JP7111690B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine such as a pinball game machine (generally called a "pachinko machine") and a reel-type game machine (generally called a "pachislot machine").

In attaching the mounting member to the plate portion that constitutes the rolling area where the game ball rolls, the plate portion is provided with a positioning hole, the mounting member is provided with a positioning projection, and the positioning projection is inserted into the positioning hole. A gaming machine is known that positions members by means of the above (for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Utility Model Application No. 05-059197 (Japanese Utility Model Application No. 07-022791)

By the way, when a transparent mounting member is adopted, the positioning hole provided in the plate portion that constitutes the rolling area in which the game ball rolls and the positioning protrusion provided in the transparent mounting member are not transparent. There is a problem that the appearance of the game machine is degraded because it is visually recognized through the member.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION An object of the present invention is to provide a game machine in which positioning holes provided in a plate portion constituting a rolling area on which a game ball rolls and positioning protrusions provided in a mounting member are made inconspicuous. do.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention
A plate portion having a rolling area on which the game ball rolls is formed on the front side;
an obstacle nail planted in the plate;
an attachment member attached from the front to the front surface of the plate portion and having transparency,
The plate portion has a positioning hole,
The mounting member has a positioning projection inserted into the positioning hole and an inclined portion provided as a surface inclined toward the front surface of the plate portion,
The positioning projection is inserted into the positioning hole and positioned on the front surface of the plate,
In a state where the attachment member is attached to the front surface of the plate portion,
At least part of the positioning protrusion overlaps the inclined portion in a front view,
The plate portion is made of transparent resin, and the inclined portion is positioned below the center of the rolling area,
A guide nail array in which a plurality of the obstacle nails are arranged at intervals narrower than the diameter of the game ball is provided near the lower portion of the inclined portion,
The inclined portion is configured as a strip-shaped surface having a longer length in a direction orthogonal to the inclined direction than the length in the inclined direction,
at least part of the inclined portion is positioned along the direction in which the obstructing nails are arranged in the guide nail row;
The longitudinal dimension of the inclined portion along the direction in which the obstacle nails are arranged is longer than the length dimension of the guide nail rows.
It is characterized by

According to the present invention, there is provided a game machine capable of obscuring positioning holes provided in a plate portion forming a rolling area in which game balls roll and positioning projections provided in a mounting member. can be done.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine that is an embodiment of the present invention; FIG. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a left side view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back. 1 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front with a door frame opened from a main body frame and a main body frame opened from an outer frame; FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame and an outer frame and viewed from the front; FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame and an outer frame and viewed from behind. FIG. It is a front view of the outer frame in the pachinko machine. It is a right side view of an outer frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled an outer frame and was seen from the front. (a) is a perspective view of the outer frame side upper hinge member portion of the outer frame, omitting the left frame member, as viewed from below, and (b) is an exploded perspective view showing (a) exploded. be. (a) is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the main body frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame is removed from the outer frame side upper hinge member of the outer frame, and (b) is an outer upper hinge member; Fig. 10 is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the body-side upper hinge member is attached to the; It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect|action of the locking member in an outer frame. It is a front view of the door frame in the pachinko machine. It is a right side view of a door frame. It is a left side view of a door frame. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. FIG. 20 is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 19; FIG. 20 is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. 19; FIG. 20 is a cross-sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. 19; Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame, which is disassembled into main members and viewed from behind; (a) is a front perspective view of a door frame base unit in a door frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit. Fig. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit, which is disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; Fig. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into main members and viewed from behind; (a) is a front view of the production operation unit in the door frame, and (b) is a right side view of the production operation unit. (a) is the perspective view which looked at the production|presentation operation unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the production|presentation operation unit from the back. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of the effect operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends; FIG. 34(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line DD in FIG. 34(a). FIG. 34B is a cross-sectional view taken along line EE in FIG. 34(b). (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line FF in FIG. 34(b), and (b) is an enlarged view of part A in (a). It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the production|presentation operation unit for every main member, and was seen from the front. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled into main members and viewed from behind; (a) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button as seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button as seen from the rear. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the decoration board unit of the effect operation unit, which is exploded and viewed from the front; It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which pressed the operation button in sectional drawing of the production|presentation operation unit of FIG. (a) is a view of the effect operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends, and a portion of the operation button is cut away to show the portion that is to be hidden by the first button decoration portion of the operation button, the button frame, or the like. (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a portion of an operation button to be hidden by a first button decorative portion, a button frame, or the like in a cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the appearance of the production operation unit as a perspective view seen from the front, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the appearance of the production operation unit as seen from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. . (a) is a front view of the door frame left side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as seen from the front, and (c) is a rear view of the door frame left side unit. is a perspective view. It is the exploded perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door-frame left side unit, and was seen from the front. It is the exploded perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door-frame left side unit, and was seen from the back. FIG. 47(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line LL. (a) is a front view of the door frame right side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as seen from the front, and (c) is a rear view of the door frame right side unit. is a perspective view. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door-frame right side unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door-frame right side unit, and was seen from the back. FIG. 51(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line MM in FIG. 51(a). 51(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line NN in FIG. 51(a), and FIG. 51(b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line OO in FIG. 51(a). (a) is a front view of the door frame top unit in the door frame, (b) is a front perspective view of the door frame top unit, and (c) is a rear perspective view of the door frame top unit. is. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame top unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door frame top unit, and was seen from the back. FIG. 57 is a cross-sectional view taken along line PP in FIG. 56; It is a front view of a game board. 1 is an exploded perspective view of a game board disassembled into main components and viewed from the front; FIG. It is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the back. It is a front view of the game board excluding the front unit and the back unit. FIG. 64 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of FIG. 63 as seen from the front. 64 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of FIG. 63, viewed from behind; FIG. It is an explanatory view showing the part of the function display unit enlarged from the front with the game board attached to the pachinko machine. FIG. 64 is an exploded perspective view of a game panel in a form different from that of FIG. 63 as seen from the front together with the front structural member, the substrate holder, and the main control unit; FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 67 viewed from behind; It is a block diagram of a main control board, a payout control board and a peripheral control board. FIG. 70 is a block diagram continued from FIG. 69; FIG. It is a schematic diagram of various detection signals input to and output from a game ball lending device connection terminal plate that relays electrical connections between a payout control board that constitutes the main board, a CR unit, and a frequency display board. FIG. 70 is a block diagram continued from FIG. 69; FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an outline of a peripheral control MPU; FIG. It is a block diagram around VDP with a built-in sound source in a liquid crystal and a sound control part. It is a block diagram showing the power supply system of the pachinko machine. FIG. 76 is a block diagram continued from FIG. 75; It is a circuit diagram showing a circuit of a main control board. It is a circuit diagram which shows a power failure monitoring circuit. 4 is a circuit diagram showing an inter-board communication interface circuit between a main control board and a peripheral control board; FIG. It is a circuit diagram which shows the circuit etc. of a payout control part. It is a circuit diagram showing a payout control input circuit. FIG. 82 is a circuit diagram continued from FIG. 81; It is a circuit diagram showing a payout motor drive circuit. 4 is a circuit diagram showing a CR unit input/output circuit; FIG. 4 is an input/output diagram showing various input/output signals to/from a main control board and various output signals to an external terminal board; FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the arrangement of output terminals on an external terminal plate; FIG. 4 is a circuit diagram showing a liquid crystal module circuit for drawing in the display area of the door frame side liquid crystal display device; It is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board. 4 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board; FIG. 90 is a table showing the continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board in FIG. 89 to the peripheral control boards; FIG. It is a table showing an example of various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a main-control side power-on process. FIG. 93 is a flow chart showing a continuation of the main control side power-on processing of FIG. 92; FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of main control side timer interrupt processing; 7 is a flow chart showing an example of processing when powering on a peripheral control unit; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit V-blank interrupt processing; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing; 8 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing; 8 is a flowchart illustrating an example of peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt processing; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of LOCKN signal history creation processing; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of connection failure determination processing; 6 is a flowchart illustrating an example of connection recovery processing; 4 is a timing chart for explaining the timing of outputting a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the transmitter IC for the upper tray liquid crystal; FIG. 10 is a circuit diagram showing an example of a conventional magnetic sensor input circuit provided in a game machine; It is a circuit diagram which shows an example (Example 1) of the magnetic sensor input circuit deployed in the game machine of embodiment. It is a circuit diagram showing an example (Example 2) of the magnetic sensor input circuit arranged in the gaming machine of the embodiment. It is a circuit diagram showing an example (Example 3) of the magnetic sensor input circuit arranged in the gaming machine of the embodiment. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the operating states of the magnetic sensor and each transistor in tabular form; FIG. 4 is a diagram showing a circuit configuration in which a plurality of sensor signal input units respectively connected to a plurality of magnetic detection sensors are connected in parallel to base terminals of transistors in the detection circuit unit; (A) shows a signal waveform input to the sensor signal input section in the conventional example, and (B) shows a signal waveform input to the sensor signal input section in the embodiment. (A) shows a signal waveform input to the sensor signal input section in the conventional example, and (B) shows a signal waveform input to the sensor signal input section in the embodiment. FIG. 5 is a circuit diagram showing an example of a magnetic sensor input circuit of another embodiment; FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of a circuit configuration in which a voltage output section, a voltage raising section, and a detection circuit section are arranged on the same substrate; FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of a circuit configuration in which a voltage raising section and a detection circuit section are arranged on the same substrate, and a voltage output section is arranged on another substrate (sensor substrate); FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of a circuit configuration in which a voltage output section and a voltage raising section are arranged on the same board, and a detection circuit section is arranged on another board (for example, a main control board); The figure which shows the circuit structure which connected several sensors in parallel with the voltage output part. FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing how the first control unit MCG is integrated only with parts (discrete parts) having high security performance against fraud. FIG. 9 is a diagram showing a partial region of a base board of a main control board according to a modification; It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the acquisition principle of the operation information in the opening window vicinity. FIG. 120 is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 119; FIG. 2 is a diagram schematically showing the relationship between a special operation receiving portion when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front and various effect members arranged at positions overlapping the special operation receiving portion when viewed from the front; be. (a) is a figure explaining the 1st operation control mode with respect to a display part, (b) is a figure explaining the 2nd operation control mode with respect to a display part. It is a figure explaining the 3rd operation control mode with respect to a display part. It is a figure explaining the 3rd operation control mode with respect to a display part. It is a figure explaining the 3rd operation control mode with respect to a display part. It is a figure explaining the 4th operation control mode with respect to a movable body. It is a figure explaining the 4th operation control mode with respect to a movable body. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a control example of physical object detection information analysis processing executed in the peripheral control unit steady-state processing; FIG. (a) is a time chart showing the control when production acceptance occurs at a plurality of operation parts, and (b) shows the production behavior when production reception occurs at each of the plurality of operation parts. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing; It is a figure which shows the example 1 of production|presentation using a special operation receiving part. It is a figure which shows the example 1 of production|presentation using a special operation receiving part. It is a figure which shows the example 2 of production|presentation using a special operation receiving part. It is a figure which shows the example 2 of production|presentation using a special operation receiving part. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a special design and special electric accessary goods control processing (step S114). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st starting opening passage process (step S5232). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 2nd starting opening passage process (step S5234). It is a flow chart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process processing (step S5238). It is a flow chart showing the procedure for the first special symbol normal process (step S5280). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a jackpot determination process (step S5305). (A) is a diagram showing a big hit determination table, and (B) and (C) are diagrams showing symbol determination tables. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special design stop design setting process (step S5281). It is a flow chart showing the procedure for the first variation pattern setting process (step S5282). It is a flow chart showing the procedure for the first special symbol variation process (step S5283). It is a flow chart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop processing (step S5284). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a normal design and normal electric accessary goods control processing (step S116). FIG. 13 is a flow chart showing the procedure of gate passage processing (step S5402). FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about normal design normal processing (step S5403). It is a functional block diagram explaining a structure and an outline of a function for performing production control in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the module structure in the peripheral control part of the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the basic concept of production|presentation control in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the structure until it acquires the data required for production|presentation control of the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the liquid crystal drawing effect|action of a step-up notice of this embodiment. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining the flow of scheduler data during execution according to the embodiment; FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing functions of the sound module of the embodiment; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing functions of the lamp module of the embodiment; It is a figure which shows an example of the function of the sequence control in the production|presentation control of the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the function of the lamp|ramp in the production control of the gaming machine of this embodiment, and a sound. It is a figure which shows an example of functions, such as a sound and a motor, in production|presentation control of the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the scheduler definition of this embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of a role product controlled using scheduler data according to the present embodiment; It is a figure which shows the execution timing of the notice production performed in a series of variable display until it stops from the start of variation of a special symbol in this embodiment, and shows an example of the scheduler and scheduler data which are used. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating the contents of scheduler data “SCH_LMP_YKK_STP” that controls lighting and blinking of lamps in advance notice of step-up according to the present embodiment; FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating the contents of scheduler data “SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT” for controlling lamps in advance of button cut-in according to the present embodiment; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the overall flow of the star role announcement and the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1" that controls the left star role in the present embodiment; It is a figure explaining the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA2" which controls the right star role in the star role announcement of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA3" which controls the middle star role item in the star role announcement of this embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the contents of scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO” for motor control in the logo accessory drop notice of the present embodiment; It is a drawing explaining the scheduler data executed when the power of the gaming machine of the present embodiment is turned on. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining the configuration for processing commands and scheduler data in the peripheral control board of the gaming machine of the present embodiment and the relationship between these configurations. FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating a process of executing scheduler data when power is turned on according to the embodiment; It is a diagram showing an example of an advance notice effect in a series of variable display from the start to stop of the variation of the special symbol in this embodiment, (A) is performed from the start to the end of the variation and the effect is executed. (B) is a diagram for explaining the position of the machete in the falling notice of the machete. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the contents of scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1" for performing motor control in the first half of the button machete role drop notice, which is the first half of the machete role drop notice of the present embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the first half of the hatchet accessory fall notice scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2" that performs motor control in the hatchet accessory fall notice, which is the latter half of the hatchet accessory fall notice of the present embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the second half of the hatchet accessory fall notice scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2” that controls the motor in the hatchet accessory fall notice, which is the latter half of the hatchet accessory fall notice of the present embodiment. It is a figure explaining the liquid crystal effect block data combination number table classified by variation pattern (LCD_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) which stores the combination of the liquid crystal effect block data corresponding to the variation pattern command in this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the liquid crystal design block data combination number table classified by variation pattern (ZUG_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) which stores the combination of the liquid crystal design block data corresponding to the variation pattern command in this embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a sub effect block data combination number table by variation pattern (SCH_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) storing combinations of sub effect block data corresponding to variation pattern commands in the present embodiment; It is a figure explaining the outline|summary of production|presentation control of the fluctuation|variation (usually fluctuation|variation 12 second) of the first half of the fluctuation pattern "10H03H" in this embodiment. 4 is a flow chart showing the procedure of sub effect block data control start processing according to the present embodiment. 4 is a flow chart showing the procedure of sub effect block data control activation processing according to the present embodiment. 4 is a flow chart showing the procedure of sub effect block data control update processing according to the present embodiment. It is a diagram for explaining the procedure for executing the notice effect in the variable display corresponding to the change pattern "10H03H" of the present embodiment, (A) is the timing of executing the notice effect and the execution time of the notice effect, (B) is It shows the scheduler data driven by each scheduler to execute the advance notice effect. It is a figure explaining the relationship between the liquid crystal effect block data classified by variation pattern of this embodiment, and the liquid crystal design block data classified by variation pattern. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an image of creating a data file for drawing a step-up advance notice for liquid crystal display in the step-up effect unit (step-up effect 1 to step-up effect 4) by the image composition/motion creation graphic tool of the present embodiment. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining the configuration of step-up notice effect block data according to the present embodiment, where (A) shows the configuration of step-up notice liquid crystal effect block data, and (B) shows the configuration of step-up notice sub-effect block data. show. It is a figure which shows an example of the scheduler function for liquid crystal presentations of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the parameter for the scheduler function for liquid crystal presentation in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the parameter for the scheduler function for liquid crystal presentation in this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the structure of the production|presentation switch in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of a structure of the production|presentation SW group of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the production|presentation SW starting command table of this embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a step-up notice in the present embodiment, (A) showing stages in which the step-up notice effect is executed, and (B) showing an example of a screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device at each stage. . It is a figure explaining the execution procedure of the step-up notice using production|presentation SW in this embodiment. It is a diagram for explaining the execution procedure of the step-up notice using the effect SW in the present embodiment, (A) is the liquid crystal effect scheduler data for executing the step-up notice 1, (B) is the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect 10 shows a drawing image using scheduler data. It is a figure explaining the master data defined on the liquid crystal effect scheduler data for each drawing section in this embodiment, and the effect SW corresponding to the replacement data replaced with the said master data. It is a figure explaining the control procedure by the production|presentation switch of this embodiment, and especially shows the evaluation procedure which sets production|presentation SW to ON. It is a figure explaining an example of the function defined in the production|presentation SW command analysis module of this embodiment. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining the details of the configuration of the effect SW information table of the present embodiment, (A) is an example of program code defining the effect SW information table, (B) is bit assignment of effect SW control information, and (C). is a diagram showing an example of the effect SW group It is a figure which shows an example of the program code which defines the production|presentation SW number corresponding to the production|presentation SW in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the program data code which defines the production|presentation SW flag and production|presentation SW information table of this embodiment, (A) shows a production|presentation SW flag, (B) shows a production|presentation SW information table. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of program data defining effect SW replacement table information and effect SW replacement table included in the effect SW information table of the present embodiment, where (A) is effect SW replacement table information and (B) is effect SW. Shows a replacement table. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of program data defining a layer information table of the present embodiment, where (A) is a list storing addresses for storing each layer information table, and (B) is the contents of the layer information table (for background); indicates FIG. 2 is a diagram showing an example of program data defining the layer information table of the present embodiment, (A) shows the contents of the layer information table (preliminary first half 1), and (B) shows the contents of the layer information table (preliminary first half 2). show. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of program data defining a liquid crystal layer table and a liquid crystal effect common block in this embodiment, (A) showing a liquid crystal layer table for a step-up notice effect, and (B) showing a structure of a liquid crystal effect common block. . It is a diagram showing an example of program data defining the liquid crystal effect block (LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1-4) of each step of the step-up notice of the present embodiment. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an outline of button mini-character effects according to the present embodiment; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of program data defining a liquid crystal layer table corresponding to button mini character effects in the present embodiment; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of program data defining individual common blocks for button mini character effects in the present embodiment; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of program data defining liquid crystal effect block data for executing a button mini character effect in the present embodiment; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of drawing divisions that can be determined within a callback function when a callback is executed by the effect SW of the present embodiment; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of drawing results of individual layers and drawing results of all layers when the advance notice effect is executed according to the present embodiment; FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of a common block that spans a plurality of periods according to the present embodiment, where (A) shows the execution timing of symbol display and notice effect, and (B) shows the structure of a liquid crystal notice effect block made up of common blocks. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating a conventional configuration for writing an image in a frame buffer by writing an image written in each layer; FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating a procedure for converting an image file stored in an off-screen buffer and then writing it to a frame buffer according to the embodiment; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a procedure for temporarily storing a display list command group in a peripheral control RAM and then transferring it to a VDP with built-in tone generator according to the present embodiment; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a procedure for transferring a display list command group to a tone generator built-in VDP without storing it in a peripheral control RAM in this embodiment; FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of a configuration having a plurality of display areas for variably displaying identification patterns in the present embodiment, (A) is a configuration example having a display area A and a display area B for identification patterns on one display screen, ( B) is a configuration example in which, in the case of having two display screens, a display area A and a display area B of an identification pattern are provided on each display screen. It is a diagram for explaining the highlighting mode of the display area for executing the variable display of the identification pattern in the present embodiment, (A) is a normal mode in which the display area A and the display area B are displayed in a standard mode (prescribed size). , (B) is an enhancement mode A in which the display area A is displayed in an enhancement mode, and (C) is an enhancement mode B in which the display area B is displayed in an enhancement mode. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of screen transition in a configuration in which variable display of the identification pattern of the present embodiment is performed in the display area A and the display area B, respectively. Then, an example in which the identification pattern stops changing in the display area B is shown. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of screen transition in a configuration in which the variable display of the identification pattern of the present embodiment is performed in the display area A and the display area B, respectively. An example of displaying all the stop symbols is shown. It is a figure which shows an example of a structure of the production|presentation block of timer production|presentation of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the execution example of the timer production|presentation of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of a structure of the production|presentation block of the background production|presentation of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the execution example of the background production|presentation of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the mini character production|presentation of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example which an identification pattern changes and displays in each of several display areas of this embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example in which identification patterns are independently variably displayed in a plurality of display areas according to the present embodiment, and variably displayed in the same manner at a predetermined timing; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example in which identification patterns are variably displayed in a plurality of display areas of the present embodiment and stopped at different patterns; It is a figure which shows the structural example of the game board of the game machine in this embodiment. It is a perspective view which shows the shape of the character accessory in this embodiment. BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS It is a perspective view which shows the shape of the snowman accessory in this embodiment, (A) is the figure seen from the front, (B) is the figure seen from the back. 1 is an exploded perspective view of a character accessory of this embodiment; FIG. It is the figure which looked at the cover member of the character accessory of this embodiment from the back side. It is a figure which shows the front side of the character accessory board|substrate of the character accessory of this embodiment of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the state which accommodated the character accessory board|substrate in the cover member of the character accessory of this embodiment, and shows the back side of a character accessory board|substrate. It is a figure explaining the positional relationship of a light-emitting body, the transmissive part of a cover member, and a non-transmissive part in the character role object of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the light guide member which diffuses the light from the light-emitting body in the character role object of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the front side of the character accessory board|substrate of the character accessory of the modification 1 of this embodiment of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the state which accommodated the character accessory board|substrate in the cover member of the character accessory of the modification 1 of this embodiment, and shows the back side of a character accessory board|substrate. It is a figure explaining the positional relationship of the light-emitting body, the transmissive part of a cover member, and a non-transmissive part in the character role object of the modification of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the front side of the character accessory board|substrate of the character accessory board|substrate of the modification 2 of this embodiment of this embodiment, and has shown the state which the character accessory board|substrate and the light guide member have overlapped. It is a figure which shows the state which accommodated the character accessory board|substrate in the cover member of the character accessory of the modification 2 of this embodiment, and shows the back side of a character accessory board|substrate. It is a figure which shows the state which attached the character accessory of the modification 2 of this embodiment to the game board. It is a figure which shows sectional drawing of the snowman accessory of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the front side cover member of the snowman accessory of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the back side cover member of the snowman accessory of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the front side of the snowman board|substrate of the snowman accessory of this embodiment of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the back side of the snowman board|substrate of the snowman accessory of this embodiment of this embodiment. It is the figure which looked at the cross section of the horizontal direction of the snowman accessory of this embodiment from the top. It is the figure which looked at the cross section of the horizontal direction of the snowman accessory in the modification of this embodiment from the top. It is the figure which showed the whole game board of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the front view, perspective view, and exploded perspective view of the rabbit role of this embodiment. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing a front view and a rear view of the face substrate of the rabbit character according to the present embodiment; FIG. 4 is a perspective view of the face covering portion of the rabbit character of the present embodiment; FIG. 4 is a perspective view showing a state in which the rabbit accessory of the present embodiment is in a standby position; FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of the rabbit character of the present embodiment; FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of the rabbit character of the present embodiment; FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of the rabbit character of the present embodiment; It is the figure which showed the whole game board in the modification of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the stump accessory of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the stump accessory of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the stump box part of this embodiment, its exploded view, the front view of a rear-wall cover, and the front view of a rear-wall board|substrate. It is the figure which showed the stump box part in the modification of this embodiment, its exploded view, the front view of a rear-wall cover, and the front view of a rear-wall board|substrate. It is the figure which showed the Example about the grass accessory of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the Example about the grass accessory in the modification of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the Example about the grass accessory in the modification of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the Example about the grass accessory in the modification of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the Example about the grass accessory in the modification of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the Example about the grass accessory in the modification of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the Example about the grass accessory in the modification of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the Example about the grass accessory in the modification of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the Example about the grass accessory in the modification of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the Example about the grass accessory in the modification of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the Example about the grass accessory in the modification of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the Example about the grass accessory in the modification of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the Example about the grass accessory in the modification of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the front view, the perspective view, and the exploded perspective view of the rabbit character in the modification of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the Example about the mountain role of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the back grass accessory of this embodiment. In the stump box portion shown in FIGS. 257(A) and 258(A) of this embodiment, the box upper wall portion, the box right wall portion, the box lower wall portion, and the box left wall portion are moved from the standby position to the moving position. It is the figure which showed the state to which it was made to move. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example in which no stump plate portion is provided in front of the stump box portion of the present embodiment, and a fixed grass plate portion is provided instead of the first grass movable portion and the second grass movable portion; be. FIG. 276 is a diagram showing a modification of FIG. 276 of the present embodiment; FIG. 277 is a diagram showing a modification of FIG. 277 of this embodiment. FIG. 277 is a diagram showing a modification of FIG. 277 of this embodiment. FIG. 277 is a diagram showing a modification of FIG. 277 of this embodiment. (A) and (B) are diagrams showing an example of the configuration of the box rear wall portion of FIG. 279 of this embodiment, and (C) and (D) of the box rear wall portion of FIG. It is a figure showing an example of composition. BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS It is the figure which showed the pachinko machine of this embodiment, (A) and (B) are front views, (C) is a top view, (D) and (E) are right side views. It is a time chart showing the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart showing the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing changes over time in the display mode of the game board side effect display device, the moving state of the frame movable body, and the light emitting effect state in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing changes over time in the display mode of the game board side effect display device, the moving state of the frame movable body, and the light emitting effect state in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a figure showing a pachinko machine of a modification in the present embodiment, (A) and (B) are front views, (C) and (D) are plan views, (E) and (F) are right side views. be. It is a figure showing a pachinko machine of a modification in the present embodiment, (A) and (B) are front views, (C) and (D) are plan views, (E) and (F) are right side views. be. It is the figure which showed the pachinko machine of the modification in this embodiment, (A) and (B) are front views, (C) is a top view, (D) and (E) are right side views. It is a figure showing a pachinko machine of a modification in the present embodiment, (A) and (B) are front views, (C) and (D) are plan views, (E) and (F) are right side views. be. It is the figure which showed the pachinko machine of the modification in this embodiment, (A) and (B) are front views, (C) is a top view, (D) and (E) are right side views. It is a time chart of a modification showing the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of a modification showing the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is the figure which showed the pachinko machine of the modification in this embodiment, (A) and (B) are front views, (C) is a top view, (D) and (E) are right side views. It is the figure which showed the pachinko machine of the modification in this embodiment, (A) and (B) are front views, (C) is a top view, (D) and (E) are right side views. It is the figure which showed the pachinko machine of the modification in this embodiment, (A) and (B) are front views, (C) is a top view, (D) and (E) are right side views. It is a figure showing a pachinko machine of a modification in the present embodiment, (A) and (B) are front views, (C) and (D) are plan views, (E) and (F) are right side views. be. It is a time chart of a modification showing the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of a modification showing the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is the figure which showed the pachinko machine of the modification in this embodiment, (A) and (B) are front views, (C) is a top view, (D) and (E) are right side views. It is the figure which showed the pachinko machine of the modification in this embodiment, (A) and (B) are front views, (C) is a top view, (D) and (E) are right side views. It is the figure which showed the pachinko machine of the modification in this embodiment, (A) and (B) are front views, (C) is a top view, (D) and (E) are right side views. It is the figure which showed the pachinko machine of the modification in this embodiment, (A) and (B) are front views, (C) is a top view, (D) and (E) are right side views. It is the figure which showed the pachinko machine of the modification in this embodiment, (A) and (B) are front views, (C) and (D) are top views. It is the figure which showed the pachinko machine of the modification in this embodiment, (A) and (B) are right side views. It is the figure which showed the pachinko machine of the modification in this embodiment, (A) and (B) are front views, (C) is a top view, (D) and (E) are right side views. It is a time chart of a modification showing the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of a modification showing the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is the figure which showed the pachinko machine of the modification in this embodiment, (A) and (B) are front views, (C) is a top view, (D) and (E) are right side views. It is the figure which showed the pachinko machine of the modification in this embodiment, (A) and (B) are front views, (C) and (D) are top views. It is the figure which showed the pachinko machine of the modification in this embodiment, (A) and (B) are right side views. It is the figure which showed the pachinko machine of the modification in this embodiment, (A) and (B) are front views, (C) and (D) are top views. It is the figure which showed the pachinko machine of the modification in this embodiment, (A) and (B) are right side views. It is a time chart of a modification showing the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of a modification showing the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of a modification showing the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of a modification showing the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of a modification showing the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of a modification showing the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of a modification showing the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of a modification showing the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of a modification showing the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of a modification showing the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of a modification showing the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of a modification showing the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of a modification showing the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of a modification showing the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of a modification showing the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of a modification showing the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of a modification showing the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of a modification showing the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of a modification showing the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of a modification showing the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of a modification showing the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of a modification showing the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a front view of the game board in the second embodiment. It is an exploded front perspective view of the game board in the second embodiment. FIG. 11 is an exploded front perspective view of a game panel in the second embodiment; It is an enlarged right front perspective view of the game panel in the second embodiment. FIG. 11 is an exploded front perspective view of an area covering member in the second embodiment; FIG. 11 is a plan view of the arrangement of obstructing nails in the right game area in the second embodiment; FIG. 11 is an exploded rear perspective view of an area covering member in the second embodiment; FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view of obstructing nails in the right playing area in the second embodiment, where (a) is a cross-sectional view of a portion where one obstructing nail is accommodated in the penetrating portion, and (b) is a cross-sectional view showing two obstructing nails. A cross-sectional view of the location where the penetration portion is accommodated is shown, and (c) is a cross-sectional view of the location where the three obstacle nails are accommodated in the penetration portion. It is a front view which shows an example of a nail sheet. Fig. 2 is a front view showing an example of usage of the nail sheet; FIG. 11A is a front view showing an example of an installation method of the area covering member in the third embodiment, and FIG. 11B is a front view showing an example of the installation state of the area covering member. FIG. 4(c) is a sectional view when the area covering member is attached to the existing member, and (d) is a sectional view when the area covering member is integrated with the existing member. Installation examples of multiple types of area covering members according to the third embodiment, in which (a) is an installation mode of the area covering member in which the right through portion is shifted inward, and (b) is an installation mode in which the left through portion is shifted inward. (c) is an installation mode of the area covering member with both penetrating portions shifted inward, and (d) is an installation mode of the area covering member with the right penetrating portion shifted outward. However, (e) shows an installation mode of the area covering member in which the left through-hole is shifted outward, and (f) shows an installation mode of the area-covering member in which both through-holes are shifted outward. ing. Another embodiment of the area covering member according to the third embodiment, in which (a) is a front view showing an example of an installation method of the area covering member, and (b) is a front view showing an example of an installation state of the area covering member. However, (c) is an installation mode in which the area covering member is rotated 180 degrees and both penetrating parts are shifted inward, and (d) is an installation mode in which the area covering member is rotated 90 degrees to the right and both penetrating parts are inward. A front view shows a staggered installation mode, and (e) shows an installation mode in which the area covering member is rotated 90 degrees to the left and both through-holes are shifted inward. Another embodiment of the area covering member according to the third embodiment, in which (a) is a front view showing an example of an installation method of the area covering member, and (b) is a front view showing an example of an installation state of the area covering member. However, (c) shows a front view of an installation mode in which the area covering member is moved downward and the penetrating portions on both sides are shifted downward. 3(a) to 3(d) show another embodiment of the area covering member according to the third embodiment, showing various applicable shapes of the penetrating portion, respectively, in front views. Another embodiment of the area covering member according to the third embodiment, wherein (a) is an installation mode of the area covering member that accommodates two obstacle nails in the penetrating portions on both sides, and (b) is an installation mode of the area covering member that accommodates two obstacle nails in the penetrating portion. (c) is a front view showing an example of a case where the area cover member is installed on the game panel from the front side, (d) and (e) are cross-sectional views showing an example of the case where the area cover member is installed on the game panel from the front side. Another embodiment of the area covering member in the third embodiment, (a) is a front view showing an example of fixing the area covering member from behind the game panel, and (b) is a front view showing an example of fixing the area covering member to the game panel. A cross-sectional view showing an example of fixing from the rear of the is shown. Another embodiment of the area covering member in the third embodiment, (a) is a front view showing a part of the left game area before installing the area covering member, and (b) is a left side after installing the area covering member. A front view showing a portion of the playing area is shown, respectively. Another embodiment of the area covering member according to the third embodiment, in which (a) is a front view showing an installation mode of the area covering member molded with the penetrating portion shifted downward, and (b) is a front view showing an installation state of the area covering member formed with the penetrating portion shifted upward. Front views showing the manner in which the staggered area covering members are installed are shown, respectively. An example of an installation mode of the decorative seal on the area covering member, in which (a) is a front view showing the area covering member before installation of the decorative seal, and (b) is an embodiment in which the decorative seal is attached to the entire perimeter of the through portion. , and (c) is a front view showing a mode in which a decorative seal is affixed to a part of the periphery of the penetrating portion. 1A to 1C show an example of accommodation of an obstructing nail in a penetration portion formed in an area covering member, and FIGS. The manner in which the obstructing nail is accommodated is shown in cross-sectional views. (a) to (g) show an example of accommodation of an obstructing nail in a penetration portion formed in an area covering member, and (a) to (g) show an obstructing nail in a penetration portion in which a convex portion is formed in the central portion of the cross section of the area covering member. The accommodation mode is shown in cross-section, respectively. (a) to (d) show an example of accommodation of an obstacle nail in a penetration portion formed in a region covering member, and (a) to (d) show an obstacle nail in a penetration portion in which a convex portion is formed on the game panel side of the region covering member. The accommodation mode is shown in cross-section, respectively. FIGS. 1A to 1D show an example of accommodation of an obstructing nail in a penetrating portion formed in an area covering member, and FIGS. Aspects are each shown in cross-section. FIGS. 1A to 1E are cross-sectional views showing an example of how an obstacle nail is accommodated in a penetration portion formed in an area covering member, and FIGS. are indicated respectively. 1A to 1C are cross-sectional views showing an example of a housing manner of an obstructive nail in a penetration portion formed in an area covering member, and FIGS. Each is indicated in the figure. Fig. 10A shows an example of a manner in which an obstructing nail is accommodated in a penetration portion formed in a region covering member, and Fig. 3(a) shows a visually recognizable manner before a fraudulent act, and Fig. 4(b) is a front view showing a visually recognizable manner after the fraudulent act. It is shown. A front view of another embodiment of the area covering member of the third embodiment is shown. BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS It is the figure which showed the pachinko machine in this embodiment, (A) and (B) are front views, (C) is a top view, (D) and (E) are right side views. (A) and (B) are front views showing a modified pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. (C) is a front view of the root vegetable frame movable body of the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. It is the time chart which showed the production mode in the pachinko machine of this execution form. It is the figure which showed the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko machine in this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko machine in this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko machine in this embodiment. It is the time chart which showed the production mode in the pachinko machine of this execution form. It is the figure which showed the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko machine in this embodiment. It is the time chart which showed the production mode in the pachinko machine of this execution form. It is the time chart which showed the production mode in the pachinko machine of this execution form. It is the figure which showed the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko machine in this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the production|presentation aspect of the pachinko machine in this embodiment. It is the time chart which showed the production mode in the pachinko machine of this execution form. It is the time chart which showed the production mode in the pachinko machine of this execution form. It is the time chart which showed the production mode in the pachinko machine of this execution form. It is the time chart which showed the production mode in the pachinko machine of this execution form. It is the time chart which showed the production mode in the pachinko machine of this execution form. It is the time chart which showed the production mode in the pachinko machine of this execution form. It is the figure which showed the display mode of the game board side production|presentation display apparatus in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a time chart showing the display mode of the game board side effect display device in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is the figure which showed the display mode of the game board side production|presentation display apparatus in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a time chart showing the display mode of the game board side effect display device in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart showing the display mode of the game board side effect display device in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is the figure which showed the display mode of the game board side production|presentation display apparatus in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the display mode of the game board side production|presentation display apparatus in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the display mode of the game board side production|presentation display apparatus in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a time chart showing the display mode of the game board side effect display device in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is the figure which showed the display mode of the game board side production|presentation display apparatus in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the display mode of the game board side production|presentation display apparatus in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the display mode of the game board side production|presentation display apparatus in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the display mode of the game board side production|presentation display apparatus in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. 4 is a table showing display effect patterns of the game board side effect display device and image data to be arranged in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is the figure which showed the display mode of the game board side production|presentation display apparatus in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. 4 is a table showing display effect patterns of the game board side effect display device and image data to be arranged in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is the figure which showed the display mode of the game board side production|presentation display apparatus in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the display mode of the game board side production|presentation display apparatus in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the display mode of the game board side production|presentation display apparatus in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the display mode of the game board side production|presentation display apparatus in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the display mode of the game board side production|presentation display apparatus in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the display mode of the game board side production|presentation display apparatus in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the display mode of the game board side production|presentation display apparatus in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the display mode of the game board side production|presentation display apparatus in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the display mode of the game board side production|presentation display apparatus in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the display mode of the game board side production|presentation display apparatus in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the display mode of the game board side production|presentation display apparatus in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a time chart showing the display mode of the game board side effect display device in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is the figure which showed the display mode of the game board side production|presentation display apparatus in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the display mode of the game board side production|presentation display apparatus in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the display mode of the game board side production|presentation display apparatus in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the display mode of the game board side production|presentation display apparatus in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a time chart showing the display mode of the game board side effect display device in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is the figure which showed the display mode of the game board side production|presentation display apparatus in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a time chart showing the display mode of the game board side effect display device in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is the figure which showed the display mode of the game board side production|presentation display apparatus in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a time chart showing the display mode of the game board side effect display device in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is the figure which showed the display mode of the game board side production|presentation display apparatus in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a time chart showing the display mode of the game board side effect display device in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is the figure which showed the display mode of the game board side production|presentation display apparatus in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a time chart showing the display mode of the game board side effect display device in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is the figure which showed the display mode of the game board side production|presentation display apparatus in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a time chart showing the display mode of the game board side effect display device in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is the figure which showed the display mode of the game board side production|presentation display apparatus in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the display mode of the game board side production|presentation display apparatus in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. 4 is a table showing the priority of layers used for display effects of the game board side effect display device and image data arranged in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart showing the display mode of the game board side effect display device in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is the figure which showed the display mode of the game board side production|presentation display apparatus in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the display mode of the game board side production|presentation display apparatus in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a time chart showing the display mode of the game board side effect display device in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is the figure which showed the display mode of the game board side production|presentation display apparatus in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. 4 is a table showing the priority of layers used for display effects of the game board side effect display device and image data arranged in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart showing the display mode of the game board side effect display device in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart showing the display mode of the game board side effect display device in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is the figure which showed the display mode of the game board side production|presentation display apparatus in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the display mode of the game board side production|presentation display apparatus in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. 4 is a table showing the priority of layers used for display effects of the game board side effect display device and image data arranged in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart showing the display mode of the game board side effect display device in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart showing the display mode of the game board side effect display device in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is the figure which showed the display mode of the game board side production|presentation display apparatus in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the display mode of the game board side production|presentation display apparatus in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. 4 is a table showing the priority of layers used for display effects of the game board side effect display device and image data arranged in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is the figure which showed the display mode of the game board side production|presentation display apparatus in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. 4 is a table showing the priority of layers used for display effects of the game board side effect display device and image data arranged in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. 4 is a table showing combinations of image data and image data arranged in display effects of the game board side effect display device in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. 4 is a table showing the priority of the display effect pattern of the game board side effect display device, the layer to be used, and the image data to be arranged in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is the figure which showed the display mode of the game board side production|presentation display apparatus in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the display mode of the game board side production|presentation display apparatus in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. 4 is a table showing the priority of layers used for display effects of the game board side effect display device and image data arranged in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is the figure which showed the display mode of the game board side production|presentation display apparatus in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the display mode of the game board side production|presentation display apparatus in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the display mode of the game board side production|presentation display apparatus in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the obstacle nail and panel board in this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the obstacle nail, the panel board, and the game ball in this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the panel board, obstacle nail, etc. in this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the panel board, obstacle nail, etc. in this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the panel board, obstacle nail, etc. in this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the panel board, obstacle nail, etc. in this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the panel board, obstacle nail, etc. in this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the panel board, obstacle nail, etc. in this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the panel board, obstacle nail, etc. in this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the panel board, obstacle nail, etc. in this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the panel board, obstacle nail, etc. in this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the panel board, obstacle nail, etc. in this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the panel board, obstacle nail, etc. in this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the panel board, obstacle nail, etc. in this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the panel board, obstacle nail, etc. in this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the panel board, obstacle nail, etc. in this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the panel board, obstacle nail, etc. in this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the panel board, obstacle nail, etc. in this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the panel board, obstacle nail, etc. in this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the panel board, obstacle nail, etc. in this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the panel board, obstacle nail, etc. in this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the panel board, obstacle nail, etc. in this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the panel board, obstacle nail, etc. in this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the panel board, obstacle nail, etc. in this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the panel board, obstacle nail, etc. in this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the panel board, obstacle nail, etc. in this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the panel board, obstacle nail, etc. in this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the panel board, obstacle nail, etc. in this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the panel board, obstacle nail, etc. in this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the panel board, obstacle nail, etc. in this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the panel board, obstacle nail, etc. in this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the panel board, obstacle nail, etc. in this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the panel board, obstacle nail, etc. in this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the panel board, obstacle nail, etc. in this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the panel board, obstacle nail, etc. in this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the panel board, obstacle nail, etc. in this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the decorative member and panel board in this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the decorative member and panel board in this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the decorative member in this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the decorative member in this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the decorative member in this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the decorative member in this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the game board in this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the game board in this embodiment. It is a perspective view of the housing in this embodiment. It is a perspective view of the housing in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display in the display area in this embodiment. FIG. 4 is an image diagram showing the movement of the self-tank displayed in the display area in this embodiment. FIG. 4 is an image diagram showing the movement of the self-tank displayed in the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the game state in this embodiment. It is a transition diagram of the game state in the present embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the table of the production|presentation pattern in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the table of the production|presentation pattern in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the table of the production|presentation pattern in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the table of the production|presentation pattern in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example of production|presentation in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the display area in this embodiment.

[1. Overall Structure of Pachinko Machine]
A pachinko machine 1 that is an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of a pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 10. FIG. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine which is one embodiment of the present invention. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front right, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front left, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the rear. FIG. 8 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front with the door frame opened from the body frame and the body frame opened from the outer frame. FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into the door frame, game board, main body frame and outer frame and viewed from the front. FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view viewed from the rear after being disassembled into two parts; FIG.

The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment comprises a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed on an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 for closing the front surface of the outer frame 2 so that it can be opened and closed, and a door frame 3. A body frame 4 which is supported so as to be openable and closable and which is attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable; and a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which game balls are hit by.

The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 is, as shown in FIGS. 20 are connected to each other and extend vertically. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same front and rear width. Further, the vertical lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are longer than the horizontal lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 .

The outer frame 2 includes a panel member 50 attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20 by connecting the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, and attached to the left end side of the upper frame member 10 when viewed from the front. and an outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the upper left end side of the curtain plate member 50 in front view and the left frame member 30 . The body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are attached so as to be openable and closable by the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 .

The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 having a vertically extending rectangular outer shape when viewed from the front and having a through hole 111 penetrating back and forth, and a through hole of the door frame base unit 100.例文帳に追加A handle unit 300 which is attached to the lower right corner of the front surface below 111 and can be operated by a player to hit a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and a through hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100. A plate unit 320 attached to the lower part of the front surface below the plate unit 320 and a plate unit 320 attached to the center of the plate unit 320. According to the game state that changes when a game ball is hit into the game area 5a, the player can A performance operation unit 400 capable of presenting a participatory performance, and a door frame left side unit 530 attached to the front left part on the left side of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 320. , a door frame right side unit 550 attached to the front right portion on the right side of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 320, a door frame left side unit 530, and a door frame right side unit 550. and a door frame top unit 570 attached to the front upper part of the door frame base unit 100 above the through hole 111 on the upper side of the door frame base unit 100 .

The body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 consists of a frame-shaped body frame base 600 which can be partially inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the body frame base 600. It is attached to both upper and lower ends on the left side of the front view, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame side upper hinge member 140 of the door frame 3 and the door frame. A main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and a main body frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the side lower hinge members 150 are rotatably attached, a reinforcing frame 660 attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 600 in front view, and a main body frame base 600. A ball launching device 680 for hitting a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and a right side surface of the main body frame base 600, which is attached to the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, and a locking unit 700 for locking between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and a reverse side mounted on the rear side along the upper side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 in the front view to pay out game balls to the player side. An L-shaped payout unit 800, a board unit 900 attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and a game board 5 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 so as to be openable and closable and attached to the main body frame base 600. and a back cover 980 that covers the rear side of the.

The dispensing unit 800 of the main body frame 4 includes an inverted L-shaped dispensing unit base 801 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600, and a dispensing unit base 801 attached to the top of the dispensing unit base 801 and extending to the left and right to open upward. A box-shaped ball tank 802 for storing game balls supplied from an island facility (not shown), and a ball tank 802 attached to a payout unit base 801 below the ball tank 802. A tank rail 803 extending to the left and right to guide, a ball guiding unit 820 attached to the rear surface of the upper left side of the payout unit base 801 in front view and guiding the game ball from the tank rail 803 downward in a meandering manner, and a ball guiding unit 820. The game balls guided by the ball guiding unit 820 are detachably attached to the lower side of the payout unit base 801 and paid out one by one based on the instruction from the payout control board 951 housed in the payout control board box 950. and a payout device 830 attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 to guide the game balls paid out by the payout device 830 downward and to release the game balls according to the state of storage of the game balls on the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320. An upper full ball path unit 850 that discharges from either a normal discharge port 850d or a full tank discharge port 850e, and an upper full ball path unit 850 attached to the lower end of the dispensing unit base 801 and discharged from the normal discharge port 850d of the upper full ball path unit 850 A normal guiding path 861 that guides game balls forward and guides them from the front end to the through-ball passage 273 of the door frame 3 and guides forward game balls released from the full tank release port 850e to guide the game balls forward and guides the game balls forward from the front end to the full ball passage 273 of the door frame 3. and a lower full ball path unit 860 having a full guideway 862 leading to the tank ball receptacle 274 .

The board unit 900 of the main body frame 4 includes a board unit base 910 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600, and a lower part for bass sound which is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 on the left side of the board unit base 910 in front view. A speaker unit 920 having a speaker 921 , a power supply board box 930 that is attached to the rear side of the board unit base 910 on the right side in front view and accommodates the power supply board inside, and is attached to the rear side of the speaker unit 920 . An interface control board box 940 housing an interface control board inside, and a payout control board 951 mounted across the power board box 930 and the interface control board box 940 to control the payout of game balls are housed therein. A payout control board box 950 is provided.

As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 defines the outer periphery of a game area 5a into which game balls are hit, and shoots game balls from the ball launching device 680 into the upper portion of the game area 5a. A front structural member 1000 having an outer rail 1001 and an inner rail 1002 that guide to the front, and a flat plate-like game panel 1100 that is attached to the rear side of the front structural member 1000 and defines the rear end of the game area 5a. there is

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a player rotates the handle 302 while game balls are stored in the upper tray 321, the ball launcher 680 shoots the game ball with a force corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 302. It is driven into the game area 5 a of the game board 5 . Then, when the game balls hit into the game area 5a are accepted by the winning openings, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the upper tray 321 by the paying-out device 830 according to the accepted winning openings. Since the payout of the game balls can enhance the interest of the player, the game balls in the upper tray 321 can be hit into the game area 5a, and the player can enjoy the game.

[2. Overall configuration of the outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 16. FIG. FIG. 11 is a front view of the outer frame of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 12 is a right side view of the outer frame. 13 is a perspective view of the outer frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 14 is a perspective view of the outer frame as seen from the rear. FIG. 15 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame exploded and viewed from the front. FIG. 16(a) is a perspective view of the upper hinge member on the outer frame side of the outer frame as viewed from below with the left frame member omitted, and (b) is an exploded perspective view showing (a) exploded. It is a diagram. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) such as a game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 includes an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member 20 which are separated vertically and extend left and right, and both ends of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 are connected to each other. and a left frame member 30 and a right frame member 40 extending to. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same front and rear width. Further, the vertical lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are longer than the horizontal lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 . Further, the outer frame 2 is assembled so that the left and right end surfaces of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 and the laterally outwardly facing side surfaces of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are flush with each other. It is

In addition, the outer frame 2 includes an outer frame side upper hinge member 60 attached to the left end side of the upper frame member 10 in front view, a lock member 66 attached to the lower surface of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, An outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the upper left end side of the curtain plate member 50 in a front view and the left frame member 30 is provided. The main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 can be attached so as to be opened and closed by the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 .

In addition, the outer frame 2 includes a panel member 50 attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20 by connecting the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, and attached to the rear side of the panel member 50. A curtain plate reinforcing member 80 whose both ends are attached to the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively; a flat plate-like left sliding member 81 attached to the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 at a position to the left from the center of the left and right; A flat plate-shaped right sliding member 82 attached to a position near the right end on the upper surface of the plate member 50 . The curtain plate reinforcing member 80 is formed of a solid member (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) and attached to the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40. As shown in FIG.

Further, the outer frame 2 includes an upper frame member 10 and a left frame member 30, an upper frame member 10 and a right frame member 40, a lower frame member 20 and a left frame member 30, and a lower frame member 20 and a right frame member 40, respectively. A connecting member 85 is provided. In addition, the outer frame 2 includes an upper hooking member 90 and a lower hooking member 91 which are attached to the inside (left side) of the right frame member 40 and engage an outer frame hook 703 of a locking unit 700 which will be described later. , is equipped.

[2-1. Upper frame member]
An upper frame member 10 of the outer frame 2 is made of a solid (solid) material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) having a predetermined thickness. The upper frame member 10 has engaging cutouts 11 that penetrate vertically and are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right ends. Upper lateral fixing portions 87 of an upper left connecting member 85A and an upper right connecting member 85B, which will be described later, of the connecting member 85 are mounted in the engaging notch portion 11 . In addition, the upper frame member 10 has mounting stepped portions 12 recessed from the general surface on the upper surface and front surface of the left end portion when viewed from the front. An outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is attached to the attachment step portion 12 .

[2-2. Lower frame member]
A lower frame member 20 of the outer frame 2 is made of a solid (solid) material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) having a predetermined thickness. The lower frame member 20 is formed so that its lateral length and vertical thickness are the same as those of the upper frame member 10, and its front and rear width is equal to that of the upper frame member 10. It is formed longer than the front and back width of the . The lower frame member 20 has engagement cutouts 21 that penetrate vertically and are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at positions closer to the rear than the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right ends. In the engaging notch portion 21, a lower lateral fixing portion 88 of a left lower connecting member 85C and a lower right connecting member 85D, which will be described later, of the connecting member 85 is attached.

In addition, the lower frame member 20 has front end notches 22 recessed rearward from the front surfaces of both left and right ends. In the lower frame member 20 , the width in the front-rear direction from the rear end of the front end notch 22 to the rear surface of the lower frame member 20 is the same as the width in the front-rear direction of the upper frame member 10 . When the lower frame member 20 is assembled to the outer frame 2 , the portion between the left and right front end cutouts 22 is inserted into the panel member 50 .

[2-3. Left frame member and right frame member]
The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 extend vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and are formed by extrusions of metal such as aluminum alloy. The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed in shapes symmetrical to each other in plan view. When assembled as the outer frame 2, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are recessed inward from a position rearward of the center in the front-rear direction to the vicinity of the rear end on the lateral outer side surfaces. It has concave portions 31 and 41 and protruding portions 32 and 42 which protrude from the side surfaces opposite to the concave portions 31 and 41 and have hollow interiors. The strength and rigidity of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are enhanced by the protrusions 32 and 42 . Further, lower lateral fixing portions 88 on the rear side of an upper left connecting member 85A and an upper right connecting member 85B of the connecting member 85 are inserted and attached into the projecting portions 32 and 42, respectively.

In addition, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 have a plurality of vertically extending grooves formed on their surfaces. When the pachinko machine 1 is installed in an island facility such as a game hall or is transported by the plurality of grooves, the pachinko machine 1 can be easily held by a worker's finger, and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily held. The design of the appearance of the machine 1 can be enhanced.

[2-4. Curtain plate member]
The curtain plate member 50 of the outer frame 2 is formed in a box shape with an open rear side. The curtain plate member 50 has a rear extension portion 51 extending rearward in a flat plate shape near the left end in the front view on the upper surface, and a U-shape with a size that allows a game ball to pass from the left end of the rear extension portion 51. A left discharge hole 52 that is notched and penetrates vertically, and a right discharge hole 53 that penetrates vertically in a size that allows the game ball to pass through on the right side of the left discharge hole 52 in the rear extension part 51, A vertical wall portion 54 that extends upward in a flat plate shape from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 including the rear end of the rearwardly extending portion 51, and a front surface that bulges forward from near the upper end of the vertical wall portion 54. and a return portion 55 that inclines toward the rear as it goes toward.

The curtain plate member 50 is mounted on the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 so that the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is placed on the upper surface of the rear extending portion 51 on the front side and the upper surface of the rear extending portion 51 . A horizontal portion 71, which will be described later, is attached. Further, the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50 is formed at a position that coincides with a later-described discharge hole 74 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 in a state assembled to the outer frame 2 . Further, the right discharge hole 53 is formed at a position on the right side of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 in the assembled state with the outer frame 2 . The right discharge hole 53 is formed larger than the left discharge hole 52 .

Further, the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 on the right side of the rear extension portion 51 is inclined so that the front end side is lower. The curtain plate member 50 has a left mounting portion 56 for mounting the left sliding member 81 on the right side of the rear extending portion 51 on the top surface, and a right mounting portion 56 for mounting the right sliding member 82 near the right end on the top surface. a portion 57; The bottom surface of the body frame 4 is placed on the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 via the left sliding member 81 and the right sliding member 82 .

As shown in the figure, the curtain plate member 50 has a shallow relief-like decoration formed on the front surface. Although not shown, the panel member 50 has a box-shaped interior partitioned by a plurality of ribs in a grid pattern, thereby enhancing strength and rigidity. Further, the curtain plate member 50 is formed so that the front half of the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 can be accommodated therein.

[2-5. Outer frame side upper hinge member]
As shown in the drawing, the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 includes an upper fixing portion 61 extending horizontally and having a rectangular outer shape, and a flat plate extending forward from the front end of the upper fixing portion 61. , a bearing groove 63 extending from the right end of the forward extending portion 62 to the center of the front extending portion 62 toward the front and penetrating vertically, and the upper fixing portion 61 in plan view. A flat plate-shaped lateral fixing portion 64 extending downward from the left side, and a lateral fixing portion extending downward from the left end of the forward extending portion 62 to the portion where the bearing groove 63 opens around the front end thereof. A flat plate-like hanging portion 65 that is continuous with the portion 64 is provided (see FIG. 16(b), etc.).

In the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the upper fixing portion 61 is placed on the upper surface of the mounting step portion 12 of the upper frame member 10 in a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, and is fixed by a screw (not shown). there is Further, the forward extending portion 62 extends forward beyond the front end of the upper frame member 10 . Further, the horizontal fixing portion 64 is inserted into the recess 31 on the outer side surface of the left frame member 30 from above and fixed to the left frame member 30 with screws.

The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 by inserting the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 into the bearing groove 63 to move the main body frame 4. It can be supported so that it can be opened and closed. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

[2-6. lock member]
As shown in FIG. 16, the lock member 66 of the outer frame 2 consists of a band plate-shaped lock body 66a extending forward and backward with a predetermined width on both sides and an operation portion projecting rightward from the rear end of the lock body 66a. 66b, an elastically deformable bar-shaped elastic portion 66c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 66a and then obliquely forward left, and a mounting hole penetrating vertically near the rear end of the lock body 66a. 66d and. This lock member 66 is made of synthetic resin. The locking member 66 is rotatably attached to the lower surface of the forward extending portion 62 of the outer-frame-side upper hinge member 60 with a mounting screw 67 .

The rear end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is attached to a position rearward of the bearing groove 63 in the forward extending portion 62 of the outer frame-side upper hinge member 60 through the attachment hole 66d. Further, when the lock member 66 is attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the lock body 66a can block the bearing groove 63 in plan view, and the right side surface near the front end is the outer frame side upper hinge member. The hanging portion 65 of 60 extends forward so as to come into contact with the portion extending to the opening of the bearing groove 63 (see FIG. 18).

The tip of the elastic portion 66c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 66a abuts the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65 of the outer frame upper hinge member 60. As shown in FIG. The lock member 66 is biased in a direction in which the front end thereof rotates leftward about the mounting hole 66d by the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c. Therefore, in a normal state, the right side surface of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 near the front end is in contact with the drooping portion 65 (see FIG. 18). In this state, a space capable of accommodating a body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the body frame side upper hinge member 620, which will be described later, is formed in a portion of the bearing groove 63 on the front side of the lock body 66a.

By operating the operation portion 66b, the lock member 66 can rotate the lock body 66a against the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c. By operating the operation portion 66b to rotate the lock body 66a in a direction in which the front end thereof moves leftward, the lock body 66a can be retracted from the bearing groove 63 in a plan view. can be in a state in which the As a result, the main frame hinge pin 622 can be inserted into the bearing groove 63 or removed from the bearing groove 63 .

[2-7. Outer frame side lower hinge member]
As shown in the drawing, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 includes a flat plate-like horizontal portion 71 extending horizontally and a portion on the left side of the horizontal portion 71 which is located rearward of the center in the front-rear direction. A raised plate-like rising portion 72, an outer frame lower hinge pin 73 protruding upward from near the front end of the horizontal portion 71, and the horizontal portion 71 are penetrated vertically so that only one game ball can pass through. and a sized discharge hole 74 . The outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

The horizontal portion 71 of the outer-frame-side lower hinge member 70 is formed in a trapezoidal shape with the left side as the base in plan view. The outer frame lower hinge pin 73 has a columnar shape and is formed in a truncated cone shape with an upper end narrowed above the center in the vertical direction. The outer frame lower hinge pin 73 is attached to a leftward position near the front end of the horizontal portion 71 . The discharge hole 74 is formed in the horizontal portion 71 so as to be in contact with the center portion of the rising portion 72 in the front-rear direction and extend rightward from the left side of the horizontal portion 71 in an inverted U shape. This discharge hole 74 is formed to have approximately the same size as the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50 .

When the outer frame 2 is assembled, the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is placed on the upper surface near the left end of the panel member 50 and the rear extension portion 51 . is fixed to the panel reinforcement member 80 by a screw (not shown) passing through the upper surface of the panel member 50 . When the outer frame 2 is assembled, the rising portion 72 is attached to the inner side surface of the left frame member 30 on the front side of the protruding portion 32 with a screw (not shown). The outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 73 into the main body frame lower hinge hole (not shown) in the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 of the main body frame 4 . In cooperation with the hinge member 60, the body frame 4 can be attached so that it can be opened and closed.

In addition, when the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 74 is aligned with the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50 . Thereby, the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 can be dropped (discharged) to the rear side of the curtain plate member 50 through the discharge hole 74 and the left discharge hole 52 . More specifically, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game balls that fall between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 move between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 as the main body frame 4 is closed. Since the gap between the two gradually narrows, the ball rolls to the rear side where the gap is wide, and can be discharged from the discharge hole 74 . At this time, the discharge hole 74 is formed at a position that is substantially the same as the rear end of the body frame 4 when the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in the state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. A game ball dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 is discharged from the discharge hole 74 so that it can be easily prevented from rolling backward from the main body frame 4, and the outer frame side. It is possible to make it difficult for a game ball to stay at the part of the lower hinge member 70.例文帳に追加

[2-8. Connection member]
The connecting members 85 of the outer frame 2 include an upper left connecting member 85A connecting the upper frame member 10 and the left frame member 30, an upper right connecting member 85B connecting the upper frame member 10 and the right frame member 40, and a lower frame member. 20 and the left frame member 30, and a lower right connection member 85D, which connects the lower frame member 20 and the right frame member 40. As shown in FIG.

The connection member 85 includes a flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 86 extending horizontally, a flat plate-like upper lateral fixing portion 87 extending upward from one of the left and right sides of the horizontal fixing portion 86, and the horizontal fixing portion. A flat plate-like lower lateral fixing portion 88 extending downward from the same side as the portion of 86 from which the upper lateral fixing portion 87 extends is provided. The connecting member 85 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

In the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B, the upper lateral fixing portion 87 extends upward from the center of the horizontal fixing portion 86 in the front-rear direction, and the lower lateral fixing portion 88 extends from both front and rear sides of the upper lateral fixing portion 87. extending downwards. That is, the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are provided with two lower horizontal fixing portions 88 spaced apart in the front-rear direction. The horizontal fixing portions 86 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are fixed to the upper frame member 10 in contact with the lower surface of the upper frame member 10 . The upper lateral fixing portions 87 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are inserted into the engaging notches 21 of the upper frame member 10 and fixed to the left and right ends of the upper frame member 10 . Further, the front lower horizontal fixing portions 88 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are fixed to the inner side surfaces of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 on the front side of the projecting portions 32 and 42, respectively. Further, the lower lateral fixing portion 88 on the rear side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is a screw that is inserted into the projecting portions 32, 42 of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and screwed from the outer side surface. are fixed to the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively.

In the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D, the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 protrudes further rearward than the rear end of the horizontal fixing portion 86, and further protrudes further than the horizontal fixing portion 86 of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. A lower horizontal fixing portion 88 extends downward beyond the horizontal fixing portion 86 from the lower end of the portion protruding rearward. Further, the left lower connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D further include a bent portion 89 projecting from the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 to the same side as the horizontal fixing portion 86. As shown in FIG. The horizontal fixing portions 86 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are fixed in contact with the upper surface of the lower frame member 20 . Also, the upper horizontal fixing portions 87 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are fixed to the inner side surfaces of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 on the front side of the projecting portions 32 and 42, respectively. Further, the lower lateral fixing portions 88 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are inserted into the engagement notch portions 21 of the lower frame member 20 and fixed to the lateral end surfaces of the lower frame member 20, respectively. be.

[2-9. Lock Mechanism of Upper Hinge Member on Outer Frame Side]
Next, in the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the locking mechanism of the lock member 66 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 with respect to the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 of the main body frame 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18. will be described with reference to FIG. 17(a) is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the main body frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame is removed from the outer frame side upper hinge member of the outer frame, and (b) is an outer upper side view. FIG. 4 is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which a main-body-side upper hinge member is attached to a hinge member; 18A and 18B are explanatory diagrams showing the action of the locking member on the outer frame.

When the lock member 66 of the outer frame 2 is attached to the front extending portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 (normal state), the tip of the elastic portion 66c contacts the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65. The lock body 66a is adapted to block a part of the bearing groove 63 bent in a V-shape, and the tip portion of the lock body 66a does not block the deepest part of the bearing groove 63. A space is formed in the deepest part of the bearing groove 63 into which the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 of the main body frame 4 can be inserted.

The support mechanism of the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 using the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the lock member 66 in this embodiment is such that the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 is inserted into the deepest part of the bearing groove 63 and the front end of the lock body 66a is mounted. is close to the right drooping portion 65 (in this state, there is a slight gap between the right side of the front end of the lock body 66a and the right drooping portion 65, and they are in contact with each other). ), the centers of the body frame upper hinge pin 622 located at the deepest portion of the bent bearing groove 63 and the front end face of the lock body 66a are diagonally shifted and opposed to each other. state.

In this normal axially supported state, the main body frame hinge pin 622 that supports the heavy main body frame 4 is in contact with the front end portion of the bearing groove 63. Almost no load is applied from 622 to the front end face of lock body 66a. In other words, no load is applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66. As shown in FIG. Since the front end surface of the lock body 66a is formed in an arc shape, the lock member 66 can be smoothly rotated when the operating portion 66b is rotated to rotate the lock member 66. there is Also, in the drawing, the center of the arc of the front end surface of the lock body 66a is the center of the mounting hole 66d (the center of rotation of the lock member 66).

Therefore, when the body frame upper hinge pin 622 is applied with an acting force F in a direction to pull out along the inclination of the bearing groove 63 formed in a dogleg shape, and comes into contact with the arc-shaped front end face of the lock body 66a, the acting force is applied. F is the component force F1 (normal direction of the arc of the front end surface of the lock body 66a) acting on the contact portion between the main body frame hinge pin 622 and the arc-shaped front end face, and the main body frame hinge pin 622 and the bearing groove 63. and the component force F2 acting on the contact portion with the inner surface of one side, the direction of the component force F1 faces the center of the mounting hole 66d (mounting screw 67) (the rotation center of the lock member 66). , the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 does not rotate in the direction away from the right drooping portion 65, and the body frame upper hinge pin 622 is positioned between the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 and the bearing groove 63. The state of being sandwiched between the side inner surfaces is maintained.

For this reason, even in a normal axially supported state or a state in which the acting force of the hinge pin 622 on the body frame is applied to the lock member 66, the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66 is not always subjected to a load, and is integrally formed of synthetic resin. Therefore, it is possible to prevent plastic deformation due to creep of the elastic portion 66c, and prevent the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 from falling out of the bearing groove 63 for a long period of time. Even if the front end portion of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is rotated in the rightward direction by applying an excessive force, the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66a abuts the drooping portion 65 and cannot move further. Since it does not rotate, the locking member 66 does not protrude outside the front extending portion 62 .

Even if the shape of the front end surface of the lock body 66a is not arcuate, the front end of the lock member 66 may be positioned toward the outside of the front extending portion 62 so that no rotational moment is generated by the action of the force component F1. By locating the center of rotation of the lock member 66 (the shaft fixed by the mounting screw 67) at a position where a rotational moment is generated, no load is applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66 at all times. Even if the lock member 66 rotates, the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66 a only abuts the hanging portion 65 , so the lock member 66 does not protrude outside the front extension portion 62 .

When the bearing groove 63 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 supports the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620, the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 is inserted into the bearing groove 63 from the open side of the bearing groove 63. Insert hinge pin 622 . When the main body frame hinge pin 622 is inserted into the bearing groove 63, the main body frame hinge pin 622 contacts the right side surface of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66, and the front end of the lock body 66a is pushed against the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 rotates around the mounting screw 67 so as to move leftward. As a result, the lock body 66a closing the bearing groove 63 is retracted to open the bearing groove 63, so that the body frame upper hinge pin 622 can be moved to the deepest portion (front end) of the bearing groove 63.

When the body frame hinge pin 622 is moved to the deepest part of the bearing groove 63, the contact between the body frame hinge pin 622 and the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is released, and the lock body 66a is released by the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 rotates so that the front end of the lock member 66 moves to the right, and the lock member 66 returns to its normal state. As a result, the main body frame hinge pin 622 is accommodated in the space on the front side of the front end of the lock body 66 a in the bearing groove 63 , and the main body frame hinge pin 622 can rotate in the deepest part of the bearing groove 63 . state is held (locked).

When removing the body frame upper hinge pin 622 from the bearing groove 63, the operation portion 66b of the lock member 66 is operated to rotate the lock member 66 so that the front end of the lock body 66a moves leftward, and the elastic portion The lock body 66a is retracted from the bearing groove 63 against the biasing force of 66c. As a result, the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63 and the opening are in communication with each other, and the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 can be removed from the bearing groove 63 .

[2-10. Crime Prevention Mechanism and Ball Engagement Prevention Mechanism at the Location of the Lower Hinge Member on the Outer Frame Side]
Ball biting prevention for preventing a game ball from being caught between a crime prevention mechanism at a portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment. The mechanism will be explained.

In the assembled state of the outer frame 2, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is attached to the front view left end portion of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50. As shown in FIG. The horizontal portion 71 of the outer-frame-side lower hinge member 70 is attached in a state of being placed near the left end of the upper surface of the panel member 50 and the upper surface of the rear extension portion 51 . The curtain plate member 50 has a standing wall portion 54 rising upward from the rear end of the upper surface. As a result, even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is attempted to enter the rear side of the main body frame 4 (pachinko machine 1) through the gap between the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640, Since the tip of the unauthorized tool abuts against the standing wall portion 54 extending upward from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, further insertion of the unauthorized tool to the rear side can be prevented. , tampering through the portion of the lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side can be prevented.

In addition, since the upper end of the standing wall portion 54 is provided with a return portion 55 extending forward, when an unauthorized tool in contact with the standing wall portion 54 is bent upward, the return portion 55 bends the tip of the unauthorized tool. can be further folded forward, it is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the rear side of the main body frame 4, and fraudulent actions can be performed through the portion of the lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side. can be reliably prevented.

By the way, when the standing wall portion 54 extending upward is provided at the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, the game ball is placed on the outer frame side in a state where the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2. When dropped onto the lower hinge member 70 (horizontal portion 71), the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 is not ejected backward from the rear end of the horizontal portion 71 due to the presence of the standing wall portion 54. There is a risk of being caught between On the other hand, in this embodiment, the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the rear extension portion 51 of the curtain plate member 50 are provided with a discharge hole 74 and a left discharge hole 52 through which the game ball can pass. , and the right ejection hole 53, the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 can be ejected downward from the ejection hole 74 or the like, and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 can be ejected downward. It is possible to reduce the pinching of the game ball between.

Therefore, if a game ball is caught between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, the periphery of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 may be damaged, or the main body frame 4 may not be closed in a normal state. It is possible to prevent a gap from being formed between the body frame 4 and fraudulent acts using the gap.

[3. Overall configuration of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 to 30. FIG. 19 is a front view of a door frame in a pachinko machine, FIG. 20 is a right side view of the door frame, FIG. 21 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 22 is a rear view of the door frame. 23 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 24 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 25 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the back. 26 is a cross-sectional view cut along line AA in FIG. 19, FIG. 27 is a cross-sectional view cut along line BB in FIG. 19, and FIG. 28 is a cross-section cut along line CC in FIG. It is a diagram. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into the main members and viewed from the back.

As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, the door frame 3 has a rectangular frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 extending vertically when viewed from the front, and is attached to the front lower right corner of the door frame base unit 100. a handle unit 300 attached to the door frame base unit 100, a plate unit 320 attached to the front lower portion of the door frame base unit 100, a performance operation unit 400 attached to the center of the plate unit 320, and a door frame base unit above the plate unit 320. A door frame left side unit 530 attached to the front left part of the door frame base unit 100, a door frame right side unit 550 attached to the front right part of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 320, and a door frame left side unit 550 and a door frame top unit 570 attached to the front upper portion of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 .

The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 is a plate-like door frame base 110 having a through hole 111 penetrating in the front and rear directions, and has a vertically extending rectangular (quadrangular) outer shape when viewed from the front, although the details will be described later. , a frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110, and attached to both upper and lower ends of the reinforcing unit 130 on the left end side when viewed from the front, and attached to the main body frame 4 so as to be hinge rotatable. A door frame side upper hinge member 140 and a door frame side lower hinge member 150, a glass unit 190 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 and closing the through hole 111, a security cover 200 covering the lower rear surface of the glass unit 190, The door frame 3 and the body frame 4, which are attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 so as to protrude forward through the door frame base 110 and can be opened and closed, and between the body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 are locked. a ball feed unit 250 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110 for sending game balls to the ball shooting device 680; and a ball shooting device 680 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110. and a foul cover unit 270 for receiving a game ball which is shot by and does not reach the game area 5a and discharges it to the lower tray 322. - 特許庁

The handle unit 300 of the door frame 3 rotates the game balls stored in the upper tray 321 according to the rotation angle of the handle 302 when the player rotates the rotatable handle 302, which will be described later in detail. The ball can be hit into the game area 5a of the game board 5 with a strong force.

The plate unit 320 of the door frame 3, which will be described later in detail, is attached to a portion below the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100, and the front surface bulges forward. A production operation unit 400 is attached to the front end in the center in the left-right direction. The plate unit 320 includes an upper plate 321 for storing game balls to be hit into the game area 5a, and an upper plate 321 arranged below the upper plate 321 for receiving game balls supplied from the upper plate 321 and the foul cover unit 270. A lower tray 322 that can be stored, an upper tray ball extraction button 327 for extracting game balls stored in the upper tray 321 to the lower tray 322, and within the range of the balance of cash and prepaid cards thrown into the ball lending machine A ball lending button 328 for lending game balls to the player, a return button 329 for returning the cash or prepaid card after deducting the amount of the game balls lent from the ball lending machine, and the cash put into the ball lending machine. , a ball rental/return display unit 330 that displays the remaining number of prepaid cards, etc., an effect selection left button 331 and an effect selection right button 332 that can be operated by the player when presenting an effect, A lower tray ball ejection button 333 for discharging game balls downward from the tray unit 320 is provided.

The effect operation unit 400 of the door frame 3 is attached to the front part of the plate unit 320 at the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and can be pressed by the player and presents the effect image to the player. It is possible. Although details will be described later, the effect operation unit 400 includes a large operation button 410 that can be operated by the player, and a door frame side effect that is arranged in the operation button 410 so as to be visible from the player side and can display the effect image. and a display device 460 .

The door frame left side unit 530 of the door frame 3, which will be described in detail later, is attached to the front left portion of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the plate unit 320 and to the left of the through hole 111 in the through hole 111 ( It decorates the left outer side of the game area 5a). The door frame left side unit 530 includes a left unit decoration lens member (not shown) that can be decorated with light.

The door frame right side unit 550 of the door frame 3, which will be described later in detail, is attached to the front right portion on the right side of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 320, and the through hole 111 ( It decorates the right outer side of the game area 5a). The door frame right side unit 550 protrudes farther forward than the door frame left side unit 530, and includes a right unit left decorative member 554 and a right unit right decorative member 557 provided on both left and right sides, and a right unit right decorative member 557 provided at the front end. A right unit decorative lens member 561 is provided. The door frame right side unit 550 can decorate the right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 with light emission.

The door frame top unit 570 of the door frame 3 is mounted above the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 and above the through hole 111 in the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100. It decorates the upper part of the frame 3. Although details will be described later, the door frame top unit 570 includes a pair of upper speakers 573 separated left and right, a top middle decorative member 576 projecting forward at the center of the front surface, and left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576. A top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 are decorated. The door frame top unit 570 can decorate the top middle decorative member 576, the top left decorative lens member 579, and the top right decorative lens member 580 with light emission.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 31-33. FIG. 31(a) is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame, and FIG. 31(b) is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit. Fig. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and Fig. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the back. be.

The door frame base unit 100 is attached to the body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable (hinge rotatable) so that the left side in front view closes the front surface of the body frame 4 . The door frame base unit 100 has a handle unit 300 at the lower corner of the front surface, a plate unit 320 to which the effect operation unit 400 is attached at the lower front surface of the through hole 111, and a door frame left side unit 530 at the left outer front surface of the through hole 111. A door frame right side unit 550 and a door frame top unit 570 are attached to the right outer front surface of the through hole 111 and the upper outer front surface of the through hole 111, respectively.

As shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, the door frame base unit 100 is a plate-shaped door frame base 110 having a vertically extending rectangular shape when viewed from the front and having a through hole 111 penetrating in the front and rear direction. , a frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110, and a frame-like reinforcing unit 130 attached to both upper and lower ends of the reinforcing unit 130 on the left end side when viewed from the front, projecting forward from the door frame base 110 and projecting from the main body frame 4. A door frame side upper hinge member 140 and a door frame side lower hinge member 150 rotatably attached to the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640, and the front surface of the door frame base 110 and the front surface of the through hole 111. A door frame left side decorative substrate 160 mounted on the left side of the view and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a glass unit 190 rotatably mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 110 are detachably mounted. and a glass unit mounting member 170 for.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 is mounted on the front surface of the door frame base 110 at the lower right corner in front view, and is mounted on the rear surface of the door frame base 110 with a cylindrical handle mounting member 180 for mounting the handle unit 300. A glass unit 190 for closing the through-hole 111, a security cover 200 for covering the lower rear surface of the glass unit 190, and an opening/closing cylinder unit attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 so as to penetrate the door frame base 110 and protrude forward. 210 , a ball feeding unit 250 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110 , and a foul cover unit 270 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110 .

Further, although illustration is omitted, the door frame base unit 100 includes various decorative substrates provided in the door frame 3, a ball feed solenoid 255, a handle rotation detection sensor 307, a handle touch sensor 310, a single button operation sensor 312, Ball rental button 328, return button 329, ball rental return display unit 330, effect selection left button 331, effect selection right button 332, vibration motor 424, pressure detection sensor 440, door frame side effect display device 460 (liquid crystal display device 461) , the upper speaker 573 , etc., and a door body relay board for relaying connection with the door frame relay board 911 of the board unit 900 in the body frame 4 .

[3-1a. door frame base]
The door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. The door frame base 110 has a quadrangular (rectangular) shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. The door frame base 110 is penetrated in the front-rear direction, and has a through-hole 111 formed in a generally quadrangular shape with an inner peripheral shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. The through-hole 111 has an upper side and both left and right sides forming the inner circumference thereof, which are close to the outer circumference of the door frame base 110 , respectively, and a lower side forming the inner circumference extends vertically from the lower end of the door frame base 110 . It is located at about 1/3 of the height of the direction. Accordingly, the door frame base 110 is formed in a frame shape as a whole with the through holes 111 penetrating therethrough in the front and rear directions. The door frame base 110 is integrally molded of synthetic resin.

The door frame base 110 has a handle mounting seat surface 112 which is formed at the lower right corner of the front surface when viewed from the front and is inclined so that the left end side projects slightly forward from the right end side, the handle mounting seat surface 112 and a through hole 111. A cylinder mounting portion 113 to which a cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 of the opening/closing cylinder unit 210 is mounted is recessed from the rear surface toward the front near the right end in front view between the and the cylinder mounting portion 113, and the opening/closing cylinder unit 210 penetrates in the front and rear at the cylinder mounting portion 113. The cylinder insertion hole 114 through which the cylinder lock 211 is inserted, and the cylinder insertion hole 114 and the handle mounting seat surface 112 are penetrated in the front-rear direction on the left side of the front view. and a ball feed opening 115 for facing the ball.

In addition, the door frame base 110 penetrates in the front and rear direction at a position on the left side of the center of the door frame base 110 in the left-right direction and at substantially the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 112, so that the ball discharge port 276 of the foul cover unit 270 faces forward. A passage opening 116 for a lower tray and a through-ball passage 273 of a foul cover unit 270 are penetrated in the front-rear direction so as to be adjacent to the lower side of the through-opening 111 near the left end of the door frame base 110 in front view. A plate passage opening 117, a glass unit mounting portion 118 recessed forward from the rear surface along the inner circumference of the through opening 111 and into which the glass frame 191 of the glass unit 190 is inserted, and both upper left and right sides of the door frame base 110. A speaker insertion opening 119 penetrates in the front and rear direction at the corner and through which the rear end of the upper speaker 573 of the door frame top unit 570 is inserted.

[3-1b. reinforcement unit]
The reinforcement unit 130 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 31 and 33 and the like. The reinforcing unit 130 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 to reinforce the door frame base 110 and increase the strength and rigidity of the door frame base 110 (the door frame 3). The reinforcing unit 130 includes an upper reinforcing sheet metal 131 extending to the left and right and attached along the upper edge of the rear surface of the door frame base 110, and a middle reinforcing sheet metal extending to the left and right attached to the lower side of the through hole 111 on the rear surface of the door frame base 110. A sheet metal 132, a vertically extending left reinforcing sheet metal 133 attached along the front view left side of the rear surface of the door frame base 110, and a vertically extending right reinforcement sheet attached along the front view right side of the rear surface of the door frame base 110. A metal plate 134 and a lock engaging portion 135 that is attached to the rear surface of the right reinforcing metal plate 134 and engages the door frame hook 702 of the locking unit 700 .

In the reinforcement unit 130, the left and right ends of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131 are connected and fixed to the upper ends of the left reinforcing sheet metal 133 and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 by screws, and the left end of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is connected to the left reinforcing sheet metal 133 by screws. Fixed. The right end of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is connected and fixed to the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 via a cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 of the opening/closing cylinder unit 210 which will be described later. Therefore, the reinforcement unit 130 is formed in a frame shape by an upper reinforcement sheet metal 131, a middle reinforcement sheet metal 132, a left reinforcement sheet metal 133, a right reinforcement sheet metal 134, and the like.

The upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, the right reinforcing sheet metal 134, and the lock engaging portion 135 of the reinforcing unit 130 are each formed by appropriately bending a metal plate. The middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is formed with a notch 132a penetrating back and forth at a position corresponding to the upper tray passage opening 117 of the door frame base 110 .

Although not shown in detail, the reinforcement unit 130 includes an upper reinforcement sheet metal 131, a middle reinforcement sheet metal 132, a left reinforcement sheet metal 133, and a right reinforcement sheet metal 134, each of which has a portion bent in the front-rear direction. This part not only increases the strength and rigidity, but also prevents unauthorized tools such as piano wires and flathead screwdrivers from entering from the outside.

[3-1c. Door frame side upper hinge member]
The door-frame-side upper hinge member 140 of the door-frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The door-frame-side upper hinge member 140 includes a door-frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 that is attached to the door-frame base 110 and has a pair of projecting pieces 141a that are separated vertically, and a pair of projections of the door-frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141. A columnar door frame upper hinge pin 142 that passes through the piece 141a and whose upper end is inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main frame side upper hinge member 620, and a pair of projecting pieces 141a on the door frame upper hinge pin 142. A disc-shaped flange member 143 attached at a position between and a hinge pin 142 on the door frame, which is interposed between the flange member 143 and the lower projecting piece 141a of the pair of projecting pieces 141a. and a lock spring 144 that urges the door frame upper hinge pin 142 upward.

Although not shown, the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 has a flat mounting piece connecting the rear ends of the pair of protruding pieces 141a. It is shaped like a letter. The door-frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 has a mounting piece that connects a pair of protruding pieces 141a and is attached to the rear surface of the door-frame base 110 with screws.

The door frame upper hinge pin 142 is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main frame side upper hinge member 620 at a portion (upper end) that protrudes upward from the upper projecting piece 141a. Further, although illustration is omitted, the door frame upper hinge pin 142 has a portion that protrudes downward from the lower projecting piece 141a and is bent in the horizontal direction. This bent portion abuts on the lower surface of the projecting piece 141a on the lower side, thereby restricting upward movement of the door frame upper hinge pin 142. As shown in FIG.

The flange member 143 is an E-ring and is inserted and held in a groove formed on the outer circumference of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 . The lock spring 144 is a coil spring through which the door frame upper hinge pin 142 can be inserted, and has its upper end in contact with the flange member 143 and its lower end in contact with the lower projecting piece 141a. The lock spring 144 is interposed in a compressed state between the flange member 143 and the projecting piece 141a on the lower side, and biases the door frame upper hinge pin 142 upward via the flange member 143. .

In the door-frame-side upper hinge member 140, the door-frame upper hinge pin 142 is biased upward by a lock spring 144, and the horizontally bent portion of the lower end of the door-frame upper hinge pin 142 protrudes downward. Further upward movement is restricted by abutting on the lower surface of the piece 141a. In this state, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 protrudes above the upper surface of the upper projecting piece 141a by a predetermined amount.

When an operator holds the horizontally bent portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 and pulls the portion downward against the urging force of the lock spring 144, the door frame upper hinge member 140 is attached to the door frame. The upper hinge pin 142 can be moved downward as a whole, and the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 can be retracted below the upper surface of the upper projecting piece 141a. Therefore, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame upper hinge member 140 can be inserted from below into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame upper hinge member 620 or removed downward. can be done. As a result, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame upper hinge member 140 is inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame upper hinge member 620, so that the upper left end of the door frame 3 in the front view is moved. , can be hinge-rotatably supported with respect to the body frame 4 .

Further, in the door-frame-side upper hinge member 140, a portion of the door-frame-side upper hinge pin 142 supported by a pair of protruding pieces 141a of the door-frame-side hinge shaft bracket 141 is attached to the door frame of the door-frame-side lower hinge member 150, which will be described later. It is supported coaxially with the lower hinge pin 152 . As a result, the door frame 3 can be hinge-rotated with respect to the main body frame 4 in a favorable state by the door-frame-side upper hinge member 140 and the door-frame-side lower hinge member 150 .

[3-1d. Door frame side lower hinge member]
The door frame side lower hinge member 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32 and the like. The door-frame-side lower hinge member 150 includes a door-frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 that is attached to the door-frame base 110 and has a flat plate-like extension piece 151a that extends forward, and A columnar door frame lower hinge pin 152 (see FIGS. 21 and 22) projecting downward from the vicinity of the front end of the extending piece 151a.

The door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 has a flat plate-like mounting piece (not shown) extending upward from the rear end of a horizontally extending flat plate-like extension piece 151a. is formed in a substantially L shape. The lower door frame hinge shaft bracket 151 has a mounting piece (not shown) attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 with screws.

The lower door frame hinge pin 152 has a truncated cone shape that narrows downward. The door frame lower hinge pin 152 is rotatably inserted from above into a door frame hinge hole 644 of a main body frame side lower hinge member 640 of the main body frame 4 to be described later. The door frame lower hinge pin 152 is arranged coaxially with the door frame upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame side upper hinge member 140 .

The door frame side lower hinge member 150 can rotate the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 152 into the door frame hinge hole 644 of the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 . can support

[3-1e. Door frame left side decorative board]
The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32 and the like. The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 is attached to the front surface of the door frame base 110 on the left side of the through hole 111 when viewed from the front. The door frame left side decorative board 160 extends vertically from the height below the speaker insertion opening 119 on the left side of the door frame base 110 in the front view to the height near the center of the through opening 111 in the vertical direction. A frame left side upper decoration substrate 161 and a door frame left side lower decoration extending vertically from the height of a lower position of the door frame left side upper decoration substrate 161 to substantially the same height as the lower end of the upper tray passage opening 117 . a substrate 162;

A door-frame left-side upper decorative board 161 and a door-frame left-side lower decorative board 162 of the door-frame left-side decorative board 160 are each provided with a plurality of LEDs 161a and 162a capable of emitting light forward. These LEDs 161a and 162a are full-color LEDs.

The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 is positioned behind a door frame left side unit 530, which will be described later, with the door frame 3 assembled, and has a plurality of LEDs 161a and 162a provided (mounted) on the front surface. By appropriately emitting light, the left unit decoration lens member of the door frame left side unit 530 can be decorated with light emission.

[3-1f. Glass unit mounting member]
The glass unit mounting member 170 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The glass unit mounting member 170 is rotatably mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 110 and is used to detachably mount the glass unit 190 . The glass unit mounting member 170 has a disc-shaped base portion 171 mounted rotatably about an axis extending back and forth on the rear side of the door frame base 110, and a rod-like member protruding from the base portion 171 in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. and a protrusion 172 that

The glass unit mounting members 170 are rotatably mounted on the rear surface of the door frame base 110 below the pair of speaker insertion openings 119 and outside the glass unit mounting portion 118 .

The glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated so that the projecting portion 172 projects upward from the base portion 171, so that the projecting portion 172 is outside the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110 when viewed from the rear. In this position, the glass unit 190 can be inserted into the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110 or removed from the glass unit mounting portion 118 .

With the glass unit 190 inserted into the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110 , the glass unit mounting member 170 rotates so that the projecting portion 172 projects downward from the base portion 171 . The rear side of the mounting piece 191a of the unit 190 is brought into contact with the rear side of the glass unit 190 to restrict the upper portion of the glass unit 190 from moving rearward.

The center of gravity of the glass unit mounting member 170 is positioned within the projecting portion 172 because the protruding portion 172 protrudes from the disk-shaped base portion 171 that is rotatably attached to the door frame base 110 . . Therefore, when the glass unit mounting member 170 is freely rotatable, the projecting portion 172 projects downward from the base portion 171 and is stable. In the glass unit mounting member 170, when the projecting portion 172 is in the rotational position where the projecting portion 172 projects downward from the base portion 171, the rearward movement of the glass unit 190 is restricted by the projecting portion 172. Even if the member 170 is subjected to vibration or the like, the whole does not rotate so that the projecting portion 172 projects upward from the base portion 171, and the rearward movement restriction of the glass unit 190 is not naturally released. do not have.

When removing the glass unit 190 from the door frame base 110, the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated so that the projecting portion 172 projects upward from the base portion 171, and the projecting portion 172 is attached to the mounting piece 191a of the glass unit 190. By moving the glass unit 190 to the outside, the upper side of the glass unit 190 can be moved rearward, and the glass unit 190 can be removed from the door frame base 110 .

[3-1g. Handle mounting member]
The handle mounting member 180 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The handle attachment member 180 is for attaching the handle unit 300 to the front surface of the door frame base 110 . 32 and 33, the handle mounting member 180 includes a cylindrical tube portion 181 extending in the front-rear direction, and a rear end of the tube portion 181 extending outward in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the tube portion 181. An extended annular flange portion 182 and a plurality of ( In this example, three) ridges 183 and a plurality of reinforcing ribs 184 connecting the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 181 and the front surface of the flange portion 182 and arranged in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 181 are provided. .

The handle mounting member 180 is attached to the handle mounting seat surface 112 with screws while the rear surface of the flange portion 182 is in contact with the front surface of the handle mounting seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110 .

The cylindrical portion 181 has an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the base portion 301 a of the handle base 301 in the handle unit 300 . One of the three protrusions 183 is provided on the upper side inside the tubular portion 181 and the remaining two are provided on the lower side inside the tubular portion 181 . These three ridges 183 are formed in the handle base 301 at positions corresponding to the three grooves 301c. Therefore, in the handle mounting member 180, the base portion 301a of the handle base 301 can be inserted into the cylindrical portion 181 only when the three protrusions 183 and the three groove portions 301c of the handle base 301 are aligned. The rotational position of the handle base 301 (handle unit 300) with respect to the door frame base 110 can be regulated.

Since the axis of the cylindrical portion 181 extends perpendicularly to the rear surface of the flange portion 182, the handle mounting member 180 can be attached to the inclined handle mounting seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110 so that the cylindrical portion The axis 181 is tilted so as to extend forward right, and the handle unit 300 can be attached to the door frame base 110 in a similarly tilted state.

[3-1h. glass unit]
The glass unit 190 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The glass unit 190 closes the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 so that the rear can be visually recognized from the front. The glass unit 190 includes a frame-shaped glass frame 191 that is larger than the inner peripheral shape of the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 and can be attached to the glass unit mounting portion 118 , and a glass frame that closes the inside of the glass frame 191 and has a glass frame on the outer periphery. and two transparent glass plates 192 attached to 191 . The two glass plates 192 are attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 191, respectively, and are separated from each other in the front-rear direction so as to form a space therebetween (see FIG. 26, etc.).

The glass frame 191 includes a pair of flat mounting pieces 191a extending outward from positions below the left and right upper corners in a front view, and a band projecting downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side. and a plate-shaped locking piece 191b. A mounting piece 191 a of the glass frame 191 can abut against a projecting portion 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170 . The locking piece 191b can be inserted into the space between the door frame base 110 and the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130 (see FIG. 26).

This glass unit 190 is obtained by inserting the locking piece 191b of the glass frame 191 from the rear side of the door frame base 110 into the gap between the door frame base 110 and the reinforcing sheet metal 132 in the reinforcing unit 130 from above. , the front end of the glass frame 191 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110, the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated, and the projecting portion 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170 is attached to the mounting piece 191a of the glass frame 191. It is attached to the door frame base 110 by bringing it into contact with the rear surface of the door frame base 110 .

When removing the glass unit 190 from the door frame base 110, the procedure can be reversed. Thereby, the glass unit 190 is detachable with respect to the door frame base 110 .

[3-1i. Security cover]
The security cover 200 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The security cover 200 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 so as to cover the lower rear surface of the glass unit 190, and is made of transparent synthetic resin. The crime prevention cover 200 includes a flat plate-like body portion 201 having an outer periphery formed in a predetermined shape, and a flat plate-like rear projecting piece 202 projecting short rearward along the outer peripheral edge of the body portion 201, and is spaced apart from the left and right. and a pair of locking pieces 203 that protrude forward from the body portion 201 and can be locked to the rear side of the door frame base 110 .

The body portion 201 of the crime prevention cover 200 is formed such that its lower end protrudes downward beyond the lower end of the glass unit 190 when attached to the door frame base 110 . Further, the upper end of the body portion 201 is formed in a shape along the lower end of the game area 5a on the game board 5 when the pachinko machine 1 is assembled. More specifically, the upper end of the body portion 201 is shaped along a portion of an inner rail 1002, an out guide portion 1003, a portion of a lower right rail 1004, and a right rail 1005 of a front component 1000, which will be described later. It is formed so as not to protrude into the game area 5a when assembled to the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加

The rear projecting piece 202 is formed along substantially the entire circumference of the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 201 . Therefore, the security cover 200 is formed into a shallow box-like shape that is opened rearward by the body portion 201 and the rear projecting piece 202, and has high strength and rigidity. Further, as shown in FIG. 33, the rear projecting piece 202 also protrudes rearward from a portion of the rear surface of the body portion 201 that is different from the outer peripheral edge of the body portion 201 . A rear projecting piece 202 protruding rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body part 201 is formed along a part of the outer rail 1001 of the front structural member 1000 of the game board 5 when the pachinko machine 1 is assembled. ing.

Note that the rear projecting piece 202 is not formed at a portion positioned between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 in the assembled state of the pachinko machine 1 . As a result, the game ball passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 (the game ball shot by the ball shooting device 680) does not come into contact with the rear projecting piece 202 of the security cover 200, and is within the game area 5a. It does not interfere with hitting the game ball into.

A pair of locking pieces 203 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base 110 . Thereby, the security cover 200 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base 110 .

When the security cover 200 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body 201 abuts the rear surface of the glass unit 190 (the rear end of the glass frame 191), and the part protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body 201 is The removed rear projecting piece 202 is inserted into the security recess 1008 of the front component 1000, which will be described later. In addition, the security cover 200 is in a state in which the rear protrusion 202 protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body 201 protrudes rearward from the front surface of the front structural member 1000 so as to be in contact with the lower surface of the front structural member 1000. . As a result, the space between the security cover 200 and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is in a complicatedly bent state by the rear projecting piece 202 of the security cover 200 and the security concave portion 1008 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire attempts to enter the game area 5a through between the crime prevention cover 200 and the front component member 1000 from the lower front of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear projecting piece 202 and the crime prevention concave portion 1008. , it is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the game area 5a.

[3-1j. Open/close cylinder unit]
The opening/closing cylinder unit 210 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The opening/closing cylinder unit 210 is attached from the rear side to the cylinder attachment portion 113 positioned between the through hole 111 and the handle attachment seat surface 112 in the vicinity of the right end of the door frame base 110 in front view, and cooperates with the locking unit 700 described later. It is used for opening and closing the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 and for opening and closing the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4.

The opening/closing cylinder unit 210 includes a cylindrical cylinder lock 211 having a keyhole 211a on the front surface and extending back and forth, and a locking unit attached to the rear end of the cylinder lock 211 to rotate a key inserted into the keyhole 211a. A rotation transmission member 212 that transmits rotation to the key cylinder 710 of 700, and a cylinder mounting plate 213 that mounts the cylinder lock 211 to the door frame base 110 (reinforcement unit 130).

The cylinder lock 211 can be rotated by inserting a corresponding key (not shown) into the keyhole 211a. can also be rotated by a predetermined angle in the direction of .

The rotation transmission member 212 is formed in a cylindrical shape (specifically, a conical cylinder whose diameter increases toward the rear) with an open rear end, and is arranged at opposite positions across the central axis from the rear end to the front. It has a pair of cutouts 212a that are cut out in the same direction. The rotation transmitting member 212 is formed so that the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 in the body frame 4 can be inserted from behind, and projections of the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 are inserted into the pair of notches 212a. Thus, the rotation of the rotation transmission member 212 (the key inserted into the keyhole 211a of the cylinder lock 211) can be transmitted to the key cylinder 710 of the lock unit 700 to rotate the key cylinder 710.

The cylinder mounting metal plate 213 is formed by bending a single metal plate, and has a convex shape that protrudes forward when viewed from above. More specifically, the cylinder mounting metal plate 213 includes a rectangular flat front plate portion 213a extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a pair of flat plate-like side plate portions 213b extending rearward from both left and right sides of the front plate portion 213a. and a pair of mounting plate portions 213c extending in a flat plate shape from the respective rear sides of the pair of side plate portions 213b in directions away from each other. The cylinder lock 211 penetrates the front plate portion 213a of the cylinder mounting metal plate 213 from the rear at a substantially central position in the vertical direction, and the rear end of the cylinder lock 211 is attached to the rear surface of the front plate portion 213a. Of the pair of mounting plate portions 213c of the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213, the mounting plate portion 213c on the left side in front view is attached to the right end portion of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130, and the mounting plate portion 213c on the right side in front view is attached to the reinforcing unit 130. It is attached to the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 . As a result, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 of the reinforcing unit 130 are connected by the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 .

When the opening/closing cylinder unit 210 is assembled to the door frame base unit 100 , the front end of the cylinder lock 211 projecting forward from the front plate portion 213 a of the cylinder mounting plate 213 extends from the rear side of the door frame base 110 into the cylinder insertion hole. 114 and protrudes forward of the door frame base 110. A front plate portion 213a and a pair of side plate portions 213b of a cylinder mounting plate 213 are accommodated in a box-shaped cylinder mounting portion 113 that is open rearward. ing.

[3-4. Overall configuration of production operation unit]
The overall configuration of the effect operation unit 400 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 34 to 41 and the like. FIG. 34(a) is a front view of the effect operation unit in the door frame, and (b) is a right side view of the effect operation unit. Also, FIG. 35(a) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 35(b) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as seen from the back. FIG. 36 is an explanatory diagram of the effect operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. 37 is a cross-sectional view taken along line DD in FIG. 34(a), and FIG. 38 is a cross-sectional view taken along line EE in FIG. 34(b). FIG. 39(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line FF in FIG. 34(b), and (b) is an enlarged view of part A in (a). 40 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 41 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit disassembled into the main members and seen from the back. The effect operation unit 400 is attached to the front part of the dish unit 320 at the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and can be pressed by the player and can present the effect image to the player. is.

The production operation unit 400 has a circular outer shape, and the central side except for the outer peripheral edge is formed transparent, and an operation button 410 that can be pressed by the player and the production operation unit of the plate unit cover 326 surrounding the outer periphery of the operation button 410. A frame-shaped frame unit 415 attached to the attachment portion 326a, a decoration board unit 420 arranged behind the operation button 410 and capable of decorating the outer peripheral edge of the operation button 410 and the frame unit 415 with light emission, and a frame. A base unit 430 attached to the rear side of the unit 415 and having an operation button 410 and a decoration board unit 420 attached to the front side, and a base unit 430 attached to the base unit 430 so as to be visible from the player side through the operation button 410 and effecting A door frame side effect display device 460 capable of displaying an image is provided.

[3-4a. Manual operation button]
The operation buttons 410 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42 and the like. FIG. 42(a) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button as seen from the front, and FIG. 42(b) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button as seen from the rear. The operation button 410 has a circular outer shape with a diameter slightly smaller than the height of the plate unit 320 in the vertical direction, and the center side excluding the outer peripheral edge is formed transparent. The operation button 410 has a transparent button lens 411 formed in a curved surface (a shape of a part of a spherical surface) so that the outer circumference is circular and the center side bulges forward. It has an annular button frame 412 attached thereto, and a cylindrical button base 413 attached to the rear side of the button frame 412 so as to sandwich the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411 . The button frame 412 and the button base 413 are made of a member that does not easily transmit light.

The button lens 411 is formed with a substantially constant thickness as a whole. Further, the button lens 411 is formed to have a smooth curved surface without unevenness on the front side. The button lens 411 extends for a predetermined length toward the center (inner side) in a recessed state with a W-shaped cross section from the rear surface of the button frame 412 and is arranged in rows in the circumferential direction. A first button decorative portion 411a extends on an axis toward the center in a recessed state with an arcuate cross section from the back surface at a position on the outer peripheral side of the first button decorative portion 411a, and is arranged in a circumferential direction within a predetermined angular range. and a plurality (six) of second button decoration portions 411b provided.

As shown in the drawing, the first button decorative portion 411a of the button lens 411 extends toward the center from the inner periphery of the button frame 412 when assembled to the operation button 410. It extends longer toward the center than

The plurality of second button decorative portions 411b of the button lens 411 each extend in an arc shape on the same circumference, and are formed three each on the left and right sides. These second button decorative portions 411b are formed to face from the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412, and protrude forward such that the front side thereof is substantially flush with the front surface of the button frame 412.

The button lens 411 exerts a lens effect of refracting light due to unevennesses having a W-shaped cross section or an arc-shaped cross section formed on the back surface of the first button decorative portion 411a and the second button decorative portion 411b. Therefore, the rear side cannot be seen clearly.

The button frame 412 is formed in an annular shape, and has a plurality (six) of frame openings 412a penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending in the circumferential direction in an arc shape with a predetermined length. The six frame openings 412 a are provided three each on the left and right sides, corresponding to the six second button decorations 411 b of the button lens 411 . This button frame 412 has a plated layer with metallic luster on its surface.

The button base 413 includes a substantially cylindrical main body portion 413a that extends short in the front-rear direction, an annular flange portion 413b that protrudes outward from the front end of the main body portion 413a, and an annular flange portion 413b that protrudes outward from the front end of the main body portion 413a. A plurality of (four) guide boss portions 413c projecting rearward along the outer periphery of the main body portion 413a at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction, and from the rear side of the flange portion 413b along the outer periphery of the main body portion 413a. A plurality (three) of detection pieces 413d protruding rearward in a band-like shape and arranged in the circumferential direction, and a detection piece 413d extending forward and backward through the flange portion 413b outside the main body portion 413a and along the outer circumference for a predetermined length. A plurality (six) of base openings 413e are formed in the circumferential direction, and a base opening 413e extends forward from the front end of the main body 413a. and an inner extending portion 413f that narrows toward (center side).

The outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411 and the button frame 412 are attached to the outer peripheral surface of the inner extending portion 413f of the button base 413 and the front surface of the flange portion 413b. The four guide boss portions 413c are respectively arranged at portions corresponding to the four upper, lower, left, and right corners with respect to the circumferential direction of the main body portion 413a. These four guide boss portions 413c are slidably inserted into holding holes 431b of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430, respectively. 413 d of three detection pieces are arrange|positioned at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction so that two may be distribute|arranged to the upper side and one to the lower side with respect to the circumferential direction of the main-body part 413a. These three detection pieces 413d are detected by the pressure detection sensor 440 of the base unit 430 when the operation button 410 is pressed.

The six base openings 413e are provided three each on the left and right sides, and correspond to the second button decorative portion 411b of the button lens 411 and the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412. As shown in FIG. At the base opening 413e of the button base 413, part of the main body 413a and the inner extension 413f are recessed inward from the outer periphery. The inner diameter of the inwardly tapering front end of the inner extending portion 413 f substantially matches the inner diameter of the button frame 412 .

The front surface of the operation button 410 bulges forward in a curved surface shape (the shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface), and is formed transparently. can be viewed from the front. The operation button 410 has four guide bosses 413c slidably inserted into holding holes 431b of the unit base 431 in the base unit 430, and an operation button spring 438 inserted into the holding holes 431b of the unit base 431. is urged forward by The front side of the outer peripheral edge of the operation button 410 abuts against the frame unit 415 due to the biasing force of the operation button spring 438 of the base unit 430 . By pressing against the , it moves rearward until the rear end abuts the front surface of the base unit 430 . When the operation button 410 is pressed and moved backward, at least one of the three detection pieces 413 d is detected by the pressure detection sensor 440 of the base unit 430 . Detection of the detection piece 413d by the press detection sensor 440 means that the operation button 410 has been operated.

In addition, the operation button 410 is a first button decoration formed over the entire circumference so as to extend from the inner peripheral end of the button frame 412 in the transparent button lens 411 to the center side in a state where the effect operation unit 400 is assembled. The portion 411a makes it difficult for the player to see the gap between the inner peripheral surface of the button base 413 and the operation button internal decoration member 432 of the base unit 430 .

Further, the operation button 410 has a button lens 411 and a button frame 412 that close the front end opening of a cylindrical button base 413 . A transparent portion that allows the rear to be visually recognized is formed so as to narrow from the outer periphery to the inner side with respect to the outer diameter of 410 . The presence of the button frame 412 also makes it difficult for the player to see the gap between the inner peripheral surface of the button base 413 and the operation button inner decorative member 432 of the base unit 430 .

In addition, when the operation button 410 is assembled to the effect operation unit 400 , the rear end of the cylindrical button base 413 (main body portion 413 a ) passes through the inner peripheral side of the decoration board unit 420 and extends from the front surface of the decoration board unit 420 . It will protrude backwards. As a result, the lights emitted forward from the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b mounted on the operation button left external decoration board 422 and the operation button right external decoration board 423 of the decoration board unit 420 are emitted from the button. It is possible to prevent leakage from the outside of the base 413 to the inside, and the operation button left interior decoration substrate 433, the operation button right interior decoration substrate 434, the operation button top interior decoration substrate 435, and the operation button bottom interior of the base unit 430 can be prevented. It is possible to prevent light emitted forward from the LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate 436 from leaking from the inside to the outside of the button base 413 . Therefore, the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b of the decoration board unit 420, the operation button left inner decoration board 433 of the base unit 430, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button It is possible to prevent the LEDs mounted on the lower interior decoration board 436 from illuminating the parts other than the part to be luminous decoration, and the luminous decoration can be performed with good appearance.

[3-4b. frame unit]
The frame unit 415 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 41 and the like. The frame unit 415 is attached from the front side to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320 so as to surround the outer circumference of the operation button 410 from the front side, and decorates the outside of the operation button 410. The frame unit 415 is formed in a shape that matches the front end side of the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a.

The frame unit 415 includes a frame-shaped frame main body 416 attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 and having a circular central opening 416a, and frame main bodies 416 on both left and right sides of the central opening 416a. a pair of translucent frame side lenses 417 attached from the rear side to the frame, and a translucent frame top lens 418 attached from the front side to the frame body 416 above the central opening 416a. there is

The frame main body 416 has a circular central opening 416a which is smaller in diameter than the outer diameter of the operation button 410 and penetrates in the front-rear direction. A plurality (six) of outer peripheral openings 416b extending in an arc shape along the peripheral edge of the central opening 416a and arranged in rows in the circumferential direction, and a notch 416c having a predetermined width in the upper front surface of the central opening 416a. , is equipped with The central opening 416 a is formed to have substantially the same diameter as the outer peripheral side of the frame opening 412 a of the button frame 412 in the operation button 410 . As a result, the front end side of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 can come into contact with the outer peripheral rear side of the frame opening portion 412a.

The six outer peripheral openings 416b are provided three each on both left and right sides of the central opening 416a, and are closed by frame side lenses 417 from the rear side. The cutout portion 416c also penetrates in the front-rear direction, and the frame top lens 418 is fitted from the front side.

The frame main body 416 also includes a substantially tubular inner tubular portion 416d extending rearward from a position slightly outside the peripheral edge of the central opening 416a. The inner cylindrical portion 416d extends rearward from a position between the central opening portion 416a and the outer peripheral opening portion 416b, and has a cutout portion corresponding to the cutout portion 416c. In the state where the production operation unit 400 is assembled, the inner cylindrical portion 416d is arranged so that the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b of the operation button left external decoration board 422 and the operation button right external decoration board 423 of the decoration board unit 420 are respectively arranged. and partitions between the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b (see FIG. 38).

Further, the frame body 416 has a pair of mounting portions 416e that extend outward from the upper left and right sides of the outer periphery, respectively, and are mounted to the effect operation unit mounting portions 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. As shown in FIG. The frame main body 416 (effect operation unit 400) is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 at the left and right portions of the pair of attachment portions 416e and cutout portion 416c.

The frame main body 416 has a metal cover on substantially the entire surface except for a portion having the same width as the cutout 416c on the side opposite to the cutout 416c side (the side where the frame top lens 418 is attached) across the central opening 416a. A glossy plated layer is formed.

The frame side lenses 417 close outer peripheral openings 416b formed on the left and right sides of the frame main body 416 three each, from the rear side. The frame side lens 417 has a smooth surface without unevenness on the front side, and a plurality of unevenness along the periphery of the central opening 416a on the rear side (see FIGS. 39 and 46). Light is refracted by these multiple unevennesses, so that the rear side of the frame side lens 417 cannot be seen.

The frame top lens 418 has a substantially rectangular outer shape so as to be fitted into the cutout portion 416c of the frame body 416 from the front side. The frame top lens 418 has a smooth front surface. In addition, the frame top lens 418 has a plurality of concave and convex portions extending in a zigzag pattern on the rear surface side along the periphery of the central opening 416a and arranged in a plurality of rows in the radial direction of the central opening 416a (see FIGS. 37 and 46). reference). The rear side of the frame top lens 418 cannot be seen because light is refracted by these unevennesses.

In the frame unit 415, in a state in which the production operation unit 400 is assembled, the pair of frame side lenses 417 are connected to the second LEDs 422b and 423b of the operation button left external decoration board 422 and the operation button right external decoration board 423 of the decoration board unit 420, respectively. , and the frame top lens 418 is positioned in front of the frame top lens decoration substrate 437 of the base unit 430, and the second LEDs 422b, 423b, etc. mounted thereon can be decorated with light. .

[3-4c. Decoration board unit]
The decoration board unit 420 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 43 and the like. FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the decoration board unit of the effect operation unit, viewed from the front. The decoration board unit 420 is attached to the front surface of the base unit 430 below the frame unit 415, and can decorate the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 with light emission. Vibration can be applied to the operation unit 400 .

The decoration board unit 420 includes a C-shaped board base 421 whose upper side is open, and an operation button left external decoration board 422 and an operation button right external decoration board 423 attached to the left and right front surfaces of the board base 421, respectively. , and a motor cover 425 attached to the front surface of the substrate base 421 so as to cover the front side of the vibration motor 424 .

The substrate base 421 has an inner circumference that is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the cylindrical body portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410, and an outer diameter that is larger than the outer diameter of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413. Moreover, it is formed smaller than the outer diameter of the frame unit 415 .

The operation button left external decoration board 422 extends in an arc shape along the front surface of the board base 421 . The operation button left external decoration board 422 has a plurality of first LEDs 422a mounted along the inner periphery of the board base 421 on the front side, and a plurality of first LEDs 422a on the inner periphery of the board base 421 radially outside the plurality of first LEDs 422a. and a plurality of second LEDs 422b mounted along. The operation button right external decoration board 423 extends in an arc shape along the front surface of the board base 421 . The operation button right outer decoration board 423 has a plurality of first LEDs 423a mounted along the inner periphery of the board base 421 on the front side, and a plurality of first LEDs 423a on the inner periphery of the board base 421 radially outside the plurality of first LEDs 423a. and a plurality of second LEDs 423b mounted along. Both front and rear surfaces of the operation button left external decoration board 422 and the operation button right external decoration board 423 are white.

The vibration motor 424 has an eccentric weight 424a attached to the rotating shaft, and can generate vibration by rotating the weight 424a.

When the decoration board unit 420 is assembled to the effect operation unit 400 , the rear end side of the cylindrical main body part 413 a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 is inserted inside the board base 421 . Further, in the decoration board unit 420, the first LEDs 422a and 423a of the operation button left external decoration board 422 and the operation button right external decoration board 423 are positioned behind the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410, respectively. The second LEDs 422b, 423b are located behind the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415. As shown in FIG. In addition, in the state assembled to the effect operation unit 400, the frame The inner tubular portion 416d of the unit 415 is located (see FIG. 38).

Therefore, the decoration board unit 420 illuminates only the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 with light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a of the operation button left external decoration board 422 and the operation button right external decoration board 423, respectively. At the same time, only the frame side lenses 417 of the frame unit 415 can be illuminated with light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b.

Further, the decoration board unit 420 can generate vibration by rotating the weight 424a of the vibration motor 424, and can vibrate the entire presentation operation unit 400. FIG.

[3-4f. Effects of production operation unit]
The effects of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 44 to 46 and the like. 44 is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the operation button is pressed in the sectional view of the effect operation unit of FIG. 37. FIG. FIG. 45(a) is a view of the effect operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends, and a part of the operation button is cut away to be hidden by the first button decorative portion of the operation button, the button frame, or the like. It is explanatory drawing which shows a site|part, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the site|part which is going to be hidden by the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in sectional drawing of the production|presentation operation unit. FIG. 46(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the appearance of the production operation unit as a perspective view seen from the front, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the appearance of the production operation unit as seen from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. is.

The effect operation unit 400 of the present embodiment can show the effect image to the player according to the game state that changes when the game ball is hit into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and the player can operate the effect operation unit 400. The player can be entertained by participating in the performance presented to the player by operating the button 410.例文帳に追加

The performance operation unit 400 is formed to have a total height substantially equal to the height of the portion below the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 . Further, the performance operation unit 400 is formed to have a full width slightly larger than 1/3 of the full width of the door frame 3. - 特許庁The effect operation unit 400 is arranged at the center in the left-right direction under the game area 5a (the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110) when viewed from the front.

The production operation unit 400 has the upper part of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 attached to the production operation unit attachment portion 326 a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 . When the effect operation unit 400 is attached to the plate unit 320, a gap is formed between the lower surface of the leg portion 442a of the relay board cover 442 serving as the bottom surface and the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. is formed. That is, the effect operation unit 400 is attached only to the upper portion of the plate unit 320, and is attached in a suspended state.

In addition, in the effect operation unit 400, the front surface of the frame unit 415 (the surface formed by the inner periphery of the front end of the central opening 416a of the frame body 416) is parallel to the inclined surface of the front end opening of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a. installed as. As a result, in the effect operation unit 400, the central axis line CL of the transparent operation button 410 that protrudes forward in a curved surface shape (the shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) is at an angle of 63 degrees with respect to the vertical line. It is inclined so that it moves upward as it goes forward. Thus, when the player sits down in front of the pachinko machine 1 to play a game using the pachinko machine 1, the player's head is placed above the plate unit 320 (the effect operation unit 400). Since it is positioned in front of the center of the game area 5a on the game board 5, the central axis CL of the operation button 410 passes through the vicinity of the player's head. Therefore, when the player looks down from the game area 5a to the effect operation unit 400 (operation button 410), the operation button 410 is as close as possible to the front view (projection view from the direction parallel to the central axis CL). Therefore, the operation button 410, the door frame side effect display device 460 inside the operation button 410, and the like can be visually recognized in good condition.

The effect operation unit 400 has four guide bosses 413c of the operation button 410 slidably inserted into four holding holes 431b of the base unit 430, and is biased forward by an operation button spring 438. As shown in FIG. In a normal state (a state in which the operation button 410 is not pressed), the operation button spring 438 pushes the front end of the flange portion 413 b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 toward the frame unit 415 . It abuts on the rear surface of the frame body 416 near the central opening 416a.

In the normal state, the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 protrudes forward from the central opening 416a of the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415 from the vicinity of the inner periphery of the button frame 412 (center axis line CL side). there is In other words, in the transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410 that protrudes forward in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface), a portion protruding forward from the inner circumference (inside) of the button frame 412 is , protrudes forward from the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 (see FIG. 37, etc.).

Incidentally, in this embodiment, the diameter of the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 in the frame unit 415 is set to about 15 cm, and the button lens 411 (the front end thereof) faces the frame unit with respect to the direction of the central axis CL of the operation button 410. It protrudes about 4 cm forward from the front of 415.

In a normal state, when the player presses the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 , the operation button 410 moves backward along the center axis CL against the biasing force of the operation button spring 438 . When the rear end of the operation button 410 contacts the front surface of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430, the rearward movement of the operation button 410 is restricted and the rearward movement of the operation button 410 is stopped. When the player presses the operation button 410, the player presses the button lens 411 that protrudes forward in a curved surface shape (shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface).

Since the operation button 410 has a very large outer diameter compared to the performance operation button provided in the conventional pachinko machine, the vicinity of the peripheral edge away from the central portion of the button lens 411 is pressed. likely to be To be more specific, the operation buttons for presentation in the conventional pachinko machine are attached so that their central axes extend substantially parallel to the vertical line, whereas the operation buttons 410 of the presentation operation unit 400 of the present embodiment are attached. is installed with the central axis CL inclined with respect to the vertical line, when the player presses the operation button 410 from above as in the conventional pachinko machine, as indicated by the white arrow in FIG. A portion of the operation button 410 away from the center axis CL is pressed.

By the way, since the operation buttons for performance in the conventional pachinko machine are formed on a flat surface to be pressed by the player, if the operation buttons are enlarged while the portions to be pressed are flat surfaces, When a part of the operation button deviated from the center is pressed, the surface to be pressed is tilted so that the pressed part retreats first, and the operation button cannot retreat straight. There is a possibility that the pressing operation becomes impossible.

On the other hand, in the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 of the present embodiment, the portion (button lens 411) pressed by the player has a curved surface shape (partial shape of a substantially spherical surface) that bulges forward. Therefore, when a position away from the center of the operation button 410 is pressed, the force is distributed over the entire operation button 410, making it difficult for the operation button 410 to tilt, and the operation button 410 moves straight backward. can be done. Therefore, even if any position on the front side of the operation button 410 is pressed, the operation button 410 can be smoothly retracted without being tilted. You can fully enjoy the performance to operate.

In addition, the effect operation unit 400 has the vibration motor 424 attached to the lower front surface of the board base 421 of the decoration board unit 420, and as described above, only the upper part is plated so that the effect operation unit 400 can be suspended. Since it is attached to the performance operation unit attachment portion 326a of the unit cover 326, when the weight 424a is rotated by the vibration motor 424 to generate vibration, the vibration is generated at the part farthest from the attachment part. , the entire effect operation unit 400 can be greatly (strongly) vibrated, and the vibration can be transmitted to the player who is touching the effect operation unit 400. - 特許庁In addition, since the vibration motor 424 is arranged directly below the position (the position of the white arrow in FIG. 44) that is relatively easy for the player to press, the player pressing the operation button 410 It is possible to transmit strong vibrations to the player, and surprise the player and enjoy the performance.

Furthermore, the effect operation unit 400 is attached to the plate unit cover 326 in a suspended state, and the lower surface of the leg portion 442a of the relay board cover 442 forming the lower surface and the bottom plate of the plate unit cover 326 form the lower surface. Since a gap is formed between the upper surface of the portion 326i and the lower surface of the leg portion 442a when the operation button 410 is strongly pressed downward or struck, the frame is not held until the lower surface of the leg portion 442a contacts the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i. The attachment portion 416e of the unit 415, the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326, and the like bend downward, thereby absorbing the impact. Further, after the lower surface of the leg portion 442a abuts on the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i, the downward movement of the effect operation unit 400 is regulated, and the attachment portion 416e of the frame unit 415 and the plate unit cover 326 are attached to the effect operation unit. It is possible to avoid applying an excessive force to the portion 326a and the like, and to prevent damage to the effect operation unit 400 and the like. Therefore, when the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 is pressed and an effect is presented to the player, even if the operation button 410 is pressed or hit with a strong force, the operation button 410 or the effect operation unit is not pressed. Since the 400 and the like are not damaged, it is possible to avoid the interruption of the game due to the damage, suppress the decline in the interest of the player, and reduce the increase in the burden on the game hall side by making it difficult to damage. can be suppressed.

As described above, the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 pressed by the player is formed in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) protruding forward, so that the button lens 411 is formed in a flat plate shape. The strength and rigidity of the button lens 411 are higher than those of the case, and even if the button lens 411 is hit strongly, the impact can be dispersed over the entire button lens 411, making it difficult to break.

46, the button lens 411, the frame side lens 417, the frame top lens 418, and the operation button inner decorative member 432 are made of transparent members. The decoration by unevenness such as the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the first button interior decoration portion 432f, and the second button interior decoration portion 432g formed on the back side is the front side (player side). ). In addition, since the plate thickness changes in the parts where these uneven decorations are formed, the light is refracted in a complicated way, so it is difficult to see the rear side through the parts where the uneven decorations are formed. .

Since the effect operation unit 400 includes the first button decoration portion 411a extending from the inner periphery of the button frame 412 in the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 toward the center, the first button decoration portion 411a is decorated with unevenness. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to see the rear at the outer peripheral portion of the portion inside the button lens 411 . Behind the portion where the first button decorative portion 411a is formed (rear in the direction of the center axis CL), there are the inner peripheral surface of the main body portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the peripheral wall portion of the inner decorative member 432 of the operation button. 432a, and the first button decorative portion 411a located in front of the gap is positioned from the front side (player side) to close the gap on the outer circumference of the operation button inner decorative member 432. can be made invisible. As a result, even if the operating button interior decoration member 432 whose position is fixed is provided inside the operating button 410 that can be pressed, it is possible to prevent the operating button 410 from deteriorating in appearance. It is possible to prevent the player from having an unpleasant feeling, and it is possible to arrange the operation button internal decoration member 432 inside the transparent operation button 410 without any problem, and to improve the appearance of the operation button 410.例文帳に追加

More specifically, the effect operation unit 400 is configured such that the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, and the button frame 412 of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 are arranged so that the outer circumference of the operation button interior decoration member 432 of the base unit 430 is adjusted. The unit base 431, the decoration board unit 420, and the like on the rear side (back side) of the outer side are formed so as not to be seen from the player side through the transparent button lens 411.例文帳に追加Specifically, in FIG. 45, the cross-hatched portion surrounded by the one-dot chain line is hidden from the player's side. In this way, since the operation button 410 is provided with the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the like, the outer side and the inner side of the operation button interior decoration member 432 are difficult to see and hidden. It is possible to improve the appearance of the operation button 410 and, in turn, the effect operation unit 400 as a whole.

In addition, in the effect operation unit 400, the first button decorative portion 411a of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 extends toward the central axis CL of the operation button 410 and is arranged in rows in the circumferential direction. A second button interior decoration portion 432g formed on the front plate portion 432b of the operation button interior decoration member 432 arranged inside and behind the operation button 410 extends in a modified octagonal shape around the center axis CL. As shown in FIG. 46, the concave-convex line of the first button decoration portion 411a and the concave-convex line of the second button inner decoration portion 432g intersect with each other. The decoration can be shown to the player.

In addition, in the effect operation unit 400, the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button inner decoration portion 432g are separated from each other in the front-rear direction (the direction in which the central axis CL extends). With the second button inner decoration part 432g, a deep and three-dimensional geometric pattern can be shown to the player, and the decoration including the inside of the operation button 410 can be enjoyed.

Furthermore, in the effect operation unit 400, the first button decoration portion 411a and the second inner button decoration portion 432g are separated in the front-rear direction. Since the degree of overlap between the line and the concave-convex line of the second button interior decoration portion 432g changes, the player can see the decoration with movement, and the player can be entertained.

In this way, the effect operation unit 400 provides a moving and three-dimensional decoration to the player by using the first button decoration portion 411a of the operation button 410 and the second button interior decoration portion 432g of the operation button interior decoration member 432. Since it can be shown, the pachinko machine 1 can strongly attract the player's interest and have a high appeal.

In addition, in the operation button 410 (inside the button frame 412), behind the operation button inner decorative member 432, the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button An upper interior decoration board 435 and an operation button lower interior decoration board 436 are arranged, and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surfaces thereof emit light, thereby causing the operation button interior decoration member 432 in the operation button 410 to emit light. can be decorated. That is, the inside of the operation button 410 can be illuminated by the operation button left interior decoration substrate 433 , the operation button right interior decoration substrate 434 , the operation button upper interior decoration substrate 435 , and the operation button lower interior decoration substrate 436 . As shown in FIG. 38, the LEDs mounted on the front surfaces of the operation button left interior decoration substrate 433, the operation button right interior decoration substrate 434, the operation button upper interior decoration substrate 435, and the operation button lower interior decoration substrate 436 are as follows. As viewed from the direction in which the central axis CL extends, the button base 413 of the operation button 410 is arranged inside the cylindrical main body portion 413a, so that the light from them does not leak to the outside of the main body portion 413a. , only the inside of the operation button 410 can be favorably illuminated.

In addition, the effect operation unit 400 is arranged behind the second button decoration portion 411b facing from the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 positioned near the outer periphery of the operation button 410, and the operation button left external decoration substrate 422 in the decoration substrate unit 420 is positioned behind the second button decoration portion 411b. The first LED 422a and the first LED 423a of the operation button right external decoration board 423 are arranged, and by lighting these first LEDs 422a and 423a, the six second button decoration portions 411b of the operation button 410 are decorated with light emission. can be done. As shown in FIG. 38, the first LED 422a of the operation button left external decoration board 422 and the first LED 423a of the operation button right external decoration board 423 are formed by the cylindrical body portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the frame unit. 415 and the cylindrical inner cylindrical portion 416d of the frame main body 416, and the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a does not leak to the inside of the main body portion 413a or the outer side of the inner cylindrical portion 416d. Only the second button decoration portion 411b of the button 410 can be favorably illuminated.

Furthermore, the effect operation unit 400 is arranged behind the frame side lens 417 facing from the six outer peripheral openings 416b of the frame body 416 in the frame unit 415, the second LED 422b of the operation button left external decoration board 422 and the operation button right external decoration board A second LED 423b of 423 is arranged, and the frame side lens 417 can be decorated with light emission by causing the second LEDs 422b and 423b to emit light. The second LED 422b of the operation button left external decoration board 422 and the second LED 423b of the operation button right external decoration board 423 are located between the cylindrical inner cylindrical portion 416d of the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415 and the outer periphery of the frame main body 416. The light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b does not leak to the inside of the inner cylindrical portion 416d or the outside of the frame body 416, and only the frame side lenses 417 of the frame unit 415 can be decorated with good light. .

In addition, the production operation unit 400 has a frame top lens decoration substrate 437 in the base unit 430 arranged behind the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415, and a plurality of lenses mounted on the front surface of the frame top lens decoration substrate 437. , the frame top lens 418 can be decorated with light emission. A plate-shaped light shielding wall portion 431c protrudes forward from the lower side of the portion of the base unit 430 to which the frame top lens decoration substrate 437 of the unit base 431 is attached to near the rear of the lower end of the frame top lens 418. Light from the LED of the top lens decoration substrate 437 does not leak to the side of the operation button 410 or the frame side lens 417, and only the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415 can be favorably illuminated.

[3-5. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 530 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50. FIG. FIG. 47(a) is a front view of the door frame left side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit viewed from the front, and (c) is a rear view of the door frame left side unit. 1 is a perspective view seen from . FIG. 48 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 49 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit viewed from the rear. FIG. 50 is a sectional view taken along line LL in FIG. 47(a). The door frame left side unit 530 is arranged above the tray unit 320 so as to cover the front side of the door frame left side upper decorative board 161 and the door frame left side lower decorative board 162 (door frame left side decorative board 160). It is attached to the front left part on the left side of the through hole 111 in 100 . The door frame left side unit 530 is for decorating the left side of the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 when viewed from the front.

The door frame left side unit 530 includes a vertically extending strip-shaped left unit base 531 attached to the left side of the through hole 111 in the front view of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100, and the left unit base 531. A transparent strip-shaped left unit diffuser lens member 532 attached to the front surface, and a translucent property arranged in front of the left unit diffuser lens member 532 and having a polyhedral decoration at the front end. A left unit decorative lens member (not shown), and a left unit top that is attached to the upper front surface of the left unit base 531 from the front side of the left unit decorative lens member, protrudes forward in a cylindrical frame shape, and extends vertically. a decoration base 534, a left unit lower decoration base 535 attached to the front lower portion of the left unit base 531 from the front side of the left unit decoration lens member and protruding forward in a frame shape shorter than the left unit upper decoration base 534; A transparent left unit decorative cover 536 attached to the front side of the left unit base 531 so as to cover the front end side of the left unit decorative lens member from the front sides of the left unit upper decorative base 534 and the left unit lower decorative base 535, and the left unit. and a plurality of decorative members 537 attached to the front side of the decorative cover 536 .

A left unit base 531 of the door frame left side unit 530 is formed in a shallow box shape with an open rear side, and has a plurality of openings 531a penetrating in the front and rear directions. As illustrated, the plurality of openings 531a include circular holes and vertically extending rectangular holes. The left unit base 531 has LEDs 161a and 162a mounted on the front surface of the door frame left side decorative board 160 (the door frame left side upper decorative board 161 and the door frame left side lower decorative board 162). It is attached to the front left side of the door frame base 110 so as to face forward. The openings 531a of the left unit base 531 are formed so that the LEDs 161a and 162a of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 are positioned substantially in the vertical center when the door frame 3 is assembled. The left unit base 531 is made of an opaque member.

In addition, the left unit base 531 has a left reflecting standing wall portion 538 (see FIGS. 5 and 23) erected toward the front from the glass plate 192 disposed so as to close the through hole 111. As shown in FIG. ing. In the left reflecting vertical wall portion 538, the inner surface which has a flat planar shape and is provided so as to face the through hole 111 is provided as a reflecting surface capable of reflecting light. This reflective surface can be provided not only by forming the inner surface itself of the left reflecting vertical wall portion 538 from a reflective material such as metal or resin, but also by attaching a reflective seal to the inner surface. It is possible. As will be described later, the left reflecting vertical wall portion 538 is formed by the left unit base 531 and serves as a portion (left portion) of the reflecting vertical wall portion 33 described above.

The left unit diffuser lens member 532 is made of a transparent member and is vertically divided into an upper diffuser lens member 532A and a lower diffuser lens member 532B. The left unit diffuser lens member 532 includes a circular lens portion 532a that is circular in front view and corresponds to the circular opening 531a in the left unit base 531, and a rectangular lens portion that is square in front view and corresponds to the square opening 531a. and a lens portion 532b. When the door frame left side unit 530 is assembled to the door frame 3, the LEDs 161a and 162a of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 are positioned immediately after the center of the circular lens portion 532a and square lens portion 532b. formed.

A circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffuser lens member 532 is formed in a convex lens shape with smooth front and rear surfaces. With this circular lens portion 532a, the light from the LEDs 161a and 162a arranged in the rear can be emitted forward in the form of dots. The circular decorative portion of the left unit decorative lens member can be decorated with light emission by the light emitted forward from the circular lens portion 532a.

The square lens portion 532b of the left unit diffusion lens member 532 includes a central diffuse reflection portion 532c recessed rearward in a conical shape at the center of the front surface, and a front diffusion lens portion 532d formed outside the central diffuse reflection portion 532c on the front surface. , an input lens portion 532e that bulges rearward in a curved surface shape at the center of the rear surface (immediately after the central diffuse reflection portion 532c), and an input lens portion 532e on the rear surface that is entirely outside of the input lens portion 532e and that extends forward as it goes away from the input lens portion 532e. and a forward reflecting portion 532f that is slanted for movement.

The front diffuser lens portion 532d of the rectangular lens portion 532b is formed of a plurality of concentric arcuate grooves divided in the circumferential direction by lines extending radially from the central diffuse reflection portion 532c. More specifically, the front diffuser lens portion 532d has grooves recessed rearward in an arc shape in a cross-sectional shape when cut along the radial direction, and a mountain portion between the grooves extends forward. It bulges in an arc shape, and the front surface is formed in a smooth wave shape. In addition, the front diffusion lens portion 532d is formed so that the groove portions and the peak portions are alternately positioned in the circumferential direction with respect to the radially extending line that divides it in the circumferential direction.

The front reflecting portion 532f of the rectangular lens portion 532b is formed of a plurality of concentric arcuate grooves divided in the circumferential direction by lines extending radially from the input lens portion 532e. These plurality of grooves are recessed in a V shape from the rear to the front, and the deepest portions are formed in an arc shape. The front reflecting portion 532f has a triangular cross-sectional shape when cut along the radial direction, with peaks between grooves sharpening rearward, and is formed in a serrated shape. The front reflecting portion 532f is formed such that the grooves and peaks move forward as the distance from the center increases. In addition, the front reflecting portion 532f is formed so that groove portions and mountain portions are alternately positioned in the circumferential direction with respect to the radially extending line dividing the portion in the circumferential direction. The radially extending line that divides in the circumferential direction coincides with the radially extending dividing line in the front diffuser lens portion 532d.

When this rectangular lens portion 532b is assembled to the door frame 3, the corresponding LEDs 161a and 162a of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 are located immediately behind the input lens portion 532e.

Light emitted forward from the LEDs 161a and 162a is input into the square lens portion 532b from the input lens portion 532e. Since the input lens portion 532e bulges rearward into a curved surface (convex lens shape), it refracts the light that spreads forward from the LEDs 161a and 162a so that it travels forward in parallel. Almost all of the light can be guided to the conical central diffuse reflection portion 532c. The light guided to the central diffuse reflection portion 532c is directed perpendicularly to the longitudinally extending axis (parallel to the front surface of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160) by the inclined conical surface of the central diffuse reflection portion 532c. direction), and travels outward along the front surface of the square lens portion 532b from the center side. Also, the light reflected by the central diffuse reflection portion 532c travels from the central side to the outside (direction away from the center line of the central diffuse reflection portion 532c) over the entire thickness of the rectangular lens portion 532b in the front-rear direction.

When the light reflected outward from the central side in the rectangular lens portion 532b substantially parallel to the front surface of the left side decorative substrate 160 of the door frame reaches the saw-shaped forward reflecting portion 532f, it is reflected forward by the surface of the forward reflecting portion 532f. reflect to the side. At this time, since the rear surface of the front reflecting portion 532f is inclined so as to move forward as it moves away from the central diffuse reflecting portion 532c, the thickness of the rectangular lens portion 532b in the front-rear direction becomes thinner as it moves away from the center. (see Figure 50). As a result, light that is reflected outward over the entire thickness of the square lens portion 532b in the front-rear direction by the central diffuse reflection portion 532c is sequentially forwardly reflected by the front reflection portion 532f as it goes outward from the center side. can be reflected.

The light reflected forward by the front reflecting portion 532f passes through the front diffusion lens portion 532d and is emitted forward from the rectangular lens portion 532b. At this time, since the front diffusion lens portion 532d has a wavy cross section, the light reflected forward by the front reflection portion 532f can be diffused in various directions. light can be emitted substantially uniformly forward (the rear surface of the left unit decorative lens member) from the front surface of the .

In the front diffusion lens portion 532d and the front reflection portion 532f, the square lens portion 532b is formed by dividing a plurality of concentric grooves by a plurality of radially extending lines, and then forming a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves with the dividing lines as boundaries. are shifted in the radial direction, and the concentric arc-shaped grooves are arranged alternately in the circumferential direction, so that the light emitted forward from the front surface of the rectangular lens portion 532b has a concentric striped pattern of light and shade. It is possible to prevent the light from becoming light, and it is possible to irradiate the light forward with more uniform light and shade. As a result, the multifaceted decorative portion in front of the rectangular lens portion 532b in the left unit decorative lens member can be decorated with substantially uniform light emission.

A left unit decorative lens member (not shown) is formed along the front surface of the left unit decorative cover 536 . The left unit decorative lens member includes a circular decorative portion formed in a portion positioned in front of the circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffusion lens member 532 and a portion positioned in front of the square lens portion 532b of the left unit diffusion lens member 532. and a multifaceted decorative part formed on the part. The circular decorative portion is formed in a shape in which a plurality of triangular ribs are provided in the circumferential direction on the outer circumference of a columnar portion whose front surface is recessed and which extends short in the front-rear direction. The polyhedral decorative part has a plurality of square pyramid-shaped parts arranged in a vertical direction on the front surface of a rectangular parallelepiped extending vertically, and a polyhedron consisting of a plurality of triangles arranged in a vertical direction on both sides of the rectangular parallelepiped part. It is shaped like this. The circular decorative portion and the multifaceted decorative portion are formed in the same shape as the circular decorative portion 561a and the multifaceted decorative portion 561b of the right unit decorative lens member 561 of the door frame right side unit 550, respectively.

The left unit decorative lens member can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the transparent left unit decorative cover 536 . In addition, the left unit decorative lens member is configured such that the circular decorative portion is projected forward from the rectangular lens portion 532b of the left unit diffuser lens member 532 by the light emitted forward from the circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffuser lens member 532, and the multifaceted decorative portion is projected forward from the square lens portion 532b of the left unit diffuser lens member 532. By the light irradiated to each of them, they are decorated with light emission.

The left unit upper decorative base 534 has a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and is formed in the shape of a rectangular tube extending back and forth. The left unit upper decorative base 534 has a portion forming a lower surface on the outer periphery thereof, which is inclined so as to protrude downward from the front end side to the rear end side, and the lower portion of the portion penetrates in the front-rear direction. The left unit upper decoration base 534 is made of an opaque member.

The left unit lower decorative base 535 is formed in a U shape that opens upward when viewed from the front. The left unit lower decorative base 535 is inclined from the approximate center in the vertical direction at the front end to the rear end so that the upper side moves rearward as it goes upward. The left unit lower decoration base 535 is formed of an opaque member.

The left unit decorative cover 536 extends vertically over the entire height of the door frame left side unit 530 . The left unit decorative cover 536 has a vertically intermediate portion that is bent rearward. A V-shaped part whose upper part is bent backward along the front end of the unit lower decorative base 535 connects the lower end of the upper V-shaped part and the upper end of the lower V-shaped part. It is composed of a linear part and a.

The left unit decorative cover 536 is attached at both upper and lower ends to the front surface of the left unit upper decorative base 534 and the front surface of the left unit lower decorative base 535, respectively. The left unit decorative cover 536 is made of a transparent member, and the left unit decorative lens member arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized from the front side.

The decorative members 537 extend short in the vertical direction and are attached to the front surface of the left unit decorative cover 536 at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. The decorative member 537 is made of an opaque member.

[3-6. Door frame right side unit]
The door frame right side unit 550 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 51 to 55 and the like. Fig. 51(a) is a front view of the door frame right side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as seen from the front, and (c) is a rear view of the door frame right side unit. 1 is a perspective view seen from . 52 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit viewed from the rear. FIG. 54 is a cross-sectional view taken along line MM in FIG. 51(a). FIG. 55(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line NN in FIG. 51(a), and FIG. 55(b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line OO in FIG. 51(a). The door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the right side of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 320 .

The door frame right side unit 550 includes a vertically extending box-shaped right unit base 551 attached to the right side of the through hole 111 in the front view of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100, and the front surface of the right unit base 551. and a door frame right side decorative board 552 attached to the front side of the door frame right side decorative board 552, which is mounted on the front side of the right unit base 551 on the left side of the front view center and extends in the vertical direction and the front and back direction. A transparent plate-like right unit left diffusion lens member 553, a sheet-like right unit left decoration member 554 attached to the left side surface of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and decorated, and a right unit left decoration member. and a transparent plate-like right unit left cover 555 attached to the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 so as to cover the left side of 554 .

In addition, the door frame right side unit 550 is located on the front side of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 and on the right side of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 in front view, and on the front side of the right unit base 551 on the right side of the center in front view and the right unit left diffusion lens. A transparent plate-shaped right unit right diffusion lens member 556 that is attached to the member 553 and extends in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction, and is attached to the right side surface of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 and is decorated. and a right unit right cover 558 in the form of a transparent plate attached to the right unit right diffuser lens member 556 so as to cover the right side of the right unit right decorative member 557. there is

Further, the door frame right side unit 550 is disposed between the right unit left diffuser lens member 553 and the right unit right diffuser lens member 556, and is open on the front and right sides. A box-shaped opaque right unit left light shielding member 559 and an opaque right light shielding member 559 attached to the left side of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 so as to close the open right side of the right unit left light shielding member 559 and a right unit right light shielding member 560 having a flat plate shape.

The door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the front ends of the right unit left diffuser lens member 553 and the right unit right diffuser lens member 556, and has a translucent right diffuser having a polyhedral decoration on the front end. It is mounted on the front surface of the right unit base 551 so as to cover the unit decorative lens member 561 , the left and right sides of the right unit decorative lens member 561 , the front end sides of the right unit left diffuser lens member 553 and the right unit right diffuser lens member 556 . A frame-shaped right unit decoration base 562 penetrating in the front and rear direction, a transparent right unit cover 563 attached to the front side of the right unit decoration base 562 so as to close the front end opening of the right unit decoration base 562, and a right unit cover. and a plurality of decorative members 564 attached to the front side of 563 . Although illustration is omitted, the door frame right side unit 550 is attached so as to vertically penetrate the right unit base 551, and is connected to the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100 and the door frame of the door frame top unit 570. A connection cable for connecting with the top unit relay board 589 is provided.

The right unit base 551 of the door frame right side unit 550 has a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. It is The right unit base 551 is made of an opaque member.

In addition, the right unit base 551 has a right reflecting vertical wall portion 568 (see FIGS. 6 and 24) erected toward the front from the glass plate 192 disposed so as to close the through hole 111. ing. In the right reflecting vertical wall portion 568, the inner surface which has a flat planar shape and is provided so as to face the through hole 111 is provided as a reflecting surface capable of reflecting light. As with the inner surface of the left reflective vertical wall portion 538, the inner surface of the right reflective vertical wall portion 568 itself is made of a reflective material such as metal or resin. It is also possible to provide such as by attaching a seal for use. As will be described later, the right reflecting vertical wall portion 568 is formed by the right unit base 551 and serves as a portion (right portion) of the reflecting vertical wall portion 33 described above.

The door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is formed in a strip shape extending vertically. The door frame right side decorative board 552 includes a plurality of left LEDs 552a mounted on the left side of the center in the left-right direction on the front surface, a right LED 552b mounted on the right side of the center in the left-right direction on the front surface, and a left LED 552b mounted on the center of the front surface in the left-right direction. and a plurality of medium LEDs 552c. The left LED 552 a of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 is for lighting up the right unit left decoration member 554 via the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 . Also, the right LED 552b is for lighting up and decorating the right unit right decoration member 557 via the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 . The middle LED 552c is for decorating the right unit decorative lens member 561 with light.

The door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is formed white on both front and rear surfaces. The door frame right side decorative board 552 is vertically divided into an upper door frame right side upper decorative board 552A and a lower door frame right side lower decorative board 552B. Although illustration is omitted, the door frame right side lower decorative board 552B is connected to the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100, and the door frame right side upper decorative board 552A is connected to the door frame right side lower decorative board 552B. It is connected to the.

The right unit left diffusing lens member 553 includes a flat plate-shaped main body portion 553a extending in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction, a rear wall portion 553b projecting from the rear side of the main body portion 553a to the right in front view in a short flat shape, A plurality of notch portions 553c are cut out in a rectangular shape leftward from the right end of the rear wall portion 553b when viewed from the front, and a plurality of notch portions 553c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. 554, input lens portions 553e protruding rearward from the rear end surface of the main body portion 553a and provided in a plurality in the vertical direction, and on the right side of the main body portion 553a when viewed from the front. A plurality of side reflection portions 553f are arranged in the vertical direction so that the input lens portion 553e is positioned at the center in the vertical direction.

The body portion 553a of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 has a vertically extending quadrangular shape in side view. It is formed in a shape that is slanted to move to the Further, as shown in FIG. 55, the main body portion 553a is aligned with the vertical line of the front surface of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 so as to move to the right in front view as it goes forward from the rear end side. Slightly slanted. The front end of the body portion 553 a projects forward to a greater extent than the front end of the door frame left side unit 530 when assembled to the door frame 3 .

The right end of the rear wall portion 553 b extends to substantially the center of the right unit base 551 in the left-right direction when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550 . The left end of the rear wall portion 556b of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 contacts the right end of the rear wall portion 553b.

A plurality of cutouts 553c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and some of them correspond to the LEDs 552c in the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 . When the door-frame right-side unit 550 is assembled, the inner LEDs 552c of the door-frame right-side decorative substrate 552 face forward from the plurality of cutouts 553c, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 emits light by the plurality of inner LEDs 552c. can be decorated.

The housing recess 553 d has a flat bottom surface, and the shape of the outer circumference substantially matches the outer shape of the left decorative member 554 of the right unit. Thereby, the right unit left decorative member 554 can be accommodated.

The plurality of input lens portions 553e protrude rearward at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction from the rear end surface of the main body portion 553a. Specifically, when the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 is vertically divided into 6 equal parts, it is formed at substantially the center in the vertical direction. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the input lens portion 553e has a rectangular parallelepiped portion in which a vertically extending square protrudes rearward, and a concave portion forward from the rear surface of the rectangular parallelepiped portion so as to be curved in a spherical shape. It has a part and a. These input lens portions 553e are positioned immediately before the left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 in the assembled state of the door frame right side unit 550 respectively. Thereby, the light from the left LED 552a can be input so as to be widely diffused within the main body portion 553a.

A plurality (six) of the side reflecting portions 553f are provided in the vertical direction. Each side reflection portion 553f is formed of a plurality of concentric arcuate grooves divided in the circumferential direction by lines extending radially from the input lens portion 553e. In each of the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves, the surface on the side closer to the input lens portion 553e is inclined with respect to the surface of the main body portion 553a, and the surface on the side farther from the input lens portion 553e is the main body portion. It extends perpendicularly to the surface of 553a, and the deepest part is formed in an arc shape. The side reflecting portion 553f has a cross-sectional shape, when cut in the radial direction centered on the input lens portion 553e, formed in a sharp triangular shape in which the peaks between the grooves face toward the center. , the whole is formed in a saw-like shape. In addition, the side reflecting portions 553f are formed so that groove portions and ridge portions are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction with radial lines separating the plurality of concentric arcuate grooves in the circumferential direction. ing.

In this right unit left diffusion lens member 553, the light emitted forward from the left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is directed into the body portion 553a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 from the rear surface of the input lens portion 553e. is incident. Since the rear end of the input lens portion 553e is recessed in a curved shape toward the front, the light from the left LED 552a is refracted by the curved surface so that the light from the left LED 552a spreads. will be radially diffused toward the front from the center.

The body portion 553a is slightly inclined with respect to a line extending vertically from the front surface of the door-frame right-side decorative substrate 552 so as to move to the right in front view as the whole goes forward. Light emitted from the left LED 552a mounted on the front surface of the right side decoration board 552 and incident on the main body 553a through the input lens 553e hits the flat left surface of the main body 553a. However, the direct light from the left LED 552a is not radiated to the outside from the left surface of the body portion 553a due to the incident angle with respect to the left surface of the body portion 553a, and is reflected toward the side reflecting portion 553f on the inner surface of the left surface. becomes.

The light incident forward into the body portion 553a from the input lens portion 553e hits the sawtooth side reflecting portion 553f, is reflected leftward in front view, and travels outward from the left surface of the body portion 553a. It will be irradiated. Light is also emitted outward (to the right in front view) from the right surface (side surface reflecting portion 553f) of the main body portion 553a. Since it is a member, the left surface of the right unit left light shielding member 559 is brightly illuminated, and the indirect light reflected by the right unit left light shielding member 559 passes through the main body portion 553a and is irradiated to the left side. . Therefore, from the left surface of the main body portion 553a, the light reflected leftward by the side reflecting portion 553f in the main portion 553a and the light emitted rightward from the side reflecting portion 553f are emitted from the left surface of the right unit left light shielding member 559 to the left. Since the light reflected to the right and passed through the body portion 553a is irradiated to the left, the right unit left decorative member 554 attached to the left side of the body portion 553a can be decorated with good brightness. can.

In the side reflection portion 553f, a plurality of concentric circular grooves are divided by a plurality of lines extending radially, and the plurality of concentric circular grooves are shifted in the radial direction with respect to the dividing lines to form concentric circular grooves. are arranged alternately in the circumferential direction, the light emitted outward (leftward) from the left surface of the main body 553a is prevented from becoming light with concentric striped pattern shading. This makes it possible to irradiate leftward light with more uniform intensity. As a result, the right unit left decorative member 554 housed in the housing recess 553d on the left surface of the main body 553a can be decorated with substantially uniform light emission.

Since the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 is made of a transparent member, the side reflection lens member 553 formed on the opposite side from the front view left side of the main body portion 553a (the side where the accommodating recessed portion 553d is formed) A pattern consisting of a plurality of concentric arcuate grooves and radially extending lines in the portion 553f can be visually recognized. Therefore, when a transparent portion is formed in the right unit left decorative member 554, the pattern of the side reflection portion 553f of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 can be visually recognized through the transparent portion. portion can be decorated with the side reflecting portion 553f.

The right unit left decorative member 554 is formed in a thin sheet shape, and decorations such as the logo of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 and the logo in line with the concept of the performance presented to the player on the game board 5 are translucent. It is designed to have The right unit left cover 555 protects the outer surface of the right unit left decorative member 554 in a state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550 .

The right unit right diffusing lens member 556 is formed substantially bilaterally symmetrical with the right unit left diffusing lens member 553, and has the same configuration. More specifically, the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 includes a flat plate-shaped main body portion 556a extending in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction, and a rear wall projecting short to the left in front view from the rear side of the main body portion 556a. 556b, a plurality of notch portions 556c that are cut out in a rectangular shape from the left end of the rear wall portion 556b to the right when viewed from the front and are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction; A front view of a housing recess 556d that is shallowly recessed to accommodate the unit right decorative member 557, a plurality of input lens portions 556e that protrude rearward from the rear end surface of the main body portion 556a and are provided in the vertical direction, and the main body portion 556a. A plurality of side reflection portions 556f are arranged in the vertical direction so that each input lens portion 556e is centered in the vertical direction on the left side.

The main body portion 556a of the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 has a vertically extending rectangular front end with an upper corner notched obliquely in a C-chamfered shape, and a lower side extending upward toward the front. It is formed in a shape that is inclined so as to move to the right direction, and has substantially the same outer shape as the main body portion 553 a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 . Further, as shown in FIG. 55, the main body portion 556a is aligned with the vertical line of the front surface of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 so as to move leftward in the front view as it goes forward from the rear end side. Slightly slanted. The front end of the main body portion 556 a projects forward farther than the front end of the door frame left side unit 530 when assembled to the door frame 3 .

The left end of the rear wall portion 556b extends to substantially the center of the right unit base 551 in the left-right direction when assembled with the door frame right side unit 550 . The right end of the rear wall portion 553b of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 abuts against the left end of the rear wall portion 556b.

A plurality of cutouts 556c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and some of the cutouts 556c correspond to the LEDs 552c in the door frame right side decorative substrate 552. As shown in FIG. The plurality of cutouts 556c are formed at positions corresponding to the plurality of cutouts 553c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 . Therefore, in the state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, a square opening penetrating back and forth between the notch portion 553c of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the notch portion 556c of the right unit right diffusing lens member 556. is formed, and the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 faces forward from the opening, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 can be favorably decorated with light emission by the plurality of middle LEDs 552c.

The housing recess 556 d has a flat bottom surface, and the shape of the outer circumference substantially matches the outer shape of the right decorative member 557 of the right unit. Thereby, the right decorative member 557 of the right unit can be accommodated.

The plurality of input lens portions 556e protrude rearward at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction from the rear end surface of the main body portion 556a. Specifically, when the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 is vertically divided into six equal parts, it is formed at the approximate center in the vertical direction. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the input lens portion 556e has a rectangular parallelepiped portion in which a vertically extending square protrudes rearward, and a recessed forward from the rear surface of the rectangular parallelepiped portion so as to be curved in a spherical shape. It has a part and a. These input lens portions 556e are positioned in front of the right LEDs 552b of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 in the assembled state of the door frame right side unit 550 respectively. Thereby, the light from the right LED 552b can be input so as to be widely diffused within the main body portion 556a.

A plurality (six) of the side reflecting portions 556f are provided in the vertical direction. Each side reflection portion 556f is formed of a plurality of concentric arcuate grooves circumferentially divided by lines extending radially from the input lens portion 556e. In each of the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves, the surface on the side closer to the input lens portion 556e is inclined with respect to the surface of the main body portion 556a, and the surface on the side farther from the input lens portion 556e is the main body portion. It extends perpendicularly to the surface of 556a, and the deepest part is formed in an arc shape. The side reflecting portion 556f has a cross-sectional shape, when cut in the radial direction centered on the input lens portion 556e, formed in a sharp triangular shape in which the peaks between the grooves face toward the center. , the whole is formed in a saw-like shape. In addition, the side reflecting portions 556f are formed so that the groove portions and the ridge portions are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction with respect to the radial line that divides the plurality of concentric arcuate grooves in the circumferential direction. ing.

In this right unit right diffusion lens member 556, the light emitted forward from the right LED 552b of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is directed into the body portion 556a of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 from the rear surface of the input lens portion 556e. is incident. Since the rear end of the input lens portion 556e is recessed in a curved shape toward the front, the light from the right LED 552b is refracted by the curved surface so that the light from the right LED 552b spreads. will be radially diffused toward the front from the center.

The main body portion 556a is slightly inclined with respect to a line extending vertically from the front surface of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 so that the main body portion 556a moves leftward in a front view as the whole goes forward. Light emitted from the right LED 552b mounted on the front surface of the right side decoration board 552 and incident on the main body 556a through the input lens 556e strikes the flat right surface of the main body 556a. However, the direct light from the right LED 552b is not radiated to the outside from the left surface of the body portion 556a due to the incident angle with respect to the right surface of the body portion 556a, and is reflected toward the side reflecting portion 556f on the inner surface of the right surface. becomes.

The light incident forward into the body portion 556a from the input lens portion 556e hits the sawtooth side reflecting portion 556f, is reflected rightward in front view, and travels outward from the right surface of the body portion 556a. It will be irradiated. Light is also emitted outward (to the left in front view) from the right surface (side surface reflecting portion 556f) of the main body portion 556a. Since it is a member, the right surface of the right unit right light shielding member 560 is brightly illuminated, and the indirect light reflected by the right unit right light shielding member 560 passes through the main body portion 556a and is irradiated to the right side. . Therefore, from the right surface of the main body portion 556a, the light reflected rightward by the side reflecting portion 556f in the main portion 556a and the light emitted leftward from the side reflecting portion 556f are emitted to the right side of the right unit right light shielding member 560. Since the light reflected to the right direction and passed through the body portion 556a is irradiated to the right side, the right decorative member 557 of the right unit attached to the right side of the body portion 556a can be decorated with good brightness. can.

In the side reflection portion 556f, the plurality of concentric grooves are divided by a plurality of radially extending lines, and the plurality of concentric arc grooves are shifted in the radial direction with the dividing lines as boundaries to form the concentric arc grooves. are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction, the light irradiated outward (rightward) from the right surface of the main body portion 556a is prevented from becoming light with concentric striped pattern shading. It is possible to irradiate rightward light with more uniform density. As a result, the right unit right decorative member 557 accommodated in the accommodation recess 556d on the right surface of the main body portion 556a can be decorated with substantially uniform light emission.

In addition, since the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is formed of a transparent member, it is formed on the opposite side from the right side of the main body portion 556a in front view (the side on which the housing recess 556d is formed). A pattern consisting of a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves and radially extending lines in the portion 556f can be visually recognized. Therefore, when a transparent portion is formed in the right unit right decorative member 557, the pattern of the side reflection portion 556f of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 can be visually recognized through the transparent portion. portion can be decorated with the side reflecting portion 556f.

The right decorative member 557 of the right unit is formed in a thin sheet shape, and decorations such as the logo of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 and the logo in line with the concept of presentation presented to the player on the game board 5 are translucent. It is designed to have The right unit right cover 558 protects the outer surface of the right unit right decorative member 557 in a state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550 . The right unit right decorative member 557 and the right unit right cover 558 are formed substantially bilaterally symmetrical with the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit left cover 555 . Further, the decoration applied to the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit right decorative member 557 may be the same decoration or different decorations.

The right unit left light shielding member 559 is formed to have substantially the same shape as the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 when viewed from the side. The right unit left light shielding member 559 is formed in a shallow box shape that is open on the front and right sides. The right unit left light shielding member 559 includes a flat plate-shaped main body portion 559a extending in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction, a rear wall portion 559b projecting from the rear side of the main body portion 559a to the right in front view in a short flat shape, and a rear wall portion 559b. A plurality of notch portions 559c are cut leftward from the right end of the wall portion 559b in a front view and have a plurality of cutout portions 559c formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. A plurality of flat reinforcement portions 559d extending from the wall portion 559b to the front end of the main body portion 559a are provided.

The main body portion 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559 has a vertically extending rectangular shape in which the upper corners on the front end side are notched obliquely in a C-chamfered shape, and the lower side extends upward as it goes forward. It is formed in a shape inclined so as to move, and has substantially the same outer shape as the body portions 553 a and 556 a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 .

The left end of the rear wall portion 559b extends to the right from the approximate center of the right unit base 551 in the left-right direction when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550 . The left surface of the right unit right light shielding member 560 contacts the right end of the rear wall portion 559b.

A plurality of cutouts 559c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and some of the cutouts 559c correspond to the LEDs 552c in the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 . The plurality of notches 559c are formed at positions corresponding to the plurality of notches 553c and 556c of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusing lens member 556, respectively. Therefore, when the door frame right side unit 550 is assembled, the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 faces forward from the plurality of cutouts 559c, and the plurality of middle LEDs 552c emit light from the right unit decorative lens member 561. can be decorated.

The plurality of reinforcing portions 559d are provided in three sets spaced apart by a predetermined distance in the vertical direction, one pair of reinforcing portions 559d having a height substantially equal to the left and right widths and spaced apart in the vertical direction. Each set of reinforcing portions 559 d is formed at a position behind a decorative member 564 attached to the right unit cover 563 . The strength and rigidity of the entire door frame right side unit 550 are enhanced by the plurality of reinforcing portions 559d.

The right light shielding member 560 of the right unit has a shape in a side view such that the upper corner on the front end side of a vertically extending quadrangle is notched obliquely in a C chamfer shape, and the lower side moves upward as it goes forward. It is formed in an inclined shape, and is formed in substantially the same shape as the main body portion 559 a of the right unit left light shielding member 559 . The right unit right light shielding member 560 closes the right opening opened to the right of the right unit left light shielding member 559 formed in a shallow box shape in the state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550 .

The right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are each formed of a white member. The right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are assembled to the door frame right side unit 550 as shown in FIG. It is arranged so as to be close to the body portions 553 a and 556 a of the left diffuser lens member 553 and the right unit right diffuser lens member 556 . As a result, the main body portion 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are separated from each other in the horizontal direction, forming a space extending in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction with a predetermined width in the horizontal direction. . Through the space formed between the body portion 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560, light emitted forward from the LED 552c in the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is emitted from the right unit decoration. The rear side of the lens member 561 is irradiated.

In addition, the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are formed of an opaque member, and the left LED 552a, the middle LED 552c, and the right LED 552b of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 illuminate forward, respectively. The light emitted is prevented from interfering with each other. Only the middle LED 552c can be used for luminous decoration.

Further, the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are arranged behind each of the divided spaces because the internal space is vertically divided into four by the three sets of reinforcing parts 559d. It is possible to prevent light from interfering between the spaces by the LED 552c in the door frame right side decorative substrate 552, which is located in front of each space of the right unit decorative lens member 561. , can be decorated independently. In other words, the front end side of the door frame right side unit 550 can be vertically divided into a plurality of (four) areas, and each area can be illuminated independently.

The right unit decorative lens member 561 is formed in a shape along the front end shape of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 . The right unit decorative lens member 561 includes a circular decorative portion 561a formed in a circular shape in a front view, and a polyhedral decorative portion 561b extending vertically and formed with a plurality of polyhedrons. The circular decorative portion 561a is formed in a shape in which a plurality of triangular ribs are provided in the circumferential direction on the outer circumference of a columnar portion whose front surface is recessed and which extends short in the front-rear direction. The polyhedral decorative portion 561b has a plurality of rows of quadrangular pyramid-shaped parts arranged vertically on the front surface of a rectangular parallelepiped extending vertically, and a plurality of rows of polyhedrons made up of a plurality of triangles on the left and right sides of the rectangular parallelepiped part. It is formed into a shape as shown.

More specifically, the right unit decorative lens member 561 has a plurality of circular decorative portions 561a and multifaceted decorative portions 561b divided into four spaces by three sets of reinforcing portions 559d of the right unit left light shielding member 559. In the three regions located in the front, the circular decorative portion 561a arranged in the center in the vertical direction is provided with one multifaceted decorative portion 561b on each of the upper and lower sides. It is formed so that only the portion 561b is arranged.

The right unit decorative lens member 561 is attached to the front ends of the right unit left diffuser lens member 553 and the right unit right diffuser lens member 556 . The right unit decorative lens member 561 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the transparent right unit cover 563 . The right unit decorative lens member 561 is decorated with light emission by the LED 552c in the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 arranged in the rear.

The right unit decoration base 562 is formed in a tubular frame shape penetrating in the front-rear direction. The right unit decorative base 562 is formed in a shape that follows the shapes of the front and upper ends of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 . The right unit decoration base 562 is formed so as to be able to cover both the left and right outer sides near the front ends of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 and the left and right sides of the right unit decoration lens member 561 . The front end of the right unit decorative lens member 561 slightly protrudes forward from the front end of the right unit decorative base 562 when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550 . This right unit decorative base 562 is formed of an opaque member.

The right unit cover 563 is formed so as to be able to close the front end opening of the right unit decoration base 562 . The right unit cover 563 is made of a transparent member, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized from the front side.

The decorative members 564 extend short in the vertical direction and are attached to the front surface of the right unit cover 563 at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. The decorative member 564 is made of an opaque member. The three decorative members 564 vertically divide the right unit cover 563 (right unit decorative lens member 561) into four.

When the door frame right side unit 550 is assembled to the door frame 3, the door frame left side unit 530 protrudes forward in a large plate shape, and slightly forward than the front end of the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320. there is The door frame right side unit 550 includes a right unit left decorative member 554 and a right unit right decorative member 557 provided on both projecting left and right sides, and a right unit decorative lens member 561 provided at the front end. can be decorated with luminescence.

Since the door frame right side unit 550 is plate-shaped and protrudes greatly forward, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island facility of the game hall, the door frame right side unit 550 is adjacent to the pachinko machine on the right side. It is possible to exhibit a function and effect like a partition between. As a result, the players playing the pachinko machine 1 can be given the illusion that they are playing in a private room, and the players can play in a relaxed atmosphere without worrying about other players around them. can be done.

In addition, since the door frame right side unit 550 protrudes greatly forward, in a game hall where the pachinko machines 1 are arranged side by side, even if the door frame right side unit 550 is not located in front of the pachinko machine 1, the island facility can be installed. The pachinko machine 1 can be visually recognized even from the lateral direction along the line, and the pachinko machine 1 can be conspicuous in a game hall where many pachinko machines are arranged. Therefore, if the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit right decorative member 557 on both the left and right sides of the door frame right side unit 550 are decorated with light, even if the pachinko machine 1 is not positioned near the front of the pachinko machine 1, the book can be seen from a distance. The existence of the pachinko machine 1 can be notified, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made highly appealing to the players.

Furthermore, in the door frame right side unit 550, when a problem such as a ball jam or an error occurs in the pachinko machine 1, the right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens on both left and right sides By making the member 561 or the like luminous and decorated in a peculiar manner, the staff of the game hall can immediately be notified of the occurrence of the trouble and be made to recognize it, and can quickly deal with the trouble. Therefore, the interruption of the game by the player can be resolved early, and the player's frustration and loss of interest in the game can be suppressed.

[3-7. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 570 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 56 to 59 and the like. Figure 56 (a) is a front view of the door frame top unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit viewed from the front, and (c) is a view of the door frame top unit from the back. It is a perspective view. 57 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 58 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit viewed from the rear. FIG. 59 is a cross-sectional view taken along line PP in FIG. The door frame top unit 570 is mounted above the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 above the through hole 111 in the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 .

The door frame top unit 570 is mounted on the left and right sides of the center base 571 that is mounted in the center in the horizontal direction above the through hole 111 in the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 . A pair of side bases 572 attached to the front surface of the door frame base 110, a pair of upper speakers 573 attached to the front surfaces of the pair of side bases 572, and extending to the left and right, with the center in the left and right direction protruding forward. A pair of openings 574a passing through the pair of upper speakers 573 in front of the pair of upper speakers 573 in a box-like shape with an open rear, and a position closer to the center in the left-right direction than the pair of openings 574a to the vicinity of the center. It has a plurality of slits 574b (three on each side) extending vertically and penetrating them in the front-rear direction. A unit main body 271, and a speaker cover 575 made of punching metal, which is arranged on the front side of the pair of upper speakers 573 and attached to the rear side of the unit main body 271 so as to close the pair of openings 574a. ing.

Here, although illustration is omitted, the pair of side bases 572 (the left side base 572a and the right side base 572b) each have an internal space that is open only toward the side where the opening window is provided. In the internal space of the opening window, the outer peripheral light emitting portion 34 (left outer peripheral outer light emitting portion 34a, right outer outer peripheral light emitting portion 34b) provided so as to emit light from outside the outer periphery into the opening window, and from inside the outer periphery of the opening window outer peripheral light detectors 35 (left outer peripheral outer light detector 35a, right outer outer light detector 35b) for detecting the light outside the outer periphery.

That is, as will be described later, according to such a structure, the outer peripheral light emitting portion 34 and the outer peripheral outer light detecting portion 35 are arranged outside the outer periphery of the opening window. Almost the entire area of the window can be made to function as a portion (operation receiving portion) for receiving operations by the player. In addition, the outer peripheral external light detection section 35 is not arranged in an exposed state, but is arranged in the internal space 3435 (see FIG. 119) of the side base 572 that is opened only toward the side where the opening window is provided. As a result, when light is detected by the outer peripheral external light detection unit 35, it is possible to preferably eliminate effect light that may cause disturbance.

Further, the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 at the center in the left-right direction, and is attached to the top inner decorative member 576 having translucency, and to the rear side of the top inner decorative member 576. A door frame top middle decorative substrate 577 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the cage, and a plurality of slits 574b attached to the front surface of the unit body 271, respectively, and left and right ends of the top middle decorative member 576. A plurality of transparent plate-shaped light guide members 578 (three on each side) extending from the vicinity to the vicinity of the left and right ends of the unit main body 271 across the opening 574a, and a top inner decoration member 576 on the front surface of the unit main body 271. A top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 attached to the left and right sides and respectively covering the front surfaces of a plurality (three) of light guide members 578, and a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decoration. A top center left decorative member 581, which is attached to the front surface of the unit body 271 from the front side of each lens member 580 and extends from both left and right sides of the top center decorative member 576 to near the center side end of the opening 574a, and A top middle right decorative member 582 is provided.

Further, the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the inner side of the left and right side surfaces of the unit main body 271, respectively, and LEDs are mounted on portions facing the left and right outer ends of the plurality (three) of light guide members 578, respectively. A door frame top left decorative board 583 and a door frame top right decorative board 584 pass through, and a plurality of (three) slits 574b formed on both left and right sides of the center in the left and right direction on the rear side of the unit body 271. A pair of substrate bases 585 attached to the respective parts, and a door attached to the front surfaces of the pair of substrate bases 585 and having a plurality of LEDs 586a and 587a mounted behind the slit 574b of the unit main body 271. It is attached to the rear side of the unit main body 271 on the front side of the frame top center left decoration board 586 and the door frame top center right decoration board 587, and the door frame top center left decoration board 586 and the door frame top center right decoration board 587, respectively. A pair of light blocking members 588 are provided.

In addition, the door frame top unit 570 includes a door frame top unit relay board 589 attached to the front surface of the central base 571 within the unit main body 271, and a central base 571 so as to cover the front surface of the door frame top unit relay board 589. An attached relay board cover 590, an upper cover 591 attached to the unit main body 271 so as to close the upper opening 574c of the unit main body 271, and a unit cover 591 so as to close the lower opening 574d of the unit main body 271. and a lower cover 592 attached to the main body 271 .

A central base 571 of the door frame top unit 570 is formed in a rectangular shape extending left and right when viewed from the front. The center base 571 is formed in a box shape that is open rearward, and has a plurality of unevenness on the front surface. A pair of side bases 572 are attached to the left and right ends of the central base 571, respectively. A pair of upper speakers 573 are attached to the front surface of each side base 572, respectively. When the pair of upper speakers 573 are assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the respective front surfaces are obliquely attached so that the side near the center of the door frame top unit 570 in the left-right direction moves rearward. The pair of upper speakers 573 are full-range cone speakers capable of outputting sound over a wide frequency band.

The unit main body 271 is formed in such a shape that the lower portions near the left and right ends of a square extending in the left and right direction bulge downward when viewed from the front. In other words, the unit main body 271 is formed in such a shape that a square extending in the left and right direction is notched with a trapezoid narrowing upward from the lower end side when viewed from the front. The unit main body 271 has a rectangular shape extending to the left and right in a plan view, and a portion of about 1/2 of the total width (length in the horizontal direction) centered on the center in the horizontal direction on the front edge side of the rectangle. A trapezoid protruding forward and a quadrangle protruding short forward with the front end side of the trapezoid as a long side are combined to form a shape. Therefore, the unit main body 271 is arranged such that both sides of the portion protruding forward at the center in the left-right direction on the front surface are aligned with the lines connecting the left-right end portions of the unit main body 271 and the left-right direction end portions of the front ends of the portions protruding forward. It is located posteriorly (recessed).

The unit main body 271 has openings 574a penetrating in the front-rear direction at portions extending from the right and left ends of the front surface to positions outside the portions projecting forward. In addition, the unit body 271 has a plurality of slits that extend left and right at a predetermined height in the vertical direction and that penetrate in the front-rear direction at a portion that protrudes forward in a trapezoidal shape on the front surface and that extends obliquely. 574b is formed. The plurality of slits 574b extend laterally from the vicinity of the front end of the front surface of the unit main body 271, which extends obliquely forward, to the vicinity of the opening 574a. Also, the plurality of slits 574b are formed on both sides of the center of the unit main body 271 in the left-right direction so as to be separated vertically by three.

The unit main body 271 has an upper opening 574c formed by notching forward from the rear end toward the front in the center in the left-right direction on the upper surface, and a lower opening 574d formed by notching from the rear end toward the front in the left-right direction on the lower surface. , is equipped with An upper opening 574c of the unit main body 271 is closed by an upper cover 591. As shown in FIG. Also, the lower opening 574 d is closed by a lower cover 592 .

The unit main body 271 also has a top left decorative portion 574e and a top right decorative portion 574f extending vertically at both left and right ends. The front surface of the top left decorative portion 574e is formed at substantially the same position in the front-rear direction as the front surface of the portion where the opening 574a is formed. The top right decorative portion 574f is formed such that its front surface is located forward of the front surface of the portion where the opening 574a is formed. This unit main body 271 is formed of an opaque member.

The top middle decorative member 576 is attached to the front end of a portion that protrudes forward from the front surface of the unit main body 271 at the center in the left-right direction. The top middle decorative member 576 has a shape when viewed from the front that is a modified pentagon bent so that the center of the lower side of the substantially square in the horizontal direction is positioned downward, and extends laterally outward from the upper ends of the left and right sides of the modified pentagon. It is formed in a shape as if it were a combination of a substantially right-angled triangle connecting the tip of the edge and the lower ends of the left and right sides of the pentagon. The top middle decorative member 576 is inclined such that the modified pentagonal portion on the front surface moves backward as it goes downward. The top middle decorative member 576 is formed in a three-dimensional shape as a whole and has translucency.

The door frame top middle decorative board 577 is arranged behind the top middle decorative member 576 in a state in which the front surface is inclined so as to move backward as it goes downward so as to follow the front surface of the modified pentagonal portion of the top middle decorative member 576 . side mounted. A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the door frame top interior decoration substrate 577, and the interior top decoration member 576 can be decorated with light emission by causing the LEDs to emit light.

The light guide member 578 is made of a transparent member. The light guide member 578 is formed in a shape along the left and right outer sides of the front end of the front surface of the unit main body 271 protruding forward. The side near the left and right ends of the unit main body 271 is defined as the end side, and the side near the center is defined as the center side. 578a, and an arc portion 578b extending in an arc shape with a large radius so as to move forward from the central end side of the straight portion 578a toward the central side. The straight portion 578a of the light guide member 578 has a depth in the front-rear direction smaller than the height in the vertical direction, and the arc portion 578b has a depth in the front-rear direction larger than the height in the vertical direction. The straight portion 578a of the light guide member 578 has a constant vertical height, and the circular arc portion 578b has a vertical height that decreases toward the center. When the light guide member 578 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the straight portion 578a is positioned immediately before the opening 574a of the unit body 271, and the arc portion 578b closes the slit 574b of the unit body 271 from the front. there is

The light guide member 578 includes a diffuse reflection portion 578c formed on the rear surface of the straight portion 578a and formed of sawtooth unevenness, a diffusion input portion 578d formed on the rear surface side of the arc portion 578b and formed of a plurality of irregularities, It has

When the light guide member 578 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, both left and right outer ends of the light guide member 578 face the LEDs 583a and 584a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 or the door frame top right decorative substrate 584. At the same time, the diffusion input portion 578d faces the LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top center left decorative board 586 or the door frame top center right decorative board 587. FIG. When the light from the LEDs 583a and 584a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 or the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 is incident on the light guide member 578 from both left and right outer ends, the light is transmitted to the straight portion 578a. As the light advances toward the center, the light is sequentially reflected forward from the end side by the diffuse reflection portion 578c formed on the rear surface of the straight portion 578a, and the light is emitted forward from the entire front surface of the straight portion 578a. A top left decorative lens member 579 or a top right decorative lens member 580 is arranged in front of the light guide member 578, and the portion in front of the straight portion 578a of them is decorated with light emission.

Light from the LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top center left decorative substrate 586 or the door frame top center right decorative substrate 587 enters the light guide member 578 from a diffusion input portion 578d formed on the rear surface of the arc portion 578b. Then, the light is diffused widely into the arc portion 578b by the unevenness of the diffusion input portion 578d, and the light is emitted forward from the entire front surface of the arc portion 578b. As a result, the portion of the top left decorative lens member 579 or the top right decorative lens member 580 located in front of the arc portion 578b can be decorated with light.

In this way, the light guide member 578 is connected to the LEDs 583 a and 586 a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 , or the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 and the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 . By guiding the light from the LEDs 584a and 587a, the entire top left decorative lens member 579 or top right decorative lens member 580 arranged in front can be decorated with good (uniform) light.

The top left decorative lens member 579 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 so as to cover the front of the three light guide members 578 arranged on the left side of the center in the horizontal direction on the front surface of the unit main body 271 . The top left decorative lens member 579 has three decorative lens portions 579a that accommodate the three light guide members 578 independently from the front. A decorative lens portion 579 a of the top left decorative lens member 579 is formed in a shape following the light guide member 578 and covers the front surface and both upper and lower surfaces of the light guide member 578 . On the front surface of each decorative lens portion 579a, concavities and convexities of truncated square pyramids protruding forward are arranged in rows on the left and right sides.

The top left decorative lens member 579 extends from the left end of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570 to the right end of the top left decorative portion 574 e of the unit body 271 . That is, the top left decorative lens member 579 decorates substantially the entire left side of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570 . The top left decorative lens member 579 is illuminated by the LEDs 583 a and 586 a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and the door frame top center left decorative substrate 586 via three light guide members 578 .

The top right decorative lens member 580 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 so as to cover the front of the three light guide members 578 arranged on the right side of the center in the horizontal direction on the front surface of the unit main body 271 . The top right decorative lens member 580 has three decorative lens portions 580a that accommodate the three light guide members 578 independently from the front. A decorative lens portion 580 a of the top right decorative lens member 580 is formed in a shape following the light guide member 578 and covers the front surface and both upper and lower surfaces of the light guide member 578 . On the front surface of each decorative lens portion 580a, concavities and convexities of truncated square pyramids projecting forward are arranged in rows on the left and right sides.

The top right decorative lens member 580 extends from the right end of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570 to the left end of the top right decorative portion 574 f of the unit body 271 . That is, the top right decorative lens member 580 decorates substantially the entire right side of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570 . The top right decorative lens member 580 is illuminated by LEDs 584 a and 587 a of a door frame top right decorative substrate 584 and a door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 via three light guide members 578 .

The top middle left decorative member 581 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 from the front of the top left decorative lens member 579 between the left opening 574 a on the front surface of the unit main body 271 and the top middle decorative member 576 . The top center left decorative member 581 is attached so as to fill the space between the three decorative lens portions 579a of the top left decorative lens member 579 in the state assembled to the door frame top unit 570, and the center of the front surface is the top left. It protrudes forward from the front surface of the decorative lens member 579 . The top middle left decorative member 581 is formed of an opaque member.

The top middle right decorative member 582 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 from the front of the top right decorative lens member 580 between the right opening 574 a on the front surface of the unit main body 271 and the top middle decorative member 576 . The top center right decorative member 582 is attached so as to fill the space between the three decorative lens portions 580a of the top right decorative lens member 580 in the state assembled to the door frame top unit 570, and the center of the front surface is the top right. It protrudes forward from the front surface of the decorative lens member 580 . The top center right decorative member 582 is formed of an opaque member.

The door frame top left decorative board 583 is attached to the inside of the left side surface (top left decorative portion 574e) in the unit main body 271 with the surface on which the LED 583a is mounted directed rightward. The door frame top left decorative board 583 has an LED 583a mounted at a position facing the left end surface of three light guide members 578 attached to the front surface on the left side of the center of the unit body 271 in the left-right direction (see FIG. 59). ). The three LEDs 583a can be made to emit light independently. A portion of the top left decorative lens member 579 located in front of the opening 574a on the left side of the unit main body 271 is illuminated by the LED 583a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 via the straight portions 578a of the three light guide members 578. Can be decorated with luminescence.

The door frame top right decorative board 584 is attached to the inside of the right side surface (top right decorative portion 574f) in the unit main body 271 with the surface on which the LED 584a is mounted directed leftward. On the door frame top right decorative board 584, an LED 584a is mounted at a position facing the right end surfaces of three light guide members 578 attached to the front surface on the right side of the center of the unit body 271 in the left-right direction (see FIG. 59). ). The three LEDs 584a can be made to emit light independently. By means of the LED 584a of the door frame top right decorative substrate 584, the portion of the top right decorative lens member 580 located in front of the opening 574a on the right side of the unit main body 271 is illuminated via the straight portions 578a of the three light guide members 578. Can be decorated with luminescence.

The pair of board bases 585 are attached to the rear side of the portion in the unit main body 271 where the plurality of slits 574b are formed. The pair of substrate bases 585 are formed substantially symmetrical with each other. The substrate base 585 has side walls that are substantially square in side view and have sides that extend vertically and forward and backward, a rear wall that is square in front view and extends outward in the left and right direction at right angles from the rear sides of the side walls, and a front end of the upper side of the side wall. The line connecting the upper sides of the side walls to the middle is the oblique side, and the upper side of a substantially right-angled triangle connects the upper sides of the side wall and the back wall. and a right-angled triangular lower wall, and is formed in a triangular prism-like box shape with an open space between upper and lower oblique sides. The board base 585 is attached to the unit main body 271 so that the open portion is closed by the unit main body 271 . A door frame top middle left decoration substrate 586 or a door frame top middle right decoration substrate 587 is attached to the substrate base 585 so that the open portion is closed.

The door frame top center left decorative board 586 is attached to the board base 585 so as to close the box-shaped open portion from the front in the board base 585 attached to the left rear side of the left-right center of the unit main body 271 . be done. The door frame top center left decorative board 586 is attached to the front surface of the board base 585 so that the front surface moves forward toward the center of the unit main body 271 in the left-right direction. It becomes inclined. As a result, when the door frame top center left decorative substrate 586 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the front surface thereof is the surface of the portion where the three slits 574b are formed on the left side of the center of the unit main body 271 in the left-right direction. becomes a state approximately parallel to .

A plurality of LEDs 586a are mounted on the door frame top center left decorative board 586 at positions corresponding to the three slits 574b of the unit main body 271 . As a result, when the door frame top center left decorative board 586 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570 , a plurality of LEDs 586 a face forward from the three slits 574 b on the left side of the center of the unit body 271 . The door frame top center left decorative substrate 586 emits light from a plurality of LEDs 586a to light-embellish a portion of the top left decorative lens member 579 near the top center decorative member 576 via the arc portion 578b of the light guide member 578. be able to.

The door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is mounted on the board base 585 mounted on the rear side of the unit main body 271 on the right side of the left-right center so as to close the box-shaped open portion from the front. be done. The door frame top center right decorative board 587 is attached to the front surface of the board base 585 so that the front surface moves forward toward the center of the unit main body 271 in the left-right direction. It becomes inclined. As a result, when the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the front surface thereof is the surface of the portion where the three slits 574b are formed on the right side of the center of the unit main body 271 in the left-right direction. becomes a state approximately parallel to .

A plurality of LEDs 587 a are mounted on the door frame top center right decorative board 587 at positions corresponding to the three slits 574 b of the unit body 271 . As a result, when the door frame top center right decorative board 587 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, a plurality of LEDs 587a face forward from the three slits 574b on the right side of the center of the unit body 271. The door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 emits light from a plurality of LEDs 587a to light-embellish a portion of the top right decorative lens member 580 near the top middle decorative member 576 via the arc portion 578b of the light guide member 578. be able to.

A pair of light shielding members 588 are attached to the front rear side of the unit main body 271 at positions between the door frame top center left decorative substrate 586 and the door frame top right decorative substrate 587 and the unit main body 271 . The pair of light shielding members 588 are formed substantially bilaterally symmetrical with each other by an opaque member. The light shielding member 588 is provided between the upper and lower portions of the plurality of LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top center left decorative substrate 586 and the door frame top center right decorative substrate 587 which are arranged in rows corresponding to the three slits 574b in the unit main body 271. partitioning. With this light shielding member 588, light can be guided forward only by the LEDs 586a and 587a positioned immediately after each light guide member 578, and the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 579 can be guided forward. The decorative lens portions 579a and 580a of the lens member 580 can be satisfactorily light-emitting and decorated in an independent state.

The door frame top unit relay board 589 is attached to the front surface of the central base 571 . The door frame top unit relay board 589 includes a pair of upper speakers 573, a door frame top middle decorative board 577, a door frame top left decorative board 583, a door frame top right decorative board 584, a door frame top middle left decorative board 586, and a door. It relays the connection between the frame top center right decorative board 587 and the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100 . The door frame top unit relay board 589 is connected to the door main body relay board via a connection cable (not shown) provided in the door frame right side unit 550 . The front side of the door frame top unit relay board 589 is covered with a relay board cover 590 .

The door frame top unit 570 is provided with a top middle decorative member 576 projecting forward at the center in the left-right direction, and the front surfaces of both left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 are curved backward. Therefore, the player can be given the illusion that only the top middle decorative member 576 protrudes greatly forward, and the player's interest in the pachinko machine 1 can be strongly attracted.

In addition, the door frame top unit 570 attaches the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 that decorate the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 arranged in the center to the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 . It is formed so as to extend from both sides to a top left decorative portion 574e and a top right decorative portion 574f formed on both left and right ends of the unit main body 271. As shown in FIG. As a result, the front upper portion of the door frame 3 can be entirely decorated with the door frame top unit 570 .

At this time, in the door frame top unit 570, the front surface is protected by a speaker cover 575 made of punching metal behind each in the vicinity of both left and right ends where the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 are arranged. The speaker cover 575 faces forward from between the three vertically spaced decorative lens portions 579a and 580a of the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580. The sound output from the left and right upper speakers 573 can be listened to by the player in good condition, and the player can enjoy high-quality stereo sound.

Further, the door-frame top unit 570 has a top left decorative lens member 579 and a plurality of light guide members 578 provided on the rear side of the top right decorative lens member 580, so that the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and the door frame top right decorative substrate 583 are arranged. Light from substrate 584, door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586, and door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 can be directed to top left decorative lens member 579 and top right decorative lens member 580, and top left decorative lens member. 579 and the entire front surface of the top right decorative lens member 580 can be well decorated with light emission. Therefore, the door frame top unit 570 can light-embellish the entire upper front surface of the door frame 3 including the front side of the left and right upper speakers 573 .

[3-8. Effects of door frame]
Effects of the door frame 3 will be described. The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment has a through-hole 111 penetrating through the front and rear of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100, and is made larger in the vertical and horizontal directions than the conventional pachinko machine. , the vertical height of the plate unit 320 and the door frame top unit 570 is reduced in accordance with the enlargement of the through hole 111, and the horizontal width of the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 is reduced. is made smaller. As a result, the front surface of the game board 5 (game area 5a) attached to the main body frame 4 can be seen as widely as possible from the player (front) through the through hole 111 (glass unit 190). , corresponds to a game board 5 having a wide game area 5a.

The door frame 3 has an effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) having a large hemispherical operation button 410 at the center in the left-right direction of the plate unit 320 protruding forward below the through hole 111. , and the front surface of the lower half (the portion below the upper plate 321) on both the left and right sides of the production operation unit 400 (the front surface of the front lower decorative portion 326c) is hollowed backward (dish unit 320 and the front ends of the left and right ends of the production operation unit 400, the front surfaces on both the left and right sides of the production operation unit 400 are positioned rearward. ing. As a result, the performance operation unit 400 attached to the front surface of the plate unit 320 at the center in the left-right direction appears to protrude forward greatly, so that the performance operation unit 400 is made conspicuous and emphasized to the player. , and the effect operation unit 400 can be strongly focused.

The door frame 3 tilts the performance operation unit 400 arranged in front of the plate unit 320 below the through hole 111 so that the large semispherical transparent operation button 410 faces obliquely upward and forward. Therefore, when the player sits down in front of the pachinko machine 1, the operation buttons 410 face the player's head (face), and the player lowers his/her line of sight and presses the effect operation unit 400. When viewed, the operation button 410 can be seen almost in the front, and the large and round operation button 410 can be strongly recognized, and the expectation for the performance using the operation button 410 can be heightened. At the same time, the effect image displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460 arranged in the transparent operation button 410 can be visually recognized in a good condition, and the effect image can be sufficiently enjoyed.

Further, since the door frame 3 is provided with the operation button 410 which is large in diameter and protrudes forward in a round shape and has a diameter substantially equal to the total height of the plate unit 320, the operation button 410 can be operated by moving the hand over a short distance. Any part of the operation button 410 can be touched, and the "quick press" of the operation button 410 can be performed relatively easily. In addition, since the operation button 410, which has a large diameter and bulges forward in a round shape, is mounted in a tilted state, it can be pressed from above like the operation button of a conventional pachinko machine. It can be operated satisfactorily even from the front or from the front, and the operation button 410 with good operability can make the performance using the operation button 410 more enjoyable.

Further, the door frame 3 is attached with the effect operation unit 400 in a state of being suspended by the plate unit 320, and is provided with a vibration motor 424 for generating vibrations in the lower part of the effect operation unit 400. When vibration is generated by rotating the vibration motor 424 according to the state, a strong vibration can be transmitted to the player's hand touching the upper part of the operation button 410, and the player is startled by pressing the operation button. The production using 410 can be made even more enjoyable.

Further, the door frame 3 is provided with a large operation button 410 (effect operation unit 400) extending over the entire height of the plate unit 320 at the center of the front surface of the plate unit 320. Since the lower plate 322 underneath is less conspicuous, it is possible to make it easier for players who are familiar with the conventional pachinko machine to recognize that it is clearly different, and appeal strongly attracting the interest of the players. The pachinko machine 1 with high power can be obtained.

In addition, the door frame 3 is formed so that the lower plate 322 wraps around to the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 with respect to the lower plate opening 326d that opens on the left side of the effect operation unit 400 on the front surface of the plate unit 320. Therefore, the capacity of the lower tray 322 can be increased with respect to the size of the lower tray opening 326d, and the number of game balls stored in the lower tray 322 can be sufficiently secured. In addition, since the rear part of the lower plate 322 wraps around to the rear side of the effect operation unit 400, when the player puts his or her left hand into the lower plate 322 or puts his or her finger on the lower plate opening 326d, Since it is difficult for the fingertips to touch the wall behind the lower tray 322, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel a sense of incongruity, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest in the game and increasing the size of the lower tray opening 326d. The fact that the lower plate 322 has a larger volume than that can also be made tactilely recognizable.

Further, the door frame 3 has a lower tray ball supply port 323c through which game balls from the upper tray 321 are discharged to the lower tray 322, and a lower outlet for discharging game balls from the lower tray 322 to a dollar box or the like below the tray unit 320. The countersunk ball extraction hole 322a is arranged linearly in the front-rear direction, and is arranged on the right outside of the lower dish opening 326d (right side of the left end of the frame unit 415 of the effect operation unit 400) in front view. That is, the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a are connected to the effect operation unit 400, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a (right outer side of the lower plate opening 326d) in the plate unit cover 326, and the front end of the lower plate cover 340. Since the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a are not visible from the player side, the appearance of the tray unit 320 (pachinko machine 1) can be improved. The appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

Further, in the lower tray 322 of the door frame 3, the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a is arranged in front of (directly in front of) the lower tray ball supply port 323c. As a result, the game ball discharged from the upper tray 321 or the like to the lower tray 322 is immediately discharged from the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a to the dollar box or the like below as soon as it enters the lower tray 322. At this time, since the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a cannot be seen from the player side, the flow of the game balls discharged from the upper tray 321 and the like to the dollar box through the lower tray 322 also increases. can't see This allows the player to have the illusion that the game balls on the upper tray 321 or the game balls or the like paid out from the payout device 830 with the upper tray 321 being full are directly discharged to the dollar box. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel the annoyance of the game ball passing through the lower tray 322, and to make the player concentrate on the game (striking operation of the game ball, effect images, etc.) and suppress the decline in interest. can.

In the lower tray 322, the door frame 3 is provided with a lower tray ball extraction hole 322a at a position closer to the front left of the lower tray ball supply port 323c, and the lower tray 322 is erected on the right side of the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a. Since the raised wall part is obliquely curved to face the direction of the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a, the game ball supplied from the lower tray ball supply port 323c to the lower tray 322 is directly discharged. It can be guided to the hole 322a, or it can be reflected by the wall on the right side and indirectly guided to the ball hole 322a. As a result, while the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a remains open, the game ball supplied to the lower tray 322 from the lower tray ball supply port 323c is located in the area on the left side of the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a in the lower tray 322. (Lower tray first area A1), since it can be ejected downward from the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a, the game ball circulating in the lower tray 322 is not visible to the player. Game balls can be discharged downward (dollar box), and the same effect as described above can be achieved.

In addition, the door frame 3 has a lower plate opening 326d of a plate unit cover 326 where the lower plate 322 faces forward, between the performance operation unit mounting portion 326a (the performance operation unit 400) and the lower speaker port 326e. Therefore, even if the player puts his hand on the lower tray opening 326d or puts his hand into the lower tray 322, the front of the lower speaker port 326e is not blocked by the player's hand. The sound from the lower speaker 921 in the board unit 900 can be favorably output forward, and the sound of the pachinko machine 1 can be enjoyed. In addition, when the player puts his or her hand into the lower tray 322 or approaches it, the player can feel the vibration caused by the deep bass sound from the lower speaker 921 forwardly output from the lower speaker port 326e. It is possible to entertain the player and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, since the door frame 3 is provided with a plate-shaped right side unit 550 projecting greatly forward from the right side of the through-hole 111, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island facility of the game hall, the door Since the frame right side unit 550 can exert an effect like a partition between the pachinko machine adjacent to the right side, the player playing the pachinko machine 1 can play in a private room. It is possible to give the illusion that the player is there, and to play the game in a relaxed atmosphere without worrying about other players around.

Further, the door frame 3 can be decorated with light on the front end and the left and right sides of the door frame right side unit 550, which is plate-shaped and protrudes greatly forward. In the pachinko machine 1, even if it is not positioned in front of the pachinko machine 1, the existence of the pachinko machine 1 can be notified even from a distance such as from a lateral direction along the island facility, and the pachinko machine has a high appeal to the players. machine 1.

Further, the door frame 3 is provided with a top middle decorative member 576 protruding forward at the center in the left-right direction in the door frame top unit 570 above the through hole 111, and the front surfaces of both the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 are The top middle decorative member of the door frame top unit 570 is more concave than the straight line connecting the front ends of the left and right ends of the door frame top unit 570 and the front ends of the left and right ends of the top middle decorative member 576. 576 is formed in a concavely curved shape so that the front surfaces on both the left and right sides of 576 are positioned rearward. As a result, only the top middle decorative member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 appears to protrude greatly forward, so that the top middle decorative member 576 can be made conspicuous and emphasized to the player, and the top can be seen to be emphasized. Strong attention can be drawn to the middle decorative member 576 .

By the way, the upper part of the door frame in the conventional pachinko machine is equipped with a pair of upper speakers spaced apart from each other to the left and right, and the two upper speakers stand out. On the other hand, in the door frame 3 of the present embodiment, the door frame top unit 570 attached to the upper side of the through hole 111 has a pair of upper parts whose front surfaces are protected by speaker covers 575 made of punching metal on both left and right ends. A speaker 573 is provided, and a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 extending from both left and right sides of a central top middle decorative member 576 through the front of a speaker cover 575 to both left and right ends are provided. The entire front surfaces of the left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 can be decorated with light. As a result, the upper part of the front face of the door frame 3 can be decorated as a whole, so that the pair of upper speakers 573 are not conspicuous in the upper part of the door frame 3, and the decoration is clearly different from that of the conventional pachinko machine. The pachinko machine 1 can be made to be highly appealing to the player by allowing the player to recognize at a glance that it is there, and the pair of upper speakers 573 can entertain the player with high-quality stereo sound. can.

In this way, the door frame 3 of this embodiment has the effect operation unit 400 attached to the plate unit 320 and the top middle decorative member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 below and above the through hole 111. Since each of them protrudes greatly forward at the center in the left-right direction, it is possible to present to the player a decoration with a sense of unity in the top and bottom in which the imaginary line passing through the center in the left-right direction is conspicuous, and at the same time, the decoration gives a sophisticated feeling. The pachinko machine 1 can be made more conspicuous than other pachinko machines and has a high appeal.

In addition, since the door frame 3 has the top middle decorative member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 and the production operation unit 400 arranged vertically in the center in the left-right direction protrude forward, the top middle decorative member 576 When the effect operation unit 400 is decorated with light, the player can see a light emitting line extending vertically at the center of the front surface of the door frame 3 in the left-right direction, and the line of sight of the player is arranged at the center in the left-right direction. It can be guided to the operation button 410 of the production operation unit 400 or the like.

[5. Overall configuration of the game board]
Next, the overall configuration of the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 60 to 66 and the like. FIG. 60 is a front view of the game board. FIG. 61 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the front, and FIG. 62 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the back. 63 is a front view of the game board excluding the front unit and the back unit, FIG. 64 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of FIG. 63 and viewed from the front, and FIG. 65 is the game board of FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled and was seen from the back. FIG. 66 is an explanatory diagram showing the part of the function display unit enlarged from the front with the game board attached to the pachinko machine.

The game board 5 has a game area 5a into which game balls are struck by the player operating the handle 302 of the handle unit 300. As shown in FIG. The game board 5 includes a front structural member 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and a front structural member 1000 that is attached to the rear side of the front structural member 1000 to cover the rear end of the game area 5a. A plate-shaped game panel 1100 that partitions, a substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100, and a game ball attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200, and the game is played by hitting the game ball into the game area 5a. and a main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 for controlling the game contents to be played. A plurality of obstacle nails that come into contact with the game balls are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion within the game area 5a on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (not shown).

The game board 5 also includes a function display unit 1400 which displays the game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310 and is attached to the lower left corner of the front component 1000 so as to be visible to the player side, and a game panel. A peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of 1100, a game board side effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and the front surface of the game panel 1100. and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100. A game board side performance display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and a peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the game board side performance display device 1600. - 特許庁

The game panel 1100 has a transparent flat panel plate 1110 whose outer circumference is slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front structural member 1000, and holds the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110. and a frame-like panel holder 1120 attached to the rear side and to which the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface.

The table unit 2000 includes a plurality of general winning openings 2001 which are always open to accept the game ball hit into the game area 5a, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 at different positions in the game area 5a. A first starting port 2002 which is always open to accept a ball, a gate portion 2003 which is attached at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball, and the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003. A second start port 2004 that enables the acceptance of game balls according to the result of the ordinary lottery drawn by this, and the first special lottery that is drawn by accepting the game balls to the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. A big prize winning opening 2005 is provided in which game balls can be accepted either according to the result of the lottery or the result of the second special lottery.

In addition, the front unit 2000 is attached directly above the out port 1126 at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and has a first start port 2002 and a big winning port 2005. A start port unit 2100 and a start port unit A lower side unit 2200 that is attached along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of 2100 when viewed from the front and has a plurality of general winning openings 2001, and a side unit attached above the left end of the lower side unit 2200 when viewed from the front. It has an upper part 2300 and a frame-like center accessory 2500 having a gate part 2003 and a second starting port 2004 attached substantially in the center of the game area 5a.

The back unit 3000 is attached to the back surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a box-like shape with an open front and a back box 3010 having a square opening 3010a on the back wall. A lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the board-side effect display device 1600 is provided.

Further, the back unit 3000 includes a back left middle decoration unit 3050 attached to the front end of the back box 3010 from the center in the vertical direction on the left side in front view, and a back left center decoration unit 3050 attached below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. A back bottom rear movable effect unit 3100 attached near the rear wall of the box 3010, a back top left movable effect unit 3200 attached above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 and on the left side in the front view, and the back box. A back left movable effect unit 3300 attached to the left side of the opening 3010a in the front view in the back box 3010, and a back upper center attached above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 from the center in the left-right direction to the right end in the front view. A movable effect unit 3400 and a back bottom front movable effect unit 3500 attached in front of the back bottom rear movable effect unit 3100 below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 are provided.

[5-1. Front component]
Next, the front constituent member 1000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 64 and 65 and the like. The front structural member 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and an inner shape that penetrates in the front-rear direction in a substantially circular shape. The front component member 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 extending in an arc from a lower end on the left side of the center in the front view in the front view along the circumferential direction in a clockwise direction, passing through the upper end in the center in the left-right direction in the front view and extending obliquely to the upper right; The game is played on the inner rail 1002 which is arranged inside the front structural member 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the horizontal direction when viewed from the front to the oblique upper left when viewed from the front, and the right side of the lower end of the inner rail 1002 when viewed from the front. and an out-guiding portion 1003 formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and inclined so as to become lower toward the rear.

In addition, the front component 1000 includes a lower right rail 1004 that is linearly inclined from the right end of the out-guiding portion 1003 in front view to the vicinity of the right side of the front component 1000 so that the right end side is slightly higher, and the lower right rail 1004 . from the right end of the front structural member 1000 along the right side of the front structural member 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001, the upper portion of which is curved inwardly of the front structural member 1000, and the upper end of the right rail 1005 and the outer rail 1001 and the impact part 1006 with which the game ball rolling along the outer rail 1001 abuts.

The front structural member 1000 is rotatably supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1002 and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close the space between the front structural member 1000 and the front view clock. The backflow prevention member is rotatable only between the open position where it is rotated in the surrounding direction to open the gap with the outer rail 1001, and is biased by a spring (not shown) so as to return to the closed position side. 1007 is provided.

Further, the front structural member 1000 includes the outer side of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 near the lower ends thereof extending substantially vertically, the outer side of the out guiding portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and the outer side of the right rail 1005. Each part has a security recess 1008 recessed rearward from the front end. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the security concave portion 1008 projects backward from the security cover 200 on the door frame 3. inserted. As a result, the space between the security cover 200 and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is in a complicatedly bent state by the rear projecting piece 202 of the security cover 200 and the security concave portion 1008 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire attempts to enter the game area 5a through between the crime prevention cover 200 and the front component member 1000 from the lower front of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear projecting piece 202 and the crime prevention concave portion 1008. , it is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the game area 5a.

The front component 1000 also has a plurality of positioning projections 1009 projecting rearward from the rear end of the inner rail 1002 . By inserting these positioning protrusions 1009 into inner rail fixing holes 1116 formed in the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 , the inner rail 1002 can be positioned and fixed to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 .

Further, the front component 1000 includes a plurality of mounting bosses 1010 projecting rearwardly from the rear surface. The plurality of mounting bosses 1010 can be positioned between the panel holder 1120 (the game panel 1100) by being inserted into the mounting holes 1128 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100. FIG.

The front structural member 1000 also has a notch portion 1011 that is cut upward from the lower end at the lower left corner in front view. This notch 1011 is aligned with the notch 1127 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, these notches 1011 and 1127 are passed through the lower full ball path. Front end openings of a normal guideway 861 and a full tank guideway 862 of the unit 860 face forward.

[5-2. Game panel]
Next, the game panel 1100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 61 and 62, FIGS. 64 and 65, and the like. The game panel 1100 includes a flat panel plate 1110 whose outer circumference is slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front structural member 1000 and which is made of transparent synthetic resin, and the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110 is held. and a frame-like panel holder 1120 attached to the rear side of the front structural member 1000 and having the back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface thereof.

A panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, or methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The thickness of this panel plate 1110 is thinner than that of the panel holder 1120 (game panel 1150), and is the minimum necessary thickness that can be sufficiently held even if obstacle nails are planted in the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. (8 to 10 mm). In this example, the panel plate 1110 is made of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

The panel plate 1110 has an out recess 1111 recessed upward from the lower end at the lowest position in the game area 5a. In addition, a plurality of openings 1112 are formed through the panel plate 1110 in the front-rear direction for mounting the front unit 2000 thereon.

In addition, the panel plate 1110 has a plurality of fitting holes 1113 which are circular holes arranged near the outer circumference and penetrate in the front-rear direction, and long holes 1114 arranged near the outer circumference at the lower left portion and penetrate in the front-rear direction and extend in the vertical direction. , is equipped with These fitting holes 1113 and elongated holes 1114 are arranged outside the game area 5 a and are used for positioning with the panel holder 1120 . Further, the panel plate 1110 is provided with stepped engaging stepped portions 1115 recessed on the front side at both ends of the upper side and both ends of the lower side. These engaging stepped portions 1115 are cut out to approximately half the plate thickness of the panel plate 1110, and are arranged outside the game area 5a like the fitting holes 1113 and long holes 1114, It is for engaging and fixing the panel plate 1110 to the panel holder 1120 .

In addition, the panel plate 1110 is provided with a plurality of inner rail fixing holes 1116 at predetermined positions. By fitting and fixing a positioning projection 1009 projecting from the rear side of the inner rail 1002 into the inner rail fixing hole 1116, the inner rail 1002 can be fixed at a predetermined position.

The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 is large enough to include the panel plate 1110, has a substantially rectangular outer shape, and is thicker than the panel plate 1110 (about 20 mm in this example). The panel holder 1120 is made of synthetic resin (for example, thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1120 detachably holds the panel plate 1110 and has a holding stepped portion 1121 recessed from the front side toward the rear side, and a front-to-rear direction inside the holding stepped portion 1121 having a size substantially equal to that of the game area 5a. and a through hole 1122 penetrating through.

The depth from the front surface of the holding step portion 1121 of the panel holder 1120 is substantially the same as the thickness of the panel plate 1110 , and the front surface of the panel plate 1110 held in the holding step portion 1121 is the same as the panel holder 1120 . Almost flush with the front surface. Further, the holding stepped portion 1121 is formed in such a size that a predetermined amount of clearance is formed with respect to the outer peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110 on the front inner peripheral surface thereof. Due to this clearance, even if the panel plate 1110 expands and contracts relatively due to changes in temperature and changes over time, the expansion and contraction can be absorbed.

Further, the panel holder 1120 is arranged at a position corresponding to the fitting hole 1113 and the elongated hole 1114 formed in the panel plate 1110 held by the holding stepped portion 1121, and extends forward from the front surface of the holding stepped portion 1121. It extends and has a plurality of projecting pins 1123 that can be fitted into and inserted into the fitting holes 1113 and long holes 1114 of the panel plate 1110 . By fitting and inserting these protruding pins 1123 into the fitting holes 1113 and long holes 1114 of the panel plate 1110, the panel holder 1120 and the panel plate 1110 can be positioned relative to each other.

Further, the panel holder 1120 is provided with an engaging claw 1124 and an engaging piece 1125 that engage with the engaging stepped portion 1115 at positions corresponding to the engaging stepped portion 1115 of the panel plate 1110 . More specifically, the engaging claw 1124 is arranged above the holding stepped portion 1121 of the panel holder 1120, corresponds to the upper engaging stepped portion 1115 of the panel plate 1110, and extends forward from the front surface of the holding stepped portion 1121. It protrudes toward and elastically engages with the engaging stepped portion 1115 . The engaging claw 1124 is sized so that the tip does not protrude from the front surface of the panel holder 1120 .

The engaging piece 1125 of the panel holder 1120 is arranged below the holding stepped portion 1121 of the panel holder 1120 and corresponds to the lower engaging stepped portion 1115 of the panel plate 1110 . The engaging piece 1125 is arranged along the front surface of the panel holder 1120 on the upper side ( center side) by a predetermined amount. By engaging the engaging step portion 1115 of the panel plate 1110 with the engaging claws 1124 and the engaging pieces 1125 , the panel plate 1110 is detachably held with respect to the panel holder 1120 .

In addition, the panel holder 1120 has an out port 1126 penetrating back and forth at the lowest position in the game area 5a. In the panel holder 1120, the rear lower side of the out port 1126 is recessed forward to the lower end with the same width as the out port 1126. - 特許庁

Further, the panel holder 1120 has a notch portion 1127 that is cut upward from the lower end at the lower left corner in front view. This cutout portion 1127 is aligned with the cutout portion 1011 of the front component member 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, these cutout portions 1011 and 1127 are penetrated to form the lower full ball path unit 860. Front end openings of the normal guideway 861 and the full-tank guideway 862 face forward.

The panel holder 1120 also has a plurality of mounting holes 1128 penetrating in the front-rear direction at positions corresponding to the plurality of mounting bosses 1010 in the front structural member 1000 . By inserting the mounting bosses 1010 of the front structural member 1000 into the plurality of mounting holes 1128, the panel holder 1120 can be mounted on the rear side of the front structural member 1000, and the panel holder 1120 can be attached to the front structural member 1000. 1120 (gaming panel 1100) can be positioned.

In addition, the panel holder 1120 has a square insertion hole 1129 penetrating in the front-rear direction above the notch 1127 . The rear end of the function display unit 1400 is inserted through the insertion hole 1129 .

When the game panel 1100 is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000 , the out port 1126 of the panel holder 1120 is opened to the rear side of the out guide portion 1003 of the front component member 1000 . As a result, the game ball that has flowed down to the lower end of the game area 5a is guided to the rear out port 1126 by the out guide section 1003 and discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1126 .

[5-2a. Second embodiment of game panel]
Next, a game panel 1150 of an embodiment different from the game panel 1100 described above will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 67 and 68. FIG. FIG. 67 is an exploded perspective view of a game panel in a form different from that of FIG. 63, seen from the front together with the front structural member, substrate holder, and main control unit. FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 67 viewed from behind. The game panel 1150 is made of a wood board material such as veneer plywood having a predetermined thickness (for example, 18 mm to 21 mm). This game panel 1150 is formed to have the same thickness as the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 described above.

The game panel 1150 is formed to have substantially the same outer shape as the outer shape of the front component 1000 . The game panel 1150 is provided with an out port 1151 penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the out guide portion 1003 of the front structural member 1000 in the lower part of the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. In the game panel 1150, the rear lower side of the out port 1151 is recessed forward to the lower end with the same width as the out port 1151.例文帳に追加

In addition, the game panel 1150 has a cutout portion 1152 having the same shape as the cutout portion 1011 of the front structural member 1000 and a cutout portion 1152 which penetrates in the front-view left side of the lower end in the front-rear direction and which is open downward, and which is located above the cutout portion 1152 in the vertical direction. and a square insertion hole 1153 through which the rear end of the function display unit 1400 is inserted.

In addition, the game panel 1150 is provided with a plurality of inner rails penetrating in the front-rear direction so that the positioning projections 1009 can be fitted in positions corresponding to the plurality of positioning projections 1009 projecting rearward from the inner rails 1002 of the front component member 1000. A fixing hole 1154 is provided. In addition, the game panel 1150 has a plurality of mounting holes 1155 penetrating back and forth at positions corresponding to the plurality of mounting bosses 1010 in the front structural member 1000 . By inserting the mounting bosses 1010 of the front component 1000 into the plurality of mounting holes 1155, the game panel 1150 can be attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, and the game panel 1150 can be attached to the front component 1000. 1150 can be positioned.

Furthermore, although illustration is omitted, the game panel 1150 is provided with a plurality of openings penetrating back and forth for mounting the front unit 2000 in the same manner as the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 described above. ing.

The game panel 1150 is attached to the rear side of the front structural member 1000 , and the out port 1151 is opened to the rear side of the out guide portion 1003 of the front structural member 1000 . As a result, the game ball that has flowed down to the lower end of the game area 5a is guided to the rear out port 1151 by the out guide section 1003, and discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1150 through the out port 1151.

[5-3. Substrate holder]
Next, the substrate holder 1200 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 64 to 65 and the like. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in the shape of a horizontally long box that is open at the top and front, and the bottom surface is inclined downward toward the center in the left-right direction. This board holder 1200 can cover the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from below when assembled on the game board 5 . As a result, all of the game balls discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1126 and the game balls discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the rear unit 3000 can be received. It is possible to discharge downward from the discharging portion 1201 that is positioned.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
Next, the main control unit 1300 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 64 to 65 and the like. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 . The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 for controlling game content, game ball payout, etc., and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. .

The main control board box 1320 has a plurality of sealing mechanisms. When one sealing mechanism is used to close the main control board box 1320, the sealing mechanism is destroyed to open the main control board box 1320. The opening and closing of the main control board box 1320 can be traced. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to discover unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrence against tampering with the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

Each of the various board boxes 930, 950, 1320, 1520, and 3042 including the main control board box 1320 is provided as a transparent member so that visual confirmation from the outside is possible. there is That is, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in particular, the payout control board 951 in the payout control board box 950 and the main control board 1310 in the main control board box 1320 have surfaces inferior in fraud prevention performance. Since a mounting area is provided, it is important to ensure such transparency in order to obtain various effects related to fraud countermeasures, which will be described later.

[5-5. Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1400 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 64 to 66 and the like. The function display unit 1400 is attached to the lower left corner of the front component 1000 outside the play area 5a, as shown. The function display unit 1400 can be visually recognized from the front (player side) through the through hole 111 of the door frame 3 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 (see FIG. 66). This function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on control signals from the main control board 1310 to display the game state (game situation), the ordinary lottery result, the special lottery result, and the like.

As shown in FIG. 66, the function display unit 1400 includes a status indicator 1401 consisting of one LED for displaying the game status, and four LEDs for displaying the result of the ordinary lottery drawn by passing game balls through the gate section 2003. Ordinary pattern display 1402 consisting of, normal holding indicator 1408 consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of holdings related to the passage of the game ball to the gate part 2003, and the lottery by accepting the game ball to the first start port 2002 A first special design indicator 1403 consisting of eight LEDs displaying the first special lottery result, and a first special reservation consisting of two LEDs displaying the number of reservations related to the acceptance of game balls to the first start port 2002 A number indicator 1404, a second special symbol indicator 1405 consisting of eight LEDs displaying the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball to the second start port 2004, and a second start port 2004 A second special reservation number indicator 1406 consisting of two LEDs that displays the number of reservations related to the acceptance of game balls, and when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is "big hit" etc., the big winning opening 2005 A round indicator 1407 consisting of three LEDs for displaying the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening/closing pattern is mainly provided.

In this function display unit 1400, the number of reservations, patterns, etc., can be displayed by lighting, extinguishing, blinking, etc. of the provided LEDs as appropriate.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
Next, peripheral control unit 1500 will be described with reference to FIG. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the game board side effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 . The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 that controls the effects presented to the player based on control signals from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board box 1520 that houses the peripheral control board 1510. ing. Although illustration is omitted, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit for controlling lighting effects, sound effects, movable effects, etc., and an effect display control part for controlling effect images. .

[5-7. Game board side effect display device]
Next, the game board side effect display device 1600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 and 62. FIG. The game board side effect display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 . More specifically, the game board side effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the back wall of the back box 3010 at substantially the center thereof. This game board side effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 in the assembled state of the game board 5 . This game board side effect display device 1600 is a full-color liquid crystal display device with a white LED as a backlight, and can display still images and moving images.

The game board side effect display device 1600 includes two left fixed pieces 1601 protruding outward from the left side surface when viewed from the front, and a right fixed piece 1602 protruding outward from the right side surface when viewed from the front. This game board side effect display device 1600 has two fixed grooves which are open on the left inner circumferential surface in a front view inside a frame-shaped liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b of the back box 3010 described later, with the liquid crystal screen facing forward. The two left fixing pieces 1601 are inserted into 3010c from the oblique rear of the back box 3010, the right fixing piece 1602 is moved forward, and the right fixing piece 1602 is inserted into the opening of the lock mechanism 3020 to lock. It is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding the mechanism 3020 downward.

[5-8. front unit]
Next, the table unit 2000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 to 62. FIG. The front unit 2000 of the game board 5 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front, and the front end projects forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and the rear end penetrates the opening 1112. , and protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 .

The table unit 2000 of the present embodiment is capable of receiving a game ball hit into the game area 5a, and has a plurality of general winning openings 2001 that are always open, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 are located within the game area 5a. A first starting port 2002 that is always open to accept game balls at different positions, a gate part 2003 that is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball, and a game ball A second starting port 2004 that enables the acceptance of game balls according to the result of the ordinary lottery drawn by passing through the part 2003, and the lottery by accepting the game balls to the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 and a big prize winning port 2005 that enables acceptance of game balls according to the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery.

A plurality of general winning holes 2001 are arranged in the lower part of the game area 5a. The first starting port 2002 is arranged right above the out port 1126 at the center in the left-right direction within the game area 5a. The gate portion 2003 is arranged substantially directly below the impact portion 1006 on the upper right side in the front view in the game area 5a. The second starting port 2004 is arranged right below the gate portion 2003 to the right in front view. The big winning opening 2005 is arranged between the first starting opening 2002 and the out opening 1126 .

In addition, the front unit 2000 is attached directly above the out port 1126 at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and has a first start port 2002 and a big winning port 2005. A start port unit 2100 and a start port unit A lower side unit 2200 that is attached along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of 2100 when viewed from the front and has a plurality of general winning openings 2001, and a side unit attached above the left end of the lower side unit 2200 when viewed from the front. It comprises an upper part 2300 and a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 which is attached substantially in the center of the game area 5a and has a gate part 2003 and a second starting port 2004. - 特許庁

The starting port unit 2100 is arranged directly above the out port 1126 in the vicinity of the lower end portion of the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. In this starter opening unit 2100, the first starter opening 2002 opens upward to a size capable of receiving only one game ball at a time, and the big winning opening 2005 receives a plurality of game balls at once ( For example, 4 to 6 pieces) extend to the left and right with an acceptable size, and are formed so as to be openable and closable according to the game state.

The lower side unit 2200 extends in an arc shape along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the starting port unit 2100 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. The lower side unit 2200 has a plurality of general winning holes 2001 capable of receiving game balls at all times.

The upper side unit 2300 is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front in the game area 5a, at the upper left side of the lower side unit 2200 in the front view, slightly below the center in the vertical direction. When the upper side unit 2300 is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110, the left end of the shelf is close to the inner rail 1002, and the game ball that has flowed down along the inner rail 1002 is directed to the right (game area 5a). center in the left-right direction).

The center accessory 2500 is arranged above the starter unit 2100 and the lower side unit 2200 in the game area 5a and slightly above the center when viewed from the front. installed. The center accessory 2500 is formed in a frame shape, and through the frame, the game board side effect display device 1600 arranged behind the game panel 1100 and the effect units provided in the back unit 3000 are visually recognized from the front. be able to. The center accessory 2500 has a gate portion 2003 and a second starting port 2004 .

The frame-shaped center accessory 2500 protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, except for the lower side, so that a game ball hit into the game area 5a is projected inside the frame. It is impenetrable.

The center accessory 2500 has a warp entrance 2520 which is open on the outer peripheral surface on the left side in the front view so that game balls in the game area 5a can enter, and a game ball which has entered the warp entrance 2520 can be released into a frame. It has a warp exit 2522 that is open and a stage 2530 that rolls the game ball discharged from the warp exit 2522 in the left-right direction and then discharges it into the game area 5a. A starting port unit 2100 is arranged directly below the stage 2530, and when a game ball is released downward from the center of the stage 2530, the game ball is received in the first starting port 2002 with an extremely high probability.

[5-9. back unit]
Next, the back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 to 62. FIG. The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 on the game panel 1100 . Also, behind the back unit 3000, a game board side effect display device 1600 and a peripheral control unit 1500 are attached.

The rear unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a box shape with an open front. The rear wall has a square opening 3010a. A box-shaped performance drive board box 3042 is provided so as to be rotatable about an axis extending left and right along the axis and housing the performance drive board.

The back unit 3000 includes a back left center decorative unit 3050 attached to the front end of the back box 3010 from the center in the vertical direction on the left side in front view, and a back left center decoration unit 3050 attached below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. A back bottom rear movable effect unit 3100 attached near the rear wall of the box 3010, a back top left movable effect unit 3200 attached above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 and on the left side in the front view, and the back box. A back left movable effect unit 3300 attached to the left side of the opening 3010a in the front view in the back box 3010, and a back upper center attached above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 from the center in the left-right direction to the right end in the front view. A movable effect unit 3400 and a back bottom front movable effect unit 3500 attached in front of the back bottom rear movable effect unit 3100 below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 are provided.

The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 has a box-like shape with an open front, and has a square opening 3010a penetrating the rear wall and a plate frame-like shape protruding rearward from the periphery of the opening 3010a at intervals. A liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b, and two fixing grooves 3010c recessed outward from the inside of the frame on the left side of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b in rear view, into which the left fixing piece 1601 of the game board side effect display device 1600 is inserted. , and a notch portion 3010d to which the lock mechanism 3020 is attached from the rear end to the rear wall of the back case 3010 at the center in the vertical direction of the right side of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b in rear view.

The opening 3010 a is formed to have substantially the same size as the display screen of the game board side effect display device 1600 . Further, the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b is formed in a size that allows the game board side effect display device 1600 to be fitted in the frame. The back box 3010 has a lock mechanism 3020 attached to the left side of the notch 3010d on the rear surface in a vertically slidable manner.

In addition, the back box 3010 has a flat fixing piece 3010e extending outward from the front end. The fixing piece 3010e is attached to the panel holder 1120 with its front surface in contact with the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100. As shown in FIG. The back box 3010 has bosses, mounting holes, etc. for mounting each movable effect unit and the like at appropriate positions.

The back unit 3000 includes a back bottom rear movable effect unit 3100, a back top left movable effect unit 3200, a back left movable effect unit 3300, a back top middle movable effect unit 3400, and a back bottom front movable effect unit 3500, etc. , luminous effect, movable effect, display effect, etc. can be performed, and the player can be entertained by various effects, and the player's interest in the game can be prevented from decreasing.

[6. Game content]
Next, game contents by the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 60 and the like. In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the game balls stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 are released by the player rotating the handle 302 of the handle unit 300 arranged at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3. , the ball passes between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 and is driven into the upper part of the game area 5a, and the game with the game ball is started. A game ball hit to the upper part of the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the hitting strength. The hitting strength of the game balls can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 302, and the more the handle 302 is rotated in the clockwise direction, the stronger the ball can be hit. , the game ball can be hit at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

In addition, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110), and game balls are placed on the obstacle nails. By coming into contact with the game ball, the speed at which the game ball flows down is suppressed, and various movements are imparted to the game ball so that the movement can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail, a windmill (not shown) that rotates when the game ball abuts is provided at an appropriate position.

When the game ball hit to the upper part of the center role 2500 enters the left side of the outer peripheral surface of the center role 2500 from the highest part in front view, it hits a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown), The area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 will flow down. When the game ball flowing down the area on the left side of the center role 2500 enters the warp entrance 2520 opening on the outer peripheral surface of the center role 2500 , it is supplied from the warp exit 2522 to the stage 2530 .

The game ball supplied to the stage 2530 rolls on the stage 2530, moves left and right, and is released forward. When a game ball is released into the game area 5a from the center of the stage 2530, it is received by the first start hole 2002 with a high probability because it is positioned directly above the first start hole 2002. - 特許庁When the game ball is received in the first starting port 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out to the upper tray 321 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. .

When the game ball rolling on the stage 2530 is released into the game area 5a from other than the center, it flows down toward the starting port unit 2100. - 特許庁A game ball released from the stage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 into the game area 5a may be received by the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100, the open big winning opening 2005, or the like.

By the way, if the game ball that has flowed down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2520, it is moved to the center in the left-right direction by the upper side unit 2300, There is a possibility that it will be accepted in the starting port 2002 or the like. Then, when the game balls are received in the general winning hole 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out to the upper tray 321 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. .

On the other hand, when the game ball hit to the upper part of the center role 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the center role 2500 (so-called right hitting), On the downstream side, the water flows through a region provided with the gate portion 2003 and the second starting port 2004 .

Then, when the right-handed game ball passes through the gate portion 2003, a normal lottery is performed in the main control board 1310, and if the lottery result of the normal lottery is "normal hit", the second start port 2004 is opened for a predetermined time ( For example, between 0.3 to 10 seconds), it will be in an open state, and the reception of game balls to the second start port 2004 is possible. Then, when the game ball is received in the second starting port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, 4) game balls are paid out to the upper tray 321 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. be.

In the present embodiment, in the normal lottery performed by passing game balls through the gate section 2003, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the normal lottery to the indication of the result of the normal lottery (for example, 0.5 hours). 01-60 seconds, also referred to as normal fluctuation time). The suggestion of the ordinary lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5 . The second starting port 2004 is opened after the normal fluctuation time has elapsed.

Further, if the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 before the normal lottery result is suggested after the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003, the normal lottery result cannot be suggested, so the ordinary lottery result is not suggested. The start of the suggestion of the result is put on hold until the previous suggestion of the result of the ordinary lottery ends. Further, the upper limit of the number of retained lottery results is set to four, and even if the game balls pass through the gate section 2003, the game balls exceeding the upper limit are discarded without being retained. As a result, an increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating reservations.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a game ball is received in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, the main control board 1310 changes the advantageous game state (for example, "jackpot", " A lottery for the special lottery result that generates a medium hit, a small win, a variable probability win, a reduced time win, etc., is performed. Then, the special lottery result of the lottery is indicated to the player over a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also called special fluctuation time). In addition, the special lottery results drawn by receiving the game ball in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 include "loss", "small hit", "2R big hit", "5R big hit", " 15R jackpot", "probability change (probability change) hit", "short time (time reduction) hit", "probability change short time hit", "probability change short time hit", etc.

If the special lottery result (first special lottery result and second special lottery result) drawn by accepting the game ball into the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 is a special lottery result that generates an advantageous gaming state , After the elapse of the special fluctuation time, the large winning opening 2005 is in a state in which it is possible to receive game balls in a predetermined opening/closing pattern. When the big winning opening 2005 is in the open state, when the game ball is received in the big winning opening 2005, the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 output a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) from the payout device 830. A game ball is paid out to the upper tray 321. - 特許庁Therefore, when the big winning hole 2005 is capable of receiving game balls, by allowing the big winning hole 2005 to receive the game balls, a lot of game balls can be paid out and the player can be entertained.

If the special lottery result is a "small win", the big winning opening 2005 is opened for a predetermined short period of time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds) to accept a game ball. Repeat the opening and closing pattern multiple times (eg, twice). On the other hand, if the special lottery result is a "big hit", a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) elapses after the large winning opening 2005 becomes an open state capable of accepting game balls, or the opening to the big winning opening 2005 When any of the conditions of acceptance of a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls is satisfied, a predetermined opening/closing pattern (one opening/closing pattern is referred to as one round) that makes the game ball unacceptable in a closed state is set. Repeat a number of times (predetermined number of rounds). For example, 2 rounds for "2R big win", 5 rounds for "5R big win", and 15 rounds for "15R big win" are repeated to generate an advantageous game state advantageous to the player.

In addition, in the "big hit", after the end of the big win game, change the probability that the special lottery result such as "big hit" will be drawn ("variable hit"), or change the display time of the effect image that suggests the special lottery result. There is a "hit" to do ("time saving hit").

In this embodiment, from the start of the special lottery to the acceptance of the game ball into the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 until the special lottery result drawn is suggested, the first start port 2002 and the second Since the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started when the game ball is accepted in the second start port 2004, the start of the suggestion of the special lottery result is suspended until the suggestion of the special lottery result previously drawn is completed. be. The number of reserved special lottery results to be reserved is up to four for the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, respectively. Even if the game ball is accepted in 2004, the special lottery result is discarded without being reserved. As a result, an increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating reservations.

This special lottery result is suggested by the function display unit 1400 and the game board side effect display device 1600. - 特許庁The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest the result of the special lottery. Suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 is performed by repeatedly turning on and off a plurality of LEDs to flash for a predetermined period of time, and then suggesting the special lottery result by a combination of the lit LEDs.

On the other hand, the game board side effect display device 1600 is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, and the special lottery result is suggested as a effect image. The effect image suggesting the result of the special lottery on the game board side effect display device 1600 is variably displayed by varying each symbol row in a state in which three symbol rows consisting of a plurality of symbols are arranged in the horizontal direction. The pattern rows are sequentially stopped and displayed, and each pattern row is stopped and displayed so that the patterns of the three pattern rows to be stopped and displayed form a combination corresponding to the result of the special lottery. When the special lottery result is other than "losing", after the three symbol rows are stopped and each symbol is stopped and displayed, a finalized image suggesting the special lottery result is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, An advantageous game state (for example, a small winning game, a big winning game, etc.) is generated according to the drawn special lottery result.

The time indicating the special lottery result on the function display unit 1400 (blinking time of the LED (fluctuation time)) and the time indicating the special lottery result on the game board side effect display device 1600 (the pattern row fluctuates). A longer time is set for the function display unit 1400 than the time until the finalized image is displayed.

In the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the game board side effect display device 1600, the effect operation unit 400 on the door frame 3 is displayed according to the special lottery result. Operation button 410, door frame side effect display device 460, various decorations of center accessory 2500, various decorations of back unit 3000, back bottom rear movable effect unit 3100, back upper left movable effect unit 3200, back left movable effect By appropriately using the unit 3300, the back upper middle movable effect unit 3400, and the back lower front movable effect unit 3500, etc., it is possible to perform light emission effect, movable effect, display effect, etc., and the game can be played by various effects. It is possible to keep the player's interest in the game from decreasing.

[Relationship between the present embodiment and the present invention]
The door frame 3 in this embodiment is the door unit of the present invention, the main frame 4 in this embodiment is the main unit of the present invention, and the through hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 of this embodiment is the present invention. , the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 in the door frame 3 of the present embodiment, the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 in the door frame 3 of the present embodiment, the effect operation unit 400 of the present embodiment and the operation button 410 in the second effect operation unit 400A The button lens 411 corresponds to the first decorative body of the present invention, and the first button decorative portion 411a of the button lens 411 in this embodiment corresponds to the first decorative portion of the present invention.

In addition, the decorative member inside the operation button of the base unit in this embodiment, the main screen 471 and sub-screen 472 of the screen unit 470 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A are the second decorations of the present invention, The second button interior decoration portion 432g of the operation button interior decoration member 432, the peripheral edge decoration portion 472a of the screen unit 470, the sub-screen decoration member 476, and the peripheral edge decoration member 478 each correspond to the second decoration portion of the present invention. .

Further, each LED and sub-screen decoration substrate mounted on the operation button left interior decoration substrate 433, the operation button right interior decoration substrate 434, the operation button upper interior decoration substrate 435, and the operation button lower interior decoration substrate 436 in this embodiment. The LED 477a of 477 is the light emitter of the present invention, the door frame side effect display device 460 of the present embodiment is the back side decoration means of the present invention, the frame unit 415 of the present embodiment, the unit base 431 of the base unit 430, and The unit bases 451 of the second base unit 450 each correspond to the base portion of the present invention.

[8. Characteristic effects of the present embodiment]
As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the effect operation unit 400 (or the second effect operation unit 400A) attached to the front surface of the plate unit 320 protruding forward in the door frame 3 is operated. When the button lens 411 of the button 410 is viewed from the outside, the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button inner decoration portion 432g of the operation button inner decoration member 432 (or the screen unit 470 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A The peripheral edge decorative portion 472a, the sub-screen decorative member 476, the peripheral edge decorative member 478, etc.) overlapped decoration, the first button decoration portion 411a and the door frame side effect display device 460 overlapped decoration, etc. Since it is possible to show the player the decoration full of decorativeness with a sense of perspective, it is possible to strongly attract the interest of the player and to differentiate it from other pachinko machines. The pachinko machine 1 can be made expensive.

In addition, the operation button internal decorative member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A (screen unit 470)), the door frame side effect display device 460, etc. are arranged in the movement direction of the button lens 411 (operation button 410). In addition, since the button lens 411 is supported by the unit base 431 (unit base 451) so that it can be moved by the player's operation, the player operates (presses) the button lens 411 to move it. Then, the first button decorative portion 411a and the second inner button decorative portion 432g (or the peripheral edge decorative portion 472a, the sub-screen decorative member 476, the peripheral edge decorative member 478, etc.) approach or separate, A change in the distance between the first button decoration portion 411a and the second inner button decoration portion 432g (or the peripheral edge decoration portion 472a, the sub-screen decoration member 476, the peripheral edge decoration member 478, etc.) changes the distance between the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button decoration portion 411a. It is possible to change the perspective of the decoration that appears to overlap with the button interior decoration portion 432g (or the peripheral edge decoration portion 472a, the sub-screen decoration member 476, the peripheral edge decoration member 478, etc.). The decoration (intersection mode) by the second button interior decoration portion 432g (or the peripheral edge decoration portion 472a, the sub-screen decoration member 476, the peripheral edge decoration member 478, etc.) can be changed by the player himself, and the player can It is possible to entertain and suppress the decline in interest.

In addition, since the center of the button lens 411 bulges outward, which is the side opposite to the operation button inner decorative member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A), the first decorative body Since a space is formed between the second decorative body and the player, the distance from the button lens 411 to the first button decorative portion 411a and the second button of the operation button inner decorative member 432 The distance to the inner decorative portion 432g (or the peripheral decorative portion 472a of the screen unit 470, the sub-screen decorative member 476, the peripheral decorative member 478, etc.) is greatly different, and the button lens 411 is operated to move it. When the position of the player's eyes moves even when the screen is not on, the first button decorative portion 411a and the second inner button decorative portion 432g (or the peripheral edge decorative portion 472a, the sub-screen decorative member 476, the peripheral edge decorative member 478, etc.) are displayed. Since the intersecting state (overlapping condition) between the two is changed, the moving decoration can be shown to the player, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted.

Furthermore, since the outer peripheral edge of the transparent button lens 411 is provided with the first button decoration portion 411a having a radial decoration toward the center, the central side of the button lens 411 where the first button decoration portion 411a is not provided The operation button inner decorative member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A) and the door frame side effect display device 460 on the back side can be visually recognized well through the first button decoration portion 411a. The player's line of sight can be directed to the center of the button lens 411 by the decoration of , and through the center of the transparent button lens 411, the decorative member 432 inside the operation button (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A) or the door frame It is possible to draw the player's attention to the side effect display device 460 strongly.

In addition, since the operation button inner decorative member 432 is provided with the second button inner decorative portion 432g having a plurality of concentric polygonal decorations centering on the center, the button lens 411 can be seen from the outside. The decoration of the first button decoration portion 411a and the decoration of the second button interior decoration portion 432g of the operation button interior decoration member 432 intersect with each other, so that the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button interior decoration portion 432g The pachinko machine 1 can be made to have a high appeal to the players by making the decoration by the first button decoration part 411a and the second button interior decoration part 432g conspicuous. can.

In addition, since the decoration of the second button inner decoration portion 432g of the operation button inner decoration member 432 has a plurality of concentric polygonal decorations centering on the center, the second button inner decoration portion 432g By the decoration, the player's line of sight and interest can be directed to the door frame side effect display device 460 visible in the center of the operation button inner decorative member 432, and the decoration (effect image) of the door frame side effect display device can be enjoyed. can.

Furthermore, each LED mounted on the operation button left interior decoration substrate 433, the operation button right interior decoration substrate 434, the operation button upper interior decoration substrate 435, and the operation button lower interior decoration substrate 436 (or the sub-screen decoration substrate 477) When the LED 477a) emits light, the operation button inner decorative member 432 (or the sub-screen decorative member 476) can be decorated with light emission, and the button lens 411 can also be decorated with light emission. In addition to the decoration of the button decoration portion 411a and the second button interior decoration portion 432g (or the sub-screen decoration member 476), the player can also be entertained by light emission decoration. At this time, the operation button left inner decoration substrate 433, the operation button right inner decoration substrate 434, the operation button upper inner decoration substrate 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration substrate 432g (or the sub-screen decoration member 476) are formed by the second button inner decoration portion 432g (or the sub-screen decoration member 476). Since the light from each LED (or LED 477a) of the decoration substrate 436 can be diffused, in the second button interior decoration portion 432g, the operation button left interior decoration substrate 433, the operation button right interior decoration substrate 434, and the operation button top Direct light from each LED (or LED 477a) of the interior decoration substrate 435 and the operation button lower interior decoration substrate 436 emits light for decoration. Indirect light diffused by the portion 432g (or the sub-screen decorative member 476) is used for luminous decoration, while the second button inner decorative portion 432g (sub-screen decorative member 476) is strongly luminous-decorated. Since the first button decoration portion 411a is weakly illuminated, the LEDs of the operation button left interior decoration substrate 433, the operation button right interior decoration substrate 434, the operation button upper interior decoration substrate 435, and the operation button lower interior decoration substrate 436 are illuminated. (or the LED 477a) is illuminated, and the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button interior decoration portion 432g (or the sub-screen decoration member 476) are viewed from the outside, the perspective is further emphasized. The decoration can be shown to the player, and the pachinko machine 1 can be highly appealing to strongly attract the interest of the player.

In addition, since the operation button inner decorative member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A) is arranged in the moving direction of the button lens 411, the button lens 411 and the operation button inner decorative member 432 (or the door There is no need to secure a space for the button lens 411 to move to a portion outside the outer periphery of the frame side second effect display device 460A), and the button lens 411 and the operation button inner decorative member 432 (or the door frame The side second effect display device 460A) can be expanded outward to be made as large as possible, and the button lens 411 and the operation button inner decorative member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be enlarged. 460A) can be highlighted. In addition, as described above, since it is not necessary to secure a space for movement outside the button lens 411, by arranging the frame unit 415 outside the button lens 411, the entire pachinko machine 1 can be The pachinko machine 1 can be made highly decorative and highly appealing to attract the attention of players by improving its appearance.

In addition, since the center of the button lens 411 bulges outward, the button lens 411 has a flat shape when the player hits the button lens 411 and applies an impact to a part of the surface. Compared to the case, the applied impact force is more likely to be dispersed over the entire button lens 411, so that the button lens 411 can be made less likely to break (be less likely to be damaged). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the breakage of the button lens 411 during the game, which interrupts the game and makes some players feel frustrated and lose interest. By making it difficult, it is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game area 5a of the game board 5 arranged in the body frame 4 can be visually recognized from the front through the through hole 111 in the door frame 3. The unit base 431 (second base unit 450) of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) attached to the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 protruding forward on the side has an outer diameter of 10 cm. Operation buttons 410 that are movable (advance and retreat) by being operated by the player in a circular shape of about 15 cm within a range of ~30 cm, and decoration inside the operation buttons that can be seen from the front through the transparent button lens 411 of the operation buttons 410 Since the member 432, the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A), and the frame-shaped frame unit 415 in which the operation button 410 is arranged in the frame are attached, the conventional Since the performance operation unit 400 (the second performance operation unit 400A) having as large an operation button 410 as possible can be seen at a position where the storage tray for the game balls is conspicuous in the pachinko machine, the player can see the performance operation unit 400 at a glance. The pachinko machine 1 can be made to recognize that it is different from the conventional pachinko machine, and has a high appeal. The frame unit 415 is provided with a translucent frame side lens 417, and a translucent second button decoration is provided on the outer edge of the operation button 410 (button lens 411) so as to be adjacent to the frame side lens 417. 411b, and attached to the unit base 431 (second base unit 450) on the rear side of the frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration portion 411b. First LEDs 422a and 423a for decorating the second button decoration part 411b with light emission and second LEDs 422b and 423b for decorating the frame side lens 417 with light emission are provided, and the frame side lens 417 and the second button are provided. An inner cylindrical portion 416d of the frame main body 416 that partitions from the decoration portion 411b, and a main body portion 413a and an inner extension portion 413f of the button base 413 that partitions the second button decoration portion 411b and the central side of the button lens 411. Therefore, the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a illuminates the center side of the frame side lens 417 and the button lens 411, or the second LED 422b , 423b can be prevented from illuminating the second button decoration portion 411b, and the frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration portion 411b adjacent to each other can be independently decorated with light emission. can. Therefore, the frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration portion 411b can be clearly decorated with light emission, and a good-looking light emission effect can be performed. In addition, by appropriately combining lights off, lighting, blinking, brightness, color, etc., for the frame side lenses 417 and the second button decorative portion 411b that are adjacent to each other, various patterns of light emission effect can be performed. This makes it difficult for the player to get bored, entertains the player, and suppresses the decline in the player's interest in the game.

Further, the first LEDs 422a and 423a that decorate the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the second LEDs 422b and 423b that decorate the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 are combined into one operation button left outer decoration. Since the board 422 and the operation button right external decoration board 423 are provided and the operation button left external decoration board 422 and the operation button right external decoration board 423 are attached to the unit base 431 (second base unit 450), the second button decoration portion Compared to the case where 411b (operation button 410) is provided with a substrate, the first LEDs 422a and 423a can be kept away from the second button decoration portion 411b as much as possible, and the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a can be sufficiently emitted. It is possible to irradiate the second button decoration portion 411b in a diffused state. Therefore, since the second button decoration portion 411b can be uniformly decorated with light emission, the appearance of the light emission decoration of the second button decoration portion 411b and the frame side lens 417 can be improved, and the player's interest is strongly attracted. At the same time, the player can be entertained, and the decline in interest of the player can be suppressed.

Further, since the operation button left external decoration board 422 and the operation button right external decoration board 423 are attached to the unit base 431 (the second base unit 450), the operation button left external decoration board 422 moves along with the movement of the operation button 410. Also, the wiring connected to the operation button right external decoration board 423 is not bent or stretched, and disconnection of the wiring due to fatigue can be eliminated. Therefore, even if the operation button 410 (the second button decoration portion 411b) is moved, the wiring will not be disconnected. The player can be entertained with the luminous decoration without any problem, and the loss of interest of the player can be suppressed.

In addition, since the second button decorative portion 411b is provided on the outer edge of the transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410, the transparent button lens 411 can be passed through the rear operation button inner decorative member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460. When looking at (door frame side second effect display device 460A), the outer edges of the operation button inner decorative member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) is decorated, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. By appropriately lighting the first LEDs 422a and 423a and the second LEDs 422b and 423b, the operation button inner decorative member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be seen behind. As described above, the second button decoration portion 411b and the frame side lens 417, which decorate the outer edge of the button lens 411, can be decorated with light emission in various patterns. It can be strongly attracted to the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A), and the light emission effect, the operation of the operation button 410, and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be strongly attracted. It is possible to entertain the effect image or the like by the effect display device 460A) and suppress the decrease in interest.

In addition, since the button lens 411 (operation button 410) provided with the second button decorative portion 411b on the outer edge can be operated by the player, the operation button 410 can be operated by the player during execution of the player participation type production. By allowing the operation, the player can enjoy the operation of the operation button 410 (player-participation type performance), and the player's interest in the game can be suppressed. Then, when executing the player-participation type production, the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 are decorated with light emission, thereby attracting the interest of the player to the operation button 410. Therefore, the player can be prompted to operate the operation button 410, and the player can be entertained by participating in the player participation type production.

Furthermore, since only the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 is provided with the opaque main body portion 413a and the inner extension portion 413f that can be decorated by the first LEDs 422a and 423a, the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 can be The portion closer to the center than the button decoration portion 411b is not decorated (illuminated) by the first LEDs 422a and 423a, and the center side of the operation button 410 (button lens 411) is brightened so that it is arranged at the rear. It is possible to prevent the operation button internal decorative member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) from becoming difficult to see from the front. Therefore, the second button decoration portion 411b can be decorated with light emission in a good state, and the transparent button lens 411 can pass through the transparent button lens 411 to the decorative member 432 inside the operation button and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460). The display device 460A) can be visually recognized in a good state, and the player can be sufficiently entertained with decorations, light-emitting effects, and the like, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, since the inner cylindrical portion 416d extends from the rear side of the frame unit 415 having the frame side lenses 417, on the rear side of the frame unit 415, the frame side lenses 417 and the second button decoration of the operation button 410 are arranged. The portion 411b can be completely partitioned by the inner cylindrical portion 416d. On the other hand, at the end (rear end) of the inner tubular portion 416d near the operation button left external decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right external decoration substrate 423, light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a and the second LEDs 422b and 423b is emitted. Since the rear end of the inner cylindrical portion 416d is positioned closer to the operation button left external decoration board 422 and the operation button right external decoration board 423 than the diffusion range, the operation button left external decoration board 422 and the operation button right external Even if a gap is formed between the decoration substrate 423 and the front surface, the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a illuminates the frame side lens 417, and the light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b illuminates the second button decoration portion 411b. never do. Therefore, it is possible to realize the pachinko machine 1 that reliably blocks the light by the inner cylindrical portion 416d and reliably exhibits the above-described effects.

In addition, since the body portion 413a and the inner extension portion 413f of the button base 413 extend from the rear side of the operation button 410 (the button lens 411), the rear side of the operation button 410 has the second button decorative portion 411b. and the central side of the button lens 411 can be completely partitioned by the body portion 413a and the inner extension portion 413f. On the other hand, the operation button left external decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right external decoration substrate 423 are located near the end (rear end) of the operation button left external decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right external decoration substrate 423 in the main body portion 413a. , the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a does not pass through the rear end of the main body portion 413a, and the entrance of the light to the central side of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 is completely blocked. can be done. Therefore, the second button decoration portion 411b can be illuminated in a favorable state by the first LEDs 422a and 423a, and the transparent button lens 411 can be used to display the decorative member 432 in the rear operation button and the door frame side effect display device 460 ( The door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be visually recognized in a good state, and the player can be sufficiently entertained with the decoration and the light emission effect, thereby suppressing the decline in interest in the game.

In addition, when viewed from the front, the second button decoration is placed in front of the outer portion of the operation button inner decorative member 432 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) arranged behind the operation button 410 (button lens 411). Since the portion 411b is positioned, the operation button inner decorative member 432 (the door frame side second The second button decoration portion 411b can make the outside members and the rear side (back side) of the effect display device 460A) difficult to see, thereby preventing deterioration of the appearance of the operation button 410.例文帳に追加Also, at this time, if the second button decoration portion 411b is decorated with light emission by the first LEDs 422a and 423a, the brightness of the second button decoration portion 411b is changed by the operation button interior decoration member 432 (door frame side second effect Since the outer side and the rear side of the display device 460A) are relatively dark, the members on the outer side and the rear side of the operation button inner decorative member 432 (the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side) can be made difficult to see. Therefore, the appearance of the operation button 410, the frame unit 415, the operation button inner decorative member 432, the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A), etc. can be further improved, and the player can A decrease in interest can be suppressed.

Further, since the outer peripheral shape of the operation button 410 is circular, the second button decoration portion 411b provided on the outer edge of the operation button 410 (button lens 411) and the frame adjacent to the second button decoration portion 411b The side lens 417 has an arcuate shape. Therefore, by appropriately emitting light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a and the second LEDs 422b and 423b, it is possible to produce a light emission effect such that the light circulates around the outer edge of the operation button 410, or light emission such that the light spreads from the inside to the outside of the operation button 410. Since it is possible to show the player an effect, a light-emitting effect in which light converges from the outside to the inside of the operation button 410, etc., the player can be kept from getting bored with various light-emitting effects, and the player can enjoy it. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the upper tray 321 used for the game by hitting the game balls stored in the tray unit cover 326 of the tray unit 320 in the door frame 3 into the game area 5a is formed. At the same time, the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) is detachably attached to the front side and lower side of the upper plate 321 to provide a mounting space of a predetermined size behind the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A). A remaining space of the mounting space 326j is formed, a portion corresponding to the lower plate first region A1 of the lower plate main body 325 is arranged on the left side of the remaining space of the mounting space 326j, and the remaining space of the mounting space 326j is formed from that portion. Since the part corresponding to the lower plate second area A2 in the lower plate main body 325 is extended inside to attach the lower plate 322 capable of storing game balls, the lower plate 322 looks small when viewed from the front. As a result, the lower plate 322 can be made inconspicuous, and the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) can be relatively conspicuous. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front, the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) can be seen at the position where the upper tray and the lower tray are vertically aligned in the conventional pachinko machine. The pachinko machine 1 can make the player recognize that it is different from the conventional pachinko machine just by looking at it, and can strongly attract the interest of the player. can.

In addition, in the portion of the lower plate second region A2 of the lower plate main body 325 of the lower plate 322, it extends upward from the upper end of the main body vertical wall portion 325b extending upward from the outer periphery, and extends to the remaining space side of the mounting space 326j. Since lower tray covers 340, 340A for regulating the movement of game balls are provided, the game balls in the lower tray 322 are prevented from coming into contact with the rear side of the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A). , the game balls supplied to the lower tray 322 and the game balls stored in the lower tray 322 contact or press the rear side of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A). can be prevented. Therefore, the game ball does not come into contact with the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), and the game ball does not damage the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from being interrupted due to the breakage of the performance operation unit 400 (the second performance operation unit 400A), thereby preventing the player from losing interest, and the pachinko machine 1 is installed. It is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side.

Also, lower plate covers 340, 340A for restricting movement of game balls to the remaining space side of the main body standing wall portion 325b and the mounting space 326j are provided in the lower plate second area A2 of the lower plate main body 325 of the lower plate 322. , it is possible to prevent game balls from entering (spilling out) from the lower tray main body 325 into the remaining space of the mounting space 326j. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling lost or uncomfortable due to the game ball entering the remaining space of the mounting space 326j, thereby enhancing the player's interest in the game. can be suppressed.

In addition, since the portion of the lower plate second area A2 of the lower plate main body 325 of the lower plate 322 is covered by the lower plate covers 340 and 340A, the game ball supplied into the lower plate 322 bounces within the lower plate 322. Even if it jumps up, it can be reliably prevented from entering the remaining space side of the mounting space 326j, and the above-described effects can be reliably achieved. In addition, since the portion of the lower tray second area A2 of the lower tray main body 325 is covered by the lower tray covers 340 and 340A, the player can easily move the lower tray main body 325 toward the lower tray first area A1 (lower tray opening). 326d) into the lower tray second area A2, the lower tray covers 340 and 340A can prevent the fingertips from entering the remaining space of the mounting space 326j. etc. can be prevented from being injured by touching the lower surface of the upper plate 321 or the rear side of the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A), and the player can play in a safe state. can be done.

Furthermore, since there is a gap between the lower plate covers 340, 340A and the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), impact and pressure due to the contact of the game ball against the lower plate covers 340, 340A is not transmitted from the lower tray covers 340, 340A to the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), and damage to the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is ensured. can be prevented.

In addition, in the portion of the lower tray second region A2 in the lower tray main body 325 of the lower tray 322, since the lower tray ball removal hole 322a is provided in front of the lower tray ball supply port 323c, the lower tray ball removal hole 322a is opened. In this state, the game balls discharged from the lower tray ball supply port 323c can enter the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a as it is and be discharged downward (dollar box), and the game balls can be discharged downward (dollar box). It is possible to make it difficult to reach the front end side of the standing wall portion 325b. Even if the game ball jumps over the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a, since the lower tray covers 340 and 340A are provided as described above, the game ball will not reach the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). Since abutment on the rear side can be prevented, damage to the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) can be prevented, interruption of the game can be reduced, and the player's interest in the game is reduced. can be suppressed.

In addition, since the bottom wall portion 325a of the lower plate main body 325 near the front end of the lower plate 322 is higher toward the front, the game ball heading toward the front end side of the main body vertical wall portion 325b of the lower plate main body 325 is inclined. The moving speed of the game ball can be attenuated by climbing the bottom surface. Therefore, since the speed of the game ball contacting the lower tray covers 340, 340A can be slowed down, the lower tray covers 340, 340A reliably restrict the movement of the game ball to the remaining space side of the mounting space 326j. In addition, it is possible to reduce the impact when the game ball hits the lower tray covers 340, 340A and the main body vertical wall portion 325b, thereby suppressing damage to them.

Further, since at least the lower tray covers 340, 340A are formed as separate members, when the lower tray covers 340, 340A are damaged, they can be easily repaired only by replacing the lower tray covers 340, 340A. 1 can be reduced.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the center of the front in the left-right direction bulges most forward below the game area 5a of the game board 5 where a game such as receiving game balls into the general winning opening 2001 or the like is performed. After the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 which is put out is provided, the production operation unit 400 and the second production operation unit 400A are detachably attached to the most forwardly bulging portion thereof, and the upper plate 321 is attached to the plate unit cover 326. and a lower plate 322, and the storage plate (upper plate 321 and lower plate 322) is provided with the outer side of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) when viewed from the front. It has a lower tray first area A1 and a lower tray second area A2 positioned in the rear space of the installation space 326j behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) in front view. Therefore, when viewed from the front, the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) can be conspicuous, and the storage plate (upper plate 321 and lower plate 322) can be made smaller and less noticeable. can. Therefore, since the conspicuous production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) can be seen in the part where the upper tray and the lower tray were visible in the conventional pachinko machine, the game machine is different from the conventional pachinko machine for the player. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing and capable of strongly attracting the player's interest.

In addition, since the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is attached to the center of the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 in the left-right direction, the portion of the surface of the plate unit cover 326 where the lower plate 322 is open is Although it is small, the first portion of the lower plate main body 325 having the lower plate second region A2 located in the space behind the installation space 326j behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) in front view. Since the extension part 325B, the second extension part 325C, and the lower tray covers 340 and 340A are provided, game balls can be stored in a range (lower tray second area A2) of the lower tray 322 that cannot be seen from the front. can. Therefore, since a sufficient amount of game balls can be secured contrary to the appearance from the front, the player can concentrate on the game without worrying about the remaining amount of game balls in the lower tray 322.例文帳に追加This allows the player to enjoy the game and suppress the loss of interest.

Furthermore, the lower tray main body 325 and the main body portion 325A having the lower tray first area A1, the lower tray covers 340 and 340A having the lower tray second area A2, the first extension section 325B and the second extension section Since the lower tray 322 is configured by attaching (combining) the portion 325C, a plurality of lower tray covers 340, 340A having different sizes, the first extension portion 325B, the second extension portion 325C, etc. are prepared in advance. By attaching the lower plate covers 340, 340A, the first extension part 325B and the second extension part 325C of sizes corresponding to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 and the size of the mounting space 326j in the plate unit cover 326, etc. The volume of dish 322 can be optimized. Further, as described above, by rearranging (replacing) the lower tray covers 340, 340A, the first extension portion 325B, and the second extension portion 325C, it is possible to correspond to the size of the space behind the mounting space 326j. Since the size of this rear space depends on the rearward projection amount of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A), various production operation units 400 (second production operation unit 400A) with different rearward projection amounts can be used. The lower plate 322 can be adapted to the production operation unit 400A), and the versatility of the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced.

In addition, since the lower plate 322 is provided with a bottom wall portion 325a and a main standing wall portion 325b rising from the outer peripheral end of the bottom wall portion 325a, the lower plate 322 becomes a downwardly recessed container-like shape and a game ball. can be reliably stored. In addition, since the lower tray covers 340 and 340A have the cover vertical wall section 340a that rises from the upper end of the main body vertical wall section 325b of the lower tray main body 325, various shapes of the lower tray covers 340 and 340A are prepared in advance. By combining (attaching) lower plate covers 340 and 340A having shapes corresponding to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 and the size (shape) of the space behind the mounting space 326j, etc., various forms can be accommodated. It is possible to achieve the same effects as those described above.

In the lower tray 322 composed of the lower tray main body 325 and the lower tray covers 340 and 340A, the lower tray covers 340 and 340A are combined (attached) to the upper end of the vertical wall portion 325b of the lower tray main body 325. Therefore, since the part of the lower tray 322 on which the game balls are placed is the lower tray main body 325, the lower tray main body 325 and the lower tray covers 340, 340A are placed on the part where the load of the game balls is increased due to the storage. Boundaries (joints, dividing lines PL) are never located. Therefore, since the load of the stored game balls is received only by the lower tray main body 325, even if many game balls are stored, the lower tray cover 340, 340A will not be pulled away from the lower tray main body 325. It does not work, and can prevent the lower tray covers 340 and 340A from coming off the lower tray main body 325.例文帳に追加

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, an upper plate capable of storing game balls is provided below and in front of the game area 5a of the game board 5 where a game is performed such that the game balls are accepted in the general winning opening 2001 or the like. 321 and a lower plate 322, and a lower plate ball supply port 323c and a lower plate ball extraction hole 322a in the lower plate 322 by the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) arranged in the center in the left-right direction. Since more than half of the lower plate 322 including the and is made invisible (hardly visible) from the front (player), the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be made neat and attractive, and the player is interested. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing, capable of strongly attracting . In addition, since the game ball heading from the lower tray ball supply port 323c to the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a is made difficult to see by the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), the player can play the game inside the lower tray 322. It is possible to prevent the player from being distracted by making it difficult for the player to notice the flow of the ball, and to suppress the decline in interest in the game.

In addition, by the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the bottom plate of the lower plate 322 to guide the game ball from the lower plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a Since the part between the ball extraction hole 322a and the game ball guided by the guide means such as the ball guide part 322c and the buffer part 322d is made difficult to see, if the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a is kept open, , the game balls supplied to the lower tray 322 from the lower tray ball supply port 323c are guided by the guiding means and are smoothly (immediately) ejected downward from the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a. It is possible to create the illusion that the game balls are discharged below the lower tray 322 (dollar box) without passing through the lower tray 322.例文帳に追加This makes it difficult for the player to feel the annoyance of the game ball passing through the lower tray 322, and allows the player to devote himself to the game to suppress the loss of interest.

Furthermore, the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) makes more than half of the lower plate 322 including the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball removal hole 322a difficult to see from the front. In addition, the lower tray ball supply port 323c, the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a, and the like are positioned behind the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A). That is, since half or more of the lower plate 322 is made to wrap around behind the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A), the size of the lower plate 322 seen from the front is different from the actual size of the lower plate. Since the size (capacity) of 322 is large, it is possible to secure a sufficient amount of game balls stored in the lower tray 322 compared to its appearance.

Also, in the state where the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a is open, the game ball released into the lower tray 322 from the lower tray ball supply port 323c is transferred to the lower tray ball supply port 323c on the bottom surface of the lower tray 322 Since it can be smoothly guided to the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a by the guiding means such as the portion between the extraction hole 322a, the ball guiding portion 322c and the buffering portion 322d, and discharged to the lower portion of the lower tray 322 (dollar box). , the game ball can be prevented from circulating in the lower tray 322, and the game ball circulating in the lower tray 322 can be reliably made invisible from the front (player). Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the flow of the game balls in the lower tray 322, thereby preventing the player from being distracted and reducing the interest in the game.

Furthermore, if the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a is left open, the game ball supplied from the lower tray ball supply port 323c to the lower tray 322 is immediately released by the ball guiding portion 322c or the like without the player noticing it. Since the game balls can be discharged downward from the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a, the player is given the illusion that the game balls are discharged below the lower tray 322 (dollar box) without passing through the lower tray 322.例文帳に追加can be done. This makes it difficult for the player to feel the annoyance of the game ball passing through the lower tray 322, and allows the player to devote himself to the game to suppress the loss of interest.

In addition, by the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), more than half of the game ball storage area (storage area) in the plan view of the lower plate 322 is made invisible from the front, so the lower plate visible from the front Since the actual lower tray 322 is larger than the visible size with respect to the size 322, a sufficient amount of game balls can be secured as with the lower tray of the conventional pachinko machine.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the door frame 3 protruding forward below the game area 5a of the game board 5 where a game such as receiving game balls into the general winning opening 2001 or the like is performed. Effect operation unit attachment for attaching a large effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) having the same height as the total height of the plate unit cover 326 at the center in the left-right direction of the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 in the plate unit 320. In addition to having a portion 326a, the front lower decorative portion 326c of the plate lower than the approximate center in the vertical direction is recessed so as to be gouged rearward on both the left and right sides of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326. Because of the shape, the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a can be seen to protrude greatly forward, and the effect operation unit 400 (second effect The operation unit 400A) can be conspicuous. Therefore, the large production operation unit 400 (the second production operation unit 400A) can be seen in an emphasized state at the position where the upper tray and the lower tray were arranged vertically in a conventional pachinko machine, so that the player can see. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 1 can be made to be highly appealing by making the player recognize that it is different from the conventional pachinko machine at a glance. The lower plate 322 is recessed rearward from the plate front lower decorative portion 326c recessed rearward on both the left and right outer sides of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326. A part is wrapped around the back of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), and the amount of game balls stored in the lower plate 322 (volume of the lower plate 322) can be sufficiently secured. The player does not have to worry about the lower plate 322 being filled with game balls while playing, and the player can concentrate on the game, enjoy the game, and suppress the decline in interest.

In addition, since a part of the lower plate 322 wraps around behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), when the player puts his or her hand into the lower plate 322 from the front, the fingertips will not touch the lower plate. It is possible to make it difficult to touch the rear wall of 322 (the front surface of the plate unit base 323), the lower plate cover 340, and the like. As a result, it is possible for the player to perceive that a sufficient amount of game balls is secured by touch, and in a state in which the game balls are stored in the lower tray 322, Since it is possible to recognize that many game balls are stored in the space, the player can be given a feeling of satisfaction, and the game can be enjoyed and the decline in interest can be suppressed. In addition, since the fingertips of the hand placed in the lower tray 322 are less likely to touch the rear wall of the lower tray 322, the lower tray cover 340, etc., the player feels the same as the lower tray in the conventional pachinko machine. As a result, players accustomed to conventional pachinko machines can be prevented from feeling a sense of incongruity, and the players can be relieved and their interest in the game can be suppressed.

Furthermore, since the lower plate 322 is formed to be wider toward the back side (rear), even if the front side is small, a sufficient amount of game balls can be reserved. In other words, since the front end portion of the lower plate 322 is made small, the lower plate 322 is made inconspicuous on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 (the plate front lower decorative portion 326c) where the lower plate 322 is open. , and the effect operation unit 400 (the second effect operation unit 400A) can be relatively conspicuous. Therefore, the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) can be provided while securing a sufficient amount of game balls stored in the lower plate 322, and the appeal to the player can be enhanced, and the player can be attracted. It is possible to entertain and suppress the decline in interest.

In addition, since the lower tray cover 340 covers the sides and upper part of the portion of the lower tray 322 that wraps around behind the production operation unit 400 (the second production operation unit 400A), the player cannot move inside the lower tray 322. When a player puts his or her hand in, it is possible to prevent the fingertip or the like from touching the inner surface of the plate unit cover 326 or the rear surface of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) and get injured. The game can be played in a safe state. Also, the lower tray cover 340 can prevent game balls from entering (spilling out) from the lower tray 322 into the tray unit cover 326 .

Furthermore, since the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is arranged in the center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326, the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) can be operated from the player side. The pachinko machine 1 can be made more conspicuous and highly appealing, capable of strongly attracting the interest of the players, and the decoration by the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) can be easily seen. By doing so, it is possible to entertain the decorations and effects of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) and suppress the decrease in interest of the player.

In addition, since the lower tray 322 is provided with a lower tray ball supply port 323c that can communicate with the upper tray 321 and a lower tray ball extraction hole 322a that penetrates vertically so as to be openable and closable, the conventional pachinko machine can be used. Since it has the same function as the lower tray 322, when a player who is accustomed to the conventional pachinko machine plays a game with this pachinko machine 1, the function of the lower tray 322 is not confused and the same as the conventional one. The game can be played with a relaxed feeling, and the player can concentrate on the game and enjoy the game. In addition, since the lower dish ball supply port 323c and the lower dish ball extraction hole 322a are respectively arranged behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), when viewed from the front, the lower dish ball supply port 323c and the lower dish ball extraction hole 322a are arranged. A pachinko machine with a high appealing power, in which a lower tray ball extraction hole 322a is not visible from the player side, the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved, and the interest of the player can be strongly attracted. machine 1.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, below the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 facing the game area 5a of the door frame 3, the plate unit 320 protruding forward is The base unit 430 (second base unit 450) of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) attached to the plate unit cover 326 is provided with a door frame side effect display device 460 capable of presenting effects to the player. The operation button interior decoration member 432 (the screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A) that decorates the outside is attached, and the outer diameter of the operation button interior decoration member 432 (the screen unit 470) is extended so as to surround the outer periphery. An operation button 410 having a transparent button lens 411 bulging in a direction (outward) away from the base unit 430 (second base unit 450 ) is attached at the center, and the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411 is provided with a button lens 411 . A cylindrical button base 413 that includes a first button decorative portion 411a, a second button decorative portion 411b, and a button frame 412 and protrudes from the button lens 411 side toward the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) side. Therefore, the operation button inner decorative member 432 (door frame side second It is possible to reduce visibility of the outer edge and the back side (rear side) of the screen unit 470) of the effect display device 460A, and the appearance of the operation buttons 410 can be improved. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the appearance of the operation button 410, the operation button inner decorative member 432 provided inside, the door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A), etc., and improve the appearance of the player. A decrease in interest can be suppressed.

In addition, the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the button base 413 of the operation button 410 allow the button lens 411 and the button inner decoration member 432 (screen unit 470) to pass through the gap between the button lens 411 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 (screen unit 470). Since it is possible to make the outer edge and inner side of the operation button interior decoration member 432 (screen unit 470) difficult to see, by increasing the outer diameter of the operation button 410, the button lens 411 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 (screen unit 470) can be 470) is relatively large, it can be satisfactorily hidden by the first button decoration part 411a and the like, so that while preventing deterioration in appearance, a large operation button with an outer diameter of about 15 cm can be used. 410 (button lens 411) can be implemented without problems. Therefore, since the operation button 410 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be enlarged, the pachinko machine 1 can be made conspicuous and the player's interest is strongly enhanced. The pachinko machine 1 can be made attractive and highly appealing.

Further, since the button base 413 (main body portion 413a) projecting in a cylindrical shape from the button lens 411 side to the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) side is provided, the button lens 411 and the operation button internal decorative member 432 ( When the gap between the screen units 470) is viewed obliquely, the inner wall of the button base 413 can shield the objects outside the operation button internal decorative member 432 (screen unit 470) so that they cannot be seen. The appearance of the button 410 can be further improved.

In addition, since the transparent button lens 411 has a three-dimensional shape (semispherical shape) that bulges in a direction (outward) away from the base unit 430 (second base unit 450), the portion near the outer periphery of the button lens 411 The surface is a plane formed by the front end side opening of the button base 413 (a plane perpendicular to the direction in which the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) and the button lens 411 are aligned, that is, the advancing/retreating direction of the operation button 410). ), the light is easily refracted when viewed from the player's side. Therefore, the first button decorative portion 411a, the second button decorative portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the button base 413 provided on the outer peripheral edge are combined to form the button lens 411 and the operation button internal decorative member 432 (screen unit 470). ), the outer edge of the operation button inner decorative member 432 (screen unit 470), the back side, and the like can be made difficult to see through the gap between them, so that the above-described effects can be achieved reliably.

In addition, since the button lens 411 is formed in a three-dimensional shape that bulges outward, the volume inside the operation button 410 increases. The side effect display device 460 (the second door frame side effect display device 460A) can be made larger or made easier to move, and the door frame side effect display device can entertain the player through the operation button 410.例文帳に追加460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be easily provided, and the pachinko machine 1 that can entertain the players more can be embodied.

Furthermore, since the button lens 411 is formed in a three-dimensional shape, the operation button 410 is given a design (ornamental effect). can be directed to the pachinko machine 1, and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as the pachinko machine to be played.

In addition, in the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, and the button frame 412 provided on the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411, the button frame 412 is made opaque. It is possible to reliably hide the inner side of the operation button 410 and the operation button inner decorative member 432 (screen unit 470) from being seen through the gap between the lens 411 and the inner decorative member 432 (screen unit 470). It is possible to improve the appearance by reducing deterioration of the appearance of the button 410 and the like.

In addition, an opaque button frame 412 is provided over the entire periphery with a predetermined width from the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411 to the inside. Since the gap between the body portion 413a of the button base 413 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 (screen unit 470) in the operation button 410 can be made difficult to see from the side, the body portion 413a and the operation button interior decoration member 432 ( The gap between the screen unit 470 and the screen unit 470) can be increased, and the space for moving the operation button 410 and the screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A can be easily secured. can be moved well.

Furthermore, since the outer periphery of the button lens 411 is cylindrical, the operation button 410 can be moved smoothly and easily because there is no directivity in the outer periphery compared to the polygonal shape. Therefore, even if the operation button 410 is enlarged, it can be pressed without any problem, and the player can surely enjoy the player-participation type performance using the operation button 410, thereby suppressing the loss of interest.

In addition, since the operation button 410 is made large, when the player participatory effect is executed in which the player operates the operation button 410, it is possible to easily operate the operation button 410 without confirming the position of the operation button 410. Since the operation button 410 can be easily touched and pressed, the player can easily participate in the player-participation type performance using the operation button 410, which amuses the player and reduces interest. can be suppressed.

Furthermore, since the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) is provided in the operation button 410, the player's interest is manipulated by presenting the effect image according to the game state. It can be strongly attracted to the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) in the button 410, and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) In addition to being able to entertain the performance, the player can be prompted to operate the operation button 410 by means of a performance image or a light-emitting performance by the door frame side performance display device 460 (door frame side second performance display device 460A). , the decline in interest can be suppressed by making the player actively participate in the player-participation-type production and entertaining the player. In addition, by executing the performance within the operation button 410, it is possible to make some players think that something good will happen, thereby heightening the expectation for the game and suppressing the decrease in interest. can be done.

In addition, the door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be visually recognized through the transparent button lens 411 (the portion inside the first button decoration portion 411a) of the large operation button 410. Therefore, the player can immediately recognize that the operation buttons 410 of the pachinko machine 1 are clearly different from the operation buttons of the conventional pachinko machine, and the appeal to the players is high. It can be used as a pachinko machine 1, and at the same time, heightens the player's expectation for the performance using the operation button 410 and the door frame side performance display device 460 (door frame side second performance display device 460A) in the operation button 410.例文帳に追加It is possible to suppress the decline in interest of the player.

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments. and design changes are possible.

That is, in the above-described embodiment, the game machine is applied to the pachinko machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be applied, and even in this case, the same effects as those described above can be obtained.

In the above-described embodiment, the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 has the first button decorative portion 411a formed on the inner peripheral side of the button frame 412. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, the button lens 411 without the first button decorative portion 411a may be used.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the operation button 410 has the opaque button frame 412 attached to the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411 . A decorative portion for hiding the rear side may be formed along the entire circumference at a portion of the lens 411 corresponding to the button frame 412 .

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, in the operation button 410, the base unit 430 (the second Although the button base 413 (main body portion 413a) protruding cylindrically toward the second base unit 450) side is shown, it is not limited to this, and the decorative member 432 inside the operation button and the second effect on the door frame side are shown. At least one may protrude toward the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) so as to partially surround the entire outer periphery of the display device 460A. The shape of the button base 413 may be a shape that follows the outer circumference of the button lens 411 or a shape that does not follow the outer circumference of the button lens 411 . The button base 413 may have decorations (planar decorations such as pasting stickers or printing, or three-dimensional decorations such as reliefs) on the inner wall side. Furthermore, the button base 413 may be translucent or opaque. Also, the button base 413 may be colored or may be colorless and transparent. Also, when the button base 413 is transparent, it is desirable that at least one of the inner wall side and the outer wall side is subjected to light diffusion processing such as embossing, slits, prisms, and the like.

In addition, in the above embodiment, an example in which the lower plate 322 is recessed rearward only from the left outer portion of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 is shown. but not limited to, recessed backward from both left and right sides of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A), and a lower plate that is connected to each other behind the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) 322 may be used, and only the portion on the right outside of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) is recessed rearward, and a part of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) wraps around to the rear. You can let it be.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the shape of the portion (front lower decorative portion 326c) of the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 where the lower plate 322 is recessed rearward (the shape of the front end of the lower plate 322) is curved rearward. Although an example of a concave shape is shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and the front surface may be concave like a polygonal prism or a polyhedron.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, an example in which the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is attached to the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this. , ``equipped with a rotating body having a decoration on its surface,'' ``equipped with a decoration with a decoration and a movable device for moving the decoration,'' and ``a game Equipped with decorations that three-dimensionally imitate characters, items, logos, and scenes (diorama), etc., in accordance with the machine concept; You may attach members, such as a unit or a panel provided with decorations, such as , by a seal, printing, etc., etc. Moreover, the member attached to the attachment space 326j (the performance operation unit attachment portion 326a) does not have to be one, and a plurality of (two or more) members may be attached. For example, separate members may be attached, such as a member attached to the upper half of the attachment space 326j and a member attached to the lower half of the attachment space 326j.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the plate unit cover 326 is provided with the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a that opens forward for mounting the effect operation unit 400 (the second effect operation unit 400A). However, the plate unit cover (for example, a panel-shaped cover portion) that does not have an opening (effect operation unit mounting portion 326a) for mounting the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) A space corresponding to the mounting space 326j (or the remaining space of the mounting space 326j) may be formed behind the plate unit cover. It should be noted that the front surface of such a plate unit cover is desirably decorated with characters, items, logos, predetermined patterns, etc. in line with the concept of the gaming machine by stickers, printing, attachment of decorative members, or the like. .

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, an area slightly larger than half of the storage area (storage area) of the game balls in the plan view of the lower plate 322 is covered by the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) as a cover. Although an example is shown in which it is difficult to see from the front, the present invention is not limited to this. The entire plate 322 may be made invisible from the front.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the second button decorative portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 are arranged in an arc shape partially in the circumferential direction. , and the second button decorative portion 411b and the frame side lens 417 may be formed in an annular shape extending over the entire circumference.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, as the second button inner decorative portion 432g of the operation button inner decorative member 432 in the effect operation unit 400, a decoration having a plurality of concentric polygons centered on the center is shown. The decoration is not limited to this, and the second inner button decoration portion 432g may be a decoration having a plurality of concentric circles (including ovals) centering on the center.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, through the transparent button lens 411 (front member) of the operation button 410, the operation button inner decorative member 432, the door frame side effect display device 460, and the door frame side second effect are arranged on the rear side. Although the rear member such as the display device 460A is shown to be visible at all times, it is not limited to this. may be provided with a variable light transmission means that allows the rear side to be visually recognized by satisfying the above. Here, as the variable light transmission means, there are ``things like a magic mirror which makes the rear side visible due to the difference in brightness between the front side and the rear side'', and ``things like a liquid crystal film which are transparent by turning on/off the power supply. or become opaque so that the rear side can be visually recognized”, and the like. In addition, the front member and the rear member may be relatively movable, or relatively non-movable.

At least one of the front member and the rear member has a variable light transmission means, so that only the front member or the front member and the rear member are visible in a normal state, The decoration of the visible member can be shown to the player. In a special state, by satisfying a predetermined condition, a rear member (a rear member or a member arranged behind the rear member) that cannot be seen in a normal state can be seen. A member and a back member, or a front member, a back member and a member behind the back member can show overlapping decorations. Therefore, the front member and the rear member can be used to show various decorations (decorative effects) to the player, making it difficult for the player to get bored and entertaining the player. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest in.

More specifically, for example, when the front member has a variable light transmitting means such as a magic mirror, in a normal state, only the front member is decorated by darkening the rear side of the front member. It can be visually recognized by the player. Then, when the space between the front member and the rear member or the rear side of the rear member is brightened by light from a light emitting part such as an LED, the conditions for satisfying the variable light transmitting means in the front member are satisfied, and the rear member passes through the front member. The member can be visually recognized, and the player can see the decoration in which the decoration of the front member and the decoration of the rear member are superimposed.

Alternatively, if the front member is transparent and the rear member has variable light transmitting means such as a magic mirror, the surface of the rear member can be seen through the front member in a normal state. A player can be shown the surface and decoration of the . When the rear side of the rear member is brightened with light from a light-emitting portion such as an LED, the conditions for satisfying the variable light transmission means in the rear member are satisfied, and the rear side can be visually recognized through the rear member. Through the member, the member on the rear side of the rear member (for example, a display device, a decoration such as a character) can be seen by the player.

Furthermore, when both the front member and the rear member have variable light transmission means such as a magic mirror, in a normal state, only the decoration of the front member can be seen by the player, When the space between the rear member and the rear member is brightened by light emitted from a light-emitting portion such as an LED, the condition for satisfying the variable light transmitting means in the front member is satisfied, and the surface of the rear member becomes visible through the front member. The decoration by the rear member can be shown to the player. On the other hand, the rear side of the rear member is brightened by the light emitted from the LED or the like (or the space between the front member and the rear member and the rear side of the rear member are simultaneously brightened by the light emitted from the LED or the like). ), and the conditions for satisfying the variable light transmitting means in the front and rear members are satisfied, respectively, and the member behind the rear member (for example, a display device, a decoration such as a character) through the front member and the rear member. can be shown to the player. Accordingly, by appropriately selecting the portion to be brightened by the light of the light emitting portion, the visible range can be changed in multiple stages, and the player can enjoy various decorations.

In the above specific example, since the variable light transmission means is like a magic mirror, it looks like a mirror when the rear side is darkened. A glittering decoration can be shown to the player.

Also, in the above specific example, the variable light transmitting means is explained as something like a magic mirror. In addition, if a liquid crystal film or the like is used as the variable light transmission means, it can transmit light even in an opaque state (it has translucency). If the rear side of the member can be brightened (or decorated with light emission) by the light of the light emitting part such as the LED, the player can see more various effects such as light emission effects and decoration effects. .

[7. Main control board, payout control board and peripheral control board]
Next, the control board for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 74. FIG. FIG. 69 is a block diagram of the main control board, payout control board and peripheral control board, FIG. 70 is a block diagram showing the continuation of FIG. 69, and FIG. FIG. 72 is a block diagram showing the continuation of FIG. 69, and FIG. 73 is a schematic diagram of various detection signals input and output to the game ball rental device connection terminal board that relays the electrical connection with the display board. FIG. 74 is a block diagram showing an outline of a peripheral control MPU, and FIG. 74 is a block diagram around a sound source built-in VDP in a liquid crystal display control section.

The pachinko machine 1, as its control configuration, as shown in FIG. 69, in addition to the process of generating the control power supply (for example, +5V, etc.), the first control unit MCG that controls the game including the payout of prize balls. , and a second control unit SCG that performs effects related to the game progressed by the first control unit MCG.

More specifically, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment employs a structure in which various controls are shared by preparing a plurality of boards. , a payout control board 951, and a power supply board 931, and a peripheral control board 1510 is provided as the second control unit SCG. Hereinafter, in explaining the control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the main control board 1310, the payout control board 951, and the power supply board 931 are explained in this order. 2 The control unit SCG (peripheral control board 1510) will be described.

[7-1. Main control board]
Of the first control unit MCG, the main control board 1310, which controls the progress of the game, controls power-on processing that is executed when the power is turned on as shown in FIG. A main control MPU 1310a, which is a microprocessor that stores various control programs such as a main control program that controls game operations, a ROM that stores various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, etc., and various A main control input circuit 1310b to which the detection signal from the detection switch is input, a main control output circuit 1310c for outputting various signals to an external board or the like, and a main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d for driving various solenoids. , and a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e that monitors signs of a power failure or momentary power failure of a predetermined voltage.

The main control MPU 1310a includes a built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in RAM") and a built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in ROM"). In addition, a watchdog timer 1310af (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in WDT 1310af") for monitoring the operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud are also built-in.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a incorporates a non-volatile RAM. This non-volatile RAM pre-stores a unique ID code assigned by the manufacturer of the main control MPU 1310a to identify the individual (a unique code that exists only in the world). Since the ID code assigned once is stored in a non-volatile RAM, it cannot be rewritten using an external device. The main control MPU 1310a can retrieve the ID code from the nonvolatile RAM and refer to it.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a includes a hardware random number circuit 1310an (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in A hard random number circuit 1310an” is built in. The main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an generates a random number within a predetermined numerical range (in this embodiment, a numerical range of 0 as the minimum value to 32767 as the maximum value is preset), A predetermined value is not fixed as an initial value (that is, the initial value is not fixed), and the circuit is configured so that a different value is set each time the main control MPU 1310a is reset. Specifically, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an first sets a value within a predetermined numerical range as an initial value to a clock signal ( Based on a clock signal output from a main control crystal oscillator (to be described later), other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another without overlapping at high speed, and all values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted. When finished, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and other values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a without duplication. Extract one after another. The main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an repeats such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU 1310a wins the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an at the time of acquiring the value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an. It is set as a random number for judgment.

The main control input circuit 1310b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information to which detection signals from various detection switches are respectively input to its various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the main control input circuit 1310b is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset, which will be described later, is not input. In other words, in the main control input circuit 1310b, the information based on the detection signals from the various detection switches input to the various input terminals is not reset by the main control system reset described later, so that the various signals based on the information It is configured as a circuit output from an output terminal.

The main control output circuit 1310c is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded (GND). A main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function having a reset terminal provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the received information, and a main control output circuit without a reset function 1310cb having no reset terminal and not having a reset function. and consists of The main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset, which will be described later, is input. That is, the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function resets the information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external board or the like by resetting the main control system described later. is configured as a circuit in which no signal based on is output from its various output terminals. On the other hand, the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset, which will be described later, is not input. In other words, the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb does not reset the information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external board or the like by the main control system reset described later. It is configured as a circuit that outputs signals based on it from its various output terminals.

As shown in FIG. 60, a first starting hole sensor 4002 that detects a game ball entering the first starting hole 2002, a second starting hole sensor 4004 that detects a game ball entering the second starting hole 2004, and general A detection signal from the general winning hole sensor 4020 that detects a game ball that has entered the winning hole 2001 and a signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e are sent to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b. is entered in 60, a gate sensor 4003 for detecting a game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2003, a count sensor 4005 for detecting a game ball that has entered the big winning opening 2005, and the back unit 3000 shown in FIG. A detection signal from a magnetism detection sensor 4024 attached to detect fraudulent activity using a magnet is supplied to a panel relay board 4161 attached to the game board 5, and a predetermined input of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b. Input to the input terminal of the port.

The main control MPU 1310a outputs a drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca based on the detection signal from each of these switches. 1310ca outputs a control signal to the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, and outputs a drive signal from the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d to the starter solenoid 2107 and the attacker solenoid 2108 via the panel relay board 4161, or outputs a drive signal to the predetermined output port. By outputting a drive signal to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function from the output terminal of the first special symbol display device 1403 via the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, the panel relay board 4161, and the function display unit 1400 , Second special symbol indicator 1405, first special reservation number indicator 1404, second special reservation number indicator 1406, normal symbol indicator 1402, state indicator 1401, and round indicator 1407 or output a drive signal do.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a outputs various information (game information) about the game from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function, thereby controlling payout from the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function. By outputting various information (game information) related to the game to the board 951 or outputting a signal (power failure clear signal) from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 1310ca with the reset function, the main control with the reset function A signal (power failure clear signal) is output from the control output circuit 1310ca to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e.

In this embodiment, non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switches are used for the first start sensor 4002, the second start sensor 4004, the gate sensor 4003, and the count sensor 4005. For the general winning hole sensors 4020, 4020, contact type ON/OFF mechanical switches are used. This is because the game ball frequently enters the first starting hole 2002 and the second starting hole 2004 and frequently passes through the gate part 2003, so the first starting hole sensor 4002, the second starting hole sensor 4004, and Detection of game balls by the gate sensor 4003 also occurs frequently. For this reason, long-life proximity switches are used for the first starter sensor 4002, the second starter sensor 4004, and the gate sensor 4003. FIG. Also, when a big winning game state that is advantageous to the player occurs, the big winning opening 2005 is opened and the game balls enter frequently, so the detection of the game balls by the count sensor 4005 also occurs frequently. For this reason, the count sensor 4005 also uses a long-life proximity switch. On the other hand, in general winning openings 2001 and 2201 into which game balls do not enter frequently, detection by general winning opening sensors 4020 and 4020 does not occur frequently. For this reason, the general prize winning opening sensors 4020, 4020 use mechanical switches that have a shorter life than the proximity switches.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands related to payout as serial data from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function, thereby controlling payout from the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function. Various commands are transmitted to the substrate 951 as serial data. When the payout control board 951 completes normal reception of various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, it outputs to the main control board 1310 a signal (payer ACK signal) to that effect. This signal (payer ACK signal) is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a receives various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 951 as serial data at the main control input circuit 1310b, thereby inputting the predetermined serial input port from the main control input circuit 1310b. Various commands are received as serial data at the terminal. When the main control MPU 1310a completes normal reception of various commands from the payout control board 951 as serial data, it sends a signal (main pay ACK signal) to that effect from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output with a reset function. It outputs to the circuit 1310ca, and outputs a signal (main payment ACK signal) to the payout control board 951 from the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands related to the control of the game effect and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 as serial data from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 1310cb without the reset function. , various commands are transmitted as serial data to the peripheral control board 1510 from the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function.

Here, the main peripheral serial transmission port for transmitting various commands to the peripheral control board 1510 as serial data will be briefly described. The main control MPU 1310a is configured around a main control CPU core 1310aa, and in addition to the main control built-in RAM, the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae, which is one of the main control serial I/O ports, etc., are connected to the bus 1310ah. (See FIG. 79). The main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae transmits various commands as main peripheral serial data to the peripheral control board 1510, and mainly includes a transmission shift register 1310aea, a transmission buffer register 1310aeb, a serial management unit 1310aec, etc. (Fig. 79). The main control CPU core 1310aa sets a command in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb and outputs a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 1310aec. It is transferred to the transmission shift register 1310aea to start transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data. In this embodiment, the transmission buffer register 1310aeb has a storage capacity of 32 bytes. The main control CPU core 1310aa continuously transmits multiple commands to the peripheral control board 1510 by outputting a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 1310aec after setting multiple commands in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb.

The power supply board 931 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 has an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as "capacitor") as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined period of time even when the power is cut off. ) and BC0 (see FIG. 75). This capacitor BC0 allows the main control MPU 1310a to store various types of information in the main control built-in RAM even when the power is cut off during power cutoff processing. Various information stored in the main control built-in RAM is an operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 954 when an operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 described later is operated within a predetermined period from power on. Is output from the payout control board 951, through the main control input circuit 1310b, is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the main control MPU1310a, and is completely erased from the main control built-in RAM by the main control MPU1310a (cleared).

[7-2. Payout control board]
Out of the first control unit MCG, a payout control board 951 for controlling the payout of game balls, etc. includes a payout control unit 952 for performing various controls related to payout, and an operation switch 954 for performing various functions. and an error LED indicator 860b for displaying the status of the pachinko machine 1. In addition, the operation switch 954, which also functions as a RAM clear switch, controls the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in RAM") based on the detection signal output by being operated. .) outputs a RAM clear signal to completely erase the information stored in the memory.

[7-2-1. Payout control unit]
As shown in FIG. 70, a payout control unit 952 that performs various controls related to payout controls power-on processing that is executed when the power is turned on, and also controls the payout of game media that is executed after a predetermined time has passed since the power is turned on. A payout control MPU 952a, which is a microprocessor containing various control programs including a payout control program that controls operations, a ROM that stores various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, etc., and detection from various detection switches related to payout A payout control input circuit 952b for inputting signals, a payout control output circuit 952c for outputting various signals to an external board or the like, and a payout motor drive circuit for outputting drive signals to the payout motor 834 of the payout device 830. 952 d and a CR unit input/output circuit 952 e for exchanging various signals with the CR unit 6 . The payout control MPU 952a includes a built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as "payout control built-in RAM") and a built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as "payout control built-in ROM"). It also has a built-in watchdog timer that monitors its operation (system) and a function to prevent fraud.

Under the control of the payout control MPU 952a, the payout control program receives various information (game information) about the game from the main control board 1310 and various commands about the payout through the payout control input circuit 952b, respectively, as a main payment serial data reception signal. to receive serial data. In addition, the payout control program generates a frame state 1 command (corresponding to the first error occurrence command) when an error occurs in the game ball payout operation, and operates the operation switch 954 as an error cancellation unit. A 16-bit (2-byte) error cancellation navigation command (corresponding to the first error cancellation command) is created based on the signal (detection signal), and these error generation commands and error cancellation navigation commands are sent as serial data to the payer. As a signal, serial data is output to the reception port of the main control board 1310 via the payout control I/O port 952b (command transmission means). In addition, this payout control program, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power is turned on, that is, after the payout control unit main process is executed or the payout control unit timer interrupt process is executed to start payout control, the payout When an operation error occurs, the error is canceled based on the detection signal generated by the operation of the operation switch 954, and the output of warning information corresponding to the error is stopped (error cancellation control means).

In addition, this payout control program outputs a door frame open command (first door open command) when a detection signal (door frame open detection signal) associated with the opening operation is input from the door frame open switch 618. , when a detection signal (body frame open detection signal) accompanying the opening operation is input from the body frame open switch 619, a body frame open command (first body frame open command) is output. On the other hand, this payout control program issues a door frame closing command (first door frame closing command) when a detection signal (door frame closing detection signal) associated with the closing operation is input from the door frame opening switch 618. When the body frame open switch 619 receives a detection signal (body frame closing detection signal) associated with the closing operation, it outputs a body frame closing command (first body frame closing command).

The payout control input circuit 952b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the information that the detection signals from the various detection switches are input to its various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the payout control input circuit 952b is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset, which will be described later, is not input. That is, the payout control input circuit 952b does not reset the information based on the detection signals from the various detection switches input to the various input terminals by the payout control system reset described later, so that the various signals based on the information It is configured as a circuit output from an output terminal.

The payout control output circuit 952c is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external substrate etc. are input to its various input terminals. A payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca having a reset function provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the received information, and a payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb having no reset terminal and having no reset function. and consists of The payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset, which will be described later, is input. That is, the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function resets the information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external board or the like by the payout control system reset described later. is configured as a circuit in which no signals based on are output from its various output terminals. On the other hand, the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset, which will be described later, is not input. In other words, the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb does not reset the information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external board or the like by the payout control system reset described later. It is configured as a circuit that outputs signals based on it from its various output terminals.

A ball run-out detection sensor 827 for detecting the running out of game balls in the supply passage of the ball guiding unit 820 of the payout unit 800, and a payout detection sensor 842 for detecting game balls released from payout outlets 831b and 832b of the payout device 830. A detection signal from a blade rotation detection sensor 840 that detects the rotation of the payout blade 839 is inputted to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a through a payout control input circuit 952b. Note that, for the sake of explanation later, the blade rotation detection sensor 840 is simply referred to as the rotation detection sensor 840 in this specification.

Detection signals from the door frame open switch 618 for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and the main body frame open switch 619 for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are applied to the payout control input circuit 952b. input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

Further, a detection signal from a full tank detection sensor 279 for detecting whether or not the storage space of the foul cover unit 270 shown in FIG. It is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the board 931 and the payout control input circuit 952b.

The payout control MPU 952a receives various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 via the payout control input circuit 952b in the form of serial data at the input terminal of its serial input port, and receives an operation signal (detection command) of the operation switch 954. signal) is output to the main control board 1310 via the payout control input circuit 952b. When the payout control MPU 952a completes normal reception of various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, it outputs a payout control signal with a reset function from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. By outputting to the circuit 952ca, a signal (payer ACK signal) is output to the main control board 1310 from the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function.

In addition, the payout control MPU 952a transmits various commands for indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 as serial data from the output terminal of the serial output port to the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb. Various commands are transmitted from the output circuit 952cb to the main control board 1310 as serial data.
When the main control board 1310 completes normal reception of various commands from the payout control board 951 as serial data, it outputs a signal (main payout ACK signal) to the payout control board 951 to that effect. This signal (primary payment ACK signal) is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a through the payout control input circuit 952b.

In addition, the payout control MPU 952a outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 834 to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. Outputs a drive signal from the payout motor drive circuit 952d to the payout motor drive circuit 952d, outputs a drive signal from the payout motor drive circuit 952d to the payout motor 834, or outputs the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the error LED indicator By outputting the drive signal for displaying on 860b to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, the drive signal is outputted from the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function to the error LED indicator 860b.

The error LED indicator 860b is a segment indicator, and displays the status of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters, graphics, and the like. Contents displayed and notified by the error LED indicator 860b include the following. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it is notified that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it is notified that it is "abnormal connection" (specifically, the main control board 1310 and It informs that there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the board with the payout control board 951), and when the number "1" is displayed, it means that the ball is out (specifically, the ball is out) Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 827, it informs that there are no game balls in the supply passage of the dispensing device 830), and when the number "2" is displayed, it means that "ball is caught" (specifically, Based on the detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840, the payout rotator and the game ball are engaged near the entrance of the distribution space communicating with the supply passage of the payout device 830, and the payout rotator becomes difficult to rotate. ), and when the number "3" is displayed, it indicates that it is a "payout detection sensor error" is occurring), and when the number "5" is displayed, it indicates that it is a "retry error" (specifically, that the number of retries for the dispensing operation has reached a preset upper limit). is displayed, and when the number "6" is displayed, it indicates that the tank is "full" (specifically, based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279, the storage space of the foul cover unit 270 is stored). game balls are full), and when the number "7" is displayed, it is "CR not connected" (electrical connection from payout control board 951 to CR unit 6) is disconnected), and when the number "9" is displayed, it is "in stock (with prize ball stock (not paid out))" (specifically, game balls that have not yet been paid out has reached the predetermined number of balls).

In addition, the payout control MPU 952a outputs the number of game balls actually put out from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function. , the number of game balls actually put out is output to the external terminal plate 784 via a resistor (not shown).

In addition, the payout control board 951 outputs various information (game information) regarding the game from the main control board 1310 to the external terminal board 784 via a resistor (not shown). The external terminal plate 784 is provided with a plurality of photocouplers (not shown) (infrared LED and photo IC built-in). ), the number of game balls and various information (game information, contents of errors related to the payout operation of game balls, or the fact that there was an error) are communicated to the hall computer installed in the hall computer.
The external terminal board 784 and the hall computer are in a state of being electrically insulated by a plurality of photocouplers. It is designed to prevent the computer from malfunctioning or breaking down, and the main control board 1310 that advances the game from the hall computer via the external terminal board 784 of the pachinko machine 1 and the payout control board 951 that controls payout etc. It is designed not to malfunction or break down due to application of abnormal voltage. The hall computer monitors the game played by the player by grasping the number of game balls put out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加

A game ball lending request signal from the ball lending button 328 and a prepaid card return requesting signal from the return button 329 are first sent to the frequency display plate 365, the main door relay terminal plate 880, and then the game ball lending device connection terminal plate. 869 to the CR unit 6. The CR unit 6 transmits a signal designating the number of game balls to be rented in accordance with the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 951 via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869 in a serial manner. It is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the input/output circuit 952e. In addition, the CR unit 6 updates the remaining amount of the prepaid card inserted according to the number of rented game balls, and sends a signal for displaying the remaining amount on the ball lending/returning display unit 330. This signal is output to the lending device connection terminal plate 869 , the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the frequency display plate 365 , and this signal is input to the ball lending/returning display section 330 . In addition, the CR unit lamp 365d adjacent to the ball lending/returning display section 330 receives the supply voltage from the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880. ing.

In addition, the power supply board 931 that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 951 has a capacitor BC1 (see FIG. 75) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the payout control board 951 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. there is Due to this capacitor BC1, the payout control MPU 952a can store various information in the payout control built-in RAM (payout storage unit) in the power-off processing even when the power is cut off. Various information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, when the operation switch 954 is operated within a predetermined period after the power is turned on, the operation signal is transmitted through the payout control input circuit 952b to the payout control MPU 952a. It is input to the input terminal of the input port, and the payout control MPU 952a judges it as a RAM clear signal for completely erasing the information stored in the payout control built-in RAM. It is designed to be completely erased (cleared). This operation signal (RAM clear signal) is output to the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb, and is also output to the main control board 1310 from the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb.

[7-2-2. Exchanging various signals with the connection terminal board for rental equipment such as game balls]
Here, exchange of various signals between the payout control section 952 and the CR unit 6 and exchange of various signals between the CR unit 6 and the frequency display plate 365 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 71, the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 not only relays the electrical connection between the CR unit 6 and the payout control board 951, but also connects the CR unit 6 and the frequency display plate 365. (To be exact, the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 is electrically connected to the frequency display plate 365 via the main door relay terminal plate 880. , the CR unit 6 and the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 are electrically connected, the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880 are electrically connected, and the main door relay The terminal plate 880 and the degree display plate 365 are electrically connected). Between the board between the CR unit 6 and the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, between the board between the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the payout control board 951, between the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay The terminal plate 880 and the substrates, and the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and the frequency display plate 365 are electrically connected by respective wirings (harnesses). AC 24 V, which will be described later, is supplied from the power supply board 931 to the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 . The CR unit 6 generates a predetermined voltage VL (in this embodiment, DC +12V (DC+12V, hereinafter referred to as "+12V")) from the supplied AC 24V by a built-in voltage generating circuit (not shown), and generates the voltage together with the ground LG. , to the payout control board 951 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 , and to the frequency display plate 365 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880 . .

A ball lending button 328, which is a push button switch, is mounted on the part surface of the frequency display plate 365 at a position corresponding to the ball lending button 328, and a push button switch is mounted at a position corresponding to the returning button 329 of the ball lending unit 360. A return button 329 is mounted, and a ball rental/return display section 330 as a segment display is mounted at a position corresponding to the remaining rental display section 363 of the rental ball unit 360 .

The ball lending button 328 and return button 329 are electrically connected to the ground LG from the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880 . When the ball lending button 328 is pressed, the ball lending button 328 is switched on (ON), and the ball lending operation signal TDS from the ball lending button 328 is transmitted to the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game. It is designed to be input to the CR unit 6 via a ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 . When the return button 329 is pressed, the return button 329 is switched on (ON), and the return operation signal RES from the return button 329 is connected to the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the game ball rental device. Input is made to the CR unit 6 via the terminal board 869 .

The ball lending/returning display unit 330 is composed of three segment displays arranged in a row, and the segment displays of the three digits are sequentially driven one by one by a so-called dynamic lighting method. The lighting of the digit segment indicators is controlled. With such lighting control, the ball lending/returning display section 330 displays the balance of the prepaid card inserted in the CR unit 6 or displays an error in the CR unit 6 . The ball rental/return display unit 330 includes digit signals DG0 to DG2 (three signals in total) for designating a single-digit segment display out of three-digit segment displays, and the designated single-digit segment display. segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G (7 signals in total) for designating the contents to be displayed by lighting the CR unit 6 to the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal When input through the plate 880, the 1-digit segment displays are sequentially illuminated according to the input digit signals DG0 to DG2 and segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G, and these 3-digit segment displays are displayed. The contents of the luminescence of the vessel can be visually recognized through the remaining lending display portion 363 .

A CR unit lamp 365 d is mounted on the degree display plate 365 adjacent to the ball lending/returning display section 330 . A predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is input to the CR unit lamp 365 d via a game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and a main door relay terminal plate 880 . A predetermined voltage VL is input to the CR unit 6 as a ball lendable signal TDL through a current limiting resistor mounted on a game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 via a CR unit lamp 365d. The CR unit 6 creates a predetermined voltage VL from AC 24 V supplied from the power supply board 931 with a built-in voltage creation circuit, and when the ball lending button 328 and the return button 329 are valid and the ball lending state is possible controls the logic of the ball lendable signal TDL to cause the CR unit lamp 365d to emit light. Further, the segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G are input to the ball lending/returning display section 330 through the current limiting resistance mounted on the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 .

In the CR unit 6, the ball lending button 328 is pressed and the ball lending operation signal TDS from the ball lending button 328 is sent from the frequency display plate 365 through the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. When input, the ball rental request signal BRDY is output to the payout control board 951 (payout control MPU 952a) through the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869. Then, the CR unit 6 issues a single payout operation start request signal for paying out a predetermined number of rental balls (in this embodiment, 25 balls, which is equivalent to 100 yen as an amount) in one payout operation. BRQ is output to the payout control board 951 (payout control MPU 952a) through the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869. The payout control board 951 (payout control MPU 952a) to which BRDY and BRQ are input, outputs EXS, which is a signal for notifying the start or end of one payout operation, to the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869. to output to the CR unit 6, and PRDY, which is a signal to notify that the payout operation for paying out the rental balls is possible or impossible, is sent to the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869 to the CR unit 6. For example, if the hall clerk or the like has set the CR unit 6 in advance so that game balls worth 200 yen are paid out when the ball lending button 328 is pressed, one payout operation is performed. is performed twice in a row, and when 25 balls worth 100 yen are paid out, 25 balls worth 100 yen will be paid out, and a total of 50 balls worth 200 yen will be paid out. Become.

In the CR unit 6, when the return button 329 is pressed, the return operation signal RES from the return button 329 is input from the frequency display plate 365 through the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869. Then, the prepaid card is ejected from an insertion slot (not shown) and returned. The returned prepaid card stores the balance after subtracting the amount corresponding to the number of game balls paid out as a result of pressing the ball lending button 328 .

[7-3. Power supply board 931]
Next, the power board 931 of the first control unit MCG will be briefly described. The power board 931 includes a power switch 934 that can electrically connect or disconnect 24 volts AC (24 VAC) supplied from the pachinko island facility, and a power control unit 935 that generates various power sources. , and a shooting control section 953 for performing shooting control by the shooting solenoid 682 of the ball shooting device 650 shown in FIG. 5 and ball feeding control by the ball feeding solenoid 255 of the ball feeding unit 250 shown in FIG.

[7-3-1. Power control section]
The power control unit 935 operates a power switch 934 to operate a synchronous rectification circuit 935a that rectifies 24 volts AC (24V AC) supplied from the pachinko island facility, and improves the power factor of the power rectified by the synchronous rectification circuit 935a. A power factor correction circuit 935b, a smoothing circuit 935c for smoothing the power whose power factor has been improved by the power factor correction circuit 935b, and various direct currents to be supplied to various substrates from the power smoothed by the smoothing circuit 935c. and a power generation circuit 935d for generating power.

[7-3-2. Launch control unit]
A firing control section 953 that performs firing control by the firing solenoid 682 and ball feeding control by the ball feeding solenoid 255 mainly includes a firing control circuit 953a. The shooting control circuit 953a receives an operation signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 307 that electrically adjusts the intensity (shooting intensity) at which the game ball is shot toward the game area 5a according to the rotational position of the handle 302, A detection signal from the handle touch sensor 310 that detects whether or not a finger is touching, and a single-shot button operation sensor 312 that detects whether or not the launch (shooting) of the game ball is forcibly stopped by the player's will. , and are inputted via the handle relay terminal board 315 . In addition, when the CR unit 6 and the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 are electrically connected to the launch control circuit 953a, a CR connection signal is input via the payout control board 951 to notify that effect. .

The shooting control circuit 953a adjusts the drive current for launching (shooting) the game ball toward the game area 5a based on the operation signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 307, and controls the output to the shooting solenoid 682. On the other hand, by outputting a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 255 via the handle relay terminal plate 315, the ball feeding member of the ball feeding unit 250 receives one game ball stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320, Control is performed to send the game ball received by the ball sending member to the batted ball launching device 650 side.

[7-4. Peripheral control board]
For such a first control unit MCG, the peripheral control board 1510 of the second control unit SCG performs performance control based on various commands from the main control board 1310 as shown in FIG. 19, a performance display drive board 4450 for drawing the display area of the door frame side performance display device 460, a peripheral control unit 1511 for exchanging control commands and various information (various data), a game board side performance display device 1600 and a door. While performing drawing control of the frame side effect display device 460, a liquid crystal display control unit 1512 performing sound control such as music and sound effects flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, calendar information specifying the date and time A real-time clock (hereinafter referred to as "RTC") control unit 4165 that holds time information specifying seconds, and the volume of music, sound effects, etc. flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 are controlled by rotating the knob. and a volume adjustment volume 1510a that is adjusted by operation.

[7-4-1. Peripheral control unit]
As shown in FIG. 72, the peripheral control unit 1511, which performs performance control, controls the peripheral control MPU 1511a as a microprocessor and the power-on processing that is executed when the power is turned on. Peripheral control ROM 1511b for storing various control programs such as sub-control programs that are executed and control performance operations, various data, various control data and various schedule data, Various information that continues across the peripheral control unit steady-state processing that is executed each time a blank signal is input (for example, schedule data that defines the screen to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600, light emission modes of various LEDs, etc. and information for managing the schedule data that defines the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and various information that continues over the day (for example, information for managing the history of occurrence of the jackpot game state and special A peripheral control SRAM 1511d for storing information for managing performance flags, etc.) and a peripheral control external watchdog timer 1511e (hereinafter referred to as "peripheral control external WDT 1511e") for monitoring whether the peripheral control MPU 1511a is operating normally ”.) and are provided.

The peripheral control RAM 1511c can retain the stored contents only for a period of time when the power is restored immediately after an instantaneous power failure occurs, and the power is cut off for a long time (when the power is cut off for a long time). ), the peripheral control SRAM 1511d loses its contents, whereas the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is supplied with backup power by a large-capacity electrolytic capacitor (not shown) provided on the power supply board 931 (hereinafter referred to as "SRAM electrolytic capacitor"). As a result, the stored contents can be held for about 50 hours. By providing an SRAM electrolytic capacitor on the power supply board 931, when the game board 5 is removed from the pachinko machine 1, backup power is not supplied to the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. It loses its contents as it can no longer be held.

The peripheral control external WDT 1511e is a timer for monitoring whether the system of the peripheral control MPU 1511a is running out of control. When this timer expires, it is reset by hardware. That is, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset when it does not output a clear signal for clearing the timer of the peripheral control external WDT 1511e to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e within a certain period (until the timer expires). When the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e within a certain period, the timer count of the peripheral control external WDT 1511e can be restarted, so the reset is not applied.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a incorporates a plurality of parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, etc. When various commands are received from the main control board 1310, each decoration board of the game board 5 is controlled based on these various commands. The game board side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals or gradation lighting signals to multiple LEDs etc. The game board side motor drive data for transmitting to the drive board 4170 and for outputting drive signals to electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids that operate various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 are sent to the motor drive board serial Door-side motor drive for transmitting from the I/O port to the motor drive board 4180 via the peripheral control output circuit, or for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as the dial drive motor 414 provided on the door frame 3 Data is transmitted from the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the peripheral control output circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. Peripheral control output of door-side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals or gradation lighting signals to the plurality of LEDs etc. provided on each decoration board in 3 from the serial I/O port for the frame decoration driving amplifier board LED It is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 .

Various commands from the main control board 1310 are input to the main control board serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown). Also, a detection signal from a rotation detection switch for detecting the rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401 provided in the effect operation unit 400 and a press detection switch for detecting the operation of the press operation unit 405 is serialized by a door-side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the frame decoration driving amplifier board 194, and the serialized performance operation unit detection data is transmitted from the door-side serial transmission circuit to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882. , the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the peripheral control input circuit, are input to the serial I/O port for detecting the performance operation unit of the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

Detection signals from various detection switches (for example, photo sensors) for detecting the original positions and movable positions of various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 are sent to the game board side (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180 . Serialized by the serial transmission circuit, this serialized movable body detection data is input from the game board side serial transmission circuit through the peripheral control input circuit to the serial I/O port for the motor drive board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. there is The peripheral control MPU 1511a exchanges various data between the peripheral control board 1510 and the motor drive board 4180 by switching the input/output of the serial I/O port for the motor drive board.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a has a built-in watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as "peripheral control built-in WDT"). It is diagnosed whether or not

[7-4-1a. Peripheral control MPU]
Next, the peripheral control MPU 1511a, which is a microcomputer, will be described. As shown in FIG. 73, the peripheral control MPU 1511a comprises a peripheral control CPU core 1511aa, a peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, a peripheral control DMA (abbreviation of Direct Memory Access) controller 1511ac, a peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and various peripheral control serial I/O controllers. /O port 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, peripheral control analog/digital converter (hereinafter referred to as peripheral control A/D converter) 1511ak, and the like.

The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa reads/writes various data from/to the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab and the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac via the internal bus 1511ah. Various data are read from and written to the peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag and the peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai.

The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa reads various data from the peripheral control ROM 1511b via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the external bus 1511h. It reads and writes various data via an internal bus 1511ah, a peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and an external bus 1511h.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac includes storage devices such as a peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, a peripheral control ROM 1511b, a peripheral control RAM 1511c, and a peripheral control SRAM 1511d. /O port 1511ag and peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak and other input/output devices, without going through the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa. to DMA3.

Specifically, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac includes a storage device of a peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab built into the peripheral control MPU 1511a, a peripheral control various serial I/O port 1511ae built into the peripheral control MPU 1511a, and a peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af. , peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak, and other input/output devices, without going through the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa, to transfer data independently. In addition, while reading and writing the storage device of the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab via the internal bus 1511ah, peripheral control various serial I/O ports 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, and It reads and writes from/to an input/output device such as a peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak via a peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and a peripheral bus 1511ai.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac includes storage devices such as a peripheral control ROM 1511b, a peripheral control RAM 1511c, and a peripheral control SRAM 1511d, which are externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a. Between input/output devices such as O port 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, and peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak, without going through the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa, In order to transfer data independently, the peripheral control ROM 1511b, the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d are read and written via the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and the external bus 1511h. Serial I/O port 1511ae, WDT 1511af with built-in peripheral control, peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak, and other input/output devices are connected via peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and peripheral bus 1511ai. to read and write.

A peripheral control bus controller 1511ad controls an internal bus 1511ah, a peripheral bus 1511ai, and an external bus 1511h to control a central processing unit of a peripheral control MPU core 1511aa, a peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, a peripheral control ROM 1511b, a peripheral control RAM 1511c, and a peripheral control RAM 1511c. Storage devices such as SRAM 1511d, input/output devices such as peripheral control serial I/O ports 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, peripheral control parallel I/O ports 1511ag, and peripheral control A/D converters 1511ak It is a dedicated controller that exchanges various data between them.

Peripheral control serial I/O ports 1511ae are serial I/O port for lamp drive board, serial I/O port for motor drive board, serial I/O port for frame decoration drive amplifier board motor, frame decoration drive amplifier board LED , a serial I/O port for the frame decoration driving amplifier board motor, a serial I/O port for the main control board, and a serial I/O port for obtaining the performance operation unit information.

A peripheral control built-in watchdog timer (peripheral control built-in WDT) 1511af is a timer for monitoring whether the system of the peripheral control MPU 1511a is running out of control. It has become. In other words, when the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa starts the watchdog timer, if it does not output a clear signal for clearing the timer to the WDT 1511af with built-in peripheral control within a certain period (until the timer expires), it is reset. will be required. When the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa starts the watchdog timer and outputs a clear signal to the WDT 1511af with built-in peripheral control within a certain period of time, the timer count can be restarted, so the reset is not applied.

The peripheral control parallel I/O port 1511ag outputs various latch signals such as the game board side motor drive latch signal and the door side motor drive light emission latch signal. Detection signals from various detection switches for detecting the original positions and movable positions of various movable bodies provided on the board 5 are serialized by a game board side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180, and this serial and outputs a movable body information acquisition latch signal for receiving the converted movable body detection data from the game board side serial transmission circuit at the serial I/O port for the motor drive board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. This LED is a high-intensity white LED and serves as a confirmation notification lamp for notifying that the occurrence of the big win game state is confirmed. In this embodiment, by adopting a configuration in which the LED and the peripheral control parallel I/O port 1511ag are directly connected electrically, the path between the LED and the peripheral control parallel I/O port 1511ag can be shortened. Therefore, noise countermeasures can be taken for the lighting control of the LED, which has a significant meaning in the game. The lighting control of the LED is executed in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing described later, and the other LEDs except for this LED are executed in the peripheral control unit regular processing described later. It has become.

The peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak is electrically connected to the volume control volume 1510a, and its resistance value is varied by rotating the knob of the volume control volume 1510a. The voltage divided by the value is converted from an analog value to a digital value and converted to a value of 1024 steps from value 0 to value 1023. In this embodiment, the values of 1024 steps are divided into 7 and managed as substrate volumes 0-6. The board volume 0 is set to mute, and the board volume 6 is set to the maximum sound volume. The liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (VDP 1512a with built-in sound source to be described later) is controlled so that the volume is set to the board volume 0 to 6, and music and sound effects are played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. FIG. In this manner, music and sound effects are played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by adjusting the volume based on the rotating operation of the knob.

In the present embodiment, in addition to music and sound effects, notification sounds for notifying pachinko machine 1 clerk or the like of the occurrence of malfunctions of the pachinko machine 1 or fraudulent acts on the pachinko machine 1, and contents related to game effects are announced. (For example, to make the screen unfolding on the game board side effect display device 1600 more powerful, or to notify the player that there is a high possibility of shifting to an advantageous game state, etc.). The notification sound also flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the notification sound and the notification sound are designed to flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob, and from mute to maximum volume. can be adjusted by controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (VDP 1512a with built-in sound source to be described later) by a program. The volume adjusted by this program can smoothly change from mute to maximum volume, unlike the substrate volume divided into 7 levels described above.
As a result, for example, even if a hall clerk or the like rotates the knob of the volume control volume 1510a to set the volume to a low level, the music, sound effects, etc. that flow from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 are produced. Although the sound becomes smaller, when the pachinko machine 1 has a problem or when the player commits a fraudulent act, a notification sound set to a large volume (maximum volume in this embodiment) can be emitted. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk from noticing the occurrence of a problem or the player's cheating due to the notification sound. In addition, based on the current board volume set by adjusting the volume based on the turning operation of the knob, the volume of the advertising sound is reduced so as not to interfere with the music and sound effects. In addition to the music and sound effects, the screen displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 can be produced more powerfully by increasing the volume of the sound, or the game state can shift to an advantageous game state for the player. You can also notify them of high prices.

[7-4-1b. Peripheral control ROM]
The peripheral control ROM 1511b stores in advance various control programs, various data, various control data, and various schedule data for controlling the peripheral control unit 1511, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, the RTC control unit 4165, and the like. The various schedule data include screen generation schedule data for generating screens to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, light emission mode generation schedule data for generating light emission modes of various LEDs, and music. There are sound generation schedule data for generating sound effects and the like, and electric drive source schedule data for generating drive modes of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids. The schedule data for screen generation is configured by arranging the screen data that defines the structure of the screen in time series, and the order of the screens to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is defined. It is The schedule data for generating the light emission mode is configured by arranging light emission data defining the light emission modes of various LEDs in time series. The sound generation schedule data is configured by arranging sound command data in time series, and defines the order in which music and sound effects are played. This sound command data includes an output channel number for indicating which output channel is to be used among a plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the built-in sound source VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, which will be described later, and the VDP built-in sound source 1512a. A track number is defined for indicating in which track among a plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source, sound data such as music and sound effects are to be incorporated. The electric drive source schedule data is configured by arranging drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids in time series, and defines operations of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids.

Some of the various control programs stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b are directly read out from the peripheral control ROM 1511b and executed. Some are read and executed. Various data, various control data, and various schedule data stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b are also read directly from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and are stored in various control data copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, which will be described later, when the power is turned on. In some cases, what is copied in is read out.

In addition, in the peripheral control ROM 1511b, as one of various control programs for controlling the RTC control unit 4165, a program for correcting the brightness of the game board side effect display device 1600 according to the usage time of the game board side effect display device 1600 is stored. A brightness correction program is included. This luminance correction program corrects the decrease in luminance due to aging of the game board side effect display device 1600 when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is of the LED type. The date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on, the current date and time, brightness setting information, etc. are acquired from the internal RAM of the RTC control unit 4165, which will be described later, and the acquired brightness setting information is used based on the correction information. to correct. This correction information is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 1511b. As will be described later, the brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, in a range of 100% to 70% in increments of 5%. and the brightness of the LED that is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 that has been set. Therefore, when six months have already passed since the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and the luminance When the brightness of the LED included in the setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on, the brightness of 80% obtained by adding 5% which is the acquired correction information to this 75%. The brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted and turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information, and the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on from the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first powered on. If December has already passed, the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75%, and the effect display device on the game board side is displayed. When lighting the backlight of 1600, the game board is based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness becomes 85%, which is obtained by adding 10%, which is the acquired correction information, to this 75%. The brightness of the backlight of the side effect display device 1600 is adjusted and turned on.

[7-4-1c. Peripheral control RAM]
As shown in FIG. 73, the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a is a backup that exclusively stores information to be backed up among various information updated by executing various control programs. A managed work area 1511ca, a backup first area 1511cb and a backup second area 1511cc dedicated to storing copies of various information stored in the backup managed work area 1511ca, and a backup area stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b. Various control program copy area 1511cd for exclusively storing copies of various control programs stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and copies of various data, various control data, and various schedule data stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b. various control data copy areas 1511ce for dedicated storage; backup unmanaged work areas 1511cf for dedicated storage of various types of information updated by execution of various control programs that are not backed up; is provided.

When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (including when the power is restored due to an instantaneous power failure or power failure), the value 0 is forcibly written into the backup unmanaged work area 1511cf to be cleared to zero. For the work area 1511ca to be managed, the first backup area 1511cb, and the second backup area 1511cc, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, a power-on state command (see FIG. 89) from the main control board 1310 starts the RAM clear effect. and to indicate the game state (for example, to indicate the start of an effect when the operation switch 954 shown in FIG. 69 is operated within a predetermined period after the power is turned on). Sometimes cleared to zero.

The backup management target work area 1511ca is performance information (1fr ) as a backup target, and effect information (1ms), which is various information updated in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing executed each time a 1ms timer interrupt described later occurs, is backed up. Bank 0 (1 ms) that is exclusively stored as an object. The names of Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1ms) will be briefly explained here. The following "0" means a normally used storage area for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. In other words, "Bank0" means that the size of the normally used storage area is the minimum management unit. "Bank 1", "Bank 2", "Bank 3", and "Bank 4" provided in an area extending from a backup first area 1511cb to a backup second area 1511 cc, which will be described later, are of the same storage area as "Bank 0". It means that it has a size. "(1fr)" is, as will be described later, when the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source outputs drawing data for one screen (one frame) to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, the peripheral control MPU 1511a A V blank signal is output to the peripheral control MPU 1511a to indicate that it is ready to receive screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a. Since the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed every time, "Bank 0", "Bank 1", "Bank 2", "Bank 3", and "Bank 4" are respectively appended (effect information (1fr) and effect Backup information (1fr) is also used with the same meaning). As will be described later, "(1 ms)" means that the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed each time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs. and "Bank4" (effect information (1 ms) and effect backup information (1 ms), which will be described later, are also used with the same meaning).

Bank0 (1fr) includes a lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, a frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, a reception command storage area 1511cac, an RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad, and a schedule data storage area 1511cae. etc. are provided. In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the game board 5 is set, and in the transmission data storage area 1511cab for the frame decoration driving amplifier board side LED, lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting to the plurality of LEDs, etc. provided on each decoration board of the door frame 3 are stored. This is a storage area in which the door-side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting the signal is set. In the received command storage area 1511cac, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 are received and the received various commands are stored. The RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad is a storage area where various information acquired from the RTC control unit 4165 (RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a described later) is set. is a storage area in which various schedule data corresponding to commands received from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) are set. In the schedule data storage area 1511cae, various schedule data copied from the peripheral control ROM 1511b to the various control data copy area 1511ce are read and set, and various schedule data are directly read from the peripheral control ROM 1511b. Some are set

Bank 0 (1 ms) includes frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf, motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag, movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah, presentation operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai, and A drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak and the like are provided. Door-side motor drive data STM-DAT for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as the dial drive motor 414 provided on the door frame 3 is stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf. In the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag, which is a storage area to be set, a drive signal for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid that operates various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 is stored. This is a storage area in which the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set. This is a storage area in which various types of information obtained by acquiring the original positions and movable positions of various movable bodies are set. Rotation (direction of rotation) of the dial operation unit 401 and operation of the pressing operation unit 405 are acquired based on various information (for example, dial created based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the production operation unit 400 Rotation (rotation direction) history information of the operation unit 401, operation history information of the pressing operation unit 405, etc.) is set, and the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak has an effect display drive board 4450 on its periphery. Drawing data is received from the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source of the control board 1510, and if the received drawing data is determined to be abnormal data, the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral control board 1510 output based on the LOCKN signal described later to notify that fact. This is a storage area in which various kinds of information obtained by acquiring the frequency of failures between connections with the effect display drive board 4450 and the occurrence status of failures are set.

The lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa in Bank 0 (1 fr), the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511 cab, and the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511 caf in Bank 0 (1 ms). and the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag are each divided into two areas, a first area and a second area.

In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa when the peripheral controller steady-state processing described later is executed. , when the next peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp driving board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, and the peripheral control unit steady-state Each time the process is executed, the game board side emission data SL-DAT are alternately set in the first area and the second area of the lamp driving board side transmission data storage area 1511caa. Peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, for example, when game board side emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa in the current peripheral control unit steady process, the previous peripheral When the control unit steady process is executed, the process proceeds based on the game board side emission data SL-DAT set in the first area of the lamp driving board side transmission data storage area 1511caa.

In the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, when the peripheral controller steady-state processing is executed, the door side light emission data STL is stored in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab. -When DAT is set and the next peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab. Every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the door-side light emission data STL-DAT are alternately set in the first area and the second area of the frame-decoration driving amplifier board-side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab. be. Peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, for example, when door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab in this peripheral control unit steady process, When the previous peripheral controller steady-state processing was executed, the process proceeds based on the door-side light emission data STL-DAT set in the first area of the frame-decoration driving amplifier board-side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab. It's becoming

In the frame-decoration drive amplifier board-side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf, when the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later is executed, the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf stores the door When the side motor drive data STM-DAT is set and the next peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the door side motor drive data STM is stored in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf. -DAT is set, and every time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the door side is stored in the first area and the second area of the transmission data storage area 1511caf for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor. Motor drive data STM-DAT are alternately set. Peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed. For example, in the current peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, door side motor drive data STM-DAT is stored in the second area of frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf. When set, the door-side motor drive data STM-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf when the previous peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing was executed. Based on this, the process proceeds.

In the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag, game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag when the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed. Then, when the next peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag, Each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. Peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed, for example, in the current peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. Sometimes, when the previous peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing was executed, the processing proceeds based on the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT set in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. It's like

Next, a backup first area 1511cb and a backup second area 1511cc dedicated to storing copies of performance information, which are various types of information stored in the backup management target work area 1511ca, will be described. In the first backup area 1511cb and the second backup area 1511cc, two pairs of two banks are managed as one page. Effect information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, is used as effect backup information (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. Effect information (1 ms) which is copied to the first backup area 1511cb and the second backup area 1511cc at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac and stored in Bank0 (1 ms) which is the normally used storage area. is transferred to the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac as effect backup information (1ms) each time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed. Copied quickly. Consistency of one page is determined by whether or not the contents of two banks that constitute the page match.

Specifically, in the backup first area 1511cb, Bank1 (1 fr) and Bank2 (1 fr) are set as one pair, and Bank1 (1 ms) and Bank2 (1 ms) are set as one pair, and a total of two pairs are managed as one page. ing. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, are transferred to Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) each time peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed for each frame (1frame). Memory that is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac and stored in Bank0 (1 ms), which is a storage area that is normally used, each time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, It is copied to Bank1 (1 ms) and Bank2 (1 ms) at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank1 (1 fr) and Bank2 (1 fr) match. This is done depending on whether or not the contents of Bank1 (1 ms) and Bank2 (1 ms) match.

In the second backup area 1511cc, one pair of Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) and one pair of Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) are managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, are transferred to Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) each time peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame (1frame). Memory that is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac and stored in Bank0 (1 ms), which is a storage area that is normally used, each time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, This page is copied to Bank3 (1 ms) and Bank4 (1 ms) at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. This is done depending on whether or not the contents of Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) match.

Thus, in this embodiment, in the first backup area 1511cb, one pair is Bank1 (1 fr) and Bank2 (1 fr), and one pair is Bank1 (1 ms) and Bank2 (1 ms). The backup second area 1511cc is an area for managing pages, and the backup second area 1511cc has a total of 2 pairs, with Bank 3 (1 fr) and Bank 4 (1 fr) as one pair, and Bank 3 (1 ms) and Bank 4 (1 ms) as one pair. This is an area for managing as one page. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the first backup area 1511cb and the second backup area 1511cc.

Further, in the present embodiment, the performance information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, is stored as performance backup information (1fr) by the peripheral control unit every 1 frame. Each time a routine process is executed, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies at high speed to the first backup area 1511cb and the second backup area 1511cc, and the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms), which is the normally used storage area. is backup first area 1511cb and backup second area 1511cc each time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed as the effect backup information (1ms). The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac executes high-speed copying by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac in common. That is, in this embodiment, the performance information (1fr) and the performance information (1ms) are managed by a common management method (common program execution).

[7-4-1d. Peripheral control SRAM]
A peripheral control SRAM 1511d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a includes a backup management target work area 1511da for exclusively storing information to be backed up among various information updated by executing various control programs; A backup first area 1511db and a backup second area 1511dc are provided for exclusively storing copies of various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511da. It should be noted that the contents stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d are the power-on state command from the main control board 1310 (see FIG. 89) when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (including when the power is restored due to an instantaneous power failure or power failure). indicates the start of the RAM clearing effect and the game state (for example, when the operation switch 954 shown in FIG. 69 is operated within a predetermined period from the time of power-on, it instructs the start of the effect. ), it is not cleared to zero. This point is completely different from the point that the backup management target work area 1511ca, the first backup area 1511cb, and the second backup area 1511cc of the peripheral control RAM 1511c are cleared to zero. Further, when the dial operation section 401 or the pressing operation section 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. It is designed to be By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the screen of this setting mode, for each content (item) stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d (for example, the history of the occurrence of the jackpot game state) etc.), on the other hand, the contents (items) stored in the peripheral control RAM 1511c are not displayed at all and cannot be cleared in the setting mode. This point is also completely different between the peripheral control RAM 1511c and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d.

The backup management target work area 1511da includes performance information (SRAM), which is various information that continues over the course of the day (for example, information for managing the history of the occurrence of a big hit game state and for managing a special performance flag). information, etc.) to be backed up. Here, the name of Bank0 (SRAM) will be briefly explained. As described above, "Bank" is the minimum management unit representing the size of the storage area for storing various information. The following "0" means a normally used storage area for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. In other words, "Bank0" means that the size of the normally used storage area is the minimum management unit. "Bank 1", "Bank 2", "Bank 3", and "Bank 4", which are provided in an area extending from a first backup area 1511db to a second backup area 1511dc, which will be described later, are of the same storage area as "Bank 0". It means that it has a size. In "(SRAM)", various information stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a is to be backed up. , and “Bank 4” (effect information (SRAM) and effect backup information (SRAM), which will be described later, are also used with the same meaning).

Next, a backup first area 1511db and a backup second area 1511dc dedicated to storing a copy of performance information (SRAM), which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511da, will be described. The first backup area 1511db and the second backup area 1511dc are managed as one page, with two banks forming one pair. Effect information (SRAM), which is the content stored in Bank 0 (SRAM), which is a storage area that is normally used, is stored as effect backup information (SRAM) every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. Then, it is copied to the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. Consistency of one page is determined by whether or not the contents of two banks that constitute the page match.

Specifically, in the first backup area 1511db, a pair of Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area that is normally used, are transferred to Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) by peripheral control DMA each time the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed for each frame. This page is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac, and consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) match.

In the backup second area 1511dc, Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) are paired, and this pair is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area normally used, are transferred to Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) by peripheral control DMA each time the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed for each frame. This page is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac, and consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) match.

As described above, in this embodiment, the first backup area 1511db is an area for managing a pair of Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) as one page. 1511dc is an area for managing a pair of Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) as one page. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the first backup area 1511db and the second backup area 1511dc.

[7-4-2. Liquid crystal display control unit]
A liquid crystal display control unit 1512 for performing drawing control of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 and sound control such as music and sound effects flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 is shown in FIG. As described above, a sound source for controlling sounds such as music and sound effects is built in (hereinafter referred to as "internal sound source"), and the drawing of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is performed. Sound source built-in VDP (abbreviation of Video Display Processor) 1512a for control, various character data of the screen displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 In addition, various kinds of music, sound effects, etc. A liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b for storing sound data, an audio data transmission IC 1512c for transmitting serialized music, sound effects, etc. as audio data to the frame decoration driving amplifier board 194, and the door frame side effect display device 460. The serialized drawing data is sent to the effect display drive board 4450 which is arranged near the lower side of the door frame side effect display device 460 attached to the right side of the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 and is stored in the plate unit 320. A differential circuit 1512e that differentiates the LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d and the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511, into a positive signal and a negative signal. Then, in addition to the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, the signal from the differential circuit 1512e is input, and when the signal from the differential circuit 1512e is input, this signal is a compulsory switching circuit 1512f that is connected so as to transmit the signal, and is connected so as to transmit the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d when the signal from the differential circuit 1512e is not input; It has The liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b stores sprite data used for displaying screens and images, which will be described later, such as ring image data used for displaying a ring-shaped display object (annular display object), and for displaying an operation menu background image, which will be described later. Operation menu background image data to be used, selected display object image data used to display at least one selected display object described later, tone adjustment background image data used to display a volume adjustment screen including a volume scale to be described later, volume adjustment icon to be described later In addition to volume setting icon image data used for display, body frame back image data used for displaying the body frame back image that allows the position of each part on the back of the body frame 4 to be visually recognized from the player, display of the service mode screen Service mode screen image data used for , break timer setting screen image data used for displaying the rest timer setting screen, and during rest screen image data used for displaying the during rest screen are stored. The liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b also stores suggestive display object image data used to display a suggestive display object for prompting the user to operate the pressing operation section 405 (operation section) of the effect operation unit 400. FIG.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 extracts screen generation schedule data corresponding to commands from the main control board 1310 from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. 1511cae is set in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the first screen data of the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae is stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c of the peripheral control unit 1511. After extracting from the control data copy area 1511ce and outputting to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, when a V blank signal (to be described later) is input, the first screen data is extracted according to the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae. The following screen data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and is output to the tone generator built-in VDP 1512a. In this manner, the peripheral control MPU 1511a stores the screen data arranged in time series in the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae every time the V blank signal is input. Then, the screen data is output to the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source one by one from the top screen data.

In addition, the peripheral control MPU 1511a copies the head sound command data of the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 1310 from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. It is extracted and set to 1511cae in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. After extracting various control data from the control data copy area 1511ce of the control RAM 1511c and outputting it to the VDP 1512a with built-in tone generator, when the V blank signal is input, the leading data is extracted according to the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae. The next sound command data following the sound command data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and is output to the tone generator built-in VDP 1512a. In this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a receives the sound command data arranged in time series in the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, and receives the V blank signal. Each time, the sound command data is output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a one by one from the top sound command data.

[7-4-2a. Sound source built-in VDP]
When screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a in addition to the above-described built-in tone generator, the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source controls the game board from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b based on the input screen data, as shown in FIG. The side character data and the tray side character data are extracted to create sprite data, and one screen (one frame) of drawing data to be displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is generated. A built-in VRAM (hereinafter referred to as "internal VRAM") for The sound source built-in VDP 1512a outputs the drawing data for the game board side effect display device 1600 from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600 among the drawing data generated on the built-in VRAM, and outputs the drawing data for the door frame side effect display device 460. Drawing data is sent from channel CH2 via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), a frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and an effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. By outputting (transmitting) to the door frame side effect display device 460, the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are synchronized.

The drawing data output from the channel CH1 is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side effect display device 1600, while the drawing data output from the channel CH2 is relayed from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame periphery. A terminal plate 868, a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and an effect display stored in the plate unit 320 by being arranged near the lower side of the door frame side effect display device 460 attached to the right side of the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. It is output (transmitted) to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the drive board 4450 . As described above, the drawing data output from the channel CH1 is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side effect display device 1600, so that the peripheral control board 1510 and the game board side effect display device 1600 Although the length of the wiring required for the path from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600 is short due to being attached to the game board 5 respectively, the drawing data output from the channel CH2 can The peripheral control board 1510 is attached to the game board 5 because the control board 1510 outputs to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 . On the other hand, since the effect display drive board 4450 is housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3, from the channel CH2 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450. Since the length of wiring required for the path of CH1 is much longer than that of the channel CH1, it is extremely susceptible to noise. For this reason, for channel CH2, in which the wiring for sending drawing data is much longer than channel CH1, THine Electronics Co., Ltd.'s "V-by-One ( By adopting a differential communication system called "Registered Trademark", it is a mechanism that is less susceptible to noise.

Channel CH1 uses a serial differential interface called LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling), whereas channel CH2 uses a parallel interface. The drawing data output from channel CH2 is composed of three video signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and three synchronization signals, a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal. It is serialized by the door frame side performance transmitter IC 4610d and stored in the peripheral control output circuit (not shown), the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. It is transmitted to the effect display drive board 4450 . The serialized various signals are restored to parallel signals in the effect display drive board 4450 and output to the door frame side effect display device 460 .

In this way, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs screen data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a Based on this input screen data, character data is extracted from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b to create sprite data for one screen to be displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and door frame side effect display device 460. frame) is generated on the built-in VRAM, and among the generated drawing data, image data for the game board side effect display device 1600 is output from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600, and the door frame side is output. Image data for the performance display device 460 is sent from the channel CH2 to a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), a frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and a performance display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. is output (transmitted) to the door frame side effect display device 460 via. That is, the "screen data for one screen (one frame)" means that the drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is stored in the built-in VRAM. It is the data for generating above.

In addition, the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source outputs drawing data for one screen (one frame) from channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600, and displays image data for the door frame side effect display device 460 from channel CH2. Output to the door frame side effect display device 460 through the peripheral control output circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. Then, it outputs a V blank signal to the peripheral control MPU 1511a to notify that it is ready to accept screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a. In this embodiment, since the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps per second, a V blank signal is output. The interval is approximately 33.3 ms (=1000 ms/30 fps). The peripheral control MPU 1511a executes peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which will be described later, in response to the input of this V blank signal. Here, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies somewhat depending on the liquid crystal sizes of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 . Also, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may vary slightly in the manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 1510 on which the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the tone generator built-in VDP 1512a are mounted.

Note that the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source adopts a frame buffer system. This "frame buffer system" is a frame buffer (built-in VRAM) that holds drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be drawn on the screens of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. , drawing data for one screen (one frame) held in this frame buffer (built-in VRAM) is output to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 .

When the above-described sound command data is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a based on the command from the main control board 1310, the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source 1512b, as shown in FIG. By extracting sound data such as sound and sound effects and controlling the built-in sound source, sound data such as music and sound effects are incorporated into the track according to the track number specified in the sound command data, and used according to the output channel number. The output channel is set, and the music, sound effects, and the like that flow from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 are serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

The sound command data also includes a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the track in which the sound data is incorporated. In addition to the sound data and the sub-volume value for adjusting the sound volume, the sound data and the sound volume of the notification sound for notifying the hall clerk of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 and the fraudulent action against the pachinko machine 1 are adjusted. Contains the subvolume value to be used. Specifically, for the effect sound, the substrate volume adjusted by rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a is set as the sub-volume value, and for the notification sound, the volume is adjusted. The maximum volume is set as the sub-volume value without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion of the volume 1510a.
The sub-volume value of the effect sound can be adjusted by operating the dial operation section 401 and the pressing operation section 405 of the effect operation unit 400 and shifting to a later-described setting mode.

The sound specification data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of the channel to be output. Of the tracks, the sound data of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used and the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used are synthesized, and the volume of the synthesized effect sound is Actually, it is amplified up to the master volume value which is the sound volume flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, serializes the amplified effect sound, and outputs it as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

In this embodiment, the master volume value is set to a constant value, and when the volume of the synthesized effect sound is the maximum volume, it is amplified to the master volume value, so that it flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. The volume is set to the maximum allowable volume. Specifically, for the sound effect, among the multiple tracks, the sound data of the sound effect incorporated in the track to be used and the sub volume value for adjusting the volume of the sound effect incorporated in the track to be used By synthesizing the set volume adjustment volume 1510a with the board volume adjusted by rotating the knob, the volume of the synthesized effect sound is the volume actually flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. is amplified to the master volume value, and this amplified effect sound is serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c. Synthesizing the maximum volume without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a set as a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the notification sound incorporated in the track to be used, The volume of this synthesized notification sound is amplified to a master volume value that is the volume actually flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and this amplified notification sound is serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c. .

Here, when the performance sound is being played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the control of playing the notification sound to notify the pachinko hall clerk or the like of the occurrence of a problem with the pachinko machine 1 or of an illegal act on the pachinko machine 1 is simple. First, forcibly set the sub-volume value of the track in which the sound effect is incorporated to mute, the sound data of the track in which this sound effect is incorporated, the sub-volume value set to mute, and the notification Synthesize the sound data of the track in which the sound is embedded and the sub-volume value in which the volume of the informational sound is set to the maximum volume, and change the volume of the synthesized effect sound and the volume of the informational sound It amplifies to the master volume value which becomes the sound volume flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, serializes the amplified effect sound and notification sound, and outputs them as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

In other words, the sounds that actually flow from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 are only the notification sounds with the maximum volume. At this time, since the effect sound is muted, the effect sound does not flow from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the effect sound progresses according to the above-mentioned schedule data for sound generation. In this embodiment, the notification sound is played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 for a predetermined period of time (for example, 90 seconds). The volume of the effect sound progressing according to the schedule data for the production is set again as the sub-volume value by the substrate volume adjusted by rotating the knob of the volume control volume 1510a (at this time, the dial of the effect operation unit 400 When the operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 is operated to shift to the setting mode and adjust, the sub-volume value of the adjusted effect sound is set), and the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 flowing.

In this way, when the effect sound is played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, when the notification sound is played to notify the hall clerk or the like of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or a fraudulent act on the pachinko machine 1, Although the volume of the effect sound is muted and the informational sound flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the muted effect sound progresses according to the schedule data for sound generation, so that the predetermined period of time has elapsed. When the sound stops flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the effect sound does not start playing again from the point where the information sound started to flow, but continues to flow according to the sound generation schedule data until a predetermined period has passed since the information sound started to flow. It starts to flow again from where it progressed.

[7-4-2b. Liquid crystal and sound control ROM]
The liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b stores, as shown in FIG. are stored in advance, and various sound data such as music, effect sound, notification sound, notification sound, etc. are also stored in advance.

[7-4-2c. Audio data transmission IC]
Audio data transmission IC 1512c receives serialized audio data from VDP 1512a with built-in sound source, and converts the right audio data into positive and negative signals as differential serial data to a peripheral control output circuit (not shown) and frame peripheral relay. It is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and is output to a peripheral control output circuit (not shown) as differential serial data in which the left audio data is a positive signal and a negative signal. , frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 , and peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 to the frame decoration driving amplifier board 194 . As a result, music, sound effects, and the like are reproduced in stereo from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 in accordance with various presentations.

The audio data transmission IC 1512c outputs audio data as differential serial data between the boards from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, for example, the plus signal of the left audio data, Even if the negative signal is affected by noise, when the noise component on the positive signal and the noise component on the negative signal are synthesized by the frame-decorating drive amplifier board 194 to form one left-side audio data, Since noise components are removed by canceling each other, noise countermeasures can be taken.

[7-4-2d. Transmitter IC for door frame side production]
As shown in FIG. 74, the door frame side rendering transmitter IC 1512d receives drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source. Channel CH2 uses a parallel interface as described above. The drawing data is composed of three video signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and three synchronization signals, a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal. , a green video signal, and a blue video signal each consist of 8 bits, for a total of 24 bits. In this embodiment, the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal that can be input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d are each 6 bits, for a total of 18 bits. It is input to the side effect transmitter IC 1512d. Since the lower 2 bits are extremely weak color information that is difficult for the human eye to distinguish, the lower 2 bits including the weak color information are invalidated although they are output from the tone generator built-in VDP 1512a.

Three video signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and three synchronization signals, a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal, which are drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source. is input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d transmits three video signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, a horizontal synchronous signal, and a vertical synchronous signal. and a clock signal, and serialized into a differential serial signal (serial data) called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" by Thine Electronics Co., Ltd. with only a differential 1-pair cable. These various signals are transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 , the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 , and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 .

As described above, since the drawing data output from the channel CH1 of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side effect display device 1600, the path from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600 Although the length of the wiring required for (first path) is short, the drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source is transferred from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and then the door. Since it is output (sent) to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the frame 3, the route from the channel CH2 to the door frame side effect display device 460 (the first 2 path) is much longer than the wiring length required for the first path, it becomes very susceptible to noise.

Specifically, since the door frame 3 is pivotally supported so as to be openable and closable with respect to the body frame 4 shown in FIG. For example, from the peripheral control board 1510 provided in the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 to the effect display drive board 4450 stored in the plate unit 320 provided in the door frame 3, on the main body frame 4 side. It is necessary to pass various wirings for electrically connecting the various substrates provided and the various substrates provided on the door frame 3 side. However, on the closing side of the body frame 4, in addition to the payout device 830, the game balls paid out by the payout device 830 can be guided to the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320, and the upper plate 321 can guide the game balls. A full-tank branching unit 770 capable of branching and guiding paid-out game balls to the lower tray 322 side when the tank becomes full is arranged.
Further, below the main body frame 4, a payout unit 800 shown in FIG. In this way, various wirings for electrically connecting various substrates provided on the main body frame 4 side and various substrates provided on the door frame 3 side are drawn near the dispensing device 830, the full-tank branch unit 770, the power supply substrate 931, and the like. In addition to the noise caused by the driving of the payout motor 834 provided in the payout device 830, the noise caused by the electrostatic discharge caused by the game balls and the power line supplied from the pachinko island facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The environment is subject to noise, etc.

For this reason, for channel CH2, in which the wiring for sending drawing data is much longer than channel CH1, the transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 for door frame side effect is provided by Thine Electronics Co., Ltd. By adopting a differential system communication called "V-by-One (registered trademark)", the system is less susceptible to noise. In this embodiment, a door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510, a door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 described later provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3, As described above, a differential 1-pair cable is used as a wiring for electrically connecting between the connections of the transmitter and the receiver. is a twisted pair cable, not just parallel wires. This twisted pair cable is a cable in which two wires are twisted together, and is also called a twisted pair wire.

Here, a case in which parallel lines are used as a differential one-pair cable for electrically connecting a transmitter and a receiver will be briefly described. For the channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source that the length of the wiring for sending the drawing data is much longer than the channel CH1 of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source, THine Electronics Even with a mechanism that is less susceptible to noise by adopting differential communication called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" of Co., Ltd., only with such a hardware configuration, electrostatic discharge of game balls When the serial data on the parallel lines are affected by noise, noise intruding into the power supply line supplied from the pachinko island facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, etc., the performance display is stored in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. Since the noise is not canceled (removed) when received by the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the drive board 4450, the serial data is received by the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 in the affected state. , the drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source is received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 as being different from normal and disturbed data, and in the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460, it appears like a so-called sandstorm. There is a problem that an image is displayed and it becomes impossible to recognize what the image is at all.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the door frame side provided in the peripheral control board 1510 is used for the channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with built-in tone generator, which has a much longer wiring length for sending drawing data than the channel CH1 of the VDP 1512a with built-in tone generator. In the performance transmitter IC 1512d, THine Electronics Co., Ltd.'s "V-by-One (registered trademark)" differential method communication is adopted to make it less susceptible to noise, and in addition to such a hardware configuration A twisted pair cable that can cancel (remove) noise on the receiving side even if differential serial data is affected by noise entering the wiring is electrically connected between the transmitter and the receiver. It was adopted as a differential 1-pair cable. As a result, even if the serial data is affected by the twisted pair cable due to noise caused by electrostatic discharge of game balls, noise intruding into the power supply line supplied from the pachinko island facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, etc., the door frame Since the noise is canceled (removed) when received by the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of No. 3, the channel of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a Drawing data output from CH2 is reliably received by the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided in the effect display driving board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 and output to the door frame side effect display device 460. As a result, the image generated by the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 can be reliably displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460. FIG. By canceling (removing) the noise, it is possible to prevent the door frame side effect display device 460 from displaying an image such as a sandstorm that makes it impossible to recognize what kind of image it is. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's desire to play. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play due to the influence of the noise.

In this embodiment, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, which will be described later, are provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. , that is, between the transmitter and the receiver, a frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are interposed. This is because the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are not integrally constructed, but are separately assembled and attached to the main body frame 4, and the door frame 3 is attached to the main body frame. 4, various wirings such as harnesses and twisted cables from various substrates provided on the door frame 3 side are electrically connected to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 provided on the body frame 4 side. Thus, various substrates provided on the main body frame 4 side and various substrates provided on the door frame 3 side can be electrically connected. With such a configuration, maintenance of the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 can be performed by removing the door frame 3 from the main body frame 4 after the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4 and various wirings are removed. However, if the defect occurring in the door frame 3 cannot be resolved, another door frame 3' is attached to the body frame 4 in place of the defective door frame 3, and the door frame 3 is replaced. By electrically connecting various wirings from various substrates provided on the ' side to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 provided on the main body frame 4 side, various substrates provided on the main body frame 4 side and various wiring provided on the door frame 3 ' side are connected. and the substrate can be electrically connected.

Further, in this embodiment, as described above, the transmitter IC 1512d for door frame side effects provided on the peripheral control board 1510 employs differential communication called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" by Thine Electronics Co., Ltd. In addition to this hardware configuration, even if the serial data by the differential method is affected by noise that enters the wiring, the noise can be canceled (removed) on the receiving side. ) was employed as the differential one-pair cable to electrically connect between the transmitter and the receiver. Specifically, between the substrates between the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, between the substrates between the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and between the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 and the effect display drive The substrates 4450 and 4450 are electrically connected to each other by twisted pair cables, while power supply wiring and wiring for transmitting various signals are electrically connected by harnesses. As a result, in the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, in addition to the video transmission wiring pattern for transmitting differential serial data transmitted by the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, Power supply wiring patterns and various signal wiring patterns for transmitting various other signals are mixed. For this reason, on the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, the wiring patterns for video transmission are formed separately from the power wiring patterns and various signal wiring patterns by a predetermined distance. Since the path from the transmitter to the receiver straddles a plurality of relay terminal plates such as the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, video transmission terminals formed on these plurality of relay terminal plates are provided. Between the input and output of the wiring pattern, a part of the signal that transmits serial data by the differential method transmitted by the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is reflected and becomes noise, and the output level of the signal is lowered. occurs. Therefore, in the present embodiment, impedance matching is applied to the video transmission wiring patterns formed on the plurality of relay terminal boards.

Further, in this embodiment, as described above, between the substrates between the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, between the substrates between the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and between the substrates of the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 The terminal plate 882 and the production display drive board 4450 are electrically connected by twisted pair cables, while the power supply wiring and other wiring for transmitting various signals are electrically connected by harnesses. However, one wire of the twisted pair cable is red and the other wire is gray, and among the harnesses, the wire that supplies power is red and the other multiple wires are gray . Note that the wiring for supplying power may be yellow instead of red.

[7-4-2e. Forced switching circuit, differential circuit]
Signals output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d are sent to the forced switching circuit 1512f, the peripheral control output circuit (not shown), the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. It is designed to be transmitted to the effect display drive board 4450 that is housed. LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, is supplied to the forced switching circuit 1512f in addition to the signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d. is differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differential circuit 1512e and input. The differential circuit 1512e serializes the LOCKN signal output request data into differential serial signals (serial data). This LOCKN signal output request data is used for the period during which the startup screen is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, or for the period during which the game board side effect display device 1600 is in a waiting state for a customer to perform a demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600. During this period, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC 0 (to be described later) provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. , that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, is sent as an operation confirmation request for the door frame side effect display device 460 . The forced switching circuit 1512f, when two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal in the differential circuit 1512e are input, connects the circuits so as to transmit these two signals. When the two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are not input in the conversion circuit 1512e, the circuit is configured so as to transmit the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. It is As a result, when two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input to the differential circuit 1512e, the two signals are connected to each other so as to transmit the two signals. , is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3, while in the differential circuit 1512e When the two differential signals of the plus signal and the minus signal are not input, the door frame side effect transmitter is connected so as to transmit the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. A signal output from the IC 1512d is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. The peripheral control MPU 1511a displays the start screen on the game board side effect display device 1600 when the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, and performs a demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 in a customer waiting state. During the period, the LOCKN signal output request data is transmitted toward the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 (actually, the differential circuit 1512e provided in the peripheral control board 1510).

When a serial signal (serial data) from the peripheral control board 1510 is received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 described later, the effect display drive board 4450 stored in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 serializes various and a liquid crystal module circuit 4450V that restores a signal to a parallel signal and outputs it to the door frame side effect display device 460.

The door frame side presentation receiver IC SDIC0 receives the drawing data from the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source, and when it judges that the received drawing data is abnormal data, sends a LOCKN signal (to be described later) to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882. , and output to the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 . This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511 a of the peripheral control section 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510 . When a predetermined condition is satisfied based on the input LOCKN signal, the peripheral control MPU 1511a controls the sound source built-in VDP 1512a to generate an image for notifying that effect, and outputs the image to the game board side effect display device 1600. is displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 to notify.

Further, when the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 determines that the received two signals are the LOCKN signal output request data, it sends a LOCKN signal (to be described later) to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868. output to the peripheral control board 1510 via the This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511 a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510 . As a response signal to the transmission of the LOCKN signal output request data, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines that there is no failure in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver when the LOCKN signal is input. While it can be determined that there is no problem with the performance display drive board 4450 housed in 320, it is assumed that there is a problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver when the LOCKN signal is not input. It is determined that the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 has a problem, and a notification image (for example, "There is a problem with the effect display device on the door frame side. Please call the clerk.") is output to the game board side effect display device 1600 by controlling the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, and a notification sound to that effect (for example, "A problem has occurred in the door frame side effect display device ) is output to the audio data transmission IC 1512c by controlling the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, and the notification sound is played from the speaker provided in the door frame 3. As a result, the notification can be made by the notification image displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the notification sound repeatedly played from the speaker provided on the door frame 3 or the like. At this time, all the various LEDs mounted on various decoration substrates provided on the door frame 3 and various decoration substrates provided on the game board 5 may be turned on.

[7-4-3. RTC control unit]
As shown in FIG. 72, the RTC control unit 4165, which holds calendar information specifying the date and time information specifying the hour, minute, and second, is mainly composed of the RTC 4165a. The RTC 4165a incorporates a RAM 4165aa (hereinafter referred to as "RTC built-in RAM 4165aa") that holds calendar information and time information. The RTC 4165a is supplied with power from a battery 4165b (a button battery is used in this embodiment) as a drive power source and a backup power source for the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa. In other words, the RTC 4165a is supplied with power from the battery 4165b independently of the peripheral control board 1510 (pachinko machine 1) without receiving any power from the peripheral control board 1510 (pachinko machine 1). As a result, even if the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, the RTC 4165a can update and hold the calendar information and time information by power supply from the battery 4165b.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 acquires calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a, sets them in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c described above, and stores the acquired calendar information and time information. Based on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 can be unfolded. As such effects, for example, on December 25th, a screen of a Christmas tree or reindeer will be displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, or on New Year's Eve, a New Year's countdown will be displayed. The screen to be executed is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, and the like. Calendar information and time information are set at the time of shipment from the factory.

In addition to calendar information and time information, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa stores and holds LED brightness setting information when the game board side effect display device 1600 is equipped with an LED type backlight. there is The peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires brightness setting information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa and adjusts the brightness of the backlight by PWM control when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is of the LED type. . The brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the range of the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, from 100% to 70% in 5% increments, and brightness adjustment information for the currently set game. The brightness of the LEDs that are the backlights of the board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are included.

In addition to the calendar information, time information, and brightness setting information, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa also stores calendar information, time information, and brightness setting information as information on the date and hour, minute, and second first stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa. Input date and time information is also stored.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a performs ON/OFF control of the backlight or only ON when the backlights of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are of the cold cathode tube type. It is designed to

Various types of information such as calendar information, time information, brightness setting information, and input date and time information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa are set on the production line of the game machine manufacturer. In order to perform various tests such as a display test of the game board side effect display device 1600 on the production line, the year when the input date and time information was input on the production line as the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on. It is set to the date and time of manufacture, which is the month, day, hour, minute, and second.

Thus, in addition to calendar information and time information, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa contains brightness setting information, input date and time information, etc. when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is of the LED type. , the information that needs to be maintained independently of the model information of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the probability of occurrence of a jackpot game state with a low probability or a high probability) can be stored.

In addition, depending on the environment of the hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, the luminance setting information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa may be too bright for the backlight luminance of the game board side effect display device 1600 set at the date and time of manufacture. , sometimes too dark. Therefore, by operating the dial operation section 401 and the pressing operation section 405 of the effect operation unit 400, it is possible to shift to the setting mode and adjust the brightness of the backlight to a predetermined brightness. When the dial operation part 401 or the pressing operation part 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. In addition, if the dial operation section 401 or the pressing operation section 405 of the production operation unit 400 is operated during the period in which the demonstration by the game board side production display device 1600 is being performed in the customer waiting state, the setting mode is performed. is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 . By operating the dial operation section 401 and the pressing operation section 405 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the screen of this setting mode, the calendar information and time information can be reset, and the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 can be set as desired. brightness can be adjusted. The adjusted desired brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is overwritten (updated) as the brightness of the LEDs stored in the brightness setting information.

In the setting mode, the peripheral control MPU 1511a executes the above-described brightness correction program, so that if the game board side effect display device 1600 is equipped with an LED type backlight, the game board side effect This corrects the decrease in brightness that accompanies aging of the display device 1600 . Peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires input date and time information from RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of RTC control unit 4165, specifies the date and time when game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on, and uses calendar information and time to specify the year, month, and day. Acquire time information specifying minutes and seconds to specify the current date and time, and adjust the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, from 100% to 70% in increments of 5%. Luminance setting information including luminance adjustment information for playing and the luminance of the currently set LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, is acquired. The acquired luminance setting information is corrected based on the correction information pre-stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b.

For example, based on the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on and the current date and time, if six months have already passed since the time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on, Acquire the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and when the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is lit, this 75% Based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information, the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted so that the brightness is 80%, which is obtained by adding 5%, which is the correction information acquired for If 12 months have already passed since the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511b. When the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on, the acquired correction information of 10% is added to this 75% to obtain 85%. Based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information, the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted and turned on so as to achieve the brightness.

The current date and time may be specified by directly acquiring calendar information specifying the date and time information specifying the hour, minute, and second from the RTC built-in RAM 4165 aa of the RTC control unit 4165 . Current calendar information set in the calendar information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 1510 in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c in the current time information acquisition processing of step S1002 in the control unit power-on processing. and the current time information set in the time information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 1510 to specify the current date and time.

[834. Volume adjustment volume]
As described above, the volume control volume 1510a can adjust the volume of music, sound effects, etc., that are output from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by rotating the knob. As described above, the sound volume control volume 1510a is adapted to vary the resistance value by rotating the knob portion thereof, and the electrically connected peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak is connected to the knob portion. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and converted into values in 1024 steps from value 0 to value 1023. In this embodiment, as described above, the values of 1024 steps are divided into 7 and managed as substrate volumes 0-6. The board volume 0 is set to mute, and the board volume 6 is set to the maximum sound volume. The liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (VDP 1512a with built-in sound source) is controlled so that the volume is set to the substrate volume 0 to 6, and music and sound effects are played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. FIG.

In this manner, music and sound effects are played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by adjusting the volume based on the rotating operation of the knob. Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, in addition to the music and sound effects, a notification sound for notifying the hall clerk or the like of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or a fraudulent act on the pachinko machine 1, a game effect, etc. (For example, the screen displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 is made more powerful, or the possibility of shifting to an advantageous game state for the player is announced. etc.) also flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the notification sound and the notification sound are designed to flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob part, and the sound is muted. to the maximum volume can be adjusted by controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (VDP 1512a with built-in tone generator) by a program.

The volume adjusted by this program can smoothly change from mute to maximum volume, unlike the substrate volume divided into 7 levels described above. As a result, for example, even if a hall clerk or the like rotates the knob of the volume control volume 1510a to set the volume to a low level, the music, sound effects, etc., flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 are produced. Although the sound becomes smaller, when the pachinko machine 1 has a problem or when the player commits a fraudulent act, a notification sound set to a large volume (maximum volume in this embodiment) can be emitted. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk from noticing the occurrence of a problem or the player's cheating due to the notification sound.

In addition, based on the current board volume set by adjusting the volume based on the turning operation of the knob, the volume of the advertising sound is reduced so as not to interfere with the music and sound effects. In addition to the music and sound effects, the screen displayed on the game board side production display device 1600 and the door frame side production display device 460 is produced more powerfully by increasing the volume of the sound, which is advantageous for the player. It is also possible to notify that there is a high possibility of shifting to a game state.

In this embodiment, in addition to adjusting the volume of music and sound effects by rotating the knob of the volume control volume 1510a, the dial operation unit 401 of the production operation unit 400 and the By operating the push operation unit 405, it is possible to shift to a setting mode and adjust the volume of music and sound effects. When the dial operation part 401 or the pressing operation part 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. In addition, if the dial operation section 401 or the pressing operation section 405 of the production operation unit 400 is operated during the period in which the demonstration by the game board side production display device 1600 is being performed in the customer waiting state, the setting mode is performed. is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 . By operating the dial operation section 401 and the pressing operation section 405 of the presentation operation unit 400 according to the setting mode screen, the volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted to a desired volume. Specifically, the peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak converts the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the knob of the volume control volume 1510a from an analog value to a digital value, and the converted value is By adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation of the dial operation section 401 or the pressing operation section 405 of the effect operation unit 400, the value of the substrate volume can be increased or decreased. there is This adjusted volume is set and updated as a sub-volume value for the track in which the sound data of the production sound such as music and sound effects is incorporated among the plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. However, it is not reflected in the adjustment of the volume of the notification sound and notification sound described above.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the volume of music or sound effects is adjusted by directly rotating the knob of the volume control volume 1510a, and the dial operation unit 401 or pressing operation unit 405 of the production operation unit 400 is used. and adjusting the volume of music or sound effects by increasing or decreasing the value of the substrate volume by adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation of . Since the volume control volume 1510 a is mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 , the body frame 4 must always be left open from the outer frame 2 . Then, the person who can rotate the knob of the volume control volume 1510a is the store clerk in the hall. However, with the volume adjusted by the hall clerk, the player may find the music and sound effects to be too soft and difficult to hear, and the player may feel loud and the music and sound effects loud. Therefore, within a predetermined period of time after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 are operated, or the game board side effect display device 1600 is put into a customer waiting state for a demonstration. When the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated during the period during which the effect is performed, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. By operating the dial operation section 401 and the pressing operation section 405 of the presentation operation unit 400 according to the setting mode screen, the volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted to a desired volume. As a result, the player can adjust the volume of the music and sound effects to a desired volume. The dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 can be operated to increase the volume to a desired level. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of 400, the volume can be reduced to a desired volume.

Further, in this embodiment, when the pachinko machine 1 is in a non-playing state for a predetermined period of time and the customer waits for customers, the demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 is repeatedly performed (for example, 10 times). , the volume adjusted by the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 and playing the game last time is canceled and the volume is initialized. In this volume initialization, the volume is set to the volume adjusted by the hall clerk, that is, the volume adjusted by the hall clerk by directly rotating the knob of the volume control volume 1510a. As a result, when a player who has played a game while seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 last time feels that the adjusted sound volume is too small to hear the music and sound effects, the player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1 this time. A player who plays a game can operate the dial operation part 401 and the pressing operation part 405 of the effect operation unit 400 to increase the volume to a desired volume, and the player sat in front of the pachinko machine 1 last time and played a game. If the player who has been playing the game feels that the adjusted volume is loud and the music and sound effects are loud, this time, the player who sits in front of the pachinko machine 1 and plays the game can turn the dial operation unit 401 of the production operation unit 400. By operating the pressing operation unit 405, the volume can be reduced to a desired volume.

[8. power supply system]
Next, the power supply system of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 75 and 76. FIG. FIG. 75 is a block diagram showing the power supply system of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 76 is a block diagram showing the continuation of FIG. First, the power supply board 931 will be described, and then the power supplied to each control board and the like will be described. The grounds (GND) of various substrates and the grounds (GND) of various terminal plates are electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the power substrate 931 and are the same ground (GND).

[8-1. Power supply board 931]
The power board 931 is electrically connected to a power cord, and the plug of this power cord is inserted into the power outlet of the pachinko island facility. When the power switch 934 is operated, power supplied from the pachinko island facility is supplied to the power board 931, and the power of the pachinko machine 1 can be turned on.

The power board 931 includes a power control section 935 and a firing control section 953, as shown in FIG. The power control unit 935 is a circuit that creates various DC voltages from 24 volts (AC24V) supplied from the pachinko island facility, and supplies backup power to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. A section 953 is a circuit for driving and controlling the shooting solenoid 682 of the ball shooting device 650 shown in FIG. 5 and the ball feeding solenoid 255 of the ball feeding unit 250 shown in FIG.

The power control unit 935 includes a synchronous rectification circuit 935a, a power factor improvement circuit 935b, a smoothing circuit 935c, a power generation circuit 935d, and capacitors BC0 and BC1. AC 24V supplied from the pachinko island facility is supplied to the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 through the power supply board 931, and is also supplied to the synchronous rectification circuit 935a. This synchronous rectification circuit 935a rectifies the AC 24 volts (AC24V) supplied from the pachinko island facility and supplies it to the power factor correction circuit 935b. The power factor correction circuit 935b improves the power factor of the rectified power to generate DC +37V (DC+37V, hereinafter referred to as "+37V") and supplies it to the smoothing circuit 935c. This smoothing circuit 935c removes the supplied +37V ripple, smoothes the +37V, and supplies it to the firing control circuit 953a and the power generating circuit 935d of the firing control section 953, respectively.

Capacitor BC0 supplies backup power to the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the capacitor BC1 is built into the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control unit 952 in the payout control board 951. It supplies backup power to the RAM (withdrawal control built-in RAM).

The shooting control circuit 953a of the shooting control unit 953 uses +37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 935c as a drive power source, and shoots the game ball with a launching strength (launching strength) corresponding to the rotational position of the handle 302. While adjusting the drive current for striking (firing) toward the ball and controlling the output to the firing solenoid 682, the ball of the ball feeding unit 250 is output by outputting a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 255 of the ball feeding unit 250. A feeding member receives one game ball stored in the upper tray 321 of the tray unit 320, and controls feeding of the game ball received by the ball feeding member to the shot ball launching device 650 side.

The power source generation circuit 935d supplies from +37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 935c to DC +5V (DC+5V, hereinafter referred to as "+5V"), DC +12V (DC+12V, hereinafter referred to as "+12V"), and DC +24V (DC+24V, hereinafter referred to as "+24V") is generated and supplied to the payout control board 951 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, respectively. A power system to which +5V is applied is a +5V power line, a power system to which +12V is applied is a +12V power line, and a power system to which +24V is applied is a +24V power line.

The +5V generated by the power generation circuit 935d is supplied to the payout control board 951 as described later. +5V supplied to the payout control board 951 is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a through the payout control filter circuit 951a, and is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM through the diode PD0. ing. The +12V generated by the power generation circuit 935d is supplied to the +5V generation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. This +5V creation circuit 1310g creates +5V which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a from +12V from the payout control board 951. The +5V generated by the +5V generating circuit 1310g is supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a through the main control filter circuit 1310h and to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM through the diode MD0. ing.

The negative terminal of the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 931 is grounded (GND), while the positive terminal of the capacitor BC1 is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control board 951, and the payout The cathode terminal of the diode PD0 of the control board 951 is also electrically connected. In other words, the +5V generated by the power generation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 flows toward the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, and the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM, which is forward due to the diode PD0, and the capacitor BC1. The positive terminal is designed to allow current to flow toward it. In this way, the capacitor BC1 is +5V by an electrical connection method in which +5V generated by the power generation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 is returned to the payout control board 951 and then again from the payout control board 951 to the power supply board 931. is supplied and can be charged. As a result, when the +5V generated by the power generation circuit 935d is no longer supplied to the payout control board 951, the charge charged in the capacitor BC1 is supplied to the payout control board 951 as payout VBB. Therefore, although the current does not flow to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a because it is blocked by the diode PD0, the payout control MPU 952a does not operate. It has become so.

The negative terminal of the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 931 is grounded (GND), while the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0 is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. , and is also electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 on the main control board 1310 . That is, the +5V generated by the +5V generation circuit 1310g is a current flowing toward the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM and the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0, which are in the forward direction due to the diode MD0. A current flows in the direction of Thus, the capacitor BC0 is supplied with +5V and charged by an electrical connection method in which +5V generated by the +5V generation circuit 1310g is supplied to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 to the power supply board 931. You can do it. As a result, the +12V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 is no longer supplied to the +5V creation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951, and the +5V creation circuit 1310g can create +5V. When it is exhausted, the charge charged in the capacitor BC0 is supplied as the main VBB to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. Therefore, a diode is connected to the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. Although the main control MPU 1310a does not operate because the current is blocked by MD0, the memory content is retained by supplying the main VBB to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM. Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the backup power supply circuit for supplying backup power to the main control built-in RAM is composed of the diode MD0 and the capacitor BC0.

[8-2. Voltage supplied to each control board, etc.]
Next, the outline about the voltage supplied to each control board etc. is demonstrated, Then, the voltage mainly supplied to the payout control board and the voltage supplied to the main control board are demonstrated.

The three types of voltages +5V, +12V, and +24V generated by the power generation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 are supplied to the payout control board 951, as shown in FIG. Two voltages of +24 V are supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951 . The three types of voltages +5V, +12V, and +24V created by the power source creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 are supplied to the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and through the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, They are supplied to the control board 1510 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 respectively.

The three voltages of +5V, +12V, and +24V supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 are applied to the lamp drive circuit 4170a of the lamp drive board 4170 and the drive source drive circuit of the motor drive board 4180, as shown in FIG. 4180a, respectively. The lamp drive circuit 4170a of the lamp drive board 4170 outputs various signals such as a lighting signal, a blinking signal and a gradation lighting signal to various decoration boards of the game board 5, and the drive source drive circuit 4180a of the motor drive board 4180 outputs the game A drive signal is output to an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid for the board 5 .

The peripheral control board 1510 includes a +3.3V generating circuit 1510b that generates DC 3.3V (DC+3.3V, hereinafter referred to as "+3.3V") from +5V supplied from the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868. ing. The +3.3V generated by the +3.3V generation circuit 1510b is supplied to the liquid crystal module 1600a of the game board side effect display device 1600. FIG. In addition, +12V supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 is supplied to the backlight power source 1600b of the game board side effect display device 1600. FIG.

On the other hand, the three voltages +5V, +12V, and +24V supplied to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are supplied to the frame decoration driving amplifier board 194 as shown in FIG. 76(b). The frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 has a +9V generating circuit 194a that generates DC +9V (DC+9V, hereinafter referred to as "+9V") from +12V supplied from the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882. +9V generated by the +9V generating circuit 194a and +5V, +12V, and +24V supplied from the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are supplied to various decorative substrates of the door frame 3 and the like.

In addition, +12 V supplied to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 is supplied to the upper tray side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x. The upper plate side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x generates +3.3V from +12V. The +3.3 V generated by the upper tray liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x is supplied to various electronic components constituting the liquid crystal module circuit 4450V shown in FIG. and the door frame side effect display device 460, respectively. The voltage generated by the upper tray side liquid crystal module backlight power supply circuit 4450 y is supplied to the door frame side effect display device 460 .

[8-2-1. Voltage supplied to payout control board]
As shown in FIG. 75, the payout control board 951 includes a payout control filter circuit 951a and the like in addition to the payout control MPU 952a and the like. This payout control filter circuit 951a is supplied with +5V from the power supply board 931, and removes noise from this +5V. This +5V is supplied to the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 931 via the diode PD0, and is also supplied to the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control unit 952, for example. +12V from the power supply board 931 is supplied to, for example, the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952, and is supplied to the external communication circuit 784a of the external terminal plate 784 via the payout control board 951. The external communication circuit 784a of the external terminal plate 784 is a circuit for outputting a signal that conveys the number of game balls put out by the pachinko machine 1, game information of the pachinko machine 1, etc., to a hall computer installed in the game hall (hall). is. The hall computer monitors the game played by the player by ascertaining the number of game balls put out by the pachinko machine 1, game information of the pachinko machine 1, and the like, from signals output from the external communication circuit 784a. In addition, +24 from the power supply board 931 is supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951 without being used at all in the payout control board 951 .

[8-2-2. Voltage supplied to the main control board]
As shown in FIG. 75, the main control board 1310 includes a +5V generation circuit 1310g, a main control filter circuit 1310h, a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, etc., in addition to the main control MPU 1310a. The +5V creation circuit 1310g is supplied with +12V from the power supply board 931 via the payout control board 951, and creates +5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, from this +12V. In the main control board 1310, the +5V power line is a power supply system to which +5V generated by the +5V generation circuit 1310g is applied and supplied. In this embodiment, the +5V power supply line created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 and the +5V power supply line created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 are not electrically connected. Therefore, the +5V power supply line created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 is not electrically connected to various electronic components of the main control board 1310, and the +5V power supply of the main control board 1310 The +5V power supply line created by the creation circuit 1310g is not electrically connected to various electronic components such as boards other than the main control board 1310. FIG.

The main control filter circuit 1310h is supplied with +5V produced by the +5V production circuit 1310g, and removes noise from this +5V. This +5V is supplied to the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 931 via the diode MD0, and is also supplied to the main control MPU 1310a, for example. +12V from the payout control board 951, for example, is supplied to the main control input circuit 1310b and the like, +24V from the payout control board 951, for example, is supplied to the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is supplied with +12V and +24V from the power supply board 931 via the payout control board 951, and monitors signs of power failure or momentary power failure of these +12V and +24V. When the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e detects a sign of power failure or momentary power failure of +12V and +24V, it outputs a power failure notice signal as a power failure notice to the main control MPU 1310a. The power failure warning signal is input to the payout control MPU 952a through the main control board 1310 and the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control board 951. Also, the power outage warning signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control board 1310 . 76(b), the power failure warning signal is input to the frame decoration driving amplifier board 194 via the peripheral control board 1510, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. At the same time, they are input to the decoration substrates of the door frames and the like via the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate 194 .

In this embodiment, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors the voltage applied to each of the +12V power line and the +24V power line by monitoring the voltage applied to either the +12V power line or the +24V power line. Signs of power failure such as power failure or momentary power failure can be detected more accurately than when monitoring the voltage applied to the power supply.

[9. Main control board circuit]
Next, the circuit etc. of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 to 79. FIG. 77 is a circuit diagram showing the circuit of the main control board, FIG. 78 is a circuit diagram showing a power failure monitoring circuit, and FIG. 79 is a circuit showing an interface circuit for communication between the main control board and the peripheral control board. It is a diagram. First, the main control filter circuit 1310h shown in FIG. 75 will be described, followed by the power supply created by the main control board 1310, the main control system reset, the main control crystal oscillator, the main control input circuit, the power failure monitoring circuit, the main control MPU Various input/output signals to and from the main control board 1310 and the interface circuit for communication between the peripheral control boards 1510 will be described.

The main control board 1310 includes a main control MPU 1310a, a main control input circuit 1310b, a main control output circuit 1310c, a main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, a +5V generation circuit 1310g, and a main control MPU 1310a shown in FIGS. In addition to the control filter circuit 1310h, peripheral circuits include a main control system reset MIC1 that outputs a reset signal and a main control crystal oscillator MX0 that outputs a clock signal (24 megahertz (MHz )).

[9-1. Main control filter circuit]
As shown in FIG. 77, the main control filter circuit 1310h is mainly composed of a main control 3-terminal filter MIC0. This main control 3-terminal filter MIC0 is a T-type filter circuit, magnetically shielded with ferrite, and has excellent attenuation characteristics. The main control 3-terminal filter MIC0 has its 1st terminal applied with +5V generated by the +5V generation circuit 1310g, its 2nd terminal connected to the ground (GND), and its 3rd terminal to remove noise components. +5V is output. The +5V applied to the No. 1 terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC0, one end of which is grounded (GND), so that the ripple (AC component superimposed on the voltage) is first removed. smoothed.

The +5 V output from the third terminal is electrically connected to the other ends of the capacitor MC1 and the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (in this embodiment, capacitance: 470 microfarads (μF)), one end of which is grounded (GND). , the ripple is further removed and smoothed. This smoothed +5V is applied to the power terminal of the main control system reset MIC1, the VDD terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and the like. It should be noted that the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is supplied with the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the power supply from the pachinko island facility is cut off. It is applied as +5 V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after it is generated.

The VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor MC3, one end of which is grounded (GND), and the +5V applied to the VDD terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples. A VSS terminal, which is a ground terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is grounded (GND).

The VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to the anode terminal of the diode MD0 in addition to being electrically connected to the capacitor MC3. The cathode terminal of the diode MD0 is electrically connected to the VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 1310a, and one end of the capacitor MC4 is connected to the ground (GND). is electrically connected to the other end of the The VBB terminal of this main control built-in RAM is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 and the other end of the capacitor MC4. electrically connected to the terminal. In other words, +5V, whose noise component has been removed and smoothed by the main control filter circuit 1310h, is applied to the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and is applied to the VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM and the capacitor BC0 through the diode MD0. is intended to be applied to the positive terminal of As a result, as described above, the +12V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. When the circuit 1310g cannot generate +5V, the charge charged in the capacitor BC0 is supplied to the main control board 1310 as the main VBB, so the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a Although the main control MPU 1310a does not operate because the current is blocked by the diode MD0, the memory contents are retained by applying the main VBB to the VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM.

[9-2. Main control system reset]
The +5 V from which noise components have been removed and smoothed by the main control filter circuit 1310h is applied to the power terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 as shown in FIG. The main control system reset MIC1 resets the main control MPU 1310a and the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, and includes a delay circuit. The delay capacitor terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor MC5, one end of which is grounded (GND), and the delay time of the delay circuit is set by the capacity of this capacitor MC5. It is possible to do so. Specifically, the main control system reset MIC1 outputs a system reset signal from the output terminal after the elapse of the delay time when +5V input to the power supply terminal reaches a threshold value (eg, 4.25V).

The output terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 is electrically connected to the SRST terminal, which is the reset terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function. The output terminal is an open-collector output type capacitor, one end of which is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR1 electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and the other end of which is grounded (GND). It is electrically connected to the other end of MC6. Ripple is removed and smoothed by this capacitor MC6. When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is higher than the threshold, the output terminal is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor MR1 and the logic becomes HI. While being input to the reset terminal of the circuit 1310ca, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal is smaller than the threshold, the logic becomes LOW, and this logic is applied to the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function. Input to the reset pin respectively. Since the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function are negative logic inputs, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal becomes smaller than the threshold, the main control MPU 1310a and the reset function The main control output circuit 1310ca with is reset. One end of the power supply terminal is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor MC7 grounded to the ground (GND), and the +5V input to the power supply terminal is smoothed by removing ripples. Also, the ground terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and the NC terminal is electrically unconnected to the outside.

[9-3. Main control crystal oscillator]
The +5 V from which noise components have been removed and smoothed by the main control filter circuit 1310h is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, as shown in FIG. This VDD terminal is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor MC8, one end of which is grounded (GND), and the +5V input to the VDD terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples. In addition to the VDD terminal, this smoothed +5 V is also applied to the A terminal, B terminal, C terminal and ST terminal, which are output frequency selection terminals. The main controlled crystal oscillator MX0 outputs a 24 MHz clock signal from the F terminal, which is an output terminal, by applying +5 V to these A terminal, B terminal, C terminal, and ST terminal.

The F terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0 is electrically connected to the CLK terminal, which is the clock terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and receives a 24 MHz clock signal. The GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the main controlled crystal oscillator MX0, is grounded (GND), and the D terminal that outputs the divided frequency of the F terminal of the main controlled crystal oscillator MX0 is electrically unconnected to the outside. state.

[9-4. Main control input circuit]
The main control input circuit 1310b includes the vibration sensor 2405, the general winning opening sensors 4020, 4020, the first starting opening sensor 4002, the second starting opening sensor 4004, the magnetic detection sensor 4024, the count sensor 4005, and the gate sensor shown in FIG. In addition to the detection signal from 4003, it is a circuit to which the operation signal (RAM clear signal) etc. from the operation switch 954 provided on the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 is input. Since the circuit configuration to which the detection signal from each switch is input is the same, the circuit to which the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 954 is input will be described here.

[9-4-1. Circuit to which the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch is input]
First, as described above, the operation switch 954 is a RAM (payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control board 951 and the main control of the main control board 1310 within a predetermined period from the power on. It is operated to clear the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the MPU 1310a, or to cancel the error when an error is reported after the power is turned on. A function to clear the RAM within a predetermined period after the power is turned on, and error cancellation after the power is turned on (after a period of time during which the RAM clear function has passed, that is, after a predetermined period has passed since the power was turned on). and a function to perform Since the main control board 1310 does not have the function of canceling the error that the payout control board 951 has, when an operation signal is input from the operation switch 954 within a predetermined period from power on, the main control It is judged as a RAM clear signal for clearing the built-in RAM, and processing for clearing the main control built-in RAM is performed.

The main control board 1310 receives an operation signal whose logic is LOW from the payout control board 951 when the operation switch 954 is not operated. becomes HI is input from the payout control board 951 (detailed description of this point will be given later).

The transmission line that transmits the operation signal from the operation switch 954 provided on the payout control board 951 within a predetermined period from the time of power-on, as shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR2 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0 through the resistor MR3. The base terminal of the transistor MTR0 is electrically connected to the resistor MR3, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR4 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of transistor MTR0 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of transistor MTR0 is electrically connected to the other end of resistor MR5, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and the non-inverting buffer. Main control via ICMIC10 (non-inverting buffer ICMIC10 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (MIC10A) without inverting it.) It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the MPU 1310a.

The circuit that outputs the operation signal from the operation switch 954 in the payout control board 951 is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded (GND), and the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is transmitted. The line is pulled up to +12V by pull-up resistor MR2. The main control board 1310, when the operation switch 954 is not operated, the operation signal from the payout control board 951 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW and is input, while the operation switch 954 is operated. When it is on, the operation signal from the payout control board 951 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2 and the logic becomes HI and is input.

A circuit composed of the resistors MR3 and MR4 and the transistor MTR0 is a switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by an operation signal from the operation switch 954. FIG.

When the operation switch 954 is not operated, an operation signal whose logic is LOW is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, thereby turning off the transistor MTR0 and also turning off the switch circuit. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is raised to the +5V side by the resistor MR5, and the operation signal from the operation switch 954 whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. be done. When the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 input to the input terminal PA0 is HI, the main control MPU 1310a instructs to perform RAM clear for erasing the information stored in the main control built-in RAM. to decide.

On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is operated, an operation signal pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor MR2 and logic becomes HI is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, thereby turning on the transistor MTR0 and switching the switch. The circuit is also turned ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the operation signal from the operation switch 954 whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. be done. The main control MPU 1310a instructs to perform RAM clear for erasing information stored in the main control built-in RAM when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 input to the input terminal PA0 is LOW. I judge.

It should be noted that the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2. This is because the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input through the payout control board 951 . That is, between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951, in order to suppress the influence of noise entering the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the boards, the control reference voltage is higher than +5V A voltage of +12V is used to improve signal reliability. Therefore, in this embodiment, the detection signals from the general winning opening sensor 4020, the first starting opening sensor 4002, and the second starting opening sensor 4004, which are directly input to the main control board 1310, are pulled up to the +5V side by a pull-up resistor. While being pulled up, the detection signals from the magnetic detection sensor 4024, the count sensor 4005, the general winning gate sensor 4020, and the gate sensor 4003, which are input via the panel relay board 4161 shown in FIG. Since it is not directly input, it is pulled up to the +12V side by a pull-up resistor like the operation signal from the operation switch 954 .

[9-5. Power failure monitoring circuit]
As shown in FIG. 75, the main control board 1310 is supplied with two types of voltages of +12V and +24V from the power supply board 931 through the payout control board 951, and +12V and +24V are input to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. ing. The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors signs of a power failure or momentary power failure of +12V and +24V, and upon detection of a power failure or momentary power failure, outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning to the main control MPU 1310a and the payout control board. It is output to the payout control MPU 952 a of 951 and the peripheral control board 1510 . Here, the configuration of the power failure monitoring circuit will be described first, followed by the monitoring of +24 V power failure or momentary power failure, +12 V power failure or momentary power failure monitoring, and the output of a power failure warning signal.

[9-5-1. Configuration of blackout monitoring circuit]
As shown in FIG. 78, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e mainly includes a shunt type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, an open collector output type comparator MIC21, a D-type flip-flop MIC22, and transistors MTR20 to MTR23.

The REF terminal, which is the reference voltage input terminal, and the K terminal, which is the cathode terminal, of the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20 are electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR20, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. +5V is applied, and the current input to the REF terminal is limited by the resistor MR20. The K terminal outputs a reference voltage Vref (2.495 V is set in the present embodiment) that serves as a comparison reference voltage for the comparator MIC21. The K terminal is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor MC20, one end of which is grounded (GND). AC component) is removed and smoothed. The A terminal, which is the anode terminal of the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, is grounded (GND).

The comparator MIC21 has two voltage comparison circuits, one of which (MIC21A) is used to compare the monitoring voltage V1 of +24V with the reference voltage Vref, and the other (MIC21B) is used to compare , +12V are used to compare the monitor voltage V2 and the reference voltage Vref. A monitoring voltage V1 of +24 V is applied to the third terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC 21A, and a reference voltage Vref is applied to the second terminal, which is the negative terminal of the MIC 21A. A monitoring voltage V2 of +12 V is applied to the fifth terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC 21B, and a reference voltage Vref is applied to the sixth terminal, which is the negative terminal of the MIC 21B. These comparison results are input to the D-type flip-flop MIC22. This D-type flip-flop MIC22 has two D-type flip-flop circuits, one of which (MIC22A) is used in this embodiment. The Vcc terminal, which is the power terminal of the comparator MIC21, is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC21, one end of which is grounded (GND). , the ripple is removed and smoothed by the capacitor MC21, and the GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the comparator MIC21, is connected to the ground (GND).

[9-5-2. +24V blackout or momentary blackout monitoring]
The +24V power failure or momentary power failure is monitored by comparing the +24V monitor voltage V1 and the reference voltage Vref with the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, as described above. As shown in FIG. 78, the third terminal, which is the plus terminal of MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 to which the monitoring voltage V1 of +24V is applied, is a resistor MR21 whose one end is electrically connected to the +24V power supply line. is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR22 grounded to the ground (GND), the other ends of the resistors MR21 and MR22 and the other end of the capacitor MC23 grounded to the ground (GND); are electrically connected. The monitoring voltage V1 of +24V applied to the third terminal, which is the positive terminal of MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, is divided by +24V according to the resistance ratio of the resistors MR21 and MR22, and the ripple is removed by the capacitor MC23 and smoothed. . The values of the resistors MR21 and MR22 are such that, when +24V power failure or momentary power failure occurs, the voltage starts to drop from +24V and becomes the preset power failure detection voltage V1pf (in this embodiment, it is set to 21.40V). The monitor voltage V1 of +24V is set to have the same value as the reference voltage Vref.

The first terminal, which is the output terminal of MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, is an open collector output, one end of which is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor MR23 electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor MC24, one end of which is grounded (GND), and is electrically connected to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Capacitor MC24 plays a role as a low-pass filter.

When the +24V voltage is greater than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the +24V monitoring voltage V1 becomes greater than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the No. 1 terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, is +5V by the pull-up resistor MR23. A signal that has been pulled up to the side and has a logic HI is input to the PR terminal, which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

On the other hand, when the +24V voltage is lower than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the +24V monitoring voltage V1 is lower than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the first terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, is the ground (GND). A signal that has been pulled down to the side and has a logic LOW is input to the PR terminal, which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

[9-5-3. +12V blackout or momentary blackout monitoring]
The +12V power failure or momentary power failure is monitored by the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 comparing the +12V monitoring voltage V2 and the reference voltage Vref as described above. As shown in FIG. 78, the fifth terminal, which is the positive terminal of MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 to which the +12V monitor voltage V2 is applied, is a resistor MR24 whose one end is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line. is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR25 grounded to the ground (GND), the other ends of the resistors MR24 and MR25 and the other end of the capacitor MC25 grounded to the ground (GND); are electrically connected. The monitoring voltage V2 of +12V applied to the fifth terminal, which is the positive terminal of MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, is divided by +12V according to the resistance ratio of the resistors MR24 and MR25, and the ripple is removed by the capacitor MC25 and smoothed. . The values of the resistors MR24 and MR25 are such that, when +12V power failure or momentary power failure occurs, the voltage starts to drop from +12V and becomes the preset power failure detection voltage V2pf (in this embodiment, it is set to 10.47V). The monitor voltage V2 of +12V is set to have the same value as the reference voltage Vref when the voltage is applied.

The 7th terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, is an open collector output, and is electrically connected to the 1st terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21A. A preset D-type flip-flop MIC22 is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor MR23 which is electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of a capacitor MC24 having one end grounded to the ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the PR terminal which is a terminal. Capacitor MC24 plays a role as a low-pass filter as described above.

When the +12V voltage is greater than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the +12V monitoring voltage V2 becomes greater than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the 7th terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, is +5V by the pull-up resistor MR23. A signal that has been pulled up to the side and has a logic HI is input to the PR terminal, which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

On the other hand, when the +12V voltage is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the +12V monitoring voltage V2 is lower than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the 7th terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, is the ground (GND). A signal that has been pulled down to the side and has a logic LOW is input to the PR terminal, which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

[9-5-4. Power failure warning signal output]
The D-type flip-flop MIC22 stores the value (logic) of the signal input to the 1D terminal, which is the D input terminal, according to the change in the edge of the clock signal input to the 1CK terminal, which is the clock input terminal, and stores this stored value. (logic) is output from the 1Q terminal, which is an output terminal, and a value obtained by inverting the stored value (logic) is output from the negative logic 1Q terminal, which is an output terminal. When the D-type flip-flop MIC22 receives a signal whose logic is LOW at the CLR terminal, which is a clear terminal, it releases the latched state and resets the logic of the signal input to the PR terminal, which is a preset terminal. The inverted signal is output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal (at this time, the logic of the signal output from 1Q is inverted, that is, the same logic as the signal input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal). A logic signal is output from the negative logic 1Q terminal). On the other hand, when a logic HI signal is input to the CLR terminal, which is a clear terminal, the latch state is set. In addition, when the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is configured to set the latch state by inputting a signal whose logic is HI to the CLR terminal, which is a clear terminal, the logic of the PR terminal, which is a preset terminal, is LOW. is input, the state of outputting a signal with logic HI from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal, is maintained (at this time, the signal output from 1Q is inverted in logic to be negative logic maintains the state of output from the 1Q terminal).

In the present embodiment, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 has the D input terminal 1D terminal and the clock input terminal 1CK terminal grounded (GND), respectively. The circuit is configured so that there is no change in the edge of the input clock signal, and the value (logic) of the signal input to the 1D terminal, which is the D input terminal, is stored and is not output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal. ing. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 has a PR terminal, which is a preset terminal. Alternatively, a signal from the 7th terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 that monitors momentary power failure, is input, and based on these signals, a signal is output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal. The Vcc terminal, which is a power supply terminal, is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor MC22, one end of which is grounded (GND), and is applied to the Vcc terminal, which is a power supply terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. +5V is smoothed by removing ripples by the capacitor MC22, the GND terminal as the ground terminal is grounded (GND), and the negative logic 1Q terminal that inverts the logic of the 1Q terminal as the output terminal is electrically connected to the outside. It is in an unconnected state.

In the present embodiment, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 receives a power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a through a main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function to a CLR terminal, which is a clear terminal. This power failure clear signal is designed to be started and stopped after a predetermined time has passed in the processing performed by the main control MPU 1310a when power is turned on on the main control side, which will be described later. Since the CLR terminal is a negative logic input, the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is input to the CLR terminal via the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function with the logic being LOW. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 is designed to release the latched state when a power failure clear signal is input to the CLR terminal. is output from the 1Q terminal.

On the other hand, when the output of the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is stopped, the logic becomes HI through the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function and is input to the CLR terminal. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 is adapted to set a latch state when the power failure clear signal is not input to the CLR terminal, and latches the input state in which the logic is LOW to the PR terminal.

The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, and is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. A signal output from the 1Q terminal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a as a power failure warning signal. The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function, and resets the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The functionless main control output circuit 1310cb outputs to the payout control board 951 as a payout power outage warning signal, and outputs to the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power outage warning signal.

The main control input circuit 1310b electrically connects the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, and the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the amplifier MIC22, is electrically connected to the other end of a resistor MR26 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 via a resistor MR27. It is connected. The base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to the resistor MR27 and also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR28, one end of which is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR20 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of a resistor MR29, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Main control via ICMIC23 (Non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (MIC23A) without inverting it.). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the MPU 1310a.

A circuit composed of the resistors MR27, MR28 and the transistor MTR20 is a switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by a signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, turning off the transistor MTR20. , the switch circuit is also turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled up to the +5V side, turning on the transistor MTR20. The switch circuit is also turned ON.

When both the condition that the voltage of +24V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are met, the logic HI signal is preset to the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Since the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is input to the PR terminal, which is the terminal PR, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20. Turn off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor MR29, and the power failure warning signal whose logic becomes HI through the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 is output to the input terminal of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. Input to PA1.

On the other hand, when either one of the condition that the voltage of +24V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is D. Since the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes HI and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20. This turns on the transistor MTR20. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the power failure warning signal whose logic becomes LOW through the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 is output to the input terminal of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. Input to PA1.

In addition, the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb that outputs the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the payout control board 951 as the payout power outage notice signal is open as shown in FIG. The circuit is configured as a collector output type, and the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 1310b described above, and the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is connected via the resistor MR30. It is electrically connected to the base terminal. The base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the preceding stage is electrically connected to the resistor MR30, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR31, one end of which is connected to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR32, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the subsequent transistor MTR22 via a resistor MR33. The base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the resistor MR33, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR34 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is grounded (GND), the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC26, one end of which is grounded (GND), and the wiring It is electrically connected to the payout control board 951 via (harness). In addition, when the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the latter stage is electrically connected to the payout control board 951 via wiring (harness), the payout control input of the payout control unit 952 shown in FIG. 70 in the payout control board 951 In the circuit 952b, one end is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) electrically connected to the +12V power supply line, and the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a shown in FIG. connected.

A circuit composed of the resistors MR30 and MR31 and the transistor MTR21 of the preceding stage is a switching circuit of the preceding stage, and a circuit composed of the resistors MR33, MR34 and the transistor MTR22 of the succeeding stage is a switching circuit of the latter stage, and is a D-type flip-flop. It is turned ON/OFF by a signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC 22 .

When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the preceding transistor MTR21 is turned off, the switch circuit in the previous stage is also turned off, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage, which is the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage, is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor MR32. As a result, the transistor MTR22 in the latter stage is turned on, and the switch circuit in the latter stage is also turned on. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 is pulled up to the +5V side, turning on the transistor MTR21. The switch circuit in the previous stage is also turned on, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage, which is the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage, is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, thereby The transistor MTR22 is turned off, and the subsequent switch circuit is also turned off.

When both the condition that the voltage of +24V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are met, the logic HI signal is preset to the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Since the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the terminal PR, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage. transistor MTR21 is turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the preceding stage is pulled up to +5 V by the resistor MR32 and applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage, thereby turning on the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is lowered to the ground (GND) side in the payout control board 951 via the wiring (harness), so that the payout power outage warning signal whose logic becomes LOW is issued. It is input to the control board 951 .

On the other hand, when either one of the condition that the voltage of +24V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is D. Since the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes HIGH in logic and is applied to the base terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21. The input turns ON the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is pulled down to the ground (GND) and applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage, thereby turning off the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor MTR22 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor in the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952 in the payout control board 951 through the wiring (harness). A payout power outage warning signal whose logic is HI is input to the payout control board 951 .

In addition, the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function that outputs the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the peripheral control board 1510 as the peripheral power failure warning signal is open as shown in FIG. The circuit is configured as a collector output type, and the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 1310b described above, and connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 via the resistor MR35. is electrically connected to The base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the resistor MR35, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR36, one end of which is connected to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR23 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via wiring (harness), the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control section 1511 in the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. , one end of which is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line, and is electrically connected to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. Connected.

A circuit composed of the resistors MR35 and MR36 and the transistor MTR23 is a switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by a signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, turning off the transistor MTR23. , the switch circuit is also turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled up to the +5V side, turning on the transistor MTR23. The switch circuit is also turned ON.

When both the condition that the voltage of +24V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are met, the logic HI signal is preset to the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Since the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is input to the PR terminal, which is the terminal PR, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23. Turn off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor in the payout control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 1511 in the peripheral control board 1510 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. is input to the peripheral control board 1510 .

On the other hand, when either one of the condition that the voltage of +24V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is D. Since the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes HI in logic and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23. This turns on the transistor MTR23. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the peripheral control board 1510 via the wiring (harness), so that the peripheral power failure warning signal whose logic becomes LOW is generated by the peripheral control board. 1510.

In this way, the main control input circuit 1310b that transmits the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the main control MPU 1310a as a blackout warning signal, and the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. A main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function that outputs a signal output from the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power outage warning signal and a main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function each have one transistor. While the logic of the peripheral power failure warning signal input to the control board 1510 is the same logic, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22, is issued to the payout control board 951. The main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function that outputs a power failure warning signal has two transistors, a front stage and a rear stage. The logic is the inversion of the logic of the peripheral power outage warning signal input to the control board 1510, and is different from the logic of the power outage warning signal and the logic of the peripheral power outage warning signal.

The collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR29, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and the main control MPU 1310a through the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23. is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA, the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage of the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb is connected via wiring (harness) to the payout control board. In the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952 in 951, one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor electrically connected to the +12V power supply line, and the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb The collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to a pull-up resistor one end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line in the payout control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 1511 in the peripheral control board 1510 via a wiring (harness). It is connected to the. This is because the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b and the main control MPU 1310a are located between the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b and the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. 1310, the main control board 1310 and the payout control board, whereas the power failure warning signal logic (ON / OFF signal) using +5V which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a 951 and between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, the main control MPU 1310a, A power failure warning is performed by the power failure warning signal logic (ON/OFF signal) using +12V, which is a voltage higher than +5V which is the control reference voltage of the payout control MPU 952a and the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

[9-6. Various input/output signals to the main control MPU]
Next, various input/output signals to the main control MPU 1310a will be described with reference to FIG. The RXA terminal, which is the serial data input terminal of the serial input port of the main control MPU 1310a, receives the serial data from the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 69 as the payer serial data reception signal via the main control input circuit 1310b. . On the other hand, the TXA terminal and TXB terminal, which are the serial data output terminals of the serial output port of the main control MPU 1310a, use the serial data transmitted from the TXA terminal to the payout control board 951 as the main payment serial data transmission signal as the main control output without reset function. The main payment serial data transmission signal is transmitted to the circuit 1310cb without reset function from the main control output circuit 1310cb to the payout control board 951, and the serial data to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. A peripheral serial data transmission signal is transmitted to the main control output circuit 1310 cb without reset function, and the main peripheral serial data transmission signal is transmitted from the main control output circuit 1310 cb without reset function to the peripheral control board 1510 .

In addition to the above-described operation signal (RAM clear signal) being input to each input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a, for example, a payout signal indicating the completion of normal reception of the main payment serial data reception signal described above A payer ACK signal from the control board 951 is input via the main control input circuit 1310b, and detection signals from various switches such as the first starting port sensor 4002 shown in FIG. 69 are input via the main control input circuit 1310b. respectively entered or equal.

On the other hand, from each output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a, for example, a main payment ACK signal indicating the completion of normal reception of the above-mentioned payer serial data reception signal is output to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function. Then, a main payment ACK signal is output from the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function to the payout control board 951, and a drive signal is sent to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function for the start opening solenoid 2107 shown in FIG. and output a drive signal from the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function to the starting port solenoid 2107 via the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, and various displays such as the first special symbol display 1403 shown in FIG. For the device, a drive signal is output to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, and a drive signal is output from the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function to various displays, and various information (game information) related to the game is output to the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function, and various information (game information) related to the game is output to the payout control board 951 from the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function.

[9-7. Interface circuit for communication between main control board and peripheral control board]
Next, an interface circuit for communication between main control board 1310 and peripheral control board 1510 will be described with reference to FIG. The main control board 1310 is supplied with +12V from the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. ing. The main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 is affected by noise entering the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. In order to suppress this, +12V, which is higher than +5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, is used for transmission, thereby increasing its reliability.

Specifically, the main control board 1310 causes the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function to function as a communication interface circuit, and the communication interface circuit mainly comprises a resistor MR50, resistors MR51 and MR52, and a transistor MTR50. It is On the other hand, the peripheral control board 1510 includes, as a communication interface circuit, a diode AD10, an electrolytic capacitor AC10 (capacitance: 47 μF in this embodiment), a photocoupler AIC10 (infrared LED and photo IC built-in). It is composed mainly of

+12 V supplied from the power supply board 931 is applied to the anode terminal of the diode MD50 of the main control board 1310 through the payout control board 951, and the negative terminal is grounded to the ground (GND) to the cathode terminal of the diode MD50. is electrically connected to the positive terminal of an electrolytic capacitor MC50 (capacitance: 220 microfarads (μF) in this embodiment). The cathode terminal of the diode MD50 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, and is also electrically connected to the anode terminal (terminal 1) of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510 via wiring (harness). It is connected to the. As a result, for example, due to a power failure or momentary power failure, when the power from the power supply board 931 is no longer supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951, the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC50 +12V can be continuously applied from the main control board 1310 to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510 .

In this way, the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is charged to the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. Therefore, the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae incorporated in the main control MPU 1310a serially manages at least the command set by the main control CPU core 1310aa in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb. The data can be transferred to the transmission shift register 41aea by the unit 1310aec and transmitted from the transmission shift register 1310aea as main peripheral serial data.

The main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 is transmitted to the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 as described above. In order to suppress the influence of intruding noise, +12V, which is higher than +5V which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, is used for transmission, thereby increasing its reliability.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, +12 V is charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC50 so that it is applied from the main control board 1310 to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a transfers the command set by the main control CPU core 1310aa in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb to the transmission shift register 41aea by the serial management unit 1310aec and transmits it. When it is transmitted from the shift register 1310aea as main cycle serial data, it is possible to transmit a main cycle serial data transmission signal whose logic is HI by +12V from the collector terminal of the transistor MTR50.

In this embodiment, the storage capacity of the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae incorporated in the main control MPU 1310a has a storage capacity of 32 bytes, and one packet is composed of 3 bytes of data. Therefore, data of up to 10 packets are stored in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb. Also, in this embodiment, the transfer bit rate of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control MPU 1310a is set to 19200 bps.

The cathode terminal (third terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR50 on the main control board 1310 via the resistor AR10 and its wiring (harness). A resistor AR10 of the peripheral control board 1510 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10.

The TXB terminal that outputs the main peripheral serial data transmission signal from the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 via. The base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is electrically connected to the resistor MR51, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR52 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR50 is grounded (GND).

A circuit composed of the resistors MR51 and MR52 and the transistor MTR50 is a switch circuit. When the logic of the main frequency serial data transmission signal is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is applied to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the transistor MTR50 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, forward current does not flow through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510, so the photocoupler AIC10 is turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor MR50, turning on the transistor MTR50 and also turning on the switch circuit. . As a result, a forward current flows through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510, so that the photocoupler AIC10 is turned on.

+5 V supplied from the power supply board 931 is applied to the anode terminal of the diode AD10 of the peripheral control board 1510 through the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the cathode terminal of the diode AD10 is grounded (GND), and the negative terminal is grounded (GND). It is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the grounded electrolytic capacitor AC10. The cathode terminal of the diode AD10 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10, and is also electrically connected to the Vcc terminal (terminal 6), which is the power supply terminal of the photocoupler AIC10. The emitter terminal (4th terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal (5th terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 is a pull-up resistor electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10. It is pulled up to the +5V side by AR11 and electrically connected to the input terminal of the main control board serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. By turning ON/OFF the photocoupler AIC10, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 changes, and the signal is transmitted as the main peripheral serial data transmission signal to the main control board serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. is input to the input terminal of

As a result, as described above, when the +5V supplied from the power supply board 931 is no longer supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 due to, for example, a power failure or momentary power failure, The electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor AC10 can be continuously applied to the Vcc terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 as +5V. When a power outage or momentary power failure occurs, the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510 is transmitted to the main control MPU 1310a by applying +5V from the electrolytic capacitor AC10. The transmission of the data set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the built-in main circumference serial transmission port 1310ae can be completed, and the main circumference serial data transmission signal in the middle of transmission, that is, the main circumference serial data is cut off. The peripheral control board 1510 reliably receives the data without missing or missing data.

When the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510 is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the transistor Since the photocoupler AIC10 is turned off by turning off the MTR50, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor AR11, and the logic becomes HI. While the serial data transmission signal is input to the input terminal of the main control board serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510 is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled up to +5 V by the resistor MR50 to turn on the transistor MTR50, thereby turning on the photocoupler AIC10. The voltage applied to the collector terminal is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the main peripheral serial data transmission signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal of the serial I/O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. . Thus, the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 is the same as the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510. It is the logic of

Thus, in this embodiment, a +5V power line to which +5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, is applied, and a +12V power line to which +12V, which is the communication voltage applied via the diode MD50, is applied. , measures are taken when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the control reference voltage and communication voltage drop. That is, for the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a, the +5V power supply line, the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 using the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit 1310h as the first auxiliary power supply, are electrically connected in parallel, even if a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the control reference voltage applied from the +5V power supply line drops, the electrolytic capacitor of the main control filter circuit 1310h which is the first auxiliary power supply By applying the control reference voltage from the positive terminal of MC2, it is possible to maintain the state in which the control reference voltage is applied. +12V applied to the +12V power supply line is applied to the anode terminal of diode MD50 as a communication voltage for main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function that functions as a communication interface circuit. and the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, which is the second auxiliary power supply, are electrically connected in parallel, so that a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the communication voltage is applied from the +12V power supply line through the diode MD50. Even if the voltage drops, the state in which the communication voltage is applied can be maintained by applying the communication voltage from the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, which is the second auxiliary power supply. there is As a result, the command being transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 can be prevented from being interrupted, and the command can be prevented from being omitted. can do. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the command from being missed immediately after the occurrence of a power failure or during an instantaneous power failure.

In addition, a plurality of commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a are all used as main peripheral serial data, and are composed of the resistor MR50, the resistors MR51 and MR52, and the transistor MTR50. 470 μF is set as the capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit 1310h so that transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 can be completed via the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function that functions as a communication interface circuit. and 220 μF is set as the capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor MC50. As a result, even if a power failure or momentary power failure occurs during transmission from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, the multiple commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb are reset so that all of them function as interface circuits as main peripheral serial data. Since the transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 can be completed via the non-functioning main control output circuit 1310cb, the peripheral control board 1510 does not interrupt or drop multiple commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb. can be received without fail.

[10. Circuit of Payout Control Board]
Next, the circuit etc. of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 will be described with reference to FIGS. 80 to 85. FIG. 80 is a circuit diagram showing the circuit of the payout control unit, etc., FIG. 81 is a circuit diagram showing a payout control input circuit, FIG. 82 is a circuit diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 81, and FIG. FIG. 84 is a circuit diagram showing a CR unit input/output circuit, and FIG. It is an output figure. First, the payout control filter circuit 951a will be described, and then the circuit of the payout control unit, various input/output signals with the main control board 1310, and various output signals to the external terminal board 784 will be described.

[10-1. Dispensing Control Filter Circuit]
As shown in FIG. 80, the payout control filter circuit 951a is mainly composed of a payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0. This payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0 is a T-type filter circuit, magnetically shielded with ferrite, and has excellent attenuation characteristics. The 1st terminal of the payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0 is applied with +5 V from the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. The +5V from the power supply board 931 is smoothed by the capacitor PC0 by first removing the ripple (AC component superimposed on the voltage). The 2nd terminal of the payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0 is grounded (GND), and the 3rd terminal of the payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0 outputs +5V from which the noise component is removed.

The third terminal of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 has one end connected to the ground (GND), and the other end of the capacitor PC1 and the electrolytic capacitor PC2 (capacitance: 180 microfarads (μF) in this embodiment). By being electrically connected to each other, the +5V output from the third terminal of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 is further smoothed by removing ripples. This smoothed +5V is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1, the VCC terminal that is the power supply terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, the VDD terminal that is the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, etc., which will be described later. . It should be noted that the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, is supplied with the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor PC2 when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the power supply from the pachinko island facility is cut off. It is applied as +5 V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after generation.

The VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor PC3, one end of which is grounded (GND), and the +5V applied to the VDD terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples by the capacitor PC3. ing. A VSS terminal, which is a ground terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, is grounded (GND).

Moreover, the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a is electrically connected to the anode terminal of the diode PD0 in addition to being electrically connected to the capacitor PC3. The cathode terminal of the diode PD0 is electrically connected to the VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the RAM (payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU 952a, and one end is the ground (GND) and the capacitor PC4 that is grounded. is electrically connected to the other end of the The VBB terminal of this payout control built-in RAM is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode PD0 and the other end of the capacitor PC4. electrically connected to the terminal. That is, +5V smoothed by removing noise components by the payout control filter circuit 951a is applied to the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, and is applied to the VBB terminal of the payout control built-in RAM and the capacitor BC1 through the diode PD0. is intended to be applied to the positive terminal of As a result, as described above, when the +5V generated by the power source generation circuit 935d of the power source substrate 931 shown in FIG. Since it is supplied to the payout control board 951 as, the current is blocked by the diode PD0 and does not flow to the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, and the payout control MPU 952a does not operate. The memory contents are held by applying VBB. Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the backup power supply circuit for supplying backup power to the payout control built-in RAM is composed of the diode PD0 and the capacitor BC1.

[10-2. Circuit of Payout Control Unit]
In addition to a payout control MPU 952a, a payout control input circuit 952b, a payout control output circuit 952c, a payout motor drive circuit 952d, and a CR unit input/output circuit 952e, the payout control unit 952 includes peripheral circuits as shown in FIG. It mainly consists of a payout control system reset PIC1 that outputs a signal and a payout control crystal oscillator PX0 that outputs a clock signal (8 megahertz (MHz) in this embodiment). Here, the payout control system reset will be described first, followed by the payout control crystal oscillator, payout control input circuit, payout motor drive circuit, CR unit input/output circuit, and various input/output signals to the payout control MPU.

[10-2-1. Dispensing control system reset]
+5V smoothed by removing the noise component by the payout control filter circuit 951a is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1, as shown in FIG. The payout control system reset PIC1 resets the payout control MPU 952a and the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, and incorporates a delay circuit. The delay capacitance terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1 is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor PC5, one end of which is grounded (GND), and the delay time of the delay circuit is set by the capacity of this capacitor PC5. It is possible to do so. Specifically, the payout control system reset PIC1 outputs a system reset signal from the output terminal after the delay time elapses when +5V input to the power terminal reaches a threshold value (eg, 4.25V).

The output terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1 is electrically connected to the SRT0 terminal, which is the reset terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, and the reset terminal of the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function. The output terminal is an open-collector output type capacitor, one end of which is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR1 electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and the other end of which is grounded (GND). It is electrically connected to the other end of PC6. This capacitor PC6 plays a role as a low-pass filter. When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is higher than the threshold, the output terminal is pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor PR1 and the logic becomes HI, and this logic is the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU 952a and the payout control output with reset function. While input to the reset terminal of the circuit 952ca, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal is smaller than the threshold, the logic becomes LOW, and this logic is applied to the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU 952a and the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function. Input to the reset pin respectively. Since the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU 952a and the reset terminal of the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function are negative logic inputs, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal becomes smaller than the threshold, the payout control MPU 952a and the reset function The attached payout control output circuit 952ca is reset. One end of the power terminal is electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of a capacitor PC7, and the +5 V input to the power terminal is smoothed by removing ripples. Also, the ground terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and the NC terminal is electrically unconnected to the outside.

[10-2-2. Dispensing Control Crystal Oscillator]
+5V from which the noise component has been removed and smoothed by the payout control filter circuit 951a is input to the VCC terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, as shown in FIG. This VCC terminal is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor PC8, one end of which is grounded (GND), and the +5V input to the VCC terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples. In addition to the VCC terminal, this smoothed +5V is also applied to the OE terminal, which is the output enable terminal of the payout controlled crystal oscillator PX0. When +5 V is applied to the OE terminal of the payout controlled crystal oscillator PX0, the 8 MHz clock signal is output from the OUT terminal, which is the output terminal.

The OUT terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0 is electrically connected to the MCLK terminal, which is the clock terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, and an 8 MHz clock signal is input to the payout control MPU 952a. The GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the payout controlled crystal oscillator PX0, is grounded to the ground (GND).

[10-2-3. Payout control input circuit]
The payout control input circuit 952b receives payout power failure notice signals from the door frame open switch 618, the body frame open switch 619, and the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e provided in the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. circuit, handle relay terminal plate 315 shown in FIG. 70, a circuit to which the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 is input via the power supply board 931, a circuit to which the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input, and the like. . First, the circuit to which the detection signal from the door frame open switch is input will be explained, followed by the circuit to which the detection signal from the body frame open switch is input, the circuit to which the output power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit is input, A circuit to which a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor is input and a circuit to which an operation signal is input from the operation switch will be described. Various detection switches such as the full tank detection sensor 279, the out-of-ball detection sensor 827, the payout detection sensor 842, and the rotation detection sensor 840 shown in FIG. Since the circuit configuration to which the detection signal from the switch is input is almost the same, the circuit to which the detection signal from the full-tank detection sensor is input will be described here.

[10-2-3(a). Circuit where the detection signal from the door frame open switch is input]
The door frame open switch 618 uses a normally closed type (normally closed (NC)), and when the door frame 3 is opened from the body frame 4 as shown in FIG. 3 is closed by the body frame 4, the switch is turned off (disconnected). The second terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is grounded (GND), while the first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is a pull-up resistor PR20 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. , and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 via a resistor PR21. The base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is electrically connected to the resistor PR21, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR22 whose one end is grounded (GND). Further, the first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR20, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC20, one end of which is grounded (GND). . The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR20 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of a resistor PR23, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and the non-inverting buffer. Payout control via ICPIC20 (non-inverting buffer ICPIC20 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC20A) without inverting it.) It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the MPU 952a. The ON/OFF of the transistor PTR20 changes the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a as a door opening signal.

The first terminal of the door frame open switch 618 is pulled up to +5V by a pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 via a resistor PR21. and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 through the resistor PR24. The base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the resistor PR24, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR25, one end of which is connected to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR21 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the external terminal plate 784 via wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the external terminal plate 784 via wiring (harness), one end of the external terminal plate 784 is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line (not shown). It is electrically connected to the other end of the up resistor. By turning ON/OFF the transistor PTR21, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 changes, and the signal is input to the external terminal plate 784 as the outer end frame door open information output signal.

Further, the No. 1 terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20 and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 through the resistor PR21, and is also connected to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20. , and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 through the resistor PR24. ing. The base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the resistor PR26, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR27 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR22 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 via wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via wiring (harness), one end of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the line. The ON/OFF of the transistor PTR22 changes the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22, and the signal is input to the main control board 1310 as the main frame door opening signal.

A circuit composed of a pull-up resistor PR20 and a capacitor PC20 is a switch signal generating circuit, and when the door frame 3 is opened from the body frame 4 or when the door frame 3 is closed with the body frame 4, It is configured as a circuit that also has a function of absorbing voltage fluctuations from the door frame opening switch 618 due to a flapping phenomenon in which the contacts constituting the door frame opening switch 618 repeat ON/OFF for a short period of time.

A circuit composed of resistors PR21, PR22 and transistor PTR20, a circuit composed of resistors PR24, PR25 and transistor PTR21, and a circuit composed of resistors PR26, PR27 and transistor PTR22 are door frame opening switches. It is a switch circuit that is turned on/off by a detection signal from 618 .

When the door frame 3 is released from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is turned on. Therefore, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor PTR20 is turned on. It is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR23, and the door frame open signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. be. Further, when the door frame 3 is released from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor The PTR 21 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal plate 784 through the wiring (harness), and the outer edge frame door open information output signal whose logic becomes HI. is input to the external terminal plate 784 . Further, when the door frame 3 is released from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is turned on. Therefore, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor The PTR 22 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. A door open signal is input to the main control board 1310 .

On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is closed from the body frame 4, the door frame open switch 618 is off, so the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PR20. , the transistor PTR20 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the door frame open signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. Further, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is OFF, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is raised to +5V, thereby turning the transistor PTR21 ON. Then, the switch circuit is also turned ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the outer end frame door open information output signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the external terminal plate 784. FIG. Further, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is OFF, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is raised to +5V, thereby turning the transistor PTR22 ON. Then, the switch circuit is also turned ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the main frame door open signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the main control board 1310 .

In this way, when the door frame 3 is released from the body frame 4, the door frame open switch 618 is turned ON, so that the door frame open signal whose logic is HI is output to the input terminal of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. The outer end frame door open information output signal which is input to PA0 and whose logic is HI is input to the external terminal plate 784, and the main frame door open signal whose logic is HI is input to the main control board 1310. When the door frame 3 is closed to the body frame 4, the door frame open switch 618 is turned off, so that the door frame open signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. , the outer end frame door open information output signal whose logic is LOW is input to the external terminal plate 784 , and the main frame door open signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control board 1310 .

[10-2-3(b). Circuit where the detection signal from the body frame open switch is input]
The body frame opening switch 619 is of a normally closed type (normally closed (NC)), and when the body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 shown in FIG. 4 is closed by the outer frame 2, the switch is turned off (disconnected). The No. 2 terminal of the body frame open switch 619 is grounded (GND), while the No. 1 terminal of the body frame open switch 619 has a pull-up resistor PR28 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5V power line. , and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 via a resistor PR29. The base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the resistor PR29, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR30 whose one end is grounded (GND). In addition, the first terminal of the body frame open switch 619 is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR28, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC21 whose one end is grounded (GND). . The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR23 is grounded (GND), the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21, and is connected to the external terminal plate 784 via wiring (harness). electrically connected. When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the external terminal plate 784 via wiring (harness), one end of the external terminal plate 784 is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line (not shown). It is electrically connected to the other end of the up resistor. The ON/OFF of the transistor PTR23 changes the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23, and the signal is input to the external terminal plate 784 as the outer end frame door open information output signal.

The first terminal of the body frame open switch 619 is pulled up to the +5V side by a pull-up resistor PR28 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 via the resistor PR29. , and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 via the resistor PR31. The base terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the resistor PR31, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR32 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR24 is grounded (GND), the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 described above, and the wiring (harness) shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 . When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via wiring (harness), one end of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the line. The ON/OFF of the transistor PTR24 changes the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24, and the signal is input to the main control board 1310 as the main frame door opening signal.

A circuit composed of a pull-up resistor PR28 and a capacitor PC21 is a switch signal generating circuit. It is configured as a circuit that also has a function of absorbing fluctuations in voltage from the body frame open switch 619 due to a flapping phenomenon in which the contacts forming the body frame open switch 619 repeat ON/OFF for a short period of time.

A circuit composed of resistors PR29, PR30 and transistor PTR23 and a circuit composed of resistors PR31, PR32 and transistor PTR24 are switch circuits that are turned ON/OFF by a detection signal from body frame open switch 619. FIG.

When the body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the body frame open switch 619 is ON, so the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor PTR23 is turned on. It is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal plate 784 through the wiring (harness), and the outer end frame door open information output signal whose logic becomes HI. is input to the external terminal plate 784 . In addition, when the body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the body frame open switch 619 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor The PTR 24 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. A door open signal is input to the main control board 1310 .

On the other hand, when the body frame 4 is closed by the outer frame 2, the body frame open switch 619 is turned off, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PR28. , the transistor PTR23 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side at the external terminal plate 784 through the wiring (harness), and the outer end frame door open information output signal whose logic becomes LOW is generated. It is input to the external terminal board 784 . When the body frame 4 is closed by the outer frame 2, the body frame open switch 619 is turned off, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PR28. , the transistor PTR24 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the main frame door opening signal whose logic becomes LOW is generated by the main control board. 1310.

In this way, when the body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the body frame open switch 619 is turned ON, and the outer end frame door open information output signal whose logic is HI is input to the external terminal plate 784. A main frame door open signal whose logic is HI is input to the main control board 1310. On the other hand, when the main body frame 4 is closed by the outer frame 2, the main body frame open switch 619 is turned off, thereby turning off the logic. is input to the external terminal plate 784 , and the main frame door open signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control board 1310 .

In this embodiment, as described above, one or both of the state in which the door frame 3 is closed with the main body frame 4 and the state in which the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 69, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 receives the main frame door opening signal. Although it cannot be determined whether the door frame 3 is released from the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2 based on the door frame 3 and / or It is possible for the player to determine that the body frame 4 is open, which does not occur during a normal game, and that the outer end frame door open information output signal is sent to the external terminal plate 784. Since the outer end frame door open information output signal is transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal plate 784, the hall computer outputs the door frame door open information output signal based on the outer end frame door open information output signal. 3 is released from the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the door frame 3 and/or the main body frame 4 are opened. It can be determined that a state that does not occur during a normal game has occurred.

In this embodiment, as described above, the door frame open switch 618 and the body frame open switch 619 are normally closed switches. Even if the door frame 3 is released from the main body frame 4, and the main body frame open switch 619 is short-circuited for some reason and the switch is turned on (conducting), the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2. By adopting normally closed switches for the door frame open switch 618 and the body frame open switch 619 in this manner, it is possible to output the main frame door open signal to the main control board 1310 even in the event of a short circuit, and A frame door open information output signal can be transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784 .

If the door frame open switch 618 and the body frame open switch 619 are changed from normally closed switches to normally open (normally open (NO)) switches (door frame open switch 618' and body frame open switch 619'), , the door frame open switch 618' is turned ON (conducting) when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, and turned OFF (disconnected) when the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4. . The body frame open switch 619 ′ is turned on (conducting) when the body frame 4 is closed from the outer frame 2 and turned off (disconnected) when the body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 . Then, even if the door frame open switch 618' is disconnected for some reason and the switch is turned OFF (disconnected), the door frame 3 will be in a state of being released from the body frame 4. Even if the frame opening switch 619' is broken and the switch is turned OFF (disconnected), the body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2. FIG. In this way, even if normally open switches are used for the door frame open switch 618' and the body frame open switch 619', the main frame door open signal can be output to the main control board 1310 even when the wire is broken. An outer end frame door open information output signal can be transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784 .

[10-2-3(c). Circuit to which output power failure warning signal from power failure monitoring circuit is input]
A transmission line for transmitting a power outage warning signal from a power outage monitoring circuit 1310e provided in the main control board 1310 is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor PR40 whose one end is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of transistor PTR40 via PR41. The base terminal of the transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to the resistor PR41, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR42 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR40 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to the other end of a resistor PR43, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and the non-inverting buffer. Payout control via ICPIC40 (non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC40A) without inverting it.) It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the MPU 952a. The ON/OFF of the transistor PTR40 changes the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a as the payout power failure warning signal.

A circuit composed of resistors PR41, PR42, and transistor PTR40 is a switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by an output power failure warning signal from a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e provided in the main control board 1310. FIG.

As described above, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors signs of power failure or momentary power failure of the two voltages of +12 V and +24 V from the power supply board 931, and when the power failure or momentary power failure signs are detected, the reset function is disabled. A payout power failure notice signal is output to the payout control board 951 as a power failure notice via the main control output circuit 1310cb. The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors the +12V and +24V voltages for signs of power failure or momentary power failure, and as described above, the +24V voltage is greater than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, and the +12V voltage is greater than the power failure detection voltage V2pf. When both conditions of the large condition are satisfied, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the payout control board 951 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes LOW. While the payout power failure warning signal is input to the payout control board 951, one of the conditions that the voltage of +24V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf When the condition is established, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor MTR22 is pulled up to the +12V side by the above-mentioned pull-up resistor PR40 through the wiring (harness), so that the logic becomes HI. is input to the payout control board 951 .

When both the condition that the voltage of +24V is greater than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is greater than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, that is, there is no sign of power failure or momentary power failure of the voltages of +12V and +24V. Occasionally, since a payout power outage notice signal whose logic is LOW is input to the payout control board 951, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, thereby turning off the transistor PTR40. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor PTR40 is pulled up to the +5V side by resistor PR43. As a result, the payout power outage warning signal whose logic is HI is input from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

On the other hand, when either one of the condition that the voltage of +24V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, that is, the voltage of +12V and/or +24V. When there is a sign of a power failure or momentary power failure, a payout power failure warning signal whose logic is HI is input to the payout control board 951, so that the power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40. The voltage applied to the transistor PTR40 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor PR40 to turn on the transistor PTR40, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the payout power failure warning signal in which the logic of the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

In this way, when there is a sign of power failure or instantaneous power failure of the voltage of +12V and / or +24V, a payout power failure warning signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a, When there is no sign of power failure or instantaneous power failure of the voltages of +12V and +24V, a payout power failure warning signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. This is because, as described above, when there is a sign of power failure or momentary power failure of the voltage of +12V and/or +24V, a power failure warning signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. On the other hand, when there is no sign of power failure or momentary power failure of the voltages of +12V and +24V, the power failure warning signal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a, so that the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e The logic of the payout power outage notice signal input to the payout control MPU 952a and the logic of the power outage notice signal input to the main control MPU 1310a are the same logic.

[10-2-3(d). Circuit to which the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor is input]
A detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 provided in the foul cover unit 270 shown in FIG. is entered in The output terminal of this full tank detection sensor 279 is circuit-configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded (GND), and one end is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line in the payout control board 951. is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR44a, and is electrically connected to the first terminal of the three-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor. This three-terminal filter PIC50 for a full-tank detection sensor is a T-type filter circuit, magnetically shielded with ferrite, and has excellent attenuation characteristics.

The 2nd terminal of the 3-terminal filter PIC50 for the full-tank detection sensor is grounded (GND), and the 3rd terminal of the 3-terminal filter PIC50 for the full-tank detection sensor is connected to the 3-terminal for the full-tank detection sensor via a resistor PR44b. It is electrically connected to the first terminal of the terminal filter PIC50, and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 via the resistor PR45. As a result, the detection signal of the full-tank detection sensor 279 is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 after noise components are removed in the three-terminal filter PIC50 for the full-tank detection sensor. The base terminal of the transistor PTR41 is electrically connected to the resistor PR45, is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR46 whose one end is grounded (GND), and is electrically connected to the ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the other end of the electrically connected capacitor PC40. Capacitor PC40 plays a role as a low-pass filter. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR41 is grounded (GND), the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is electrically connected to the other end of a resistor PR47 having one end electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and is a non-inverting buffer. Payout control via ICPIC40 (non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC40B) without inverting it.) It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the MPU 952a. The ON/OFF of the transistor PTR41 changes the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a as a full tank signal.

A circuit composed of resistors PR45, PR46 and transistor PTR41 is a switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279. FIG.

As described above, the full tank detection sensor 279 detects whether or not the accommodation space in the second ball passage of the foul cover unit 270 is full of stored game balls. In this embodiment, when the accommodation space is not full of stored game balls, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full-tank detection sensor 279 is applied via the handle relay terminal plate 315 and the power supply board 931, In the payout control board 951, a signal pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor 44a and the logic becomes HI is input to the payout control board 951, while the housing space is filled with the stored game balls. , the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the payout control board 951 via the handle relay terminal board 315 and the power supply board 931, and the logic becomes LOW. is input to the payout control board 951 .

When the accommodation space is not filled with the stored game balls, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is applied to the handle relay terminal plate 315, and through the power supply board 931, to the payout control board 951. A signal pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor 44a and logic HI is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41, thereby turning on the transistor PTR41 and also turning on the switch circuit. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the full tank signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a.

On the other hand, when the accommodation space is full of stored game balls, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full-tank detection sensor 279 is applied to the handle relay terminal plate 315 and the power supply board 931 via the payout control board. At 951, the signal pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41, thereby turning off the transistor PTR41 and also turning off the switch circuit. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor PR47, and the full tank signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a.

In this embodiment, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 is input to the switch circuit composed of the resistor PR45, the resistor PR46, and the transistor PTR41 via the full tank detection sensor 3-terminal filter PIC50. Although it was a circuit configuration, the detection signals from various detection switches such as the ball out detection sensor 827 and the payout detection sensor 842 shown in FIG. It has a circuit configuration in which it is directly input to each switch circuit without going through. Since the full-tank detection sensor 279 is provided in the foul cover unit 270 attached to the door frame 3, compared with the out-of-ball detection sensor 827, the payout detection sensor 842, etc. provided in the payout device 830 attached to the main body frame 4. , the path for transmitting the detection signal is extremely long, and is extremely susceptible to noise.

The full tank detection sensor 279 detects whether or not the storage space in the second ball passage of the foul cover unit 270 is filled with stored game balls. Based on the detection signal from 279, when it is determined that the storage space is full of stored game balls, the drive control of the payout motor 834 is forcibly stopped to stop the payout of game balls by the payout rotator. It is designed to control. In other words, when noise enters the transmission path (transmission line) that transmits the detection signal from the full-tank detection sensor 279, the payout control MPU 952a detects that the game balls in which the accommodation space is stored are not full, but the payout motor 834 In some cases, the drive control is forcibly stopped to stop the payout of game balls by the payout rotating body. When game balls are filled up to the upstream side of the winning ball passage by controlling and rotating the payout rotor to continue the payout of the game balls, the payout rotor itself cannot rotate and the payout motor 834 is abnormally loaded, the payout motor 834 is overloaded and abnormally heats up and breaks down. be. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in order to prevent such a problem from occurring, the detection signal from the full-tank detection sensor 279 is first filtered by the three-terminal filter PIC50 for the full-tank detection sensor to remove the noise component. adopted.

[10-2-3(e). Circuit to which the operation signal from the operation switch is input]
The first and second output terminals of the operation switch 954 are grounded (GND), and the third and fourth output terminals of the operation switch 954 are pulled up to +5 V by a pull-up resistor PR48. It is pulled up and electrically connected to the base terminal of the preceding transistor PTR42 via a resistor PR49. The base terminal of the transistor PTR42 in the previous stage is electrically connected to the resistor PR49, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR50, one end of which is connected to the ground (GND). The fourth terminal, which is the output terminal of the operation switch 954, is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR48, and is also electrically connected to the ground (GND) at one end of the capacitor PC41, the other end of which is grounded. ing. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR42 in the previous stage is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR42 in the previous stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR51, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the subsequent transistor PTR43 via a resistor PR52. The base terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the resistor PR52, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR53, one end of which is connected to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the rear-stage transistor PTR43 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the rear-stage transistor PTR43 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR54, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. and a non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC40C) without inverting it). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. By turning ON/OFF the transistors PTR42 and PTR43 in the preceding stage and the succeeding stage, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the succeeding stage changes, and the signal is the RWMCLR signal input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. is entered in

The third and fourth output terminals of the operation switch 954 are pulled up to +5 V by a pull-up resistor PR48 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the preceding transistor PTR42 via a resistor PR49. It is pulled up to the +5V side by a pull-up resistor PR48 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR44 through a resistor PR55. The base terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the resistor PR55, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR56, one end of which is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR44 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via wiring (harness), one end of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the other end of pull-up resistor MR2 electrically connected to the power supply line. The ON/OFF of the transistor PTR44 changes the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a as a RAM clear signal.

A circuit composed of a pull-up resistor PR48 and a capacitor PC41 is a switch signal generation circuit, and when the operation switch 954 is pressed, the contacts forming the operation switch 954 repeat ON/OFF for a short time, which is a flapping phenomenon. It is configured as a circuit that also has a function of absorbing voltage fluctuations from the operation switch 954 caused by .

A circuit composed of resistors PR49, PR50 and transistor PTR42 is a switch circuit in the previous stage, a circuit composed of resistors PR52, PR53 and transistor PTR43 is a switch circuit in the latter stage, and resistors PR55, PR56 and transistor PTR44. is a switch circuit, which is turned on/off by an operation signal from the operation switch 954 .

As described above, the operation switch 954 is set to the RAM (payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control board 951 and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 within a predetermined period after the power is turned on. It is operated to clear the built-in RAM (main control built-in RAM), or to cancel the error when an error is reported after the power is turned on. A function to clear the RAM within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on, and to cancel an error after the power is turned on (after a period of time during which the RAM is cleared, that is, after a predetermined period has passed since the power was turned on). It has a function and The operation signal from the operation switch 954 is a RAM clear signal in the function of clearing the RAM within a predetermined period after the power is turned on. ), it becomes an error cancellation signal.

When the operation switch 954 is not operated, the third and fourth terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor PR48, so that the operation signal whose logic becomes HI is sent to the preceding transistor. The voltage is input to the base terminal of PTR42 to turn on the transistor PTR42 in the previous stage, and the switch circuit in the previous stage is also turned on. When the voltage applied is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, the transistor PTR43 in the latter stage is turned off, and the switch circuit in the latter stage is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor PTR43 is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor PR54, and the RWMCLR signal whose logic has become HI is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a. The payout control MPU 952a performs RAM clear for erasing information stored in the payout control built-in RAM when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is HI within a predetermined period after the power is turned on. It is determined that the error is not instructed, and the error is canceled when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is HI after the power is turned on (after a predetermined period has elapsed since the power was turned on). It is judged that it is not instructive.

Further, when the operation switch 954 is not operated, the third and fourth output terminals of the operation switch 954 are pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48, and the operation signal whose logic becomes HI is generated by the transistor PTR44. , the transistor PTR44 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the RAM clear signal whose logic becomes LOW is sent to the main control board 1310. is entered. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 receives a RAM clear signal whose logic is LOW within a predetermined period after the power is turned on, as described above. is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, the transistor MTR0 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is raised to the +5V side by the resistor MR5, and the RAM clear signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. The main control MPU 1310a determines that when the logic of the RAM clear signal input to the input terminal PA0 is HI, it is not an instruction to perform RAM clear for erasing information stored in the main control built-in RAM.

On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is operated, the third and fourth terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are pulled down to the ground (GND) side, so that the operation signal whose logic becomes LOW is output to the preceding transistor. The voltage is input to the base terminal of PTR42 to turn off the transistor PTR42 in the previous stage, and the switch circuit in the previous stage is also turned off. When the voltage applied is pulled up to +5 V by the resistor PR51, the transistor PTR43 in the latter stage is turned on, and the switch circuit in the latter stage is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor PTR43 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the RWMCLR signal whose logic has become LOW is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. The payout control MPU 952a performs RAM clear for erasing information stored in the payout control built-in RAM when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is LOW within a predetermined period after the power is turned on. If the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is LOW after the power is turned on (after a predetermined period has elapsed since the power was turned on), the error is cleared. It is judged to be an instruction.

Further, when the operation switch 954 is being operated, the third terminal and the fourth terminal, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are pulled down to the ground (GND) side by the pull-up resistor PR48, so that the logic becomes LOW. A signal is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR44 to turn off the transistor PTR44, thereby turning off the switch circuit. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2 of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. A clear signal is input to the main control board 1310 . The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 receives a RAM clear signal whose logic is HI within a predetermined period after the power is turned on, as described above. is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, the transistor MTR0 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and a RAM clear signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. The main control MPU 1310a determines that when the logic of the RAM clear signal input to the input terminal PA0 is LOW, it is an instruction to perform RAM clear for erasing the information stored in the main control built-in RAM.

[10-2-4. Dispensing Motor Drive Circuit]
Next, a payout motor drive circuit 952d for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 834 of the payout device 830 shown in FIG. 5 will be described. As shown in FIG. 83, the payout motor drive circuit 952d is mainly composed of a voltage switching circuit 952da and a drive ICPIC60. The power input terminals 1 and 2 of the voltage switching circuit 952da are electrically connected to the +12V power line and the +5V power line, respectively, and +12V and +5V are applied, respectively, and the ground terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da is connected to the ground (GND). Grounded. A voltage switching signal is input to a power switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da. This voltage switching signal is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, and is output from the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function to the power switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da. It is designed to be The power supply output terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da is electrically connected to the third terminal and the tenth terminal which are the cathode terminals of the drive ICPIC 60 via the Zener diode PZD60, and is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the payout motor 834. , and +12 V or +5 V is applied as a motor drive voltage to the cathode terminal of the drive ICPIC 60 via the Zener diode PZD 60 based on the voltage switching signal input to the voltage switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da. It is supplied to the terminal and the tenth terminal, respectively, and also supplied to the dispensing motor 834 .

The drive ICPIC 60 has four Darlington power transistors. In this embodiment, the emitter terminals of the drive ICPIC 60, 6th terminal and 7th terminal, are grounded (GND) respectively, and the base terminal of the drive ICPIC 60 is grounded. A payout motor drive signal is input to certain 1st, 5th, 8th and 12th terminals through resistors PR60 to PR63. The 2nd, 4th, 9th and 11th terminals that are the collector terminals of the drive ICPIC 60 are connected to the 1st, 5th, 8th and 12th terminals that are the base terminals of the drive ICPIC 60, respectively. Correspondingly, when the payout motor drive signal is input to the 1st terminal, 5th terminal, 8th terminal, and 12th terminal, which are the base terminals of the drive ICPIC60, through the resistors PR60 to PR63, respectively, the excitation signal A certain drive pulse is output to each phase (/B phase, B phase, A phase, /A phase) corresponding to the payout motor 834, respectively. This payout motor drive signal is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, and from the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function to the drive ICPIC60 via the resistors PR60 to PR63. Outputs are made to base terminals 1, 5, 8 and 12, respectively. These drive pulses are generated by switching exciting currents flowing through the phases (/B phase, B phase, A phase, and /A phase) of the payout motor 834 to rotate the payout motor 834 . When the driving pulse (excitation signal) of each phase (/B phase, B phase, A phase, /A phase) is interrupted by this switching, a back electromotive force is generated. If this back electromotive force exceeds the withstand voltage of the drive ICPIC 60, the drive ICPIC 60 will be damaged. Therefore, as a protection, the Zener diode PZD0 is electrically connected to the front stage of the 3rd and 10th terminals, which are the cathode terminals of the drive ICPIC 60. A circuit configuration that

[10-2-5. CR unit input/output circuit]
Next, a CR unit input/output circuit 952e for inputting/outputting various signals to/from the CR unit 6 shown in FIG. 71 will be described. The payout control board 951 receives the ball rental request signal BRDY and the one-time payout operation start request signal BRQ from the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 as described above. , are supplied, and a predetermined voltage VL (+12 V) and ground LG created from AC 24 V supplied from the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. Through the terminal plate 869, there is an EXS signal that indicates the start or end of one payout operation, and a PRDY signal that indicates that the payout operation for paying out balls is possible or not possible. and output As shown in FIG. 84, the input/output circuit for inputting/outputting these various signals and the like is mainly composed of photocouplers PIC70 to PIC74 (which incorporate an infrared LED and a phototransistor).

A predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 via the resistor PR70. A cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the ground LG from the CR unit 6 . A resistor PR60 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC70. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned ON, while the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70. At times, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned off. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 via the resistor PR71. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of PTR71. The collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the resistor PR71 and also electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor PR73, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line.

The base terminal of the transistor PTR70 is electrically connected to the resistor PR71, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR74, one end of which is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR70 is grounded (GND), the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is electrically connected to the other end of a resistor PR75 having one end electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and is a non-inverting buffer. 80 through ICPIC80 (non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC80A) without inverting it.). is electrically connected to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a shown in FIG. The ON/OFF of the transistor PTR70 changes the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70, and the signal is input as the CR connection signal 1 to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a.

On the other hand, the base terminal of the transistor PTR71 is not only electrically connected to the resistor PR72, but also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR76 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR71 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the power supply substrate 931 via wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the power supply board 931 via a wiring (harness), one end of the power supply board 931 is electrically connected to the +12 V power supply line. is electrically connected to the other end of the The ON/OFF of the transistor PTR71 changes the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71, and the signal is input to the power substrate 931 as a CR connection signal.

A circuit composed of resistors PR71, PR74, and transistor PTR70 is a switch circuit that is turned on/off by turning on/off the photocoupler PIC70.

When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned off, and is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR73, thereby turning on the transistor PTR70 and the switch circuit. It turns ON. Thereby, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the CR connection signal 1 whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned on, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the transistor PTR70 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PTR75, and the CR connection signal 1 whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a. be.

A circuit composed of resistors PR72, PR76 and transistor PTR71 is also a switch circuit that is turned on/off by turning on/off the photocoupler PIC70.

When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned off, and is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR73, thereby turning on the transistor PTR71 and the switch circuit. It turns ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the power supply substrate 931 through the wiring (harness), and the CR connection signal whose logic is LOW is input to the power supply substrate 931. be.

On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned on, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the transistor PTR71 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the power supply substrate 931 through the wiring (harness), and the CR connection signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the power supply substrate 931. be done.

A predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied not only to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 but also to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 via the resistor PR77. BRDY from the CR unit 6 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71. A resistor PR77 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC71. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned ON while the photo When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the coupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned off. there is The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor PR78, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. and a non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC80B) without inverting it.). It is electrically connected to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. When the photocoupler PIC71 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 changes, and the signal is input as the BRDY signal to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a.

When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned ON. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the coupler PIC71 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the BRDY signal whose logic has become LOW is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a. On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned off. , The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR78, and the BRDY signal whose logic has become HI is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a. Thus, the logic of the BRDY signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is the same as the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6. FIG.

A predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied not only to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 and the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71, but also to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 via the resistor PR79. BRQ from the CR unit 6 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72. A resistor PR79 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC72. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned ON while the photo When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the coupler PIC72 and the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned off. there is The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor PR80, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. and a non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC80C) without inverting it). It is electrically connected to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. The logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is changed by turning ON/OFF the photocoupler PIC72, and the signal is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a as a BRQ signal.

When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned ON. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the coupler PIC72 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the BRQ signal whose logic has become LOW is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a. On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned off. , The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR80, and the BRQ signal whose logic has become HI is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a. Thus, the logic of the BRQ signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is the same logic as the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6. FIG.

An EXS signal that tells that one payout operation has started or ended from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a is output to the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb, and is output to the payout control output circuit without reset function. 952cb is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR81. The anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is electrically connected to the other end of a resistor PR82, one end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line. A resistor PR82 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC73. When +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 through the resistor PR82, EXS output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a through the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function When the logic of the signal is LOW, while the photocoupler PIC73 is ON, +12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 through the resistor PR82, and the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a When the logic of the EXS signal output from the output terminal of through the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb is HI, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned OFF. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is grounded with the ground LG from the CR unit 6, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is connected to the CR unit 6 through the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 by a pull-up resistor PR83. is pulled up to a predetermined voltage VL and electrically connected to the built-in control device. The ON/OFF of the photocoupler PIC73 changes the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73, and the signal is input to the built-in controller of the CR unit 6 as EXS.

When +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 through the resistor PR82, EXS output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a through the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function When the logic of the signal is LOW, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned ON, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the EXS whose logic is LOW becomes the CR unit. 6 is input to the built-in controller. On the other hand, when +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 through the resistor PR82, the output is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a through the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb. When the logic of the EXS signal is HI, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned OFF, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is pulled up to the predetermined voltage VL by the pull-up resistor PR83, and the logic becomes HI. The resulting EXS is input to the built-in controller of the CR unit 6 . Thus, the logic of the EXS output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is the logic of the EXS signal output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function. It has the same logic.

A PRDY signal that indicates that the payout operation for paying out rental balls from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a is possible or impossible is sent via a resistor PR84 to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74. is entered in The anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR85, one end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line. A resistor PR85 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC74. When +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 through the resistor PR85, PRDY output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a through the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function When the logic of the signal is LOW, while the photocoupler PIC74 is ON, +12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, and the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a The photocoupler PIC74 is turned OFF when the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal of through the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb is HI. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is grounded with the ground LG from the CR unit 6, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is connected to the CR unit 6 through the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 by the pull-up resistor PR86. is pulled up to a predetermined voltage VL and electrically connected to the built-in control device. The ON/OFF of the photocoupler PIC74 changes the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74, and the signal is input to the built-in controller of the CR unit 6 as PRDY.

When +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 through the resistor PR85, PRDY output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a through the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function When the logic of the signal is LOW, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned ON, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the PRDY whose logic is LOW is the CR unit. 6 is input to the built-in controller. On the other hand, when +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 through the resistor PR85, the output is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a through the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb. When the logic of the PRDY signal is HI, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned OFF, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is pulled up to a predetermined voltage VL by the pull-up resistor PR86, and the logic becomes HI. The resulting PRDY is input to the built-in controller of the CR unit 6 . Thus, the logic of the PRDY output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function. It has the same logic.

[10-2-6. Various input/output signals to payout control MPU]
Next, various input/output signals input/output from input/output terminals of various input/output ports of the payout control MPU 952a will be described.

As shown in FIG. 80, the RXD terminal, which is the serial data input terminal of the serial input port of the payout control MPU 952a, receives serial data from the main control board 1310 via the payout control input circuit 952b as a main payment serial data reception signal. be done. On the other hand, from the TXD terminal, which is the serial data output terminal of the serial output port of the payout control MPU 952a, the serial data to be sent to the main control board 1310 is sent as the payer serial data transmission signal to the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb. A payout serial data transmission signal is transmitted to the main control board 1310 from the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb.

Each input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a is connected to the above-mentioned RWMCLR signal, payout power failure warning signal, door open signal, full tank signal, various signals from the CR unit 6 (BRQ signal, BRDY signal, CR connection Signal 1, etc.), etc. are input, for example, the main payment ACK signal from the main control board 1310, which informs the completion of normal reception of the above-described payer serial data reception signal, is sent via the payout control input circuit 952b. Also, detection signals from the out-of-ball detection sensor 827, the payout detection sensor 842, the rotation detection sensor 840, etc. shown in FIG. 70 are inputted via the payout control input circuit 952b.

On the other hand, from each output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a, the above-mentioned EXS signal and PRDY signal are output to the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb, and the EXS signal and the PRDY signal are output from the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb. The PRDY signal is output to the CR unit input/output circuit 952e, the voltage switching signal is output to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, and the voltage switching signal is sent from the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function to the voltage switching circuit 952da. Alternatively, the payout motor drive signal is output to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, and the payout motor drive signal is output from the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function to the payout motor 834 via the payout motor drive circuit 952d. In addition, for example, the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function outputs a payout control output circuit 952ca with a payer ACK signal that informs the completion of normal reception of the main payment serial data reception signal, and the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function outputs the payout control output circuit 952ca. Output the ACK signal to the main control board 1310, or output the drive signal of the error LED indicator 860b shown in FIG. For example, output to the error LED indicator 860b.

[10-3. Various input/output signals with the main control board and various output signals to the external terminal board]
Next, various input/output signals between the payout control board 951 and the main control board 1310 and various output signals from the payout control board 951 to the external terminal board 784 will be described with reference to FIG.

[10-3-1. Various input/output signals with the main control board]
The payout control board 951 exchanges various input/output signals with the main control board 1310 . Specifically, as shown in FIG. 85(a), the payout control board 951 controls the above-described payer serial data transmission signal, payer ACK signal, operation signal (RAM clear signal), main frame door open signal, etc. is output to the main control board 1310 . These output signals are pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310. FIG.

On the other hand, the payout control board 951 provides, in addition to the above-described main payment serial data reception signal, main payment ACK signal, and operation signal (RAM clear signal), a main prize number information output signal, a 15 round big hit information output signal, And 2 rounds jackpot information output signal such as jackpot information output signal, probability fluctuation information output signal, special design display information output signal, normal design display information output signal, information output signal during time saving, starting entrance winning information output signal etc. A game information signal, a payout blackout warning signal, and the like are input from the main control board 1310 . These input signals are pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952 of the payout control board 951.

[10-3-2. Various output signals to external terminal board]
The payout control board 951 outputs various signals to the external terminal board 784 . Specifically, as shown in FIG. 85(b), in addition to the above-described outer end frame door open information output signal, the number of game balls actually paid out as prize balls by the payout motor 834 reaches 10 balls. Jackpot information including a prize ball number information output signal, a main prize ball number information output signal, a 15 round big win information output signal and a 2 round big win information output signal from the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. Game information signals such as an output signal, a probability fluctuation information output signal, a special symbol display information output signal, a normal symbol display information output signal, a time saving information output signal, and a start winning prize information output signal are output to the external terminal plate 784. do. These output signals are pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal plate 784 . In other words, two signals are output to the external terminal plate 784, the outer end frame door opening information output signal from the payout control board 951 side and the prize ball number information output signal, and the main prize ball number from the main control board 1310 side is output. Information output signal, 15 rounds jackpot information output signal, 2nd round jackpot information output signal, information output signal during probability fluctuation, special pattern display information output signal, normal pattern display information output signal, time saving medium information output signal, and starting entrance winning information Eight signals called output signals are output via (passing through) the payout control board 951 .

A signal output from the external terminal plate 784 is transmitted to a hall computer installed in a game hall (not shown), and the hall computer monitors the games played by the players. When the 15-round jackpot information output signal or the 2-round jackpot information output signal is output to the hall computer as one jackpot information output signal, the hall computer outputs the number of jackpots with two rounds (2-round jackpot ) and the number of big wins with 15 rounds (the number of occurrences of 15-round big wins) is the sum of the number of big wins of the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加Therefore, the hall computer cannot grasp the number of occurrences of 2-round big wins and the number of occurrences of 15-round big wins from the total number of big wins. , it is not possible to grasp whether it is a 2-round jackpot or a 15-round jackpot. A data counter (not shown) is arranged above the pachinko machine 1, and some players refer to the number of occurrences of the jackpot game state displayed on the data counter to select whether or not to play the game. Some do.

However, the number of occurrences of the big win game state displayed on the data counter may actually be biased toward the number of occurrences of the two-round big win, so even if the player starts playing the game, only the two-round big wins occur. Sometimes the 15 round jackpot doesn't happen easily. In this way, the number of occurrences of the big win game state displayed on the data counter can give the player a sense of expectation, but may unnecessarily stir up the gambling spirit of the player.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, by separately outputting the 15 round big win information output signal and the 2 round big win information output signal to the hall computer as the big win information output signal, the hall computer can output the number of occurrences of the 2 round big win, The number of 15-round big hits and the number of occurrences can be accurately grasped. Therefore, the hall computer can grasp whether the number of big wins actually occurring in the pachinko machine 1 is the 2-round big win or the 15-round big win, and the data counter stores 15 rounds. Since the number of occurrences of the big win and the number of occurrences of the 2-round big win can be separately displayed or only the number of occurrences of the 15-round big win can be displayed as the number of occurrences of the big win game state, it is possible to stimulate the gambling spirit of the player more than necessary. do not have.

In the present embodiment, the 2-round big win information output signal is output to the hall computer during the period from the occurrence of the 2-round big win to the end of the 2-round big win, and the 15-round big win information output signal is also output when the 15-round big win occurs. It is in a state of being output to the hall computer during the period from the time it occurs to the time it ends. In addition to the method of outputting the 2-round big win information output signal and the 15-round big win information output signal to the hall computer as in the present embodiment, for example, when a 2-round big win occurs, the 2-round big win information output signal is output for a predetermined period. The 2-round big win information output signal and the 15-round big win information are output to the hall computer, and when a 15-round big win occurs, the 15-round big win information output signal is outputted to the hall computer for a predetermined period. A method of outputting the output signal to the hall computer only for the same predetermined period can also be mentioned.

[11. Arrangement of Output Terminals on External Terminal Board]
Next, the arrangement of the output terminals of the external terminal board 784 for outputting various signals to the hall computer installed in the game hall (hall) will be described with reference to FIG. The external terminal plate 784 is attached to the rear surface of the prize ball base attached to the rear surface of the body frame base 600, and the rear side thereof is covered with an external terminal plate cover 786. FIG. 86 is a diagram showing the arrangement of the output terminals of the external terminal plate.

As described above, the external terminal plate 784 outputs the outer end frame door open information output signal, the prize ball number information output signal, the main prize ball number information output signal, the 15 round big win information output signal, and the 2 round big win information output signal. When the jackpot information output signal, the probability fluctuation information output signal, the special symbol display information output signal, the normal symbol display information output signal, the time saving information output signal, and the start opening winning information output signal are input from the payout control board 951, It outputs to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 .

Briefly describing these various signals, the outer end frame door open information output signal is not generated during a normal game when the player says that the door frame 3 and/or the body frame 4 shown in FIG. 1 are open. This is a signal that conveys that a state has occurred, and the prize ball number information output signal is generated each time the number of game balls actually paid out as prize balls by the payout motor 834 shown in FIG. 5 reaches 10. The main prize number information output signal is the first starting hole 2002, the second starting hole 2004, the general winning holes 2001 and 2201, and the big winning hole 2005 shown in FIG. This is a signal to inform that each time the number of game balls scheduled to be put out as prize balls based on the entered game balls reaches 10, and the 15-round big win information output signal is a 15-round big win. The 2-round jackpot information output signal is a signal that indicates that a 2-round jackpot is occurring, and the information output signal during probability fluctuation is a signal that a probability fluctuation occurs. The special symbol display information output signal is a signal indicating that the special symbol display information output signal is a special symbol display device 1403 or a second special symbol display device 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. It is a signal that informs that the variable display is finished (stopped), and the normal symbol display information output signal is the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. It is a signal that tells that it is in a stopped state, the time saving medium information output signal is a signal that tells that a time saving state is occurring, and the start winning information output signal is the first start shown in FIG. Each time a game ball enters the port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, it is a signal to notify that effect.

As shown in FIG. 86, the output terminals PT1 to PT10 are horizontally arranged in a line on the external terminal plate 784 . The output terminal PT1 is colored white and outputs a prize number information output signal. As described above, the prize ball number information output signal is a signal that notifies each time the number of game balls actually paid out as prize balls by the payout motor 834 shown in FIG. In the embodiment, it is output from the output terminal PT1 for 0.105 seconds. When the number of prize balls information output signal from the external terminal plate 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer causes the payout motor 834 of the pachinko machine 1 to generate 10 prize balls each time the number of prize balls information output signal is input to the hall computer. It is possible to grasp that the game balls of the balls have been put out as prize balls, and to grasp the total number of game balls put out by the Pachinko machine 1 by counting the number of the put out game balls.

The output terminal PT2 is colored green and outputs an outer end frame door open information output signal. As described above, the outer end frame door open information output signal indicates that the door frame 3 and/or the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. In this embodiment, it is output from the output terminal PT2 while the door frame 3 and/or the body frame 4 are opened. When the outer end frame door opening information output signal from the external terminal plate 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer controls the door frame 3 and the pachinko machine 1 while the outer end frame door opening information output signal is being input. / Or it can grasp that the main body frame 4 is opened.

The output terminal PT3 is colored gray and outputs a special symbol display information output signal. As described above, the special symbol display information output signal terminates (stops) the variable display of special symbols on the first special symbol display device 1403 and the second special symbol display device 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. In this embodiment, the end (stop) of the special symbol fluctuation display in the first special symbol indicator 1403 and the second special symbol indicator 1405 of the function display unit 1400 from the output terminal PT3 It is designed to be output for 0.128 seconds at times. When the special symbol display information output signal from the external terminal plate 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer receives the special symbol display information output signal, the first special symbol of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to grasp that the variable display of special symbols has ended (stopped) on the display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405, and count the number of times to display the first special of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1. The total number of times the special symbols are variably displayed on the symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 can be grasped.

The output terminal PT4 is colored yellow and outputs a start winning prize information output signal. As described above, the starting hole winning information output signal is a signal that notifies each time a game ball enters the first starting hole 2002 or the second starting hole 2004 shown in FIG. , Every time a game ball enters the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 from the output terminal PT4, it is output for 0.128 seconds. When the starting hole winning information output signal from the external terminal plate 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer receives the first starting hole 2002 or the second starting hole 2002 of the pachinko machine 1 each time the starting hole winning information output signal is inputted. It is possible to grasp that the game ball has entered the starting hole 2004, count the number of times the starting hole winning prize information output signal is input, and send to the first starting hole 2002 or the second starting hole 2004 of the pachinko machine 1 It is possible to grasp the total number of game balls entered.

The output terminal PT5 is colored black and outputs a 15-round jackpot information output signal. The 15-round jackpot information output signal is, as described above, a signal that indicates that a 15-round jackpot is occurring. It is designed to be output. When the 15-round big win information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer keeps the pachinko machine 1 generating 15-round big wins while the 15-round big win information output signal is being input. The state can be grasped, and the total number of occurrences of the 15-round big win in the pachinko machine 1 can be grasped by counting the number of times the 15-round big win information output signal is input.

The output terminal PT6 is colored pink and outputs a 2-round jackpot information output signal. As described above, the 2-round big win information output signal is a signal that indicates that a 2-round big win is occurring. It is designed to be output. When the 2-round big win information output signal from the external terminal plate 784 is inputted to the hall computer, the hall computer keeps the 2-round big win in the pachinko machine 1 while the 2-round big win information output signal is being inputted. The state can be grasped, and the total number of occurrences of the 2-round big win in the pachinko machine 1 can be grasped by counting the number of times the 2-round big win information output signal is inputted.

The output terminal PT7 is colored blue and outputs a normal symbol display information output signal. The normal symbol display information output signal, as described above, is a signal that informs that the variable display of normal symbols has ended (stopped) on the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. In this embodiment, it is designed to be output from the output terminal PT7 for 0.128 seconds at the end (stop) of the normal symbol fluctuation display on the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400. FIG. When the normal symbol display information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer receives the normal symbol display information output signal, the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1. In 1402, it is possible to grasp that the variable display of normal symbols has ended (stopped), count the number of times, and display the total number of variable displays of normal symbols on the normal symbol display device 1402 of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1. The number of times can be grasped.

The output terminal PT8 is colored red and outputs a time saving information output signal. As described above, the information output signal during time saving is a signal that conveys that the time saving state has occurred, and in this embodiment, it is output from the output terminal PT8 while the time saving state is occurring. ing. When the time saving information output signal from the external terminal plate 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer grasps that the pachinko machine 1 is in the time saving state when the time saving information output signal is input. In addition, it is possible to grasp the total number of times that the pachinko machine 1 is in the time saving state by counting the number of times that the information output signal during time saving is input.

The output terminal PT9 is colored orange and outputs a probability fluctuation information output signal. As described above, the information output signal during probability fluctuation is a signal that indicates that a probability fluctuation is occurring. It has become so. When the information output signal during probability fluctuation is input from the external terminal plate 784 to the hall computer, the hall computer receives the information output signal during probability fluctuation, and the pachinko machine 1 is in a state where the probability fluctuation is occurring. In addition, it is possible to grasp the total number of occurrences of probability fluctuations in the pachinko machine 1 by counting the number of times the probability fluctuation information output signal is input.

The output terminal PT10 is colored light blue and outputs a main prize number information output signal. As described above, the main prize ball number information output signal is input to various winning openings such as the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the general winning openings 2001 and 2201, and the big winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. This is a signal that notifies each time the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls based on the played game balls reaches 10, and is output from the output terminal PT10 for 0.128 seconds in this embodiment. It has become so. When the main prize number information output signal from the external terminal plate 784 is input to the hall computer, the pachinko machine 1 outputs 10 prize balls each time the main prize number information output signal is input to the hall computer. It is possible to grasp that the game balls are scheduled to be put out as prize balls, and to grasp the total number of game balls to be put out by the pachinko machine 1 by counting the number of the game balls to be put out. can do. It should be noted that game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls based on game balls that have entered various winning openings such as the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the general winning openings 2001 and 2201, and the big winning opening 2005 When the number of balls reaches 20 or more and the main prize number information output signal is output multiple times, the main prize number information output signal is 0.256 (= 0.128 seconds x 2 times) seconds, It is designed to be output with an interval of 0.128 seconds as if it were one continuous signal.

Of the output terminals PT1 to PT10 of the external terminal plate 784, the output terminals PT1 and PT2 output various signals output on the payout control board 951 side, while the output terminals PT3 to PT10 output the main control board. Various signals output on the 1310 side are arranged to be output via (pass through) the payout control board 951 . The output terminals PT1 to PT10 are colored, respectively. By electrically connecting wirings having connectors colored in the same colors to the output terminals PT1 to PT10, respectively, it is possible to mistakenly connect other wirings. can be prevented from being connected to each other. Various signals output on the payout control board 951 side and various signals output on the main control board 1310 side are not mixed, and various signals output on the payout control board 951 side are transmitted to the hall computer. The output terminals PT1 and PT2 are arranged in a row on the left side of the external terminal plate 784, and the output terminals PT3 to PT10 for transmitting various signals output from the main control board 1310 side to the hall computer are arranged on the external terminal plate 784. By arranging them in a row from the center left side to the right side, wiring for transmitting various signals output on the payout control board 951 side to the hall computer and various signals output on the main control board 1310 side It is possible to prevent erroneous electrical connection with the wiring for transmitting the signal to the hall computer.

In addition, in this embodiment, the number of prize balls information output signal output on the payout control board 951 side and the main number of prize balls information output signal output on the main control board 1310 side are respectively sent from the external terminal plate 784 to the hall. configured to communicate to a computer. This is because, for example, game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 are not supplied to the prize ball tank 720 shown in FIG. 1 due to some trouble in the pachinko island equipment. When the number of game balls is running low, if a 15-round jackpot occurs in the pachinko machine 1 by chance, the number of game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 for paying out the game balls as prize balls is insufficient, so the game balls are paid out. (For example, if ball clogging or ball entanglement occurs in the payout device 830, game balls cannot be paid out unless this is resolved). Then, as described above, the number of game balls actually paid out as prize balls by the payout motor 834 shown in FIG. 5 reaches ten. Since it is a signal to convey that every time, when the game ball cannot be paid out, the payout control board 951 outputs the winning ball number information output signal and transmits it to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784. become unable. When the game balls are not paid out, the player calls a hall clerk or the like. A hall clerk or the like checks, for example, a hose-shaped replenishment nozzle for supplying game balls from the pachinko island facility to the prize ball tank 720 to identify the position of the clogged ball (or, for example, to Then, by specifying the position of the clogged ball and the position of the jammed ball and solving it, the game ball will be returned to the state of being paid out.

However, since the game by the main control board 1310 is in progress even when the hall clerk or the like is proceeding with the work, the game balls are paid out by the work of the hall clerk or the like after the jackpot of 15 rounds is completed. When the state is restored, the payout control board 951 will pay out the game balls that have not been paid out one after another, and the payout control board 951 is at the time when the 15 round big win is completed and the 15 round big win has not occurred. Every time the number of game balls actually put out as prize balls by the payout motor 834 reaches 10, it outputs a prize number information output signal to notify that effect and transmits it to the hall computer via the external terminal plate 784. It will happen. As a result, an extremely large number of game balls are put out even though the 15-round jackpot has not yet occurred. , a problem arises in that the hall computer cannot accurately grasp the relationship between .

Therefore, in this embodiment, regardless of whether or not the payout motor 834 is driven and controlled by the payout control board 951 and the prize balls are actually paid out, that is, the payout control board 951 outputs the prize ball number information output signal. As a signal of the main control board 1310, the game ball that entered various winning openings such as the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the general winning openings 2001 and 2201, and the big winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. Each time the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10, a main prize number information output signal is output as a signal to that effect, and the payout control board 951 and the external terminal plate 784 are output. A system was adopted in which the information is transmitted to the hall computer via the system. As a result, even if the above-described troubles (ball clogging in the replenishment nozzle, etc., ball clogging or ball jamming in the payout device 830) occur, the game state of the pachinko machine 1 and the payout in this game state The relationship between the number of game balls to be put out and the relationship can be accurately transmitted to the hall computer. Therefore, the hall computer can accurately grasp the relationship between the game state of the pachinko machine 1 and the number of game balls to be paid out in the game state.

[12. Circuit of effect display drive board]
Next, the circuit of the effect display drive board 4450 for drawing the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the effect display drive board 4450 is arranged near the lower side of the door frame side effect display device 460 attached to the right side of the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 and housed in the plate unit 320. It mainly comprises a liquid crystal module circuit 4450V for drawing in the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 . FIG. 87 is a circuit diagram showing a liquid crystal module circuit 4450V for drawing in the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460. As shown in FIG.

[12-1. Liquid crystal module circuit]
As shown in FIG. 87, the liquid crystal module circuit 4450V of the effect display drive board 4450 is mainly composed of the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0.

The liquid crystal module circuit 4450V is a serial signal (serial data) by a differential method called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" of Thine Electronics Co., Ltd. from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d of the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. are sent as a plus signal and a minus signal, they are input to the common mode choke coil SDL0 through the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, respectively, and the positive signal and the negative signal are input by the common mode choke coil SDL0. Noise can be separated from negative signals. The noise-separated plus signal and minus signal are input to the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN- terminal of the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, respectively. A resistor SDR0 is electrically connected between the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN- terminal. This resistor SDR0 is a termination resistor (terminator) and prevents the plus signal and the minus signal from being reflected at the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN- terminal, respectively, thereby preventing disturbance of the serial signal.

The door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 outputs three video signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, based on the serial signals (serial data) respectively input to the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN- terminal, and It restores to three synchronizing signals, a horizontal synchronizing signal, a vertical synchronizing signal, and a clock signal (that is, restores to a parallel signal before being serialized). Although the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal output from the channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source are each 8 bits, as described above, the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal are , the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal that can be input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d are each 6 bits, for a total of 18 bits.

The liquid crystal module circuit 4450V receives serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control section 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 in addition to the signal from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d of the peripheral control board 1510 as described above. Two signals obtained by differentiating certain LOCKN signal output request data into a positive signal and a negative signal in the differential circuit 1512e of the peripheral control board 1510 are also inputted. As described above, the forced switching circuit 1512f of the peripheral control board 1510 transmits two signals that are differentially differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal in the differential circuit 1512e. On the other hand, when the two signals differentiated into the plus signal and the minus signal are not input in the differential circuit 1512e, the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is transmitted. The circuit is configured so that the circuit is connected so as to As a result, when two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input to the differential circuit 1512e, the two signals are connected to each other so as to transmit the two signals. , is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the liquid crystal module circuit 4450V of the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3. When the two differential signals of the positive signal and the negative signal are not input to the motion circuit 1512e, the circuit is connected so as to transmit the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. A signal output from the frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 stored in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. is sent to the liquid crystal module circuit 4450V.

The forced switching circuit 1512f changes the signal output from the door-frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512d, that is, the door-frame From the transmitter IC 1512d for side effect, the serial signal (serial data) by THine Electronics Co., Ltd.'s "V-by-One (registered trademark)" differential method is used as a positive signal and a negative signal, and from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board. 868, and through the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, it is input to the common mode choke coil SDL0, and is input to the RXIN+ terminal and RXIN- terminal of the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, respectively, while the differential circuit 1512e. When two signals differentially converted into a plus signal and a minus signal are input from the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, these two signals are It is input to the common mode choke coil SDL0, and is input to the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN- terminal of the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, respectively. Door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 judges that it is a LOCKN signal output request when two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in differential circuit 1512e are input, A LOCKN signal is output from a LOCKN terminal, which will be described later, to the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 . This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511 a of the peripheral control section 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510 .

As described above, the LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, is used to produce the startup screen on the game board side when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. During the period during which the display is displayed on the display device 1600, or during the period during which the game board side effect display device 1600 is in the customer waiting state and the demonstration is being performed, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the effect display In order to confirm whether or not there is a problem in the connection between the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the door frame side effect display device 460 is operated. This is sent as an operation confirmation request. Although the LOCKN signal output request data in this embodiment is differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal in the differential circuit 1512e, the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, that is, THine Electronics Co., Ltd. The data format is completely different from the company's "V-by-One (registered trademark)" differential serial signal (serial data). Therefore, when the LOCKN signal output request data is received by the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 judges that the signal is not output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, and an abnormal event occurs. Assuming that it is data, a LOCKN signal is output from a LOCKN terminal, which will be described later. In other words, in this embodiment, the LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal, which will be described later, by utilizing the function of the door frame side effect receiver ICSD0 to output the LOCKN signal when it is determined that the received data is abnormal data. In order to forcibly output LOCKN signal output request data having a structure different from the data format of the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 By outputting it, it is possible to confirm whether or not the device called ICSDIC0 for door frame side effect receiver is operating normally. This makes it possible to confirm whether or not there is a problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

The VDD terminal, VDDO terminal, LVDSVDD terminal, PLLVDD terminal, and PDWN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 are each supplied with +3.3 V generated by the upper plate side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x shown in FIG. The GND terminal, GNDO terminal, LVDSGND application form, PLLGND terminal, EDGE terminal, OE terminal, MODE0, and MODE1 terminals of the frame-side effect receiver IC SDIC0 are grounded.

The VDD terminal is a power supply terminal for a digital circuit, and a capacitor SDC0 is electrically connected between the terminal and the GND terminal that serves as the ground for this digital circuit, and the +3.3 V power supply is supplied to the VDD terminal. It removes high frequency noise from the line.

The VDDO terminal is a power supply terminal for TTL (Transistor-Transistor Logic) output, and a capacitor SDC1 is electrically connected between the terminal and the GNDO terminal that serves as the ground for this TTL output. It removes high frequency noise from the +3.3V power supply line.

The LVDSVDD terminal is a power supply terminal for LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling) input, and a capacitor SDC2 is electrically connected between the terminal and the LVDSGND terminal that serves as the ground for this LVDS input, and is supplied to the LVDSVDD terminal. It removes high frequency noise from the +3.3V power supply line.

The PLLVDD terminal is a power supply terminal for a PLL (Phase Locked Loop) circuit, and a capacitor SDC3 is electrically connected between the terminal and the PLLGND terminal that serves as the ground for this PLL circuit, and the power is supplied to the PLLVDD terminal. High frequency noise is removed from the +3.3V power supply line.

When +3.3 V is supplied (applied) to the PDWN terminal, the logic becomes HI, indicating normal operation. It is a terminal to transmit. The PDWN terminal is supplied with +3.3V via a resistor SDR1 and is electrically connected to the other end of a varistor SDZ0, one end of which is grounded. This varistor SDZ0 suppresses noise and overvoltages on the +3.3V electrical line supplied through resistor SDR1.

The EDGE terminal transmits various signals output from various output terminals (DE terminal, SYNC0 terminal to SYNC2 terminal, and D0 terminal to D17 terminal) based on the clock signal DCLK output from the CLKOUT terminal, which will be described later. (logic transitions from LOW to HI) or falling edge (logic transitions from HI to LOW). As shown, the falling edge is designated by grounding the EDGE terminal. By the way, if the EDGE terminal is connected to +3.3V, a rising edge can be specified.

The OE terminal instructs whether or not to permit output from various output terminals (DE terminal, SYNC0 to SYNC2 terminals, D0 to D17 terminals, and CLKOUT terminal) to be described later. As described above, by grounding the OE terminal, the output is always enabled. By the way, if the OE terminal is connected to +3.3V, it will be in a state where it cannot be output.

The MODE0 terminal and the MODE1 terminal are terminals for selecting an operation mode, and the operation mode can be selected by grounding both of them. Operation modes include a normal mode and a handshake mode. In normal mode, three video signals (18-bit video signals) of a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal are generated based on serial signals (serial data) respectively input to the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN- terminal. and three synchronous signals (3-bit synchronous signals) of a horizontal synchronous signal, a vertical synchronous signal, and a clock signal. be. In the shake hand mode, the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is connected. In this mode, a LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirmation (recovery). This shake hand mode is automatically switched.

For example, three video signals (18-bit video signals) of a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal based on serial signals (serial data) respectively input to the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN- terminal, For some reason, the parallel signal restored by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is abnormal. When it is difficult to draw such data on the door frame side effect display device 460, the normal mode is automatically switched to the shake hand mode, and the LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal. This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the damping resistor SDR2, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and controls the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510. It is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511 a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral control board 1510 . The peripheral control MPU 1511a sends a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door-frame-side performance transmitter IC 1512d in order to inform the door-frame-side performance transmitter IC 1512d of the establishment of a predetermined condition based on the input LOCKN signal. to output When this connection confirmation signal is input to the INIT terminal, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is connected to the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. A predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for recovering is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the door frame side presentation drive board 4450 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. Send to receiver IC SDIC0. When such a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is received by the door frame side presentation receiver ICSDIC0, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver can be easily restored. A predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is stored in advance in the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. The INIT terminal of the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510, the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the peripheral door A direct electrical connection may be made via the relay terminal plate 882 .

As described above, the LOCKN terminal is connected between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. This is a terminal for outputting a request to transmit a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the terminals. The LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the resistance SDR2, which is the damping resistor of the performance display drive board 4450, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and It is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511 a of the peripheral control section 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the control board 1510 .

The SYNC0 to SYNC2 terminals output three synchronizing signals, a horizontal synchronizing signal, a vertical synchronizing signal, and a clock signal, which are restored based on serial signals (serial data) respectively input to the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN- terminal. terminal. In this embodiment, the SYNC0 to SYNC2 terminals are unconnected terminals because the restored three synchronizing signals of the horizontal synchronizing signal, the vertical synchronizing signal, and the clock signal are not used.

The DE terminal outputs a clock signal output from the CLKOUT terminal and a DE signal that indicates whether the data output from the D0 to D17 terminals, which are data output terminals, are valid or invalid. A DE signal output from the DE terminal is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via a resistor SDR3, which is a damping resistor.

The CLKOUT terminal is a terminal for outputting a clock signal DCLK generated by a PLL circuit incorporated in the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0. The clock signal DCLK output from the CLKOUT terminal is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the resistor SDR4, which is a damping resistor.

The D0 to D17 terminals receive three video signals (18 This is a data output terminal for outputting a 1-bit video signal). Blue video signals B0 to B5 (6 bits) are output from 6-bit data output terminals D0 to D5 in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK, and each signal line of the blue video signals B0 to B5 is a damping resistor. They are respectively input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the ladder resistance SDRA0. Green video signals G0 to G5 (6 bits) are output from 6-bit data output terminals D6 to D11 in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK, and each signal line of the green video signals G0 to G5 is a damping resistor. They are respectively input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the ladder resistance SDRA1. Red video signals R0 to R5 (6 bits) are output from 6-bit data output terminals D12 to D17 in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK, and each signal line of the red video signals R0 to R5 is a damping resistor. They are respectively input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the ladder resistance SDRA2.

The peripheral control board 1510, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, the effect display drive board 4450, and the door frame side effect display device 460 are electrically connected to the same ground. It's becoming

[Mounting mode of each electronic component possessed by the first control unit MCG and the second control unit SCG]
By the way, it is generally known that surface-mounting electronic components is advantageous in that the hardware circuits can be suitably miniaturized by integration. However, among electronic components, integrated circuit components (components in which multiple types of single-function elements (resistive elements, diode elements, capacitor elements, etc.) are integrated and enclosed in a relatively large package) A relatively large amount of space is created on the back side of the package, since the package is naturally larger than a discrete component (a component in which a single function element is enclosed in a relatively small package). Such a space on the back side of the package becomes a location that is difficult to visually confirm in a surface-mounted state (a location where electronic components (unauthorized components) are likely to be mounted illegally). For this reason, in the field of gaming machines, for many years, electronic components have been inserted into a base plate (a so-called base board or the like) instead of being surface-mounted.

That is, an electronic component that is inserted and mounted tends to create a relatively large gap between the package and the base plate. Therefore, by inserting and mounting electronic components, it is possible to maintain the space on the back side of the package as a place where it is easy to visually confirm even in the mounted state, thereby preventing unauthorized components from being mounted. It is preferably suppressed.

However, in recent years, in the field of amusement machines, the space used for presentations has become even larger. It is becoming necessary to plan.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, of the first control unit MCG and the second control unit SCG shown in FIG. In view of the fact that the SCG is not directly related to the benefits that the player obtains and is unlikely to be the object of fraudulence, first, the second control unit SCG is surface-mounted.

That is, as described above, the second control unit SCG according to this embodiment is configured including the peripheral control board 1510 as shown in FIG. Then, the second control unit SCG uses various integrated circuit components and various discrete components mounted on the base board of the peripheral control board 1510 to perform progress processing of effects according to the results of the game progress processing. is considered feasible.

Various integrated circuit components mounted on the base board of the peripheral control board 1510 include, for example, a peripheral control MPU 1511a and a peripheral control ROM 1511b shown in FIG. Various discrete components mounted on the base board of the peripheral control board 1510 include, for example, resistors AR10 and AR11, a diode AD10, an electrolytic capacitor AC10, and the like shown in FIG.

In this regard, in the second control unit SCG according to this embodiment, lead portions of various electronic components are placed on the surface of the base plate (here, the base plate of the peripheral control board 1510). Only the surface mounting area that is mounted in form is formed. That is, in this case, the various electronic components of the peripheral control board 1510 are also surface mount type components (SMD). However, since these electronic parts are not directly related to the benefits that players get and are unlikely to be the target of fraud, the security performance against unauthorized installation of electronic parts cannot be The hardware circuit mounted on the pachinko machine 1 can be miniaturized.

On the other hand, the first control unit MCG according to this embodiment comprises the main control board 1310, the payout control board 951, and the power supply board 931, as shown in FIG. The first control unit MCG uses various integrated circuit components and various discrete components mounted on the base substrates of these substrates 1310, 951, and 931 to supply the power supply for control (for example, +5 V). A game-related process including a generation process and payout of prize balls can be executed. However, since such processing on the side of the first control unit MCG is directly linked to awarding of benefits to the player, the first control unit MCG is easily targeted for fraud. Therefore, although miniaturization of the hardware circuit is required, if the first control unit MCG is simply integrated by surface mounting, the security performance against unauthorized mounting of electronic parts will be significantly lowered, and the game will be interesting. The reality is that a decline in

However, on the other hand, even such a first control unit MCG is mounted on its base board (the base board of the main control board 1310, the base board of the payout control board 951, the base board of the power supply board 931) Among various electronic components, discrete components have smaller packages than integrated circuit components, and even if an electronic component is illegally mounted on the back side of the discrete component, it can be easily confirmed visually. It can be said that the component has a relatively high performance in terms of security performance against unauthorized mounting of the electronic component.

That is, the inventor believes that the electronic components mounted on the first control unit MCG include components with high security performance against fraud (discrete components) and components with low security performance against fraud (integrated circuit components). If further integration as a hardware circuit is attempted using only components (discrete components) with high security performance against fraud, even on the first control unit MCG side, which is likely to be targeted for fraud, We have found that it is possible to reduce the size of the hardware circuit while maintaining security performance against unauthorized mounting of electronic components.

FIG. 117 is a diagram schematically showing how the first control unit MCG is integrated only with components (discrete components) having high security performance against fraud. Hereinafter, referring to FIG. 117, even on the side of the first control unit MCG, which is likely to be the target of fraudulence, it is possible to reduce the size of the hardware circuit while maintaining security performance against fraudulent mounting of electronic components. I will explain that it is.

As shown in FIG. 117, the first control unit MCG according to this embodiment includes a base plate BB and various electronic components D mounted on the base plate BB. . Note that FIG. 117 is only a schematic diagram for explaining the principle of the characteristic technique according to the present application. 951 base board and power supply board 931 base board. An example of applying the characteristic technique according to the present application to such an embodiment will be described later. First, for convenience of explanation, the explanation will be made assuming an example in which they are configured by one base substrate.

Here, on the base plate BB,
An insertion mounting region TH where lead portions provided on electronic components are mounted by being inserted into the base plate BB, and is inferior in integration performance but excellent in fraud prevention performance;
A surface mounting area SM in which the leads provided on the electronic component are mounted on the surface of the base plate BB, and the integration performance is excellent due to multi-layered wiring patterns, but the fraud prevention performance is inferior. are provided in a separate manner.

According to such a configuration, while electronic components that are unlikely to be targeted for fraud can be mounted in the surface mounting area SM, electronic components that should be pursued to prevent fraud rather than integration are mounted in the insertion mounting area TH. Since it is possible to reduce the size of the hardware circuit, it is possible to preferably maintain the performance of suppressing mounting of illegal components.

That is, as described above, in the first control unit MCG according to this embodiment, as the various electronic components D,
An integrated circuit component D1 in which multiple types of single-function elements are integrated and enclosed in a relatively large package, and has low security performance against unauthorized mounting;
・Since the single-function element is enclosed in a relatively small package, it is equipped with a discrete component D2 with high security performance against unauthorized mounting.

In this respect, as a first characteristic technique according to the present application, the first control unit MCG according to this embodiment places the integrated circuit component D1 with low security performance in the insertion mounting area TH and the surface area TH. Among the mounting areas SM, only the insertion mounting area TH, which has superior tampering prevention performance, is mounted, and only the discrete components with high security performance are mounted in the surface mounting area SM, which has inferior tampering prevention performance. As a result, even on the side of the first control unit MCG, which is likely to be a target of fraudulence, it is possible to reduce the size of the hardware circuit while maintaining security performance against fraudulent mounting of electronic components.

In the first control unit MCG according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 117, the discrete component D2 with high security performance is a surface mount type discrete component D2a mounted in the surface mount area SM. , and an insertion mounting type discrete component D2b mounted in the insertion mounting area TH.

That is, as described above, with regard to electronic components, in general, integration can be achieved by using the surface mounting type rather than the insertion mounting type. However, if both the insertion mounting area TH and the surface mounting area SM are separately provided as the base plate BB, the position where the integrated circuit component D1 to be electrically connected, for example, is provided in terms of circuit design. Also, considering the space in which wiring patterns are provided, it is better to place the electronic components in the insertion mounting area TH instead of the surface mounting area SM. can also occur.

In this regard, in the first control unit MCG according to this embodiment, instead of using all the discrete components D2 as the surface-mount type discrete components D2a, they are designed to be the most suitable mode for integration. An insertion mounting type discrete component D2b is intentionally used in part. As a result, it is expected that the hardware circuit will be made more compact while maintaining security performance against unauthorized mounting of electronic components.

It should be noted that, as shown in FIG. 117, the insertion mounting area TH, which is excellent in fraud prevention performance, is not formed on one side (back side) of the board, but is formed on the other side (front side) of the board, and is a discrete component. and integrated circuit components are respectively mounted. On the other hand, the surface mount area SM, which is inferior in fraud prevention performance, is not formed on one side (back side) of the substrate, but is formed on the other side (front side) of the substrate, and is formed between the integrated circuit component and the discrete component. It is desirable that the integrated circuit components are not mounted and only the discrete components are mounted. That is, in this case, first, the mounting of electronic components for mounting on the back side, which is likely to become a blind spot when checking whether an illegal component is mounted, is eliminated. On top of this, both integrated circuit components that are likely to be targeted for fraud and discrete components that are less likely to be targeted for fraud are mounted in the insertion mounting region TH, which has excellent fraud prevention performance. Since only discrete parts that are difficult to be targeted for fraud are mounted in the inferior surface mounting area SM, it is expected that the hardware circuit will be miniaturized while maintaining the performance of suppressing the mounting of fraudulent parts. become.

Furthermore, in the first control unit MCG according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 117, even if the discrete component D2 has a high security performance, the capacitor element having a large capacitance value (backup For power supplies, etc.), considering that the shape is relatively larger than other elements (resistive elements, diode elements, capacitor elements with small capacitance values (for filter circuits, etc.), etc.), the surface mounting area is It is not used as the surface mounting type discrete component D2a mounted on the SM, but is prepared only as the insertion mounting type discrete component D2b-C mounted in the insertion mounting region TH. This makes it possible to more preferably maintain security performance against unauthorized mounting of electronic components when miniaturizing hardware circuits.

However, although the capacitor element with a large capacitance value is larger than the other elements (discrete parts), compared to the integrated circuit part D1, there is not a large gap between the package and the base plate. . Therefore, the capacitor element may be used as a surface mount type discrete component D2a mounted in the surface mount area SM. Even in this case, security performance against unauthorized mounting of electronic components can be maintained. is possible.

Moreover, the first control unit MCG according to this embodiment incorporates a characteristic second technique based on a different viewpoint from the characteristic first technique according to the present application described above. ing.

That is, as shown in FIG. 117, in the first control unit MCG according to this embodiment, one hardware circuit for the purpose of exhibiting a specific electrical function (for example, backup power supply function) as a discrete circuit (hardware circuit using no integrated circuit component D1) DHC electrically configured by the discrete component D2. However, this discrete circuit DHC is provided with an electrical structure composed of a plurality of discrete components D2 each mounted in a manner divided into an insertion mounting area TH and a surface mounting area SM.

That is, in this case, although the discrete circuit DHC is intended to perform a specific electrical function (for example, a backup power supply function), it is not mounted on the insertion mounting area TH on the base plate BB. An electronic component D2b having a shape that enables mounting and an electronic component D2a having a shape that enables mounting on the surface mounting area SM coexist. Therefore, when a third party visually recognizes the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG, they have an electrically close role to perform a specific electrical function (for example, a backup power supply function). It will be possible to make it difficult to remember that there is such a circuit. Further, by mounting a part of the electronic component on the surface mounting area SM, it can be expected to reduce the size of the hardware circuit.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to reduce the size of the hardware circuit while suppressing fraudulent use of electronic components.

However, as described above, the example shown in FIG. 117 is for explaining the principles of the two characteristic techniques according to the present application. explain.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the base board BB of the first control unit MCG includes the base board of the main control board 1310, the base board of the payout control board 951, and the base board of the power supply board 931. and three base substrates. Both the insertion mounting area TH and the surface mounting area SM are provided in such a manner as to be separated from each other on these base substrates.

However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, only the insertion mounting area TH is formed on the base board of the power supply board 931 of the three base boards, and the base board of the main control board 1310 is formed. The substrate and the base substrate of the payout control substrate 951 are provided in such a manner that both the insertion mounting area TH and the surface mounting area SM are separated from each other.

Among the various electronic components D mounted on the base plate BB of the first controller MCG, the diode MD0 (FIG. 75 ) is mounted on the surface mounting area SM of the base board of the main control board 1310 as a surface mounting type discrete component D2a. Similarly, the diode PD0 (see FIG. 75) of the "backup power supply circuit for supplying backup power to the payout control built-in RAM" is surface-mounted on the base board of the payout control board 951. A surface mount type discrete component D2a is mounted in the area SM.

According to such a configuration, of the integrated circuit component D1 with low security performance and the discrete component D2 with high security performance, only the discrete component D2 (diode MD0, diode PD0) is the surface mount type discrete component D2a. They are mounted in the surface mounting area SM (main control board 1310, payout control board 951). As a result, even on the side of the first control unit MCG, which is likely to be the target of fraudulence, it is possible to reduce the size of the hardware circuit while maintaining security performance against fraudulent mounting of electronic components ( A characteristic first technology according to the present application).

Moreover, in the example applied to this embodiment, the surface mount area SM formed on the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG includes a specific type of discrete component (here, the diode MD0 and the diode PD0 are both Schottky diode element) will be mounted in plurality. That is, in this case, all the electronic components mounted on the surface mount area SM having inferior fraud prevention performance have the same shape, so it is expected that the labor required for fraud confirmation can be saved.

Further, in the above configuration, the discrete components (the electronic components responsible for part of the power supply function) that should originally be included in the power supply board 931 are intentionally mounted on a board (main control board 1310) different from the power supply board 931. I have to. That is, even if the power supply board 931 does not have enough space to form the surface mounting area SM, it is possible to form the surface mounting area SM on another board and mount the surface mounting type discrete component D2 there. is possible, and it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing the circuit of the first control unit MCG as a whole.

Furthermore, in the above configuration, one discrete circuit DHC (backup power supply circuit) having a plurality of discrete components D2 (capacitor element and Schottky diode element here) for the purpose of exerting a backup power supply function. is provided, the plurality of discrete components D2 constituting the discrete circuit DHC are separately mounted in an insertion mounting area TH (capacitor element) and a surface mounting area SM (Schottky diode element). I'm doing it.

According to such a configuration, although the discrete circuit DHC (backup power supply circuit) is intended to exhibit a backup power supply function, on the base plate BB, the insertion mounting area TH (power supply board 931) and an electronic component D2a having a shape that enables mounting on the surface mounting area SM (main control board 1310, payout control board 951). become. Therefore, when a third party visually recognizes the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG, they have an electrically close role to perform a specific electrical function (for example, a backup power supply function). It will be possible to make it difficult to remember that the circuit is there, and by increasing the difficulty of understanding such circuits, fraud can be expected to be suppressed (the second characteristic technology according to the present application).

Moreover, in the example applied to this embodiment, a plurality of discrete components D2 of one discrete circuit DHC (backup power supply circuit) intended to exhibit a backup power supply function are placed in the insertion mounting area TH (capacitor element). and surface mounting area SM (Schottky diode element), and these discrete components D2 can be mounted on two different boards (main control board 1310, supply control board 951 (Schottky diode element), power supply board In this case, the electronic components D2a and D2b, which are mixed for surface mounting and insertion mounting, are mounted on different base substrates. Therefore, the difficulty of understanding the circuit will be increased more and more, and it will be possible to further suppress fraud.

Further, in the above embodiment, as is clear from FIG. 117, the mounting surface of the surface mounting area SM on the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG is the same as the insertion mounting area TH on the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG. It is provided so as to have an area smaller than the mounting surface. Therefore, it becomes difficult for a third party to notice that the surface mount area SM having inferior anti-fraud performance is provided, and anti-fraud can be expected to be suppressed.

Further, in the above embodiment, as is clear from FIG. 117, the number of types of electronic components mounted on the surface mounting area SM on the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG is The number of types of electronic components to be mounted in the insertion mounting area TH in the BB is smaller than that of the electronic components. Therefore, the number of types of electronic components to be visually checked to see if any illegal activity has been performed on the electronic components mounted in the surface mounting area SM, which is relatively inferior in security performance, is relatively reduced. This makes it possible to facilitate visual checks.

Further, in the above embodiment, as is clear from FIG. 117, the total number of electronic components mounted in the surface mounting area SM on the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG is It is provided so as to be smaller than the total number of electronic components to be mounted in the insertion mounting area TH. Therefore, by relatively reducing the total number of electronic components that are subject to visual checks to see if there is any fraudulent activity on the electronic components mounted in the surface mounting area with relatively inferior security performance. , it is possible to reduce the load on visual checks.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the surface mounting areas SM are provided on the base substrate of the main control substrate 1310 and the base substrate of the payout control substrate 951, respectively. may be formed.

In addition, the surface mounting area SM is formed only on a specific base board, and the surface mounting type discrete components D2 which should be originally mounted on other base boards are collectively arranged on the specific base board. good too. According to such a configuration, when confirming whether or not unauthorized mounting is performed, only the surface mounting area SM formed on the specific base substrate needs to be confirmed intensively. It is expected that the required time and effort will be saved.

However, in view of the fact that the integrated circuit component D1 is mounted on any of the three base substrates, at least the insertion mounting region TH must be formed on any of the three base substrates in order to appropriately suppress fraud. must.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the base board BB of the first control unit MCG is the base board of the main control board 1310, the base board of the payout control board 951, and the base board of the power supply board 931. Although it is configured by three base substrates, as schematically shown in FIG. 117, they may be collectively configured on one base substrate.

In addition, the "base board BB of the first control unit MCG" according to the present application is essentially a board in which the surface mounting area SM and the insertion mounting area TH are separated, which are provided by a plurality of base substrates. , or may be provided by one base substrate.

For example, the main control board 1310 includes a first base board on which only the insertion mounting area TH is formed, and a second base board on which only the surface mounting area SM is formed. By inserting and mounting the substrate into the insertion mounting region TH of the first base substrate, the electronic components inserted and mounted in the first base substrate are maintained while maintaining security performance against unauthorized mounting of electronic components. It is conceivable to adopt a structure in which the components and the electronic components surface-mounted on the second base substrate are electrically connected to each other. "Board BB" is a concept that includes at least both a first base substrate on which only the insertion mounting area TH is formed and a second base substrate on which only the surface mounting area SM is formed. That is, this mode is also one of the modes that "the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG is provided with both the insertion mounting region TH and the surface mounting region SM in a manner that they are separated from each other.” It is included as an aspect.

Note that when the first base substrate on which only the insertion mounting region TH is formed and the second base substrate on which only the surface mounting region SM is formed, the insertion mounting region TH and the surface mounting region SM It is desirable to dispose the first base substrate and the second base substrate so that they are oriented in different directions (preferably orthogonal directions).

That is, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the components (surface-mounted components) mounted in the surface-mounted area SM inferior in fraud suppression performance are electronic components enclosed in a relatively small package. By using only discrete components, it is possible to reduce the size of the hardware circuit while eliminating the space for mounting illegal components (reducing the space on the back side).

However, even with such a discrete component (surface mount component) with excellent security performance, there is a small space on the back side of the component, but it is difficult to visually confirm it when mounted in the surface mount area SM. still left. Therefore, the pachinko hall side, which operates and manages the pachinko machine 1, understands that ``there is no space left behind the discrete parts (surface-mounted parts) for the illegal parts to be mounted.'' However, it is impossible to completely get rid of the anxiety that "a very small illegal part may be produced and installed illegally", and in a situation where it is difficult to confirm visually There is a concern that the operation and management of the pachinko machine 1 will become complicated, such as being forced to confirm.

Therefore, it is more desirable to provide each base board of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 in the following mode instead of the above-described mode.

[Modified example of each base board of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951]
FIG. 118 is a diagram showing a partial region of the base board MB of the main control board 1310 according to the modification. A modification of the base board MB of the main control board 1310 will be described below with reference to FIG. Although description of a modification of the base board of the payout control board 951 is omitted, it can be modified in the same manner as the base board MB of the main control board 1310 described below.

As shown in FIG. 118, the base board MB of the main control board 1310 according to this modification includes at least an insertion mounting board THB that is inferior in integration performance but superior in fraud prevention performance.

Also in the insertion mounting board THB according to this modified example, a plurality of types of electronic components (insertion mounting components) are mounted in an inserted manner in the same manner as in the insertion mounting board TH of the above-described embodiment. Similarly, these electronic components (insertion mounting components) include both the integrated circuit component D1 with low security performance and the discrete component D2b with high security performance.

However, as is clear from FIG. 118, in the base board MB of the main control board 1310 according to this modified example, the insertion mounting board THB and the insertion mounting lead parts are inserted into the insertion mounting board THB. It remains that the electronic components mounted in the form of being mounted are provided respectively. That is, although the base board MB of the main control board 1310 according to this modification has a surface mount area and surface mount components mounted in the area, at first glance it is difficult to see which of them A special mounting structure that does not appear to be provided is adopted.

More specifically, the base board MB of the main control board 1310 according to this modification includes not only the integrated circuit component D1 and the discrete component D2b as the insertion mounting components, but also the special mounting component D3 (in the figure, the special mounting component D3a and special mounted parts D3b). Although this special mounting component D3 incorporates an electronic component (surface mounting component) mounted in a surface mounting area that is inferior in fraud prevention performance, it is concealed from the insertion mounting board THB. It is inserted and mounted via a special insertion mounting lead portion TL, which will be described later.

According to such a special mounting component D3, although a surface mounting region to be described later and an electronic component (surface mounting component) mounted in the surface mounting region are respectively provided inside the special mounting component D3, fraud prevention is performed. Since it has an external shape that looks like an insertion mounting component mounted on the insertion mounting board THB with excellent performance, it is expected that it will be excluded from the target component for illegal purposes by malicious persons. be able to be In addition, in the base board MB of the main control board 1310 according to this modified example, the part into which such a special mounting component D3 is inserted and mounted in the insertion mounting board THB is a surface mounting board on which surface mounting components are mounted. It will function as an area.

Moreover, in the base board MB of the main control board 1310 according to this modified example, such special mounting components D3 are not arranged together (adjacently) in one place, but are arranged in a plurality of places on the base board MB. At least one of the special mounting components D3 (special mounting component D3a in the figure) is arranged so as to be surrounded by a relatively large area (insertion mounting area) where the insertion mounting components D1 and D2b are insertion mounted. We are planning to set up

In other words, in this case, surface mount areas with inferior anti-tamper performance and electronic components (surface mount components) mounted in the surface mount areas are subdivided into small pieces to make them inconspicuous. The surface mounting area is present when a malicious person sees the base board MB of the main control board 1310, because it can be successfully slipped into the insertion mounting area provided as a relatively large area. As a result, it is expected that the hardware circuit will be miniaturized while the performance of suppressing the mounting of illegal components is more preferably maintained.

As will be described later, a diode MD0 (see FIG. 75) as the surface-mounted discrete component D2a shown in FIG. 117 is sealed inside the special mounting component D3a according to this modified example. As described above, such a diode MD0 is used in a discrete circuit (backup power supply circuit) intended to provide a backup power supply function. Nevertheless, even in this modified example, for a plurality of discrete components constituting one discrete circuit (backup power supply circuit), the insertion mounting area (capacitor element (capacitor BC0)) and the surface mounting area (Schottky diode element (Diode MD0)) and mounted separately. Moreover, for the capacitor element (capacitor BC0) inserted and mounted in the insertion mounting area, a position (such as the power supply board 931) not adjacent to the special mounting component D3a containing the Schottky diode element (diode MD0) in the insertion mounting area. It is designed to be implemented in

In this way, the difficulty of understanding the circuit is increased by making it difficult to remember that the electronic component built into the special mounting component D3a exhibits a specific electrical function (backup power supply function). As a result, even if it is noticed that there is a surface-mounted area with inferior anti-fraud performance, anti-fraud can be expected.

Next, an example of the structure of the special mounting component D3a according to this modified example will be described. In FIG. 118, for convenience of explanation, the portion where the special mounting component D3a is mounted is enlarged, and the outer package OP of the special mounting component D3a is partially omitted to expose its internal structure. Figures (indicated by dotted lines) are included.

As also shown in the explanatory diagram, the special mounting component D3a according to this modified example includes a special surface mounting board SMB as a surface mounting board on which a surface mounting type electronic component (surface mounting component) is mounted; A surface mounting type discrete component D2a mounted on a special surface mounting board SMB, and a special insertion mounting lead part as an insertion mounting lead part inserted into a through hole (specific insertion hole) of the insertion mounting board THB. It has a TL and an outer package OP that molds these parts with molding resin.

Here, the special surface mounting board SMB electrically connects the surface mounting lead portions SL provided in the electronic components (surface mounting type discrete components D2a) mounted on the board and the special insertion mounting lead portions TL. The wiring pattern HP is formed so as to be directly connected, and the mounting surface of the wiring pattern HP is provided so as to be substantially perpendicular to the mounting surface of the insertion mounting board THB.

The surface area of the mounting surface of the special surface mount board SMB is only large enough to mount the surface mount type discrete component D2a. It is designed to have a mounting surface with a smaller area than the assumed area. That is, in the insertion mounting board THB, even when all the electronic parts necessary for operating the pachinko machine 1 are mounted, there is still a spare space for mounting other electronic parts. In order to reduce the size of the surface mount board SMB, when the electronic component to be mounted (surface mount type discrete component D2a) is mounted, there is no extra space for mounting other electronic components. not left.

With such a configuration, it is difficult to tamper with the special surface mount board SMB. come to be expected.

The surface mount type discrete component D2a itself has a package structure (inner package) molded with molding resin. Inside, a Schottky diode element (diode MD0) included in one discrete circuit (backup power supply circuit) is electrically connected to the surface mounting lead portion SL by a bonding wire. That is, the surface-mounting type discrete component D2a is provided with the surface-mounting lead portions SL formed so as to be pulled out to the outside of the inner package (mold resin). Other electronic components mounted on the insertion mounting board THB are electrically connected to the special insertion mounting lead portions TL via the wiring patterns HP formed on the special surface mounting board SMB. The Schottky diode element (diode MD0) is electrically connected to perform processing in cooperation with each other.

Furthermore, the surface mount type discrete component D2a is provided in a flat external shape (package shape), and is soldered to the special surface mount board SMB in such a manner that its flat surface faces the special surface mount board SMB. It is surface mounted. However, as described above, the mounting surface of the special surface mounting board SMB on which the surface mounting type discrete component D2a is mounted is substantially orthogonal to the mounting surface of the insertion mounting board THB. Therefore, the surface mounting type discrete component D2a provided in the special mounting component D3 faces the insertion mounting board THB not by its flat surface but by its thin surface (thin surface). It will be implemented so that it becomes a form.

In such a configuration, the thin surface having a relatively small area, rather than the flat surface having a relatively large area, faces the insertion mounting board THB. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 118, only a small area (equivalent to two through holes) is left on the insertion mounting board THB so that one discrete component (insertion mounting type) can be mounted. Even in a situation where the mounting component D3 is not mounted, the special mounting component D3 can be arranged in the small area (for two through holes).

It should be noted that the size of the surface-mounted discrete component D2a itself (length in the horizontal direction in the drawing) according to this modification is the same as when the special-mounted component D3a is mounted on the insertion mounting board THB. It is smaller than the pitch between the through-holes into which the lead parts TL for special insertion mounting are inserted (the spacing between specific insertion holes).

One end of the special insertion mounting lead portion TL has a bifurcated structure in which the special surface mounting board SMB is sandwiched from both sides thereof, and the wiring pattern HP is formed on the special surface mounting board SMB. It is fixed to the special surface-mounting board SMB by soldering at the location where it is mounted, and is electrically connected to the surface-mounting lead portion SL via the wiring pattern HP. . On the other hand, the other end side is fixed to the insertion mounting board THB by being inserted into the through hole of the insertion mounting board THB and soldered to the insertion mounting board THB side. are electrically connected to various electronic components via the wiring patterns.

In addition, although the outer package OP has a package structure (inner package) in which the surface-mounted discrete component D2a itself is molded with a mold resin, a mold resin other than the mold resin is used. Accordingly, the surface mount type discrete component D2a is further molded (double molded) together with the special surface mount board SMB to be mounted.

With such a configuration, it is extremely difficult to tamper with a surface mount board that is inferior in tampering prevention performance.

In particular, in the special mounting component D3a according to this modified example, the appearance shape produced by the outer package OP of the double mold is different from the appearance shape of the specific type of surface mounting component itself surface-mounted inside. . That is, in this case, since the discrete component D2a itself can be mounted in a state where the external shape thereof is concealed, it is possible to prevent the specific type of surface mounted component contained in the special mounted component D3a from being mounted. The circuit becomes more difficult to understand, for example, it looks like a

Moreover, of the special insertion mounting lead portions TL and the surface mounting lead portions SL provided inside the outer package OP, only the special insertion mounting lead portions TL are formed by the outer package OP (mold resin). The surface-mounted discrete component D2a is integrally molded with the special surface-mounted board SMB so that the surface-mounted discrete component D2a is pulled out to the outside of the surface-mounted component D3a. It is mounted on the insertion mounting board THB as one electronic component having lead portions TL).

According to such a configuration, although a surface-mounted board inferior in fraud prevention performance and an electronic component mounted on the board (surface-mounted component) are provided inside, the special mounted component D3a is Since it can function as if it were an insertion mount component mounted in an insertion mount area with excellent fraud prevention performance, it is expected that it will be excluded from fraudulent purposes by malicious persons. be able to be Also, in terms of physical distribution and mounting, it can be handled in the same manner as an insertion-mounting type discrete component, so it can be said that it is also superior in terms of ease of handling.

Furthermore, the outer package OP is mounted on the surface-mount type discrete component D2a having a width smaller than the pitch between the through-holes using a molding resin different from the molding resin of the discrete component D2a itself. By integrally molding with the target special surface mount board SMB, it has an external shape as an electronic component having a size that does not fit within the pitch between the through holes.

That is, as shown in FIG. 117, when the surface mount type discrete component is left as it is in an external shape smaller than the pitch between the through holes in the insertion mounting area (the interval between the insertion holes), the main control board A third party is likely to notice that a surface mounting area having inferior anti-tampering performance is provided in the base board MB of 1310, which may encourage fraud.

In this regard, in the above configuration, the surface mount type discrete component D2a, which has a width smaller than the pitch between the through holes, is an electronic component having a size that does not fit within the pitch between the through holes. It is designed to be mounted after giving it an external shape. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 118, on the base board MB of the main control board 1310, there is no electronic component having an external shape whose lateral width is smaller than the pitch between the through-holes. Since it is possible to make it appear as if only electronic components (insertion mounting components) of the type are mounted, it is possible to improve the performance of suppressing mounting of illegal components.

Furthermore, the external shape produced by such an outer package OP is different from the external shape of electronic components that are surface-mounted inside. It has a unique external shape that is different from any of the electronic components (excluding the mounting component D3). That is, in the special mounting component D3a according to this modified example, the excessive security performance of protecting the mere discrete component D2a, which can only have a limited function compared to an arithmetic processing unit, with double molding resin is provided. In addition to this, a unique and relatively large external shape is given as an external shape that dares to attract the attention of malicious persons.

According to such a configuration, the excessive security performance provided on the base board MB of the main control board 1310 can be shown to a third party, so that the motivation to commit fraud is reduced. can be expected.

Furthermore, the outer package OP is given an identification number indicating the type of the electronic component as the special mounting component D3a. It is made different from the content (SD) of the identification number attached to the surface mount type discrete component D2a) mounted on the special surface mount board SMB.

According to such a configuration, since the content (SD) of the identification number attached to the specific type of surface-mounted component does not appear, the external shape produced by the outer package OP and the surface-mounted component inside are Combined with the fact that the appearance shape of the specific type of surface mount component is different from that of the surface mount component (combined with the structure of the double mold), it becomes possible to make it appear that the specific type of surface mount component is not mounted. In addition, it becomes possible to make it look as if only insertion mounting type electronic components (insertion mounting components) are mounted, and it is possible to improve the performance of suppressing mounting of illegal components.

Further, in the special mounting component D3a according to this modified example, the length in the thickness direction of the special surface mounting board SMB is made smaller than the length in the thickness direction of the surface mounting type discrete component D2a. On top of this, a mounting surface on which electronic components and wiring patterns are provided is formed only on one side of the flat surface of the special surface mounting board SMB, and a molding resin is directly attached to the back side thereof. It has become.

That is, by adopting such a configuration, not only a unique and asymmetric external shape is formed, but also the length in the thickness direction of the special mounting part D3a is an insertion mounting type mounted in the insertion mounting area TH. is smaller than the length in the thickness direction of the discrete component D2b. As a result, together with the above-described structure in which the mounting surfaces are perpendicular to each other, there is no need to secure a special mounting space when mounting the special mounting component D3a on the insertion mounting board THB. The special mounting component D3a can be mixed into the mounting of the insertion mounting component.

As described above, the special mounting component D3a according to this modified example looks like one insertion-mounting type discrete component from the outside, but actually, the special surface-mounting board SMB and the surface-mounting type discrete component D2a and D2a are included therein. That is, in the special mounting component D3a, the special insertion mounting lead portion TL is internally fixed to the special surface mounting board SMB and electrically connected to the surface mounting lead portion SL through the wiring pattern HP. On the other hand, the insertion mounting component has a structure in which the insertion mounting lead portion is electrically connected to a specific electronic component by a bonding wire inside.

Further, in the base board MB of the main control board 1310 according to this modified example, as shown in FIG. In addition to the special mounting component D3a that is surface-mounted, a special mounting component D3b that internally surface-mounts a capacitor element with a small capacitance value is provided.

That is, the special mounting component D3b according to this modified example has a filter for a specific data line between it and the discrete component D2b provided as a resistance element among the insertion mounting type discrete components D2b mounted in the insertion mounting area TH. It forms a circuit. Recall that even with such a filter circuit configuration, the electronic components included in one discrete circuit have an electrically close role in order to exhibit a specific electrical function (filter function). By increasing the difficulty of understanding such circuits, fraud can be expected to be suppressed.

As for the special mounting component D3b, both the resistor element and the capacitor element forming the filter circuit may be internally surface-mounted on the special surface-mounting board SMB. However, in this case, the electronic components are arranged side by side in a row. For example, it is desirable to keep the external shape lower than the capacitor element (not shown in the drawing) in order to reduce the size of the base board MB of the main control board 1310 .

Further, the special mounting component D3 may contain a plurality of types of electronic components as described above, or may contain a plurality of electronic components of one type. In any case, when a plurality of electronic components are embedded, the plurality of electronic components are surface-mounted side by side in a row on one special surface mount board SMB, and the electronic components are It is desirable to package the parts and the special surface mount board SMB together by molding with molding resin.

However, if a plurality of electronic components are built into the special mounting component D3, the external shape of the component naturally becomes large. There is a concern that it will no longer be possible to expect a dazzling effect using preconceptions such as "It must be an insertion mounting type discrete component." Therefore, in order to suitably obtain the dazzling effect using such a prejudice, it is necessary to make a single surface-mount type discrete component different in external shape and thin by the above-mentioned double mold structure. It is desirable to mount them so that their faces face the insertion mounting board TH.

In addition, the above-described double-molded outer package OP may be formed of a non-transparent material such as a mold resin, and an identification number different from the identification number attached to one surface-mount type discrete component itself may be assigned to the outer package. It is also important to make it more difficult to understand the circuit by adding it to the OP.

It should be noted that the special mounting component D3 according to this modification has a structure in which "one surface mounting type discrete component" smaller than "one insertion mounting type discrete component" is included. When double-molded, the size is about the same as that of a single insertion-mounting type discrete component, and it can be expected that the above-mentioned excellent effects will be achieved. . Therefore, in a configuration in which "one insertion-mounting type discrete component" is provided inside and is double-molded, the size becomes larger than "one insertion-mounting type discrete component". Therefore, it cannot be expected that the above-described excellent effects will be achieved.

The techniques described with reference to FIGS. 117 and 118 will be summarized below. It should be noted that each content described below can be adopted by any of the technology described with reference to FIG. 117 and another example thereof, or the technology described with reference to FIG. 118 and another example thereof, unless otherwise specified. It is a configuration that is assumed to be, and it is a function and effect that can be achieved.

As described above, the techniques described with reference to FIGS. 117 and 118 are
・It has a board on which multiple mounting electronic parts are mounted, and by using those electronic parts, in addition to the generation processing of the control power supply (for example, +5V, etc.), the progress processing of the game including the payout of prize balls and a board on which a plurality of electronic components for mounting are mounted, and by using these electronic components, an effect related to the game progressed by the first control unit MCG is performed. Second control unit SCG
It is intended to solve the problem of ``miniaturizing hardware circuits while maintaining security performance against unauthorized mounting of electronic components for mounting'' in gaming machines equipped with .

More specifically, in the technique described with reference to FIGS. The above-mentioned second control unit SCG, which is only performed, is not directly related to the benefits that the player obtains, and is unlikely to be the target of fraud. One of the technical features of is that it is configured only by surface mounting. That is, in this case, surface mount type components (SMD) are used as the above-described various mounting electronic components of the peripheral control board 1510, but these mounting electronic components are provided by the player. A hardware circuit installed in the pachinko machine 1 without degrading security performance against unauthorized mounting of mounting electronic components because it is not directly related to the privilege and is unlikely to be illegally targeted. miniaturization can be achieved.

On the other hand, the processing on the side of the first control unit MCG is directly linked to awarding of benefits to the player, so the first control unit MCG is likely to be a target of fraud. Therefore, although miniaturization of the hardware circuit is required, if the first control unit MCG is simply integrated by surface mounting, the security performance against unauthorized mounting of electronic components for mounting will be remarkably lowered. The reality is that the decline in interest in gaming is inevitable.

Therefore, in the technique described with reference to FIGS. 117 and 118, on the substrate of the first control unit MCG,
an insertion mounting region where lead portions provided on mounting electronic components are mounted by being inserted into the base plate BB, and is inferior in integration performance but excellent in fraud prevention performance;
・A surface mounting area where the leads provided on the electronic component for mounting are mounted on the surface of the base plate BB, and the wiring pattern is multi-layered to provide excellent integration performance but inferior fraud prevention performance. First of all, it is decided to establish both. On top of this, the technical feature is to select and mount the following two types of mounting electronic components with different properties in the insertion mounting region or the surface mounting region having the above properties in a manner that can solve the above problems. is one of

・Multiple types of single-function elements are integrated and enclosed in a relatively large package, and the integrated circuit component has low security performance against unauthorized mounting. ・Single-function elements are enclosed in a relatively small package. Discrete components with high security performance against unauthorized mounting

More specifically, in the first control unit MCG, the integrated circuit component with low security performance is mounted only in the insertion mounting region, which is superior in fraud prevention performance, out of the insertion mounting region TH and the surface mounting region. At the same time, only the discrete components with high security performance are mounted in the surface mounting area where the anti-fraud performance is inferior. As a result, even on the side of the first control unit MCG, which is likely to be the target of fraudulence, it is possible to reduce the size of the hardware circuit while maintaining security performance against fraudulent mounting of mounting electronic components.

However, even if the security performance is maintained against unauthorized mounting of electronic components for mounting in this way, the board of the first control unit MCG is likely to be the object of unauthorized use. No change. Therefore, the substrates of the first control unit MCG are basically covered with transparent cover members (various substrate boxes 930, 950, 1320, etc.) as shown in FIGS. ), the mounting surface (flat surface) is directed toward the rear side of the pachinko machine 1. As shown in FIG. That is, in this case, not only is it possible to make it difficult to cheat on the mounting surface (flat surface) by the transparent cover member, but the first control unit MCG can be operated simply by performing an operation to open the main body frame 4 from the outer frame 2 . Since it is possible to monitor (visually) whether illegal parts are mounted on the board (first board) on which integrated circuit parts that are likely to be illegal are mounted, illegal parts Therefore, it is possible to suitably secure the suppressing performance and the ease of monitoring for the mounting of the

In order to obtain such effects, as shown in FIGS. 117 and 118, electronic components for mounting are mounted on one surface (rear surface) of the substrate of the first control unit MCG. First, the electronic component for mounting is mounted only on the other side (front side), and in a state covered with the transparent cover member (various board boxes 930, 950, 1320, etc.), Needless to say, it should be arranged so that the other side (front side) faces the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 .

In addition, considering that the main control board 1310 is a part of the first control unit MCG that performs processing that is directly linked to the granting of benefits to the player, the first control unit MCG has the above-described configurations. It can be said that it is desirable to apply each of the substrates, particularly to the substrates of the main control substrate 1310 .

Furthermore, in order to more preferably maintain the security performance against unauthorized mounting of electronic components for mounting, first, as a board possessed by the main control board 1310, an insertion mounting area excellent in unauthorized suppression performance is formed and integrated circuit components are installed. At least a first substrate on which both the discrete component and the discrete component are inserted and mounted, and a second substrate on which the discrete component is surface-mounted and the integrated circuit component is not mounted on which a surface mounting region inferior in fraud suppression performance is formed are prepared. to Among these substrates, the first substrate is covered with the transparent cover member (various substrate boxes 930, 950, 1320, etc.), and the one side surface (on which electronic components are not mounted) is placed. back side) and the other side (the front side on which electronic components are mounted) are arranged so that the other side faces the rear side of the pachinko machine 1, whereas the second board , the one side surface (the back side surface on which electronic components are not mounted) and the other side surface (the front side surface on which electronic components are mounted) do not face the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 and are perpendicular to it. It is desirable to arrange so as to face the direction of In other words, in this case, the presence of the surface mounting area (second substrate), which is inferior in fraud prevention performance, can be made difficult to be visually recognized from the rear side, so that the security performance against unauthorized mounting of electronic components for mounting is more suitable. will be expected to remain at

However, even with such a configuration, if a malicious person insists on ``whether a surface mounting area with inferior anti-tampering performance is formed somewhere,'' There is a concern that the second substrate on which the mounting area is formed may be noticed. In this case, even though only the discrete components with high security performance among the integrated circuit components and the discrete components are mounted on the surface mounting area of the second substrate, fraudulent acts that the hall side has not yet thought of. (For example, the development of microscopic fraudulent chips) could lead to losses.

Therefore, regarding the other side surface (front side) of the first substrate where both the integrated circuit component and the discrete component are inserted and mounted in the insertion mounting area with excellent tampering prevention performance, not only the insertion mounting area but also the tampering prevention A surface mounting area with inferior performance should be intentionally formed on the same surface (front surface). Then, the other side surface (front side surface) of the first substrate is mounted on the pachinko machine while the pattern wiring as the surface mounting area is exposed without mounting any electronic component for mounting on the surface mounting area. It is desirable to arrange it in such a manner that it faces the rear side of 1. That is, in this case, the surface mounting area of the other side surface (front side surface) of the first substrate arranged to face the rear side is used when a malicious person attempts to commit fraud from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1. The pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a high level of fraud prevention performance. As a result, it is possible to discourage a malicious person from trying to find the second board on which the surface mount area having inferior anti-fraud performance is formed. It is desirable that the surface mounting area formed on the first substrate be provided at a position (such as an end portion of the first substrate) where the presence of the surface mounting area can be easily noticed when looking at the first substrate.

Also, regarding the pattern wiring as the surface mounting area formed on the first substrate, does it have an independent shape that is not electrically connected to the insertion mounting area formed on the same surface as the surface mounting area? Although it is electrically connected to the insertion mounting area, even if an illegal part is mounted on the surface mounting area, the insertion mounting area is not affected (the game progresses). It is important to form on output signals that do not need to be used above). On the other hand, in the second substrate according to this illustrative example, unlike the first substrate, only the surface mounting region, which is inferior in fraud prevention performance, is formed between the insertion mounting region and the surface mounting region. Mounting electronic components (here, discrete components) are surface-mounted on the surface-mounting area.

Even if each of the above-described configurations is adopted, there is a possibility that a malicious person will find out "the second substrate on which discrete components are surface-mounted in the surface-mounted area with inferior anti-fraud performance". Gender cannot be completely ruled out. Therefore, among the surface mounting areas of the main control board 1310, the surface mounting area which is formed only on the other side of the first board and in which no mounting electronic components are mounted is used as the surface mounting area. Regarding the "surface mounting area formed only on the other side of the second substrate" In the second substrate, only the discrete components, which are difficult to be tampered with, out of the discrete components and the integrated circuit components are surface-mounted, and the second substrate is molded with a molding member (non-permeable member), and the one side surface ( The back side on which no electronic parts are mounted) and the other side (front side) are arranged so as not to face the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 but to face the direction perpendicular to it. is desirable. That is, in this case, it is possible to conceal the fact that the surface mounting area is formed on the second substrate and the type of the discrete component surface-mounted on the surface mounting area. In addition, the molding material makes it difficult to cheat on the mounting surface. Therefore, it is possible to remove the mounting from the target that requires monitoring), so it is possible to reduce the size of the hardware circuit while maintaining security performance against unauthorized mounting of electronic components for mounting. It is expected that problems such as

However, more preferably, as for mounting components (discrete components in this case) surface-mounted in the surface-mounting region, as shown in FIG. 118, a molding member ( It should be inserted and mounted in the insertion mounting region TH of the first substrate while being molded with a non-transparent member). According to such a configuration, the first board arranged to face the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 (a surface mounting area that gives an impression that "surface mounting parts are not mounted in the pachinko machine 1" and electronic parts (substrate formed with an insertion mounting area on which a second substrate is mounted), the insertion mounting area includes "discrete components", "integrated circuit components", and "a second substrate together with a mold member (non-transparent member) The surface mounting areas molded by the " are mounted by insertion, and the electronic components are electrically connected to each other. That is, in this case, when the first substrate is viewed from the rear side, there is a surface mounting area (second 2 substrates) are made invisible by the molded material, making it possible to make them appear as insertion mounting components and allow them to function electrically. It is expected that the problem of "miniaturization of the hardware circuit" will be solved more favorably.

In addition, the second substrate on which the surface-mounted components are mounted is inserted and mounted into the first substrate so that the thin surface of the substrate faces the rear side (both substrate surfaces are orthogonal to the first substrate). Therefore, it becomes possible to mount the second substrate in the molded state without creating a large dead angle with the first substrate.

Here, even if each of the above configurations is adopted, "the second substrate itself in a state of being molded by a mold member (non-permeable member) is attached to the mold member (non-permeable member) together with the unauthorized parts. ), the hall side is required to periodically check whether there is any fraudulent act such as replacing it with another board that is in a molded state. In this regard, if the above-described mold structure is simply adopted, when the above-described fraudulent act of replacing the mold member with another board having the same configuration such as color and material is performed, the fraudulent act is committed. It becomes difficult to see that it is in a broken state, and the security performance against unauthorized mounting of electronic components for mounting may conversely deteriorate.

Therefore, in the surface mounting area of the second substrate to be molded, only a specific type of discrete component (electronic component for mounting) among various discrete components mounted on the substrate of the main control board 1310 is mounted. It is desirable that they are surface-mounted, and other types are not surface-mounted on the second substrate and are mounted only on a different substrate. According to such a configuration, only discrete components having a specific shape are surface-mounted and molded in the surface-mounting area of the second substrate. The degree of swelling of the mold member (see, for example, FIG. 118, etc.) at the mounting position of the discrete component is unified. In other words, when a different board on which unauthorized components are mounted in addition to a specific type of discrete component is molded with a molding member, the degree of swelling of the molded member at the mounting position of the unauthorized component will be different from the mounting position of the specific type of discrete component. Since the bulging condition of the mold member will be different from the bulging condition of the mold member in the above, the difference in shape (the bulging condition is not uniform) in the mold member facilitates the monitoring of the above-mentioned fraudulent acts, and prevents unauthorized mounting of electronic components for mounting. It is expected that the security performance will be favorably maintained.

In this case, in the substrate included in at least the main control substrate 1310 of the first control unit MCG, the discrete components of the specific type are collectively mounted only in the surface mounting area of the second substrate. It can be said that it is more desirable to avoid mounting on a substrate different from the two substrates in terms of miniaturization (integration) of the hardware circuit.

However, since the "specific type of discrete component" is required to be an electronic component for mounting that has the same shape in order to preferably obtain the above-mentioned effects, for example, the "specific type of discrete component" If the "Schottky barrier diode" is surface-mounted on the second substrate, the "PN diode" is a "discrete component different from the specific type", and is not mounted on the second substrate and is a different substrate. is required to be implemented in Strictly speaking, when surface-mounting a "Schottky barrier diode" as a "specific type of discrete component" to the second board, the same product "Schottky barrier diode" must be mounted on the second board. It is desirable that the "Schottky barrier diode" of a different product is not mounted on the second substrate but is mounted on a different substrate.

However, in the board included in the main control board 1310, it is required to mount many types of discrete components in addition to the specific type of discrete components. Therefore, in order to achieve more suitable miniaturization (integration) of hardware circuits, the only difference is the type of discrete components to be surface-mounted, and the other structures (no insertion mounting area or , being mounted only on one side, a mold structure, etc.) is prepared, and only one type of discrete component different from the specific type is surface-mounted. Further, it is desirable that the third substrate is inserted and mounted in the insertion mounting area of the first substrate so as to be electrically connected to other mounted electronic components. According to such a configuration, the substrates (the second substrate and the third substrate) having the mold structure described above for each type of discrete component are different electronic components (in the example of FIG. 118, the special mounting component D3a, the special (equivalent to the mounting component D3b), and the shape to be monitored for each board having a mold structure (the degree of swelling in the mold member) is unified to monitor the above-mentioned fraudulent activity (e.g. confirmation of whether or not a type of electronic component that should not be mounted is mounted), it is possible to maintain the security performance against unauthorized mounting of electronic components for mounting, It becomes possible to suitably solve problems such as "miniaturization of circuits". In addition to the second board and the third board, boards on which only discrete components of a different type from those mounted on these boards are surface-mounted may be similarly prepared.

If only one discrete component is surface-mounted on the second and third substrates as shown in FIG. In combination, it is possible to more preferably solve the problem of "miniaturizing hardware circuits while maintaining security performance against unauthorized mounting of electronic components for mounting".

Further, when a plurality of substrates molded in this way (here, the second substrate and the third substrate (corresponding to the special mounting component D3a and the special mounting component D3b in the example of FIG. 118)) are provided, these substrates Preferably, each surface mounting surface (the surface on the other side described above) is arranged so as to face a specific direction. According to such a configuration, since it is possible to collectively check the degree of swelling of the molding member of each substrate from the same direction, it is possible to monitor the above-mentioned fraudulent activity (e.g. confirmation of whether or not an electronic component is mounted) can be facilitated.

Furthermore, each member (mold member) that molds the second substrate and the third substrate is provided with a component side identification mark corresponding to the type of the discrete component surface-mounted on each of the substrates. In addition, it is desirable that the surfaces on which the component side identification marks are attached face the same direction. That is, in this case, it is possible to make one-to-one correspondence between the "type of component side identification mark" attached to each of the second substrate and the third substrate and the "shape to appear on the mold member". , it becomes possible to facilitate fraud monitoring as to whether replacement of parts has occurred. In this case, it is preferable that the component side identification mark is attached to the mold surface opposite to the side where the surface mounting area is formed (the surface on which the mold member does not bulge). It is desirable to eliminate the distortion as the identification mark so as not to cause an erroneous confirmation.

Further, according to the above configuration, for the second substrate and the third substrate in which the surface mounting region inferior in fraud suppression performance is formed, one electronic component molded together with the discrete components surface-mounted on the substrate is formed. They are provided as components and are inserted and mounted in an insertion mounting region formed on the first substrate so that their substrate surfaces are perpendicular to each other. That is, in this case, the second board and the third board on which the discrete components originally provided as surface-mounted components are mounted are treated as if they were insertion-mounted components without creating a large space between them and the first board. Therefore, it is expected that the hardware circuit will be miniaturized while maintaining the performance of suppressing mounting of illegal components.

However, in order to preferably maintain the performance of suppressing the mounting of illegal components, the appearance of "an electronic component inserted and mounted on the first board as if it were an insertion mounted component" should be changed to the second board or the second board. It is required that they are held by the third substrate so as not to be seen on the substrate on which the surface mounting area is formed. Therefore, the second and third substrates should be designed so that multiple types of discrete components are not surface-mounted, integrated circuit components are not surface-mounted, and furthermore, as shown in FIG. To make only one discrete component surface-mounted is to suppress the size of the board and convert it into one insertion-mounting component (a structure in which an electric element is connected to an insertion-mounting lead portion by a bonding wire). It can be said that it is extremely important in making it look as if it is a general electronic component (discrete component) that has been used. That is, the surface mounting area formed on the second substrate and the third substrate includes at least an insertion mounting area formed on the first substrate and an empty state where nothing is mounted on the first substrate. It is required that the area be made smaller than the surface mounting area provided.

Furthermore, after making the second substrate and the third substrate compact in this way, the first substrate has the second substrate and the third substrate each having one electron. Insertion mount components (discrete components) that are mounted at a lower mounting height than those electronic components that are inserted and mounted as components (discrete components (general electronic components that have a structure in which electrical elements are connected to lead parts for insertion mounting by bonding wires) components)), and insertion mounting components that are mounted at a higher mounting height than these electronic components (discrete components (general electronic components with a structure in which electrical elements are connected to insertion mounting leads by bonding wires)) and are preferably arranged respectively. According to such a configuration, the second substrate and the third substrate in which the surface mounting region having inferior fraud prevention performance is formed are inserted and mounted in the insertion mounting region formed on the first substrate and having excellent fraud prevention performance. It becomes possible to make it look more suitable as if it were a single electronic component. In this sense, the second substrate and the third substrate may be provided as electronic components (mold components) smaller than any of the integrated circuit components inserted and mounted on the first substrate, or may be inserted into the first substrate. It can also be said that it is important to provide an electronic component (mold component) that is smaller than the largest discrete component to be mounted.

In addition to the substrate (first substrate) on which the insertion mounting area according to this embodiment is formed, in general, substrates on which electronic components are mounted also have substrates corresponding to the types of the electronic components to be mounted. In many cases, a side identification indication is attached, and for example, an electrical symbol corresponding to the Schottky barrier diode is attached near the location where the Schottky barrier diode is mounted. However, with respect to the second board and the third board according to the present embodiment, it is possible to conceal which type of electronic component it functions as, thereby increasing the difficulty of understanding the circuit. It can be said that this is desirable in terms of suitably maintaining the suppression performance against mounting of illegal components.

Therefore, in the insertion mounting surface of the first substrate, in the vicinity of each position where the second substrate and the third substrate are inserted and mounted as one electronic component, different substrate side identification marks are attached respectively. However, any of these board-side identification marks, including the board-side identification marks attached corresponding to mounting electronic components of the same type, is any board-side identification mark within the insertion mounting area of the first control unit MCG. It is desirable to use a unique mode different from the display (for example, a special display mode such as "?" or "*"). That is, in this case, even if the board side identification mark (mounting surface of the first board) attached near the position where the second board and the third board are respectively inserted and mounted is confirmed, the mode is the same type of mounting electronic device. Since it is a unique aspect that is different from the board-side identification marking attached corresponding to the component, which type is mounted as the discrete component surface-mounted on the second board or the third board, respectively. It becomes possible to make it difficult to recognize

However, in the case of adopting a structure that increases the difficulty of circuit understanding by concealing which type of electronic component the second board and the third board function as in this way, the type There is concern that a person with malicious intent may try to check the internal elements by scraping the mold member.

Therefore, with respect to the second substrate and the third substrate, first, the surface mounting surface (surface mounting surface in a molded state) formed on these substrates should not be provided with any substrate side identification indication. However, even if a person with malicious intent scrapes the mold member and tries to check the inside of it, it is difficult to recognize which type is mounted as the discrete component. is desirable.

Furthermore, with respect to each discrete component surface-mounted in the surface-mounting area formed on the second substrate and the third substrate, most of the discrete components inserted-mounted in the insertion-mounting area formed on the first substrate is configured by molding with a first mold member of a different color, and then both the second substrate and the third substrate to be mounted are molded with a second mold member of the same or similar color as the specific color Further, it is desirable that the molded electronic component is inserted and mounted in an insertion mounting region formed on the first substrate. According to such a configuration, the second substrate and the third substrate having the surface mounting region inferior in fraud prevention performance are molded in the same manner as other insertion mounting components and mounted on the first substrate. Even in the case of insertion mounting, the manager on the hall side can easily find out where the second board and the third board are. It becomes possible to facilitate confirmation of whether or not there is.

In this case, even a malicious person will be helped to grasp information about which surface mounting area (second substrate or third substrate) having inferior anti-fraud performance is provided. could become In this regard, in the above configuration, the type of the discrete component as the electronic component is concealed by molding the discrete component surface-mounted on the surface-mounting area with the second molding member together with the second substrate or the third substrate. In addition, the second mold member is provided in the same or similar color as the specific color assigned to the first mold member of the surface-mounted discrete component. ing. That is, in this case, in order to ascertain the type of the discrete component surface-mounted in the surface-mounting area, a person with malicious intent scrapes the second mold member and attempts to confirm the inside thereof. Even so, it is difficult to determine whether the second mold member molded together with the second substrate or the third substrate is being scraped, or whether the first mold member inside the second mold member is being scraped. As a result, it is expected that the type of the electronic component will be concealed and the difficulty of understanding the circuit will be favorably maintained.

Further, as described above, in this illustrative example, of the insertion mounting surface of the first substrate, in the vicinity of each position where the second substrate and the third substrate are inserted and mounted as one electronic component, on the same mounting surface A board-side identification display having a unique mode (for example, a special display mode such as "?" or "*") different from any board-side identification display is attached. However, if only the board-side identification display with such a unique aspect is attached, it is impossible for the hall side to grasp which type of electronic component it functions as. There is concern that it may adversely affect management. Therefore, in the vicinity of each position where the second board and the third board are inserted and mounted as one electronic component on the insertion mounting surface of the first board, a board having a unique aspect is placed at a relatively easily visible position. In addition to attaching a side identification mark, electronic components for mounting of the same type (or different It is desirable to secretly attach a board-side identification mark having the same form as the board-side identification mark attached corresponding to the same type of mounted electronic component on the board.

Further, as described above, in this illustrative example, the surface mounting area of the second board includes a specific type (for example, a Schottky barrier diode) of various discrete components mounted on the board of the main control board 1310. only discrete components (electronic components for mounting) are surface-mounted. In addition, in the surface mounting area of the third board, among various discrete components mounted on the board of the main control board 1310, one type different from the specific type (for example, having a relatively small specific capacity). Only discrete components (electronic components for mounting) of capacitors) are surface mounted. According to these configurations, it is obvious that the second substrate and the third substrate alone cannot function as a discrete circuit having a specific function (for example, a backup circuit or a filter circuit). That is, electronic components for mounting to be surface-mounted in a surface-mounting area formed on a molded substrate (second substrate or third substrate) and a substrate (here) different from the substrate (second substrate or third substrate) Then, by configuring a specific discrete circuit with mounting electronic components surface-mounted in the insertion mounting area formed on the first substrate), the difficulty of understanding the circuit is increased, and the molded substrate (Second board or third board) It is difficult to replace this itself (because the structure in the mold is concealed, and it is necessary to create a mold part that does not have a specific circuit function) and is illegal. It is expected that countermeasures will be provided.

As described above, in summarizing the techniques described with reference to FIGS. 117 and 118, configurations having several technical features have been described in the order in which synergistic effects can be expected. Each configuration is merely described as the best embodiment, and it is not always necessary to use all of the configurations when implementing, and the configurations can be appropriately combined regardless of the order in which they are described. It is possible to implement

Next, technical ideas that can be grasped from the above embodiment and modifications will be described below.

[Technical concept 1-1]
A specific control unit having a base plate on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted and capable of executing control power source generation processing and game progress processing by using the electronic components,
A gaming machine capable of awarding a privilege to a player when a special game result is obtained as a result of executing the game progress process,
The base plate of the specific control unit is
an insertion mounting region in which the lead provided on the electronic component is mounted by being inserted into the base plate;
a surface mounting area in which leads provided on the electronic component are mounted on the surface of the base plate;
At least one of the surface-mounted components among the plurality of electronic components mounted in the surface-mounting region is molded with a mold resin, even though the surface-mounted component itself is molded with the mold resin. is also molded with another mold resin together with the surface mounting area to be mounted.

[Technical concept 1-2]
a first control unit having a base plate on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted and capable of executing control power source generation processing and game progress processing by using the electronic components;
a second control unit having a base plate on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted, and by using the electronic components, a performance progress process can be executed according to the result of the game progress process;
A gaming machine capable of awarding a privilege to a player when a special game result is obtained as a result of the game progress processing,
The base plate of the second control unit includes an insertion mounting region in which lead portions provided on the electronic component are mounted by being inserted into the base plate, and an insertion mounting region in which the lead portions provided on the electronic component are mounted on the base plate. Only the surface mounting area is provided among the surface mounting areas that are mounted on the surface of the
both the insertion mounting area and the surface mounting area are provided on the base plate of the first control unit,
Among the plurality of electronic components, a first-side surface-mounted component mounted on the surface-mounted area provided on the base plate of the first control unit, and a surface-mounted area provided on the base plate of the second control unit. In spite of the fact that the second side surface-mounted components to be mounted are themselves molded with molding resin, the first side surface-mounted components and the second side surface-mounted components A gaming machine, wherein the surface mounting area of the first side surface mounting component is further molded with a mold resin other than the molding resin of the first side surface mounting component itself.

In such technical concepts 1-1 and 1-2, the surface-mounted parts mounted in the surface-mounted area inferior in fraud prevention performance are themselves molded with molding resin. Since it is integrally molded with the surface mounting area to be mounted by a mold resin different from the mold resin, it is possible to perform some kind of tampering on the surface mounting area that is inferior in tampering prevention performance. becomes extremely difficult.

[Technical concept 2]
A specific control unit having a base plate on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted and capable of executing control power source generation processing and game progress processing by using the electronic components,
A gaming machine capable of awarding a privilege to a player when a special game result is obtained as a result of executing the game progress process,
The base plate of the specific control unit is
an insertion mounting board on which the insertion mounting lead portions provided on the insertion mounting component of the electronic component are mounted so as to be inserted;
a surface-mounting board on which surface-mounting leads provided on the surface-mounting component of the electronic component are mounted so as to be placed on the surface;
The surface mounting board includes:
at least a special surface mounting board having a lead portion for special insertion mounting formed so as to extend outward from the surface mounting board and be insertable into the insertion mounting board,
On the special surface mounting board,
a wiring portion formed to electrically connect the lead portion for surface mounting of the surface-mounted component to be mounted on the special surface-mounting board and the lead portion for special insertion mounting;
The surface mount components mounted on the special surface mount board are
Only the lead portion for special insertion mounting out of the lead portion for surface mounting and the lead portion for special insertion mounting is integrally molded together with the special surface mounting plate so that only the lead portion for special insertion mounting is pulled out to the outside of the molding resin, A game machine characterized by being mounted on the insertion mounting board as one electronic component having a lead portion for special insertion mounting.

In technical idea 2, a surface mount component mounted in a surface mount area with inferior fraud prevention performance functions as if it were an insertion mount component mounted in an insertion mount region with excellent fraud prevention performance. can be expected to be excluded from malicious purposes.

[Technical concept 3]
A specific control unit having a base plate on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted and capable of executing control power source generation processing and game progress processing by using the electronic components,
A gaming machine capable of awarding a privilege to a player when a special game result is obtained as a result of executing the game progress process,
The base plate of the specific control unit is
an insertion mounting board on which the insertion mounting lead portions provided on the insertion mounting component of the electronic component are mounted so as to be inserted;
a surface-mounting board on which surface-mounting leads provided on the surface-mounting component of the electronic component are mounted so as to be placed on the surface;
The surface mount component includes:
at least a discrete surface mount component in which a single-function element is molded with a mold resin,
The discrete surface mount component comprises:
The discrete surface-mounted component is integrally molded with the surface-mounted board on which the discrete surface-mounted component is to be mounted using a mold resin different from the mold resin of the discrete surface-mounted component itself, and thus has a relatively large external shape and a base of the specific control unit. A game machine characterized by having an external shape different from any of all electronic components mounted on a board.

In this technical idea 3, after giving excessive security performance such as protection with double mold resin to mere discrete surface mounted parts that can only have limited functions compared to arithmetic processing units etc. , a unique and relatively large external shape is provided as an external shape that dares to attract the attention of malicious persons. That is, in this case, it is possible to show the third party the excessive security performance provided in the specific control unit, so that it can be expected that the willingness to commit fraud will decrease.

[Technical concept 4]
A specific control unit having a base plate on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted and capable of executing control power source generation processing and game progress processing by using the electronic components,
A gaming machine capable of awarding a privilege to a player when a special game result is obtained as a result of executing the game progress process,
The base plate of the specific control unit is
an insertion mounting region in which the lead provided on the electronic component is mounted by being inserted into the base plate;
a surface mounting area in which leads provided on the electronic component are mounted on the surface of the base plate;
In the base plate of the specific control unit, the surface mounting area is provided dispersedly in a plurality of locations so that each area is a relatively small area, whereas the insertion mounting area is provided dispersedly. A gaming machine provided as a relatively large area surrounding at least one of the provided surface mounting areas.

In this kind of technical idea 4, the surface mounting area with inferior anti-tampering performance is not gathered in one place, but dispersed to make it less conspicuous. They are arranged in such a way that they are slipped into the insertion mounting area provided as an area. Therefore, it becomes difficult for a malicious person to notice the presence of the surface mounting area when looking at the base plate of the specific control unit. It is expected that hardware circuits will be miniaturized.

[Technical concept 5]
A specific control unit having a base plate on which a plurality of electronic circuits are formed and capable of executing control power supply generation processing and game progress processing by using the electronic circuits,
A gaming machine capable of awarding a privilege to a player when a special game result is obtained as a result of executing the game progress process,
The plurality of electronic circuits include:
A backup power supply circuit that supplies backup power to a predetermined storage unit when the control power supply is cut off is included as a discrete circuit having at least a capacitor and a diode, both of which are single-function electronic components. ,
The base plate of the specific control unit is
an insertion mounting region in which the lead provided on the electronic component is mounted by being inserted into the base plate;
a surface mounting area in which the leads provided on the electronic component are mounted on the surface of the base plate;
The insertion mounting area is
provided as a relatively large area surrounding the surface mounting area so that electronic components mounted in the surface mounting area are adjacent to some of the electronic components mounted in the insertion mounting area;
The backup power supply circuit
Although the discrete circuit is provided as a discrete circuit having a backup power supply function for supplying backup power to a predetermined storage unit when the control power supply is cut off, the capacitor and the diode included in the discrete circuit One of the electronic components is mounted on the surface mounting area surrounded by the insertion mounting area, and the other electronic component is mounted on the surface mounting area in the insertion mounting area. A game machine characterized by being mounted at a position not adjacent to a component.

In this technical idea 5, although it is a discrete circuit intended to exhibit a specific electrical function (backup power supply function), it can be mounted in the insertion mounting area on the base plate. There will be a mixture of electronic components having a shape that allows smoothness and electronic components having a shape that allows mounting on the surface mounting area. Therefore, when a third party visually recognizes the base plate of a specific control unit, remember that they have a close electrical role in order to perform a specific electrical function (backup power supply function). By increasing the difficulty of circuit understanding, fraud can be expected to be suppressed.

Moreover, the surface mounting area, which has inferior anti-tampering performance, is arranged in such a way that it can be blended into the insertion mounting area, which is provided as a relatively large area with excellent anti-tampering performance. The capacitors and diodes included in one discrete circuit for the purpose of exhibiting the power supply function) are arranged so as not to be adjacent to each other. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to notice the existence of the surface mounting area that is inferior in fraud prevention performance, and even if the existence is noticed, the electronic components mounted in the surface mounting area cooperate with other electronic components. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to remember what electrical function the circuit is implemented for. can be expected.

[Technical concept 6]
A specific control unit having a base plate on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted and capable of executing control power source generation processing and game progress processing by using the electronic components,
A gaming machine capable of awarding a privilege to a player when a special game result is obtained as a result of executing the game progress process,
The base plate of the specific control unit is
an insertion mounting board on which the insertion mounting lead provided on the electronic component is mounted so as to be inserted;
a surface mounting board on which surface mounting leads provided on the electronic component are mounted so as to be placed on the surface;
The surface mounting board includes:
at least a special surface mounting board having a lead portion for special insertion mounting formed so as to extend outward from the surface mounting board and be insertable into the insertion mounting board,
The special surface mounting board is
a wiring portion formed to electrically connect the lead portion for surface mounting of an electronic component to be mounted on the special surface mounting board and the lead portion for special insertion mounting; The special insertion mounting lead portions are inserted into the insertion mounting board so that the mounting surfaces are substantially perpendicular to each other.

A gaming machine characterized by:

In general, components mounted on surface mounting boards often have a flat shape. In this regard, in the technical idea 6, the special surface mounting board is arranged so that the mounting surfaces of the insertion mounting board are substantially perpendicular to each other. That is, in this case, a thin surface having a relatively small area, rather than a flat surface having a relatively large area, faces the insertion mounting board. The special surface mounting board can be arranged even in a situation where only a small area (surface area) is left.

[Technical concept 7]
A specific control unit having a base plate on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted and capable of executing control power source generation processing and game progress processing by using the electronic components,
A gaming machine capable of awarding a privilege to a player when a special game result is obtained as a result of executing the game progress process,
The base plate of the specific control unit is
an insertion mounting board mounted in such a manner that lead portions for insertion mounting provided on the electronic component are inserted;
a surface mounting board on which surface mounting leads provided on the electronic component are mounted so as to be placed on the surface of the base board,
Among the plurality of electronic components, the surface-mounted components mounted on the surface-mounted board include specific surface-mounted components having a size that fits within the installation interval of specific insertion holes provided on the insertion mounting board. and
The specific surface mount component is
Although the size is within the installation interval of the specific insertion hole, the specific surface mount component is integrated with the surface mount board to be mounted with a mold resin different from the mold resin of the specific surface mount component itself. A game machine characterized by having an external shape as an electronic component having a size that does not fit within the installation interval of the specific insertion holes by being molded.

In other words, if the specific surface-mounted component is left with an external shape that is smaller than the installation interval of the insertion holes in the insertion-mounting board, a surface-mounted area with inferior tampering prevention performance is provided in the specific control unit. It becomes easy for a third party to notice it, and it may encourage fraudulent acts.

In this regard, in the technical idea 7, the specific surface-mounted component is integrally molded with the surface-mounted board to be mounted with a mold resin different from the mold resin of the specific surface-mounted component itself. Since the appearance shape of an electronic component with a size that does not fit within the installation interval of a specific insertion hole appears, a surface mounting area that is inferior in fraud prevention performance is provided in the specific control unit. It becomes possible to make it difficult for a third party to notice that.

[Technical concept 8]
a first control unit having a base plate on which a plurality of electronic components for mounting are mounted and capable of executing a game progress process by using the electronic components;
a second control unit having a base plate on which a plurality of electronic components for mounting are mounted, and by using these electronic components, a production progress process can be executed according to the result of the game progress process;
A gaming machine capable of awarding a privilege to a player when a special game result is obtained as a result of executing the game progress process,
The plurality of electronic components for mounting include:
It includes discrete components in which single-function elements are enclosed in relatively small packages, and integrated circuit components in which multiple types of single-function elements are integrated and enclosed in relatively large packages,
The base plate of the first control unit,
an insertion mounting region in which the lead portions provided on the electronic component for mounting are mounted by being inserted into the base plate;
a surface mounting area in which lead portions provided on the electronic component for mounting are mounted on the surface of the base plate;
the base plate of the first control unit includes at least a first substrate and a second substrate as substrates on which the surface mounting area is formed;
The first substrate is
Neither the discrete component nor the integrated circuit component is mounted on the surface mounting area, and the pattern wiring as the surface mounting area is exposed, and faces the rear side of the gaming machine. It is arranged in
The second substrate is
Of the integrated circuit component and the discrete component, the integrated circuit component is not mounted on the surface mounting area, but only the discrete component is mounted, and is oriented in a direction different from the rear side of the gaming machine. A game machine characterized by being arranged.

In this technical idea 8, a first substrate is purposely prepared on which a surface mounting area is formed in which no electronic component for mounting is mounted and which is in a vacant state. The pattern wiring is arranged so as to face the rear side of the game machine while the pattern wiring is exposed. In other words, in this case, when a malicious person attempts to commit fraud from behind the game machine, "No electronic components for mounting are mounted on the surface mounting area, which is inferior in fraud prevention performance, and it is highly fraudulent as a game machine." It has come to play a role as a billboard that appeals that it is equipped with suppression performance, and it is expected that this will suppress the installation of illegal parts.

On the other hand, on the second substrate, the integrated circuit is arranged in a direction different from the rear side of the game machine so that its existence is hardly noticed, and the integrated circuit is mounted on the surface mounting area. Among components and discrete components, integrated circuit components that are likely to be targets of fraud are not mounted, and only discrete components that are unlikely to be targets of fraud are mounted. That is, in this case, coupled with the existence of the first substrate, the existence of the second substrate itself can be made difficult to notice, and even if the existence is noticed, the fraud suppression performance is inferior. Since only discrete components that are unlikely to be targeted for fraud are mounted in the surface mounting area, it is expected that the hardware circuit will be miniaturized while maintaining the performance of suppressing mounting of illegal components. Become.

[Technical concept 9]
a first control unit having a board on which a plurality of mounting electronic components are mounted, and capable of executing a game progress process by using the electronic components;
a second control unit having a board on which a plurality of electronic components for mounting are mounted, and by using the electronic components, a performance progress process according to the result of the game progress process can be executed,
A gaming machine capable of awarding a privilege to a player when a special game result is obtained as a result of executing the game progress process,
The plurality of electronic components for mounting include:
It includes discrete components in which single-function elements are enclosed in relatively small packages, and integrated circuit components in which multiple types of single-function elements are integrated and enclosed in relatively large packages,
The substrate of the first control unit is
A first substrate formed with an insertion mounting area in which the lead portions of the electronic component for mounting are mounted by being inserted into the substrate; a second substrate formed with a surface mounting area to be mounted on top and a special insertion mounting lead portion extending outward and capable of being inserted into the insertion mounting area of the first substrate; and
The first substrate has
An insertion mounting region into which the insertion mounting lead provided on the insertion mounting component is inserted so that mounting is possible, and an insertion mounting region in which the surface mounting lead provided on the surface mounting component is placed on the surface. Although both the surface mounting area that can be mounted is formed, no mounting electronic component is mounted on the surface mounting area formed on the first substrate, and the pattern wiring as the surface mounting area is not mounted. It is said to remain exposed,
The second substrate has
Only the surface mounting area is formed out of the insertion mounting area and the surface mounting area, and only the discrete component out of the discrete component and the integrated circuit component is mounted together with the second substrate. By inserting the special insertion mounting lead portion into the insertion mounting area of the first substrate as one electronic component molded in the above, various insertion mounting components mounted on the first substrate A gaming machine characterized by being electrically connected between them.

In this technical idea 9, as a surface mounting area inferior in fraud prevention performance, a surface mounting area ( a first substrate), and a surface mounting region (second substrate) in which only discrete components that are difficult to be targeted for fraud are surface-mounted and molded together with the substrates, out of the discrete components and the integrated circuit components. It has That is, in this case, when a malicious person tries to commit fraud from the rear side of the game machine, the surface mounting area where the mounting electronic components are mounted is made invisible, and any mounting method is used. Since only the surface mounting area where no electronic components are mounted is visible, the surface mounting area is considered to be "a surface mounting area with inferior anti-tampering performance where no mounting electronic components are mounted. , as a game machine, it has a high anti-fraud performance.

Moreover, in addition to the surface mounting area, the first substrate having the surface mounting area that plays the role of the billboard is formed with an insertion mounting area that is excellent in fraud prevention performance. Then, the surface mounting area (second substrate) molded together with the substrate is inserted and mounted. That is, in this case, among the board (first board) giving the impression that "no surface mount components are mounted", the insertion mounting area with excellent fraud prevention performance is replaced with the surface mount area (first board) with poor fraud prevention performance. 2 substrates) are incorporated into the mold in such a way that it is difficult to see, so it is expected that the hardware circuit will be miniaturized while maintaining the performance of suppressing the mounting of illegal parts. Become.

[Technical concept 10]
a first control unit having a board on which a plurality of mounting electronic components are mounted, and capable of executing a game progress process by using the electronic components;
a second control unit having a board on which a plurality of electronic components for mounting are mounted, and by using the electronic components, a performance progress process according to the result of the game progress process can be executed,
A gaming machine capable of awarding a privilege to a player when a special game result is obtained as a result of executing the game progress process,
The plurality of electronic components for mounting include:
It includes discrete components in which single-function elements are enclosed in relatively small packages, and integrated circuit components in which multiple types of single-function elements are integrated and enclosed in relatively large packages,
The substrate of the first control unit is
A first substrate formed with an insertion mounting area in which the lead portions of the electronic component for mounting are mounted by being inserted into the substrate; a second substrate having a surface mounting area mounted thereon,
In the first substrate,
Electronic components for mounting are not mounted on one surface, and both the discrete components and the integrated circuit components are mounted on the other surface, and the other surface is the rear of the game machine. While it is arranged in a form facing the side,
In the second substrate,
Electronic components for mounting are not mounted on one surface, and only the discrete components are mounted on the other surface without mounting the integrated circuit components among the integrated circuit components and the discrete components on the other surface. mounted on the first substrate in such a manner that both the one side surface and the other side surface are oriented in a direction different from the rear side of the game machine in a state molded by Amusement machine.

In this technical idea 10, the first substrate on which the insertion mounting area with excellent fraud prevention performance is formed does not mount electronic components for mounting on one side surface, and discrete components and integrated components are integrated on the other side surface. In the state where both the circuit parts and the circuit parts are respectively mounted, the other surface is arranged so as to face the rear side of the game machine. As a substrate (first substrate) to be used as the first substrate, it is possible to suitably secure the performance of suppressing mounting of illegal components and the ease of monitoring.

In addition, regarding the second substrate on which a surface mounting area inferior in anti-tampering performance is formed, electronic components for mounting are not mounted on one surface, and integrated circuit components that are likely to be targeted for tampering are mounted on the other surface. Since only discrete parts that are difficult to be illegally targeted are mounted, it is expected that the hardware circuit will be miniaturized while maintaining the performance of suppressing the mounting of illegal parts. Become.

Moreover, in the second substrate, the surface mounting area on which the discrete components are mounted is molded together with the substrate by the molding member, and both the surface on the one side and the surface on the other side are mounted on the gaming machine. It is arranged so as to face in a different direction from the rear side of the. In other words, in this case, the surface mounting area, which is inferior in fraud prevention performance, is made to function as a special area where it is practically impossible to mount unauthorized parts, and the target (gaming machine) that requires monitoring for mounting unauthorized parts confirmation target from the rear side).

In addition, for the surface mounting area (second board) excluded from the monitoring target for mounting of illegal components, the thin part of the board faces the rear side (both the one side surface and the other side surface are subject to monitoring). facing a direction different from the rear side of the game machine), the molded state can be maintained without creating a large space between the first substrate and the first substrate. It becomes possible to mount a second substrate.

[Technical concept 11]
a first control unit having a board on which a plurality of mounting electronic components are mounted, and capable of executing a game progress process by using the electronic components;
a second control unit having a board on which a plurality of electronic components for mounting are mounted, and by using the electronic components, a performance progress process according to the result of the game progress process can be executed,
A gaming machine capable of awarding a privilege to a player when a special game result is obtained as a result of executing the game progress process,
The plurality of electronic components for mounting include:
It includes discrete components in which single-function elements are enclosed in relatively small packages, and integrated circuit components in which multiple types of single-function elements are integrated and enclosed in relatively large packages,
The substrate of the first control unit is
a first substrate having an insertion mounting area in which both the discrete component and the integrated circuit component are inserted and mounted;
a second substrate having a surface mounting area where the integrated circuit component is not mounted among the discrete component and the integrated circuit component, and a specific type of mounting electronic component among the discrete components is surface-mounted; and A third substrate having a surface mounting area where the integrated circuit component out of the discrete component and the integrated circuit component is not mounted, and an electronic component for mounting of a type different from the specific type among the discrete components is surface-mounted. and
The second substrate and the third substrate are
Provided as separate electronic components molded together with discrete components surface-mounted on the substrates, and mounted by insertion into insertion mounting regions formed on the first substrate electrically connectable to various insertion mounting components mounted on the first substrate,
Each member for molding the second board and the third board is provided with a component side identification mark according to the type of the discrete component surface-mounted on each of the boards. A game machine characterized by being arranged so that all faces with identification marks face in a specific direction.

In Technical Concept 11, both integrated circuit components that are likely to be targeted for fraud and discrete components that are less likely to be targeted for fraud are mounted on the first substrate in which the insertion mounting region having excellent fraud prevention performance is formed. Then, on the second and third substrates formed with the surface mounting areas having inferior anti-fraud performance, only the discrete components that are unlikely to be targeted for fraud are mounted in different types on each substrate.

Therefore, electronic components for mounting mounted on the insertion mounting area side, which has excellent tampering prevention performance, can be mounted on the surface mounting area side, which has inferior tampering prevention performance. Regarding electronic components for mounting, it is checked whether electronic components for mounting with shapes of types corresponding to each of the second and third boards are mounted (Electronic components of types that should not be mounted on the corresponding board) is not implemented), it is expected that even if fraud is done, it will be possible to easily detect it, and the hardware circuit will be miniaturized. become.

Moreover, the second substrate and the third substrate, on which the surface mounting areas inferior in fraud prevention performance are formed, are provided as separate electronic components molded together with the discrete components surface-mounted on the respective substrates. and are inserted and mounted in respective insertion mounting regions formed on the first substrate, so that they can be electrically connected to various insertion mounting components mounted on the first substrate. there is That is, in this case, a discrete component of a specific type originally provided as a surface mount component and a discrete component of a different type from the specific type are inserted and mounted on the first substrate as if they were insertion mounted components. Therefore, it is expected to reduce the size of the hardware circuit while suitably maintaining the performance of suppressing mounting of illegal components.

Furthermore, each member for molding the second substrate and the third substrate is provided with a component-side identification mark corresponding to the type of the discrete component surface-mounted on each of the substrates. They are arranged so that the surfaces with side identification marks all face in a specific direction. That is, in this case, the "type of component side identification mark" and the "shape to appear on the mold member" given to the second board and the third board inserted and mounted to the first board, respectively, are one-to-one. Since it becomes possible to correspond, it becomes possible to facilitate fraud monitoring as to whether replacement of parts has occurred.

[Technical concept 12]
a first control unit having a board on which a plurality of mounting electronic components are mounted, and capable of executing a game progress process by using the electronic components;
a second control unit having a board on which a plurality of electronic components for mounting are mounted, and by using the electronic components, a performance progress process according to the result of the game progress process can be executed,
A gaming machine capable of awarding a privilege to a player when a special game result is obtained as a result of executing the game progress process,
The plurality of electronic components for mounting include:
It includes discrete components in which single-function elements are enclosed in relatively small packages, and integrated circuit components in which multiple types of single-function elements are integrated and enclosed in relatively large packages,
The substrate of the first control unit is
a first substrate having an insertion mounting region in which both the discrete component and the integrated circuit component are inserted and mounted; having a second substrate formed with a surface mounting area on which a discrete component is surface mounted,
The second substrate is
Discrete components surface-mounted on the substrate are provided as one electronic component molded together, and insertion mounting is performed in such a manner that the substrate surfaces are perpendicular to the insertion mounting area formed on the first substrate. are electrically connected to various insertion mount components mounted on the first substrate,
The first substrate has
When the second substrate is inserted and mounted as one electronic component to the substrate, an insertion mounted component mounted at a lower mounting height than the electronic component, and an insertion mounting component mounted at a higher mounting height than the electronic component. A gaming machine characterized in that insertion mounting components are arranged respectively.

In this technical idea 12, both integrated circuit components that are likely to be targeted for fraud and discrete components that are difficult to be targeted for fraud are mounted on the first substrate in which the insertion mounting region having excellent fraud prevention performance is formed. Since only discrete components that are unlikely to be targeted for fraud are mounted on the second substrate in which a surface mounting area having inferior anti-fraud performance is formed, hardware It is expected that the miniaturization of circuits will be achieved.

Moreover, the second substrate on which the surface mounting area inferior in fraud prevention performance is formed is provided as one electronic component molded together with the discrete components surface-mounted on the substrate, and is formed on the first substrate. They are inserted and mounted in such a manner that their substrate surfaces are orthogonal to each other in the inserted mounting area. That is, in this case, the second board on which the discrete components that are originally provided as surface-mounted components are mounted can be mounted on the first board as if they were insertion-mounted components without creating a large space between the first board and the first board. Therefore, it is expected that the hardware circuit will be miniaturized while maintaining the performance of suppressing the mounting of illegal parts.

Further, an insertion mounting component mounted on the first substrate at a lower mounting height than the electronic component when the second substrate is inserted and mounted on the substrate as one electronic component, and the electronic component Since the insertion mounting components mounted at a higher mounting height than the second substrate formed with the surface mounting area inferior in fraud suppression performance are arranged, the second substrate formed with the surface mounting area inferior to the fraud suppression performance is disposed on the first substrate. It is possible to make it difficult to recognize that the device is mounted in the insertion mounting region with excellent suppression performance.

[Technical concept 13]
a first control unit having a board on which a plurality of mounting electronic components are mounted, and capable of executing a game progress process by using the electronic components;
a second control unit having a board on which a plurality of electronic components for mounting are mounted, and by using the electronic components, a performance progress process according to the result of the game progress process can be executed,
A gaming machine capable of awarding a privilege to a player when a special game result is obtained as a result of executing the game progress process,
The plurality of electronic components for mounting include:
It includes discrete components in which single-function elements are enclosed in relatively small packages, and integrated circuit components in which multiple types of single-function elements are integrated and enclosed in relatively large packages,
The substrate of the first control unit is
a first substrate having an insertion mounting region in which both the discrete component and the integrated circuit component are inserted and mounted; having a second substrate formed with a surface mounting area on which a discrete component is surface mounted,
The discrete components surface-mounted on the second substrate are molded with a first molding member having a specific color different from most of the discrete components inserted and mounted on the first substrate. and
The second substrate is
Discrete components surface-mounted on the substrate are provided as one electronic component molded with a second mold member having the same or similar color as the specific color, and an insertion mounting area formed on the first substrate. A game machine characterized by being electrically connectable to various insertion-mounted components mounted on the first substrate by being inserted-mounted to the first substrate.

In this technical concept 13, both integrated circuit components that are likely to be targeted for fraud and discrete components that are difficult to be targeted for fraud are mounted on the first substrate in which the insertion mounting region having excellent fraud prevention performance is formed. Since only discrete components that are unlikely to be targeted for fraud are mounted on the second substrate in which a surface mounting area having inferior anti-fraud performance is formed, hardware It is expected that the miniaturization of circuits will be achieved.

Moreover, the second substrate on which the surface mounting area inferior in fraud prevention performance is formed is provided as one electronic component molded together with the discrete components surface-mounted on the substrate, and is formed on the first substrate. It is designed to be inserted and mounted for the inserted insertion mounting area. That is, in this case, the second substrate on which the discrete components that are originally provided as surface-mounted components are mounted can be inserted and mounted on the first substrate as if they were insertion-mounted components. Therefore, it is expected to reduce the size of the hardware circuit while maintaining the performance of suppressing mounting of illegal components.

In addition, for the discrete components to be surface-mounted in the surface-mounting area formed on the second substrate, the first molding member has a color different from most of the discrete components to be inserted-mounted in the insertion-mounting area formed on the first substrate. After that, the second substrate to be mounted is further molded with a second molding member having the same color as the specific color or a similar color to the specific color. I have to.

Therefore, even if the second substrate on which the surface mounting area inferior in fraud prevention performance is formed is molded in the same form as other insertion mounting components and is inserted and mounted on the first substrate, the hole The administrator on the side can easily find out where the second board is, and can easily confirm whether or not the second board has been tampered with. However, in this case, even a malicious person may be helped to grasp information as to where the surface mounting area (second substrate) having inferior anti-tampering performance is provided.

In this regard, in the above configuration, the discrete components surface-mounted on the surface-mounting area are molded together with the second substrate by the second molding member, thereby concealing the type of the electronic component and making it difficult to understand the circuit. The second mold member is provided with the same or similar color as the specific color assigned to the first mold member of the surface-mounted discrete component. That is, in this case, in order to ascertain the type of the discrete component surface-mounted in the surface-mounting area, a person with malicious intent scrapes the second mold member and attempts to confirm the inside thereof. Even so, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp whether the second mold member molded together with the second substrate is being scraped or the first mold member inside it is being scraped. As a result, it is expected that the type of the electronic component will be concealed and the difficulty of understanding the circuit will be favorably maintained.

[Technical concept 14]
a first control unit having a board on which a plurality of mounting electronic components are mounted, and capable of executing a game progress process by using the electronic components;
a second control unit having a board on which a plurality of electronic components for mounting are mounted, and by using the electronic components, a performance progress process according to the result of the game progress process can be executed,
A gaming machine capable of awarding a privilege to a player when a special game result is obtained as a result of executing the game progress process,
The plurality of electronic components for mounting include:
It includes discrete components in which single-function elements are enclosed in relatively small packages, and integrated circuit components in which multiple types of single-function elements are integrated and enclosed in relatively large packages,
The substrate of the first control unit is
a first substrate having an insertion mounting region in which both the discrete component and the integrated circuit component are inserted and mounted; a second substrate having a surface mounting area on which discrete components are surface mounted;
The second substrate is
The first substrate is provided as one electronic component molded together with discrete components surface-mounted on the substrate, and is inserted and mounted in an insertion mounting area formed on the first substrate. It is possible to electrically connect with various insertion mounting parts mounted on the
The mounting surface of the second substrate is not provided with any substrate-side identification markings corresponding to the discrete components surface-mounted on the substrate, and the mounting surface of the first substrate is provided with the one electronic component. A specific board-side identification mark is attached corresponding to the position where the second board is inserted and mounted, and the specific board-side identification mark is attached corresponding to the same type of electronic component for mounting. A game machine characterized by having a unique aspect that is different from any of the board-side identification marks attached within the insertion mounting area of the game machine, including the board-side identification marks.

In Technical Concept 14, both integrated circuit components that are likely to be targeted for fraud and discrete components that are less likely to be targeted for fraud are mounted on the first substrate in which the insertion mounting region having excellent fraud prevention performance is formed. Since only discrete components that are unlikely to be targeted for fraud are mounted on the second substrate in which a surface mounting area having inferior anti-fraud performance is formed, hardware It is expected that the miniaturization of circuits will be achieved.

Moreover, the second substrate on which the surface mounting area inferior in fraud prevention performance is formed is provided as one electronic component molded together with the discrete components surface-mounted on the substrate, and is formed on the first substrate. It is designed to be inserted and mounted for the inserted insertion mounting area. That is, in this case, the second substrate on which the discrete components that are originally provided as surface-mounted components are mounted can be inserted and mounted on the first substrate as if they were insertion-mounted components. Therefore, it is expected to reduce the size of the hardware circuit while maintaining the performance of suppressing mounting of illegal components.

Furthermore, the mounting surface (surface mounting surface) of the second substrate is not provided with any substrate-side identification markings corresponding to the discrete components to be surface-mounted on the substrate, and the mounting surface of the first substrate is is attached with a specific board-side identification mark corresponding to the position where the second board as the one electronic component is inserted and mounted, and the specific board-side identification mark is an electronic component for mounting of the same type. Including the board-side identification mark attached corresponding to , it is a unique aspect different from any of the board-side identification marks attached in the first control section and the second control section. That is, in this case, even if the specific board-side identification mark attached to the mounting surface of the first board is confirmed, the aspect thereof is different from the board-side identification mark attached corresponding to the same type of mounting electronic component. Since it is a unique aspect, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize which type is mounted as the discrete component surface-mounted on the second substrate. In addition, even if a person with malicious intent scrapes the mold member and tries to check the inside in order to grasp the type of the discrete component surface-mounted in the surface-mounting area, It is possible to make it difficult to recognize which type is mounted as the discrete component.

[Technical concept 15]
a first control unit having a base plate on which a plurality of electronic circuits are formed and capable of executing control power source generation processing and game progress processing by using the electronic circuits;
a second control unit having a base plate on which a plurality of electronic circuits are formed, and by using the electronic circuits, a production progress process according to the result of the game progress process can be executed,
A gaming machine capable of awarding a privilege to a player when a special game result is obtained as a result of executing the game progress process,
The plurality of electronic circuits provided in the first control unit include:
Consists of electronic components for mounting single-function elements, and includes a specific discrete circuit intended to perform a specific electrical function,
the base plate of the first control unit has an insertion mounting area and a surface mounting area formed on different substrates;
On the specific substrate on which the surface mounting area is formed in the base plate, only a specific type of mounting electronic component among the plurality of types of mounting electronic components constituting the specific discrete circuit is surface-mounted. and mounted on a substrate different from the specific substrate by being inserted and mounted in the insertion mounting area formed on the substrate different from the specific substrate. is electrically connectable between the insertion mounting parts of
Electronic components for mounting other than the specific type among the plurality of types of electronic components for mounting constituting the specific discrete circuit are inserted and mounted in the insertion mounting area formed on a substrate different from the specific substrate. A game machine characterized by being

According to Technical Concept 15, only discrete components (mounting electronic components that make up a specific discrete circuit) that are difficult to be targeted for fraud are mounted on a specific substrate formed with a surface mounting region that is inferior in fraud prevention performance. Therefore, it is expected to reduce the size of the hardware circuit while suitably maintaining the performance of suppressing mounting of illegal components.

Moreover, in a specific substrate in which a surface mounting area inferior in fraud prevention performance is formed, only a specific type of mounting electronic component among a plurality of types of mounting electronic components constituting a specific discrete circuit is surface-mounted. and mounted on a substrate different from the specific substrate by being inserted and mounted in the insertion mounting area formed on the substrate different from the specific substrate. It is designed to be electrically connectable with the insertion mount component of the.

That is, in this case, the specific substrate on which the surface-mounted component is mounted can be inserted and mounted on the first substrate as if it were an insertion-mounted component. It is expected that the hardware circuit will be miniaturized while maintaining the In addition, since only a specific type of mounting electronic component among the mounting electronic components constituting the specific discrete circuit is surface-mounted on the above-mentioned specific board, it is necessary to check whether the surface mounting area has been tampered with. can be made easier. In addition, since the specific board is molded together with the specific type of mounting electronic components, it is inserted and mounted on another board on which other mounting electronic components are inserted and mounted. To increase the difficulty of understanding a specific discrete circuit formed over a surface mounting area formed in a substrate and an insertion mounting area formed in a substrate different from the specific substrate, and serve as an anti-fraud measure. is expected.

[13. Various commands related to transmission and reception of the main control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951 and various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board, FIG. 89 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board, and FIG. is a table showing the continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board in FIG. 89, and FIG. 91 is a table showing an example of various commands received by the main control board from the payout control board. First, the prize ball command, which is a command related to payout transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board, will be described, followed by various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board, and received by the main control board. Various commands from the payout control board will be explained.

[13-1. Various commands sent from the main control board to the payout control board]
The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 detects various winning switches such as the general winning opening sensors 4020 and 4020, the first starting opening sensor 4002, the second starting opening sensor 4004, and the count sensor 4005 shown in FIG. When the signal is input, based on these detection signals, a prize ball command for paying out a predetermined number of game balls as prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board. This prize ball command is a command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits). In this embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 and the CR unit 6 (communicate with the pachinko machine 1 and drive the payout motor 834 of the pachinko machine 1 (payout device 830) to the upper tray 321 and the lower tray 322 which are storage trays (a machine that pays out game balls as rental balls) is electrically connected (such a pachinko machine is called a "CR machine"), as shown in FIG. 88(a), the main control board Command 10H to command 1EH ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) are prepared as prize ball commands to be transmitted from 1310 to the payout control board 951. Command 10H designates one prize ball, and command 11H. , 2 prize balls are specified, and 15 prize balls are specified in the command 1EH. The payout control board 951 controls to drive the payout motor 834 and pay out game balls by the designated number of prize balls.

In addition, the pachinko machine 1 and a ball lending machine (a device that directly pays out game balls to the upper tray 321 and the lower tray 322, which are storage trays, as rental balls) are installed adjacent to the game hall (hall). 1 and the ball lending machine are electrically connected (such a pachinko machine is called a "general machine"), as shown in FIG. Commands 20H to 2EH are prepared as the prize ball commands to be sent to , command 20H designates one prize ball, command 21H designates two prize balls, and command 2EH designates a prize ball. 15 spheres are specified. The payout control board 951 controls to drive the payout motor 834 and pay out game balls by the designated number of prize balls.

As a command common to the CR machine and the general machine, a command 30H is prepared as shown in FIG. 88(c), and this command 30H designates a self-check. If an ACK signal output from the receiving side as confirmation of receipt of the command is not input for a predetermined period after the command is transmitted, the transmitting side transmits the command 30H and checks whether or not the ACK signal is input. Check connection status. In the case of the CR machine in this embodiment, the payout control board 951 checks the connection state with the CR unit 6 .

[13-2. Various commands sent from the main control board to the peripheral control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 will be described. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 1510 based on the progress of the game. These various commands are commands having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits). As shown in FIGS. 89 and 90, status indicating the type of command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) and a mode showing variations of effects having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits).

Various commands, as shown in FIGS. 89 and 90, are related to special figure 1 synchronization effect, special figure 2 synchronization effect related, jackpot related, power on, normal figure synchronization effect related, normal electric role effect related, notification display, status classified into display and others.

[13-2-1. Special figure 1 synchronization production related]
The special figure 1 synchronization effect relation is based on the detection signal from the first start opening sensor 4002 shown in FIG. 69, and as shown in FIG. Consists of commands named special figure 1 synchronization effect start, special symbol 1 designation, special figure 1 synchronization effect end, and state designation at the time of fluctuation. These various commands are assigned a status of "A*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). , which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The special figure 1 synchronization production start command instructs the start of the special figure synchronization production with the production pattern specified in the mode, and the special pattern 1 specification command specifies loss, specific jackpot, and non-specific jackpot. , Special figure 1 synchronization production end command is intended to indicate the end of special figure 1 synchronization production, state designation command at the time of fluctuation indicates probability and time saving state. In the probability and time saving state, a low probability time saving state that indicates that it is a low probability state and a time saving state, a high probability state that indicates that it is a time saving state, and a low probability It consists of a low probability non-time saving state that indicates that it is a state and not a time saving state, and a high probability non-time saving state that indicates that it is a high probability state and not a time saving state (as a normal game state, A low probability non-time saving state is set). Here, the high probability state is a state in which the probability of hitting the jackpot is set higher than the low probability state (normal game state), and the time saving state is, for example, normal by the normal symbol display 1402 shown in FIG. By shortening the time during which patterns are variably displayed compared to a non-time-saving state (normal game state) and stop-displaying with a light emitting pattern corresponding to the ordinary lottery result, the ordinary lottery result by the ordinary lottery described later in a predetermined time is obtained. The number of times of stop display is increased compared to the non-time saving state, and the period for opening and closing the pair of movable pieces shown in FIG. 8 is increased compared to the non-time saving state (normal game state). By increasing the acceptance rate (entrance rate) of the game ball to the second start port 2004 shown, the state that it is possible to obtain a special symbol lottery opportunity without reducing the number of balls (in other words, compared to the non-time saving state , by increasing the number of determinations as to whether or not to open/close the pair of movable pieces, and by lengthening the period of the opening/closing operation of the pair of movable pieces when opening/closing the pair of movable pieces. It is a state of increasing the acceptance rate (entrance rate) of game balls to.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special symbol 1 synchronization production start command is transmitted at the start of the special symbol 1 fluctuation, and the special symbol 1 designation command is transmitted immediately after the special symbol 1 synchronization production start, Special figure 1 synchronization The effect end command is transmitted when the special symbol 1 fluctuation time elapses (when the special symbol 1 is confirmed), and the state designation command at the time of fluctuation is transmitted immediately after the special symbol win-loss information designation. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later.

[13-2-2. Special Figure 2 Synchronization Production Related]
The special figure 2 synchronization effect related is based on the detection signal from the second start opening sensor 4004 shown in FIG. 69, and as shown in FIG. It consists of a command named special figure 2 synchronization effect start, special symbol 2 designation, and special figure 2 synchronization effect end regarding the second special symbol display device 1405 of. These various commands are assigned a status of "B*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). , which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The special figure 2 synchronization production start command instructs the start of the special figure synchronization production with the production pattern specified in the mode, and the special pattern 2 specification command specifies loss, specific jackpot, and non-specific jackpot. , The end of the special figure 2 synchronization production is intended to instruct the end of the special figure 2 synchronization production.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special figure 2 tuning effect start command is transmitted at the start of the special symbol 2 fluctuation, and the special symbol 2 designation command is transmitted immediately after the special figure 2 synchronization effect start, special figure 2 tuning The effect end command is transmitted when the special symbol 2 fluctuation time elapses (when the special symbol 2 is confirmed). These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-3. Jackpot related]
As shown in FIG. 89, the categories related to big wins include big win opening, big win 1 open Nth time display, big win 1 closed display, big win 1 count display, big win ending, big win pattern display, small win opening. , small-hit open display, small-hit count display, and small-hit ending commands. These various commands are assigned a status of "C*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). , which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The jackpot opening command instructs the start of jackpot opening. During or start of opening of the N-th round of the large winning opening 2005), the large winning opening 1 closed display command is the start of the closing of the large winning opening 1 between rounds (large opening of the starting opening unit 2100). The command for displaying the number of game balls from 0 to 10 (count 0 to 10) indicates that the winning opening 2005 is being closed or has started closing between rounds (shown in FIG. 69). The number of game balls that entered the big winning opening 2005 detected by the count sensor 4005) is transmitted, the big winning ending command instructs the start of the big winning ending, and the big winning design display command It instructs the display of pattern information.

In addition, the small hit opening command instructs the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit opening display command is the start of the small hit opening (during the opening of the large winning opening 2005 of the starting unit 2100 at the time of the small hit or opening start), and the small hit count display command is a small hit middle and big winning opening winning effect (when a game ball entering the big winning opening 2005 during a small hit is detected by the count sensor , and the small-hit ending command instructs the start of the small-hit ending.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the jackpot opening command is sent at the start of the jackpot opening, and the big win opening 1 Nth display command is when the big win 1 is opened in the 1st to 16th rounds (of the starter unit 2100 When the large winning opening 2005 is opened for the Nth round), the large winning opening 1 closed display command is transmitted when the large winning opening 1 is closed (start closing of the large winning opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100), The large winning opening 1 count display command is used when the large winning opening 1 is opened and when the count changes to the large winning opening 1 (when opening the large winning opening 2005 of the starter unit 2100 and when the game ball entering the large winning opening 2005 is detected by the count sensor 4005), the jackpot ending command is sent when the jackpot ending starts, and the jackpot pattern display command is sent when the big win opening is opened (when the big win opening 2005 of the starter unit 2100 is opened) ).

In addition, the small winning opening command is transmitted at the start of the small winning opening, and the small winning opening display command is transmitted at the time of opening the small winning (at the time of opening the big winning opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100 at the time of the small winning), The small hit count display command is transmitted when the small hit middle and large winning opening is won (when the game ball entering the big winning opening 2005 is detected by the count sensor 4005 during the small winning), and the small winning ending command is , Sent at the start of the small winning ending. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-4. Power on]
As shown in FIG. 89, the power-on category is composed of a command named Power-on State and Main Control Return Destination at Power-on. These various commands are assigned a status of "D*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). , which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The power-on state command instructs the start of the RAM clear effect and the game state. When the power is turned on, the state command of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. Information that instructs when the operation switch 954 is operated to clear the RAM, and when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on, as well as when the power is restored after a power failure or momentary power failure). .) In the above-mentioned, low probability short working hours state, high probability short working hours state, low probability non-short working hours state, and high probability non short working hours state information that indicates whether to return in any state (probability and short working hours state) , and information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine. The model code of this pachinko machine, for example, when creating the so-called max type, middle type, and sweet digital type, which work belongs to which copyright, what kind of game specifications (for example, probability fluctuation occurs) In addition to the game specification that the state continues until the next big win game state occurs, the game specification that the probability fluctuation occurs in a state where the number of times the special symbol changes is limited (for example, 30 times or 70 times) (so-called ST machine), etc.). In other words, the information on the model code of a pachinko machine consists of a series code for specifying which type of machine type is the max type, middle type, or sweet digital type, and a series code for specifying the copyright of the work. and the game specification (for example, when a probability change occurs, the game specification that the state will continue until the next big hit game state occurs, in addition to the probability change in a state where the number of special symbol fluctuations is limited and a game specification code for specifying the game specification (ST machine, etc.) that causes

The main control return destination command at power-on instructs the return destination of the main control board 1310 itself. The main control return destination command at power-on mainly consists of information instructing the drive state of the starter solenoid 2107 shown in FIG. 69 and information instructing the drive state of the attacker solenoid 2108 shown in FIG. ing.

As for the transmission timing of the power-on state command and the main control recovery target command at power-on, when the main control board power is turned on ) is sent to Specifically, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, when recovering from a power failure or momentary power failure, the main control side power on time processing described later is executed and the peripheral control board command of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt processing is executed. In the transmission process, a power-on status command and a power-on main control return destination command are transmitted.

[13-2-5. Related to Futsuzu Synchronization Production]
The general pattern synchronization production relation is based on the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 shown in FIG. 69, and as shown in FIG. Consists of commands with the names of normal pattern synchronization production start, normal pattern designation, general pattern synchronization production end, and change state designation regarding the device 1402. These various commands are assigned a status of "E*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). , which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The normal pattern synchronization production start command instructs the start of the general pattern synchronization production with the production pattern specified in the mode, and the general pattern specification command specifies a loss, a specific jackpot, and a non-specific jackpot. The figure synchronous production end command indicates the end of the normal figure synchronous production, and the state designation command at the time of fluctuation indicates the probability and the time saving state. In the probability and time saving state, as described above, a low probability time saving state indicating that it is a low probability state and a time saving state, and a high probability state indicating that it is a time saving state High probability time saving state It consists of a state, a low-probability non-time-saving state that indicates that it is a low-probability state and not a time-saving state, and a high-probability non-time-saving state that indicates that it is a high-probability state and not a time-saving state (usually As a game state, a low probability non-time saving state is set).

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the general pattern synchronization production start command is sent at the start of normal pattern 1 fluctuation, the general pattern designation command is sent immediately after the general pattern synchronization production start, and the general pattern synchronization production end command is , It is transmitted when the normal pattern fluctuation time elapses (when the normal pattern is determined), and the state designation command at the time of fluctuation is transmitted immediately after the normal pattern win-loss information is designated. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-6. Ordinary electric role production related]
8, which are opened and closed by driving the starting solenoid 2107 shown in FIG. It consists of commands named hit opening, general electric open display, and general drawing ending. These various commands are assigned a status of "F*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). , which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The general pattern opening command is for instructing the start of the general pattern opening, and the general pattern open display command indicates that the general pattern is open during start (a pair of movable pieces are opened in the left and right direction by driving the starting port solenoid 2107 state, or when expanding), and the ending command per normal pattern instructs the start of ending per normal pattern.

As for the transmission timing of these various commands, the opening command per general pattern is transmitted at the start of opening per general pattern, and the general electrical opening display command is transmitted when the general electrical opening (a pair of movable When spreading in the direction), the ending command per normal pattern is sent at the start of the ending per normal pattern. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-7. Notification display]
As shown in FIG. 90, the classification of the notification display consists of commands named Winning Abnormal Display, Connection Abnormal Display, Disconnection/Short Circuit Abnormal Display, Magnetic Detection Switch Abnormal Display, Door Open, and Door Close. These various commands are assigned a status of "6*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). , which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The winning abnormality display command is issued when the game ball enters the big winning hole 2005 of the starter unit 2100 when the big winning hole is entered except during the big win (when the condition device is in operation). is detected by the count sensor 4005). It instructs the start of connection abnormality notification when there is a connection abnormality. 4005 or the like, it instructs the start of disconnection/short-circuit abnormality display. It instructs the start of the magnetism detection switch abnormality notification when a Further, when an abnormality occurs in the vibration sensor 2405, a vibration detection switch abnormality display command for instructing start of notification of vibration detection switch abnormality is transmitted.

Further, the door opening command is based on the detection signal (opening signal) from the door frame opening switch 618 input via the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. In the open state, the door frame closing command instructs the door open notification, and the door frame closing command causes the door frame 3 to close with respect to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618 . When it is in the state of being opened, the end of the door open notification is instructed. On the other hand, the body frame open command is shown in FIG. When the body frame is in the open state, the body frame closing command instructs the body frame open notification. It instructs the end of the notification of the opening of the body frame when the door is in the closed state.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the winning abnormality display command is transmitted when winning a large winning opening other than during the jackpot (during operation of the condition device), and the connection abnormality display command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951 When there is no ACK reply (ACK signal) from the payout control board 951 at the time of command transmission to The magnetic detection switch abnormality display command is transmitted when an abnormality of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is detected. Further, the door open command is transmitted when door opening is detected (when the door frame 3 is in a state of being opened with respect to the body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame open switch 618), and the door is opened. The frame closing command is transmitted when door closing is detected (when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame open switch 618). The main body frame open command is transmitted when the main body frame opening is detected (when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame open switch 619), and the main body is opened. The frame closing command is transmitted when the body frame closing is detected (when the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the body frame open switch 619). These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-8. Status display]
As shown in FIG. 90, the state display is divided into commands named frame state 1 command (corresponding to the error occurrence command), error cancellation navigation command (corresponding to the error cancellation command), and frame state 2 command. there is These various commands are assigned a status of "7*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). , which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The frame state 1 command, the error cancellation navigation command, and the frame state 2 command are commands each having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) transmitted from the payout control board 951, and detailed descriptions thereof will be given later. . When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 receives the frame state 1 command, error cancellation navigation command, and frame state 2 command from the payout control board 951, as shown in FIG. Along with setting the status, the received command is set as the mode as it is. That is, when the main control MPU 1310a receives the frame state 1 command, the error cancellation navigation command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 951, the additional information "7*H" is added to these received commands. is formatted into a command having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits).

The formatted frame state 1 command is transmitted when power is restored, when the frame state changes, and during error cancellation navigation, the error cancellation navigation command is transmitted during error cancellation navigation, and the frame state 2 command is transmitted when power is restored. , and when the frame state changes. Note that these formatted frame state 1 command, error cancellation navigation command, and frame state 2 command are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt processing.

[13-2-9. test related]
As shown in FIG. 90, the test-related section consists of various commands named test. This test command is assigned a status of "8*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" indicates a specific hexadecimal number). , which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The test command instructs various tests of the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, the peripheral control unit 1511, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, the lamp drive board 4170, the motor drive board 4180, and the frame decoration board shown in FIG. 72). This is for inspecting various substrates such as the driving amplifier substrate 194).

As for the transmission timing of the test command, it is transmitted at times other than the RAM clear when the main control board power is turned on and the RAM clear. Specifically, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, when recovering from a power failure or momentary power failure, and when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 is operated, the main control side power-on processing described later is performed. A test command is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt processing.

[13-2-10. others]
As shown in FIG. 90, the other divisions include start-up winning, variable reduction operation end designation, high probability end designation, special symbol 1 memory, special symbol 2 memory, normal symbol memory, special symbol 1 memory look-ahead effect, and It consists of a command named special symbol 2 memory look-ahead effect. These various commands are assigned a status of "9*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). , which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The start opening winning command instructs the start of starting opening winning effect, and starts the effect when the game ball enters the first starting opening 2002 based on the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 4002. , the start of the effect when the game ball enters the second starting hole 2004 based on the detection signal from the second starting hole sensor 4004, respectively. The high-probability end designation command instructs the state transition from the high-probability state to the low-probability state, and the special symbol 1 storage command. is still used for variable display of special symbols on the first special symbol display device 1403 of the function display unit 1400 when the game ball enters the first start port 2002 shown in FIG. The number of balls that have not been held (number of reservations)), and the special design 2 storage command is 0 to 4 special design 2 reservations (the game ball enters the second start port 2004 shown in FIG. 8) The second special symbol display device 1405 of the function display unit 1400 conveys the number of balls (number of reservations) that has not yet been used for the variable display of special symbols, and the normal symbol storage command is normal symbol 1 reservation 0 to 4 It conveys the number of balls (the number of balls (retained number) that have passed through the gate portion 2003 shown in FIG. 8 and have not yet been used for normal symbol fluctuation display on the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400). There is, and the special symbol 1 storage prefetch effect command is read ahead and the special symbol 1 is reserved before the special symbol 1 is used for the variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display device 1403 of the function display unit 1400 It is intended to instruct the start of the look-ahead effect to notify the advance notice of the display result by the first special symbol display device 1403 based on, the special symbol 2 storage look-ahead effect command is the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is the special symbol 2 hold Before being used for the variable display of special symbols in the device 1405, it prefetches and instructs the start of the look-ahead performance to announce the advance notice of the display result by the second special symbol display device 1405 based on the special symbol 2 reservation.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the starting opening winning command is set at the time of starting opening winning (when the game ball enters the first starting opening 2002 based on the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 4002, or when the game ball enters the second opening opening). When the game ball enters the second starting hole 2004 based on the detection signal from the starting hole sensor 4004), the lower speaker 921 shown in FIG. 5 and the upper speaker 573 shown in FIG. The command to specify the end of the fluctuation reduction operation is sent at the end of the stop period after the fluctuation is fixed after the specified number of fluctuation reductions have been completed (after the suspension period has passed), and the high-probability end designation command is , In the case of "high probability N times", it is sent at the end of the stop period after the high probability number of times has been digested (after the stop period has passed), and the special symbol 1 storage command is the special symbol 1 operation pending ball number change When the game ball enters the first start port 2002 and the first special symbol display device 1403 of the function display unit 1400 has a reserved number that is not yet used for the variable display of special symbols, further the first start When the game ball enters the mouth 2002 and the number of reservations increases, or when the number of reservations decreases by using the first special symbol display device 1403 for variable display of special symbols from the number of reservations). , The special symbol 2 storage command is used when the number of special symbol 2 operation pending balls changes (a game ball enters the second start port 2004 and the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 changes the special symbol. In a state where there is a reserved number that is not yet used, when the game ball enters the second start port 2004 and the reserved number increases, or from the reserved number, the second special pattern display 1405 changes the special pattern. used for display and the number of reservations has decreased), and the normal design memory command is transmitted when the number of normal design 1 operation reservation balls changes (the game ball passes through the gate section 2003 and the normal design of the function display unit 1400 In a state where there is a reserved number that has not yet been used for variable display of normal symbols on the display device 1402, when the game ball passes through the gate part 2003 and the reserved number increases, or from the reserved number, the normal symbol display device 1402 is displayed. ), and the special symbol 1 memory look-ahead effect command is sent when the number of reserved balls has decreased by using it for variable display of normal symbols, and when the number of special symbol 1 operation reserved balls increases (the game ball is in the first start port 2002 When the number of reserved balls has increased by entering a ball), the special symbol 2 memory prefetch effect command is sent when the number of reserved balls in special pattern 2 operation increases (a game ball enters the second start port 2004 and the number of reserved balls increases increased). These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

By the way, as described above, the starting opening winning command is issued when the starting opening wins (when the game ball enters the first starting opening 2002 based on the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 4002, or when the second starting opening When the game ball enters the second start port 2004 based on the detection signal from the sensor 4004, the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 mainly send voice to notify that effect. How the peripheral control board 1510 shown in 72 uses the start-up winning command may vary depending on the specifications of the pachinko machine. For example, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment is designed to be used not only to notify by voice from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 but also to monitor the presence or absence of fraud. On the other hand, in some other pachinko machines, the peripheral control board 1510 simply receives the start-up winning command, and the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 do not give voice notification.

[13-3. Various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board]
Next, various commands from the payout control board 951 received by the main control board 1310 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 91, various commands from the payout control board 951 are divided into commands named frame state 1, error cancellation navigation, and frame state 2. Frame state 1, error cancellation navigation, and The order of priority is set in the order of frame state 2.

The frame state 1 command (equivalent to the error occurrence command) is prepared for ball out, full tank, stock of 50 or more, connection error and CR unconnected, and bit 0 (B0, "B" represents a bit.) is set to 1, bit 1 (B1) is set to 1 when the tank is full, bit 2 (B2) is set to 1 when 50 or more stocks are in stock, and connection failure A value of 1 is set in bit 3 (B3), and a value of 1 is set in bit 4 (B4) when CR is not connected. Bits 5 (B5) through 7 (B7) of the Frame State 1 command have a value of 1 in B5, a value of 0 in B6, and a value of 0 in B7.

The error cancellation navigation command (equivalent to the error cancellation command) is prepared for ball catching, payout detection sensor error, and retry error. An error sets bit 3 (B3) to the value 1, and a retry error sets the value 1 to bit 4 (B4). Here, the "payout detection sensor error" indicates whether or not there is a problem with the payout detection sensor 842 shown in FIG. A "retry error" indicates that an inconsistent game ball was repeatedly put out by a retry operation. Bit (B0), bit (B1), and bit 5 (B5) to bit 7 (B7) of the error cancellation navigation command have value 0 for B0, value 0 for B1, value 0 for B5, value 1 for B6, A value of 0 is set in B7.

The frame state 2 command is provided with "draw ball", and bit 0 (B0) is set to "1" during ball draw. Bits 1 (B1) through 7 (B7) of the Frame State 2 command have a value of 0 in B1, a value of 0 in B2, a value of 0 in B3, a value of 0 in B4, a value of 1 in B5, a value of 1 in B6, and A value of 0 is set in B7.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the frame state 1 command is transmitted at the time of power restoration, at the time of frame state change, and during error cancellation navigation, the error cancellation navigation command is transmitted during error cancellation navigation, and the frame state 2 command is transmitted at the time of error cancellation navigation. is sent when power is restored and when frame status changes. Incidentally, these various commands are actually transmitted in the command transmission process of step S558 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on process described later.

[14. Various control processing of the main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 according to the progress of the game of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 92 to 94. FIG. FIG. 92 is a flow chart showing an example of main control side power-on processing, FIG. 93 is a flow chart showing a continuation of the main control side power-on processing of FIG. 92, and FIG. 94 is an example of main control side timer interrupt processing. It is a flow chart showing. First, various random numbers used for game control will be described, followed by the operation of the initial value update type counter, the main control side power-on processing, and the main control side timer interrupt processing.

[14-1. Various random numbers]
As various random numbers used for game control, a random number for judging a big hit for use in determining whether or not to generate a big hit game state, and a reach (reach loss) when not generating a big hit game state. Reach determination random number for use in determination, shown in FIG. 69, the variation for use in determining the variation display pattern of the special symbol that is variably displayed in the first special symbol display device 1403 and the second special symbol display device 1405 A random number for a display pattern, a random number for a jackpot pattern to be used for determining a jackpot pattern derived and displayed by a first special pattern display device 1403 and a second special pattern display device 1405 when a jackpot game state is generated, and the jackpot pattern. A random number for determination of the initial value of the jackpot symbol for use in determining the initial value of the random number for the symbol is derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 1403 and the second special symbol display device 1405 when generating the small winning game state. A small-hit symbol random number for use in determining a small-hit symbol and a small-hit symbol initial value determination random number for use in determining the initial value of the small-hit symbol random number are prepared. In addition to these random numbers, the normal symbol hit determination random number used to determine whether or not to open and close the movable piece shown in FIG. Random numbers for determining the initial value for determination of the normal symbol hit, and random numbers for the normal symbol variation display pattern for use in determining the variation display pattern of the normal symbols variably displayed on the normal symbol display device 1402 shown in FIG. prepared.

Of the various random numbers used for such game control, the big hit determination random numbers are updated by hardware, while the other random numbers are updated by software.

For example, the big hit judging random number is directly updated by hardware by a main control internal hardware random number circuit 1310an incorporated in the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. As described above, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an first receives a clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a with a value within a predetermined numerical range as an initial value. (a clock signal output from the main controlled crystal oscillator MX0 shown in FIG. 77), other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed, and all values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted. When the extraction is completed, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and other values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. do. The main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an repeats such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU 1310a wins the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an at the time of acquiring the value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an. It is set as a random number for judgment.

On the other hand, the counter for updating the random number for determining a normal symbol is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical range from the minimum value to the maximum value, and the range from the minimum value to the maximum value will be described later. Each time the main control side timer interrupt processing is performed, the value is incremented by 1 to count up. This counter counts up from the normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number toward the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value toward the normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the normal symbol hit determination random number, the normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number is updated. Such a counter update method is called an "initial value update type counter". The random number for determining the initial value for normal pattern hit determination can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process for drawing one value from the fixed numerical range of the counter for updating the normal symbol hit determination random number. .

In this embodiment, when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. The game information stored in the main control built-in RAM is regarded as a numerical value, and the checksum value (sum value) obtained by calculating the total is stored in the main control side power failure processing (power failure). When the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared, such as when it does not match the checksum value (sum value), the random number for determining the initial value for determining per normal symbol is the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. extracts the ID code from its built-in non-volatile RAM, and performs initial value derivation processing that always derives the same fixed value from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol per judgment based on this extracted ID code. It is a mechanism that executes and sets this derived fixed value. In other words, the initial value determining random number for determining a normal winning pattern is always overwritten with the same fixed value derived based on the ID code by executing the initial value deriving process. In this way, the value set to the random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal per symbol is derived using the ID code, and is incorporated in the main control MPU 1310a by the manufacturer that manufactured the main control MPU 1310a. The first security measure is that the ID code cannot be rewritten even if the ID code is stored in the external device, and the initial value derivation process is executed when the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared. A second security measure of deriving the same fixed value based on .

Here, the advantage of taking out the ID code from the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a and using the taken out ID code as the random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal per symbol will be described. For example, a person who illegally acquires game balls to be paid out as prize balls obtains the game board 5 by some means, disassembles it, and uses the ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a. Even if it is possible to grasp the timing at which the value of the counter for illegally obtaining and updating the random number for normal pattern hit determination coincides with the normal pattern hit determination value, the ID code is unique for identifying the individual. Since the code is attached, it is completely different from the ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a' provided in the other game board 5'. That is, in the other game board 5', the timing at which the value of the counter for updating the normal symbol hit determination random number coincides with the normal symbol hit determination value is completely different from that of the obtained game board 5'. In other words, the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the obtained game board 5 is completely useless in the other game board 5', that is, in the other pachinko machine 1', so it is disassembled and analyzed. Even if a momentary power failure is generated at each predetermined interval and the game ball is passed through the gate portion 2003 shown in FIG. 8 at each predetermined interval, the movable piece shown in FIG. A game state in which a game ball can be received into the starting port 2004 cannot be generated.

[14-2. Main control side power-on processing]
First, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the main control MPU 1310a is circuit-configured such that the stack pointer is set to a predetermined address as a default.
This stack pointer indicates, for example, the address stacked on the stack to temporarily store the contents of the memory element (register) in use, or the return address of this routine when returning to this routine after terminating a subroutine. It indicates the address stacked on the stack for temporary storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked.

92 and 93, the main control program described above performs main control side power-on processing under the control of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. FIG. When this main control side power-on process is started, the main control program sets RAM access permission under the control of the main control MPU 1310a (step S10). By setting this RAM access permission, it is possible to update the main control built-in RAM (game storage section).

Following step S10, the main control program performs initial value setting and startup setting of the main control built-in WDT 1310af shown in FIG. 69 (step S12). Here, a watchdog timer control register (hereinafter referred to as " A timer setting value is set in the WDT control register), the main control built-in WDT 1310af is activated, and timing is started until the main control MPU 1310a is reset. When the main control built-in WDT 1310af is activated, the main control built-in WDT 1310af starts clocking, and the watch dog timer clear register built into the main control MPU 1310a ( hereinafter referred to as "WDT clear register"), the main control built-in WDT 1310af forcibly resets the main control MPU 1310a. On the other hand, when the WDT 1310af with built-in main control is activated and time measurement is started, if the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register before the measured time reaches the time set by the timer setting value, The clocking by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared and clocking is restarted. In this way, the operation (system) of the main control MPU 1310a operates normally by repeating the process of clearing the clocking by the main control built-in WDT 1310af until the time set by the timer set value is reached and restarting the clocking. It is possible to monitor whether or not

Following step S12, the main control program performs power failure clear processing (step S14). In this power clearing process, first, output of a power failure clear signal to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e shown in FIG. 78 is started. The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is composed of a comparator MIC21, which is a voltage comparison circuit, and a D-type flip-flop MIC22. A comparator MIC21, which is a voltage comparison circuit, compares +24V with a reference voltage or +12V with a reference voltage, and outputs the comparison results. The result of this comparison is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, with logic HI when no power failure or momentary power failure has occurred. Its logic becomes LOW and is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

In the power clearing process, first, by starting to output a power failure clear signal to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, output of a power failure clear signal to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is started. This power failure clear signal is input to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop IC, through the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, with the logic being LOW from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a. be done. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a can release the latched state of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. It is possible to invert and output from the 1Q terminal, which is an output terminal, and to monitor the signal from the 1Q terminal.

Subsequently, in the power clearing process, wait timer processing is performed to determine whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input. The voltage does not rise immediately after the power is turned on until it reaches the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs (phenomenon in which the supply of power is temporarily stopped), the voltage drops, and when it becomes smaller than the power failure forecast voltage, a power failure forecast signal is input as a power failure forecast from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. Similarly, when the voltage becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage during the period from when the power is turned on until it rises to the predetermined voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. Therefore, in the wait timer process, after the power is turned on, the process waits until the voltage becomes larger than the blackout warning voltage and becomes stable. In this embodiment, the wait time (wait timer) is set to 200 milliseconds (ms). It is Determination of whether or not the power failure warning signal is input is performed based on the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, as the power failure warning signal.

If the power failure warning signal is not input even after waiting until the voltage becomes higher than the power failure warning voltage after the power is turned on and becomes stable, the main control program outputs the power failure clear signal to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Stop output. Here, the power failure clear signal is sent from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a to the logic HI, and passes through the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop IC. is entered in As a result, the main control MPU 1310a can set the D-type flip-flop MIC22 to the latch state. When the D-type flip-flop MIC22 latches the state in which the logic LOW is input to the PR terminal, which is a preset terminal, it outputs a power failure warning signal from the 1Q terminal, which is an output terminal.

Following step S14, the main control program makes it possible to execute RAM clear processing for initializing the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) for a predetermined time after the power is turned on (when the game side power is turned on). operation control means). Specifically, the main control program first determines whether or not the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 is operated (step S16). In this determination, the main control program inputs an error cancellation navigation command (first error cancellation command) based on the operation signal (detection signal) associated with the operation of the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 to the main control MPU 1310a. This is done depending on whether or not the Based on the logic value of the operation signal, the main control program determines that when the logic value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is HI, it is not an instruction to perform RAM clear, and the operation switch 954 is operated. On the other hand, when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is LOW, it is determined that the operation switch 954 is being operated by judging that the RAM clear is instructed.

In step S16, the main control program sets the value 1 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG when the operation switch 954 is operated (step S18). On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is not operated in step S16, the main control program sets the value 0 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S20). That is, the main control program can execute RAM clear processing for initializing the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a (that is, the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit)) for a predetermined period of time after the power is turned on. State (game control side power-on operation control means). The RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG mentioned above indicates whether or not to erase game information related to games such as probability fluctuations and unpaid prize balls stored in the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) of the main control MPU 1310a. It is set to a value of 1 when the game information is erased, and set to a value of 0 when the game information is not erased. The value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in steps S18 and S20 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a.

Following step S18 or step S20, the main control program performs wait time standby processing (step S22). In this wait time standby process, the system for performing drawing control of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 by the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 of the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. do). In this embodiment, 2.5 seconds (s) is set as the waiting time (boot timer) until booting.

Following step S22, the main control program determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S24). As described above, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, or when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, when the voltage drops below the power failure forecast voltage, a power failure forecast signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e as a power failure forecast. The determination in step S24 is made based on this power failure warning signal. When it is determined in step S24 that there is an input of the power failure warning signal, the main control program returns to the determination of step S24 and repeats the determination of step S24 as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input. As a result, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT 1310af activated in step S12, and the clocking by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared to restart the clocking. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. After that, the main control program, under the control of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, performs the main control side power-on processing again. A detailed description of the fact that the determination in step S24 is performed following the wait time standby process in step S22 will be given later.

When it is determined in step S24 that there is no power failure warning signal input, the main control program determines whether or not the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 (step S26). As described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the game information is erased, and is set to a value of 0 when the game information is not erased. When the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 in step S26, that is, when the game information is not erased, a checksum is calculated (step S28). This checksum is calculated by regarding the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM as numerical values and calculating the total.

Following step S28, the main control program compares the calculated checksum value (sum value) with the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control side power-off processing (at power-off) described later. It is determined whether or not they match (step S30). If they match, the main control program determines whether the backup flag BK-FLG is 1 (step S32). This backup flag BK-FLG stores and retains game backup information such as game information, checksum value (sum value) and backup flag BK-FLG value in the main control built-in RAM in the main control side power failure processing described later. It is set to a value of 1 when the main-control-side power-off process has been completed normally, and set to a value of 0 when the main-control-side power-off process has not been completed normally. In the inspection process of the manufacturing line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after manufacturing for inspection, the calculation of the checksum in step S28 and the determination in step S30 are performed. , will be described later.

When the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 in step S32, that is, when the main-control-side power-off process is normally completed, the main control program sets the work area of the main-control built-in RAM as when power is restored ( step S34). For this setting, the power recovery information is read from the ROM built in the main control MPU 1310a (that is, the main control built-in ROM), and this power recovery information is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. As a result, the game information is read out from the game backup information, and various commands corresponding to this game information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM. "Restoration of power" refers to the state in which the power is turned on after the power has been cut off, the state in which the power is restored after a power outage or momentary power outage, and fraudulent means (e.g. A high frequency from a hidden high frequency output device) is irradiated to the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1310a itself resets and then returns.

Following step S34, the main control program sets the backup flag BK-FLG to 0 (step S36). As a result, the game information, the checksum value (sum value), etc. are changed as a result of the subsequent various processes being performed. If FLG is not set to 1, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM will be cleared, as will be described later.

On the other hand, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (is 1) in step S26, that is, when game information is erased, or when the checksum value (sum value) does not match in step S30 , or when the backup flag BK-FLG is not 1 (is 0) in step S32, that is, when the main control side power failure processing is not normally completed, the main control program writes all of the main control built-in RAM. Clear the area (step S38). That is, the main control program executes the game control side RAM clear processing triggered by the input of the detection signal associated with the operation of the operation switch 954 (payout control side power-on operation control means). Specifically, the main control program writes the value 0 to the main control built-in RAM. Alternatively, the main control program may read and set a predetermined value from the main control built-in ROM as the initial value. In addition, the main control MPU 1310a executes processing when the logic value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 instructs RAM clearing and the game information is erased, when the sum values do not match, or when the main control side power is cut off. When not completed normally, the unique ID code pre-stored in the non-volatile RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is taken out, and based on this taken out ID code, the fixed numerical range of the counter for updating the random number for normal design per judgment Perform an initial value derivation process that always derives the same fixed value from, and this fixed value is set to the normal symbol per determination initial value determination random number for use in determining the initial value of the normal per symbol determination random number described above. do.

Following step S38, the main control program sets the working area of the main control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S40). This setting is carried out by reading the initial information from the main control built-in ROM and setting this initial information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S36 or step S40, the main control program performs interrupt initialization (step S42). This setting is to set the interrupt cycle when the main control side timer interrupt processing to be described later is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 4 milliseconds (ms).

Following step S42, the main control program performs serial communication initialization (step S44). Here, various serial input/output ports built in the main control MPU 1310a (for example, serial input/output ports (reception channel and transmission channel) for the payout control board 951, serial input/output ports for the peripheral control board 1510 (reception channel and transmission channel ), the transmission serial port prescaler is set for the communication speed and the presence or absence of parity, and the transmission serial port control register is set for initialization of the transmission circuit and transmission permission.

Following step S44, the main control program initializes the test signal output port (step S46). Here, a test signal output port (not shown) for outputting various test information is initialized (set to OFF data output) when the power is turned on in the game machine testing facility.

Following step S46, the main control program performs activation setting of the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an shown in FIG. 69 (step S48). Here, among various random numbers related to the game, a hardware random number control register built in the main control MPU 1310a for updating the jackpot determination random number for use in determining whether or not to generate a jackpot game state by hardware In addition to setting the hardware random number setting register to activate the hard random number circuit 1310an incorporated in the main control. When the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an is activated by these settings, a high-speed predetermined clock signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a (a clock signal output from the main control crystal oscillator MX0 shown in FIG. 77). Other values within the numerical range are extracted one after another without duplication, and when all values within the predetermined numerical range have been extracted, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, Based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a, other values within a predetermined numerical range are rapidly extracted one after another without duplication. When acquiring a random number (random value) from the main control internal hard random number circuit 1310an, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a latch signal to the main control internal hard random number circuit 1310an. The random number (random value) extracted by the built-in hard random number circuit 1310an is obtained from the built-in hard random number latch register of the main control MPU 1310a. The main control MPU 1310a sets the acquired random number as a big hit determination random number.

Following step S48, the main control program sets a reservation for a command to be transmitted when the power is turned on (step S50). Here, based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, in order to notify that the power has been turned on (power has been restored), the A power-on state command and a main control return destination command at power-on are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, even if the game information is read from the game backup information and various commands corresponding to this game information are stored. be. In such a case, after completion of transmission of various commands corresponding to the game information, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command are subsequently transmitted. These commands are transmitted in main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later. A detailed description of the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50 will be given later.

Following step S50, the main control program performs interrupt permission setting (step S52). By this setting, the main control-side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is repeatedly performed at the interrupt period set at step S42, that is, every 4 ms.

Following step S52, the main control program issues an error cancellation navigation command associated with the operation of the operation switch 954 (operation switch) when a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, that is, when the main control side main processing is started. Execution of game control side RAM clear processing triggered by receipt will be regulated (normal operation control means). As described above, the main control program uses the concept of time sharing based on the concept of time sharing to use the detection signal input in accordance with the operation of the operation switch 954 as an error cancellation navigation command for a predetermined period of time after the power is turned on. Triggered by the input, RAM clear processing is executed (game control side power-on operation control means), and after the predetermined time has elapsed, even if there is an input of the error cancellation navigation command, the execution of RAM clear processing is regulated ( Game control side normal operation control means), handled as a release switch for releasing the error notification accompanying the error that occurred. In other words, the operation switch 954 (error canceling unit), which was originally supposed to be used to cancel an error that occurred in the payout operation, is replaced as a game memory unit for a predetermined period of time after the power is turned on. Main control built-in RAM (and payout control built-in RAM as a payout storage unit to be described later) function as an operation unit for executing RAM clear processing for starting initialization, or after the predetermined time has elapsed, the game It can be made to function as an operation unit for canceling an error that has occurred regarding the ball dispensing operation.

Next, the main control program determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S54). As described above, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, or when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, when the voltage drops below the power failure forecast voltage, a power failure forecast signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e as a power failure forecast. The determination in step S54 is made based on this power failure warning signal.

When there is no power failure warning signal input in step S54, the main control program performs non-hit-lose random number update processing (step S56). In this non-hit-lose random number update process, the above-described ready-to-win determination random numbers, variable display pattern random numbers, big-hit symbol initial value determination random numbers, small-hit symbol initial value determination random numbers, and the like are updated. In this way, in the non-hit-lose random number update process, software updates the random numbers that are not related to the hit-lose determination (big hit determination). Incidentally, the above-described random number for normal symbol hit determination, random number for normal symbol hit determination initial value determination, normal symbol variation display pattern random number, etc. are also updated by this non-hit-lose random number update process.

After step S56, the process returns to step S54, and the main control program determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input. Then, steps S54 to S56 are repeated. The processing of steps S54 to S56 is called "main control side main processing".

On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is input in step S54, the main control program performs interrupt prohibition setting (step S58). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is not performed, preventing writing to the main control built-in RAM and protecting the game information from being rewritten.

Following step S58, the main control program starts outputting a power failure clear signal (step S60). Here, the same process as the process of starting to output the power failure clear signal in the power failure clear process of step S14 is performed. Thereby, the main control program can release the latch state of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 under the control of the main control MPU 1310a.

Following step S60, the main control program is shown in FIG. , 2nd special reservation number display 1406, normal symbol display 1402, normal symbol storage display 1188, state display 1401, round display 1407, etc. stop the drive signal output (step S62).

Following step S62, the main control program calculates a checksum and stores the calculated value (step S64). This checksum is calculated by considering the game information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM, excluding the storage area for the checksum value (sum value) and the value of the backup flag BK-FLG, as numerical values.

Following step S64, the main control program sets the backup flag BK-FLG to 1 (step S66). This completes the storage of the game backup information.

Following step S66, the main control program sets RAM access prohibition (step S68). By setting the RAM access prohibition, access to the main control built-in RAM (game storage section) becomes impossible, so that updating of the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game storage section) can be prevented.

After step S68, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT 1310af activated in step S12, and the clocking by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared, and the clocking starts again. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. After that, the main control program, under the control of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, performs the main control side power-on processing again. The processing of steps S58 to S68 and the infinite loop are referred to as "main control side power failure processing".

The pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU 1310a) is reset when there is a power failure or momentary power failure.

In step S30, it is checked whether or not the game backup information stored in the main control internal RAM is normal. are inspecting. By double checking the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM in this way, it is inspected whether or not the game backup information has been stored by fraud.

Here, it will be described that the determination of the presence/absence of the power failure warning signal in step S24 is performed following the wait time standby process in step S22. First, regarding the problem in the case where there is no determination of the presence or absence of the power failure warning signal in step S24, that is, when the value of the RAM clear flag is determined in step S26 following the wait time standby processing in step S22, and the subsequent processing proceeds. I will explain the problems in

The VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, charges the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. The charge is applied as +5 V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the power failure or momentary power failure occurs. In other words, even if the power supply from the pachinko island facility is cut off due to a momentary power failure or power failure, the power from the pachinko island facility will be restored by applying +5V charge charged to the hardware called electrolytic capacitor MC2. The main control side power interruption process can be completed within a period of about 7 ms after the interruption. This is because when a player is playing a game, that is, when a main control-side main process or a main-control-side timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is performed, a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the pachinko island facility is interrupted. When the power is cut off, it is possible to reliably complete the main control side power cut-off processing.

However, as an extremely rare phenomenon, during the wait time standby process of step S22 when power is restored, the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display by the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 of the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. A waiting time (boot timer: in this embodiment, 2.5 seconds is set) until the system that controls drawing of the device 460 starts to count, and immediately before reaching the waiting time. If an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs, the charge charged in hardware such as the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as +5 V to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, but within a period of about 7 ms, step S42 , and then the interrupt permission setting is performed in step S52, so that the main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is performed, and even if the contents of the main control built-in RAM are updated, the main control side It may not be possible to complete the main control side power-off processing in the power-on processing. Therefore, the main control side power-on processing is started when the power is restored again without storing the value obtained by calculating the checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM.

Then, when the power is restored this time, the main control side power-on processing is started, and the wait time standby processing of step S22 is completed without occurrence of an instantaneous power failure or power failure. and the value stored in the main control built-in RAM immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurred. Instead, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared in step S38. In other words, when power is restored, the operation switch 954 is operated by the hall clerk or the like, and even if the hall clerk or the like does not express the intention of clearing the RAM, the information stored in the main control built-in RAM is forcibly erased (cleared). ).

Therefore, in the present embodiment, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process for determining whether or not the power failure warning signal is input is provided as step 24, and when the power failure warning signal is input, Returning to the determination of step S24, the determination of step S24 is repeatedly performed as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input. As a result, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT 1310af activated in step S12, and the clocking by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared to restart the clocking. is disabled, the main control MPU 1310a can be forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. Before performing the wait time waiting process of step S22, although a value is set in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG in step S18 or step S20, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is mainly Since it is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the control MPU 1310a, even if RAM access permission is set in step S10, the contents (game information) of the main control built-in RAM are not changed at all.

In this way, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process for determining whether or not the power failure warning signal is input is provided as step 24, and when the power failure warning signal is input (that is, step When it is determined by the determination of step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process of S22), the process returns to the determination of step S24 again, and as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input, By repeating the determination in step S24, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 can be forcibly reset and the main control board 1310 can be restarted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game information from being updated, so that the calculation result of the checksum does not fluctuate. As a result, when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is restarted, it determines that the checksum calculation result in step S28 and the checksum calculation and stored value in step S64 match. Therefore, the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure that is stored and held in the main control built-in RAM is not initialized. Therefore, when the power is restored, it is possible to prevent the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure from being initialized.

Further, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process of determining whether or not a power failure warning signal is input is provided as step 24, and when the power failure warning signal is not input (that is, step S22 When it is determined by the determination in step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is not cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process), when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is progressing the game, the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is supplied with power from the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 can complete the processing of steps S58 to S68 and the processing at the time of power failure on the main control side, which is composed of an infinite loop. When the control MPU 1310a is restarted, the control MPU 1310a determines that the checksum calculation result in step S28 matches the checksum calculation result in the backup process (that is, the checksum calculation and stored value in step S64). Since the judgment is made, the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM and held immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs is not initialized. That is, the main control board 1310 can be activated by restoring the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs.

Furthermore, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, when it is determined in step S24 that a power failure warning signal has been input, the main control built-in WDT 1310af causes the main control MPU 1310a to forcibly reset the contents of the main control built-in RAM. On the other hand, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, when it is determined that the power failure warning signal has not been input in step S24, the power failure warning signal has not been input. As a result, the main control side power failure processing can be reliably completed within the "power supply securing period for momentary power failure or power failure" of about 7 ms by hardware. In other words, in the present embodiment, when the power supply from the pachinko island facility is cut off due to an instantaneous power failure or power failure while the main control side power-on processing is being performed at the time of power restoration, the main control MPU 1310a The electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 77 is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal, as +5 V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the power failure or momentary power failure occurs. Therefore, if the main control side power failure processing cannot be completed within the "instantaneous power failure or power supply securing period" of about 7 ms by the hardware of the electrolytic capacitor MC2, the wait time standby process of step S22 is performed. In step 24 immediately after, it is determined whether or not a power failure warning signal is input. When the power failure warning signal is input, the process returns to the determination of step S24, and as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input, step S24 is performed. By repeating the determination, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT 1310af activated in step S12, and the clocking by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared and restarted. When the timer cannot be started, the main control MPU 1310a can be forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. By forcibly resetting the main control MPU 1310a by the main control built-in WDT 1310af by such software, steps after step S24 (specifically, interrupt initial setting is performed in step S42, and then step S52 It is possible to prevent the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information) from being updated by preventing the progress to the control flow of setting interrupt permission and starting the main control side timer interrupt processing described later). adopted the mechanism. In this way, when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the power supply from the pachinko island equipment is cut off, the part provided by software so that the contents (game information) of the main control built-in RAM will not be changed at all, and the power supply on the main control side The contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information) are covered by hardware so that the interruption process is surely completed and the contents (game information) of the main control built-in RAM are not changed at all. game information) can be reliably prevented from being changed.

Next, a description will be given of the fact that a command to be transmitted at power-on is reserved in step S50. In step S50, as described above, power is turned on (power restored) based on the power recovery time information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. In order to convey this, a power-on state command and a main control return destination command at power-on shown in FIG. As described above, this main control return destination command at power-on mainly consists of information instructing the drive state of the starter solenoid 2107 and information instructing the drive state of the attacker solenoid 2108 shown in FIG. there is Here, first, when the main control return destination command at power-on does not include the information instructing the drive state of the starter solenoid 2107 and the information instructing the drive state of the attacker solenoid 2108 shown in FIG. , that is, the problem in the case where the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on is not performed in step S50.

For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display of the big win game state screen (for example, the big win game effect screen) in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 shown in FIG. drives the attacker solenoid 2108 to open the large winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. Based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in S34, by restoring the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurred, the attacker Driving of the solenoid 2108 is started, and the state in which the large prize winning port 2005 is closed by the opening/closing member 2107 is shifted to the state in which it is opened.

However, if an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and recovers when power is restored. Then, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can return based on the probability and time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 generates a jackpot game state as a game state, an instantaneous power failure or a power failure occurs, and then the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 will not operate the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. Based on the probability and the time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from, the screen can be displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 according to the probability and the time saving state. It is not possible to display at all which round of the jackpot game state. That is, for example, when a game ball enters the big winning hole 2005 and is detected by the count sensor 4005 shown in FIG. Even if the main control board 1310 transmits to the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral control board 1510 receives it, the peripheral control board 1510 displays the game ball that entered the big winning hole 2005 on the screen according to the probability and the time saving state. Even if the number can be displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, it is not possible to display at all which round (that is, what round) of the jackpot game state.

In such a situation, the main control board 1310 stops driving the attacker solenoid 2108 and the large winning opening 2005 is opened by the opening/closing member 2107 when, for example, the four rounds (fourth round) of the jackpot game state are finished. Peripheral control from the main control board 1310 of the large winning opening 1 closed display command instructing the transition from the open state to the closed state (that is, start closing between rounds of the large winning opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100) When the information is transmitted to the board 1510 and the main control board 1310 starts the 5th round (fifth round) of the jackpot game state, the attacker solenoid 2108 is started to be driven and the big winning opening 2005 is closed by the opening/closing member 2107. A 5th big winning gate opening display command for instructing the transition from the state to the open state (that is, the opening of the 5th round of the big winning gate 2005) is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. do. As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 finally switches the screen of the start of the 5th round of the jackpot game state from the screen corresponding to the probability and time saving state described above, and displays it in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. becomes.

In addition, for example, a screen that informs the player that the game state is such that the game ball can be accepted into the second start port 2004 and that the game state is advantageous to the player (for example, a screen that indicates that the movable piece is expanded) When the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display of the screen to be communicated to the player in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the main control board 1310 drives the starting solenoid 2107 to display the pair shown in FIG. When an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs when the movable piece of the is expanded in the left and right direction, and then the power is restored, the main control board 1310 stores the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. Based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting, by restoring to the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs, the starting port solenoid 2107 is started to drive and paired. The movable piece moves from a state in which it rises substantially vertically to a state in which it spreads in the left-right direction.

However, if an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and recovers when power is restored. , and then when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can be restored based on the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 is in the game state in which the game ball can be received into the second start port 2004 as the game state, and the game state is advantageous to the player, an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs. After that, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 is based on the probability and the time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. Even if it can be displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and returned, it becomes a game state in which the game ball can be received into the second start port 2004 and becomes a game state advantageous to the player. The peripheral control board 1510 cannot display the screen for telling the presence in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 at all. Therefore, a player sitting in front of the pachinko machine is surprised at the momentary power failure or power failure, and when the power is restored, the game ball is accepted into the second start port 2004 just before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs. In such a case, the game state is returned to the second start port 2004 as the game state when the power is restored so that the game ball can be accepted. Nevertheless, when the power is restored, the screen for instructing the game (that is, the screen for instructing the game of entering the game ball into the second start port 2004) is not displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Therefore, there is also a problem that the player does not know what kind of game should be played.

Thus, in the two examples described above, there is a problem that the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure cannot be quickly restored after the power is restored. In other words, a player seated in front of the pachinko machine, when an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs and then the power is restored, the system of the pachinko machine appears to be in a stuck state, a so-called frozen state, and misunderstands that it has failed. There was a problem.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the main control board 1310 powers on (including when the power is turned on, and when power is restored after a power failure or momentary power failure), the power-on state command and a command to return to the main control at power-on to the peripheral control board 1510, in step S50, the state command at power-on and the command to return to the main control at power-on classified into the power-on shown in FIG. is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. These commands are transmitted in main control-side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later.

As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 receives from the main control board 1310 based on the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command, for example, in the above-described example, in the 4 rounds of the jackpot game state, When an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs and then the power is restored, the attacker solenoid 2108 is started to be driven as a return destination of the main control board 1310, and the large prize winning opening 2005 is opened from the closed state by the opening and closing member 2107. Since it is possible to transmit to the peripheral control board 1510 that the transition to the state of ) cannot be displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, but in the jackpot game state, the attacker solenoid 2108 is started to be driven, and the big winning port 2005 is opened by the opening/closing member 2107. (For example, a screen that conveys a message to the player, ``This is a big win. A display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 can be displayed to instruct a player seated in front of the pachinko machine to enter a game ball into the big winning hole 2005 after the power is restored. For example, in the above-described example, in the state in which the game ball can be accepted into the second start port 2004 and the game state is advantageous to the player, an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs, and then it is restored. When the power is turned on, a screen (for example, "Movable piece The peripheral control board 1510 displays the display area of the game board side production display device 1600 (a screen that conveys the message to the player). can be displayed to instruct a player sitting in front of the pachinko machine to enter a game ball into the second starting port 2004 after the power is restored. As a result, when power is restored after an instantaneous power failure or power failure, the main control board 1310 side can give detailed instructions on the return destination of the peripheral control board 1510 . Therefore, the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure can be quickly restored after power is restored. In other words, a player sitting in front of the pachinko machine, when an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs and then the power is restored, the system of the pachinko machine appears to be in a stuck state, a so-called frozen state, and misunderstands that it has failed. can be prevented.

Next, in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the manufacturing line of the main control board 1310, the checksum of step S28 when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after manufacturing for inspection. Calculation and determination in step S30 will be described. In the main control board inspection process, when the power supply of the main control board 1310 is turned on for the first time after manufacturing for inspection, the main control board configured by the above-described backup processing of steps S58 to S68 and an infinite loop. Since the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has never executed the control-side power-off processing, even if the checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM is calculated in step S28, in step S30 In the comparison determination, the checksum values cannot match, and the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is always cleared in step S38. As a result, when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at power-on is performed in step S50, the power-on state command and the main control return destination command at power-on shown in FIG. 89 are created. By storing the transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, only two commands, the state command at power-on and the main control return destination command at power-on, can be stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. is stored in As for these commands, in the main-control-side timer interrupt processing to be described later, the state command at power-on is first transmitted, and then the main-control return destination command at power-on is transmitted. Utilizing this, in the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after manufacturing for inspection, the main control board 1310 issues a power-on status command as the first command. It will be sent to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process.

By the way, as described above, the power-on state command is shown in FIG. When the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 shown is operated to clear the RAM, information to instruct that effect, and when the power is turned on (in addition to turning on the power, a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the power is Including when power is restored.) Return in any state (probability and time saving state) from the above-mentioned low probability short working time state, high probability short working time state, low probability non-short working time state, and high probability non short working time state and information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine. Here, a problem in the case where the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine is not included in the power-on state command will be described.

As described above, the model code of the pachinko machine is used for the copyright of any work when creating the so-called max type, middle type, and sweet digital type as the pachinko machine 1 (more precisely, the main control board 1310). What kind of game specifications (for example, when a probability change occurs, in addition to the game specification that the state continues until the next big hit game state occurs, the number of times the special symbol changes is limited (for example, It is possible to specify whether it is a game specification (such as a so-called ST machine) in which a probability change occurs in a state where the game is played 30 times or 70 times).

In the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, when manufacturing the main control boards 1310, there are cases where the main control boards 1310 for copyrights of a plurality of types of works are mixed.
Then, the worker of the production line is the owner of the copyright of which work out of the copyrights of multiple kinds of works (for example, the copyright of works such as movie A, movie B, drama C, movie D, manga E, and manga F). It becomes unclear whether the main control board 1310 is flowing to the production line to manufacture the control board 1310, or the main control board for one copyright (for example, the copyright for the work called movie D) among the copyrights of multiple types of works. Although the main control board 1310 is being sent to the production line to manufacture 1310, the main control board 1310 is required to manufacture the main control board 1310 for other copyrights (for example, the copyright of the work Manga F). There is also an assumption or misunderstanding that it is flowing to the production line. For this reason, when manufacturing the main control board 1310 on the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control board 1310 for the copyright of a plurality of types of works is mixed, the worker of the production line may It is not possible to confirm which work the manufactured main control board 1310 is copyrighted, and even if the same work is copyrighted, which model type (max type, middle type, sweet digital type) type), and what kind of game specification (game specification or ST machine that when a probability change occurs, the state is continued until the next big win game state occurs). As a result, when manufacturing the main control board 1310 in the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control board 1310 for the copyright of a plurality of types of works coexists, the main control board for the copyrights of a plurality of types of works is produced. The main control board 1310 is sent to the game board assembly line for attaching the main control board 1310 to the game board 5 with the 1310 mixed. For this reason, the operator of the game board assembly line sometimes attaches to the game board 5 the main control board 1310 that does not correspond to the game board 5 with respect to the copyright of the work. As a result, there is a problem that the production efficiency of the game board 5 is lowered.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 is turned on (including when the power is turned on, and when the power is restored after a power failure or momentary power failure), the model code of the pachinko machine In order to transmit to the peripheral control board 1510 a power-on state command including information indicating the power-on state command and the main control return destination command at power-on shown in FIG. is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. These commands are transmitted in main control-side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later.

As a result, an operator on the production line of the maker that manufactures the pachinko machine 1 turns on the main control board 1310 in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the production line, so that the inspection device can operate the main control board 1310. Based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from the above-mentioned max type, middle type, and sweet digital type, the series code for specifying which type it is, the copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, and the game specifications (for example, when the probability fluctuation occurs, the next big hit game state In addition to the game specification that the state is continued until it occurs, a game specification code for specifying the game specification (such as ST machine) that the probability fluctuation occurs in a state where the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol is limited; Based on this, by visually checking the detailed model information displayed on the inspection monitor, it is possible to determine which work the main control board 1310 belongs to. The model type (max type, middle type, and sweet digital type), and what kind of game specifications (if the probability change occurs, the state will continue until the next big win game state occurs) It is also possible to discriminate whether it is a game specification or ST machine). As a result, when manufacturing the main control board 1310 in the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, even if the main control board 1310 for copyright of a plurality of types of works is mixed, the main control board inspection process of the manufacturing line The operator can visually check the inspection monitor to accurately determine the model type of the main control board 1310, the copyright of the work, and the game specifications, so that the main control board 1310 for the copyright of the work can be sorted into the following. It can be sent to the game board assembly line. The operator of the game board assembly line can surely attach the main control board 1310 corresponding to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work to the game board 5, and the main control board 1310 not corresponding to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work. It is possible to prevent a decrease in the production efficiency of the game board 5 caused by the work of attaching the 1310 to the game board 5.例文帳に追加Therefore, it is possible to contribute to the improvement of the production efficiency of the game board 5 .

[14-3. Main control side timer interrupt processing]
Next, main control side timer interrupt processing will be described. This main-control-side timer interrupt processing is repeatedly performed for each interrupt cycle (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the main-control-side power-on processing shown in FIGS. 92 and 93 .

When the main control side timer interrupt process is started, in the main control board 1310, the main control program switches register banks under the control of the main control MPU 1310a, as shown in FIG. 94 (step S100). The general-purpose storage elements (general-purpose registers) of the main control MPU 1310a have two register banks consisting of a first register bank and a second register bank. The first register bank is used in the main control main process in the main control side power-on process described above, while the first register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt process, which is this routine. In step S100, since the second register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, switch the register bank to the other register tank. In this embodiment, when the main control side timer interrupt processing of this routine is started, the processing of saving each register to the stack is not required.

Following step S100, the main control program performs timer subtraction processing (step S102). In this timer subtraction process, for example, the time when the first special symbol indicator 1403 and the second special symbol indicator 1405 are lit according to the variable display pattern determined by the special symbol and special electric auditors control process described later, the normal In addition to the time when the normal symbol indicator 1402 lights up according to the normal symbol variation display pattern determined by the symbol and normal electric auditors control process, various commands sent by the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) are sent to the payout control board 951. Time management such as ACK signal input judgment time set as a judgment condition when judging whether or not the payer ACK signal is input to inform that the receiver has been received normally. Specifically, when the variation time of the variation display pattern or the normal symbol variation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interrupt cycle is set to 4 ms, so each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the variation time is subtracted by 4 ms. Then, when the subtraction result becomes 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

In this embodiment, the ACK signal input determination time is set to 100 ms. Each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the ACK signal input determination time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the subtraction result becomes 0, thereby accurately measuring the ACK signal input determination time. These various times and the ACK signal input determination time are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S102, the main control program performs switch input processing (step S104). In this switch input process, various signals input to input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Specifically, the main control program detects, for example, the detection signals from the general winning opening sensors 4020 and 4020 shown in FIG. A detection signal from the count sensor 4005 shown in FIG. 69 for detecting a game ball entering the big winning hole 2005 shown in FIG. 8, and a game ball entering the first starting hole 2002 shown in FIG. 8 are detected. A detection signal from the first starting hole sensor 4002 shown in FIG. 69, and a detection signal from the second starting hole sensor 4004 shown in FIG. , a detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 shown in FIG. 69 that detects a game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2003 shown in FIG. A detection signal, a vibration sensor 2405 for detecting fraud by vibrating the game machine shown in FIG. The payer ACK signal from the payout control board 951 that informs that it has been received by the payout control board 951 is read and stored as input information in the input information storage area. In addition, the detection signal from the first start hole sensor 4002 that detects the game ball that entered the first start hole 2002, the detection from the second start hole sensor 4004 that detects the game ball that entered the second start hole 2004 When each signal is read, the corresponding start-up winning command shown in FIG. 90 and classified as others is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above. That is, when there is a detection signal from the first starter sensor 4002, a starter winning command corresponding thereto is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, and there is a detection signal from the second starter sensor 4004. Then, a start-up winning command corresponding to this is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area.

In this embodiment, detection signals from general winning gate sensors 4020 and 4020 that detect game balls that have entered the general winning gates 2001 and 2201, and a count sensor 4005 that detects game balls that have entered the big winning gate 2005 A detection signal from, a detection signal from the first starting hole sensor 4002 that detects a game ball that has entered the first starting hole 2002, and a second starting hole sensor 4004 that detects a game ball that has entered the second starting hole 2004. and the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 that detects a game ball that has passed through the gate unit 2003 are read for the first time when this switch input process is started, and read for a predetermined time (for example, 10 μs ), each is read again for the second time. Then, the result of the second reading is compared with the result of the first reading. A determination is made as to whether or not there are any of the comparison results that are the same. If the result is not the same, it is read again for the third time, and the result of the third reading is compared with the result of the second reading. It is determined again whether or not there are any of the comparison results that are the same. If the results are not the same, they are read again for the fourth time, and the result of the fourth reading is compared with the result of the third reading. It is determined again whether or not there are any of the comparison results that are the same. If the result is the same, it is treated as if there is no entry of the game ball.

Thus, in the switch input process, the main control program receives the detection signals from the general winning opening sensors 4020 and 4020, the count sensor 4005, the first starting opening sensor 4002, the second starting opening sensor 4004, and the gate sensor 4003, By performing double reading for a total of two times by comparing the 1st to 3rd readings and the 2nd to 4th readings, it is possible to avoid the effects of chattering, noise, etc. Since it is possible to avoid erroneous detection, the detection signals from the general winning opening sensors 4020, 4020, the count sensor 4005, the first starting opening sensor 4002, the second starting opening sensor 4004, and the gate sensor 4003 Reliability can be improved.

Following step S104, the main control program performs win/lose random number update processing (step S106). In this win/lose random number update process, the above-described random numbers for the big-hit design and random numbers for the small-hit design are updated. Also, in addition to these random numbers, the random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol, which is updated in the non-win/lose random number update process of step S56 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. And the random number for determining the initial value for the small winning symbol is also updated. The random number for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the random number for determining the initial value for the small winning symbol are updated in the main control side main process and this main control side timer interrupt process, respectively, thereby enhancing the randomness. . On the other hand, since the random number for the big win pattern and the random number for the small win pattern are related to the win/lose judgment (big win judgment), each counter counts up only each time the win/lose random number update process is performed. Incidentally, the above-described normal symbol hit determination random number and normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number are also updated by this win/lose random number update process.

For example, the counter for updating the random number for determining per normal symbol is, as described above, an initial value update type counter, and is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical range ranging from the minimum value to the maximum value, and this minimum value to the maximum value is counted up by incrementing the value by 1 each time this main control side timer interrupt processing is performed. The random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol hit determination is counted up toward the maximum value, and then the random number for determination of the initial value for normal symbol hit determination is counted up from the minimum value. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the normal symbol hit determination random number, the hit/lose random number update process updates the initial value determination random number for big hit determination. The random number for determining the initial value for normal pattern hit determination can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process for drawing one value from the fixed numerical range of the counter for updating the normal symbol hit determination random number. .

In this embodiment, the random number for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the random number for determining the initial value for the small winning symbol are set to the non The win/lose random number update process and the win/lose random number update process of step S106 in the main control side timer interrupt process, which is this routine, are updated respectively, but each time an interrupt timer occurs, the processing time of this routine becomes uneven. If the number of executions of the non-hit-lose random number update process in step S56 is random by repeatedly executing the main control side main process within the remaining time until the interrupt timer is generated, the random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol , and the small-hit symbol initial value determination random number may be updated only in the non-hit-lose random number update process of step S56.

Following step S106, the main control program performs prize ball control processing (step S108). In this prize ball control process, the input information is read out from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and based on this input information, a prize ball command shown in FIG. When the number of scheduled game balls reaches 10, the output of the main prize number information output signal is set to notify that effect, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area, or the main prize number is stored in the output information storage area. A self-check command shown in FIG. 88 for checking the connection state between the control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 is created. Then, the generated prize ball command and self-check command are transmitted to the payout control board 951 as main payment serial data. For example, when one game ball enters the big winning hole 2005 shown in FIG. has reached 10 balls, the output of the main prize number information output signal is set to notify that effect, the output information is stored in the output information storage area, and the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control board 951. Or, when the payout control board 951 does not receive the payout ACK signal indicating that the payout control board 951 has received the prize ball command normally, the connection state between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 is confirmed. A self-check command is created and transmitted to the payout control board 951 . If the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls exceeds 10, as in the case of creating a prize ball command to pay out 15 balls as prize balls, the number of balls in excess will be added to the number of balls in the next game. In the prize ball control process, the input information is read out from the above-mentioned input information storage area, the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls is added based on this input information, and the added number of game balls is calculated. is reached, the output of the main prize number information output signal is set to notify that effect, and is stored in the output information storage area as the output information.

Following step S108, the main control program performs frame command reception processing (step S110). In the payout control board 951, the payout control program executes various 1-byte (8-bit) commands (eg, frame state 1 command, error cancellation navigation command, and frame state 2 command) divided into the state displays shown in FIG. to send. On the other hand, as will be described later, the payout control program outputs an error generation command when an error occurs in the payout operation, or outputs an error cancellation navigation command based on the detection signal of the operation switch 954 .
In the frame command reception process described above, when the main control program normally receives these various commands as payer serial data, the information to notify the payout control board 951 is stored as output information in the main control built-in RAM. store in the area. In addition, the main control program formats the command normally received as the payer serial data into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (various commands classified by status display in FIG. 90 (frame status 1 command, error release The navigation command and frame state 2 command)) are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above. The frame state 1 command here corresponds to the first error generation command, and the error cancellation navigation command corresponds to the first error cancellation command.

Following step S110, the main control program performs fraud detection processing (step S112). In this fraudulent act detection process, an abnormal state regarding the prize balls is checked. For example, when the input information is read out from the above-described input information storage area, and when the detection signal from the count sensor 4005 is input when the game is not in the jackpot game state (when the game ball enters the big winning hole 2005), etc. 90 as an abnormal state, a winning abnormality display command classified into the notification display shown in FIG. 90 is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

Following step S112, the main control program performs special symbol and special electric accessory control processing (step S114). In this special symbol and special electric accessory control process, a latch signal is output to the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an shown in FIG. (random number) is acquired from the hardware random number latch register built into the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a, and this acquired random number is set as a jackpot determination random number. And the random number for judging the jackpot (that is, the random value obtained from the hardware random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a) and the jackpot judgment value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM match or not. (Determine whether or not to generate a jackpot game state (referred to as "special lottery")), take out the value of the counter for updating the random number for the jackpot pattern, and store it in advance in the main control built-in ROM It determines whether or not it matches the probability variation per determination value (determines whether or not to generate probability variation). Here, "probability change" means that the probability of winning a big hit changes to a high probability (probability variable time) set higher than the normal time (low probability). In this embodiment, as the range of the above-described jackpot determination value (jackpot determination range), a value of 32668 to a value of 32767 is set for a low probability. ~ value 32767 is set and read from the probability variation time determination table. Thus, in the special symbol and special electric accessory control process of step S114, the random number for judging the big hit (that is, the random value obtained from the hard random number latch register built into the main control MPU 1310a with built-in main control) and the built-in main control When determining whether or not the jackpot determination value stored in advance in the ROM matches, the random number for jackpot determination (that is, the random value obtained from the hard random number latch register built into the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a) is included in the jackpot determination range.

When these determination results are based on the first start sensor 4002, while creating various commands related to the special figure 1 tuning effect shown in FIG. In some cases, create various commands related to the special figure 2 tuning performance shown in FIG. Set the output of the lighting signal to the first special symbol indicator 1403 or the second special symbol indicator 1405 so as to light the device 1403 or the second special symbol indicator 1405, and store it in the output information storage area described above as the output information do. In addition, according to the game state to be generated, for example, when it becomes a big win game state, various commands (big win opening command, big winning mouth 1 open Nth display command, big winning mouth 1) classified as related to big win shown in FIG. Closed display command, large winning opening 1 count display command, jackpot ending command, and jackpot pattern display command) are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, or the opening and closing member 2107 shown in FIG. 8 is opened and closed. By setting the output of the drive signal to the attacker solenoid 2108 and storing it as output information in the output information storage area, or when the number of times (round) that the big prize winning port 2005 changes from the closed state to the open state is two times, The output of the lighting signal to the 2nd round display lamp 1407a of the round indicator 1407 shown in FIG. At some point, the output of the lighting signal to the 15th round indicator lamp 1407b of the round indicator 1407 shown in FIG. The output of the lighting signal to the status indicator 1401 is set so that the presence or absence of variation is lit in a predetermined color, and is stored as output information in the output information storage area.

Following step S114, the main control program performs normal symbol and normal electric accessory control processing (step S116). In this normal symbol and normal electric accessary product control process, the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and the gate winning process is performed based on this input information. In this gate winning process, it is determined from the input information whether or not the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 has been input to the input terminal. Based on this determination result, when the detection signal is input to the input terminal, the value of the counter for updating the random number for determining per normal symbol is extracted as gate information, and the gate information storage area of the main control built-in RAM is extracted. memorize to

This gate information storage area has 0th to 3rd divisions (four divisions), and gate information is stored in the order of 0th division, 1st division, 2nd division, and 3rd division. It's like For example, if the gate information is stored in the 0th to 2nd sections of the gate information storage, and the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 is input to the input terminal, the gate information is stored in the 3rd section of the gate information storage. do.

The gate information stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. When this gate information is set, the gate information in the first section of the gate information storage is stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage, the gate information in the second section of the gate information storage is stored in the first section of the gate information storage, and the gate information is stored in the first section of the gate information storage. The gate information in the third partition of the information storage is shifted to the second partition of the gate information storage, respectively, and the third partition of the gate information storage becomes a free area. For example, when gate information is stored in the first and second sections of the gate information storage, the gate information of the first section of the gate information storage is stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage, and the gate information of the first section is stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage. The gate information of the two partitions is shifted to the first partition of the gate information storage, and the second partition of the gate information storage and the third partition of the gate information storage become empty areas. Here, when the gate information is stored in the first section to the third section of the gate information storage, the above-described gate information so that the total number of the stored gate information is used as a holding ball and the normal symbol storage display 1188 is lit. Based on this, the output of the lighting signal of the normal symbol memory display 1188 is set, and stored as the output information in the output information storage area described above.

Following the gate winning process, the gate information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM is read, and the value of the random number for determining per normal symbol is extracted from the read gate information and stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM. It is determined whether or not it matches the normal symbol hit determination value (referred to as "normal lottery"). Whether or not to open and close the movable piece is determined based on the determination result (lottery result by ordinary lottery). When the opening and closing operation is performed by this determination, the pair of movable pieces are expanded in the left-right direction, so that the second start opening 2004 becomes a game state in which the game ball can be received, which is advantageous to the player. It becomes a game state. This determination and the corresponding normal symbol variation display pattern are determined based on the above-described normal symbol variation display pattern random numbers, and various commands classified into normal symbol synchronization effects shown in FIG. 89 are created and sent as transmission information. While storing in the transmission information storage area described above, set the output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display 1402 so that the normal symbol display 1402 is lit according to the determined normal symbol fluctuation display pattern, and the above-described output information Store in the output information storage area. In addition, for example, when the value of the extracted normal symbol hit determination random number matches the normal symbol hit determination value pre-stored in the main control built-in ROM, various commands related to the normal electric role effect shown in FIG. is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, the output of the drive signal to the starting port solenoid 2107 is set so as to open and close the movable piece, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area described above. , When the value of the taken-out normal symbol per determination random number does not match the normal symbol per determination value pre-stored in the main control built-in ROM, normal symbol variation based on the above-described normal symbol variation display pattern random number Determine the display pattern, create various commands classified into the normal pattern synchronization effect shown in FIG. The output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display 1402 is set so as to light the symbol display 1402, and is stored as the output information in the output information storage area described above.

Following step S116, the main control program performs port output processing (step S118). In this port output process, output information is read from the above-described output information storage area from output terminals of various output ports of the main control MPU 1310a, and various signals are output based on this output information. This main control program, for example, from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a based on the output information, when the various commands from the payout control board 951 has been normally received, the payout control board 951 the main payment ACK signal , or when in a jackpot game state, a drive signal is output to the attacker solenoid 2108 that performs the opening and closing operation of the opening and closing member 2107 of the big winning opening 2005, and a drive signal is output to the starter solenoid 2107 that performs the opening and closing operation of the movable piece. In addition to outputting, main prize number information output signal, 15 rounds jackpot information output signal, 2nd rounds jackpot information output signal, probability fluctuation information output signal, special pattern display information output signal, normal pattern display information output signal, Various information (game information) signals related to the game such as time saving information output information, starting entrance winning information output signal, etc. are output to the payout control board 951.

Following step S118, the main control program performs peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S120). In the peripheral control board command transmission process, the main control program reads transmission information from the transmission information storage area and transmits the transmission information to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data. This transmission information includes various commands classified into special figure 1 tuning effect related, shown in FIG. Commands, various commands classified as related to big wins (for example, big wins based on the detection signal from the count sensor 4005 (see FIG. 69) when a game ball entering the big win opening 2005 (see FIG. 8) is detected Large winning mouth 1 count display command corresponding to the mouth count command), various commands classified as power-on, various commands classified as related to general pattern synchronization effects, various commands classified as related to normal electric role effects, Fig. 90 , various commands classified as notification display (door open command, door frame close command, body frame open command, body frame close command, etc.), various commands classified as status display (frame state 1 command, error release navigation commands and frame state 2 commands), various commands classified into test-related commands, and various commands classified into others are stored. One packet of the main circumferential serial data is composed of 3 bytes. Specifically, the main peripheral serial data includes a status indicating the type of command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating variations of effects having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status and a sum value calculated by considering the mode as a numerical value, and this sum value is created at the time of transmission.

In this peripheral control board command transmission process, the main control program transmits to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitute various commands as main peripheral serial data. As described above, when a power failure or instantaneous power failure occurs, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 77 is applied as +5 V to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. Therefore, the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae incorporated in the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. The data can be transferred to the register 41aea and transmitted from the transmission shift register 1310aea as main-circumference serial data. When the power is restored after a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, to inform that the power has been restored in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at power-on in step S50 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. In addition, the power-on state command and the main control return destination command at power-on shown in FIG. , as main peripheral serial data, the status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the state command at power-on, are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value. The mode and the sum value are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in this order. In addition, in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, game information is read from the game backup information in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the main control side power-on process, and the game information is read according to this game information. various commands may be stored. In such a case, after completion of transmission of various commands corresponding to the game information, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command are subsequently transmitted.

In this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a frame state 1 command (first error occurrence command) from the payout control board 951 through the reception port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control unit ) (error command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the frame state 1 command having the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the frame state 1 command having the form shown in FIG.

On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives an error cancellation navigation command (first error cancellation command) from the payout control board 951 through the reception port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 (error command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the error cancellation navigation command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the error cancellation navigation command in the form shown in FIG.

Furthermore, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a main body frame open command (first main body frame open command) from the payout control board 951 through the reception port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 A main body frame open command (second main body frame open command) is transmitted to (rendering control unit) (main body frame command sending means, second main body frame sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the body frame open command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the body frame open command in the form shown in FIG. On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a main body frame closing command (first main body frame closing command) from the payout control board 951 through the receiving port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 ( A main body frame closing command (second main body frame closing command) is transmitted to the production control unit) (main body frame command sending means, second main body frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the body frame closing command having the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the body frame closing command having the form shown in FIG.

In addition, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a door opening command (first door opening command) from the payout control board 951 through the reception port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control (door frame command sending means, second door frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the door frame closing command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the door closing command in the form shown in FIG. On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a door closing command (first door closing command) from the payout control board 951 through the receiving port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control (door frame command sending means, second door frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the door closing command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the door closing command in the form shown in FIG.

Following step S120, the main control program clears the main control built-in WDT 1310af shown in FIG. 69 (step S122), and ends this routine. The clearing of the main control built-in WDT 1310af in step S22 is performed by setting the timer clear set value in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU 1310a. This clears the clocking by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. Then, since the WDT 1310af with built-in main control restarts the clocking, the WDT 1310af with built-in main control does not forcibly reset the main control MPU 1310a.

In addition, as described above, the main control board 1310 has the above-described backup function for storing the game information according to the progress of the game before the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off while the game is progressing. The processing can be executed and completed, and at the time of power restoration, the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off based on the game information for which the backup processing was executed as a return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310. 89, which instructs the drive state of the starter solenoid 2107 and attacker solenoid 2108, which are electrical drive sources, by the port output process in step S118 in this routine. It is designed to be able to output to That is, the main control board 1310 is the main controller in setting the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50 in the main control side power-on processing in FIG. Based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the control built-in RAM, in order to notify that the power has been turned on (power has been restored), a power-on state command and a power-on main command classified into power-on shown in FIG. A control return destination command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, and then the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitutes the main control return destination command at power-on. Send to Therefore, the peripheral control board 1510, based on the power-on main control return destination command from the main control board 1310, sets the game board side effect display device 1600 as the return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. effect can be displayed in the display area. As a result, when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs while a player is playing a game and power is restored thereafter, the game state immediately before the power failure or power failure can be quickly restored after the power is restored. In addition, since the return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 can be displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and notified, the system of the pachinko machine 1 is stuck, so-called freeze. It is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the device is out of order because the player sees the device in the broken state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that there is a malfunction by quickly returning to the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure after the power is restored.

In addition, in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the manufacturing line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after manufacturing for inspection, as described above, as shown in FIG. At step S38 in the main control side power-on processing, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is always cleared. As a result, when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at power-on is performed in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at power-on in step S50 in the same process, the power-on state command classified into the power-on shown in FIG. and the main control return destination command at power-on are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, so that two commands, the power-on state command and the main control return destination command at power-on, are generated. is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S120 in this routine, the main peripheral serial data constitutes the power-on state command, The status, mode, and sum value are sent to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process in that order, and then the main control board inspection is performed in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitutes the main control return destination command at power-on. Send to the inspection equipment in the process. The inspection device in the main control board inspection process configures the information representing the model code of the pachinko machine based on the information representing the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310. , the series code for specifying which type is the above-mentioned model type from the max type, middle type, and sweet digital type, the copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, and the game specifications (For example, when a probability change occurs, in addition to the game specification that the state continues until the next big win game state occurs, the game specification that the probability change occurs in a state where the number of special symbol changes is limited (ST machine), etc.), and based on this, detailed model information is displayed on the inspection monitor in the main control board inspection process.

[16-1. Various control processing of the peripheral control unit]
[16-1-1. Peripheral control unit power-on processing]
First, the peripheral controller power-on process will be described with reference to FIG. When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 performs a peripheral control unit power-on process as shown in FIG. When this peripheral control unit power-on processing is started, the performance control program performs initial setting processing under the control of the peripheral control MPU 1511a (step S1000). In this initial setting process, the effect control program performs the process of initializing the peripheral control MPU 1511a itself, the hot start/cold start determination process, the process of setting the wait timer after reset, and the like. The peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a process of initializing itself, but the time required for the process of initializing this peripheral control MPU 1511a is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control MPU 1511a is initialized in an extremely short time. be able to. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a enters a state in which the interrupt permission is set, so that, for example, in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing to be described later, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs from the main control board 1310, shown in FIGS. , various commands such as commands relating to the control of game effects and commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 can be received.

In the hot start/cold start determination process, the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 1fr) are compared, and effect backup information (1ms), which is the content backed up in Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms), is compared, and Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) in the backup second area 1511cc are compared. ) are compared, and the effect backup information (1 ms), which is the content backed up in Bank 3 (1 ms) and Bank 4 (1 ms), are compared. When the contents match, the effect backup information (1fr) which is the contents stored in Bank1 (1fr) for Bank0 (1fr), which is the normally used storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. , to Bank0 (1 ms), and effect backup information (1 ms), which is the content stored in Bank1 (1 ms), are respectively copied back to perform a hot start. That is, when there is no match), a value of 0 is forcibly written into each of Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1ms), which are normally used storage areas of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, to perform a cold start.

In the hot start/cold start determination process, the peripheral control SRAM 1511d shown in FIG. (SRAM) are compared, and effect backup information (SRAM), which is the content backed up in Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) in the second backup area 1511dc, is compared. When the contents of the comparison match, the effect backup information (SRAM), which is the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), is stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is the normally used storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d shown in FIG. ) is copied back to perform a hot start, and when the compared contents do not match (that is, when they do not match), a value is stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a normally used storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. 0 is forcibly written to cold start. Following such a hot start or cold start, the backup unmanaged work area 1511cf of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 is forcibly written with a value of 0 to be cleared to zero. After performing this initialization setting process, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af shown in FIG. 73 and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e shown in FIG. 72 to reset the peripheral control MPU 1511a. I try not to get caught.

Following step S1000, the effect control program performs current time information acquisition processing (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition process, calendar information specifying the date and time information specifying the hour, minute, and second are acquired from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 41654a of the RTC control unit 4165 shown in FIG. is set in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. In addition, in the current time information acquisition process, the luminance setting process of the liquid crystal display device is also performed. In the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires brightness setting information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, and sets the brightness of the LEDs included in the acquired brightness setting information to the brightness of the game board. Processing is performed to adjust the brightness of the backlight of the side effect display device 1600 and turn it on. As described above, the brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the range of the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, from 100% to 70% in increments of 5%. It includes the set brightness of the LED which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 .

Specifically, in the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165 is 75%, and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is set to 75%. is lit, the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information, and the brightness stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165 When the brightness of the LED included in the setting information is 80% and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on, the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information. Lights up by adjusting the brightness. In the brightness setting processing of the liquid crystal display device, correction similar to the above-described brightness correction program for correcting the brightness of the game board side effect display device 1600 according to the usage time of the game board side effect display device 1600 is performed. It is not done at all. This is because a correction program similar to the brightness correction program is incorporated into the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, so that the brightness of the LED is corrected toward 100% every time the brightness setting processing of the liquid crystal display device is executed. This is to prevent

In this embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a only once when the power is turned on. After performing the current time information acquisition process, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e so that the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset.

Following step S1002, the effect control program sets the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1006). This V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing described later. are set to the value 0 when not executed. The V-blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is executed when a V-blank signal is input from the built-in tone generator VDP 1512a to indicate that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a can be accepted. A value of 1 is set in the partial V blank signal interrupt process. In this step S1006, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is once initialized by setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. After setting the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to 0, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e so that the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset. there is

Following step S1006, the effect control program determines whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is value 1 (step S1008). When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not 1 (is 0), the process returns to step S1008 to repeatedly determine whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 or not. By repeating such a determination, a standby state is established until the peripheral controller steady-state processing is executed. After determining whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e to reset the peripheral control MPU 1511a. I try not to get caught.

When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 in step S1008, that is, when the peripheral controller steady-state processing is executed, the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is set to 1 (step S1009). The steady-processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, and set to a value of 0 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed.

Following step S1009, the effect control program performs 1 ms interrupt timer activation processing (step S1010). In this 1 ms interrupt timer start processing, a 1 ms interrupt timer for executing peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is started, and the number of times the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed by the 1 ms interrupt timer being started is counted. 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is set to 1 to initialize the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN. This 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing.

Following step S1010, the effect control program performs lamp data output processing (step S1012). In this lamp data output process, the effect control program performs continuous DMA serial transmission to the lamp drive board 4170 shown in FIG. Here, serial I/O port serial transmission for the lamp drive board is performed using the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. When this lamp drive board serial I/O port continuous transmission is started, the data shown in FIG. Game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 is created by a lamp data creation process described later. is set by default.

The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. The first byte of the game board side light emission data SL-DAT stored at the top address is sent to the lamp drive board serial I/O port via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. transfer and write to the transmit buffer register of As a result, the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the game board side emission clock signal SL-CLK to transmit 1 byte of the transmission shift register. data is started to be transmitted bit by bit.

Every time a transmission interrupt request for the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board occurs, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac uses this as a trigger (in this embodiment, the transmission buffer register for the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board The 1-byte data written is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register becomes empty because there is no more 1-byte data.), the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa is using the bus. If not, the remaining game board side light emission data SL-DAT stored in the lamp driving board side transmission data storage area 1511caa is transmitted 1 byte at a time via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai, By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the serial I/O port for the lamp driving board, the serial I/O port for the lamp driving board transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, In synchronism with the board-side light emission clock signal SL-CLK, transmission of 1-byte data in the transmission shift register is started bit by bit, and continuous transmission is performed through the serial I/O port for the lamp driving board.

In the lamp data output process, the effect control program performs DMA serial continuous transmission process to the frame decoration driving amplifier board 194 shown in FIG. Here too, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a is used to perform serial I/O port continuous transmission for the frame decoration driving amplifier board LED. When this frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I/O port continuous transmission is started, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. In 1511cab, door-side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 3 is generated by the lamp data generation process described later. is set by default.

The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a designates transmission of the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I/O port as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and stores the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area. The first byte of the door-side light emission data STL-DAT stored at the top address of 1511cab is transferred to the frame decoration driving amplifier board LED serial signal via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. Transfer and write to the transmit buffer register of the I/O port. As a result, the serial I/O port for the frame decoration driving amplifier board LED transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the door-side light emission clock signal STL-CLK to the transmission shift register. Start transmitting 1-byte data bit by bit.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac receives a transmission interrupt request for the frame-decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I/O port (in this embodiment, the frame-decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I/O port). 1-byte data written in the transmission buffer register of the port is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register becomes empty because there is no more 1-byte data.), peripheral control CPU core 1511aa is not using the bus, the remaining door-side light emission data STL-DAT stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab are transferred byte by byte to the external bus 1511h and the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad. , and via the peripheral bus 1511ai, by transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the serial I/O port for the frame decoration driving amplifier board LED, the serial I/O port for the frame decoration driving amplifier board LED receives this written data. The data in the transmission buffer register is transferred to the transmission shift register, and in synchronization with the door side light emission clock signal STL-CLK, transmission of 1 byte data in the transmission shift register is started bit by bit, and the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED Continuous transmission is performed by the serial I/O port.

Following step S1012, the production control program performs production operation unit monitoring processing (step S1014). In this production operation unit monitoring process, in the production operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, the operation button 410 is operated based on the detection signal from the various detection switches provided in the production operation unit 400. Based on the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. determine as appropriate whether or not to reflect

Following step S1014, the effect control program performs display data output processing (step S1016). In this display data output process, the VDP with built-in tone generator 1512a outputs the drawing data for one screen (one frame) generated on the built-in VRAM of the VDP with built-in tone generator 1512a in the display data creation process, which will be described later, from channels CH1 and CH2 shown in FIG. Output to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 . As a result, various screens are drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 . In the display data output process, if the drawing exceeds the drawing capability of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source, the generated drawing data for one screen (one frame) is transferred to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect. The output to the display device 460 is canceled. Although this makes it possible to prevent a delay in the processing time, so-called dropped frames may occur. Various effects from the lower speaker 921 shown in FIG. 5 and the upper speaker 573 shown in FIG. It is a mechanism that allows you to prioritize synchronization with the production of music and sound effects that match the time.

Following step S1016, the effect control program performs sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output process, the performance control program outputs sound data such as music and sound effects set in the sound source built-in VDP 1512a in the sound data creation process described later to the audio data transmission IC 1512c as serialized audio data, In addition to music and sound effects, sound data of notification sounds and notification sounds are output to the audio data transmission IC 1512c as serialized audio data. When serialized audio data is input from the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, the audio data transmission IC 1512c converts the right audio data to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as differential serial data with positive and negative signals. At the same time, the left audio data is transmitted to the frame-decoration drive amplifier board 194 as differential serial data with positive and negative signals. As a result, music, sound effects, and the like in accordance with various effects are stereo-reproduced from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and notification sounds and notification sounds are also stereo-reproduced.

Following step S1018, the effect control program performs scheduler update processing (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, the performance control program updates various schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. For example, in the scheduler update process, among the screen data arranged in time series that constitute the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, what number screen data from the first screen data is stored in the VDP 1512a with built-in tone generator. Update the pointer to indicate whether to output.

Further, in the scheduler update process, among the light emission data arranged in time series that constitute the light emission mode generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, the number of light emission data from the top light emission data is changed to light emission of various LEDs. Update the pointer to indicate which mode to use.

In the scheduler update process, the sound data such as music and sound effects, and the sound data of the notification sound and notification sound arranged in time series constituting the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae are instructed. Of the sound command data, the pointer is updated to indicate what order of the sound command data from the top sound command data is to be output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a.

In the scheduler update process, among the drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series constituting the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, the first drive data is The pointer is updated to indicate which drive data is to be output. The drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series, which constitute the electric drive source schedule data, are repeatedly executed each time a 1 ms timer interrupt is generated by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt, which will be described later. It is updated in the motor and solenoid drive processing in the processing. In the motor and solenoid drive processing, which is repeatedly executed each time this 1ms timer interrupt occurs, the electric drive source such as the motor or solenoid is driven according to the drive data indicated by the pointer, and the next drive specified in time series is executed. Update the pointer to the data and update the pointer each time you do your own work. In other words, the drive data indicated by the pointer updated in the motor and solenoid drive process is forcibly updated in the scheduler update process. Even if another drive data is instructed from the drive data that should be instructed, the scheduler update process is forcibly instructed to the drive data that should be originally instructed.

Following step S1020, the effect control program performs received command analysis processing (step S1022). In this received command analysis process, the effect control program, the information transmitted from the effect display drive board 4450 via the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, various Various commands received in the peripheral controller command reception interrupt processing (command receiving means), which will be described later, are analyzed (command analyzing means). Based on the information transmitted from the effect display drive board 4450 via the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the effect control program generates screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound. The schedule data for generation, the electric drive source schedule data, etc. are extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. do. In addition, the effect control program is such that the command from the main control board 1310 received in this peripheral control unit command interrupt process is, for example, a starting entrance winning command for instructing the start of the starting entrance winning effect, the number of normal symbols held Normal pattern storage command for identifying (0 to 4), pattern synchronization production start command for instructing the start of the pattern synchronization production, pattern storage command output when the number of start suspension changes, large winning opening 2005 A large winning opening 1 count display command (large winning opening count command) output each time a game ball is accepted, or a frame state 1 command (second error generation command, It analyzes (command analysis means) whether it is a full tank error generation command or not, and recognizes which game state it is at present. In addition, in this effect control program, after a predetermined time has passed since the power is turned on, the command received by this peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is a main body frame open command, a main body frame close command, a door open command, or a door frame close Analyze whether it is a command or not. Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the received command storage area 1511cac of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. , The effect control program analyzes various commands stored in the received command storage area 1511cac. Various commands, shown in FIG. , various commands classified as related to normal figure synchronization effects, various commands classified as related to normal electric role effects, various commands classified as notification display shown in FIG. 90, door frame open command , door frame close command, body frame open command, body frame close command, error cancellation navigation command (equivalent to second error cancellation command) and frame state 1 command (equivalent to second error generation command), etc. There are various commands that are grouped, various commands that are grouped into test-related, and various commands that are grouped into others.

Following step S1022, the effect control program performs warning processing (step S1024). In this warning process, furthermore, when the command analyzed by the received command analysis process of step S1022 as described above includes various commands classified into the notification display shown in FIG. The schedule data for screen generation, the schedule data for emission mode generation, the schedule data for sound generation, the electric drive source schedule data, etc., which are set in the abnormality display mode for executing the abnormality notification, are stored in the peripheral control unit 1511. It extracts from the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c and sets them in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. In addition, in the warning process, when multiple abnormalities occur at the same time, the abnormality notification is performed in the order of the priority registered in advance, and the abnormality notification is automatically changed to the remaining abnormality notification after the abnormality is resolved. It is designed to Thus, a plurality of abnormalities can be simultaneously monitored without losing information that one abnormality has occurred due to the occurrence of another abnormality after the occurrence of one abnormality and before the abnormality is resolved. can be done.

Furthermore, in this warning process, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, the commands analyzed by the effect control program in the received command analysis process (step S1022) described above are classified into the status displays shown in FIG. In the case of various commands, for example, an error cancellation navigation command (second error cancellation command), by controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 in a manner different from the normal production mode accompanying the production operation, for example, the game board side Effect display device 1600 (effect device), door frame side effect display device 460 (effect device), lamp (effect device) is used to visually warn the outside, or a speaker is used to audibly warn the outside ( error reporting means). By doing so, when a malicious player tries to input an error cancellation navigation command to the main control board 1310 by operating the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 in spite of being in the game state, Since the pachinko machine 1 is configured to issue a warning to the outside, it is possible to prevent cheating on the main control board 1310, which may affect the progress of the game.

Next, following step S1024 described above, the effect control program performs RCT acquisition information update processing (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update process, the performance control program stores in the calendar information storage unit acquired in the current time information acquisition process of step S1002 and set in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. calendar information and the time information stored in the time information storage section are updated. By this RCT acquisition information update process, the hour, minute, and second, which are the time information stored in the time information storage unit, are updated, and based on the updated time information, the year, month, and month, which are the calendar information stored in the calendar information storage unit. date is updated.

Following step S1026, the effect control program performs prefetch effect control processing (step S1027). The look-ahead effect control process executes the process related to the look-ahead effect based on the effect command analyzed in the received command analysis process of step S1022. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 30, when receiving a special symbol 1 storage prefetch effect command or a special symbol 2 storage prefetch effect command (hereinafter referred to as "prefetch effect command"), for executing the prefetch effect Make settings. Details of the look-ahead effect control processing will be described later.

The look-ahead effect command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 when the game ball wins the first starting hole 2002 and the second starting hole 2004 . In this embodiment, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives a prefetch effect command, a prefetch effect execution flag is set in the received command analysis process of step S1022. In the look-ahead effect control process, if the look-ahead effect execution flag is set, it is determined whether to execute the look-ahead effect based on the contents of the look-ahead effect command. That is, in this embodiment, even when a prefetch effect command is received from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510 determines whether or not to actually execute the prefetch effect.

Then, when the look-ahead effect is to be executed, the state of the pending display of the starting memory is changed as the look-ahead effect (normal look-ahead effect). In addition, after the normal look-ahead effect is executed, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a continuous look-ahead effect is executed to change the state of the pending display each time the starting memory in which the variable display is executed in advance is consumed. do. In the look-ahead effect control process, a process for executing a normal look-ahead effect is performed, and it is determined whether or not to execute a continuous look-ahead effect. The predetermined condition may be, for example, that the number of starting memories that have not been digested is equal to or greater than a certain number, or that there is a high degree of expectation that the outcome of the variable display game based on the starting memories to be read ahead will be a big win. may

Note that the content of the look-ahead effect is not limited to changing the display mode of the start memory, but also the display effect on the door frame side effect display device 460 such as character display and background change, light emission of lamps, and sound output from the speaker. , the motion of a movable body, and the like.

Following step S1027, the effect control program performs lamp data creation processing (step S1028). In this lamp data creation process, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and the pointer is designated among the light emission data arranged in time series constituting the light emission mode generation schedule data. game board side light emission data SL- for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decoration boards provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. DAT is created by extracting from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and is set in the lamp driving board side transmission data storage area 1511caa of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. In addition, the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 stores the door-side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to the plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3. Alternatively, it is created by extracting it from various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and set in the transmission data storage area 1511cab for frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG.

Following step S1028, the effect control program performs display data creation processing (step S1030). In this display data creation process, the presentation control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and out of the screen data arranged in time series constituting the schedule data for screen generation, the screen data indicated by the pointer. are extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and output to the tone generator built-in VDP 1512a. When screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source extracts character data from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b based on the input screen data, creates sprite data, and displays the effect display device on the game board side. 1600 and the drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the effect display device 460 on the side of the door frame are generated in the built-in VRAM.

Following step S1030, the effect control program performs sound data creation processing (step S1032). In this sound data creation process, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and the pointer points out of the sound instruction data arranged in time series constituting the schedule data for sound generation. The sound command data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and is output to the tone generator built-in VDP 1512a. When sound command data is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a extracts sound data such as music and sound effects stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b and controls the built-in sound source to generate the sound command. Sound data such as music and sound effects are incorporated in accordance with the track number specified in the data, and the output channel to be used is set in accordance with the output channel number.

In the sound data creation process, each time the sound data creation process is performed (that is, each time the peripheral control unit steady process is performed), the peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak shown in FIG. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the knob 1510a is converted into 1024 steps of values from 0 to 1023. In this embodiment, the values in 1024 steps are divided into 7 and managed as board volumes 0 to 6. Board volume 0 is set to mute and board volume 6 is set to maximum volume. Each is set so that the volume increases toward the volume 6. - 特許庁The VDP 1512a with built-in sound source of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is controlled so that the sound volume is set to the board volume 0 to 6, and the audio data is transmitted as audio data obtained by serializing the sound data in the sound data output process of step S1018 described above. By outputting to the IC 1512 c, music and sound effects are played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 .

In addition, the notification sound and notification sound are designed to flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob. The VDP 1512a can be controlled and adjusted. The volume adjusted by this program can smoothly change from mute to maximum volume, unlike the substrate volume divided into 7 levels described above. For example, even if a hall clerk or the like turns the knob of the volume control volume 1510a to set the volume to a low level, the production sounds such as music and sound effects flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 are small. However, when there is a problem with the pachinko machine 1 or when the player is cheating, a notification sound set to a high volume (maximum volume in this embodiment) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk from noticing the occurrence of a problem or the player's cheating due to the notification sound. In addition, based on the current board volume set by adjusting the volume based on the turning operation of the knob, the volume of the advertising sound is reduced so as not to interfere with the music and sound effects. In addition to the music and sound effects, the screen displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is made more powerful by increasing the volume of the sound, which is advantageous for the player. It is also possible to notify that there is a high possibility of shifting to a game state.

Following step S1032, the effect control program performs backup processing (step S1034). In this backup process, the effect control program stores the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. The contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the externally attached peripheral control SRAM 1511d are copied and backed up in a first backup area 1511db and a second backup area 1511dc, respectively.

Specifically, in the backup process, the peripheral control RAM 1511c is backed up every frame in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. Lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, reception command storage area 1511cac, RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad, and Effect information (1fr) stored in the schedule data storage area 1511cae is used as effect backup information (1fr). The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies at high speed to Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) of the second backup area 1511cc.

Briefly explaining the high-speed copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) are specified to be copied to Bank1 (1fr) in the first backup area 1511cb, and the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (1fr) are copied to the end address of Bank0 (1fr). The contents up to the stored content are copied in sequence from the head address of Bank1 (1fr) of the first backup area 1511cb by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte). 1511ac specifies to copy the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) to Bank2 (1fr) in the first backup area 1511cb, and copies the contents stored in the top address of Bank0 (1fr) to Bank0 (1fr ) up to the end address of Bank 2 (1fr) of the first backup area 1511cb in sequence from the start address of Bank 2 (1fr) of the first backup area 1511cb.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa designates copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) to Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, ) to the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (1fr) are successively stored by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) at the start address of Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc. , and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa designates copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) to Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. Then, the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (1fr) to the contents stored at the end address of Bank0 (1fr) are continuously transferred to Bank4 ( 1fr) are copied in order from the first address.

In the backup process, the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is backed up every frame in the backup target work area 1511da shown in FIG. Effect information (SRAM) stored in Bank0 (SRAM) is transferred to Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) of backup first area 1511db as effect backup information (SRAM) by peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac at high speed. , and the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies at high speed to Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) of the second backup area 1511dc.

Briefly explaining the high-speed copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) are specified to be copied to Bank1 (SRAM) in the first backup area 1511db, and the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (SRAM) are copied to the end address of Bank0 (SRAM). The contents up to the stored content are copied in sequence from the top address of Bank 1 (SRAM) of the first backup area 1511db by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte). 1511ac is specified to copy the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) to Bank2 (SRAM) of the first backup area 1511db, and the contents stored in the top address of Bank0 (SRAM) are copied to Bank0 (SRAM ) up to the end address of Bank 2 (SRAM) of the first backup area 1511db in sequence from the start address of Bank 2 (SRAM) of the first backup area 1511db.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa designates copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) to Bank3 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511dc as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, ) to the end address of Bank0 (SRAM) are continuously backed up by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) at the start address of Bank3 (SRAM) of the second area 1511dc. , and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa designates copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) to Bank4 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511dc as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. Then, the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (SRAM) to the contents stored at the end address of Bank0 (SRAM) are continuously transferred to Bank4 of the backup second area 1511dc by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte). SRAM) are copied in order from the first address.

Following step S1034, WDT clear processing is performed (step S1036). In this WDT clearing process, a clear signal is output to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e so that the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset.

Following step S1036, the effect control program sets the value 0 to the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG as execution completion of the peripheral control unit steady-state processing (step S1038), returns to step S1006 again, V blank signal detection flag VB -FLG is initialized by setting a value of 0, and the determination in step S1008 is repeated until a value of 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process, which will be described later. That is, in step S1008, the system waits until the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. The process of S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1006. Thus, when it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, steps S1009 to S1038 are performed. The processing from step S1009 to step S1038 is called "peripheral control unit regular processing".

This peripheral control unit steady processing, effect control program, first step S1009 peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed and starts from setting the value 1 to the steady processing flag SP-FLG, 1 ms in step S1010 , and step S1036, and finally, in step S1038, the normal processing flag SP-FLG is set to 0 as execution completion of the peripheral controller normal processing. is set to complete. The peripheral controller steady-state processing is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 in step S1008. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is executed when a V blank signal is input from the built-in tone generator VDP 1512a to indicate that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a can be accepted. A value of 1 is set in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which will be described later. In this embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps per second. The interval at which blank signals are input is approximately 33.3 ms (=1000 ms/30 fps). That is, the peripheral controller steady-state processing is repeatedly executed approximately every 33.3 ms.

[16-1-2. Peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, as shown in FIG. 72, the V-blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 can be received is input from the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512. A description will be given of the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing that is executed with the . When the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is 0 as shown in FIG. 96 (step S1045). As described above, the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing of steps S1009 to S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. Each is set to a value of 0 when the processing is completed.

When the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is not 0 (is 1) in step S1045, that is, when the peripheral control section steady-state processing is being executed, this routine ends. On the other hand, when the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is 0 in step S1045, that is, when the execution of the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is completed, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to 1 (step S1050), Exit this routine. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing. They are each set to a value of 0 when no routine processing is executed.

In this embodiment, in step S1045, it is determined whether or not the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is 0, that is, whether or not the execution of the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is completed, and the execution of the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is completed. Sometimes, the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in step S1050. When the signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to a value of 1, it is determined in step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. Since the peripheral controller steady-state processing is forcibly canceled on the way and the execution is started from the beginning, in order to prevent this, the steady-state processing is canceled in step S1009 in the processing when the peripheral controller power is turned on (peripheral controller steady-state processing) in FIG. By setting the value 1 to the processing in-progress flag SP-FLG, the effect that the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed is notified to the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, and the peripheral control unit power supply in FIG. By setting the value 0 to the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG in step S1038 in the processing at the time of turning on (peripheral control unit steady-state processing), the completion of the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is indicated by the peripheral control unit V blank which is this routine. By notifying the signal interrupt processing, it is determined in step S1045 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, whether or not the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is 0, that is, the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed. It is determined whether or not it is completed. In other words, this is a measure to be taken when the peripheral controller steady-state processing cannot be completed until the next V blank signal is input after the V blank signal is input, ie, a so-called processing failure.

As a result, in the current peripheral control unit steady-state processing, if the processing cannot be completed within about 33.3 ms and the processing fails, the next processing will be performed in step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. It is in a state of waiting until the V blank signal of is input. That is, the time required to execute the current peripheral controller steady-state processing that has failed is approximately 66.6 ms. Peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is normally executed every time a 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by activating a 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit regular processing) of FIG. 95, will be described later. is executed only 32 times for one peripheral control unit steady process. is executed only 32 times. That is, even if the peripheral control unit steady processing fails, the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing which is timer interrupt control are not consistent. It is designed not to collapse. Therefore, even if the peripheral controller steady-state processing fails, it is possible to reliably match the state of progress of the presentation.

[16-1-3. Peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is repeatedly executed each time the 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by starting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral controller regular processing of the peripheral controller power-on processing of FIG. 95, will be described. . When this peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. is determined (step S1100). As described above, this 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is determined by this routine after the 1ms interrupt timer is activated by the 1ms interrupt timer start processing of step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. This is a counter that counts the number of times that a certain peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process has been executed. In this embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps per second. The interval at which blank signals are input is approximately 33.3 ms (=1000 ms/30 fps). That is, since the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed at intervals of about 33.3 ms, after starting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing, the next peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. is executed, the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed only 32 times. Specifically, when the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing, the first 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, the second, . will occur.

When the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not less than 33 times in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and this peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started, this routine ends. If the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next occurrence of the V blank signal, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is prioritized over the peripheral control unit V Although it is set higher than the blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing due to this 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that governs the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal, , the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing due to the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled in order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing. Then, after the 1 ms interrupt timer is restarted in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit regular processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is newly started due to the generation of the first 1 ms timer interrupt. ing.

On the other hand, when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 in step S1100, the value 1 is added to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN (incremented, step S1102). By adding the value 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated by the 1 ms interrupt timer activation processing of step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. The number of times the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which is this routine, is executed increases by one.

Following step S1102, motor and solenoid drive processing is performed (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive processing, the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 are arranged in time series. Of the drive data for electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids, the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids of the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 and the motor drive board 4180 shown in FIG. is driven, the pointer is updated to the next drive data specified in time series, and the pointer is updated each time this motor and solenoid drive processing is executed.

Specifically, in the motor and solenoid drive processing, DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 is performed. Here, serial I/O port continuous transmission for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor is performed using the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. When the serial I/O port continuous transmission for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor is started, first, the electrical drive source schedule data set in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the externally attached peripheral control RAM 1511c are transmitted. To output a drive signal to the dial drive motor 414 of the effect operation unit 400 based on the drive data indicated by the pointer among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series. The door-side motor drive data STM-DAT is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the frame decoration drive of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. It is set in the amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf. Then, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a designates transmission of the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and stores transmission data for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor. The first byte of the door-side motor drive data STM-DAT stored at the top address of the area 1511caf is sent to the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. transfer and write to the transmit buffer register of the serial I/O port for As a result, the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor transfers the written data in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the door-side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK. starts transmitting 1-byte data bit by bit.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac receives a transmission interrupt request for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I/O port (in this embodiment, the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I/O 1-byte data written in the transmission buffer register of the port is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register becomes empty because there is no more 1-byte data.), peripheral control CPU core 1511aa is not using the bus, the remaining door-side motor drive data STM-DAT stored in the frame-decoration drive amplifier board-side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf is transferred 1 byte at a time to the external bus 1511h and the peripheral control bus controller. 1511ad and via the peripheral bus 1511ai to the transmission buffer register of the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I/O port for writing, the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I/O port receives this write data. transfer the data in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, start transmitting the 1-byte data of the transmission shift register bit by bit in synchronization with the door-side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK, and frame decoration drive amplifier board Continuous transmission is performed by the motor serial I/O port.

In the motor and solenoid drive processing, DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the motor drive board 4180 is performed. Here too, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 is used to perform serial I/O port continuous transmission for the motor drive board. When the motor drive board serial I/O port continuous transmission is started, first, the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the electrical drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the externally attached peripheral control RAM 1511c are constructed. A motor for moving various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. and the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT for outputting the drive signal to the solenoid is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and created. It is set in the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in 73 . Then, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a designates transmission of the serial I/O port for the motor drive board as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and stores it in the top address of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. The first byte of the received game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is sent to the transmission buffer of the motor drive board serial I/O port via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. Transfer and write to a register. As a result, the serial I/O port for the motor drive board transfers the data written in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the game board side motor drive clock signal SM-CLK. Start sending byte data bit by bit.

Every time a transmission interrupt request for the serial I/O port for the motor drive board occurs, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac uses this as a trigger (in this embodiment, the transmission buffer register for the serial I/O port for the motor drive board The 1-byte data written is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register becomes empty because there is no more 1-byte data.), the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa is using the bus. If not, the rest of the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT stored in the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag is transmitted 1 byte at a time via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. , by transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the serial I/O port for the motor drive board, the serial I/O port for the motor drive board transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, In synchronization with the game board side motor drive clock signal SM-CLK, 1-byte data of the transmission shift register is started to be transmitted bit by bit, and continuous transmission is performed through the serial I/O port for the motor drive board.

Following step S1104, movable body information acquisition processing is performed (step S1106). In this movable object information acquisition process, history information (for example, original position history information) of detection signals from various detection switches is determined by determining whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided on the game board 5 are input. , movable position history information, etc.) and sets it in the movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah of the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. The original position, movable position, etc. of the various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 can be acquired from the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches set in the movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah.

Following step S1106, effect operation unit information acquisition processing is performed (step S1108). In this production operation unit information acquisition process, history information (for example, operation Operation history information of the button 410, etc.) is created and set in the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. Whether or not the operation button 410 is operated can be acquired from history information of detection signals from various detection switches set in the production operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai.

Following step S1108, drawing state information acquisition processing is performed (step S1110). In this drawing state information acquisition process, the history information of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSD0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 shown in FIG. It is set in the control MPU 1511a and the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak of the externally attached peripheral control RAM 1511c. As described above, the LOCKN signal indicates that the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal data. When a determination is made, it is a signal that is output to notify that effect. , that is, a signal output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. The door frame side effect display device acquires the frequency of failure and the failure occurrence state between the connection between the peripheral control board 1510 and the effect display drive board 4450 from the history information of the LOCKN signal set in the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak. 460 drawing state can be obtained.

Following step S1110, backup processing is performed (step S1112), and this routine ends. In this backup process, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. At the same time, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control SRAM 1511d are copied and backed up in the first backup area 1511db and the second backup area 1511dc, respectively.

Specifically, in the backup process, the peripheral control RAM 1511c is executed every time a 1ms interrupt timer occurs in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. Each time, Bank 0 (1ms) which is a backup target includes a transmission data storage area 1511caf for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor, a storage area 1511cag for the motor drive board side transmission data, and a storage area 1511cah for acquiring movable body information. , and effect information (1 ms), which is the content stored in the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai, is stored in Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 (1 ms) of the first backup area 1511cb as effect backup information (1 ms). The control DMA controller 1511ac performs high-speed copying, and the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac performs high-speed copying to Bank3 (1 ms) and Bank4 (1 ms) of the backup second area 1511cc.

Briefly explaining the high-speed copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (1 ms) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. The contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) are specified to be copied to Bank1 (1ms) in the first backup area 1511cb, and the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (1ms) are copied to the end address of Bank0 (1ms). The contents up to the stored content are copied in sequence from the head address of Bank1 (1 ms) of the first backup area 1511cb in a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) increments, and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa executes the peripheral control DMA controller. Copying the contents stored in Bank0 (1 ms) to Bank2 (1 ms) in the first backup area 1511cb is specified as the request factor of 1511ac, and the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (1 ms) are copied to Bank0 (1 ms). ) up to the end address of Bank 2 (1 ms) of the first backup area 1511cb in sequence from the start address of Bank 2 (1 ms).

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa designates copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) to Bank3 (1ms) of the backup second area 1511cc as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, ) to the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (1 ms) are continuously backed up by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) at the start address of Bank3 (1 ms) of the second area 1511cc. , and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa designates copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) to Bank4 (1ms) of the backup second area 1511cc as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. Then, the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (1 ms) to the contents stored at the end address of Bank0 (1 ms) are successively transferred to Bank 4 ( 1ms) are copied in order from the first address.

As described above, in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process, various processes related to the effects of steps S1104 to S1108 described above are executed within a period of 1ms as the progress of the effects. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit steady-state processing in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. is doing. In the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs and this peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started, Therefore, even if the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next occurrence of the V blank signal, the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt causes the peripheral control unit After forcibly canceling the start of the 1 ms timer interrupt processing and restarting the 1 ms interrupt timer again in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady-state processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control is performed by newly generating the first 1 ms timer interrupt. 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started. In other words, consistency between the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process, which is timer interrupt control, is maintained. Therefore, it is possible to reliably match the state of progress of the production.

Also, as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies somewhat depending on the liquid crystal sizes of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. The interval at which the V blank signal is output may vary slightly even in the manufacturing lot of the mounted peripheral control board 1510 . In this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that governs the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal, the peripheral control In order to execute the part V blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control part 1 ms timer interrupt process due to the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in the present embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes slightly, by forcibly canceling the start of the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt, this It is possible to absorb the time lag caused by a slight change in the interval at which the V blank signal is output.

[16-1-4. Peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral controller command reception interrupt processing for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 will be described. When various commands from the main control board 1310 start to be transmitted as serial data, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 1-byte (8-bit) information is fetched into the receive buffer by the substrate serial I/O port, and when this fetch is completed, an interrupt is generated and the peripheral controller command reception interrupt processing is performed. One packet of the main-circumference serial data consists of 3 bytes. The 1st byte is the status, the 2nd byte is the mode, and the 3rd byte is the status and mode. is assigned a sum value calculated from

When the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether or not the 1-byte reception period timer has timed out, as shown in FIG. 98 (step S1200). This 1-byte reception period timer sets a period during which 1-byte (8-bit) information of the main cycle serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 can be received.

When the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, when it is within the period during which 1-byte (8-bit) information of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 can be received, the peripheral 1-byte information received from the reception buffer of the main control board serial I/O port built in the control MPU 1511a is taken in (step S1202), and the value 1 is added to the reception counter SRXC (incremented, step S1204). This reception counter SRXC is a counter that indicates the number of times the main circumference serial data is read out from the reception buffer. When it is taken out from the reception buffer, the value is 2, and when the sum value, which is the third byte of the main-circumference serial data, is taken out from the reception buffer, the value is 3. An initial value of 0 is set to the reception counter SRXC when the power is turned on.

After step S1204, it is determined whether or not the reception counter SRXC is 3, that is, whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main circumferential serial data, has been extracted from the reception buffer (step S1206). In this determination, following the status, which is the first byte of the main-circumference serial data, the mode, which is the second byte of the main-circumference serial data, and the sum value, which is the third byte of the main-circumference serial data, are sequentially sent from the receive buffer. It is determined whether or not it has been taken out.

When the reception counter SRXC is not 3 in step S1206, that is, following the status which is the 1st byte of the main circumference serial data, the mode which is the 2nd byte of the main circumference serial data, and the 3rd byte of the main circumference serial data. is not taken out from the reception buffer in order, a 1-byte reception period timer is set (step S1208), and this routine ends. A 1-byte reception period timer is set in step S1208, thereby setting a period during which the mode, which is the second byte of the main cycle serial data, or the sum value, which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data, can be received.

On the other hand, when the value of the reception counter SRXC is 3 in step S1206, that is, the status, which is the first byte of the main circumference serial data, is followed by the mode, which is the second byte of the main circumference serial data, and then the 3 bytes of the main circumference serial data. When the sum value of the byte is sequentially taken out from the reception buffer, the initial value 0 is set to the reception counter SRXC (step S1210), and the sum value is calculated (step S1212). This calculation is performed by considering the status, which is the first byte of the main-circumference serial data, and the mode, which is the second-byte of the main-circumference serial data, which have already been extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, as numerical values, and summing them (sum value ).

Following step S1212, it is determined whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main circumferential serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, matches the sum value calculated in step S1212 (step S1214). The sum value, which is the third byte of the main-circumference serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, is the sum value assigned as the third byte of the main-circumference serial data among the main-circumference serial data from the main control board 1310. Therefore, it should match the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, the pachinko machine 1 is supplied with game balls from a pachinko island facility, and when the game balls rub against each other and become charged, they generate static electricity and generate noise, so the pachinko machine 1 is affected by the noise. in a sanding environment. Therefore, in this embodiment, on the side of the peripheral control unit 1511, the status assigned as the first byte of the received main circumference serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main circumference serial data are regarded as numerical values. The total (sum value) is calculated using the main control board 1310, and does this calculated sum value match the sum value assigned as the 3rd byte of the main peripheral serial data among the main peripheral serial data from the main control board 1310? is determining whether or not As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether or not the main peripheral serial data between the main control substrate 1310 and the peripheral control substrate 1510 has been affected by noise and changed to non-normal main peripheral serial data. be able to.

In step S1214, when the sum value, which is the third byte of the main-circumference serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, matches the sum value calculated in step S1212, the received main-circumference serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main peripheral serial data are stored in the received command storage area 1511cac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. (step S1216) and terminate this routine. This received command storage area 1511cac is used as a ring buffer, and the status allocated as the first byte of the main circumferential serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main circumferential serial data are It is stored in the 1511cac peripheral controller receive ring buffer. This "peripheral controller reception ring buffer" is a buffer that is used so that the end and the beginning of the buffer are connected. Remember. It should be noted that the peripheral control MPU 1511a receives the status assigned as the first byte of the main peripheral serial data and the status assigned as the second byte of the main peripheral serial data when storing in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer in step S1216. is stored in association with the mode assigned, and the sum value assigned as the third byte is discarded.

On the other hand, when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, the period in which 1-byte (8-bit) information of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 can be received is exceeded. Alternatively, in step S1214, if the sum value, which is the third byte of the main circumferential serial data already taken out from the reception buffer in step S1202, does not match the sum value calculated in step S1212, this routine is executed as it is. finish.

[16-1-5. Peripheral control unit blackout warning signal interrupt processing]
Next, as shown in FIG. 75, a power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 is input from the main control board 1310. Interrupt processing will be described. When this peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. signal) is input (step S1302). If the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is not input in this determination, the routine ends as it is.

On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is input in step S1302, it is determined whether or not 2 microseconds have passed (step S1304). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the timer started in step S1320 has passed 2 microseconds. If two macroseconds have not elapsed in step S1304, the routine returns to step S1302 to determine whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input. If the signal has been input, it is determined again in step S1304 whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed. In other words, in the determination of step S1304, it is determined whether or not the power failure warning signal has been input for 2 microseconds after the start of the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process, which is this routine.

If the power failure warning signal continues to be input for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing, which is the main routine, is started in step S1304, power saving processing is performed (step S1306). In this power saving process, the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is extinguished, the excitation of the motors and solenoids provided on the game board 5 is turned off, and various LEDs are extinguished. By suppressing the power consumption of the entire system of the pachinko machine 1, even if the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, stable operation is ensured only for a period of 20 milliseconds, which is the time during which the peripheral control MPU 1511a can operate.

Following step S1306, command reception standby processing is performed (step S1308). In this command reception waiting process, assuming that there are various commands being transmitted by the main control board 1310, a period of at least 17 milliseconds is set so that the peripheral control MPU 1511a can receive the commands being transmitted. It is supposed to wait. When the command is received, the above-described peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is started, and the received command storage area 1511cac (peripheral control unit reception ring buffer) of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. ) stores the received command.

Following step S1308, command backup processing is performed (step S1310). In this command backup process, the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies to Bank2 (1fr) at high speed, and the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies to Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc at high speed.

Briefly explaining the high-speed copying of the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. Copy the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) as a request factor of the control DMA controller 1511ac to the received command storage area included in Bank1 (1fr) of the first backup area 1511cb. Then, a predetermined byte (for example, , 1 byte) in sequence from the top address of the received command storage area contained in Bank 1 (1fr) of the first backup area 1511cb. copy the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the received command storage area included in Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb, and store in Bank0 (1fr) From the contents stored at the start address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the contents stored at the end address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr), each predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) is continuous. are copied in order from the first address of the received command storage area contained in Bank2 (1fr) of the first backup area 1511cb.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa stores the content stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) in the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and includes it in Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc. specified to be copied to the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr), and stored from the start address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the end address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr). 1511cc of the backup second area 1511cc. 1511aa transfers the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to the received command storage area included in Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc. Copy is specified, and the content stored at the start address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored at the end address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) is copied to a predetermined address. Bytes (for example, 1 byte) are successively copied from the start address of the received command storage area contained in Bank 4 (1fr) of the second backup area 1511cc.

After step S1310, it is determined whether or not a power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) has been input (step S1312). When the power failure warning signal is input in this determination, WDT clear processing is performed (step S1314). In this WDT clearing process, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af shown in FIG. 73 and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e shown in FIG. 72 so that the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset. .

On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal has not been input in step S1312, or following step S1314, the process returns to step S1312 to determine whether or not the power failure warning signal has been input. In other words, it is endlessly determined whether or not a power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is input. By endlessly continuing determination in this way, when a power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is not input in step S1312, the peripheral control MPU 1511a sends a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e. is not output, and the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset. On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is input in step S1312, WDT clear processing is performed in step S1314, and the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset. When the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset, the power-on processing of the peripheral control unit shown in FIG. 95 is started again.

As described above, when the input of the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) continues in the infinite loop in the determination in step S1312, the WDT clearing process is executed in step S1314 to perform the peripheral control immediately before the power failure occurs. The MPU 1511a is designed not to be reset. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1312 that the input of the power failure warning signal is canceled without being continued in the infinite loop, the WDT clear processing is not executed. The output of the clear signal is interrupted. As a result, even if the peripheral control unit blackout warning signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, is erroneously started due to noise or the like, and the noise is generated beyond the period of 2 microseconds and the judgment in step S1302 is passed, step If it is determined in S1312 that the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is not continued and canceled in the infinite loop, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset because the WDT clearing process of step S1314 is not executed. Therefore, such noise can be dealt with by automatically resetting.

[16-1-6. LOCKN signal history creation process]
Next, the LOCKN signal history creation process executed as one process of the drawing state information acquisition process of step S1110 in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 97 will be described. In this LOCKN signal history creating process, the history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 shown in FIG. 87 is created. As described above, the LOCKN signal is the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. When it is determined that the data is abnormal, it is a signal that is output to notify that effect. This is a signal output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the side effect receiver IC SDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

When the LOCKN signal history creation process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72, as shown in FIG. LOCKN-signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is read from the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak (step S1500). This LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is stored in 1 byte (8 bits: most significant bits B7, B6, B5, B4, B3, B2, B1, least significant bit B0, "B" represents a bit). The history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSD0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 is stored in the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak as LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST. remembered.

Following step S1500, it is determined whether or not there is a LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 (step S1502). In this determination, when there is a LOCKN signal from the door-frame-side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the door-frame-side effect receiver ICSDIC0 judges that the drawing data received from the door-frame-side effect transmitter IC1512d is abnormal data. , a transmission request for a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. On the other hand, when there is no LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is not abnormal (normal data). predetermined data for confirming (recovering) the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. It is determined that the transmission of the pattern (SYNC pattern) is not requested.

When there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 in step S1502, the LOCKN signal detection history information is shifted (step S1504). In this LOCKN signal detection history information shift process, when there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1500 is shifted to the highest bit B7←B6, B6←. B5, B5.rarw.B4, B4.rarw.B3, B3.rarw.B2, B2.rarw.B1, B1.rarw.least significant bit B0.

If the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted in step S1504, the least significant bit B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is set to 1 (step S1506), and this routine ends.

On the other hand, when there is no LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 in step S1502, shift processing of the LOCKN signal detection history information is performed (step S1508). In the shift processing of the LOCKN signal detection history information, the same processing as the shift processing of the LOCKN signal detection history information in step S1504 is performed. The signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is changed to the least significant bit B0 in such a manner that the most significant bit B7←B6, B6←B5, B5←B4, B4←B3, B3←B2, B2←B1, B1←least significant bit B0. , toward the most significant bit B7 by one bit.

If the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted in step S1508, the least significant bit B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is set to 0 (step S1510), and this routine ends.

In this manner, each time the LOCKN signal history creation process is executed, the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted by one bit from the least significant bit B0 toward the most significant bit B7, and then shifted to the least significant bit B0. Since a value of 1 or 0 is set, it is possible to create a history of the LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0.

[16-1-7. Connection failure determination process]
Next, a description will be given of the connection fault determination process executed as one process of the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral controller steady-state process of the peripheral controller power-on processing shown in FIG. In this connection failure determination process, based on the history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSD0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not there is a problem in the connection between the effect transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

72, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is read from the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak (step S1520). As described above, the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST stores the history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSD0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450. FIG. As described above, the LOCKN signal indicates that the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal data. When it is determined, it is a signal output to notify that effect. and to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

Subsequent to step S1520, it is determined whether or not there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSD0 (step S1522). This determination is to determine whether or not the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1520 matches the connection confirmation determination value. This connection confirmation determination value is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 1511b shown in FIG. has a value of 0, and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 have a value of 1. In step S1522, it is determined whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the connection confirmation determination value.

In step S1522, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read out in step S1520 do not match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the connection confirmation determination value, the peripheral control board 1510 is prepared. It is determined that there is no problem between the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. and exit this routine.

On the other hand, in step S1522, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read out in step S1520 match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the connection confirmation determination value, the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is defective. Then, the communication check counter CC-CNT is incremented by 1 (Step S1524). Each time this routine is executed, the communication check counter CC-CNT counts up the number of times it is determined in step S1522 that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is faulty. (to count the cumulative number of times). The communication check counter CC-CNT is set to 0 and reset when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. In some cases, the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT immediately before a power failure occurs is restored.

Following step S1524, it is determined whether or not the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the accumulated count upper limit value CC-LMT (step S1526). In this determination, when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the cumulative count upper limit value CC-LMT, the cumulative number of times it is determined that there is a failure in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is the cumulative count. While it is determined that the upper limit CC-LMT has not been reached, if the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not smaller (larger) than the accumulated count upper limit CC-LMT, a problem occurs in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. It is determined that the cumulative number of times determined to be in the state of having reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT.

In step S1526, when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the cumulative count upper limit value CC-LMT, that is, the cumulative number of times it is determined that there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is the cumulative number of times. If the upper limit value CC-LMT has not been reached, the communication error flag CC-FLG is set to 0 (step S1528), and this routine ends. On the other hand, in step S1526, when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not smaller (larger) than the accumulated count upper limit value CC-LMT, it is determined that there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. When the calculated accumulated number reaches the accumulated number upper limit value CC-LMT, the communication error flag CC-FLG is set to 1 (step S1530), and this routine ends. The communication error flag CC-FLG indicates that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is not established when the cumulative number of times it is determined that there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver reaches the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT. is a flag that indicates whether or not a problem has definitely occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. When the accumulated number of times determined to be in the state of being in the accumulated state has not reached the accumulated number upper limit value CC-LMT, the value is set to 0 respectively. The communication error flag CC-FLG is set to 0 and reset when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. In some cases, the value of the communication error flag CC-FLG immediately before a power failure occurs is restored.

[16-1-8. Connection recovery process]
Next, the connection recovery process executed as one process of the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 95 will be described. This connection recovery process is executed following the connection failure determination process shown in FIG. and to confirm (restore) the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. We will notify you to that effect.

When the connection recovery process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72, as shown in FIG. In the scheduler update process of step S1020, it is determined whether or not the schedule data for screen generation is being activated among the various schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. S1540). In this determination, in the scheduler update process, of the screen data arranged in time series that constitutes the schedule data for screen generation, the order of which screen data from the first screen data is to be output to the tone generator built-in VDP 1512a is indicated. Then, it is determined whether the pointer has been updated. In other words, in the scheduler update process, when the pointer is being updated, the presentation progresses according to the screen generation schedule data. When performance is completed along with the data and updating of the pointer is all completed, it is determined that the schedule data for screen generation is not activated. In addition, in this judgment, the period during which the startup screen is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, or the time period when the game board side effect display device 1600 is in a customer waiting state and a demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 is performed. It can be judged based on the schedule data for screen generation whether or not it is the period of time, and the start screen when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. When the game board side effect display device 1600 is in a customer waiting state and a demonstration is being performed by the game board side effect display device 1600, the process advances to step S1542 to be described later, while the startup screen when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the game board side. During the period displayed on the effect display device 1600, or when the game board side effect display device 1600 is not in the customer waiting state and the demonstration is performed by the game board side effect display device 1600 (simple state of waiting for customers), This routine is terminated as it is.

In step S1540, when the effect is progressing according to the schedule data for screen generation, that is, when the schedule data for screen generation is being activated, this routine ends as it is. When the presentation is completed and the pointer has been completely updated, that is, when the schedule data for screen generation has not been activated, it is determined whether or not the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is 0 (step S1542). 101. As described above, the communication check counter CC-CNT is set to the door frame side presentation counter provided in the peripheral control board 1510 in the determination of step S1522 each time the connection failure determination process shown in FIG. 101 is executed. Count up the number of times it is determined that there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. (count the cumulative number of times). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the number of times it is determined that there is a failure in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is even one.

If the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is 0 in step S1542, that is, if it has not been determined that there is a problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver even once, this process is performed as it is. While terminating the routine, if the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0 in step S1542, that is, if it is determined that there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, even once. If there is, it is determined whether or not the value of the communication error flag CC-FLG is 0 (step S1544). As described above, this communication error flag CC-FLG is set when the accumulated number of times that it is determined that there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver reaches the accumulated number upper limit value CC-LMT. A flag that indicates whether or not a problem has definitely occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. is set to 0 when the accumulated number of times that it is determined that there is a problem in the connection of , does not reach the accumulated number upper limit value CC-LMT.

When the value of the communication error flag CC-FLG is 0 in step S1544, that is, when it is determined that there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the accumulated number of times is the accumulated number upper limit value CC-LMT. If not, SYNC pattern output processing is performed (step S1546), and this routine ends. In this SYNC pattern output process, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the transmitter IC 1512d for door frame side effects provided on the peripheral control board 1510, so that the signal for door frame side effects provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is output. The transmitter IC 1512 d outputs a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) to the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC 0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 . This predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is stored in advance in the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and is output to the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0. It restores the connection between the transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

On the other hand, when the value of the communication error flag CC-FLG is not 0 (it is 1) in step S1544, that is, when there is definitely a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, communication error display processing is executed. (step S1548) and terminate this routine. In this communication error display process, the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. process to draw to For example, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, a message saying "There is a problem with the door frame side effect display device. Please call a clerk." Further, in the communication error display process, the period during which the startup screen is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, and the game board side effect display device 1600 in the customer waiting state are displayed. During the period, the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver LOCKN signal output request data is sent from the peripheral control MPU 1511a as an operation confirmation request for the door frame side effect display device 460, and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 is LOCKN. As a response signal to the transmission of the signal output request data, the LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal to the peripheral control MPU 1511a. It is determined that a problem has occurred in the door frame side effect display device 460, and a notification image to that effect (for example, "A problem has occurred in the door frame side effect display device. Please call a clerk.") is displayed in the game. In addition to performing processing to display in the display area of the board side effect display device 1600, an information sound (for example, "There is a problem with the door frame side effect display device.") is repeated from the speaker or the like provided on the door frame 3. Do the flow process. At this time, it is also possible to carry out a process of turning on all the LEDs for lighting decoration provided on the door frame 3 and various LEDs mounted on various decoration substrates provided on the game board 5 .

Next, the timing at which the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs the connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 74 will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

First, a brief description will be given of the decorative symbols variably displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. The variable display of the decorative pattern is executed by the unit steady processing etc., and the main control side of the main control side power on time processing shown in FIG. The first special lottery result drawn by the acceptance of the game ball to the first start port 2002 shown in FIG. When the result of the second special lottery drawn by receiving the game ball into the starting opening 2004 is "big hit", the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening and closing operation of the big winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. 8 is 1 round to 15 rounds. Up to 15 rounds in total, and in each round, within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), when game balls enter the big winning opening 2005 and the number of balls reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9 balls), The round is completed, and every time one game ball enters the big winning hole 2005, a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of game balls are paid out.

The first special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball to the first start port 2002, or the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball to the second start port 2004, from the main control board 1310 Based on the command, the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 controls the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, so that left side decorative symbols are displayed on the left side of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, and central decorative symbols are displayed in the center. Then, on the right side, the variable display of the right decorative pattern is started, and after a predetermined time has passed, the variable display of the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern is stopped, and the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery. The player can recognize the first special The first special lottery result or the second special lottery result can be confirmed even in the design or the second special design. When the left decorative design, the central decorative design, and the right decorative design are variably displayed, the left decorative design, the central decorative design, and the right decorative design become translucent to the extent that the background image can be visually recognized, and the left decorative design is displayed. The reels rotate from the upper left side to the lower left side of the area, the center decorative pattern from the upper center to the lower center of the display area, and the right decorative pattern from the upper right to the lower right of the display area. When the left decorative design, the central decorative design, and the right decorative design are stop-displayed, the left decorative design, the central decorative design, and the right decorative design correspond to the stopped-displayed left-hand decorative design, the central decorative design, and the right-hand decorative design. The left decorative design, the central decorative design, and the right decorative design are opaque so that the background image at the position is difficult to see. In this way, the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is stopped and started to be displayed in the first special symbol display device 1403 or the second special symbol display device 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 66, The left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern, which are displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and stopped, are synchronized.

Peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, the first special lottery result drawn by the acceptance of the game ball to the first start opening 2002, or the second lottery drawn by the acceptance of the game ball to the second start opening 2004 When receiving a command from the main control board 1310 to convey the result of the special lottery, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is controlled based on the received command, so that the game board side shown in FIG. 8 is displayed as shown in FIG. When the variable display of the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern is started in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (timing K0), the peripheral control unit steady state of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. In the scheduler update process of step S1020 in the process, the first screen among the screen data arranged in time series constituting the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. Since the pointer is updated to indicate which screen data is to be output to the built-in tone generator VDP 1512a from the data, that is, in the scheduler update process, when the pointer is updated, the data is displayed according to the schedule data for screen generation. Since the effect is in progress, the schedule data for screen generation is being activated, and while the schedule data for screen generation is being activated, that is, the variable display of the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern is started. 102 is executed in the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady-state processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. , the determination in step S1540 in the connection recovery process is such that the routine is forcibly terminated.

As a result, the communication check counters CC-CNT are counted during the period from the start of the variable display of the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 to the stop display. Even when the value is not 0, that is, between the connection (that is, the transmitter and (connection between the transmitter and the receiver), the SYNC pattern output processing of step S1546 in the connection recovery processing is not performed, even if it is determined that there is a failure in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. and the communication error display process of step S1548 in the connection recovery process is not performed. There is a problem with the side effect display device. Please call the store clerk." In addition to invalidating the LOCKN signal from the door-frame-side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the door-frame-side effect display device 460 displays an image based on the drawing data received by the door-frame-side effect receiver ICSDIC0 from the door-frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512d. display.

When the variable display of the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern is started and stopped in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (timing K1), the peripheral control section shown in FIG. 95 is turned on. In the scheduler update process of step S1020 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the hour process, the presentation is completed in accordance with the schedule data for screen generation set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. Since all the updates have been completed, that is, while the schedule data for screen generation has not been activated in the scheduler update process, and the schedule data for screen generation has not been activated, the power supply to the peripheral control unit shown in FIG. In the judgment of step S1540 in the connection recovery process shown in FIG. When the value of CNT is 0, that is, when it has not been determined that there is a failure in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the routine ends as it is, while the communication check counter When the value of CC-CNT is not 0, that is, when it is determined that there is a failure in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver even once, the process proceeds to step S1544 in the same process. When the value of the communication error flag CC-FLG is 0, that is, the accumulated number of times that it is determined that there is a failure in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the accumulated number of times upper limit value CC-LMT is reached. If not, the process proceeds to step S1546 in the same process, performs the above-described SYNC pattern output process, and terminates the routine. That is, when there is definitely a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the process proceeds to step S1548 in the same process, the above-described communication error display process is performed, and the routine ends. In other words, while the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver IC 1512d are displayed. If there is even one failure in the connection with ICSDIC0, that is, in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, and the failure occurs in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. When the accumulated number determined to be present does not reach the accumulated number upper limit value CC-LMT, the SYNC pattern output processing is always performed, so that the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, In other words, while processing is performed to restore the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the accumulated number of times that it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is faulty reaches the accumulated number upper limit value CC-LMT. (that is, there is definitely a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver), by always performing the communication error display process, for example, " A problem has occurred in the door frame side effects display device. Please call the store clerk." The LOCKN signal from the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0, which conveys that the data is valid, is validated.

In the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the variable display of the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern is started and stopped, and again the variable display of the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern is performed. During the interval period until is started, the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, so as described above, The LOCKN signal from the door-frame-side performance receiver IC SDIC0, which informs that the drawing data received from the door-frame-side performance transmitter IC 1512d is abnormal data, is validated, and the door-frame-side performance transmitter IC 1512d and the door-frame-side performance receiver IC DIC0 are validated. If there is even one failure in the connection with the receiver ICSDIC0, that is, in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the failure occurs in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. When the cumulative number of times determined to be is not reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, the SYNC pattern output processing is always performed, so that the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 In other words, while performing processing to restore the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the cumulative number of times it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is in a state of failure reaches the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT. When it reaches (that is, there is definitely a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver), the communication error display process is always performed, so that, for example, the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 A message "A malfunction has occurred in the effect display device on the door frame side. Please call a clerk." is displayed to notify the user.

When the variable display of the left decorative design, the central decorative design, and the right decorative design is started again (timing K2), as described above, the schedule data for screen generation is being activated, so the left decorative design and the central decorative design are displayed. , and until the right decorative pattern is stopped and displayed (timing K3), even when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0, that is, the door frame side presentation provided on the peripheral control board 1510 The number of times it is determined that there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 (that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver) is 1. Even if there are times, the SYNC pattern output process of step S1546 in the connection recovery process is not performed, and the process of recovering the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is not performed. The communication error display processing of step S1548 is not performed, and for example, the message "There is a problem with the door frame side effect display device. Please call a clerk." Therefore, the LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, which informs that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is abnormal data, is invalidated, and the door frame side effect display device. 460 displays an image based on the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d.

In this way, the variable display of the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern is started in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, and then stopped, and then the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern are displayed again. In the interval period until the start of the variable display of the pattern, the LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, which informs that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is abnormal data, is validated. On the other hand, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the door frame side effect transmitter is operated until the variable display of the left side decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern is started and stopped. The LOCKN signal from the door frame side rendering receiver IC SDIC0, which informs that the drawing data received from the IC 1512d is abnormal data, is invalidated. This is because the result of the stop display of the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is the most interesting information for the player. Since the player can determine whether or not a jackpot game state in which a Then, until the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed, the image of the effect drawn in the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 is disturbed due to the influence of noise, etc. and is not correct. Even if it becomes a state where drawing is not possible, instead of interrupting the effect in the middle and recovering the state where it can be drawn correctly, the left side decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the By stop-displaying the right decorative pattern, the drawing of the information that the player is most interested in is completed.

In this respect, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the startup screen on the game board side effect display device 1600 when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, and the customer waiting state. This is very different from the case where the LOCKN signal output request data is transmitted to the differential circuit 1512e provided on the peripheral control board 1510 during the period during which the game board side effect display device 1600 is performing a demonstration. This LOCKN signal output request data is used for the period during which the startup screen is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, or for the period during which the game board side effect display device 1600 is in a customer waiting state for a demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600. During the period of execution, it is transmitted from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, and is transmitted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450. This is sent as an operation confirmation request for the door frame side effect display device 460 in order to confirm whether or not there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

When the LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, is differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differentiation circuit 1512e provided on the peripheral control board 1510, the differential Two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal in the conversion circuit 1512e are input to the forced switching circuit 1512f provided in the peripheral control board 1510. FIG. The forced switching circuit 1512f performs circuit connection so as to transmit the two signals when two signals that are differentially differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal in the differential circuit 1512e are input. Two signals are transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 . When the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 of the liquid crystal module circuit 4450V provided in the effect display drive board 4450 determines that the received two signals are the LOCKN signal output request data, the LOCKN signal output request data is As described above, the data format is different from that of the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. Output to the control MPU 1511a. As a response signal to the transmission of the LOCKN signal output request data, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines that there is no problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver when the LOCKN signal is input, and the effect display drive board 4450 While it can be determined that no trouble has occurred, when the LOCKN signal is not input, a trouble has occurred in the effect display drive board 4450 assuming that a trouble has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. Then, a notification image (for example, "There is a problem with the door frame side effect display device. Please call a clerk.") is displayed on the game board side effect display device by controlling the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source. 1600, and by controlling the sound source built-in VDP 1512a and outputting a notification sound (for example, "There is a problem with the door frame side effect display device") to the audio data transmission IC 1512c A notification sound is emitted from a speaker or the like provided on the door frame 3 . As a result, the notification can be made by the notification image displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the notification sound repeatedly played from the speaker provided on the door frame 3 or the like. At this time, all the various LEDs mounted on various decoration substrates provided on the door frame 3 and various decorative substrates provided on the game board 5 may be turned on.

In this way, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 transmits the LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data, the forced switching circuit 1512f can receive the LOCKN signal output request data at the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. The circuit is connected so that the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, which has received the LOCKN signal output request data, outputs the LOCKN signal from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 to the peripheral control MPU 1511a as a response signal. Therefore, when the LOCKN signal is input, it can be determined that there is no failure in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver and that there is no failure in the door frame side effect display device 460. When the signal is not input, it can be determined that the door frame side effect display device 460 is malfunctioning because the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is malfunctioning. When the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines that the door frame side effect display device 460 is malfunctioning, the communication error display processing of step S1548 in the connection recovery processing of FIG. 102 can be executed as notification processing. It has become. In other words, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a discovers a problem with the door frame side effect display device 460, it can notify the store clerk or the like of the fact by executing the notification process. A store clerk or the like in the hall can very easily check whether or not the door frame side effect display device 460 has a problem before the player plays the game, and the check can be made without trouble. ing. Therefore, the malfunction of the door frame side effect display device 460 can be found without much effort.

As described above, the LOCKN signal indicates that the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal data. When it is determined that there is, it is a signal that is output to notify that effect. Since it is a signal output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) to confirm (restore) the connection between the ICSDIC0 and the transmitter and the receiver, it is used for door frame side effects. When the image transmitted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d cannot be normally received by the receiver IC SDIC0, a communication failure occurs between the image communication between the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 and the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. A LOCKN signal can be output to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 in order to notify that the drawn data is abnormal. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a, to which the LOCKN signal is input, sends a connection confirmation signal indicating the start of transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d to the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0. By outputting to the frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512d, it is possible to eliminate communication problems during image communication. In other words, the peripheral control MPU 1511a can detect a failure of the door frame side effect display device 460 due to a communication failure during image communication at an early stage, and can work on the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d to eliminate the problem. It's like Therefore, by finding and eliminating the problem of the door frame side effect display device 460, it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play.

Further, the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, which receives the image transmitted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and outputs it to the door frame side effect display device 460, receives the image transmitted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. When normal reception is not possible, the effect control microprocessor outputs a LOCKN signal, which is a communication problem occurrence signal, to indicate that a communication problem has occurred between the image communication between the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 and the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d. Since it is possible to output to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of a certain peripheral control unit 1511, the peripheral control MPU 1511a to which the LOCKN signal is input controls the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, causing a communication problem. This generated image is displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. can be displayed and notified. In other words, the peripheral control MPU 1511a quickly discovers a malfunction of the door frame side effect display device 460 due to a communication malfunction during image communication, and notifies the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 to that effect. Since the player can inform the pachinko hall clerk or the like or can directly inform the hall clerk or the like who happens to pass in front of the pachinko machine 1, the hall clerk or the like can be notified when the trouble occurs. You can start working on resolving the problem at an early stage. Therefore, by early detection and elimination of the malfunction of the door frame side effect display device 460, the player's desire to play can be suppressed.

Furthermore, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 controls the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect provided in the effect display drive board 4450 during the period from the timing K1 to the timing K2 (interval period). If there is even one failure in the connection between the side effects receiver ICSDIC0, that is, in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, and the failure occurs in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. A predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for activating the LOCKN signal and resolving communication problems during image communication when the accumulated number of times determined to be in the state of being in the state of being in the state of being in the state of accumulation does not reach the accumulated number upper limit value CC-LMT. is transmitted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d to the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d until the cumulative number of times reaches the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT. , can be output repeatedly. Thereby, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 fluctuates the first special symbol or the second special symbol game in the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 Since the connection confirmation signal can be repeatedly output only during the period in which the game is not progressed by starting and displaying the stop display, the communication failure can be resolved.

Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 controls the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect provided in the effect display drive board 4450 during the period from the timing K1 to the timing K2 (interval period). If there is even one failure in the connection between the presentation receiver ICSDIC0, that is, in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the failure occurs in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. When the accumulated number of times determined to be in the state of being in the state of being in the state of being in the accumulated state does not reach the accumulated number upper limit value CC-LMT, a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is generated to validate the LOCKN signal and eliminate the communication failure during image communication. A connection confirmation signal is sent from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d to inform the start of transmission to the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0. While continuing to output repeatedly, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts to fluctuate the first special symbol or the second special symbol game in the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 to play the game. , the output of the connection confirmation signal is stopped, and when the connection confirmation signal output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a is stopped and the connection confirmation signal is no longer input, the transmitter IC 1512d for door frame side effect stops outputting the connection confirmation signal. (SYNC pattern) to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, and the image generated by the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 can be output to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. It's like Thereby, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 fluctuates the first special symbol or the second special symbol game in the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 By continuing to output the connection confirmation signal, which is a signal for resolving the problem, only during the period in which the game is not progressing by starting and displaying the stop display, the communication problem can be resolved. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts the fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol game in the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 and stops displaying. Only during the period in which the progress of the game is not executed, when the connection confirmation signal is repeatedly output, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 displays the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405. Even if the first special symbol or second special symbol game is started to fluctuate and the progress of the game is started again, the distortion of the effect progressing on the display screen of the door frame side effect display device 460 (disturbance of the image) Every time the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 restarts and ends the progress of the game (every time (interval period) between timing K1 and timing K2), it can be made to go in the direction of elimination.

According to the embodiment as described above, the pachinko machine 1 comprises the main control board 1310 of FIG. 69 and the payout control board 951 of FIG. The main control board 1310 includes a first start port 2002 and a second start port 2002, which are starting regions in which game balls fired by the ball shooting device 650 toward the game region 5a defined on the game board 5 are provided in the game region 5a. A main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. 69, which is a game control microprocessor for controlling the progress of the game based on the fact that the ball has entered the mouth 2004, is installed. The payout control board 951 is a payout control microprocessor that controls the payout of game balls by the payout device 830 based on the prize ball commands shown in FIGS. 70 payout control MPU 952a is mounted.

The main control MPU 1310a, which is a game control microprocessor, has at least a RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 1310a. The main control built-in RAM can store game information even after the power is turned off.

The payout control MPU 952a, which is a payout control microprocessor, includes at least a RAM (payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU 952a. The payout control built-in RAM can store information on payout even after the power is turned off.

The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment further comprises an operation switch 954 shown in FIG. When the operation switch 954 is operated within a period from when the power is turned on to when the determination process of step S16 in the main control side power-on process of FIG. 92 is performed, the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM is erased. The main control MPU 1310a, which is a game control microprocessor, is output as a RAM clear signal in FIG. A RAM clear function that outputs the RWMCLR signal in FIG. When the operation is performed after the period during which the determination process of step S16 in the process at the time of power-on is performed (or the period during which the process at the time of power-on of the payout control unit is performed after the power is turned on) has passed, the error that occurred regarding the payout device 830 is canceled. 82 as an error cancellation signal for the game control microprocessor to the main control MPU 1310a which is the game control microprocessor and output to the payout control MPU 952a which is the payout control microprocessor. .

In this way, when the operation switch 954 is operated within a period during which the determination process of step S16 in the main control side power-on process of FIG. The RAM clear signal of FIG. 77 for erasing the information about is output to the main control MPU 1310a which is the game control microprocessor, and when the operation is performed within the period during which the payout control unit power-on process is performed from the time of power-on, A RAM clear function that outputs the RWMCLR signal of FIG. When the operation is performed after the period during which the determination process of step S16 is performed in the main control side power-on process (or the period during which the payout control unit power-on process is performed after the power is turned on), the payout device 830 An error release function to output to the payout control MPU 952a which is the payout control microprocessor without outputting the RWMCLR signal of FIG. Since it has both functions, it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 with two different functions, a RAM clear function and an error release function, respectively, by operating one operation switch 954 . Therefore, the RAM clear function and the error cancellation function can be provided while contributing to cost reduction.

[Sensor signal input section of panel relay board 4161]
The sensor signal input part of the panel relay board 4161 is connected to various detection sensors arranged on the game board, for example, the general winning opening sensor 4020, the first starting opening sensor 4002, the second starting opening sensor 4004, the count sensor 4005, and the vibration sensor 2405. , a circuit to which detection signals from the magnetic detection sensor 4024 and the like are input. Since the circuit configuration to which the detection signal from each detection sensor is input is the same, here, the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is taken as an example of the detection sensor, and the circuit to which the detection signal from the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is described. do.

Attempts to gain unfair profits by manipulating the falling state of game balls at will by bringing magnets (e.g., permanent magnets or electromagnets) closer to game balls hit into the game area in a game machine. There is no end to illegal gaming behavior.

In order to detect such fraudulent gaming behavior and suppress fraudulent behavior by means of light-emitting means, sound alarms, etc., magnetism detection sensors 4024 capable of detecting magnetism are provided corresponding to predetermined positions in the gaming area. there is

[Conventional magnetic sensor input circuit]
FIG. 104 is a circuit diagram showing an example of a conventional magnetic sensor input circuit arranged in a game machine. The gaming machine has a main control board 1310 and a panel relay board 4161 . As shown, the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is supplied with a voltage of +5V produced by a +5V production circuit 1310g.

The magnetic detection sensor 4024 is composed of a magnetic sensor MGS and a built-in transistor STR. The magnetic sensor MGS is composed of, for example, a magnetoresistive element or the like, and outputs a predetermined voltage (for example, +5 V) when it does not detect magnetism of a predetermined value or more, and outputs a voltage when it detects magnetism of a predetermined value or more. not (0V).

The base terminal of the transistor STR is connected to the output terminal of the magnetic sensor MGS, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR is grounded. A collector terminal of the transistor STR is connected via a connector CON1 to one end of a pull-up resistor IR0 provided on the panel relay board 4161, and +12V is applied to the other end of the pull-up resistor IR0. As a result, when the transistor STR is in the off state, the collector terminal of the transistor STR is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor IR0 (corresponding to the first voltage).

The transistor STR is turned on by a voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS when the magnetic sensor MGS is in a non-detecting state in which magnetism is not detected, and current flows from the collector terminal to the ground via the emitter terminal. When the magnetic sensor MGS detects magnetism, the transistor STR is turned off by stopping the output from the magnetic sensor MGS, and the current flow from the collector terminal to the emitter terminal is stopped.

The collector terminal of the transistor STR is connected to one end of the resistor IR1 in addition to being connected to the pull-up resistor IR0, and the other end of the resistor IR1 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0 is grounded, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR2, and +12 V is applied to the other end of the pull-up resistor IR2. As a result, when the transistor ITR0 is off, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor IR2.

The collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to the pull-up resistor IR2 and also to the base terminal of the subsequent transistor ITR1. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is connected to the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 through the connector CON2.

The main control input circuit 1310b is composed of a pull-up resistor NR1, a resistor NR2, and a transistor NTR1. One end of the pull-up resistor NR1 is connected to the collector terminal of the preceding transistor ITR1 of the panel relay board 4161 via the connector CON2. , +12 V is applied to the other end of the pull-up resistor NR1. As a result, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor NR1 when the transistor ITR in the previous stage is in the off state.

Further, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is connected to one end of the resistor NR2 in addition to being connected to the pull-up resistor NR1, and the other end of the resistor NR2 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1. The emitter terminal of the transistor NTR1 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor NTR1 is electrically connected to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

In the figure, the detection sensor section corresponds to the magnetic detection sensor 4024, and the voltage output section 4163 corresponds to the pull-up resistor IR0 connected to the magnetic detection sensor 4024 and to which +12V is applied. The detection circuit unit 4164 is a circuit composed of a pull-up resistor IR2 connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 and to which +12 V is applied, and a transistor ITR1 having a base terminal connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0. is applicable.

Further, in the preceding stage of the detection circuit section 4164, a sensor signal input section 4162 is configured by a circuit configured by a connector CON1, a voltage output section 4163, a resistor IR1 and a transistor ITR0. Thus, the panel relay board 4161 is provided with the sensor signal input section 4162 and the detection circuit section 4164 .

[Detection operation]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in a non-detecting state in which it does not detect magnetism, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR to turn on the built-in transistor STR. When the transistor STR is turned on, current flows to ground through the pull-up resistor IR0, the connector CON1, the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR. Also, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor STR is pulled down to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage). Further, since the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to the collector terminal of the transistor STR, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 is also pulled down to the ground side. This turns off the transistor ITR0.

When the transistor ITR0 is turned off, the transistor ITR1 is turned on by applying a voltage pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor IR2 to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1. When the transistor ITR1 is turned on, current flows to ground through the pull-up resistor NR1, the connector CON2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1.

Also, when the transistor ITR1 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1 connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is pulled down to the ground side, and the transistor NTR1 is turned off. A magnetism detection switch signal in which the logic of the collector terminal whose transistor NTR1 is turned off is LOW (OFF) is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

When the magnetic sensor MGS detects magnetism, the output of voltage from the magnetic sensor MGS is stopped, and no voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR, thereby turning off the built-in transistor STR. By turning off the transistor STR, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is pulled up to the +12V side. Further, since the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to the collector terminal of the transistor STR, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 is also raised to the +12V side (corresponding to the first voltage). This turns on the transistor ITR0.

When the transistor ITR0 is turned on, current flows to ground through the pull-up resistor IR2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0. Also, when the transistor ITR0 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is pulled down to the ground side, and the transistor ITR1 is turned off.

When the transistor ITR1 is turned off, a voltage pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor NR2 of the main control input circuit 1310b is applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1, thereby turning on the transistor NTR1. When the transistor NTR1 is turned on, the magnetic detection switch signal connected to the collector terminal of the transistor NTR1 and whose logic is HI (on) is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

The operation states of the magnetic sensor MGS, built-in transistor STR, transistor ITR0, transistor ITR1, and transistor NTR1 described above are shown in tabular form in FIG. When the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is disconnected from the panel relay board 4161, the transistor ITR0 is turned on, the transistor ITR1 is turned off, and the transistor NTR1 is turned on in the same manner as when the magnetic sensor MGS detects magnetism. .

By the way, when signal transmission is performed by a connector member, contact resistance occurs when the connector member corrodes or when dust enters the connector connecting portion. Connector members are classified into pin contact type and bellows contact depending on the shape of the contact portion terminal of the connector member. The gap is easier to open than the type. When the gap is opened, dust and the like are likely to enter from this portion.

Contact resistance is also generated when vibration is applied to the connector member. For example, when a game is played with a right hand, fine sliding wear occurs due to vibrations applied to the connector member from a specific portion of the game area where a large number of game balls flow down continuously in a concentrated manner. However, this may cause contact resistance.

Here, the conventional magnetic sensor input circuit when such contact resistance RR occurs in the connector member (connector CON1) electrically connecting the magnetic detection sensor 4024 and the voltage output section 4163 of the panel relay board 4161 operation will be described. For example, in FIG. 104, when a contact resistance RR occurs in the connector member, the contact resistance RR is indicated by a dashed line. Incidentally, the magnitude of the contact resistance RR is 100 to 1000 times greater than when the contact of the connector is normal.

As described above, when the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in a non-detection state in which it does not detect magnetism, the built-in transistor STR is turned on. When the built-in transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground through the pull-up resistor IR0, the contact resistor RR (connector CON1), the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR. As a result, although the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is pulled down to the ground side (corresponding to a second voltage), current flows through the contact resistance RR, causing the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistance RR to rise. is lifted. In FIG. 104, a connection point between the pull-up resistor IR0 and the resistor IR1 is illustrated as a black dot as a portion where the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistance RR rises.

In other words, a voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 by current flowing through the contact resistance RR generated due to the contact state of the connector portion. . Then, when the voltage raised by the contact resistance RR reaches a specified voltage between the base terminal and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0, the transistor ITR0 is turned on. Therefore, the transistor ITR0 may be turned on even though the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in the non-detection state. That is, the conventional sensor signal input section 4162 provided on the panel relay board 4161 may erroneously detect the signal of the sensor when the contact resistance RR occurs.

[Embodiment 1 of magnetic sensor input circuit]
FIG. 105 is a circuit diagram showing an example (Example 1) of the magnetic sensor input circuit arranged in the game machine of the embodiment. The magnetic sensor input circuit of Example 1 in this embodiment includes the magnetic detection sensor 4024, the connector CON1, the voltage output section 4163 of the panel relay board 4161, the detection circuit section 4164, and the main control board of the conventional magnetic sensor input circuit shown in FIG. The main control input circuit 1310b of 1310 has the same circuit configuration. Therefore, the same reference numerals are used for the same circuit configuration parts.

In addition, the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is installed in a plurality of places in the game area, for example, near the first start port 2002, the second start port 2004, the general winning port 2001, the big winning port 2005, the out port 1126, etc. become.

The difference between the magnetic sensor input circuit of this embodiment and the conventional magnetic sensor input circuit is that when the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in a non-detection state where the magnetic detection sensor 4024 does not detect magnetism, Even if a predetermined voltage higher than the voltage (second voltage) at which the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is pulled down to the ground side and lower than the first voltage is applied, the action of the predetermined voltage on the detection circuit section 4164 is provided, and the voltage output section 4163 and the detection circuit section 4164 are electrically connected via the voltage raising section 4166 .

The first embodiment is an example in which the voltage booster 4166 is composed of a Zener diode ZD0 having a Zener voltage higher than the predetermined voltage. Specifically, the cathode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 of the voltage output section 4163, and is connected to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 via the connector CON1 in the preceding stage of the connection. It is connected.

The anode terminal of Zener diode ZD0 is connected to the base terminal of transistor ITR0 arranged in the subsequent stage. +12 V is applied to the other end of the pull-up resistor IR0. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to one end of a pull-up resistor IR2 to which +12 V is applied to the other end in the detection circuit section 4164. Connected to the base terminal. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is connected to the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 through the connector CON2. A sensor signal input section 4162 is composed of the connector CON1, the voltage output section 4163, and the voltage raising section 4166. FIG.

[Detection operation when connector contact is normal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in a non-detecting state in which it does not detect magnetism, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR to turn on the built-in transistor STR. When the transistor STR is turned on, current flows to ground through the pull-up resistor IR0, the connector CON1, the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR.

As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor STR is pulled down to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage). Further, since the collector terminal of the transistor STR is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 via the Zener diode ZD0, the Zener voltage is higher than the second voltage, so the Zener diode ZD0 maintains a non-conducting state. Therefore, no voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 (0 V). This turns off the transistor ITR0.

When the transistor ITR0 is turned off, the voltage pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor IR2 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit section 4164, thereby turning on the transistor ITR1. When the transistor ITR1 is turned on, current flows to ground through the pull-up resistor NR1, the connector CON2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1.

Also, by turning on the transistor ITR1, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is pulled down to the ground side, and the transistor NTR1 is turned off. A magnetism detection switch signal in which the logic of the collector terminal whose transistor NTR1 is turned off is LOW (OFF) is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

When the magnetic sensor MGS section detects magnetism, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is stopped, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR disappears, thereby turning off the built-in transistor STR. By turning off the transistor STR, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is pulled up to the +12V side. Also, since the collector terminal of the transistor STR is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 via the Zener diode ZD0, a Zener voltage (corresponding to a first voltage) is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0. This turns on the transistor ITR0.

When the transistor ITR0 is turned on, current flows to ground through the pull-up resistor IR2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0. Also, when the transistor ITR0 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit section 4164 connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is pulled down to the ground side, and the transistor ITR1 is turned off.

When the transistor ITR1 is turned off, a voltage pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor NR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b is applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1, thereby turning on the transistor NTR1. When the transistor NTR1 is turned on, the magnetic detection switch signal connected to the collector terminal of the transistor NTR1 and whose logic is HI (on) is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

Then, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that such an abnormal state exists, in the above example, when it determines that the logic of the magnetic detection switch signal is HI, the main control unit MPU 1310a An error command is transmitted to the control unit 1511, and processing such as outputting a signal to that effect from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer is performed. In response to the error command, the peripheral control unit 1511 notifies the abnormality by means of the game board side effect display device 1600, the door frame side effect display device 460, an alarm lamp, sound, or the like.

[Detection operation when connector contact is abnormal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in a non-detecting state in which it does not detect magnetism, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR to turn on the built-in transistor STR.

When the built-in transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground through the pull-up resistor IR0, the contact resistor RR (connector CON1), the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR. As a result, although the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is pulled down to the ground side (corresponding to a second voltage), current flows through the contact resistance RR, causing the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistance RR to rise. is lifted. In FIG. 105, a connection point between the pull-up resistor IR0 and the Zener diode ZD0 is illustrated as a black dot as a location where the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistance RR rises.

That is, a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage is applied to the cathode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 by current flowing through the contact resistance generated due to the contact state of the connector portion. become. Even if a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage is applied, the Zener diode ZD0 maintains a non-conducting state because the Zener voltage is higher than the predetermined voltage. Therefore, no voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 (0 V). This turns off the transistor ITR0. That is, the voltage booster 4166 prevents the detection circuit 4164 from being affected by the predetermined voltage.

The operation of the subsequent detection circuit section 4164 and the main control input circuit 1310b is the same as the detection operation when the contact of the connector is normal.

This does not affect the voltage of the detection circuit section 4164 (because there is no voltage change). False detection can be prevented.

As in the conventional art, when an abnormality is detected by the magnetic sensor MGS, the main control MPU 1310a transmits an error command to the peripheral control unit 1511, and the peripheral control unit 1511 responds to the transmitted error command by , or that the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is disconnected, is notified by the game board side effect display device 1600, the door frame side effect display device 460, the warning display device, the sound, etc. do. Also, an error signal is output from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer.

[Embodiment 2 of magnetic sensor input circuit]
FIG. 106 is a circuit diagram showing an example (Example 2) of the magnetic sensor input circuit arranged in the game machine of the embodiment. The magnetic sensor input circuit of the second embodiment includes the magnetic detection sensor 4024, the connector CON1, the voltage output section 4163 of the panel relay board 4161, the detection circuit section 4164, and the main control of the main control board 1310 of the conventional magnetic sensor input circuit of FIG. The input circuit 1310b has the same circuit configuration. Therefore, the same reference numerals are used for the same circuit configuration parts.

In the second embodiment, the voltage booster 4166 has one end connected to the first resistor IR1, one end of which is connected to the voltage output section 4163, and the other end of the first resistor IR1, and the other end is grounded. and a second resistor IR3. Comparing the sensor signal input section 4162 of the second embodiment with the conventional sensor signal input section 4162 of FIG. It is different in that it is connected to the connection point with the base terminal of the transistor ITR0. That is, in the second embodiment, the voltage booster 4166 is an example configured with a resistor IR3 that causes a current to flow to the ground when the predetermined voltage is applied.

One end of the first resistor IR1 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 of the voltage output section 4163, and is connected to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 via the connector CON1 in the preceding stage of the connecting portion. ing.

In the detection circuit section 4164, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR1 to which +12V is applied to the other end, and is also connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is connected to the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 through the connector CON2. A sensor signal input section 4162 is composed of the connector CON1, the voltage output section 4163, and the voltage raising section 4166. FIG.

[Detection operation when connector contact is normal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in a non-detecting state in which it does not detect magnetism, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR to turn on the built-in transistor STR. When the transistor STR is turned on, current flows to ground through the pull-up resistor IR0, the connector CON1, the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR.

As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor STR is pulled down to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage). Also, since the collector terminal of the transistor STR is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0, a voltage pulled down to the ground side is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0. This turns off the transistor ITR0.

When the transistor ITR0 is turned off, the transistor ITR1 is turned on by applying a voltage pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor IR2 to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1. When the transistor ITR1 is turned on, current flows to ground through the pull-up resistor NR1, the connector CON2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1.

Also, by turning on the transistor ITR1, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is pulled down to the ground side, and the transistor NTR1 is turned off. A magnetism detection switch signal in which the logic of the collector terminal whose transistor NTR1 is turned off is LOW (OFF) is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

When the magnetic detection sensor 4024 detects magnetism, voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is stopped, and no voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR, thereby turning off the built-in transistor STR. By turning off the transistor STR, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is pulled up to the +12V side.

A voltage of +12 V is applied to a series resistor circuit composed of a pull-up resistor IR0, a first resistor IR1 of the voltage raising section 4166, and a second resistor IR3, and the pull-up resistor IR0 and the voltage raising section 4166 Current flows to ground through the first resistor IR1 and the second resistor IR3. A potential difference generated between both ends of the second resistor IR3 due to the current flowing through the second resistor IR3 is applied between the base terminal and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0, thereby turning on the transistor ITR0.

When the transistor ITR0 is turned on, current flows to ground through the pull-up resistor IR2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0. Also, when the transistor ITR0 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit section 4164 connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is pulled down to the ground side, and the transistor ITR1 is turned off.

When the transistor ITR1 is turned off, a voltage pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor NR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b is applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1, thereby turning on the transistor NTR1. When the transistor NTR1 is turned on, the magnetic detection switch signal connected to the collector terminal of the transistor NTR1 and whose logic is HI (on) is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

[Detection operation when connector contact is abnormal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in a non-detecting state in which it does not detect magnetism, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR to turn on the built-in transistor STR.

When the built-in transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground through the pull-up resistor IR0, the contact resistor (connector CON1), the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR. As a result, although the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is pulled down to the ground side (corresponding to a second voltage), current flows through the contact resistance RR, causing the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistance RR to rise. is lifted. In FIG. 106, a connection point between the pull-up resistor IR0 and the first resistor IR1 is illustrated as a black dot as a portion where the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistance RR rises.

In other words, a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage is applied to one end of the first resistor by current flowing through the contact resistance RR generated due to the contact state of the connector portion. It will be. This voltage is sufficiently lower than the voltage applied when the built-in transistor of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is turned off.

When a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage is applied to one end of the first resistor, current flows through the first resistor IR1, which in turn flows to ground through the second resistor IR3. That is, since the other end of the second resistor IR3 is grounded, the current due to the predetermined voltage which is higher than the applied second voltage and lower than the first voltage substantially drops to the ground and the second resistor IR3 is grounded. Almost no current flows into the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 in the subsequent stage of IR3. Therefore, the subsequent transistor ITR0 is not turned on. As a result, the subsequent transistor ITR0 is kept off. That is, the voltage booster 4166 prevents the detection circuit 4164 from being affected by the predetermined voltage.

The operation of the subsequent detection circuit section 4164 and the main control input circuit 1310b is the same as the detection operation when the contact of the connector is normal.

This does not affect the voltage of the detection circuit section 4164 (because there is no voltage change). False detection can be prevented.

[Embodiment 3 of magnetic sensor input circuit]
FIG. 107 is a circuit diagram showing an example (Example 3) of the magnetic sensor input circuit arranged in the gaming machine of the embodiment. The magnetic sensor input circuit of Example 3 includes the magnetic detection sensor 4024 of the conventional magnetic sensor input circuit of FIG. Circuit 1310b has the same circuit configuration. Therefore, the same reference numerals are used for the same circuit configuration parts.

In this embodiment 3, the voltage booster 4166 includes two transistors ITR0 and ITR2 that form a Darlington circuit set to an operating voltage higher than a predetermined voltage that is higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage. and resistors IR1, IR4 and IR5. Compared with the second embodiment described above, in the third embodiment, instead of the resistor IR3 whose other end is grounded, a series-connected resistor IR4 and a resistor IR5 are connected in parallel to the two transistors ITR0 and ITR2 forming the Darlington circuit. Connected. That is, in the third embodiment, the voltage booster 4166 is an example composed of a resistor IR4 and a resistor IR5 that cause a current to flow to the ground when the predetermined voltage is applied.

More specifically, one end of the resistor IR1 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 of the voltage output section 4163, and the other end of the resistor IR1 is connected to the base terminal of the preceding transistor ITR0 of the Darlington circuit. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR2 in the rear stage of the Darlington circuit, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR2 is grounded.

The other end of the resistor IR1 is connected to the base terminal of the preceding transistor ITR0, and also connected to one end of the resistor IR4, and the other end of the resistor IR4 is connected to the emitter terminal of the preceding transistor ITR0. One end of the resistor IR5 is connected to the emitter terminal of the preceding transistor ITR0, and the other end of the resistor IR5 is grounded.

That is, the resistor IR4 is connected in parallel between the base terminal and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0 in the preceding stage, and the resistor IR5 is connected in parallel between the base terminal and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR2 in the subsequent stage. The collector terminals of the two transistors ITR0 and ITR2 are connected to one end of a pull-up resistor IR2 to the other end of which +12 V of the detection circuit section 4164 is applied, and are connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1.

[Detection operation when connector contact is normal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in a non-detecting state in which it does not detect magnetism, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR to turn on the built-in transistor STR. When the transistor STR is turned on, current flows to ground through the pull-up resistor IR0, the connector CON1, the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR. Also, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor STR is pulled down to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage). Since the base terminal of the transistor is connected to the collector terminal of the transistor STR, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 is also pulled down to the ground side. As a result, the transistor ITR0 is turned off, and the transistor ITR2 is also turned off.

When the transistor ITR0 is turned off, the voltage pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor IR2 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit section 4164, thereby turning on the transistor ITR1. When the transistor ITR1 is turned on, current flows to ground through the pull-up resistor NR1, the connector CON2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1.

Also, by turning on the transistor ITR1, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is pulled down to the ground side, and the transistor NTR1 is turned off. A magnetism detection switch signal in which the logic of the collector terminal whose transistor NTR1 is turned off is LOW (OFF) is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

When the magnetic detection sensor 4024 detects magnetism, voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is stopped, and no voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR, thereby turning off the built-in transistor STR. By turning off the transistor STR, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is pulled up to the +12V side.

A voltage of +12 V is applied to a series resistor circuit composed of the pull-up resistor IR0, the resistor IR1 of the voltage booster 4166, the resistor IR4, and the resistor IR5. Current flows to ground through resistors IR4 and IR5. A potential difference generated between both ends of the resistor IR4 is applied between the base terminal and the emitter terminal of the preceding transistor ITR0 by the current flowing through the resistor IR4. As a result, the preceding stage transistor ITR0 is turned on.

When the preceding transistor ITR0 is turned on, a current flows to the ground through the pull-up resistor IR2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0, the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0, and the resistor IR5. Due to the current flowing through the resistor IR5, a potential difference generated across the resistor IR5 is applied between the base terminal and the emitter terminal of the subsequent transistor ITR2. As a result, the subsequent transistor ITR2 is turned on.

When the subsequent transistor ITR2 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR2, the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor ITR2, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR2. Also, when the transistor ITR2 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit section 4164 connected to the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor ITR2 is lowered to the ground side, and the transistor ITR1 is turned off.

When the transistor ITR1 is turned off, a voltage pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor NR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b is applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1, thereby turning on the transistor NTR1. When the transistor NTR1 is turned on, the magnetic detection switch signal connected to the collector terminal of the transistor NTR1 and whose logic is HI (on) is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

[Detection operation when connector contact is abnormal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in a non-detecting state in which it does not detect magnetism, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR to turn on the built-in transistor STR.

When the built-in transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground through the pull-up resistor IR0, the contact resistor RR (connector CON1), the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR. As a result, although the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is pulled down to the ground side (corresponding to a second voltage), current flows through the contact resistance RR, causing the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistance RR to rise. is lifted. In FIG. 107, a connection point between the pull-up resistor IR0 and the resistor IR1 is illustrated as a black circle as a portion where the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistance RR rises.

That is, a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage is applied to one end of the resistor IR1 by current flowing through the contact resistance generated due to the contact state of the connector portion. . This voltage is sufficiently lower than the voltage applied when the built-in transistor of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is turned off.

When a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage is applied to one end of resistor IR1, current flows through resistor IR1, which in turn flows to ground through resistor IR4 and resistor IR5. That is, since the other end of the resistor IR5 is grounded, most of the current due to the applied predetermined voltage drops to the ground, and most of the current flows to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 in the front stage of the Darlington circuit, which is the rear stage of the resistor IR1. do not flow. Therefore, the preceding transistor ITR0 is not turned on. In addition, the subsequent transistor ITR2 is not turned on. As a result, the two transistors ITR0 and ITR2 of the Darlington circuit remain off. That is, the voltage raising section 4166 avoids the action of the predetermined voltage on the detection circuit section 4164 .

The operation of the subsequent detection circuit section 4164 and the main control input circuit 1310b is the same as the detection operation when the contact of the connector is normal.

This does not affect the voltage of the detection circuit section 4164 (because there is no voltage change). False detection can be prevented.

Further, as shown in FIG. 109, a plurality of open collector type sensor signal input sections 4162 respectively connected to the plurality of magnetic detection sensors 4024 are connected in parallel to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit section 4164. ing. When any one of these sensor signal input sections 4162 detects magnetism and is turned on, the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit section 4164 is turned off.

Similarly, when any one of the connections between the magnetic detection sensor 4024 and the sensor signal input section 4162 is broken, the sensor signal input section 4162 corresponding to the broken magnetic detection sensor 4024 is turned on, and the detection circuit section 4164 is turned on. transistor ITR1 is turned off. Further, when there are a plurality of sensors, a voltage output section 4163 is provided for each of these sensors, and the voltage output section 4163 provided respectively is a transistor array having a plurality of Darlington circuits, for example, "TD62083AP" (commercially available, manufactured by TOSHIBA). (manufactured) can be used.

The sensor signal input unit 4162 provided on the panel relay board 4161 of the present embodiment has been described above, but the detection sensor that can be applied to the sensor signal input unit 4162 is not limited to the magnetic detection sensor 4024. Various sensors, for example, general prize winning opening sensor 4020, first starting opening sensor 4002, second starting opening sensor 4004, count sensor 4005, vibration sensor 2405, contact A sensor or the like can be applied.

[Application example to which the sensor signal input unit 4162 of the panel relay board 4161 can be applied]
The sensor signal input unit 4162 of the first to third embodiments described above prevents erroneous detection of the signal from the detection sensor due to contact resistance that occurs when the contact of the connector is abnormal. By the way, the applicable portion of the sensor signal input portion 4162 of Examples 1 to 3 is not limited to the contact portion of the connector.

As described above, in the gaming machine, there is a situation in which the detection sensors are installed at a plurality of locations in the game area (for example, they are arranged near the starting gate, the winning gate, the big winning gate, the out gate, etc.). . Therefore, the electrical connection between the detection sensor and the detection circuit section that detects the detection signal from the detection sensor (for example, the transistor of the panel relay board, etc.) can be made by various circuit patterns and wiring (harness) depending on the installation location of the detection sensor. is selected as appropriate. Regarding this point, it takes various forms depending on the model of the gaming machine.

By the way, the electrical parts (for example, connectors and detection sensors) and the wiring pattern that are used change over time, and the length of the wiring (harness) changes the resistance value, which changes the current flowing through the detection sensor. If the values are different, the circuit may not operate normally. In addition, the resistance value also changes when, for example, the type of detection sensor, location of arrangement, and the length of wiring (harness) are changed due to specification changes during development. Therefore, the current flowing through the detection sensor changes. Also, by changing the location of the detection sensor, extending the length of the harness, or changing the location where the harness is routed, there may be locations where noise is likely to be picked up, and the degree of influence of noise will also change.

If the current flows through the resistance value that changes due to such a cause, the current flowing through the detection sensor may differ from the originally designed value. That is, there is a possibility of erroneously detecting the signal of the detection sensor. In addition, the circuit may not operate normally due to the influence of noise, and there is a risk of erroneous detection of the signal from the detection sensor.

The sensor signal input unit 4162 having the voltage raising unit 4166 of the first to third embodiments is affected by aging of electrical components (for example, connectors and detection sensors) and wiring patterns used, and wiring (harness). Even if the resistance value changes depending on the length, erroneous detection of the signal from the detection sensor due to aging or noise can be prevented, and the detection circuit can be generalized. In addition, in the conventional example of FIG. 104 and the embodiment of FIG. 105, the changing resistance values are indicated by encircling two-dot chain lines.

In the following, a case where noise appears on the harness will be described as an example. Also, FIG. 110(A) shows the signal waveform input to the sensor signal input section 4162 in the conventional example, and FIG. 110(B) shows the signal waveform input to the sensor signal input section 4162 in the embodiment. The left side of FIG. 110A is the signal waveform input when there is no noise, and the right side is the signal waveform input when noise is present.

As shown in FIG. 110(A), in the conventional example, when there is no noise and the magnetism detection sensor 4024 does not detect magnetism, the level is low (0.4 V), and the transistor ITR0 in FIG. 104 is turned on. can be maintained at a level lower than the voltage (0.8V) applied. When the magnetism detecting sensor 4024 detects magnetism, it is at high level (12 V), which is higher than the voltage (0.8 V) at which the transistor ITR0 turns on, turning on the transistor ITR0.

On the other hand, in the conventional example, when noise is present, even when the magnetic detection sensor 4024 does not detect magnetism, the peak of the noise waveform reaches the voltage (0.8 V) at which the transistor ITR0 turns on, as indicated by the hatched portion. ), the transistor ITR0 is turned on and cannot be kept off. Therefore, the sensor signal is erroneously detected.

In addition to noise, for example, as shown in FIG. 110A, when overshoot occurs, erroneous detection does not occur when magnetism is detected. and the off state cannot be maintained. Therefore, the sensor signal is erroneously detected.

As shown in FIG. 110B, in the embodiment, the voltage booster 4166 raises the voltage that can be input to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 in FIG. It is In the detection operation, when there is no noise, when the magnetic sensor 4024 does not detect magnetism, it is at a low level (0.4 V), which is lower than the boosted voltage of 2 V, so the voltage at which the transistor ITR0 turns on. (0.8V) can be maintained. When the magnetism detection sensor 4024 detects magnetism, it is at a high level (12V), which is higher than the boosted voltage of 2V. 8V), and the transistor ITR0 turns on.

On the other hand, in the embodiment, when noise is present, the peak of the noise waveform exceeds the voltage (0.8 V) at which the transistor ITR0 turns on even when the magnetism detection sensor 4024 does not detect magnetism. is lower than the boosted voltage of 2V, the voltage booster 4166 maintains the off state. Therefore, the transistor ITR0 can be kept off. Therefore, erroneous detection can be prevented.

Next, for example, a case where a voltage rise occurs due to an increase in resistance value due to aging will be described as an example. Also, FIG. 111(A) shows the signal waveform input to the sensor signal input section 4162 in the conventional example, and FIG. 111(B) shows the signal waveform input to the sensor signal input section 4162 in the embodiment. The left side of FIG. 111(A) is the signal waveform that is input when normal, and the right side is the signal waveform that is input when voltage rises due to an increase in resistance due to aging.

In the conventional example, when a voltage rise occurs due to an increase in the resistance value due to aging, even if the magnetism detection sensor 4024 does not detect magnetism, the voltage input as indicated by the hatched portion is applied to the transistor. Since the voltage (0.8V) at which the ITR0 turns on is exceeded, the transistor ITR0 is kept on and cannot be kept off. Therefore, the sensor signal is erroneously detected.

On the other hand, in the embodiment, even if the voltage rises due to an increase in the resistance value due to aging, the input voltage does not turn on the transistor ITR0 when the magnetic detection sensor 4024 does not detect magnetism. Even if the voltage (0.8 V) is exceeded, the voltage booster 4166 maintains the OFF state because it is lower than the boosted voltage of 2V. Therefore, the transistor ITR0 can be kept off. Therefore, erroneous detection can be prevented.

Thus, since the sensor signal input section 4162 of Examples 1 to 3 includes the voltage raising section 4166, erroneous detection of the signal from the detection sensor due to aging or noise can be prevented. In addition, since the sensor signal input section 4162 is provided with a voltage raising section 4166, noise can be generated by changing the placement location of the detection sensor, extending the length of the harness, or changing the location where the harness is routed. The sensor signal input unit 4162 can prevent the influence of noise even if there is a place where the noise is likely to be picked up. Therefore, the circuit units (the sensor signal input unit 4162 and the detection circuit unit 4164) arranged on the panel relay board 4161 can be generalized. Therefore, it is possible to provide a margin for design changes during development.

[Sensor signal input unit 4162' of another embodiment]
The magnetic detection sensor 4024 shown in the first to third embodiments described above has a built-in transistor STR. The transistor STR is turned off. In other words, the sensor signal input unit 4162 uses a sensor whose input is low when magnetism is not detected and whose input is high when magnetism is detected. Alternatively, a magnetic sensor whose input is high when no magnetism is detected and whose input is low when magnetism is detected, in other words, a magnetic sensor which is turned off when no magnetism is detected and turned on when magnetism is detected It is also possible to use

FIG. 112 is a circuit diagram showing an example of a magnetic sensor input circuit of another embodiment. The magnetic sensor MGS is turned off when no magnetism of a predetermined value or more is detected, and is turned on when magnetism of a predetermined value or more is detected.

An input terminal of the magnetic sensor MGS is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 provided on the panel relay board 4161 via the connector CON1, and +12V is applied to the other end of the pull-up resistor IR0. Also, the output terminal of the magnetic sensor MGS is grounded.

As the voltage booster 4166, one of the first to third embodiments described above can be used. In this alternative embodiment, the voltage booster 4166 is an example of a Zener diode ZD0 having a Zener voltage higher than the predetermined voltage. Specifically, the cathode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 of the voltage output section 4163, and is connected to the input terminal of the magnetic sensor MGS via the connector CON1 in the preceding stage of the connecting portion.

The anode terminal of Zener diode ZD0 is connected to the base terminal of transistor ITR0 arranged in the subsequent stage. It should be noted that in another embodiment, the detection circuit portion 4164' is composed of the transistor ITR0. +12 V is applied to the other end of the pull-up resistor IR0. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1 is grounded, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is connected to the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 through the connector CON2, and is connected to a pull-up resistor NR having +12 V applied to one end. there is Here, the circuit configuration of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 is the same as in the first to third embodiments. In another embodiment, the voltage output section 4163 and the voltage raising section 4166 constitute a sensor signal winning section 4162', and the transistor ITR0 constitutes a detection circuit section 4164'.

[Detection operation when normal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS is in a non-detection state in which it does not detect magnetism, the magnetic sensor MGS is off. As a result, the voltage pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor IR0 is applied to the cathode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 (corresponding to the first voltage). Since this applied voltage is higher than the Zener voltage, the Zener diode ZD0 is turned on, and is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 of the detection circuit section 4164 via the anode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0, thereby turning on the transistor ITR0.

When the transistor ITR0 is turned on, a current flows to ground through the pull-up resistor NR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b, the connector CON2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 of the detection circuit section 4164', and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0.

Also, by turning on the transistor ITR0, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is pulled down to the ground side, and the transistor NTR1 is turned off. A magnetism detection switch signal in which the logic of the collector terminal whose transistor NTR1 is turned off is LOW (OFF) is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

When the magnetic sensor MGS is in the detection state of detecting magnetism, the magnetic sensor MGS is turned on. When the magnetic sensor MGS is turned on, a current flows to ground through the pull-up resistor IR0 to which +12 V is applied, the connector CON1, the input terminal of the magnetic sensor MGS, and the output terminal of the magnetic sensor MGS.

As a result, the voltage at one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 of the voltage output section 4163 is pulled down to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage). One end of the pull-up resistor IR0 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 through the Zener diode ZD0, so that the Zener voltage is higher than the second voltage, so the Zener diode ZD0 is kept off. Therefore, no voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 (0 V). This turns off the transistor ITR0.

When the transistor ITR0 is turned off, the transistor NTR1 is turned on by applying a voltage pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor NR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1. When the transistor NTR1 is turned on, the magnetic detection switch signal connected to the collector terminal of the transistor NTR1 and whose logic is HI (on) is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

[Detection operation in case of abnormality caused by change in resistance value]
When the magnetic sensor MGS is in a non-detection state in which it does not detect magnetism, the magnetic sensor MGS is off. As a result, the voltage pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor IR0 is applied to the cathode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 (corresponding to the first voltage). Since this applied voltage is higher than the Zener voltage, the Zener diode ZD0 is turned on, and is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 of the detection circuit section 4164 via the anode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0, thereby turning on the transistor ITR0.

At this time, even if there is noise on the harness from the magnetic sensor MGS, since the voltage applied to the cathode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 (corresponding to the first voltage) is higher, the Zener diode ZD0 There is no effect on the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit section 4164 via the anode terminal of the transistor ITR0, and the transistor ITR0 remains turned on. That is, the voltage booster 4166 prevents the detection circuit 4164' from being affected by the predetermined voltage.

On the other hand, when the magnetic sensor MGS is in the detection state of detecting magnetism, the magnetic sensor MGS is turned on. When the magnetic sensor MGS is turned on, a current flows to ground through the pull-up resistor IR0 to which +12 V is applied, the connector CON1, the input terminal of the magnetic sensor MGS, and the output terminal of the magnetic sensor MGS.

As a result, the voltage at one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 of the voltage output section 4163 is pulled down to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage). One end of the pull-up resistor IR0 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 through the Zener diode ZD0, so that the Zener voltage is higher than the second voltage, so the Zener diode ZD0 is kept off. Therefore, no voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 (0 V). This turns off the transistor ITR0.

At this time, even if there is noise on the harness from the magnetic sensor MGS, the predetermined voltage due to the noise applied to the cathode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 is higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage. It is a predetermined voltage, and this predetermined voltage is applied to the cathode terminal of Zener diode ZD0. Even if a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage is applied, the Zener diode ZD0 maintains the off state because the Zener voltage is higher than the predetermined voltage. Therefore, no voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 (0 V). This turns off the transistor ITR0. That is, the voltage booster 4166 prevents the detection circuit 4164 from being affected by the predetermined voltage. Note that the operation of the main control input circuit 1310b is the same as the detection operation in the normal case.

[Example in which a plurality of sensor signal input sections 4162 are arranged on a panel relay board 4161]
Next, FIG. 113 is a diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the invention according to claim 1. In FIG. As shown in FIG. 113, an example is shown in which a voltage output section 4163, a voltage raising section 4166, and a detection circuit section 4164 are arranged on the same board (on the panel relay board 4161). The present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a configuration in which at least one of the voltage raising section 4166 and the voltage output section 4163 and the detection circuit section 4166 are arranged on the same substrate may be employed. FIG. 114 shows a circuit configuration in which a voltage raising section 4166 and a detection circuit section 4164 are arranged on the same board (panel relay board 4161), and a voltage output section 4163 is arranged on another board (for example, a sensor board). FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example;

In FIG. 115, the voltage output section 4163 and the voltage raising section 4166 are arranged on the same board (panel relay board 4161), and the detection circuit section 4164 is arranged on another board (for example, the main control board 1310). FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a circuit configuration in which; In this manner, the arrangement positions of the voltage output section 4163 and the detection circuit section 4164 can be changed in various ways.

FIG. 114 is a diagram showing another example of the circuit configuration of the invention according to the embodiment of the present invention. The resistance value that changes with aging and wiring length includes the magnetic detection sensor 4024 or the magnetic sensor MGS, the wiring (harness) from these to the panel relay board 4161, and the connector CON1. The detection sensor unit arranged at a predetermined position on the game board 5a is composed of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 of the first to third embodiments in FIG.

Voltage output section 4163 outputs a first voltage when the detection sensor section is in the first state, and outputs a second voltage lower than the first voltage when the detection sensor section is in the second state. Output voltage. For example, in the circuit shown in FIG. 113, when the magnetic detection sensor 4024 does not detect magnetism, it outputs a low level voltage (for example, 0.4 V). Outputs a high-level voltage (eg, 12 V) when the

The detection circuit unit 4164 switches ON/OFF of output of the detection signal according to the first voltage or the second voltage output from the voltage output unit 4163 . Since the detection circuit unit 4164 of FIG. 113 uses the detection circuit unit 4164 described in the first to third embodiments, the pull-up resistor IR2 pulled up to +12 V is connected to the front stage of the base terminal of the transistor ITR1. ing.

Then, the first voltage (for example, 12 V in each embodiment) higher than the second voltage (for example, 0.4 V in each embodiment) is applied to the subsequent stage of the voltage output section 4163. Even if a predetermined voltage (a voltage of 0.8 V or more and less than 2.0 V is shown in FIG. 111 as an example) lower than the predetermined voltage is applied, the detection circuit unit 4164 is prevented from being affected by the predetermined voltage. A voltage booster 4166 is provided.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 113, one detection circuit section 4164, a plurality of voltage output sections 4163 and a plurality of voltage raising sections 4166 are arranged on the same board (on the panel relay board 4161). . In this example, the sensor signal input section 4162 is configured by the voltage output section 4163 and the voltage raising section 4166 arranged in the subsequent stage of the voltage output section 4163 . Also, each of the plurality of voltage raising units 4166 , . . . is electrically connected in parallel to one detection circuit unit 4164 .

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 113, a plurality of open-collector type sensor signal input sections 4162 connected to each of the plurality of magnetic detection sensors 4024 or magnetic sensors MGS are connected to the base of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit section 4164. Multiple terminals are connected in parallel. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is connected to the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 through the connector CON2.

In FIG. 113, when any one of these sensor signal input sections 4162 detects magnetism and is turned on, the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit section 4164 is turned off, thereby turning on the transistor NTR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b. is. Therefore, the detection signal can be detected without erroneously detecting any of the plurality of detection sensor units. Using the sensor signal input section 4162 having the voltage raising section 4166 in this way eliminates the need to consider the resistance value that changes as shown. Therefore, a plurality of sensor signal input units 4162 can be integrated on one board (on the panel relay board 4161), and the panel relay board 4161 can be commonly used (generalized) in various types of gaming machines. becomes possible. Therefore, it contributes to the reduction of man-hours related to design changes and manufacturing during development.

FIG. 116 shows an example in which a plurality of magnetic sensors MGS of another embodiment described with reference to FIG. Further, in FIG. 116, it is configured with a magnetic sensor MGS of another embodiment. In another example of FIG. 116, when the magnetic sensor MGS detects magnetism (the magnetic sensor MGS is on), the voltage output unit 4163 outputs a low-level voltage (for example, 0.4 V), while the magnetic sensor When the MGS does not detect magnetism (the magnetic sensor MGS is off), the voltage output section 4163 outputs a high-level voltage (eg, 12V).

On the other hand, in FIG. 116, since the detection circuit section 4164' described in another embodiment is used, the difference is that there is no pull-up resistor IR2 pulled up to +12V. The collector terminal of transistor ITR0 is pulled up to +12V by pull-up resistor NR1.

In FIG. 116, when any one of these magnetic sensors MGS detects magnetism and is turned on, the transistor ITR0 of the detection circuit section 4164' is turned off, thereby turning on the transistor NTR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b. is.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the control of game progress and effects will be summarized below.

As described above, the main control board 1310 executes various processes for controlling the pachinko machine 1 as a whole, and outputs various control signals (control commands) according to the results of the processes. In addition, the peripheral control board 1510 is based on the control signal (control command) output by the main control board 1310, the display mode of the effect display device 1600 (design, various background images, characters, display images such as characters, etc.), It controls the display mode and operation mode of various members (the performance operation unit 400, movable members, etc.) that contribute to the performance.

In particular, the main control board 1310 performs a special symbol process every time an interrupt process is performed. In this special control process, first, the first and second start opening winning process is performed. In this first and second starting hole winning process, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the starting hole, and when it is determined that it has won, the processing of increasing the number of reservations on the corresponding special symbol side by 1, etc. done.

If the processing flag is 0 when finishing the first and second starting opening winning processing, the fluctuation start processing is executed. In this fluctuation start process, on the condition that the number of reservations is 1 or more, the jackpot determination in the pending state is digested and executed, and after memorizing the result of this jackpot determination (hitting or losing, its type, etc.) , update the processing flag to "1".

On the other hand, if the processing flag is 1 when finishing the first and second start opening winning processing, the variation pattern setting processing is executed. In this variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern of the special symbol (identification symbol) displayed on the first special symbol display device or the second special symbol display device based on the stored result of the big hit determination and the current game state ( After determining and setting the fluctuation time from the start of the variable display of the special pattern until the stop display, etc.) and the stop pattern (jackpot pattern, losing pattern, etc.), the processing flag is updated to "2".

On the other hand, if the processing flag is 2 when the first and second starting opening winning processing is finished, the processing during fluctuation is executed. In this process during fluctuation, the fluctuation time determined and set in the fluctuation pattern setting process is monitored by a timer, and the fluctuation display of the special design in the first special design indicator or the second special design indicator based on the timeout. to stop After that, when the result of the big hit determination stored in the variation start process is a big win, the process selection flag is updated to "3", and when the result of the big win determination stored in the change start process is not a big win (loss). , the process selection flag is updated to "0". That is, in this case, in the next interrupt process, the fluctuation start process is restarted.

On the other hand, if the processing flag is 3 when the first and second starting opening winning processing is finished, the jackpot game processing is executed. In this jackpot game processing, a condition device, which is one of the conditions for executing the jackpot game, is operated to set the mode of the jackpot game (for example, the number of rounds) determined based on the type of jackpot won, Based on this, the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing member 2106 is controlled. In addition, when the jackpot game ends, processing is performed to stop the operation of the condition device, and when the type of the jackpot won is a special type, it is controlled to be in an advantageous state such as a time-saving state or a variable probability state. After updating the game state flag as shown, the processing flag is updated to "0". That is, in this case, in the next interrupt process, the process is restarted from the fluctuation start process.

As the variation pattern, a plurality of types of variation patterns are stored. The variation pattern determines the time from the start to the end of the symbol variation of the special symbol, and the effect that appears in the effect display device 1600 by transmitting the information to the peripheral control board 1510. It can determine the type of pattern. In this embodiment, the plurality of types of variation patterns can be classified into a variation pattern for big hit variation, a variation pattern for loss reach variation, and a variation pattern for loss variation. The big win variation is a change that is performed when the result of the big win determination is a big win, and in the performance display device 1600, after the ready-to-win performance, the variable display of the decorative pattern finally develops so that the big win pattern is fixed and stopped. The effect to be performed is executed. The loss reach variation is a variation that is performed when the result of the big hit determination is a loss and it is determined that the reach is performed by the reach determination based on the reach random number. An effect is executed such that the variable display of the symbols is finally deviated and the symbols are fixed and stopped. The loss variation is a variation that is performed when the result of the big hit determination is a loss and it is not determined to perform the reach in the reach determination based on the reach random number, and the effect display device 1600 does not go through the reach effect. , an effect is executed in which the variable display of the decorative symbols is developed so that the finally lost symbols are fixed and stopped. Further, the variation pattern is defined so as to be able to specify which variation pattern is the first special symbol side or the second special symbol side.

That is, the peripheral control board 1510 acquires the game information such as the result of the big hit determination from the main control board 1310 and refers to it, thereby making it possible to appear such a variation pattern of decorative symbols. In addition, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to causing the effect display device 1600 to appear a variation pattern of decorative symbols based on the acquired game information, the effect display (background and reserved image) related to the degree of expectation is changed, and the effect It executes control to change the mode (display and movement) in the operation unit 400 and to operate movable members such as the back and bottom movable effect unit 3100 .

In addition, the peripheral control board 1510 can acquire operation information on the operation button 410 and operation information of the player in the vicinity of the opening window, and can also execute control related to effects according to these information.

Here, the principle of acquiring operation information in the vicinity of the opening window will be described. FIG. 119 is a schematic diagram for explaining the principle of acquiring operation information in the vicinity of the opening window. These are shown schematically. 120 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 119. FIG.

That is, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the game board 5, which is housed in the main body frame 4 and has the game area 5a in which game balls flow down, and the game area 5a are made visible. A door frame 3 having an opening window and provided to be openable and closable with respect to the body frame 4 is provided. As shown in FIGS. 119 and 120, the door frame 3 is provided with a reflective vertical wall portion 33 which is erected along the outer circumference of the opening window and is formed so as to be able to reflect light on at least the inner surface thereof. It is Note that the opening window is a portion of the through hole 111 that is on the front side (front side) of the glass plate 192 .

Here, the reflecting standing wall portion 33 is provided as a frame decoration. More specifically, the reflective vertical wall portion 33 is formed by a lower reflective vertical wall portion 338 formed by the lower tray unit base 323 , a left reflective vertical wall portion 538 formed by the left unit base 531 , and a right unit base 551 . These members are arranged in a substantially U-shape along the outer peripheral edge of the opening window (a mode in which the reflecting wall portion is not installed on the upper side of the opening window). It is composed by The inner surfaces of the lower reflective vertical wall portion 338, the left reflective vertical wall portion 538, and the right reflective vertical wall portion 568 are all substantially perpendicular to one specific virtual plane P (FIG. 120). It is provided so as to serve as a light reflecting surface.

According to such a configuration, none of the lower reflective wall portion 338, the left reflective wall portion 538, and the right reflective wall portion 568 are provided among the reflective wall portions 33 formed in a substantially U-shape. The part (upper side of the opening window) is defined as "light from a predetermined light source outside the outer circumference of the opening window travels on the above-mentioned one specific virtual plane P and is taken into the outer circumference of the opening window, and is eventually reflected upright wall part It functions as a first portion that enables "the light reflected by the reflective vertical wall portion 33 to travel on the above-mentioned one specific virtual plane P and travel outside the outer periphery of the opening window. It will also function as a second part that makes it possible to "make it detectable".

Furthermore, in the reflective vertical wall portion 33 according to this embodiment, one reflecting wall portion straddles the inner surfaces of the three separate members (the lower reflective vertical wall portion 338, the left reflective vertical wall portion 538, and the right reflective vertical wall portion 568). A structure in which a member 36 (e.g., a reflective seal) is attached is adopted, so that the reflective performance of the reflective vertical wall portion 33 including the joints of three separate members is suitably secured.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 119, a left side base 572a (see FIG. 23) is provided on the upper left side of the door frame 3 outside the outer periphery of the opening window. In the internal space 3435a, a left outer peripheral light emitting portion 34a and a left outer peripheral outer light detecting portion 35a are provided. The left side base 572a itself is provided by a member having extremely low (or zero) light transmittance.

Here, the internal space 3435a is a space including the one specific virtual plane P that intersects with the lower reflective vertical wall portion 338, the left reflective vertical wall portion 538, and the right reflective vertical wall portion 568, and is provided with an opening window. It is provided as a space that is opened only toward the side so that light can travel toward the opening window side and light from the opening window side is taken in. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, while such an internal space 3435a is provided behind the left upper speaker 573, in order to suppress fraudulent acts from behind the speaker 573, A transmissive member 3436a is provided which is designed to have extremely high transmittance and very little influence on the traveling direction of light.

Further, the left outer peripheral outer light emitting portion 34a is unitized with the left outer peripheral outer light detecting portion 35a, and emits light toward a wide range of at least the side on which the opening window is provided on the one specific virtual plane P. is provided so that it can proceed.

Further, the left outer peripheral ambient light detection section 35a is unitized with the left outer peripheral outer light emitting section 34a, and is capable of detecting light from the side where the opening window is provided on at least the one specific virtual plane P. It is designed to be

According to such a configuration, the light from the left outer peripheral outer light emitting portion 34a is reflected by the reflective vertical wall portion 33 after proceeding toward the opening window side, and becomes the reflected light from the reflective vertical wall portion 33, and becomes the internal space 3435a. be incorporated into In this regard, in the internal space 3435a, the left side base 572a allows only the light from the opening window side to be taken in, so that external disturbances are preferably suppressed, while the light from the left outer peripheral outer light emitting portion 34a The light emitted and reflected by the reflecting vertical wall portion 33 can be detected by the left outer peripheral external light detecting portion 35a.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 119, a right side base 572b (see FIG. 23) is provided on the upper right side of the door frame 3 outside the outer periphery of the opening window. In the internal space 3435b, a right outer peripheral light emitting portion 34b and a right outer peripheral outer light detecting portion 35b are provided. The right side base 572b itself is also made of a member with extremely low (or zero) light transmittance.

Here, like the internal space 3435a, the internal space 3435b is a space that includes the one specific virtual plane P that intersects with the lower reflective vertical wall portion 338, the left reflective vertical wall portion 538, and the right reflective vertical wall portion 568, respectively. and is provided as a space that is opened only toward the side where the opening window is provided so that light can travel toward the opening window side and light from the opening window side is taken in. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, while providing such an internal space 3435b behind the right upper speaker 573, in order to suppress fraudulent acts from the back of the speaker 573, there is a gap between the opening window and the opening window. A transmissive member 3436b designed to have extremely high transmittance and extremely low influence on the traveling direction of light is provided.

In addition, the right outer peripheral outer light emitting portion 34b is unitized with the right outer peripheral outer light detecting portion 35b, and emits light over a wide range of at least the side of the one specific virtual plane P on which the opening window is provided. is provided so that it can proceed.

In addition, the right outer peripheral ambient light detection section 35b is unitized with the right outer peripheral outer light emitting section 34b, and is capable of detecting light from the side where the opening window is provided on at least the one specific virtual plane P. It is designed to be

According to such a configuration, the light from the right outer peripheral outer light emitting portion 34b is reflected by the reflective vertical wall portion 33 after traveling toward the opening window side, and becomes the reflected light from the reflective vertical wall portion 33, and becomes the internal space 3435b. be incorporated into In this respect, in the internal space 3435b, the right side base 572b allows only the light from the opening window side to be taken in, so that disturbance from the right outer peripheral outer light emitting portion 34b is preferably suppressed. The light emitted and reflected by the reflecting vertical wall portion 33 can be detected by the right outer peripheral external light detecting portion 35b.

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the area ( 120) functions as a special operation receiving portion 3333 capable of detecting an operation by the player, and the mode of operation of the player with respect to this special operation receiving portion 3333 is determined. Effect control according to the determination is executable.

For example, when the special operation receiving portion 3333 is not operated by the player, the light emitted from the left outer peripheral outer light emitting portion 34a in a wide angular range is not blocked by any physical object, and the reflecting standing wall portion 33 , (various angles on at least one specific virtual plane P), and travel toward the left outer peripheral ambient light detection section 35a. That is, in the left outer peripheral ambient light detection unit 35a, the reflected light from such various angles is detected by a plurality of light receiving elements (at least a plurality of light receiving elements arranged on one specific virtual plane P) using an optical lens or the like. , and based on the separate detection signal, special operation receiving section 3333 outputs information to peripheral control board 1510 to the effect that no physical object exists.

Also, at this time, the light emitted from the right outer peripheral outer light emitting portion 34b in a wide angle range is not blocked by any physical object, and the light is emitted at various angles (at least on at least one specific virtual plane P) on the reflecting vertical wall portion 33. angle) and travels toward the right outer peripheral external light detection section 35b. That is, the right outer peripheral ambient light detection unit 35b also uses an optical lens or the like to detect reflected light from such various angles by using a plurality of light receiving elements (at least a plurality of light receiving elements arranged on a specific virtual plane P). , and based on the separate detection signal, special operation receiving section 3333 outputs information to peripheral control board 1510 to the effect that no physical object exists.

On the other hand, when the special operation receiving portion 3333 is operated by the player in the manner shown in FIG. The light is blocked by the physical object), and only the light other than the light directed in the blocked direction (angular range) becomes the reflected light from the reflecting vertical wall portion 33 and travels toward the left outer peripheral external light detection portion 35a. That is, in this case, the left outer circumference outside light detection section 35a detects the light from the left outer circumference outside light emitting section 34a based on the information from the plurality of light receiving elements (the plurality of light receiving elements arranged on at least one specific virtual plane P). By determining the direction (angle) and the size (angle range) in which the light emitted from the outside is blocked, the physical It outputs information to the peripheral control board 1510 as to whether the object exists.

At this time, part of the light emitted in a wide angular range from the right outer circumference outer light emitting portion 34b is also blocked by the player's finger (physical object), and the light directed in the blocked direction (angular range). Only the light other than the above becomes reflected light from the reflecting vertical wall portion 33 and travels toward the right outer peripheral external light detecting portion 35b. That is, in this case, the right outer circumference outside light detection section 35b detects the light from the right outer circumference outside light emitting section 34b based on the information from the plurality of light receiving elements (the plurality of light receiving elements arranged on at least one specific virtual plane P). By determining the blocked direction (angle) and the size (angle range) of the light emitted from the above-mentioned outer peripheral light emitting portion 34b, the physical It outputs information to the peripheral control board 1510 as to whether the object exists.

The peripheral control board 1510 acquires and analyzes the information from the left outer peripheral ambient light detection section 35a and the right outer peripheral ambient light detection section 35b and analyzes them, thereby enabling the special operation receiving section 3333 to detect physical In addition to information on whether an object exists (whether an operation has been performed on the special operation receiving section 3333), if a physical object exists in the special operation receiving section 3333, its coordinate position (x, y) and size It will be possible to obtain information related to As will be described later, the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment acquires such information periodically. Operation gestures such as changes can be determined, and production control is executed according to the determination.

Note that these analysis processes do not necessarily have to be performed on the side of the peripheral control board 1510, and may be performed by an external means that acquires information from the left outer peripheral ambient light detection section 35a and the right outer peripheral ambient light detection section 35b. The peripheral control board 1510 may acquire the analysis results from the external means, or the external means and the peripheral control board 1510 may share the analysis results.

In addition, the light emission from the left outer peripheral light emitting portion 34a and the light emission from the right outer outer peripheral light emitting portion 34b are set in a blinking mode, respectively, so that the left outer outer peripheral light emitting portion 34a is in a light emitting state and the right outer outer peripheral light emitting portion 34b is in an extinguished state. A certain period and a period in which the left outer peripheral light emitting portion 34a is in the off state and the right outer outer peripheral light emitting portion 34b is in the light emitting state may alternately occur. That is, in this case, the reflected light when the left outer peripheral light emitting portion 34a is in the light emitting state is detected by the left outer peripheral outer light detecting portion 35a side, and the reflected light when the right outer outer peripheral light emitting portion 35a is in the light emitting state is detected by the right outer peripheral light emitting portion 35a. If the external light detection section 35b detects and analyzes the information based on the information, the light from the left outer peripheral outer light emitting section 34a and the light from the right outer outer peripheral light emitting section 34b do not interfere with each other. Accordingly, it is expected that detection information with higher accuracy can be obtained.

Further, the light emission from the left outer periphery outer light emitting portion 34a and the light emission from the right outer outer periphery light emitting portion 34b are set in a blinking mode, respectively, and the left outer outer periphery light emitting portion 34a is in a light emitting state and the right outer outer periphery light emitting portion 34b is in an extinguished state. a period during which the left outer peripheral light-emitting portion 34a is in the off state and the right outer peripheral outer light-emitting portion 34b is in the light-emitting state; A cycle in which periods in the off state occur sequentially may be repeated. That is, in this case, the reflected light when the left outer peripheral light emitting portion 34a is in the light emitting state is detected by the left outer peripheral outer light detecting portion 35a side, and the reflected light when the right outer outer peripheral light emitting portion 35a is in the light emitting state is detected by the right outer peripheral light emitting portion 35a. Detected by the external light detection section 35b side, the offset amount when the left outer peripheral outer light emitting section 34a and the right outer peripheral outer light emitting section 35a are in the off state is also detected and analyzed based on this information, Interference between the light from the left outer peripheral outer light emitting portion 34a and the light from the right outer outer peripheral light emitting portion 34b is eliminated, and the detected offset can be eliminated before making a determination, which increases accuracy accordingly. It becomes expected to obtain high detection information.

Also, visible light may be used as the light emitted from the left outer peripheral light emitting portion 34a and the right outer peripheral outer light emitting portion 34b. However, in the pachinko machine 1, in view of the fact that effects are performed using light at various locations, using invisible light rays such as infrared rays is effective in preventing disturbance from these effect lights and the effects of the effect light. It is more desirable in suitably suppressing the bad influence on.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, "light from a predetermined light source outside the outer periphery of the opening window travels on the above-mentioned one specific virtual plane P and is taken into the outer periphery of the opening window. a first portion that enables the light reflected by the standing reflecting wall portion 33 to be reflected by the standing reflecting wall portion 33; The second portion that enables the "detection" is provided as the same portion of the reflective vertical wall portion 33 formed in a substantially U-shape. However, a plurality of regions in which light is permitted to travel between the inside and outside of the outer circumference of the opening window are provided on the reflecting vertical wall portion 33, and the outer circumference light emitting portion and the outer circumference outside light detection portion are separately provided in these areas. and may be arranged respectively.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the reflecting vertical wall portion 33 is formed in a substantially U-shape with an upper opening. You may make it form the reflecting vertical wall part 33 also in the peripheral edge between. However, it is preferable to set the opening direction of the internal space 3435a and the internal space 3435b downward in order to prevent disturbance caused by direct light from illumination. .

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, by using the left outer peripheral light emitting portion 34a and the left outer peripheral outer light detecting portion 35a, and the right outer peripheral outer light emitting portion 34b and the right outer peripheral outer light detecting portion 35b, special Although the operation on the operation receiving portion 3333 is made detectable, the present invention is not limited to this. In other words, any structure may be used as long as the operation of the special operation receiving portion 3333 can be detected. It may be detected by a photodetector and the coordinates (x, y) and size of the physical object may be determined from the detection result.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the light from the outer peripheral light emitting portions 34 (the left outer peripheral outer light emitting portion 34a and the right outer outer peripheral light emitting portion 34b) provided outside the outer periphery of the opening window is As reflected light from the reflective vertical wall portion 33, which is erected along the outer periphery of the window and is formed so as to be able to reflect light on at least the inner surface thereof, the outer peripheral external light detection portion 35 (left outer peripheral By detecting with the outside light detection unit 35a and the right outer circumference outside light detection unit 35b), the vicinity of the opening window is made to function as a special operation receiving unit 3333, and an effect according to the operation mode of the player in the special operation receiving unit 3333 is performed. It is executable.

By arranging the outer peripheral external light detection part 35 in the inner space 3435 of the side base 572 that is open toward the side where the opening window is provided, instead of arranging it in an exposed state, the outer peripheral external light detection can be performed. As described above, when the light is detected by the unit 35, it is possible to suitably exclude the effect light that may become a disturbance.

However, even with such a configuration, the light from the outer peripheral light emitting portion 34 was reflected by the reflecting vertical wall portion 33 from the portion of the internal space 3435 that was opened toward the side where the opening window was provided. Since the structure is such that the effect light can be captured in addition to the light, there is concern that the effect light may become disturbance and adversely affect the detection accuracy of the outer peripheral external light detection unit 35 .

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. is arranged at a position where it is not possible to irradiate the traveling light. More specifically, the frame-side light-emitting portion L1 is provided at a position forward of the special operation receiving portion 3333 and is positioned forward of the base portion BL1 having extremely low (or zero) light transmittance. attached to the side. Since the base portion BL1 is wider than the frame-side light-emitting portion L1, it is difficult for the light from the frame-side light-emitting portion L1 to travel to the rear side (the side where the opening window is provided). , thereby making it difficult for the light from the frame-side light-emitting portion L1 to be taken into the internal space 3435. As shown in FIG.

Moreover, in the right unit base 551 according to this embodiment, the first right decoration base portion 551a made of a material that allows the light from the frame-side light-emitting portion L1 to travel with high transmittance, and the frame-side It has a second right decorative base portion 551b made of a material (for example, metal) with a low transmittance (or a transmittance of 0) that hinders the progress of light from the light emitting portion L1. The first right decorative base portion 551a is formed so as to surround the frame-side light-emitting portion L1 so that the light from the frame-side light-emitting portion L1 can contribute as dramatic light, whereas the second right decorative base portion 551a is formed to surround the frame-side light emitting portion L1. The base portion 551b is formed between the frame-side light-emitting portion L1 and the opening window so that the light from the frame-side light-emitting portion L1 does not easily travel toward the side where the opening window is provided. This also makes it difficult for the light from the frame-side light-emitting portion L1 to be taken into the internal space 3435. As shown in FIG.

In particular, the second right decorative base portion 551b according to this embodiment allows the light from the frame-side light-emitting portion L1 to travel toward the player side through the first right decorative base portion 551a. It is provided so as to extend to a part of the front side of the right decorative base portion 551a, thereby suitably suppressing light from the frame-side light-emitting portion L1 from proceeding to the opening window. .

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the right unit base 551 is provided with both the base portion BL1 and the second right decorative base portion 551b, but only one of them is provided. Even in this case, it is possible to make it difficult for the light from the frame-side light-emitting portion L1 to be taken into the internal space 3435 .

On the other hand, the frame-side light-emitting portion L2 provided on the left unit base 531 of the body frame 4 is attached to the front side of the base portion BL2, which has extremely low (or zero) light transmittance. is at a position where light traveling on a specific virtual plane P can be emitted. However, as is clear from FIG. 120, since the reflecting member 36 is provided between the frame-side light-emitting portion L2 and the opening window, the light from the frame-side light-emitting portion L2 is transmitted through the opening window. This makes it difficult for the light from the frame-side light-emitting portion L2 to be taken into the internal space 3435. As shown in FIG.

However, since the height and width of the reflecting member 36 are small, there is concern that the light from the frame-side light-emitting portion L2 may be reflected by other members and directed toward the opening window. Therefore, in the left unit base 531 according to this embodiment as well, the first left decoration base portion 531a and the frame side It has a second left decorative base portion 531b made of a material (for example, metal) with a low transmittance (or a transmittance of 0) that hinders the progress of light from the light emitting portion L2. The first left ornamental base portion 531a is formed to surround the frame-side light-emitting portion L2 so that the light from the frame-side light-emitting portion L2 can contribute as dramatic light, while the second left ornamental base portion 531a is formed to surround the frame-side light emitting portion L2. The base portion 531b is formed between the frame-side light-emitting portion L2 and the opening window so as to make it difficult for the light from the frame-side light-emitting portion L2 to travel toward the side where the opening window is provided. This also makes it difficult for the light from the frame-side light-emitting portion L2 to be taken into the internal space 3435. As shown in FIG.

In particular, the second left decorative base portion 531b according to this embodiment allows the light from the frame-side light emitting portion L2 to travel toward the player side through the first left decorative base portion 531a. It is provided so as to extend to a part of the front side of the left decorative base portion 531a, thereby suitably suppressing light from the frame-side light-emitting portion L2 from proceeding to the opening window. .

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the left unit base 531 is provided with the second left decoration base portion 531b, and the right unit base 551 is provided with the second right decoration base portion 551b. These members may not necessarily be provided, and even in this case, it is difficult for the effect light to be taken into the internal space 3435, as described above. When the second left ornamental base portion 531b and the second right ornamental base portion 551b are not provided, the reflecting member 36 is not provided with the first left ornamental base portion 531a or the first right ornamental base portion 551a. Instead of being attached to the outer surface (surface that can be contacted from the outside), if it is attached to the inner surface (surface that cannot be contacted from the outside) of the first left decorative base portion 531a or the first right decorative base portion 551a, the It becomes expected to avoid degrading the reflective performance due to direct physical contact of the . In this case, light from the outer peripheral light emitting portion 34 (the left outer peripheral light emitting portion 34a and the right outer peripheral outer light emitting portion 34b) passes through the first left ornamental base portion 531a and the first right ornamental base portion 551a, and then passes through the above-described light emitting portion 34. The light is reflected by the reflecting member 36 , passes through the first left decorative base portion 531 a and the first right decorative base portion 551 a again, and is taken into the internal space 3435 .

When the second left decorative base portion 531b is provided on the left unit base 531 and the second right decorative base portion 551b is provided on the right unit base 551, the reflecting member 36 is omitted and the second left decorative base portion 531b is provided. The left ornamental base portion 531b and the second right ornamental base portion 551b themselves may also function as reflecting members using a material such as metal. According to such a configuration, only by providing the reflecting members (the second left decorative base portion 531b and the second right decorative base portion 551b), it is possible to prevent the effect light from the frame side light emitting portions L1 and L2 from becoming disturbance. While suitably suppressing, the detection accuracy of the outer peripheral ambient light detection unit 35 can be suitably secured by the reflected light from the reflecting members (the second left decorative base portion 531b and the second right decorative base portion 551b). Become.

The peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment can obtain information such as the coordinates and size of a physical object located near the opening window by using the principle of acquiring operation information near the opening window. As a result, substantially the entire area of the opening window (substantially the entire area that is visible when viewed from the front of the glass plate 192) is used as the special operation receiving portion 3333, resulting in more dynamic operability with a high degree of freedom. It is possible to realize a performance suitable for this.

The operability and performance that can be realized by using such a special operation receiving section 3333 will be described below. 121 to 127 are schematic diagrams for explaining the operability and performance that can be realized by using the special operation receiving portion 3333, and are related to explaining the operability and the performance. In addition to omitting members that do not exist, related members are also shown schematically.

FIG. 121 shows the special operation receiving portion 3333 when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front, and various effect members A to E arranged at positions overlapping the special operation receiving portion 3333 when viewed from the front. is schematically shown. The arrows in the figure simply indicate the movable ranges of the various movable bodies among the effect members A to E.

As shown in FIG. 121, when the special operation receiving portion 3333 according to this illustrative example is viewed from the front, there is a special operation receiving portion 3333 on the back side of the glass plate 192 that can contribute to an effect according to the result of the big hit determination. As members, movable bodies A1, A2, B, and C, a display portion D, and a board surface light emitting portion E are arranged so as to be capable of emitting light at a portion where game balls can flow down and other portions. . Arrows in FIG. 121 schematically show the movable ranges of the movable bodies A1, A2, B, and C. As shown in FIG.

It should be noted that these members are shown as an example for explaining the technology of the present application, and do not necessarily match the embodiment previously described with reference to FIG. 60 and the like. However, basically, the movable bodies A1, A2, B, and C are composed of “back bottom rear movable production unit 3100, back top left movable production unit 3200, back left movable production unit 3300, back top middle movable production unit 3400, back The display part D corresponds to the "effect display device 1600", and the board surface light emitting part E corresponds to "various decorations provided for the game board 5". It corresponds to "various LEDs mounted on a substrate". In addition, the board surface light-emitting part E does not necessarily have to be provided on the game board 5, and may be a member (such as a light guide plate) provided on the front side of the game board 5, for example.

Here, in the peripheral control board 1510, first, the display portion D, in which the effect display corresponding to the result of the big hit determination is performed, is positioned as the target of the operation effect. When the player performs an operation on the overlapping coordinate area and this is detected as a physical object, control is possible so that a change in performance corresponding to the operation appears on the display section D.

An example of effect control in the case of causing a change in effect on the display portion D by an operation on the special operation receiving portion 3333 will be described below.

[First operation control mode for display unit D]
For example, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 121 and FIG. Of all the coordinate regions (see FIG. 119) when 3333 is viewed from the front, the first coordinate region Z1 facing the first display region of the display unit D is set (controlled) to be capable of receiving effects, and is displayed. A specific operation instruction image S1 is displayed in the first display area of the portion D. FIG. Then, during a predetermined period during which the specific operation instruction image S1 is displayed, an operation (for example, a touch operation on the glass plate 192 (strictly is detected as a physical object, the specific operation instruction image S1 is hidden. At the same time as ending reception of the performance for the first coordinate area Z1, a change in performance is caused in the display part D, and the kind of the change in performance caused can suggest the degree of expectation for the result of the judgment of the big hit.

At this time, when the effect change is caused based on the fact that the special operation receiving portion 3333 is operated anywhere within the first coordinate area Z1, the effect change is applied to at least the display portion D. It is desirable to generate it in the first display area facing the first coordinate area Z1. That is, in this case, when the player makes it difficult to visually recognize the first display area with his/her finger or the like in front view, the effect change occurs at least within the first display area. In the first display area until the finger is moved or the first display area is viewed from an oblique direction (using the space between the glass plate 192 and the display unit D) instead of from the front view. It becomes possible to make it difficult to recognize the appearance change. Alternatively, the player may proceed with the game while placing his or her finger on the first coordinate area Z1 without checking the effect change in the first display area, or may be positioned in front of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to select a way of enjoying the game, such as having a third person who is not in the game confirm the changes in the performance in the first display area, and it is expected that the game interest will be improved.

Note that if the player's operation is not detected during the lapse of a predetermined period of time (the arrival of a specific timing) after the appearance of the specific operation instruction image S1, the specific operation instruction image S1 is not displayed. At the same time, reception of the effect for the first coordinate area Z1 is terminated. At this time, it is possible to cause a change in the effect that appears when the reception of the effect for the first coordinate area Z1 is made, or without causing a change in the effect that appears when the reception of the effect for the first coordinate area Z1 is received. It is also possible to terminate reception of the effect for the first coordinate area Z1.

[Second operation control mode for display unit D]
Further, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 121 and 122(b), when the second effect condition is satisfied based on the result of the big hit determination, the special operation receiving section Of all the coordinate areas (see FIG. 119) when 3333 is viewed from the front, "the second coordinate area Z2 facing the second display area of the display section D" and "the third display area of the display section D Both the region and the opposing third coordinate region Z3” are set (controlled) to be capable of receiving effects, and the second operation instruction image S2 is displayed in the second display region of the display unit D, and the third display region , the third operation instruction image S3 is displayed. Then, during a predetermined period in which both the second operation instruction image S2 and the third operation instruction image S3 are displayed, the second coordinate area Z2 or the third coordinate area Z3 of the special operation receiving portion 3333 An operation (for example, a touch operation on the glass plate 192 (strictly speaking, a finger or the like is sufficient in the special operation receiving unit 3333, and does not necessarily need to be touched)) is performed, and this is a physical object. When it is detected, both the second operation instruction image S2 and the third operation instruction image S3 are hidden, and the acceptance of the effect of the second coordinate area Z2 and the third coordinate area Z3 is terminated, and the display section D , a specific effect (effect corresponding to the selected side (coordinate area side where the physical object is detected)) is generated, and in the generated specific effect, it is possible to execute control that can suggest the degree of expectation for the result of the big hit determination. .

It should be noted that the operation by the player was not detected until a predetermined period of time passed (a specific timing arrived) after both the second operation instruction image S2 and the third operation instruction image S3 appeared. In this case, both the second operation instruction image S2 and the third operation instruction image S3 are hidden, and reception of effects for the second coordinate area Z2 and the third coordinate area Z3 is terminated. ing. At this time, a specific effect that appears when there is an effect acceptance for the second coordinate area Z2 or the third coordinate area Z3 may be generated, or the specific effect may not be generated. However, in the case of generating a specific effect that appears when there is an effect reception for the second coordinate area Z2 or the third coordinate area Z3, the operation for the second operation instruction image S2 is accepted prior to the execution of the specific effect. It is desirable to make a display (effect, etc.) to appear when an operation to the third operation instruction image S3 is accepted (effect, etc.). That is, in this case, it is possible to grasp that the rendering on the side where the effect is generated is forcibly executed while neither the second coordinate area Z2 nor the third coordinate area Z3 is operated. As a result, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game due to the fact that the player does not know what effect is being executed.

In addition, in the first operation control mode and the second operation control mode for the display unit D, not only is the reception of the effect for the first coordinate area Z1, the second coordinate area Z2, and the third coordinate area Z3 allowed, but also the same Within the period, other operation means such as the operation button 410 may be allowed to accept the same effect.

For example, in the first operation control mode for the display unit D, when the first effect condition is satisfied, both the first coordinate area Z1 and the operation button 410 are enabled to receive the effect, and the specific operation instruction image S1 is displayed. is displayed, even if a pressing operation (detection of a button switch) is performed on the operation button 410 instead of an operation (detection of a physical object) on the first coordinate area Z1, the specific The operation instruction image S1 is hidden, and the reception of the effect of the first coordinate area Z1 and the operation button 410 is terminated, and at the same time, the effect change is caused in the display part D, and the expectation for the result of the big hit determination is made according to the type of the effect change that has occurred. It is possible to implement control that can suggest degree.

Note that even when there is an operation (detection of a physical object) with respect to the first coordinate area Z1, the specific operation instruction image S1 is not displayed, and the acceptance of the effect of the first coordinate area Z1 and the operation button 410 is ended, and the above-mentioned A performance change is caused in the display part D, and control capable of suggesting the degree of expectation for the result of the big hit determination by the type of the generated performance change can be executed.

In addition, in the second operation control mode for the display unit D, when the second effect condition is satisfied, both the second coordinate area Z2 and the third coordinate area Z3 and the operation button 410 can receive the effect. do. Then, in a predetermined period during which the specific operation instruction image S2 and the specific operation instruction image S3 are displayed, an operation (detection of a physical object) on either the second coordinate area Z2 or the third coordinate area Z3 is not performed. When a pressing operation (detection of a button switch) is performed on the button 410, the second selection image indicating that the specific operation instruction image S2 is selected and the specific operation instruction image S3 are selected. Switching display is performed between the third selection image showing that the user is in the When a predetermined period of time elapses after the specific operation instruction image S2 and the specific operation instruction image S3 are displayed in a state in which either the second selection image or the third selection image is displayed, the selected image is displayed. generates a display (such as an effect) that allows the user to recognize that an operation has been accepted for the operation instruction images S2 and S3 on the side where is appearing, and selects the second operation instruction image S2 and the third operation instruction image S3. Both the images (the second selected image and the third selected image) are hidden, and reception of effects for the second coordinate area Z2 and the third coordinate area Z3 and the operation button 410 is ended. Then, after that, a specific effect (the effect of the selected side) is generated on the display section D, and the generated specific effect enables the execution of control that suggests the degree of expectation for the result of the big hit determination.

It should be noted that, within the above-mentioned predetermined period, it is made possible to accept an operation (an operation for accepting any decision) for another operating means, and when there is an operation for the other operating means, the selected image appears. The second operation instruction image S2, the third operation instruction image S3, and the selection image (second selection image and the third selected image) may be hidden, and reception of effects for the second coordinate area Z2 and the third coordinate area Z3, the operation button 410, or other operation means may be terminated. Then, after that, a specific effect (the effect of the selected side) is generated on the display section D, and the generated specific effect enables execution of control that suggests the degree of expectation for the result of the big hit determination.

Further, within the above-mentioned predetermined period until the specific effect appears, the second coordinate area Z2 and the third coordinate area Z2 and the third coordinate area are displayed regardless of whether the second selected image or the third selected image appears. The area Z3 can receive a performance. Then, when an operation on either the second coordinate area Z2 or the third coordinate area Z3 is detected, it is irrelevant whether the second selected image or the third selected image is displayed, and the rendering is performed. The display (effect, etc.) on the side on which the acceptance is made appears, and the second operation instruction image S2, the third operation instruction image S3, and the selection images (second selection image, third selection image) are all hidden. Then, reception of effects for the second coordinate area Z2 and the third coordinate area Z3, the operation button 410, and other operation means is terminated. At this time, the operation is detected before all of the second operation instruction image S2, the third operation instruction image S3, and the selection images (the second selection image and the third selection image) are hidden. The switching display may be performed so that the selected image (the second selected image, the third selected image) appears on the selected side. Then, after that, a specific effect (the effect of the selected side) is generated on the display section D, and the generated specific effect enables execution of control that suggests the degree of expectation for the result of the big hit determination.

According to such a configuration, it is possible not only to accept effects for the first coordinate area Z1, the second coordinate area Z2, and the third coordinate area Z3, but also for other operation means such as the operation button 410. It is possible to accept the same performance. In this regard, in the second operation control mode, while allowing the reception of the same effect, if an operation is performed with respect to the second coordinate area Z2 or the third coordinate area Z3, the second coordinate area Z2 or the third coordinate area By accepting only one operation (detection of a physical object) on the area Z3, it is possible to generate a side effect according to the player's preference. That is, in the case of using other operation means, it is possible to say that "a side according to the preference of the player is displayed until a predetermined period of time has passed since the specific operation instruction image S2 and the specific operation instruction image S3 are displayed." '' or ``perform at least two operations using a plurality of operation means'', when a specific operation receiving unit 3333 is used, it is more Since it is possible to make a display mode according to the taste of the player appear with only a small number of operations (one time in this production example), it is possible to realize more complicated effects with simple operability. come to be expected.

In addition, while providing such efficient operability, when simultaneously providing operability that can achieve a desired operation by performing at least two or more operations using a plurality of operation means, The player can ponder which operation to select as the desired operation while performing the operations in the process steps leading up to the desired operation. That is, in this case, while performing the operation in the process stage leading to the desired operation, it becomes easy to imagine the effect situation after the selection, and it becomes difficult to decide which operation to perform within a predetermined period of time. be able to In this way, the player can selectively use operation means with different required numbers of operations depending on whether the player is ready to make a quick decision or is in a troubled state, so that the interest in the game can be maintained. become.

In this way, in the peripheral control board 1510, by making the display part D the target of the operation effect using the special operation receiving part 3333, it is possible to realize an unprecedented interesting effect. However, as described above, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, the special operation receiving portion 3333 is set to a larger operation receiving range than the display portion D when viewed from the front (the coordinate range to be detected is the coordinate range of the glass plate 192). By realizing a production that uses such a special relationship, it is possible to realize more dynamic and flexible operability and suitable production. .

[Third operation control mode for display unit D]
For example, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 121 and FIG. Of all the coordinate areas (see FIG. 119) when 3333 is viewed from the front, the fourth coordinate area Z4 facing the fourth display area of the display unit D is set (controlled) to be capable of receiving effects, and is displayed. A specific operation target image S4 is displayed in the fourth display area of the part D, and a specific image prompting an operation to move the specific operation target image S4 to the movable body B is displayed in another display area of the display part D. indicate.

Then, during a predetermined period after the specific operation target image S4 is displayed, an operation (for example, a touch operation on the glass plate 192 (for example, a Strictly speaking, it is sufficient if there is a finger or the like in the special operation receiving portion 3333, and it is not necessary to touch)), and when this is detected as a physical object, as shown in FIG. , the coordinate area in which the effect can be received is not limited to the limited fourth coordinate area Z4 in the display unit D, but at least a large fifth coordinate area including the coordinate area facing the movable body B provided outside the display unit D Change the setting to Z5. Note that the fifth coordinate area Z5 in this illustrative example is a coordinate area facing the fourth display area (not necessarily matching the fourth coordinate area Z) and facing the movable body B provided outside the display section D. It includes up to the coordinate area where the coordinates are located, and is set so as to straddle the movable body B, the display section D, and the board surface light emitting section E.

Note that at this time, the display mode of the specific operation target image S4 is changed (for example, the color is changed) based on the fact that an operation has been performed on any part of the special operation receiving portion 3333 within the fourth coordinate area Z4. (or displayed in a vibrating mode) so that the player can recognize that the specific operation target image S4 is in a movable state by an operation by the player.

That is, in the third operation control mode, a physical object such as a finger is held in the special operation receiving portion 3333, and the physical object is moved to the coordinate position facing the movable body B in the fifth coordinate area Z5. , the specific operation target image S4 appearing in the display section D acts on the movable body B provided outside the display section D, and an effect on the movable body B is started. We are realizing a production.

Therefore, when a physical object such as a finger is held in the special operation receiving portion 3333 and the physical object is moved within the fifth coordinate area Z5, the peripheral control board 1510 detects such movement of the physical object, It is possible to perform control to move the specific operation target image S4 within the display section D so as to follow the movement of the detected physical object. As a result, the specific operation target image S4 is in the middle of movement in which the physical object has not finished moving to the coordinate position facing the movable body B, and the physical object in the special operation receiving section 3333 It moves in the display part D so as to follow the movement in the front view.

More specifically, while a physical object such as a finger is held within the special operation receiving portion 3333, the physical object is moved from the position shown in FIG. , the peripheral control board 1510 moves the specific operation target image S4 within the display section D so as to follow such movement of the physical object. However, when a physical object such as a finger is at the position shown in FIG. A portion of the image protrudes from the display portion D, and the entire image cannot be displayed. Therefore, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, the specific operation target image S4 is displayed only on the part that can be displayed on the display part D, and the part protruding from the display part D is displayed on the display part D. is controlled to emit light from the corresponding portion of the board surface light-emitting portion E so that is recognizable. More specifically, as the physical object approaches the coordinate position facing the edge of the display section D, the portion where the specific operation target image S4 is displayed on the display section D is reduced. is controlled so as to increase the portion corresponding to the light emitting region of .

With such a configuration, it is possible to express a state in which the specific operation target image S4 on the display section D is about to jump out of the display section D due to the player's operation. More dynamic and highly flexible operability and performance suitable for this, which cannot be contained in a single unit, will be realized.

Especially, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. In spite of being placed, not only the display part D but also a member different from the display part D (board surface light emitting part E) is controlled for the effect. Therefore, even when the physical object is moved in a coordinate area facing a plurality of members in the special operation receiving portion 3333, it becomes easy to recognize that the effect corresponding to the movement is appearing. It is possible to suitably realize performance suitable for dynamic operability.

When a physical object such as a player's finger is moved slightly upward from the position shown in FIG. (Here, board surface light-emitting part E) is placed at a coordinate position facing it. However, in this case as well, instead of suddenly hiding all of the specific operation target image S4 and causing only the board surface light emitting unit E to emit light, as the physical object moves away from the coordinate position facing the display unit D, the specific operation Control is performed so that the portion where the target image S4 is displayed on the display portion D is reduced, and the portion corresponding to the light emitting area of the board surface light emitting portion E is increased. That is, in this case, when the physical object is separated from the coordinate position facing the display section D by a specific distance, only the board surface light emitting section E out of the display section D and the board surface light emitting section E is given an effect (here, light emission). As a result, an effect as if the specific operation target image S4 has moved out of the display unit D can be expressed.

Then, when the physical object such as the player's finger moves further upward within the fifth coordinate area Z5 and reaches the position shown in FIG. The control is performed so that both the board surface light emitting part E and the movable body B in the position are caused to emit light. That is, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, the control similar to the effect control between the display unit D and the board light emitting unit E is performed between the board light emitting unit E and the movable body B. I am trying to do it. More specifically, when the physical object in the coordinate area facing the game board 5 (here, the board surface light-emitting portion E) approaches the coordinate area facing the movable body B by a predetermined distance, the physical object Although it is within the coordinate area facing the board surface light emitting part E, the effect control is performed not only for the board surface light emitting part E but also for a member (movable body B) different from the board surface light emitting part E. I have to. Therefore, even if the physical object is moved within the coordinate area facing both the board surface light emitting unit E and the movable body B in the special operation receiving unit 3333, an effect (here, a display It becomes easy to recognize that the specific operation target image S4) that has moved out of the part D appears (moves), so that it is possible to suitably realize the performance suitable for the dynamic operability. .

Then, when the physical object such as the player's finger moves further upward within the fifth coordinate area Z5 and reaches the position shown in FIG. It is determined that the operation as if moving to Z5 has been properly performed, and the conditions in the third operation control mode are satisfied, and the acceptance of the effect for the fifth coordinate area Z5 is ended. In addition, a display that allows recognition of the fact that the condition (the specific operation target image S4 is moved to the movable body B) in the third operation control mode is satisfied appears on the display unit D, and the movable body B is used. Execute the control to start the production. The effect using the movable body B can be realized, for example, by causing the movable body B to emit light in a predetermined manner, or by causing the movable body B to operate in a predetermined manner. It should be possible to suggest the degree of expectation for the results of

In the third operation control mode, when the physical object moves within the special operation receiving section 3333 and the physical object moves out of the fifth coordinate area Z5 (when the finger is removed from the special operation receiving section 3333 123(a), it is desirable to start over from the state shown in FIG. 123(a). That is, as will be described later, the peripheral control board 1510 basically acquires the positional information of the physical object and the like on a regular basis regardless of the performance execution status. Information indicating that the object is moving, information indicating that the object has moved outside the fifth coordinate area Z5, and the like are obtained.

In addition, although the specific operation target image S4 is moved so as to follow the movement of the physical object, the present invention is not limited to this. The operation target image S4 may be moved.

Further, the fifth coordinate area Z5 may be the entire coordinate area of the special operation receiving section 3333. FIG. In addition, if there is no site on the opposite side of the coordinate position where the physical object is placed, and there is no part that can be rendered to suggest the existence of the specific operation target image S4, then the coordinate position is close to the coordinate position where the physical object is placed. A production representation may be made to suggest that a specific operation target image S4 exists at the site.

In addition, in this example of explanation, a board surface light-emitting part E capable of effect expression (light emission) is placed between the display part D and the movable body B. good. That is, in this case, after the specific operation target image S4 is no longer displayed on the display unit D, until the physical object is moved to a coordinate position facing the movable body B (or a nearby coordinate position), the player , the operation is continued while holding in mind the image that the specific operation target image S4 is moving.

In addition, the display unit D displays a map that enables a grasp of the positional relationship between the display unit D and the movable body B, and the position of the specific operation target image S4 is displayed in the map according to the movement of the physical object. You may make it perform the production|presentation display suggested by.

122 to 125, the respective coordinate areas Z1 to Z5 are shown, but the player cannot actually see them.

On the other hand, in the peripheral control board 1510, among the various production members shown in FIG. When the player performs an operation on the coordinate area overlapping the movable bodies A1, A2, and C in the front view of the operation receiving portion 3333 and this is detected as a physical object, an effect action corresponding to the operation appears. It is controllable. Therefore, the player can select any one of the plurality of movable bodies and operate them in an appropriate manner (speed, amount of movement).

[Fourth Manipulation Control Mode for Movable Body C]
For example, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 121 and FIG. Among all the coordinate regions (see FIG. 119) when 3333 is viewed from the front, the sixth coordinate region Z6 facing a part of the movable body C is set (controlled) to be capable of receiving effects. At this time, in order to allow the player side to recognize that the sixth coordinate area Z6 is capable of receiving effects in order to move the movable body C, a specific display image appears on the display unit D, or the movable body C is displayed. It is desirable to cause C to emit light in the first mode (for example, to emit light in a flashing mode) or vibrate.

Then, during a predetermined period after the sixth coordinate area Z6 is set to be capable of receiving the effect, an operation (for example, a touch operation on the glass plate 192 (strictly speaking, a special It is sufficient if there is a finger or the like in the operation receiving portion 3333, and it is not necessary to touch it.)) is performed and detected as a physical object, as shown in FIG. is changed to a large seventh coordinate area Z7 including at least the movable range CT of the movable body C, instead of the sixth coordinate area Z6. Here, the seventh coordinate area Z7 is set as a coordinate area including all of the sixth coordinate area Z6.

That is, in this fourth operation control mode, a physical object such as a finger is held in the special operation receiving portion 3333, and the physical object is moved to the end of the movable range CT of the movable body C in the seventh coordinate area Z7. When moved to the coordinate position facing the part, the movable body C can be moved to follow the movement of the physical object.

Therefore, when the state shown in FIG. 126(b) is reached, a physical object such as a finger is detected in the seventh coordinate area Z7, and the movable body C is moved by the movement of the physical object. It is desirable to perform control that enables recognition of In the example shown in FIG. 126(b), the movable body C is made to emit light in the second mode (for example, in the constant mode).

However, the player does not know what kind of movable range CT is provided for the movable body C, and the player does not know what kind of movable range CT is provided in the movable body C. There is a concern that even if the physical object is to be moved along the movable range CT of the movable body C, this cannot be done properly. As a result, if the physical object such as the player's finger deviates from the seventh coordinate area Z7 (special operation receiving unit 126(a) against the player's intention, and the interest in the game may decrease.

In this regard, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 126(a) and 126(b), the seventh coordinate area Z7 in the fourth operation control mode is set as the object of control. The sixth coordinate region Z6 is set in a range expanded by at least the first distance over all directions in front view, including the direction opposite to the upper side where the movable range CT of the movable body C extends. I'm doing it.

According to such a configuration, even if the player does not grasp what kind of movable range CT is provided for the movable body C, the direction deviated from the movable range CT of the movable body C When the finger (physical object) is moved to the side, the movable body C does not move even though the effect has been accepted (even though the state shown in FIG. 126(a) is not redone). Since the phenomenon occurs, it becomes possible to estimate the movable range CT of the movable body C and perform the operation through confirmation of such a phenomenon.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, within the movable range CT set for the movable body C, the movable body C is positioned at a plurality of predetermined positions (the first position shown in FIG. 126(b)). the original position), the second position shown in FIG. 126(c), the third position shown in FIG. 127(a), and the fourth position (end position) shown in FIG. 127(b)) make it possible to control Then, the seventh coordinate area Z7 is divided into a first driving coordinate area Z7-1 including a portion facing the first position (original position) and a second driving coordinate area Z7-1 including a portion facing the second position. Z7-2, a third drive coordinate region Z7-3 including a portion facing the third position, and a fourth drive coordinate region Z7-4 including a portion facing the fourth position, and drive By determining to which of the coordinate areas Z7-1 to Z7-4 the physical object detected in the sixth coordinate area Z6 has moved, the movable body C is moved to the driving coordinate area corresponding to the determination. control is executable.

Here, as shown in FIGS. 126(a) and 126(b), the first drive coordinate area Z7-1 including the portion facing the first position (original position) within the movable range CT is The movable range CT is set as a range extending from the sixth coordinate area Z6 by at least the first distance in the left, right, and downward directions except for the upper side where the movable range CT of the movable body C extends.

According to such a configuration, after a physical object such as a finger is detected in the sixth coordinate area Z6 (FIG. 126(a)) and the setting is changed to the seventh coordinate area Z7 (FIG. 126(b)), the Even if the physical object is moved in a direction different from the direction in which the movable range CT of the movable body C extends (moves less than the first distance), the physical object remains within the single first drive coordinate area Z7-1. Therefore, the movable body C does not move and remains at the first position (original position) corresponding to the first driving coordinate area Z7-1 where the physical object was detected. Become. That is, in this case, even though the operation by the player has received the effect (even though the state shown in FIG. 126(a) is not redone), the movable body C does not move. Therefore, by confirming such a phenomenon, the direction in which the movable range CT of the movable body C extends can be estimated and the operation can be performed.

On the other hand, after a physical object such as a finger is detected in the sixth coordinate area Z6 (FIG. 126(a)) and the setting is changed to the seventh coordinate area Z7 (FIG. 126(b)), the physical object is moved. When the body C is moved in the direction in which the movable range CT of the body C extends (moves less than the first distance), the physical object only moves the second distance shorter than the first distance, as shown in FIG. 126(b). from the first driving coordinate area Z7-1 shown in FIG. 126C to reach the second driving coordinate area Z7-2 shown in FIG. 126(c). That is, in this case, based on the fact that the physical object is detected within the second driving coordinate area Z7-2, the movable body C moves to the first position corresponding to the first driving coordinate area Z7-1 (Fig. 126 ( b)) to the second position (FIG. 126(c)) corresponding to the second drive coordinate area Z7-2.

Here, as shown in FIG. 126(c), the second drive coordinate area Z7-2 including the portion facing the second position within the movable range CT also extends in the vertical direction in which the movable range CT of the movable body C extends. In the left and right directions orthogonal to , it has a range that extends by the same distance as the first drive coordinate area Z7-1. On the other hand, the vertical direction in which the movable range CT of the movable body C extends is set to be shorter than the length in the horizontal direction.

According to such a configuration, when the physical object detected in the second driving coordinate area Z7-2 is moved in a direction different from the vertical direction in which the movable range CT of the movable body C extends, the physical object is , it is likely to be detected within a single second driving coordinate area Z7-2, and the movable body C corresponds to the second driving coordinate area Z7-2 in which the physical object is detected without moving. It will continue to stay at the second position to do. That is, in this case, even though the operation by the player has received the effect (even though the state shown in FIG. 126(a) is not redone), the movable body C does not move. Therefore, by confirming such a phenomenon, the direction in which the movable range CT of the movable body C extends can be estimated and the operation can be performed.

Moreover, by setting the second drive coordinate area Z7-2 to the left and right ranges shifted from the movable range CT of the movable body C in this way, the sixth coordinate area Z6 (FIG. 126(a)) can be obtained. After a physical object such as a finger is detected in , the criteria for determining an appropriate operation for moving the physical object along the movable range CT of the movable body C are relaxed. As a result, it is possible to alleviate the difficulty of moving the physical object while guessing what kind of movable range CT is provided for the movable body C without grasping it. You will be able to maintain your interest.

Note that when the movable body C moves to the second position corresponding to the second drive coordinate area Z7-2, the movable body C moves to the first position corresponding to the first drive coordinate area Z7-1. It may be made to emit light in a mode (for example, green) different from the light emission mode (for example, blue). Also, at this time, when the physical object is detected within the second driving coordinate area Z7-2 before the movable body C finishes moving to the second position corresponding to the second driving coordinate area Z7-2 (the When the body C starts to move toward the second drive coordinate area Z7-2), by changing the light emission mode (for example, from blue to green), it is possible to indicate that the operation by the player has been properly received. It becomes possible to recognize it from an early stage, and it becomes possible to suppress the frustration caused by the delay in the behavior of the movable body which is inevitable in response to the quick operation by the player's finger or the like.

Also, if the physical object moves at a speed exceeding the moving speed of the movable body, the movable body cannot be moved so as to follow the physical object. Control is performed to move to the latest detected position.

Then, the physical object in the second drive coordinate area Z7-2 (FIG. 126(c)) is moved upward by the player's finger operation or the like, and the physical object in the third drive coordinate area Z7-3 (FIG. 127 ( a)), the movable body C moves from the second position (FIG. 126(c)) corresponding to the second driving coordinate area Z7-2 to the third driving coordinate area Z7-3. It will move to the third position (FIG. 127(a)).

Here, as shown in FIG. 126(c), the third drive coordinate area Z7-3 including the portion facing the third position within the movable range CT is the vertical direction in which the movable range CT of the movable body C extends. In the left and right directions orthogonal to , it has a range that extends over a longer distance than the first drive coordinate area Z7-1 and the second drive coordinate area Z7-2. On the other hand, the vertical direction within the third driving coordinate area Z7-3 in which the movable range CT of the movable body C extends is set to be shorter than the length in the horizontal direction.

That is, as described above, when a movable body that does not have a technique to indicate the operation direction unlike a display means, etc., is to be operated, it is necessary to understand what kind of movable range is provided. You have to move physics objects by guessing. Therefore, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, in the first driving coordinate area Z7-1 and the second driving coordinate area Z7-2, the left and right ranges shifted from the movable range CT of the movable body C are accepted for rendering. As described above, by widening the range, the criteria for determining appropriate operation for moving the movable body C along the movable range CT are relaxed.

However, when a physical object such as a finger is detected in the sixth coordinate area Z6 (FIG. 126(a)) and then the physical object is moved along the movable range CT of the movable body C, the sixth coordinate area Z6 (FIG. 126(a)) There is a tendency for the deviation from the movable range CT to increase as the distance from . Therefore, in the third driving coordinate region Z7-3 (FIG. 127(a)), the first driving coordinate region Z7-1 and the second driving coordinate region Z7-1 and the second By having a range that extends over a longer distance than the driving coordinate area Z7-2, it is assumed that the movement distance of the physical object from the sixth coordinate area Z6 increases and the deviation from the movable range CT gradually increases. Also, this can be accepted as a proper performance operation. As a result, the difficulty in moving the physical object over a long distance while estimating what kind of movable range CT is provided for the movable body C without grasping it can be alleviated. It becomes possible to maintain the game interest. For example, even if the physical object moves upward within a coordinate range that does not face the movable range CT of the movable body C, the movable body C moves upward.

Note that when the movable body C moves to the third position corresponding to the third driving coordinate area Z7-3, the light emission mode (for example, blue) when the movable body C is positioned at the first position or the second position It may be made to emit light in a light emission mode (eg, red) that is different from the light emission mode (eg, green) when it is located at the position. Also, when a physical object is detected within the third drive coordinate area Z7-3 before the movable body C has finished moving to the third position corresponding to the third drive coordinate area Z7-3 (movable body C starts to move toward the third drive coordinate area Z7-3), the light emission mode may be changed (for example, from blue to green).

For the same reason, the fourth driving coordinate area Z7-4 also extends further to the left and right than the third driving coordinate area Z7-3, perpendicular to the vertical direction in which the movable range CT of the movable body C extends. It has a range that extends over long distances. However, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, the physical object in the third drive coordinate area Z7-3 is moved upward by the player's finger operation and moves upward to the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-. 4, move the movable body C from the third position (FIG. 127(a)) corresponding to the third driving coordinate area Z7-3 to the fourth position corresponding to the fourth driving coordinate area Z7-4. It is not necessarily moved to the position (FIG. 127(b)). In addition, when the physical object in the third drive coordinate area Z7-3 is moved upward by the player's finger operation or the like and is detected in the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4, the movable Body C is moved from the third position (FIG. 127(a)) corresponding to the third driving coordinate area Z7-3 to the first position (FIG. 127(c)) corresponding to the first driving coordinate area Z7-1. It can be moved.

That is, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, it is determined whether or not the movable body C can be moved to the fourth position corresponding to the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4 based on the result of the big hit determination. It has been decided, and while it is said that it has been decided, such an effect using the movable body C is provided to the player. Then, when the physical object detected in the sixth coordinate area Z6 is detected in the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4 by the player's finger operation or the like, the movable body C moves to the fourth position (Fig. 127 ( The degree of expectation (that a specific result has been obtained) depends on whether an effect of moving to b)) appears or an effect of returning to the first position (FIG. 127(c)) without moving to the fourth position appears. (may be deterministically shown).

In the peripheral control board 1510, the physical object in the third drive coordinate area Z7-3 is moved upward by the player's finger operation and detected in the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4. In this case, it is determined that the conditions in the fourth operation control mode have been satisfied, and reception of the effect for the seventh coordinate area Z7 is ended. Then, when it is determined that the movable body C can move to the fourth position, as shown in FIG. is moved to the fourth position. On the other hand, when it is determined that the movable body C cannot move to the fourth position, as shown in FIG. Control is performed to move C to the first position.

However, at this time, even if it is determined that the movable body C can move up to the fourth position, the movable body C once moves downward (the movable body C moves to the fourth position (Fig. 127). (b)), and even if it is determined that the movable body C cannot move to the fourth position, the movable body C is once moved upward. It is desirable to show the movement of movement (the effect of whether or not the movable body C moves to the fourth position (FIG. 127(b))) in order to improve the amusement of the game.

Then, when the movable body C moves to the fourth position corresponding to the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4, the light emission mode (for example, blue) when the movable body C is positioned at the first position or the second position The light emission mode (e.g., green) when it is positioned at the third position (e.g., red) is different from the light emission mode (e.g., rainbow color). However, unlike the case of the first to third positions, the timing is not when the physical object is detected in the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4, but at a later timing (movable body C It is desirable to make it appear after the timing at which it is possible to definitely grasp the movement from the movement to the fourth position. Similarly, when the movable body C moves to the first position corresponding to the first driving coordinate area Z7-1, it does not occur when the physical object is detected in the fourth driving coordinate area Z7-4. It is desirable to end the light emission after a later timing (timing at which it can be determined with certainty that the movable body C will not move from the movement to the fourth position).

After moving the movable body C to the fourth position corresponding to the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4, the peripheral control board 1510 performs control to move the movable body C to the first position (original position) after a predetermined time has elapsed. By doing so, the fourth operation control mode is terminated.

By the way, in this fourth operation control mode, regardless of the degree of expectation of the big hit, the movable body is between the first position (FIG. 126(b)) and the third position (FIG. 127(a)) of the movable range CT. It is possible to move C freely. For example, after moving the movable body C to the second position (FIG. 126(c)), when the physical object is operated to return to the first drive coordinate area Z7-1 side, the peripheral control board 1510 returns to the first drive coordinate area Z7-1. Control is performed to move the movable body C from the second position (FIG. 126(c)) to the first position (FIG. 126(b)) based on the detection of the physical object again in the coordinate area Z7-1. . Further, when the physical object is operated to return to the second drive coordinate area Z7-2 after moving the movable body C to the third position (FIG. 127(a)), the peripheral control board 1510 returns to the second drive coordinate area Z7-2. Control is performed to move the movable body C from the third position (FIG. 127(a)) to the second position (FIG. 126(c)) based on the detection of the physical object again in the coordinate area Z7-2. It will happen.

According to such a configuration, as an effect of whether or not the movable body C moves to the fourth position (FIG. 127(b)), the driving mode of moving the movable body C up and down in small steps can be selected by the player's preference. Since it can be made to appear according to the situation and can be performed only for a time that suits the player's taste, it will be possible to manipulate the "pause" until the final result appears in the production, improving the game's interest. It is expected that Note that after the physical object is detected in the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4, the reception of the effect for the fourth operation control mode is terminated, so the movable body C cannot be freely manipulated.

It should be noted that the fourth driving coordinate area Z7-4 is set (controlled) to enable reception of the effect until a predetermined period of time elapses (a specific timing arrives). If the physical object is not properly detected in , reception of the effect for the sixth coordinate area Z6 or the seventh coordinate area Z7 is terminated. At this time, the behavior of the movable body C that appears when the physical object is properly detected in the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4 may be caused, or the movable body C may be moved without causing such behavior. , a plurality of predetermined positions (the first position (original position) shown in FIG. 126(b)).

In addition, in the fourth operation control mode according to this illustrative example, regardless of the degree of expectation of the big hit, from the first position (FIG. 126 (b)) to the third position (FIG. 127 (a)) of the movable range CT 126(b)) to the fourth position (FIG. 127(b)) of the movable range CT. It is also possible that the higher the position is, the higher the degree of expectation for the suggested big win. That is, in this case, the peripheral control board 1510 selects one of a plurality of production patterns with different big hit expectations based on the result of the big hit determination, and positions determined by the selected production pattern (first position to fourth position ), the movable body C is controlled to be operable. At this time, when the physical object moves from the first driving coordinate area Z7-1 to the second driving coordinate area Z7-2, or moves from the second driving coordinate area Z7-2 to the third driving coordinate area Z7-3, Also, an effect (behavior going back and forth) may appear to indicate whether or not the movable body C will move to the next position.

In addition, in the first to third operation control modes for the display unit D, when the images S1 to S4 are made available for effect reception, coordinate areas Z1 to Z4 larger than the images S1 to S4 in the front view are generated. On the other hand, in the fourth operation control mode for the movable body C, a sixth coordinate area Z6 smaller than the movable body C in the front view is generated when the movable body C is enabled to receive the effect. In other words, since the movable body often includes parts with a relatively large amount of movement and parts with a relatively small amount of movement, for example, a part with a relatively small amount of movement is produced It is desirable to exclude it from the acceptance target in order to suppress the decline in the interest in the game. On the other hand, in the display unit, if the coordinate area is set according to the size of the image that can receive the effect, it is required to use a large image in order to maintain the operability. Since there is a concern that the balance with the display image may be deteriorated, it is desirable to independently set the size of the image to be made available for effect reception separately from the setting range of the coordinate area.

However, when the movement of the physical object is detected within a specific coordinate area (here, the first driving coordinate area Z7-1 to the fourth driving coordinate area Z7-4) and control is performed to make an effect appear accordingly. , for example, the physical object detected in the first driving coordinate area Z7-1 moves and moves to the fourth driving coordinate area without passing through the second driving coordinate area Z7-2 or the third driving coordinate area Z7-3. It is conceivable that a situation in which Z7-4 is suddenly detected may occur. Such a situation can occur, for example, when the right hand is set as the detection target in the first drive coordinate area Z7-1, and then the left hand is set as the detection target in the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4 without moving the right hand. Therefore, it should be determined that the physical object is not moving, and an effect (such as moving the movable body C) according to the movement should not be executed.

In this respect, the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment generates an interrupt timer process every 4 ms while executing the above-mentioned peripheral control unit steady process (every 33.3 ms). In the timer processing, information from the left outer peripheral ambient light detection section 35a and information from the right outer peripheral ambient light detection section 35b are acquired and stored as coordinate information indicating the coordinate position at which the physical object was detected. Then, in the above-described peripheral control unit steady-state processing, a specific coordinate area is determined by analyzing a plurality of (8, 9) pieces of coordinate information stored every 4 ms after the end of the previous peripheral control unit steady-state processing. (For example, first drive coordinate area Z7-1 to fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4), it is determined whether or not the physical object is properly moving, and control data for the actuator is determined according to the result of the determination. to set. Then, in the interrupt processing every 1 ms, control is performed to drive the movable body C based on the control data set in this way, so that the movable body C moves to the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4. From the stage in which the physical object is in the middle of the movement and has not finished moving, the physical object starts to move so as to follow the movement of the physical object in the sixth coordinate area Z6 when viewed from the front. Note that the coordinate information is stored in chronological order in which the coordinate positions were acquired.

For example, even if a physical object is detected in the fourth driving coordinate area Z7-4 after the physical object is detected in the first driving coordinate area Z7-1, coordinate information indicating that the physical object was detected in the second driving coordinate area Z7-2 and the physical object was detected in the third driving coordinate area Z7-3 at a timing before the physical object was detected in If the coordinate information indicating the detection does not exist, it is determined that the physical object did not move properly, and the movable body C is controlled so as not to move.

That is, in the fourth operation control mode, the movable body C moves from the first position corresponding to the first driving coordinate area Z7-1 to the fourth position corresponding to the fourth driving coordinate area Z7-4. is performed when the physical object detected in the first driving coordinate area Z7-1 is in the second driving coordinate area Z7-2, in the third driving coordinate area Z7-3, and in the fourth driving coordinate area Z7- 4 in chronological order. For example, if there is no detection in the third driving coordinate area Z7-3, only up to the second position corresponding to the second driving coordinate area Z7-2. The movable body C is designed not to move. As a result, only when the special operation receiving portion 3333 is properly operated, a proper effect can be produced.

In addition, in the fourth operation control mode, the movable body C is controlled to move depending on whether the physical object is detected in each of the coordinate areas Z7-1 to Z7-4. , movement of the movable body C is controlled according to whether or not movement of a physical object having a vector component in the direction toward the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4 is detected within the movable range CT of the movable body C. can be That is, in this case, the vector component of the physical object is analyzed based on the acquired coordinate positions stored in chronological order.

It should be noted that the setting control of the coordinate area, the movement detection of the physical object, and the effect control of the movable body C used in the fourth operation control mode, for example, can be performed in the display section in the third operation control mode described above. may be applied to the image S4 of .

Further, in the third operation control mode and the fourth operation control mode, the detection (acceptance of effect) related to the movement of the physical object after the movement of the physical object has started in the special operation receiving section 3333 has not ended and continues. During this period, control is performed to move the object to be rendered (display image or movable body) in a manner corresponding to at least the direction and amount of movement of the already detected physical object. With such a configuration, since it is possible to create effects as if the player himself creates the effects, it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

By the way, in the first operation control mode, the second operation control mode, the third operation control mode, and the fourth operation control mode, the effect reception for the special operation reception unit 3333 is performed at the coordinates set at that time. Confined within the area. However, the physical object detection itself in the special operation receiving unit 3333 is always performed (every 4 ms), and the detected coordinate information is stored in association with the acquired time series. Then, the peripheral control board 1510 analyzes the position, motion, etc. of the physical object based on the coordinate information stored in association with the time series in the peripheral control unit regular processing (every 33.3 ms). In this regard, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, when a physical object is detected in the special operation receiving unit 3333, any one of a plurality of analysis processes with different analysis contents can be executed. Even if the same movement is detected as the movement of the physical object in the section 3333, different control can be performed according to the analysis result.

FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing a control example of the physical object detection information analysis processing executed in the peripheral control unit regular processing.

That is, in the peripheral control board 1510, first, it is determined whether or not there is an operation effect accepting period generated based on the satisfaction of a specific effect condition according to the result of the big hit determination (step S3301). As a result, when it is in the operation effect acceptance period, as described above, the physical object is detected within the coordinate area in which the effect can be accepted based on the coordinate information stored in association with the time series. It is analyzed whether or not there is, and if a physical object is detected within the coordinate area where the effect can be received, the movement mode and size of the physical object are further analyzed (step S3302). Then, based on the analysis results for these effects, control (reset or end) regarding the coordinate area that can receive effects, control to cause changes in effects such as display images and movable bodies, and current conditions control to maintain the effect state (step S3303). As a result of the processing in step S3302, even if a physical object is not detected in the coordinate area that can receive the effect, control (resetting, end), or control to return the display image or the object to be rendered such as the movable body to the original position (for example, control to move the movable body C to the first position shown in FIG. 126(a)).

On the other hand, in the processing of step S3301, if it is determined that the coordinate area in which the special operation receiving unit 3333 can receive the effect is not within the set operation effect receiving period, the analysis content for the effect is determined. The analysis is performed with different contents (step S3312). That is, the special operation receiving portion 3333 according to this embodiment is provided in a manner facing the entire game board 5 . Therefore, in order to fraudulently facilitate the winning of game balls, the act of placing a magnet at a coordinate position facing various winning openings in the special operation receiving portion 3333, or pulling a wire or the like from the gap between the door frame 3 and the glass plate 192 It is conceivable that an act such as breaking in and destroying a speaker that emits an alarm sound at the time of fraud will be performed.

Therefore, in the process of step S3312, it is analyzed whether or not there is a possibility that a fraudulent act is being performed in the special operation receiving section 3333, based on the coordinate information stored in chronological order. I'm trying For example, it is determined whether or not a physical object is detected within the special operation receiving section 3333, and if a physical object is detected within the special operation receiving section 3333, the movement mode, size, etc. of the physical object are determined. Analyzes whether or not matches the mode of movement, size, etc. that can appear when a fraudulent act is being performed. If it is determined that there is a possibility that fraudulent activity has been carried out as a result of such analysis for fraud countermeasures, an external output indicating that fraudulent activity has been carried out, or an alarm sound or warning light is emitted. (step S3313), and if it is not determined that there is a possibility of fraudulent activity, control is performed so that such fraud countermeasures are not taken (step S3313). ).

As an analysis procedure (step S3312) for such fraud countermeasures, for example, when a physical object is detected in the special operation receiving unit 3333, the detected coordinate position is set as a reference position for analysis ( Remember. Next, an analysis coordinate range that includes the analysis reference position and extends by a predetermined distance from the analysis reference position is set, and the detected physical object stays within the analysis coordinate range for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). ) (physical object hardly moves). As a result, if the detected physical object continues to stay within the coordinate range for analysis for a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds), there is a possibility that some kind of fraudulent act is being performed within the coordinate range for analysis. It is possible to adopt a method of determining that there is At this time, if the size of the physical object is such that it is impossible to commit fraud (e.g., it is extremely thin), even if such a movement mode is detected, fraudulent activity will not occur. It is also possible not to determine that there is a possibility that As a result, it is possible to prevent an erroneous notification from being made when dirt or the like adheres to the glass plate 192 .

According to such a configuration, during the operation presentation acceptance period, even if any action is performed, it is not judged as a fraudulent act, and the analysis is performed only as a presentation act, and the result of the analysis is performed. On the other hand, if it is not during the operation effect acceptance period, all actions are determined as fraudulent analysis targets, and anti-fraud control can be performed according to the results of the analysis. become. Therefore, even if one event (for example, an event in which a physical object is detected in a specific coordinate area for 30 seconds) occurs in the special operation receiving unit 3333 and is detected, depending on the rendering situation, If it is regarded as a performance act and causes a specific performance change, it is also possible that it is regarded as a fraudulent act and fraudulent notification is issued. In this way, one detection information is used for a plurality of different purposes (here, the purpose of performance and the purpose of countermeasures against fraud) depending on the situation of the game and performance, so that more purposes can be achieved with less detection information. can be achieved, and an efficient control structure can be realized.

In addition, in this example of explanation, when it is not in the operation effect acceptance period that occurs based on the satisfaction of the specific effect condition according to the result of the big hit determination, the effect change is not caused by the operation of the special operation receiving part 3333. However, even when it is not in the operation effect acceptance period (always), the detection of the physical object in the special operation receiving unit 3333 changes the display image, or the movable body emits light and moves. good too. However, in this case, when it is not during the operation effect acceptance period, in addition to judging all acts as analysis targets for fraudulent acts, it is also judged as analysis targets for effect acts, and each control is performed according to the results of these determinations. Become. Therefore, when one event occurs in the special operation receiving section 3333, both the effect change and the fraudulent notification can appear.

Also, in the middle of monitoring whether the physical object continues to stay within the analysis coordinate range for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), it is determined that a specific effect condition according to the result of the big hit determination is satisfied. If the operation effect acceptance period occurs based on the above, the analysis process for countermeasures against fraud is not terminated, and the physical object continues to stay within the coordinate range for analysis for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). It is desirable to continue even after the operation effect acceptance period has occurred. In other words, in this case, in addition to performing analysis processing for presentation and control according to the results during the operation presentation acceptance period, the physical object continues to stay within the coordinate range for analysis for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). will continue to be monitored, and depending on the results of the monitoring, fraudulent reporting will be carried out.

By the way, when the special operation receiving unit 3333 is in the first effect period in which the reception of the effect related to the first effect event (for example, the effect of moving the movable body) is allowed, an operation means different from the special operation receiving unit 3333 ( For example, the operation button 410) may be controlled to further generate a second effect period during which the acceptance of a second effect event (for example, an effect of changing the display image) is permitted.

For example, as shown in FIG. 129(a), at timing t1, the special operation receiving section 3333 permits reception of an effect (reception of a panel operation) related to a first effect event (for example, an effect of moving a movable body). Assume that the first performance period has occurred. It should be noted that, in this first effect period, during the period from the occurrence of the period to the arrival of the timing t2 when the first reception time elapses, the special operation receiving unit 3333 starts moving the physical object. Control to operate the movable body in a manner corresponding to at least the movement direction and the movement amount of the already detected (analyzed) physical object while the movement detection (analysis) is not finished and is still continuing. (For example, control to move a specific movable body so as to follow the movement of the physical object, etc.) can be executed.

In this regard, in the peripheral control board 1510, when it is determined that the specific effect condition is satisfied based on the result of the big hit determination, the first effect period is generated, and this is continued without being terminated. Furthermore, a second effect in which reception of effect (reception of button operation) related to a second effect event (for example, effect of changing the display image) is permitted in an operation means (for example, operation button 410) different from special operation receiving unit 3333 It is possible to execute control for setting an effect pattern, an advance notice effect, etc. that are determined to generate a period.

That is, in this case, when the timing t11 arrives while the first effect period is occurring, the reception of effect (reception of button operation) related to the second effect event (for example, the effect of changing the display image) is permitted with the operation button 410. control is performed to generate a second effect period. Then, when the operation of the operation button 410 is accepted during the period from the occurrence of the second presentation period to the arrival of the timing t12 when the second reception time has elapsed, the second presentation period ends at that time. Let Alternatively, when the operation of the operation button 410 is not accepted until the timing t12 arrives, the second effect period is terminated when the timing t12 arrives.

According to such a configuration, the first effect period during which the reception of the effect related to the first effect event is permitted by the first operation part (here, the special operation receiving unit 3333) and the reception of the effect related to the second effect event. and the second effect period allowed by the second operation part (here, operation button 410) occur simultaneously (timings t11 to t12 shown in FIG. 129(a)). Moreover, in the above configuration, the end timings of the first performance period and the second performance period are different, so that the second performance period generated later than the first performance period is ended earlier. That is, in this case, when the second effect period occurs after the first effect period, even if the first operation part is being operated, the operation is interrupted and the second operation part is operated. Therefore, it is required to simultaneously operate the first operating part and the second operating part in different modes. come to be expected.

It should be noted that, in order to suitably realize such effect operability, as shown in FIG. Reception) is produced when it is detected that a predetermined number of times (preferably once) or a predetermined amount of operation (a finite amount of operation) has been performed on the second operation portion (here, the operation button 410). Assuming that the execution condition is satisfied, it is desirable to perform control to generate a second effect event (for example, effect action that changes the display image) without requiring any subsequent operation. For example, when one pressing operation is detected for the operation button 410, the second effect period is ended before the timing t12 arrives, and after that, no operation is required, and the display image changes the effect. This includes control that causes

On the other hand, regarding the production reception related to the first production event (the production reception on the side that ends after a relatively long period of time has passed), at least until the second production period ends, and even after that Regardless of the number of operations or the amount of operation for one operation part, the reception of the effect related to the first effect event is continued without ending, and each time the first operation part is operated during the continuation, the operation is performed. It is desirable to perform control to reflect the change in performance according to the operation. For example, the movement of the physical object detected in the special operation receiving unit 3333 is analyzed, and depending on the movement mode (movement amount, etc.) of the physical object, reception of the effect is continued without ending. Control for repeatedly executing the process of moving the movable body to the latest analyzed coordinate position each time the movement is analyzed periodically (every 33.3 ms) corresponds to this.

According to such a configuration, even if the operation of the first operation portion is interrupted when the second effect period occurs after the first effect period, the opportunity to operate the first operation portion is lost. Since it is possible to suitably guarantee that the game will not be broken, the decrease in interest in the game due to the interruption can be suppressed. Further, if the second operation part is operated after interrupting the operation of the first operation part, the second effect period can be terminated at a relatively early stage, and after that, the second operation part is operated. Since the effect change (second effect event) corresponding to the operation occurs without requiring the This is also suitably ensured for the operation opportunity for one operation portion.

In this case, in a situation where the operation on the first operation part is resumed, the effect change (second effect event) corresponding to the operation on the second operation part is about to start, and the first operation is started. It is possible to generate a special performance situation such that the second performance event can be enjoyed while the operation opportunity for the part is provided. In this regard, "When an operation is performed on the second operation part, a performance event in which the size of the specific display image changes occurs, and when the first operation part is operated, the specific display image is moved to a specific position. If the first effect event is set to affect (change) the aspect of the effect object of the second effect event, such as "make the effect event to move occur", the above In a special performance situation, the second performance event can be enjoyed while changing the aspect of the performance object of the second performance event by operating the first operation part, and the second performance event can be enjoyed more dynamically and freely. High operability and performance suitable for this are realized.

Here, as an example of influencing (changing) the aspect of the object to be rendered of the second effect event when an operation is performed on the first operation part, for example, the effect of the second effect event Changing at least one of the movement amount, movement direction, movement speed, light emission mode (light color, traveling direction, light intensity, etc.), size, or shape of an object (display image, movable body, etc.) However, it is not limited to these, as long as it can have some influence on the object of the second effect event (display image, sound effect, movable body, etc.). In other words, even though the target of the operation effect for the first operation part and the target of the operation effect for the second operation part are the same target of the effect, the aspect of the effect produced on the target of the effect (for example, the first operation part The size is changed in the operation effect for the second operation part, and the display position is changed in the operation effect for the second operation part). Further, the first effect period does not necessarily have to be set as a finite time, and the operation to the first operation part is accepted even after the second effect period ends. Any device may be used as long as the first operation portion can be operated when an event is occurring.

Further, in a period in which both the first effect period and the second effect period occur simultaneously, the effect reception related to the first effect event and the effect reception related to the second effect event are related to the second effect event. Only with respect to reception of the effect, display prompting an operation instruction and display suggesting the maximum remaining time as the second effect period favorably prompts the interruption of the operation of the first operation part. desirable above.

In addition, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, in order to suitably realize the relationship of such effects, even if control is performed to generate the second effect period after the first effect period, Control is performed so as not to generate the first presentation period after the second presentation period.

Also, in the above explanation example, both the first effect period and the second effect period are generated at the same time. It may be temporarily terminated, and when the second presentation period ends, the first presentation period may be generated again. Even in this case, it is impossible to realize the above-described operability and performance in such a manner that the mode of the performance object of the second performance event is affected when the first operation site is operated. It is possible.

Further, in the above-described example, each time the operation is performed on the first operation part, control is performed to reflect the effect change corresponding to the operation. When there is, control may be performed to reflect a change in performance corresponding to the operation.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, the control method according to each of the explanation examples described above can be appropriately used to realize various operation acceptance presentations as follows.

[Production example 1 using the special operation receiving part 3333]
For example, as shown in FIG. 130(a), the effect pattern of the effect example 1 (variation pattern of the effect example 1) is set based on the result of the big hit determination, and the effect of the effect example 1 is set on the display unit D. It is assumed that the decorative design SZ is changed in the pattern. Then, the peripheral control board 1510 sets the coordinate area (not shown) facing the movable bodies A1 and A2 in the special operation receiving section 3333 to be capable of receiving the effect during the period when the effect pattern of the effect example 1 appears. Generates an operation performance period to (control).

Here, as the effect pattern of the effect example 1, at least the effect pattern A1 of the effect example 1 that is determined to move the movable body A1 and the effect example 1 that is determined to move the movable body A2 production pattern A2 is included. However, while the movable body A1 is provided on the front side of the game board 5 so as to be visible from the player side, the movable body A2 is provided on the rear side of the game board 5 so that it is difficult for the player side to visually recognize it. It is provided at a position overlapping the movable body A1 in front view. Therefore, in the peripheral control board 1510, even if either of the effect patterns A1 and A2 is performed as the effect pattern of the above-described effect example 1, the coordinate area (not shown) facing the movable body A1 is displayed on the display unit D. , a suggestion image HG1 is displayed to suggest that an operation of sliding the movable body A1 in the movable direction (here, leftward direction) should be performed. Also, in the same way, regardless of which of the production patterns A1 and A2 is being performed, the movable body A1 is made to emit light to suggest that the coordinate area (not shown) facing it should be operated. ing.

Then, when such a slide operation is properly accepted while the effect pattern A1 is being performed, the peripheral control board 1510 follows the slide operation by the player as shown in FIG. 130(b). Control is performed to start the leftward movement of the movable body A1. Note that even in this situation, the display unit D displays a suggestion image HG1 suggesting that a slide operation should be performed in the moving direction of the movable body A1 (here, leftward) in the coordinate area (not shown) facing the movable body A1. is displayed, and the movable body A1 is in a light emitting state.

Then, when such a slide operation reaches a specific position while the effect pattern A1 is being performed, the peripheral control board 1510 moves so as to follow the slide operation by the player, as shown in FIG. 131(a). After the body A1 is moved to a specific performance position, control is performed to end the operation performance period during which reception of performance for the movable body A1 is allowed. In this situation, the display section D displays a display suggesting that the movable body A1 has been successfully moved to a specific performance position and the expectation for the big hit determination is high, and the movable body A1 emits light. It is desirable to perform an effect such as changing the mode or shape of the

However, even if the slide operation by the player reaches a specific position while the effect pattern A1 is being performed, if the predetermined effect condition is not satisfied, the peripheral control board 1510 will not perform the control shown in FIG. 131 ( As shown in b), the movable body A1 is stopped from following the slide operation by the player, so that the operation performance period during which the reception of the performance for the movable body A1 is permitted is ended, and the movable body A1 is returned to the original position. Control to move back. In this case, the display section D displays a display suggesting that the move of the movable body A1 to a specific performance position has failed and the degree of expectation for the big hit determination is low, and the movable body A1 stops emitting light. It will be controlled so that

On the other hand, when the player's slide operation is properly accepted while the effect pattern A2 is being performed, the peripheral control board 1510 responds to the player's slide operation as shown in FIG. 130(c). The leftward movement of the movable body A2 is controlled so as to follow it. Note that even in this situation, the display unit D displays a suggestion image HG1 suggesting that a slide operation should be performed in the moving direction of the movable body A1 (here, leftward) in the coordinate area (not shown) facing the movable body A1. is displayed, and the movable body A1 is in a light emitting state. However, in addition to this, the movable body A2 is also controlled to be in a light emitting state.

Then, when such a slide operation reaches a specific position while the performance pattern A2 is being performed, the peripheral control board 1510 moves so as to follow the slide operation by the player, as shown in FIG. 131(c). After the body A2 is moved to a specific performance position, control is performed to terminate the operation performance period during which performance acceptance for the movable body A2 is permitted. In this situation, the display section D displays a display suggesting that the movable body A2 has been successfully moved to a specific performance position and that the expectation for the big hit determination is extremely high. It is desirable to perform an effect such as changing the mode or shape of light emission.

However, even if the slide operation by the player reaches a specific point while the effect pattern A2 is being performed, if the predetermined effect condition is not satisfied, the peripheral control board 1510 will not be able to perform the operation shown in FIG. 131 ( As shown in b), the movable body A2 is stopped from following the slide operation by the player, so that the operation performance period during which the reception of the performance for the movable body A2 is permitted is terminated, and the movable body A2 is returned to the original position. Control to move back. In this case, the display section D displays a display suggesting that the move of the movable body A2 to the specific performance position fails and the expectation for the big hit determination is low, and the movable bodies A1 and A2 emit light. is terminated.

According to this production example 1, when the player performs the slide operation while the situation shown in FIG. Instead, the movable body A2, which was made difficult to see, suddenly appears and moves, so the decline in the interest in the game is suppressed by the movable effect with a surprise that the object of the effect has been replaced. be able to be

Further, although illustration is omitted, according to such production example 1, within the period from the appearance of the situation of FIG. 130(a) to the appearance of the situation of FIG. Although the movable body A2 has started to move, it is still at a position (behind the game board 5) that is difficult to see, and from the player's point of view, there is a situation where it seems as if no change in performance has occurred. become able to appear. In other words, in this case, the movable body A2 moves forward of the display section D after causing disappointment that no effect change has occurred despite the fact that the slide operation is properly performed by the player. Therefore, the decline in interest in the game can be more suitably suppressed by such a surprise movable effect.

Further, in the production example 1, as shown in FIGS. 131(a) and 131(c), the movable bodies A1 and A2 are advanced to a position overlapping the decorative pattern SZ in the varying state. , the player is encouraged to shift his gaze from the decoration pattern SZ to the movable bodies A1 and A2, and it becomes difficult to overlook which of the movable bodies A1 and A2 has appeared.

Moreover, in the above configuration, the mode of overlap with the decorative pattern SZ differs depending on whether the movable body A1 appears or the movable body A2 appears. Even if the player fails to shift his/her gaze, it is possible to predict which of the movable bodies A1 and A2 has appeared by confirming the size and position of the part where the decorative pattern SZ is made difficult to visually recognize. This makes it possible to suppress the loss of interest in the game when the player misses which of the movable bodies A1 and A2 has appeared.

It should be noted that, in the production example 1, the movable body A1 is arranged on the front side of the game board 5 and the movable body A2 is arranged on the rear side of the game board 5. Both the movable bodies A1 and A2 may be arranged on the back side of the game board 5, or both the movable bodies A1 and A2 may be arranged on the back side of the game board 5.

Here, when both the movable bodies A1 and A2 are arranged on the front side of the game board 5, the movable body A1 is arranged on the front side so that the movable body A2 is difficult to see. It is desirable to keep the movable base portion (the portion that does not move) and the like to remain positioned on the front side of the movable body A2 even when A1 moves, thereby maintaining the difficulty of visually recognizing the movable body A2.

On the other hand, when both the movable bodies A1 and A2 are arranged on the back side of the game board 5, it is possible to give the player enjoyment as to which of the movable bodies A1 and A2 will appear by the player's operation. become. In this case, the portion of the game board 5 positioned in front of the movable bodies A1 and A2 is made to emit light to prompt the user to operate the coordinate area (special operation receiving portion 3333) facing the portion. is desirable.

Further, in the production example 1, the movable bodies A1 and A2 are set so as to move in the same direction (to the left), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the movable direction of the movable body A1 is set to the left direction and the movable direction of the movable body A2 is set to the upward direction, the game is played in the left direction by being urged by the operation instruction suggesting the left direction (suggestion image HG1). Although the slide operation is performed by the player, the movable body A2 moves upward, and the decline in the interest in the game can be more preferably suppressed by such a surprise movable effect. Alternatively, even though the player is prompted to operate the movable body A1 whose movable direction is set to the left, an operation instruction suggesting an upward direction is made to appear so that the player can perform an upward slide operation. When this is done, the movable body A2, which has been made difficult to see, may move upward and appear.

Further, in the production example 1, when the movable body A2 appears by the player's operation, the movable body A1 does not move, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the movable body A2 is moved by the player's operation, the movable body A1 is also moved following the player's slide operation. Even if only the movable body A1 is moved back to the original position after the movable bodies A1 and A2 have moved by a predetermined distance, the decline in the interest in the game can be more suitably suppressed by the surprise movable performance. become nauseous. Alternatively, when moving the movable body A2 by the player's operation, first, only the movable body A1 is moved following the player's slide operation. After moving the movable body A1 by a predetermined distance, the movable body A1 is moved back to the original position, and the movable body A2 is moved following the slide operation by the player. Decrease in game interest can be more suitably suppressed by a certain movable effect. However, when the player's operation target is switched between the movable bodies A1 and A2, the player's operation is kept at a predetermined position for a predetermined time (the time required for the movable body A2 to move to the predetermined position). It is desirable to execute the production.

Also, in the production example 1 above, when the movable body A2 is moving (see FIGS. 130(c) and 131(c)), the movable bodies A1 and A2 are caused to emit light respectively. In this situation, the movable body A1 does not necessarily have to emit light. That is, in this case, when the physical object is detected in the coordinate area (special operation receiving section 3333) facing the movable body A1, or when the movable body A2 starts advancing to the front side of the display section D and returns to the original position Control is performed to end the light emission of the movable body A1 at a timing that is easier to see than a certain time (timing at which the movable body A1 has moved to a predetermined position).

Also, in the above production example 1 and its other examples, the movable body A2 is arranged on the rear side overlapping the movable body A1 in a front view, but instead of the movable body A1, the board surface light emitting part E is arranged. You may do so. That is, in this case, when the movable body A2 is moved (in the situation shown in FIG. 130(a)), the board surface light-emitting part E located in front of the movable body A2 is made to emit light, so that the movable body A2 is in a state that is difficult to see. An operation to the coordinate area (special operation receiving portion 3333) facing A2 is prompted.

130(a) to 130(c), regardless of where the movable bodies A1 and A2 are located, the suggestive image HG1 shows one effect. The situation (initial situation where none of the movable bodies are moving) is shown. However, instead of this, the display mode of the suggestive image HG1 is changed according to the position of the movable bodies A1 and A2 so that the movement status of the movable bodies A1 and A2 can be recognized just by looking at the suggestive image HG1. can be

[Production example 2 using the special operation receiving part 3333]
For example, now, as shown in FIG. 132(a), the effect pattern of effect example 2 (variation pattern of effect example 2) is set based on the result of the big hit determination, and the effect of effect example 2 is set on display unit D. It is assumed that the decorative design SZ is changed in the pattern. Then, the peripheral control board 1510 sets (controls) the coordinate area (not shown) facing the movable body A1 in the special operation receiving section 3333 to be able to receive the effect during the period when the effect pattern of the effect example 2 appears. ) is generated.

Here, as the effect pattern of effect example 2, at least the effect pattern A1 of effect example 2 that is determined to operate the movable body A1 and the effect pattern A1 that is determined to operate the movable body A1 and the movable body B are determined to operate respectively. Effect pattern AB of example 2 of effect shown is included. 130(a), (b), and FIG. 131(a) (or FIG. 131(b)). In the mode shown in 1, an opportunity to receive an operation effect for the movable body A1 is provided, and the movable body A1 moves. On the other hand, in the effect pattern AB of effect example 2, the opportunity to receive the operation effect for the movable body B is provided after the opportunity for receiving the operation effect for the movable body A1 is provided. Therefore, in the peripheral control board 1510, even if either of the effect patterns A1 and AB is performed as the effect pattern of the example 2 of effect, the coordinate area (not shown) facing the movable body A1 is displayed on the display unit D. , a suggestion image HG1 is displayed to suggest that an operation of sliding the movable body A1 in the movable direction (here, leftward direction) should be performed. Also, in the same way, regardless of which of the production patterns A1 and AB is being performed, the movable body A1 is caused to emit light to suggest that the coordinate area (not shown) facing the movable body A1 should be operated. ing.

However, in the effect pattern AB of effect example 2, when an operation to a coordinate area (not shown) facing the movable body A1 is accepted (when a physical object is detected), a specific effect event is generated for the movable body A1. is not generated, first, as shown in FIG. 132(b), the suggestive image HG1 on the display unit D is hidden, and control is performed to interrupt the reception of the effect in the coordinate area facing the movable body A1. At this time, it is desirable that the decorative pattern SZ on the display section D is displayed in a manner that is visible but difficult to visually recognize (such as semi-transparent display), and the luminous state of the movable body A1 is also interrupted. It is desirable to let

Then, as shown in FIG. 132(c), in the display section D in which the suggestive image HG1 is hidden in this manner, an operation means (such as the operation button 410) other than the special operation receiving section 3333 is operated. The prompting operation instruction image SG is displayed, and an operation reception period for a specific effect using the other operation means (such as the operation button 410) is generated. Then, when an operation to another operation means (such as the operation button 410) is accepted during the operation acceptance period of the specific effect, the operation instruction image SG in the display section D is hidden as shown in FIG. 133(a). At the same time, control is performed so that the movable body B different from the movable body A1 initially shown as the object of effect is operated. In addition, in this production example 2, the movable body B is advanced to the front side of the display section D for a predetermined time.

Then, in the effect pattern AB of effect example 2, after the movable body B moves in this way, as shown in FIG. Along with displaying a suggestive image HG2 suggesting that an operation of sliding body A1 in the moving direction (here, leftward) should be performed, a coordinate area (not shown) facing movable body A1 in special operation receiving section 3333 is displayed. is set (controlled) so that the performance can be accepted. At this time, the opportunity for the effect operation of the movable body A1 is given again, but after the situation shown in FIG. 132(a) appears, the movable body B does not move and the movable body A1 moves It is preferable to set the effect pattern AB of the effect example 2 in which the movable body A1 moves after the movable body B moves so that the degree of expectation is higher than the effect pattern A1 of the effect example 2 described above. In this case, as shown in FIG. 133(b), the suggestive image HG2 is displayed differently from the suggestive image HG1 shown in FIG. Alternatively, it is desirable to make the lighting mode of the movable body A1 different from the lighting mode of the movable body A1 shown in FIG. .

In addition, in the production pattern AB of production example 2, after the situation shown in FIG. In the mode shown in a) (or FIG. 131(b)), an opportunity to receive an operation presentation for the movable body A1 is provided, and the movable body A1 moves. 130(c) and 131(c) (or FIG. 131(b)) after the situation shown in FIG. ), an opportunity to receive an operation effect for the movable body A1 may be provided, and the effect pattern in which the movable body A1 moves may appear.

In particular, in the production pattern AB of this production example 2, as shown in FIG. Since they are made different, this is also the movement effect that appears when the operation of sliding the movable body A1 in the movable direction (here, leftward direction) is performed in the coordinate area (not shown) facing the movable body A1. is preferably performed in a special execution mode different from the case of effect pattern A1 of example 2 of effect.

According to the production pattern AB of production example 2, the first production opportunity using the first operation part (here, the special operation receiving unit 3333) is given first (in this situation, the second operation Although the second performance opportunity for the site (for example, the operation button 410) is not granted), when the first operation site is operated and the performance is accepted, it is different from the first operation site. A second performance opportunity for the second operation part (for example, the operation button 410) is provided, and the first performance opportunity is temporarily lost. Then, when the second operation part (for example, the operation button 410) is operated in a situation where the first performance opportunity is temporarily lost and the performance is accepted, a second performance event ( Here, the motion of the movable body B) occurs. That is, in this case, it is possible to generate a performance as to whether or not the second performance opportunity for the second operation part is granted when the performance for the first operation part is accepted. A novel operability using the operation part of is provided.

It should be noted that, in order to suitably realize novel operability using such a plurality of operation parts, it is desirable to always provide the second operation part in a form that is physically difficult to operate. Then, when it is determined that the second performance opportunity for the second operation part is given, it is difficult to physically operate the second operation part based on the reception of the performance for the first operation part. It is desirable to perform control from a mode to an easy-to-operate mode, and to allow reception of an effect for the second operation portion when in the easy-to-operate mode. Here, the term "physically difficult to operate" refers to, for example, a mode in which the second operation part (for example, the operation button 410) is covered with another member to make it difficult to operate, or a mode in which the second operation part is covered is positioned in the same state as when the is already operated, and "control from a physically difficult to operate to an easy to operate" means, for example, that the second operation part itself is Control to operate to a position where it is not covered by other members, control to operate another member covering the second operation portion to a position where the second operation portion is not covered, and operation of the second operation portion It can be realized as a control to operate to a position different from the state when it is pressed. Further, in this case, the trigger for controlling the second operation portion from the state in which it is physically difficult to operate to the state in which it is easy to operate does not necessarily have to be when the effect is received for the first operation portion. It may be the time when a specific time has passed after the effect pattern of is executed. In any case, in providing the second performance opportunity for the second operation part when the performance reception for the first operation part is made, the second operation part itself or a member provided in the vicinity thereof is operated. It is preferable to do so in order to suggest that the target of operation has been changed from the first operation portion to the second operation portion and that the change will increase the degree of expectation.

Further, in the production pattern AB of the production example 2, after giving the first production opportunity using the first operation part (here, the special operation receiving part 3333), the first operation part is operated to A second performance opportunity is provided based on the fact that the performance has been accepted. However, after a predetermined time has elapsed after the first performance opportunity using the first operation part (here, the special operation receiving part 3333) is provided (or after the suggestive image HG1 is displayed), the first A second performance opportunity may be given to a second operation portion (for example, the operation button 410) different from the operation portion of , and the first performance opportunity may be temporarily lost. In this case, until the predetermined time elapses, the first effect event is generated by the operation of the first operating part, but the first effect event ends when the predetermined time elapses. (If the object to be rendered is a movable body, the movable body is controlled to return to its original position). Alternatively, the first performance opportunity using the first operation part is not given, and a second operation part different from the first operation part (for example, A second performance opportunity for the operation button 410) may be provided. That is, in this case, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game when the effect reception is not performed by the operation of the first operation portion even though the suggestive image HG1 is displayed.

Further, in the production pattern AB of the production example 2, after the suggestive image HG1 is displayed, the suggestive image HG1 is hidden. , may be further displayed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to depict how the suggestive image HG1 changes to the suggestive image HG2 with a higher degree of expectation, so that it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest in the game. However, at this time, if the suggestive image HG1 is displayed in a state in which no effect is received for the first operation part, the display mode of the suggestive image HG1 is changed (for example, from color display to black-and-white display, translucent display, etc.). It is desirable to use a display mode that is relatively difficult to see). In addition, a timing image showing the remaining display time of the suggestive image HG1 (remaining time for receiving the effect for the first operation part) is also displayed, so that the reception for the effect for the first operation part is not performed. In this state, if the timer image indicates that the remaining time does not decrease, the player can be made to recognize that the remaining period for accepting the effect for the first operation portion does not decrease. Thus, the player can enjoy a game using another operating means (for example, the operating button 410) with peace of mind. In this case, even though the effect is not received for the first operation part, the remaining time for receiving the effect is shown to have decreased by a predetermined amount, and then the remaining time does not decrease. is indicated by the timing image, it is possible to provide a more interesting effect.

Further, in the effect pattern AB of the effect example 2, after the suggestion image HG1 is displayed, based on the fact that the effect reception for the first operation part is performed, a predetermined effect is not received for the first operation part. A period is generated, and the display mode of the suggestive image HG1 is changed (for example, from color display to black-and-white display, or to a display mode that is relatively difficult to see, such as translucent display, etc.) in the predetermined period, and clocking is performed. The image may indicate that the remaining time does not decrease (eg, the display meter does not decrease and becomes stationary). Also, at this time, it is desirable to change the display mode of the image different from the suggestive image HG1 on the display unit D. In this case, when the predetermined period ends after the second opportunity for effect is provided, the display mode of the suggestion image HG1 is changed to a mode with a higher degree of expectation, and the reception of the effect for the first operation site is performed again. You may do so.

In addition, in the effect pattern of the effect example 2, after the suggestive image HG1 prompting the operation with the movable body A1 as the object of effect is displayed (or while the suggestive image HG1 is being displayed), the movable body B is operated. However, the movable body B does not have to be operated by the player. It may be a non-operable movable body that moves. When such a non-operable movable body is adopted, even if it is determined to operate (a special result is obtained), no operation instruction is issued for the non-operable movable body, and the operation is accepted. Nor. In this regard, if the determination of whether or not the predetermined operating conditions for the non-operating movable object are satisfied is appropriately generated regardless of the execution status of the production pattern, other objects to be produced (movable objects, display images, etc.) etc.) is displayed, the decision to operate the non-operable movable body can be secretly made, so that an operation instruction related to another performance object appears and the operation is accepted. While it is possible, it is possible to have the possibility that non-operable movable bodies that are not related to this will suddenly move, and the possibility that special movable bodies and other objects will move at the same time. Thus, it can be expected that the game interest will be improved by such unexpected operation effects.

Further, when the suggestive images HG1 and HG2 and the operation instruction image SG appear in the display portion D, the target operation portion (the specific coordinate area of the special operation receiving portion 3333, the operation button 410, etc.) is displayed. ), the effect can be received also in the coordinate area (special operation receiving portion 3333) facing the portion where the suggestive images HG1 and HG2 and the operation instruction image SG appear. good too. According to such a configuration, even if the operation site cannot be recognized, the specific image (suggestion images HG1 and HG2 and the operation instruction image S) appearing in the display section D can be operated by simply operating the specific image. A similar effect can be generated, and a decline in the interest in the game can be suppressed.

In the above-described embodiment, while the special operation receiving unit 3333 continues to detect the movement of the physical object after the movement of the physical object has started, at least the detected physical object is detected. It is possible to control the movement of the object to be rendered (display image or movable body) in accordance with the direction and amount of movement. Then, the movement speed may be reflected in the movement of the movable body.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, in realizing the operation effect using the special operation receiving portion 3333, the effect is performed in the coordinate area facing the part to be operated in the special operation receiving portion 3333. Although the reception is performed, it is not necessarily the coordinate area facing the part to be operated, and the effect reception may be performed in a specific coordinate area in the special operation receiving section 3333. good.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, the change in light caused by the operation (physical object such as a finger) on the special operation receiving section 3333 is detected by the peripheral external light detection section 35 and detected by the peripheral control board 1510. By analyzing, the operation mode (such as movement information of a physical object such as a finger) for the special operation receiving unit 3333 is determined. The mode of operation on the portion 3333 (in this case, the mode of touch operation on the glass plate 192) may be determined. However, in this case, there is a concern that the visibility of the game area and the display area through the glass plate 192 may be adversely affected.

Next, the game control of the pachinko machine 1 in this embodiment will be described in detail. FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the special symbol and special electric accessary product control process (FIG. 94: step S114).

Now, assuming that the main control program is shifted to the special symbol and special electric accessory control process (FIG. 94: step S114), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first executes the above-described second On the condition that the detection signal by the first starting hole sensor 4002 is in the ON state (the ball has entered the first starting hole 2002) (YES in step S5231), the random number for judging the first big hit is acquired from the random number counter. The first start opening passage processing such as storing this in the first special symbol reservation storage area of the main control built-in RAM is executed (step S5232). Also, on the condition that the detection signal by the second starting port sensor 4004 is in the ON state (there is a ball entering the second starting port 2004) (YES in step S5233), the second special random number of the second special symbol ( Second big hit determination random number) is acquired from the random number counter and stored in the second special symbol holding storage area of the main control built-in RAM (step S5234).

Next, it is determined whether or not a big-hit execution flag indicating that the big-hit game state is being controlled is set (step S5235), and if the big-hit execution flag is set, the big-hit game state is controlled. Big hit control processing (step S5240a) is executed.

In addition, in the jackpot control process according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG.
・When the result of the judgment processing for the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is a mode suggesting either "8R probability variable jackpot A" or "8R normal jackpot", the big prize opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), or when the count sensor 4005 detects that nine game balls have entered the large winning opening 2005, the opening and closing pattern (round game) is repeated eight times. Control to 8R jackpot game state,
・When the result of the judgment processing for the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped becomes a mode that suggests "16R probability variable jackpot", the big prize opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) After that, or when the count sensor 4005 detects that nine game balls have won the big prize opening 2005, the opening and closing pattern (round game) to be closed is repeated 16 times to control to a 16R jackpot game state,
・When the result of the judgment processing for the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped is a mode that suggests "8R probability variable jackpot B", the big winning opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds ) or when the count sensor 4005 detects that 9 game balls have won the big prize opening 2005, the opening and closing pattern (round game) to be closed is repeated 8 times to control to the 8R jackpot game state,
・When the result of the judgment processing for the display mode at the time of stopping the variable display of the second special symbol is a mode suggesting "2R normal jackpot", the big prize opening 2005 is opened for a short time (for example, 0.6 seconds). A 2R jackpot game state in which an opening/closing pattern (round game) to be closed after playing is repeated twice is controlled.

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the situation where the time-saving control is executed, right-handed hitting is more advantageous for the player than left-handed, and in situations where the time-saving control is not executed, it is more advantageous than right-handed hitting. As described above, hitting left-handed is advantageous for the player. In this regard, in the left-handed state, even if a jackpot is won as a result of the lottery for the first special symbol corresponding to the acceptance of the game ball into the first start port 2002, the jackpot game is open for a long time of 8 rounds at maximum. Only the state (approximately 1000 game balls can be acquired) occurs.

On the other hand, in the right-handed state, if the jackpot is won in the lottery for the second special symbol according to the acceptance of the game ball into the second start port 2004, the probability is about 50% (the allocation rate of the winning species ), 16 rounds of long open jackpot game state (approximately 2000 game balls can be obtained) are executed, and the expected value of the prize balls that can be obtained when winning the jackpot Therefore, when the ball is shifted to the right-handed state, it can be expected to obtain a larger amount of prize balls than when the left-handed state is used.

In the big hit control process, when starting the opening control of such a big winning hole 2005, first, the process of starting the operation of the condition device, the process of resetting the fluctuation number counter described later, and the like are performed.

In addition, in the jackpot control process, after such opening control of the jackpot 2005 is performed, as shown in FIG. Execute each set processing of the flag and the time saving flag.

The high-probability flag is a flag indicating a high-probability state, and is used in the big-hit determination process shown in FIG. 139 to be described later. It is set when the big hit game state based on the probability variable big hit, 8R probability variable big hit B) is ended, and when the next big hit occurs, the first special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. 144 to be described later or the second special symbol stop processing (not shown) is reset by

Time saving flag is a flag indicating that the time saving control is being executed (low probability time saving state, high probability time saving state), and as shown in FIG. 140, time saving control (high probability time saving state) after the jackpot game state It is set when ending the big hit game state based on the big hit (8R probability variable big hit A, 16R probability variable big hit, 8R probability variable big hit B), and when the next big hit occurs, the first special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. 144 to be described later. Or it is reset by the second special symbol stop processing (not shown). Alternatively, when the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is digested 100 times without winning the jackpot after the occurrence of the low-probability time-saving state, the first special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. 144 to be described later. Or it is reset by the second special symbol stop processing (not shown).

The variation number counter is a counter that indicates the number of variations of the special symbols after the variation number counter is reset, and is used in the first variation pattern setting process (second variation pattern setting process) shown in FIG. 142 to be described later. It is updated (for example, counted up) when the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are changed, and at least a specific type of jackpot (16R probability variation jackpot, 8R probability variation jackpot B) It is reset when starting a big hit game state based on.

Also, if the big hit executing flag is not set (NO in step S5235), then as the process of step S5236, whether or not the small hitting executing flag indicating that the small hitting game state is controlled is set. determine whether And as a result, if the small hit execution flag is set, small hit control processing (step S5240b) for controlling the small hit game state is executed. In addition, in the small hit control process, the process of opening the big winning opening 2005 only for a specific opening time (for example, 1.8 seconds) is performed.

Here, in the small hit control process (step S5240b), unlike the case of the big hit control process (step S5240a), after the opening control of such a big winning opening 2005 is performed, a high probability flag, a time saving flag, a time saving Each set processing such as the number counter is not performed. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 140(a), no small win is won in the big win determination.

Also, if the small hit running flag is not set (NO in step S5236), the value of the second special reservation number counter indicating the number of the second big hit determination random numbers stored in the second special symbol reservation storage area On the condition that it is "0" (step S5237), the first special symbol process including the lottery process related to the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is executed (step S5238).

On the other hand, if the value of the second special reservation number counter indicating the number of the second big hit determination random numbers stored in the second special design reservation storage area is not "0" (step S5237), the second special design 2nd special design process processing including the lottery processing concerning the display mode at the time of fluctuation display stop is executed (step S5239). As a result, as long as the game is played so as not to lose the lottery for the second special symbol in the pending state (unless the value of the second special pending number counter is "0"), the first special symbol Only the lottery for the random number for judging the second big hit is performed continuously without interruption (priority execution), regardless of the pending status of the lottery.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the time-saving state (high-probability time-saving state), the player simply maintains hitting the game ball to the right side of the center accessory 2500 (right hitting). Only the lottery (judgment processing) for the two big hit judging random numbers can be performed continuously without interruption.

In addition, the special game (symbol variation) using the second special symbol (second special symbol) is limited to those that are executed with priority over the special symbol game using the first special symbol (first special symbol) Instead, for example, the execution of the special figure game may be started in the order in which the game ball enters (passes) the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 and the start winning is generated. In this case, a table is provided for storing data capable of specifying the order in which the starting prizes are generated, and execution of the special figure game using either the first special figure or the second special figure is started from the stored data. It should be possible to determine whether

FIG. 135 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first starting port passing process (step S5232).

Now, in the process of step S5231, if it is determined that the first starting hole sensor 4002 is in the ON state and a game ball has entered the first starting hole 2002, as shown in FIG. 2, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, as the process of step S5241, first, each random number on the first special symbol side (random number for judging a big hit, random number for judging reach, random number for judging a big hit, random number for a variation display pattern ) is obtained from the random number counter.

Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value of the first special reservation number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and based on this counter value, the number of reservations of the first special symbol is the maximum value. It is determined whether or not the (upper limit) is "4" (step S5242). In the process of step S5242, when it is determined that the number of reservations of the first special symbol is not the maximum value, the variable display of the first special symbol (determination process for the first special symbol) is newly suspended. , the following steps S5243 to S5245 are performed.

That is, first, as the process of step S5243, the first special reservation number counter is counted up (1 is added). Then, as the process of step S5244, each random number obtained in step S5241, the first special design reservation storage area corresponding to the counter value by the first special reservation number counter of the storage area of the main control built-in RAM store in

And next, the first special figure prefetching process for executing the first special figure side prefetching effect is executed, and the process is terminated (step S5245). As will be described later, the look-ahead effect on the side of the first special symbol is an effect that suggests in advance the determination result (or its degree of expectation) of the first special symbol before starting the variable display of the first special symbol. In this first special figure look-ahead processing, the peripheral control board 1510 side is required to determine whether or not to perform the look-ahead effect and the content of the look-ahead effect (information related to win-loss for look-ahead determination, information related to symbol type for look-ahead determination information, information on the variation pattern number for pre-reading determination, etc.) is generated and stored in the corresponding storage area as transmission information for the peripheral control board 1510 . At this time, instead of the determination result itself of the first special symbol, the command may include information about the stop symbol of the special symbol as information suggesting the type of the big win game. For example, the information of the stage before being finally determined, such as the SP reach group, the normal reach group, the latent hit group, and the small hit group among the symbol types, may be transmitted as the look-ahead command.

On the other hand, in the process of step S5242, when it is determined that the number of reserved first special symbols is the maximum value, the variable display of the first special symbol is not newly reserved. That is, by ending the processing without executing the processing of steps S5243 to S5245, the variable display of the first special symbol is not newly suspended.

FIG. 136 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the second start opening passing process (step S5234).

Now, in the process of step S5233, if it is determined that the second starting hole sensor 4004 is in the ON state and a game ball has entered the second starting hole 2004, as shown in FIG. In addition, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, as the process of step S5251, first, each random number on the second special symbol side (random number for second big hit determination, random number for second reach determination, second big hit symbol random number, random number for the second fluctuation display pattern) is obtained from the random number counter.

Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value of the second special reservation number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and based on this counter value, the number of reservations of the second special symbol is the maximum value. is "4" (step S5252). In the processing of this step S5252, when it is determined that the number of reservations of the second special symbol is not the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol (lottery for the second special symbol) is newly suspended. , the following steps S5253 to S5255 are performed.

That is, first, as the process of step S5253, the second special reservation number counter is counted up (1 is added). Then, as the process of step S5254, each random number obtained in step S5251, the second special design reservation storage area corresponding to the counter value by the second special reservation number counter of the storage area of the main control built-in RAM store in

And next, the second special figure prefetching process for executing the second special figure side prefetching effect is executed, and the process is terminated (step S5255). As will be described later, the look-ahead effect on the side of the second special symbol is an effect that suggests in advance the determination result (or its degree of expectation) of the second special symbol before starting the variable display of the second special symbol. In this second special figure look-ahead processing, the peripheral control board 1510 side generates information (win-lose information, symbol type, variation pattern number, etc.) required for determining whether or not to perform the look-ahead effect and the content of the effect, It is stored in the corresponding storage area as transmission information for the peripheral control board 1510 . At this time, instead of the determination result itself of the second special symbol, the command may include information about the stop symbol of the special symbol as information suggesting the type of the big win game. For example, the information of the stage before being finally determined, such as the SP reach group, the normal reach group, the latent hit group, and the small hit group among the symbol types, may be transmitted as the look-ahead command. Further, in the process of step S5255, a process (FIG. 176) for realizing a change effect later described can be performed.

On the other hand, in the process of step S5252, when it is determined that the number of pending of the second special symbol is the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly suspended. That is, by ending the processing without executing the processing of steps S5253 to S5255, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly suspended.

When the number of reserved first special symbols changes based on the gaming ball entering the first starting port 2002, a command for instructing the number of reserved first special symbols in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120) (First hold number specification commands 0 to 4) are set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 . Further, when the number of reserved second special symbols changes based on the game ball entering the second starting port 2004, the number of reserved second special symbols is indicated in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120). command (second hold number designation commands 0 to 4) is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 .

FIG. 137 is a flow chart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process (step S5238). In addition, the first special symbol process processing executed in step S5238 of the special symbol and special electric auditors control processing and the second special symbol process processing executed in step S5239 of the special symbol and special electric auditors control processing are the same. , and only the random numbers and tables used for determination are different, so only the first special symbol process processing executed in step S5238 of the special symbol and special electric auditors product control processing will be described here. In the first special symbol process, one of the following five processes is selectively executed according to the first special symbol process flag.

1. The random number for judging the big hit corresponding to the first special symbol stored in the main control built-in RAM is read out, and based on the random number for judging the big hit, the lottery process for the display mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped, etc. is performed first special symbol normal processing (step S5280)

2. First special symbol stop symbol setting processing (step S5281 )

3. Executed in correspondence with the variation mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 1403 based on the random number for the variation display pattern and the special symbol on the performance display device (game board side performance display device) 1600 First variation pattern setting processing (step S5282) in which lottery processing etc. are performed for the variation mode of the effect display to be performed

4. First special symbol variation processing (step S5283) to wait until the variation display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 1403 is stopped

5. So that the mode when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped determined based on the result of the determination process for the display mode when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped is displayed on the first special symbol display 1403 First special symbol stop processing (step S5284) for stopping the variable display of the first special symbol

In addition, the initial value of the first special symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the first special symbol normal process (step S5280) should be performed.

FIG. 138 is a flow chart showing the procedure for the first special symbol normal process (step S5280).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal process should be performed, as shown in FIG. As the process of 2, it is determined whether or not there is a variable display of the first special symbol in the pending state based on the counter value of the first special pending number counter. As a result, if it is determined that there is a variable display of the first special symbol in the pending state, then as the process of step S5302, it is stored in the first special symbol pending storage area of the main control built-in RAM. The earliest memory of the random numbers related to the display mode of the first special symbol (for example, the first jackpot determination random number, the first reach determination random number, the first jackpot symbol random number, and the first fluctuation display pattern random number) The random number stored in the area is read from the same main control built-in RAM. And then, as the processing of steps S5303 and S304, while counting down the first special reservation number counter, the first special stored in each storage area of the first special symbol reservation storage area of the main control built-in RAM Random numbers related to the display mode when the fluctuation display of the pattern is stopped (for example, the first big hit judgment random number, the first reach judgment random number, the first big hit pattern random number, the first fluctuation display pattern random number) First-In Shift operation is performed in the First-Out mode.

Specifically, the first special symbol reservation storage area has four storage areas (first special symbol reservation storage area a to first special symbol reservation storage area d), and the start winning to the first start port 2002 Random numbers extracted according to occurrence are stored in order from the first (earliest) area. Then, when the random number is stored in the n-th (n=1 to 3) storage area and the start winning is generated, the extracted random number is stored in the n+1-th (n=1 to 3) storage area, and the first When the conditions for starting the variable display based on the random numbers stored in the storage area are satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read and stored in the Nth (N=2 to 4) storage area. Various random numbers are moved to the N-1th (N=2 to 4)th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display of the first special symbol occurred is memorized so as to be identifiable, and the suspension of the variable display is released in order from the earliest suspension (the earliest suspension). . Similarly, the second special symbol reservation storage area has four storage areas (second special symbol reservation storage area a to second special symbol reservation storage area d), and according to the occurrence of the start winning prize to the second start port 2004 The random numbers extracted by the first (earliest) area are stored in order. Then, when the random number is stored in the n-th (n=1 to 3) storage area and the start winning is generated, the extracted random number is stored in the n+1-th (n=1 to 3) storage area, and the first When the conditions for starting the variable display based on the random numbers stored in the storage area are satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read and stored in the Nth (N=2 to 4) storage area. Various random numbers are moved to the N-1th (N=2 to 4)th storage area. As a result, the order in which the variable display of the second special symbol occurred is stored so as to be identifiable, and the variable display is released in order from the earliest suspension (the earliest suspension). .

After that, as the process of step S5305, a big hit determination process, which is a process of determining whether or not the big win is hit or lost, is performed based on the read-out first big hit determination random number. After that, when the first special symbol process flag is updated (step S5306) so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5281), this process is terminated.

FIG. 139 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the big hit determination process (step S5305).

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, if the current gaming state is a high probability state (high probability time-saving state, high probability non-time-saving state) (step S5311), at the time of high probability shown in FIG. 140 (A) Select the jackpot determination table (step S5312), if the current game state is a low probability state (step S5311), select the jackpot determination table at the time of low probability shown in FIG. 140 (A) (step S5313), select The big hit determination table and the random number for big hit determination read in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal process are compared (step S5314).

As shown in FIG. 140 (A), the big hit determination table is stored in the main control built-in ROM, and when the game state is low probability for each type of special random number (random number for first big hit determination, random number for second big hit determination) (Low probability non-time-saving state, low probability time-saving state) Jackpot judgment table at low probability used in the case of high probability (high probability non-time-saving state, high probability time-saving state) used when the game state is high and a jackpot determination table at the time of probability. In the low-probability jackpot determination table referred to for comparison with the first jackpot determination random numbers, 204 types of first jackpot determination random numbers match the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot has been won, and 65332 The random numbers for judging the first big hit (65536 types) are associated with each other so that the random number for judging the first big hit of the type is consistent with the loss judgment value indicating that the type is lost (probability of jackpot at low probability; roughly "1/321"). On the other hand, in order to compare with the second special symbol jackpot determination random number (second jackpot determination random number) in the second special symbol process process executed in step S5239 of the special symbol and special electric auditors control process In the low-probability jackpot determination table to be referred to, 204 types of second jackpot determination random numbers match the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot has been won, and 65,332 types of second jackpot determination random numbers are lost. The random numbers for judging the second big hit are associated with each other so as to coincide with the misjudgment value indicating that (probability of big hit at low probability; approximately "1/321").

In addition, in the high-probability jackpot determination table referred to for comparison with the first jackpot determination random numbers, 2040 types of first jackpot determination random numbers match the jackpot determination values, and 63496 types of first jackpot determination random numbers match. The random numbers for judging the first big hit are associated with each other so that the random number matches the judgment value for winning (big hit probability at high probability; approximately "1/32"). On the other hand, in the high-probability jackpot determination table referred to for comparison with the second jackpot determination random number in the second special symbol process process executed in step S5239 of the special symbol and special electric auditors control process , 2040 types of random numbers for judging a second big hit match the big hit judging value indicating that a big hit has been won, and 63496 types of random numbers for judging a second big hit match with the above-mentioned losing judgment value indicating that the player has lost. The random numbers for judging the second big hit are associated with each other (probability of big win at high probability; approximately "1/32"). It should be noted that the jackpot determination value set in the jackpot determination table referenced for comparison with the first jackpot determination random number and the jackpot determination table referenced for comparison with the second jackpot determination random number (jackpot determination value The number may be the same and the jackpot judgment values may be different (the jackpot probability is the same), or the number of jackpot judgment values may be different (the jackpot probability is different)). In this case, at least one of the low-probability big-hit determination table and the high-probability big-hit determination table should have different jackpot determination values (both may be made different). .

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 compares the selected jackpot determination table with the jackpot determination random number read out in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal processing, and when it is determined to be a jackpot (step S5315 ), a big hit flag indicating that the variation has been won as a big hit is set (step S5316), and the big hit determination process is terminated.

Further, in step S5315, when it is determined that the big hit has been lost, the read-out big-hit determination random number matches the small-hit determination value indicating that the small-hit has been won based on the selected big-hit determination table. It is determined whether or not (step S5317). However, as described above, in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal processing (second special symbol process processing) of this example, since the random number for big hit determination that matches the small hit determination value is not read out (small hit probability; 0/65536), and in this step S5317, it is determined that a small hit has not been won (determined as a loss).

On the other hand, if it is determined to be lost in step S5317, the reach determination table and the reach determination random number read out in step S5302 are compared (step S5319).

The reach determination table (not shown) is stored in the main control built-in ROM, and is used when the game state is a high probability non-time saving state. A ready-to-reach determination table in a high-probability time-saving state used in case 1 and a ready-to-reach determination table in a low-probability state used in a case of a low-probability state of a game state (low-probability non-time-saving state) are provided.

Here, in the reach determination table during the high probability time saving state, one type of reach determination random number matches the reach determination value indicating that the reach is reached, and the reach determination value indicating that the 71 types of reach determination random numbers do not reach The random numbers for reach determination are associated with each other so as to match with . However, in the reach determination table in the high-probability time-saving state, in order to maximize the progress speed of the game when in the time-saving state, all 72 types of reach determination random numbers match the reach determination value that indicates that the reach is not reached. By doing so, it may be prevented from matching with the reach determination value indicating reach.

In addition, in the reach determination table in the low probability state, five types of reach determination random numbers including the same reach determination random number as the reach determination random number set in the reach determination table in the high probability time saving state reach. The random numbers for reach determination are associated with each other so as to match the reach determination value shown and match the reach determination value indicating that the 67 types of random numbers for reach determination do not reach. Thus, in this embodiment, at the time of the low probability state, the reach determination value indicating reaching is increased from the time of the high probability time saving state, and is obtained with a predetermined probability.

Furthermore, in the reach determination table in the high probability non-time saving state, the same reach determination random number as the reach determination random number set in the reach determination table in the high probability time saving state and the low probability state Five types of reach determination including random numbers The random numbers for reach determination are associated so that the random numbers for reach match with the reach determination values indicating reach, and the random numbers for reach determination of 67 kinds match with the reach determination values indicating that the random numbers for reach do not reach. Thus, in this embodiment, in the high probability non-working time saving state, the reach determination value indicating reaching is made the same as the low probability non-working time saving state.

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 compares the selected reach determination table with the reach determination random number read in step S5302 (step S5319), and when it is determined that the reach is lost (YES in step S5120) , a reach flag indicating that the change is a reach is set, and the process ends (step S5121).

FIG. 141 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5281).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 141, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first The result of the lottery process of the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, that is, the result of the big hit determination process (step S5305) is determined. The result of the lottery process is determined by determining whether or not the jackpot flag is set (step S5331).

If the big hit flag is set in step S5331, the main control MPU 1310a selects the symbol determination table shown in FIG. By comparing with the selected symbol determination table, a big hit symbol is determined as a mode (stop symbol of the first special symbol) when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped (step S5332).

As shown in FIG. 140(B), the symbol determination table on the first special symbol side contains random numbers for the first big hit symbol (here, total 200 Random numbers for the first jackpot pattern) are stored in a form associated with each other. In addition, as shown in FIG. 140 (C), the symbol determination table on the side of the second special symbol contains the second big hit symbol random number ( Here, a total of 200 second jackpot symbol random numbers) are stored in association with each other.

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines the type of the big hit by specifying the determination result associated with the acquired random number for the big win design. The symbol determination table of this example is set so that the kind of big win determined based on the random numbers for the first big-hit pattern and the kind of big-win determined based on the random numbers for the second big-hit pattern are different. . More specifically, the distribution rate (allocation) between the probability variable jackpot that triggers the transition to the high probability state and the normal jackpot that does not trigger the transition to the high probability state is the same, but for the first jackpot pattern The expected value of the game balls that can be acquired by the big win determined based on the second big win symbol random number is larger than the expected value of the game balls that can be acquired by the big win determined by the random number. ing.

The following is a concise summary of specific game and performance contents for each type of jackpot.

1. After the big winning symbol combination appears on the game board side effect display device 1600, the big winning hole 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), or nine game balls win the big winning hole 2005. By repeating an opening/closing pattern (round game) that is closed when detected by a count sensor 4005 eight times, the game ball is controlled to an 8R big win game state in which it is possible (easily) to enter the big winning hole 2005, and this 8R big win game is played. After the state, it is controlled to a high-probability time-saving state until the next big-hit game state occurs, and during the execution period of the 8R big-hit game state, a battle performance (battle victory performance) in which a specific character wins is performed, with a high probability. The 8R probability variable jackpot A controlled to the performance mode indicated by the game board side performance display device 1600 that it is in a relatively advantageous state in the time saving state.

2. After the big winning symbol combination appears on the game board side effect display device 1600, the big winning hole 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), or nine game balls win the big winning hole 2005. By repeating an opening/closing pattern (round game) that is closed when detected by a count sensor 4005 eight times, the game ball is controlled to an 8R big win game state in which it is possible (easily) to enter the big winning hole 2005, and this 8R big win game is played. After the state, control is performed to a low-probability time-saving state until the variable display of special symbols is digested 100 times (or a jackpot is won within the period until 100 times are digested), and the 8R jackpot game state is executed. During the period, a battle performance (battle defeat performance) is performed in which a specific character is defeated, and in a low-probability time-saving state, the game board side performance display device 1600 controls to a performance mode in which a relatively disadvantageous state is indicated. 8R normal jackpot

3. After the big winning symbol combination appears on the game board side effect display device 1600, the big winning hole 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), or nine game balls win the big winning hole 2005. By repeating an opening/closing pattern (round game) closed when detected by a count sensor 4005 16 times, the game ball is controlled to a 16R big win game state in which it is possible (easily) to enter the big winning hole 2005, and this 16R big win game is played. After the state, it is controlled to a high-probability time-saving state until the next big win game state occurs, and during the execution period of the 16R big win game state, an effect is given as to whether the number of rounds exceeds 8 rounds (16 rounds). A game board side effect display device 1600 indicates that the game board side effect display device 1600 is in a relatively advantageous state after a predetermined period of time has passed since the addition challenge effect in which (success effect) is performed is performed, and control is performed to the high probability time saving state. 16R probability variable jackpot controlled by production mode

4. After the big winning symbol combination appears on the game board side effect display device 1600, the big winning hole 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), or nine game balls win the big winning hole 2005. By repeating an opening/closing pattern (round game) that is closed when detected by a count sensor 4005 eight times, the game ball is controlled to an 8R big win game state in which it is possible (easily) to enter the big winning hole 2005, and this 8R big win game is played. After the state, it is controlled to a high-probability time-saving state until the next big win game state occurs, and during the execution period of the 8R big win game state, an effect is given as to whether the number of rounds exceeds 8 rounds (16 rounds). A game board side effect display device 1600 indicates that the game board side effect display device 1600 is in a relatively advantageous state after a predetermined period of time after the lapse of a predetermined period after the addition challenge effect in which (failure effect) is performed is performed and the control is performed to the high probability time saving state. 8R probability variable jackpot B controlled in production mode

5. After the big winning pattern combination appears on the game board side effect display device 1600, the big winning hole 2005 is opened for a short time (for example, 0.6 seconds), or nine game balls win the big winning hole 2005 as described above. By repeating an opening/closing pattern (round game) that is closed when detected by a count sensor 4005 twice, the game ball is controlled to a 2R big win game state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the big winning hole 2005, and after this 2R big win game state. is controlled to a low-probability time-saving state until the special symbol fluctuation display is digested 100 times (or a jackpot is won within the period until 100 times digested), and during the execution period of the 2R jackpot game state 2R is controlled to a production mode in which a specific character is defeated (battle defeat production), and the game board side production display device 1600 indicates a relatively disadvantageous state in a low-probability time-saving state. normal jackpot

In the left-handed state, the game ball does not pass through the gate portion 2003, and the movable piece (not shown) for opening the second starting port 2004 is not driven. Therefore, in the left-handed state, the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 does not occur, and only the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2002 occurs, and there is a reserved ball of the second special symbol. Except for the case, only the variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 1403 is executed, and the big hits (8R probability variable big hit A, 8R normal big hit) related to the first special symbol are generated. Similarly, the game ball does not enter the first starting port 2002 in the right-handed state. Therefore, in the right-handed state, only the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 occurs, and the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 1186 except when there is a reserved ball of the first special symbol Only the variable display is executed, and the big hits (16R probability variable jackpot, 8R probability variable jackpot B, 2R normal jackpot) related to the second special symbol are generated.

In addition, in the big hit related to the first special symbol, the opening and closing pattern of opening the big winning hole 2005 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) is repeated eight times at maximum, and only about 1000 game balls are paid out. In the big hit related to the second special symbol, it is possible to pay out about 2000 game balls by repeating the opening and closing pattern of opening the big winning hole 2005 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) 16 times.

In addition, when the 8R probability variation big hit A is determined in the first special symbol stop pattern setting process, the 8R probability variation big hit A symbol is determined as the jackpot symbol, and when the 8R normal jackpot is determined, the 8R normal jackpot symbol is determined as the jackpot symbol. decide. In addition, although not shown, when the 16R probability variation big hit is determined in the second special symbol stop symbol setting process, the 16R probability variation big hit pattern is determined as the big hit pattern, and when the 8R probability variation big hit B is determined, the 8R probability variation big hit pattern is determined as the big hit symbol. The B symbol is determined, and when the 2R normal jackpot is determined, the 2R normal jackpot pattern is determined as the jackpot pattern.

Further, if the big hit flag is not set in step S5331, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines whether or not the small hit flag is set as the process of step S5333. And as a result, if the small hit flag is set in the process corresponding to the step S5333 in the second special symbol process process (step S5239), the small hit symbol ( After determining the special pattern stop mode) (step S5334), the process proceeds to step S5337.

Furthermore, if the small hit flag is not set in step S5333, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 decides on the losing design as the aspect of stopping the fluctuation of the special design (step S5336), and then shifts to step S5337. do.

Then, after the determination process for the stop symbol is performed in this way, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 performs the process of step S5337 as the process of step S5337. (It may be one that instructs the mode of the stop symbol of the first special symbol)) is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, so that the determination result notification command corresponding to each lottery result is set. And after that, as the process of step S5338, this process ends when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first variation pattern setting process (step S5282).

In addition, the peripheral control MPU 1511a controls the display of the effect display device 1600 based on the received determination result notification command and the variation pattern command (left, middle, and right decorative symbols are variably displayed, and the left decorative pattern → right decorative pattern → Stop and display in the order of the middle decorative pattern (the left, middle and right decorative patterns may be synchronously displayed with the same pattern and stopped and displayed at the same time)). For example, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines a combination of three left, middle and right decorative symbols when winning a jackpot of a type other than the 2R normal jackpot. On the other hand, when a 2R normal jackpot is obtained, a specific symbol combination (a combination in which at least one of left, middle and right decorative symbols is not the same as other symbols) is determined. In addition, when the reach loss is specified, the lost pattern with the reach (the left and right decorative patterns are a combination of the same patterns "0" to "9" and the middle decorative patterns are different; the reach loss When the missing pattern is specified, the missing pattern (combination of left, middle and right decorative patterns in which at least the left and right decorative patterns are different) is determined. The stop symbol thus determined is displayed on the effect display device 1600 when the variation time specified from the variation pattern command has passed (when the game effect is finished).

In any case, when a win is obtained as a result of progress of the game, the peripheral control MPU 1511a causes the effect display (special display mode) at the time of the win to appear before the start of the big win game, so that the big win game can be played. is started, the effect display during the jackpot game is made to appear.

FIG. 142 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first variation pattern setting process (step S5282).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first variation pattern setting process should be performed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets the big hit flag as shown in FIG. If it is (step S5341), select the variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of big hit according to the type of big hit determined in step S5332 of the first special symbol stop design setting process (step S5342), small hit flag is set (step S5343), the variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of the small hit is selected (step S5344), and if the reach flag is set (step S5345), the variation pattern table at the time of reach ( (not shown) is selected (step S5346), and if none of the big hit flag, the small hit flag and the reach flag are set, that is, if it becomes a normal loss (a loss that does not execute the reach effect), at the time of loss is selected (step S5347).

Then, the variation pattern to be executed is determined by comparing the selected variation pattern table and the random number for the variation display pattern read in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal process (step S5348), and the determined variation pattern is started. A variable pattern command for notifying the peripheral control board 1510 is set to start the variable display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 1403 (step S5349). In addition, the main control MPU 1310a sets the variation time set corresponding to the determined variation pattern to the variation timer (step S5350). Then, when the first special symbol process flag is updated (step S5355) so that the process shifts to the first special symbol variation process (step S5283), this process is terminated. As a result, the variable display control of the first special symbol is performed by the first special symbol display device 1403 only for the variation time thus determined, and the effect display device 1600 performs the effect control in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol. will take place.

In addition, the variation pattern table of this example is a random number for judging the big hit (random number for judging the first big hit, random number for judging the second big hit) and random number for the big hit design (random number for the first big hit design, random number for the second big hit design). A plurality of types are provided for each determination result based on. In addition, the variation pattern set in each variation pattern table includes a plurality of variation time information indicating a predetermined time (variation time) required for variation display control of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol). They are stored so as to be associated with the random numbers for the first variation display pattern. Thus, the main control MPU 1310a reads in step S5302 of the selected variation pattern table and the first special symbol normal process among the plurality of types of variation pattern tables according to the determination result based on the random number for judging the big hit and the random number for the big hit symbol. By comparing with the random number for the fluctuation display pattern, and obtaining the fluctuation time information associated with the read random number for the fluctuation display pattern from this table, the special design (first special design, second special design) determine the variation pattern of As a result, the determination process for the variation pattern of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed. The variation pattern table is stored in the main control built-in ROM.

However, as described above, in this example, since there is no winning of a small hit, the variation pattern table at the time of a small win is not used. In this example, a small win is not won, but a small win may be won.

In addition, in the variation pattern table at the time of reach in this example, it is set so that the mode type of reach effect to be executed is determined by comparing the judgment value indicating which reach effect is to be executed and the random number for the variation display pattern. It is For example, in the non-time saving state, 164 types of variable display pattern random numbers out of 241 types of variable display pattern random numbers are set as determination values (0 to 163) indicating that one of the normal reach effects is executed, and 59 Random numbers for variation display patterns of types are set as determination values (164 to 222) indicating execution of one of super ready-to-win performances with low expectations for big wins, and 18 types of random numbers for variation display patterns have high expectations for big wins. It is set as a determination value (223 to 240) indicating that one of the super ready-to-win effects is executed.

In addition, the super reach performance (SP performance) is a player who has a higher expectation of a big hit than the normal reach performance, and a player who wants to generate a big hit game state when the super reach performance is executed. expectations are rising. That is, such a super ready-to-win effect has the highest selection rate in the variation pattern table at the time of the big win, and even if a loss is finally displayed by this, the player's expectation of the big win game state. will be able to increase However, in reality, in order to sufficiently raise the player's expectations for the jackpot game state, during the period when the super reach effect is being executed, a high-expectation notice effect that is drawn separately from the fluctuation pattern appears. It is required to do (combine).

In addition, in the fluctuation pattern table at the time of loss used when determining the fluctuation time of the first special symbol provided corresponding to the random number for the first big hit determination and the random number for the first big hit pattern, the non-time saving state and the time saving state , and a fluctuation time of 12 seconds is set in common. On the other hand, in the variation pattern table at the time of loss provided corresponding to the second big hit determination random number and the second symbol random number and used when determining the variation time of the second special symbol, 0.1 seconds to as a time saving state A variable time of 12 seconds can be set, and a variable time of 12 seconds is set as a non-time saving state. In this way, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is the same during the time saving state and during the non-working time saving state, and during the fluctuation of the first special symbol in the time saving state, the winning of the game ball to the second start port 2004 As well as prompting, the time for the player to enter the game ball to the second start port 2004 is ensured.

Also, if 0.1 second is selected from the variation time at the time of losing the second special symbol, each game ball that is driven into the game area 5a at intervals of 0.6 seconds in a time saving state (such as a high probability time saving state) Discharge without being subjected to lottery processing is suppressed.

That is, the right-handed game ball is supplied to the area directly above the gate portion 2003 . Then, when the same game ball is received in the gate unit 2003 from this area when in a time saving state (high probability time saving state, etc.), a hit as a normal pattern is obtained (for example, winning probability is 100%), The movable piece involved in opening and closing the second starting port 2004 is maintained in the open state for a long period of time (5.5 seconds in this example). As a result, in a situation where the second starting port 2004 can be continuously received one after another (almost all of the game balls hit to the right side of the center accessory 2500 can be received by the second starting port 2004). Even if there is, every time those game balls are accepted, control is executed so that the lottery on the second special symbol side can be digested one after another with a high jackpot probability (probability in a high probability state) around ``about 1/32''. become possible.

And in this example, since the game ball is fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds when the player is operating the handle 302, in the time saving state (high probability time saving state etc.), the second Game balls are often received at the starting port 2004 at intervals of 0.6 seconds. In this regard, in this example, as described above, the fluctuation pattern table when the second special symbol is lost based on the winning of the game ball to the second start port 2004 is extremely It can be set to a short time of 0.1 second. That is, in this case, when a loss is obtained, the pattern variation is completed only in the time (0.1 seconds) less than the shooting interval (0.6 seconds) of the game ball, so 0.6 seconds. Even in a situation where game balls launched at intervals are received one after another in the second starting port 2004, the game balls are prevented from being discharged without being subjected to lottery processing. .

FIG. 143 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first special symbol variation process (step S5283).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol variation process should be performed, as shown in FIG. As a process of (1), 1 is subtracted from the variable timer in which the variable time corresponding to the variable pattern determined in the lottery process (step S5282) for the variable pattern is set. As a result, when it is determined that the variable time timer is 0, that is, the randomly selected variable time has passed (step S5372), the process proceeds to step S5373. That is, in the process of this step S5373, this process is terminated when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is shifted to the first special symbol stop process (step S5284).

If the variable time timer has not reached 0 even though the variable timer has been decremented by 1 (step S5371), Each time the timer interrupt process is performed, the processes of steps S5371 and S5372 are performed.

FIG. 144 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop process (step S5284).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop process should be performed, as shown in FIG. As the process of , display control is performed to display the stop symbol determined by the first special symbol stop symbol setting process on the first special symbol display device 1403, and the first special symbol is displayed on the effect display device 1600. A stop display command for instructing derived display of the display result of the decorative pattern corresponding to the stop pattern is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S5382).

Further, when the big hit flag is set (YES in step S5386), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets a big win start command indicating to start the big win game state (step S5387), The standby time until the start of the jackpot game state (time for displaying the start of the jackpot game state, etc.) is set in the interval timer (step S5388). Then, a jackpot execution flag indicating that the jackpot game state is being executed is set, and if the high-probability flag is set, the high-probability flag is reset, and if the time-saving flag is set. The time saving flag is reset (step S5389), and the variation counter is reset, and the first special symbol process flag is the initial value. When the process is updated to the first special symbol normal process (step S5394), this process ends. That is, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, it is determined that the jackpot executing flag is set in the processing of step S5235, and the jackpot game is played in the jackpot control processing (step S5240a). state will be executed.

Incidentally, the jackpot start command is a command to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and is individually prepared according to the type of jackpot. In step S5387, a jackpot start command (8R variable jackpot A command, 8R normal jackpot command, 16R variable jackpot) according to the type of jackpot (8R variable jackpot A, 8R normal jackpot, 16R variable jackpot, 8R variable jackpot B, 2R normal jackpot) Jackpot command, 8R probability variable jackpot B command, 2R normal jackpot command) are set. As a result, the production of the jackpot game state (battle production or additional challenge production) corresponding to the type of jackpot indicated by the jackpot start command is executed by the production display device 1600, lamps/LEDs, speakers, and the like.

On the other hand, in the process of step S5386, when it is determined that the jackpot flag is not set (NO in step S5386), first, it is determined whether or not the low probability time saving state (step S5390). Then, when it is in the low-probability time-saving state, it is determined whether the number of fluctuations of the special symbols digested after being controlled in the low-probability time-saving state has reached a predetermined upper limit value (here, 100 times) ( step S5391). That is, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol digested after being controlled to the low probability time saving state reaches the predetermined upper limit value (100 times), the conditions for ending the low probability time saving state are satisfied, and time saving The function is stopped and the normal game state (low-probability non-time-saving game state) is entered (step S5392).

Then, after the processing related to the time saving function is performed in this way, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S5393). And as a result, when it is determined that the small hit flag is set (YES in step S5393), a small hit start command indicating starting the small hit game state is set (step S5394), and the small hit game is set. Waiting time until the start of the state (time for displaying the effect of starting the small winning game state, etc.) is set in the interval timer (step S5395). Then, set a small winning in-execution flag indicating that the small winning game state is being executed (step S5396), so that the process is shifted to the first special symbol normal processing which is the initial value of the first special symbol process flag (step S5394), this process ends. That is, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, it is determined that the flag during execution of the small hit is set in the process of step S5236, and in the small hit control process (step S5240b). A small winning game state is executed. Incidentally, unlike when a big win is won, the game state is not changed when such a small win game state is executed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set (NO in step S5393), the first special symbol process is performed without performing the processing related to the big hit or the small hit as a loss. When the flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol normal process which is the initial value (step S5394), this process is terminated. That is, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, it is determined that the flag during execution of the big hit or the flag during execution of the small hit is not set (steps S5235, S236), and a new game is started according to the state of suspension. (Lottery and symbol control) processing related to progress is performed (steps S5237 to S5239).

FIG. 145 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process (step S116).

Now, in the process of step S5401, if it is determined that the detection signal by the gate sensor 4003 is in the ON state and the game ball has passed through the gate portion 2003, as shown in FIG. The main control MPU 1310a of the control board 1310, as the process of step S5402, executes the gate part passing process such as acquiring the normal random number of the normal symbol from the random number counter and storing it in the normal symbol holding storage area of the RAM. do.

Then, in the normal design process processing, one of the following five process processing is selectively executed according to the normal design process flag.

1. Ordinary symbol normal processing (step S5403) in which the ordinary random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is read out, and lottery processing for the display mode at the time of stopping the variation control of the ordinary symbol is performed based on the read ordinary random number (step S5403)
2. Ordinary design fluctuation time determination processing (step S5404) in which lottery processing or the like is performed for the fluctuation mode (fluctuation time) of the ordinary design displayed on the ordinary design display device 1402 based on the ordinary design fluctuation random number.
3. Normal symbol variation processing (step S5405) to wait until the normal symbol variation display in the normal symbol display 1402 is stopped.
4. Variation display of the normal symbols so that the mode when the variation control of the normal symbols is stopped determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the variation control of the normal symbols is stopped is displayed on the normal symbol display device 1402. Normal design stop processing (step S5406) to stop
5. When the result of the lottery process for the mode at the time of stopping the fluctuation control of the normal pattern becomes a mode suggesting "normal pattern winning", the movable piece is opened and the game ball is accepted to the second start port 2004. Ordinary electric accessary product opening process (step S5407)

In addition, the normal design process flag is operated so that the initial value indicates that the normal design normal process (step S5403) should be performed.

FIG. 146 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the gate passage processing (step S5402).

Now, in the process of step S5401, if it is determined that the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 is in the ON state and the game ball has passed through the gate portion 2003, the above-described The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first acquires the counter value of the normal holding number counter from the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a as the process of step S5411. Then, based on this counter value, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved normal symbols is the maximum value of "4".

In the processing of this step S5411, when it is determined that the number of suspensions of the normal symbols is not the maximum value, the following steps S5412 to S5414 in order to newly suspend the variable display control of the normal symbols processing will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S5412, the normal pending number counter is counted up (1 is added). Next, as the process of step S5413, the normal random number and the normal pattern fluctuation random number are obtained from the random number counter. Then, as the process of step S5414, each random number thus obtained is stored in the normal symbol reservation storage area corresponding to the counter value of the normal reservation number counter in the storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a.

However, in the process of step S5411, when it is determined that the number of reserved normal symbols is the maximum value, the fluctuation display control of the normal symbols is not newly reserved. That is, by not executing the processing of steps S5412 to S5414, the variable display control of the normal symbols is not newly suspended.

FIG. 147 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the normal symbol normal process (step S5403).

When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol normal process should be performed, as shown in FIG. Based on the counter value of the normal reserved number counter, it is determined whether or not there is a variable display control of the normal symbols in the reserved state. As a result, if it is determined that there is a variable display control of the normal symbols in the pending state, then as the process of step S5422, the normal symbols stored in the normal symbol pending storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a The random number stored in the first storage area among the random numbers related to the display mode of the pattern (for example, normal random number, normal pattern fluctuation random number) is read out from the same RAM. Then, as the processing of steps S5423 and S5424, the normal reservation number counter is counted down, and when the fluctuation display of the normal symbols stored in each storage area of the normal reservation storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is stopped Random numbers related to the display mode (normal random numbers, normal fluctuation random numbers) are shifted in the first-in first-out mode.

Specifically, the normal symbol reservation storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and the random numbers extracted according to the passage of the game ball to the gate unit 2003 are sequentially selected from the first (earmost) area. Remember. Then, when the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003 when the random number is stored in the n-th (n=1 to 3) storage area, the extracted random number is stored in the n+1-th (n=1 to 3) storage area. When the conditions for starting the variable display based on the random numbers stored in the first storage area are satisfied, the various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read and the Nth (N=2 to 4) storage area is read. , is moved to the N-1th (N=2 to 4)th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the normal symbols occurs is memorized so as to be identifiable, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the earliest suspension). .

Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, if the current gaming state is a time saving state (high probability time saving state) (step S5426), selects a normal figure hit determination table (not shown) during time saving ( Step S5426), if the current gaming state is non-time saving state (low probability non-time saving state, high probability non-time saving state) (step S5425), select the normal figure per determination table (not shown) during non-time saving ( Step S5427), it compares with the normal random number which is read out with normal design per decision table and normal design normal processing step S5422 which is selected (step S5428).

In addition, the normal pattern hit determination table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU 1310a, and is used when the game state is time saving (high probability time saving state). It is provided with a normal pattern hit determination table for non-working time saving used in the case of time (low probability non-working time saving state, high probability non-working time saving state). Then, in the time-saving normal pattern hit determination table that is referenced for comparison with the normal random numbers, all 255 types of normal random numbers match the normal pattern per decision value, which indicates that the normal pattern has been elected. The normal random numbers are associated with each other so as not to coincide with the normal pattern deviation judgment value indicating that it is lost. In this way, when the game ball passes through the gate part 2003 during the time saving, the game ball is always won in the normal game, and the movable piece is opened and the game ball to the second start port 2004 Acceptance is controlled. Instead of all of the 255 types, more normal random numbers than in the non-time saving state may coincide with the normal pattern per judgment value indicating that the normal pattern is won.

In addition, in the non-short-time normal pattern hit determination table that is referenced for comparison with the normal random numbers, all 255 types of normal random numbers can match the normal pattern per decision value indicating that they have been elected per normal pattern. Instead, the normal random numbers are associated with each other so as to coincide with the normal pattern deviation determination value indicating that the normal pattern is out. In this way, in the non-working hours, even if there is a passage of the game ball to the gate portion 2003, because there is no winning per normal figure, the movable piece 2106 is in the open state second start opening There is no control over the acceptance of gaming balls into 2004. However, as described above, it may be possible to obtain a normal pattern hit even in a non-time-saving state, in this case, the winning probability is lower than the time-saving state (for example, 50%), and the lottery result of the normal pattern is a hit. When the movable piece of the second starting port 2004 is opened for a shorter time than the time saving state, for example, for 2 seconds to allow the reception of the game ball to the second starting port 2004, then move forward again to the second You may make it impossible to accept a game ball to the second starting port 2004. - 特許庁

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 compares the selected normal pattern per determination table with the normal random number read in step S5422 of the normal pattern normal processing, and when it is determined that it is per normal pattern (step S5429 ), after setting the normal pattern per flag indicating that the variation has been elected per normal pattern (step S5430), per normal pattern as a mode of stopping the fluctuation control of the normal pattern (stop pattern of the normal pattern) Design is determined (step S5431), on the other hand, as a result of comparison between the selected normal pattern per determination table and the normal random number read in step S5422 of normal design normal processing, when it is determined that it is lost, the normal pattern fluctuation A general pattern loss pattern is determined as a form (normal pattern stop pattern) at the time of control stop (step S5432). And after that, when the above-described normal design process flag is updated (step S5433) so that the process shifts to the normal design fluctuation time determination process (step S5404), this process is terminated.

While such control by the main control MPU 1310a is being performed, the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires the above-described various commands transmitted from the main control MPU 1310a, thereby performing the above-described peripheral control unit steady-state processing (received command analysis processing ( In step S1022)), the game situation is grasped each time, and an effect can be executed according to the game situation.

More specifically, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first determines whether or not there is a situation in which starting winning has occurred, and when in this situation, performs control related to pending display and look-ahead effects in response to starting winning. And after this, by updating the process flag based on the grasped gaming situation, the following variation pattern designation command reception waiting processing, production design fluctuation start processing, production design fluctuation processing, production design fluctuation stop processing, jackpot display processing , jackpot game processing, or jackpot end effect processing.

Variation pattern specification command reception waiting process: During the period until the variation pattern command related to the variation pattern is received from the main control MPU 1310a, the design is not in a variation state and the control related to the big hit is not performed (demonstration etc.) Along with performing control, when receiving a variation pattern command related to the variation pattern from the main control MPU 1310a, the process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the performance symbol variation start processing.

Production pattern variation start processing: Various production contents (production pattern, advance notice production, etc.) in the pattern fluctuation period are determined based on the fluctuation pattern command, etc., and the variation of the decoration pattern is started based on the determined production contents. to control. After that, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the process during effect symbol fluctuation.

Production design fluctuation processing: Various production contents determined in production design fluctuation start processing are controlled to start at each timing during the design fluctuation period, and when the fluctuation time ends, the value of the process flag is changed to production design Update to the value corresponding to the fluctuation stop processing.

Effect design fluctuation stop processing: Based on the reception of a command (design determination command) instructing to stop all designs, stop the fluctuation of the decorative design and perform control such as deriving and displaying the display result (stop design). When the decorative pattern is to be stopped by the big win pattern, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big win display process, and when the decorative pattern is to be stopped by the losing pattern, the value of the process flag is changed to the variation pattern designation command reception waiting process. Update to the corresponding value.

Big win display processing: Controls effects (display effects for informing the occurrence of a big win on the effect display device 1600, etc.) during the period from when the decorative symbols stop with the big win symbols until the start of the big win game. After that, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the process during the big-hit game.

During jackpot game processing: Various effects are controlled during the occurrence of the jackpot game state. When the jackpot game state ends, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot end effect processing.

Big hit end effect processing: In the effect display device 1600, the effect (such as a display effect for informing the player that the big win game state has ended) is controlled during the period from the end of the big win game state to the change allowable state. . Then, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern specifying command reception waiting process.

[18. Production control by scheduler]
2. Description of the Related Art Gaming machines perform various effects during games by outputting sound, lighting/flashing of lamps, displaying images, and the like. As described above, the game machine controls a plurality of types of effect devices by means of the peripheral control board 1510, which is the effect control device, based on commands output from the main control board 1310, and executes effects according to the game state of the game. do. The main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 are connected by a unidirectional signal line for unidirectional signal transmission.

In order to coordinate and execute a plurality of types of effects, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 7-313694 discloses a control technique for realizing various effects displays using scenario data. Scenario data is data that sequentially defines patterns to be displayed on the screen in chronological order. By preparing control processing for realizing general-purpose processing for sequentially displaying designated patterns according to the scenario data, there is an advantage that a wide variety of presentation displays can be easily realized simply by switching the scenario data. Scenario data can also include specification of BGM. In this case, by outputting BGM for which the sound source IC is designated, it is possible to output sound corresponding to the display screen.

However, game machines are required to provide more elaborate presentations. With the above-described conventional technology, it is difficult to perform various effects such as sound output, lamp lighting, image display, etc. by interlocking a plurality of effect devices. For example, BGM cannot be changed while image display according to scenario data is being executed. In addition, when sound effects are to be output in response to a user's operation during image display, image display and BGM output are stopped, and sound effects are output. When the output of the sound effects ended, the BGM and image display were restarted from the beginning regardless of how far the BGM had been played, providing a sense of discomfort. The lighting and blinking of the lamp is controlled by a separate program according to the game state, regardless of the content of the image display. there were.

[18-1. Software Configuration in Peripheral Control Unit]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1530 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the main command from the main control board 1310 and executes game effects. In this embodiment, each component for executing effects based on the received main command is configured as software, but may be configured as hardware. Hereinafter, after explaining the configuration and outline of the functions for realizing the effect control in this embodiment, the details of each function will be explained.

[18-1-1. Configuration and overview of each function]
FIG. 148 is a functional block diagram illustrating the configuration and outline of functions for executing effect control in this embodiment. Peripheral control unit 1530 includes input command analysis unit 5010, effect control unit 5020, layer data storage unit 5030, effect block control unit 5040, effect block data storage unit 5050, scheduler execution unit 5060, scheduler data storage unit 5070, and output module unit. 5080.

The input command analysis unit 5010 receives input of a main command and analyzes the input command. The effect control unit 5020 acquires layer data from the layer data storage unit 5030 based on the analysis result of the main command, and determines block control information (effect block number). Explaining the layers, in the present embodiment, layers are set for each effect division such as background and characters, each effect element is drawn on each layer, and these layers are displayed in an overlapping manner to create an image on the liquid crystal display device. to output As a result, for example, if only the background is different and the display (movement) of the character is the same, it is possible to use a common layer for displaying the character. This makes it possible to reduce the capacity of performance data (scheduler data) and improve development efficiency. The layer data storage unit 5030 stores information for specifying effects for each layer.

The effect block control unit 5040 receives block control information (effect block number) determined by the effect control unit 5020 and acquires effect block data corresponding to the effect block number from the effect block data storage unit 5050 . The effect block data includes scheduler data for executing the effect. The scheduler data stores a plurality of functions that instruct predetermined processes to be executed among the plurality of processes required according to the production device in order to control the production in each production device in the order to be executed. Data. The production block data consists of "liquid crystal production block data" for executing the production to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device, "liquid crystal pattern block data" for changing and displaying the identification pattern on the liquid crystal display device, sound, There are three types of "sub-effect block data" for controlling lamps, accessories, and the like. Effect block control section 5040 executes control according to the type of effect block data, and transfers scheduler control information including effect block data to scheduler execution section 5060 .

The scheduler execution section 5060 acquires the scheduler data included in the effect block data from the scheduler data storage section 5070 . Then, the scheduler data is executed, the function corresponding to each effect device is called, and the effect device control information is transmitted to the output module section 5080 .

The output module unit 5080 receives effect device control information from the scheduler execution unit 5060, and transmits effect device drive data to each effect device based on the effect device control information. Each effect device performs an operation based on the effect device drive data. Output module unit 5080, effect control unit 5020 is configured in software by the CPU (peripheral control MPU1511a) provided in the effect control device (peripheral control board 1530), the CPU executes another computer program realized by It should be noted that the effect control unit 5020 may be constituted by an arithmetic circuit different from the production control unit 5020 and configured as hardware.

[18-1-2. Module configuration]
Next, the details of the configuration of the modules and the like that implement the functions described above will be described. FIG. 149 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of modules and the like in the peripheral control unit 1530 of the gaming machine of this embodiment. Each configuration is configured as software by a computer program executed by the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1530, but may be partially or wholly configured as hardware.

In this embodiment, the system module 5100 for driving each production device is processed by the peripheral control section 1530 . The system module 5100 includes a command analysis module 5200, a liquid crystal module 5400, a sound module 5500, a lamp module 5600, a driving device module 5700, etc., as modules related to presentation. Also included is an effect control unit 5020 for creating effect device control information for driving each effect device based on a main command.

System module 5100 includes main command buffer 5110 , liquid crystal display list command buffer 5120 , lamp data output buffer 5130 , motor data output buffer 5140 and serial control IC 5150 . The main command buffer 5110 receives a main command transmitted from the main control board 1310 and transfers it to the command analysis module 5200 . In this embodiment, the main command is 3-byte one-set information, which is a command status value, a command mode value, and a checksum value of the command status and mode value in order from the first byte. The main command buffer 5110 receives this signal, evaluates the checksum value, and discards the received command if the received command is not determined to be correct. If determined, it is passed to the command analysis module 5200 .

The main command includes information representing the contents related to the performance among the game state and the operation state of the game machine. For example, the main command can include whether or not a game ball has entered a starting winning hole, the result of a special figure lottery, the variation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol, and the like. Further, when the present embodiment is applied to a slot machine, door opening and other sensor outputs, operation of a start lever and a stop button, rotation and stop of reels, success/failure of a combination at the time of stop, and the like are included. Note that the commands listed here are examples, and various commands can be included depending on the model of the game machine and the contents of the presentation.

The command analysis module 5200 is included in the input command analysis unit 5010, analyzes the contents of the main command, and determines whether or not the command is related to the production. If the command is determined to be related to production, it is transferred to the production control unit 5020. - 特許庁

The effect control unit 5020 specifies a layer to be controlled for effect from the layer data table based on the analysis result of the main command. Then, the block data number (effect block number) is acquired from the specified layer, and the block data number corresponding to each layer is transmitted to the effect block control section 5040 .

The effect block control section 5040 includes a liquid crystal effect block control section 5310 and a sub-effect block control section 5320 . The liquid crystal effect block control section 5310 determines control information for executing the effect of displaying an image on the liquid crystal display device. The sub-effect block control section 5320 determines control information for executing sound output, lighting/flickering of lamps, actions of characters, and the like.

When the effect block number is determined, the liquid crystal effect block control section 5310 executes the liquid crystal effect block data corresponding to the effect block number. The liquid crystal effect block data is block data for executing the liquid crystal display effect, and includes one or more drawing scheduler data. By executing the drawing scheduler data, the background, characters, identification patterns, etc. are displayed on the liquid crystal display device.

The liquid crystal effect block control section 5310 activates the scheduler execution section 5060 according to the control (display) object, and executes the drawing scheduler data included in the block data. The liquid crystal display scheduler execution unit 5060 includes a liquid crystal effect 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 for displaying effect elements such as backgrounds and characters, and a liquid crystal design 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5332 for displaying identification patterns. included.

The liquid crystal effect 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 and the liquid crystal pattern 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5332 are executed at a frame cycle (1f=approximately 33.334 milliseconds) which is a screen update cycle. The liquid crystal effect 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 and the liquid crystal pattern 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5332 drive the drawing scheduler data specified by the liquid crystal effect block data by the drawing scheduler, and the liquid crystal module 5400 generates a liquid crystal display list command. The liquid crystal display list command is passed through the liquid crystal display list command buffer 5120 to the effect display device (game board side effect display device 1600, door frame side liquid crystal display device 460).

The sound source built-in VDP 1540a generates display data based on the liquid crystal display list command buffer 5120, and outputs it to the effect display device (game board side effect display device 1600, door frame side liquid crystal display device 460). The display data is generated, for example, by developing character data specified by a liquid crystal display list command on a specified position on the frame buffer.

When the effect block number is determined, the sub effect block control section 5320 executes the sub effect block data corresponding to the effect block number. The sub effect block data is block data for executing each effect of lamp, sound, and motor, and includes one or more sub effect scheduler data. By executing the sub-effect scheduler data, each effect device such as a lamp, a sound, and a motor performs operations defined in advance in the sub-effect scheduler data.

The sub effect block control section 5320 activates the scheduler execution section 5060 according to the execution cycle of various effect devices, and executes the sub effect scheduler data included in the sub effect block data. The scheduler execution unit 5060 for controlling various effect devices includes a sub effect 1f scheduler execution unit 5333 that controls the effect device at 1 frame intervals and a sub effect 1ms scheduler execution unit 5334 that controls the effect device at 1 millisecond intervals. included. Thus, by providing the scheduler execution unit corresponding to the execution interval, it becomes possible to execute the effect according to the configuration of the game machine and the required specifications of the effect device. For example, since 1f corresponds to the drawing update interval, it is possible to synchronize the sound output, character action, etc. with the liquid crystal display. Further, if the detection interval of the sensor is in units of 1 ms, it is possible to quickly deal with any malfunction in the action of the character.

The sub-effect block control unit 5320 executes control of effects other than the liquid crystal display. explain. Note that the effect control by the sub effect 1f scheduler execution unit 5333 and the sub effect 1ms scheduler execution unit 5334 will be described without particular distinction, assuming that they are the same except for the execution cycle. An outline of control according to the type of effect device will be described below.

First, a case of executing an effect by sound output will be described. If the sub-effect block data contains scheduler data for sound output, the scheduler executing section 5060 activates the scheduler for sound output and executes the scheduler data. Then, when a function for sound output (for example, SPLAY) is executed, the sound module 5500 generates sound source drive data (sound source command) based on specified parameters. A plurality of schedulers can be activated. For example, by controlling the output of BGM and effect sound by different schedulers, sound source driving data can be generated in parallel and sounds can be output at the same time. . The VDP 1540a with built-in sound source reads the sound source data specified by the sound source drive data from the liquid crystal and sound ROM 1540b, and outputs it from the speakers 921 and 573 by the audio data transmission IC 1540c.

Next, a case of executing an effect by a lamp will be described. If the sub effect block data includes scheduler data for lamp control, the scheduler execution unit activates the scheduler for lamps and executes the scheduler data. Then, when a function for lamp control (eg, HPLAY) is executed, the lamp module 5600 generates lamp drive data based on the specified parameters. As in the case of sound output, multiple schedulers can be activated, and multiple lamps and layers can be controlled in parallel.

The lamp module 5600 creates lamp drive data for each cycle (one frame or one millisecond) and outputs it to the lamp data output buffer 5130 . Lamp data output buffer 5130 has a double buffer structure, temporarily stores lamp drive data generated by lamp module 5600 , and outputs the data to serial control IC 5150 . By making the ramp data output buffer 5130 a double buffer, it is possible to simultaneously generate and output ramp data in a single cycle. By configuring in this way, the output of the lamp data can be changed to the next operation of creating the lamp data in response to the increase in lamp control processing time due to the increase in the number of lamp systems or the overlapping of lamp layers. By setting the period as a cycle, it is sufficient that the processing related to the creation of the lamp data is completed within the processing cycle.

Specifically, when the lamp data output buffer 5130 is configured by a buffer A and a buffer B, for example, if the lamp driving data generated last time is stored in the buffer A, the data for the next cycle is stored in the buffer B. , and outputs the previously created lamp driving data from the buffer A to the serial control IC 5150 by DMA to turn on/blink each lamp. In the next cycle, the buffers are switched, the lamp driving data is output from the lamp module 5600 to the buffer A, and the lamp driving data stored in the buffer B is output to the serial control IC 5150 . Controlling the lighting and blinking of LEDs is the same as for lamps, and the description of the control of lamps can be replaced with LEDs unless otherwise specified.

Finally, a case of controlling a driving device (for example, a motor, a solenoid) for operating the accessory will be described. If the sub effect block data includes scheduler data for driving device control, the scheduler execution unit activates the scheduler for driving device (motor scheduler) to execute the scheduler data. Then, when a driver control function (eg, MPLAY) is executed, the driver module 5700 generates lamp driving data based on the specified parameters. As in the case of sound output, it is possible to activate a plurality of schedulers, so that a plurality of driving devices can be controlled in parallel.

The drive module 5700 creates motor drive data for each cycle and outputs it to the motor data output buffer 5140 . In this embodiment, the motor drive data is created and output in a cycle of 1 millisecond. Motor data output buffer 5140 temporarily stores motor drive data generated by drive module 5700 and outputs it to serial control IC 5150 . The motor drive data is output from the serial port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a without using DMA. However, the output of the latch signal for reflecting the motor data in each driving device is not the same timing as the timing of output from the motor data output buffer 5140 to the serial control IC 5150, but the latch signal is output at the next cycle after transmission of all the motor data. output. This is because the output timing of the latch signal is after the serial transmission of all motor data is completed, so as the serial transmission time of the motor data becomes longer, the waiting time until the serial transmission is completed becomes an overhead, and the total processing time for each frame period becomes This is because there will be a shortage of In this embodiment, by shifting the timing of the motor data serial transmission and the corresponding latch signal output, the waiting time until the completion of the serial transmission is reduced to 0, but depending on the CPU used, multiple DMAs can be used. In this case, by serially transmitting the motor drive data using DMA and outputting a latch signal in response to a DMA completion interrupt, the waiting time until completion of serial transmission can be similarly reduced to zero. Simultaneously with the output of the motor driving data, effect driving photo information is input to the driving device module 5700 (peripheral control MPU 1511a). Each effect driving photo information is received by serial communication via a parallel serial control IC.

[18-2. Data structure]
In this embodiment, the scheduler data can take various structures. For example, a call function may be provided to retrieve other scheduler data as part of the scheduler data. The scheduler execution unit 5060 sequentially executes the processes specified by the scheduler data, and when executing the call function, once executes other scheduler data specified by the call function, and then continues the processing of the original scheduler data. and execute it. By doing so, it becomes possible to utilize general-purpose presentation contents in various situations in the same way as calling a subroutine in a general program.

This function is not only capable of reducing the load of creating scheduler data, but also has effects unique to gaming machines, as described below. In the gaming machine, various lotteries and the like are performed during the game, and the development of the game changes according to the result. Some players are able to guess the result of the lottery by finding subtle differences in the contents of the lottery. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by using the call function, it is possible to utilize general-purpose presentation contents in various situations, so that it is possible to eliminate such subtle differences and make it difficult to predict the results of the lottery. It is possible to suppress the loss of interest in the game.

As another configuration, the scheduler data may include a conditional branching function for switching the effect content according to the game state. The scheduler execution unit 5060 sequentially executes the processes specified by the scheduler data, and when executing the conditional branching function, determines the game state based on the main command, and executes the effect contents according to the game state. . By doing so, it is possible to deal with a wide variety of branching game states with one scheduler data. The game state used for conditional branching includes, for example, the result of a lottery performed during the game, and whether or not the player has operated a button or the like. In a reel-type game machine, the stopped state of the rotating reels may be used, and in the pachinko machine, the winning state of the starting winning hole may be used. Further, conditional branching may be performed depending on whether or not an error occurs during the game.

Various configurations are possible for the contents of the presentation after conditional branching. For example, after conditional branching, the configuration may be such that two or more processes are completely separated. Further, after performing a predetermined process by conditional branching, the process may be returned to the process before branching. According to the latter aspect, for example, when a button is pressed during a game, after executing a process of temporarily outputting a sound effect, it is possible to return to the previous presentation without discomfort.

As described above, the gaming machine can include various effects devices, and as an example, it can include a display device for displaying images. Various devices capable of displaying images, such as liquid crystal panels, CRTs, organic EL panels, and plasma displays, can be used as display devices. The display contents of the display device are controlled by the image processing device. An image processing device is a device that develops an image into a bitmap according to a predetermined display command and generates display data for displaying the image on a display device. For example, it can be configured by combining a VDP (Video Display Processor) and a character ROM in which characters and the like to be displayed on the screen are prepared as bitmaps.

[18-3. Basic Concept of Production Control]
FIG. 150 is an explanatory diagram showing the basic concept of effect control in the gaming machine of this embodiment. Here, the main effect control will be explained in the case of the sub-effect executed by executing the scheduler data containing the function, and in particular, the sound output will be explained as an example.

The scheduler execution unit 5060 (sub production scheduler execution unit 5320) activates the type and number of schedulers 5502 according to the production device when executing production. The scheduler execution section 5060 acquires the scheduler data designated as the sub effect block data from the scheduler data storage section 5070, and executes the function contained in the scheduler data. The structure of scheduler data will be described later.

The sound functions executed during sound output include "SPLAY" for playing a phrase, "STOP_PH" for stopping a phrase being played, and "VOL_PH" for setting a volume level during phrase playback. These sound functions are processed by the sound module 5500, and controls specified by parameters and the like are executed. When the sound module 5500 accepts execution of the function for sound, it generates sound source driving data and outputs the sound source driving data to the sound source built-in VDP 1540a.

The functions processed by the sound module 5500 control the sound output corresponding to the specified channel. Although the game machine of this embodiment is provided with 32 channels, the number of channels is assumed to be 4 for easy understanding. Sounds output by each channel are output from speakers [1] to [4] via volume 5506v[1] to [4]. The speakers [1] to [4] illustrated here schematically represent the outputs of the respective channels Ch1 to Ch4, and correspond to any one of the physical speakers provided in the gaming machine. It does not mean that

The correspondence between the scheduler 5502 and the output channels is managed by channel management works 5507[1] to 5507[4] provided in association with the channels Ch1 to Ch4. An example of the data structure of the channel management work 5507 is shown in the lower right of the figure. A work 5507 stores a phrase number, a stereo reproduction flag, an output volume, and a loop attribute. A phrase number is information indicating which phrase is currently being reproduced. The stereo reproduction flag indicates whether or not stereo output is to be performed. Output volume is the volume per channel. A loop attribute is a designation as to whether or not to repeat playback. These information are specified by the sound module 5500 based on the function for sound.

As described above, FIG. 150 shows the basic concept of effect control in the present embodiment by taking sound output control as an example. The sub-rendering scheduler executing section activates the scheduler designated by the sub-rendering block data, and executes the scheduler data on the scheduler. When the scheduler data is executed, the function for controlling each effect device is called and processed by the modules (sound module 5500, lamp module 5600, drive device module 5700) corresponding to each effect device.

[18-4. Data flow in production control]
So far, the basic concept of the module configuration and control in the performance control of the gaming machine has been described. Next, the flow of effect control from the reception of the main command to the acquisition of the scheduler data will be described.

[18-4-1. Acquisition of data necessary for production control]
FIG. 151A is a diagram illustrating a configuration up to acquisition of data required for effect control of the gaming machine of the present embodiment. 149, when the main command is received from the main control board 1310, the effect control unit 5020 analyzes it by the command analysis module 5200 and notifies the effect control unit 5020 of the analysis result.

Based on the layer data table, the effect control unit 5020 includes each layer, a variation pattern layer (a layer that performs effects related to the variation pattern), a pending layer (a layer that performs effects related to the pending effect), a game instruction layer (a game instruction based on the analysis results by the command analysis module 5200 for each layer), communication error layer (layer for notifying communication errors), notification layer (layer for various notifications), and abnormality notification layer (layer for notifying anomalies) , Acquisition and update management of effect block data number corresponding to each layer. Also, the obtained effect block data number is transferred to the effect block control unit 5040 . For the effect block number, for example, if it is a variation pattern layer, the liquid crystal effect block data combination number table by variation pattern, the liquid crystal design block data combination number table by variation pattern, and the sub effect block data by variation pattern are based on the variation pattern number. Determined from the combination number table. The division unit of the performance block is divided into predetermined units (blocks) which are common performances in a series of performances (for example, performances executed from the start to the end of the variation of the special symbols). Further, block data including control information such as effect content and effect time for each effect device is defined for each block. By controlling the performance for each performance block based on the performance block number, the performance by each performance device can be synchronized. Also, the arrangement of the layers corresponds to the layers on the liquid crystal display, and in this embodiment, the variation pattern layer is the backmost layer, and the abnormality notification layer is the frontmost layer. It is a configuration for

When the effect block control unit 5040 receives the block data number (effect block number) corresponding to each layer, the scheduler control unit (liquid crystal effect block control unit 5310, liquid crystal pattern block control unit 5311, sub effect block The corresponding block data (liquid crystal effect block data 5051, liquid crystal design block data 5052, sub-effect block data 5053) is acquired by the control unit 5320). Each block data includes scheduler data for executing effects, as described above.

For example, when the main command is the starting winning command, the pending layer is specified, and the liquid crystal effect block data 5051 for performing the pending display on the liquid crystal display screen and the sub effect block data for outputting the effect sound at the time of starting winning 5053 is obtained. Also, when the special symbol starts to fluctuate, a fluctuation start command or the like is transmitted, and the fluctuation pattern layer is specified. Furthermore, a command is also sent when notifying an error or warning, and the anomaly detection layer is specified. Also, by performing effects for each layer, a plurality of effects can be superimposed at the same time.

Based on the liquid crystal effect block data number, the liquid crystal effect block control unit 5310 obtains the liquid crystal effect block data 5051 from the liquid crystal effect block data combination number table corresponding to each layer. Start the production 1f scheduler. The liquid crystal effect 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 further acquires the liquid crystal effect schedule data 5071 . By executing the liquid crystal presentation schedule data 5071 on the liquid crystal presentation 1f scheduler, the liquid crystal module 5400 is instructed to process the function defined in the liquid crystal presentation schedule data 5071 . The liquid crystal module 5400 processes the function instructed to be executed based on the specified scheduler data, creates a display list command necessary for driving the VDP 1540a, outputs the display list command to the VDP 1540a, and displays the game board. An image is drawn on the side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. - 特許庁The processing in the liquid crystal presentation 1f scheduler is executed in synchronization with the screen update interval (one frame).

Further, based on the liquid crystal pattern block data number, the liquid crystal pattern block control section 5311 obtains the liquid crystal pattern block data 5052 from the liquid crystal pattern block data combination number table corresponding to each layer. to activate the liquid crystal pattern 1f scheduler. The liquid crystal pattern 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5332 further acquires the liquid crystal pattern schedule data 5072 . By executing the liquid crystal design schedule data 5072 on the liquid crystal design 1f scheduler, the liquid crystal module 5400 is instructed to process the function defined in the liquid crystal design schedule data 5072 . The liquid crystal module 5400 processes the function instructed to be executed based on the specified scheduler data, creates a display list command necessary for driving the VDP 1540a, outputs the display list command to the VDP 1540a, and displays the game board. An image is drawn on the side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. - 特許庁The processing in the liquid crystal pattern 1f scheduler is executed in synchronization with the screen update interval (one frame).

After obtaining the sub effect block data 5053, the sub effect block control section 5320 specifies the execution cycle (1 frame or 1 millisecond) based on the information specified in the sub effect block data 5053 and the like. Then, when the execution cycle is 1 frame, the sub performance 1f scheduler is activated by the sub performance 1f scheduler execution unit 5333, or when the execution cycle is 1 millisecond, the sub performance 1ms scheduler execution unit 5334 executes the sub performance 1ms. Start the scheduler.

Further, the sub effect 1f scheduler execution unit 5333 or the sub effect 1ms scheduler execution unit 5334 acquires the sub effect schedule data 5073 and executes it on the corresponding scheduler. The sub performance schedule data 5073 does not differ depending on the execution cycle, and all functions can be executed by the schedulers of all execution cycles. This makes it possible to create scheduler data that is commonly used by schedulers with different execution cycles, thereby reducing the data volume. In addition, it is possible to quickly respond to changes in the execution cycle of the production device. In addition, the same schedule data can be executed simultaneously by different schedulers, which makes it possible to share the scheduler data, prevent the same type of failure from occurring in multiple places, and reduce the data volume. can.

A specific example of simultaneously executing the same schedule data by different schedulers will now be described. FIG. 151B is a diagram for explaining the step-up notice liquid crystal drawing effect of the present embodiment. For the step-up notice, four types of step-up notice 1 to 4 can be executed, and by executing the production that develops the production content step by step, the player can expect the result of the variable display of the pattern. suggest degrees.

In the step-up notice 1, the notice performance ends when the step-up 1 performance is executed. In the step-up notice 2, the step-up 2 performance is generated just before the step-up 1 performance ends, and after the step-up 2 performance ends, the notice performance ends. The effect is similarly executed for the step-up notices 3 and 4, and the notice effect is finished after the step-up 3 effect and the step-up 4 effect are finished, respectively.

In the step-up notice, sound and lamps also execute the step-up notice effect in accordance with the liquid crystal effect. In the sound production, different sounds are output in each stage of the step-up production, so four types of scheduler data from step 1 to step 4 are defined for each progress (stage) of the production. On the other hand, in the ramp effect, the same ramp pattern is displayed in each stage of the step-up effect, so it is sufficient to define one type of common ramp scheduler data.

In addition, when the liquid crystal effect of the step-up notice develops to the next stage, the next step-up notice will start just before the end of the current step-up notice, so multiple step-up effects will be temporarily performed at the same time. There is a period of time. As described above, in the ramp effect, it is necessary to execute the same scheduler data for subsequent step-up effects. It's becoming Therefore, when the same effect is executed in each stage, one type of common scheduler data may be defined even if the effect execution periods overlap.

Specifically, when the step-up notice lamp scheduler data (SCH_LMP_STEP) is executed by the ramp scheduler (LMP_SCH01) in the step-up 1 effect, the same step-up is performed when the step-up 2 effect that starts just before the end of the step-up 1 effect occurs. The advance lamp scheduler data (SCH_LMP_STEP) is executed by another lamp scheduler (LMP_SCH02). With this configuration, the same scheduler data is not defined redundantly, and the same scheduler data is simultaneously (overlapped) executed, so that in a series of performances, the same pattern of performance is performed in parallel. Realized to run.

The sub production 1f scheduler execution unit 5333 or the sub production 1ms scheduler execution unit 5334 calls the modules (sound module 5500, lamp module 5600, driving device module 5700) corresponding to the production device to be controlled, and defines them in the sub production schedule data 5073. Instructs the processing of the specified function. Each module processes a function instructed to be executed based on designated scheduler data, creates data necessary for driving the rendering device, and outputs the driving data to the rendering device.

[18-4-2. Overview of execution of scheduler data]
FIG. 152 is a diagram for explaining the flow of scheduler data during execution of this embodiment. The production control unit 5020 determines the content of production based on the analysis result of the main (main board) command by the command analysis module 5200, and various production devices are operated by the VDP 1540a with built-in sound source, the sound module 5500, the lamp module 5600 and the driving device module 5700. Control. FIG. 152 shows the structure of the scheduler data 5401 referenced to set this command.

In this embodiment, the scheduler data 5401 is prepared for each effect number specified by the effect block control section 5040 and stored in the peripheral control ROM 1530b. The correspondence relationship between the scheduler data 5401 and the performance number is defined in the performance management table. As shown on the left side of the figure, the effect management table has a effect management pointer that indicates the storage address of the scheduler data. Although the number of effect management pointers corresponding to the effect number is prepared, only five pointers are illustrated here. In the illustrated example, for example, the effect management pointer [1] initially stores the start address A1 of the scheduler data 5401. In the example shown in FIG. As the processing of scheduler data is executed, the value of effect management pointer [1] shifts to A1 and A2 in sequence.

In this embodiment, the effect number uses the address value of the effect management pointer. In the example of FIG. 152, the performance numbers 01H, 02H, etc. represent the storage addresses of the performance management pointers [1], [2], etc., respectively. Note that the effect number is not limited to the address value, and arbitrary identification information can be used. In this case, the effect management table may be configured so that the effect number and the effect management pointer are associated with each other. Processing should be performed. Also, if the address value of the effect management pointer is used as the effect number, the amount of data in the effect management table can be reduced, and the above-described search is not necessary, so the load required for processing the scheduler data can be reduced.

Each command that constitutes the scheduler data 5401 is basically composed of a function and a parameter, as shown in FIG. A function, as described above, is a command for controlling the effect device, for example, for instructing each module to operate the effect device. A parameter is a variable that specifically indicates the processing content of a function. It should be noted that a function that does not need to specify parameters may be provided.

Functions are categorized into groups such as sequence control, lamp, sound, motor (drive) and user. Sequence control is a basic function for effect control, and lamps, sounds and motors are functions for controlling each effect device. A user is a function that does not belong to these groups. A detailed description of the functions will be given later with reference to FIGS. 155 to 157. FIG.

In the example shown in FIG. 152, the "call" function is specified at address A2. The "call" function belongs to the sequence control group, saves the pointer value of the next function, and sets the address specified by the parameter to the performance management pointer. The scheduler execution unit 5060 can temporarily move to the address specified by the parameter, process the scheduler data, and then return to the previous process based on the saved pointer value.

After address A2, scheduler execution unit 5060 executes address A31 specified by the parameter of the "call" function. A liquid crystal command is set at address A31, a voice operation number is set at A32, a lamp operation number is set at A33, and return is performed at A3n. After finishing these processes, the effect command returns to the address A2 where "call" is specified, and shifts to the process of the next address A3.

Thus, by utilizing the "call" function, it is possible to incorporate the contents of a series of blocks BL3 specified by addresses A31-A3n into various parts of the scheduler data. By doing so, the capacity of the scheduler data can be reduced, and the load for creating the scheduler data can be reduced. 2. Description of the Related Art In game machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines, various lotteries and the like are performed during a game, and the development of the game changes according to the results. Some players are able to guess the result of the lottery by finding subtle differences in the contents of the lottery. On the other hand, according to the present invention, since it is possible to utilize general-purpose presentation contents in various situations by calling, it is possible to eliminate such subtle differences and make it difficult to predict the lottery results. , it is possible to suppress the loss of interest in the game.

Although it is possible to use the "call" function in this way, the scheduler data 5401 of this embodiment is different from the interpreter program. As described above, the main function used in the scheduler data 5401 is to set the contents of instructions to other schedulers, such as "Set character action number", "Voice action number set", and "Lamp action number set". , the scheduler execution unit 5060 only specifically instructs very limited functions that can be realized.

In the example shown in FIG. 152, NOP (wait) is then executed at address A3. The "NOP" function waits for the specified number of frames and continues processing the scheduler data. Here, processing of the scheduler data waits until the time specified by the parameter Prm[031] has passed. As will be described later, in this embodiment, processing is repeatedly executed by timer interrupts. Therefore, in the "NOP" function, if the value of the parameter Prm[031] is not 0, the scheduler execution unit 5060 temporarily terminates the processing of the scheduler data without performing subsequent processing. , processing to move to the function of the next address.

In this embodiment, a work having the same format as the work area 5301 shown in FIG. 151A is used to specify the voice action number and the like. The work area 5301 used by the system event and the work used by the scheduler execution unit 5060 are prepared separately, and the scheduler execution unit 5060 stores the voice operation number and the like in each work according to the scheduler data specification. Also, the layer designated by the effect control unit 5020 is provided separately from the layer for the system module (see FIG. 151A). Also in the work for each module, it is possible to designate a plurality of voice operation numbers and lamp operation numbers from among these layers in parallel.

Similarly, the scheduler data after the conditional branch address A11 are defined by functions and parameters. In the example shown in FIG. 152, no conditional branch is provided from address A11 of the conditional branch to the end of the rendering (address An). Since this range is a block BL2 different from the block BL1 described above, it is possible to specify a character command (address A22), a voice action number (address A21), etc. without considering conflict with the block BL1. . Instead of these settings, a "call" function may be used to fetch block BL3 and the like.

The scheduler data may use a combination of conditional branching and a "call" function. For example, a random number may be generated for switching the effect content, and a different address may be called according to the value of the random number. In the example shown in FIG. 152, if a condition of "random value ≤ Th1?" Also, after address A2 (address A2+1), if address A41 (not shown) is called with the condition "Th1<random number≤Th2?" is executed differently. In this way, by calling a different address with conditional branching according to the random number, it is possible to switch the contents of the effect at random according to the random number, making it possible to enhance the interest of the game. In the present specification, hereinafter, such switching of the effect content is referred to as "effect lottery".

In the effect lottery, all of the display, sound, lamp, and driving device may be switched, or only part of them may be switched. To switch all of them, it is sufficient to specify all the contents of display, sound, and lamp in the scheduler data called by the "call" function. When switching only a part, specify only the part to be switched in the scheduler data called by the "call" function, and specify the other parts uniformly after returning from the "call" function. do it.

Also, within the scheduler data, conditional branching and a "call" function may be used to call different scheduler data according to the random number for the effect lottery. In this case, the display, sound, lamp, and driving device perform the lottery for effects independently, and as a result, there is an advantage in that the combination of the effects provides a wide variety of effects, thereby increasing interest.

However, regardless of the result of the display, sound, lamp, and driving device effect lottery, it is preferable that these effects end at the same time in order to realize a natural effect. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the scheduler data to be selected for the effect lottery is such that the effect ends at the same time. It should be noted that it is not an essential requirement that the performances end at the same time, and these performance times may not be the same.

The effect lottery based on the scheduler data has the advantage that the effect contents can be diversified and the lottery mode can be switched according to the output status of the display, sound, lamp, and driving device. For example, when an effect lottery is instructed, the driving device is executing a figure-of-eight sorting operation and other operations are restricted, the driving device module 5700 prohibits the effect lottery related to the driving device. may Similarly, with respect to display, sound, and lamp, the effect lottery may be prohibited depending on the situation when the effect lottery is instructed. Further, in the effect lottery prohibition, the effect lottery may be partially prohibited by prohibiting the selection of some scheduler data.

As described above, the effect lottery only switches the effect contents by the control processing of the peripheral control board 1510, and does not affect the game itself. However, by enabling the effect lottery in this way, it is possible to realize a more diverse effect than the types of commands output from the main control board 1310, and to further enhance the interest.

[18-4-3. Overview of sound output control]
Next, the function of the sound module for controlling sound output will be described. FIG. 153 is an explanatory diagram showing the functions of the sound module 5500 of this embodiment. The sound module 5500 receives an instruction from the scheduler execution unit 5060, executes the process designated by the function included in the scheduler data, and outputs sound. The sound module 5500 can receive and process requests from multiple schedulers 5502 . Each scheduler 5502 is provided in association with a sound layer for audio. Each scheduler 5502 is provided with a work 5507 for operation management. The contents of the work 5507 will be described later.

After specifying the voice action number based on the scheduler control information, the scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the voice action number table to specify the scheduler data 5505 to be executed. The voice action number table is a table in which sound pointers and sound layers are associated with voice action numbers. In this embodiment, the voice action number corresponds to the storage address of the voice action number table. Any identification information can be used as the voice action number, but as in the case of the effect number described above, it is better to correspond to the storage address to reduce the capacity of the voice action number table and reduce the processing load when referring to the table. has the advantage of allowing

The sound pointer designates the storage address of scheduler data 5505 . In this embodiment, the address SA1 is stored in the sound pointer [1].

Scheduler data 5505 consists of functions and parameters. Functions used in the scheduler data 5505 for controlling sound output will be described later with reference to FIGS. 156 and 157. FIG.

In the example shown in FIG. 153, a "call" function is defined at address SA2. After executing a series of blocks after address SA31 (not shown), scheduler execution unit 5060 processes address SA3 next to address SA2.

At address SA3, phrase reproduction is defined. The scheduler execution unit 5060 reads the phrase data 5508 corresponding to the phrase number 00H designated by the parameter and reproduces it.

An example of the structure of phrase data 5508 is shown on the right side of FIG. A phrase number is identification information attached to each phrase data. Although arbitrary identification information can be used in this embodiment, the storage address of the phrase data 5508 may be used as the phrase number. In this case, it is possible to omit the phrase number from the phrase data 5508 .

A channel is an output channel specified during phrase playback. The left/right panpot and the up/down panpot are the left/right/up/down output balance of each speaker provided in the gaming machine. Volume is the output volume. The song number is the identification number of the audio to be reproduced. When the music number is notified to the VDP 1540a with built-in tone generator, the VDP 1540a with built-in tone generator reads the tone generator data corresponding to the music number from the liquid crystal and sound ROM 1540b, and reproduces the sound. "Loop" is a designation as to whether or not the audio is to be played back repeatedly. Stereo is a designation as to whether or not stereo output is to be performed.

Each scheduler 5502 is associated with a work 5507 for operation management. Work 5507 stores various information shown in the figure. The operating state indicates whether or not each layer is operating. The voice number represents the number of scheduler data 5505 in operation. In this embodiment, the start address of the scheduler data 5505 is used. The sound pointer is the address of scheduler data 5505 that scheduler 5502 is executing. In the example shown in FIG. 153, as the process progresses, the value of the sound pointer sequentially shifts to SA2 and SA3. The timer value represents the waiting time before executing the next function. It is set when the wait time is designated by the scheduler data 5505, and is decremented sequentially as time elapses. The sound module 5500 executes the following functions when this value becomes 0.

The number of call nests and the number of loop nests represent the number of nests of calls and loops designated multiple by the scheduler data 5505 and the phrase number. That is, for example, in the processing after address SA31 called by the "call" function (first call) of address SA2, if the scheduler data 5505 of another address is further called by the "call" function (second call), the call nest The number becomes 2. After completing the second call and returning to the first call, the call nest number is reduced to one. The same is true for loops. The call return address is a return address from the called party and is provided according to the number of call nests. The loop start address is the start address of the loop range, and the loop count is the loop repeat count. A loop head address and the like are provided according to the number of loop nests.

[18-4-4. Overview of lamp output control]
Next, the function of the lamp module that controls the output of the lamp will be described. FIG. 154 is an explanatory diagram showing the functions of the lamp module 5600 of this embodiment. The lamp module 5600 receives an instruction from the scheduler execution unit 5060, executes processing specified in the function included in the scheduler data, and performs lamp output, that is, lamp lighting/flickering control. Like the sound module 5500, the lamp module 5600 can also receive requests from a plurality of schedulers 5602 and process them. Each scheduler 5602 is associated with a lamp layer for lamps. Each scheduler 5602 is provided with a work 5603 for operation management. The contents of the work 5603 will be described later.

After specifying the lamp operation number based on the scheduler control information, the scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the lamp operation number table to specify the scheduler data 5601 to be executed. The lamp operation number table is a table in which lamp pointers and lamp layers are associated with lamp operation numbers. In this embodiment, the lamp operation number corresponds to the storage address of the lamp operation number table. Although arbitrary identification information can be used for the lamp operation number, it is better to use a storage address, as in the case of the performance number described above, to reduce the capacity of the lamp operation number table and to reduce the processing load when referring to the table. It has the advantage of allowing

The lamp pointer designates the storage address of the scheduler data 5601 . In this embodiment, the address LA1 is stored in the lamp pointer [1].

The scheduler data 5505 is composed of functions and parameters, similar to the performance data (FIG. 152). The functions used in scheduler data 5505 for controlling lamps are described later in FIG.

In the example shown in FIG. 154, a "call" function is defined at address LA2. After executing a series of blocks after address LA31 (not shown), scheduler execution unit 5060 processes address LA3 next to address LA2.

At address LA3, a gradation pattern setting is defined. The scheduler execution unit 5060 sets the gradation pattern data 5606 stored at the address LA11 specified by the parameter. A gradation scheduler 5604 is associated with each ramp scheduler 5602. The lamp is lit with the specified gradation data 1, and when the time specified by the timer value elapses, the lamp is lit with gradation data 2. light up. Here, an example in which two types of gradation data are specified is shown, but even when three or more are specified, the lamp is lit while sequentially switching the gradation data at the time interval of the timer value. By preparing a plurality of gradation pattern settings after address LA12, it is possible to light the lamp with various gradation patterns while changing the timer value for switching between gradation data. It is also possible to provide a loop within the gradation pattern data. When the gradation scheduler 5604 executes a series of processes for addresses LA11 to LA1n, it ends lighting of the lamp. The ramp scheduler 5602 returns to the processing of the address LA3 of the scheduler data 5601 and executes the processing of the next address until it stops (address LAn).

Each scheduler 5602 is associated with a work 5603 for operation management. The work 5603 stores various information shown in the drawing. The scheduler status indicates whether the scheduler is running. The operation pattern number represents the number of scheduler data 5601 in operation. In this embodiment, the start address of the scheduler data 5601 is used. The scheduler timer represents the waiting time before executing the next function. It is set when the wait time is specified in the scheduler data, and is decremented as the time elapses. The lamp performs the following functions when this value reaches zero. The grayscale data timer represents the waiting time until the next grayscale data is executed when the grayscale pattern data 5606 is executed. In the example shown in FIG. 154, when the gradation data specified by the address LA11 is executed, when the timer value set in the gradation data timer becomes 0, the gradation data 1 is shifted to the gradation data 2. Then, when the timer value becomes 0 again, the processing of address LA11 is terminated and the processing of address LA12 is started.

The ramp pointer is the address of the scheduler data 5601 that the scheduler 5602 is executing. In the example shown in FIG. 154, as the process progresses, the value of the lamp pointer sequentially shifts to LA1, LA2, and LA3. The grayscale data pointer is the address of the grayscale pattern data 5606 being executed by the grayscale scheduler 5604 . In the example shown in the figure, the value of the gradation data pointer sequentially shifts to LA11 and LA12 as the process progresses. The loop count is the number of repetitions of the loop, and the loop start address is the start address of the loop range. As with sounds, loops may be nested.

[18-4-5. Outline of drive device control]
Next, the function of the drive module 5700 that controls the operation of the drive will be described. The driving device is, for example, a stepping motor. Since the control is the same as that of the lamp module 5600, the illustration is omitted. The driving device module 5700 receives an instruction from the scheduler execution unit 5060, executes the processing designated by the function included in the scheduler data, and controls the operation of the driving device. The drive module 5700 can also accept and process requests from multiple schedulers.

The control items of the driving device include, for example, movement amount (rotation step angle of stepping motor), movement time, movement speed (motor rotation speed), excitation method, trapezoidal driving, rotation direction, and the like. In addition, instructions to execute a return operation to return to the origin position and instructions to stop the mechanical end (when the movable range of the drive device is mechanically limited, stop it while being biased to the limit position of the movable range) are given. included. In the trapezoidal drive, the rotation speed is changed by a predetermined angular acceleration instead of changing the speed in a step function at the start and stop of rotation.

Scheduler data consists of functions and parameters. The functions used in the scheduler data to control the drives are described below in FIG.

[18-5. function]
In the above, the example which uses a function in the module used for production|presentation control was demonstrated. Other functions will now be described. Figures 155 to 157 are diagrams showing examples of functions in the effect control of the gaming machine of this embodiment. As before, the functions are categorized into sequence control, lamp, sound, motor and user groups. Functions belonging to each group will be described below.

[18-5-1. Function details (sequence control)]
Functions belonging to the sequence control group are mainly functions for controlling the flow of presentation. FIG. 155 shows an example of sequence control functions. An outline of each function will be described below.

"STOP" is a function representing the end of scheduler data. "NOP" is a wait function that waits for a time corresponding to the number of executions specified as a parameter. The time corresponding to the number of executions varies depending on the processing cycle for executing the "NOP" function. If 30 is specified, it will wait for about 1 second, and if it is executed at a cycle of 1 ms, if the number of times of execution is also specified as 30, it will wait for about 30 ms. "NOP_F_VALUE" uses the execution count (frame number), scheduler memory number, mask value, and comparison value as parameters. When the conditions based on the scheduler memory number, mask value, and comparison value are satisfied, the "NOP_F_VALUE" function ends and the conditions are satisfied. It is a conditional wait function that waits for a time corresponding to the number of executions if the conditions are not met.

"MEMW" is a function that takes the target scheduler work number and value as parameters and writes the specified value in the corresponding scheduler work area. "LOOPST" is a function for repeating processing (loop), specifying the head of the loop and setting the number of loops as a parameter. Note that if the number of loops is set to "0", it becomes an infinite loop. "LOOP" is a function for designating the end of repetitive processing (loop).

"RET" is a function for returning processing to the block (function data) that called it. The pointer value saved by the "call" function is set in the performance management table. "CALL" is the aforementioned "call" function, which executes processing from a specified address (block) and sets information specifying a call destination such as an address value and label as a parameter. In "CALL", the pointer value of the function to be executed next is saved, and the address of the call destination is set in the performance management pointer. Then, after executing the called process, the address saved by the above-mentioned "RET" function is set in the performance management pointer, and the previous process is returned to.

"SUBC" selects a process to be called (block to be executed) using the scheduler work number value as an index based on the target scheduler work number and branch table specified as parameters, and executes the selected process. That is, it executes a "call" function based on specified conditions. A specific example using "SUBC" will be described later with reference to FIG. When the "SUBC" function terminates the called process, it returns to the caller process (the process following the "SUBC" function).

"SUBJ" selects a process to be called (block to be executed) using the scheduler work number value as an index based on the target scheduler work number and table specified as parameters, and executes the selected process. That is, the "JUMP" function, which will be described later, is executed based on the specified conditions. A specific example using "SUBJ" will be described later with reference to FIG. It does not return to the processing of the caller that executed the "SUBJ" function, but continues the processing of the callee. "JUMP" sets the address specified by the parameter to the performance management pointer, and continues processing from the specified address or label.

"REQ" is a function for activating another scheduler specified by a parameter. A specific example using "REQ" will be described later with reference to FIG. "REQF" is a function for activating another scheduler specified by a parameter like "REQ", and other scheduler data is overwritten until the overwrite prohibition time specified by the parameter elapses. to start up. In "REQ", control by multiple scheduler data can be executed in parallel. On the other hand, "REQF" allows the processing of the scheduler data to be executed to be executed independently for a specified period. You can prevent it from becoming disabled.

[18-5-2. Function Details (Lamp)]
The functions belonging to the ramp group are functions for controlling the flow of ramp effects. FIG. 156 shows an example of functions related to lamp control, and an outline of each function will be described.

"HPLAY" is a function for executing lamp gradation data reproduction processing for lighting a lamp based on gradation data specified by a parameter. In "HPLAY", even if the lamp is being reproduced with the same gradation data, it is reset and the reproduction of the lamp is started from the beginning when the function is executed. The gradation data is specified by setting the gradation pattern data address, and the execution of the gradation data is instructed by clearing the gradation data timer in the work 5603 .

"KPLAY", like "HPLAY", is a function for executing lamp gradation data reproduction processing for lighting a lamp based on gradation data specified by a parameter. In "KPLAY", if the lamp is being reproduced with the same gradation data, the reproduction of the lamp being executed is continued without resetting.

"HPLAY2" is a function that designates a layer in addition to gradation data with a parameter and executes ramp gradation data reproduction processing. The processing is the same as "HPLAY". "KPLAY2" is a function that, like "HPLAY2", designates a layer in addition to gradation data with a parameter and executes ramp gradation data reproduction processing. The processing is the same as "KPLAY".

"HPLAY" and "KPLAY" execute designated ramp gradation data reproduction processing for reproducing ramp gradation data designated by parameters. If the ramp gradation data has already been reproduced, reproduction of the ramp gradation data is interrupted during reproduction by "HPLAY" and the same ramp gradation data is reproduced from the beginning. continue playing without interruption. That is, while the ramp gradation data is being reproduced, even if the same ramp gradation data is executed using "KPLAY", no particular processing is executed.

'HPLAY2' has the same function as 'HPLAY' except that a layer for reproducing ramp gradation data is designated by a parameter in addition to the function of 'HPLAY2'.

"KPLAY2" has the same function as "KPLAY" except that the layer for reproducing ramp gradation data is designated by a parameter in addition to the function of "KPLAY2" described above, and the layer is designated by a parameter.

[18-5-3. Function Details (Sound)]
Functions belonging to the sound group are functions for controlling sound output. 156 and 157 show an example of functions related to sound control, and an outline of each function will be described.

"SPLAY" is a function for executing phrase reproduction processing for outputting sound based on the phrase number designated by a parameter. In "SPLAY", even if the sound of the same phrase number is being reproduced, it is reset and the reproduction of the sound is started from the beginning when the function is executed. "SXPLAY" is a function for executing phrase reproduction processing for outputting sound based on the phrase number designated by the parameter, like "SPLAY". In "SXPLAY", when the sound of the same phrase number is being reproduced, the reproduction of the sound is continued without resetting. "STOP_PH" is a function for executing phrase stop processing for stopping the reproduction of sound based on the phrase number designated by the parameter.

"PAN_PH" moves the currently playing phrase specified by the parameter from the voice output coordinate position at the start of execution of the "PAN_PH" function, using the transition time and panpot end coordinate position also specified by the parameter, to end the panpot. This is a function for moving the voice output coordinate position at the specified transition time to the coordinate position. In addition to the functions of the "PAN_PH" function, "PAN_PH2" can specify the panpot start coordinate position with a parameter. This is a function for moving the voice output coordinate position from the panpot start coordinate position specified by the parameter to the panpot end coordinate position in the specified transition time.

"VOL_FADE_PH" specifies the phrase being played back specified by the parameter from the volume value at the start of execution of the "VOL_FADE_PH" function to the fade end volume value using the transition time and fade end volume value also specified by the parameter. This function is used to increase or decrease the volume value during the transition time. "VOL_FADE_PH2" has the functions of the "VOL_FADE_PH" function, but also allows you to specify the fade start volume value with a parameter. This function increases/decreases the volume value in the specified transition time from the fade start volume value specified by the fade start volume value to the fade end volume value.

"VOL_PH" is a function that increases or decreases the volume value of the phrase being reproduced specified by the parameter with the volume value specified by the parameter. "VOL_MUTE_ON_PH" is a function that mutes the volume of a phrase specified by a parameter. "VOL_MUTE_OFF_PH" is a function that cancels muting of the volume of a phrase specified by a parameter.

"SCPLAY" and "SXCPLAY" execute designated channel music reproduction processing for reproducing the phrase corresponding to the phrase number designated by the parameter on the designated channel. When the same phrase has already been reproduced, the reproduction of the phrase is interrupted and the same phrase is reproduced from the beginning during reproduction by 'SCPPLAY', and the reproduction of the phrase is continued without interruption during reproduction by 'SXCPLAY'. In other words, even if the same phrase is executed using "SXCPLAY" while the phrase is being reproduced, no particular processing is executed.

"PAN_CH" performs panpot for ch (channel), whereas "PAN_PH" described above performs panpot for phrase. Other than that, the processing is the same as "PAN_PH". As for "PAN_CH2", while "PAN_PH2" described above performs panpot for phrases, panpot for ch is performed. ” and the process does not change.

"VOL_FADE_CH" performs a fade for the ch, whereas the "VOL_FADE_PH" described above performs a fade for the phrase. Processing remains the same. Regarding "VOL_FADE_CH2", while "VOL_FADE_PH2" mentioned above fades the phrase, it fades the ch. Processing remains the same.

"VOL_CH" increases or decreases the volume value for the phrase, while "VOL_PH" described above increases or decreases the volume value for the ch. Other than that, the processing is the same as "VOL_PH". Regarding "VOL_MUTE_ON_CH", "VOL_MUTE_ON_PH" mentioned above mutes the phrase, while mute the ch. Other than that, the processing is the same as "VOL_MUTE_ON_PH". As for "VOL_MUTE_OFF_CH", "VOL_MUTE_OFF_PH" mentioned above cancels muting for phrases, whereas mute for ch is canceled. is changed to ch, the processing is the same as "VOL_MUTE_OFF_PH".

[18-5-4. Function details (motor)]
Functions belonging to the motor group are functions for controlling the output of motors and solenoids. FIG. 157 shows an example of functions related to motor control, and an outline of each function will be described.

"MPLAY" executes a motor regeneration process that causes the motor to reproduce an operation based on the motor data number designated by the parameter. "MMPLAY" executes a motor regeneration process that causes the motor designated by the parameter to reproduce the operation based on the motor data number. "SOL_ON" executes a solenoid ON process that causes the solenoid to perform an operation based on the solenoid data number designated as a parameter. "SOL_OFF" executes solenoid OFF processing to stop the operation of the solenoid based on the solenoid data number designated as the parameter.

[18-5-5. Function details (user)]
A function belonging to a user's group is a function for executing control not belonging to any group described so far. An example of these functions is given in FIG. 157, and an outline of each function will be described.

"MBUF_SET" executes a motor output buffer scheduler work value set process for setting a scheduler work value in the motor output buffer. "COMMAND" and "COMMAND0" are processes for issuing commands from within the scheduler. "COMMAND" issues a command to the tone generator built-in VDP 1540a. For example, it issues a command to start drawing to the liquid crystal display device. On the other hand, the command issued by "COMMAND0" is analyzed by the command analysis module 5200 and performs the same operation as the main command. "MEMC" executes scheduler memory copy processing to copy the contents of the work area of the scheduler being executed to the work area of another scheduler.

[18-6. Scheduler]
Next, the scheduler that calls each function will be described. The scheduler is used to execute scheduler data, which is a data string that defines functions required for executing a series of processes in order of execution. One or more schedulers are provided for each purpose for management purposes, but all schedulers can execute all functions. There is no difference other than the processing cycle (frame or 1 ms) in the schedulers provided for each use, which are capable of executing sound functions, and all functions can be mixed and executed. There is no limit to the number of schedulers that can be executed, and multiple registered schedulers can be executed simultaneously.

FIG. 158 is a diagram showing an example of the scheduler definition of this embodiment. Schedulers can be conveniently classified according to state transitions and devices to be controlled. An outline of typical types of schedulers will be described below.

First, an example of a scheduler relating to state transition will be described. There is a special figure state scheduler (special figure state SCH, TOK_SCH) for executing main state transition scheduler data for controlling the transition of the game state of the entire game. In the effect control in the peripheral control board 1510 , the transition of the game state is controlled based on the command received from the main control board 1310 . The processing cycle of the special figure state scheduler is 1f (frame).

There is also a sub-state scheduler (sub-state SCH, SUB_SCH) for executing sub-state scheduler data that controls transitions of internal states (sub-internal states) in the peripheral control board 1510 . The internal state transitions when a predetermined condition is established, for example, when the player operates a production button, wins a lottery for execution of the production, or when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, the state transitions to another state. do. The processing cycle of the sub-state scheduler is 1f (frame).

The scheduler for sound includes a background that controls the output of sounds that are output along with the background display and the changing display of patterns, a scheduler (SND_SCH01) for executing the pattern sound scheduler data, and a scheduler (SND_SCH01) that is output when the notice effect is executed. There are a scheduler (SND_SCH02, 03) that controls the output of sound that is played, and a scheduler (SND_SCH04) that controls the output of sound when the announcement is executed by the role object. The processing cycle of the scheduler for sound is 1f (frame).

Similar to the sound-related scheduler, the lamp-related scheduler includes a background display and a scheduler (LMP_SCH01 ), a scheduler (LMP_SCH02, 03) for controlling the lighting and blinking of lamps during the execution of the announcement effect, and a scheduler (LMP_SCH04) for controlling the lighting and blinking of the lamps during the execution of the announcement by the character. The processing cycle of the scheduler for lamps is 1f (frame).

A scheduler is also defined to control sounds and lamps in tandem. Such a scheduler has a sound and lamp notification layer that outputs sounds and lights and flashes lamps in order to notify the outside of bulbs out and clogged, and alarms due to abnormalities detected by magnetic sensors, etc. There is a scheduler (INF_SCH01-03) for executing scheduler data for each layer. In addition, there is a sound/lamp general-purpose scheduler (SNDLMP_SCH01-05) that is used for a general purpose to execute effects in which sound output and lamp lighting/flashing are interlocked. The processing cycle of these schedulers is 1f (frame).

The scheduler for motors includes a scheduler (MOTSYS_SCH) for executing motor system scheduler data for executing system operations, and a scheduler (MOTSYS_SCH) for executing motor RAM clear scheduler data for making settings when clearing RAM. MOTRAM_SCH), a scheduler (MOTINI_SCH) for executing motor role item initialization scheduler data for initializing the placement of role items, and a motor role item correction scheduler data for correcting the position of role items. , and a scheduler (MOT_SCH) for executing the action of a character by means of a performance or the like.

The scheduler for executing the action of the role by the performance etc. includes the scheduler (MOT_SCH01 to 05) for controlling the action of a specific role, and the general-purpose scheduler that is used independently of the type of role. There is a scheduler (MOT_SCH05-10).

Note that the processing cycle of the scheduler for motors is 1 ms (milliseconds), which is shorter than the processing cycle of the scheduler for game state management, sounds and lamps (this embodiment, 1f = about 33.334 ms). It's becoming

Although the number of schedulers that control each target device is fixed in this embodiment, the number of schedulers may be controlled to dynamically increase or decrease according to the game state or notice. As a result, each scheduler can be activated without depending on the number of accessories provided in the game machine and the number of effects, and restrictions for executing effects can be reduced.

[18-7. Application example of scheduler data (effect 1)]
The functions used in production control and the outlines of the types and functions of the scheduler that performs a series of controls by combining these functions have been described above. Specific application examples of the scheduler data and functions will be described below with reference to the drawings. explain.

[18-7-1. Production overview]
FIG. 159A is a diagram showing an example of the action of a character object controlled using the scheduler data of this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 159A, the game board 5 of the present embodiment includes a logo character 5001, a star character 5002 (a left star character 5002a, a middle star character 5002b, a right star character 5002c) and a hatchet character 5003. is placed.

The logo accessory 5001 is arranged in the upper left part of the game area. When the logo accessory 5001 operates, it falls (moves) from the initial position (upper position) to the intermediate position, and returns to the initial position after the effect is completed. Furthermore, the logo accessory 5001 can perform not only vertical movement but also vertical and horizontal vibration effects before and after movement.

The star character 5002 is arranged above the game area, the left star character 5002a is arranged on the left side, the middle star character 5002b is arranged in the center, and the right star character 5002c is arranged on the right side. Each star character 5002 can operate independently, and one or a plurality of star character 5002 operates at a predetermined timing according to the content of the presentation.

The left star accessory 5002a moves to the lower left, and can be moved to a position slightly lower left in the center of the game area. In addition, the middle star role 5002b moves downward and can be moved to a position slightly above the center of the game area. The right star accessory 5002c moves to the lower right, and can be moved to the center or lower right position of the game area. Note that each star role object 5002 may stop before moving to the final arrival position, or after reaching the final arrival position, may return to an intermediate position and stop.

The machete accessory 5003 is arranged above the center of the game area. The machete accessory 5003 can drop (move) from the initial position (upper position) to the intermediate position and lower position. It moves from the initial position to the intermediate position, stops temporarily, and then moves to the lower position, or moves from the initial position to the lower position at once, depending on the operation of the production button by the player or the lottery result of the hatchet role announcement production. The operation mode is set to As with the logo accessory 5001, the hatchet accessory 5003 can also perform an effect of vibrating vertically and horizontally before and after movement.

Next, the flow of the advance notice effect executed with one symbol change will be described. First, step-up notice, button (BTN) cut-in notice, group notice, star character object notice, and button (BTN) logo character object drop notice will be described with reference to FIG. 159B. Note that the flow of the notice effect including the hatchet notice effect will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 159B shows an example of the execution timing of the notice effect executed in a series of variable displays from the start to the stop of the variation of the special symbol in this embodiment, and is a diagram for explaining the scheduler and scheduler data used at this time. be. In the series of variable display shown in FIG. 159B, step-up notice and button (BTN) cut-in notice are executed in the first half of the fluctuation. After that, a reach occurs, and in the latter half of the fluctuation, a group notice, a star character object notice, and a button (BTN) logo character object drop notice are executed. Scheduler data for controlling the lighting of lamps, sound output, image output, actions of characters, etc. is executed for each notice effect.

Below, a part of the scheduler data for executing each of the advance notice effects will be extracted, and the functions controlled and configured by the scheduler data will be described. Specifically, the scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_STP" (FIG. 160) for controlling the lamp in the step-up notice, the scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT" (FIG. 161) for controlling the lamp in the button cut-in notice, and the star role in the star role notice Motor scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1" (FIGS. 162 to 164) that controls the operation of 5002, and motor scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO" (FIG. 165) that controls the operation of the logo accessory 5001 in the button logo accessory drop notice.

[18-7-2. Lamp control in step-up notice]
In the step-up notice of the present embodiment, control is performed so that the lighting mode of the predetermined lamp changes stepwise according to the degree of expectation (lottery result value of the step-up notice). As shown in FIG. 159B, the step-up warning lamp scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_STP" belongs to the warning group 01 and is driven by the scheduler for the warning group 01 lamp scheduler data (lamp SCH warning 01) "LMP_SCH02".

FIG. 160 is a diagram for explaining the contents of the scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_STP" that controls the lighting and blinking of the lamp in the advance notice of step-up according to the present embodiment.

When the scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_STP" is started, first, the function "SUBC: YKK_STP: TBL_LMP_STP" is executed. This function is a scheduler work area index branch call "SUBC", and is executed with the subject scheduler work number "YKK_STP" and the step-up notice branch call address table "TBL_LMP_STP" as parameters.

The scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the specified step-up notice branch call address table “TBL_LMP_STP” and specifies the address of the scheduler data to be the branch destination based on the contents of the step-up notice work area “YKK_STP”. The step-up notice work area "YKK_STP" stores the step-up notice lottery result value, which corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the step-up notice branch call address table "TBL_LMP_STP".

The step-up notice branch call address table "TBL_LMP_STP" stores addresses of step-up notice lamp scheduler data. Specifically, SUBC_NON, SUBC_LMP_STP1, SUBC_LMP_STP2, SUBC_LMP_STP3, and SUBC_LMP_STP4 indicating addresses of scheduler data are stored. SUBC_NON is an address for a dummy call indicating that no processing is to be performed. By preparing an address for a dummy call, it is possible to turn off the lamp when the advance notice is not won. . SUBC_LMP_STP1, SUBC_LMP_STP2, SUBC_LMP_STP3, and SUBC_LMP_STP4 are addresses of scheduler data for executing step-up notices corresponding to the step-up numbers (1 to 4).

In this embodiment, the step-up notice work area "YKK_STP" stores the lottery result value corresponding to the step-up notice with the step-up number of 4, and the scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_STP4" is executed. The scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_STP4" designates the gradation pattern data (PTA_STP_PT1-4) corresponding to each step, executes ramp gradation data reproduction processing (KPLAY), and waits 90 frames (approximately 3 seconds) for each step. Execute the process. As a result, at each step, the lamp is lit and blinked in the corresponding gradation pattern for 3 seconds. At this time, the scheduler data 'SUBC_LMP_STP4' is driven using the scheduler 'LMP_SCH01' for the background and pattern lamp scheduler data.

Thereafter, the function "RET" is executed in the scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_STP4" to return to the process of the caller (scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_YKK_STP"). Furthermore, the function "STOP" is executed to terminate the scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_YKK_STP".

In this embodiment, the step-up notice work area "YKK_STP" stores the lottery result value corresponding to the step-up notice with the step-up number of 4, and the scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_STP4" is executed. The scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_STP4" designates the ramp gradation pattern data (PTA_STP_PT1-4) corresponding to each step-up and executes the ramp gradation data reproduction process (KPLAY), 90 frames (approximately 3 seconds) for each step. wait processing. Thus, in each step, the lamp is lit and blinked in the corresponding lamp gradation pattern for 3 seconds. At this time, the scheduler data 'SUBC_LMP_STP4' is driven using the scheduler 'LMP_SCH02' for advance notice group 01 lamp scheduler data.

Thereafter, the function "RET" is executed in the scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_STP4" to return to the next process of the caller (scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_YKK_STP"). Furthermore, the function "STOP" is executed to terminate the scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_STP".

The step-up notice has been described above, and the functions that can be realized by the scheduler work area index branch call "SUBC" will now be described. First, it is possible to call scheduler data for a plurality of lottery results with a single action based on the dynamically rewritten work memory contents (previous lottery result values in this embodiment). be. Depending on the content of the notice, the range of lottery result values may be several hundred, and with binary branching such as an IF statement, the amount of scheduler data for judgment increases and becomes too complicated, making management such as correction difficult. On the other hand, "SUBC" easily solves the above problem by using the contents of the work memory as an index. In this embodiment, the number of the work memory and the number of call address tables for branching are one each. Secondly, since it takes the form of "CALL", it is possible to execute common scheduler data after executing the "SUBC" function. By describing one scheduler data, the same processing can be executed after all branches. Further, in order to deal with program defects, if the value of the work memory exceeds the number of elements in the call address table for branching, the "SUBC" function may be terminated without executing the branching process.

That is, the function "SUBC" can select the scheduler data of the branch destination based on the values stored in the work area from the branch destination held in advance in table format, and call the selected scheduler data. With a simple conditional branch, it is necessary to define conditions according to the number of branches and set scheduler data for each branch destination, but with the function "SUBC", branch destinations can be easily added or deleted. , it is possible to easily cope with additions and changes in the contents of the production, and to improve the development efficiency.

[18-7-3. Lamp control in button cut-in notice]
The button cut-in notice of this embodiment is started in the first half of the fluctuation, and the notice is executed to the end by accepting the operation input of the effect button by the player within a predetermined period. Further, similarly to the step-up notice, the lighting mode of the predetermined lamp is controlled according to the degree of expectation (lottery result value of the button cut-in notice).

The button cut-in notice belongs to the notice group 02, and the lamp scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT" is driven by the notice group 02 lamp scheduler data scheduler (lamp SCH notice 02) "LMP_SCH03" as shown in FIG. 159B. It belongs to a different notice group than the step-up notice, and the scheduler data is driven by a different scheduler, so it is possible to execute notices in parallel.

FIG. 161 is a diagram for explaining the contents of the scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT" for controlling the lamp in the button cut-in notice of this embodiment.

When the scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT" is started, the function "KPLAY:LMP_SCH03:PTA_CUT_STA" is first executed, and then the wait process "NOP:30" for 30 frames (about 1 second) is executed. As a result, the specified lamp lights (blinks) for one second based on the gradation pattern data "PTA_CUT_STA". At this time, the ramp scheduler "LMP_SCH03" is used.

Subsequently, loop processing for 3 seconds is executed in order to accept the input of the effect button from the player. Specifically, the function "LOOPST" is executed with the parameter loop count set to 90 times. Since each loop corresponds to one frame, 90 loops correspond to 3 seconds. In the loop processing, the functions from "LOOPST" indicating the start of the loop to "LOOP" indicating the end of the loop are executed up to a specified number of times. Therefore, the function "SUBC:YKK_BTN:TBL_LMP_CUB" is executed up to 90 times.

Regarding the function "SUBC: YKK_BTN: TBL_LMP_CUB", the scheduler work area index branch call "SUBC" is executed with the target scheduler work number "YKK_BTN" and the button cut-in notice branch call address table "TBL_LMP_CUB" as parameters.

The scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the button cut-in notice branch call address table “TBL_LMP_CUB” and specifies the start address of the scheduler data to be the branch destination based on the contents of the button ON_OFF work area “YKK_BTN”. The button ON_OFF work area "YKK_BTN" stores the operation state of the effect button. When the effect button is not operated, "0: button OFF", and when the effect button is operated, "1: button ON". is set. The operation state of the effect button corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the button cut-in notice branch call address table "TBL_LMP_CUB". The content of the button ON_OFF work area "YKK_BTN" is rewritten by a program for button processing outside the scheduler data.

While "0: Button OFF" is set in the button ON_OFF work area "YKK_BTN", lamp scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_CUT_BTNOFF" at button cut-in notice button OFF is selected in the button cut-in notice branch call address table "TBL_LMP_CUB". be. The content of the scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_CUT_BTNOFF" is only the function "RET", and returns immediately after the function "SUBC: YKK_BTN: TBL_LMP_CUB" (function "LOOP") of the scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT" of the calling source. Therefore, when no effect button input is detected during the 90 loop processes, the loop process is exited, the function "STOP" is executed, and the scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT" is terminated.

On the other hand, when "1: Button ON" is set in the button ON_OFF work area "YKK_BTN", the lamp scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_CUT_BTNON" when the button cut-in notice button is ON is set in the button cut-in notice branch call address table "TBL_LMP_CUB". is selected. The content of the scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_CUT_BTNON" is the function "SUBJ: YKK_CUT: TBL_LMP_CUT", and the scheduler work area index branch jump "SUBJ" is the target scheduler work number "YKK_CUT" and the button cut-in notice branch jump address table "TBL_LMP_CUT". is executed as a parameter.

The button cut-in notice branch jump address table "TBL_LMP_CUT" stores addresses of button cut-in notice lamp scheduler data. Specifically, SUBJ_NON, SUBJ_LMP_CUT1, SUBJ_LMP_CUT2, SUBJ_LMP_CUT3, and SUBJ_LMP_CUT4 indicating addresses of scheduler data are stored. SUBJ_NON is an address for a dummy call indicating that no processing is to be performed. By preparing an address for a dummy call, it is possible to turn off the lamp when the advance notice is not won. . SUBJ_LMP_CUT1, SUBJ_LMP_CUT2, SUBJ_LMP_CUT3, and SUBJ_LMP_CUT4 are addresses of scheduler data for executing a lamp lighting pattern (color, lighting time) corresponding to the button cut-in notice lottery result value.

In this embodiment, the button cut-in notice work area "YKK_CUT" stores the lottery result value indicating the button cut-in notice pattern (PTN) 4, and the scheduler data "SUBJ_LMP_CUT4" is executed. In the scheduler data "SUBJ_LMP_CUT4", first, the lamp is lit in red (gradation data pattern "PTA_CUT_RED") by the lamp gradation data reproduction process (KPLAY), and then the wait process is executed for 150 frames to continue for 5 seconds. Let At this time, the ramp scheduler 'LMP_SCH03' is used to drive the scheduler data. At this time, the scheduler data 'SUBC_LMP_STP4' is driven using the scheduler 'LMP_SCH03' for advance notice group 02 lamp scheduler data.

Since the button cut-in notice lamp scheduler data "SUBJ_LMP_CUT4" is called by JUMP instead of CALL, the execution of the button cut-in notice lamp scheduler data is terminated by the function "STOP", and the caller scheduler "SUBC_LMP_YKK_CUT" is returned to. do not do. Therefore, there are two types of termination of the scheduler "SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT": when the "STOP" function included in "SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT" is executed, and when the "STOP" function included in the schedulers "SUBJ_LMP_CUT1" to "SUBJ_LMP_CUT4" is executed. There is

The button cut-in notice has been described above. Here, the functions that can be realized by the scheduler work area index branch jump "SUBJ" will be described. First, it is possible to call scheduler data for a plurality of lottery results with a single action based on the dynamically rewritten work memory contents (previous lottery result values in this embodiment). However, depending on the content of the notice, the range of lottery result values may be several hundred, and with binary branching such as IF statements, the amount of scheduler data for judgment increases and becomes too complicated to manage corrections, etc. . "SUBJ" easily solves the above problem by using the contents of the work memory as an index. In this embodiment, the number of the work memory and the number of call address tables for branching are one each. Secondly, since it takes the form of "JUMP", it is possible to execute different processes for each branched scheduler data after execution of the "SUBJ" function. Also, as with "SUBC", in order to cope with program failures, if the value of the work memory exceeds the number of elements in the call address table for branching, the "SUBC" function is terminated without performing branch processing. You may do so.

That is, the function "SUBJ" selects the scheduler data of the branch destination based on the values stored in the work area from the branch destination held in advance in table format, and the selected scheduler data , and the same effect as the function "SUBC" can be obtained.

Also, unlike the function "SUBC", the function "SUBJ" continues to process the schedule data of the callee and does not return to the caller process, so it is suitable for alternatively executing processes. ing. For example, when the content of the effect to be executed differs depending on whether or not the effect button is operated, it is possible to suppress the redundant execution of the effect by using the function "SUBJ". On the other hand, since the function "SUBC" returns to the processing based on the scheduler data of the caller, it is possible to execute the common post-processing after executing the callee's processing, thereby simplifying the processing.

Therefore, by using the function "SUBC" and the function "SUBJ", it is possible to simplify the structure of the scheduler data and to provide a structure that can flexibly cope with processing branching. Furthermore, additions and changes can be easily handled by simply changing the branch destination in the table format, so development efficiency can be improved, and changes in game machine specifications can be easily handled.

[18-7-4. Motor control in star role announcement]
Next, the control of the star role announcement performed in the latter half of the variation in the present embodiment will be described. Reach occurs in the variable display of the special symbols, and when it shifts to the latter half of the variation, a group notice is generated, and the star role item notice is executed independently of the group notice. The star role announcement includes a plurality of types of star role 5002 (in this embodiment, three types of left star role 5002a, middle star role 5002b, and right star role 5002c) that can be operated by a driving body (motor). By operating, the degree of expectation of pattern variation is notified. Specifically, the greater the number of appearances of star accessories 5002, the higher the degree of expectation.

The star role announcement of this embodiment is executed by driving the star role announcement motor scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1" with the motor scheduler "MOT_SCH02" (left star role scheduler data scheduler), as shown in FIG. 159B. be done. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, a dedicated scheduler (MOT_SCH02-04) for operating the star role 5002 is provided in advance, but a general-purpose scheduler (MOT_SCH05-09) can also be used. .

FIGS. 162 to 164 are diagrams for explaining the contents of scheduler data for motor control in the star role announcement of this embodiment. Figure 162 shows the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1" that controls the overall flow and the left star role 5002a, Figure 163 shows the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA2" that controls the right star role 5002c, and Figure 164 shows the scheduler that controls the middle star role 5002b. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining data “SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA3”;

When the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1" is started, first, the function "SUBC: YKK_HYA: TBL_MOT_HYA" is executed. This function is a scheduler work area index branch call "SUBC", and is executed with the subject scheduler work number "YKK_HYA" and star role announcement branch call address table "TBL_MOT_HYA" as parameters.

The scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the specified star role announcement branch call address table "TBL_MOT_HYA", and based on the contents of the star role announcement work area "YKK_HYA", specifies the address of the scheduler data to be the branch destination. . The star role announcement work area "YKK_HYA" stores the lottery result value of the star role announcement and corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the star role announcement branch call address table "TBL_MOT_HYA".

The address of the star role appearance scheduler data is stored in the star role announcement branch call address table "TBL_MOT_HYA". Specifically, SUBC_NON, SUBC_MOT_HYA1, SUBC_MOT_HYA2, and SUBC_MOT_HYA3 indicating addresses of scheduler data are stored. It should be noted that SUBC_NON is an address for a dummy call indicating that no processing will be performed, and by preparing an address for a dummy call, it is possible to disable the accessory when the advance notice is not won. there is SUBC_MOT_HYA1, SUBC_MOT_HYA2, and SUBC_MOT_HYA3 are addresses of scheduler data for executing the star role announcement. SUBC_MOT_HYA3 is scheduler data for operating all three types of star role 5002 .

In this embodiment, in the star role announcement work area "YKK_HYA", a lottery result value indicating execution of a star role announcement that makes the left star role 5002a, the middle star role 5002b, and the right star role 5002c appear. "3" is stored, and the scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_HYA3" is executed. In addition, when only the left star role 5002a is operated, the lottery result value of the star role announcement is "1", and when the left star role 5002a and the right star role 5002c are operated, the star role announcement lottery "2" is set to the result value.

The scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_HYA3" first specifies the parameter "PTA_HYA_LEF" indicating the pattern of the appearance motion of the left star role 5002a, and executes the function "MPLAY" corresponding to the motor regeneration process. At this time, the function "MPLAY" is executed by the motor scheduler "MOT_SHC02" in which the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1" is executed.

Next, the scheduler execution unit 5060 executes the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA2" for the appearance of the right star role 5002c by the function "REQ". The function "REQ" is a function for executing scheduler data specified by a parameter with a scheduler also specified by a parameter. Here, the right star role 5002c appearance scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA2" is executed using the right star role 5002c scheduler data scheduler "MOT_SHC03". Similarly, the function "REQ" executes the appearance scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA2" of the middle star role 5002b using the scheduler "MOT_SHC04" for the middle star role 5002b scheduler data. In addition, in the present embodiment, motor reproduction processing (function "MPLAY") for operating the right star character 5002c and the middle star character 5002b is executed within the same frame as the motor reproduction processing for the left star character 5002a. ing. As described above, each star role product 5002 can be controlled in parallel by causing the scheduler data for operating each star role product 5002 to be executed by different schedulers.

Subsequently, the scheduler execution unit 5060 executes wait processing "NOP: 300" for 300 frames (10 seconds). During this wait time, the left star role 5002a operates in a specified mode. After completion of the wait process, the function "RET" is executed to return to the star role announcement motor scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1" from which it was called.

Next, control of the right star role 5002c will be described with reference to FIG. The right star role 5002c appearance scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA2" is executed using the right star role 5002c scheduler data scheduler "MOT_SHC03" specified at the time of execution by the function "REQ".

When the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA2" is started, as shown in FIG. 163, the parameter "PTA_HYA_RGT" indicating the appearance operation mode (pattern) of the right star role 5002c is specified, and the motor regeneration process "MPLAY" is executed. . Subsequently, wait processing "NOP: 300" for 300 frames (10 seconds) is executed. This wait time is the operation time of the right star role 5002c. After completion of the wait process, the process ends by executing the function "STOP" without returning to the process of the scheduler data of the calling source.

Finally, referring to FIG. 164, control of the middle star role 5002b will be described. The medium star role 5002b appearance scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA3" is executed using the medium star role 5002b scheduler data scheduler "MOT_SHC04" specified at the time of execution by the function "REQ".

When the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA3" is started, as shown in FIG. 164, the parameter "PTA_HYA_MID" indicating the appearance operation mode (pattern) of the middle star character 5002b is specified, and the motor regeneration process "MPLAY" is executed. . Subsequently, wait processing "NOP: 300" for 300 frames (10 seconds) is executed. This wait time is the operating time of the middle star role 5002b. After completion of the wait process, the process ends by executing the function "STOP" without returning to the process of the scheduler data of the calling source.

As described above, in this embodiment, in the scheduler data for operating the left star role 5002a, the scheduler data for operating the right star role 5002c and the scheduler data for operating the middle star role 5002b are combined with the function "REQ". By executing using , it is possible to operate each role in parallel. In other words, the action of each character can be executed in parallel without special control by executing individually defined scheduler data as needed. The advantage of executing scheduler data in parallel is, first, that it is possible to describe a single character action without being conscious of other schedulers. Furthermore, when performing multiple operations corresponding to the notice pattern with one scheduler, the number of combinations becomes enormous, and the scheduler data becomes complicated and the number of data becomes enormous. By calling the scheduler data in parallel with each other, the minimum number of scheduler data is created and called, thereby enabling easy control. In the present embodiment, an example of operating three types of role products in parallel has been described, but more role products can be executed in parallel if there is no problem with the operation of the role products. As described above, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to operate a plurality of accessories in parallel without requiring complicated control, and it is possible to easily realize an effect rich in variations.

[18-7-5. Motor control in the notification of the falling logo]
Next, the control of the logo accessory drop notice executed in the latter half of the variation in the present embodiment will be described. The logo character object drop notice is executed independently of the group notice and the star character object notice. The notice of the falling of the logo accessory is a notice effect in which the logo accessory 5001 imitating the logo of the game machine falls vertically in front of the game board side effect display device 1600, and the probability of occurrence of a big hit is higher than usual. is high.

As shown in FIG. 159B, the logo accessory drop notice of this embodiment is achieved by driving the logo accessory drop notice motor scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO" with the motor scheduler "MOT_SCH01" (logo accessory scheduler data scheduler). executed. It is also possible to operate the logo accessory 5001 with a general-purpose scheduler (MOT_SCH05-09).

FIG. 165 is a diagram for explaining the contents of the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO" that performs motor control in the logo accessory drop notice of the present embodiment.

When the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO" is started, first the function "MPLAY:PTA_LGO_GAT" is executed, and then wait processing "NOP:30" for 30 frames (about 1 second) is executed. As a result, the designated operation is performed for one second based on the operation pattern data "PTA_LGO_GAT". Specifically, the logo accessory 5001 rattles. At this time, the motor scheduler "MOT_SCH01" is used.

Subsequently, loop processing for 3 seconds is executed in order to accept the input of the effect button from the player. Specifically, the function "LOOPST" is executed with the parameter loop count set to 90 times. As described above, in loop processing, the functions between "LOOPST" and "LOOP" are repeatedly executed. Therefore, the function "SUBC:YKK_LGO:TBL_YKK_LGO" is executed up to 90 times.

To explain the function "SUBC: YKK_LGO: TBL_YKK_LGO", the scheduler work area index branch call "SUBC" is executed with the target scheduler work number "YKK_LGO" and the button logo accessory drop notice lottery result branch call table "TBL_YKK_LGO" as parameters. be.

The scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the button logo accessory drop notice lottery result branch call table “TBL_YKK_LGO”, and based on the contents of the button logo accessory notice work area “YKK_LGO”, determines the start address of the scheduler data to be the branch destination. Identify. The result of the execution lottery for the button logo accessory drop notice work area "YKK_LGO" is stored in the button logo accessory drop notice work area. If the lottery for execution of the notice of the fall of the logo accessory is won, "1: Execution of the notice of the fall of the logo" is set. The result of the execution lottery for the button logo accessory drop notice corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the button logo accessory drop notice lottery result branch call table "TBL_YKK_LGO".

While "0: Unexecuted" is set in the button logo event notice work area "YKK_LGO", in the button logo event drop notice lottery result branch call table "TBL_YKK_LGO", the motor scheduler when the logo event drop notice is not executed. The data "SUBC_YKK_LGO_NON" is selected. The content of the scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_LGO_NON" is only the function "RET", and returns immediately after the function "SUBC: YKK_LGO: TBL_YKK_LGO" (function "LOOP") of the caller scheduler "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO". Therefore, if the execution lottery for the button logo accessory drop notice is lost, the loop processing is executed 90 times, the loop processing is exited, the function "STOP" is executed, and the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO" is terminated. .

On the other hand, when "1: logo drop notice execution" is set in the button logo accessory notice work area "YKK_LGO", that is, when the lottery for execution of the button logo accessory drop notice is won, the button logo accessory drop In the announcement lottery result branch call table "TBL_YKK_LGO", the motor scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_LGO_DOWN" at the time of execution of the logo accessory drop announcement is selected. The content of the scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_LGO_DOWN" is the function "SUBC: YKK_BTN: TBL_MOT_LGO", and the scheduler work area index branch call "SUBC" is the target scheduler work number "YKK_BTN" and the button logo and object drop notice button branch call address table. It is executed with "TBL_MOT_LGO" as a parameter.

The scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the button logo accessory drop notice button branch call address table “TBL_MOT_LGO” and specifies the start address of the scheduler data to be the branch destination based on the contents of the button ON_OFF work area “YKK_BTN”. As in the case of the button cut-in notice, the button ON_OFF work area "YKK_BTN" stores the operation state of the production button, and when the production button is not operated, "0: button OFF", the production button is operated. If the button is ON, "1: button ON" is set. The operation state of the effect button corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the button logo accessory drop notice branch call address table "TBL_MOT_LGO".

While "0: Button OFF" is set in the button ON_OFF work area "YKK_BTN", the motor scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_LGO_BTNOFF" is set in the button logo object drop notice button branch call address table "TBL_MOT_LGO" when the logo object drop notice button is OFF. ” is selected. The content of the scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_LGO_BTNOFF" is only the function "RET", and returns immediately after the function "SUBC:YKK_BTN:TBL_MOT_LGO" (function "RET") of the caller scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_LGO_DOWN". This further returns to the function "LOOP" of the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO". Therefore, even if the execution lottery of the button logo accessory drop notice is won, if the input of the effect button is not detected during the loop processing of 90 times, the loop processing is exited and the function "STOP" is executed. Executed and scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO" ends.

On the other hand, when "1: button ON" is set in the button ON_OFF work area "YKK_BTN", the motor scheduler when the button logo accessory drop notice button is ON is set in the button logo accessory drop notice button branch call address table "TBL_MOT_LGO". The data "SUBC_MOT_LGO_BTNON" is selected. The content of the scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_LGO_BTNON" first executes the function "COMMAND: COM_LGO_ON". A function "COMMAND" is a function for issuing a command when scheduler data is executed. Here, the command "COM_LGO_ON" is issued. The command “COM_LGO_ON” is a command for causing the game board side effect display device 1600 to start drawing the effect when the logo accessory 5001 falls, and is issued to the effect control unit 5020 .

Further, the scheduler execution unit 5060 executes the function "MPLAY:PTA_LGO_DOWN" within the same frame as the issuance of the command "COM_LGO_ON". A parameter “PTA_LGO_DOWN” is pattern data for performing an action of dropping the logo accessory 5001 . Furthermore, wait processing for 120 frames (about 4 seconds) is executed by the function "NOP: 120". At this time, the logo accessory 5001 performs a falling motion for 3 seconds and stops at the falling position for the remaining 1 second.

Furthermore, by executing the function "MPLAY:PTA_LGO_INI", the logo accessory 5001 moves from the falling position to the initial position. Subsequently, the function "NOP:90" executes wait processing for 90 frames (about 3 seconds), during which the logo accessory 5001 is returned to the initial position. After the wait process is completed, the function "MEMW: YKK_LGO: 0" is executed because the execution of the logo accessory drop operation is completed, and the button logo accessory lottery result is rewritten to "0: not executed", and the calling scheduler is called. It returns immediately after the function "SUBC:YKK_BTN:TBL_MOT_LGO" (function "RET") of the data "SUBC_YKK_LGO_DOWN". This further returns to the function "LOOP" of the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO". It returns to the function "LOOP" of the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO", but since the button logo accessory lottery result is rewritten to "0: Not executed", the scheduler data "PTA_LGO_DOWN" that drops the button logo accessory is executed. The remaining number of loops is processed, and the execution of the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO" is terminated by the function "STOP".

As described above, by internally issuing a command when the logo accessory 5001 is dropped, an effect can be displayed on the liquid crystal only when the logo accessory 5001 is dropped and at the timing when the logo accessory 5001 is dropped. realizable. In this embodiment, by using the function "COMMAND", it is possible to cooperate with a plurality of types of production devices and execute them as needed at appropriate timing, and to execute more interesting productions. .

In this embodiment, the function "COMMAND" is used to display the effect on the liquid crystal on the VDP 1540a with built-in tone generator. By returning once, performing complicated processing that cannot be handled by the function command, and writing the processing result in the work area used by the subsequent scheduler, it is possible to perform processing that cannot be controlled by the function command. An advantage of issuing a command within the scheduler data is that the command issuing timing is used as the processing timing as it is, so there is no need for time management or execution determination by a program. In addition, it is possible to interactively process external inputs (buttons, jog dials, touch pads) by the user that are not predetermined at the start of fluctuation, issue commands using the function "COMMAND", and perform processing.

Also, in this embodiment, the function "COMMAND" is a function to send a command with a fixed value. may

[18-8. Application example of scheduler data (at power on)]
Next, the scheduler data executed in the peripheral control board 1510 when the game machine is powered on will be described. Here, the control from the power-on of the gaming machine to the start of the first variable display after the game is started will be described.

[18-8-1. Outline of processing]
FIG. 166 is a drawing for explaining scheduler data executed when the game machine of this embodiment is powered on. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, when the power of the gaming machine is turned on, a power-on command is output from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 .

When the scheduler execution unit 5060 receives the power-on command, it drives the scheduler data "SCH_STS_POWERON" with the sub-state scheduler "SUB_SCH".

When the scheduler data "SCH_STS_POWERON" is executed, the sub-internal state transition scheduler is executed in a predetermined order, and the scheduler data corresponding to the sub-game state (sub-internal state) is activated. As the scheduler data "SCH_STS_POWERON" progresses, the liquid crystal display screen displays screens corresponding to sub-internal states, such as the standby screen, manufacturer demo screen, model demo title screen, and anti-theft screen, as shown in FIG. be done. At this time, the main game state is a waiting state. When the waiting state ends, the game is started, and when the game ball wins in the starting winning hole, the main game state and the sub internal state transition to the changing state.

[18-8-2. Power-on control]
Next, a configuration for processing various commands and scheduler data will be described. FIG. 167 is a diagram for explaining the configuration for processing commands and scheduler data in the peripheral control board 1510 of the gaming machine of this embodiment and the relationship between these configurations.

As described above, when the game machine is powered on or when a predetermined event occurs in the game control in the main control board 1310, the main command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 and received by the peripheral control board 1510. be. The main command is stored in the main command buffer 5110 of the system module 5100 and analyzed by the main command analysis process in the command analysis module, as described with reference to FIG. The command analysis module identifies the type of event generated by the main command analysis process, activates the corresponding scheduler, and executes the scheduler data.

Also, when the function "COMMAND0" (FIG. 156) is executed and a command is output from the scheduler, the output command is stored in the main command buffer 5110 and analyzed by the main command analysis processing, just like the main command. be done.

When a main command or a command output by the function "COMMAND0" is received, a command for executing control in the peripheral control board 1510 is generated by main command analysis processing. The generated commands include commands for starting the scheduler and commands for controlling various production devices (sub-internal output commands).

In the command to start the scheduler, for example, scheduler data for performing control corresponding to the change of the sub-internal state due to the change of the game state in the main control board 1310 and the progress of control in the peripheral control board 1510, the main control board such as start winning Scheduler data for executing production corresponding to the event notified from 1310, scheduler data defined so that various production devices operate in a series of modes, etc. are executed. In this embodiment, in addition to directly starting a scheduler from a command, another scheduler can be started by a function "REQ" included in scheduler data.

On the other hand, the command for controlling the rendering device (sub-internal output command) is, for example, a liquid crystal command for displaying a predetermined image on the liquid crystal display device. A command for controlling the effect device is output by the function "COMMAND" included in the scheduler data, in addition to being output based on the result of analyzing the main command. Commands for controlling the rendering device are temporarily stored in a sub-internal output command buffer, and are processed in the order stored from the top of the buffer.

As described above, in this embodiment, by further activating other schedulers from the scheduler, it is possible to hierarchically combine and execute a plurality of schedulers by receiving one main command. As a result, various controls in the peripheral control board 1510 can be componentized in units of scheduler data. It is possible to improve the development efficiency of the game machine, such as making the debugging work more efficient.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the command output by the function "COMMAND0" makes it possible to share the command analysis processing. This makes it possible to share the logic for selecting scheduler data and the logic for determining function parameters through command analysis. can be suppressed.

Next, startup of the scheduler and execution of scheduler data when a power-on command is received from the main control board 1310 will be described. FIG. 168 is a diagram illustrating the process of executing scheduler data when power is turned on in this embodiment.

As described with reference to FIG. 167, when the game machine is powered on and the peripheral control board 1510 receives the power-on command transmitted from the main control board 1310, the power-on command is analyzed by the main command analysis process, and the scheduler The activation process activates the sub-state schedulers and sequentially executes the corresponding scheduler data. In executing each scheduler data, the function "COMMAND0" is executed to issue a command to create a sub-internal state, and if necessary, a lamp or sound corresponding to the sub-internal state is output.

Specifically, the scheduler to be executed is first executed by using the sub-state scheduler "SUB_SCH" to execute the state power-on scheduler data "SCH_STS_POWERON". In the state power-on scheduler data "SCH_STS_POWERON", the function "COMMANDO" issues a command "COM_STS_TAIKI" to transition to the next internal state, and stops the scheduler.

The command "COM_STS_TAIKI" is processed in the "main command analysis process", and the state standby scheduler data "SCH_STS_TAKI" corresponding to the next sub-internal state is executed.

Subsequently, when the state standby scheduler data 'SCH_STS_TAKI' is executed using the sub state scheduler 'SUB_SCH', the function 'KPLAY:PTA_LAMP_TAIKI' is executed. As a result, lighting of the lamp is started based on the lamp lighting pattern "PTA_LAMP_TAIKI" in the standby state. After that, by executing the function "NOP: 900", it becomes a standby state for 900 frames (30 seconds). After the standby state ends, the function "COMMANDO" issues the command "COM_STS_MDEMO" to transition to the next internal state, and stops the scheduler.

The command "COM_STS_MDEMO" is processed in the "main command analysis process", and the state maker demo scheduler data "SCH_STS_MDEMO" corresponding to the next sub-internal state is executed.

Subsequently, when the state maker demo scheduler data 'SCH_STS_MDEMO' is executed using the sub-state scheduler 'SUB_SCH', the function 'KPLAY:PTA_LAMP_MDEMO' is executed. As a result, lighting of the lamp is started based on the lamp lighting pattern "PTA_LAMP_MDEMO" in the maker demonstration state. After that, the function "NOP: 300" is executed to enter a standby state for 300 frames (10 seconds). After the standby state ends, the function "COMMANDO" issues the command "COM_STS_KDEMO" to transition to the next internal state, and stops the scheduler.

The command "COM_STS_KDEMO" is processed in the "main command analysis process", and the state model demo scheduler data "SCH_STS_KDEMO" corresponding to the next sub-internal state is executed.

Subsequently, when the state maker demo scheduler data 'SCH_STS_KDEMO' is executed using the sub-state scheduler 'SUB_SCH', the function 'KPLAY:PTA_LAMP_KDEMO' is executed. As a result, lighting of the lamp is started based on the lamp lighting pattern "PTA_LAMP_KDEMO" in the model demonstration state. After that, by executing the function "NOP: 900", it becomes a standby state for 900 frames (30 seconds). After the standby state ends, the function "COMMANDO" issues a command "COM_STS_GOTO" to transition to the next internal state, and stops the scheduler.

The command "COM_STS_KDEMO" is processed in the "main command analysis process", and the state goto prevention scheduler data "SCH_STS_GOTO" corresponding to the next sub-internal state is executed.

Subsequently, when the state goto prevention scheduler data 'SCH_STS_GOTO' is executed using the sub-state scheduler 'SUB_SCH', the function 'KPLAY:PTA_LAMP_GOTO' is executed. As a result, the lighting of the lamp is started based on the lighting pattern of the lamp data "PTA_LAMP_GOTO" in the stuck prevention state. Furthermore, by executing the function "SPLAY:PTA_SND_GOTO", sound reproduction is started based on the sound data "PTA_SND_GOTO" in the Goto prevention state. After that, the function "NOP: 450" is executed to enter a standby state for 450 frames (15 seconds). After the standby state ends, the function "COMMANDO" issues a command "COM_STS_TAIKI" to transition to the next internal state, and stops the scheduler.

The command "COM_STS_TAIKI" is processed in the "main command analysis process", and the state standby scheduler data "SCH_STS_TAKI" corresponding to the next sub-internal state is executed. At this stage, the gaming machine becomes ready to play, starts a game, and loops in this standby state until a game ball wins.

As described above, in this embodiment, it is possible to set the internal state in the peripheral control board 1510 only by receiving the power-on command transmitted from the main control board. Specifically, the function "COMMAND0" enables control as if the main control board 1310 issued a command. For example, the initialization command at power-on may have fixed parameters, and is sent from the main control board 1310 by outputting the command with the function "COMMAND0" instead of the main command from the main control board 1310. It is possible to reduce the number of main commands. Thereby, it becomes possible to reduce the capacity of the game control program of the main control board 1310, which is effective especially when the capacity of the game control program is restricted.

[18-9. Application example of scheduler data (effect 2)]
Next, an example of executing a hatchet accessory drop notice instead of a button cut-in notice and a button logo accessory drop notice will be described. The hatchet accessory drop notice is divided into the first half and the second half, and the first half notice and the second half notice are executed in cooperation. At this time, the control that is different from the control described so far is performed in that the parameters used in the first half announcement are carried over to the second half announcement.

[18-9-1. Production overview]
FIG. 169 is a diagram showing an example of an advance notice effect in a series of variable displays from the start to the end of the variation of the special symbol in this embodiment, and (A) shows the effect executed from the start to the end of the variation and It shows the scheduler data for executing the production and the scheduler to be executed, and (B) is a diagram for explaining the position of the machete role 5003 in the forewarning of the machete role falling.

In the series of variable displays shown in FIG. 169(A), the step-up notice and the first half drop notice of the button (BTN) hatchet, which is the first half of the notice of step-up and the fall of the hatchet, are executed in the first half of the fluctuation. After that, a reach occurs, and in the second half of the fluctuation, the group notice is executed, and the button hatchet accessory first half drop notice continued from the first half is followed by the hatchet accessory second half drop notice. Scheduler data for controlling the lighting of lamps, sound output, image output, actions of characters, etc. is executed for each notice effect. The content of the step-up notice is as described above.

Next, the content of the hatchet accessory drop notice will be described with reference to FIG. 169(B). As described above, the hatchet accessory drop notice is divided into the button (BTN) hatchet accessory first half drop notice and the hatchet accessory second half drop notice.

In the first half of the button hatchet accessory drop notice, the notice effect progresses by operating the effect button. Therefore, even if the execution lottery of the button hatchet accessory first half drop notice is won, unless the presentation button is operated, the hatchet accessory 5003 drop presentation is not executed. On the other hand, in the latter half of the hatchet accessory fall notice, the effect is executed based on the result of the execution lottery for the hatchet accessory fall notice in the second half regardless of the operation of the production button.

When the execution lottery for the first half drop notice of the button hatchet accessory is won and the performance button is operated at a predetermined timing, the hatchet accessory 5003 falls to the middle stage position. Further, when the hatchet accessory 5003 falls to the middle position and wins the execution lottery for the second half drop notice of the hatchet accessory, the hatchet accessory 5003 falls to the lower position. That is, the hatchet accessory 5003 falls from the top (upper position, initial position) to the center (middle position) in the first half of the hatchet accessory drop notice, and falls to the bottom (lower position) in the second half. It should be noted that, if the hatchet accessory 5003 wins the execution lottery for the second half drop notice, the hatchet accessory 5003 will drop to the bottom regardless of its position. Further, when the hatchet accessory drop notice ends, the hatchet accessory 5003 returns to the upper portion (initial position).

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 169(B), the hatchet accessory drop notice is produced in six different patterns. Specifically, when the result of the execution lottery for the first half drop notice of the button hatchet accessory is not won, it does not depend on the operation of the production button, so when the second half drop notice of the hatchet accessory is not won (Pattern 1) And there is a case of winning (pattern 2). In the case of pattern 1, since the first half drop notice of the button hatchet accessory and the second half drop notice of the hatchet accessory are not won, the hatchet accessory 5003 is maintained without falling and moving from above. In the case of pattern 2, while the machete component 5003 did not fall and was positioned at the top in the machete component fall notice, the execution lottery was won in the machete component latter half fall notice, so that the machete component 5003 spread from the top to the bottom. fall at once.

When the execution lottery of the button hatchet accessory first half drop notice is won, the presentation mode of the button hatchet accessory first half drop notice is different depending on whether or not the presentation button is operated. Therefore, the hatchet accessory drop notice can be executed in four patterns depending on whether or not the performance button is operated and the result of the execution lottery for the hatchet accessory drop notice in the second half.

When the execution lottery for the first half drop notice of the button hatchet accessory is won, the production button is not operated, and furthermore, the result of the lottery for the second half drop notice of the hatchet accessory is not won, the hatchet accessory 5003 does not fall. remains positioned at the top (pattern 3). When the execution lottery for the first half drop notice of the button hatchet accessory is won, the production button is operated, and furthermore, when the result of the lottery for execution of the latter half drop notice of the hatchet accessory is not won, the hatchet accessory 5003 is displayed when the production button is operated. falls from the top to the middle, and remains in the middle until the hatchet accessory drop notice ends (pattern 4).

If you win the execution lottery for the first half drop notice of the button hatchet role, do not operate the production button, and win the lottery for the second half fall notice of the hatchet role, the production button is not operated. The hatchet accessory 5003 does not fall and is positioned at the top until the latter half drop notice is started, and falls from the top to the bottom at the latter half drop notice (pattern 5). If the execution lottery for the first half drop notice of the button hatchet accessory is won, the performance button is operated, and furthermore, if the execution lottery for the second half drop notice of the hatchet accessory is won, the hatchet accessory 5003 is dropped from above when the performance button is operated. It falls to the middle, and then falls from the top to the bottom in the latter half of the hatchet accessory drop notice (pattern 6).

As described above, the machete component drop notice of the present embodiment can appear in six patterns of effects. Hereinafter, the scheduler data for controlling the operation of the machete component 5003 in the machete component drop notice will be described. Specifically, the motor scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1" for controlling the operation of the machete accessory 5003 in the first half drop notice for the machete accessory shown in FIG. The second half fall notice motor scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2" for controlling the operation of the hatchet 5003 in the fall notice will be described.

[18-9-2. Various controls in the notice of the fall of the machete]
FIG. 170 is a diagram for explaining the contents of scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1" for motor control in the first half of the button hatchet accessory fall notice, which is the first half of the hatchet accessory fall notice in this embodiment. . As described above, when the execution lottery for the first half drop notice of the button hatchet accessory is won, the function "LOOP" accepts the operation of the production button for 3 seconds, and when the production button is operated, the hatchet accessory 5003 is operated. Execute the production to let you. If the execution lottery for the first half drop notice of the button hatchet accessory is not won, and if the performance button is not operated even if the winning is won, the hatchet accessory 5003 is not operated and the process ends. Motor scheduler "MOT_SCH01" is used to execute button hatchet accessory first half drop notice scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1".

When the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1" is started, first, the function "COMMAND:COM_NTA1_STA" is executed to start drawing an effect when rattling the hatchet accessory 5003 on the game board side effect display device 1600. FIG. After that, the function "MPLAY:PTA_NTA_GAT" is executed, and then wait processing "NOP:30" for 30 frames (about 1 second) is executed. As a result, the specified motion is performed for one second based on the motion pattern data "PTA_NTA_GAT". Specifically, the hatchet accessory 5003 rattles.

Subsequently, loop processing for 3 seconds is executed in order to accept the input of the effect button from the player. Specifically, the function "LOOPST" is executed with the parameter loop count set to 90 times. As described above, in loop processing, the functions between "LOOPST" and "LOOP" are repeatedly executed. Therefore, the function "SUBC:YKK_NTA1:TBL_YKK_NTA1" is executed up to 90 times.

To explain the function "SUBC: YKK_NTA1: TBL_YKK_NTA1", the scheduler work area index branch call "SUBC" uses the target scheduler work number "YKK_NTA1" and the button hatchet role first half drop notice lottery result branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA1" as parameters. executed.

The scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA1" for the first half drop of the button hatchet accessory lottery result branch call address table, and based on the contents of the button hatchet first half drop forecast work area "YKK_NTA1", the scheduler data to be the branch destination. specify the start address of In the work area "YKK_NTA1" for the first half drop notice of the button hatchet, the result of the lottery for execution of the first half drop notice of the button hatchet is stored. Not won", and "1: execution of the first half drop notice of the hatchet accessory" is set when winning the button hatchet accessory first half drop notice execution lottery. The result of the execution lottery of the button hatchet accessory first half drop notice corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the button hatchet accessory first half drop notice lottery result branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA1".

If "0: not won" is set in the button hatchet first half drop notice work area "YKK_NTA1", the button hatchet jackpot first half drop notice lottery result branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA1" is set. The motor scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_NTA1_NON" is selected when the first-half drop notice is not executed. The content of the scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_NTA1_NON" is only the function "STOP", and the result of the button hatchet early drop notice lottery is "non-winning", so the scheduler data is executed without executing the button hatchet early drop notice. end the execution of

On the other hand, if "1: execution of the first half fall notice of the button hatchet accessory" is set in the work area "YKK_NTA1", that is, if the execution lottery for the first half drop notice of the button hatchet accessory is won. , the motor scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_NTA1_DOWN" at the execution of the button hatchet accessory fall notice lottery result branch call table "TBL_YKK_NTA1" is selected. The content of the scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_NTA1_DOWN" is the function "SUBC: YKK_BTN: TBL_MOT_NTA1", and the scheduler work area index branch call "SUBC" is the target scheduler work number "YKK_BTN" and button branch call address It is executed using the table "TBL_MOT_NTA1" as a parameter.

The scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the button branch call address table 'TBL_MOT_NTA1' for notifying the fall of the first half of the button hatchet accessory, and based on the contents of the button ON_OFF work area 'YKK_BTN', specifies the start address of the scheduler data to be the branch destination. . As in the case of the button cut-in notice and the button logo character drop notice, the operation state of the production button is stored in the button ON_OFF work area "YKK_BTN", and when the production button is not operated, "0: button OFF ”, and “1: button ON” is set when the effect button is operated. The operation state of the effect button corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the button hatchet accessory first half drop notice branch call address table "TBL_MOT_NTA1".

While "0: Button OFF" is set in the button ON_OFF work area "YKK_BTN", in the button branch call address table "TBL_MOT_NTA1", the motor scheduler when the button is OFF. The data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_BTNOFF" is selected. The content of the scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_BTNOFF" is only the function "RET", and returns immediately after the function "SUBC: YKK_BTN: TBL_MOT_NTA1" (function "RET") of the caller scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_NTA1_DOWN". This further returns to the function "LOOP" of the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1". Therefore, even if the execution lottery for the first half drop notice of the button hatchet accessory is won, if the input of the production button is not detected during the loop processing of 90 times, the loop processing is exited and the function "STOP" is executed. is executed, and the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1" ends.

On the other hand, when "1: Button ON" is set in the button ON_OFF work area "YKK_BTN", the button for the first half of the button hatchet accessory fall notice button ON is set in the button branch call address table "TBL_MOT_NTA1". The time motor scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_BTNON" is selected. The contents of the scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_BTNON" first execute the function "COMMAND: COM_NTA_STA-MID" and issue the command "COM_NTA_STA-MID". The command “COM_NTA_STA-MID” is a command for causing the game board side effect display device 1600 to start drawing the effect when the hatchet accessory falls, and is issued to the effect control unit 5020 .

Further, the scheduler execution unit 5060 executes the function "MPLAY:PTA_NTA_STA-MID" within the same frame as the command "COM_NTA_STA-MID" is issued. The parameter "PTA_NTA_STA-MID" is pattern data for the operation of dropping the machete 5003 to the intermediate position. Furthermore, the function "NOP: 120" executes wait processing for 120 frames (about 4 seconds), during which the machete 5003 falls to the intermediate position.

Finally, by executing the function "MEMW:SCH_MEM_NTA:1", "1" is written in the scheduler hatchet position information work area "SCH_MEM_NTA" to record that the hatchet 5003 has moved to the intermediate position. After that, the function "STOP" terminates the execution of the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1".

When the first half of the button hatchet accessory drop notice, which is the first half of the hatchet accessory drop notice, ends, the latter half of the hatchet accessory drop notice is started. FIGS. 171 and 172 are diagrams for explaining the contents of the second half fall notice scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2" for controlling the motor in the latter half of the hatchet fall notice, which is the second half of the hatchet fall notice in this embodiment. be. The motor scheduler "MOT_SCH01" is used for execution of the machete accessory second half drop notice scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2" in the same way as the button hatchet accessory first fall notice scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1".

When the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2" is started, first, the function "COMMAND: COM_NTA2_STA" is executed to start drawing an effect suggesting whether or not the hatchet accessory 5003 will fall on the game board side effect display device 1600. . After that, wait processing "NOP: 90" for 90 frames (about 3 seconds) is executed. When the machete accessory 5003 falls, the expectation of a big win increases, so the player's expectation is heightened by performing effect drawing for 3 seconds.

Subsequently, the scheduler execution unit 5060 executes the function "SUBC:YKK_NTA2:TBL_YKK_NTA2". In the function ``SUBC: YKK_NTA2: TBL_YKK_NTA2'', the scheduler work area index branch call ``SUBC'' is executed with the target scheduler work number ``YKK_NTA2'' and the result branch call address table ``TBL_YKK_NTA2'' as parameters. .

The scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the hatchet accessory second half fall notice lottery result branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA2", and based on the contents of the hatchet accessory latter fall notice 2 work area "YKK_NTA2", determines the scheduler data to be the branch destination. Identify the start address. In the work area "YKK_NTA2", the result of the execution lottery for the late notice of the falling of the hatchet is stored in the work area "YKK_NTA2". ', and if the lottery for execution of the latter half of the hatchet accessory drop notice is won, "1: Execution of the latter half drop notice of the hatchet accessory" is set. The result of the execution lottery for the second half drop notice of the hatchet accessory corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA2" for the second half drop notice of the hatchet accessory.

If "0: not won" is set in the work area "YKK_NTA2" for the second half of the fall of the hatchet, the second half of the fall of the hatchet is set in the branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA2" for the latter half of the fall of the hatchet. The motor scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_NTA2_NON" at the time of notice non-execution is selected. In the scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_NTA2_NON", the function "SUBC: SCH_MEM_NTA: TBL_YKK_NTA2NON" is executed, and the value of the hatchet position information work area "SCH_MEM_NTA" for the scheduler and the branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA2NON" when the result of the lottery result of the latter half of the fall of the hatchet is not won. branch based on

When "0: initial position" is set in the scheduler hatchet position information work area "SCH_MEM_NTA", the hatchet accessory fall notice lottery result branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA2NON" indicates that the hatchet accessory fall notice has not yet been set. Run-time motor scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_NON_NTA2_NON" is selected. In the scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_NON_NTA2_NON", the function "RET" is executed to return to the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2".

When "0: initial position" is set, the motor scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_NON_NTA2_NON" when not executing the latter half fall notice of the hatchet accessory is selected in the branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA2NON" for the latter half drop notice lottery result of the hatchet accessory. be. In the scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_NON_NTA2_NON", the function "RET" is executed to return to the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2". After that, the value of the scheduler knife position information work area "SCH_MEM_NTA" is overwritten to "0: initial position", and the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2" is completed.

On the other hand, if "1: Intermediate position" is set in the scheduler's hatchet position information work area "SCH_MEM_NTA", the hatchet's first half drop is set in the branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA2NON" for the latter half of the hatchet's drop notice lottery result. The motor scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_DOWN_NTA2_NON" is selected when the advance notice is not won.

In the motor scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_DOWN_NTA2_NON" when the first half drop notice is executed and the second half drop notice is not won, wait processing "NOP: 120" for 120 frames (about 4 seconds) is first executed. In the wait process executed here, as will be described later, when the hatchet accessory 5003 is at the lower position, it becomes a waiting time for returning to the intermediate position. Here, since the machete accessory 5003 is originally in the middle position, it waits for 4 seconds.

After completion of the wait process, the function "MPLAY:PTA_NTA_INIT_MID-TOP" is executed to return the hatchet accessory 5003 from the intermediate position to the initial position. Furthermore, in order to secure the operation time of the machete 5003, wait processing "NOP: 120" for 120 frames (about 4 seconds) is executed, and the function "RET" returns to the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2".

In addition, when "1: hatchet late fall notice" is set in the hatchet role fall notice 2 work area "YKK_NTA2", in the hatchet role fall notice lottery result branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA2", the hatchet Motor scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_NTA2_DOWN" is selected at the time of winning the second half drop notice. In the scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_NTA2_DOWN", the function "SUBC: SCH_MEM_NTA: TBL_YKK_NTA2DOWN" is executed, and branching is performed based on the value of the scheduler's hatchet position information work area "SCH_MEM_NTA" and the hatchet object fall notice 2 branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA2DOWN". .

When "0: initial position" is set in the scheduler hatchet position information work area "SCH_MEM_NTA", the hatchet accessory fall notice lottery result branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA2DOWN" indicates that the hatchet accessory first half drop notice has not yet been set. The motor scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_NON_NTA2_DOWN" is selected when the execution/second half fall notice wins.

In the scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_NON_NTA2_DOWN" (FIG. 172), first, the function "COMMAND: COM_NTA_STA-END" is executed to issue the command "COM_NTA_STA-END". The command "COM_NTA_STA-END" is a command for causing the game board side effect display device 1600 to start drawing an effect in which the hatchet accessory 5003 falls from the initial position to the lower position.

Further, the scheduler execution unit 5060 executes the function "MPLAY:PTA_NTA_STA-END" within the same frame as the command "COM_NTA_STA-END" is issued. The parameter "PTA_NTA_STA-END" is pattern data for dropping the hatchet accessory 5003 to the lower position. Further, the function "NOP: 240" executes wait processing for 240 frames (about 8 seconds), during which the hatchet accessory 5003 is dropped from the initial position to the lower position.

Then, at the timing when the hatchet accessory 5003 moves to the lower position, the function "COMMAND: COM_NTA_END" is executed to issue the command "COM_NTA_END". The command "COM_NTA_END" is a command for causing the game board side effect display device 1600 to start drawing the effect that the hatchet accessory 5003 has reached the lower position. Furthermore, the function "NOP: 90" executes wait processing for 90 frames (about 3 seconds) to allow the effect display device 1600 on the game board side to continue drawing the effect.

After that, the function "MPLAY:PTA_NTA_INIT_END-MID" is executed. The parameter "PTA_NTA_INIT_END-MID" is pattern data for returning the machete 5003 from the lower position to the middle position.

Subsequently, the function "CALL:SUBC_MOT_NTA1_DOWN_NTA2_NON" is executed to call the aforementioned scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_DOWN_NTA2_NON", thereby returning the machete 5003 from the intermediate position to the initial position. After that, the function "RET" returns to the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2".

On the other hand, if "1: middle position" is set in the scheduler's hatchet position information work area "SCH_MEM_NTA", the hatchet's first half drop is set in the branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA2DOWN" for the latter half of the hatchet's drop notice lottery result. The motor scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_DOWN_NTA2_DOWN" is selected at the time of announcement execution/second half drop announcement winning.

In the scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_DOWN_NTA2_DOWN" (FIG. 172), first, the function "COMMAND: COM_NTA_MID-END" is executed to issue the command "COM_NTA_MID-END". The command "COM_NTA_MID-END" is a command for causing the game board side effect display device 1600 to start drawing an effect in which the hatchet accessory 5003 falls from the middle position to the lower position.

Further, the scheduler execution unit 5060 executes the function "MPLAY:PTA_NTA_STA-END" within the same frame as the command "COM_NTA_STA-END" is issued. The parameter "PTA_NTA_STA-END" is pattern data for dropping the hatchet accessory 5003 to the lower position. Furthermore, the function "NOP: 120" executes wait processing for 120 frames (about 4 seconds), during which the hatchet accessory 5003 is dropped from the middle position to the lower position.

Then, at the timing when the hatchet accessory 5003 moves to the lower position, the function "COMMAND: COM_NTA_END" is executed to issue the command "COM_NTA_END". The command "COM_NTA_END" is a command for causing the game board side effect display device 1600 to start drawing the effect that the hatchet accessory 5003 has reached the lower position. Furthermore, the function "NOP: 90" executes wait processing for 90 frames (about 3 seconds) to allow the effect display device 1600 on the game board side to continue drawing the effect.

Here, the function "NOP: 120" controls 120 frames (approximately 4 seconds) wait processing is executed. This time is the time it takes for the hatchet accessory 5003 to move from the initial position to the intermediate position.

After that, similarly to the case of "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_NON_NTA2_DOWN", the function "MPLAY:PTA_NTA_INIT_END-MID" is executed to return the hatchet accessory 5003 from the lower position to the middle position. Furthermore, the function "CALL:SUBC_MOT_NTA1_DOWN_NTA2_NON" is executed to return the machete accessory 5003 from the middle position to the initial position. After that, the function "RET" returns to the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2".

When the machete accessory 5003 returns to the initial position and returns to the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2", the function "MEMW: SCH_MEM_NTA: 0" is executed, and the value of the machete position information work area for the scheduler "SCH_MEM_NTA" is set to "0: initial position". to end the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2".

In the machete role drop notice, the scheduler data is divided into the first half and the second half, and the operation of the machete role 5003 differs in the second half depending on whether or not the player operates the production button in the first half. Therefore, by using the function "MEMW" in the first half to write the position of the machete component 5003 and acquiring the written position information in the second half, it is possible to specify the position of the machete component 5003. . As a result, the moving amount of the motor can be determined for each position of the hatchet accessory 5003, and by calling the corresponding scheduler data, it is possible to execute an effect according to the operation result of the effect button.

In addition, since common scheduler data is called for the movement from the intermediate position to the initial position in the movement of the machete 5003 to the initial position after the action, the scheduler data as a whole can be simplified.

The function "MEMW" can refer to a common value by writing a fixed value in a predetermined area when executing scheduler data and referring to it when executing other scheduler data. As a result, it is possible to specify the values that indicate the state that changes due to the execution of multiple scheduler data at the time of execution of each scheduler data. The process can be completed only by defining the scheduler data without creating the scheduler data in the This makes it possible to minimize the required number of scheduler data that requires different processing depending on the state, streamlines the creation and debugging of scheduler data, and facilitates management. Also, in this embodiment, the function writes a fixed value, but by specifying the work name in the function parameter instead of the fixed value, it is possible to transfer data from the program side and perform processing based on command information. can be performed on the scheduler, and more complicated processing can be performed by the scheduler. A unique feature of the function "MEMW" is that even information that has not been determined at the start of execution of the scheduler data containing the function "MEMW" can be processed if the information is determined by the time the function "MEMW" is executed. This enables effective time control and interactive control.

[18-10. Configuration example of scheduler data (fluctuation pattern)]
The flow of executing a series of advance notice effects has been described above. The details of execution of such a series of advance notice effects are drawn based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 1310 . Furthermore, specific production contents are drawn for each advance notice production.

Hereinafter, based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 1310, the procedure for controlling the execution of a series of advance notice effects and the basic effects related to these series of notice effects and the fluctuation pattern (regardless of the lottery other than the notice effect) The structure of the scheduler data for executing the effect related to the background effect and the pattern effect that are produced and are one-to-one with the variation pattern will be described.

In the present embodiment, the period from when the special symbols start to change to when the change stops is managed in units of blocks (effect sections) divided into predetermined structural units. Blocks, for example, from the start of pattern fluctuation until reach occurs, or until the pattern stops if reach does not occur (first half fluctuation), between reach occurrence and until the pattern stops (second half fluctuation ), and the period from the stop of the design to the end of the variation. Each block is assigned a time corresponding to a variation pattern, and the execution timing and execution time of the advance notice effect within the assigned time are defined. The time corresponding to each block and data relating to the basic performance to be executed are collectively referred to as block data.

In addition, the rule of block division is that when comparing the basic effects related to fluctuations in multiple fluctuation patterns, the same basic effects are treated as common block data, and the parts with different basic effects on the liquid crystal display are divided as block data. do. Referring to FIG. 173A, in the liquid crystal effect block data combination number table by variation pattern (LCD_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) that stores combinations of liquid crystal effect block data corresponding to the variation pattern command in this embodiment, the variation pattern “10H01H” is normal variation 6 seconds. It is a loss, and the normal fluctuation is performed for 6 seconds, and then the design of the loss is performed. Since the normal variation 6-second performance and the failure stop performance are also used in other variation patterns, they are divided into liquid crystal performance block data (LCD01_BLK) for 6 seconds of normal variation and liquid crystal performance block data for failure stop (LCD02_BLK).

The variation pattern “10H02H” is a normal variation 12 seconds lost, and the normal variation is performed for 12 seconds, and then a losing pattern effect is performed. Since the normal fluctuation 12-second effect is also used in other fluctuation patterns, it is divided into the normal fluctuation 12-second liquid crystal effect block data (LCD03_BLK), and the losing pattern effect is exactly the same as the fluctuation pattern "10H01H". , Loss stop liquid crystal effect block data (LCD02_BLK), which is divided into liquid crystal display blocks with a variation pattern "10H01H", is commonly used. As for the other variation patterns, similarly, the parts that have already been converted into block data for the basic performance are used in common, and the different parts are newly converted into block data.

As described above, by making blocks, the common basic effect part becomes a unique number of block data, and all variation patterns and basic effects such as big hits other than variations are combined with unique liquid crystal effect block data. , all variation patterns and basic effects such as big hits other than variations can be realized. It is also important to greatly reduce the total amount of effect data to be created, but the main purpose of blockization is to create a liquid crystal effect that contains a specific basic effect when there is a change in a specific basic effect. The change is reflected in all fluctuation patterns that use block data.

Regarding the liquid crystal display in this embodiment, since the VDP 1540a with built-in sound source is controlled, the format and function are completely different from the scheduler data for sounds, lamps, and characters in this embodiment. The configuration in which the drawing scheduler data for effect and the drawing scheduler data for advance notice effect are combined is the same as the sub-effect block data for controlling sounds, lamps, accessories, and the like. In addition, the drawing scheduler data for the liquid crystal display includes frame information, still image and moving image material IDs, display position information, enlargement/reduction information, rotation angle information, color information, alpha information, etc., for generating a display list command for the VDP 1540a with built-in sound source. The information shown is embedded.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the block data for variably displaying the identification pattern on the liquid crystal display device is defined as liquid crystal pattern block data separately from the block data for performing other liquid crystal effects. This makes it possible to make the control for variably displaying the identification pattern independent from the control of other liquid crystal effects, for example, even when the shape of the identification pattern is changed and variably displayed, a common advance notice effect can be performed. It becomes possible to execute on a liquid crystal display device. The drawing scheduler data for pattern display has the same format and function as the drawing scheduler data for liquid crystal presentation. Also, the structure in which drawing scheduler data for basic effects and drawing scheduler data for advance notice effects related to symbols are combined for each block data is the same as the above-described sub-effect block data and liquid crystal effect block data. The drawing scheduler data for design display has the same configuration and functions as the drawing scheduler data for liquid crystal display, and additionally, information specifying the mode of variable display of identification patterns is embedded.

FIG. 173A is a diagram illustrating a variation pattern liquid crystal effect block data combination number table (LCD_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) that stores combinations of liquid crystal effect block data corresponding to variation pattern commands in this embodiment. FIG. 173B is a diagram for explaining the liquid crystal design block data combination number by variation pattern (ZUG_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) for storing the combination of liquid crystal design block data corresponding to the variation pattern command in this embodiment. FIG. 174 is a diagram for explaining a sub effect block data combination number table by variation pattern (SCH_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) that stores combinations of sub effect block data corresponding to variation pattern commands in this embodiment.

The liquid crystal effect block data combination number table by variation pattern (LCD_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) is a table that holds information indicating the combination of liquid crystal effect block data for each variation pattern. For example, a unique number specifying the constituent liquid crystal effect block data is held in chronological order with respect to the variation pattern number. For example, if the variation pattern number is "10H03H", it consists of "LCD03_BLK" that indicates normal variation for 12 seconds in the first half variation, "LCD04_BLK" that indicates normal short reach in the second half variation, and "LCD02_BLK" that indicates when the deviation is stopped. be done. At this time, "LCD03_BLK", "LCD04_BLK", and "LCD02_BLK" are stored in this order. In this way, by connecting the liquid crystal effect block data for each variation pattern, it is possible to define (realize) the configuration of the basic effect and the advance notice effect.

Also, as shown in FIG. 414, the same liquid crystal effect block data is used in the same effect section. For example, when the first half variation is the normal variation of 12 seconds, "LCD03_BLK" is used regardless of the details of the announcement effect that is actually executed. As a result, the number of liquid crystal effect block data can be realized with a unique number corresponding to the type of variation, and the liquid crystal effect block data can be uniquely specified for each variation pattern.

As shown in FIG. 173B, the liquid crystal pattern block data combination number table for each variation pattern (ZUG_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) holds information indicating block data combinations for each variation pattern, similar to the liquid crystal effect block data combination number table for each variation pattern. . Also, the sub effect block data corresponding to the variation pattern number is defined in a structure corresponding to the liquid crystal effect block data of the same variation pattern number one-to-one (same combination, same effect time).

Also, as shown in FIG. 174, the sub effect block data combination number table by variation pattern (SCH_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) contains information indicating block data combinations for each variation pattern, similar to the liquid crystal effect block data combination number table by variation pattern. Hold. Also, the sub effect block data corresponding to the variation pattern number is defined in a configuration (same combination, same effect time) corresponding one-to-one with the liquid crystal effect block data and the liquid crystal pattern block data of the same variation pattern number.

Next, the execution procedure of the announcement effect based on the scheduler data corresponding to the variation pattern will be explained. Here, the execution procedure of the basic effect and the advance notice effect based on the effect scheduler data corresponding to the variation pattern "10H03H" will be described. First, the outline of the procedure for executing the effect control based on the liquid crystal effect block data, the effect control based on the liquid crystal symbol block data and the effect control based on the sub effect block data will be described. FIG. 175 is a diagram illustrating an overview of effect control of the first half variation (normal variation of 12 seconds) of the variation pattern “10H03H” in the present embodiment.

When the variation pattern command (main variation related command) "10H03H" is received from the main control board 1310, the variation pattern number "10H03H" is specified by analyzing the command received by the command analysis module 5200, and the effect control unit 5020 Notice.

Effect control unit 5020, as described in FIG. 151A, determines the layer to be used, determines the block data number corresponding to the layer, based on the determined block number, to each variation pattern number The corresponding block data number is acquired from the liquid crystal effect block data combination number table by variation pattern (LCD_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO), the liquid crystal pattern block data combination number table by variation pattern (ZUG_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO), and the sub effect block data combination number table by variation pattern (SCH_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO). do. By setting all the block data numbers corresponding to the respective effect devices to the same number, it is possible to synchronously execute the effects of the respective effect devices.

Then, the effect control section 5020 transmits the block data numbers for all the layers to the liquid crystal effect block control section 5310, the liquid crystal pattern block control section 5311 and the sub effect block control section 5320.

After that, the liquid crystal effect block control unit 5310 is the liquid crystal effect 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331, the liquid crystal pattern block control unit 5311 is the liquid crystal pattern 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5332, and the sub effect block control unit 5320 is the sub effect 1f (1ms) scheduler execution unit. 5333 (5334) executes the block data corresponding to the transmitted block data number in chronological order. Specifically, the liquid crystal effect 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 is the normal fluctuation 12-second liquid crystal effect block data "LCD03_BLK" corresponding to the first half fluctuation, and the liquid crystal design 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5332 is the normal fluctuation 12-second liquid crystal design block data "ZUG03_BLK". ', the sub-effect 1f (1ms) scheduler executing section 5333 (5334) executes the normal fluctuation 12-second sub-effect block data "SCH03_BLK".

When the processing of the liquid crystal effect block data is started, one or a plurality of liquid crystal effect 1f schedulers corresponding to the liquid crystal effect block data are started, and the drawing scheduler data specified according to the content of the effect is executed. The drawing scheduler data includes liquid crystal function information for displaying an image on the liquid crystal display device, designates parameters according to the content of the effect, and transmits the liquid crystal function information to the liquid crystal module 5400 in a predetermined order. The liquid crystal module 5400 analyzes and executes the received liquid crystal function information, and transmits a display list to the VDP 1540a with built-in sound source, thereby performing drawing on the liquid crystal display device.

Further, when processing the liquid crystal pattern block data, the liquid crystal pattern 1f scheduler is activated, and the drawing scheduler data corresponding to the variable display mode of the identification pattern is executed. The procedure for drawing on the liquid crystal display device is the same as in the case of processing the liquid crystal effect block data.

On the other hand, when the processing of the sub-effect block data is started, one or a plurality of sub-effect 1f (1ms) schedulers corresponding to the sub-effect block data are activated, and the scheduler data specified according to the contents of the effect are executed. Note that the scheduler may be prepared according to the execution cycle, or may be shared and the execution cycle may be set at startup.

As described above, the scheduler data includes performance data designation functions for controlling performance devices such as lamps (“KPLAY”), speakers (“SPLAY”), and accessories (“MPLAY”). Designated effects are executed by sequentially executing the effect data designation functions in a defined order. The performance data designation function is transmitted to the modules (lamp module 5600, sound module 5500, driving device (motor) module 5700, etc.) corresponding to the performance devices to be controlled, and each module executes performance by various performance devices.

It is also possible to call other scheduler data from the scheduler data by the functions "REQ, REQF". Various production devices can be controlled by executing the production data specifying function in the called scheduler data at this time. Furthermore, by using the command transmission function "COMMAND" or "COMMAND0", control by commands instead of functions is possible. For example, by transmitting a liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal module 5400 at the timing of executing a performance data specifying function that controls the movement of the character, the movement of the character and the drawing are coordinated like the above-mentioned hatchet character fall notice effect. It is possible to execute the production that was done.

Here, the procedure for executing the effect control using the sub effect block data will be described. FIG. 176 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the variation pattern sub effect block data control start process relating to the variation pattern layer of the present embodiment.

The production block control unit 5040 selects a variation pattern layer in the production control unit 5020 based on the variation pattern number notified from the command analysis module 5200, and changes the control of the block data number by variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern. Control is started using the pattern-by-pattern sub effect block data combination number table (FIG. 174). The row position of the sub effect block data combination number table by variation pattern (FIG. 174) is set to the row index of the sub effect block data combination number table by variation pattern (step S7001). For example, in the table shown in FIG. 174, if the variation pattern number is "10H01H", "0" is set in the sub effect block data combination number table row index by variation pattern, and if the variation pattern number is "10H03H". Since it is the third row, for example, "2" (row -1) is set in the sub effect block data combination number table row index by variation pattern.

Next, the effect block control unit 5040 initializes the sub effect block data combination number table column index by variation pattern to "0" (step S7002). It starts from the sub effect block data corresponding to the first column of the specified row (variation pattern sub effect block data combination number table row index). Finally, the effect block control unit 5040 causes the scheduler execution unit 5060 to execute a variation pattern sub effect block data control scheduler activation process (step S7003). As a result, the scheduler for executing the sub effect block data classified by variation pattern is activated, and the scheduler data included in the sub effect block data is executed.

FIG. 177 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the variation pattern-specific sub effect block data control activation process of the present embodiment.

The scheduler execution unit 5060 first acquires the number of the sub effect block data number table by variation pattern based on the row and column indexes from the sub effect block data combination number table by variation pattern (step S7011). Further, the sub effect block data number table row index is initialized to "0" (step S7012). As a result, processing is started from the top record of the sub effect block data number table by variation pattern specified from the sub effect block data combination number table by variation pattern.

Subsequently, the scheduler execution unit 5060 activates the scheduler data registered in the sub effect block data classified by variation pattern (step S7013). The scheduler data is registered in the sub effect block data corresponding to each effect registered in the sub effect block data number table classified by variation pattern (FIG. 179B). Specifically, based on the sub-effect block data number table row index, the sub-effect block data corresponding to each effect (background sub-effect block data, sub-effect block data corresponding to the notice) is extracted from the sub-effect block data number table. get. One or a plurality of scheduler data are registered in the sub-effect block data corresponding to each effect (background sub-effect block data, sub-effect block data corresponding to the notice), and a scheduler corresponding to each scheduler data is defined. ing. When a plurality of scheduler data are registered, one or a plurality of scheduler data are associated with each other based on the result of lottery of advance notice or the like.

Furthermore, scheduler executing section 5060 updates the sub-effect block data number table row index when activation of all scheduler data defined in the sub-effect block data is completed, and the sub-effect block data number table row index changes to a variation pattern. It is determined whether or not the number of elements in the row of the separate sub effect block data number table has been exceeded (step S7014). When the number of elements in the row of the sub effect block data number table by variation pattern is exceeded (the result of step S7014 is "YES"), the sub effect block data control activation process is terminated. On the other hand, if it does not exceed the number of sub effect block data number table row elements by variation pattern (result of step S7014 is "NO"), the next sub effect block data is processed.

FIG. 178 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the variation pattern-specific sub effect block data control update process of the present embodiment. In the sub-effect block data control update process by variation pattern, in the sub-effect block data corresponding to each effect (background sub-effect block data, sub-effect block data corresponding to the notice) that constitutes the sub-effect block data number table by variation pattern This is a process for executing the next sub effect block data classified by variation pattern when the execution of all the scheduler data is completed. The variation pattern sub effect block data control update process is periodically executed to monitor the execution status of the variation pattern sub effect block data.

The scheduler execution unit 5060 first acquires the number of the sub effect block data number table by variation pattern from the sub effect block data combination number table by variation pattern using the row and column indexes of the sub effect block data combination number table by variation pattern. (step S7021). As a result, the sub-effect block data corresponding to each effect (background sub-effect block data, sub-effect block data corresponding to the notice) constituting the sub-effect block data number table by variation pattern is specified, and defined in the sub-effect block data. It is determined whether or not the currently scheduled scheduler is running (step S7022). If it is being executed (the result of step S7022 is "YES"), the execution of the scheduler continues, and the sub effect block data control update process ends.

Next, the scheduler execution unit 5060 performs all scheduler operations for the sub effect block data corresponding to each effect (background sub effect block data, sub effect block data corresponding to the notice) defined in the sub effect block data by variation pattern. is completed (the result of step S7022 is "NO"), the sub effect block data combination number table column index by variation pattern is incremented, and whether or not the next column data is end data ("DATA_END"). is determined (step S7023). If it is end data (the result of step S7023 is "YES"), a series of effects are completed, and thus the sub effect block data control update process for each variation pattern is ended.

On the other hand, if the next column data is not the end data (result of step S7023 is "NO"), the scheduler execution unit 5060 starts executing the sub effect block data by variation pattern corresponding to the next column data. , Sub effect data block control scheduler start processing for each variation pattern is executed (step S7024).

As explained in FIGS. 173A, 173B and 174, the sub effect block data by variation pattern is defined in association with the liquid crystal effect block data and the liquid crystal pattern block data, and the corresponding block data are executed at the same timing, By setting the execution time of each block data to be the same, the effect control by the drawing scheduler, the effect control by the sub effect scheduler, and the effect control by a plurality of schedulers can be synchronized. In addition, by making blocks, if the same variation pattern is used, regardless of the combination of effects and the presence or absence of the appearance of effects, the number of activations of the scheduler defined in the effect block and the effect block will always be the same. can be reduced, resulting in improved quality.

As described above, in the present embodiment, by synchronizing the effects control by one or a plurality of drawing schedulers and sub-production schedulers, it is possible to coordinate the operations of various production devices, and to execute various productions without discomfort. can do. In addition, since scheduler data having the same execution time can be executed in parallel, scheduler data for controlling various production devices can be developed and checked independently for each production device and for each block data. is possible, and development efficiency can be improved.

FIG. 179 is a diagram for explaining the procedure for executing the basic effect and the advance notice effect of the variable display corresponding to the change pattern "10H03H" of the present embodiment. Execution time of the notice effect, (B) shows the configuration of sub effect block data classified by variation pattern. The sub-effect block data by variation pattern includes background sub-effect block data and notice sub-effect block data for executing the background effect and the notice effect. In FIG. 179B, two types of sub effect block data, ie, background block data and notice block data are combined, but the number of sub effect block data can be varied.

As shown in FIG. 179, the sub effect block data by variation pattern that constitutes the variation display of the variation pattern “10H03H” is “SCH03_BLK” (normal variation 12 seconds), “SCH04_BLK” (normal short reach), “SCH02_BLK” ( lost stop). The variation pattern sub effect block data "SCH03_BLK" corresponds to 12 seconds from the start of variation until the left and right symbols stop. The variation pattern sub effect block data "SCH04_BLK" corresponds to a period during which the left symbol and the right symbol stop at the same identification symbol and the normal short reach is executed. The variation pattern sub performance block data "SCH02_BLK" corresponds to a period during which the middle symbol is stopped, the result of the variation display is determined as a failure, and the determined symbol is displayed.

In the sub-effect block data by variation pattern "SCH03_BLK", as shown in FIG. 179(A), the sub-effect block data related to the step-up notice, the BTN logo character drop notice, and the pattern stop notice, and the sub-effect related to the background. Block data is defined. In the sub effect block data "SCH04_BLK", sub effect block data for cut-in notice and group notice and sub effect block data related to background are defined. Furthermore, in the sub effect block "SCH02_BLK", the sub effect block data relating to the background is defined without defining the preliminary effect sub effect block data. In the drawing, the execution of the forewarning effect is not duplicated, but a plurality of forecast block data may be defined and executed so that a plurality of the forewarning effects are overlapped. The content of each announcement effect shown in FIG. 179 is as described above.

Effect control based on each sub effect block data will be described below. As shown in FIG. 179(B), two types of sub effect block data are executed in parallel in the variable display of the variable pattern "10H03H". First, the variation pattern sub effect block data “SCH03_BLK” will be described.

In the background-related sub-effect scheduler data, normal fluctuation 12-second background sub-effect block data is defined. In the normal fluctuation 12-second background sub-effect block data, a sub-effect scheduler number and sub-effect scheduler data related to the normal fluctuation 12-second background are defined. Since the normal fluctuation 12-second background sub effect block data is scheduler data related to the background, it has the same effect time as the sub effect block data "SCH03_BLK". Therefore, it is continuously executed until the sub effect block data "SCH03_BLK" is completed.

The function "NOP", step-up notice sub-effect block data, BTN logo accessory drop notice sub-effect block data, and symbol stop notice sub-effect block data are defined in the sub-effect scheduler data related to the notice. The function "NOP" serves as a wait for synchronizing with the liquid crystal effect scheduler, and is defined to perform a sub-effect in accordance with the liquid crystal effect. The step-up notice sub-effect block data defines a sub-effect scheduler number and sub-effect scheduler data relating to the step-up notice. The step-up notice sub effect block data has the same effect time as the step-up notice liquid crystal effect block data. In the BTN logo accessory drop notice sub effect block data, a sub effect scheduler number and sub effect scheduler data related to the BTN logo accessory drop notice are defined. The BTN logo accessory drop notice sub effect block data has the same effect time as the BTN logo accessory drop notice liquid crystal effect block data. The symbol stop notice sub-performance block data defines a sub-performance scheduler number and sub-performance scheduler data relating to symbol stop notice. The symbol stop notice sub effect block data has the same effect time as the symbol stop notice liquid crystal effect block data. The variation pattern sub effect block data "SCH03_BLK" is formed by combining and executing the above sub effect block data.

By executing the sub effect block data synchronously with the liquid crystal effect block data, the scheduler data for each sound, lamp and motor defined in the sub effect block data are executed synchronously with the liquid crystal effect block data. It will be.

At this time, from the start of the fluctuation to the start of the first liquid crystal effect block data (step-up notice), from the end of the liquid crystal effect block data corresponding to each liquid crystal notice effect to the liquid crystal effect block data corresponding to the next liquid crystal notice effect Until the start of the function A "NOP" is executed and waits for the specified time. In this way, by controlling the appearance timing of the sub-effect scheduler data corresponding to each liquid crystal effect block data in the scheduler block for each variation pattern by the function "NOP", the scheduler can be executed sequentially at the execution timing of each advance notice effect by a program etc. By starting the corresponding scheduler data without instructing the execution of the data, it becomes possible to execute the effects of each effect device corresponding to the liquid crystal preview effect at the designated timing. Also, the function "NOP" at the end of each scheduler data in the sub effect block data classified by variation pattern may be omitted.

The execution time of the notice effect set by the scheduler data for controlling the effect devices such as lamps, sounds, and accessories is defined as a common time for each notice effect. As a result, the time from the start of the control by the sub-effect block data to the execution of each advance notice effect is uniquely determined, so that the control timing of each effect device can be synchronized.

Further, the time information at the time of execution of the sub effect block data by variation pattern is managed by a relative value from the start of execution of the sub effect block data by variation pattern, not from the start of variation. As a result, when the same sub-effect block data by variation pattern is used in a plurality of variation patterns, each effect in the sub-effect block data by variation pattern for each variation pattern has the effect start time from the start of variation. Although it will be different, it can be processed without problems because the time value is managed relatively within the sub-effect block data for each variation pattern. In the case of the liquid crystal effect block data by variation pattern, similarly, the liquid crystal effect block data by variation pattern is managed by a relative value from the start of execution of the liquid crystal effect block data by variation pattern, and the liquid crystal design block data by variation pattern is similarly managed. Managed as a relative value from the start of data execution.

Next, the variation pattern sub effect block data "SCH04_BLK" will be described. The sub effect block data by variation pattern "SCH04_BLK" corresponds to normal short reach, and at this time, two types of sub effect block data are executed in parallel.

Normal short reach background sub-effect block data is defined in the sub-effect scheduler data related to the background. A sub effect scheduler number and sub effect scheduler data relating to the normal short reach background are defined in the normal short reach background sub effect block data. Since the normal short reach background sub-effect block data is scheduler data related to the background, it has the same effect time as the sub-effect block data by variation pattern "SCH04_BLK". Therefore, it is continuously executed until the sub effect block data "SCH04_BLK" for each variation pattern is completed.

The function "NOP", cut-in notice sub-effect block data, and group notice sub-effect block data are defined in the sub-effect scheduler data related to the notice. The function "NOP" serves as a wait for synchronizing with the liquid crystal effect scheduler, and is defined to execute a sub-effect in accordance with the liquid crystal effect. The cut-in notice sub-effect block data defines a sub-effect scheduler number and sub-effect scheduler data relating to the cut-in notice. The cut-in notice sub effect block data has the same effect time as the cut-in notice liquid crystal effect block data. In the group announcement sub-effect block data, a sub-effect scheduler number and sub-effect scheduler data related to group announcement are defined. The group announcement sub effect block data has the same effect time as the group announcement liquid crystal effect block data. The variation pattern sub effect block data "SCH04_BLK" is constructed by combining and executing the above sub effect block data.

By executing the sub effect block data synchronously with the liquid crystal effect block data, the scheduler data for each sound, lamp and motor defined in the sub effect block data are executed synchronously with the liquid crystal effect block data. It will be.

Also, in the variation pattern sub-effect block data "SCH04_BLK", the number of sub-effect block data columns is the same as in the variation pattern-specific sub effect block data "SCH03_BLK", but the number of sub effect block data columns cannot be increased or decreased. no problem.

Finally, in the sub-effect block data classified by variation pattern "SCH02_BLK", since the effect related to the announcement is not performed, only the losing stop background sub-effect block data is executed. Loss stop background sub-effect block data is defined in the sub-effect scheduler data related to the background. A sub-effect scheduler number and sub-effect scheduler data related to the normal fluctuation 12-second background are defined in the losing stop background sub-effect block data. Since the losing stop background sub-effect block data is scheduler data related to the background, it has the same effect time as the sub-effect block data "SCH02_BLK". Therefore, it is continuously executed until the sub effect block data "SCH02_BLK" is completed.

FIG. 180 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between liquid crystal effect block data classified by variation pattern and liquid crystal design block data classified by variation pattern according to the present embodiment. The liquid crystal effect block data by variation pattern and the liquid crystal pattern block data by variation pattern differ only in the function executed by the scheduler data in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data from the function executed by the scheduler data in the sub-effect block data. , and the data format and control method are common, so the description is omitted.

Next, the configuration of the sub-effect block data will be described, taking the step-up effect described with reference to FIG. 151B as an example. First, an outline of creating liquid crystal display scheduler data for step-up notice will be described. FIG. 181 is a diagram showing an image of creating a drawing data file for step-up advance notice for liquid crystal display of this embodiment in step-up effect units (step-up effect 1 to step-up effect 4) using a video synthesis/motion creation graphic tool. be.

The drawing data file is created for each step-up effect and consists of a series of effects combining still images and moving images. Also, as shown in FIG. 181, the drawing data file is converted by the tool into the liquid crystal presentation scheduler data in the present embodiment in step-up presentation units.

The reason why the drawing data file is not created one-on-one with the liquid crystal notice effects (step-up notices 1 to 4) is that, for example, if only the step-up 1 effect is changed, there are four types of step-up notices as in this embodiment. is executable, it is necessary to change 4 drawing data files. Considering the work time required for change and the risk of omission of correction, create a unique number of drawing data files for each step, This is because it is more efficient to realize the advance notice in combination.

FIG. 182 is a diagram for explaining the configuration of effect block data for the step-up notice of this embodiment. (A) shows the configuration of the step-up notice liquid crystal effect block data, and (B) shows the configuration of the step-up notice sub-effect block data. As described above, four types of step-up notices can be executed in this embodiment, and step-up notices 1 and 2 are shown in (A) and (B). In step-up notices 3 and 4, step-up 3 effects and step-up 4 effects are executed at predetermined timings.

To explain the step-up notice liquid crystal effect block data, first, based on the step-up notice lottery result value obtained at the start of the fluctuation, it is determined which step-up notice of step-up notices 1 to 4 is to be executed. be. If the lottery result value of the step-up notice is not won, the step-up notice liquid crystal effect block data is not executed and the process ends, so the step-up notice is not executed and drawing on the liquid crystal display device is not performed.

On the other hand, if the step-up notice lottery result value is step-up notice 1, step-up notice 1 of the step-up notice liquid crystal effect block data is selected, and if the step-up notice lottery result value is step-up notice 2, The step-up notice 2 of the step-up notice liquid crystal effect block data is selected, and the corresponding effect block data is selected. The effect block data of the step-up notice 2 operates in the liquid crystal scheduler LCD_SCH01 for executing the step-up 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data and the liquid crystal scheduler LCD_SCH02 for executing the step-up 2 liquid crystal effect scheduler data in parallel.

When the liquid crystal scheduler LCD_SCH01 executes the step-up 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data, the data to be executed next is "DATA_END", so the operation of the liquid crystal scheduler LCD_SCH01 ends.

Also, the liquid crystal scheduler LCD_SCH02 executes the function "NOP", waits for the time specified by the parameter, and then executes the step-up 2 liquid crystal effect scheduler data. After the execution of the step-up 2 liquid crystal presentation scheduler data is finished, the data to be executed next is "DATA_END", so the operation of the liquid crystal scheduler LCD_SCH02 is finished.

As described above, multiple variations of a single announcement can be realized by combining the announcement effect scheduler data in the smallest structural units.

Next, the step-up notice sub effect block data will be described with reference to FIG. 182(B). The step-up notice sub effect block data, the step-up notice liquid crystal effect block data, the block configuration and the execution time are all in one-to-one correspondence. As a result, it is possible to dynamically synchronize all the effect devices with respect to combinations of fluctuation patterns and advance notice lottery results, and to realize a effect with a sense of unity.

The step-up notice sub effect block data differs from the step-up notice liquid crystal effect block data only in the functions executed by the liquid crystal effect scheduler data and the functions executed by the sub effect scheduler data. Since the data format and control method are common, the description is omitted.

As described above, in this embodiment, when a variation pattern command is received from the main control board 1310, the sub effect block data stored in the data access order is obtained from the sub effect block data combination table by variation pattern "SCH_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO". By executing the scheduler data included in the acquired sub-effect block data in accordance with the data access order, it is possible to execute the defined basic effect and preview effect in a predetermined order and at a predetermined timing. .

Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the scheduler data for controlling various effect devices can be executed in parallel, and the scheduler data that are executed at the same timing are defined to have the same execution time. You can synchronize the performance. Furthermore, once execution of the scheduler data is started, a predetermined operation is performed at the timing set in the scheduler data thereafter. As a result, by simply executing the corresponding block data based on the information that specifies the content of the production, such as variation patterns, the hierarchically defined scheduler data is automatically acquired, and the production is executed at the defined timing. It is possible to

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, multiple schedulers can be activated and schedule data can be executed independently by each scheduler. Therefore, it is possible to develop multiple types of scheduler data in parallel, which greatly improves development efficiency. can be substantially improved.

Further, according to this embodiment, the scheduler analyzes the scheduler data described in a predetermined format, and is configured to control the rendering device. Therefore, even if the control mechanism of the game machine (for example, the peripheral control board 1510 and the arithmetic unit included therein) is updated, a common schedule can be achieved by installing a scheduler corresponding to the new game machine. data can be used. In other words, the scheduler has a function as middleware for executing common schedule data on different platforms, making it possible to utilize software assets related to the performance control of gaming machines over a long period of time.

Note that the scheduler in this embodiment may be implemented by software or by hardware. When the scheduler is implemented by software, the scheduler that is activated when the scheduler data is executed may be stopped after use to release the used memory area. Memory usage can be reduced by stopping the scheduler. For example, the scheduler may be released when a predetermined time has elapsed after execution of the schedule data is completed, or the scheduler other than the minimum scheduler may be stopped when the gaming machine is in a customer waiting state.

[19. Production control by liquid crystal production scheduler data]
Next, the details of the liquid crystal effect scheduler data constituting the liquid crystal effect block data will be explained. The liquid crystal effect scheduler data, like the sub effect block data, is composed of a combination of functions for controlling the object of effect. In the sub-effect block data, sound output, lighting of the lamp, operation of the driving device, etc. were controlled, but in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data, drawing on the liquid crystal display device is controlled.

[19-1. LCD display scheduler function]
First, functions (liquid crystal effect scheduler functions) constituting the liquid crystal effect scheduler data will be described. The liquid crystal effect scheduler function is an instruction (function, command) for effect control described in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data that constitutes the liquid crystal effect block data described above. Send and perform the rendition. Also, when executing the scheduler function for liquid crystal presentation, the attributes of the object to be displayed (for example, color, shape, operation content, etc.) can be changed by specifying parameters.

[19-1-1. LCD display scheduler function]
FIG. 183 is a diagram showing an example of the liquid crystal effect scheduler function of the present embodiment. An outline of each liquid crystal effect scheduler function will be described below.

Each liquid crystal presentation scheduler function is managed for each group. In this embodiment, there are groups of coordinate setting, scale setting, rotation angle setting, α setting, frame setting, Z index setting, effect SW setting, and sub-scheduler setting.

First, functions belonging to the coordinate setting group will be described. The functions belonging to the coordinate setting group, for example, specify the coordinates of the display area of the liquid crystal display device and set the liquid crystal display object. This makes it possible to designate and display the position of the object to be displayed on the liquid crystal display.

The functions "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_POSX", "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_POSY", and "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_POSZ" specify the X-axis coordinate position, Y-axis coordinate position, and Z-axis coordinate position, respectively, and set the display position of the liquid crystal display object.

The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANCHORX" specifies the X-axis coordinate position, and the function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANCHORY" specifies the Y-axis coordinate position to set the liquid crystal display target anchor point position. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANCHORXY" specifies the X-axis and Y-axis coordinate positions and sets the liquid crystal display object anchor point position. The liquid crystal display target anchor point position is the center position of the liquid crystal display target.

Next, the group to which the function for performing scaling (scale setting) of the display object (still image, moving image) belongs will be described. Scaling refers to, for example, setting the center of the display area that is to be enlarged or reduced when displaying on a liquid crystal display device from the size of still images or moving images stored in CGROM, or converting the unit of coordinates. It is to do. By setting an appropriate coordinate system in the display area and performing drawing processing, the object to be displayed on the liquid crystal display can be displayed at an appropriate position and size.

The scale setting group includes the functions "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALE", "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEX", "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEY", "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEZ", "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEXY", and "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEXYZ". The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALE" specifies the X-axis and Y-axis values and sets the enlargement or reduction ratio of the liquid crystal display object. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEX" specifies the X-axis value and sets the coordinates of the liquid crystal display object. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEY" designates the Y-axis value and sets the enlargement or reduction ratio of the liquid crystal display object. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEZ" designates the Z-axis value and sets the enlargement or reduction ratio of the liquid crystal display object. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEXY" specifies the X-axis and Y-axis values and sets the enlargement or reduction ratio of the liquid crystal display object. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEXYZ" specifies the X-axis, Y-axis, and Z-axis values to set the enlargement or reduction ratio of the liquid crystal display object.

Next, a description will be given of the group to which the functions for setting the angle at which the object to be displayed on the liquid crystal display is rotated and displayed belong. By storing only the reference liquid crystal display object in the CGROM and displaying it by designating the angle, it becomes unnecessary to store a plurality of liquid crystal display objects after rotation, and an increase in storage capacity can be suppressed. can.

The functions "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEX", "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEY", "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEZ" and "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEXYZ" belong to the rotation angle setting group. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEX" specifies the X-axis value, the function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEY" specifies the Y-axis value, and the function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEZ" specifies the Z-axis value to rotate the liquid crystal display object. Also, the function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEXYZ" designates the X-axis value, Y-axis value, and Z-axis value to rotate the liquid crystal display object.

Next, other functions will be explained. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ALPHA" is α setting processing, and specifically specifies the α value to set the transparency of the liquid crystal display object. The α value is a numerical value that indicates transparency, and can be set from transparent (colorless) that completely transmits the background color to completely opaque that does not transmit the background color at all.

The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_FRAME" is a frame setting process, and more specifically, sets a frame value, which is the drawing update interval of the object to be displayed on the liquid crystal display. A frame value is a numerical value indicating an interval for redrawing an object to be displayed on the liquid crystal display during animation processing.

The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ZINDEX" sets the Z index of the liquid crystal display object. The Z index is a hierarchy for displaying the liquid crystal display object, and by setting this, the liquid crystal display object is displayed on the front side or moved to the back side on the screen. For example, when the object to be displayed on the liquid crystal display is the background, the Z index is set so that it is drawn on the backmost surface.

The functions "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_LCDSW", "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_FRAMELCDSW", and "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_KICKLCDSW" belong to the effect SW setting group for setting information about the effect SW. The effect SW, which will be described later in detail, is information embedded in control information for drawing (images, moving images). Upon detecting this information, a predetermined process is called back to switch the effect contents. , or perform another production. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_LCDSW" sets the effect SW information to the still image index number on the CGROM and the moving image index number on the CGROM in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_FRAMELCDSW" sets frame effect SW information to the entire liquid crystal effect scheduler data. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_KICKLCDSW" sets SW information defining special control information, which will be described later, in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data.

The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SUBSCH" is a function for calling the sub-scheduler. By defining highly versatile processing as a sub-scheduler and calling it back at a predetermined timing, it is possible to simplify processing and improve development efficiency.

[19-1-2. Scheduler function parameter for liquid crystal presentation]
An example of the liquid crystal presentation scheduler function used in the gaming machine of the present embodiment has been described above. Next, the parameters specified when executing the scheduler function for liquid crystal presentation will be described with an example. 184 and 185 are diagrams showing an example of parameters for the liquid crystal effect scheduler function in this embodiment.

The parameters of the scheduler function for liquid crystal presentation are managed for each group similarly to the scheduler function for liquid crystal presentation. The group of scheduler functions for liquid crystal presentation and the group of parameters are grouped differently. The parameter group includes sequence control, effect SW, footage setting, symbol replacement related, sub-effect scheduler function, and the like.

The sequence control parameter group includes: AAD_FRAME, AAD_POS, AAD_POS2, AAD_POS3, AAD_ALPHA, AAD_ANGLE, AAD_ENTRY, AAD_ENTRY_B, AAD_SKIP, AAD_SKIP_B, AAD_SCALE, AAD_SCALE2, AAD_SCALE3, AAD_SIZE ” and so on. Each parameter will be described below.

"AAD_FRAME" is a parameter for designating a frame value and has a length of 16 bits. "AAD_POS" is a parameter for designating the X-axis coordinate position and has a length of 16 bits. "AAD_POS2" is a parameter for setting the X-axis and Y-axis coordinate positions, each of which is 16 bits long. "AAD_POS3" is a parameter for setting the X-axis, Y-axis and Z-axis coordinate positions, each of which has a length of 16 bits.

"AAD_ALPHA" is a parameter for designating the α value, which is the transparency of the liquid crystal display object, and has a length of 8 bits. "AAD_ANGLE" is a parameter for designating the rotation angle of the liquid crystal display object, and has a length of 16 bits. "AAD_ENTRY" is a parameter that specifies the total number of data of parameters to be set, and has a length of 16 bits. "AAD_ENTRY_B" is a parameter that designates the total number of data of parameters to be set, and is divided into two parameters with a length of 8 bits.

"AAD_SKIP" is a parameter that specifies the number of frames to skip, and has a length of 16 bits. "AAD_SKIP_B" is a parameter that designates the number of frames to be skipped during liquid crystal display, and is divided into two parameters with a length of 8 bits.

"AAD_SCALE" is a parameter that specifies a scale value when the coordinate system of the display area is uniaxial, and has a length of 16 bits. "AAD_SCALE2" is a parameter that specifies an enlargement or reduction ratio when the coordinate system of the display area is biaxial, and each has a length of 16 bits. "AAD_SCALE3" is a parameter that specifies an enlargement or reduction ratio when the coordinate system of the display area is three axes, and each has a length of 16 bits. "AAD_SIZE" is a parameter that specifies the size of the liquid crystal display object on the XY two axes, and each has a length of 16 bits.

A group of parameters of the effect SW includes "AAD_LCDSWENTRY", "AAD_LCDSW", "AAD_LCDSW_PARAM", "AAD_KICKLCDSWENTRY", "AAD_KICKLCDSW", "AAD_FRAMELCDSWENTRY", "AAD_FRAMELCDSW_PARAM", and the like.

"AAD_LCDSWENTRY" is a parameter designating the total number of registrations of effect SW, and has a length of 16 bits. "AAD_LCDSW" is a parameter that designates the number of the effect SW, and designates two numerical values of 16-bit length. "AAD_LCDSW_PARAM" is a parameter for passing the effect SW number, and has a length of 16 bits.

"AAD_KICKLCDSWENTRY" is a parameter designating the total number of registered kick effect SWs, and has a length of 16 bits. "AAD_KICKLCDSW" is a parameter that specifies the kick effect SW number, and specifies two 16-bit numbers. "AAD_FRAMELCDSWENTRY" is a parameter designating the total number of registered frame effect SWs, and has a length of 16 bits. "AAD_FRAMELCDSW_PARAM" is a parameter for passing the frame effect SW number, and has a length of 16 bits.

A group of parameters for footage settings includes "AAD_SEQFOOTENTRY", "AAD_SEQFOOT", and so on. "AAD_SEQFOOTENTRY" is a parameter specifying the number of still images to be registered in a predetermined area, and has a length of 16 bits. "AAD_SEQFOOT" is a parameter specifying the index number of the still image stored in the CGROM, and has a length of 16 bits.

A group of parameters related to symbol replacement includes "AAD_ZUGARA" and the like. "AAD_ZUGARA" is a parameter designating a pattern index number, and has a length of 16 bits.

The group of parameters of the scheduler function for sub-effects includes "AAD_SUBENTRY", "AAD_SUB" and the like. "AAD_SUBENTRY" is a parameter specifying the number of sub-scheduler function parameters, and has a length of 16 bits. "AAD_SUB" is a parameter specifying a sub-scheduler function number and has a length of 16 bits.

[20. Callback control based on image information]
Effect control in a game machine has conventionally been realized by executing a combination of a program for individually controlling various effect devices, a program for linking a plurality of effect devices, and the like. These programs were created by highly skilled programmers, written in program code representing the operation details and control procedures of the production device for each content of the notice in addition to the command associated with the variation pattern. In liquid crystal drawing, individual effect drawing data is called in the frame in which the effect is executed, and a plurality of effect drawings (background, pattern, notice, hold, etc.) are combined.

However, recent game machines are required to execute a wide variety of effects in order to improve the performance of the hardware and enhance the interest of the game machines, and it is necessary to realize complicated effect control. As a result, individual programmers are required to have advanced skills, and development man-hours have increased, making it difficult to secure the necessary number of personnel (programmers) both qualitatively and quantitatively. Furthermore, the increase in the total amount of program code of the effect control program increases the number of man-hours required for testing for the purpose of checking the operation of the game machine and improving the quality.

Therefore, in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, in order to shorten the development period and improve the quality, it is possible to realize the effect executed in cooperation with the liquid crystal drawing (image display) by program code. Instead, the development period is shortened and the quality is improved by outputting the program data for the game machine by a tool for creating the liquid crystal drawing performance and controlling the performance based on the output program data.

Specifically, by allocating images and moving images displayed on the liquid crystal display device in chronological order, a tool capable of creating data for executing the liquid crystal rendering effect is used. In this tool, a single production drawing data (notice, background, pattern, hold, etc.) is defined as one production block, and production blocks are grouped for each state such as fluctuation pattern and big hit to create a production common block. By combining a plurality of common performance blocks, a series of performance drawings such as a variation pattern and a big hit are realized.

However, due to the configuration of the game machine, there are effects such as display or non-display of effects related to the lottery, replacement of effects and patterns, and interactive effects in response to external input by the player. Then, it is impossible to realize all productions.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when creating the effect common block using the above-described tool, a effect switch (effect SW ) can be set (incorporated). The effect SW is a flag on the RAM and is set to ON or OFF. When the effect SW set in the effect data for drawing is set, a callback is always generated regardless of whether the effect SW is "ON" or "OFF". Further, when the effect SW is ON in the callback destination function, predetermined control is performed based on the defined effect SW information corresponding to the effect SW. The effect SW is set to ON by a command issued inside the main control board 1310 or the peripheral control board 1510 . The effect SW is set for each display object, still image, and moving image in the liquid crystal layer table, liquid crystal effect common block, liquid crystal effect block, liquid crystal effect scheduler data, and liquid crystal effect scheduler data.

When the liquid crystal effect block control unit 5310 executes and analyzes the effect blocks included in the effect common block at the time of liquid crystal drawing, and detects the incorporated effect SW, it dynamically calls the program function based on the detected effect SW (callback do). Then, based on the information processed by the called-back program function, a display list command can be created to realize ON/OFF of the effect display and replacement of the effect. It should be noted that program functions called by callbacks can also execute effects other than liquid crystal effects (eg, sound output, lighting of lamps, movement of characters, etc.). In addition, processing such as setting information necessary for subsequent effect control, such as setting of flags and updating of data in a predetermined area, is also possible. As described above, by calling a program function upon detection of the effect SW, it is possible to display or hide drawings by a plurality of effect blocks, replace effects and patterns, and implement interactive effects in response to external inputs by the player. .

The program functions for turning on/off the liquid crystal effect and replacing the effect called by the callback are preliminarily incorporated in the peripheral control unit 1530 and need not be newly created. Therefore, by setting the presentation SW to call a predefined program function while setting the presentation elements such as images and moving images at the time of designing the presentation, designers and planners who do not have advanced knowledge of programs, Complex performance specifications can be realized. Furthermore, by using the effect creation tool to create effect blocks (liquid crystal effect scheduler data) for each component of the effect, it is possible to significantly shorten the development period. By performing the test using the effect SW without performing the test, it is possible to simplify the test process and greatly reduce the time required for the test.

[20-1. Configuration of production switch]
Next, the configuration of the production switch (SW) will be described. FIG. 186 is a diagram for explaining the configuration of effect switches in this embodiment. The effect SW is uniquely identified by the effect SW number, and is associated with information necessary for replacing the effect, a program function called by a callback, and the like.

A performance SW number is associated with a performance SW group ID, a performance SW reset group ID, a performance SW attribute, a performance SW activation command address, a performance replacement information table address, and the like.

An effect SW group is a set of effect SW grouped according to the execution mode of the effect, and the effect SW group ID is an identifier of the effect SW group, and defines which effect SW group it belongs to. The production SW reset group has the same configuration as the production SW group, and by specifying the production SW reset group ID, the production SW groups belonging to the production SW reset group are set to OFF, and the productions belonging to the production SW group are collectively turned off. Can be hidden. The effect SW reset group ID is an identifier of the effect SW reset group. Since the effect SW group ID and the effect SW reset group ID have a bit configuration, a plurality of effect SW groups can be designated.

FIG. 187 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the effect SW group of this embodiment. Further, as described above, the effect SW includes active and passive effects, and the effect SW group is composed of one or a plurality of active effect SWs and passive effect SWs. Specifically, the head group number of active effect SW belonging to the effect SW group and the number of active effect SW, and the head group number of passive effect SW and the number of passive effect SW are included.

The effect SW attribute is information indicating the attribute of the effect SW, and specifically includes liquid crystal effect SW all reset information, replacement information, special control information, passive/active information, and the like. The liquid crystal effect SW all reset information is information specifying whether or not to set OFF the effect SW belonging to the specified effect group at the time of evaluation of the effect SW. The replacement information is information that designates whether or not to call a callback function for replacement of effects when the effect SW is evaluated. The special control information (special control behavior) is information specifying whether or not to call a predetermined callback function when the effect SW is evaluated. The passive/active information indicates the evaluation method of the effect SW. The passive effect statically evaluates the effect SW, and the active effect dynamically evaluates the effect SW.

The effect SW activation command address is the address of the effect SW activation command table. The effect SW activation command is a command sequence for setting the effect SW to ON, and commands for setting the effect SW to ON are defined in the effect SW activation command table. FIG. 188 is a diagram showing an example of the effect SW activation command table of this embodiment. FIG. 188 illustrates an effect SW activation command table "lcdsw_cmd_en_ykk_b051_crs_charge_suc" and an effect SW activation command table "lcdsw_cmd_act_b056_cmc_su3_out_red". Each table is composed of the number of commands and data for the number of commands for determination.

[20-2. Control by production switch in step-up notice production]
Next, the effect control using the effect switch will be described with a step-up notice effect as an example. FIG. 189 is a diagram showing an example of a step-up notice in the present embodiment, (A) showing the steps in which the step-up notice effect is executed, and (B) a screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device at each step. shows an example of

As shown in FIG. 189(A), the step-up notice of this embodiment can be executed up to four stages at maximum, and when the step-up notice of each stage ends, the development effect to the next stage is executed. . When the step-up notice develops, the step-up notice performance of the next stage is continuously executed, and when it does not develop, the step-up notice ends as it is.

Here, variations of the step-up notice effect at each stage will be described. In step-up notice 1, which is the first stage after the start of the step-up notice effect, an effect in which the display screen is painted with ink is executed. At this time, the degree of expectation is suggested by the color of the ink and the pattern of the filling. For example, when the color of ink is black, the degree of expectation is low, and the degree of expectation increases in the order of white, red, and rainbow. As for the pattern of filling, the degree of expectation increases as the number of positions where filling is started increases, and the degree of expectation may change depending on the position itself where filling is started. For example, if the filling starts only from the bottom left, the expectation is low. Expectations increase in order, and are highest when filling starts from the four corners.

Also, as described above, at the end of the step-up notice of each stage, the development effect to the step-up notice of the next stage is executed. The development effect is executed in a common manner halfway through in order to increase the player's sense of expectation regardless of whether or not the game actually progresses to the next stage. To explain the case of the step-up notice 1, first, the liquid crystal display screen is filled with a combination of black color and filling pattern determined by lottery. After that, when the screen is completely painted over, the ink gradually fades (becomes lighter), and the characters to be displayed in step-up notice 2 emerge. When the step-up notice 2 develops, the ink is removed as it is and the character display becomes darker, and the effect is continued. On the other hand, if the development effect fails, the characters are not darkened and the ink is removed and the characters are not displayed.

In the step-up notice 2, characters corresponding to expectations are displayed. Expectations are higher in the order of "Change", "Osu", "Kai", "Continuation", and "One-hit Kill". In the step-up notice 2 presentation mode, first, in the state where the characters are displayed, the screen is filled while enlarging the region to be filled with the combination of the ink color and the filling variation in the step-up notice 1.例文帳に追加After that, when the screen is completely painted over with black, the step-up notice 3 is entered. On the other hand, if the development stage fails, the ink will gradually peel off before the screen is completely painted with the ink, and finally the ink will completely peel off and the displayed characters will disappear. I will put it away.

In the step-up notice 3, the liquid crystal display screen is in a state where it is filled with black by the step-up notice 2, and an effect is executed in which the black gradually disappears from this state. At this time, the degree of expectation is suggested according to the pattern in which the ink is peeled off. For example, if the ink comes off only from the bottom left, the expectation is low. The degree of expectation increases in the order of the number of cases, and the degree of expectation is highest when the ink is peeled off from the four corners. Characters are displayed in the process of removing the ink, and when the characters are displayed on the liquid crystal display screen after all the ink is removed, the development effect is successful, and the step-up notice 4 is entered. On the other hand, if the character is not displayed on the liquid crystal display screen after all the ink has been removed, the development effect has failed.

The step-up notice 4 is the final stage of the step-up notice, and the degree of expectation is suggested by the content (pattern) and color of characters displayed on the liquid crystal display screen. For example, the character patterns have the highest expectations in the order of "game", "opportunity", "development", "enthusiastic fight", "heat", and "happiness". In terms of character colors, expectations are high in the order of black, white, red, and rainbow. In the effect mode of step-up notice 4, an animation or the like in which the displayed characters are enlarged is executed.

Next, a procedure for executing the above-described step-up notice by means of the effect SW will be described. Figures 190 to 192 are diagrams for explaining the procedure for executing a step-up notice using the effect SW in this embodiment. FIG. 190 is a diagram showing the correspondence between all the effect contents and the effect SW in step-up notice 1. FIG. Figure 191 (A) shows the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data and drawing image for executing the step-up notice 1 that is painted with black ink from the four directions of the screen, (B) shows red ink from the upper right and lower left of the screen. 10 shows the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data and the drawing image for executing the step-up notice 1 filled with . FIG. 192 is a diagram showing the relationship between the effect SW for replacing the effect related to step-up notice 1 and the effect.

FIG. 190 shows all the effects produced in step-up notice 1, each drawing (lower left black drawing, upper left black drawing, lower right black drawing, upper right black drawing, character failure, character success). The name of the effect SW and the content of the effect are described in association with each category. The total number of step-up effects shown in the figure is a total of 16 effects with 4 effects each for the lower left, upper left, lower right, and upper right drawing categories, and a total of 10 effects with 5 effects each for the character failure and character success drawing categories, for a total of 26 effects. It has become. In addition, there is always one effect that can be executed at the same time in each drawing division, and only one of the drawing divisions "character failure" and "character success" is executed, so the maximum effect that is executed at the same time in step-up notice 1 There are 5 renderings in total: drawing section "lower left", drawing section "upper left", drawing section "lower right", drawing section "upper right" and drawing section "character failure" or drawing section "character success".

Also, the effect determination method for each drawing division will be specifically described in accordance with the advance notice lottery result value of the step-up advance notice 1. FIG. First, lottery for step-up notice 1 is conducted to determine the contents of the effect related to black drawing. Specifically, the effect content related to the ink drawing is the selection of the position where the ink appears from the drawing division “lower left, upper left, lower right, upper right”, and the color of the ink that appears from the selected ink appearance position. Become. In addition, it becomes either the rendering division "character failure" or the rendering division "character success" and the contents of the characters displayed at this time.

Next, the configuration of the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data and the step-up notice 1 drawing image when the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data is executed without any control will be described with reference to FIG. 191(A). . As described above, the total number of effects for step-up notice 1 is 26 in total. is defined. When the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data is executed without any control, that is, when all the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data are executed at the same time, as shown in the drawing image of the step-up notice 1 , black ink spreads from the bottom left, top left, bottom right, and top right of the screen at the same time, and the characters "change" are faintly displayed in the drawing classification "character failure" and the drawing classification "character success", and then the drawing classification "character The characters "change" are erased in "failure", and at the same time the characters "change" are clearly displayed in the drawing section "character success".

Further, in FIG. 191B, according to the lottery result of step-up notice 1, the drawing section “lower left” is “red”, the drawing section “upper left” is “none”, the drawing section “lower right” is “none”, and the drawing section “lower right” is “none”. A command is issued in which the division "upper right" is "red", the drawing division "character failure" is "strike", and the drawing division "character success" is "none". As a result, the drawing image spreads red ink from the drawing section "lower left", and red ink spreads from the drawing section "upper right", and the drawing section "character failure" and the characters "kiai" are displayed lightly. , the character "Kaiai" is erased in the drawing category "character failure".

At this time, the effect SW corresponding to the corresponding effect is set to ON according to the content of each issued lottery command. Specifically, "LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_RED" is set to ON when the step-up notice 1 lottery command drawing division "lower left" is set to "red", and the step-up notice 1 lottery command drawing division "upper right" is set to "red". Accordingly, "LEDSW_RIGUP_S1_RED" is set to ON, and "LEDSW_MOJI_NGS1_KIA" is set to ON for the step-up notice 1 lottery command drawing classification "character failure is spirit". On the other hand, the step-up notice 1 lottery command drawing classification “upper left” is “none”, the step-up notice 1 lottery command drawing classification “lower right” is “none”, and the step-up notice 1 lottery command drawing classification “character success” is “none”. ' command does not produce an effect, so none of the effect SWs are set to ON and are set to OFF.

As a result, red ink spreads from the drawing section "lower left" from the entire production of step-up notice 1, and red ink spreads from the drawing section "upper right", and the drawing section "character failure" and "spirit" It is realized that the effect SW corresponding to the case of displaying characters is set to ON corresponding to the command based on the lottery result of step-up notice 1. - 特許庁

Subsequently, while referring to FIG. 192, using the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data of FIG. A mechanism for effect replacement will be explained.

FIG. 192 is a diagram for explaining the master data defined on the liquid crystal effect scheduler data for each drawing section in this embodiment, and the effect SW corresponding to the replacement data to be replaced with the master data. Specifically, referring to the lower left black effect replacement group in FIG. 192, the effect SW corresponding to the master data of the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data is the index number on the CGROM of the moving picture where black ink spreads from the lower left. and corresponding effect SW "LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_BLK". On the other hand, the effect SW corresponding to the replacement data corresponds to the effect SW "LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_WHI" corresponding to the index number on the CGROM of the moving image where white ink spreads from the lower left, and the index number on the CGROM of the moving image where red ink spreads from the lower left. effect SW "LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_RED", and effect SW "LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_REI" corresponding to the index number on the CGROM of the animation in which rainbow ink spreads from the lower left. The replacement data is not defined in the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data, but is separately defined in the lower left black effect replacement table. Also, the effect SW "LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_BLK" corresponding to the index number on the CGROM of the moving image where black ink spreads from the lower left of the master data is defined in both the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data and the lower left black effect replacement table.

The liquid crystal effect 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 analyzes and executes the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data in the process of creating a display list command for drawing the effect, and executes the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data. Triggered by (detected) the present effect SW "LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_BLK", a callback is generated, and control is transferred from the liquid crystal effect 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 to the program function for effect replacement.

The replacement program function called by the callback refers to the lower left black effect replacement table, determines all the effect SWs registered in the lower left black effect replacement table, and identifies the effect SW set to ON. do. In this embodiment, the step-up notice 1 lottery command drawing classification "lower left" is "red", and the effect SW "LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_RED" is set to ON, so "from the lower left" corresponding to the effect SW "LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_RED" The moving picture number on the CGROM of "red ink" is specified.

The program function for replacement called by the callback passes the specified moving picture number on the CGROM in red ink from the lower left to the liquid crystal presentation 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 and ends the execution. When the control returns to the liquid crystal effect 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 again, the liquid crystal effect 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 executes a CGROM corresponding to the moving image in which black ink appears from the lower left corner defined in the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data. Instead of creating a display list command using the above animation number, a display list command is generated using the animation number on the CGROM corresponding to the animation in which red ink appears from the lower left handed over from the replacement program function. create.

The feature of the replacement of effects by callback in this embodiment is that from a low-level control structure (in this embodiment, liquid crystal effect scheduler data, a data structure that is easy to change and suitable for tooling) to a high-level control structure (this embodiment By calling a callback program function for replacement, a program function that is unsuitable for change but can execute complicated processing), it is possible to separate detection of replacement timing and replacement control, making it simple Complicated processing is realized by using liquid crystal effect scheduler data, which is a data structure.

Further, in this embodiment, regardless of the identifier for callback (the ON/OFF set value of the effect SW in this embodiment), the process is always executed by the callback. Instead of executing the same control as the effect control of the present embodiment by callback, a structure for performing complicated control is incorporated into the liquid crystal effect scheduler data side, and the liquid crystal 1f drawing scheduler execution unit side has a complicated liquid crystal effect scheduler. If the performance control is realized by analyzing and executing the data, the complexity of the program code processed by the liquid crystal 1f drawing scheduler execution unit increases, and furthermore, when adding new functions or changing functions, be sure to It is necessary to change the liquid crystal effect scheduler data. In this case, it is necessary to change both the program code and the data, and not only can problems occur due to the change in control, but also functions that were operating normally before the change can be affected, causing new problems. There is a risk of

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, regardless of the callback identifier (ON/OFF set value of the effect SW), the callback always executes the process, and the multiple functions executed by the callback are executed. In the callback function of , determine whether it can be executed and the content of processing. By creating a corresponding callback function to realize a single function, even if a new function is added or a function is changed, there is no need to change the liquid crystal display scheduler data structure, and the call corresponding to the new function It can be achieved by creating a callback function or modifying an existing callback function. Therefore, the range of influence of the change or addition of functions is limited to the callback function to be newly added or changed, and the possibility of affecting other callback functions and causing malfunctions is reduced. In addition, compared to the case where the execution analysis of the liquid crystal display scheduler data is centrally executed with a single large program, the method of performing the execution analysis by multiple callback functions and the liquid crystal display scheduler data for realizing each function. However, the structure and composition of the program can be simplified more.

In the present embodiment, the explanation was focused on replacement of effects, but the mechanism of control by callback in this embodiment is not limited to replacement of effects, but also replacement of patterns, control of display or non-display of effects, and control of drawing targets. It can also be applied to conversion of drawing data, execution of scheduler data of other effect display devices, and conversion of scheduler data.

Here, the purpose of defining the effect SW "LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_BLK" corresponding to the index number on the CGROM of the moving image in which black ink spreads from the lower left of the master data to both the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data and the lower left black effect replacement table. explain. If the index number on the CGROM corresponding to the master effect SW is not defined in the effect replacement table, the relationship between the master and the replacement target, that is, the index number on the CGROM corresponding to the master effect SW must be determined by the liquid crystal effect scheduler. It exists only on the data, and the index number on the CGROM corresponding to the replacement effect SW corresponding to the master exists only in the effect replacement table. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, several thousands of effect replacement tables and effect SW are defined. In a situation where game specifications are frequently changed or added between the planning and development of a game machine and its introduction into the market, the consistency between the index numbers of moving images (images) on the CGROM and the effect SW. is extremely difficult to maintain.

As for the relationship between the index number on the CGROM and the effect SW, the index number on the CGROM corresponding to the master effect SW may be erroneously defined in the effect replacement table. It is possible that the above index number is mistakenly registered in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data. In this case, a difference occurs in the number of data of the index number on the CGROM corresponding to the command value of the performance lottery and the performance SW on the replacement table, and the replacement is performed with a performance different from the performance selected by the performance lottery. . Since the degree of expectation is set for each effect, it is possible that an effect dedicated to the big win, which does not appear due to fluctuations in failure, will appear, which is a fatal defect for the game machine. As in this embodiment, by defining the effect replacement table including the index number on the CGROM corresponding to the master effect SW, it is possible to confirm consistency by comparing the total number of effects and the replacement table. Become. In addition, in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data, any data in the replacement table can be defined without problems, so it is a control method that is extremely unlikely to cause problems. In this embodiment, even if the master effect defined on the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is drawn as a result of the effect lottery, the index number on the CGROM of the master on the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is not used and is always replaced. Using the index number on the CGROM of the master defined in the table, a display list command is created and an effect is drawn.

In the step-up announcement 3, as described above, ink is gradually erased from part or all of the vertices of the display area from the painted-out state, and characters emerge when the development effect is successful. On the other hand, when the development effect fails, the ink is completely erased without displaying the characters, and the step-up notice ends as it is. In either case of success or failure, since the effect of gradually erasing the ink from the vertex of the display area is executed, there are effect SW flags for four types of drawing patterns for gradually erasing the ink from each vertex. (Layer) is defined. Also, two types of effect SW flags (layers) corresponding to the result of the development effect are defined.

The upper left black replacement group, lower right black replacement group, upper right black replacement group, character failure effect replacement group, and character success effect replacement group other than the lower left black replacement group shown in FIG. 192 have the same configuration and control method as the lower left black replacement group. is.

In the step-up notice 4, since the step-up notice is not continuously executed thereafter, a production SW flag (layer) may be defined according to the aspect of the displayed character animation, or one type of production SW flag (layer) may be defined. Layer) only, and the type of character animation may be set with a parameter.

As described above, in the present embodiment, different types of effects are produced by individually defining the drawing effect pattern for each character content or the appearance position of black, and setting ON the effect SW flag corresponding to the effect to be executed. can be executed or combined renditions can be executed. Since the switching and combination of effects can be done by simply switching the settings of the effect SW flags individually, there is no need for technology such as creating a new program. Production of various variations can be realized. For example, in the step-up notice 1, it is possible to realize dozens of drawing patterns simply by combining four types of drawing patterns according to the appearance position of black and two types of display patterns as a result of development effects. As a result, the types of programs to be developed are minimized, the development efficiency of the performance control program for the game machine is improved, and the inspection of the developed performance control program can be made efficient, thereby improving the quality. can be done.

[20-3. Overview of control based on production switch]
Next, an outline of control based on the production switch will be described. FIG. 193 is a diagram for explaining the control procedure by the effect switch of this embodiment, and particularly shows the evaluation procedure for setting the effect SW to ON. In this embodiment, first, when the main command (main control command) that triggers the start of production from the main control board 1310 is received, the peripheral control internal issued to the configuration in the peripheral control board 1510 by the peripheral control unit 1530 Issue commands are generated. The peripheral control internal issue command is a command for executing the advance notice lottery or executing the effect by the peripheral control unit 1530 .

The effect SW command analysis module of the peripheral control board 1510 evaluates the analyzed main control command and the received sub-internal issue command, and sets the corresponding effect SW to ON. Specifically, it is compared with the effect SW determination data stored in the peripheral control ROM 1530b, and it is determined whether data matching the received command is registered. It is determined whether or not data matching the received command is registered in the command string of the effect SW determination data, and if the matching data exists, peripheral control is performed based on the effect SW number corresponding to the command string. The effect SW flag stored in the RAM 1530c is set to ON.

The effect SW determination data is composed of two kinds of information, and the first information is a effect SW determination command sequence for turning ON the effect SW. The effect SW determination command string is not fixed length, and it is possible to combine multiple command values, a main control command value and a sub-internal command value, or a combination of a peripheral control internal issued command value and a peripheral control internal command value. . For example, a variation start designation command value and a probability state designation command value transmitted from the main control board 1310 are defined side by side, or a background designation command of the peripheral control internally issued command value and a command value of the lottery result of the mini character notice are defined side by side. It is possible.

By defining multiple commands side by side, for example, if the same mini character notice has different mini characters displayed in different backgrounds, the background command value is determined, and after the background is specified, the mini character command value is determined. For the first time, it will be possible to specify the mini character's production corresponding to the background, but it will be necessary to make multiple judgments for the number of commands. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by defining the command value of the background designation command and the command value of the lottery result of the mini character notice side by side, the effect SW corresponding to the command value can be the mini character corresponding to the background. There is no need to make judgments multiple times, and the corresponding effects can be specified in the same manner as the effects defined by a single command, even for effects defined by a combination of multiple commands. Moreover, since it is possible to define a plurality of effect SWs for the same command value, a plurality of effect SWs can be activated simultaneously with a single command value.

The second information of the effect SW determination data is the effect SW number and the index number of the effect SW flag array. The effect SW determination data is registered with respect to all the effect SW by combining the effect SW determination command value and the effect SW number.

From the above, as shown in FIG. 193, when the command "0x103001" is received, "LCDSW_LEFDW_S1" of the effect SW number 100 is registered in the effect SW determination data, so the effect SW flag stored in the RAM Set lcdsw_flg[LCDSW_LEFDW_S1] to ON.

By setting the effect SW flag corresponding to the command as described above, as shown in FIGS. be

A function for executing an effect based on the effect SW is defined in the effect SW command analysis module. Examples of these functions are described below. FIG. 194 is a diagram illustrating an example of functions defined in the effect SW command analysis module of this embodiment. Each function takes an effect SW number (LEDSW number) as an argument.

LEDSW_TST is a function that determines whether or not the effect SW number is ON from a regular program or a called-back program. LEDSW_SET is a function for turning on the effect SW from a regular program or a called-back program instead of activation of the effect SW by a command.

LEDSW_OFF is a function for turning off the effect SW from a regular program or a called-back program. In addition, if the attribute of the effect SW defines the attribute of "reset all", based on the "reset target effect SW group ID" of the "effect SW information table" corresponding to the effect SW number, reset target effect SW All effect SWs belonging to the group are set to OFF.

LEDSW_GET is a function for acquiring attribute information of a target effect SW from a regular program or a called-back program. LCDSW_ATIMER is a function that acquires the frame time from when the active effect SW is activated from the regular program or the called-back program.

[20-4. Implementation example of production switch]
Next, an implementation example of control using the production switch will be described. Figures 195 to 200 are diagrams showing part of program code for executing control using effect switches in this embodiment. The program code shown in each drawing is written in C language.

As described above, the effect SW is set for each display object, still image, and moving image in the liquid crystal layer table, the liquid crystal effect common block, the liquid crystal effect block, the liquid crystal effect scheduler data, and the liquid crystal effect scheduler data. Since the effect SW is set for all the effect blocks, the process based on the effect SW is always called back when the effect block is executed. To execute a callback even when there is no need to execute a specific process, and to terminate the callback function after determining not to perform the specific process within the callback function.

FIG. 195 is a diagram for explaining the details of the configuration of the effect SW information table of this embodiment, (A) is an example of program code defining the effect SW information table, and (B) is bit assignment of effect SW control information. , (C) is a diagram showing an example of the effect SW group.

The effect SW information table is configured based on the effect SW information table management structure shown in (A), and includes effect SW group ID, effect SW group ID to be reset, effect SW control information (effect SW attribute), effect SW. Includes command information address and effect replacement information table information.

The effect SW group ID is identification information of the effect SW group to which the corresponding effect SW belongs. The effect SW group is grouped according to functions, such as effect SW for performing the same (similar) advance notice effect, effect SW for pending display, effect SW for notification, and the like. ing. The effect SW group ID is represented by bits, and one effect SW can belong to a plurality of effect SW groups.

The reset target effect SW group ID is identification information for designating the effect SW group whose effect SW is set to OFF when "all effect SW reset" is specified in "attrib bit assignment" described later. This makes it possible to collectively designate the effect SWs whose processing is interrupted (reset) at the time of switching the effect SWs. Like the effect SW group ID, the reset target effect SW group ID is represented by bits, and it is possible to designate a plurality of groups.

The effect SW control information is information that defines the functions of the effect SW, and specifically includes liquid crystal effect SW all reset information, replacement information, special control information, and passive/active information. The effect SW control information is composed of 16 bits, and each bit defines the function of the effect SW. The bits corresponding to the functions of the effect SW are as shown in FIG. 195(B), and the contents will be explained below.

The passive (PASSIVE)/active (ACTIVE) information indicates the evaluation method of the effect SW, and when the bit is "0", it is "PASSIVE", and when it is "1", it is "ACTIVE". In the passive mode, even if a command for activating the effect SW is received multiple times during the period in which the effect SW is defined, the drawing effect corresponding to the effect SW is performed only once, and in the active mode, the effect is produced during the period in which the effect SW is defined. When the command for starting the SW is received a plurality of times, the corresponding performance is re-executed for the number of commands received. Active is used, for example, when a drawing effect corresponding to the button presses is displayed when the button is pressed multiple times within the button valid period.

The special control information (special control behavior) is information specifying whether or not to call a predetermined callback function when the effect SW is evaluated. If the bit is set to "1", the user callback function is called instead of the system callback function.

The replacement information is information for calling a callback function for replacement of effects when the effect SW is evaluated. If the bit is set to “1”, the pre-defined callback function for replacement is called when the effect SW defined for each display object, still image, and moving image in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is evaluated. be

The liquid crystal effect SW all reset information is information specifying whether or not to set OFF the effect SW belonging to the specified effect group at the time of evaluation of the effect SW. When the bit is set to "1", the effect SW belonging to all the groups set by the "reset object effect SW group ID" is set to OFF when the effect SW is evaluated.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 195(A). As for the performance SW command information address, defined command information is output when the performance SW is set to ON at the time of performance SW evaluation. The command to be output is stored in the reference destination of the effect SW command information address, and the control of the new effect SW and the effect are executed by the output command.

The effect SW replacement table information is a replacement table in which data to be replaced is defined when "1" is set in the bit of the replacement information of the effect SW control information (when "with replacement" is specified). address is stored. Details of the replacement table will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the effect SW group will be explained. In this embodiment, when setting a plurality of related effects SW, etc., they are managed as a effect group. The production group includes an production SW group ID, an active production SW head ID, an active production SW number, a passive production SW head ID, and a passive production SW number.

The effect SW group ID is an identifier of the effect SW group. In the effect SW group, active effect SW and passive effect SW are stored in a continuous area. The active effect SW head ID is identification information of the effect SW positioned at the head among the active effect SWs belonging to the effect SW group. The active effect SW number is the number of active effect SW arranged from the effect SW corresponding to the active effect SW head ID. The passive effect SW head ID is identification information of the effect SW positioned at the head among the passive effect SWs belonging to the effect SW group. The passive effect SW number is the number of passive effect SW arranged from the effect SW corresponding to the passive effect SW head ID. As described above, by defining the effect SW group ID as the effect SW group ID to be reset, when "all effect SW reset" is specified in "attrib bit assignment", the continuous switch belonging to the effect SW group ID It is possible to simultaneously turn off a plurality of passive effect SWs and a plurality of continuous active effect SWs.

FIG. 196 is a diagram showing an example of program code defining effect SW numbers corresponding to effect SWs in this embodiment. In the program code shown in FIG. 196, enumeration types (enum) are used to define specific numerical values for the effect SW numbers. In this embodiment, the work area and the effect information table can be referred to by using the effect SW number as an index.

By defining the effect SW numbers in the enumeration type in this way, it is no longer necessary to directly handle numerical values when setting or referring to the effect SW numbers in the program, and the readability of the program can be improved.

Next, the effect SW flag and the effect SW information table will be explained. FIG. 197 is a diagram showing an example of program data defining the effect SW flag and the effect SW information table of this embodiment, where (A) shows the effect SW flag and (B) shows the effect SW information table.

The effect SW flag is a flag indicating (ON/OFF) whether or not the process based on the corresponding effect SW is executed on the callback function side. As shown in (A), the effect SW flag is stored in a byte-type array variable, and the index of the array corresponds to the effect SW number. When the effect SW corresponding to the effect SW number is executed, "1" (ON) is set, and when not executed, "0" (OFF) is set.

The effect SW information table is defined by the effect SW information table management structure shown in FIG. It has become. Also, the effect SW information table is stored in an array indexed by the effect SW number, like the effect SW flag, and stores data corresponding to all effect SWs.

Subsequently, the effect SW replacement table information and the effect SW replacement table for effect replacement will be described. The effect SW replacement table information is included in the effect SW information table as shown in FIG. 195(A). FIG. 198 is a diagram showing an example of program data defining effect SW replacement table information and effect SW replacement table included in the effect SW information table of the present embodiment. ) indicates an effect SW replacement table.

FIG. 198(A) is program data showing the configuration of effect SW replacement table information "lcdsw_cchanege_info_lefdw_s1". The effect SW replacement table information stores the address of the effect SW replacement table, effect SW master data, and effect SW replacement data. The address of the effect SW replacement table is the address of the table in which the number of the actual replacement material is stored.

The effect SW master data is effect SW data defined in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data, and in the case of "lcdsw_cchanege_info_lefdw_s1", the black color corresponds to this (LCDSW_LEFDW_S1_BLK). The replacement data is information indicating the material to be replaced from the master data. For example, there is a case where the color of black is replaced with white (LCDSW_LEFDW_S1_WHI), and the material information is replaced with the corresponding replacement data by evaluating the effect SW.

FIG. 198(B) is program data showing the configuration of the effect SW replacement table "lcdsw_cchanege_lefdw_s1". The effect SW replacement table first defines the number of columns and the number of rows of the material numbers defined in the replacement table. In this embodiment, the number of columns is one and the number of rows is four. After defining the number of columns and rows, information indicating replacement material is stored. In this embodiment, the replacement information has a one-dimensional table structure, but there is no problem with a two-dimensional or three-dimensional table structure.

A specific replacement method first refers to the effect SW replacement table information, and evaluates all of the effect SW effect switch master data and the effect SW replacement data defined in the effect SW replacement table information. At this time, one of the effect SW defined in the effect SW replacement table information is set to ON by a command issued as a result of the effect lottery. Here, it is assumed that the effect SW replacement data (LCDSW_LEFDW_S1_WHI) is set to ON. The same line of the effect SW replacement table is specified by using the number of lines of the effect SW set to ON in the effect SW replacement table information as an index. A material number (CG_MOVE_LEFDW_S1_WHI) corresponds to a line of effect SW replacement data (LCDSW_LEFDW_S1_WHI) in the effect replacement data, and the material number to be replaced is specified. A material number is an index number that identifies a still image or moving image on the CGROM.

[21. layer configuration]
Next, layers for displaying images and videos will be described. Layers allow the general use of display results by dividing the liquid crystal display object into a plurality of regions (layers) and drawing them. For example, by separating the background layer, it is possible to draw in a common method even if the displayed character is changed.

In this embodiment, a table (layer information table) for storing layer information is individually stored and managed so that changes in some layers do not affect other layers. can be done.

FIG. 199 is a diagram showing an example of program data defining the layer information table of this embodiment. (A) is a list storing addresses for storing each layer information table, and (B) is a layer information table (background data). for use). The effect SW described above is also defined in the layer information table. A callback function is called with the effect SW as a trigger, and whether or not to execute the corresponding liquid crystal layer table is determined based on the information of the effect SW in the callback function. decide. For example, when the effect SW (LEDSW_BG_RIV) is ON, the river background layer table (direct_layer01_common0002) is executed. FIG. 200 is a diagram showing an example of program data defining the layer information table of this embodiment. (A) shows the contents of the layer information table (preliminary first half 1), The contents of the first half 2) are shown. The layer information tables of the first half of the notice 1 and 2 both determine the layer table to be executed by the effect SW, like the layer information table for the background.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 199(A), layer information tables for background, pattern display, first-half notice, jackpot effect, character action, pending display, etc. are defined.

Also, FIG. 199(B) shows a layer information table for the background, and in the production in this embodiment, sea background, mountain background, and river background are defined, and furthermore, the background according to the game state (time saving medium background, high probability medium background) are also defined. Furthermore, variations such as partial background color change can be added by the effect SW.

FIG. 200A shows the layer information table for the first half of the notice, in which the roulette notice, the blackout notice, and the window notice are defined, and a command for clearing the notice is also defined. FIG. 200(B) shows the layer information table for the first half of the notice, in which step-up notice, button mini character notice, and conversation notice are defined. is also defined. The advance notice clear layer table is used to end the advance notice drawing executed in each advance notice layer table defined in each advance notice layer information table. Specifically, the effect SW group ID of the notice layer is defined as the reset target effect SW group ID of the effect SW control information of the effect SW described above, and the "attrib bit assignment" defines "all effect SW reset". Then, when the effect SW (LEDSW_YKK_CLR) is set to ON, all the notice effect SWs belonging to the effect SW group ID defined in the effect SW group ID to be reset are set to OFF, and drawing corresponding to the effect SW is performed. ends and disappears. In addition, the layer table for clearing the advance notice is empty data because there is no effect.

At the end of the area allocated to the list storing the layer table and the table storing the layer information, a record for judging the termination is stored. When the record for judging the termination is detected, it is judged that the data reading is completed. It becomes possible to This makes it possible to dynamically change the amount of data (the number of records) without setting the number of elements for each list or table in advance.

[22. Implementation example of step-up notice]
Next, an implementation example of the advance notice effect using the liquid crystal effect block data (common block) will be described by taking the step-up notice effect as an example.

[22-1. Effect layer table/LCD effect block data]
FIG. 201 is a diagram showing an example of program data defining the liquid crystal layer table and the liquid crystal effect common block in this embodiment, (A) is the liquid crystal layer table for the step-up notice effect, and (B) is the liquid crystal effect common block. shows the configuration of

As shown in FIG. 201(A), the liquid crystal layer table corresponding to the step-up notice effect has the number of liquid crystal effect common blocks registered in the liquid crystal layer table and the number of liquid crystal effect common blocks corresponding to the number of liquid crystal effect common blocks. It is defined as a pair with the total number of drawing frames and effect SW. In this embodiment, the total drawing frame number (580) frames, the effect SW "LCDSW_STEPUP", and the common block "LCD_COMMONBLK_STEPUP" are defined. A callback is executed based on the effect SW "LCDSW_STEPUP", and whether or not to execute the common block "LCD_COMMONBLK_STEPUP" is determined in the callback function based on the information of the effect SW "LCDSW_STEPUP".

The liquid crystal effect common block "LCD_COMMONBLK_STEPUP" is defined in the order of the effect SW, the total number of drawing frames, the loop start frame position, the playback time, and the liquid crystal effect block. As shown in FIG. 201(B), when there are a plurality of liquid crystal effect blocks, multiple lines are defined in the same format. After step-up notice 4, a terminal is set, and the number of steps can be increased or decreased by adding or deleting liquid crystal effect blocks. For example, when step-up notice 5 is added, data corresponding to step-up notice 5 may be added between step-up notice 4 and the end.

The effect SW, like the effect SW defined in the layer table, controls whether or not to execute the corresponding liquid crystal effect block based on the set value. The total number of rendering frames defines the total number of rendering frames of the liquid crystal rendering block. To explain using step-up notice 1 on the first line, it is defined that the liquid crystal effect block of step-up notice 1 is reproduced for (150) frames. The loop start frame position is a frame position for determining which display data frame to return to after the end of the reproduction of the liquid crystal effect block "LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1" on the first line.

The playback time is the playback time of the liquid crystal effect block "LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1". The relationship between the total playback time, the loop start frame position, and the playback time is that the playback time is the playback time of the liquid crystal effect block "LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1", so after the liquid crystal effect block "LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1" finishes playing, the liquid crystal effect block "LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1" will be played again. When performing loop reproduction from the beginning or middle of the program, the number of frames to be looped is added to the reproduction time, and the added number of frames is defined as the total reproduction time. Step-up notice 1 "LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1" LCD effect block playback time is (150) frames, so if you loop the second half 50 frames twice after playing the LCD effect block "LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1", it will be played for the total playback time. It can be realized by defining (250) frames of time (150) frames+loop playback time (50×2) frames and defining (100) frames at the loop start frame position. An effect such that the pattern fluctuates without being fixed during the pseudo-continuous effect can be realized by using the loop reproduction function.

Also, the reason why the loop start frame is defined as the frame immediately before the end of the playback even though the total playback time and the playback time of the liquid crystal effect block "LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1" in this embodiment are the same is due to some kind of problem. If the next production common block is not executed, the drawing is not updated, and in order to prevent the liquid crystal screen from stopping, the drawing is repeated based on the loop start point when the total playback time is exceeded.

In the present embodiment, the control by the liquid crystal presentation common block "LCD_COMMONBLK_STEPUP" in the case of executing the effects from step-up notice 1 to step-up notice 3 is performed after the peripheral control board 1530 executes the notice lottery related to the step-up notice. A peripheral control internal command, a step-up notice 1 command, a step-up notice 2 command, and a step-up notice 3 command related to the notice performance are issued. Subsequently, the step-up 1 effect SW "LEDSW_YKK_STEP_SU1", the step-up 2 effect SW "LEDSW_YKK_STEP_SU2", and the step-up 3 effect SW "LEDSW_YKK_STEP_SU3" are set to ON corresponding to the issued command. On the other hand, the step-up 4 effect SW "LEDSW_YKK_STEP_SU4" remains set to OFF because the step-up notice 4 command has not been issued.

After setting the effect SW, a callback is executed based on all the effect SW defined in the liquid crystal effect common block "LCD_COMMONBLK_STEPUP" to call the callback function. In the called callback function, it is determined whether or not each effect SW is set to ON, and a liquid crystal effect block corresponding to the effect SW set to ON is executed. Since 'LEDSW_YKK_STEP_SU1', 'LEDSW_YKK_STEP_SU2' and 'LEDSW_YKK_STEP_SU3' are set to ON in the liquid crystal presentation common block 'LCD_COMMONBLK_STEPUP', the liquid crystal presentation blocks 'LCD_YKK_STEP_SU1', 'LCD_YKK_STEP_SU2' and 'LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU3' are executed respectively. On the other hand, since "LEDSW_YKK_STEP_SU4" is set to OFF, "LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU4" is not executed. As described above, since it is possible to define a plurality of liquid crystal effect blocks in the liquid crystal effect common block and control whether or not to execute the liquid crystal effect blocks using the effect SW, it is possible to combine and execute a plurality of notices. , and furthermore, switching between display/non-display of each effect is possible.

Subsequently, the contents of the liquid crystal effect block of each step in the step-up notice will be explained. FIG. 202 is a diagram showing an example of program data defining liquid crystal effect blocks (LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1 to 4) for each step of step-up notice.

As for the contents of the liquid crystal effect block, first, the total number of data defined in the liquid crystal effect block is defined. The number of execution frames, the function, or the function used in the liquid crystal effect block that becomes the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is the two types of "LCD_NOP" and "LCD_NULL" and the liquid crystal effect scheduler data. "LCD_NOP" is a function that waits for the number of execution frames, and "LCD_NULL" is a function that indicates the end of the liquid crystal presentation block.

Next, the liquid crystal effect block will be described in detail. Referring to the liquid crystal effect block "LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU2", (3) at the top indicates that "LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU2" consists of 3 lines of data (the number of steps is 3). Since the next line is "LCD_NOP" specifying the number of execution frames (120), it waits for (120) frames from the start of execution of the liquid crystal effect block. (120) After waiting for the frame, the liquid crystal effect scheduler data "LCD_DIR_STEPUP_SU2" is executed for frames corresponding to the number of execution frames (175). After that, "LCD_NULL" in which the number of execution frames (1) is specified is executed, and the execution of the liquid crystal effect block "LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU2" is ended.

As explained in FIG. 189, at the end of the step-up notice of each stage of the step-up notice, the wait of "LCD_NOP" is used to realize the execution of the development effect to the step-up notice of the next stage. is doing.

Specifically, the liquid crystal effect block "LCD_DIR_STEPUP_SU1" does not wait, and starts executing the liquid crystal effect scheduler data "LCD_DIR_STEPUP_SU1". The liquid crystal effect block "LCD_DIR_STEPUP_SU2" executes the wait by "LCD_NOP", and after waiting for (120) frames, by starting the execution of the liquid crystal effect scheduler data "LCD_DIR_STEPUP_SU2", the liquid crystal effect scheduler data "LCD_DIR_STEPUP_SU1" When (120) frames have passed since the start of execution, the liquid crystal effect scheduler data "LCD_DIR_STEPUP_SU2" starts execution. As a result, at the end of the step-up notice 1, it is possible to repeatedly execute the development effect to the next step step-up notice 2. - 特許庁

In addition, it is possible to define a plurality of liquid crystal effect scheduler data in chronological order in the liquid crystal effect block. to execute the LCD effect scheduler data in the next line.

After the total number of functions is defined in the effect scheduler data for the step-up notice 2, the function NOP for waiting while the step-up notice effect 1 is being executed, the function LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU2 for executing the step-up notice effect 2, Finally the function LCD_NULL is defined which indicates the end of the scheduler data. Step-up notice 3 and step-up notice 4 are similarly described.

[23. Implementation example of button mini character production]
The liquid crystal effect scheduler data for the step-up notice effect has been described above. Next, a description will be given of an effect in which a mini-character appears on the liquid crystal display screen by prompting the player to operate the effect button while the pattern is changing and by operating the effect button within a predetermined period.

[23-1. Aspect of button mini character production]
FIG. 203 is a diagram for explaining the outline of the button mini-character effect of this embodiment. The button mini-character effect is performed when a lottery is drawn for execution when a main command is received or when a variation is started, and a prize is won. In the button mini character effect, when the effect button is operated during the button operation input acceptance period, a predetermined character (mini character) is displayed on the liquid crystal display screen. In addition, a first half valid period and a second half valid period are set for the button operation input reception period, and the mini characters are displayed in different modes.

To explain further, when the execution lottery for the button mini character effect is won and 90 frames (f) elapse from the start of the variation, the first half of the button mini character valid period starts. The effective period of the first half of the button mini-character is 90 frames, and an image (moving image) prompting the pressing of the button is displayed on the liquid crystal display screen when the first half of the effective period of the button mini-character is started. If you press the button during the first half of the button mini character valid period, the mini character will be displayed. Specifically, as will be described later, when the button is operated during the first half of the valid period of the button mini-character, the effect SW for displaying the mini-character is set to ON, and the corresponding liquid crystal effect block is executed by the callback.

If you press the button during the second half of the button mini character's valid period, the mini character will be displayed in the same way as during the first half of the button mini character's valid period. In FIG. 378, the character is displayed in a different manner from when the button is operated during the first half of the effective period of the button mini character. Characters may be displayed in different modes as much as possible.

If the button is operated during the second half of the button mini character validity period, the mini character will be displayed in the same way as during the first half of the button mini character validity period. In FIG. 203, the character is displayed in a different manner from when the button is operated during the first half of the effective period of the button mini character. Characters may be displayed in different modes as much as possible.

[23-2. LCD production common block]
FIG. 204 is a diagram showing an example of program data defining a liquid crystal layer table corresponding to button mini character effects in this embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 204, the liquid crystal layer table "direct_layer05_common0002" corresponding to the button mini character effect is the number of liquid crystal effect common blocks registered in the liquid crystal layer table, and the liquid crystal effect common block corresponding to the number is the total drawing frame of the liquid crystal effect common block. It is defined in pairs with the number and the effect SW. In this embodiment, the total drawing frame number (180) frames, the effect SW "LCDSW_BTN_MINIBEF", and the liquid crystal effect common block "LCD_COMMONBLK_MINIBEF" are defined. Subsequently, the total drawing frame number (150) frames, effect SW "LCDSW_BTN_MINIAFT", and liquid crystal effect common block "LCD_COMMONBLK_MINIAFT" are defined. In the liquid crystal layer table "direct_layer05_common0002", first, the liquid crystal effect common block "LCD_COMMONBLK_MINIBEF" is executed for (180) frames. Thereafter, during (150) frames, the liquid crystal presentation common block "LCD_COMMONBLK_MINIAFT" is executed, and execution of the liquid crystal layer table "direct_layer05_common0002" is terminated.

Next, the configuration of each liquid crystal effect common block for the button mini character effect will be described. FIG. 205 is a diagram showing an example of program data defining individual common blocks for button mini character effects in this embodiment.

The configuration and control method of the liquid crystal effect common blocks "LCD_COMMONBLK_MINIBEF" and "LCD_COMMONBLK_MINIAFT" in FIG. 205 are the same as the effect layer table and liquid crystal effect block data described in FIG. The effect SW "LEDSW_YKK_MINIBEF" and "LEDSW_YKK_MINIAFT" that call the callback function for determining whether to execute the liquid crystal effect block data "LCD_YKK_MINIBEF" and "LCD_YKK_MINIAFT" are active effects that define active attributes in the effect SW control information. Become SW. Therefore, the drawing effect (effect block) corresponding to the effect SW is executed as many times as the button is operated.

[23-3. LCD production block data]
FIG. 206 is a diagram showing an example of program data defining liquid crystal effect block data for executing the button mini character effect in this embodiment.

The structure and control method of the liquid crystal effect block data "LCD_YKK_MINBEF" and "LCD_YKK_MINIAFT" shown in FIG. 206 are the same as the liquid crystal effect block data explained in FIG. First, in the first half of the effect, "LCD_NOP" defined at the beginning of the liquid crystal effect block data "LCD_YKK_MINBEF" is executed, and it waits for (90) frames from the start of the fluctuation. . Subsequently, the liquid crystal effect scheduler data "LCD_DIR_MINBEF" corresponding to the button mini character first half effective period is executed for (90) frames, and the execution of the liquid crystal effect block data "LCD_YKK_MINBEF" is completed. In the latter half of the effect, "LCD_NOP" defined at the head of the liquid crystal effect block data "LCD_YKK_MINIAFT" corresponding to the button mini-character latter half effective period is executed, and waits for (30) frames from the start of fluctuation. After that, the liquid crystal effect scheduler data "LCD_DIR_MINIAFT" corresponding to the button mini character latter half effective period is executed for (120) frames, and the execution of the liquid crystal effect block data "LCD_YKK_MINIAFT" is finished.

As described above, since the production SW "LEDSW_YKK_MINBEF" and "LEDSW_YKK_MINIAFT" are active production SW, the production SW "LEDSW_YKK_MINBEF" and "LEDSW_YKK_MINIAFT" are set to ON while the liquid crystal production scheduler data "LCD_DIR_MINBEF" and "LCD_DIR_MINIAFT" are being executed. When the command to do is issued multiple times, the drawing effects corresponding to the effect SW "LEDSW_YKK_MINBEF" and "LEDSW_YKK_MINIAFT" are executed for the number of times issued. Also, the effect SW always generates a callback every frame, and the corresponding callback function is called. The control at the time of pressing the button is executed in the called callback function, and the callback is executed for each frame even after the button pressing control is completed until the execution of the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is completed. By creating liquid crystal presentation scheduler data for drawing presentation during the button valid period and controlling it with the active presentation SW, the period during which the callback is executed is set as the button valid period without judging the button valid period separately. becomes possible. For example, by repeatedly hitting a button, the number of repeated hits can be counted, and an effect corresponding to the number of times can be executed. Also, the lamp can be turned on according to the button operation by calling the sub production scheduler data including the function for controlling the lamp within the callback function. Furthermore, by calling sub performance scheduler data including a function for controlling a character, an operation corresponding to the number of button operations is performed, and the scheduler data for returning to the initial position after the expiration of the button operation effective period can be executed. The procedure for returning the character to its initial position is, for example, to wait by "LCD_NOP" until the expiration of the valid period of button operation, and then execute a production block including a function to return the character to its initial position.

[24. Liquid crystal effect scheduler for patterns]
As described above, in the present embodiment, when executing the notice effect, it is possible to replace the drawing contents according to the game state and the degree of expectation of the variable display game to be the notice target. Similarly, it is also possible to replace the identification symbols to be variably displayed in the variable display game when predetermined conditions such as the game state are satisfied. The outline of the procedure for replacing identification symbols will be described below.

In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the variable display of identification symbols is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle symbols, and reels on which identification symbols are arranged in a predetermined order are assigned to each row. Identification symbols are drawn on each reel in a mode corresponding to the game state, and each reel is defined for each mode. The variable display of identification symbols is realized by sequentially displaying identification symbols drawn on each reel together with a background image.

The display of the identification pattern is updated for each frame, and the effect SW is assigned, as in the previous notice effect. In the liquid crystal effect scheduler data for displaying the identification pattern, the index number on the CGROM of the still image or moving image for displaying the identification pattern and the effect SW corresponding to the index number on the CGROM are defined as master data. . A reel number is defined in the effect SW for replacement of identification symbols. The reel number represents a unique identification number displayed for each game state or effect. For example, if the identification patterns displayed for the mountain background, the river background, and the sea background are different, the left pattern of the mountain background is R0, the middle pattern is R1, and the right pattern is R2, and the left pattern of the river background is R3, and the middle pattern. is R4, the right design is R5, the left design of the mountain background is R6, the middle design is R7, and the right design is R8. By using the reel number, it is possible to individually correspond to the game state and the effect, and it is also possible to specify the display position of the identification pattern.

Additionally, the reel number includes a reel index number. A reel index number is defined for each reel arrangement number of identification symbols. The reel arrangement is the identification pattern design and the identification pattern when the identification patterns are displayed in order of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 0, and then return to 1 after 0. A reel index is defined by defining the total number and the display order of identification symbols. Multiple reel indexes can also be defined.

The identification symbol replacement table includes an identification symbol replacement table corresponding to a reel number and a reel index number corresponding to the reel number, and a reel replacement work number table for reel replacement. In the identification symbol replacement table, index numbers on the CGROM of still images or moving images corresponding to the reel arrangement are defined for each reel index.

Replacement of identification symbols is carried out using a reel index replacement work number table in addition to the replacement table of identification symbols. In the reel index replacement work number table, one or a plurality of work numbers for reel replacement on the RAM corresponding to each reel index are defined. On the reel replacement work, the temporary stop symbol number value of the identification symbol related to the pseudo continuous fluctuation, the fixed symbol number value of the identification symbol, etc. are displayed when the identification symbol is stopped or can be recognized by the player as if it is stopped. The identification pattern number value is stored in advance at the start of fluctuation by the peripheral control program according to the contents of the performance.

To explain the specification of the data for replacing the identification pattern, when a callback is executed based on the effect SW for replacing the identification pattern, the reel index number corresponding to the reel number is specified in the callback function for replacing the identification pattern. Based on this, the target reel index replacement work number is specified from the reel index replacement work number table. Further, the identification symbol number value stored in the reel index replacement work is taken out, and the reel index replacement work number is corrected based on the number of displayed identification symbols produced in the liquid crystal presentation scheduler data. Similarly, based on the reel index number corresponding to the reel number, the replacement table corresponding to the replacement table of the identification pattern is specified, and the reel in which the index number on the CGROM of the still image or moving image to be replaced in the specified table is corrected. It is specified using the index replacement work number.

Also, in the replacement of the identification pattern, even if the effect of the master defined on the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is selected, the index number on the CGROM of the master on the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is not used in the same way as the effect replacement. A display list command is always created using the index number on the CGROM of the master defined in the replacement table, and the effect content is drawn.

Furthermore, by replacing the identification pattern every frame, even if an erroneous identification pattern is displayed due to the occurrence of noise or the like, it is possible to immediately restore the normal display. In addition, by setting the reel according to the game state, even if an error occurs in replacement of the identification symbols, the player can grasp the game state regardless of the contents of the identification symbols. , it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest of the player.

[25. callback timing]
Next, a description will be given of the timing at which a callback is generated when the effect SW is detected. In the present embodiment, it is possible to determine the drawing division by the parameters passed to the callback function in the callback function.

FIG. 207 is a diagram showing an example of drawing divisions that can be determined within the callback function when the callback is executed by the effect SW of this embodiment.

"LCD_EFF_BEF_LCD_A" generates a callback before the start of liquid crystal A drawing, and "LCD_EFF_AFT_LCD_A" generates a callback after the liquid crystal A drawing starts. Also, "LCD_EFF_BEF_LCD_B" generates a callback before the liquid crystal B drawing starts, and "LCD_EFF_AFT_LCD_B" generates a callback after the liquid crystal B drawing starts. The liquid crystal A and the liquid crystal B are different liquid crystals, and by making it possible to determine the completion of drawing before starting the drawing of each liquid crystal, the completion of drawing of the liquid crystal A triggers drawing on the liquid crystal B, and the drawing of the liquid crystal B ends. , drawing can be performed on the liquid crystal A.

"LCD_EFF_BEF_ANIM" causes a callback before all drawing is started, and "LCD_EFF_AFT_ANIM" causes a callback after all drawing is completed. By judging before the start of drawing, it is possible to initialize the frame buffer with the necessary background color before drawing, and by judging the end of drawing, it is possible to instruct other rendering devices to execute rendering when rendering is completed. It becomes possible.

"LCD_EFF_BEF_ANIM" causes a callback before the drawing of the corresponding layer is started, and "LCD_EFF_AFT_ANIM" causes the callback after the drawing of the corresponding layer is completed. Predetermined processing can be performed before or after the drawing of a particular layer is started. For example, if a plurality of notifications occur at the time of drawing the notification layer by making a determination before starting layer drawing, it is possible to enlarge and draw the display of the notification with the highest priority. In addition, by performing the determination after the start of layer drawing, by drawing the effect around the pattern drawn in accordance with the timing when the pattern with high expectation stops before the start of drawing the pattern layer, the pattern with high expectation It is possible to display the effect around the symbol only when the is stopped.

As described above, it is possible to specify a drawing section and execute a predetermined process before or after drawing is started. It is also possible to generate a callback for each common block. As shown in FIG. 207, "LCD_EFF_BEF_COMBLK" can generate a callback before starting common block drawing, and "LCD_EFF_AFT_COMBLK" can generate a callback after common block drawing is completed. Execution of a specific liquid crystal effect block corresponding to a single effect constituting the liquid crystal effect common block is stopped by making a determination before the common block drawing is started, and the liquid crystal effect common block is not drawn. By performing the determination after drawing, it becomes possible to execute a liquid crystal presentation common block different from the liquid crystal presentation common block scheduled to be executed which was determined in advance at the start of the variation.

In addition, "LCD_EFF_BEF_DIR" generates a callback before the liquid crystal effect block drawing in the liquid crystal effect common block starts, and "LCD_EFF_AFT_DIR" generates a callback after the liquid crystal effect block drawing is completed. By making a determination before starting drawing of the liquid crystal effect block, it is possible to change the liquid crystal effect block to be executed according to the result of an external input by the player. Further, by making determination after the start of drawing of the liquid crystal presentation block, it is possible to add new drawing to the content drawn in the liquid crystal presentation block based on the drawing content of the liquid crystal presentation block that draws a single presentation. Furthermore, 'LCD_EFF_BEF_CAST' can generate a callback before the start of drawing still and moving images in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data, and 'LCD_EFF_AFT_CAST' can generate a callback after the completion of drawing the still and moving images. Various effects can be replaced by judging before the start of rendering of still images and moving images. Further, by performing the determination after the drawing of the still image or the moving image is completed, it is possible to add the drawing of the effects according to the contents of replacement of various effects.

As described above, since the control that can be realized differs depending on the drawing section, it is very important to determine the drawing section within various callback functions.

[26. Production switch group management]
As described so far, in this embodiment, multiple procedures (functions) are managed by the liquid crystal effect scheduler data for each liquid crystal effect block, and images and videos are drawn for each layer based on the state of the gaming machine and the classification of the effect. be done. Also, as described above, one or a plurality of effect SWs are set for each layer.

When the effect is executed, images and the like are drawn in a plurality of layers in parallel, and a plurality of liquid crystal effect scheduler data are executed in parallel. For example, in the step-up announcement effect, when the step-up announcement 1 is executed, the background layer background is drawn, and the identification pattern is drawn in the pattern layer. Further, the step-up announcement 1 is drawn on the announcement layer (notice_first half 1 layer). FIG. 208 is a diagram showing an example of drawing results of individual layers and drawing results of all layers when the advance notice effect of the present embodiment is executed.

At this time, one or a plurality of effect SWs are set for each layer, but if it is attempted to manage these effect SWs individually, the processing may become complicated. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the effect SW is grouped and managed for each layer, state of the game machine, and effect classification.

For example, the effect SW assigned to each layer is grouped. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 208, an effect SW group background, an effect SW group pattern, and an effect SW group notice are configured corresponding to the background layer, the pattern layer, and the notice layer. These effect SW groups may be further grouped and managed, and the effect SW may be managed for each state of the game machine and each effect category.

By grouping and managing the effect SW in this manner, individual effect elements can be collectively controlled. For example, if you want to change the background currently displayed and the pattern display and pending display that match the background to a different background when starting a new fluctuation, the background layer, pattern layer, and pending layer are divided according to the background. The effect SWs are grouped, and the effect SWs belonging to the group are collectively set to OFF within a callback function using a callback. As a result, it is possible to hide the pattern display and reserved display that match the current background together with the background, and by performing the pattern display and reserved display that match the new background in the corresponding layer, multiple It is possible to switch the drawing of only the required effect display among the plurality of effect displays superimposed and displayed in layers.

In addition, in the production that spans the game state, for example, in the big hit production after the start of the fluctuation and the end of the fluctuation, the pattern is hidden and the background is changed to the big hit production. It is also possible to display continuously. In such control, the effect group to be hidden is defined as the reset target effect SW group ID, and the effect SW specified to reset all the effect SW is changed to the liquid crystal effect common block at the time of starting the fluctuation. It can be realized by defining it in the liquid crystal presentation common block at the start of the jackpot presentation.

[27. exception common block]
In the present embodiment described so far, all the effects are managed as common blocks in units of blocks of a certain length for the purpose of increasing the efficiency of control of complicated game effects in order to increase the interest of the players. As a result, by selecting a production block according to the fluctuation pattern and the result of the advance notice lottery, and drawing based on the selected production block, a series of productions such as a variable display of symbols and a big hit can be realized, and complex control can be achieved. Control was realized to synchronize sub-effects such as accessories, lamps, and sound output with the drawing content. The common block is set with a period separated by a predetermined timing from the start of pattern fluctuation to the finalization of the pattern, and these periods correspond to, for example, the first half fluctuation and the second half fluctuation, and are assigned to the fluctuation pattern. It was set according to the fluctuation time of the pattern.

By configuring in this way, it has become possible to use a common block for general purposes with a plurality of types of variation patterns. Furthermore, by securing the independence of the advance notice effect executed in the first half variation and the notice effect executed in the second half variation, the degree of freedom in combining common blocks can be increased.

However, since the common blocks are separated by a predetermined period as described above, it is difficult to realize an effect that continues from the start of the variation to the end of the variation only by combining effect blocks of a certain length. When executing such effects over multiple periods, the preceding common block and the succeeding common block are associated with each other, and versatility is reduced. In addition, each common block is executed independently. Therefore, there is a possibility that the control becomes complicated in order to maintain the continuity of the presentation. Therefore, in order to realize such effects, it was necessary to create individual program codes for control instead of setting program data.

Therefore, in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, in this embodiment, not only are performance blocks of a certain length combined in all performances to perform a series of performances such as variable display of symbols and a series of performances of big hits, but also the length of the performance blocks is exceptionally configured to allow a performance block length that matches the performance period instead of a fixed length. Furthermore, by making it possible to draw a combination of performance blocks with different performance times, and to simultaneously draw a performance block straddling the combined performance blocks, a continuous drawing performance is realized from the start of variation to the end of variation.

The effect spanning a plurality of periods includes, for example, a countdown effect in which numbers are counted down when the pattern starts to fluctuate, and the countdown display continues from the first half fluctuation to the second half fluctuation. FIG. 209 is a diagram illustrating an example of a common block that spans multiple periods according to the present embodiment. (A) is the execution timing of symbol display and notice effect, (B) is a liquid crystal notice effect block by a common block, and 3 shows the configuration of a liquid crystal preview effect block with common blocks spanning a plurality of periods.

In the example shown in FIG. 209, the first half fluctuation is "normal fluctuation 12 seconds" and the second half fluctuation is "normal short reach" corresponding to the fluctuation pattern "10H03H". As shown in FIG. 209(A), step-up notice and BTN logo character object drop notice are executed in the first half change, and cut-in notice and group notice are executed in the second half change. The content of each notice effect is as described above. Also, a countdown notice is executed from the start of the step-up notice to the end of the group notice.

In FIG. 209(B), the liquid crystal effect block data of the notice effect using the common block (step-up notice, BTN logo character drop notice, cut-in notice and group notice), and the group notice from the start of the step-up notice It shows the configuration of the effect block of the countdown notice to be executed during the period until the end. Each block data corresponding to the common block is as described above.

The effect block of the countdown notice is composed of a function NOP that waits until the liquid crystal effect notice block data starts, a function NOP that waits until the latter half fluctuation ends after the end of the liquid crystal effect notice block data and the liquid crystal effect notice block data. . The function NOP that waits until the liquid crystal effect notice block data starts is a NOP that is executed before the step-up notice is started, and the function NOP that waits until the second half fluctuation is completed is a NOP that is executed after the group notice is finished. The same wait time is set.

As described above, by making it possible to set an exception to the execution period of the effect block, it becomes possible to operate the common block more flexibly. Also, by setting the waiting time before and after the start of the effect, it is possible to minimize the influence of deviation of the execution timing of other effect blocks due to the exception setting. The exception common block is also controlled by a callback function using the effect SW in the same manner as other common blocks.

[28. Image conversion]
Drawing data for one screen of the liquid crystal display is extracted from the frame buffer and stored separately from the frame buffer in the capture storage area of the VDP 1540a with built-in sound source for the purpose of enhancing the interest of the game and shortening the processing time related to drawing. , the image was reused, and processing such as deformation and additional drawing was performed. In this way, drawing data is temporarily stored in another area and used for drawing in the next frame, thereby efficiently realizing various rendering expressions.

FIG. 210 is a diagram illustrating a conventional configuration for writing an image to a frame buffer by writing an image written to each layer. As shown in FIG. 210, conventionally, images drawn on each layer are superimposed and written in a frame buffer, and then output to a display device.

Specifically, first, moving images and still images displayed on the background layer are written to the frame buffer using the display list command. Next, a moving image or still image displayed on the pattern layer is overwritten on the frame buffer using the display list command. Furthermore, the animation and still images displayed in the preview layer are overwritten on the frame buffer using the display list command. Finally, a display list command is used to overwrite moving images and still images related to the reserved layer on the frame buffer to create drawing data for one frame.

After that, the peripheral control board 1530 copies the drawing data for one frame to be displayed created in the frame buffer to a capture buffer separately allocated to the RAM of the VDP 1540a with built-in tone generator. After newly adding an effect around the pattern to the drawing data stored in the buffer for capture, the data is written back to the frame buffer to create one frame of drawing data for the next display.

By doing so, the drawing data to be displayed in the next frame can be easily created simply by adding an effect to the created drawing data. However, in image conversion according to such a conventional technique, only image conversion for one frame of drawing data can be realized. It is limited to enlargement and reduction of the entire liquid crystal drawing screen. It is impossible to perform image conversion on the drawing elements drawn on each layer on the buffer for capture or on each drawing element within the layer.

The reason why image conversion cannot be performed for each drawing element is that the drawing elements in each effect, such as the background, the design, the notice, etc., are overwritten on the frame buffer in the order of layers. It will be overwritten by the drawing elements of the layer drawn from . Also, since the drawing element is a set of colored dots when it is drawn on the frame buffer, even if you try to extract the drawing element with a rectangle, it will be overwritten with another drawing element. , the overwritten part of the drawing element data is lost.

Nowadays, with the improved processing power of VDP, there is little need to reuse image data for one screen of the liquid crystal display that has already been drawn. Therefore, an increase in load was expected in order to execute complicated drawing processing.

In this embodiment, in order to solve the above-mentioned problems and perform more diverse effects, image data for one screen of the liquid crystal display of the created frame buffer is captured, and the captured image is transformed and new drawing is performed. Instead of adding , when drawing new image data for one screen of the liquid crystal display, for each effect display unit that constitutes the image data for one screen of the liquid crystal display, the image can be changed dynamically during drawing. Complicated performance expression is realized by adding new drawing.

Specifically, a single effect drawing data (announcement, background, pattern, hold, etc.) is defined as one effect block, and the effect SW is stored in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data for displaying by the effect block in units of effect blocks. incorporate. Then, the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is executed and analyzed during liquid crystal drawing, and processing (program function) is dynamically called (callback) based on the information of the effect SW incorporated in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data.

When changing the image, instead of drawing the corresponding effect block in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data and the program function called back on the frame buffer, it is allocated on the RAM of the VDP 1540a with built-in sound source separately from the frame buffer. Drawing is performed on an off-screen buffer (temporary storage means for image display information). After changing the image or adding a new image to the image on the off-screen buffer, the image is written back to the frame buffer. By configuring in this way, in addition to changing the image only for a specific notice, adding a new image, and replacing the effect of only the background, changing the image of an image in which multiple effects are superimposed, or creating a new image. Additions can be realized.

Hereinafter, a configuration for storing an image drawn on each layer in an off-screen buffer, converting the image stored in the off-screen buffer, and writing the image to a frame buffer will be described in detail. FIG. 211 is a diagram illustrating the procedure for converting an image file stored in the off-screen buffer and then writing it to the frame buffer in this embodiment.

As described above, one or a plurality of image conversion buffers called off-screen buffers, which are different from frame buffers, are allocated to the RAM of the VDP 1540a with built-in sound source. Then, image conversion is performed in the image conversion buffer, and complex image conversion is made possible by combining the image converted on one or more off-screen buffers and the image drawn on the frame buffer.

To explain further, the effect SW is embedded in the liquid crystal effect block data that constitutes each layer corresponding to the effect and in each liquid crystal effect scheduler data that constitutes the liquid crystal effect block data. A callback function is called by a callback based on the provided effect SW, and image conversion is performed in the callback function.

In FIG. 211, first, before starting the drawing of the background layer, the drawing target is switched from the frame buffer to the off-screen buffer A within the function called back based on the effect SW. Next, at the drawing timing of each effect element of the background layer, a display list command for enlarging each effect element of the background layer is created and sent to the off-screen buffer A in the function called back based on the effect SW. By doing so, each enlarged background is drawn on the off-screen buffer A.

Subsequently, before starting the drawing of the pattern layer, the drawing object is switched from the frame buffer to the off-screen buffer A and drawn in the function called back based on the effect SW. Next, at the drawing timing of each effect element of the pattern layer, an effect is added to the pattern drawn on the background drawn on the off-screen buffer A within the function called back based on the effect SW. Create a display list command. By transmitting this display list command, effects can be added to the background and pattern drawn in the off-screen buffer A, and the image drawn in the off-screen buffer A is overwritten in the frame buffer.

Subsequently, before starting the drawing of the preview layer, the drawing target is switched from the frame buffer to the off-screen buffer B in the function called back based on the effect SW. Next, at the timing when the drawing of all effect elements related to the notice layer is completed, a display list command to rotate the notice drawing of each effect element of the notice layer is executed in the function called back based on the effect SW. create. By sending this display list command, each rotated preview is drawn in the off-screen buffer B, and the image drawn in the off-screen buffer B is overwritten in the frame buffer.

Finally, write all the effect elements of the reserve layer to the frame buffer to create a liquid crystal drawing screen for one frame to be displayed this time.

By the above procedure, unlike the conventional image conversion described above, the image conversion is not performed for the entire screen, but for each layer drawing unit, the drawing element unit constituting the layer, and the image conversion regardless of the order of drawing to the frame buffer. It can be performed.

This embodiment is characterized in that callbacks based on the same effect SW are performed multiple times at each drawing timing within a period from the start of drawing of the liquid crystal screen for one frame to the end of drawing. The details of the types of drawing timing are as described above with reference to FIG.

Further, by performing image conversion using callbacks, there is no need to determine or monitor whether or not the image being drawn is subject to image conversion. Furthermore, at the timing of creating a display list command that draws the image to be converted, instead of the start of drawing related to a series of fluctuations, the image is displayed based on the lottery result value of the preliminary lottery and the result of the interactive operation by the user's external input. It becomes possible to determine the method of conversion.

[29. RAM-less transfer]
Conventionally, a display list command is created based on the animation data stored in the CGROM, and the VDP 1540a with built-in sound source processes the created display list command, thereby drawing during execution of the game effect. At this time, the display list commands created while analyzing the animation data stored in the CGROM are stored in a buffer assigned to the peripheral control RAM 1530c, and after completion of the display list command creation for one screen, the external request DMA (transfer means) was used to send the contents of the buffer to the VDP.

Currently, however, production specifications are becoming more complex and the processing load is increasing, which increases processing time such as advance notice lottery processing at the start of fluctuations. The processing time for the motor data creation process is also increasing due to the increase in the number. Since the processing time for peripheral control such as effects is executed at a fixed cycle, there is a risk that the processing may not be completed within the cycle if the above-mentioned high-load processing is executed repeatedly. .

Aside from exceptions when the processing cannot be completed within the cycle, when the processing cannot be routinely completed within the cycle, the game control by the main control device and the performance control by the peripheral control devices are synchronized based on the processing cycle. The progress of the game and the presentation of the game by each presentation device are separated from each other, and there is a possibility that the interest in the game is remarkably reduced.

Therefore, it has been necessary to shorten the processing time of the peripheral control processing, such as by reducing the time required for high-load processing in the peripheral control processing such as effects. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the processing time for analyzing the animation data on the CGROM and creating the native display list commands that can be processed by the VDP 1540a with built-in sound source, which has a relatively high load in the peripheral control processing, is reduced. A means for reducing the processing time of the entire peripheral control processing will be described.

First, a conventional procedure for transferring a display list command group for displaying an image on the liquid crystal display device to the VDP 1540a with built-in sound source will be described. FIG. 212 is a diagram for explaining the procedure for temporarily storing a display list command group in the peripheral control RAM 1530c and then transferring it to the tone generator built-in VDP 1540a.

In the procedure shown in FIG. 212, first, various liquid crystal presentation scheduler data is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1530b by the liquid crystal presentation scheduler display list control module, and the liquid crystal presentation scheduler data is analyzed and converted into a VDP native display list command group. The purpose of converting the liquid crystal effect scheduler data to the VDP native display list command group is that the liquid crystal effect scheduler data contains information (VDP register number and parameter value corresponding to the register number) related to the display list command to be sent to the VDP 1540a with built-in sound source. Therefore, it is necessary to convert the liquid crystal effect scheduler data into VDP native display list commands that can be executed by the VDP 1540a with built-in tone generator. The converted VDP native display list command group is temporarily stored in peripheral control RAM 1530c. Also, when the callback function called by the presentation SW is executed when the liquid crystal presentation scheduler data is executed, the liquid crystal presentation scheduler data is analyzed and converted into a VDP native display list command group as required and stored in a peripheral control RAM 1530c.

Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a sets the display list transfer to the external request DMA in the process of processing the liquid crystal presentation scheduler data. As a result, the VDP native display list command group stored in the peripheral control RAM 1530c is acquired from the peripheral control RAM 1530c by the external request DMA and transferred to the VDP with built-in sound source 1540a.

When the VDP with built-in tone generator 1540a receives the transferred VDP native display list command, it temporarily stores it in the display list FIFO. The VDP 1540a with built-in sound source processes the display list stored in the display list FIFO from the top, and outputs an image (moving image) to the liquid crystal display device.

As described above, the display list command group for one frame is stored in the buffer of the peripheral control RAM 1530c, and the display list command group is transferred from the buffer to the VDP 1540a using the external request DMA in the next processing cycle after the display list command group is created. Drawing is realized by sending. However, the process of analyzing and converting a huge amount of liquid crystal effect scheduler data for one screen into a VDP native display list command group results in a large processing load. In addition, in the case of a configuration in which a plurality of VDPs of different manufacturers are installed in one game machine, the liquid crystal effect scheduler data in the intermediate data format is analyzed and converted into a VDP native display list command group corresponding to the VDP of each manufacturer. becomes possible.

Therefore, in this embodiment, a configuration is applied in which part or all of the display list command group can be transferred to the tone generator built-in VDP 1540a without being stored in the peripheral control RAM 1530c. FIG. 213 is a diagram for explaining the procedure for transferring the display list command group to the tone generator built-in VDP 1540a without storing it in the peripheral control RAM 1530c in this embodiment.

In the procedure shown in FIG. 213, first, the display list transfer setting is performed for the external request DMA by the liquid crystal presentation scheduler display list selection management module. The external request DMA acquires the set display list command group not from the peripheral control RAM 1530c but from the peripheral control ROM 1530b.

The peripheral control ROM 1530b stores liquid crystal presentation scheduler data in the same manner as when the display list command group is temporarily stored in the peripheral control RAM 1530c, but each liquid crystal presentation scheduler data is a converted VDP native display list command group. and an interrupt display list command.

The external request DMA acquires the designated liquid crystal presentation scheduler data from the peripheral control ROM 1530b based on the transfer setting by the liquid crystal presentation scheduler display list selection management module, and transfers it to the tone generator built-in VDP 1540a. The VDP with built-in tone generator 1540a temporarily stores the transferred VDP native display list command and interrupt display list command in the display list FIFO.

The sound source built-in VDP 1540a extracts the VDP native display list command from the display list FIFO, analyzes and executes the extracted VDP native display list command, and writes the image to the frame buffer. Furthermore, when the interrupt display list command transferred together with the VDP native display list command group is analyzed and executed, the analysis of the display list is interrupted, and a transfer interrupt request is issued to the external request DMA. After that, an interrupt is generated to the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

When the peripheral control MPU 1511a detects an interrupt from the tone generator built-in VDP 1540a, the interrupt processing module determines that the interrupt is caused by an interrupt display list command, and executes a callback. The callback function refers to the callback information table corresponding to the liquid crystal presentation scheduler data, and replaces the presentation and the pattern. The effect replacement method is the same as the explanation using FIG. 198 and the like, and the symbol replacement method is the same as the explanation using FIG. 198 and the like. The liquid crystal effect scheduler data corresponding callback information table defines the effect SW corresponding to the number of interrupt display list commands defined in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data. The replacement information is determined by the callback function, a display list command is created based on the determined replacement information, and is transmitted to the tone generator built-in VDP 1540a. After that, the peripheral control MPU 1511a transmits a display list command for resuming display list analysis to the tone generator VDP 1540a. The tone generator built-in VDP 1540a analyzes the display list analysis restart display list command, generates a transfer restart request to the external request DMA, and restarts display list command analysis.

By processing only the replacement part of the presentation using the callback function as described above, the peripheral control RAM 1530c (temporary storage means) can be used without performing any conversion of the VDP native display list related to all presentations other than the replacement. Therefore, it becomes possible to transfer from the peripheral control ROM 1530b to the tone generator built-in VDP 1540a using the external request DMA (transfer means).

With the configuration as described above, the VDP native display list command group can be transferred to the tone generator built-in VDP 1540a without being stored in the peripheral control RAM 1530c. This makes it possible to reduce the load on the peripheral control MPU 1511a accompanying image display, and speed up image processing. In addition, since the used area of the peripheral control RAM 1530c can be saved, the storage area can be used effectively.

It should be noted that the peripheral control ROM 1530b may store only VDP native display list command groups with high frequency of use, and the VDP native display list command groups with low use frequency may be processed according to the conventional procedure. As a result, processing of frequently used display list commands can be shortened, thereby improving the processing speed as a whole and suppressing an increase in the capacity of the peripheral control ROM 1530b. In addition, display list commands corresponding to highly versatile images (moving images) are stored in the peripheral control ROM 1530b, and image processing that differs depending on the model and version is performed according to the conventional procedure, thereby improving development efficiency. is also possible.

[30. Alignment adjustment]
A processor (CPU, MPU) used for game control and peripheral control (performance control) of a game machine can basically handle data types of integer type and floating point type. Integer types that can be used with a 32-bit CPU are char (character, character) type, int (integer) type, and long (long integer) type, with sizes of 1 byte, 2 bytes, and 4 bytes, respectively. . Floating point types are float (single precision) type and double (double precision) type, and have sizes of 4 bytes and 8 bytes, respectively.

The processor used for the peripheral control of the game machine, whether it is a CISC processor or a RISC processor, can read and write data in memory (ROM, RAM) in 1-byte units at all addresses. It has become a machine. Note that addresses for reading and writing multiple bytes of data are not limited to this. When the processor reads multiple bytes of data, it always reads from a byte boundary, and an alignment violation occurs when accessing across a byte boundary. The behavior when an alignment violation occurs depends on the processor. Relax.

However, in the current development of game machines, when a program that controls a game is executed, a data structure consisting of multiple pieces of information on the memory (ROM, RAM) is created without being aware of the alignment. I had a lot of things to do. As a result, an alignment violation may occur during program execution, and the program execution speed may decrease. In the peripheral control of a game machine, all processing must be completed within a predetermined processing cycle, and thus a decrease in program execution speed can pose a serious problem. In particular, since the presentation of a game machine is based on multiple elements, it is necessary to collectively manage various information related to each element, and store various information in different types of data types. data structure is used.

In order to solve the above problems, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, in a data structure composed of a plurality of information used for game control, when storing data corresponding to the data structure on the memory, each information Explicitly embed empty data between or at the end of the area that stores the . By adjusting the data access start position by the processor and arranging the information so that the processor always accesses from the byte boundary address, alignment violations are prevented and the program execution speed is prevented from declining. can be done. Alignment adjustment for all ROM and RAM data structures is a huge amount of work, so the load on the processor is large and the processing time is long. It is desirable to adjust the alignment using the data structures on the ROM and RAM related to the processing for rendering, the control processing for drawing the liquid crystal, the lamp control processing, and the like. Also, there is no problem in performing alignment adjustment other than the process described above.

[31. Configuration for displaying a plurality of identification patterns]
By the way, in recent years, since a wide variety of effects have been required in order to increase interest in games, the contents of effects on the effect display device have become more complicated and the contents of drawing have become more diverse. In the embodiment described so far, only one set of identification symbols for informing the result of the variable display is displayed, and the game is played by adding a relatively wide variety of effects to the variable display of the set of identification symbols. Although it was mainly to progress, there are players who do not like a wide variety of effects. There is a possibility that the game interest may be lowered in a configuration in which a wide variety of presentations are frequently performed. Therefore, for the purpose of providing a gaming machine that meets the needs of a wide range of players, a configuration capable of displaying a plurality of unique sets of identification symbols will be described below. Specifically, a plurality of display areas for performing variable display of identification symbols on the effect display device 1600 are assigned to one or a plurality of display devices (display screens), and any player needs among different player needs are assigned. In order to be able to cope with , the variable display of the identification pattern of another set is simultaneously progressed. Each display area is common in that the result of the variable display is notified by the identification pattern, but is displayed in a different effect mode such as a variation mode of the identification pattern.

[31-1. Aspect of display area of identification pattern]
FIG. 214 is a diagram showing an example of a configuration having a plurality of display areas for displaying the above-described identification symbols when the above-mentioned plurality of sets of identification symbols are variably displayed under the control of the peripheral control MPU 1511a in this embodiment. (A) is a configuration example having a display area A and a display area B of identification symbols on one display screen in the effect display device 1600, and (B) is a configuration example in which two display screens are provided, and identification symbols are displayed on each display screen. This is a configuration example having a display area A and a display area B. FIG.

In the example shown in FIG. 214(A), one screen has a display area A and a display area B of identification patterns, and the display area A is assigned to the upper part of the screen and the display area B is assigned to the lower part of the screen. A first identification pattern 8010 is displayed in the display area A, and a second identification pattern 8020 is displayed in the display area B. In the example shown in FIG. 214(A), display area A and display area B are configured as display areas of the same size, and display area A and display area B are separated by a wavy border extending in the lateral direction of the center. It is Also, the first identification pattern 8010 is composed of three-digit patterns of a first left pattern 8010a, a first middle pattern 8010b and a first right pattern 8010c. Similarly, the second identification pattern 8020 is a three-digit pattern of a second left pattern 8020a, a second middle pattern 8020b, and a second right pattern 8020c in accordance with the fact that the first identification pattern 8010 is a three-digit pattern. Configured. The sizes of the display areas A and B are not limited to the same size, and may be different sizes.

The variable display of the first identification pattern 8010 and the second identification pattern 8020 is started at the same time and stopped at the same time. The individual symbols (left symbol, middle symbol, right symbol) of each identification symbol may be stopped at any timing, but the timing at which the stop mode of all the identification symbols is finally determined is the same. In addition, the final stop pattern is a combination of the same stop patterns (lottery result) so that the player does not misunderstand any of the identifying patterns and does not feel uncomfortable. For example, when deriving a winning result as a result of a lottery, all the individual identification patterns of the first identification pattern 8010 become the same pattern combination (for example, "777" etc.), and in line with it, the second All of the individual identification patterns of the identification pattern 8020 also have the same pattern combination (such as "777" equivalent to the first identification pattern 8010). Also, when deriving the no-reach result as a result of the lottery, the individual identification patterns of the first identification pattern 8010 do not constitute the reach display (the left pattern and the right pattern are the same). "224" etc.), and in line with it, the individual identification patterns of the second identification pattern 8020 also do not constitute a reach display (the left pattern and the right pattern are the same) A pattern combination (equivalent to the first identification pattern 8010 ("135", "224", etc.). Also, when deriving the result of the lottery with reach out, the individual identification patterns of the first identification pattern 8010 constitute the reach display (the left pattern and the right pattern are the same), but the patterns are not all the same. Combinations (for example, "131", "242", etc.) are formed, and in line with it, the individual identification patterns of the second identification pattern 8020 do not constitute a reach display (the left pattern and the right pattern are the same). "135", "224", etc. equivalent to the first identification pattern 8010).

It should be noted that the first identification pattern 8010 displayed in the display area A and the second identification pattern 8020 displayed in the display area B may be any pattern display mode in which the player can recognize that they are equivalent pattern combinations. For example, one display area is configured to display a combination of symbols in a pattern display mode (such as "123") consisting of "Chinese numerals", while the other display area is configured to display a pattern consisting of "alphanumeric characters". The symbol combination may be displayed in a display mode (such as "123"). Also, the combination of symbols may be displayed in the same kind of symbol display mode in both display areas (for example, "123" is displayed in both display areas). Moreover, when displaying the same type of pattern display mode, the display mode (font) may be the same or may be different. Further, in the present embodiment, the number of digits of the first identification pattern 8010 and the second identification pattern 8020 is set to three digits. For example, the number of digits of the first identification pattern 8010 and the number of digits of the second identification pattern 8020 may be 2 digits, or the number of digits of the first identification pattern 8010 and the second identification pattern 8020 may be 4. It may be composed of the same number of digits or more. Although details will be described later, the first identification pattern 8010 may have the same number of digits as the second identification pattern 8020 when the stop mode of the second identification pattern 8020 is finally determined. In the variable display process of the 1 identification pattern 8010, the number of digits may be temporarily changed from the final number of digits.

In this embodiment, the same type of pattern display mode (alphanumeric pattern in this embodiment) is adopted in the display areas of both the first identification pattern 8010 and the second identification pattern 8020, but each identification pattern The mode of the additional decoration display added to each pattern is made different. Specifically, the first identification pattern 8010 has an additional decoration display for each identification pattern, giving impact to each identification pattern itself, and various effects are also performed by these additional decoration displays ( high decorative dynamic display). On the other hand, the second identification pattern 8020 does not display additional decorations like the first identification pattern 8010, or at least displays simpler additional decorations than the first identification pattern 8010 (lower decorative dynamic display).

Furthermore, the kind of the pattern forming the first identification pattern 8010 and the kind of the pattern forming the second identification pattern 8020 do not necessarily have to exactly match or strictly correspond one-to-one. For example, according to the effect mode, the first identification pattern 8010 has a number pattern (0 to 9) and a character pattern (for example, a pattern imitating an airplane) as patterns that are variably displayed in each identification pattern, The second identification pattern 8020 may be only number patterns (0 to 9). Further, in this case, when the first identification pattern 8010 stops at the character pattern, the pattern is changed again, and the final stop pattern is controlled to be a number pattern. Character designs may include special game elements different from number designs, and while number designs are directly linked to the final lottery results, character designs are not the final lottery results but are used exclusively. It can be positioned as one that is used specifically for presentation in the process of variable display.

In the first identification pattern 8010 displayed in the display area A, various effects are performed until the result display (derivation of the lottery result) of the variation display (symbol variation) (high decoration dynamic display). For example, in the variable display of identification symbols, a high-speed display mode in which the player has difficulty in recognizing the details of the identification symbols is switched to a low-speed display mode in which the player can recognize the details of the identification symbols at a predetermined timing. Specifically, as described above, by executing a callback based on the effect SW for replacement of the identification symbol, the replacement table of the identification symbol is displayed based on the stop symbol or the stop timing of the symbol at the switching timing of the identification symbol. And the identification pattern is replaced by using the reel index replacement work number table, the identification pattern is finely decorated until just before the stop, and the player who pays attention to the first identification pattern 8010 is given interest until just before the stop. and

In addition, the first identification pattern 8010 displayed in the display area A can change all or part of the identification patterns that constitute the first identification pattern 8010 depending on the game state, the production mode, or the type of the special pattern variation pattern. , and the first identification symbol 8010 is changed variously during the progress of the game, depending on the game state, the effect mode, or the type of variation pattern of the special symbol. Specifically, a plurality of symbol row data of the first identification symbol 8010 displayed in the display area A are provided (for example, symbol row data of 0 to 9, symbol row data of 0 to 9, etc.), and the game state At the time of switching, effect mode switching, or special symbol variation pattern selection, symbol row data selection effect SW (for example, symbols corresponding to symbol row data of 0 to 9) individually corresponding to the types of the plurality of symbol row data By setting the row data selection effect SW1 and the symbol row data selection effect SW2) corresponding to the symbol row data of 0 to 9 to ON, and setting the other effect SW to OFF, it is used for displaying the first identification symbol 8010. The pattern row data can be changed in various ways, and various performances can be executed.

Further, as described above, in the first identification pattern 8010, on the premise that the number of digits is the same as that of the second identification pattern 8020 when finally determined, the final digit It may be configured to temporarily change to a number of digits different from a number. For example, although it will be 3 digits in the end, it may be displayed as 2 digits only for a specific period during variable display (for example, the reach swing period to instigate whether the reach will be after the left symbol stops). etc. can be exemplified. This may be executed based on the effect SW defined in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data selected based on the variation pattern. As the effect SW to be defined, digit number data selection effect SW corresponding to digit number data (for example, digit number data selection effect SW corresponding to digit number data of 3 digits, digit number data selection effect SW When two digits are displayed using the selection effect SW2, etc., various effects can be executed by setting the digit number data selection effect SW2 to ON and setting the other effect SW to OFF. .

In the first identification pattern 8010, not only the identification pattern itself is changed to change the display mode, but also an effect using the additional decorative display made to the identification pattern as described above is performed. For example, as shown in FIG. 214(A), by displaying a star-shaped additional decoration 8011 on the left identification pattern 8010a of the first identification pattern 8010, advantageous lottery results (such as winning) can be obtained in the variable display being executed. You may make it suggest that there is a high possibility that it will be derived. At this time, the degree of expectation may be notified in accordance with the number and color of the additional decorations 8011 or the type of action (for example, the degree of expectation increases in the order of one, three, and five additional decorations 8011). The degree of expectation for the additional decoration 8011 is set to increase in the order of white, blue, and red, and the degree of expectation for the operation of the additional decoration 8011 is set to increase in the order of static, vibrating, and rotating. ). In addition, by displaying the same additional decoration 8011 on the right identification pattern 8010c, the player is made to pay more attention to the effect of the first identification pattern 8010, and the degree of expectation is raised more clearly. good too. Furthermore, different additional decorations may be applied to each identification pattern, and the degree of expectation for deriving an advantageous lottery result from any of the first identification patterns 8010 may be reported.

As another example, effect display control is performed to superimpose a flame effect image (white, blue, red), which is an additional decoration display different from the above-described star-shaped additional decoration 8011, on each pattern included in the first identification pattern 8010. Then, an effect of changing the color of the flame according to the degree of expectation may be executed (for example, the degree of expectation increases in the order of white→blue→red). Thus, when a plurality of additional decorative displays are provided for the first identification pattern 8010, the peripheral control board 1510 performs a lottery to determine which additional decorative display to display based on the result of the winning lottery. By reflecting the determination result, it is possible to execute based on the effect SW defined in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data selected based on the variation pattern or the like.

In the display area A, the additional decoration display added to the first identification pattern 8010 is drawn on a layer different from the layer displaying the identification pattern. As a result, the identification pattern display control can be performed in common regardless of the presence or absence of the additional decoration display and the type thereof. In addition, by drawing the identification pattern and the additional decoration display on different layers, it is possible to specify whether the additional decoration display is displayed on the front side or the back side of the identification pattern, and is set by the liquid crystal display scheduler data. By doing so, it is possible to automatically control when the performance is executed. Furthermore, as described above, whether or not to display the additional decoration display is determined at the time of execution based on the effect SW defined in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data selected based on the variation pattern, etc., and the corresponding process is executed. Therefore, it is possible to achieve a more effective presentation without complicating the presentation control.

Furthermore, in the display area A where the first identification pattern 8010 is displayed, the character effect display may be executed independently of the identification pattern. For example, in a ready-to-reach state in which the left identification symbol 8010a and the right identification symbol 8010c are stopped at the same symbol, an effect of displaying a character according to the degree of expectation (the possibility of deriving an advantageous lottery result depending on the character type, action, etc.) Suggested pattern effect) may be executed.

In addition, the background display in the display area A may be changed according to the degree of expectation of the lottery result in the variable display (design effect suggesting the possibility of deriving an advantageous lottery result depending on the type of background display). Alternatively, instead of changing the background display itself, an effect may be executed in which only the background display color is changed (for example, expectations are higher in the order of white→blue→red).

As described above, in the display area A, the character effect display and the background display are also drawn on a layer different from the layer on which the identification pattern is drawn, so that the identification pattern is displayed on the front side. It is possible to specify whether to display or to display on the back side (for example, the character effect display is on the front side, the background display is on the back side, etc.). can be controlled automatically. This makes it possible to independently control the variable display of the identification pattern regardless of the mode of character effect display, the presence or absence of change in background display, and the type of background display.

As another effect mode in the display area A, the operation instruction image of the operation unit is displayed on the front side layer of the first identification pattern 8010 independently of the first identification pattern 8010, and the player operates the operation unit. An operation presentation corresponding to the mode is executed (a pattern presentation suggesting the possibility of deriving an advantageous lottery result by an operation corresponding image or the like). For example, when the player presses the effect button after the button operation instruction image is displayed, the character is displayed according to the degree of expectation, and an operation effect of performing a specific action is executed.

Furthermore, in the display area A, an effect linked with the movable body provided on the game board 5a may be executed (a effect suggesting the possibility that an advantageous lottery result may be derived by the action of the movable body). For example, by moving the movable body arranged in the upper part of the game area 5a to a position where part or all of the first identification pattern 8010 is blocked from the player's line of sight, it is suggested that the expectation is high. good too.

Next, the display area B will be explained. In the second identification pattern 8020 displayed in the display area B, when the variation start command is received and the variation display of the identification pattern is started, the variation display of the identification pattern is started after the variation stop command is received or after the variation time elapses. End and stop at the designated stop symbol. While the identification pattern is being variably displayed, the display mode is a high-speed display mode in which it is difficult for the player to recognize the contents of the identification pattern, and the display mode is simple (low decorative dynamic display).

In the display area B, the additional decoration display made for the first identification pattern 8010, the character effect display for notifying the degree of expectation during the variable display of the identification pattern, and the operation effect are displayed. no. Furthermore, unlike the first identification pattern 8010, control for changing the display mode of the second identification pattern 8020 from the high-speed display mode to the low-speed display mode is not executed. Further, even when the first identification pattern 8010 temporarily stops and changes again, the variable display of the second identification pattern 8020 continues.

Therefore, in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data for controlling the display of the second identification pattern 8020, the effect SW for changing the display mode such as pattern replacement is not defined, and the scheduler data is extremely simple. In addition, since the effect control program only sequentially executes the contents defined in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data, even with such simple scheduler data, the same effect control as in the case of highly decorative dynamic display is executed. and the execution of the effect by the effect SW or the like is simply skipped.

The mode of the second identification pattern 8020 may be changed as long as the display mode is not changed during the variable display. For example, the aspect of the second identification pattern 8020 corresponding to the game state and the effect mode may be prepared in advance, and the aspect corresponding to the start of variation may be selected.

As for the background display, the background display for the display area B (the background other than the display area A) may be drawn. In this case, a background corresponding to the game state or the production mode may be prepared. In addition, in order to simplify the control surface, the background portion of the display area B is made transparent, and the background display of the display area A is enlarged to perform the common background display with the display area A. may

Thus, the variable display of the second identification pattern 8020 in the display area B differs from the first identification pattern 8010 in that after the start of fluctuation, a callback is executed based on the production SW for replacing the identification pattern, or additional decoration is performed. There are no various effects such as display, but it is a simple one that specializes in waiting for which symbol combination to stop and display. Therefore, in the display area B, the player does not get excited and depressed by the kind of various performances, but the game progresses with the game nature of watching with bated breath which symbol combination is stopped and displayed.

In addition, in the display area B, the additional decoration display made for the first identification pattern 8010, the character effect display for notifying the degree of expectation during the variable display of the identification pattern, and the operation effect are displayed. Since it is sufficient to set the background display to be transparent, various layer settings such as the first identification pattern 8010 (display area A) are not required.

214, a fourth pattern 8030 different from the first identification pattern 8010 and the second identification pattern 8020 is displayed. The fourth symbol 8030 indicates that the special symbol variation is started and stopped, and during the special symbol variation display, the first identification symbol 8010 and the second identification symbol 8020 During the variable display, a special symbol variation explicit display is performed to indicate that the special symbol is being variably displayed, and when the special symbol variation stops or is stopped, the first identification symbol. While 8010 and the second identification symbol 8020 are stopped and displayed, a special symbol stop explicit display is performed to indicate that the special symbol is being stopped. For example, even if the identification symbol is apparently stopped (temporary stop), the fourth symbol 8030 clearly displays the special symbol variation until the display of the result of the variation display is completed. While the fourth pattern 8030 is being clearly displayed for special pattern variation, the triangular pattern is rotated by 90 degrees at a predetermined interval and displayed in vertical stripes. Further, while the special symbol stop clear display of the fourth symbol 8030 is being performed, the triangular symbol is displayed in a state filled with a predetermined color. It should be noted that the fourth pattern 8030 is drawn on a higher layer independent of the layer for drawing on the display area A or the display area B described above. Further, unlike the first identification pattern 8010 and the second identification pattern 8020, the fourth pattern 8030 in this embodiment is displayed so as to be recognizable from the outside under all circumstances including the customer waiting state. In the example shown in FIG. 214, the fourth pattern 8030 is provided so as to overlap the display area A. However, the present invention is not limited to this form, and the fourth pattern 8030 is provided so as to overlap the display area B. Alternatively, a display device (lamp device) or the like different from the effect display device 1600 may perform control corresponding to the special symbol change explicit display of the fourth symbol 8030 and the special symbol stop explicit display.

As described above, the first identification pattern 8010 and the second identification pattern 8020 tell the player what kind of lottery result was obtained, including the details (hit, loss without reach, loss with reach, etc.). While the fourth symbol plays a role of transmission, the fourth symbol indicates what kind of game situation is (whether the special symbol is being displayed in a variable display, or whether it is in a stop display or waiting for customers). It plays a role of transmitting information to the designer or manager of the gaming machine (or the player). In other words, although the first identification pattern 8010 and the second identification pattern 8020 have similar roles, they have a role that the fourth pattern cannot play in terms of transmitting the details of the lottery result to the player. there is Further, although the details will be described later, the first identification pattern 8010 and the second identification pattern 8020 may be temporarily erased or hidden during the variable display of special patterns or during the customer waiting state. On the other hand, the fourth symbol is a fourth symbol that may be temporarily erased or hidden during the variable display of the special symbol or during the customer waiting state in terms of always communicating the game situation to the player. It has a role that cannot be fulfilled by the 1st identification pattern 8010 and the 2nd identification pattern 8020 .

In addition, a pending memory display 8040 is drawn at the bottom of the screen shown in FIG. In this embodiment, the reserved memory display of the first special symbol is drawn in the lower left part of the screen, and the reserved memory display of the second special symbol is drawn in the lower right part of the screen, although not shown. Also, in FIG. 214(A), the reserved memory display 8040 overlaps the display area B, but there is no problem as long as it does not overlap with the identification pattern. Note that the reserved memory display 8040 is drawn on an independent layer and arranged on the front side of the layer corresponding to the display area B, as described above. Incidentally, as with the fourth pattern 8030, it is not necessarily limited to such a form, and the reserved memory display 8040 may be substituted by a display device (lamp device) or the like different from the effect display device 1600.

As described above, in this embodiment, a layer is defined for each display area. As a result, it is possible to execute the drawing effect independently for each display area, and the highly decorative dynamic display with high effect executed in the display area A and the low decorative dynamic display executed in the display area B. and can be performed in any combination. Since the combination of high-decoration dynamic display and low-decoration dynamic display can be defined by the liquid crystal production scheduler data, it is not necessary to change the production control program itself, and the production configuration can be easily created and changed. .

Next, with reference to FIG. 214(B), an example of having a display area A and a display area B of an identification pattern on each display screen in the case of having two display screens will be described. In FIG. 214B, display areas are assigned to physically different display devices, and display area A and display area B are configured by display devices of the same size. It should be noted that configurations having functions common to those in the example shown in (A) are given the same reference numerals and explanations thereof are omitted. The sizes of the display area A and the display area B are not limited to the same size, and may be different sizes.

In the example shown in FIG. 214(B), a plurality of performance display devices are provided on the game board 5, the display area A is assigned to the main liquid crystal display device, and the display area B is assigned to the sub liquid crystal display device. In the display area A, a first identification pattern 8010 is displayed, and a fourth pattern 8030 and a reserved memory display 8040 are drawn. On the other hand, in the display area B, a second identification pattern 8020 is displayed.

Instead of using the entire display area of the main liquid crystal display device as the display area A, the area for displaying the fourth pattern 8030 and the reserved memory display 8040 may be an area different from the display area A. Also, the fourth pattern 8030 and the reserved memory display 8040 may be allocated to the display area B. FIG.

In the example shown in FIG. 214(B), the first identification pattern 8010 is in the reach state, and decorations 8011 are drawn on the left identification pattern 8010a and the right identification pattern 8010c. Furthermore, a preview image 8050 is displayed that suggests that there is a high possibility of deriving an advantageous lottery result in this variation.

In addition, all of the second identification symbols 8020 are in a high-speed display mode during the variable display, so that the player cannot recognize all of the identification symbols. In the display area A, the first identification pattern 8010 is in a ready-to-win state, and the notice effect such as the display of the notice image 8050 is executed. The 8020 low-decoration dynamic display is only continued.

[31-2. Emphasis Mode of Display Area]
As described above, in the present embodiment, the identification symbols are variably displayed in different display modes in the display area A and the display area B, respectively. In the following, while the variable display of identification symbols displayed in each display area is executed in parallel, a selection operation is performed by the player (a switching operation unit (not shown) is operated), so that either one of the The control for emphasizing the variable display executed in one display area more than the other display area will be described (emphasis mode, large setting).

215A and 215B are diagrams for explaining the highlighting mode of the display area for executing the variable display of the identification pattern in this embodiment, and FIG. A normal pattern to be displayed, (B) is an emphasized pattern A that displays the display area A in an emphasized manner, and (C) is an emphasized pattern B that displays the display area B in an emphasized manner. In the present embodiment, the display area on the non-emphasized side is reduced in wipe display (small setting, suppression mode), and the display area on the non-emphasized side is also made recognizable by the player during the progress of the game. there is It should be noted that the switching of the display area to be highlighted is made possible by operating a predetermined switching operation unit (switching button, etc.), and even in a state where the special symbols are not variably displayed, the special symbols fluctuate. Switching is possible even during display.

The player can sequentially switch between (A) normal pattern, (B) emphasis pattern A, and (C) emphasis pattern B by operating the switching operation unit. As a switching mode, (A) normal pattern, (B) emphasized pattern A, and (C) emphasized pattern B may be switched in a predetermined order each time the player operates the switching operation unit. Alternatively, the player may immediately select a desired display pattern. As a configuration for allowing the player to immediately select a desired display pattern, for example, the switch destination display pattern is set so as to correspond to each of a plurality of types of operation modes of the switching operation unit by the player, The display mode is configured to be immediately switched to the display mode desired by the player, depending on the operation mode for the switching operation section. Specifically, in response to a first operation (for example, a long press of 5 seconds or longer) on the switching operation section, the normal pattern is set as the display pattern of the switching destination, while a second operation (for example, less than 2 seconds) on the switching operation section is set. (short press), set the display pattern of the switching destination to emphasize pattern A, and further, display the switching destination in response to the third operation (for example, long press for 2 seconds or more and less than 5 seconds) on the switching operation unit Emphasize pattern Set pattern B. For example, by performing the third operation on the switching operation unit, when the game is progressing in the emphasis mode (emphasis pattern B) of the display area B shown in FIG. The pattern variation due to progresses. At this time, as shown in FIG. 215(C), in the display area A displayed on the wipe, a display corresponding to the high-decoration dynamic display is performed. By performing the second operation on the switching operation unit when the player recognizes that the emphasis pattern A is being displayed, the player can immediately switch to the emphasis pattern A at his/her will. An example of the "unusual effect" is a notice effect in which the character pattern (airplane) temporarily stops at the medium identification pattern 8010b. By performing the second operation on the switching operation unit, it is possible to immediately change to the emphasis mode of the display area A (emphasis pattern A). It should be noted that, when transitioning to emphasis pattern A, a character effect or action that was not displayed in the reduced area may be performed (FIG. 215(C)→(B)).

Further, even when the display area A is reduced (wiped) and displayed as shown in FIG. . When the display area A is reduced (wiped) and displayed, it is assumed that the operation has been performed after a specified time has elapsed since the start of the operation effect, even if the player does not actually operate the switching operation unit. , the operation performance may be automatically advanced in the same manner as when the switching operation unit is operated. On the other hand, when the display area A is reduced (wiped) and displayed as shown in FIG. Execution of the effect of shielding and making it visible at a predetermined timing is suppressed (discontinued) because it is necessary to change the action mode of the character and the control becomes complicated.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 215(B), when the mode (emphasis pattern A) for emphasizing the display area A is selected, the reduced (wiped) displayed display area B is a low-decoration dynamic display, and the pattern fluctuates. progresses, the above-mentioned "unusual effect" is not performed. Therefore, when highlighting pattern A is selected, the background of display area B is made transparent, or the background of display area B is also combined with the background of display area B. may be improved. Even when the display area B is wipe-displayed, the visibility of the identification pattern in the display area B must be maintained. It is preferable to set it to a higher layer than the displayed layer.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the effect sound is output in response to the variable display of the identification pattern in each display area. Specifically, since the first identification pattern 8010 in the display area A is displayed with a variety of effects, the effect sound is output based on the effect mode, the game state, the variation pattern, etc. in accordance with the effects. be done. Here, sounds (BGM, effect sound) output accompanying the variable display of the identification pattern in the display area A and the effect to be executed are managed as one AUTO group, and the sound is controlled by the automatic channel system. As a result, the upper limit of the channels to be used is limited even when the effects in the display area A are duplicated, so that resource consumption due to the execution of the effects of the gaming machine can be suppressed. Moreover, since it becomes possible to output automatically the sound with a high priority, complication of control of production|presentation can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the second identification pattern 8020 in the display area B is displayed in a high-speed display mode, and the output effect sound is also simple (fluctuation BGM, stop sound only). Therefore, when both the display area A and the display area B have a normal pattern (FIG. 215(A)) that is not reduced (wiped) and displayed, the effect sound corresponding to the display area B is not output, or Control is performed in such a manner that the output of the effect sound corresponding to the display area B is suppressed by, for example, reducing the output sound. Also, when one of the display areas is displayed in an emphasized pattern, only the effect sound in the display area displayed in the emphasized pattern is output, and the effect sound in the reduced (wiped) display area is output. is not output, or the output sound is reduced to suppress the output of the dramatic effect sound corresponding to the reduced (wiped) display area.

In the case of the standby state in which the variable display of the pattern is not performed (the start memory is not suspended), one display area is reduced (wiped) as shown in FIGS. 215 (B) and (C). , each display area is displayed in a normal pattern as shown in FIG. 215(A). This is because there is little significance in emphasizing one display area in a state in which the variable display of the identification pattern is not performed, and the screen for displaying the customer attraction is designed on the premise of full-screen display.

Further, when the power is turned off while the variable display of the special symbols is being performed and then the power is turned on, each identification symbol is displayed in a predetermined manner. For example, it may be an emphasis pattern A that highlights the display area A, or it may be a normal pattern. At this time, the combination of symbols to be displayed is set to the combination of symbols for the initial state (for example, "123") regardless of the result of the previous variation. In addition, when the power is turned off while the pattern is not changed and then turned on, the wipe display is not displayed until the pattern starts to change (without displaying with emphasized patterns A and B), and the normal pattern is used. Display the identification pattern. This is because, as described above, it is meaningless to highlight one of the display areas when the pattern is not variably displayed.

In this embodiment, as described above, each display area is composed of different layers. In each display area, the area to be drawn differs depending on whether it is drawn in an emphasized mode or in a reduced display. Specifically, the overall size of each layer is the same as the overall size of the display screen, and is drawn within a specified display area (for example, display area A). At this time, by transforming the coordinate system of the drawing area, it is possible to draw with a common means even if the sizes of the areas are different. Therefore, if the drawing contents are the same, the display area will be can be drawn by a common means (program or data) even if the actual sizes of are different.

Therefore, only when displaying a specific object (for example, a decoration image) in a specific display mode (for example, only an emphasis mode), it is sufficient to draw a new object. For example, when adding a decoration image to the identification pattern, a new layer for drawing the decoration image may be prepared and combined with the layer for drawing the identification pattern. At this time, by setting the priority of the layer for drawing the decoration image higher than the priority of the layer for drawing the identification pattern, the decoration image can be arranged on the front side of the identification pattern when each layer is synthesized. can.

As described above, in the present embodiment, common programs and data are used for objects (for example, identification patterns) that are displayed in the same image regardless of whether they are displayed in an emphasized mode or in a reduced display. On the other hand, when displaying a decorative image superimposed on the identification pattern, prepare a layer with a higher priority than the identification pattern, draw the decoration image on that layer, and place it on the front side of the identification pattern layer. An emphasis mode is drawn by arranging. This makes it possible to use common programs and data for objects such as identification patterns that have common drawing contents in each display mode, without the need to separately prepare programs and data for each display mode. It is sufficient to prepare a minimum program and data to be the difference. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress an increase in image data due to diversification of presentation contents, suppress complication of presentation control, and suppress an increase in storage capacity.

[31-3. Screen transition]
Subsequently, the mode of variable display of the identification symbols from the start to the stop of the variation of the special symbols will be described. FIG. 216 is a diagram for explaining an example of screen transition in a configuration in which variable display of the identification pattern is performed in the display area A and the display area B of the present embodiment. An example in which the variation of the identification pattern in the display area B is stopped in conjunction with the case of this is shown. FIG. 217 is a diagram for explaining an example of screen transition in a configuration in which variable display of identification symbols is performed in display area A and display area B in this embodiment. An example of displaying all the stop symbols in the display area B is shown. Each screen shown in FIGS. 216 and 217 is a screen showing the same state, and both are displayed in a normal mode. Each screen will be described below.

(A) shows the state immediately after the variable display of the symbols is completed in the state where the starting memory number is 3. FIG. At this time, as described above, the triangular fourth symbol 8030 is statically displayed in a blacked out state. Also, the first identification pattern 8010 displayed in the display area A and the second identification pattern 8020 displayed in the display area 2 are stopped and displayed with the identification pattern set to "125".

(B) is a state in which the starting memory is consumed (the number of starting memories is 3→2) and the variable display of symbols is started. The first identification pattern 8010 in the display area A and the second identification pattern 8020 in the display area B are displayed in a high-speed display mode. When the variable display of the pattern is started, the triangular fourth pattern 8030 is changed from solid to vertical stripes and rotated.

(C) shows a state in which the left identification symbol 8010a of the first identification symbol 8010 is stopped. In FIG. 216(C), when the left identification pattern 8010a of the first identification pattern 8010 stops, the left identification pattern 8020a of the second identification pattern 8020 is also stopped and displayed. On the other hand, in FIG. 217(C), even if the left identification pattern 8010a of the first identification pattern 8010 is stopped, the left identification pattern 8020a of the second identification pattern 8020 continues to be variably displayed. Also, the variable display stops after the left identification pattern 8010a of the first identification pattern 8010 changes from the high-speed display mode to the low-speed display mode. On the other hand, when the left identification pattern 8020a of the second identification pattern 8020 is to be stopped, it is stopped and displayed without transitioning to the low speed display mode. This is because the purpose of the variable display of the identification symbols in the display area B is to notify the player that the symbols are changing and to clearly display the stop symbols rather than to enhance the performance effect.

(D) shows a state in which the right identification symbol 8010c of the first identification symbol 8010 is further stopped from the state of (C). At this time, the left identification pattern 8010a and the right identification pattern 8010c are stopped at the same pattern, and the ready-to-win state is reached. In the display area A, the ready-to-win effect corresponding to the variation pattern is executed, while in the display area B, the variable display of the second identification pattern 8020 is continued without executing any special effect.

(E) shows a state in which the medium identification pattern 8010b of the first identification pattern 8010 is stopped (temporarily stopped) at the character (airplane) pattern in the reach state. Here, the airplane pattern is a pattern indicating that the variable display is restarted, and indicates execution of so-called pseudo-continuous variation. Therefore, even in the state where the medium identification pattern 8010b is stopped, the fourth pattern 8030 is continuously displayed, and as shown in FIG. The variable display is continued in the high-speed display mode. When the first identification pattern 8010 continues to be temporarily stopped for a predetermined time, then, as shown in (F), the first identification pattern 8010 and the second identification pattern 8020 start to change again. In the example shown in FIG. 217, regardless of the display mode such as re-variation of the first identification pattern 8010, the variable display of the second identification pattern 8020 in the high-speed display mode is continued.

(G) shows a state where the left identification pattern 8010a of the first identification pattern 8010 is stopped after the re-variation of the first identification pattern 8010 is started. At this time, a decoration 8011 is superimposed on the left identification pattern 8010a, and it is reported that there is a high possibility (expectation) of obtaining an advantageous lottery result in the variation. In addition, for the second identification pattern 8020, the effect corresponding to the degree of expectation is not particularly executed, and in FIG. The pattern 8020a stops, and the variable display in the high-speed display mode is continued in FIG. 217(G).

(H) shows a state in which the right identification pattern 8010c of the first identification pattern 8010 is further stopped from the state of (G). At this time, the left identification pattern 8010a and the right identification pattern 8010c stop at the same pattern ("5") to enter a ready-to-win state, and the decoration 8011 is also displayed on the right identification pattern 8010c. After that, as shown in (I), the middle identification pattern 8010b also stops at the same pattern ("5") as the left identification pattern 8010a and the right identification pattern 8010c. It stops at the symbol corresponding to the identification symbol 8010, and a big hit effect is executed.

When the identification pattern is displayed by highly decorative dynamic display, it is possible to realize a rich variety of effects and enhance the interest of the game. On the other hand, when the identification pattern is displayed by the low-decoration dynamic display, it is possible to avoid gorgeous effects and maximize the expectation for the pattern variation. In this embodiment, a display area A in which the identification pattern is variably displayed with a high decoration dynamic display and a display area B in which the identification pattern is variably displayed with a low decoration dynamic display are provided, and either one or both is provided. By concurrently executing the variable display in the display mode of (1), the player can play the game in a mode that suits his or her taste.

In addition, since the player can freely switch between the high-decoration dynamic display and the low-decoration dynamic display during the variable display, for example, when the ready-to-win event occurs, a display that notifies the degree of expectation is executed. By highlighting the area A and highlighting the display area B in other states, the game can be played according to the situation.

In the above-described embodiment, the high-decoration dynamic display and the low-decoration dynamic display are executed in parallel, and the game progresses in a manner that the player can see both. may For example, while the high-decoration dynamic display and the low-decoration dynamic display are executed in parallel, the display on the other side can be displayed by the player so that the player can visually recognize only the display on the one side desired by the player. A movable body or the like (one side concealing means) having a function of concealing the display so as to make it invisible or difficult to view may be provided, and the display on the other side may be hidden by such a movable body. For example, in FIG. 214(A), the cover position that overlaps all or at least part of the display area A and the area where the movable body overlaps the display area A is smaller than the cover position, and the effect display performed in the display area A is easy to see. 214(A), the covering position overlapping all or at least part of the display area B in FIG. 214(A), and the display area The area where the movable body overlaps with B is small, and an undercover movable body that can move to a retracted position (a position below the display area B) where the effect display performed in the display area B is easy to see is provided. When the covering condition A for hiding the area A is established (eg, the player performs a first specific operation on the switching operation unit), the covering condition B for hiding the display area B is established by moving the upper covering movable body to the covering position. By doing so (the player performs a second specific operation on the switching operation unit, etc.), the lower covering movable body can be moved to the covering position. As a result, for example, the game can be progressed by concentrating only on one side of the display desired by the player without complicated control such as switching of the effect display.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the high-decoration dynamic display and the low-decoration dynamic display are executed in parallel in the process of progressing the game. During the period during which high-decoration dynamic display and low-decoration dynamic display do not need to be executed in parallel, for example, only high-decoration dynamic display capable of actively appealing to the outside is left, and low-decoration dynamic display is left. For example, the decorative dynamic display may be erased. For example, as shown in FIG. 215(A) of the above-described embodiment, the game progresses in a normal pattern in which the display area A and the display area B are displayed in a standard manner (prescribed size). When shifting to the state, the display area B is erased while the display area A remains, or the display area B is erased and the display area A is enlarged to a large area. If a new starting condition is met while the vehicle is waiting for a customer, the display in the display area B, which is a low-decoration dynamic display, may be restored.

[32. Application of production block to production that continues over multiple fluctuations]
Next, an example of applying the effect block to the effect that continues over multiple variations will be described. In the above-described example, the period from the start to the stop of pattern fluctuation is divided into predetermined periods, and the production blocks corresponding to each period are defined. By combining these performance blocks, it is possible to suppress complication of performance control while realizing various performances. In addition, an example was explained in which it was possible to define a production block that exceeds a predetermined period, but it is limited to production blocks that fall within one variation, and for production that is executed over multiple variations Not enough to apply the production block.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, an example of applying effect blocks to a series of effects executed over a plurality of variations will be described. Here, as a series of effects that are executed over multiple variations, there is a timer effect and background effect that are executed as a look-ahead effect (pre-notification effect) at the start of winning a prize, and a mini character effect that is executed when switching the effect mode and continues until a predetermined condition is met. will be explained.

[32-1. Control of look-ahead effect (advance notification effect)]
Before explaining the timer effect and the background effect which are executed as the look-ahead effect at the time of starting winning, the control of the look-ahead effect will be supplemented.

When the game ball wins in the starting winning opening, the main control board 1310 executes the first starting opening passing process (FIG. 135) or the second starting opening passing process (FIG. 136) according to the starting winning opening, and starts A random value is extracted (acquired) as a memory (steps S5241 and S5251). Then, in the first special figure prefetching process (S5245) or the second special figure prefetching process (S5255), based on the extracted random number or the lottery result based on the random number, special symbol 1 storage prefetch effect command or special symbol 2 A memory prefetch effect command (refer to FIG. 90, hereinafter referred to as “special figure prefetch effect command”) is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 .

When the peripheral control board 1510 receives the special figure prefetch effect command, it determines whether or not to execute the prefetch effect based on the received command. Commands from the main control board 1310 are stored in the peripheral controller reception ring buffer by the peripheral controller command reception interrupt processing (FIG. 98). Then, the received command is analyzed by the received command analysis processing (S1022) of the peripheral control unit regular processing in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (FIG. 95).

When the special figure prefetch effect command is received, the peripheral control board 1510 executes the prefetch effect control process in the reception command analysis process. In the look-ahead effect control process, a process for executing a normal look-ahead effect for changing the starting memory display, and a process for executing the timer effect and the background effect described above are executed. It should be noted that the prefetching effect control processing may be called by the peripheral control unit regular processing in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (FIG. 95) by setting a flag indicating that the prefetching effect command has been received in the received command analysis processing. good.

In the processing for executing the normal look-ahead performance for changing the starting memory display, a lottery is drawn based on the special figure look-ahead performance command, and the mode of the starting memory display after the change is selected based on the result of the lottery. At this time, the mode of the starting memory display may be changed only when shifting to the ready-to-win state in the variable display of the special symbols corresponding to the special figure prefetch effect command. The aspect of the starting memory display changes color and shape, for example. Then, a normal look-ahead effect setting process for changing the mode of the starting memory display is executed. In the normal look-ahead effect setting process, settings are made to change the display color of the start memory display, as well as settings for outputting sound effects, lighting lamps, and moving characters at the timing of the change. . Processing for executing timer effects and background effects will be described later.

[32-2. Timer effect]
The timer effect is a pre-suggestive effect that indicates by countdown display that the execution time of the suggestive effect suggesting the result of a lottery for a specific starting memory or the possibility of winning is approaching. Broadly speaking, there are two kinds of timer effects, which are controlled as one of the above-mentioned look-ahead effects, and the variable display for the specific starting memory is started before the variable display for the specific starting memory is started. A timer effect that counts down the period until a predetermined timing (hereinafter referred to as a look-ahead timer effect) and the above-mentioned look-ahead effect are controlled based on a variation pattern, and are controlled based on a specific start memory. A timer effect that does not straddle multiple fluctuations (hereinafter referred to as a timer effect within fluctuations) that counts down the period from a predetermined timing after the start of the variable display for this specific start memory to another timing of the variable display for this specific start memory. ,have. In other words, both the look-ahead timer effect and the within-variation timer effect are pre-notification effects in which the pattern variation for a specific starting memory has not been completed, and a countdown display is performed on the display screen of the effect display device 1600, and the count display is 0. Although it is common in that a predetermined effect is performed when it becomes, the look-ahead timer effect is different from the within-variation timer effect in that the countdown display is performed on the display screen over a plurality of symbol changes. Also, the initial value of the countdown display performed in the look-ahead timer effect and the timer effect within the fluctuation may be set to various values, but since it spans multiple fluctuations, the average value of the initial value used in the look-ahead timer effect is relatively larger than the average value of the initial values used in the within-variation timer effect. In this embodiment, since the look-ahead timer effect includes characteristic elements, the look-ahead timer effect will be described in detail below.

In the processing for executing the look-ahead timer effect, first, it is determined whether or not to execute the look-ahead timer effect. Since the look-ahead timer effect is a look-ahead effect that can be executed across multiple fluctuations as described above, it is enough to execute the look-ahead timer effect before the variable display corresponding to the received special figure lookahead effect command is started. determine whether sufficient time is secured. That is, it is determined whether or not the sum of the variation times of all starting memories held until the variation is started is longer than or equal to a specific time (40 seconds or longer in this embodiment). Furthermore, based on the winning/losing with respect to the starting memory of the performance execution object and the variation pattern of the starting memory, the performance contents are determined together with whether or not the look-ahead timer performance can be executed. In addition, when determining the contents of the performance, the execution timing (start timing) of the look-ahead timer performance is also determined. As the execution timing (start timing) of the look-ahead timer effect, for example, it is the start time of fluctuation corresponding to the start memory stored before the start memory for the look-ahead effect, or before the start memory for the look-ahead effect. Either the start time of the fluctuation corresponding to the memorized start memory or the end time of the fluctuation corresponding to the start memory memorized before the start memory of the look-ahead performance object is set.

The look-ahead timer effect is composed of a timer count effect for displaying a countdown and a timer end effect executed when the time is up. The timer counting effect and the timer end effect are continuously executed. In addition, the execution time of the timer counting effect, that is, the execution timing of the timer end effect varies depending on the length of the timer counting effect. And so on.

When the execution of the look-ahead timer effect is determined, first, the execution time of the timer counting effect is determined. The execution time of the timer count effect is determined based on the time from the start winning to the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the start memory of the look-ahead effect target. For example, in the present embodiment, 10 seconds is added to the total variation time of the starting memory held before the starting memory for the look-ahead effect, and the execution timing (start timing) of the look-ahead timer effect is set. A predetermined time calculated by subtracting the time based on the timing is set as the execution time of the timer count effect (initial value of the countdown display). Furthermore, the content of the production (in-countdown production pattern) to be executed as the timer counting production is set. As the effect pattern during the countdown, for example, a pattern 1 in which the lighting mode of a specific lamp provided on the game board 5 is gradually changed to high-speed blinking as the countdown display progresses, or a specific lamp provided on the game board 5 is displayed. Examples include pattern 2 in which the color of light emitted from the lamp changes as the countdown display progresses, and pattern 3 in which a specific movable body provided on the game board 5 moves as the countdown display progresses. It corresponds to the hit expectation degree of the variation of the performance object, and is set by lottery. For example, pattern 1→pattern 2→pattern 3 is set so that the probability of winning increases in the order. Both cases are selected at the same rate, and pattern 3 is more likely to be selected in the case of winning than in the case of losing.

After setting the content of the effect executed as the timer counting effect (during countdown effect pattern), the content of the timer end effect (post-countdown effect pattern) is set. In the timer ending effect, for example, the characters "END!!" are superimposed on the identification pattern on the display screen in colors corresponding to the degree of expectation (for example, the degree of expectation increases in the order of black → blue → red). To make a player surely recognize that the time is up by displaying it for a predetermined time. The post-countdown production patterns include, for example, pattern 1 in which the character color of "End!!" is black, pattern 2 in which the character color of "End!!" is blue, and character color of "End!!" Pattern 3, which is red, can be exemplified. These patterns 1 to 3 correspond to the hit expectation degree of the variation of the look-ahead effect target, and are set by lottery. For example, pattern 1→pattern 2→pattern 3 are set so that the probability of winning increases in the order. Both cases are selected at the same rate, and pattern 3 is more likely to be selected in the case of winning than in the case of losing. Note that the post-countdown effect pattern is not limited to this, and not only the character color but also the characters may be decorated or characters may be displayed. Different expectations may be accommodated.

As described above, after various settings related to the look-ahead timer effect are performed, the look-ahead timer effect is executed (started) when a predetermined start condition (arrival of start time of the look-ahead timer effect) is met. As described above, the look-ahead timer effect is composed of a timer count effect and a timer end effect, and effect blocks corresponding to the timer count effect and the timer end effect are individually defined. These performance blocks are defined in advance, and when the execution of the look-ahead timer performance is determined, the performance block of the timer count performance and the performance block of the timer end performance are selected based on the execution time and the degree of expectation of the timer count performance. The effect block for the timer count effect and the effect block for the timer end effect may be selected individually, or the effect block for the timer count effect and the effect block for the timer end effect may be managed as a set and selected for each set. can be When the effect block of the timer count effect and the effect block of the timer end effect are selected, the effect block of the timer count effect is executed, and after the end of the effect block, the effect block of the timer end effect is executed.

Also, in the effect block of the timer counting effect, only the content of the effect is defined, and the execution time can be variably set. As a result, there is no need to redundantly hold performance blocks with the same content that differ only in execution time, and an increase in storage capacity due to diversification of performance content can be suppressed. The look-ahead timer effect is based on the execution time calculated based on various conditions as described above, unlike the effect in which the execution timing and the end timing are strictly determined like the effect block corresponding to the variable time described above. Therefore, it is possible to flexibly cope with the calculated execution time of the effect. Specifically, the calculated execution time of the effect is stored in a predetermined storage area, and the execution time of the effect stored in the predetermined storage area is read at the start of the effect block of the timer counting effect.

Moreover, when the execution time of the timer count effect can be covered, the effect block may be prepared in advance so as to cover the execution time of the timer count effect. Since the execution time of the timer count effect may be within a predetermined range, even if all patterns are covered based on the number of holds and variation patterns (variation time), it may be possible to limit the realistic number of effect blocks. be. For example, if the execution timing (start timing) of the look-ahead timer effect is one pattern, the time from the start winning to the start of the variation of the look-ahead effect target is the lower limit, and the variation time of the variation is added to this time, Furthermore, by setting the time obtained by subtracting the execution time of the timer end effect as the upper limit, it is possible to specify the range of the execution time of the timer counting effect. Since at least one performance block whose execution time is included in this range should exist, there is a possibility that the minimum number of performance blocks should be prepared. Alternatively, only the effect blocks with high execution frequency may be prepared in advance, and the effect blocks with low execution frequency may be set as effect blocks in which the variation time can be variably set, thereby suppressing the number of effect blocks to be managed.

FIG. 218 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of effect blocks for the look-ahead timer effect of this embodiment. FIG. 219 is a diagram showing an execution example of the look-ahead timer effect of this embodiment. The execution example of the look-ahead timer effect shown in FIG. 219 corresponds to FIG.

218 and 219 show an example in which the look-ahead timer effect is executed over the variation 1 and the variation 2. FIG. Variation 1 has a "normal variation" in the first half and no reach, and variation 2 has a "normal variation" in the first half and becomes a big hit after occurrence of a reach. In addition, since it is as having mentioned above about the case where production|presentation is performed within each fluctuation|variation, description is abbreviate|omitted here.

As shown in FIG. 219(A), when variation 1 is started, variation display of all identification symbols is started (time t0). At this time, the number of pending symbol variations is zero. Variation 1 is normal variation in which reach does not occur, as described above.

Further, the variable display of the symbols is continued, and the variable display of the left symbols is stopped at a predetermined timing. After that, a starting prize is generated, and the number of pending symbol variations becomes 1. It is determined whether or not the look-ahead timer effect can be executed at the time of starting winning, and here, the execution of the look-ahead timer effect is determined, and a timer count effect block and a timer end effect block are selected. At this time, as shown in FIG. 219(B), only the left symbol is stopped and the other symbols are being variably displayed, and a timer display portion is arranged at the lower right portion of the screen (time t1). In addition, in FIG. 219B, "START" indicating the start of the timer effect is displayed instead of the remaining time of the look-ahead timer effect.

After that, as shown in FIG. 219(C), variation 1 ends, and the stop symbols of all the identified symbols are determined (time t2). At this time, the timer counting effect continues, and the remaining time of the look-ahead timer effect (timer counting effect) is displayed on the timer display section.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 219(D), variation 2 to be read ahead is started, and the remaining time displayed on the timer display is continuously updated. Then, as shown in FIG. 219(E), when the execution of the timer counting effect is completed, the remaining time "0.00" is displayed on the timer display section, and the timer end effect block is executed to start the timer end effect. (time t3). At this time, as a timer ending effect, a message "END!!" indicating the end of the timer effect is displayed on the screen, or a notice image such as a character is displayed. As described above, the text color of the message displayed here is set according to the degree of expectation of the change. Also, the content of the message may be set according to the degree of expectation of the change.

Then, as shown in FIG. 219(F), while the timer ending effect continues, the game stops at the same symbol "5" of the left symbol and the right symbol, and reach occurs. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 219(G), after the end of the timer end effect, the fluctuation of the middle symbols is stopped, and all the symbols are determined. After that, as shown in FIG. 219(H), the state shifts to a big hit state.

In the example shown in FIGS. 218 and 219, the timer end effect is executed before the occurrence of the ready-to-win game, but the timer end effect may be executed after the occurrence of the ready-to-win game. At this time, since the ready-to-win effect and the timer end effect are executed in duplicate, the contents of the timer end effect may be determined based on the content of the variable ready-to-win effect. As a result, it is possible to prevent the production effect from being reduced due to the duplicate execution of the production.

As described above, it is possible to define the effect to be executed across multiple variations by the effect block, and it is possible to operate the common block more flexibly. By defining the effect that is executed as a look-ahead effect at the start of winning, such as the look-ahead timer effect, as the common block described above, it is possible to standardize and simplify the effect control, and the development of the game machine can be made more efficient. can be

In addition, the control of the effect block that spans multiple fluctuations is also controlled by the callback function using the effect SW in the same way as other common blocks. As a result, it is possible to move the character and output sound in accordance with the progress of the look-ahead timer effect, and it is possible to realize a variety of effects.

[32-3. Background effect]
Next, similar to the look-ahead timer effect, the background effect, which is the pre-notification effect suggesting the lottery result for the starting memory in which the pattern variation has not been completed, will be described. As an overview of the background effect, the background of the display screen is changed over a plurality of pattern changes, and the background effect is terminated at a predetermined timing during the change of the look-ahead target. In this embodiment, the background is restored when the reach develops while the prefetch target is changing.

FIG. 220 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of effect blocks for the background effect of this embodiment. FIG. 221 is a diagram showing an execution example of the background effect of this embodiment. The execution example of the background effect shown in FIG. 221 corresponds to FIG.

FIG. 220 and FIG. 221 show an example of execution of the background effect over variation 1, variation 2, and variation 3. FIG. Variation 1 and variation 2 are “normal variation” in the first half and have no reach, and variation 3 is “normal variation” in the first half and develops to reach. Description of the latter half of the variation 3 is omitted. As with the look-ahead timer effect, the case where the effect is executed within each variation is as described above, so the description is omitted here.

As shown in FIG. 221(A), when variation 1 is started, variation display of all identification symbols is started (time t0). At this time, the number of pending symbol variations is one. As described above, Variation 1 is a normal variation in which reach does not occur. After that, the variable display of the symbols is continued, and the left symbols are stopped. Then, at time t1, a starting prize is generated, and the number of pending symbol variations becomes two. Here, execution of the background effect is determined at the time of starting winning, and a background effect block is selected. At this time, as shown in FIG. 221(B), the background is changed from "mountain" to "sea".

After that, as shown in FIG. 221(C), variation 1 ends and the stop symbol is determined (time t2). Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 221(D), variation 2 is started, and variable display of identification symbols is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 221(E), variation 2 ends and the stop symbol is determined (time t3). During this time, the background changed by executing the background effect is continuously displayed.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 221(F), variation 3 to be prefetched is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 221(G), as the pattern variation develops into reach, the background effect is completed, and the background of "sea" returns to the background of "mountains" (time t4).

An effect block for executing a background effect is selected and executed when a start winning to be a look-ahead object occurs, similarly to the timer effect. The timing of the end is the timing when the prefetch target fluctuation develops into a reach, that is, the remaining time of the fluctuation being executed at the time of the start winning, the total fluctuation time of the fluctuation executed until the prefetch target fluctuation is started, and the prefetch It may be set by calculating the total value of the first half fluctuation time of the target fluctuation. Also, the execution time may not be set in the effect block for executing the background effect, and the background effect may be continuously executed until the end condition is satisfied. The termination condition in this case is to detect that the read-ahead target has developed into a reach state. The termination condition is determined by a callback, and when the termination condition is satisfied, the process for terminating the background presentation is called.

As described above, in the background effect of the present embodiment, the background display is continuously changed from the start of the background effect to the development of the reach in the variation targeted for the look-ahead effect. When the reach develops, the background returns to the original state, so that the player recognizes that the degree of expectation for the change is high, and the degree of attention to the change in the latter half of the game increases.

On the other hand, if a reach occurs due to a change before the change targeted for the look-ahead effect starts, the background is temporarily restored when the reach occurs, and after the change ends, the background display is switched, and the background Resume the performance. As a result, even if the player is disappointed after the occurrence of the ready-to-win, the expectation can be heightened again, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

[32-4. Mini character production]
Next, a description will be given of the mini character effect that is started when the effect mode is switched. The mini-character effect is a effect in which a character (mini-character) corresponding to the effect mode appears. Since the mini-characters displayed at this time are displayed only during the pattern variation, when the pattern variation ends in a state where the number of pending variations becomes 0, the mini-characters are hidden. Note that the hidden mini-characters may be displayed again when a predetermined condition is satisfied. In addition, the mini character is continuously displayed across multiple variations until it shifts to the customer waiting state. The mini-character effect will be described below with reference to FIG.

FIG. 222 is a diagram showing an example of a mini character effect according to this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 222(A), the game continues in the "mountain" mode. In this state, as shown in FIG. 222(B), when the "mountain" mode is changed to the "sea" mode, the mini character "whale" is displayed in the left center of the screen. The mode is switched by operating an operation unit (production button) (not shown) or the like.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 222(C) and 222(D), the suspended symbol variation is executed. Then, as shown in FIG. 222(E), when all the reserved pattern variations are completed, the state shifts to the customer waiting state, and the displayed mini characters are hidden.

Since the execution condition of the mini-character effect is that the pattern variation continues, the mini-character effect is continued as long as the pattern is changing even if there is no pending variation. The conditions for executing the mini character effect may be, other than when the mode is changed, when a starting prize is generated after the customer waiting state continues for a predetermined period. By controlling in this way, the mini-characters will appear even when the mode is not changed, giving the player a sense of surprise and making it more interesting. In addition, the game state may be added to the determination conditions as a condition for executing the mini character presentation. For example, in a game state in which the probability state is not clearly notified, the current game state can be suggested to the player by facilitating the appearance of mini-characters if the probability state is high.

In addition, the end condition of the mini-character effect may be, for example, the case where the display of the mini-character continues for a predetermined period of time, in addition to the transition to the customer waiting state. By configuring in this way, it is possible to create a premium feeling in the appearance of the mini character.

The mini-character presentation is defined in the presentation block, and the end condition of the mini-character presentation is determined by a callback during execution of the mini-character presentation, and the mini-character presentation is terminated when the termination condition is satisfied. By constructing in this way, it is not necessary to set the continuation time of the mini-character presentation in advance, and it is possible to flexibly decide whether or not to continue the mini-character presentation according to the conditions such as the transition to the customer waiting state and the game state. In this way, it is possible to dynamically determine the end condition of the mini character presentation by callback, so there is no need to define individual presentation blocks corresponding to the execution time of the mini character presentation, and a presentation block is defined for each character. to facilitate management.

It should be noted that the effect blocks for effects that can span multiple variations, such as the look-ahead timer effects, background effects, and mini-character effects described above, may be set in duplicate, in which case the look-ahead timer effects, background effects, and mini-character effects overlap. will be executed. In addition, a plurality of effect blocks for effects that can span multiple variations may be overlapped at different timings. Even if it is, it becomes possible to make the start timing of each production different. As a result, it is possible to maintain the expectation for the subsequent variation even after the end of one of the performances, and further increase the expectation for the variation when the same starting memory is the target of pre-reading. be able to.

In addition, when outputting the effect sound by applying the automatic channel method in the effect that spans multiple fluctuations, it is different from the effect sound that is output in the effect executed in one variation (for example, reach effect) AUTO groups may be assigned. For example, by assigning the sound effects of a production performed with one variation to an AUTO group that can be assigned to more channels, it is possible to prioritize the output of the production sound effects of the variation, while the output of the production sound effects of the variation is configured with a small number of channels. Sound effects that span multiple fluctuations in an AUTO group that is connected (for example, the sound of “start!”, which is the start sound of the look-ahead timer effect, the counting sound (tit-tit-tit, etc.), which is the sound during the countdown, and the sound effect of the end of the timer , etc.), it is possible to prevent many channels from being occupied for a long period of time.

Furthermore, different AUTO groups may be set for each type of effects that span multiple variations. For example, an AUTO group consisting of two channels is defined for look-ahead timer effects, and an AUTO group consisting of two channels is defined for mini-character effects. As a result, even when the look-ahead timer presentation and the mini-character presentation are executed in parallel, the presentation effect sound of each presentation can be output without being hindered. The effect sound in the background effect is output constantly during the effect like BGM, or it is only output when the background is switched. channel (AUTO group) may be substituted.

Controls such as the output of sound effects, the movement of movable characters, and the lighting of lamps, etc., can be executed in accordance with the liquid crystal display by the production SW in the production that spans multiple variations such as the look-ahead timer production, background production, and mini character production. is. In particular, when the end timing of the effect cannot be specified at the start of the effect, it is difficult to control the effect device at the timing preset by the sub-effect block data. By controlling the , it is possible to realize a production with a sense of unity. In addition, in the case of outputting the effect sound of the effect for which the end timing of the effect is not specified at the start of the effect, the sub effect block data for outputting the corresponding effect sound is repeatedly executed while the effect continues, and when the effect ends, Execution of the sub effect block data may be stopped.

On the other hand, when it is possible to specify the end timing of the effect at the start of the effect, such as the look-ahead timer effect, the liquid crystal effect block data that performs the display effect and the sub effect block data that performs the effect with sound, accessories, etc. can be executed as As a result, it is possible to independently define the display effect and the effect using sounds, accessories, etc., and to configure the effect by freely combining various effect block data. For example, a plurality of types of liquid crystal effect block data defining the display mode of the timer in the timer counting effect and sub-effect block data defining the notification sound to be output when the timer counting effect is executed are prepared and combined freely. It is possible to diversify the variations of production.

[33. Configuration 2 for displaying a plurality of identification patterns]
By the way, in recent gaming machines, the effect display device 1600 executes a wide variety of effects in order to enhance the interest of the game. There was a possibility that the production area would be narrowed depending on the area where it was set. In order to prevent this, the area where the identification pattern is displayed is temporarily reduced. However, continuing the variable display while changing the display area of the identification pattern may complicate the control or increase the load on the control. Furthermore, it is necessary to suppress the decrease in interest in the game by making the aspect of reducing or enlarging the identification pattern suitable for the content of the presentation.

Therefore, the production display device 1600 is provided with a plurality of display areas for performing variable display of the identification symbols, and is configured so that the variable display of a plurality of sets of identification symbols is performed at the same time. The configuration for displaying a plurality of sets of identification symbols in different modes (high-decoration dynamic display, low-decoration dynamic display) in order to meet the needs of the player has been described with reference to FIG. In the embodiment, it is configured so that the player can visually recognize the variable display of the identification symbol in at least one of the display areas during the symbol variation. At this time, the decoration mode of the identification pattern in each display area may be the same or may be different.

[33-1. Example of configuration for simultaneously displaying identification patterns in multiple areas]
FIG. 223A is a diagram showing an example of variably displaying identification symbols in a plurality of display areas according to the present embodiment. The display area A occupies about 70% of the entire display area of the effect display device 1600 from the top. In addition, the display area B occupies the lower right area of the entire display area when viewed from the front. In addition, the pending display is arranged in the lower left part of the screen. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the fourth pattern is not displayed within the display area of the effect display device 1600, but is displayed by a light emitter such as an LED or a lamp (not shown).

In the example shown in FIG. 223A, first, as shown in (A), the starting memory is digested, and the variable display of identification symbols is started. At this time, the variable display of the first identification pattern is started in the display area A (first display area), and the variable display of the second identification pattern is started in the display area B (second display area). In this embodiment, the first identification pattern displayed in the display area A and the second identification pattern displayed in the display area B are displayed in substantially the same manner, but the first identification pattern displayed in the display area A And the second identification symbols displayed in the display area B may be in a symbol display mode in which the player can recognize that they are equivalent symbol combinations.

Further, the variable display of the first identification pattern and the second identification pattern is started at the same time and stopped at the same time, and the timing at which the stop mode of all the identification patterns is finally determined is the same. In this embodiment, the individual patterns (left pattern, middle pattern, right pattern) of each identification pattern are stopped at the same time, but if the fixed timing of the patterns is the same, the stop timing of each pattern is arbitrary. good too.

The layers of the screen shown in FIG. 223A are composed of a background layer, a pattern layer (first identification pattern), a pattern layer (second identification pattern), an announcement layer, and the like. In this embodiment, since the first identification pattern and the second identification pattern are displayed in the same manner, it is possible to use other drawing information by changing the coordinates and size for displaying the identification pattern. As a result, the drawing data can be shared, and the data volume can be reduced. Moreover, it becomes possible to share drawing processing, and to suppress the complication of the program structure.

As in the above-described example, the first identification pattern is subjected to various effects up to the result display (derivation of the lottery result) of the variable display (symbol variation, dynamic display). For example, when switching the identification pattern from the high-speed display mode to the low-speed display mode, the identification pattern can be replaced by executing a callback based on the production SW for replacing the identification pattern, and the identification pattern can be decorated until just before the stop. can. Further, in the present embodiment, the second identification symbol is also variably displayed in the same effect mode as the first identification symbol, but it is also possible to change the effect content by adapting it to the display area. Further, the display mode of the second identification symbol may be changed based on the effect SW defined for the first identification symbol. As a result, the variable display of the first identification pattern and the variable display of the second identification pattern can be smoothly interlocked.

In this embodiment, when the variable display of symbols is started, the left identification symbol, the right identification symbol, and the middle identification symbol are stopped in this order. FIG. 223A(B) shows a state in which the left identification symbols of the first identification symbol and the second identification symbol are stopped. At this time, an airplane-shaped announcement character is displayed on the upper right side of the display area, and a tree-shaped announcement character is displayed on the lower part of the display area. Note that each preview character is drawn on a different layer, and the image can be changed or deleted individually. As a result, it is possible to independently execute a plurality of advance notice effects according to the degree of expectation of the variable display.

The character of the airplane displayed as the advance notice effect is displayed while being enlarged by executing the effect in which the character is visually recognized so as to approach the front of the screen according to the degree of expectation of the big win. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 223A(B), an airplane character is displayed in a reduced state in the upper left part of the display area, and is gradually enlarged as the variable display progresses. FIG. 223A(C) shows a state in which the variable display of the right identification symbol is stopped and reach has occurred. The airplane character has moved to the upper center and is displayed larger than the character shown in FIG. 223A(B). After that, as shown in FIG. 223A(D), in the ready-to-win state, an advance notice effect is executed in which the first identification symbol is additionally decorated.

After that, as shown in FIG. 223A(E), the display of the airplane character is further enlarged and displayed on the front side of the first identification pattern. At this time, the identification pattern inside the first identification pattern is hidden by the airplane character, and after that, the airplane character is further enlarged, and the display of the first identification pattern is interrupted as shown in FIG. 223A(F). be done. At this time, the variable display of the first identification pattern may be continuously displayed on the back side of the enlarged airplane character without stopping.

After that, as shown in FIG. 223A(G), the variable display of the identification symbols is finished, and the fixed display is performed. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 223A (H), the result of the variable display is a big win, and the game shifts to a big win game state.

Subsequently, the second identification pattern will be further described. As shown in FIGS. 223A(A) and 223A(B), the second identification pattern is also displayed in a variable manner in the same manner as the first identification pattern. Further, as shown in FIG. 223A(C), when the left identification pattern and the right identification pattern stop at the same identification pattern "5" and reach occurs, as shown in FIG. 223A(D), the first identification pattern Similarly, the second identification pattern is also displayed with additional decoration.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 223A (E) and 223A (F), even if the player cannot visually recognize the first identification symbol due to the advance notice effect in the variation display after the occurrence of reach, the variation display of the second identification symbol is in a state where the player can visually recognize it.

In this embodiment, the player can visually recognize at least one of the first identification symbol and the second identification symbol during the variable display of the identification symbols. Therefore, even if the first identification pattern or the second identification pattern cannot be visually recognized, the second identification pattern is displayed with additional decoration in the same manner as the first identification pattern, so that the decoration mode of the identification pattern changes. To surely notify a player of the degree of expectation of a big win.

Also, the additional decoration of the first identification pattern and the additional decoration of the second identification pattern may be different. The maximum number of stars for the additional decoration may be set to 3 for the second identification symbol so as to be easily recognized by the player. The player can determine that the state in which only the second identification symbol is displayed is the state in which the preview image with the high expectation that the first identification symbol is hidden is displayed, or the second identification symbol is displayed. If there is no additional decoration of the pattern, it may be judged that the prediction image that hides the first identification pattern is displayed as a so-called fake performance with a low expectation.

For the first identification pattern and the second identification pattern, common image data may be used and drawn on a layer corresponding to each display area, and the additional decoration may be set for each display area. In this way, identification patterns are variably displayed in a plurality of areas, and part of the image data required for variably displayed images is shared, thereby saving the capacity for storing image data and increasing the variety of effects. can be done.

Further, not only the image data but also the liquid crystal presentation scheduler data for variably displaying the identification pattern in each display area may be made common. For example, by parameterizing the display position (coordinates) of identification patterns, layer-related information, etc., and processing them in a common procedure, the development efficiency of programs related to production can be improved and changes in production specifications can be flexibly handled. becomes possible. Furthermore, whether or not to display the additional decoration is determined at the time of execution based on the effect SW defined in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data selected based on the variation pattern or the like, and the corresponding process is simply executed. A more effective performance can be realized without complicating the performance control.

In the example shown in FIG. 223A, the notice image (character) is displayed on the front side of the identification pattern so as to hinder the recognition of the identification pattern. This is the same even if the recognition of the variable display of the identification pattern is obstructed by the action of the character. For example, the movable area of the character may be set so that the display area B is visible even when the character moves to the front side of the display area and becomes difficult to see except for the lower part of the screen.

As described above, in the present embodiment, there is a period in which the first identification symbol becomes difficult to see due to the advance notice effect, and only the second identification symbol can be seen by the player. Therefore, a callback is executed based on the identification symbol replacement effect SW of the second identification symbol, and the replacement table and reel index replacement work number of the identification symbol are performed based on the stop symbol and the stop timing of the symbol at the switching timing of the identification symbol. By using the table to replace not only the second identification pattern but also the first identification pattern, the identification pattern is decorated until just before the stop. As a result, the decoration for the first identification pattern and the decoration for the second identification pattern can be executed at the same timing or interlocked timing, so that the performance effect can be increased and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Also, the display area B for displaying the second identification pattern may not be fixed. The arrangement of the display area B may be changed according to the type of the advance notice effect, and the position where the second identification pattern is displayed may be changed. For example, the coordinates of the layer corresponding to the display area B are set to values corresponding to the preview effect. Also, a plurality of layers corresponding to the display area B may be prepared. At this time, a plurality of types of layers are prepared corresponding to the position where the second identification pattern is displayed, a parameter for displaying the corresponding layer is set to ON according to the type of the advance notice effect, and a parameter for the layer not to be displayed is set. to OFF. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to display the second identification pattern at a preset position, it is also possible to display the identification pattern separately from the first identification pattern and the second identification pattern, and By setting the parameters of all layers to OFF, it is also possible to display only the first identification pattern.

The display of the layer corresponding to the display area may be executed based on the effect SW defined in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data selected based on the variation pattern, the advance notice effect, and the like. For example, when the movable accessory moves to the left front of the screen and the left side of the screen becomes difficult to see, the effect SW that sets the display area B on the right side of the screen is set to ON to display the second identification pattern. However, the effect SW displayed at another position may be set to OFF.

In addition, the effect sound is output corresponding to the variable display of the identification pattern in each display area, but in this embodiment, the variable display of the first identification pattern and the variable display of the second identification pattern are executed in a similar manner. Therefore, a common effect sound may be output. In addition, when only the narrow display area B is displayed, such as when the announcement effect is executed in front, the volume of the effect sound is lowered, or the output of the effect sound is stopped. Alternatively, the sound output related to the variable display may be suppressed by giving priority to the output related to the advance notice effect.

Furthermore, the sounds (BGM, effect sound) related to the variable display of the identification pattern are managed as one AUTO group, and the sounds (BGM, effect sound) related to the notice effect are managed as another AUTO group, and an automatic channel system is used. sound control by At this time, by setting the priority of the AUTO group outputting the sound related to the notice performance to be high, it is possible to automatically prioritize the output of the sound output by the notice performance, and the performance control becomes complicated. can be suppressed. As described above, by setting parameters such as whether or not to output sound and the volume suppression value, it is possible to suppress the output of other effect sounds that are output while the sound related to the announcement effect is being output. can.

As described above, in the present embodiment, even if it becomes difficult to visually recognize the identification pattern during the variable display due to an advance notice effect or the like, by performing the variable display of the identification pattern in a plurality of display areas, any one of the Since it suffices for the player to be able to visually recognize the variable display of the identification pattern, the restriction on the area in which the notice effect is executed can be relaxed. In addition, it is possible to relax restrictions on the range in which the movable accessory operates.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, variable display is performed in a plurality of display areas in the same manner, so drawing can be performed using a common program and image data. On the other hand, even when the decoration image is displayed superimposed on the identification pattern in each display area, a layer to be displayed on the front side of the identification pattern is prepared for each display area, and only the program and image data corresponding to the decoration image are prepared. can be realized by As a result, it is only necessary to prepare a minimum program and data that will be the difference, suppressing the increase in image data accompanying the diversification of the performance content, suppressing the complication of performance control, and suppressing the increase in storage capacity. can be

[33-2. Modified example 1 of configuration capable of simultaneously displaying identification patterns in multiple areas]
In the above-described configuration example, the identification pattern is variably displayed in the same manner in the display area A and the display area B from the start to the stop of the identification pattern, but here, each display area is independently displayed. An example will be described in which identification symbols are variably displayed, and variably displayed in the same manner (synchronized) in each display area when a predetermined condition is established.

FIG. 223B is a diagram showing an example in which identification patterns are independently variably displayed in a plurality of display areas according to the present embodiment, and variably displayed in the same manner at a predetermined timing. In this modification, the variable display of identification symbols is started simultaneously in each display area. Fluctuating display continues. Similarly, as shown in (C), even if the right symbol stops in the display area A and the left and right symbols form the ready-to-reach mode, the variable display of all identification symbols continues in the display area B.

Subsequently, after the ready-to-win state is formed in (C), after the ready-to-win effect for a predetermined period progresses, all the left, middle, and right patterns are re-changed, as shown in (D), the identification pattern is re-changed. ("Next") is displayed in the middle symbol, and as shown in (E), the variable display of all identification symbols is started again. Subsequently, as shown in (F), the right and left symbols are stopped so as to form a ready-to-win mode. It should be noted that the second identification pattern in the display area B does not form the ready-to-win state at the timing of this ready-to-win state. As described above, after the first identification pattern displayed in the display area A forms the ready-to-win state, the pattern indicating the re-fluctuation of the identification pattern is displayed in the middle pattern, so that the re-fluctuation is performed. Therefore, at the timing when the first identification pattern displayed in the display area A becomes the reach state, if it changes again, the second identification pattern does not form the reach state, and if it does not change again, the second identification If the symbols form a ready-to-win mode, it becomes possible for the player to determine whether or not the player will be re-varyed by looking at the display of this second identification symbol, which may lead to a decrease in interest (especially the above-mentioned re-varying symbols). It is necessary to maintain as much as possible the player's interest in the possibility of re-fluctuation because of the game specifications that increase the expectation of a big hit by repeatedly stopping and re-fluctuation). Therefore, in this modified example, at the timing when the first identification symbol forms the ready-to-win state, the second identification symbol does not form the ready-to-win state, thereby solving such a problem. Then, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the ready-to-win state is formed in the first identification symbol (for example, when a high-expectation ready-to-win effect with a high degree of expectation for a big hit is performed after becoming a ready-to-win), as shown in (G), the second The identification pattern is displayed in the same manner as the first identification pattern in the reach mode, and after that, the display area B is displayed with additional ornamentation in the same manner as the display area A, and the display area B is displayed in the same display mode as the display area A. An identification pattern is displayed. (H) and (I) are the same as (G) and (H) in FIG. 223A. In addition, in FIG. 223B, for example, after the high-expected reach effect is performed, the display of the second identification pattern in the display area B is the same as the first identification pattern (in other words, the first identification pattern is For a predetermined period after reaching reach, the first identification pattern and the second identification pattern are in different display modes), and in the display area B, the additional decoration display is performed in the same manner as in the display area A. , this timing can be triggered by another predetermined condition.

The predetermined condition may be, for example, the point in time when the final re-fluctuation is started while repeatedly executing the temporary stop of the identification pattern, or the start timing of the re-fluctuation after the last temporary stop in the pseudo-continuation. can also Also, the start timing of the ready-to-win effect may be the timing when the display modes of the respective display areas are made the same.

As another predetermined condition, the predetermined condition may be established when the advance notice effect by a specific movable accessory is executed, for example, when there is a possibility that part of the display area may become invisible. At this time, the display mode of each display area may be set to be the same from the beginning assuming that a predetermined condition is established from the start of fluctuation, or the execution timing of the advance notice effect by a specific movable accessory may be matched. The execution timing of the advance notice effect is, for example, the elapsed time from a specific timing such as the start of fluctuation. Furthermore, when the movable accessory is operated by the operation of the effect button, the operation of the effect button may be set as a predetermined condition so that the display modes of the respective display areas are controlled to be the same.

Further, when the expectation of a big hit is high, a predetermined condition may be established. This is because there is a high possibility that a flashy presentation other than the presentation by the movable accessory will be executed. Also in this case, the predetermined condition may be established from the start of fluctuation. Furthermore, the various timings described above may be combined, for example, the timing of executing a ready-to-win effect with a high expectation of a big hit, or the timing of starting the final temporary fluctuation when executing a performance with a movable accessory. .

As described above, according to this modification, similar to the above-described embodiment, the display mode of the identification pattern in each display area is made the same while maintaining the effect of alleviating the restriction on the area where the announcement effect is executed. By adjusting the (synchronized) timing, it is possible to realize various effects. In addition, in the first half, where the execution frequency of production with movable accessories is low, the control load is reduced by simplifying the display mode of some display areas (low-decoration mode), and in the second half, where the production with high expectations is performed. To increase interest in a game by making it possible to suppress the restriction of performance contents such as restriction of the movement range of a movable accessory by setting the same display mode (high decoration mode) in all display areas. can be done.

[33-3. Modified example 2 of configuration capable of simultaneously displaying identification patterns in multiple areas]
In the example described above, after the identification pattern is variably displayed in the same display mode in each display area, the same pattern is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, in the modified example described here, it is possible to stop and display the identification symbols in different modes (designs) after the identification symbols are displayed in a variable manner in each display area.

FIG. 223C is a diagram showing an example in which identification patterns are displayed in a variable manner in each of a plurality of display areas according to this embodiment, and stopped at different patterns. Since (A) to (F) are the same as the example shown in FIG. 223A, illustration of (C) to (E) is omitted. It should be noted that the game machine may variably display the identification symbols in the same manner as in Modification 1 shown in FIG. 223B, and the game machine may have different stop symbols in each display area as in Modification 2. FIG.

In this modified example, when a plurality of types of winning types are prepared, and when the same mode (identification pattern) is stopped and displayed in each display area, the "first win" is displayed, while each display area has a different mode. When the (identification symbol) is stopped and displayed, it indicates a "second win" (for example, a "minor win") different from the "first win". As shown in FIG. 223C (G), in the display area A, the identification symbols are all the same "5", "5", and "5" are stopped and displayed, while in the display area B, the middle symbols are different, and the identification symbol "5" is displayed. ”, “V”, and “5” are stopped. In this modified example, when a small win is prepared as the second win, as shown in FIG. A game ball can be received in the V zone arranged in the game area. When a game ball wins in the V zone, for example, it becomes possible to shift to a high probability state.

As described above, according to this modified example, it is possible to inform the player of the details of the winning by indicating the winning type by combining the identification symbols stopped and displayed in a plurality of display areas. . For example, it is possible to indicate whether or not the stop symbol in the display area A is "win", and to indicate the type of "win" by the stop symbol in the display area B.

Also, the combination of stop symbols in each display area makes it difficult for the player to misunderstand the result of the variable display. Specifically, when the stop symbol in the display area A indicates "hit", the same identification symbol is stopped and displayed so that the player can clearly recognize the win. The display area B should also be prevented from being misunderstood by the player. For example, when the result of the variable display is "missing", the same identification pattern may be stopped and displayed to prevent the player from being misunderstood. In the case of a so-called "big hit", the same identification pattern is stopped and displayed in the display area A. On the other hand, in the case of a "minor win", which gives less game value than the "big hit", the same identification is displayed only in the display area B. You may make it stop-display by a pattern.

When the type of "hit" is suggested by the display mode of the display area B, for example, when the same identification pattern as the display area A is stopped and displayed, it is "probability variable big hit", or the same different from the display area A When the identification symbol is stopped and displayed, it may be set as a "normal jackpot" that does not shift to the variable probability state. Furthermore, only the medium pattern may be used as another identification pattern to recognize the type of the big hit. The number of rounds may be suggested by stopping the symbols corresponding to the number of rounds of the jackpot game in the middle symbols.

Furthermore, the display area B may be made non-display when the identification pattern is stopped, and the player may have a sense of anticipation without notifying the type of "hit" while announcing the "hit". For example, it is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation by making it ambiguous whether or not the probability fluctuates after the big hit. Also, the display area B may suggest an advantageous game state (probability change state, time reduction state, etc.) to be generated after the end of the big win game.

Further, after informing the player of the big win in the display mode in the display area A, the display of the identification pattern may be continued only in the display area B. If the display in the display area B is continued, the player can recognize the big win, and after notifying the big win, the identification pattern in the display area A is hidden to perform subsequent effects. area can be secured. In this case, the display of "5", "V" and "5" at the start of the big win in the display area B is changed to "5", "5" and "5" which were displayed in the display area A from the middle of the big win game. It may be displayed so as to match the In addition, this display may be displayed until the big win game ends and the identification pattern starts to change in the game after the big win game ends, or the display may be stopped at a predetermined timing in the middle of the big win game. . However, even when the display is stopped in the middle of the big win game, it is preferable to display the winning symbols in the display area A or the display area B when the game is started after the big win game ends. In this case, for example, ``5'', ``V'', and ``5'' are displayed at the winning timing in the display region B, but after the big winning game is finished, ``5'', ``V'', and ``5'' may be similarly displayed. The display may be changed to "5" "5" "5" with a game intervening.

According to this modification, similarly to the above-described embodiment, by performing a variable display of identification symbols in a plurality of display areas, it is possible to relax the restriction on the area in which the announcement effect is executed, and stop symbols in the plurality of display areas. By combining , it becomes possible to inform the player of the result of the game in detail, and furthermore, it becomes possible to realize various notification modes. As a result, the expectation of the player can be heightened, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

[34. Substrate as a constituent element of the decorative body]
By the way, in recent gaming machines, in order to realize a wide variety of presentations, the number of accessories (decorative bodies) mounted on the gaming machine has been increased, or the game has been enhanced by enlarging the size or transforming the machine. However, since the size of the game machine is set to a predetermined size, the game area is limited, and factors such as the increase in size of the liquid crystal display device have limited the size and arrangement of characters. Therefore, there is a possibility that the performance becomes monotonous and the interest in the game is lowered. The embodiments described below have been made in view of the above circumstances, and aim to provide a means for increasing the size of accessories and improving the flexibility of arrangement.

The accessories provided in the game machine are visually recognizable from the front side of the player, and are provided with decorative parts rich in decorativeness in order to enhance the interest of the game, and are provided with light emitters such as LEDs inside. , light is emitted in a mode according to the game state, the degree of expectation of the variable display, and the like. If the luminous body is arranged on a substrate like an LED, the decorative section has a transmission section through which the light output from the luminous body can be transmitted. The transmissive portion may be, for example, a transparent member that allows light to pass through, or may be a member having a mesh of holes through which light passes.

On the other hand, by providing the transmissive portion, the player can visually recognize the board on which electronic components such as LEDs and resistors are mounted through the transmissive portion. Usually, the board is mounted with electronic parts necessary for exhibiting the production effect, and is not premised on being visually recognized by the player. However, in the decorative portion having a transparent portion through which light can pass, there is a possibility that the board placed inside the decorative portion will be visually recognized by the player, and the decorative effect will be reduced.
On the other hand, if the transparency of the transmissive part is reduced, or if the surface of the transmissive part is made of a material that reflects light from the outside, or if the substrate cannot be seen, there is a risk that the expected effect will not be obtained. be. Furthermore, if the LED is arranged at a position where the player cannot see the LED from the outside of the decorative portion or the transmissive portion, the size of the decorative portion may increase unintentionally.

Therefore, an object of the present embodiment is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a reduction in the decoration effect even if the substrate is viewed through the transparent portion that constitutes the decoration portion.

[34-1. game board]
FIG. 224 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the game board 5 of the game machine in this embodiment. In the example shown in FIG. 224, an effect display device 1600 (on the game board side) is arranged in the center of the game area 5a. Also, although not shown, in the game area 5a, like the game board 5 described above, there are a plurality of general prize winning openings that are always open to receive the hit game balls, and a plurality of general prize winning openings. The mouth is a starting opening that is always open to accept game balls at different positions in the game area 5a, a gate part that detects the passage of the game ball, and a game ball to the first starting opening or the second starting opening. It is provided with a big prize winning opening etc. that can accept game balls in any of them according to the result of the lottery.

Furthermore, in the upper right part of the game area 5a, a character role object 9100 in the shape of a character reading "Super heat" is arranged. FIG. 225 is a perspective view showing the shape of the character accessory 9100 in this embodiment. The character accessory 9100 is, as shown in FIG. 225, a plate-like accessory that imitates the shape of the character "Gekiatsu". The production by the character role 9100 is executed in a mode according to the degree of expectation of the pattern variation. For example, it may emit light in a color corresponding to the degree of expectation, or may change the light emission mode such as repeating turning on and off in a predetermined pattern. In addition, alternately lighting up "strong" and "heat", and if the expectation is high, light up both characters to notify a big hit, and finally turn off both characters to execute a so-called fake effect You may

As will be described later, the character accessory 9100 has a cover member (cover body) 9110 that is visually recognized by the player, and is composed of a transparent portion 9111 and a non-transparent portion 9112. The transparent portion 9111 can emit light by a light emitter provided inside. In this embodiment, the transmissive portion (first region) 9111 is the portion corresponding to the character, the non-transmissive portion (second region) 9112 is the outer edge portion of the character, and the transmissive portion 9111 is substantially colorless and transparent. . The non-transmissive portion 9112 may also be transmissive, eg, colored with a different degree of transparency than the transmissive portion 9111 . Details of the character role product 9100 will be described with reference to FIG. 227 and subsequent drawings.

In addition, the character role 9100 partially overlaps the upper right portion of the effect display device 1600, and the light output from the display area of the effect display device 1600 is irradiated to the back side of the character role 9100. At this time, by making the back side of the character accessory 9100 a reflective member, it is possible to execute an effect combined with the effect executed by the effect display device 1600 . Also, part of the character role 9100 may be configured to be transmissive, and an effect may be performed in which the light output from the display area of the effect display device 1600 is transmitted through the character role 9100 .

In addition, a space is formed between the front side of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the game area 5a, and a snowman role 9200 imitating the shape of a "snowman" is formed on the front side of the lower left part of the effect display device 1600. are placed. The snowman accessory 9200 is formed in the shape of a three-dimensional doll, and the player can visually recognize a part of the side and back sides of the snowman accessory 9200 from the side.

FIG. 226 is a perspective view showing the shape of the snowman accessory 9200 according to this embodiment, where (A) is a view from the front and (B) is a view from the back. The snowman accessory 9200 is formed of a member having a transparent appearance, and exerts a production effect by transmitting light from a light-emitting body (LED) provided inside to the outside.

The snowman accessory 9200 is composed of a hat, a head, and a body. The head and body are made of a transparent member, allowing the player to see the inside. The hat part has a bucket shape and is provided on the upper side of the head. The hat portion is made of a colored member, and in this embodiment, can transmit light emitted from a light emitting body such as an LED provided therein. Details of the snowman accessory 9200 will be described with reference to FIG. 239 and subsequent drawings.

The snowman role 9200, like the character role 9100, is executed in a mode corresponding to the degree of expectation of pattern variation. For example, it may emit light in a color corresponding to the degree of expectation, or may be repeatedly turned on and off. Also, only the head may be lit, or only the body may be lit. Also, at the first stage of the notice performance, only the hat part may be lit to increase the player's expectation, and the head part may be sequentially lit from the head part to the body part.

[34-2. Character role (extreme heat)]
Next, a detailed configuration of the character role product 9100 will be described. FIG. 227 is an exploded perspective view of the character accessory 9100 of this embodiment. The character role object 9100 includes a cover member (cover body) 9110 arranged on the front side visible to the player, and a character role object substrate arranged on the back side of the cover member 9110 and equipped with a light emitter 9301 such as an LED. 9120 and a base member 9130 attached to the back side of the cover member 9110 and the character and character substrate 9120 .

[34-2-1. cover member]
The cover member 9110 is formed with a peripheral wall portion 9113 protruding rearward on the outer periphery, and the space on the back side surrounded by the peripheral wall portion 9113 can accommodate the character accessory board 9120 . FIG. 228 is a view of the cover member 9110 of the character accessory 9100 of this embodiment viewed from the back side. The state in which the character and role board 9120 is accommodated will be described later with reference to FIG. As described above, the cover member 9110 is formed of a transmissive portion 9111 imitating the character of “hot” which can transmit light, and a non-transmissive portion 9112 which is formed around the periphery of the transmissive portion 9111 and which hardly transmits light. ing.

In addition, the peripheral wall portion 9113 forming the outer peripheral portion of the character object 9100 is made of a material that does not easily transmit light, like the non-transmissive portion 9112, and may be the same member as the non-transmissive portion 9112. In addition, when the characters are individually lit, it is necessary to provide a peripheral wall portion 9113 between the characters in order to separate the characters. At this time, the character accessory board 9120 may be prepared for each character, or the board may be integrated.

The transmissive portion 9111 is made of a colorless and transparent material so that the inside of the character accessory 9100 can be visually recognized. At the time of performance execution, light is transmitted through the transmissive part 9111 and the light is blocked by the non-transmissive part 9112 by means of a light emitting body 9301 provided inside, thereby making the characters of "extreme heat" stand out and heightening the expectation of the player. be able to. In addition, it is possible not only to transmit light from a light emitting body (LED) 9301 arranged on the character role board 9120, but also to allow the player to visually recognize the character role board 9120 itself. .

In this embodiment, a light diffusing portion that diffuses light is formed in the non-transmissive portion 9112 on the back side of the cover member 9110 . Instead of forming the light diffusion portion, a light guide member may be provided between the cover member 9110 and the character board 9120, and the diffusion member is provided by guiding the light from the light emitter 9301 to the transmission portion 9111. It is possible to obtain the same effect as in the case of A modification using a light guide member will be described later.

With the above configuration, the light inside the character object can be efficiently collected with a small number of light emitters, so that the number of light emitters 9301 arranged on the character character object board 9120 can be reduced, and the light emission can be reduced. The degree of freedom of arrangement of the body 9301 can be increased.

Furthermore, the non-transmissive portion 9112 may be formed of a transmissive material having a lower transmittance than the transmissive portion 9111 without forming a light diffusing portion. For example, by using a colored material having transparency, the entire character accessory 9100 is made to emit light, and the difference in the degree of transparency makes the character part stand out while producing a production effect different from that in the case of using the light diffusing part. be able to.

[34-2-2. Character accessory board]
FIG. 229 is a diagram showing the front side of the character role product board 9120 of the character role product 9100 of the present embodiment. Also, FIG. 230 is a diagram showing a state in which the character accessory board 9120 is accommodated in the cover member 9110 of the character accessory 9100 of the present embodiment, and shows the back side of the character accessory board 9120. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 229 and 230, the character accessory substrate 9120 does not have a general rectangular shape, but has the shape of the character accessory 9100 according to the contour shape of the space surrounded by the peripheral wall portion 9113 of the cover member 9110. It has a similar shape. Also, the surface of the character and role board 9120 is coated with a resist colored in a predetermined color (specific color). Although various information is displayed on the character board 9120, it may be displayed by silk printing or the like, or may be displayed by etching characters.

Further, the back side of the character role board 9120 is covered by the base member 9130 when attached to the game board 5, so that the player cannot see it. Therefore, it is not necessary to set the color of the substrate to a specific color, but the manufacturing cost for processing the front and back surfaces separately rather than the cost of the material should be compared to decide whether to apply the resist only to the front surface or both surfaces. You just have to decide.

The character/accessory board 9120 is visible from the transparent portion 9111 of the cover member 9110 as described above. Therefore, if the color of the board does not match the decoration mode of the accessory, the decorative effect may be reduced, or the electronic components arranged on the board may hinder the decorative effect. Therefore, in this embodiment, the character accessory board 9120 itself is used as one of the decorative elements. For example, the character and role board 9120 is colored in a color (specific color) that matches the decoration mode of the character instead of the general green color, or the electronic components mounted on the character and role board 9120 are used to create the character pattern. Arrange so as to form an eggplant. The color in line with the decoration mode of the character is, for example, a color related to the character or theme appearing in the performance of the character (gaming machine). Hereafter, it demonstrates concretely, referring drawings.

First, a specific mode for using the shape, color, etc. of a substrate provided on a decorative body such as a accessory as a decorative element will be described. Since the character accessory 9100 of the present embodiment has the transparent portion 9111 as described above, the character accessory substrate 9120 provided inside can be visually recognized. Therefore, by coloring the character accessory substrate 9120 in a specific color that matches the decoration mode of the character accessory 9100, the overall color of the character accessory 9100 is configured. For example, if the surface of the character role board 9120 is blue, the entire character object becomes blue when the light emitter 9301 does not emit light, and the light emission color of the light emitter 9301 when the light emitter 9301 emits light, thereby giving a completely different impression to the game. can give to anyone. In particular, when the transmissive portion 9111 occupies a large area in the entire accessory, a greater effect can be obtained.

[34-2-3. Luminous Body/Electronic Component]
A plurality of light emitters (LEDs) 9301 are arranged on the surface (front) side of the character and role board 9120 . The light emitters 9301 may all have the same emission color, or may have a plurality of different emission colors. The luminous body 9301 may be lit according to the progress of the game, and the lighting position may be changed according to the content of the effect. When there are different kinds of emitted colors, the colors may be emitted in accordance with the degree of expectation, or different kinds of emitted colors may be emitted at the same time.

In this embodiment, as described above, the character/accessory board 9120 is colored in a specific color. Therefore, since the color changes depending on the combination of the specific color of the character and role board 9120 and the luminescent color of the light emitter 9301, various effects can be realized by causing the light emitter 9301 to emit light of a plurality of colors. It becomes possible.

In addition, when the light emitting body 9301 is turned off, the specific color colored on the character role board 9120 is recognized. The specific color applied to 9120 and the light emission color of light emitter 9301 can be alternately recognized as different colors. For example, when the character and object substrate 9120 is colored blue as described above, if the light emitting body 9301 is slowly blinked in red, the light and darkness are provided, and the red and blue character objects are alternately displayed. It can be recognized as a character with a completely different color.

Electronic parts other than the light emitter 9301 are mounted on the back side of the character and role board 9120 . Specifically, they are a resistor 9302 , an IC 9303 and a connector 9304 . In the present embodiment, since these electronic components cannot be visually recognized by the player, any arrangement that does not cause any technical problems may be used. In addition, as shown in FIG. 230, on the back side of the character and character board 9120, information about the light emitter 9301 arranged on the front side is printed, and the electronic parts arranged on the front side are printed even from the back side. can recognize information about Information indicating the position of the light emitter 9301 is indicated by a dotted line to prevent misidentification.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 229, only the light-emitting bodies 9301 are arranged on the front side, and no information regarding electronic components is displayed. This is to prevent the decoration effect from being reduced when the printed characters (for example, the part number of the electronic component (“LED1” in FIG. 230, etc.)) are visually recognized by the player. The information may be displayed in a color that is difficult for the player to visually recognize as necessary, such as for efficiency of the display. For example, when the color of the character and role board 9120 is colored blue as described above, a similar color such as light blue that has been adjusted to make it identifiable from light and shade is used as the information display. Just do it. Alternatively, the information may be formed by etched characters.

In addition, in the character accessory 9100 according to the present embodiment, electronic parts other than the light emitter 9301 are arranged on the back side of the board that cannot be visually recognized by the player, so the electronic parts such as the resistor 9302 and the IC 9303 are black. . In addition, when the electronic parts must be arranged on the front side, at least a part of the electronic parts such as the back side of the non-transmissive part 9112 is arranged so that it is difficult for the player to see, or the color or color is difficult to see for the player. You may employ|adopt the electronic component of a shape. For example, electronic components having the same color as the specific color may be arranged on the front side.

On the other hand, as described above, the present invention is configured so that the player can visually recognize the board provided inside the accessory. Therefore, an example in which electronic components arranged on a board are used as decorative elements of a character will be described.

Electronic parts are arranged on the surface side of the character role board 9120 at positions visible to the player through the transparent portion 9111 of the cover member 9110 . At this time, the electronic parts are arranged so as to form the character pattern displayed by the character accessory 9100 . For example, electronic components are placed at regular positions to decorate characters.

Also, the arrangement of the light emitters 9301 may prevent the player from recognizing the patterns of the characters when they emit light. Furthermore, by selectively emitting light from light emitters 9301 at positions where electronic components can be recognized even when emitting light and light emitters 9301 at positions where electronic components cannot be recognized when light is emitted, patterns can be obtained. It may be configured to be switchable between presence and absence.

Moreover, it is good also as a decorative element by arrange|positioning an electronic component of colors other than black on the surface side. Although the transmissive part 9111 is colorless and transparent, it may be a lens member or a diffusing member that allows light to pass through, while making it difficult for the player to recognize the pattern by making it difficult to clearly distinguish the electronic components. Note that another specific example will be described with a snowman accessory 9200 to be described later, as to how the arrangement of the electronic components exhibits a decorative effect.

It is also possible to use characters printed on the front surface of the substrate as a pattern. Instead of printing characters in a color that is difficult for the player to recognize in order to prevent the decorative effect from being hindered, the characters that indicate information on electronic parts and boards can be recognized by the player as decorative elements. You may print in a mode (color, shape). This makes it possible to make the pattern of the accessory more complicated, or to change the color by printing in a color different from that of the cover member 9110, thereby enhancing the decorative effect. In addition, by concentrating the characters printed on the board, the player is made to recognize that an area having a color different from that of the cover member 9110 and other parts of the board is formed on the board, thereby enhancing the decorative effect of the entire character. You can make it higher.

[34-2-4. Arrangement of luminous bodies]
Next, the positional relationship between the light emitter 9301 and the transmissive portion 9111 and the non-transmissive portion 9112 of the cover member 9110 will be described. FIG. 231 is a diagram for explaining the positional relationship between the light emitter 9301 and the transmissive portion 9111 and the non-transmissive portion 9112 of the cover member 9110 in the character accessory 9100 of this embodiment.

In this embodiment, the luminous body 9301 is arranged at a position visible from the transmissive portion 9111 and at a position behind the non-transmissive portion 9112 that is difficult for the player to see. Here, the light emitter 9301 arranged at a position visible from the transmissive portion 9111 is assumed to be a light emitter 9301a, and the light emitter 9301b arranged on the back side of the non-transmissive portion 9112 is assumed.

For example, when it is desired to emit strong light, the light emitter 9301a is arranged at a position visible from the transmissive portion 9111 so as to irradiate the light directly to the outside. In addition, as described in FIG. 228, since the light diffusing portion is provided on the back side of the non-transmitting portion 9112, by arranging the light emitting body 9301b on the back side of the non-transmitting portion 9112, the light is diffused and softened. It is possible to emit light.

In this manner, the position of the light emitter 9301a may be determined according to the type of role, and by selecting the light emitter 9301 and causing it to emit light, it is possible to switch the light emission mode for one role. Specifically, when it is desired to make the entire role object emit strong light, only the light emitter 9301a or all of the light emitters 9301 are allowed to emit light. All you have to do is

Alternatively, the transmittance of the transmissive portion 9111 may be adjusted so that the luminous body 9301a is slightly difficult to see without being completely colorless and transparent. For example, the transmissive portion 9111 may have a slightly lower transmittance (colored transparent, for example, pale blue) to make it difficult to see the inside, or the surface of the transmissive portion 9111 may be processed (eg, texturing) to diffuse light. You may make it hard to visually recognize the inside in this way. By configuring in this way, the luminous body itself becomes difficult to see, but it can emit more intense light than when it is arranged on the back side of the non-transmissive portion 9112 . In addition, since the degree of freedom in the position of the light emitter 9301 is increased, the degree of freedom in design is increased, and development efficiency can be improved.

In addition, the character/accessory board 9120 itself may not be used as a direct decorative element, but may indirectly enhance the presentation effect. For example, when the specific color of the character and role board 9120 is white, it is possible to increase the reflectance even when the arranged light emitter 9301 is not lit, and when the light emitter 9301 is lit Of course, it is possible to prevent the inside of the character role object 9100 from becoming too dark by reflecting the light from the outside.

Further, since the specific color of the character role board 9120 is white, the character color of the character role product 9100 can be recognized as white as a feature when the light is turned off. In this case, if full-color LEDs (R, G, and B LEDs) are used for the light emitter 9301, the character colors can be expressed in various colors. By superimposing and fusing the light reflected (diffused) from the light diffusing part provided in the substrate surface and the light reflected from the substrate surface, a fantastic effect that cannot be expressed with a single type of light emitter 9301 can be performed. can. At this time, since various effects can be achieved without using multiple types of light emitters 9301, costs can be reduced.

As described above, the character accessories of the present embodiment are configured to be visible to the player by using the color of the board and the electronic components mounted thereon as decorative elements. Since there is no need to In addition, electronic parts that do not serve as decorative elements may be arranged on the back side of the substrate, and by arranging electronic parts other than light emitters such as LEDs on the back side, only the color of the substrate may be used as a decorative element.

[34-2-5. Base material]
The base member 9130 has the same shape as the cover member 9110 when viewed from the front when attached. The peripheral wall portion 9113 of the cover member 9110 and the base member 9130 are brought into contact with each other and fixed by a mounting member (not shown). At this time, the character object substrate 9120 may be fixed to the cover member 9110 or the base member 9130, or the character object substrate 9120 may be accommodated in the space surrounded by the peripheral wall portion 9113 of the cover member 9110 without being fixed. You may make it Wiring for transmitting signals and supplying electric power to the character board 9120 is omitted from the drawing. should be formed.

Alternatively, the cover member 9110 may be directly attached to the game board 5 without using the base member 9130 by providing the cover member 9110 with an attachment portion. In this case, the character accessory board 9120 is attached to the cover member 9110 .

[34-3. Variation 1 of Character Accessory]
Subsequently, the shape of the character object board 9120 does not completely resemble the shape of the character object 9100, and the outer edge of the character object board 9120 matches the contour shape of the space surrounded by the peripheral wall part 9113 of the cover member 9110. I will explain the case where it is not. In this case, since the light emitter 9301 cannot be arranged over the entire character object 9100, the light guide member 9140 is arranged between the cover member 9110 and the character object substrate 9120 to diffuse the light, thereby making the light emitter It compensates for the lack of light quantity in the portion where 9301 is not arranged. Note that the cover member 9110 and the base member 9130 are the same as in the example described above.

FIG. 232 is a diagram showing an example of a light guide member 9140 that diffuses the light from the light emitter 9301 in the character accessory 9100 of this embodiment. The light guide member 9140 is surrounded by the peripheral wall portion 9113 of the cover member 9110, similar to the shape of the character and role board 9120 described above, in order to diffuse the light over the entire back side of the cover member 9110 of the character and role object 9100. It has a shape similar to the shape of the character accessory 9100 according to the contour shape of the space.

Figure 233 is a diagram showing the front side of the character role product substrate 9120 of the character role product 9100 of the first modification of the present embodiment. Moreover, FIG. 234 shows a state in which the character accessory board 9120 is accommodated in the cover member 9110 of the character accessory 9100 of Modification 1 of the present embodiment, and shows the back side of the character accessory board 9120. FIG. In addition, the configuration other than the shape of the character and role board 9120 is the same as the above-described embodiment.

As shown in FIGS. 233 and 234, the character accessory board 9120 is formed with a notch 9122 in which a part of the contour shape of the space surrounded by the peripheral wall 9113 of the cover member 9110 is missing. In addition, a mounting hole 9121 for fixing to the base member 9130 is formed in the central portion of the character board 9120 . As shown in FIG. 234, the attachment portion of the cover member 9110 is inserted through the attachment hole 9121 and attached to the base member 9130 .

Similarly, the light guide member 9140 is also formed with a mounting hole through which the mounting portion of the base member 9130 is inserted. Note that if the ratio of the notch 9122 is small and the position of the substrate does not shift, the substrate may be fixed by being sandwiched between the cover member 9110 and the base member 9130 without providing a mounting structure.

FIG. 235 is a diagram for explaining the positional relationship between the light emitter 9301 and the transmissive portion 9111 and the non-transmissive portion 9112 of the cover member 9110 in the character accessory 9100 of the modification of this embodiment. In this modification, since the light emitter 9301 cannot be arranged in the notch 9122, the entire character accessory 9100 is caused to emit light by guiding the light through the light guide member 9140. FIG. At this time, a light diffusion portion may be provided on the back side of the non-transmissive portion 9112 to assist the light guide member 9140 .

Therefore, in the character accessory 9100 of this modification, a part decorated with the character accessory substrate 9120 by using the color of the character accessory substrate 9120 and electronic components as decorative elements, and a notch 9122 are formed. Therefore, parts that are not decorated with the character and role board 9120 are mixed. At this time, the decorative effect can be maintained by performing optical decoration with the light diffusion portion provided on the back side of the non-transmissive portion 9112 of the light guide member 9140 and the cover member 9110 .

As described in this modification, the shape of the character role board 9120 does not have to be similar to the character role board 9100, and the part not decorated with the character role board 9120 is a light guide member 9140, a light diffusion part, etc. A reduction in the decorative effect may be suppressed by providing and performing optical decoration. Also, the color of the base member 9130 may be made the same as the specific color of the character board 9120 to suppress the reduction of the decorative effect. This makes it possible to make the shape of the character board 9120 relatively simple instead of making it complicated, and increases the degree of freedom in the size of the board, thereby reducing manufacturing costs such as processing of the board. Increase can be suppressed.

In addition, without using the base member 9130, light from the decorative portion can be transmitted through the notch portion 9122 by the decorative portion that can emit light disposed on the back side of the character accessory 9100. good. For example, when the character role object 9100 is arranged on the front side of the liquid crystal display device 1600 as in the present embodiment, by displaying an image in the upper right part of the screen, the display of the liquid crystal display device 1600 and the character role An effect integrated with the light emitting effect by the object 9100 may be executed. Also, by using a transparent member for the base member 9130, a similar effect can be executed. An example using the display of the liquid crystal display device 1600 will be described in more detail in Modified Example 2. FIG.

[34-4. Variation 2 of Character Accessory]
Although the notch part 9122 was formed in a part of the substrate in the modified example 1, in the modified example 2, an example in which the character accessory substrate 9120 described above is about half the size of the character accessory 9100 will be described. In addition, without using the base member 9130, the cover member 9110 is configured to be directly attached to the game board 5, and the configuration of the character accessory 9100 in this modification includes the cover member 9110, the character accessory substrate 9120, and the light guide. It is configured by member 9140 .

In this modified example, the light guide member 9140 guides the light to a portion where the light emitting body 9301 cannot be arranged, similarly to the modified example 1, thereby performing the optical decoration. Further, in this modified example, since the base member 9130 is not provided, if a luminous body is provided on the back side of the character object 9100, the light of the luminous body can be transmitted.

FIG. 236 is a view showing the front side of the character/accessory board 9120 of the character/accessory board 9100 of Modification 2 of the present embodiment, and the character/accessory board 9120 and the light guide member 9140 overlap. state. Also, FIG. 237 shows a state in which the character accessory board 9120 is accommodated in the cover member 9110 of the character accessory 9100 of Modification 2 of the present embodiment, and shows the back side of the character accessory board 9120. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 236 and 237, the character accessory board 9120 is configured to occupy about the upper half of the character accessory 9100 . Therefore, when the character role object 9100 of this modification is attached to the game board 5, the upper half is decorated with the specific color colored on the character role object board 9120, but the lower half is not decorated with the character role object board 9120. becomes. On the other hand, since the lower half of the character accessory 9100 can be transmitted through the transparent portion 9111, the back side of the character accessory 9100 may be made to have a specific color to suppress discomfort.

Also, different effects may be executed in the upper and lower areas. For example, in the case of a character character in which characters are written in two stages, the character character object board 9120 is arranged on the upper side, and the light emitter is arranged on the back side of the lower side to perform different effects on the upper and lower stages. Also, if this accessory is movable, different effects can be executed for each stop position by arranging different light emitters for each stop position on the back side.

Furthermore, the luminous body is not limited to LEDs and lamps, but may be the liquid crystal display device 1600 as described above. When moving downward to , the image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600 can be used to transmit light from the lower part of the role object to perform an effect.

The image displayed on the back side of the character role 9100 is the same color (character role It is preferable to display an image having the same color (the same color as the specific color) and the same shape at a portion where the physical substrate 9120 is exposed. This is because the image is displayed even if the character role object 9100 has some kind of trouble, so the game can be played without giving the player a sense of unease due to the trouble.

By configuring as described above, it is possible to realize a plurality of types of effects with one accessory, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 238, a part of the liquid crystal display device 1600 can be visually recognized by the player through a character accessory 9100 . Therefore, in addition to the light guided by the light guide member 9140, the light of the image (video) displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600 is displayed from the back side of the character accessory 9100, and the character accessory substrate 9120 emits light. , the display effect by the liquid crystal display device 1600 can be executed in cooperation. By configuring in this way, the lower side portion of the character and role board 9120 serves as a boundary, and can be used as one element that constitutes the decoration.

FIG. 238 is a diagram showing a state in which the character accessory 9100 of Modification 2 of the present embodiment is attached to the game board 5. As shown in FIG. The upper part of the character object 9100 diffuses the light emitted by the light emitter 9301 mounted on the character object substrate 9120 by the light guide member 9140 . On the other hand, the lower part of the character object 9100 diffuses the light (displayed image) output from the liquid crystal display device 1600 by the light guide member 9140 . At this time, by fusing the light from the light emitter 9301 and the light from the liquid crystal display device 1600, an effect that integrates the effect from the character role object 9100 and the effect from the liquid crystal display device 1600 can be executed.

It should be noted that effects other than the character role object 9100 and the liquid crystal display device 1600 may be combined. For example, when the game board 5 is made of a transparent member, and the decoration effect is enhanced by arranging a light-emitting body on the back side or pasting a sticker or the like, the accessories can be visually recognized through the transparent portion and combined. The decorative effect can be further enhanced by

[34-5. Snowman role]
Next, the snowman accessory 9200 will be described. As shown in FIG. 226, the snowman accessory 9200 is a snowman-like accessory (decorative body), and has a shape in which a spherical head is placed on a slightly larger spherical body than the head. It has become. Furthermore, a bucket-shaped hat portion is placed on the head in an inclined state. The hat portion is made of a colored member, and in this embodiment, it is capable of transmitting light emitted from a luminous body such as an LED provided therein.

FIG. 239 is a diagram showing a cross-sectional view of the snowman accessory 9200 of this embodiment. The snowman accessory 9200 accommodates a substrate (snowman substrate 9220) on which electronic components including light emitters 9301 such as LEDs are mounted inside the cover member 9210 divided into a front side cover member 9210a and a back side cover member 9210b. be done.

The snowman accessory 9200 is used in an effect that is executed when a predetermined condition is satisfied. In addition, since the cover member 9210 is made of a material that allows light to pass through and is arranged on the front side of the liquid crystal display device 1600, an effect of transmitting or reflecting the displayed image is executed. good too. Each configuration of the snowman accessory 9200 will be specifically described below.

FIG. 240 is a view of the front side cover member 9210a of the snowman accessory 9200 of this embodiment as seen from the back side. FIG. 241 is a diagram showing the back side cover member 9210b of the snowman accessory 9200 of this embodiment. FIG. 242 is a diagram showing the front side of the snowman substrate 9220 of the snowman accessory 9200 of this embodiment. FIG. 243 is a diagram showing the back side of the snowman board 9220 of the snowman accessory 9200 of this embodiment.

The cover member 9210 (front side cover member 9210a, back side cover member 9210b) of the snowman accessory 9200 is substantially colorless and transparent except for a part, and the substrate (snowman substrate 9220) accommodated inside from the front. ) can be visually recognized from the front side.

As shown in FIGS. 242 and 243, the snowman board 9220 has the shape of the snowman accessory 9200, and has a very well-designed shape. Also, the snowman board 9220 is coated with a resist colored in a predetermined color (specific color) in the same manner as the character and character board 9120 . In addition, the structure of the board itself is the same as that of the character board 9120, and various electronic components are mounted on the front side and the back side. As for the codes of the electronic components on the board, the same codes as those of the character accessory 9100 are used.

In this embodiment, the shape of the snowman substrate 9220 is a shape that occupies the interior of the snowman accessory 9200 so that the back side of the snowman accessory 9200 cannot be viewed from the front. As a result, the entire snowman accessory 9200 is recognized as the specific color of the snowman substrate 9220, and the color of the entire accessory is determined. On the other hand, a notch or a hole may be formed in a part of the snowman substrate 9220 so that the back side of the snowman accessory 9200 can be viewed. At this time, an image may be displayed by the liquid crystal display device 1600 from the back of the snowman role object 9200, or a decoration such as a light emitter may be arranged to increase the diversity of presentation.

In addition, the snowman role 9200 has a three-dimensional shape, and the player can visually recognize the side of the snowman role 9200 simply by slightly tilting the line of sight from the front. Since the cover member 9210 has transparency, the player can visually recognize the back surface beyond the side surface of the snowman board 9220 . In the character accessory 9100 configured so that the substrate cannot be visually recognized from the back side, the back side of the substrate does not have to be colored in a specific color, but the back side of the snowman substrate 9220 is also colored in a specific color. As a result, even when the player approaches the liquid crystal display device 1600 and visually recognizes the snowman role 9200 from the side, it is possible to prevent the decorative effect from being reduced. As a result, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in the form of the accessory, improve the performance effect, and improve the amusement of the game.

Since the player can visually recognize the back surface beyond the side surface of the snowman board 9220, the luminous body 9301 may be arranged on the back side of the snowman board 9220 to cause the entire snowman accessory 9200 to emit light from the back side. . Furthermore, by coloring the back side of the snowman board 9220 in a color different from that of the front side, it is possible to give the player a different impression from when only the light emitters 9301 on the front side emit light. A similar effect can be expected by arranging the light-emitting bodies 9301 having different emission colors while the color of the snowman substrate 9220 is the same. By configuring in this way, it is possible to diversify the light emitting modes of the character and enhance the interest of the game.

As shown in FIG. 239, the hat portion of the snowman accessory 9200 is provided with an opening, through which a cord for transmitting electric power and signals is inserted to the snowman substrate 9220 accommodated inside the snowman accessory 9200. there is Various effects are executed by causing light emitters (LEDs) 9301 arranged on the snowman board 9220 to emit light according to the supplied power and signals from the effect control device.

In addition, as described above, the hat portion of the snowman accessory 9200 is colored (eg, red) and has transparency. The permeability of the hat portion is lower than that of other portions of the snowman accessory 9200, making it difficult to visually recognize the inside. Therefore, the connectors 9304 arranged on the snowman board 9220 and the cords connected to the connectors 9304 are arranged in the hat portion so as to make them difficult for the player to see.

The cover member 9210 (front side cover member 9210a) is provided with transparent portions B9211b having different transmittances at portions corresponding to the eyes of the snowman when viewed from the front by the player. The transparent portion other than the hat portion is assumed to be a transparent portion A9211a. In this embodiment, the transmissive portion B9211b is configured such that the interior of the snowman character 9200 can be visually recognized in a blurred state with aberration remaining like a soft focus lens. Therefore, the contours of the electronic components arranged on the snowman board 9220 housed inside the snowman accessory 9200 can be obscured and visually recognized.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 242, in this embodiment, electronic components (resistors 9302) are collectively arranged on a snowman board 9220 corresponding to the eyes of the snowman accessory 9200. FIG. Resistors 9302 are black electronic components, densely arranged in a circle. When the player looks at the snowman accessory 9200 during the game, it is visually recognized through the transparent portion B9211b, and the outline of the electronic component appears blurred. As a result, the electronic components (resistors 9302) aggregated and arranged on the substrate can be recognized as the black eyes of a snowman and constitute a decorative element.

In addition, the part number of the electronic component (the part number printed by silk-screening such as "R1") is silk-printed with white, which is the same specific color as the resist of the snowman board 9220, and yellow, which is the same type, so as to be identifiable. there is In the present embodiment, the resistors 9302 are printed densely like the resistor 9302, so that they are identifiable and function as reflecting light because they are densely printed.

In the present embodiment, the part number of the electronic component (the part number printed by silk-screening such as "R1") may also be silk-printed in black in the same manner as the resistor. As described above, the effect of the lens makes it possible to recognize the eyes of the snowman together with the resistor 9302 .

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 243, an electronic component (IC9303 etc.) are placed. This makes it difficult for the player to visually recognize the electronic parts that have a low decorative effect or that may reduce the decorative effect, so that it is possible to suppress the decrease in the interest of the game due to the reduction in the performance effect. . At this time, by directing the snowman board 9220 toward the center of the game machine, it is possible to make the electronic components arranged on the back side more difficult to see.

Here, the configuration of the snowman accessory 9200 will be described by focusing on the cover members 9210 (the front side cover member 9210a and the rear side cover member 9210b). The front-side cover member 9210a and the rear-side cover member 9210b do not need to be split evenly in the front-rear direction. good. An example in which one side (inner side) of the front side cover member 9210a is formed over the snowman base plate 9220 toward the rear will be described below with reference to FIG.

FIG. 244 is a top view of a horizontal cross section of the snowman accessory 9200 of this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 244, if the inner cover member of the front side cover member 9210a is formed to extend backward beyond the side surface of the snowman board 9220, most of the appearance of the snowman accessory 9200 visually recognized by the player is is composed of the surface side cover member 9210a. As a result, the attachment point of the front side cover member 9210a to the back side cover member 9210b (the joint between the front side cover member 9210a and the rear side cover member 9210b) is located on the deep side behind the snowman board 9220, which is highly decorative. You can fulfill your role.

In addition, since the colorless and transparent (or substantially colorless and transparent) front side cover member 9210a extends to the rear of the snowman substrate 9220, the snowman substrate 9220 colored in white (specific color) is a snowman accessory 9200 not only on the front surface but also on the back surface. are decorated in white. Although it is desirable that both sides are white as in the present embodiment, only the front side may be white because the player mainly views from the front side.

Also, in FIG. 244, only the inner cover member of the front side cover member 9210a extends backward over the snowman board 9220, but depending on the decoration of the character used, only the outer side may extend behind the board. A mode in which both the inner side and the outer side extend to the rear of the substrate may be adopted.

Further, a configuration for attaching each component of the accessory to each other and attaching the accessory to the game board will be described. In the snowman accessory 9200 of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 244, the snowman substrate 9220 is attached by a substrate attachment portion 9213 and an attachment member 9214 formed on the back side cover member 9210b. At this time, it is preferable to provide the board mounting portion 9213 outside the snowman accessory 9200, which is difficult for the player to visually recognize. Furthermore, the front side cover member 9210a is attached to the back side cover member 9210b by a cover attachment portion (not shown). Also, the back side cover member 9210b is attached to the structure of the game board 5 (not shown), and like the board attachment portion 9213, it is preferable that the attachment portion for the structure is provided outside the snowman accessory 9200. In this way, by arranging the attachment portions of each component of the accessory and the attachment portion of the accessory and the game board 5 on the outside where it is difficult for the player to visually recognize, it is possible to suppress the obstruction of the decorativeness of the accessory. can be done.

In addition, not only the outside of the role, but also the part that is difficult for the player to visually recognize (for example, the part made of a colored member (the hat part in the snowman role 9200 of this embodiment), the lens cut for decoration, etc. By providing an attachment portion at a location where the deterioration is lowered, a location where the accessory shape is bent (a boundary portion between the head and the body in the snowman accessory 9200 of this embodiment, etc.), the decorativeness depending on the attachment location can be suppressed from being damaged.

In the example shown in FIG. 244, the snowman accessory 9200 is composed of the front side cover member 9210a and the back side cover member 9210b, but as shown in FIG. You may do so. FIG. 245 is a top view of a horizontal cross-section of a snowman accessory 9200 in a modified example of this embodiment.

In the modification shown in FIG. 245, the cover member 9210 and the snowman board 9220 are attached to the game board 5 via the base body 9230 . In this modified example, as in the example shown in FIG. 244, both surfaces of the snowman substrate 9220 are preferably white, but only the surface side may be white.

In this modification, the inner cover member not only extends backward beyond the snowman board 9220, but also extends backward beyond the base body 9230, so that not only the snowman board 9220 but also the base body 9230 can becomes visible from Therefore, in this modification, the base body 9230 can also be configured as a decoration by using the same specific color (for example, white) as the snowman board 9220 . Regarding the attachment of the cover member 9210 and the snowman board 9220 to the base body 9230, as described above, by providing an attachment portion at a location that is difficult for the player to visually recognize and attaching with an attachment member or the like, Impairment of decorativeness can be suppressed.

In this modified example, only the inner side of the cover member 9210 extends backward beyond the snowman board 9220 and the base body 9230. It is also possible to employ a mode in which it extends only to the rear of the substrate or the base or a mode in which it extends to the rear of the substrate or the base on both the inside and the outside.

[34-6. effects, etc.]
In general, electronic circuit boards have a raw board of a basic size, and the cost is greatly affected by how many boards can be obtained from one raw board based on this raw board. In a very simple way, it is designed in a rectangular shape, but the snowman substrate 9220 of the snowman accessory 9200 of this embodiment has a very well-designed shape. In other words, it can be said that all the elements that make up the board, from the resist and the color of the board to the electronic parts, are used as decorations for the role.

Note that the character role board 9120 of the character role object described above has a substantially rectangular shape. Compared with the snowman board 9220, it has a simpler design, but it can be said that the cover body covering the board has a more designable function.

As described above, in recent years, the inside of the role-thing has not only a light-emitting body (LED), but also a board on which an electronic circuit consisting of electronic parts for controlling the light-emitting body is formed, which is almost in the shape of the role-thing. prepared together. In the first place, the substrate on which the electronic circuit is formed has wiring that electrically connects the electronic components that make up the electronic circuit, and the substrate surface is covered with a protective film ( resist).

Therefore, we focused on the color of the resist, which is the protective film, that is, the color of the substrate, as a way to add color to the role. Even so, when the transparent part is provided on the front side, the electronic components mounted on the board are visible through the transparent part, and the decorative effect as a character may be reduced. As exemplified by the object 9100 and the snowman accessory 9200, the color of the board, all the elements that make up the board, and the mounted electronic components themselves are also used as decorative elements to prevent the reduction of the decorative effect and improve the game performance. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest in

A game machine is equipped with a plurality of substrates on which electronic components are mounted. Among these, the main board and the payout control board provided on the back side of the game machine are generally housed in a colorless and transparent case, which facilitates inspection and confirmation. On the other hand, in the light-emitting decoration substrate adopted for the movable or non-movable decorative member mounted on the game board panel, the surface facing the player on the front side has a lens that reflects and scatters the light from the light-emitting decoration substrate. Members and the like are provided, and are attached to the game board panel in a state facing the performance display device attached to the game board panel on the rear side. In addition, on the back side of the light emitting decoration board, in order to realize the function of light emitting decoration, connectors for connecting flat cables for receiving control signals from peripheral control means, control elements, drivers, resistors, capacitors, etc. of electronic components are mounted. When such a gaming machine is installed in an amusement arcade, it is difficult to confirm whether or not there is a problem with the electronic components mounted on the rear surface of the light-emitting decoration board in the gaming machine after installation. . This is because the rear surface of the light-emitting decorative substrate faces the surface forming the display area of the effect display device. Therefore, means for solving such problems are shown below.

FIG. 246 is a diagram showing the entire game board 5 in this embodiment. The game board 5 includes a game panel 1100 made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin and a game board side performance display device 1600. - 特許庁Also, the game panel 1100 includes a game area 5a, a rail member 5950, and a game panel opening 1100a. The game panel opening 1100 a is formed by punching out a physical opening in the game panel 1100 . A space is formed between the game board side effect display device 1600 and the game panel 1100 on the front side thereof, and a plurality of accessories are arranged in layers in this space. Specifically, from the front side, at positions close to the back surface of the game panel 1100, the board back grass role 6800, the first big tree role 6600, the second big tree role 6650, the first cloud role 6700, the second A cloud object 6750 is provided. The first giant tree accessory 6600 consists of a first giant tree trunk substrate 6610 and a first giant tree leaf substrate 6630, and the second giant tree accessory 6650 consists of a second giant tree trunk substrate 6660 and a second giant tree leaf substrate 6680. there is In addition, a first grass role 6470 and a second grass role 6475 are provided behind these, a rabbit role 6000 is provided behind them, and a mountain role 6500 is provided behind them. A game board side effect display device 1600 is provided behind 6500 . By arranging a plurality of accessories in layers in this manner, a sense of depth can be created.

FIG. 247(A) is a front view of the rabbit character 6000. FIG. FIG. 247(B) is a perspective view of the rabbit accessory 6000. FIG. FIG. 247(C) is an exploded perspective view of the rabbit accessory 6000. FIG. The rabbit character 6000 is configured as a unit by a face cover portion 6010 on the front side, a face substrate 6020 provided on the back side of the face cover portion 6010, and a body portion 6030. FIG. The face substrate 6020 has a first face light emitting part 6023a and a second face light emitting part 6023b as the face light emitting part 6023 on the front surface. In addition, the face substrate 6020 has a mouth decoration portion 6024 shaped like a rabbit's mouth. A first arm portion 6016 and a second arm portion 6017 made of opaque white synthetic resin are attached to the vertical bottom surface of the face cover portion 6010, imitating left and right front legs of a rabbit. At the lower end of the face substrate 6020, there is provided a body part 6030 which imitates the body part of a rabbit and is a plate-like member made of opaque white synthetic resin.

FIG. 248(A) is a front view of the face substrate 6020. FIG. FIG. 248(B) is a rear view of the face substrate 6020. FIG. The face substrate 6020 is a plate-like member configured by a printed circuit board, and the front and rear surfaces of the face substrate 6020 are entirely covered with a white protective film for protecting the electric circuit provided on the surface. . In addition, on the front side of the face substrate 6020, LEDs forming the first face light emitting portion 6023a and LEDs forming the second face light emitting portion 6023b are provided. A resistor 6027a to a sixth resistor 6027f, a first capacitor 6028a, a second capacitor 6028b, and a connector 6029 are surface-mounted.

As shown in FIG. 248A, the face substrate 6020 has a horizontally long rectangular shape, and two rectangular portions extend upward as a first ear portion 6021 and a second ear portion 6022 on the upper side of the rectangle. It has a shape. A horizontally long rectangular portion imitates a rabbit's face, and a first ear 6021 and a second ear 6022 imitate rabbit's ears. When the face cover portion 6010 is attached to the face substrate 6020, the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022 are not covered with the face cover portion 6010, and the face substrate 6020 is exposed.

The first ear part 6021 and the second ear part 6022 respectively have a first ear decoration part 6021a and a second ear decoration part 6022a that imitate the inside of a rabbit's ear. The first ear decoration part 6021a and the second ear decoration part 6022a are formed by printing with brown ink on the white protective film on the front surface of the face substrate 6020, and are visible brown areas. ing. In the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022, regions other than the first ear decoration portion 6021a and the second ear decoration portion 6022a are covered with the white protective film described above. Electronic parts such as the control element 6025 are not mounted on the front and rear surfaces of the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022, and the printed circuit board is used only for decoration. .

The face substrate 6020 is provided with a first face light emitting portion 6023a and a second face light emitting portion 6023b. Specifically, the first face light-emitting portion 6023a and the second face light-emitting portion 6023b are configured by LEDs mounted on the front surface of the face substrate 6020, respectively. The first face light emitting unit 6023a and the second face light emitting unit 6023b can emit light under the control of the peripheral control board 1510, which will be described later in detail.

The face substrate 6020 is provided with a mouth decoration portion 6024 . Specifically, the mouth decoration part 6024 is formed by printing with pink ink on the white protective film on the front surface of the face substrate 6020, and the shape imitating a rabbit's mouth is visible in pink. It has become. On the front surface of the face substrate 6020, the first ear decoration part 6021a and the second ear decoration part 6022a are brown, the mouth decoration part 6024 is pink, and the other areas are white.

FIG. 248(B) is a view showing the rear side of the face substrate 6020. FIG. As described above, the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 is also entirely covered with a white protective film for protecting the circuits, like the front surface of the face substrate 6020 . A first face light emitting unit 6023a and a second face light emitting unit 6023b are provided on the upper left and right sides of the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 at positions corresponding to the first face light emitting unit 6023a and the second face light emitting unit 6023b provided on the front side. Dotted lines indicating the mounting locations of , and character strings "LED1" and "LED2" indicating the names of the mounted members are formed by printing black ink on a white protective film. . A driver 6026 is surface-mounted between the character string "LED1" and the character string "LED2." Under the driver 6026, a character string "DR1" is formed by printing with black ink on a white protective film.

A capacitor 6028 (a first capacitor 6028a and a second capacitor 6028b) is surface-mounted between the dotted line indicating the mounting location of the first face emitting portion 6023a and the dotted line indicating the mounting location of the second face emitting portion 6023b. Character strings "C1" and "C2" are formed by printing black ink on the white protective film in correspondence with the first capacitor 6028a and the second capacitor 6028b.

Resistors 6027 (first resistor 6027a to sixth resistor 6027f) are surface-mounted on the lower left side of the rear surface of the face substrate 6020. FIG. Character strings “R1” to “R6” are formed by printing black ink on the white protective film corresponding to the first resistor 6027a to the sixth resistor 6027f.

A control element 6025 comprising a microcomputer is surface-mounted to the right of the area where the resistor 6027 is mounted. Also, corresponding to the control element 6025, a character string "IC1" is formed by printing with black ink on the white protective film. The control element 6025 drives the driver 6026 based on the control signal from the peripheral control board 1510, and performs lighting control of the LEDs forming the first face light emitting unit 6023a and the LEDs forming the second face light emitting unit 6023b.

A connector 6029 is surface mounted on the lower right side of the rear surface of the face board 6020 . Corresponding to the connector 6029, a character string "CN1" is formed by printing with black ink on the white protective film. Through the connector 6029 , control signals from the peripheral control board 1510 are transmitted to the control elements 6025 and power from the power supply board 931 is supplied to the face board 6020 . The power supplied to the face substrate 6020 through the connector 6029 is supplied to the control element 6025, the driver 6026, the LEDs forming the first face light emitting section 6023a and the second face light emitting section 6023b, and the like.

A control element 6025, a driver 6026, a resistor 6027, a capacitor 6028, and a connector 6029 each have a black body and metallic terminals. Metal terminals of the control element 6025, the driver 6026, the resistor 6027, the capacitor 6028, and the connector 6029 are surface-mounted on the face substrate 6020 by soldering. In FIG. 248(B), the main bodies of these electronic parts are shown in black, and the metal terminals and solders of these electronic parts are shown in white.

249 is a perspective view of the face covering portion 6010. FIG. The face cover portion 6010 has a box-like shape with an open rear side, and is made of colorless and transparent synthetic resin. The face cover portion 6010 includes a face cover front portion 6011 forming the front surface, a face cover portion upper surface portion 6012 forming the upper surface, a face cover portion right surface portion 6013 forming the right surface, and a face cover forming the lower surface. It is composed of a lower face portion 6014 and a face cover left face portion 6015 forming the left face.

As shown in FIGS. 247 to 249, a first face light scattering part 6011a and a second face light scattering part 6011a resembling the eyes of a rabbit are provided on the front side of a face cover part front part 6011 that constitutes the face on the front side of the face cover part 6010. As shown in FIGS. A face light scattering portion 6011b is provided. The first face light scattering portion 6011a is provided at a position overlapping the first face light emitting portion 6023a provided on the front surface of the face substrate 6020 when viewed from the front. In addition, the second face light scattering portion 6011b is provided at a position overlapping the second face light emitting portion 6023b provided on the front surface of the face substrate 6020 when viewed from the front. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 247(A), the first face light scattering portion 6011a and the second face light scattering portion 6011b are closer to the front view than the first face light emitting portion 6023a and the second face light emitting portion 6023b, respectively. , and the outer shapes of the first face light emitting portion 6023a and the second face light emitting portion 6023b in front view are surrounded by the first face light scattering portion 6011a and the second face light scattering portion 6011b, respectively. is configured as

The first face light scattering part 6011a and the second face light scattering part 6011b are formed by forming fine lens cuts on the front side of the face cover part front part 6011, or performing processing such as a satin finish to form the first face light scattering part 6011a and second face light scattering part 6011b. When the light emitted from the portion 6023a or the second face light emitting portion 6023b is incident, it is formed with a rough surface capable of diffusely reflecting the light. In the face cover front part 6011, light incident on the parts other than the first face light scattering part 6011a and the second face light scattering part 6011b like the first face light scattering part 6011a and the second face light scattering part 6011b The face substrate 6020 located behind is not provided with a structure that diffusely reflects the light, and the face substrate 6020 positioned behind is configured to be directly visible from the front. The rectangular portion forming the region of the face substrate 6020 excluding the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022 and the rectangular portion forming the face cover portion 6010 have the same vertical and horizontal flow and just overlap when viewed from the front. placed in position. The face substrate 6020 is screwed from behind into screw holes provided in the face-cover upper surface 6012, the face-cover right surface 6013, the face-cover lower surface 6014, the face-cover left surface 6015, and the like. is attached with

The rear face of the face cover front part 6011 and the face light emitting part 6023 are provided with a predetermined gap (about 1-2 mm). With such a configuration, heat generated in the face light emitting unit 6023 can be easily dissipated, and it is possible to prevent the face light emitting unit 6023 from malfunctioning due to the heat generated by itself. Become. In other examples, such a configuration may also be adopted in the relationship between the light emitting section and members such as a cover provided corresponding to the light emitting section.

As described above, the rabbit character 6000 is composed of the face substrate 6020, the face cover portion 6010 covering the front of the face substrate 6020, and the body portion 6030 provided at the lower end of the face substrate 6020. On the front side of the face substrate 6020, LEDs functioning as a first face light emitting part 6023a and a second face light emitting part 6023b are surface-mounted, and face cover parts constituting the front side of the face cover part 6010 covering the front respectively. A first face light scattering portion 6011a and a second face light scattering portion 6011b provided in the front portion 6011 are configured to irradiate light. Electronic components such as a control element 6025 , a driver 6026 , a resistor 6027 , a capacitor 6028 and a connector 6029 are surface-mounted on the rear surface of the face board 6020 .

A flat cable (not shown) is connected to the connector 6029 and receives a control signal from the peripheral control board 1510 for driving the LEDs constituting the face light emitting section 6023 mounted on the front surface of the face board 6020 . Electric power for driving each electronic component mounted on the face substrate 6020 is supplied from the flat cable. Based on the control signal received from the peripheral control board 1510 , the control element 6025 controls the driver 6026 to control the light emission mode of the LEDs forming the face light emitting section 6023 .

The LED that constitutes the face light emitting part 6023 is formed by encapsulating three LED chips, an LED chip capable of emitting red light, an LED chip capable of emitting green light, and an LED chip capable of emitting blue light, with a colorless and transparent resin. . In addition, the LEDs constituting the face light-emitting portion 6023 are provided with three metal terminals serving as anodes and three metal terminals serving as cathodes of each LED chip. In addition, current flows from the driver 6026 to the anode of each LED chip so that each LED chip can emit light. Specifically, by controlling the current flowing through each LED chip by the driver 6026, red, green, and blue light can be emitted independently.

Between the circuits connecting the driver 6026 and the anode of each LED chip, a resistor 6027 is provided as a limiting resistor for adjusting the current flowing through the LED chip. Specifically, first resistors 6027a to third resistors 6027c are connected between the circuits connecting the anodes of the LED chips included in the driver 2026 and the face light emitting unit 6023a to form the driver 2026 and the face light emitting unit 6023b. A fourth resistor 6027d to a sixth resistor 6027f are provided between the circuits connecting the anodes of the respective LED chips of the LEDs. By providing the first resistor 6027a to the sixth resistor 6027f corresponding to the anode of each LED chip in this manner, the current flowing through each LED chip can be adjusted, and when a short circuit occurs inside the LED, the circuit can be overloaded. It prevents current from flowing.

The first capacitor 6028a is connected to the power supply terminal of the control element 6025, and the second capacitor 6028b is connected to the power supply terminal of the driver 6026 in parallel in an electric circuit. It has a function to operate

The rabbit role 6000 is controlled to move between a standby position on the lower front side of the game board side effect display device 1600 and a moving position near the center on the front side of the game board side effect display device 1600 by a drive mechanism (not shown). It is possible to This drive mechanism is also controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 . The predetermined game content is notified to the player by the movement mode and the light emission mode of the rabbit role object 6000 . For example, the rabbit role object 6000 is moved from the standby position to the moving position, and in a state where the rabbit role object 6000 is in the moving position, the first face emitting unit 6023a and the second face emitting unit 6023b mounted on the face substrate 6020 are turned on. is lit in red, and the first facial light scattering part 6011a and the second facial light scattering part 6011b are lit in red, so that the stop mode of the changing decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in a mode indicating a big hit. It may be configured to suggest that the degree of expectation is higher than usual. In the other embodiments, examples are shown in which the part of the accessory or the member constituting the accessory is movable, or the light-emitting part provided in the accessory is controlled in a predetermined light emission mode. function as a performance, and by the performance, the stop mode of the decorative pattern during variation suggests that the expectation of stopping and displaying in a mode showing a big win is higher than usual.

As described above, there is a possibility that the luminous decorative substrate (face substrate 6020) included in such a decorative member (rabbit character 6000) may have a malfunction in its luminous function. For example, in the process of surface-mounting the printed circuit board that constitutes the face board 6020, the amount of solder on the solder surface was insufficient, and the electrical connection between the circuit on the printed circuit board and the electronic component to be mounted was not properly performed. In some cases, there is a risk that other members or tools will come into contact with the electronic components mounted on the back side of the printed circuit board during assembly at a factory, causing the mounted electronic components to come off. In addition, there is a risk that electronic components may malfunction due to aged deterioration after installation of the gaming machine in the gaming arcade.

For example, in an LED functioning as a face light emitting unit 6023 capable of full-color light emission by emitting red, blue, and green light in multiple gradations using a driver 6026, one of the six metal terminals is electrically connected. When such a connection is lost, although one of the three colors is intended to emit light in terms of control, only two colors are actually emitted, and one color is emitted. As for , a non-light emitting state occurs. Such a state can occur when the LED chip fails and current does not flow, or when the resistor 6027 functioning as a limiting resistor is removed from the face substrate 6020 and the circuit is broken. .
Such a situation may give the player who plays the game the impression that the movable decorative member does not look good. In particular, when a plurality of LEDs are controlled to emit light of the same color, there is a risk that only the defective LED will emit light of a different color. In addition, there is a risk of causing a situation in which players are misunderstood as to the degree of expectation of a big win.

Further, the flat cable connected to the connector 6029 provided on the face substrate 6020 is bent many times due to the repeated movement of the rabbit accessory 6000 as the movable decorative member, thereby deteriorating the strength of the flat cable at a predetermined portion. , the flat cable becomes disconnected, and it is possible to assume a situation in which signal transmission and power supply to the rabbit character 6000 are not properly performed. Alternatively, repeated movements of the rabbit accessory 6000 may repeatedly apply a stress to a part of the connector 6029, and the connector 6029 may be damaged. In this case, an unintended control signal is sent to the rabbit role object 6000, and an unintended light emission mode is shown to the player, or power supply is completely stopped. In this case, the face light-emitting part 6023 provided in the rabbit accessory 6000 does not take the lighting mode, and moves from the standby position to the moving position or from the moving position to the standby position in the off state. There is a risk that the appearance of the product will deteriorate.

Therefore, in the present invention, when the game machine is turned off, the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 can be seen in black, and the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 positioned in front is reflected on the surface thereof. It is configured to reflect Specifically, the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 may be configured to specularly reflect incident light. Alternatively, a colorless and transparent reflector (reflecting sheet) is installed close to the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 so as to cover the entire display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Then, the reflecting plate may be configured to mirror-reflect the incident light. With such a configuration, when there is some kind of abnormality in the face substrate 6020 of the rabbit character 6000 positioned in front of the game board side effect display device 1600, the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 positioned in the back is displayed. By visually recognizing , the content of the abnormality can be confirmed. Alternatively, it is possible to check whether an abnormality has occurred.

FIG. 250(A) is a perspective view showing the state where the rabbit accessory 6000 is in the standby position. In FIG. 250(A), the rabbit character 6000 is provided in the game machine so that the electronic components mounted on the face substrate 6020 of the rabbit character 6000 are reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. shows an example.

In this example, a rabbit character 6000 is arranged on the front side of the game board side effect display device 1600, and the front surface forming the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the face substrate 6020 provided on the rabbit character 6000 are arranged. A predetermined distance (specifically, about several centimeters) from the rear surface is positioned. In the example shown in FIG. 250(A), part of the driver 6026 mounted on the rear surface of the face board 6020 and the entirety of the first resistor 6027a and the second resistor 6027b are the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. It shows the state of being reflected in the

Although FIG. 250(A) shows the rabbit character 6000 viewed obliquely from the upper right, it is also possible to view the mounted state of other electronic components by looking into it from other angles. For example, when the rabbit character 6000 is viewed from above at the center in the horizontal direction, it is possible to visually recognize the entire driver 6026, the entire first capacitor 6028a, and the entire second capacitor 6028b. Alternatively, when the rabbit character 6000 is viewed obliquely from the upper left, the entire connector 6029 and the flat cable connected to the connector 6029 can also be viewed. In this example, it is difficult to confirm the mounting mode of the control element 6025, the fifth resistor 6027e, and the sixth resistor 6027f, but this point will be described later.

FIG. 250(B) is a perspective view showing a state where the rabbit accessory 6000 is in the standby position. In FIG. 250(B), the rabbit role 6000 is provided in the game machine so that the electronic components mounted on the face substrate 6020 of the rabbit role 6000 are reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. example. In this example, electronic components such as the control element 6025 and the first resistors 6027a to 6027f mounted on the lower half of the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 are difficult to see, and the entire driver 6026 and the first capacitor 6028a It is possible to verify the implementation of only a portion and only a portion of the second capacitor 6028b. A method for visually recognizing electronic components mounted on the lower half of the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 will be described later.

Thus, in the gaming machine in the power-off state, the back surface of the face substrate 6020 of the rabbit character 6000 serving as the decoration means is reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. , the state of the electronic components mounted on the back side of the face board 6020 can be confirmed even after the game machine is installed in the game shop. In addition, since the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 is covered with a white protective film and is visible in white, the face substrate 6020 reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 that is visually recognized as black is visually recognized. It is configured easily.

An example in which the entire surface and the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 are covered with a white protective film has been shown, but the circuit on the face substrate 6020 may be covered with a protective film of a bright color such as cream instead of white. may This is because, compared to the case of adopting a dark-colored protective film, the case of adopting a bright-colored protective film makes a clearer difference in brightness with respect to the display area of the game-board-side effect display device 1600, which is black. Therefore, the face substrate 6020 reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 can be easily visually recognized.

In the process of coloring the face board 6020, a circuit structure is formed on the printed circuit board by copper plating, and then a white protective agent is used as a protective agent to protect the wiring structure, and the portions where the through holes are provided are removed. Except for this, it is desirable to form a white protective film by coating the entire surface of the printed circuit board with this protective agent, thereby making the entire surface of the face substrate 6020 white. When a protective agent other than white is used as the protective agent for protecting the wiring structure, white ink is applied on the non-white protective agent so that the surface of the face substrate 6020 is white. You may Alternatively, by combining these modes, a white protective agent is applied to form a protective film, and then white ink is applied on the white protective film, making the surface of the face substrate 6020 whiter. It may be configured as By forming the face substrate 6020 in such a manner, the face substrate 6020 can be made visible in white. Note that the same method can be adopted when it is desired to make the substrate visible not only in white but also in other colors such as black and green. In another example, such a configuration may be adopted when the substrate is of a specific color.
Although an example in which both sides of the face substrate 6020 are entirely white has been shown, only a portion of the face substrate 6020 may be colored white. Only a predetermined area on which electronic components are mounted on the rear surface of the can be made white. The rear side of the face board 6020 is covered with a thin plate-like cover, and a punched opening is provided in the cover so that the electronic component whose mounting state is to be checked can be visually recognized. In this case, the back surface of the face board 6020 and the specific electronic component whose mounting state is to be checked may be reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 . If a colorless and transparent cover is used as such a cover, light is diffusely reflected on the surface of the cover, and the visibility of the electronic components mounted on the back surface of the face substrate 6020 is lowered. In addition, when a colored opaque cover is used as such a cover, the electronic components mounted on the back surface of the face substrate 6020 are hidden by the cover, making it extremely difficult to check the mounting state. . Therefore, it is preferable to provide punched openings so that at least some of the electronic components mounted on the back surface of the face substrate 6020 can be visually recognized. With such a configuration, the cover protects the electronic components mounted on the back surface of the face substrate 6020, while the mounting state of the electronic components to be checked can be checked through the opening provided in the cover. can. In addition, by providing such an opening, heat generated from the electronic components mounted on the back surface of the face substrate 6020 can be released to the outside, thereby preventing damage or deterioration of the mounted electronic components due to heat. It is possible to suppress the occurrence. It should be noted that it is preferable that the electronic component is configured so as not to protrude from the opening while protruding rearward from the surface forming the back surface of the cover. Also, as the color of the cover, black opaque or dark opaque may be adopted. With such a configuration, it becomes easy to visually recognize the white face substrate 6020 exposed from the cover.

It is desirable that the color of the electronic component mounted on the face substrate 6020 has a contrast with the color of the protective film covering the face substrate 6020 . Specifically, the color of the face substrate 6020 may be a bright color such as white or cream, and the color of the electronic component mounted on the face substrate 6020 may be a dark color such as black or dark blue. By adopting such a configuration, the face substrate 6020 reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 can be easily visually recognized with respect to the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 which is black. In addition, since the face board 6020 is light-colored and the mounted electronic components are dark-colored, the face board 6020 reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is mounted on the face board 6020 and the face board 6020 . It becomes possible to distinguish and visually recognize the electronic parts.

Note that the LED capable of emitting multicolor light is made of a white member in order to increase the reflectance. In this case, if the color of the face substrate 6020 is white or bright, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the mounted state of the LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 . As described above, when the electronic component to be mounted is white, the color of the face substrate 6020 may be black or dark. In this case, although the face substrate 6020 reflected in the game board side effect display device 1600 becomes difficult to see, the LED mounted on the face substrate 6020 becomes easy to see. Alternatively, the mounted electronic components or the electronic components before being mounted may be coated with black or dark ink, and the electronic components may be mounted on a white or light colored substrate.

In the specification of the present application, white refers to a color that becomes visible when visible light of all wavelengths of incident natural light is diffusely reflected almost uniformly (approximately 100 to 80%) by an object. Moreover, the light color refers to a color that becomes visible, for example, cream color or light gray, by absorbing a certain wavelength range to some extent and reflecting the remaining wavelength range diffusely. On the other hand, black refers to the color that becomes visible when an object uniformly absorbs most of the visible light of all wavelengths of incident natural light and partly (about 20 to several percent) is diffusely reflected. there is In addition, dark color means that the visible light of all wavelengths is mostly absorbed uniformly, and only a part (about 20 to several percent) is diffusely reflected, but the absorption rate of light differs in a specific wavelength region, resulting in a black color. It refers to a color that can be visually recognized as a close color, for example, dark blue.

In the rabbit role product 6000 shown in FIGS. 250(A) and 250(B), it is preferable to be configured so that it can be manually moved from the standby position to the upper moving position. In this case, the rabbit accessory 6000 at the standby position is not rendered immovable by the lock mechanism when power is cut off, and the game panel opening 1100a provided in the game panel 1100 is not provided with a so-called light guide plate. is configured as

As a configuration for manually moving the rabbit role object 6000, first, the immovable state will be described. In general, if the movable decoration is configured to be freely movable between the moving position and the standby position, the movable decoration is subjected to a large acceleration when the game machine is transported or installed in an amusement arcade. In addition, there is a risk that the movable decorative body will be damaged. Therefore, a mechanism is provided to lock the movable decoration when it is in the standby position while the power is on. A method of making the body immobile is being considered. However, when such a lock mechanism is provided, it becomes difficult to manually move the rabbit accessory 6000 as the movable decoration. Therefore, it is possible to manually move the rabbit accessory 6000 by arranging it so that such a lock mechanism is not provided.

Next, a light guide plate will be described as a configuration for manually moving the rabbit role object 6000. FIG. The light guide plate is a plate-like decorative member that diffusely reflects light incident from the side surface in a predetermined pattern provided on the surface so that the player can visually recognize the lighting of the predetermined pattern. Also, such a light emission pattern is configured to be visible to the player as a predetermined effect. However, when such a light guide plate is provided in the game panel opening 1100a of the game panel 1100, it becomes difficult or impossible to manually move the rabbit accessory 6000 as the movable decoration. Therefore, by constructing such a game panel opening 1100a so that such a light guide plate is not provided, it becomes possible to move the rabbit role 6000 by hand.

With such a configuration, when power is cut off, the rabbit character 6000 can be directly moved by the clerk's hand through the game panel opening 1100a provided in the game panel 1100. Different areas on the rear surface of 6020 can be reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 .

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 250(A), after moving the rabbit role 6000 upward by hand, the user visually recognizes the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 as if looking into the rabbit role 6000 from below. This makes it easy to check the mounting mode of the control element 6025, the fifth resistor 6027e, and the sixth resistor 6027f, which have been difficult to see. Also, in the example shown in FIG. 250(B), by moving the rabbit character 6000 upward by hand, the control element 6025 mounted on the lower half of the rear surface of the face substrate 6020, which was invisible until then, It is possible to visually recognize electronic components such as the first resistor 6027a to the sixth resistor 6027f.

An example in which the light guide plate is not provided in the game panel opening 1100a provided in the game panel 1100 is shown, but when the light guide plate is provided in the game panel opening 1100a, the entire game panel opening 1100a can be covered with the light guide plate. Instead, it may be configured to cover only a part of the game panel opening 1100a. Specifically, when the waiting position of the rabbit role 6000 is in front of the lower side of the game board side effect display device 1600, and the moving position of the rabbit role 6000 is in front of the center of the game board side effect display device 1600, the guidance is performed. It is preferable to arrange the light plate so that only the upper half of the game panel opening 1100a is covered. As described above, even if the light guide plate is provided, a part of the game panel opening 1100a is not covered with the light guide plate. By manually moving the 6000, it is possible to achieve both of the functions of being able to change the area in which the face substrate 6020 is reflected on the game board side effect display device 1600. FIG.

An example has been shown in which the region where the face substrate 6020 is reflected is changed by directly moving the rabbit role object 6000 by hand. The light plate may be enlarged, in which case an object smaller than a hand may be used to move the rabbit character. For example, by inserting a rod-shaped member with a diameter of about 5 mm or a thin plate-shaped member with a width of about 1 cm and a thickness of about 1 mm into the area of the game panel opening 1100a not covered by the light guide plate, the rabbit accessory 6000 can be moved. It may be configured as In this case, the area of the game panel opening 1100a that is not covered with the light guide plate may be set to a size that allows such a bar-shaped member or plate-shaped member to be inserted. It is sufficient that an opening of about 0.0 cm and 1.0 cm in length is provided. With such a configuration, the area of the game panel opening 1100a covered by the light guide plate can be increased, and the area in which the light guide plate can be used for presentation can be expanded.

If the rabbit accessory 6000 in the standby position is not equipped with a lock mechanism that prevents the rabbit accessory 6000 from moving when the power is cut off, and if the game panel opening 1100a is not provided with a light guide plate, the clerk can hold the hand An example has been shown in which the rabbit character 6000 can be directly moved by the member. In the case where a light guide plate is provided, the rabbit character 6000 cannot be manually moved, and the area where the face substrate 6020 is reflected with respect to the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is changed. I can't. Such a problem is a big problem in an example in which the electronic components mounted on the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 are not or hardly reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 when the rabbit character is in the standby position. becomes.

Therefore, in such an example, by turning off the power switch provided in the game machine during the initial check of the movable decoration executed when the power is turned on, the control unit and the drive unit of the game machine are turned off. When forcibly creating a state where no power is supplied to the It is preferable to stop at a position a little moved by its own weight from the position where is turned off. Specific examples are shown below.

At the time of the initial check, first, the rabbit toy 6000 at the standby position is unlocked by the lock mechanism and changed from the immovable state to the movable state, after which the rabbit toy 6000 starts moving to the upper moving position. do. After the rabbit character 6000 completes the movement to the upper movement position, it stays at the movement position for a predetermined time (about 2 seconds), then starts moving to the lower standby position, and then the rabbit character 6000 waits. It stops at the position and changes from the movable state to the non-movable state by the lock mechanism, and the initial check is completed. When the game is started and the rabbit role product 6000 is moved as an effect in response to the start winning, etc., the rabbit role object 6000 at the standby position first changes from the immovable state to the movable state, and then the rabbit role object 6000 is moved. is controlled to move between the standby position and the moving position in a predetermined movement mode, control is performed to move the rabbit accessory 6000 to the standby position, and then the rabbit accessory 6000 is moved from the unlocked state to the locked state. and

In the gaming machine with such a configuration, by intentionally generating a power failure state, the rabbit character 6000 can be mounted on the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 included in the rabbit character 6000 without the clerk moving the rabbit character 6000 directly by hand. It is possible to make the electronic parts that are used to be reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 . In addition, since the rabbit rolex 6000 is configured to stay at the movement position for a predetermined time at the time of the initial check, the rabbit rolex 6000 is forcibly turned off at the timing when the rabbit rolex 6000 stays at the movement position. can be stopped at the moving position as it is, and the timing of turning off the power switch provided in the game machine to turn off the power does not become severe. In addition, since it is possible to stop the rabbit role object 6000 at a predetermined position, it is possible to pattern the confirmation operation of the face substrate 6020 .

In addition, in the initial check, not only does it stay at the movement position for a predetermined time, but when moving from the standby position to the movement position, a predetermined position between the standby position and the movement position (for example, an intermediate position between the standby position and the movement position) position), the rabbit role object 6000 stays for a predetermined time (about 2 seconds) and then moves to the moving position, and when it is at the predetermined position, a power switch provided in the game machine is turned off to put the power supply into a power-off state. The rabbit role object 6000 may be configured to remain at a predetermined position when the rabbit character 6000 is moved. By adopting such a configuration, it becomes possible to easily stop the rabbit role 6000 at different positions, and it is possible to visually recognize the electronic components reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 from different angles. becomes. In addition, since it is possible to stop the rabbit role object 6000 at a predetermined position, it is possible to pattern the confirmation operation of the face substrate 6020 .

An example has been shown in which the rabbit role object 6000 stays at the moving position or the predetermined position at the time of the initial check. The first face light emitting unit 6023a and the second face light emitting unit 6023b may be configured to light up in a predetermined manner. Alternatively, when the initial check is started, the rabbit role object 6000 is in the standby position and before starting to move to the moving position, the first face emitting part 6023a and the second face emitting part 6023b are lit in a predetermined manner. You may For example, as a lighting mode, the first face light emitting unit 6023a and the second face light emitting unit 6023b may be lit in the same color. Moreover, white is desirable as the emission color at this time. With such a configuration, the store clerk can confirm whether or not there is an abnormality in the light emission mode of the first face light emitting section 6023a and the second face light emitting section 6023b. It is possible to confirm what kind of abnormality has occurred by visually recognizing the back side of the face board 6020 with the game machine in which the accessory 6000 is at a predetermined position or a moving position in a power-off state. Also, when a player complains about the lighting mode, it is possible to quickly identify the cause of the abnormality.

Although an example in which the first face light-emitting portion 6023a and the second face light-emitting portion 6023b are lit in the same color has been shown, it is preferable to provide three or more face light-emitting portions 6023 and to emit light in the same color. In this case, the light emission color should preferably include at least white. In such a configuration, if one of the resistors provided corresponding to the plurality of face light emitting units 6023 is missing, one face light emitting unit 6023 is different from the other plurality of face light emitting units 6023. It emits light in different colors (for example, if the resistor provided in series with the LED chip capable of emitting green light is missing, the LED can only emit blue and red light, which is a mixture of those colors. Therefore, it is possible to easily identify the defective face light-emitting portion by the color of the emitted light.

When the power cut-off state is forcibly generated, the rabbit role model 6000 is not in the standby position. When the power is turned on in such a state, it is preferable to once move the rabbit accessory 6000 to the standby position and then perform the above-described initial operation check again from the beginning. With such a configuration, it is possible to stop the rabbit role object 6000 at an appropriate position where the back surface of the face substrate 6020 can be easily visually recognized.

Various embodiments are conceivable for the aspect of the rabbit role 6000 itself, the movement aspect of the rabbit role 6000, and the positional relationship between the rabbit role 6000 and the game board side effect display device 1600. FIG. Several examples are given below.

FIG. 251 shows an example of a rabbit character 6000. FIG. In this embodiment, the area of the face substrate 6020 reflected on the game board side effect display device 1600 changes as the rabbit character moves from the lower standby position to the upper movement position. In this example, the rabbit character 6000 is composed of the face cover portion 6010 and the face substrate 6020, and is movable between the standby position and the moving position. It is configured not to move with respect to 1100 . FIG. 251(A) shows a state where the rabbit role object 6000 is in the standby position, and in this state, only the upper half of the back surface of the face substrate 6020 is reflected on the game board side effect display device 1600. . Also, the control element 6025, the fifth resistor 6027e, and the sixth resistor 6027f are not reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 because the body portion 6030 is located immediately behind these electronic components. FIG. 251(B) shows a state in which the rabbit character 6000 is at the moving position, and in this state, almost the entire back surface of the face substrate is reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. there is

It should be noted that, when the rabbit toy 6000 is in the standby position, the rabbit toy 6000 may be configured to slowly rotate about the front-rear direction by a driving mechanism (not shown). Alternatively, the rabbit toy 6000 may be configured to be manually rotated about the front-rear direction when the rabbit toy 6000 is in the standby position. With such a configuration, it is extremely easy to visually recognize the control element 6025, the fifth resistor 6027e, and the sixth resistor 6027f, which are located below the face substrate 6020 and are difficult to confirm the mounting mode. Become.

FIG. 252 shows an example of a rabbit character 6000. FIG. In this embodiment, a first ear portion 6021 and a second ear portion 6022 are provided separately from the face substrate 6020 that constitutes the rabbit accessory 6000 . The first ear 6021 and the second ear 6022 are in the shape of a vertically long rectangle. When the rabbit character 6000 moves, the face cover part 6010 and the face substrate 6020 do not move, and the first ear part 6021 and the second ear part 6022 move to the upward movement position, thereby executing a predetermined effect. will do.

FIG. 252(A) shows a state in which the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022 are in the standby position. Only part of the electronic components mounted on the back surface of the face substrate 6020 are reflected in the state hidden by the second ear portions 6022 . FIG. 252(B) shows a state in which the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022 are in the moving position. The whole area is reflected. In this way, by moving the member between the member whose mounting state of the electronic component is desired to be confirmed and the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the visual recognition state of the member whose mounting state of the electronic component is desired to be confirmed can be changed. becomes possible. In addition, in another embodiment, aspects of the rabbit character 6000 have been described, but these aspects may be applied to the first ear 6021 and the second ear 6022 in the example shown in FIG.

FIG. 253 shows an example of a rabbit character 6000. FIG. In this embodiment, the body part 6030 of the rabbit accessory 6000 is vertically long. When the rabbit toy 6000 is at the standby position, the electronic components mounted on the rear surface of the rabbit toy 6000 are made invisible by the body part 6030, and when the rabbit toy 6000 is at the moving position, the body part A rabbit character 6000 is positioned above 6030 . In this state, the game board side effect display device 1600 is configured so that almost the entire rear surface of the face substrate 6020 is reflected.

In the embodiments described so far, the area of the face covering portion 6010 of the rabbit character 6000 does not change. In addition, the movable decorative member, which expands in the horizontal direction with respect to the game panel 1100, increases in area when viewed from the front. A situation may occur in which it becomes difficult to visually recognize the reflection of the substrate in the display area. Therefore, when such a movable decorative member is employed, the front view area may be manually reduced in the state where the power is forcibly cut off during the initial check. Alternatively, when moving to the movement position during the initial check, the state before the area when viewed from the front increases is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, about 2 seconds) so that the area when viewed from the front does not increase. Later, it may be configured to increase the area when viewed from the front. With such a configuration, it becomes easy to check whether the face board 6020 is reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 when the power is cut off.

An example in which the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 is reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is shown. On the other hand, it is not preferable for the player to see the state in which the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 is reflected. For example, as an effect indicating that the degree of expectation for a big hit is high, when an effect of darkening almost the entire display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is executed, an electronic display mounted on the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 is executed by the player. The parts will be visible, and there is a risk that the player will lose interest in spite of the fact that the player is trying to liven up the game by executing the performance. In addition, the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is displayed for the purpose of marking a break in the game when a so-called reach loss occurs, that is, the decorative pattern stops in a state indicating a loss after forming a ready-to-win state. Even when the effect of darkening almost the entire surface is executed, the electronic components mounted on the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 are visually recognized by the player, and when the reach is out of reach, which is unfortunate for the player, Furthermore, there is a possibility that the player will be in a state of disinterest.

Therefore, when the rabbit character 6000 is positioned at the standby position at the timing of executing the effect of darkening almost the entire display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, it is expected that such reflection will be visually recognized. It is preferable to employ a configuration that suppresses this. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 252, the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022 are positioned between the display areas of the face substrate 6020 and the game board side effect display device 1600, so that the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022 Hidden by the ears 6022, the reflection of the face substrate 6020 in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is suppressed. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 253, the body portion 6030 is positioned between the face substrate 6020 and the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, so that the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is hidden by these members. Reflection of the face substrate 6020 in the display area is suppressed.

In the example shown in FIG. 251, when executing an effect that darkens almost the entire display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the driver 6026, the first capacitor 6028a, the second capacitor 6028b, etc. There is a risk of being seen. Therefore, by performing some kind of display only in the lower front part of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player loses interest in accordance with the effect of darkening the display area. becomes. In the lower front part of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, for example, it is preferable to display decorative patterns, display the number of reserved games, or display the reserved image indicating the degree of expectation for a big hit related to the variation. . In this case, the color of the image may be made darker or the size of the image may be made smaller than when displaying the decorative pattern, the number of reservations, or the reserved image. Also, instead of statically displaying these, they may be dynamically displayed like animation. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to make the reflection that occurs in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 inconspicuous during the game.

After the darkening effect is started, during the darkening effect, the rabbit character 6000 is moved from the standby position shown in FIG. 251(A) to the moving position shown in FIG. 252(A) from the standby position shown in FIG. 252(B) to the movement position shown in FIG. may be configured to perform an effect of moving the rabbit role object 6000 to the moving position shown in . However, in this case, the electronic components mounted on the back side of the face substrate 6020 are easily visible.

Therefore, when executing an effect to move the rabbit role object 6000 from the lower waiting position to the upper moving position, the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 overlaps the rabbit role object 6000 in a front view. It may be configured to display a reflection suppression image that suppresses reflection. In this way, when the rabbit role object 6600 moves, an image that makes it difficult or impossible to visually recognize the reflection of the face substrate 6020 in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is displayed as a game board side effect display. By displaying it in the display area of the device 1600, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the player loses interest.

The size of the reflection suppression image displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is the same size as the rabbit character 6000 when viewed from the front, or one size (about 1-2 cm) larger than the rabbit character. It is assumed that the appearance of the reflection-suppressed image completely overlaps the appearance of the rabbit character 6000 when viewed from the front, or the image is displayed in such a manner that the image with reflection-suppressed protrudes about 1 to 2 mm around the rabbit character when viewed from the front. do it. Also, the glare suppression image may be composed of white or bright color. By using white or light color, it is possible to make the reflection inconspicuous. In addition to white or bright colors, black or dark colors may also be used to form a glare-suppressed image. Furthermore, it may be an image in which a glare-suppressed image is dynamically displayed.

The timing for starting the display of the reflection suppression image may be before the start of the darkening effect, at the start of the darkening effect, or when the rabbit character 6000 starts moving during the darkening effect. When the rabbit role object 6000 is moved from the standby position to the moving position, it is preferable to move the reflection suppression image while maintaining the positional relationship with the rabbit role object 6000 . It is preferable to display the reflection suppression image until the dark transition effect is completed. For example, when the rabbit character 6000 is stopped at the standby position during the darkening effect, it is preferable to continue displaying the reflection suppression image. Thereafter, even when the rabbit role object 6000 returns from the standby position to the moving position, it is preferable to continue displaying the reflection suppression image as long as the darkening effect is being performed.

It should be noted that, in addition to preparing a plurality of modes of such reflection-suppressed images, different degrees of expectation for big wins are assigned to modes of the reflection-suppressed images, and one of the reflection-suppressed images is displayed when the rabbit character moves. , it may be configured to function as an effect suggesting the degree of expectation for a big hit. For example, blue and red may be prepared as the colors of the reflection suppression image, and the red reflection suppression image may be configured to indicate that the expectation of the big win is higher. In this case, since the player also pays attention to the display mode of the reflection suppression image itself, even if some electronic parts are reflected, it is possible to prevent such reflection from being noticed. .

Although the display of the reflection suppression image when moving the rabbit role object 6000 has been described, the above aspect can also be applied when moving the first ear portion 6021 and the first ear portion 6022. good.

In addition, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 252, it is desirable to set the back surface color of the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022 to black or dark. Moreover, it is desirable that electronic components are not mounted on the rear surfaces of the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022 . When electronic components are mounted on the rear surface of the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022, the electronic components are preferably dark-colored. With such a configuration, the rear surface of the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022, which are members for suppressing the reflection of the face substrate 6020 in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, is the same as that of the game board. Even if it is reflected in the display area of the side effect display device 1600, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the reflection.

Also, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 253, it is desirable to darken the color of the back surface of the body portion 6030 . Also, it is desirable not to mount electronic components on the rear surface of the body portion 6030 . When electronic components are mounted on the rear surface of the body portion 6030, it is desirable to use a dark color. With such a configuration, even if the rear surface of the body portion 6030, which is a member that suppresses the reflection of the face substrate 6020, is reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the player is affected by the reflection. can reduce the impact on

The moving position of the rabbit accessory 6000 at the time of the initial check may be configured to be in front of the central portion of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 . In this case, the reflection in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 can be confirmed from all directions, and the entire area behind the face substrate 6020 can be visually recognized.

On the other hand, when executing the effect of darkening almost the entire display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 described above, the rabbit role 6000 is moved forward in the central part of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. It may be configured to execute this effect after moving to the position. In this case, the rabbit role 6000 is positioned exactly in the middle between the direction of the player's line of sight and the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, and the player moves his/her face to force the rabbit role 6000 to appear. As long as the state is not viewed, it is possible to prevent the player from seeing the state reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 . When ending the effect of darkening almost the entire display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, after the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is brightened, the rabbit character 6000 waits from the moving position. By moving to the position, the influence of the reflection on the player can be reduced.

The face substrate 6020 constituting the rabbit role 6000 is shown as an example of the member reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. It may be configured such that the state of the rear surface of the member can be confirmed by reflecting it in the display area of the board-side effect display device 1600 . For example, the rear surface of a relay board (not shown) provided for transmitting control signals from the peripheral control board 1510 to the face board 6020 and for supplying power from the power supply board 931 is the game board side effect display. It may be configured to be reflected in the display area of the device 1600 . Further, on the rear surface of the relay board, connectors, control elements, and the like to which flat cables used for transmission of control signals and power supply are connected are surface-mounted. It is preferable that these are reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 . With such a configuration, it is possible to check whether there is any abnormality in the electronic components mounted on the relay board.

Although the relationship between the standby position and the movement position of the rabbit role model 6000 is shown in the example in the vertical direction, the rabbit role model 6000 can be configured to be movable in the front-rear direction, and between the rear standby position and the front movement position. It may be configured to move. Alternatively, the rabbit role 6000 provided in the front lower part of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 rotates about the rotation axis provided below the rabbit role 6000, thereby rotating the rabbit role 6000. The upper portion of 6000 may be configured to be movable so as to tilt forward. The rabbit character 6000 is configured to be movable between a standby position in which the rabbit character 6000 is in a positional relationship parallel to the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, and a moving position in which the upper part of the rabbit character 6000 is tilted forward. You may Even in such a configuration, by moving the rabbit role object 6000 from the standby position to the moving position, the area of the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 can be widened. becomes possible.

Although the game board side effect display device 1600 is fixedly provided and the rabbit character 6000 is movable with respect to the game board side effect display device 1600, the rabbit character 6000 is fixedly provided, The game board side effect display device 1600 may be configured to be movable. For example, the entire game board side effect display device 1600 may be configured to be movable backward, or the entire game board side effect display device 1600 may be configured to be rotatable about a predetermined movable axis. Alternatively, the game board side effect display device 1600 as a whole may be configured to be horizontally movable in the vertical and horizontal directions, and the fixedly provided rabbit character 6000 may be positioned in the direction of movement. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to widen the area of the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 that is reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 even for the fixedly provided rabbit character. Become.

An example in which a game board side effect display device 1600 is fixedly provided and a rabbit role 6000 is movable with respect to the game board side effect display device 1600, and an example in which the rabbit role 6000 is fixedly provided and the game board side Although an example in which the effect display device 1600 is movable has been shown, both the game board side effect display device 1600 and the rabbit accessory 6000 may be configured to be movable. For example, the game board-side effect display device 1600 may move backward, and the rabbit character 6000 may move forward. Alternatively, the game board side effect display device 1600 and the rabbit role object 6000, which are not superimposed when viewed from the front, may be configured to move closer to each other in the horizontal direction and become superimposed when viewed from the front. good. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to increase the area of the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 that is reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 .

Although an example in which one game board side effect display device 1600 is provided has been shown, a plurality of effect display devices may be provided. The rear surface of the face substrate 6020 may be reflected in at least one of the display areas of the plurality of effect display devices. In addition, the surface formed by the display area of one effect display device and the surface formed by the display region of the other effect display device are configured to face different directions, and the rabbit role object 6000 can be moved to the front side thereof. may be configured. With such a configuration, the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 can be reflected from different angles in the display areas of a plurality of effect display devices, making it easier to find the cause of the abnormality.

In addition, by configuring to provide a plurality of movable effect display devices and by moving the effect display devices, the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 included in the rabbit character 6000 can be a display area of at least one effect display device or a plurality of effect display devices. It may be configured to be reflected in the display area of the display device.

An example has been shown in which the rear surface of the face board 6020 is reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 when the power is forcibly turned off. By darkening almost the entire display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 may be reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600.

FIG. 254 shows a modification of the example shown in FIG. In this embodiment, the position where the rabbit character 6000 shown in FIGS. 246 to 253 is provided is not the lower front center of the game board side effect display device 1600, but the left lower side front side of the game board side effect display device 1600. It's becoming In addition, a stump accessory 6100 shaped like a stump is provided in front of the lower right side of the game board side effect display device 1600 . As for the game board 5 as a whole, a space is formed between the game panel 1100 and the game panel 1100 on the front side of the game board side effect display device 1600 in the same manner as in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. are arranged in layers. Specifically, from the front side, at positions close to the back surface of the game panel 1100, the board back grass role 6800, the first big tree role 6600, the second big tree role 6650, the first cloud role 6700, the second A cloud object 6750 is provided. The first giant tree accessory 6600 consists of a first giant tree trunk substrate 6610 and a first giant tree leaf substrate 6630, and the second giant tree accessory 6650 consists of a second giant tree trunk substrate 6660 and a second giant tree leaf substrate 6680. there is In addition, the first grass role 6470 and the second grass role 6475 are provided behind these, and the third grass role 6480 is provided behind these, so that the third grass role 6480 overlaps behind this. A fourth grass role 6485 is provided, behind which a rabbit role 6000 and a stump role 6100 are provided, behind these a mountain role 6500 is provided, and behind the mountain role 6500 a game board side effect display. An apparatus 1600 is provided. By arranging a plurality of accessories in layers in this manner, a sense of depth can be created.

A stump portion 6200 shaped like a stump and a first grass movable portion 6360 and a second grass movable portion 6370 shaped like grass are provided on the lower right front side of the game board side effect display device 1600 . , the first grass movable part 6360 and the second grass movable part 6370 constitute the stump accessory 6100 as a unit.

FIG. 255 shows a stump accessory 6100 . A first grass movable portion 6360 is provided on the front left side of the stump portion 6200 , and a second grass movable portion 6370 is provided on the front right side of the stump portion 6200 . The first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 are plate-shaped and formed of green transparent synthetic resin. The first grass movable portion 6360 has an exposed surface formed of a green transparent synthetic resin in the outer edge portion excluding the lower end portion, and is visible through the member positioned behind. On the other hand, a portion other than the lower end and the outer edge is provided with a first grass decoration portion 6360a coated with green ink, and the rear side of the first grass decoration portion 6360a is invisible. . The second grass movable portion 6370 also has the same configuration as the first grass movable portion 6360, and includes a second grass decoration portion 6370a.

The first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 are arranged in a state where the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 are positioned in front of the stump portion 6200 as shown in FIG. As shown in 255(B), the first grass movable part 6360 moves leftward from the position in front of the stump part 6200, and the second grass movable part 6370 moves rightward from the position in front of the stump part 6200. It is possible to take the state of moving to The first grass movable part 6360 and the second grass movable part 6370 can be moved by a drive mechanism (not shown) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510.

In the state shown in FIG. 255(A), the end surface forming the right end portion of the first grass movable portion 6360 and the end surface forming the left end portion of the second grass movable portion 6370 are in contact with each other, and the stump portion 6200 positioned behind is in contact with the end surface forming the left end portion of the second grass movable portion 6370. The lower half is difficult to see. At this time, a partial region of the stump opening 6210a is a region where the first grass decoration portion 6360a of the first grass movable portion 6360 is not provided and a second grass decoration portion 6370a of the second grass movable portion 6370 is provided. visible through unobstructed areas. In this state, a rear wall substrate 6352 and a rear wall cover 6356 that constitute the box rear wall portion 6350 of the stump box portion 6300 provided behind the stump opening portion 6210a, and a rear wall cover 6356 provided in front of the rear wall substrate 6352. A part of the wall light emitting part 6354 is configured to be visible.

In this state, the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 is set to the light emitting mode as the first light emission effect, and the light emitted from the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 is emitted from the first grass movable portion 6360 where the first grass decoration portion 6360a is not provided. The area and the area where the second grass decoration part 6370a of the second grass movable part 6370 is not provided are illuminated, and the area where the first grass decoration part 6360a of the first grass movable part 6360 is not provided and the second grass movable part 6370 are illuminated. It may be configured so that the player can be illuminated by passing through the region where the second grass decoration portion 6370a of the portion 6370 is not provided.

On the other hand, in the state shown in FIG. 255(B), the first grass movable portion 6360 moves leftward from the state in front of the stump portion 6200, and the second grass movable portion 6370 is positioned in front of the stump portion 6200. Since the stump portion 6200 has moved to the right from the state where the stump portion 6200 is moved, the visibility of the lower half of the stump portion 6200 is improved. In this state, the stump box section 6300 is visible through the stump opening 6210a provided in the stump section 6200. As shown in FIG. In this state, a rear wall substrate 6352 and a rear wall cover 6356 constituting the box rear wall portion 6350 of the stump box portion 6300 provided behind the stump opening portion 6210a, and a rear wall provided in front of the rear wall substrate 6352. The light-emitting portion 6354 has changed from a difficult-to-see state to an easy-to-see state compared to the state before the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 move.

In this state, as the second light emission effect, the rear wall light emitting section 6354 is set to the light emitting mode, and the light emitted from the rear wall light emitting section 6354 passes through the stump opening 6210a and is directed forward where the player is positioned. It may be configured so that it can take a state of being directly irradiated. In the second lighting effect, the light passes through the area where the first grass decoration part 6360a of the first grass movable part 6360 is not provided and the area where the second grass decoration part 6370a of the second grass movable part 6370 is not provided. Compared to the first light emitting effect in which light is emitted to the player, it is possible to give the player a strong visual stimulus.

In addition, the first game state and the second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state (for example, normal game state) ), in the case of the first game state, the period during which the first light emission effect is executed is longer than the period during which the second light emission effect is executed, and the second game state is executed. In this case, the period during which the second light emitting effect is executed may be longer than the period during which the first light emitting effect is executed. Alternatively, the first light emitting effect is executed for a relatively long period in the first game state as compared with the second game state, and the second game state is relatively long as compared with the first game state. It may be configured such that the second light emitting effect is executed during the period. Further, even if only the first light emitting effect is performed in the first game state, and both the first light emitting effect and the second light emitting effect or only the second light emitting effect is performed in the second game state. good. The second light emitting effect, which is visually more stimulating than the first light emitting effect, functions as an effect that gives interest to the player (an effect that gives a special feeling), so it is used only when the game state is advantageous. Also, when the game state is advantageous, the effect period is used longer, so that the interest of the player can be improved.

Thus, in the second game state, which is advantageous to the player, the player experiences visually strong stimuli for a longer period of time than in the first game state, which is relatively disadvantageous to the player. , it is possible to further increase the excitement of the player who is in an excited state due to the occurrence of an advantageous state.

FIG. 256(A) shows the stump portion 6200 . The stump portion 6200 is composed of a stump plate portion 6210 which is a colored and opaque plate-shaped member provided on the front side, and a stump box portion 6300 having a box-like shape provided on the back side. The stump plate portion 6210 is a plate-like member having an outer shape that imitates a tree stump, and a stump opening portion 6210a is provided in the center thereof.

FIG. 256(B) shows the positional relationship between the stump plate portion 6210 and the stump box portion 6300 when viewed from the front. In the drawing, the stump plate portion 6210 and the stump opening portion 6210a are indicated by dotted lines. The front side of the stump box portion 6300 is arranged so as to correspond to the stump opening portion 6210a provided in the stump plate portion 6210, simulating a state in which the side surface of the stump has a hole.

FIG. 257(A) shows the stump box portion 6300. FIG. The stump box portion 6300 includes a box upper wall portion 6310 forming the upper wall, a box right wall portion 6320 forming the right wall, a box lower wall portion 6330 forming the lower wall, and a box forming the left wall. It is composed of a left wall portion 6340 and a box rear wall portion 6350 forming a rear wall. The box upper wall portion 6310 and the box lower wall portion 6330 have a trapezoidal shape in a plan view, the back side and the front side are parallel, and the length of the front side is longer than the back side. long configured. The box right wall portion 6320 and the box left wall portion 6340 are provided so that the front sides thereof are inclined outward. Further, the box upper wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320, the box lower wall portion 6330, and the box left wall portion 6340 are made of colorless and transparent synthetic resin. Such a configuration can give a sense of depth.

FIG. 257(B) is a diagram showing a disassembled state of the stump box section 6300. FIG. The box rear wall portion 6350 is composed of a rear wall cover 6356 located on the front side and a rear wall substrate 6352 located on the rear side. In this figure, a dotted line with respect to the rear wall substrate 6352 schematically shows a position where the rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358 provided in the rear wall cover 6356 is located.

FIG. 257(C) is a front view of the rear wall cover 6356. FIG. The rear wall cover 6356 has a horizontally long rectangular shape and is made of colorless and transparent synthetic resin. A rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358 shaped like a root vegetable is formed on the front surface of the rear wall cover 6356 . The rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358 is composed of a first rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358a shaped like a root of a root vegetable and a second rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358b shaped like a leaf of a root vegetable.

FIG. 257(D) is a front view of the rear wall substrate 6352. FIG. The rear wall substrate 6352 is a horizontally long rectangular printed circuit board. The front and rear surfaces of the rear wall substrate 6352 are white. A rear wall light-emitting portion 6354 configured by surface-mounting a plurality of LEDs is provided on the front surface of the rear wall substrate 6352 . The rear wall substrate 6352 has the same size as the rear wall cover 6356 when viewed from the front. The light emitted from the LEDs forming the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 is directed forward perpendicularly to the surface forming the rear wall substrate 6352 . The rear wall light emitting portion 6354 is provided at a position overlapping the rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358 when viewed from the front. Specifically, the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a corresponds to the first rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358a shaped like the root of a root vegetable, and the second rear wall cover light scattering portion 6354a shaped like the leaf of a root vegetable A second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b is provided corresponding to the portion 6358b. In addition, as shown in FIG. 255(A), in a state in which the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 are positioned in front of the stump portion 6200, each LED constituting the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 is The first grass moving part 6360 is provided at a position where the area where the first grass decoration part 6360a is not provided and the area where the second grass decoration part 6370a is not provided of the second grass moving part 6370 do not overlap in a front view. do it. In this case, even if the rear wall light-emitting portion 6354 is in the light-emitting mode as an effect, the player is not directly irradiated with light, so that the player is given a visually weak stimulus.

The rear surface of the rear wall cover 6356 and the front surface of the rear wall substrate 6352 are not completely in contact with each other, but are provided with a predetermined gap (approximately 1-2 mm). At this time, it is desirable to set the distance between the rear surface of the rear wall cover 6356 and the rear wall substrate 6352 so that the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b do not come into contact with the rear surface of the rear wall cover 6356. With such a configuration, the heat generated in the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 can be easily dissipated, and the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 can be prevented from malfunctioning due to the heat generated by itself. It becomes possible.

The stump accessory 6100 is used for an effect of notifying the degree of expectation for a big hit in the game machine. Specifically, from a state in which the stump opening 6210a is difficult to see, the first grass movable portion 6360 moves to the left and the second grass movable portion 6370 moves to the right, so that the stump opening 6210a becomes easy to see. Then, when the stump opening 6210a becomes easily visible, the light emission of the box rear wall portion 6350 located on the back side of the stump box portion 6300 becomes visible through the stump opening 6210a. (For example, whether the rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358 appears to glow red or white, or the color of the rear wall substrate 6352 located behind in the off state) (whether it is visible in white), it is configured to suggest that the degree of expectation of stop display of the changing decorative symbols in a manner indicating a big win is higher than usual. For example, in each light emission mode of the rear wall substrate 6352, the degree of expectation that the stop mode of the changing decorative pattern will stop and display in a mode indicating a big win may be set differently. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to arouse the player's great interest in the lighting mode of the rear wall substrate 6352 .

An example has been shown in which the degree of expectation for stopping and displaying the changing decorative pattern in a manner indicating a big hit is reported by the light emission mode of the rear wall substrate 6352. However, the first rear wall light emission part 6354a and the second rear wall light emission part Such notification may be performed by using a different light emission mode from the portion 6354b.

For example, the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a does not emit light, and the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b emits weak green light. , the second rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358b shaped like a leaf of a root vegetable is green and visible to the player. In addition, by causing the first rear wall light-emitting portion 6354a to emit weak white light and the second rear wall light-emitting portion 6354b to emit weak green light, the first rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358a having a shape imitating the root of a root vegetable can be obtained. The second rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358b, which is white and has a shape imitating a root vegetable leaf, is green and visible to the player. In addition, by causing the first rear wall light-emitting portion 6354a to emit weak red light and the second rear wall light-emitting portion 6354b to weakly emit green light, the first rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358a having a shape imitating the root of a root vegetable can be obtained. The second rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358b, which is red and has a shape imitating a root vegetable leaf, is green and can be visually recognized by the player.

The reason why the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a emits weak light is to prevent the light emitted from the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a from strongly decorating a portion other than the first rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358a. Because. The reason why the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b emits weak light is to prevent the light emitted from the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b from strongly decorating a portion other than the second rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358b. Because. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to realize an effect as if only the rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358 is substantially in the light emitting mode.

By adopting such a light emission mode, it is possible to realize an expression imitating a root vegetable radish in the first light emission example and the second light emission example, and a root vegetable carrot in the third light emission example. In addition, in the first light emission example, the color of the rear wall substrate located behind the first rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358a and the color of the first rear wall substrate located behind the first rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358a are not emitted although the first rear wall light emission portion 6354a is not caused to emit light. The shape of the wall cover light scattering portion 6358a makes it possible to express a predetermined motif (radish root in this example). In addition, in the relationship between the second light emission example and the third light emission example, a plurality of motifs (in this example, radish and carrot) are expressed by different light emission colors in the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a. making it possible to

By causing the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b to emit weak light, it is possible to realize an effect as if only the rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358 is substantially in the light emitting mode. However, by making the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b emit strong light in such an effect, the entire inner surface of the stump box portion 6300 is illuminated with the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354a. It may be configured so that the light from the light emitting portion 6354b reaches there strongly. In this case, the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b may be configured to emit light of the same color (for example, white).

The light from the rear wall substrate 6352 may be reflected by the box top wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320, the box bottom wall portion 6330, and the box left wall portion 6340 to be visible to the player side. good. For example, in the transparent synthetic resin forming the box upper wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320, the box lower wall portion 6330, and the box left wall portion 6340, a light scattering portion capable of scattering the inner surfaces forming the stump box portion 6300 It may be configured as follows. Alternatively, in the box upper wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320, the box lower wall portion 6330, and the box left wall portion 6340, at least the inner surfaces constituting the stump box portion 6300 are plated to form a metal thin film such as aluminum. You may make it comprise a reflection part by performing a process. With such a configuration, the light emitted from the rear wall substrate 6352 and applied to the entire inner surface of the stump box section 6300 can be efficiently reflected toward the player. In this case, the white rear wall substrate 6352 itself also has a function of diffusely reflecting light forward.

A rear wall substrate 6352 that constitutes the box rear wall portion 6350 is visible in white through a colorless and transparent rear wall cover 6356 . Therefore, when the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 are moved to their respective movement positions and the box rear wall portion 6350 is visible from the stump opening portion 6210a, the rear wall light emitting portion Even when 6354 is in the off state, the box rear wall portion 6350 is decorated with the color of the rear wall substrate 6352 itself, and can be visually recognized by the player. In addition, the rear wall cover 6356 is provided with a rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358 imitating the shape of a root vegetable. It is possible for the player to visually recognize the box rear wall portion 6350 in a decorated state.

Although an example in which the rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358 has a shape imitating a root vegetable is shown, the entire front surface of the rear wall cover 6356 may be configured as a light scattering portion. Alternatively, in the rear wall cover 6356, the entire front surface of the rear wall cover 6356 has a smooth shape without providing a portion that scatters the light emitted from the rear wall light emitting portion 6354, and the light emitted from the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 may pass through as it is. Even in such a configuration, the box rear wall portion 6350 can be visually recognized by the player as being decorated with the color of the rear wall substrate 6352 itself as in the above example.

An example in which the box rear wall portion 6350 of the stump box portion 6300 includes the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 and the rear wall cover 6356 is shown, but instead of the box rear wall portion 6350, the box top wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320, A structure corresponding to the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 or the rear wall cover 6356 may be provided on either the box lower wall portion 6330 or the box left wall portion 6340 . Alternatively, for at least one of the box top wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320, the box bottom wall portion 6330, the box left wall portion 6340, and the box rear wall portion 6350 that constitute the stump box portion 6300, A structure corresponding to the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 and the rear wall cover 6356 may be provided. , the box left wall portion 6340 and the box rear wall portion 6350 may be provided with a structure corresponding to the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 and the rear wall cover 6356 . Further, in these examples, when a structure corresponding to the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 is provided on a predetermined wall portion, other wall portions are not provided with a structure corresponding to the rear wall light emitting portion 6354. It may be configured such that only a configuration corresponding to the rear wall cover 6356 is provided.

A box upper wall portion 6310, a box right wall portion 6320, a box lower wall portion 6330, and a box left wall portion 6340, which constitute the stump box portion 6300, are made of transparent or translucent synthetic resin, and the stump plate portion 6210 is made of transparent or translucent synthetic resin. It is made of translucent synthetic resin, and when the first grass moving part 6360 and the second grass moving part 6370 are in the standby position, the rear wall light emitting part 6354 is in a light emitting state, so that the rear wall light emitting part 6354 emits light. The irradiated light may illuminate the rear surface of the stump board portion 6210 . With such a configuration, the light from the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 passes through the stump plate portion 6210, and the player can visually recognize the stump plate portion 6210 decorated with the light. The box upper wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320, the box lower wall portion 6330, the box left wall portion 6340, and the stump plate portion 6210, which constitute the stump box portion 6300, may be formed of colored transparent or colored translucent synthetic resin. good. For example, they may be made of brown synthetic resin. Alternatively, a tree pattern may be printed on the rear surface of the stump board 6210 with brown ink to form an opaque or translucent area on a portion of the stump board.

Although an example in which the color of the rear wall substrate 6352 is white has been shown, other colors may be adopted. For example, the color of the rear wall substrate 6352 may be brown, similar to the stump plate portion 6210 . In such a mode, by turning off the first rear wall light-emitting portion 6354a, the rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358 can represent root vegetables with soil adhered thereto.

When the first grass moving part 6360 moves leftward and the second grass moving part 6370 moves rightward, the stump opening 6210a provided in the stump plate part 6210 is exposed, and the box rear wall part located behind is exposed. Although an example in which the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 can be visually recognized has been shown, the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 are rotated with the left-right direction of the lower ends of the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 as the rotation axis. When the upper parts of the first grass movable part 6360 and the second grass movable part 6370 fall forward, the stump opening 6210a provided in the stump plate part 6210 is exposed. , the box rear wall portion 6350 located at the rear may be configured to be visible.

An example in which the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 are provided in front of the stump portion 6200 has been shown, but only one of the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 is provided in front of the stump portion 6200 . The stump opening 6210a may be exposed by moving to the right or left movement position. Alternatively, the first grass movable part 6360 and the second grass movable part 6370 are configured as an integral member, and this member moves to the right or left movement position so that the stump opening 6210a is exposed. may be configured.

The box rear wall portion 6350 is composed of a rear wall substrate 6352 and a rear wall cover 6356, but the rear wall cover 6356 may be configured to be rotatable. Specifically, the upper side of the rear wall cover 6356 is used as a rotation axis, and the front surface of the rear wall cover 6356 is rotated by a drive source (not shown) so that the front surface of the rear wall cover 6356 comes into contact with the inner surface of the box upper wall portion 6310. The left side of the wall cover 6356 may be used as a rotation axis, and a drive source (not shown) may rotate the rear wall cover 6356 so that the front surface of the rear wall cover 6356 comes into contact with the inner surface of the box left wall portion 6340 . With such a configuration, the rear wall cover 6356 is positioned on the front side of the rear wall substrate 6352, and the rear wall substrate 6352 can be visually recognized by the player through the rear wall cover 6356. The box rear wall portion 6350 can be visually recognized by the player in any of the modes in which the rear wall cover 6356 is not positioned on the near side of the box 6352 and the rear wall substrate 6352 is directly visible. In addition, since the stump accessory 6100 is positioned at the lower right side of the game board side effect display device 1600 when viewed from the player's line of sight, by rotating the rear wall cover 6356 around the upper side and the left side, the rear wall after movement can be displayed. The cover 6356 becomes inconspicuous. Note that the right side or the variable may be rotated as an axis.

The rear wall substrate 6352 may have a larger shape than the rear wall cover 6356 . For example, the rear wall substrate 6352 may have the same size and shape as the stump plate portion 6210, and may be configured so that the respective outer edges overlap when viewed from the front. In this case, the rear wall substrate 6352 has a shape expanded from its original shape. In this case, the portion where the white rear wall substrate 6352 is extended to the periphery is irradiated from the rear wall light emitting portion 6354, and the box upper wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320, the box lower wall portion 6330, and the box left wall portion are illuminated. It is possible to reflect the light reflected backward by the portion 6340 or the like toward the player in front again.

Also, the light emitting portion may be provided in a portion other than the area covered by the rear wall cover 6356 . For example, in the stump plate portion 6210, a light emitting portion is provided on the front surface of the rear wall substrate 6352 behind the part imitating the root or the part imitating the cut end of the tree, and the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 is made to emit light at the same time. can be configured to By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to make the effect of causing the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 to emit light more lively. Alternatively, the rear wall substrate 6352 may be configured so that no light emitting portion other than the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 is provided. In this case also, in the portion where the white rear wall substrate 6352 is extended to the periphery, the light reflected backward by the box top wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320, the box bottom wall portion 6330, the box left wall portion 6340, etc. It is possible to reflect again toward the player in front.

In the example shown using FIG. 257, the box rear wall portion 6350 is composed of a rectangular rear wall cover 6356 provided on the near side and a rectangular rear wall substrate 6352 provided on the far side. On the other hand, in the example shown below with reference to FIG. 258, the box rear wall portion 6350 is composed of a rear wall cover 6356 positioned on the front side, a rear wall substrate 6352 positioned in the middle, and a rear wall plate portion 6380 positioned on the back side. and In this example, the rear wall cover 6356 has a shape imitating a root vegetable, a first rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358a having an external shape imitating the root of a root vegetable, and a second rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358a having an external shape imitating a leaf of a root vegetable. A wall cover light scattering portion 6358b is provided. The rear wall cover 6356 is made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin so that the color of the rear wall substrate 6352 positioned behind can be visually recognized.

The rear wall substrate 6352 has a shape that resembles a root vegetable as a whole, and is composed of a first rear wall substrate 6352a that imitates the root of a root vegetable and a second rear wall substrate 6352b that imitates the leaf of a root vegetable. A white protective film is formed with a white protective agent on the front and rear surfaces of the first rear wall substrate 6352a. A green protective film is formed on the front and rear surfaces of the second rear wall substrate 6352b with a green protective agent. Four LEDs are surface-mounted on the first rear wall substrate 6352a as the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a. Two LEDs are surface-mounted on the second rear wall substrate 6352b as the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b. A rear wall cover 6356 is attached to the front surface of the rear wall substrate 6352 . The rear wall plate portion 6380 has a rectangular shape, and a rear wall substrate 6352 is attached to the front surface thereof. In this example, the rear wall plate portion 6380 forms the rear wall of the stump box portion 6300 .

Alternatively, the first rear wall substrate 6352a and the second rear wall substrate 6352b may be formed as separate printed substrates, and attached to the rear wall plate portion 6380 so as to function as the rear wall substrate 6352. Alternatively, the first rear wall substrate 6352a and the second rear wall substrate 6352b may be formed by separately coating one printed circuit board with a white protective agent and a green protective agent.

In the stump box section 6300 having such a configuration, it is preferable to perform an effect of moving the first grass movable section 6360 and the second grass movable section 6370 to the movement positions as described above. Also, in this embodiment as well, the light emission modes when the first rear wall light emission section 6354a and the second rear wall light emission section 6354b are used for presentation are a weak light emission mode in which root vegetables can be visually recognized, A strong light emission mode may be adopted in which the stump box section 6300 as a whole can be visually recognized as if it were emitting light.

In addition, even when the first rear wall light-emitting portion 6354a and the second rear wall light-emitting portion 6354b are turned off, the color and shape of the first rear wall substrate 6352a and the second rear wall substrate 6352b may cause the light in the stump box portion 6300 to change. It is possible to express a predetermined motif. In this example, through a first rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358a, which simulates a root, the first rear wall substrate 6352a is white, and through a second rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358b, which simulates a leaf. The rear wall substrate 6352b is green and visible. In this way, one decorative body can be configured only by the outer shape of the substrate and the color of the substrate.

In this example, a plurality of grass accessories 6400 are provided in front of the lower side of the game board side effect display device 1600 in front of the rabbit role and the stump role.

In the example shown in FIG. 254, as described above, the first grass role 6470 to the fourth grass role 6485 are provided as the grass role 6400 between the game board side effect display device 1600 and the game area 5a. there is Several implementations of such a grass tool 6400 are shown below.

The grass accessory 6400 shown in FIG. 259(A) is composed of a grass substrate 6420 which is colored and opaque, has a plate shape, and has an outline shape imitating grass. In this example, grass substrate 6420 includes grass substrate front light emitter 6422 . The grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is formed by an LED surface-mounted on the front surface of the grass substrate 6420 . The grass accessory 6400 shown in FIG. 259(B) is provided with a grass substrate 6420 which is colored and opaque, plate-shaped, and has an outline shape imitating grass. In this example, the grass substrate 6420 includes a grass substrate rear surface emitter 6424 . The grass substrate rear surface light emitting portion 6424 is formed by an LED surface-mounted on the rear surface of the grass substrate 6420 . In the example shown in FIGS. 259(A) and 259(B), the grass substrate 6420 has an outer shape that imitates grass, and the outer shape itself has a function of decoration. White may be adopted as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . In this case, the grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with the luminescent color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 by causing the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 to emit green or brown light. Green or brown may be adopted as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . Green can represent the color of live grass, and brown can represent the color of dead grass. Thus, both the color and the shape of the grass substrate 6420 can realize a decoration that imitates grass.

As the LEDs mounted on the grass substrate 6420, LEDs of the same color as the grass substrate 6420 are used. Specifically, when the grass substrate 6420 is white, white LEDs are used as the mounted LEDs. With such a configuration, the LEDs mounted on the grass substrate 6420 can be made inconspicuous. In another example, such a configuration may also be adopted when an LED is provided as a light-emitting portion on the substrate.

The light emitted from the LEDs constituting the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 provided on the grass substrate 6420 is directed forward perpendicularly to the surface forming the grass substrate 6420 . By adopting such a configuration, it is possible for the player to visually recognize an effect that gives a visually strong impression. When the grass front cover 6440, which will be described later, is provided, the LEDs constituting the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 are mounted on the grass substrate 6420 so that light is emitted horizontally upward with respect to the surface forming the grass substrate 6420. can be configured to be implemented in With such a configuration, light is emitted toward the upper end portion of the front grass cover 6440, so that the light emitted from the front light-emitting portion 6422 of the grass substrate is transmitted to the entire front grass cover 6440. , the effect as if the entire grass front cover 6440 were illuminated can be visually recognized by the player. Note that, in another example, such a configuration may also be adopted when providing the light emitting portion on the substrate.

On the other hand, the light emitted from the LEDs constituting the grass substrate rear surface light-emitting portion 6424 provided on the grass substrate 6420 is irradiated horizontally upward with respect to the surface forming the grass substrate 6420 . In this case, the player can be made to visually recognize an effect as if the grass board 6420 were illuminated by a halo. When a rear weed cover 6460 (to be described later) is provided, light is emitted toward the upper end of the rear weed cover 6460 . The light emitted from the rear cover 6460 is transmitted, and the player can be made to visually recognize an effect as if the entire back cover 6460 were illuminated. Note that, in another example, such a configuration may also be adopted when providing the light emitting portion on the substrate.

Through holes (not shown) forming an electronic circuit are provided on the front and rear surfaces of the grass substrate 6420 . In addition, the metal that constitutes the electronic circuit provided on the printed circuit board is exposed in the through-hole, and when copper is used as the metal, the through-hole will be visually recognized in brown, which is the color of copper. . If at least part of the grass board 6420 is visible to the player, there is a risk that the through-holes may also be visible to the player. In particular, when white is used as the color of the grass board 6420, the brown color of the through-holes provided on the front surface of the grass board 6420 is visually recognized by the player. is lost. Therefore, in order to solve such problems, the following configuration may be employed. For example, on the front surface of the grass substrate 6420, the through-holes are preferably arranged so as to be dispersed over the entire front surface of the grass substrate 6420, instead of concentrating them at predetermined locations. Alternatively, by arranging the through-holes along the outer shape of the grass substrate 6420 or on the extension of the contour line forming the outer shape of the grass substrate 6420, the through-holes can be arranged along the outer shape of the grass substrate 6420. It becomes possible to visually recognize as if it is a part. A decorative shape resembling grass may be formed by arranging linear through-holes inside the contour of the grass substrate 6420 in the same shape as the contour. Also, one or more patterns having the same color as the through holes may be formed on a part of the front surface of the grass substrate 6420 . Alternatively, one or more patterns having the same shape as the through holes may be formed on part of the front surface of the grass substrate 6420 . For example, if the through-holes are brown and circular, one or more circular patterns may be formed on the front surface of the grass substrate 6420 with brown ink. The above example is preferably applied to all the through holes provided on the front surface of the grass substrate 6420, but may be applied to at least some of the through holes. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the function as a decoration is impaired. It should be noted that a through hole may be provided in a substrate included in a accessory in another example, and an embodiment relating to such a through hole may be applied.

259(C) to 259(E) show an example in which a grass front cover 6440 is attached to the front surface of a grass substrate 6420, and a grass accessory 6400 is configured by the grass substrate 6420 and the grass front cover 6440. FIG. The grass front cover 6440 is made of synthetic resin and has a decorative shape that resembles grass. In addition, the portion of the grass substrate 6420 on which the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is mounted is configured to be covered with the grass front cover 6440 when viewed from the front.

In the example shown in FIG. 259(C), the front grass cover 6440 is smaller in size than the grass substrate 6420, and the front surface of the grass substrate 6420 is partially covered by the front grass cover 6440. In the example shown in FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 259(D), the grass substrate 6420 and the front grass cover 6440 have the same size, and the entire front surface of the grass substrate 6420 is covered with the front grass cover 6440 . In the example shown in FIG. 259(E), the grass front cover 6440 is larger in size than the grass substrate 6420, the front surface of the grass substrate 6420 is covered with the grass front cover 6440, and the grass is positioned outside the outside of the grass substrate 6420. In the example shown in FIG. The front cover 6440 protrudes.

In the example shown in FIG. 259(C), the outer shape of the grass substrate 6420 and the outer shape of the grass front cover 6440 both realize a decorative aspect imitating grass. Also, a sense of depth can be produced. In the examples shown in FIGS. 259(D) and 259(E), the grass front cover 6440 is made of colored transparent or colorless transparent synthetic resin so that the grass substrate 6420 positioned behind can be visually recognized. may be In that case, both the outer shape of the grass substrate 6420 and the outer shape of the front grass cover 6440 can realize a decorative aspect. Also, a sense of depth can be produced.

259(F) to 259(H) show an example in which a rear grass cover 6460 is attached to the rear surface of the grass substrate 6420, and the grass substrate 6420 and the rear grass cover 6460 constitute a grass accessory 6400. FIG. The grass rear cover 6460 is made of a synthetic resin and has a decorative outer shape that resembles grass. In addition, the portion of the grass substrate 6420 where the grass substrate rear surface light-emitting portion 6424 is mounted is configured to be covered with the grass rear cover 6460 .

In the example shown in FIG. 259(F) , the rear grass cover 6460 is smaller in size than the grass substrate 6420 , and the rear of the grass substrate 6420 is covered with the rear grass cover 6460 . In the example shown in FIG. 259(G), the grass substrate 6420 and the rear grass cover 6460 are of the same size, and the rear of the grass substrate 6420 is covered with the rear grass cover 6460 . In the example shown in FIG. 259(H), the size of the rear grass cover 6460 is larger than that of the grass substrate 6420, the rear of the grass substrate 6420 is covered with the rear grass cover 6460, and the grass is positioned outside the outside of the grass substrate 6420. In the example shown in FIG. The rear cover 6460 protrudes. In this example, the outer shape of the rear cover 6460 is visible from the front.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 259(F) and 259(G), the grass accessory 6400 may be configured to be rotatable about the vertical direction. For example, the drive control by the peripheral control board 1510 may be configured such that the grass accessory 6400 rotates 180 degrees and the rear grass cover 6460 faces forward. By adopting such a configuration, it becomes a visual mode as shown in FIGS. 259(C) and 259(D), and the same effect as the example shown in FIGS. Become. In the example shown in FIG. 259(H), both the outer shape of the grass substrate 6420 and the outer shape of the rear cover 6460 can realize a decorative aspect. Also, a sense of depth can be produced.

FIGS. 260(A) to 260(G) show modified examples of the example shown in FIG. 259(C). In these examples, the size of the front grass cover 6440 is smaller than the size of the grass substrate 6420. Further, modified examples of the specific structure of the front grass cover 6440 will be described below.

In the example shown in FIG. 260(A), a colorless and transparent grass front cover 6440 is provided in front of a white grass substrate 6420 . The surface forming the front cover 6440 is not subjected to lens cutting or satin finishing, and is formed smoothly. there is A grass front cover transparent portion 6442, which will be described later, is also configured in a similar manner so that passing light can pass through without irregular reflection. With such a configuration, the grass substrate 6420 positioned behind the front grass cover 6440 can be directly visually recognized.

In this example, by setting the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 in a light emitting state, the entire grass front cover 6440 and the grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with the light emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 . For example, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 emits green light, the entire grass front cover 6440 and the grass substrate 6420 can be decorated in green.

In the example shown in FIG. 260(B), a grass front cover 6440 is provided in front of the white grass substrate 6420 . The weed front cover 6440 is formed of an upper weed front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and a lower weed front cover colored transparent portion 6442b. The front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is formed from a colorless transparent synthetic resin, and the front cover colored transparent portion 6442b is formed from a colored transparent synthetic resin. The grass front cover 6440 may be configured by assembling the cover colored transparent portion 6442b. Alternatively, the entire front cover 6440 is made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and a colored transparent sticker is pasted on a part of the front surface of the front cover 6440, or a colored transparent print is applied to the front cover 6440. A portion 6442b may be formed. An example of forming the colored transparent part 6442 b of the front cover 6440 by attaching a colored transparent seal or printing a colored transparent part on a part of the front surface of the front cover 6440 has been described. The colored transparent portion 6442b of the front cover may be formed by affixing a colored transparent seal or printing colored transparently on a part of the . Further, it is preferable to adopt green as the color of the front grass cover colored transparent portion 6442b. Further, the color of the front cover cover colored transparent portion 6442b may be the same color or substantially the same color as the grass substrate 6420. In this case, the fact that the grass substrate 6420 is a printed circuit board can be made inconspicuous. Note that, in another example, such a configuration may also be adopted when the colored transparent portion is provided.

In this example, the white grass substrate 6420 is visible through the front grass cover colorless transparent portion 6442a. In addition, the green grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b is positioned in front of the white grass substrate 6420, so that the white grass substrate 6420 can appear green. In addition, since the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b is positioned in front of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the LEDs constituting the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 become difficult to see from the player, and the grass substrate front surface in the off state. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the player loses interest when the player directly looks at the light emitting unit 6422 . On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is turned on, the intensity of the light from the light source is reduced by the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, which prevents the player from feeling dazzled. It can be suppressed. In addition, by causing the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 to emit light, the entire grass front cover 6440 and the grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with the luminescent color.

FIG. 260(C) shows the example shown in FIG. 260(B) in which the front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is changed to the front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, and the front cover colored transparent portion 6442b is changed to the front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a. This is an example modified to In this example, when the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, it is possible to express white, green, and white modes from above in a front view.

In the example shown in FIG. 260(D), a grass front cover 6440 is provided in front of the white grass substrate 6420 . The front grass cover 6440 includes a front grass cover light scattering portion 6444 in this example. Specifically, the front cover 6440 is made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and is composed of a front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a provided at the upper portion and a colorless light scattering portion 6444a provided at the lower portion. It is The weed front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444 a is formed by subjecting at least one of the front surface and the rear surface of the weed front cover 6440 to lens cutting or satin finishing. Preferably, the front grass cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a is formed on the front surface of the front grass cover 6440 or on both the front and rear surfaces. In this way, the colorless and transparent synthetic resin is made translucent by applying lens cutting and satin finishing, so it is difficult or impossible to see the shape of the members located behind, but the color are visible to the player without change. Although an example in which the light scattering portion is formed in a colorless and transparent synthetic resin has been shown, the light scattering portion may be formed in a colored and transparent synthetic resin. In this case, the color of the colored transparent synthetic resin positioned in front is mixed with the member positioned in the rear and can be visually recognized. Further, the color of the grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b may be the same color or substantially the same color as the grass substrate 6420. In this case, the fact that the grass substrate 6420 is a printed circuit board can be made inconspicuous. Further, in the front weed cover 6440 and the rear weed cover 6460, a light scattering portion may be provided so as to border the end portion forming the outer peripheral edge in a front view. In this case, the light from the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 and the grass substrate rear light-emitting portion 6424 can be diffusely reflected at the end portions of the grass front cover 6440 and the grass rear cover 6460. can highlight the external shape of Note that, in another example, such a configuration may also be adopted when providing the light scattering portion.

In this example, since the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a is positioned in front of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the LEDs constituting the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 are in a state where it is difficult for the player to see them, and the light is turned off. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player loses interest when the player directly looks at the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 . On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is turned on, the light from the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is scattered by the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, so that the player feels dazzled. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of

Although the weed front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a is formed only on the front surface of the weed front cover 6440, with this configuration, the weed front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a is formed only on the rear surface of the weed front cover 6440. Compared to the case where the electronic components mounted on the front surface of the grass substrate 6420 (LEDs constituting the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422) appear blurred, the presence of the electronic components becomes less conspicuous, and the player It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which interest is lost. Note that when the front cover cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a is formed on both the front surface and the rear surface of the front cover 6440, the electronic components mounted on the front surface of the front cover 6420 (the LEDs constituting the front light emitting portion 6422 of the front cover 6422) ) can be made less conspicuous. In addition, the color of the grass substrate 6420 in the rear becomes visible through the colorless light scattering portion 6444a of the grass front cover, and the color of the grass substrate 6420 is used as a decoration while obscuring the shape of the electronic components mounted on the front surface of the grass substrate 6420. It is a mode that exhibits the function of.

FIG. 260(E) shows that, in the example shown in FIG. 260(D), the front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is replaced with the front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, and the front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a is replaced with the front cover colorless transparent portion 6444a. This is an example modified to the portion 6442a. In this example, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, it is possible to express grass in white, green, and white modes from above in a front view.

The example shown in FIG. 260(F) is an example in which the grass front cover 6440 in the example shown in FIG. 260(B) is modified. In this example, a weed front cover opaque portion 6446 is provided instead of the weed front cover colored transparent portion 6442b. The front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is formed from a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and the front cover opaque portion 6446 is formed from an opaque synthetic resin. A cover 6440 may be constructed. Alternatively, the entire front cover 6440 is made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and a part of the front surface of the front cover 6440 is provided with a seal or print that makes the rear invisible, thereby forming the front cover opaque portion 6446. may In addition, by applying a sticker or printing to a part of the front surface of the front surface of the front cover 6440 to make the rear invisible, instead of forming the front cover opaque portion 6446, the front surface of the front surface of the front cover 6440 has a rear part. The grass front cover opaque portion 6446 may be formed by applying an invisible sticker or printing. In this case, in front of the grass front cover 6440, the state of the front side of the portion where the sticker or print is applied can be visually recognized. For example, when the front grass cover 6440 is made of a colored transparent synthetic resin, it is possible to make the color of the colored transparent synthetic resin visible while making the rear of the front grass cover 6440 invisible. . Further, when the front weed cover light scattering portion 6444 is provided on the front surface of the front weed cover 6440, the front weed cover light scattering portion 6444 should be visible, but the rear of the front weed cover 6440 should be invisible. becomes possible. Yellow or brown may be used as the color of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 . In addition, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . Note that, in other examples, such a configuration may also be adopted when providing an opaque portion.

In this example, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, the grass substrate 6420 is white and directly visible, and the white of the grass substrate 6420 is indirectly visible through the front grass cover colorless transparent portion 6442a. visually visible. On the other hand, regarding the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 , the color of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 is visible regardless of the color of the grass substrate 6420 . An example in which yellow or brown is used as the color of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 has been shown, but in this aspect, it is possible to express an aspect in which snow is piled up on dry grass.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the light emitting state, the grass substrate 6420 and the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a can be decorated with the emitted light color of the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422. FIG. For example, by adopting green as the luminescent color, it becomes possible to decorate the grass substrate 6420 and the colorless transparent portion 6442a of the grass front cover with the luminescent color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 in green, and the grass grows. can be expressed.

As the grass front cover opaque portion 6446, a silver member capable of specularly reflecting light may be employed. For example, the front cover opaque portion 6446 is made of a synthetic resin plated entirely with an aluminum thin film. The grass front cover 6440 may be configured by assembling the portion 6442a. Alternatively, the entire front cover 6440 is made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and a part of the front surface of the front cover 6440 is affixed with a silver seal, printed with silver paint, or plated with an aluminum thin film. The grass front cover opaque portion 6446 may be configured by providing the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 . The silver-colored opaque portion has a function of reflecting light. In addition, it may be configured such that a colored paint is applied to the opaque portion formed in silver or a colored transparent seal is attached. For example, by applying a thin layer of yellow paint, the opaque portion can be made visible in gold. Note that, in other examples, such a configuration may also be adopted when providing an opaque portion or a reflective portion.

In the example shown in FIG. 260(F), the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 is configured to be visible in silver. In this case, when the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is turned off, the front surface of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 is silver, and the front grass cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the grass substrate 6420 are white. It is possible to express a mode in which frost or snow falls on the grass.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is in the light emitting mode, the light emitted forward from the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is reflected backward by the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 . Furthermore, since the grass substrate 6420 is white, the light reflected backward by the front grass cover opaque portion 6446 is incident on the grass substrate 6420 and scattered. will be decorated. In this way, the light emitted from the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 can be efficiently used for decoration. By providing a colored transparent layer as the foremost layer of the front cover opaque portion 6446, the front cover opaque portion 6446 can be made visible in silver and in a predetermined color.

FIG. 260(G) shows the example shown in FIG. 260(F), in which the front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is changed into the front cover opaque portion 6446, and the front cover opaque portion 6446 is changed into the front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a. This is an example of In this example, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, it is possible to express grass in white, silver, and white modes from above in a front view.

FIG. 261(A) is an example in which the front cover cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is modified to the front cover cover colored transparent portion 6442b in the example shown in FIG. 260(A). Green may be adopted as the color of the front grass cover colored transparent portion 6442b. In addition, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . In this case, when the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is turned off, it is possible to express grass by the part visible in white by the grass substrate 6420 and the green aspect by the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b. It's becoming

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is made to emit light, it is desirable that the light emission color is the same as or similar to the color of the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, such as green or yellowish green. It is desirable to emit light. In this case, it is possible to perform a dynamic presentation while keeping the color of the front cover cover colored transparent portion 6442b as it is. In addition, the white grass substrate 6420 is decorated with the reflected light that does not pass through the front grass cover colored transparent portion 6442b, so that the white grass substrate 6420 can be visually recognized in green.

FIG. 261(B) is an example in which a part of the front cover cover colored transparent portion 6442b in the example shown in FIG. 261(A) is modified into a front cover cover colored light scattering portion 6444b. As the color of the grass front cover 6440, green may be adopted. In addition, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . By adopting such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, grass can be expressed in white, green, and green modes from above. In addition, since the grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b is positioned in front of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the white color of the grass substrate 6420 is mixed with the green color of the front grass cover colored light scattering portion 6444b. , the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 itself is configured to be difficult to see.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emitting mode, the light emitted from the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is scattered in the front grass cover colored light scattering portion 6444b to decorate the front grass cover colored transparent portion 6442b. It becomes possible to make it an aspect. In addition, the exposed white grass substrate 6420 can be made visible with the luminescent color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 .

FIG. 261(C) shows that, in the example shown in FIG. 261(B), the front cover cover colored transparent portion 6442b is replaced with the front cover cover colored light scattering portion 6444b, and the front cover cover light scattering portion 6444 is replaced with the front cover colored transparent portion. This is an example modified to 6442b. As the color of the grass front cover 6440, green may be adopted. In addition, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . By adopting such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, grass can be expressed in white, green, and green modes from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emitting mode, the light emitted from the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 passes through the front grass cover colored transparent portion 6442b, and part of the light does not pass through. The light is reflected and scattered at the front grass cover light scattering portion 6444, and the front grass cover light scattering portion 6444 can be made into a decorative mode. In addition, diffusely reflected light reaches the exposed white grass substrate 6420 , and the white grass substrate 6420 can be made visible with the luminescent color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 .

FIG. 261(D) is an example in which the front cover cover colored light scattering portion 6444b is modified to the front cover opaque portion 6446 in the example shown in FIG. As the color of the grass front cover 6440, green may be adopted. Yellow, brown, or silver may be used as the color of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 . In addition, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . By adopting such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, it is possible to express white, green, yellow, brown, or silver grass from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the light emitting mode, the light emitted from the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is reflected on the back surface of the front grass cover opaque portion 6446, and the front grass cover colored transparent portion 6442b is reflected. It becomes possible to set it as a decoration mode. In addition, by decorating the exposed white grass substrate 6420 with the reflected light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with the luminescent color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 . For example, by adopting green as the luminescent color of the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422, it is possible to decorate the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b and the grass substrate 6420 in green with the luminescent color of the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422. , can express the mode in which grass is growing.

FIG. 261(E) shows the example shown in FIG. 261(D), in which the front cover cover colored transparent portion 6442b is changed into the front cover cover opaque portion 6446, and the front cover cover opaque portion 6446 is changed into the front cover cover colored transparent portion 6442b. This is an example of As the color of the grass front cover 6440, green may be adopted. Yellow, brown, or silver may be used as the color of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 . In addition, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . By adopting such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, it is possible to express white, yellow, brown, silver, or green grass from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emitting mode, the front grass cover colored transparent portion 6442b can be set to the decorative mode. In addition, the light emitted from the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 scatters on the back surface of the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b or is reflected on the back surface of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446, thereby exposing the white light. By decorating the grass substrate 6420 , the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with the luminescent color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 . For example, by adopting green as the luminescent color of the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422, it is possible to decorate the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b and the grass substrate 6420 in green with the luminescent color of the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422. , can express the mode in which grass is growing.

FIG. 262(A) is an example in which the front cover cover colorless transparent portion 6442a in the example shown in FIG. 260(A) is modified into a front cover cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a. In addition, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . By adopting such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, white grass can be expressed from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emitting mode, the front grass cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a can be set to the decorative mode. In addition, the light emitted from the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is scattered on the back surface of the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, so that the exposed white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated. 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the luminescent color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a and the grass substrate 6420 can be decorated in green with the luminescent color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422. , and it is possible to express the mode in which the grass is growing.

FIG. 262(B) is an example in which a part of the front cover cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a is modified into a front cover opaque portion 6446 in the example shown in FIG. 262(A). Yellow, brown, or silver may be used as the color of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 . In addition, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . By adopting such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, the grass can be expressed in white, white, yellow, brown, or silver from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is set to the luminous mode, the front grass cover light scattering portion 6444 can be set to the decorative mode by the light reflected from the back surface of the front cover opaque portion 6446 . In addition, by scattering light on the back surface of the front grass cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, the exposed white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. becomes. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422, it becomes possible to decorate the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a and the grass substrate 6420 in green, and the grass grows. can be expressed.

FIG. 262(C) shows the example shown in FIG. 262(B) in which the front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a is replaced with the front cover opaque portion 6446, and the front cover opaque portion 6446 is replaced with the front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a. This is a modified example. Yellow, brown, or silver may be used as the color of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 . In addition, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . By adopting such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, it is possible to express grass in white, yellow, brown, silver, or white form from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the light emitting mode, the exposed white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with the light scattered by the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, and the white grass can be displayed. It becomes possible to decorate the substrate 6420 with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422, it becomes possible to decorate the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a and the grass substrate 6420 in green, and the grass grows. can be expressed.

In the example shown in FIGS. 262(A) to 262(C), the front cover 6440 is made of a colored and transparent synthetic resin to replace the front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a. You may make it comprise the part 6444b. Specifically, the grass front cover 6440 is preferably made of green transparent synthetic resin.

FIG. 262(D) is an example in which the front cover cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a is modified to the front cover opaque portion 6446 in the example shown in FIG. Yellow, brown, or silver may be used as the color of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 . In addition, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, white, yellow, brown, or silver grass can be represented from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the light emitting mode, the exposed white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with the light reflected from the back surface of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446, and the white grass can be displayed. It becomes possible to decorate the substrate 6420 with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the luminescent color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the grass substrate 6420 can be decorated in green, and a mode of growing grass can be expressed.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 260(A) to 262(D), the outer shape of each of the front grass cover 6440 and the grass substrate 6420 having a larger outer shape than the front grass cover 6440 can be visually recognized by the player as a decorative shape. is configured to In addition, the grass substrate front surface emitting portion 6422 includes a grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, a grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, a grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, a grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b, and a grass front cover opaque portion 6446. Although it is provided at a position where only one of the members is covered when viewed from the front, the LED constituting the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is arranged behind the position forming the boundary line of these members. may By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for a player to notice that the LEDs constituting the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 are mounted on the grass substrate 6420 in the off state.

For example, in the grass accessory 6400 shown in FIG. 260(B), an LED that constitutes the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is placed behind the boundary formed by the front cover cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the front cover cover colored transparent portion 6442b. When configured so as to be arranged, the presence of the LEDs constituting the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 becomes less conspicuous. It becomes possible for the player to visually recognize it clearly.

Similarly, the relationship between the front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the colorless light scattering portion 6444a, the relationship between the front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the front cover opaque portion 6446, the front cover colored transparent portion 6442b and the front cover color. Relationship with light scattering portion 6444b, relationship between weed front cover colored transparent portion 6442b and weed front cover opaque portion 6446, relationship between weed front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a and weed front cover opaque portion 6446, and weed front cover colored light In the relationship between the scattering portion 6444b and the grass front cover opaque portion 6446, when the LEDs constituting the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 are arranged behind the boundary line between these, the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 It is possible to make the presence of the LEDs constituting the inconspicuous.

Further, the relationship between the portion where the grass substrate 6420 is exposed and the front cover cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, the relationship between the portion where the grass substrate 6420 is exposed and the front cover cover colored transparent portion 6442b, and the relationship between the portion where the grass substrate 6420 is exposed and the front cover cover colored transparent portion 6442b. The relationship between the portion where the grass substrate 6420 is exposed and the weed front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b, the portion where the grass substrate 6420 is exposed and the weed front cover In the case where the LEDs constituting the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 are arranged behind these boundary lines in relation to the cover opaque portion 6446, the presence of the LEDs constituting the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 becomes inconspicuous.

In the combination described above, in the combination of the front weed cover opaque portion 6446 and the member forming the boundary line in combination with the weed front cover opaque portion 6446, the light of the LEDs constituting the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is In combination with the grass front cover opaque portion 6446, it is possible to efficiently transmit to the member forming the boundary line.

The light from the LEDs forming the grass-substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 may be applied perpendicularly to the grass-substrate 6420, or the boundary line at the position where the LEDs forming the grass-substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 are mounted. You may make it irradiate in the direction perpendicular|vertical to the tangential line of .

For example, when both of the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the colorless light scattering portion 6444a are combined, the light from the LEDs constituting the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 may be used. It is preferable that the direction of light irradiation is perpendicular to the grass substrate 6420 . On the other hand, in the combination of the weed front cover opaque portion 6446 and the member forming the boundary line in combination with the weed front cover opaque portion 6446, the boundary line at the position where the LEDs constituting the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 are mounted. It is preferable to irradiate the light in the direction of the member that is perpendicular to the tangent line and combined with the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 to form the boundary line.

Note that when rectangular LEDs are used as the LEDs that constitute the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the longitudinal direction of the LEDs coincides with the direction of the boundary line or the contact of the boundary line at the position where the LED is arranged. should be placed as follows.

In addition, in the case where the two parts forming the boundary line are formed by one member, the LED constituting the grass substrate front light emitting part 6422 has a size of about the same width at the part corresponding to the boundary line so that it does not protrude when viewed from the front. It may be configured to provide a V-shaped groove. With such a configuration, when viewed from the front of the LEDs forming the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the LEDs forming the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 are refracted by the V-shaped grooves and visually recognized. As a result, it is possible to make the presence of the LEDs constituting the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 inconspicuous. Note that the shape is not limited to the V-shaped groove, and any structure that can be bent may be used. On the other hand, when a boundary line is formed by combining a plurality of members, the LEDs constituting the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 are refracted and visually recognized without providing such grooves. It is possible to make the presence of the LEDs constituting the substrate front light emitting portion 6422 inconspicuous.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 260(A) to 262(D), the outer shape of each of the front grass cover 6440 and the grass substrate 6420 having a larger outer shape than the front grass cover 6440 can be visually recognized by the player as a decorative shape. is configured to This makes it possible to give a sense of depth. In the weed front cover 6440, the weed front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, the weed front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, the weed front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, the weed front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b, and the weed front cover opaque portion 6446 are formed. Decorative shapes are also formed at the boundaries.

In addition, since the grass substrate 6420 is in an exposed state, the grass substrate 6420 is decorated with the color of the grass substrate 6420 itself, and the grass substrate 6420 is also decorated with the light emitted from the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 . will be In particular, when the grass substrate 6420 is made white and light of a color other than white is emitted from the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the color of the grass substrate 6420 can be changed to the irradiated color to make it visible.

In addition, the light emitted from the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is reflected between the grass front cover 6440 positioned in front of the grass substrate 6420 and the grass substrate 6420 , so that the light is directed toward the edge of the grass substrate 6420 . is configured to reflect light, it is possible to indirectly illuminate a member that constitutes the front grass cover 6440 and that is not located in front of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 . In addition, each member constituting the grass accessory 6400 can be decorated in a different color depending on whether the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the off state or in the light-emitting state. In addition, by mounting the LEDs constituting the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 on the grass substrate 6420 so that the light is emitted horizontally upward with respect to the surface forming the grass substrate 6420, the light emitted from the grass substrate 6420 can be More light can reach the edge.

FIGS. 263(A) to 265(D) show modified examples of the example shown in FIG. 259(D). In these examples, the size of the grass substrate 6420 and the front grass cover 6440 are configured to be the same. Further, modified examples of the specific structure of the front grass cover 6440 will be described below.

In the example shown in FIG. 263(A), a colorless and transparent grass front cover 6440 is provided in front of a white grass substrate 6420 . The surface forming the front cover 6440 is not subjected to lens cutting or satin finishing, and is formed smoothly. there is In this example, the entire front weed cover 6440 functions as a colorless transparent front cover portion 6442a. With such a configuration, the grass substrate 6420 positioned behind the front grass cover colorless transparent portion 6442a can be directly visually recognized. In addition, when the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, the grass accessory 6400 as a whole can express white grass.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emitting mode, the exposed white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color.
For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422, it becomes possible to decorate the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the grass substrate 6420 in green, thereby representing a state in which grass is growing. can.

FIG. 263(B) is an example in which a part of the front cover cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is modified into a front cover cover colored transparent portion 6442b in the example shown in FIG. 263(A). Green may be adopted as the color of the front grass cover colored transparent portion 6442b. In addition, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . By adopting such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, it is possible to express white and green grass from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emitting mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the luminescent color of the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, and the grass substrate 6420 visible through the grass front cover 6440. can be decorated in green, and the mode in which grass grows can be expressed.

FIG. 263(C) shows the example shown in FIG. 263(B) in which the front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is changed to the front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, and the front cover colored transparent portion 6442b is changed to the front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a. This is an example modified to Green may be adopted as the color of the front grass cover colored transparent portion 6442b. In addition, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . By adopting such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, green and white grass can be expressed from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emitting mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the luminescent color of the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, and the grass substrate 6420 visible through the grass front cover 6440. can be decorated in green, and the mode in which grass grows can be expressed.

FIG. 263(D) is an example in which a part of the front cover cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is modified into a front cover cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a in the example shown in FIG. 263(A). In addition, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . By adopting such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, white grass can be expressed from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emitting mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the luminescent color of the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422, the grass substrate 6420 becomes visible through the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, and the grass front cover 6440. can be decorated in green, and a mode of growing grass can be expressed.

FIG. 263(E) shows that in the example shown in FIG. 263(D), the front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is replaced with the front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, and the front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a is replaced with the front cover colorless transparent portion 6444a. This is a modified example of the portion 6442a. In addition, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . By adopting such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, white grass can be expressed from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emitting mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the luminescent color of the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422, the grass substrate 6420 becomes visible through the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, and the grass front cover 6440. can be decorated in green, and a mode of growing grass can be expressed.

FIG. 263(F) is an example in which a part of the front cover cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is modified into a front cover opaque portion 6446 in the example shown in FIG. Yellow, brown, or silver may be used as the color of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 . In addition, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, white, yellow, brown, or silver grass can be represented from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emitting mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the grass substrate 6420 visible through the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a can be decorated in green. is possible, and it is possible to express the mode in which grass is growing.

FIG. 263(G) shows the example shown in FIG. 263(F), in which the front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is changed to the front cover opaque portion 6446, and the front cover opaque portion 6446 is changed to the front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a. This is an example of Yellow, brown, or silver may be used as the color of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 . In addition, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, yellow, brown, silver, or white grass can be expressed from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emitting mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the grass substrate 6420 visible through the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a can be decorated in green. is possible, and it is possible to express the mode in which grass is growing.

FIG. 264(A) is an example in which the front cover cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is modified to the front cover cover colored transparent portion 6442b in the example shown in FIG. 263(A). It is preferable to adopt green as the color of the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b. In addition, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, the grass accessory 6400 as a whole can represent green grass.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emitting mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the luminescent color of the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b and the grass substrate 6420 visible through the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b can be decorated in green. is possible, and it is possible to express the mode in which grass is growing.

FIG. 264(B) is an example in which the front cover cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is modified to the front cover cover colored transparent portion 6442b in the example shown in FIG. 263(D). It is preferable to adopt green as the color of the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b. In this case, the front grass cover 6440 has a green front grass cover colored light scattering portion 6444b. In addition, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . By adopting such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, it is possible to express green grass from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emitting mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the grass substrate 6420 becomes visible through the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, the grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b, and the grass front cover 6440. can be decorated in green, and a mode of growing grass can be expressed.

FIG. 264(C) is an example in which the front cover cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is modified to the front cover cover colored transparent portion 6442b in the example shown in FIG. 263(E). It is preferable to adopt green as the color of the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b. In this case, the front grass cover 6440 has a green front grass cover colored light scattering portion 6444b. In addition, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . By adopting such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, it is possible to express green grass from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emitting mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the luminescent color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, the grass front cover light scattering portion 6444, and the grass substrate 6420 that can be visually recognized through the grass front cover 6440. can be decorated in green, and the mode in which grass grows can be expressed.

FIG. 264(D) is an example in which the front cover cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is modified to the front cover cover colored transparent portion 6442b in the example shown in FIG. 263(F). It is preferable to adopt green as the color of the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b. Yellow, brown, or silver may be used as the color of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 . In addition, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, green, yellow, brown, or silver grass can be represented from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emitting mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the luminescent color of the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b and the grass substrate 6420 visible through the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b can be decorated in green. is possible, and it is possible to express the mode in which grass is growing.

FIG. 264(E) is an example in which the front cover cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is modified to the front cover cover colored transparent portion 6442b in the example shown in FIG. 263(G). It is preferable to adopt green as the color of the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b. Yellow, brown, or silver may be used as the color of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 . In addition, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . By adopting such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, it is possible to express yellow, brown, silver, or green grass from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emitting mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the luminescent color of the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b and the grass substrate 6420 visible through the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b can be decorated in green. is possible, and it is possible to express the mode in which grass is growing.

FIG. 265(A) is an example in which the front cover cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is modified to the front cover cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a in the example shown in FIG. 263(A). In addition, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . By adopting such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, the grass accessory 6400 as a whole can represent white grass.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emitting mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front surface emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a and the grass substrate 6420 visible through the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a are decorated with green. It is possible to express the mode in which grass is growing.

FIG. 265(B) is an example in which the front cover cover colorless transparent portion 6442a in the example shown in FIG. 263(F) is modified into a front cover cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a. Yellow, brown, or silver may be used as the color of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 . In addition, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . By adopting such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, it is possible to express grass in white, green, yellow, brown, or silver from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emitting mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front surface emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a and the grass substrate 6420 visible through the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a are decorated with green. It is possible to express the mode in which grass is growing.

FIG. 265(C) is an example in which the front cover cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is modified to the front cover cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a in the example shown in FIG. 263(G). Yellow, brown, or silver may be used as the color of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 . In addition, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, yellow, brown, silver, or white grass can be expressed from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emitting mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the luminescent color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover light scattering portion 6444 and the grass substrate 6420 visible through the grass front cover light scattering portion 6444 can be decorated in green. is possible, and it is possible to express the mode in which grass is growing.

In the example shown in FIGS. 265(A) to 265(C), the front cover 6440 is made of a colored and transparent synthetic resin to replace the front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a. You may make it comprise the part 6444b. Specifically, the grass front cover 6440 is preferably made of green transparent synthetic resin.

FIG. 265(D) is an example in which the front cover cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is modified to the front cover cover opaque portion 6446 in the example shown in FIG. Yellow, brown, or silver may be used as the color of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 . In addition, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is turned off, the grass accessory 6400 as a whole can express yellow, brown, or silver grass.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emitting mode, the light is reflected between the white grass substrate 6420 and the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 to the edge forming the outer periphery of the grass accessory 6400. The light reaches and it becomes possible to decorate the end of the grass accessory 6400 with a predetermined color. More specifically, when the grass accessory 6400 is viewed obliquely, the edge of the grass substrate 6420 appears to be exposed, so that the exposed portion can be visually recognized as glowing in a predetermined luminescent color. For example, by adopting green as the luminescent color of the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422, it is possible to decorate the edge forming the outer periphery of the grass accessory 6400 in green, and to express the mode in which grass grows. It should be noted that even in an example in which another grass front cover opaque portion 6446 is provided, it is possible to make it visible in such a manner.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 263(A) to 265(D), the external shapes of the grass front cover 6440 and the grass substrate 6420 having the same size as the grass front cover 6440 are visible to the player as decorative shapes. It is configured. In the weed front cover 6440, the weed front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, the weed front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, the weed front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, the weed front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b, and the weed front cover opaque portion 6446 are formed. Decorative shapes are also formed at the boundaries.

In addition, since the color of the grass substrate 6420 is directly visible through the front cover cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the front cover cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, the color of the grass substrate 6420 itself is used for decoration. At the same time, the grass substrate 6420 is also decorated with the light emitted from the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 . In addition, since the color of the grass substrate 6420 is visible through the front grass cover colored transparent portion 6442b and the front grass cover colored light scattering portion 6444b, the color of the front grass cover 6440 and the color of the grass substrate 6420 are different. The grass substrate 6420 is also decorated with the light emitted from the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 .

In addition, the light emitted from the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is reflected between the grass front cover 6440 positioned in front of the grass substrate 6420 and the grass substrate 6420 , so that the light is directed toward the edge of the grass substrate 6420 . is configured to reflect light, it is possible to indirectly illuminate a member that constitutes the front grass cover 6440 and that is not located in front of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 . In addition, each member constituting the grass accessory 6400 can be decorated in a different color depending on whether the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the off state or in the light-emitting state.

FIGS. 266(A) to 268(D) show modified examples of the example shown in FIG. 259(E). In these examples, the front grass cover 6440 is larger in size than the grass substrate 6420, and the front surface of the grass substrate 6420 is covered with the front grass cover 6440. Although it is configured to protrude, a modified example of the specific structure of the front grass cover 6440 will be described below.

In the example shown in FIG. 266(A), a colorless and transparent grass front cover 6440 is provided in front of a white grass substrate 6420 . The surface forming the front cover 6440 is not subjected to lens cutting or satin finishing, and is formed smoothly. there is In this example, the entire front weed cover 6440 functions as a colorless transparent front cover portion 6442a. In addition, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . With such a configuration, the grass substrate 6420 positioned behind the front grass cover colorless transparent portion 6442a can be directly visually recognized. By adopting such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, it is possible to express grass in a colorless, transparent, and white form from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emitting mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the luminescent color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, it becomes possible to decorate the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the grass substrate 6420 in green, thereby representing a mode in which grass is growing. can.

FIG. 266(B) is an example in which a part of the front cover cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is modified into a front cover cover colored transparent portion 6442b in the example shown in FIG. 266(A). Green may be adopted as the color of the front grass cover colored transparent portion 6442b. In addition, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, it is possible to express grass in colorless and transparent, white, and green forms from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emitting mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the luminescent color of the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, and the grass substrate 6420 visible through the grass front cover 6440. can be decorated in green, and the mode in which grass grows can be expressed.

FIG. 266(C) shows the example shown in FIG. 266(B) in which the front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is changed to the front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, and the front cover colored transparent portion 6442b is changed to the front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a. This is an example modified to Green may be adopted as the color of the front grass cover colored transparent portion 6442b. In addition, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, the grass can be expressed in transparent green, green, and white modes from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emitting mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the luminescent color of the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, and the grass substrate 6420 visible through the grass front cover 6440. can be decorated in green, and the mode in which grass grows can be expressed.

FIG. 266(D) is an example in which a part of the front cover cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is modified into a front cover cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a in the example shown in FIG. 266(A). In addition, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, it is possible to express the grass in colorless and transparent, white, and white modes from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emitting mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, the grass front cover light scattering portion 6444, and the grass substrate 6420 that can be visually recognized through the grass front cover 6440. can be decorated in green, and the mode in which grass grows can be expressed.

FIG. 266(E) shows that, in the example shown in FIG. 266(D) , the front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is replaced with the front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, and the front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a is replaced with the front cover colorless transparent portion 6444a. This is an example modified to the portion 6442a. In addition, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, it is possible to express the grass in colorless and translucent, white, and white modes from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emitting mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the grass substrate 6420 becomes visible through the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, and the grass front cover 6440. can be decorated in green, and a mode of growing grass can be expressed.

FIG. 266(F) is an example in which a part of the front cover cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is modified into a front cover opaque portion 6446 in the example shown in FIG. Yellow, brown, or silver may be used as the color of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 . In addition, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . By adopting such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, it is possible to express grass in a colorless and transparent, white, yellow, brown, or silver mode from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emitting mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the grass substrate 6420 visible through the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a can be decorated in green. is possible, and it is possible to express the mode in which grass is growing.

FIG. 266(G) shows the example shown in FIG. 266(F), in which the front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is changed into the front cover opaque portion 6446, and the front cover opaque portion 6446 is changed into the front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a. This is an example of Yellow, brown, or silver may be used as the color of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 . In addition, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, yellow, brown, silver, or white grass can be expressed from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emitting mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the grass substrate 6420 visible through the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a can be decorated in green. is possible, and it is possible to express the mode in which grass is growing.

FIG. 267(A) is an example in which the front cover cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is modified to the front cover cover colored transparent portion 6442b in the example shown in FIG. 266(A). It is preferable to adopt green as the color of the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b. In addition, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . By adopting such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, it is possible to express grass in a green transparent or green mode from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emitting mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the luminescent color of the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b and the grass substrate 6420 visible through the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b can be decorated in green. is possible, and it is possible to express the mode in which grass is growing.

FIG. 267(B) is an example in which the front cover cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is modified to the front cover cover colored transparent portion 6442b in the example shown in FIG. 266(D). It is preferable to adopt green as the color of the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b. In addition, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . By adopting such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, it is possible to express grass in green transparent, green, and green modes from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emitting mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the grass substrate 6420 becomes visible through the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, the grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b, and the grass front cover 6440. can be decorated in green, and a mode of growing grass can be expressed.

FIG. 267(C) shows that, in the example shown in FIG. 267(B) , the front cover colored transparent portion 6442b is replaced with the front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b, and the front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b is replaced with the front cover colored transparent portion 6444b. This is an example modified to the portion 6442b. Green may be adopted as the color of the front grass cover colored transparent portion 6442b. In addition, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . By adopting such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, the grass can be expressed in semi-transparent green, green, and white modes from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emitting mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the luminescent color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the grass substrate 6420 becomes visible through the grass front cover colored light diffusion portion 6444b, the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, and the grass front cover 6440. can be decorated in green, and a mode of growing grass can be expressed.

FIG. 267(D) is an example in which the front cover cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is modified to the front cover cover colored transparent portion 6442b in the example shown in FIG. 266(F). It is preferable to adopt green as the color of the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b. Yellow, brown, or silver may be used as the color of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 . In addition, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . By adopting such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, it is possible to represent grass in green transparent, green, yellow, brown, or silver mode from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emitting mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the luminescent color of the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b and the grass substrate 6420 visible through the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b can be decorated in green. is possible, and it is possible to express the mode in which grass is growing.

FIG. 267(E) shows the example shown in FIG. 267(D), in which the front cover cover colored transparent portion 6442b is changed into the front cover cover opaque portion 6446, and the front cover cover opaque portion 6446 is changed into the front cover cover colored transparent portion 6442b. This is an example of Green may be adopted as the color of the front grass cover colored transparent portion 6442b. Yellow, brown, or silver may be used as the color of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 . In addition, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, yellow, brown, silver, or green grass can be expressed from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emitting mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the luminescent color of the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b and the grass substrate 6420 visible through the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b can be decorated in green. is possible, and it is possible to express the mode in which grass is growing.

FIG. 268(A) is an example in which the front cover cover colorless transparent portion 6442a in the example shown in FIG. 266(A) is modified into a front cover cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a. In addition, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . By adopting such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, it is possible to express the grass in a manner that is colorless, transparent, and white from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emitting mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front surface emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a and the grass substrate 6420 visible through the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a are decorated with green. It is possible to express the mode in which grass is growing.

FIG. 268(B) is an example in which the front cover cover colorless transparent portion 6442a in the example shown in FIG. 266(F) is modified into a front cover cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a. Yellow, brown, or silver may be used as the color of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 . In addition, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . By adopting such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, it is possible to express grass in a colorless and transparent, white, yellow, brown, or silver mode from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emitting mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front surface emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a and the grass substrate 6420 visible through the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a are decorated with green. It is possible to express the mode in which grass is growing.

FIG. 268(C) is an example in which the front cover cover colorless transparent portion 6442a in the example shown in FIG. 266(G) is modified into a front cover cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a. Yellow, brown, or silver may be used as the color of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 . In addition, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, yellow, brown, silver, or white grass can be expressed from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emitting mode, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front surface emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a and the grass substrate 6420 visible through the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a are decorated with green. It is possible to express the mode in which grass is growing.

In the example shown in FIGS. 268A to 268C, the front cover 6440 is made of a colored transparent synthetic resin to replace the front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a with a color light scattering part 6444a. You may make it comprise the part 6444b. Specifically, the grass front cover 6440 is preferably made of green transparent synthetic resin.

FIG. 268(D) is an example in which the front cover cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is modified to the front cover cover opaque portion 6446 in the example shown in FIG. 266(A). Yellow, brown, or silver may be used as the color of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 . In addition, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is turned off, the grass accessory 6400 as a whole can express yellow, brown, or silver grass.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is set to the light emitting mode, the light is reflected between the white grass substrate 6420 and the grass front cover opaque portion 6446, so that the light reaches the edge forming the outer periphery of the grass substrate 6420. reaches the upper end of the grass substrate 6420, so that light can be emitted upward and backward. This makes it possible to decorate other members by irradiating light of a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the luminescent color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, it is possible to decorate the members located above and behind the edge forming the outer periphery of the grass substrate 6420 in green. In this example, it can be said that the grass substrate 6420 is provided not to decorate the grass accessory 6400 itself, but to decorate other members.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 266(A) to 268(D), at least one of the grass front cover 6440 and the grass substrate 6420 has a decorative shape that can be visually recognized by the player. In the weed front cover 6440, the weed front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, the weed front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, the weed front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, the weed front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b, and the weed front cover opaque portion 6446 are formed. Decorative shapes are also formed at the boundaries.

In addition, since the color of the grass substrate 6420 is visible through the front grass cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the front grass cover light scattering portion 6444, decoration is performed with the color of the grass substrate 6420 itself. The grass substrate 6420 is also decorated with light emitted from the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 . In addition, the light emitted from the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is reflected between the grass front cover 6440 positioned in front of the grass substrate 6420 and the grass substrate 6420 , so that the light is directed toward the edge of the grass substrate 6420 . is configured to reflect light, it is possible to indirectly illuminate a member that constitutes the front grass cover 6440 and that is not located in front of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 . In addition, each member constituting the grass accessory 6400 can be decorated in a different color depending on whether the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the off state or in the light-emitting state.

FIGS. 269(A) to 269(D) show modified examples of the example shown in FIG. 259(H). In these examples, a grass substrate rear surface emitting portion 6424 is provided on the rear surface of the grass substrate 6420 . In addition, the rear grass cover 6460 is larger in size than the grass substrate 6420, and the front surface of the rear grass cover 6460 is covered with the grass substrate 6420. However, a modified example of the specific structure of the grass front cover 6440 will be described below.

In the example shown in FIG. 269(A), a colorless and transparent grass rear cover 6460 is provided behind a white grass substrate 6420 . The surface forming the rear cover 6460 is not subjected to lens cutting or satin finishing, and is molded smoothly. In this example, the entire front weed cover 6440 functions as a colorless transparent front cover portion 6442a. In addition, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . With such a configuration, the grass substrate 6420 and the colorless transparent portion 6462a of the grass rear cover located behind the grass substrate 6420 can be directly viewed. By adopting such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, it is possible to express grass in a colorless, transparent, and white form from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate rear surface light emitting portion 6424 is set to the light emitting mode, the rear grass cover colorless transparent portion 6462a can be decorated. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate rear surface light-emitting portion 6424, it is possible to decorate the portion of the rear grass cover colorless transparent portion 6462a that is exposed in the front view with green, and the grass grows. You can express the mode.

FIG. 269(B) is an example in which the rear cover cover colorless transparent portion 6462a is modified to the rear cover cover colored transparent portion 6462b in the example shown in FIG. 269(A). Green may be adopted as the color of the rear cover cover colored transparent portion 6462b. In addition, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . By adopting such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, it is possible to express grass in green transparent and white form from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate rear surface light emitting portion 6424 is set to the light emitting mode, the rear grass cover colored transparent portion 6462b can be decorated. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate rear surface light-emitting portion 6424, it is possible to decorate the portion of the rear grass cover colored transparent portion 6462b that is exposed in the front view with green, and the grass grows. You can express the mode.

FIG. 269(C) is an example in which the back cover cover colorless transparent portion 6462a is modified to the back cover cover colorless light scattering portion 6464a in the example shown in FIG. 269(A). In addition, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . By adopting such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, it is possible to express grass in a colorless, translucent, and white form from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate rear surface light-emitting portion 6424 is made to emit light, the rear grass cover colorless light scattering portion 6464a can be decorated. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate rear surface light-emitting portion 6424, it is possible to decorate the portion of the rear grass cover colorless light scattering portion 6464a that is exposed in the front view with green, and the grass grows. You can express how you are.

FIG. 269(D) is an example in which the rear cover cover colorless transparent portion 6462a is modified to the rear cover cover opaque portion 6466 in the example shown in FIG. 269(A). Yellow, brown, or silver may be used as the color of the rear cover opaque portion 6466 . In addition, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420 . With such a configuration, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, yellow, brown, silver, or white grass can be expressed from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate rear surface light-emitting portion 6424 is set to the light emitting mode, the light is reflected between the white grass substrate 6420 and the grass rear cover opaque portion 6466, so that the light reaches the edge forming the outer periphery of the grass substrate 6420. reaches, and the periphery of the edge of the grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422, it is possible to decorate the periphery of the edge portion of the grass substrate 6420 in green, and to represent a mode in which grass is growing.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 269(A) to 269(D), the grass substrate 6420 and the grass rear cover 6460, which has a larger outside shape than the grass substrate 6420, are visible to the player as decorative shapes. It is configured. This makes it possible to create a sense of depth.
In addition, since the grass substrate 6420 is exposed, decoration is performed using the color of the grass substrate 6420 itself. Further, when the grass substrate rear surface light-emitting portion 6424 is set to emit light of a predetermined color, the light from the grass substrate rear surface light-emitting portion 6424 reaches the upper end portion of the rear grass cover 6460 and the upper end portion of the rear grass cover 6460 is illuminated. is decorated with a predetermined color.

FIGS. 270(A) to 271(G) show modified examples of the examples shown in FIGS. 259(A) to 260(G). Specifically, in the example shown in FIGS. 270(A) and 270(B), grass substrate 6420 is provided with grass substrate opening 6426 having a decorative shape resembling the head of a rabbit. Through the substrate opening 6426, the rear side is configured to be visible.

270(C) to 270(E) and FIGS. 271(A) to 271(G), the front grass cover 6440 is positioned in front of the grass substrate 6420, A grass front cover opening 6448 having a decorative shape imitating a rabbit's head is provided in the front grass cover opening 6448 so that the grass substrate 6420 can be visually recognized through the grass front cover opening 6448 .

In the examples shown in FIGS. 270(F) to 270(H), the grass back cover 6460 is positioned behind the grass substrate 6420, and the grass substrate 6420 has grass in a decorative shape resembling a rabbit's head. A substrate opening 6426 is provided. The grass rear cover 6460 is configured to be visible through the grass substrate opening 6426 .

FIG. 270(A) is an example in which a grass substrate opening 6426 is provided in the grass substrate 6420 in the example shown in FIG. 259(A). The grass substrate openings 6426 are formed in the grass substrate 6420 in such a manner that physical openings in the form of punched holes are provided. The grass substrate opening 6426 is shaped like a rabbit's head. A plurality of grass substrate openings 6426 may be provided, and in this example, a grass substrate first opening 6426a and a grass substrate second opening 6426b smaller than the grass substrate first opening 6426a are provided. With such a configuration, not only the outer shape of the grass substrate 6420 but also the grass substrate opening 6426 can have a decorative shape. In addition, it becomes possible to visually recognize the rear through the grass substrate opening 6426 .

FIG. 270(B) is an example in which a grass substrate opening 6426 is provided in the grass substrate 6420 in the example shown in FIG. 259(B). The grass substrate opening 6426 is formed in such a manner that a physical opening in the shape of a punched hole is provided in the grass substrate 6420, and a member located behind the grass substrate opening 6426 is configured to be directly visible. there is The substrate grass substrate opening 6426 is shaped like a rabbit's head. A plurality of grass substrate openings 6426 may be provided, and in this example, a grass substrate first opening 6426a and a grass substrate second opening 6426b smaller than the grass substrate first opening 6426a are provided. With such a configuration, not only the outer shape of the grass substrate 6420 but also the grass substrate opening 6426 can have a decorative shape. In addition, it is possible to directly view the rear from the grass substrate opening 6426 .

FIG. 270(C) is an example in which a front weed cover opening 6448 is provided in the front weed cover 6440 in the example shown in FIG. 259(C). The grass front cover opening 6448 is formed in a manner in which a punched hole-shaped physical opening is provided in the grass front cover 6440 , and the grass substrate 6420 positioned behind is directly visible through the grass front cover opening 6448 . configured as possible. The grass front cover opening 6448 is shaped like a rabbit's head. A plurality of weed front cover openings 6448 may be provided, and in this example, a weed front cover first opening 6448a and a weed front cover second opening 6448b smaller than the weed front cover first opening 6448a are provided. ing.

The weed front cover first opening 6448a is provided at a position overlapping with the weed substrate front first light emitting portion 6422a forming a part of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 when viewed from the front. The grass substrate front surface first light emitting portion 6422a is configured to be directly visible through. On the other hand, the grass front cover second opening 6448b is positioned so as not to overlap the grass substrate front surface second light emitting portion 6422b and the grass substrate front surface third light emitting portion 6422c, which constitute a part of the grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422, when viewed from the front. is provided. With such a configuration, not only the outer shape of the front cover 6440 but also the front cover opening 6448 can have a decorative shape. In addition, the grass substrate 6420 can be visually recognized from the front grass cover opening 6448, and depending on the shape of the front grass cover opening 6448 and the color of the grass substrate 6420 visually recognized from the front grass cover opening 6448, decoration is done.

When the grass substrate front surface first light emitting portion 6422a is in the light emitting mode, the grass exposed at the end surface forming the grass front cover first opening 6448a of the grass front cover 6440 and the portion where the grass front cover first opening 6448a is provided. The substrate 6420 is directly decorated with the light emitted from the grass substrate front first light emitting portion 6422a.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front surface second light emitting portion 6422b and the grass substrate front surface third light emitting portion 6422c are configured to emit light, the grass substrate front surface second light emitting portion 6422b and the grass substrate front surface third light emitting portion 6422b, It is decorated with light emitted from the grass substrate front surface third light emitting portion 6422c. On the other hand, with respect to the grass substrate 6420 exposed at the portion where the front grass cover second opening 6448b is provided, the entire surface of the exposed portion is not completely illuminated, and the portion forming the periphery of the exposed portion is the grass substrate. The light emitted from the front second light emitting portion 6422b and the grass substrate front third light emitting portion 6422c is decorated.

FIG. 270D shows an example in which the grass front cover 6440 is modified to have the same size as the grass substrate 6420 in the example shown in FIG. 270C. FIG. 270(E) is an example in which the size of the grass front cover 6440 is changed to be larger than that of the grass substrate 6420 in the example shown in FIG. 270(C). In these examples as well, similar effects can be obtained by adopting a mode similar to that of the grass front cover opening 6448 in the example shown in FIG. 270(C).

FIG. 270(F) is an example in which a grass substrate opening 6426 is provided in the grass substrate 6420 in the example shown in FIG. 259(F). The grass substrate opening 6426 is formed in a manner in which a punched hole-like physical opening is provided in the grass substrate 6420, and the grass rear cover 6460 positioned behind can be directly visually recognized through the grass substrate opening 6426. It is configured. The grass substrate opening 6426 is shaped like a rabbit's head. A plurality of grass substrate openings 6426 may be provided, and in this example, a grass substrate first opening 6426a and a grass substrate second opening 6426b smaller than the grass substrate first opening 6426a are provided. The grass substrate rear surface light emitting portion 6424 is not provided around the grass substrate first opening 6426a. Further, a grass substrate rear surface first light emitting portion 6424a and a grass substrate rear surface second light emitting portion 6424b are provided so as to sandwich the grass substrate second opening 6426b.

With such a configuration, not only the outer shape of the grass substrate 6420 but also the grass substrate opening 6426 can have a decorative shape. In addition, the rear cover 6460 can be visually recognized from the opening 6426 of the grass substrate. Also, decoration is performed by the shape of the grass substrate opening 6426 and the color of the grass rear cover 6460 visually recognized from the grass substrate opening 6426 .

When the grass-substrate rear surface first light-emitting portion 6424a and the grass-substrate rear-surface second light-emitting portion 6424b are configured to emit light, the grass-substrate rear surface first light-emitting portion 6424a and the grass-substrate rear surface second light-emitting portion 6424a are exposed from the grass substrate rear surface cover 6460 exposed from the grass-substrate second opening portion 6426b. The grass substrate rear surface is decorated with light emitted from the second light emitting portion 6424b. On the other hand, the rear grass cover 6460 exposed from the grass substrate first opening 6426a is decorated with light emitted from the grass substrate rear surface first light emitting portion 6424a and the grass substrate rear surface second light emitting portion 6424b. The amount of light that reaches is smaller than that of the portion exposed from the second opening 6426b of the grass substrate. Therefore, the portion exposed from the first grass substrate opening 6426a of the rear grass cover 6460 is decorated with a smaller amount of light than the portion exposed from the second grass substrate opening 6426b of the rear grass cover 6460.

It should be noted that it may be possible to perform an effect in which the grass substrate rear surface first light emitting portion 6424a is turned off and only the grass substrate rear surface second light emitting portion 6424b is turned on in a predetermined color (for example, green). In this case, the portion exposed from the first grass substrate opening 6426a of the rear weed cover 6460 is substantially not in a decorative state because the light hardly reaches it, and the second opening of the grass substrate of the rear grass cover 6460 is not substantially decorated. Only the portion exposed from 6426b can be decorated.

FIG. 270(G) is an example in which the size of the rear cover 6460 is changed to the same size as the grass substrate 6420 in the example shown in FIG. 270(F). FIG. 270(H) is an example in which the size of the rear cover 6460 is changed to be larger than that of the grass substrate 6420 in the example shown in FIG. 270(F). In these examples as well, similar effects can be obtained by adopting a mode similar to that of the grass substrate opening 6426 in the example shown in FIG. 270(F).

FIG. 271(A) is an example in which a front weed cover opening 6448 is provided in the front weed cover 6440 in the example shown in FIG. 260(A). In this example, a colorless and transparent grass front cover 6440 is provided in front of a white grass substrate 6420 . The weed front cover first opening 6448a is provided at a position overlapping with the weed substrate front first light emitting portion 6422a forming a part of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 when viewed from the front. The grass substrate front surface first light emitting portion 6422a is configured to be directly visible through. On the other hand, the grass front cover second opening 6448b does not overlap the grass substrate front surface second light emitting portion 6422b and the grass substrate front surface third light emitting portion 6422c, which constitute a part of the grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422, when viewed from the front. , and the grass front cover 6440. As shown in FIG.

In this example, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is turned off, the grass substrate 6420 is directly visible in white through the front grass cover opening 6448, and the colorless transparent portion 6442a of the front grass cover is visible. The grass substrate 6420 can be visually recognized as white because it is interposed. Therefore, when the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is turned off, the rabbit-like shape formed by the front grass cover opening 6448 is not conspicuous. In addition, since the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 provided on the front surface of the grass substrate 6420 is composed of white LEDs that are the same color as the grass substrate 6420, the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 provided on the front surface of the grass substrate 6420 stands out. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from noticing the presence of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 .

When the grass substrate front surface first light emitting portion 6422a is in the light emitting mode, the grass substrate 6420 exposed at the end face forming the grass front cover first opening 6448a and the portion where the grass front cover first opening 6448a is provided is the grass substrate. It is directly decorated with the light emitted from the front first light emitting part 6422a. For example, when brown is adopted as the light emission color of the grass substrate front surface first light emitting portion 6422a, the grass substrate 6420 and the grass front cover first opening 6448a exposed at the portion where the grass front cover first opening 6448a is provided are Although the edges of the grass board 6420 are decorated in brown, the part of the grass board 6420 that is not exposed is viewed by the player as white, which is the color of the board.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front surface second light emitting portion 6422b and the grass substrate front surface third light emitting portion 6422c are configured to emit light, the grass substrate front surface second light emitting portion 6422b and the grass substrate front surface third light emitting portion 6422b, It is decorated with light emitted from the grass substrate front surface third light emitting portion 6422c. On the other hand, regarding the grass substrate 6420 exposed at the portion where the front grass cover second opening 6448b is provided, the entire surface of the exposed portion is not completely illuminated, and the portion forming the periphery of the exposed portion is the grass substrate. The light emitted from the front second light emitting portion 6422b and the grass substrate front third light emitting portion 6422c is decorated. For example, when green is adopted as the luminescent color of the grass substrate front surface second light emitting portion 6422b and the grass substrate front surface third light emitting portion 6422c, the edge surface forming the grass front cover 6440 and the grass front cover second opening 6448b is green. However, the vicinity of the center of the grass substrate 6420 exposed at the portion where the second grass front cover opening 6448b is provided is visually recognized by the player as white, which is the color of the grass substrate 6420 .

FIG. 271(B) shows an example in which a front grass cover opening 6448 is provided in the front grass cover 6440 in the example shown in FIG. 260(B). In this example, the weed front cover 6440 is formed by an upper weed front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and a lower weed front cover colored transparent portion 6442b. 6448 is provided. It is preferable to adopt green as the color of the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b. In this example, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is turned off, the grass substrate 6420 is directly visible in white through the front grass cover opening 6448. Through 6442b, the white grass substrate 6420 can be visually recognized as green. This makes it possible to express a mode as if there is a white rabbit in green grass.

When the grass substrate front surface first light emitting portion 6422a is in the light emitting mode, the grass substrate 6420 exposed at the end face forming the grass front cover first opening 6448a and the portion where the grass front cover first opening 6448a is provided is the grass substrate. It is directly decorated with the light emitted from the front first light emitting part 6422a. For example, when brown is adopted as the light emission color of the grass substrate front surface first light emitting portion 6422a, the grass substrate 6420 and the grass front cover first opening 6448a exposed at the portion where the grass front cover first opening 6448a is provided are Although the end face is brown and decorative, the portion of the grass substrate 6420 that is not exposed from the grass front cover first opening 6448a is visually recognized by the player as the white grass substrate 6420 green. Alternatively, when green, which is the same color as that of the grass front cover colored transparent portion, is adopted as the emission color of the grass substrate front first light emitting portion 6422a, the grass is exposed at the portion where the grass front cover first opening 6448a is provided. The end face forming the base plate 6420 and the grass front cover first opening 6448a is decorated with green luminescent color, and since it has the same color as the grass front cover colored transparent part, it expresses a form as if a rabbit is hidden in the grass. be able to.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front surface second light emitting portion 6422b and the grass substrate front surface third light emitting portion 6422c are configured to emit light, the grass substrate front surface second light emitting portion 6422b and the grass substrate front surface third light emitting portion 6422b, It is decorated with light emitted from the grass substrate front surface third light emitting portion 6422c. On the other hand, with respect to the grass substrate 6420 exposed at the portion where the front grass cover second opening 6448b is provided, the entire surface of the exposed portion is not completely illuminated, and the portion forming the periphery of the exposed portion is the grass substrate. The light emitted from the front second light emitting portion 6422b and the grass substrate front third light emitting portion 6422c is decorated. For example, when green is adopted as the luminescent color of the grass substrate front surface second light emitting portion 6422b and the grass substrate front surface third light emitting portion 6422c, the edge surface forming the grass front cover 6440 and the grass front cover second opening 6448b is green. However, the grass substrate 6420 exposed at the portion where the front grass cover second opening 6448b is provided is visually recognized by the player as white, which is the color of the substrate.

FIG. 271(C) shows the example shown in FIG. 271(B) in which the front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is changed to the front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, and the front cover colored transparent portion 6442b is changed to the front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a. This is an example modified to In this example, it is possible to express grass in white, green, and white modes from above when viewed from the front. Further, regarding the provision of the grass front cover opening 6448, the same effect can be obtained by adopting the embodiment illustrated in FIG. 271(A).

FIG. 271(D) is an example in which the front grass cover opening 6448 is provided in the front grass cover 6440 in the example shown in FIG. 260(D). In this example, the weed front cover 6440 is formed by an upper weed front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and a lower weed front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a. An opening 6448 is provided. In this example, when the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is in the off state, the grass substrate 6420 is directly visible in white through the front grass cover opening 6448, and the front grass cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a is visible. , the white grass substrate 6420 can be visually recognized as white. This makes it possible to express a mode as if a white rabbit is hidden in white grass.

When the grass substrate front surface first light emitting portion 6422a is in the light emitting mode, the grass substrate 6420 exposed at the end face forming the grass front cover first opening 6448a and the portion where the grass front cover first opening 6448a is provided is the grass substrate. It is directly decorated with the light emitted from the front first light emitting part 6422a. For example, when green is adopted as the light emission color of the grass substrate front surface first light emitting portion 6422a, the grass substrate 6420 and the grass front cover first opening 6448a exposed at the portion where the grass front cover first opening 6448a is provided are Although the edge faces are green and decorated, the portion of the grass substrate 6420 that is not exposed from the grass front cover first opening 6448a is visible to the player as the white grass substrate 6420.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front surface second light emitting portion 6422b and the grass substrate front surface third light emitting portion 6422c are configured to emit light, the grass substrate front surface second light emitting portion 6422b and the grass substrate front surface third light emitting portion 6422b, It is decorated with light emitted from the grass substrate front surface third light emitting portion 6422c. On the other hand, with respect to the grass substrate 6420 exposed at the portion where the front grass cover second opening 6448b is provided, the entire surface of the exposed portion is not completely illuminated, and the portion forming the periphery of the exposed portion is the grass substrate. It is decorated with light emitted from the second front light emitting portion 6422b and the third light emitting portion 6422c on the grass substrate front surface. For example, when green is adopted as the luminescent color of the grass substrate front surface second light emitting portion 6422b and the grass substrate front surface third light emitting portion 6422c, the edge surface forming the grass front cover 6440 and the grass front cover second opening 6448b is green. However, the grass substrate 6420 exposed at the portion where the grass front cover second opening 6448b is provided is visually recognized by the player as white, which is the color of the substrate. As a result, it is possible to express an aspect as if there is a white rabbit in green grass.

FIG. 271(E) shows that, in the example shown in FIG. 271(D) , the front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is replaced with the front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, and the front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a is replaced with the front cover colorless transparent portion 6444a. This is an example modified to the portion 6442a. In this example, it is possible to express the grass in white, white, and white form from above when viewed from the front. Further, regarding the provision of the grass front cover opening 6448, the same effect can be obtained by adopting the embodiment illustrated in FIG. 271(A).

FIG. 271(F) is an example in which a front weed cover opening 6448 is provided in the front cover 6440 in the example shown in FIG. 260(F). In this example, the weed front cover 6440 is formed by an upper weed front cover colorless transparent portion 6442 a and a lower weed front cover opaque portion 6446 . are provided. Yellow, brown, or silver may be used as the color of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 . In this example, when the grass substrate front light-emitting portion 6422 is turned off, the grass substrate 6420 is directly visible in white through the front grass cover opening 6448, and the front grass cover opaque portion 6446 is yellow. or brown or silver. This makes it possible to express a mode as if a white rabbit is hidden in yellow, brown, or silver grass.

When the grass substrate front surface first light emitting portion 6422a is in the light emitting mode, the grass substrate 6420 exposed at the end face forming the grass front cover first opening 6448a and the portion where the grass front cover first opening 6448a is provided is the grass substrate. It is directly decorated with the light emitted from the front first light emitting part 6422a. For example, when yellow or brown is adopted as the light emission color of the grass substrate front first light emitting portion 6422a, or when white blinking is adopted as the light emission mode, in the portion where the grass front cover first opening 6448a is provided, The end face forming the exposed grass substrate 6420 and the grass front cover first opening 6448a is decorated with yellow, brown, or white flickering patterns. In addition, the portion of the grass substrate 6420 that is not exposed from the front grass cover first opening 6448a is visually recognized by the player as yellow, brown, or silver, which is the color of the front grass cover opaque portion 6446 . As a result, the grass front cover first opening portion 6448a and the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 are in the same decorative mode. aspect can be expressed. On the other hand, when white is adopted as the light emission color of the grass substrate front surface first light emitting portion 6422a, the grass substrate 6420 and the grass front cover first opening 6448a exposed at the portion where the grass front cover first opening 6448a is provided are The end face to be formed is white and decorated. In addition, the portion of the grass substrate 6420 that is not exposed from the front grass cover first opening 6448a is visually recognized by the player as yellow, brown, or silver, which is the color of the front grass cover opaque portion 6446 . As a result, the grass substrate 6420 exposed at the portion where the grass front cover first opening 6448a is provided, which was visually recognized as white only by the color of the substrate, when such a light emission mode is set from the above-described light-off state, The light emission color of the grass substrate front first light emitting portion 6422a can also be white, and the white rabbit can be expressed in a manner that emphasizes it more.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front surface second light emitting portion 6422b and the grass substrate front surface third light emitting portion 6422c are configured to emit light, the grass substrate front surface second light emitting portion 6422b and the grass substrate front surface third light emitting portion 6422b, It is decorated with light emitted from the grass substrate front surface third light emitting portion 6422c. On the other hand, with respect to the grass substrate 6420 exposed at the portion where the front grass cover second opening 6448b is provided, the entire surface of the exposed portion is not completely illuminated, and the portion forming the periphery of the exposed portion is the grass substrate. It is decorated with light emitted from the second front light emitting portion 6422b and the third light emitting portion 6422c on the grass substrate front surface. For example, when white is used as the luminescent color of the grass substrate front surface second light emitting portion 6422b and the grass substrate front surface third light emitting portion 6422c, the edge surface forming the grass front cover second opening portion 6448b is surrounded by the opening. The grass substrate 6420 exposed at the portion where the grass front cover second opening 6448b is provided is visually recognized by the player as white, which is the color of the substrate. As a result, it is possible to emphatically express the appearance of a white rabbit hiding in yellow, brown, or silver grass.

FIG. 271(G) shows the example shown in FIG. 271(F), in which the front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is changed into the front cover opaque portion 6446, and the front cover opaque portion 6446 is changed into the front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a. This is an example of In this example, it is possible to express grass in white, yellow, brown, or silver and white from above when viewed from the front. Further, regarding the provision of the grass front cover opening 6448, the same effect can be obtained by adopting the embodiment illustrated in FIG. 271(A).

In the examples shown in FIGS. 270(A) to 271(G), decorative members provided in front (grass substrate 6420 and front grass cover 6440) have decoratively shaped openings (grass substrate opening 6426 and grass front cover 6440). By providing a front cover opening 6448) so that the members provided at the rear can be seen, the decoratively shaped opening is conspicuous and visible to the player. In addition, since the member provided in the front and the member provided in the rear are different in color, transparency, etc., the shape of the opening can be made more conspicuous. Further, it may be configured to use such a decorative state of the opening as an effect.
In the examples shown in FIGS. 259(A) to 259(H) and FIGS. 260(A) to 260(G), modifications provided with openings are shown in FIGS. 270(A) to 271(G). However, in the examples shown in FIGS. 261(A) to 269(D), it is also possible to provide openings in the same way.

An example has been shown in which a physical punched opening is provided in the front cover 6440 to form the front cover opening 6448 to form a region where the rear can be visually recognized. Instead of the method of providing, the external shape of the visible area may be formed by the boundary line between the area where the rear is invisible or difficult to see and the area where the rear is relatively easily visible.

For example, the outer invisible area may be composed of the weed front cover opaque portion 6446 and the inner easily visible area may be composed of the weed front cover transparent portion 6442 . Alternatively, the outer difficult-to-visually-visible area is configured by the colored grass front cover opaque portion 6446, and the inner easily-visible area is configured by the grass-front cover light scattering portion 6444, or the outer difficult-to-visually-recognized area is configured by the colored grass. The front cover light scattering portion 6444 constitutes the inner easily visible region, and the outer, difficult-to-recognize region is composed of the colorless front cover light scattering portion 6444. The easy-to-recognize area is composed of the front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, the outer difficult-to-recognize area is composed of the front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, and the inner easy-to-recognize area is composed of the front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a. You may make it comprise by. Alternatively, the weed front cover 6440 includes a weed front cover colorless transparent portion 6442 a, a weed front cover colored transparent portion 6442 b, a weed front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444 a, a weed front cover colored light scattering portion 6444 b, and a weed front cover opaque portion 6446 . may be provided, and an inner easily visible region may be provided across two or more of these regions. With such a mode, it is also possible to provide a region that has a decorative shape and allows easy visibility of the rear side.

271(B) to 271(G), the location where the weed cover opening 6448 is provided is one of the weed cover colored transparent portion 6442b, the weed cover light scattering portion 6444, the weed cover opaque portion 6446, and the like. Although only the area is provided, the front weed cover opening 6448 may be provided across a plurality of areas constituting the front weed cover 6440 . Specifically, the weed front cover 6440 includes a weed front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, a weed front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, a weed front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, a weed front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b, and a weed front cover opaque portion. 6446, and may be configured to provide front grass cover openings 6448 across areas of two or more of them.
FIGS. 259(A) to 271(G) show an example in which the grass accessory 6400 can be visually recognized as a decorative mode in a light-off state or a light-emitting state, but these states are used as an effect in the game. For example, one of these states may be configured to notify the player of a predetermined event in the gaming machine. Alternatively, it is possible to notify the player of a predetermined event by changing when these states change from the above-described one state to the above-described other state. The predetermined event may be, for example, an advance notice indicating the degree of expectation of a big hit, or an advance notice indicating that the operation button 410 will become operable.

259(C) to 259(E), 260(A) to 268(D), and 270(C) to 271(G), an example in which a grass front cover 6440 is provided in front of the grass substrate 6420. showed that. 259(F) to 259(H) and FIGS. 269(A) to 269(D) show an example in which the grass rear cover 6460 is provided behind the grass substrate 6420. Any one of the embodiments in which the grass front cover 6440 is provided at the rear of the grass substrate 6420 and any one of the embodiments in which the grass rear cover 6460 is provided behind the grass substrate 6420 are combined. may

When the embodiments are combined, it is preferable that the grass substrates 6420 have the same size. 259(C) and 259(F), when the front weed cover 6440 and the rear weed cover 6460 are smaller than the grass substrate 6420, the front weed cover 6440 and the rear weed cover 6460 It is preferable to combine the embodiments with the rear cover 6460 having the same size. In this case, the outer edges of the front weed cover 6440 and the rear weed cover 6460 just overlap when viewed from the front. If the grass substrate 6420, the front grass cover 6440 and the rear grass cover 6460 have the same size as in the embodiments shown in FIGS. , Examples may be combined. In this case, the outer edges of the front weed cover 6440, the weed substrate 6420, and the rear weed cover 6460 just overlap when viewed from the front. 259(E) and 259(H), when the grass front cover 6440 and the grass rear cover 6460 are configured to be larger than the grass substrate 6420, the grass front cover 6440 and the grass rear cover 6460 It is preferable to combine the embodiments with the rear cover 6460 having the same size. In this case, the outer edges of the front weed cover 6440 and the rear weed cover 6460 just overlap when viewed from the front. In addition, the front weed cover 6440 and the rear weed cover 6460 are preferably made of the same color of synthetic resin. is preferably made of a synthetic resin. Further, when the front cover 6440 is made of a transparent green synthetic resin, the rear cover 6460 may be made of a transparent green synthetic resin.

When the embodiments are combined, the grass substrate 6420 includes both the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 and the grass substrate rear light emitting portion 6424 . It may be configured so that one side is not provided. For example, when the examples shown in FIGS. 259(E) and 259(H) are combined, the grass front cover 6440 and the grass rear cover 6460 are larger than the grass substrate 6420 in front view. Therefore, it is possible to decorate the rear cover 6460 with the light from the front light-emitting portion 6422 of the grass substrate. It is also possible to decorate the front grass cover 6440 with the light from the rear grass substrate light-emitting portion 6424 . In this case, it is desirable to provide a light scattering portion so as to border the end portion forming the outer peripheral edge in the front view of the front cover 6440 and the rear cover 6460 . Note that the grass substrate front surface emitting portion 6422 and the grass substrate rear surface emitting portion 6424 may not be provided. In this case, the grass board 6420 may be configured, for example, to have a function of relaying the signal from the peripheral control board 1510 to another role.

Any one example of the grass accessory 6400 described above may be applied to each of the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 shown in FIG. Specifically, the outer shapes of the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 are not changed, and the area other than the first grass decoration portion 6360a forming the outer area of the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 are not changed. , and the first grass decorative portion 6360a that constitutes the inner region in the first grass movable portion 6360, the member that constitutes the outer region and the inner region in any one example of the grass accessory 6400 It is better to apply the member. In addition, with respect to the area other than the second grass decoration portion 6370a that constitutes the outer area of the second grass moving portion 6370 and the second grass decoration portion 6370a that constitutes the inner area of the second grass moving portion 6370, the grass It is preferable to apply the member configuring the outer region and the member configuring the inner region in any one example of the accessory 6400 .

Also, any one example of the grass accessory 6400 may be applied to both the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 . For example, the example shown in FIG. 269B may be applied to both the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370. In this case, the left and right white grass substrates 6420 are in contact with each other to form one decoration. In addition, the left and right transparent green rear covers 6460 are in contact with each other to form one decorative body. On the other hand, even when the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 move left and right, the left and right white grass substrates 6420 and the left and right green transparent grass rear covers 6460 each form a single decorative body. is doing.

In FIG. 254, a third grass role 6480 is provided, and a fourth grass role 6485 is provided behind it. It is configured to be hidden in the grass role 6480 . Here, any one example of the above-described grass role 6400 may be applied to each of the third grass role 6480 and the fourth grass role 6485 . At this time, it is desirable that the grass substrates 6420 of the third grass role 6480 and the fourth grass role 6485 have the same size. In addition, one or both of the grass substrate front surface light-emitting portion 6422 and the grass substrate rear surface light-emitting portion 6424 that can be provided in the third grass role 6480 and the fourth grass role 6485 are simultaneously illuminated as in the above-described example. may be configured.

269(A) as the third grass role 6480 and the grass role 6400 shown in FIG. 266(E) as the fourth grass role 6485 are shown below. In this case, when the grass substrate rear surface light emitting portion 6424 provided in the grass substrate 6420 of the third grass role 6480 provided in front is lit, the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a provided in the fourth grass role 6485, It is possible to illuminate the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the white grass substrate 6420 from the front side. In addition, the fourth herb accessory 6485 efficiently diffusely reflects the light emitted from the third herb accessory 6480 to the front to enhance the interest of the player as an effect.

On the other hand, it is possible to decorate the back cover 6460 of the third grass role 6480 by emitting light from the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 provided in the fourth grass role 6485 . At this time, only the peripheral edge such as the upper side of the rear cover 6460 is visible to the player as a decorated mode, but the light passing through the rear cover 6460 is directed backward by the white grass substrate 6420. It diffusely reflects and irradiates toward the fourth grass accessory 6485 to decorate the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a of the fourth grass accessory 6485 .

In this way, the light is diffusely reflected alternately between the third grass role 6480 provided in front and the fourth grass role 6485 provided in the rear, thereby making the position of the light source invisible to the player. It is possible to efficiently reflect light forward while arranging. In particular, when a silver member capable of specularly reflecting light is used as the front cover opaque portion 6446 and the rear cover opaque portion 6466, light can be reflected more efficiently.

An example in which the third grass role 6480 provided in front and the fourth grass role 6485 provided in the back partly overlap in a front view is shown, but the third grass role 6480 and the fourth grass role 6485 may be configured to completely overlap when viewed from the front. Also, the third grass role 6480 may be configured to be larger than the fourth grass role 6485 . The fourth grass role 6485 may be completely hidden behind the third grass role 6480 when viewed from the front. Alternatively, they may be arranged at positions that are adjacent to each other but do not overlap when viewed from the front.

One or both of the third grass accessory 6480 and the fourth grass accessory 6485 provided behind may be configured to be movable as a presentation. For example, an example in which the third grass role 6480 provided in front and the fourth grass role 6485 provided in the rear partially overlap in front view has been shown, but from this state, the third grass role 6480 and the fourth grass accessory 6485 may be configured to completely overlap when viewed from the front. In this case, by moving one of the third grass role 6480 and the fourth grass role 6485 in the horizontal direction, the third grass role 6480 and the fourth grass role 6485 completely overlap when viewed from the front. By moving both the third grass role 6480 and the fourth grass role 6485 in the left-right direction, the third grass role 6480 and the fourth grass role 6485 can be viewed from the front. may be configured so that they completely overlap with each other. In this case, the third grass role 6480 and the fourth grass role 6485 may be configured so that they can move from a state in which they do not overlap at all in a front view to a state in which they overlap. Moreover, as for the movement direction, it may be configured so as to be movable not only in the horizontal direction but also in the vertical direction. In this case, it should be configured such that it can move upward or downward by the height of the grass accessory itself. Even in such a configuration, the third grass role 6480 and the fourth grass role 6485 can be configured so that they can move from a state in which they do not overlap at all in a front view to a state in which they overlap. Then, it is preferable to configure so that it is possible to take a light emission mode as in each of the examples described above in a state in which the third grass role 6480 and the fourth grass role 6485 are superimposed in a front view.

An example in which the grass accessory 6400 is movable has been shown, but by moving the grass accessory 6400, the openings (grass substrate opening 6426 and grass front cover opening 6448) are difficult to see or invisible. A change to a visible state may be adopted as an effect. Specifically, the relationship between the third grass role 6480 provided in front and the fourth grass role 6485 provided in the rear and provided with the grass substrate opening 6426 and the grass front cover opening 6448 is shown in the front view. From the state where the grass substrate opening 6426 and the grass front cover opening 6448 included in the fourth grass role 6485 are located behind the third grass role 6480, the third grass role 6480 is positioned behind the third grass role 6480 in front view. The grass substrate opening 6426 and the grass front cover opening 6448 provided in the 4 grass accessories 6485 change to a state where they are not positioned, and the grass substrate opening 6426 and the grass front cover opening 6448 can be visually recognized from the front view by the player. It is preferable to configure such that

Although an example in which the grass accessory 6400 is movable has been shown, the grass accessory 6400 may be configured to be movable to a position overlapping the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 as an effect. At this time, a predetermined image may be displayed as an effect in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 . Specifically, when the grass role 6400 moves from below to a position overlapping the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the outline of the grass role 6400 is modeled according to the movement of the grass role 6400. The image may be moved upward and displayed. At this time, it is desirable to move while displaying an image simulating the outline of the grass role 6400 slightly above the grass role 6400 in a front view. By adopting such a configuration, the front grass cover 6440 is configured with an image imitating the contour of the grass accessory 6400, the outer shape of the grass accessory 6400 configured by the front grass cover 6440, the grass substrate 6422, or the rear cover 6460. There are a plurality of grass-like shapes represented by the boundary lines between a plurality of members or the grass substrate 6420 that is smaller than the transparent grass front cover 6440 and visible through the grass front cover 6440 from top to bottom when viewed from the front. The provided decoration mode can be made visible to the player. In this way, one decoration mode can be realized as an effect by three elements, ie, the image displayed on the display device, the outer shape of the character, and the shape provided inside the character. As shown in FIGS. 261(B) and 266(B), when the grass accessory 6400 has two shapes in a front view, a total of four shapes are used to realize one decoration mode as a presentation. be able to.

The back surface of the grass substrate 6420 may be configured to mount the same electronic components as those provided in the rabbit character 6000 . Further, the grass substrate 6420 is made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and the LEDs constituting the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 and the grass substrate rear light emitting portion 6424 are attached to the grass substrate 6420 with an adhesive, and power is supplied to the LEDs. The wiring may be similarly attached to the grass substrate 6420 with an adhesive. In this case, the grass front cover 6440 is provided with a grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, a grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, and a grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b so that the wiring is difficult to see from the player. The configuration may be such that the LEDs and wiring are positioned behind them visually. In addition, by printing or engraving a pattern having the same shape as the LEDs and the wiring on the transparent grass substrate 6420, the transparency of the grass substrate 6420 is ensured, but the LEDs and the wiring are difficult for the player to see. may be configured. In this case, by causing the grass substrate front surface light emitting portion 6422 and the grass substrate rear surface light emitting portion 6424 to emit light, the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, the grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b, or the LED A pattern having the same shape as the wiring may be illuminated to be in a decorative state. With such a configuration, these members can realize both the function of hiding the presence of the LEDs and wiring and the function of decoration.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 259(C) to 271(G), one grass substrate 6420 and one grass front cover 6440, or one grass substrate 6420 and one grass rear cover 6460, or one 6420, one front grass cover 6440, and one rear grass cover 6460 constitute one grass accessory 6400. At least one member of may be increased to a plurality to configure one grass accessory 6400 . For example, two grass front covers 6440 may be attached to one grass substrate 6420 to configure one grass accessory 6400, or two grass substrates 6420 may be attached to one grass front cover 6440, It is also possible to configure one grass accessory 6400 . In addition, when a plurality of grass substrates 6420, front grass covers 6440, and rear grass covers 6460 are provided, the embodiment shown in FIGS. may apply. For example, in the later-described mountain accessory 6500, one substrate is provided with two front covers, and one of the front covers is provided with an opening so that the substrate positioned behind can be visually recognized, and the substrate is also opened. It is an example in which a part is provided.

In the example shown in FIGS. 266(A) to 268(D), a grass front cover 6440 larger than the grass substrate 6420 is provided in front of the grass substrate 6420 . In this case, the outer edge of the grass substrate 6420 is visible through the front cover 6440. The front cover light scattering portion 6444 and the front cover opaque portion 6446 are provided at least in front of the front cover 6444, and in the front view of the grass substrate 6420, the front cover colorless transparent portion is provided in front of the portion other than the outer edge. 6442a and the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b may be provided. Even with such a configuration, the color of the grass substrate 6420 can be used for decoration. In this case, the grass front cover light scattering portion 6444 and the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 may be provided so as to cover the front of the outer edge portion of the grass substrate 6420 in a strip shape. Alternatively, in the example shown in FIG. 266(D), the area occupied by the front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444b in the front cover 6440 is enlarged upward so that the area in front of the outer edge of the grass substrate 6420 is the front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444b. It may be configured to be covered by the portion 6444b. In the example shown in FIG. 266(E), the area occupied by the front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444b in the front cover 6440 is reduced upward so that the front portion of the outer edge of the grass substrate 6420 is covered by the front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444b. It may be configured to be covered by the scattering portion 6444b. 266(F) and 266(G), similarly, by expanding or contracting the area occupied by the front cover opaque portion 6446 upward, the front portion of the outer edge of the grass substrate 6420 becomes the front cover. It may be configured to be covered by an opaque portion 6446 . Alternatively, the front weed cover light scattering portion 6444 and the opaque front cover cover 6446 may cover at least a portion of the outer edge of the grass substrate 6420 with the front weed cover light scattering portion 6444 and the opaque front cover cover 6446 . A similar effect can be obtained even when the portion 6446 is provided.

246 and 254 show an example in which the grass role 6400 is provided in the area between the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the game panel 1100, but the grass role 6400 is provided in a position other than this. It may be configured as For example, a grass accessory 6400 may be provided in the area between the game panel 1100 and the glass unit 190 . Alternatively, the grass accessory 6400 may be provided on a member forming the door frame 3 . For example, the door frame left side unit 530, the door frame right side unit 550, and the door frame top unit 570 may be configured to provide grass accessories. It should be noted that not only the grass accessory 6400 but also other accessories may be provided at the same position as the grass accessory 6400 .

In this way, in the grass accessory 6400, it is possible to execute an effect that makes it visible in green, white, yellow, brown, silver, etc. by the plurality of members that make up the grass accessory 6400. You can express the appearance of green grass, withered grass, and withered grass with frost and snow. In addition, it is possible to express how the grass has changed from one of these modes to another.

In the example shown in FIG. 254, a rabbit role 6000 and a stump role 6100 are provided in front of a mountain role 6500 . In these examples, the rabbit character 6000 has a face light emitting part 6023, and the stump character 6100 has a first rear wall light emitting part 6354a and a second rear wall light emitting part 6354b. It is possible to take a production state by irradiating forward. By the way, in these examples, the light from the light emitting unit is diffusely reflected by the members provided around the light emitting unit, and part of the light emitted from the light emitting unit is directed backward, and the light from the light emitting unit is reflected. There is a problem that the light cannot be efficiently irradiated forward, and the utilization efficiency of the irradiated light is reduced. Therefore, an example in which the efficiency of using the light from the light-emitting unit can be improved by reflecting forward the light directed backward on the front side of the decorative object 6500 will be described.

FIG. 272 shows a modification of the rabbit character 6000 shown in FIG. 247 and the like. FIG. 272(A) is a front view of the rabbit character 6000. FIG. FIG. 272(B) is a perspective view of the rabbit accessory 6000. FIG. FIG. 272(C) is an exploded perspective view of the rabbit accessory 6000. FIG. The rabbit character 6000 is configured as a unit by a face cover portion 6010 on the front side, a face substrate 6020 provided on the back side of the face cover portion 6010, and a body portion 6030. FIG. The face substrate 6020 has a first face light emitting part 6023a and a second face light emitting part 6023b as the face light emitting part 6023 on the front surface. In addition, the face substrate 6020 has a mouth decoration portion 6024 shaped like a rabbit's mouth. A first arm portion 6016 and a second arm portion 6017 made of opaque white synthetic resin are attached to the vertical bottom surface of the face cover portion 6010, imitating left and right front legs of a rabbit. At the lower end of the face substrate 6020, there is provided a body part 6030 which imitates the body part of a rabbit and is a plate-like member made of opaque white synthetic resin. The face covering portion 6010 is made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and has a first face light scattering portion 6011a and a second face light scattering portion 6011a at positions corresponding to the first face light emitting portion 6023a and the second face light emitting portion 6023b, respectively. A portion 6011b is provided. Up to this point, the configuration is the same as that of the rabbit character 6000 shown in FIG. 247 and the like.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 272(A), the face substrate 6020 does not have the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022 and has a horizontally long rectangular shape. In addition, the face substrate 6020 has a concave shape toward the rear formed by the face cover upper surface 6012, the face cover right surface 6013, the face cover lower surface 6014, and the face cover left surface 6015 of the face cover 6010. It is attached so that it fits in the part where it is attached. In the face cover portion 6010, the upper surface of the face cover portion upper surface portion 6012 has a shape that protrudes upward at two locations on the left and right, thereby forming a first ear portion 6021 and a second ear portion 6022. As shown in FIG. A first ear decoration portion 6021a and a second ear decoration portion 6022a are formed by printing on the front surface of the face cover portion 6010 with brown ink.

When the rabbit character 6000 takes such a form, the light from the first face light emitting part 6023a and the second face light emitting part 6023b is irregularly reflected by the first face light scattering part 6011a and the second face light scattering part 6011b. After that, the face-cover upper surface 6012, the face-cover right surface 6013, the face-cover lower surface 6014, the face-cover left surface 6015, the first ear 6021, the first ear decoration 6021a, and the second ear 6022. , the second ear decoration portion 6022a, and the like, the light may be reflected many times and be directed backward.

Also, when the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b included in the stump accessory 6100 shown in FIGS. The light from the light emitting portion 6354b diffusely reflects at the first rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358a and the second rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358b, and then reaches the box upper wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320, and the box lower wall portion 6330. , box left wall 6340, etc., the light may be reflected and directed backward.

Therefore, an example of increasing the efficiency of light utilization by reflecting the light that has traveled backward from the rabbit character 6000 and the stump character 6100 forward again on the front side of the mountain character 6500 will be described below.

FIG. 273(A) shows a mountain role 6500. FIG. The dotted lines in the figure indicate the positions where the rabbit role 6000 and the stump role 6100 are provided. Also, for the rabbit character 6000, the outer shape of the face substrate 6020 is also indicated by dotted lines. The mountain accessory 6500 is composed of a mountain substrate 6520 , a first mountain front cover 6540 provided on the front left side of the mountain substrate 6520 , and a second mountain front cover 6560 provided on the front right side of the mountain substrate 6520 .

The mount board 6520 is composed of a printed circuit board with white front and rear surfaces. In addition, on the front surface of the mount substrate 6520, a plurality of LEDs constituting the mount substrate front light emitting portion 6522 are mounted. A mountain substrate opening 6524 is provided at substantially the center of the mountain substrate 6520 in the left-right direction. The mountain substrate opening 6524 is formed by punching out a physical opening in the mountain substrate 6520 . Members located behind can be visually recognized through the mountain substrate opening 6524 .

The first ridge front cover 6540 is made of colored transparent synthetic resin, and includes a first ridge front cover colored transparent portion 6542 , a first ridge front cover colored light scattering portion 6544 , and a first ridge front cover opening 6548 . there is With such a configuration, the white mountain substrate 6520 can be visually recognized in the color of the first mountain front cover 6540 . Specifically, the color of the first crest front cover 6540 may be blue. In this case, it is possible to express a state in which a mountain is covered with snow or a mountain has a glacier. The first crest front cover opening 6548 is formed by punching out a physical opening in the first crest front cover 6540 . Also, the first crest front cover opening 6548 is formed across the first crest front cover colored transparent portion 6542 and the first crest front cover colored light scattering portion 6544 . The peak substrate 6520 positioned behind through the first peak front cover opening 6548 is visible in white. The second ridge front cover 6560 is made of colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and includes a second ridge front cover colorless transparent portion 6562 and a second ridge front cover colorless light scattering portion 6564 . By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to express a mode in which snow is piled up on a mountain or a mountain has a glacier. In addition, the mountain substrate opening 6524 and the first mountain front cover opening 6548 decoratively express the appearance of a cave in the mountain by their shapes.

On the front surface of the mountain substrate 6520, as the mountain substrate front surface light emitting portion 6522, a mountain substrate front surface first light emitting portion 6522a to a mountain substrate front surface ninth light emitting portion 6522i are provided. A first mountain front cover colored transparent portion 6542 is provided in front of the mountain substrate front surface first light emitting portion 6522a. A first mountain front cover colored light scattering portion 6544 is provided in front of the mountain substrate front surface second light emitting portion 6522b. A first peak cover colored light scattering part 6544 is provided in front of the third light emitting part 6522c on the front surface of the peak board, and further in front of it, the face board 6020 of the rabbit character 6000 in the standby position is positioned. is doing. A first peak cover colored transparent portion 6542 is provided in front of the fourth light emitting portion 6522d on the front surface of the peak substrate, and a face substrate 6020 included in the rabbit character 6000 in the standby position is located in front of it. there is A stump accessory 6100 is positioned in front of the mountain board front surface fifth light emitting portion 6522e. A stump accessory 6100 is positioned in front of the mountain board front surface sixth light emitting portion 6522f. A second mountain front cover colorless transparent portion 6562 is provided in front of the mountain substrate front surface seventh light emitting portion 6522g, and a stump accessory 6100 is located in front of it. A second mountain front cover colorless transparent portion 6562 is provided in front of the mountain substrate front surface eighth light emitting portion 6522h. A second ridge front cover colorless light scattering section 6564 is provided in front of the ridge substrate front surface ninth light emitting section 6522i.

When viewed from the front, the mountain board 6520 is exposed and visible in white, and the front of the mountain board 6520 is covered with the first mountain front cover colored transparent portion 6542 and visible in light blue. , the area in front of the mountain substrate 6520 is covered with the first mountain front cover colored light scattering portion 6544 and is visible in light blue, and the area behind the first mountain front cover colored transparent portion 6542 is blue transparent because the mountain substrate 6520 is not positioned. an area that is visually recognized as a solid color, an area that is visually recognized as translucent blue because the mountain substrate 6520 is not positioned behind the first mountain front cover colored light scattering portion 6542b, and an opening portion 6524 that is open. A region in which the rear member can be visually recognized in a hole shape, a region where the front of the mountain substrate 6520 is covered with the second front cover colorless transparent portion 6562 and is visually recognized in white, and a front of the mountain substrate 6520 are the second. It consists of a region covered by the second front cover colorless light scattering portion 6564 and visible in white, and a region behind the second peak front cover colorless transparent portion 6562 where the peak substrate 6520 is not positioned and visible transparently. ing.

FIG. 273(B) shows a state in which the above-described rabbit role 6000 and stump role 6100 are provided in front of such a mountain role 6500 . At the rear of the rabbit character 6000, there is an area where the mountain substrate 6520 is exposed and visible in white, and an area in front of the mountain substrate 6520 is covered with the first mountain front cover colored transparent portion 6542 and visible in light blue. , the front side of the mountain substrate 6520 is covered with the first front cover colored light scattering portion 6544 to provide an area visually recognized in light blue. By diffusely reflecting the light from the face light-emitting portion 6023a and the second face light-emitting portion 6023b forward, it is possible to increase the light utilization efficiency. In addition, behind the stump accessory 6100, the mountain substrate 6520 is exposed and visible white, and the front of the mountain substrate 6520 is covered with the second mountain front cover colorless transparent portion 6562 and visible white. In these areas, the light from the first rear wall light emitting part 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting part 6354b provided in the stump accessory 6100 provided in front is diffusely reflected forward. Therefore, it is possible to improve the efficiency of light utilization. Thus, in this embodiment, one substrate is configured to have a plurality of reflective regions corresponding to a plurality of members each having a light-emitting portion.

It should be noted that when the light from the rabbit role 6000 and the stump role 6100 can be reflected forward by the mountain substrate 6520 positioned behind the rabbit role 6000 and the stump role 6100, the rabbit role 6000 and the stump role 6100 can be reflected forward. It is desirable to increase the reflection efficiency in substrate areas obscured by object 6000 and stump feature 6100 . Specifically, it is desirable to use white or light color as the color of the mountain substrate 6520 . In addition, in the substrate area that is hidden by the rabbit character 6000 and the stump character 6100, the mountain substrate 6520 is exposed without providing a cover in front, or if a cover is provided, a colorless and transparent cover is provided. It should be configured to In the example shown in FIG. 273(A), the mountain substrate 6520 is exposed in the region corresponding to the right side of the rabbit character 6000 when viewed from the front. Further, in the area where the mountain substrate 6520 is exposed, the front surface of the mountain substrate 6520 is configured so that electronic components such as the mountain substrate front light emitting portion 6522 are not mounted. In addition, in the region corresponding to the stump accessory 6100, the mountain substrate 6520 is either exposed or covered with the colorless transparent portion 6562 of the second mountain front cover. By adopting such a mode, it becomes possible to further increase the reflection efficiency of forward light.

Of the mountain substrate front surface light emitting portions 6522 provided on the mountain substrate 6520, the mountain substrate front surface first light emitting portion 6522a and the mountain substrate front surface fourth light emitting portion 6522d have the first mountain front cover colored transparent portion 6542 in front of them. For the front surface second light-emitting portion 6522b and the mountain substrate front surface third light-emitting portion 6522c, the first mountain front cover colored light scattering portion 6544 is located forward, and for the mountain substrate front surface ninth light-emitting portion 6522i, the second mountain front cover is located forward. A colorless light scattering portion 6564 is provided. In this way, by providing a colored or light-scattering cover in front of the board front light-emitting portion 6522, the player's eyes are not directly irradiated with light from the light-emitting portion. On the other hand, the fifth front light-emitting portion 6522e and the sixth sixth light-emitting portion 6522f on the front surface of the mountain substrate are not provided with a front cover, and are exposed on the front surface of the front surface of the mountain substrate 6520. FIG. This is used to illuminate the stump accessory 6100 positioned in front of the light from the mountain board front surface fifth light emitting portion 6522e and the mountain board front surface sixth light emitting portion 6522f. This is because the player is not directly irradiated with light from the sixth light-emitting portion 6522f on the front surface of the mountain board. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to make the presence of the mountain substrate front light emitting portion 6522 inconspicuous. In this way, in the ridge board 6500, instead of arranging the ridge board front light-emitting portions 6522 evenly on the front surface of the ridge board 6500, the first ridge front cover 6540 located in front of the ridge board front light-emitting portions 6522, They are unevenly distributed corresponding to the second mountain front cover 6560 , the rabbit accessory 6000 and the stump accessory 6100 .

FIG. 273(C) shows the rabbit role object 6000 moved from the waiting position to the moving position with a dotted line. In this state, the mountain board front surface third light emitting portion 6522c and the mountain board front surface fourth light emitting portion 6522d, which have been positioned behind the rabbit accessory 6000 when viewed from the front, are configured to be visible to the player when viewed from the front. It is The rabbit character 6000 can emit light not only in the standby position as described above, but also in the movement position to emit light in a predetermined color as an effect. At this time, the effect display device 1600 on the game board side may perform an effect display in the same luminescent color as that of the rabbit character 6000 . For example, when the rabbit character 6000 is made to emit white light, the game board side effect display device 1600 is configured to display a white line radially extending from the position where the rabbit character 6000 is positioned. good too.

FIG. 273(C) shows the rabbit role object 6000 moved from the waiting position to the moving position with a dotted line. A mountain substrate front surface third light emitting portion 6522c and a mountain substrate front surface fourth light emitting portion 6522d are provided behind the rabbit role object 6000 in a front view. Even when the 6000 is in the moving position, it is possible to emit light in a predetermined color as an effect. For example, when the rabbit character 6000 is at the moving position, the board side effect display device 1600 may display a white line and at the same time, the mountain board front light emitting portion 6522 may emit white light.

In the state where the rabbit accessory 6000 is in the standby position, when the mountain substrate front surface third light emitting portion 6522c and the mountain substrate front surface fourth light emitting portion 6522d are in a light emitting mode as an effect, the upper surface of the face cover portion of the rabbit accessory 6000 6012 , face cover portion right surface portion 6013 , face cover portion lower surface portion 6014 , face cover portion left surface portion 6015 . , the outline of the rabbit's face becomes a luminous mode. At this time, on the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 that constitutes the rabbit character 6000, light emitted from the front third light-emitting portion 6522c and the fourth light-emitting portion 6522d on the front surface of the mountain substrate diffusely reflects backward. As a result, this light is diffusely reflected forward from the front surface of the mountain object 6500 again. With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the utilization efficiency of the irradiated light.

In the example shown in FIG. 273, the area of the mountain role 6500 is larger than the area of the rabbit role 6000 and the stump role 6100 in front view. An accessory smaller than the object 6100 may be arranged behind the rabbit accessory 6000 or the stump accessory 6100 so as to exhibit the same function as the mountain accessory 6500 . For example, such accessories may be arranged so as to fit within the area formed by the face substrate 6020 of the rabbit accessory 6000 and the stump plate portion 6210 of the stump accessory 6100 when viewed from the front. In addition, as such an accessory, for example, a white accessory such as a grass accessory 6400 shown in FIGS. The front surface of the grass substrate 6420 may be exposed, or the front surface of the white grass substrate 6420 may be covered with the colorless transparent front cover portion 6442a. Even in such a configuration, the white grass substrate 6420 that is exposed or the white grass substrate 6420 whose front surface is covered with the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a prevents the rabbit role 6000 and the stump role 6100 from It is possible to diffusely reflect light forward.

In the rabbit role product 6000 shown in FIG. 272, the entire face substrate 6020 is completely accommodated in the face cover part 6010 when viewed from the front. Such an aspect may be applied to the relationship between the grass front cover 6440 and the grass substrate 6420 in the grass accessory 6400 described above. In this case, the entire grass substrate 6420 is housed in the front grass cover 6440 when viewed from the front. Alternatively, it may be applied to the relationship between the grass rear cover 6460 and the grass substrate 6420 in the grass accessory 6400 . In this case, the entire grass substrate 6420 is housed in the rear grass cover 6460 when viewed from the front. Specifically, for example, a plurality of flower-shaped substrates are provided so that the substrates do not overlap the rear surface of the front cover 6440 and the front surface of the rear cover 6460 in a front view. It may be configured such that each substrate is attached to the cover 6440 or the rear cover 6460 so that the entire substrate is completely contained therein. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to achieve decoration by combining the substrate and the front grass cover 6440 or by combining the substrate and the rear grass cover 6460 . Note that in other examples, such a configuration may also be adopted when providing the substrate and the cover.

As shown in FIG. 254, in the game board 5, a space is formed between the game board side effect display device 1600 and the game panel 1100 provided in front of the game board side effect display device 1600. A plurality of accessories are provided in the space. Among these accessories, the first big tree role 6600, the second big tree role 6650, the first cloud role 6700, the second cloud role 6750, and the back grass role are located close to the back side of the game panel 1100. 6800 is provided. These are visible through the game panel 1100 made of colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and have the function of decorating the rear surface of the game panel 1100 .

The first giant tree role 6600 and the second giant tree role 6650 are provided so as to cover the left and right sides of the back surface of the game panel 1100 . Specifically, it consists of a first giant tree role 6600 located on the left side of the back surface of the game panel 1100 and a second giant tree role item 6650 located on the right side of the back surface of the game panel 1100 . The first giant tree accessory 6600 is composed of a first giant tree trunk substrate 6610 and a first giant tree leaf substrate 6630 . The first giant tree trunk board 6610 is a brown printed board, and the first giant tree leaf board 6630 is a green printed board. A plurality of LED light sources are arranged on the rear surface of the first giant tree trunk substrate 6610 and the first giant tree leaf substrate 6630, and these light sources are oriented rightward. The second giant tree accessory 6650 is composed of a second giant tree trunk substrate 6660 and a second giant tree leaf substrate 6680 . The second giant tree trunk substrate 6660 is a brown substrate, and the second giant tree leaf substrate 6680 is a green substrate. A plurality of light sources composed of LEDs are arranged on the rear surfaces of the second giant tree trunk substrate 6660 and the first giant tree leaf substrate 6680, and these light sources are oriented to the left. The first giant tree accessory 6600 is composed of a first giant tree trunk substrate 6610 and a first giant tree leaf substrate 6630, and the second giant tree accessory 6650 is composed of a second giant tree trunk substrate 6660 and a second giant tree leaf substrate 6680. However, for each of these substrates, the structure related to the grass substrate 6420 of the grass role object 6400 shown in FIGS. 259(A) to 271(G) may be adopted.

The first cloud object 6700 and the second cloud object 6750 are provided so as to cover the back surface of the game panel 1100 . Each of the first cloud object 6700 and the second cloud object 6750 is composed of a white printed circuit board. For each of these substrates, the structure related to the grass substrate 6420 of the grass role object 6400 shown in FIGS. 259(A) to 271(G) may be employed.

A first giant tree leaf board 6630 forming a first giant tree role 6600 and a second giant tree leaf board 6680 forming a second giant tree role 6650 are arranged from the end of the game panel 1100 into the game area 5a and further into the game area. It is configured to be continuously visible to the player over the panel opening 1100a. In addition, the second cloud role object 6750 is configured to be continuously visible to the player from the outside of the game area 5a to the inside of the game area 5a and further to the game panel opening 1100a. On the other hand, the first giant tree leaf substrate 6630 forming the first giant tree role 6600 and the second giant tree leaf substrate 6680 forming the second giant tree role 6650 are arranged to overtake the game board side effect display device 1600 in the upper left and upper right. , and is configured so that the game board side effect display device 1600 does not look square. The mountain role 6500 is also provided so as to overtake the lower left and lower right of the game board side effect display device 1600, so that the game board side effect display device 1600 does not look square. Further, the mountain role 6500 is provided at the position closest to the game board side effect display device 1600 among the various roles provided in front of the game board side effect display device 1600 .

FIG. 274 shows the back grass accessory 6800. FIG. The back grass accessory 6800 is provided close to the back surface of the game panel 1100 so as to cover the bottom of the back surface of the game panel 1100 . The back grass accessory 6800 is composed of a back grass substrate 6820 and a back grass front cover 6840. - 特許庁The board back grass front cover 6840 is preferably made of, for example, a colored transparent synthetic resin, and more specifically, preferably made of a green transparent synthetic resin. Regarding the relationship between the back grass substrate 6820 and the back grass front cover 6840, the structure related to the grass substrate 6420 and the grass front cover 6440 of the grass accessory 6400 shown in FIGS. It may be configured to Similarly, the structure related to the back cover 6460 may be adopted for the back cover 6800 .

In the board back grass accessory 6800, a passing portion for passing game balls that have entered a prize winning opening provided on the front side of the game panel 1100 located on the front side and passed through the opening provided on the game panel 1100. A circular weed substrate opening 6824 and a weed front cover opening 6848 having a circular shape are provided. A game ball that has passed through the back grass substrate opening 6824 and the back grass front cover opening 6848 is detected by a sensor provided in the back grass accessory 6800 . Sensors for detecting game balls are attached below each passing portion and on the rear surface of the back grass substrate 6820 . With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the existence of the sensor. As shown below, the back grass substrate first opening portion 6824a to the back grass substrate fourth opening portion 6824d serve as the back grass substrate opening portion 6824, and the back grass substrate front cover opening portion 6848 serves as the back grass front cover opening portion 6848. A first opening 6848a to a fourth opening 6848d in front of the board back grass front cover are provided.

The back grass board first opening 6824a and the back grass front cover first opening 6848a are circular with the same size, and are provided at positions overlapping each other in the back grass accessory 6800 when viewed from the front. Then, the game ball enters the winning slot provided on the front side of the game panel 1100 by the board back grass substrate first opening 6824a and the board back grass front cover first opening 6848a and moves to the back of the game panel 1100. to pass through.

The back grass substrate second opening 6824b has a front surface not covered with the front grass front cover 6840, and constitutes a passing portion for allowing a game ball to pass directly through the exposed back grass substrate 6820.例文帳に追加

The board back grass front cover second opening 6848b does not have the board back grass substrate 6820 located behind it, and constitutes a passing part for directly passing game balls only by the board back grass front cover second opening 6848b. is doing. In this example, the back grass substrate 6820 has a shape that follows the contour of the bottom of the back grass front cover second opening 6848b. By adopting such a configuration, while the shape of the back grass substrate 6820 is made into a decorative outer shape, a passage that guides the game ball that has passed through the back grass front cover second opening 6848b to the sensor located below. can be made as difficult to see as possible.

The back grass board third opening 6824c and the back grass front cover third opening 6848c are circular with the same size, and are provided at positions overlapping each other in the back grass accessory 6800 when viewed from the front. Then, the game ball enters the winning slot provided on the front side of the game panel 1100 by the board back grass board third opening 6824c and the board back grass front cover third opening 6848c, and moves to the back of the game panel 1100. to pass through. In this example, two elliptical regions are formed in the back weed front cover 6840 above the passing portion formed by the back weed substrate third opening 6824c and the back weed front cover third opening 6848c. By doing so, it is possible to visually recognize a decorative shape that imitates a rabbit's head. In this way, by using the shape of the passing portion through which the game ball passes as part of the decorative shape, the presence of the passing portion can be made inconspicuous, and the decorative function of the back grass accessory 6800 It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the

The back grass substrate fourth opening 6824d and the back grass front cover fourth opening 6848d have the same size and shape, respectively, and have a circular outer shape with two elliptical portions protruding from the top. None. In addition, these are provided at positions overlapping each other in the front view of the back grass accessory 6800 . Then, the game ball enters the winning slot provided on the front side of the game panel 1100 by the board back grass board fourth opening 6824d and the board back grass front cover fourth opening 6848d, and moves to the back of the game panel 1100. to pass through. In this example, the shapes of the back grass substrate third opening 6824c and the back grass front cover third opening 6848c themselves are configured to be visually recognizable as decorative shapes imitating a rabbit's head. In this way, by using the shape of the passing portion through which the game ball passes as part of the decorative shape, the presence of the passing portion can be made inconspicuous, and the decorative function of the back grass accessory 6800 It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the

In addition, it is preferable that a cylindrical member formed of colorless and transparent synthetic resin is disposed in the passage portion through which the game ball passes so that the game ball can pass through. In addition, it is preferable that the cylindrical member is made of a colored transparent synthetic resin, and the same color as that of the back grass front cover 6840 or the same color as that of the back grass substrate 6820 is adopted as the color of the synthetic resin. With such a configuration, the presence of the cylindrical member can be made inconspicuous, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the decorative function of the back grass accessory 6800 is impaired. .

The first big tree role 6600, the second big tree role 6650, the first cloud role 6700, the second cloud role 6750, and the back grass role 6800 are attached to the front of the game panel 1100 when viewed from the front. It is located behind the game panel 1100 in a manner straddling the rail member 5950 that is mounted. As a result, each accessory can be visually recognized as a decoration without being conscious of the presence of the rail member 5950 . Note that the rail member 5950 as a whole may be made of colorless and transparent synthetic resin. Alternatively, the rail member 5950 may be composed of a plurality of members in the longitudinal direction, at least one of which may be composed of colorless and transparent synthetic resin. By adopting such a configuration, the visibility of each accessory located behind is improved, and the range in which decoration is performed can be expanded. Also, the rail member 5950 may be made of a synthetic resin of the same color as the accessories positioned behind. For example, when the back grass accessory 6800 is green and visible, the rail member 5950 provided at a position overlapping the back grass accessory 6800 when viewed from the front may be made of green transparent synthetic resin.

When the game ball hit into the game area 5a is charged, discharge occurs at an unintended place, and the high voltage causes electronic parts to malfunction, or the electromagnetic pulse generated by the discharge causes an unintended illegal operation of the control element. There is a risk of control. In particular, the first big tree role 6600, the second big tree role 6650, the first cloud role 6700, the second cloud role 6750, and the backside grass role 6800 are provided with printed circuit boards on which electronic components are mounted. When objects are provided close to the back surface of the game panel 1100, the possibility of such a situation occurring in the electronic components mounted on these substrates becomes higher.

Therefore, in the case of these accessories having a front cover, at least a part of the front cover may be provided with a silver-colored opaque portion formed of the metal thin film described above. More specifically, it is preferable to provide the front cover so that the opaque portion is located in front of the portion where the electronic component is mounted on the substrate. Further, each accessory may be provided so that the front surface of each accessory, which may be affected by such charged game balls, does not come into contact with the back surface of the game panel 1100 . Alternatively, at least in the area overlapping the game area 5a where the charged game ball rolls and falls when viewed from the front, each character is provided so that the front surface of each character does not come into contact with the back surface of the game panel 1100. may be configured.

Further, it is desirable that the ground path of the ground wire (not shown) provided on the game panel 1100 and the ground path of the ground wire (not shown) provided for each accessory be separated as much as possible. For example, a ground wire (not shown) provided on the game panel 1100 is finally installed on the island facility via a ground circuit provided for each role, or conversely, the ground wire for each role is provided on the game panel 1100. It is not preferable to have the island facility finally installed via a ground circuit that is connected to the ground. Therefore, it is preferable to provide a ground circuit board having a static elimination function at a predetermined location on the back surface of the game machine so that the ground path from the game panel 1100 and the ground path from each accessory join on the ground circuit board. . With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the influence of a charged game ball hit into the game area 5a.

246 and 254 show an example in which the grass role 6800 is provided on the lower side of the back surface of the game panel 1100. Instead of the grass role 6800 behind the board, a mountain role 6500, a rabbit role 6000, and a stump role are shown. The object 6100 may be arranged below the back surface of the game panel 1100 . In this case as well, the light diffusely reflected backward from the rabbit role 6000 and the stump role 6100 can be reflected forward again to increase the light utilization efficiency. By utilizing the reflection function of the mountain board 6520, another decorative accessory or a prize winning opening unit having a winning opening may be arranged in front of the mountain role in the same manner as the rabbit role 6000 and the stump role 6100. can be configured to In this case also, the light emitted from the light-emitting part provided in the decorative accessory or the prize-winning unit and diffusely reflected backward can be reflected forward on the front surface of the mountain substrate 6520 .

In addition, by providing a plurality of cylindrical spacers on the back surface of the front cover that constitutes these accessories, the front surface of the substrate contacts the top of the spacers and does not directly contact the back surface of the front cover. You may As the structure of each spacer, specifically, a cylindrical structure having a height of about 2 mm and a diameter of about 2 mm vertically from the rear surface of the front cover may be adopted. Also, the spacer and the front cover are preferably integrally molded from the same material. Further, when the front cover has a plurality of regions, the spacers are preferably arranged in regions where it is difficult to visually recognize the rear side. For example, the colored transparent portion, the colored light scattering portion, and the spacer of the front cover may be molded integrally with a green transparent synthetic resin. At this time, the spacer becomes green and transparent. In this case, it is preferable that the colored transparent portion is not provided with spacers, and the colored light scattering portion is provided with spacers. By providing the spacer having such a structure, the front cover and the substrate are arranged parallel to each other while being separated by the height of the spacer. With such a configuration, the portion closest to the back surface of the game panel 1100 is decorated with the front cover, and the substrate is decorated at a position several millimeters behind the front cover. At this time, compared with the case where the board is decorated at the part closest to the back surface of the game panel 1100, the board is located at the rear, so that the decoration effect by the color of the board and the external shape of the board is exhibited. Also, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the presence of through holes and electronic parts provided on the board. Further, by separating the back surface of the game panel 1100 from the substrate, it is possible to reduce the influence of the electric discharge from the charged game ball and the electromagnetic pulse on the substrate.

The back grass role 6800, the first big tree role 6600, the second big tree role 6650, the first cloud role 6700, and the second cloud role 6750 are provided close to the back side of the game panel 1100. . Specifically, it is arranged on the front side of the intermediate position between the surface forming the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the back surface of the game panel 1100 . In addition, in the space between the back grass role 6800, the first big tree role 6600, the second big tree role 6650, the first cloud role 6700, the second cloud role 6750 and the game board side effect display device 1600 is provided with a rabbit accessory 6000 and a stump accessory 6100 as movable accessories. It should be noted that the rabbit role 6000 and the stump role 600 may be provided under the game panel 1100 where the back grass role 6800 is provided.

The first giant tree role 6600, the second big tree role 6650, the first cloud role 6700, and the second cloud role 6750, which do not have a front cover, are configured so that a light emitting part is provided on the front surface of the board. In that case, a scattering section may be formed on the back surface of the game panel 1100 overlapping the light emitting section in front view to scatter the light emitted from the light emitting section. Alternatively, in these accessories, even if a colored transparent or colorless transparent front cover is provided at a position overlapping the light emitting part when viewed from the front, the scattering part is similarly formed on the back surface of the game panel 1100. You may

255 to 258 show an example in which the stump accessory 6100 is provided, but the members forming the stump accessory 6100 may be configured to be movable as an effect. For example, the box top wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320, the box bottom wall portion 6330, the box left wall portion 6340, and the box rear wall portion 6350 that constitute the stump box portion 6300 may be configured to be movable as a presentation.

FIGS. 275(A) to 275(D) show that, in the stump box portion 6300 shown in FIGS. 257(A) and 258(A), the box top wall portion 6310 to the box left wall portion 6340 are moved from their standby positions. It is the figure which showed the state moved to the position. FIG. 275(A) shows an example in which the box top wall 6310 is moved rearward until the front end of the box top wall 6310 contacts the top of the box rear wall 6350 . FIG. 275(B) shows an example in which the box right wall section 6320 is moved left and rearward until the front end of the box right wall section 6320 contacts the right end of the box rear wall section 6350 . FIG. 275(C) shows an example in which the box bottom wall 6330 is moved rearward until the front end of the box bottom wall 6330 contacts the bottom end of the box rear wall 6350 . FIG. 275(D) shows an example in which the box right wall section 6320 is moved right rearward until the front end of the box right wall section 6320 contacts the left end of the box rear wall section 6350 . Note that only one of the box upper wall 6310 to the box left wall 6340 may be configured to be movable as shown, and the other walls may be configured to be immovable. A plurality of wall portions among the portion 6310 to the box left wall portion 6340 may be configured to be movable. For example, all of the box top wall portion 6310 to the box left wall portion 6340 may be configured to be movable.

With such a configuration, the stump plate portion 6210, the first grass movable portion 6360, and the second grass movable portion 6370 provided in front of the stump box portion 6300 can be connected to the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354a. The mode of light irradiation from the light emitting portion 6354b can be changed. For example, in a state before the box upper wall portion 6310 is moved backward, light is reflected on each inner wall of the stump box portion 6300, and the stump plate portion 6210 is illuminated in a shape corresponding to the front shape of the stump box portion 6300. The Rukoto. On the other hand, when the box top wall portion 6310 is moved rearward, the light from the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b is not reflected by the box top wall portion 6310, so that the rear wall light is emitted. The light emitted obliquely upward from the portion 6354 travels straight to illuminate the back side of the stump plate portion 6210 . Therefore, in addition to the shape corresponding to the shape of the front surface of the stump box portion 6300, the stump plate portion 6210 is also illuminated in the area above the front surface of the stump box portion 6300. FIG. By moving the box top wall portion 6310 in this way, it is possible to change the area to be illuminated. Note that even when the box right wall portion 6320 to the box left wall portion 6340 are slid backward instead of the box top wall portion 6310, the illuminated area is changed corresponding to the moved wall portions. It is possible to

Further, the box rear wall portion 6350 may be configured to be movable in the front-rear direction while maintaining its inclination. For example, from the state shown in FIG. 257(A) or FIG. The box rear wall portion 6350 may be configured to be movable forward so as to be in contact with the front ends. Further, it may be configured to be movable backward from the state shown in FIG. 257(A).

Further, the box upper wall portion 6310 to the box left wall portion 6340 may be configured to be rotatable with respect to the box rear wall portion 6350 . For example, the box right wall portion 6320 and the box left wall portion 6340 are formed in a rectangular shape having the same size as the box rear wall portion 6350, and the side formed by the box right wall portion 6320 and the box rear wall portion 6350 and the box left wall portion 6340 and the box rear wall portion 6350 may be configured to be rotatable around the axis. By rotating the box right wall portion 6320 and the box left wall portion 6340 inward, the front surface of the box rear wall portion 6350 is covered with the box right wall portion 6320 and the box left wall portion 6340. The box rear wall part 6350 and the box right wall part 6320 and the box left wall part 6340 may be arranged in parallel by rotating the right wall part 6320 and the box left wall part 6340 outward. Further, the box upper wall portion 6310 and the box lower wall portion 6330 are formed in a rectangular shape having the same size as the box rear wall portion 6350, and the box rear wall portion 6350 is formed in the same manner as the box right wall portion 6320 and the box left wall portion 6340. You may comprise so that rotation is possible with respect to.

An example in which the box rear wall portion 6350 can be moved has been shown, but in the examples shown in FIGS. A rear wall cover 6356 that constitutes the wall portion 6350 may be configured to be rotatable or movable in the front-rear direction in the same manner as the box rear wall portion 6350 described above. When the rear wall cover 6356 is rotated, the stump opening 6210a can be directly irradiated with the light from the rear wall light emitter 6354 without passing through the rear wall cover 6356. FIG. On the other hand, when the rear wall cover 6356 is moved forward, a distance is created between the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 and the rear wall cover 6356, and the light from the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 spreads radially. It becomes possible to illuminate the entire cover 6356 . In the case of adopting such a mode, the area of the rear wall cover 6356 other than the first rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358a and the second rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358b may also be used as the scattering portion. With such a configuration, the rear wall cover 6356 can be moved in the front-rear direction, so that a state in which a part of the rear wall cover 6356 is illuminated and a state in which the entire rear wall cover 6356 is illuminated. may be visible to the player.

In the example shown in FIGS. 258(A) to 258(D), the rear wall plate portion 6380 is fixedly provided, and the rear wall substrate 6352 and the rear wall cover 6356 are attached to the rear wall plate portion 6380 in the box described above. Like the rear wall portion 6350, it may be configured to be movable in the front-rear direction.

Examples have been shown in which the members that are fixedly provided can be made movable. The second rear wall light-emitting portion 6354b may be configured to continue to maintain a predetermined light-emitting mode. As the predetermined light emitting mode, for example, the first rear wall light emitting section 6354a or the second rear wall light emitting section 6354b may continue to light, may blink periodically, or may be in a light-off state in which no light is emitted. You may make it Further, in the case of executing such a light emission mode of continuous lighting or periodic blinking, it may be configured to continuously emit light of the same color. By adopting such a configuration, instead of changing the light emission mode of the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b, the box upper wall portion 6310 to the box rear wall portion 6350 and the rear wall cover 6356 are arranged. By moving such members, it is possible to change the performance mode visually recognized by the player.

On the other hand, it is also possible to change the light emission mode of the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b during the period from the timing when the movement of the member is started to the timing when the movement of the member is finished. good. By adopting such a configuration, it becomes possible to realize a more complicated presentation mode.

257 and 258, the box upper wall portion 6310 to the box rear wall portion 6350, the rear wall cover 6356, and other members are moved as an effect. By moving members such as the wall portion 6350 and the rear wall cover 6356 as an effect, a predetermined member that has been moved may be configured to be in the state shown in FIG. 257 or 258 . Even with such a configuration, it is possible to change the presentation mode visually recognized by the player.

Although an example in which the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 move in the left-right direction is shown, the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 may be configured not to move. Even with such a configuration, by moving members such as the box upper wall portion 6310 to the box rear wall portion 6350 and the rear wall cover 6356, the lighting modes of the stump accessory 6100 can be diversified. Also, the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 may be configured as one member. In this case, the first grass decoration portion 6360a and the second grass decoration portion 6370a may be configured as one decoration portion, or may be configured as a plurality of decoration portions. Further, the first grass decoration portion 6360a and the second grass decoration portion 6370a are colored and semi-transparent by a method such as painting or attaching a seal, and when the light from the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 is irradiated forward, the first grass decoration portion 6360a and the second grass decoration portion 6370a The decoration portion 6360a and the second grass decoration portion 6370a may be configured to be in a staged state by being illuminated with light.

Further, as shown below, the stump accessory 6100 is configured by the stump box portion 6300 and the grass plate portion 6381 without providing the first grass movable portion 6360, the second grass movable portion 6370, and the stump plate portion 6210. can be configured to

FIG. 276 shows an example in which the stump plate portion 6210 is not provided in front of the stump box portion 6300, and a fixed grass plate portion 6381 is provided instead of the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370. is shown. The grass plate portion is preferably made of colorless and transparent synthetic resin. In addition, the grass plate portion 6381 has a plurality of decorative portions. Specifically, a green grass board colored transparent part 6381a imitating the outline shape of grass, a grass board central decorative part 6382a imitating the shape of an animal's face, a grass board upper decorative part 6382b, a grass board right decorative part 6382c, It has a grass plate lower decoration portion 6382d, a grass plate left decoration portion 6382e, and a colorless and transparent grass plate colorless and transparent portion 6381b which is an area other than these. The colored transparent grass plate 6381a, the central grass plate decorative portion 6382a, the upper grass plate decorative portion 6382b, the right grass plate decorative portion 6382c, the lower grass plate decorative portion 6382d, and the left grass plate decorative portion 6382e are each made of colorless and transparent synthetic resin. It is constructed by attaching a print or a seal to the front or rear surface of the grass plate portion 6381 to be constructed. The grass plate center decorative portion 6382a is linearly formed in the shape of an animal's face and ears so that the rear wall substrate 6352 positioned behind can be visually recognized. On the other hand, the upper grass plate decorative portion 6382b, the right grass plate decorative portion 6382c, the lower grass plate decorative portion 6382d, and the left grass plate decorative portion 6382e have a shape imitating an animal's face, and are translucent or colored transparent through which light can pass. is configured to

In such a configuration, members such as the box top wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320, the box bottom wall portion 6330, the box left wall portion 6340, the box rear wall portion 6350, and the rear wall cover 6356 are moved as described above. By doing so, it is possible to change the lighting mode of the central grass plate decorative portion 6382a, the upper grass plate decorative portion 6382b, the right grass plate decorative portion 6382c, the lower grass plate decorative portion 6382d, and the left grass plate decorative portion 6382e. In particular, the upper grass plate decorative portion 6382b, the right grass plate decorative portion 6382c, the lower grass plate decorative portion 6382d, and the left grass plate decorative portion 6382e were irradiated with light from a state in which they had hardly been irradiated until then. The shape can be changed in various ways, and the shape imitating the face of each animal can be configured to be visually recognizable to the player.

The stump box portion 6300 is a box-shaped box having a box top wall portion 6310, a box right wall portion 6320, a box bottom wall portion 6330, a box left wall portion 6340, and a box rear wall portion 6350, and having no front facing surface. Although shaped, at least one of these members may be configured to vary in position, size, or shape.

FIG. 277 shows a modification of the example shown in FIG. In this example, the box upper wall portion 6310 and the box lower wall portion 6330 are rectangular with the same width as the box rear wall portion 6350 , and the box right wall portion 6320 and the box left wall portion 6340 are formed with respect to the box rear wall portion 6350 . By providing the stump box 6300 at a right angle, the stump box 6300 has a rectangular parallelepiped shape, and the stump board 6210 is not provided, and the grass plate 6381 is positioned close to the front of the opening of the stump box 6300. is doing. In such a configuration, as described above, as an effect, the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 is made to emit light, and the box upper wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320, the box lower wall portion 6330, and the box left wall portion 6340 By configuring to rotate or slide in the front-rear direction, it is possible to change the irradiation mode of the light emitted from the rear wall light-emitting portion 6354 to the grass plate portion 6381 . Further, in accordance with the cuboid shape of the stump box portion 6300, the right grass plate decoration portion 6382c is moved to the left side, and the left grass plate decoration portion 6382e is moved to the right side, compared with the example shown in FIG. position.

278 to 280 show modifications of the example shown in FIG. In the examples shown in FIGS. 278 to 280, the shape of the box rear wall portion 6350 and the manner of mounting are different. In the example shown in FIG. 278(A), the box rear wall portion 6350 is provided at a position shifted leftward by half when viewed from the front. FIG. 278(B) shows an enlarged state of the stump box section 6300 in the example shown in FIG. 278(A).

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 279(A), the entire box rear wall portion 6350 is configured to be doubled in length in the front view. FIG. 279(B) shows an enlarged state of the stump box section 6300 in the example shown in FIG. 279(A). FIG. 281(A) is a view showing the rear wall cover 6356 in the modified example shown in FIG. 279(A). FIG. 281(B) is a diagram showing a rear wall substrate 6352 in the modified example shown in FIG. 279(A).

Also, in the example shown in FIG. 280(A), the box rear wall portion 6350 is configured to be reduced to half its size in the front view. FIG. 280(B) shows an enlarged state of the stump box section 6300 in the example shown in FIG. 280(A). FIG. 281(C) is a diagram showing the rear wall cover 6356 in the modification shown in FIG. 280(A). FIG. 281(D) is a diagram showing a rear wall substrate 6352 in the modified example shown in FIG. 280(A).

On this premise, the stump box portion 6300 shown in FIGS. 258(B), 281(A), and 281(B)), the grass plate central decorative portion 6382a and the grass plate left decorative portion 6382e are illuminated from behind. It becomes possible to Here, by moving the box top wall portion 6310 rearward, it is possible to bring the grass board top decoration portion 6382b into the light emitting decoration state. On the other hand, the grass plate central decorative portion 6382a becomes relatively inconspicuous because the amount of irradiated light decreases. Further, when the box right wall portion 6320 and the box bottom wall portion 6330 are moved backward instead of the box top wall portion 6310, the grass plate right decorative portion 6382c and the grass plate bottom decorative portion 6382d are brought into the luminous decoration state. can do. Although an example in which both the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b are caused to emit light has been shown, in the example shown in FIG. The protruding region may be configured not to emit light. In this case, only the grass plate central decorative portion 6382a can be brought into the luminous decorative state. From this state, as described above, the box top wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320, and the box bottom wall portion 6330 may be moved rearward.

In addition, the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b provided in the stump box portion 6300 shown in FIG. In this state, the grass plate central decorative portion 6382a can be in a light-emitting decorative state in which it is illuminated from behind. Here, by moving the box top wall portion 6310 rearward, it is possible to bring the grass board top decoration portion 6382b into the light emitting decoration state. On the other hand, the grass plate central decorative portion 6382a becomes relatively inconspicuous because the amount of irradiated light decreases. When the box right wall portion 6320, the box bottom wall portion 6330, and the box left wall portion 6340 are moved backward instead of the box top wall portion 6310, the grass plate right decorative portion 6382c and the grass plate bottom decorative portion 6382d and the grass board left decorative portion 6382e can be brought into the luminous decorative state.

In this way, in the state where the grass plate central decorative portion 6382a is decorated with light, by moving the box upper wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320, the box lower wall portion 6330, and the box left wall portion 6340 backward, The upper board decoration part 6382b, the right grass board decoration part 6382c, the lower grass board decoration part 6382d, and the left grass board decoration part 6382e can be brought into the luminous decoration state. Also, at this time, the grass plate central decorative portion 6382a is in the luminous decorative state with a weaker amount of light than before. In this way, by setting the upper grass plate decorative portion 6382b, the right grass plate decoration portion 6382c, the lower grass plate decoration portion 6382d, and the left grass plate decoration portion 6382e into the luminous decoration state, a certain state of the gaming machine is suggested or notified. It may be configured as For example, when four states with different degrees of advantage for the player are occurring or are in a state that can occur, the grass plate top decoration portion 6382b is set to the light-emitting decoration state corresponding to the most advantageous state, and the second most advantageous state. The right grass plate decorative portion 6382c is set to the luminous decoration state corresponding to the most favorable state, the left grass plate decorative portion 6382e is set to the luminous decoration state to correspond to the third most favorable state, and the left grass plate decorative portion 6382e to the fourth most favorable state. The lower grass board decorative portion 6382d may be configured to be in the light emitting decorative state. By adopting such a mode, it becomes possible for the player to have a sense of anticipation as to which wall portion will move in the state where the central grass plate decorative portion 6382a is decorated with light.

Alternatively, with the first rear wall light-emitting portion 6354a and the second rear wall light-emitting portion 6354b turned off and the grass board central decorative portion 6382a not decorated with light, first, the box upper wall portion 6310 and the box right wall portion 6320 , the box lower wall portion 6330, or the box left wall portion 6340 is moved backward, and after a predetermined time has passed, the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b are put into the light emitting state. good. With such a configuration, it is possible for the player to know which of the upper grass plate decorative portion 6382b, the right grass plate decorative portion 6382c, the lower grass plate decorative portion 6382d, and the left grass plate decorative portion 6382e can be visually recognized. It is possible to notify in advance. In this case, each wall is set upright with respect to the front direction, and the player cannot necessarily notice that each wall has moved. Therefore, the player who can notice the movement of one of the wall parts watches the change of the one of the decoration parts to the luminous decoration mode with a great sense of anticipation, thereby improving the amusement of the game. becomes possible.

Further, for example, in a game state that is disadvantageous to the player (so-called normal game state, etc.), the box top wall portion 6310 to the box left wall portion 6340 are set to the front position (non-operating position), and the front grass plate central decorative portion 6382a is set. Only the box top wall portion 6310 to the box left wall portion is limited to the shipping decoration mode, and only when the state is advantageous for the player (for example, the probability fluctuation state, the time-saving game state, the jackpot game state). 6340 may be moved backward to irradiate the upper grass plate decorative portion 6382b to the left grass plate decorative portion 6382e with light, thereby increasing the area of the luminous decorative mode. As a result, the appearance of the light-emitting area can be changed according to the interest of the player who improves by shifting from a disadvantageous game state to an advantageous game state.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 278(A) and 280(A), the opening is provided on the right side of the box rear wall 6350. It may be configured such that the moving decorative member appears and disappears from the opening.

278(A) to 281(D), an example in which the box rear wall portion 6350 is displaced to the left or enlarged or reduced has been shown. It may also be configured such that it is shifted in the same way, expanded or reduced. Further, the structure of the stump box portion 6300 is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 257, and the example shown in FIG. 258 may be employed.

257 and 258 show an example in which the box rear wall portion 6350 is provided with the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b. ∼ At least one wall portion of the left wall portion 6340 of the box may be provided with a configuration related to light emission such as a light emitting portion and a light scattering portion.

Specifically, in the modification shown in FIGS. 276(A) to 281(D), the box top wall portion 6310 includes the light emitting portion and the light scattering portion described with reference to FIGS. 257 and 258. may be provided to illuminate the interior of the stump box section 6300 and the grass plate section 6381 . At this time, at least one of the box right wall 6320, box bottom wall 6330, and box left wall 6340 is moved backward as shown in FIGS. should be configured to By adopting such a configuration, in the grass plate portion 6381, only the front region corresponding to the opening of the stump box 6300 is mainly illuminated, and in addition to the front of the opening of the stump box 6300, It is also possible to illuminate the right side, the lower side, and the left side. An example in which the box top wall portion 6310 is provided with a light emitting portion and a light scattering portion to illuminate the inside of the stump box portion 6300 has been shown, but instead of the box top wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320 is provided. , the lower wall portion 6330 and the left wall portion 6340 of the box may be provided with a light emitting portion and a light scattering portion so that the lighting mode can be changed by moving each wall portion.

The box upper wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320, the box lower wall portion 6330, and the box left wall portion 6340 are each configured as a plate having the same thickness. A structure in which the inner wall of the wall portion is slanted toward the outside may be employed so that the thickness of the wall portion is reduced. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to further reflect the light reflected in the stump box section 6300 forward.

In order to move the box top wall portion 6310 to the box left wall portion 6340 and change the light irradiation mode to the grass board portion 6381 as described above, the box top wall portion 6310 to the box left wall portion 6340 are colored and opaque. or by plating the inner wall with an aluminum thin film to provide a reflecting portion capable of reflecting light or a scattering portion capable of scattering light. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to make the mode in which the light irradiation mode to the grass plate portion 6381 changes more conspicuous. Even when the box upper wall portion 6310 to the box left wall portion 6340 are formed of a colorless transparent or colored transparent material and the inner wall and outer wall thereof are made smooth, the light irradiation state to the grass plate portion 6381 changes. It is possible to let

As described above, the members such as the box upper wall portion 6310 to the box rear wall portion 6350 and the rear wall cover 6356 may be deformed so as to be movable. Alternatively, any plurality of members may be movable, or all members may be movable. For example, only the box upper wall portion 6310 may be movable, and the other members may be fixed and immovable. Alternatively, the box upper wall portion 6310 and the box right wall portion 6320 may be movable, and the other members may be provided immovably and fixedly. . Further, all of the box upper wall portion 6310 to the box rear wall portion 6350 and the rear wall cover 6356 may be movable. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to change the luminous decoration mode for the grass board portion 6381 .

The movement of the box top wall portion 6310 to the box rear wall portion 6350, the rear wall cover 6356, and the like may be performed by driving means (not shown) by the peripheral control board 1510. FIG. Also, it is preferable that the peripheral control board 1510 controls the light emission of the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a, the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b, and the like.

246 to 281, various movable bodies (rabbit role 6000, stump role 6100, etc.) used for presentation and decoration on the game board 5 provided in the pachinko machine 1 are hereinafter referred to as movable bodies in the game board. In the following, the movable body (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as the frame movable body) used for presentation and decoration with respect to the door frame 3 provided in the pachinko machine 1 is shown. Fig. 4 shows an embodiment provided;

282(A) to 282(E) show a door frame top unit 570 that constitutes the door frame 3 and a right ear frame movable body 7100 imitating the ear of an animal (specifically, a rabbit) as a frame movable body. An embodiment in which a left ear frame movable body 7200 is provided is shown. The right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are movable in the vertical direction, and specific structures and operation modes will be described later.

282(A) and 282(B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 282(C) is a plan view of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 282(D) and 282(E) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 282(A), 282(C), and 282(D) show a state in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are stored in the door frame top unit 570. FIG. 282(B) and 282(E) show a state in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 project upward from the door frame top unit 570. FIG. FIG. 282(D) shows a state in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are housed in the door frame top unit 570 .

In this embodiment, a door frame top unit 570 is provided above the door frame 3 . A glass unit 190 is provided in the central part of the door frame 3. Through the glass unit 190, the game area 5a located behind, the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, and various movable bodies in the game board are displayed. (Rabbit character 6000, stump character 6100, etc.) can be visually recognized. A plate unit 320 and a handle unit 300 are provided below the door frame 3 . In addition, the effect operation unit 400 has an operation button 410, and can receive an operation input by the player. In the drawing, the illustration of the upper tray 321, the lower tray 322, the ball lending button 328, the returning button 329, etc. is omitted.

The door frame top unit 570 has a horizontally long rectangular parallelepiped shape, and its upper surface, right side surface and left side surface correspond to the upper surface, right side surface and left side surface of the door frame base unit 100 constituting the outer frame 2 and the door frame 3, respectively. They are provided so as to overlap when viewed from the front. The door frame top unit 570 is made of a white translucent synthetic resin with a thickness of several millimeters and is capable of transmitting light. The door frame top unit 570 includes a door frame top unit upper right ear opening 7000 corresponding to a vertically movable right ear frame movable body 7100 and a door corresponding to a vertically movable left ear frame movable body 7200. and a left ear opening 7010 on the frame top unit.

As shown in FIGS. 282(A) to 282(E), the door frame top unit 570 in this embodiment includes a right ear frame movable body 7100 on the left side and a left ear frame movable body 7200 on the right side in a front view. there is Specific structures and operation modes of these are shown below. Since right ear frame movable body 7100 and left ear frame movable body 7200 basically have the same structure, only right ear frame movable body 7100 will be described as a representative in the following description.

The right ear frame movable body 7100 has a vertically long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has a right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 facing forward and a right ear frame movable body second surface 7120 facing backward. ing. The right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 is composed of a right ear frame movable body first surface inner decorative portion 7112 made of an inner colored (specifically pink) transparent synthetic resin and an outer white translucent synthetic resin. The right ear frame movable body first surface outer decorative portion 7114 is provided. The surfaces of the right ear frame movable body 7100 other than the right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 (top surface, left side surface, right side surface, right ear frame movable body second surface 7120) are outside the right ear frame movable body first surface. It is made of the same white translucent synthetic resin as the decorative portion 7114 . The left ear frame movable body 7200 has the same structure as the right ear frame movable body 7100 .

Inside the right ear frame movable body 7100, a right ear frame movable body inner light emitting portion 7116 is provided at a position overlapping the right ear frame movable body first surface inner decorative portion 7112 in a front view. In addition, a right ear frame movable body outer light emitting portion 7118 is provided at a position overlapping the right ear frame movable body first surface outer decorative portion 7114 in a front view. The light-emitting part 7116 inside the right ear frame movable body is specifically composed of a printed circuit board coated with a white protective film on both sides, and a light-emitting diode capable of emitting light toward the player is mounted on its surface. It is The right ear frame movable body inner light emitting part 7116 and the right ear frame movable body outer light emitting part 7118 are controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 so as to emit light forward in a predetermined light emitting manner. The inner decorative portion 7112 of the right ear frame movable body first surface can be decorated by the inner light emitting portion 7116 of the movable body, and the outer decorative portion 7114 of the first surface of the right ear frame movable body can be decorated by the outer light emitting portion 7118 of the right ear frame movable body. is. The left ear frame movable body 7200 has the same structure as the right ear frame movable body 7100 .

The right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are driven by a drive mechanism (not shown) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 as shown in FIGS. 282(B) and 282(E) from the standby position (first state) in the door frame top unit 570, vertically upward from the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570 as shown in FIGS. It is possible to control to a state (second state) protruded to the side. The upper surfaces of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are flush with the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570 when the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are in the standby position. It is The right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 have a shape imitating an animal's ear, and project vertically upward from the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570 when stored in the door frame top unit 570. It is possible to decoratively express the state in which the animal's ears move by taking the state of moving.

In this embodiment, the door frame top unit 570 is made of a white translucent synthetic resin with a thickness of several millimeters. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 282(A), when the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are accommodated in the door frame top unit 570, the right ear frame movable body inner light-emitting portion 7116 and the right ear frame movable body 7116 When the movable body outer light emitting part 7118, the left ear frame movable body inner light emitting part 7216, and the left ear frame movable body outer light emitting part 7218 are caused to emit light in a predetermined manner, the front surface of the door frame top unit 570 is dimly illuminated. It is possible for the player to visually recognize it in the state where it is held. The same structure may be adopted for the door frame top unit 570 in other embodiments. The light is reflected and scattered within the unit 570, and the front and side surfaces of the door frame top unit 570 can be vaguely illuminated for the player to see.

On the other hand, when the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 protrude from the door frame top unit 570, the right ear frame movable body inner light emitting portion 7116, the right ear frame movable body outer light emitting portion 7118, and the left ear frame movable body When the movable body inner light emitting part 7216 and the left ear frame movable body outer light emitting part 7218 emit light in a predetermined manner, the right ear frame movable body first surface inner decorative part of the right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 7112, the right ear frame movable body first surface outer decorative portion 7114, the left ear frame movable body first surface inner decorative portion 7212 of the left ear frame movable body first surface 7210, and the left ear frame movable body first surface outer decorative portion 7214 can be visually recognized by the player in a predetermined lighting effect state.

In this way, by moving the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the frame movable body), a part of the frame movable body moves from the outer frame 2 and the door frame base unit 100. Since it is located above the top surface, the area occupied by the player's field of vision when looking up increases, and the volume of the housing appears to have increased, giving the player unprecedented surprises and fun. It is possible to give to

Next, with reference to FIGS. 283(A) to 284(B), a specific operation mode of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the game board side according to the motion mode of the frame movable body. The display mode of the frame movable body simulation image, which is an image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the operation button 410 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as an operation unit). Mode of accepting player's operation, right ear-frame movable body inner light-emitting portion 7116, right ear-frame movable body outer light-emitting portion 7118, left ear-frame movable body inner light-emitting portion 7216, left ear-frame movable body outer light-emitting portion 7218 (hereinafter referred to as frame Shown here is an example of a presentation that combines the light emission mode, etc., of a movable body light emitting section.

FIGS. 283(A) to 284(B) respectively show the operation mode of the movable frame and the display of the simulated image of the movable frame, which is an image simulating the movable frame displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. 16 is a time chart showing a state, a reception state of an operation unit, a display state of an operation instruction display displayed on a game board side effect display device 1600, and a light emission effect state of a movable frame light emitting unit.

In the time charts shown in FIGS. 283(A) to 284(B), t0, t1 to t34, t35, etc. are indicated according to the passage of time in order to explain the timing of the effects. The time between each timing is 1 second. 292(A) to 293(B), FIGS. 298(A) to 299(B), and FIGS. 307(A) to 308(B), which will be described later. The same applies to each drawing etc. in which the is modified.

FIG. 283(A) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a big hit and the player operates the operation unit during the period when the acceptance of operation for the operation unit is valid. there is FIG. 283(B) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a loss and the player operates the operation unit during the period when the acceptance of operations on the operation unit is valid. there is FIG. 284(A) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a big win and the player does not operate the operating section during the period when the acceptance of operating the operating section is valid. ing. FIG. 284(B) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a loss and the player does not operate the operation unit during the period when operation reception for the operation unit is valid. ing.

In each production pattern shown in FIGS. 283(A) to 284(B), the manner in which the frame movable body moves, the manner in which the frame movable body simulated image is displayed, the timing at which operation acceptance for the operation unit becomes effective, and the operation instruction display are performed. The start timing and the timing at which the light-emitting portion of the movable frame body changes from the light-emitting effect state to the extinguished state are the same. On the other hand, the timing at which the operation instruction display ends and the timing at which the light-emitting portion of the movable frame body changes from the off state to the light-emitting effect state or the specific light-emitting effect state may differ depending on the effect pattern. Specific examples of effects in each effect pattern will be shown below with reference to FIGS. 283(A) to 284(B).

283(A) to 284(B), the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are housed in the door frame top unit 570 in the initial state (before timing t0). state (hereinafter sometimes referred to as first state or standby state). In this state, when the ready-to-win effect state corresponding to the special lottery result occurs at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t4) between timing t0 and timing t7, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 rise at the same time. is started (timing t7).

At the same time, in the center of the game board side effect display device 1600, display of the simulated image of the movable frame is started. At the same time, display of a simulated door-frame top unit image, which is an image simulating the door-frame top unit 570, also starts. The frame movable body simulated image is specifically composed of an image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and an image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200 . As for the simulated image of the movable frame, the image simulating the movable right ear frame 7100 and the image simulating the movable left ear frame 7200 rise in accordance with the actual rise of the movable right ear frame 7100 and the movable left ear frame 7200. It is dynamically displayed in a manner that The simulated image of the movable frame is an image simulating the movable right ear frame 7100 and the movable left ear frame in accordance with the timing (timing t9) when the actual movement of the movable right ear frame 7100 and the movable left ear frame 7200 ends (timing t9). The rise of the image simulating the body 7200 is finished, and thereafter it continues to be displayed in a mode indicating a stopped state (after timing t9). The right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 complete their rising at timing t9 two seconds after starting to rise at timing t7 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a second state or rising state). Become.

On the other hand, at timing t9, the reception of the operation to the operation unit becomes effective, and the display of an image instructing the operation of the operation unit (hereinafter sometimes referred to as operation instruction display) on the game board side effect display device 1600 is started. be. As the operation instruction display, for example, an image imitating the appearance of the operation button 410 may be displayed, or a character string (for example, a character string “Push!!”) instructing the operation of the operation unit may be displayed. may Note that the operation valid period continues until an operation is accepted for the operation unit (timing t14 in the example shown below) or until a predetermined time elapses (until timing t18). Also, at timing t9, all the frame movable body light-emitting sections are turned off from the light-emitting state.

FIGS. 283(A) and 283(B) show the effects when the operating section is operated at timing t14 after the period in which the operation to the operating section is valid starts (timing t9). showing. In these production patterns, the operation instruction display ends at timing t14, and the frame movable body light-emitting section enters a predetermined light emission production state corresponding to the result of the special lottery.

FIG. 283(A) shows an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a big hit, and when the operation unit is operated (timing t14), the light emitting unit of the movable frame changes from the off state to the normal state. It becomes a specific light emission effect state different from the light emission effect state. In this way, when the frame movable body light-emitting portion enters the specific light-emitting effect state, it is indicated to the player that the special lottery result is a big win.

On the other hand, FIG. 283(B) is an effect pattern in the case where the special lottery result is a loss. It will be in a light emitting state. In this way, the movable frame body light-emitting portion is brought into the normal light-emitting effect state, thereby indicating to the player that the special lottery result is lost.

In the specific lighting effect state, compared with the light emitting state in the normal lighting effect state, the flashing state of the light becomes faster, the amount of light becomes stronger, and the number of colors increases, so that the player feels more stimulation. It is preferable to employ a light emission mode. In this way, the special lottery result indicates that the special lottery result is a big win by allowing the player to visually recognize the effect state of the specific light emission mode which is different from the normal state. Specifically, in the specific lighting effect state, the inner portion of the movable frame body and the outer portion of the movable frame body may be set to the light emitting state in different manners. For example, the inner portion of the movable frame body may be configured to be visually recognizable in a luminescence mode with a stronger stimulus than the outer portion of the movable frame body. It should be noted that this definition of the specific light-emitting effect state and the normal light-emitting effect state may be applied to other embodiments.

284(A) and 284(B), after the period in which the operation to the operation unit is valid starts (timing t9), the player does not operate the operation unit during the operation valid period, It shows an effect mode when the operation valid period ends at timing t18 after a predetermined time has passed. In these production patterns, the operation instruction display ends at timing t18, and the frame movable body light-emitting section enters a predetermined light emission production state according to the special lottery result.

FIG. 284(A) shows the effect pattern when the special lottery result is a big hit. It is in the production state. In this way, when the frame movable body light-emitting portion enters the specific light-emitting effect state, it is indicated to the player that the special lottery result is a big win.

On the other hand, FIG. 284(B) is an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a loss, and at the timing (timing t18) when the operation valid period ends, the light emitting part of the frame movable body becomes a normal light emitting effect state. . In this way, the light-emitting portion is brought into the normal light-emitting effect state, thereby indicating to the player that the special lottery result is lost.

In each effect pattern shown in FIGS. 283(A) to 284(B), at a predetermined timing (timing t20) after the expiration of the effective period of operation, the varying decorative pattern corresponds to the result of the special lottery. is displayed. For example, in the case of the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 283(A) and 284(A), the special lottery result is a square pattern (for example, "7", "7", "7") indicating that the result is a big hit. In the case of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 283(B) and FIG. 284(B), the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the reach-losing mode (for example, "7", "6", "7") indicating that the special lottery result is a loser. ) to stop and display the decorative pattern.

At the timing (timing t22) when two seconds have passed since the decorative pattern stopped, the frame movable body moves to the raised position (second state ) to the retracted position (first state). At the same time, the simulated image of the movable frame is displayed in a manner in which it descends in accordance with the actual downward movement of the movable right ear frame 7100 and the movable left ear frame 7200 . At the timing (timing t24) when the movement of the movable frame body to the storage position is completed, the simulated image of the movable frame body changes to a display mode in which the descent is completed in accordance with the actual descent movement of the movable frame body. Display ends.

When the special lottery result is a big win, it is preferable to change the light emission state of the frame movable body from the specific light emission performance state to the normal light emission performance state at a predetermined timing during the big win. If the special lottery result is a loss, the normal lighting effect state is continued, and the variation of the next decorative pattern is started.

Figures 285(A) to 285(C) show the moving state of the frame movable body, the display mode of the frame movable body simulated image, and the reception of the operation unit when the performance pattern shown in Figure 283(A) is executed. 4 schematically shows changes in the state, the state of the operation instruction display, and the light emitting state of the frame movable body with the lapse of time. As described above, the effect pattern shown in FIG. 283(A) is the effect pattern when the player operates the operation unit when the special lottery result is a big win.

FIG. 285(A) shows the state at timing t5, the decorative pattern is fluctuating in the ready-to-reach state, the frame movable body is in the retracted position (first state) in the normal light emitting state, The frame movable body simulation image is not displayed, the operation section is in the operation invalid period, and the operation instruction display is not displayed.

FIG. 285(B) shows the state at timing t8, the decorative pattern is fluctuating in the ready-to-reach state, and the frame movable body is in the light emitting state from the retracted position (first state) to the raised position (second state). The simulated image of the movable frame is a display simulating a state during movement from the retracted position (first state) to the raised position (second state), and the operation section is disabled. It is a period, and the operation instruction display is hidden.

FIG. 285(C) shows the state at timing t11, the decorative pattern is fluctuating in the ready-to-reach state, the movable frame is in the off state and in the raised position (second state), and the simulated image of the movable frame is A display simulating the frame movable body positioned at the raised position (second state) is provided, and an operation valid period is started in the operation section, and an image simulating the operation section is displayed as an instruction display as an operation instruction display. ing.

FIG. 286(A) shows the state at timing t19, the decorative pattern is fluctuating in the ready-to-reach state, the frame movable body is in the raised position (second state) in the special light emitting state, and the frame movable body is simulated. The image is displayed simulating the raised position (second state), the operation section is in the operation invalid period, and the operation instruction display is not displayed.

FIG. 286(B) shows the state at timing t23, in which the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a grid mode (for example, "7", "7", "7") indicating that the special lottery result is a big hit. The frame movable body is moving from the raised position (second state) to the retracted position (first state) in the special lighting effect state, and the simulated image of the frame movable body moves from the raised position (second state) to the retracted position ( The display simulates the state during movement to the first state), the operation unit is in the operation invalid period, and the operation instruction display is not displayed.

FIG. 286(C) shows the state at timing t28, in which the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a grid mode (for example, "7", "7", "7") indicating that the special lottery result is a big hit. The frame movable body is located at the retracted position (first state) in the special light emission effect state, the frame movable body simulated image is not displayed, the operation section is in the operation invalid period, and the operation instruction display is not displayed. .

In this way, by displaying the simulated image of the movable frame at the timing when the movable frame starts to move, it is possible to change the lighting mode according to the operation of the movable frame and the operation of the operation unit. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player misses the In addition, the movable frame body appears at a position not conventionally available in response to the result of the special lottery (for example, in response to the occurrence of the ready-to-win effect), so that the player can be greatly surprised and amused. In addition, by changing the light emission mode of the movable frame light-emitting section when the player operates the operation section, it is possible to give the player the feeling that he/she has decided the result of the special lottery. becomes.

FIGS. 287(A) to 287(F) show modifications of the frame movable body described with reference to FIGS. 282(A) to 282(E). 287(A) and 287(B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 287(C) and 287(D) are plan views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 287(E) and 287(F) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 287(A), 287(C), and 287(E) show a state (first state) in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are stored in the door frame top unit 570. showing. 287(B), 287(D), and 287(F) show a state (second state) in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 protrude upward from the door frame top unit 570. ing.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 287(C) and 287(E), the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are respectively in the standby position (first state), and the A right ear frame movable body rotating shaft 7140 and a left ear frame movable body rotating shaft 7240 are provided on the sides, and when viewed from the right side, the right ear frame movable body rotates by 90 degrees counterclockwise. 7100 and left ear frame movable body 7200 move from the standby position (first state) to the moving position (second state). The frame movable body having such a structure may be configured to execute the performance patterns described above with reference to FIGS. 283(A) to 284(B). A modified example of a time chart, which will be described later, may be applied to the frame movable body having such a structure.

FIGS. 288(A) to 288(F) show modifications of the frame movable body described with reference to FIGS. 287(A) to 287(F). 288(A) and 288(B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 288(C) and 288(D) are plan views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 288(E) and 288(F) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 288(A), 288(C), and 288(E) show the state (first state) in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are stored in the door frame top unit 570. FIG. ing. 288(B), 288(D), and 288(F) show a state (second state) in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 protrude upward from the door frame top unit 570. ing.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 288(C) and 288(E), the frame movable body has a rotation shaft on the back side, and rotates clockwise by 90 degrees when viewed from the right side. As a result, the movable frame body moves from the standby position (first state) to the moving position (second state). The frame movable body having such a structure may be configured to execute the performance patterns described above with reference to FIGS. 283(A) to 284(B). A modified example of a time chart, which will be described later, may be applied to the frame movable body having such a structure.

FIGS. 289(A) to 289(E) show modifications of the frame movable body described with reference to FIGS. 282(A) to 282(E). 289(A) and 289(B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 289(C) is a plan view of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 289(D) and 289(E) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 289(A), 289(C), and 289(D) show the state (first state) in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are stored in the door frame top unit 570. FIG. ing. 289(B) and 289(E) show a state in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 protrude upward from the door frame top unit 570 (second state).

In this embodiment, the upper portion of the movable frame is visible in the front view in the standby state (first state). The frame movable body having such a structure may be configured to execute the performance patterns described above with reference to FIGS. 283(A) to 284(B). A modified example of a time chart, which will be described later, may be applied to the frame movable body having such a structure. In this manner, in the standby state, a part of the movable frame body can be visually recognized from the front view, so that the player can be reminded that the movable frame body will move. Further, during a normal game, only the right ear-frame movable body outer light-emitting part 7118 and the left ear-frame movable body outer light-emitting part 7218 are set to the normal light emission effect state, and only when the specific light emission effect state is set, the inside of the right ear frame movable body is set. The light emitting portion 7116 and the left ear frame movable body inner light emitting portion 7216 may also be configured to emit light. Also, the movable frame body having another structure may be configured to employ a similar light emission pattern.

FIGS. 290(A) to 290(F) show modifications of the frame movable body described with reference to FIGS. 289(A) to 289(E). 290(A) and 290(B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 290(C) and 290(D) are plan views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 290(E) and 290(F) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. FIGS. 290(A), 290(C), and 290(E) show the state (first state) in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are housed in the door frame top unit 570. FIG. ing. 290(B), 290(D), and 290(F) show a state (second state) in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 protrude upward from the door frame top unit 570. FIG. ing.

In this embodiment, in the standby position (first state), the left and right movable frame bodies are adjacent to each other, and the upper part of the movable frame body is visible when viewed from the front. In this embodiment, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are housed in the upper both ear openings 7040 of the door frame top unit. In addition, the movable frame bodies are configured to be movable upward while being separated from each other in the left-right direction. In the state of moving to the movement position (second state), it becomes visible to the player in the same state as in FIG. 282(B). The frame movable body having such a structure may be configured to execute the performance patterns described above with reference to FIGS. 283(A) to 284(B). A modified example of a time chart, which will be described later, may be applied to the frame movable body having such a structure.

291(A) to 291(E) show another embodiment in which a door frame top unit 570 constituting the door frame 3 is provided with a frame movable body. In this embodiment, the frame movable body is rotatable, and the specific structure and operation mode will be described later.

291(A) and 291(B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 291(C) is a plan view of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 291(D) and 291(E) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 291(A), 291(C), and 291(D) show a state in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are stored in the door frame top unit 570. FIG. 291(B) and 291(E) show that the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIGS. It shows a state in which it is rotated by 90 degrees and protrudes upward from the door frame top unit 570 .

The door frame top unit 570 is made of a white translucent synthetic resin, and in the housed state shown in FIG. configured to be invisible. On the other hand, when the player views the door frame top unit 570 obliquely from above, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 can be visually recognized as shown in FIG. 291(C).

As shown in FIGS. 291(A) to 291(E), the door frame top unit 570 has a door frame top unit upper right ear opening 7000 and a door frame top unit upper left ear opening 7010 . The shape of the door frame top unit upper right ear opening 7000 and the door frame top unit upper left ear opening 7010 is a vertically long rectangular shape when viewed from above. Further, in the door frame top unit 570, there are a door frame top unit right light emitting portion 7050 that illuminates the right ear frame movable body 7100, and a door frame top unit left light emitting portion 7052 that illuminates the left ear frame movable body 7200. is provided. Except for these points, the door frame top unit 570 in this embodiment basically has the same structure as the structure described with reference to FIGS. 282(A) to 282(E). .

As shown in FIGS. 291(A) to 291(E), the door frame top unit 570 in this embodiment includes a right ear frame movable body 7100 on the left side and a left ear frame movable body 7200 on the right side in a front view. there is Specific structures and operation modes of these are shown below. Since right ear frame movable body 7100 and left ear frame movable body 7200 basically have the same structure, only right ear frame movable body 7100 will be described as a representative in the following description.

Figures 291(A), 291(C), and 291(D) show the state in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 is in the retracted state. The right ear frame movable body 7100 in the housed state has a vertically long rectangular shape in a plan view, with the right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 facing downward and the right ear frame movable body second surface facing upward. 7120. The right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 is composed of a right ear frame movable body first surface inner decorative portion 7112 made of an inner colored (specifically pink) transparent synthetic resin and an outer white translucent synthetic resin. The right ear frame movable body first surface outer decorative portion 7114 is provided. On the other hand, the second surface 7120 of the right ear frame movable body is entirely made of gray opaque synthetic resin. The other surfaces (upper surface, left side surface, right side surface) of the right ear frame movable body 7100 are made of the same white translucent synthetic resin as the first surface outer decorative portion 7114 of the right ear frame movable body 7114 . The left ear frame movable body 7200 has the same structure as the right ear frame movable body 7100 .

The right ear frame movable body 7100 has a right ear frame movable body rotation shaft 7140 . Further, the right ear frame movable body rotating shaft 7140 is attached near the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570 . The right ear frame movable body 7100 can rotate about the horizontal direction as an axis by transmitting power from a pulse motor (not shown) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 to the right ear frame movable body rotating shaft 7140. is. The left ear frame movable body 7200 also has a left ear frame movable body rotating shaft 7240 having a similar structure, and power from a pulse motor (not shown) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 is applied to the left ear frame movable body rotating shaft. By being transmitted to 7240, it is possible to rotate about the horizontal direction as an axis. The right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are independently controlled by pulse motors (not shown) to rotate clockwise or counterclockwise by an arbitrary angle when viewed from the right. , and can be stopped at any angle.

As shown in FIGS. 291(A) to 291(E), the door frame top unit 570 is provided with a door frame top unit right light emitting section 7050 for illuminating the right ear frame movable body 7100 . The right light emitting part 7050 in the door frame top unit is installed in a state rotated clockwise by about 30 degrees from the horizontal plane when viewed from the right. The right light emitting part 7050 in the door frame top unit is specifically composed of a printed circuit board coated with a white protective film on both sides. A light emitting diode capable of emitting light to the first surface 7110 is mounted on the top surface. By causing the light-emitting diode to emit light in a predetermined color, it is possible to make the first surface 7110 of the right ear frame movable body have a predetermined light-emitting effect. The left light emitting portion 7052 in the door frame top unit also has the same structure as the right light emitting portion 7050 in the door frame top unit.

The right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are driven by a drive mechanism (not shown) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 as shown in FIGS. The door frame top unit 570 can be stopped at an arbitrary position rotated by a predetermined angle from the standby position in the door frame top unit 570 . Fig. 291(B) and Fig. 291(E) are examples, in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are rotated 90 degrees clockwise when viewed from the right from the retracted state, and are positioned vertically. In this state, the right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 and the left ear frame movable body first surface 7210 face the front and stop. The right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 have a shape imitating an animal's ear, and are housed in the door frame top unit 570 and vertical from the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570. By taking the above, it is possible to express the state of the animal's ears standing up decoratively.

In addition, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 can be visually recognized by the player in a rotated state by continuously driving a drive mechanism (not shown) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510. is. When rotating in this manner, it is preferable to rotate the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 multiple times in the same direction at a speed of about one rotation per second. It can also be said that FIGS. 291(B) and 291(E) show the state in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are rotating. The directions of rotation of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 may be configured to rotate clockwise a plurality of times when viewed from the right, or to rotate counterclockwise a plurality of times viewed from the right. It may be configured as With such a configuration, the first surface 7110 of the movable right ear frame and the second surface 7120 of the movable right ear frame are alternately visible to the player. Also, the first surface 7210 of the movable left ear frame and the second surface 7220 of the movable left ear frame are alternately visible to the player.

The right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 can be stopped or rotated at a predetermined position, and light is emitted from the right light emitting part 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left light emitting part 7052 in the door frame top unit. Although it has been described that the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 can be brought into a predetermined decorative state by light, a specific example will be shown below.

As shown in FIGS. 291(A), 291(C), and 291(D), the right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear of the left ear frame movable body 7200 With the first surface 7210 of the movable frame facing downward, when light is emitted from the right side light emitting portion 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left side light emitting portion 7052 in the door frame top unit, the inside of the door frame top unit 570 By the light reflected by , the entire door frame top unit 570 can dimly emit light. This is because the door frame top unit 570 is made of white translucent synthetic resin.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 291(B) and FIG. In the state where the first surface 7210 faces forward, when light is emitted from the right side light emitting portion 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left side light emitting portion 7052 in the door frame top unit, the light illuminates the right ear frame movable body. It is possible for the player to visually recognize the state in which the first surface 7110 and the first surface 7210 of the left ear frame movable body are decorated. In this case as well, part of the light emitted from the right side light emitting portion 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left side light emitting portion 7052 in the door frame top unit is emitted to the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200. Since the reflected light illuminates the door frame top unit 570 from the inside, the entire door frame top unit 570 can be visually recognized by the player in a slightly dim state.

On the other hand, when the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are rotated and light is emitted from the right light emitting portion 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left light emitting portion 7052 in the door frame top unit, the light is emitted. The light alternately illuminates the first surface 7110 of the movable right ear frame, the second surface 7120 of the movable right ear frame, and the first surface 7210 of the movable left ear frame and the second surface 7220 of the movable left ear frame. state. In addition, the entire door frame top unit 570 can be visually recognized by the player in a slightly faintly lit state.

In this manner, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are positioned above the upper surfaces of the outer frame 2 and the door frame base unit 100 in a stopped state or rotated. When the player looks up, the area occupied by the field of vision is increased, and the housing looks as if the volume of the housing has increased, so that it is possible to provide the player with unexpected surprises and amusement.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 292(A) to 293(B), a specific operation mode of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the game board side according to the motion mode of the frame movable body. The display mode of the frame movable body simulation image, which is an image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the operation button 410 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as an operation unit). An example of an effect combining a player's operation reception mode, a light emission mode of the right light emitting portion 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left light emitting portion 7052 in the door frame top unit, etc. is shown.

292(A) to 293(B) respectively show the operation mode of the movable frame and the display of the simulated image of the movable frame, which is an image simulating the movable frame displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. 16 is a time chart showing a state, a reception state of an operation unit, a display state of an operation instruction display displayed on a game board side effect display device 1600, and a light irradiation mode for a frame movable body.

FIG. 292(A) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a big win and the player operates the operation unit during the period when the operation acceptance for the operation unit is valid. there is FIG. 292(B) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a loss and the player operates the operation unit during the period when the operation reception for the operation unit is valid. there is FIG. 293(A) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a big win and the player does not operate the operating section during the period when the acceptance of operating the operating section is valid. ing. FIG. 293(B) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a loss and the player does not operate the operation unit during the period when operation reception for the operation unit is valid. ing.

In each production pattern shown in FIGS. 292(A) to 293(B), the timing at which the frame movable body changes from the standby state (first state) to the rotating state (second state), and display of the frame movable body simulated image. The mode, the timing at which operation acceptance for the operation unit becomes valid, the timing at which the operation instruction display is started, and the timing at which the light irradiation mode for the frame movable body changes from the light emitting state to the extinguished state are the same. On the other hand, the timing at which the operation instruction display ends, the timing at which the movable frame body changes from the rotating state (second state) to another state, and the light irradiation state of the movable frame body from the off state to the light emitting state or the specific light emitting state The timing may differ depending on the production pattern. Specific examples of effects in each effect pattern will be shown below with reference to FIGS. 292(A) to 293(B).

292(A) to 293(B), the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are housed in the door frame top unit 570 in the initial state (before timing t0). 291(A), 291(C), and 291(D), the right ear frame is movable. The body first surface 7110 and the left ear frame movable body first surface 7210 face downward. In this state, when the ready-to-win effect state corresponding to the special lottery result occurs at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t4) between timing t0 and timing t9, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 move to timing t9. , the rotation is started at the same time, and a state in which the rotation is continued (hereinafter, may be referred to as a second state or a rotating state). The direction of rotation is clockwise when viewed from the right, and the speed of rotation is the speed of one rotation per second.

At the same time, in the center of the game board side effect display device 1600, display of the simulated image of the movable frame is started. At the same time, display of a simulated door-frame top unit image, which is an image simulating the door-frame top unit 570, also starts. The frame movable body simulated image is specifically composed of an image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and an image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200 . As for the simulated image of the movable frame, the image simulating the movable right ear frame 7100 and the image simulating the movable left ear frame 7200 are the same according to the actual rotation of the movable right ear frame 7100 and the movable left ear frame 7200. It continues to be displayed dynamically in a rotating manner. The rotation speed of the image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200 are also set to rotate at the same speed as the actual rotation speed of the frame movable body (the speed of one rotation per second). Is displayed. As a result, when the right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 and the left ear frame movable body first surface 7210 are in a rotated state facing the front as shown in FIGS. The image simulating the movable frame body 7100 and the image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200 are also the image simulating the first surface 7110 of the right ear frame movable body of the image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7100 . An image simulating the left ear frame movable body first surface 7210 included in the image simulating the frame movable body 7200 is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 as a frame movable body simulated image in a front facing manner.

On the other hand, at timing t9, the reception of the operation to the operation unit becomes effective, and the display of an image instructing the operation of the operation unit (hereinafter sometimes referred to as operation instruction display) on the game board side effect display device 1600 is started. be. As the operation instruction display, for example, an image imitating the appearance of the operation button 410 may be displayed, or a character string (for example, a character string “Push!!”) instructing the operation of the operation unit may be displayed. may Note that the operation valid period continues until an operation is accepted for the operation unit (timing t14 in the example shown below) or until a predetermined time elapses (until timing t18). Further, at timing t9, the right light emitting portion 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left light emitting portion 7052 in the door frame top unit, which irradiate light to the movable frame body, change from the light emitting state to the extinguished state.

FIGS. 292(A) and 292(B) show the effects when the operating section is operated at timing t14 after the period during which the operation to the operating section is valid starts (timing t9). showing. In these effect patterns, the operation instruction display ends at timing t14, the movable frame body that has been rotating until then stops at a predetermined rotation angle corresponding to the result of the special lottery, and the light to the movable frame body is turned on. The lighting mode becomes a predetermined lighting effect state corresponding to the result of the special lottery.

FIG. 292(A) shows an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a big hit, and when the operation unit is operated (timing t14), the right ear frame movable body 7100 moves to the first right ear frame movable body. A state in which the left ear frame movable body 7200 is vertically stopped with the surface 7110 on the front side and the left ear frame movable body 7200 is vertically stopped with the left ear frame movable body first surface 7210 on the front side (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a third state). Become. At the same time, the lighting mode of light to the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 enters a specific light emitting effect state different from the normal light emitting state. In this way, the special lottery result indicates to the player that the special lottery result is a big win when the light irradiation mode becomes the specific light emission effect state.

On the other hand, FIG. 292B shows an effect pattern in the case where the special lottery result is a loser. A state in which the left ear frame movable body 7200 is vertically stopped with the second surface 7120 on the front side and the left ear frame movable body 7200 is vertically stopped with the second surface 7220 on the front side (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a fourth state) ). At the same time, the illumination state of the light for the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 changes from the off state to the normal light emitting state. In this way, by changing the light irradiation state to the normal light emitting state, it is shown to the player that the special lottery result is lost.

293(A) and 293(B), after the period in which the operation to the operation unit is valid starts (timing t9), the player does not operate the operation unit during the operation valid period, It shows an effect mode when the operation valid period ends at timing t18 after a predetermined time has passed. In these production patterns, the operation instruction display ends at timing t18, and the movable frame body that has been rotating until then automatically stops at a predetermined rotation angle corresponding to the result of the special lottery. The illumination mode of the light to the is set to a predetermined light emission performance state corresponding to the result of the special lottery.

FIG. 293(A) shows an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a big hit. The left ear frame movable body 7200 stops vertically with the left ear frame movable body first surface 7210 facing forward (third state). At the same time, the lighting mode of light to the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 enters a specific light emitting effect state different from the normal light emitting state. In this way, the special lottery result indicates to the player that the special lottery result is a big win when the light irradiation mode becomes the specific light emission effect state.

On the other hand, FIG. 293(B) shows an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a loss. The left ear frame movable body 7200 stops vertically with the left ear frame movable body second surface 7220 facing forward (fourth state). At the same time, the illumination state of the light for the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 changes from the off state to the normal light emitting state. In this way, by changing the light irradiation state to the normal light emitting state, it is shown to the player that the special lottery result is lost.

In each effect pattern shown in FIGS. 292(A) to 293(B), at a predetermined timing (timing t20) after the expiration of the valid operation period, the varying decorative pattern corresponds to the result of the special lottery. is displayed. For example, in the case of the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 292(A) and 293(A), the special lottery result is a square pattern (for example, "7", "7", "7") indicating that the result is a big hit. In the case of the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 292(B) and 293(B), the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, and a reach-losing mode indicating that the special lottery result is a loser (for example, "7", "6", "7", etc.) ) to stop and display the decorative pattern.

At the timing (timing t24) when 4 seconds have passed since the decorative pattern stopped, the right ear frame movable body maintains either the specific lighting effect state or the normal lighting effect state. A state in which the first surface 7110 and the left ear frame movable body first surface 7210 face forward (third state), or the right ear frame movable body second surface 7120 and the left ear frame movable body second surface 7220 face forward. The state is changed from the facing state (fourth state) to a state in which the right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 and the left ear frame movable body first surface 7210 face downward (first state). At the same time, the display of the simulated image of the movable frame ends.

When the special lottery result is a big win, it is preferable to change the lighting state of light to the frame movable body from the specific light emission performance state to the normal light emission performance state at a predetermined timing during the big win. If the special lottery result is a loss, the normal lighting effect state is continued, and the variation of the next decorative pattern is started.

In this manner, the movable frame body simulated image is displayed at the timing when the movable frame body changes from the waiting state (first state) to the rotating state (second state). It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player overlooks the second state). In addition, in response to the result of the special lottery (for example, in response to the occurrence of the ready-to-win effect), the movable frame body appears at a position that has never existed before, so that the player can be greatly surprised and amused. . Further, when the player operates the operation unit, the movable frame stops in a predetermined stop state (third state or fourth state) and changes the light irradiation mode of the movable frame. It is possible to give the player a feeling as if he himself decided the result of the special lottery.

FIGS. 294(A) to 294(E) show modifications of the frame movable body described with reference to FIGS. 291(A) to 291(E). 294(A) and 294(B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 294(C) is a plan view of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 294(D) and 294(E) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. FIGS. 294(A), 294(C), and 294(D) show the state (first state) where the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are at the standby position. 294(B) and 294(E) show a state (second state) in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are rotating.

In this embodiment, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 respectively have a right ear frame movable body rotation shaft 7140 and a left ear frame movable body rotation shaft 7240 at their lower portions. Further, the vertical thickness of the door frame top unit 570 is smaller than that of the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 291(A) to 291(E). Further, the right ear frame movable body rotating shaft 7140 and the left ear frame movable body rotating shaft 7240 are provided so as to be orthogonal to the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570 . Also, the upper halves of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are positioned higher than the upper surfaces of the outer frame 2 and the door frame base unit 100 .

In the state where the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are in the standby position (first state), the right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 and the left ear frame movable body first surface 7210 face each other. positioned. On the other hand, in the rotated state, the right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 rotates clockwise in plan view, and the left ear frame movable body first surface 7210 rotates counterclockwise in plan view. For example, in FIGS. 294(B) and 294(E), the right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 is rotated 90 degrees clockwise in plan view, and the left ear frame movable body first surface 7210 is rotated clockwise in plan view. It can also be said that it shows a state rotated counterclockwise by 90 degrees. By adopting such a rotation mode, the right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 is rotated counterclockwise in plan view, and the left ear frame movable body first surface 7210 is rotated clockwise in plan view. Compared to the case where the frame is rotated around, even if a player or a store clerk carelessly puts their hand or face close to the movable frame body, the hand or face may be dragged behind the machine and injured. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of The frame movable body having such a structure may be configured to execute the effect patterns described above with reference to FIGS. 292(A) to 293(B). A modified example of a time chart, which will be described later, may be applied to the frame movable body having such a structure.

FIGS. 295(A) to 295(E) show modifications of the frame movable body described with reference to FIGS. 294(A) to 294(E). 295(A) and 295(B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 295(C) is a plan view of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 295(D) and 295(E) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. FIGS. 295(A), 295(C), and 295(D) show the state (first state) where the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are at the standby position. 295(B) and 295(E) show a state (second state) in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are rotated from the door frame top unit 570. FIG.

Also in this embodiment, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are provided so as to be orthogonal to the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570 . On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a part of the door frame top unit 570 protrudes upward so as to cover the top, left, right, and rear of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200. is doing. In addition, the right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body first surface 7210 of the left ear frame movable body 7200 are colored (specifically, pink) and transparent. It is made of resin. Further, the right ear frame movable body second surface 7120 of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body second surface 7220 of the left ear frame movable body 7200 are each formed of gray opaque synthetic resin. In this embodiment as well, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 can be in the same state as the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 294(A) to 294(E). . By providing a portion that covers the movable frame body in this way, even if a player or a store clerk carelessly brings his or her hand or face close to the movable frame body, the hand or face will be placed behind the game machine. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the person is dragged and injured. The frame movable body having such a structure may be configured to execute the performance patterns described above with reference to FIGS. 292(A) to 293(B). A modified example of a time chart, which will be described later, may be applied to the frame movable body having such a structure.

Figures 296(A) to 296(E) show modifications of the frame movable body described with reference to Figures 295(A) to 295(E). 296(A) and 296(B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 296(C) is a plan view of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 296(D) and 296(E) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. FIGS. 296(A), 296(C), and 296(D) show the state (first state) where the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are at the standby position. 296(B) and 296(E) show a state (second state) in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are rotated from the door frame top unit 570. FIG.

In this embodiment as well, a portion of the door frame top unit 570 protrudes upward so as to cover the top, left, right, and rear of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200. . On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the upwardly projecting portion and the right ear frame movable body 7100, or the upwardly projecting portion and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are integrally configured, and after they move forward, The right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 start to rotate. FIG. 296(D) shows the state before starting forward movement, and FIG. 296(E) shows the state after forward movement is completed.

In this embodiment as well, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 can be in the same state as the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 294(A) to 294(E). . By providing a portion that covers the movable frame body in this way, even if a player or a store clerk carelessly brings his or her hand or face close to the movable frame body, the hand or face will be placed behind the game machine. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the person is dragged and injured. By covering the front portion of the upwardly protruding portion with a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 can be visually recognized, but cannot be touched by a player or a store clerk. It may be configured as

The frame movable body having such a structure may be configured to execute the performance patterns described above with reference to FIGS. 292(A) to 293(B). In this case, the upwardly projecting portion and the right ear frame movable body 7100, and the upwardly projecting portion and the left ear frame movable body 7200 may be moved forward from timing t5 to timing t7, or from timing t7 to timing t7. It may be performed over timing t9. Further, an image simulating the upwardly projecting portion may be used as the movable frame simulated image, and may be displayed at the timing when the upwardly projecting portion starts to move. A modified example of a time chart, which will be described later, may be applied to the frame movable body having such a structure.

282 to 284, an embodiment in which the door frame top unit 570 is provided with a movable frame and a simulated image of the movable frame is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 is shown. 299 show variations of this embodiment. In the embodiment described below, the door frame top unit 570 includes a right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and a right ear outer frame movable body 7350 instead of the right ear frame movable body 7100, and replaces the left ear frame movable body 7200 with A left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and a left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are provided.

297(A) and 297(B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 297(C) and 297(D) are plan views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 297(E) and 297(F) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 297(A), 297(C), and 297(E) show a door frame top unit 570 in which the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, the left It shows a state in which the ear outer frame movable body 7450 is housed (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a first state). 297(B), 297(D), and 297(F) show that from the door frame top unit 570, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, A state in which the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 protrudes upward (hereinafter, may be referred to as a second state).

As shown in FIGS. 297(A) to 297(F), the door frame top unit 570 in this embodiment has a right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and a right ear outer frame movable body 7350 on the left side and a right ear outer frame movable body 7350 on the right side in a front view. A left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and a left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are provided. Specific structures and operation modes of these are shown below. Since the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 basically have the same structure, in the following description, Only the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 may be representatively described.

In the embodiments shown with reference to FIGS. 297(A) to 297(F) and FIGS. 306(A) to 306(E) described later, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are sometimes referred to as frame movable bodies. In addition, when the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 are referred to as the inner frame movable body, and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are referred to as the outer frame movable body. There is

The right ear inner frame movable body 7300 is a movable body having a rectangular shape elongated in the front-rear direction in a plan view of the housed state. The right ear inner frame movable body 7300 has a right ear inner frame movable body first surface 7310 facing upward in the housed state (first state) and facing forward in the protruding state (second state), and a right ear inner frame movable body first surface 7310 facing forward in the housed state (first state). and the second surface 7320 of the right ear inner frame movable body facing rearward in the protruding state (second state). The right ear inner frame movable body first surface 7310 is made of colored (specifically pink) transparent synthetic resin. The surfaces of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 other than the right ear inner frame movable body first surface 7310 (upper surface, left side, right side, right ear inner frame movable body second surface 7320) are white translucent synthetic resin. formed by The left ear inner frame movable body 7400 has the same structure as the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 .

The right ear outer frame movable body 7350 is a movable body having a vertically long rectangular shape when viewed from the front. and a surface 7370 . The right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360, the right ear outer frame movable body second surface 7370, and other surfaces (upper surface, left side surface, right side surface) of the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 are white translucent. It is made of synthetic resin. The left ear outer frame movable body 7450 has the same structure as the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 .

Inside the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, a rectangular right ear inner frame movable body light emitting portion 7330 is provided. Further, inside the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, a square-shaped right ear outer frame movable body light emitting portion 7380 is provided.

Specifically, the right ear inner frame movable body light emitting portion 7330 and the right ear outer frame movable body light emitting portion 7380 are configured by printed circuit boards coated with white protective films on both sides. A light-emitting diode that can emit light toward the player side in the projected state (second state) is mounted on the surface. The right ear inner frame movable body light emitting portion 7330 and the right ear outer frame movable body light emitting portion 7380 are controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 to emit light in a predetermined light emitting manner. The left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 also have the same structure as the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 .

The right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 are rotated by a driving mechanism (not shown) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 to rotate the right ear inner frame movable body rotating shaft 7340 and the left ear inner frame movable body. The door frame top unit 570 as shown in FIGS. 297(A), 297(C), and 297(E) is rotated counterclockwise by 90 degrees as viewed from the right using the shaft 7440 as a rotation axis. 297(B), 297(D), and 297(F) from the state stored in the standby position (first state) upward from the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570 as shown in FIGS. It is possible to control to a state (second state) protruding to the side.

On the other hand, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are moved upward by a drive mechanism (not shown) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510, respectively, as shown in FIGS. ), from the state (first state) housed in the standby position in the door frame top unit 570 as shown in FIG. 297(E), to FIG. It is possible to control the door frame top unit 570 to vertically protrude upward from the top surface of the door frame top unit 570 as shown (second state).

A right ear inner frame movable body 7300, a right ear outer frame movable body 7350, a left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and a left ear outer frame movable body 7450 vertically protrude upward from the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570. When the state (second state) is reached, as shown in FIG. The player can visually recognize the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 positioned inside. A right ear inner frame movable body 7300 , a right ear outer frame movable body 7350 , a left ear inner frame movable body 7400 , and a left ear outer frame movable body 7450 have shapes imitating animal ears, and are attached to the door frame top unit 570 . By taking a stored state (first state) and a state (second state) protruding vertically upward from the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570, the state in which the animal's ears move can be expressed decoratively. it is possible.

In addition, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 are independently housed in the door frame top unit 570 under the control of the peripheral control board 1510 (first state). It is possible to take a state (second state) projecting vertically upward from the upper surface of the .

In addition, the right ear inner frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 project vertically upward from the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570, respectively. When it is in the state (second state), it is independently housed in the door frame top unit 570 by the control of the peripheral control board 1510 (first state), and from the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570 It is possible to change the state to a state of vertically protruding upward (second state).

In this embodiment, the door frame top unit 570 is made of white translucent synthetic resin. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 297(A), when the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are accommodated in the door frame top unit 570, the right ear outer frame movable body light emitting part 7380 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7380 When the outer ear frame movable body light-emitting portion 7480 emits light in a predetermined manner, the front surface of the door frame top unit 570 can be visually recognized by the player in a dimly lit state.

On the other hand, when the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 protrude from the door frame top unit 570, the right ear inner frame is movable. When the body light emitting portion 7330, the right ear outer frame movable body light emitting portion 7380, the left ear inner frame movable body light emitting portion 7430, and the left ear outer frame movable body light emitting portion 7480 are caused to emit light in a predetermined manner, the right ear inner frame The movable body first surface 7310, the right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360, the left ear inner frame movable body first surface 7410, and the left ear outer frame movable body first surface 7460 are visually recognized by the player in a predetermined light emitting state. It is possible to

Note that in a state where the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 protrude from the door frame top unit 570 (second state). , the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 is positioned to cover the back of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 is positioned to cover the back of the left ear inner frame movable body 7400. , the light emitted forward from the right ear outer frame movable body light-emitting portion 7380 and the left ear outer frame movable body light-emitting portion 7480 is emitted from the right ear inner frame movable body second surface 7320 and the left ear inner frame movable body second surface 7420 . Even if it faces, the second surface 7320 of the right ear inner frame movable body and the second surface 7420 of the left inner frame movable body are diffusely reflected backward, and finally, the first surface 7360 of the right ear outer frame movable body and the second surface 7420 of the left ear inner frame movable body Since the light is diffusely reflected forward by the first surface 7460 of the left ear outer frame movable body, the utilization efficiency of the light emitted from the right ear outer frame movable body light emitting section 7380 and the left ear outer frame movable body light emitting section 7480 can be increased.

In this way, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are moved to move the outer frame 2 and the door frame base unit 100. Since it is positioned above the upper surface, it is possible to give the player unprecedented surprises and amusement compared to the case where the movable body in the game board is moved.

298(A) to 299(B), right ear inner frame movable body 7300, right ear outer frame movable body 7350, left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and left ear outer frame movable body 7450. A display mode of a simulated image of a movable frame, which is an image simulating a movable frame, which is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 in accordance with a specific operation mode, an operation mode of the movable frame, and an operation button 410 (hereinafter referred to as an operation button 410). player's operation reception mode for the player's operation on the right ear inner frame movable body light emitting part 7330, right ear outer frame movable body light emitting part 7380, left ear inner frame movable body light emitting part 7430, left ear outer frame movable body Shown is an example of presentation in which the light emitting modes of the body light emitting section 7480 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the frame movable body light emitting section) are combined.

FIGS. 298(A) to 299(B) respectively show the operation mode of the movable frame and the display of the simulated image of the movable frame, which is an image simulating the movable frame displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. 16 is a time chart showing a state, a reception state of an operation unit, a display state of an operation instruction display displayed on a game board side effect display device 1600, and a light emission effect state of a movable frame light emitting unit.

FIG. 298(A) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a big hit and the player operates the operation unit during the period when the operation acceptance for the operation unit is valid. there is FIG. 298(B) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a loss and the player operates the operation unit during the period when the operation reception for the operation unit is valid. there is FIG. 299(A) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a big win and the player does not operate the operating section during the period when the acceptance of operating the operating section is valid. ing. FIG. 299(B) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a loss and the player does not operate the operation unit during the period when the operation acceptance for the operation unit is valid. ing.

Figure 298 (A) ~ Figure 299 (B) in each production pattern shown, the state (first state) in which the inner frame movable body is retracted to the state (second state) protruded state (second state) timing, the frame movable body The display mode of the simulated image, the timing at which the operation acceptance for the operation unit becomes valid, the timing at which the operation instruction display is started, and the timing at which the movable frame light emitting unit changes from the light emitting state to the extinguished state are the same. On the other hand, presence/absence of operation of the outer frame movable body, the timing at which the operation instruction display ends, and the timing at which the frame movable body light-emitting section changes from the off state to the light emitting state or the specific light emitting state may differ depending on the effect pattern. Specific examples of effects in each effect pattern will be shown below with reference to FIGS. 298(A) to 299(B).

298(A) to 299(B), the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are In the initial state (before timing t0), the door frame top unit 570 is in a state of being accommodated (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a first state or standby state). In this state, when the ready-to-win effect state corresponding to the special lottery result occurs at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t4) between timing t0 and timing t7, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 move. When viewed from the right, it starts rotating counterclockwise (timing t7).

At the same time, in the center of the game board side effect display device 1600, display of a part of the simulated image of the movable frame is started. At the same time, display of a simulated door-frame top unit image, which is an image simulating the door-frame top unit 570, also starts. Specifically, the frame movable body simulated image is an image simulating the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, an image simulating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, an image simulating the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and an image simulating the left ear outer frame movable body. and an image imitating the frame movable body 7450 . The simulated image of the movable frame is an image simulating the movable right ear inner frame body 7300 and the movable left ear inner frame body 7400 in accordance with the rotation of the actual right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 . A simulated image is dynamically displayed in a rotating manner. Of the frame movable body simulated images, the image simulating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the image simulating the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are not yet displayed at this stage. An image simulating the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 are displayed in time with the actual timing (timing t9) when the rising of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 ends. After that, the display of the rotating state of the image simulating ends, and then the display continues in the state of indicating the stopped state (after timing t9). The movable body 7300 of the right ear inner frame and the movable body 7400 of the left ear inner frame start to rise at timing t7, and two seconds later, at timing t9, the rotation is completed (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as a second state or a raised state). Yes).

On the other hand, at timing t9, the reception of the operation to the operation unit becomes effective, and the display of an image instructing the operation of the operation unit (hereinafter sometimes referred to as operation instruction display) on the game board side effect display device 1600 is started. be. As the operation instruction display, for example, an image imitating the appearance of the operation button 410 may be displayed, or a character string (for example, a character string “Push!!”) instructing the operation of the operation unit may be displayed. may Note that the operation valid period continues until an operation is accepted for the operation unit (timing t14 in the example shown below) or until a predetermined time elapses (until timing t18). Further, at the timing t9, all the frame movable body light-emitting parts are changed from the light emission effect state to the extinguished state.

FIGS. 298(A) and 298(B) show the effects when the operating section is operated at timing t14 after the period in which the operation to the operating section is valid starts (timing t9). showing. In these production patterns, the operation instruction display ends at timing t14, and the frame movable body light-emitting section enters a predetermined light emission production state corresponding to the result of the special lottery.

FIG. 298(A) shows a production pattern when the special lottery result is a big hit, and when the operation unit is operated (timing t14), the frame movable body light emitting unit changes from the off state to normal light emission production. It becomes a specific light emission production state different from the state. At the same time, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 start to rise from the state (first state) housed in the door frame top unit 570, and two seconds later (timing t16), the rising operation is started. It becomes a completed state (second state). At the same time, in addition to the image simulating the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the image simulating the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, which are already displayed in the stopped mode, on the game board side effect display device 1600, As new simulated frame movable body images, an image simulating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and an image simulating the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are started to be displayed. The image simulating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the image simulating the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are shown in the same manner as the actual upward movement of the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450. From timing t14 to timing t16, the display mode changes from the display mode showing the retracted state to the display mode in which the rising operation is completed. In this way, when the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 have completed the turning motion (second state), the light-out state changes to the specific light-emission effect state, and the light-out state changes to the specific light emission effect. The state in which the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are stored in the door frame top unit 570 (first state) changes to a state (second state) in which the rising operation is completed. , an image simulating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and an image simulating the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are displayed in an ascending manner on the game board side effect display device 1600, whereby a special lottery is offered to the player. It will be shown that the result is a big hit.

On the other hand, FIG. 298(B) shows an effect pattern when the result of the special lottery is a loss. It is in the production state. In this case, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are maintained in the retracted state (first state), and no operation is performed. Also, an image simulating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and an image simulating the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are not displayed. In this way, the special lottery result is given to the player when the frame movable body light-emitting portion enters a normal light emitting state, or when the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 do not operate. It will be shown that it is a failure.

299(A) and 299(B), after the period in which the operation to the operation unit is valid starts (timing t9), the player does not operate the operation unit during the operation valid period, It shows an effect mode when the operation valid period ends at timing t18 after a predetermined time has passed. In these production patterns, the operation instruction display ends at timing t18, and the frame movable body light-emitting section enters a predetermined light emission production state according to the special lottery result.

FIG. 299(A) shows a production pattern when the special lottery result is a big hit, and at the timing (timing t18) when the operation valid period ends, the frame movable body light emitting unit emits specific light different from the normal light emission production state. It is in the production state. At the same time, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 start to rise from the state (first state) housed in the door frame top unit 570, and two seconds later (timing t16), the rising operation is started. It becomes a completed state (second state). At the same time, in addition to the image simulating the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the image simulating the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, which are already displayed in the stopped mode, on the game board side effect display device 1600, As new simulated frame movable body images, an image simulating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and an image simulating the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are started to be displayed. The image simulating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the image simulating the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are shown in the same manner as the actual upward movement of the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450. From timing t18 to timing t20, the display mode changes from the stored state to the display mode in which the rising operation is completed.

In this way, when the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 have completed the turning motion (second state), the light-out state changes to the specific light-emission effect state, and the light-out state changes to the specific light emission effect. The state in which the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are stored in the door frame top unit 570 (first state) changes to a state (second state) in which the rising operation is completed. , an image simulating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and an image simulating the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are displayed in an ascending manner on the game board side effect display device 1600, whereby a special lottery is offered to the player. It will be shown that the result is a big hit.

On the other hand, FIG. 299(B) shows an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a loss, and at the timing (timing t18) when the operation effective period ends, the frame movable body light-emitting portion becomes a normal light-emitting effect state. In this case, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are maintained in the retracted state (first state), and no operation is performed. Also, an image simulating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and an image simulating the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are not displayed. In this way, the special lottery result is given to the player when the frame movable body light-emitting portion enters a normal light emitting state, or when the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 do not operate. It will be shown that it is a failure.

In each production pattern shown in FIGS. 298(A) to 299(B), at a predetermined timing (timing t24) after the expiration of the effective period of operation, the varying decorative pattern corresponds to the result of the special lottery. is displayed. For example, in the case of the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 298(A) and 299(A), the special lottery result is a square pattern (for example, "7", "7", "7") indicating that the result is a big hit. In the case of the production pattern shown in FIG. 298(B) and FIG. 299(B), the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, and a reach-losing mode indicating that the special lottery result is a loser (for example, "7", "6", "7", etc.) ) to stop and display the decorative pattern.

At the timing (timing t26) when two seconds have passed since the decorative pattern stopped, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are in either a specific light emitting state or a normal light emitting state. It starts to move from the raised position (second state) to the retracted position (first state) while maintaining the light emission mode. At the same time, an image simulating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame among the frame movable body simulated images are displayed in accordance with the actual downward movement of the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 . An image simulating the movable body 7450 is displayed in a descending manner. At the timing (timing t28) when the movement of the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 to the storage position is completed, an image simulating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are displayed. The image simulating is in a display mode in which the descent is completed in accordance with the actual descent movement of the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450, and the display ends.

At the timing (timing t30) two seconds after the movement of the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 to the retracted position is completed, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame move. The movable body 7400 starts to move from the raised position (second state) to the retracted position (first state) while maintaining either the specific light emission state or the normal light emission state. At the same time, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 is simulated in the frame movable body simulated image in accordance with the actual downward movement of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 while rotating. The image and the image simulating the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 are displayed in a manner of descending while rotating. At the timing (timing t32) when the movement of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 to the storage position is completed, the image simulating the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 are displayed. The image simulating is in a display mode in which the descent is completed in accordance with the actual descent operation of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the display ends.

When the special lottery result is a big win, it is preferable to change the light emission state of the frame movable body from the specific light emission performance state to the normal light emission performance state at a predetermined timing during the big win. If the special lottery result is a loss, the normal lighting effect state is continued, and the variation of the next decorative pattern is started.

In this way, by displaying the simulated image of the movable frame at the timing when the movable frame starts to move, it is possible to change the lighting mode according to the operation of the movable frame and the operation of the operation unit. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player misses the In addition, according to the result of the special lottery, the movable frame body appears at a position that has never existed before, so that the player can be greatly surprised and amused. Further, after the inner frame movable body changes from the standby state (first state) to the moving state (second state), the outer frame movable body is moved to the standby state (first state) to the movement state (second state), it is possible to give the player a feeling as if he himself decided the result of the special lottery. In addition, in a situation where the inner frame movable body first enters the moving state (second state) and the player can notice that it has entered the moving state, the player is requested to operate the operation unit. As a result, the player can operate the operating section while having a sense of anticipation as to whether or not the outer frame movable body will enter the moving state (second state) following the inner frame movable body.

Figures 300(A) to 300(E) show modifications of the frame movable body described with reference to Figures 297(A) to 297(F). 300(A) and 300(B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. FIG. 300(C) is a plan view of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 300(D) and 300(E) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 300(A), 300(C), and 300(D) show a door frame top unit 570 in which a right ear inner frame movable body 7300, a right ear outer frame movable body 7350, a left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and a left ear inner frame movable body 7300 are installed. The state (first state) in which the ear outer frame movable body 7450 is housed is shown. 300(B) and 300(E), from the door frame top unit 570, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are shown. A state of protruding upward (second state) is shown.

In this embodiment, in addition to the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 are also controlled by the peripheral control board 1510. 300(A), 300(C), and 300(D), and stored in the standby position in the door frame top unit 570 as shown in FIGS. 300(B) and 300(E) to a state in which the door frame top unit 570 vertically protrudes upward from the upper surface (second state). be.

On the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570, a first right ear opening 7002 on the door frame top unit is positioned corresponding to the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, and a position corresponding to the right ear outer frame movable body 7350. The second right ear opening 7004 on the door frame top unit corresponds to the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the first left ear opening 7012 on the door frame top unit corresponds to the left ear outer frame movable body 7450. A second left ear opening 7014 is provided on the door frame top unit at the position. The frame movable body having such a structure may be configured to execute the production pattern described above with reference to FIGS. 298(A) to 299(B). A modified example of a time chart, which will be described later, may be applied to the frame movable body having such a structure. As shown in FIGS. 289(A) to 289(E), even in the frame movable body of the structure in this embodiment, the upper part of the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 may project from the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570 in the first state.

FIGS. 301(A) to 301(E) show modifications of the frame movable body described with reference to FIGS. 300(A) to 300(E). 301(A) and 301(B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 301(C) is a plan view of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 301(D) and 301(E) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 301(A), 301(C), and 301(D) show that the door frame top unit 570 includes a right ear inner frame movable body 7300, a right ear outer frame movable body 7350, a left ear inner frame movable body 7400, The state (first state) in which the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 is stored is shown. 301(B) and 301(E), from the door frame top unit 570, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are shown. A state (second state) protruding upward is shown.

In this embodiment, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 do not move upward, but move downward by a drive mechanism (not shown) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510. 301(A), 301(C), and 301(D), respectively, from the state (first state) housed in the standby position in the door frame top unit 570, to the state shown in FIG. 301(B). 301(E), the door frame top unit 570 can be controlled to vertically protrude upward from the top surface of the door frame top unit 570 or downward from the bottom surface of the door frame top unit 570 (second state). be.

On the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570, a right ear opening 7000 on the door frame top unit corresponds to the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, and a door frame opening 7000 corresponds to the left ear outer frame movable body 7450. A top unit upper left ear opening 7010 is provided. In addition, on the lower surface of the door frame top unit 570, the door frame top unit lower right ear opening 7020 is located at a position corresponding to the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, and the door frame is located at a position corresponding to the left ear inner frame movable body 7400. A top unit lower left ear opening 7030 is provided.

The frame movable body having such a structure may be configured to execute the effect pattern described above with reference to FIGS. 298(A) to 299(B). A modified example of a time chart, which will be described later, may be applied to the frame movable body having such a structure. In this case, in a state where it is not clear whether the result of the special lottery will be a big hit or not, the inner frame movable body starts moving downward from the lower surface of the door frame top unit 570 (timing t7), and the result of the special lottery is a big hit, the outer frame movable body starts moving upward from the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570 (timing t14, timing 18, etc.). On the other hand, when the result of the special lottery is a loss, the outer frame movable body does not move. With such a configuration, when the result of the special lottery is a big win, it is possible to make the outer frame movable body visible to other players and store clerks. On the other hand, when the result of the special lottery is a loss, the inner frame movable body moves but the outer frame movable body does not move. can be reduced. In the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 297(A) to 297(F), the outer frame movable body and the inner frame movable body express the animal's ears decoratively. In the embodiments described with reference to FIGS. 301(A) to 301(E), the upwardly projecting outer frame movable body expresses the animal's ears, and the inner frame movable body expresses the animal's eyes. there is

Figures 302(A) to 302(E) and Figures 303(A) to 303(E) show Figures 300(A) to 300(E) and Figures 301(A) to 301(E). 4 shows a modification of the frame movable body described above. 302(A), 302(B), 303(A), and 303(B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 302(C) and 303(C) are plan views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 302(D), 302(E), 303(D), and 303(E) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. In this embodiment, each frame movable body protrudes downward from the lower surface of the door frame top unit 570 (first state) and protrudes upward from the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570 (second state). It is possible to take

Figures 302(A), 302(C), and 302(D) show a state (first state) in which the inner frame movable body and the outer frame movable body protrude downward from the lower surface of the door frame top unit 570. there is FIGS. 302(B) and 302(E) show a state (second state) in which the inner frame movable body protrudes upward from the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570, and the outer frame movable body protrudes upward from the door frame top unit 570. FIG. shows a state (first state) projecting downward from the lower surface of the . Figures 303(A), 303(C), and 303(D) show a state (first state) in which the inner frame movable body protrudes downward from the lower surface of the door frame top unit 570, and the outer frame movable body shows a state (second state) projecting upward from the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570 . 303(B) and 303(E) show a state (second state) in which the inner frame movable body and the outer frame movable body protrude upward from the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570. FIG.

In this embodiment, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are driven (not shown) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510. It is possible to move to any position from the first state to the second state and stop by the mechanism.

On the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570, a first right ear opening 7002 on the door frame top unit is positioned corresponding to the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, and a position corresponding to the right ear outer frame movable body 7350. The second right ear opening 7004 on the door frame top unit corresponds to the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the first left ear opening 7012 on the door frame top unit corresponds to the left ear outer frame movable body 7450. A second left ear opening 7014 is provided on the door frame top unit at the position.

In addition, on the lower surface of the door frame top unit 570, a first right ear opening 7022 under the door frame top unit is located at a position corresponding to the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, and at a position corresponding to the right ear outer frame movable body 7350. The door frame top unit second right ear opening 7024 corresponds to the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the door frame top unit lower first left ear opening 7032 corresponds to the left ear outer frame movable body 7450. A second left ear opening 7034 is provided at the position below the door frame top unit.

The frame movable body having such a structure may be configured to execute the production pattern described above with reference to FIGS. 298(A) to 299(B). A modified example of a time chart, which will be described later, may be applied to the frame movable body having such a structure.

In this case, in a state in which it is not clear whether or not the result of the special lottery will result in a big win, the inner frame movable body starts moving upward from the state (first state) protruding from the lower surface of the door frame top unit 570. (timing t7) and movement is completed at timing t9. Figures 302(B) and 302(E) show the state in which the movement of the inner frame movable body is completed. When the result of the special lottery is a big hit, the outer frame movable body starts moving upward from the state (first state) protruding from the lower surface of the door frame top unit 570 (timing t14, timing 18, etc.). . FIGS. 303(B) and 303(E) show the state (second state) in which the movement of the outer frame movable body is completed. On the other hand, when the result of the special lottery is a loss, the outer frame movable body does not move. With such a configuration, when the result of the special lottery is a big win, it is possible to make the outer frame movable body visible to other players and store clerks. On the other hand, when the result of the special lottery is a loss, the inner frame movable body moves but the outer frame movable body does not move. can be reduced.

An example has been shown in which the inner frame movable body protrudes upward to enter the second state, and then the outer frame movable body protrudes upward to enter the second state, but the relationship between the two may be reversed. In this case, the outer frame movable body starts to project upward at timing t7. After that, when the movement is completed (timing t9), the states shown in FIGS. 303(A) and 303(D) are obtained. Further, at timing t14 or timing t18, the inner frame movable body may be configured to start moving upward. It may be configured to be able to execute two production patterns in which the order in which the frame movable body operates is reversed. Furthermore, it is better to set the expectation of a big hit in a production pattern in which the outer frame movable body operates first than in a production pattern in which the inner frame movable body operates first, for example, when the outer frame movable body operates first. It may be configured to ensure a big hit.

FIGS. 304(A) to 305(B) show modifications of the frame movable body described with reference to FIGS. 297(A) to 297(F). 304(A) and 304(B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 304(C) and 304(D) are plan views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 305(A) and 305(B) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 304(A), 304(C), and 305(A) show a door frame top unit 570 in which a right ear inner frame movable body 7300, a right ear outer frame movable body 7350, a left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and a left ear inner frame movable body 7300 are installed. The state (first state) in which the ear outer frame movable body 7450 is housed is shown. FIGS. 304(B), 304(D), and 305(B) show from the door frame top unit 570 a right ear inner frame movable body 7300, a right ear outer frame movable body 7350, a left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and a left ear. A state (second state) in which the outer frame movable body 7450 protrudes upward is shown.

In this embodiment, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are all controlled by the peripheral control board 1510. When viewed from the right, it is configured to be able to move upward by rotating clockwise by 90 degrees by a non-rotating drive mechanism.

The frame movable body having such a structure may be configured to execute the production pattern described above with reference to FIGS. 298(A) to 299(B). In the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 298(A) to 299(B), after the inner frame movable body is in the second state, the outer frame movable body is in the second state. In the frame movable body described with reference to FIGS. 304(A) to 305(B), the order of movement of the inner frame movable body and the outer frame movable body is reversed, and the outer frame movable body is moved from timing t7 to timing t9. After the state is changed from the first state to the second state in , the inner frame movable body is preferably changed from the first state to the second state at timing t14 or timing t18. A modified example of a time chart, which will be described later, may be applied to the frame movable body having such a structure.

291 to 293, an embodiment in which the door frame top unit 570 is provided with a movable frame and a simulated image of the movable frame is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 is shown. 308 show variations of this embodiment. In the embodiments described below, the door frame top unit 570 includes a right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and a right ear outer frame movable body 7350 instead of the right ear frame movable body 7100, and replaces the left ear frame movable body 7200 with A left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and a left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are provided.

306(A) and 306(B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 306(C) is a plan view of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 306(D) and 306(E) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 306(A), 306(C), and 306(D) show a door frame top unit 570 in which a right ear inner frame movable body 7300, a right ear outer frame movable body 7350, a left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and a left ear inner frame movable body 7300 are installed. It shows a state in which the ear outer frame movable body 7450 is retracted (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a first state). 306(B) and 306(E) show that from the door frame top unit 570, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body. 7450 shows a state in which 7450 protrudes upward (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a second state).

As shown in FIGS. 306(A) to 306(E), the door frame top unit 570 includes an upper right ear opening 7000 of the door frame top unit, an upper left ear opening 7010 of the door frame top unit, and an inner right side of the door frame top unit. It has a light emitting part 7050 and a left side light emitting part 7052 in the door frame top unit. The specific structures and functions of these are the same as those with reference to FIGS.

As shown in FIGS. 306(A) to 306(E), the door frame top unit 570 in this embodiment has a right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and a right ear outer frame movable body 7350 on the left side and a right ear outer frame movable body 7350 on the right side in a front view. A left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and a left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are provided. Specific structures and operation modes of these are shown below. Since the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 basically have the same structure, in the following description, Only the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 may be representatively described.

Figures 306(A), 306(C), and 306(D) show the state in which the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 is in the retracted state. The right ear inner frame movable body 7300 in the housed state has a vertically long rectangular shape in plan view, and has a right ear inner frame movable body first face 7310 facing downward and a right ear inner frame movable body first face 7310 facing upward. It has two sides 7320 . The right ear inner frame movable body first surface 7310 is made of colored (specifically pink) transparent synthetic resin. On the other hand, the right ear inner frame movable body second surface 7320 is made of gray opaque synthetic resin. The right ear outer frame movable body 7350 in the housed state has a vertically long rectangular shape in which the vicinity of the center is hollowed out so as to surround the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 in plan view, and the right ear outer frame facing downward. It has a frame movable body first surface 7360 and a right ear outer frame movable body second surface 7370 facing upward. The right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360 is made of white translucent synthetic resin. On the other hand, the right ear outer frame movable body second surface 7370 is made of gray opaque synthetic resin. The left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 also have the same structure as the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 .

The right inner ear frame movable body 7300 has a right inner ear frame movable body rotation shaft 7340 on the right side (inner side) in plan view. In addition, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 has a right ear outer frame movable body rotation shaft 7390 on the left side (outside) in plan view. In addition, the right ear inner frame movable body rotating shaft 7340 and the right ear outer frame movable body rotating shaft 7390 are positioned on the same axis. In addition, the right ear inner frame movable body rotating shaft 7340 and the right ear outer frame movable body rotating shaft 7390 are attached near the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570 . The left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 also have the same structure as the right ear inner frame movable body and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 . The right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 are powered by a pulse motor (not shown) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 to rotate the right ear inner frame movable body rotating shaft 7340 and the right ear outer frame movable body. By being transmitted to the rotating shaft 7390, it is possible to rotate about the left-right direction as an axis. In addition, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 also have a left ear inner frame movable body rotation shaft 7440 and a left ear outer frame movable body rotation shaft 7490 having similar structures. Power from a pulse motor (not shown) controlled by the control board 1510 is transmitted to the left ear inner frame movable body rotating shaft 7440 and the left ear outer frame movable body rotating shaft 7490, thereby rotating about the horizontal direction as an axis. It is possible. The right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are each independently controlled by a pulse motor (not shown), thereby moving from the right. It is possible to rotate clockwise or counterclockwise by an arbitrary angle and to stop at an arbitrary angle.

As shown in FIGS. 306(A) to 306(E), in the door frame top unit 570, the right side of the door frame top unit that illuminates the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 is provided. A light emitting part 7050 and a left side light emitting part 7052 in the door frame top unit for illuminating the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are provided. The specific structures of the door frame top unit right light emitting portion 7050 and the door frame top unit left light emitting portion 7052 are the same as those described with reference to FIGS. do.

The right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are each controlled by a drive mechanism (not shown) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510. 306(C), and 306(D) from the standby position in the door frame top unit 570 to a state of being stopped at an arbitrary position rotated by a predetermined angle. is possible. FIGS. 306(B) and 306(E) are examples, in which a right ear inner frame movable body 7300, a right ear outer frame movable body 7350, a left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and a left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are housed. From the state, rotate 90 degrees clockwise as viewed from the right, and in a vertical state, the right ear inner frame movable body first surface 7310, the right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360, the left ear inner frame movable body first surface 7310, the left ear inner frame movable body first surface 7360, A first plane 7410 shows a state in which the left ear outer frame movable body first plane 7460 faces the front and stops. A right ear inner frame movable body 7300 , a right ear outer frame movable body 7350 , a left ear inner frame movable body 7400 , and a left ear outer frame movable body 7450 have shapes imitating animal ears, and are attached to the door frame top unit 570 . It is possible to decoratively express the state in which the animal's ears move by taking the stored state and the state perpendicular to the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570 .

In addition, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 continuously drive a drive mechanism (not shown) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510. It is also possible for the player to visually recognize the rotating state by driving it with the . When rotating in this manner, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are rotated at a speed of about one rotation per second. Rotate multiple times in the same direction. 306(B) and 306(E) show the states during rotation of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450. It can be said that it shows The directions of rotation of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 may be configured to rotate clockwise a plurality of times when viewed from the right, or to rotate counterclockwise a plurality of times viewed from the right. It may be configured as With such a configuration, the right ear inner frame movable body first surface 7310 and the right ear inner frame movable body second surface 7320 are alternately visible to the player. In addition, the right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360 and the right ear outer frame movable body second surface 7370 are alternately visible to the player. In addition, the left ear inner frame movable body first surface 7410 and the left ear inner frame movable body second surface 7420 are alternately visible to the player. In addition, the left ear outer frame movable body first surface 7460 and the left ear outer frame movable body second surface 7470 are alternately visible to the player.

The right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 can be stopped or rotated at predetermined positions, and the door frame top unit Right ear inner frame movable body 7300, right ear outer frame movable body 7350, left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and left ear outer frame movable body 7300, right ear outer frame movable body 7350, left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and left ear outer frame movable body 7300, right ear outer frame movable body 7350, left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and left ear outer frame movable body Although it has been shown that the bodies 7450 can each be in a predetermined decorative state, a specific example will be shown below.

As shown in FIGS. 306(A), 306(C), and 306(D), the right ear inner frame movable body first surface 7310 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 are Right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360, Left ear inner frame movable body first surface 7410 included in left ear inner frame movable body 7400, Left ear outer frame movable body first surface included in left ear outer frame movable body 7450 When light is emitted from the right light emitting portion 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left light emitting portion 7052 in the door frame top unit with the 7460 facing downward, the light reflected in the door frame top unit 570 causes the door to open. It is possible to make the entire frame top unit 570 dimly emit light. This is because the door frame top unit 570 is made of white translucent synthetic resin.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 306(B) and 306(E), the right ear inner frame movable body first surface 7310 of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 of the right ear inner frame movable body 7350 The frame movable body first surface 7360, the left ear inner frame movable body first surface 7410 of the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body first surface 7460 of the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 face forward. When the light is emitted from the right side light emitting portion 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left side light emitting portion 7052 in the door frame top unit in the facing state, the right ear inner frame of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 is irradiated with the light. Movable body first surface 7310, right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360 of right ear outer frame movable body 7350, left ear inner frame movable body first surface 7410 of left ear inner frame movable body 7400, left ear outer side It is possible for the player to visually recognize the state in which the left ear outer frame movable body first surface 7460 of the frame movable body 7450 is decorated. Also in this case, part of the light emitted from the right light emitting portion 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left light emitting portion 7052 in the door frame top unit illuminates the door frame top unit 570 from the inside. , the entire door frame top unit 570 can be visually recognized by the player in a slightly dim state.

On the other hand, while the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are rotated, the right light emitting part 7050 in the door frame top unit and the door When light is irradiated from the left light emitting portion 7052 in the frame top unit, the irradiated light causes the right ear inner frame movable body first surface 7310, the right ear inner frame movable body second surface 7320, and the right ear outer frame movable body. Body first surface 7360, right ear outer frame movable body second surface 7370, left ear inner frame movable body first surface 7410, left ear inner frame movable body second surface 7420, left ear outer frame movable body first surface 7460 The left ear outer frame movable body second surface 7470 is alternately illuminated.

In this way, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body are positioned above the upper surface of the outer frame 2 and the door frame base unit 100. Since the 7450 is positioned and rotated in a stopped state, it is possible to give the player unprecedented surprises and amusement compared to the case where the movable body in the game board is moved. .

307(A) to 308(B), right ear inner frame movable body 7300, right ear outer frame movable body 7350, left ear inner frame movable body 7400, left ear outer frame movable body 7450 ( A frame movable body simulation which is an image simulating the frame movable body displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 according to the specific operation mode of the frame movable body (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a frame movable body) The image display mode, the player's operation reception mode for the operation button 410 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as an operation unit), the light emission mode of the right light emitting section 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left light emitting section 7052 in the door frame top unit, etc. An example of combined effects is shown.

Figures 307(A) to 308(B) respectively show the operation mode of the frame movable bodies (the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450) provided on the outside, and the effect display on the game board side. A display state of a frame movable body simulated image, which is an image simulating the frame movable body provided outside (the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450) displayed on the device 1600, and the display state of the frame movable body simulated image provided on the inside. The operation mode of the frame movable body (right ear inner frame movable body 7300, left ear inner frame movable body 7400) and the frame movable body provided inside (right ear inner frame movable body) displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 The display state of the frame movable body simulation image which is an image simulating the frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400), the reception state of the operation unit, and the operation instruction display displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 2 is a time chart showing a display state of , and a light irradiation mode for a movable frame.

FIG. 307(A) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a big win and the player operates the operation unit during the period when the acceptance of operation for the operation unit is valid. there is FIG. 307(B) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a loss and the player operates the operation unit during the period when the acceptance of operations on the operation unit is valid. there is FIG. 308(A) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a big win and the player does not operate the operation unit during the period when the operation acceptance for the operation unit is valid. ing. FIG. 308(B) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a loss and the player does not operate the operation unit during the period when the operation acceptance for the operation unit is valid. ing.

In each effect pattern shown in FIGS. 307(A) to 308(B), the frame movable body provided on the outside and the frame movable body provided on the inside are changed from the standby state (first state) to the rotating state (second state). ), the display mode of the simulated image of the movable frame, the timing at which the operation acceptance for the operation unit becomes effective, the timing at which the operation instruction display is started, and the lighting mode of the movable frame from the light emitting state to the extinguished state. The timing of entering the state is the same. On the other hand, the timing at which the operation instruction display ends, the timing at which the movable frame body changes from the second state (rotating state) to another state, and the light irradiation state of the movable frame body from the off state to the light emitting state or the specific light emitting state The timing may differ depending on the production pattern. Specific examples of effects in each effect pattern will be shown below with reference to FIGS. 307(A) to 308(B).

307(A) to 308(B), the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are In the initial state (before timing t0), the door frame top unit 570 is stored in the door frame top unit 570 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the first state or standby state). 306(C), as shown in FIG. 306(D), the right ear inner frame movable body first surface 7310, the right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360, the left ear inner frame movable body first surface 7410, the left ear outer The frame movable body first surface 7460 faces downward. In this state, when the ready-to-win effect state corresponding to the special lottery result occurs at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t1) between timing t0 and timing t5, the right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360 and the left ear outer frame movable body The first body surface 7460 simultaneously starts rotating at timing t5, and enters a state in which the rotation continues (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a second state or rotating state). The direction of rotation is clockwise when viewed from the right, and the speed of rotation is the speed of one rotation per second.

At the same time, in the center of the game board side effect display device 1600, the display of the frame movable body simulation image is started. At the same time, display of a simulated door-frame top unit image, which is an image simulating the door-frame top unit 570, also starts. Specifically, the simulated image of the frame movable body is an image simulating the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, an image simulating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, an image simulating the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and an image simulating the left ear outer frame movable body. and an image imitating the frame movable body 7450 . The simulated image of the movable frame is an image simulating the movable right ear outer frame body 7350 and the movable left ear outer frame body 7450 in accordance with the rotation of the actual right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 . The rotated image continues to be dynamically displayed while rotating in the same direction. The rotation speed of the image simulating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the image simulating the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are also rotated at the same speed as the actual rotation speed of the outer outer frame movable body (the speed of one rotation per second). to be displayed. As a result, when the right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360 and the left ear outer frame movable body first surface 7460 are in a rotated state facing the front as shown in FIGS. The image simulating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the image simulating the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 also have the right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360 of the image simulating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350. The image simulating the left ear outer frame movable body first surface 7460 possessed by the simulated image or the image simulating the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 is used as a frame movable body simulated image in a state in which the image simulating the left ear outer frame movable body first surface 7460 faces the game board side effect display device. 1600 is displayed.

After the rotating state (second state) of the outer frame movable body continues from timing t4 to timing t9, at timing t9, the inner frame movable body (the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400). start rotating at the same time, and the state in which the rotation is continued (hereinafter, may be referred to as a second state or a rotating state). Since the rotation mode of the inner frame movable body and the display mode of the image simulating the inner frame movable body are the same as those of the outer frame movable body, description thereof is omitted. On the other hand, at timing t9, the reception of the operation to the operation unit becomes valid, and the display of an image instructing the operation of the operation unit (hereinafter sometimes referred to as operation instruction display) on the game board side effect display device 1600 is started. be. As the operation instruction display, for example, an image imitating the appearance of the operation button 410 may be displayed, or a character string (for example, a character string "Push!!") instructing to operate the operation unit may be displayed. may Note that the operation valid period continues until an operation is accepted for the operation unit (timing t14 in the example shown below) or until a predetermined time elapses (until timing t18). Further, at timing t9, the right light emitting portion 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left light emitting portion 7052 in the door frame top unit, which irradiate light to the movable frame body, change from the light emitting state to the extinguished state.

FIGS. 307(A) and 307(B) show the effects when the operating section is operated at timing t14 after the period in which the operation to the operating section is valid starts (timing t9). showing. In these production patterns, the operation instruction display ends at timing t14, and the movable frame body that has been rotating until then stops at a predetermined rotation angle corresponding to the result of the special lottery. The lighting mode becomes a predetermined light emitting effect state corresponding to the result of the special lottery.

FIG. 307(A) shows an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a big hit. 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are respectively the right ear inner frame movable body first surface 7310, the right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360, and the left ear inner frame movable body first surface. The surface 7410 and the first surface 7460 of the left ear outer frame movable body are brought to the near side and vertically stopped (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the third state). At the same time, a specific light emitting effect in which the light irradiation mode for the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 is different from the normal light emitting state. state. In this way, the special lottery result indicates to the player that the special lottery result is a big win when the light irradiation mode becomes the specific light emission effect state.

On the other hand, FIG. 307(B) shows an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a loss. The movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are formed on the right ear inner frame movable body second surface 7320, the right ear outer frame movable body second surface 7370, and the left ear inner frame movable body second surface 7370, respectively. The second surface 7420 and the second surface 7470 of the left ear outer frame movable body are vertically stopped (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the fourth state). At the same time, the light irradiation mode for the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 changes from the off state to the normal light emitting state. In this way, by changing the light irradiation mode to the normal light emission effect state, it is indicated to the player that the special lottery result is lost.

In FIGS. 308A and 308B, after the period in which the operation to the operation unit is valid starts (timing t9), the player does not operate the operation unit during the operation valid period, This shows an effect mode when the operation effective period ends at timing t18 after a predetermined period of time has passed. In these production patterns, the operation instruction display ends at timing t18, and the movable frame body that has been rotating until then automatically stops at a predetermined rotation angle corresponding to the result of the special lottery. The lighting mode of the light to the is set to a predetermined light emitting effect state corresponding to the result of the special lottery.

FIG. 308(A) shows an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a big hit. The inner ear frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are respectively the right inner ear frame movable body first surface 7310, the right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360, the left ear inner frame movable body first surface 7410, A state in which the left ear outer frame movable body first surface 7460 is on the front side and is vertically stopped (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a third state) is established. At the same time, a specific light emitting effect in which the light irradiation mode for the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 is different from the normal light emitting state. state. In this way, the special lottery result indicates to the player that the special lottery result is a big win when the light irradiation mode becomes the specific light emission effect state.

On the other hand, FIG. 308(B) shows an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a loss. , the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are respectively the right ear inner frame movable body second surface 7320, the right ear outer frame movable body second surface 7370, and the left ear inner frame movable body second surface 7420. , the second surface 7470 of the left ear outer frame movable body is on the front side, and the state is vertically stopped (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the fourth state). At the same time, the light irradiation mode for the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 changes from the off state to the normal light emitting state. In this way, by changing the light irradiation mode to the normal light emission effect state, it is indicated to the player that the special lottery result is lost.

In this way, when the result of the special lottery is a big win, each frame movable body stops in the third state to indicate a big win, and when the result of the special lottery is a loss, each The frame movable body stops in the fourth state, indicating a failure.

In each effect pattern shown in FIGS. 307(A) to 308(B), at a predetermined timing (timing t20) after the expiration of the valid operation period, the changing decorative pattern corresponds to the result of the special lottery. is displayed. For example, in the case of the production patterns shown in FIGS. 307(A) and 308(A), the special lottery result is a square pattern (for example, "7", "7", "7") indicating that the result is a big hit. In the case of the production patterns shown in FIGS. 307(B) and 308(B), the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, and a reach-losing mode indicating that the special lottery result is a loser (for example, "7", "6", "7", etc.) is displayed. ) to stop and display the decorative pattern.

At the timing (timing t24) when 4 seconds have passed since the decorative pattern stopped, the frame movable body moves the frame inside the right ear while maintaining either the specific lighting effect state or the normal lighting effect state. A state in which the body first surface 7310, the right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360, the left ear inner frame movable body first surface 7410, and the left ear outer frame movable body first surface 7460 face forward (third state) or The state in which the right ear inner frame movable body second surface 7320, the right ear outer frame movable body second surface 7370, the left ear inner frame movable body second surface 7420, and the left ear outer frame movable body second surface 7470 face forward ( From the fourth state), the right ear inner frame movable body first surface 7310, the right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360, the left ear inner frame movable body first surface 7410, and the left ear outer frame movable body first surface 7460 are downward. The state changes to the state facing (first state). At the same time, the display of the simulated image of the movable frame ends.

When the special lottery result is a big win, it is preferable to change the lighting state of the light to the frame movable body from the specific light emission performance state to the normal light emission performance state at a predetermined timing during the big win. If the special lottery result is a loss, the normal lighting effect state is continued, and the variation of the next decorative pattern is started.

In this manner, the movable frame body simulated image is displayed at the timing when the movable frame body changes from the waiting state (first state) to the rotating state (second state). It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player overlooks the second state). In addition, according to the result of the special lottery, the movable frame body appears at a position that has never existed before, so that the player can be greatly surprised and amused. Further, after the outer frame movable body changes from the standby state (first state) to the rotating state (second state), the inner frame movable body rotates from the standby state (first state) with the start of the operation valid period. state (second state), and when the player operates the operation unit, the inner frame movable body and the outer frame movable body are brought into a third state indicating that the result of the special lottery is a big win , or the fourth state indicating that the result of the special lottery is a loss, it is possible to give the player a feeling as if he himself decided the result of the special lottery.

Figures 309(A) to 309(E) show modifications of the frame movable body described with reference to Figures 306(A) to 306(E). 309(A) and 309(B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 309(C) is a plan view of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 309(D) and 309(E) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 309(A), 309(C), and 309(D) show the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450. The state (first state) in the standby position is shown. Figures 309(B) and 309(E) show a state in which the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are rotating ( second state).

In this embodiment, the vertical thickness of the door frame top unit 570 is smaller than in the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. The body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are configured to be visible from below.

In the vicinity of the front end of the door frame top unit, a right light emitting portion 7050 in the door frame top unit is provided corresponding to the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 . Further, a left light emitting portion 7052 in the door frame top unit is provided corresponding to the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 . The right side light emitting portion 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left side light emitting portion 7052 in the door frame top unit can emit light backward. As a result, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 can be brought into a predetermined light emitting state. be.

The frame movable body having such a structure may be configured to execute the performance patterns described above with reference to FIGS. 307(A) to 308(B). In addition, when the special lottery result is a big hit, the right ear inner frame movable body first surface 7310, the right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360, the left ear inner frame movable body first surface 7410, the left ear outer frame. It is preferable that the movable body first surface 7460 faces the front and stops (third state) as shown in FIGS. 309(B) and 309(E). On the other hand, when the special lottery result is a loss, the right ear inner frame movable body second surface 7320, the right ear outer frame movable body second surface 7370, the left ear inner frame movable body second surface 7420, the left ear outer frame It is preferable that the second surface 7470 of the movable body is stopped facing the front (fourth state). A modified example of a time chart, which will be described later, may be applied to the frame movable body having such a structure.

FIGS. 310(A) to 311(B) show modifications of the frame movable body described with reference to FIGS. 306(A) to 306(E). 310(A) and 310(B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 310(C) and 310(D) are plan views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 311(A) and 311(B) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 310(A), 310(C), and 311(A) show the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450. The state (first state) in the standby position is shown. 310(B), 310(D), and 311(B) show the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450. The rotating state (second state) is shown.

In this embodiment, the central portion of the door frame top unit 570 is hollowed out in the left-right direction, and can be visually recognized as a U-shape when viewed from the right side. A right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and a left ear inner frame movable body 7400 are located at the lower part of the door frame top unit 570 hollowed out in the horizontal direction. are provided with a right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and a left ear outer frame movable body 7450, respectively.

The right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 are positioned in the standby state (first state) as shown in FIGS. The frame movable body first surface 7310 and the left ear inner frame movable body first surface 7410 are positioned to face each other.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 have a shape obtained by vertically inverting a bottomed cylindrical shape in which a part of the cylindrical side surface is cut. 310(A), 310(C), and 311(A), in the standby state (first state), in front of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 , the right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360 and the left ear outer frame movable body first surface 7460 are positioned facing forward, and the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 are positioned facing forward. It is configured to be invisible when viewed from the front. On the other hand, in the first state, when the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are viewed obliquely from below, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame are positioned inside. It is possible to visually recognize the lower part of each movable body 7400 .

In the lower part of the door frame top unit 570 , a right light emitting part 7050 in the door frame top unit is provided corresponding to the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 . Further, a left light emitting portion 7052 in the door frame top unit is provided corresponding to the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 . The right side light emitting portion 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left side light emitting portion 7052 in the door frame top unit can emit light obliquely upward and forward. As a result, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450, which are positioned obliquely forward and upward, can be brought into a predetermined light emitting state. It is possible.

The frame movable body having such a structure may be configured to execute the performance patterns described above with reference to FIGS. 307(A) to 308(B). When the special lottery result is a big hit, as shown in FIGS. It is preferable that the movable body first surface 7410 is in a stopped state (third state) facing the front. On the other hand, if the special lottery result is a loss, the right ear inner frame movable body second surface 7320 and the left ear inner frame movable body second surface 7420 should face the front and stop (fourth state). . On the other hand, for the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450, the second surface 7370 of the right ear outer frame movable body and the left ear outer frame movable body 7370 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7370 are used regardless of whether the special lottery result is a big hit or a loss. It is preferable that the second surface 7470 of the movable body faces the player side. A modified example of a time chart, which will be described later, may be applied to the frame movable body having such a structure.

Figures 312(A) to 312(D) and Figures 313(A) to 313(B) show modified examples of the movable frame described with reference to Figures 282(A) to 282(E). there is 312(A) and 312(B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 312(C) and 312(D) are plan views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 313(A) and 313(B) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. Figures 312(A), 312(C), and 313(A) show a state (first state) in which a plurality of movable frame bodies are housed in the standby position. FIGS. 312(B), 312(D), and 313(B) show the state (second state) in which the plurality of movable frame bodies have moved to the movement positions.

In the embodiments described below, instead of the door frame top unit 570, a door frame top unit face decoration portion 7500 is provided, and a door frame side unit right arm portion 7600, a door frame side unit left arm portion 7650, and a curtain board bottom unit are provided. A right leg movable body 7700 and a curtain plate bottom unit left leg movable body 7750 are provided.

The door frame top unit face decoration part 7500 has a horizontally long rectangular parallelepiped shape imitating a two-member box with a lid, and the right side and left side thereof form the outer frame 2 and the door frame 3, respectively. It is provided so as to overlap the right side and left side of the door frame base unit 100 in a front view. In addition, the upper surface of the door frame top unit face decoration portion 7500 is always positioned above the door frame base unit 100 .

The door frame top unit face decoration part 7500 consists of a door frame top unit face movable body 7510 corresponding to a lid box to be put on the top of a box composed of two members with a lid, and a lid in a box composed of two members with a lid. and a door frame top unit face lower part 7520 corresponding to the body box on which the door frame is covered.

The door frame top unit face upper movable body 7510 has a lid box shape without a rear side part, is provided so as to cover the upper part of the door frame top unit face lower part 7520, and is controlled by the peripheral control board 1510. It is installed so as to be vertically movable by a drive mechanism. In addition, on the front side of the door frame top unit face movable body 7510, the right eye decoration of the door frame top unit, which has a vertically long rectangular shape when viewed from the front and has a shape imitating the eyes of an animal robot, is provided. A portion 7512 and a door frame top unit left eye decoration portion 7514 are provided. The door frame top unit facial movable body 7510 is provided with a right ear frame movable body 7100 and a left ear frame movable body 7200 imitating animal ears in the same manner as the door frame top unit 570 . Also in this embodiment, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are configured to be vertically movable.

The door frame top unit face lower part 7520 has a box-like shape with a concave portion capable of accommodating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and is similar to the door frame top unit 570. 3 is provided in a fixed state. Further, the door frame top unit face lower part 7520 includes a door frame top unit face lower nose movable body 7522 and a door frame top unit face lower mouth movable body 7524 .

The door frame top unit face lower nose movable body 7522 is provided so as to be embedded in the door frame top unit face lower face 7520 near the center in the left-right direction of the front side of the door frame top unit face lower face 7520 . The door frame top unit face lower nose movable body 7522 has a rectangular parallelepiped shape, but has a box shape with an open bottom like a sliding door of a chest of drawers turned upside down. The door frame top unit face under nose movable body 7522 is movable in the front-rear direction. The door frame top unit face lower nose movable body 7522 is a frame movable body imitating the nose and mouth of an animal robot.

The door-frame top unit under-the-face movable body 7522 is provided so as to be covered with the front-side side portion of the door-frame top unit upper-the-face movable body 7510 . Therefore, in the state (first state) covered by the front side surface portion of the door-frame top unit upper-face movable body 7510, the lower-nose-face movable body 7522 of the door-frame top unit cannot be visually recognized. In addition, the door frame top unit face lower nose movable body 7522 cannot move forward.

When the door-frame top unit upper face movable body 7510 moves upward and enters the second state, the door-frame top unit face lower nose movable body 7522 provided to be embedded in the door frame top unit face lower part 7520 is changed. The front side surface becomes visible from the front, and the door frame top unit face under nose movable body 7522 becomes movable forward.

The door frame top unit face lower opening movable body 7524 is provided near the center in the left-right direction on the front side of the bottom face portion of the door frame top unit face lower part 7520 . The door frame top unit face lower opening movable body 7524 is shaped like a circular cylinder cut into a fan shape, and as shown in FIGS. It is provided so that the side forming the central angle is located on the right side. The door frame top unit face lower opening movable body 7524 can rotate within a predetermined angle range with the side forming the central angle of the sector as the rotation axis. Further, the door frame top unit face lower opening movable body 7524 does not have a curved surface located on the near side. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 312(B) and 313(B), when the door frame top unit face lower opening movable body 7524 is rotated about 35 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from the right side, The inside is configured to be visible.

The door frame top unit face lower nose movable body 7522 changes from a state (first state) provided so as to be embedded in the door frame top unit face lower portion 7520 to a state (second state) moved forward, The door frame top unit face lower opening movable body 7524 is rotated about 35 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from the right side (first state) from the state (first state) stored in the door frame top unit face lower portion 7520 (first state). 2 state), it is possible to decoratively express the state of an animal robot with its mouth open.

The door frame side unit right arm portion 7600 and the door frame side unit left arm portion 7650 are provided below the door frame top unit face decoration portion 7500 so as to protrude forward from the front surfaces of both the left and right ends of the door frame base unit 100 . ing.

The door frame side unit right arm portion 7600 is composed of a door frame side unit right arm case portion 7610 , a door frame side unit right arm upper arm portion 7620 , and a door frame side unit right arm lower arm portion 7630 .

The door frame side unit right arm case portion 7610 is made of colorless and transparent synthetic resin. The door frame side unit right arm case part 7610 has a box shape with a space inside, and the door frame side unit right arm upper arm part 7620 and the door frame side unit right arm lower arm part 7630 are movable inside. is. The thickness of the right arm case portion 7610 of the door frame side unit is about several millimeters, and the door frame side unit right arm upper arm portion 7620 and the door frame side unit right arm lower arm portion 7630 that move inside can be visually recognized.

The door frame side unit right arm upper arm portion 7620 is formed in a pipe shape from flexible synthetic resin. The door frame side unit right upper arm part 7620 has a length of about 50 cm. It can be rolled up and down. FIGS. 312(A) and 313(A) show a state (first state) in which the right upper arm portion 7620 of the door frame side unit is wound up by a reel-shaped driving mechanism (not shown).

The door frame side unit right arm lower arm portion 7630 is formed of two members in the shape of the letter L when viewed from the side and a cylindrical member imitating a shaft for locking them, imitating a manipulator of a robot. It has a shape. The end of the right upper arm portion 7620 of the door frame side unit is attached to this cylindrical member, and the upper arm portion 7620 of the right arm of the door frame side unit is wound up by the reel-shaped drive mechanism (not shown). In the first state), the door frame side unit right arm lower arm portion 7630 is located at the upper part inside the door frame side unit right arm case portion 7610 .

By rotating a reel-shaped drive mechanism (not shown) in a direction opposite to the winding up direction, the door-frame side unit right arm upper arm portion 7620 is lowered in the door-frame side unit right arm case portion 7610, whereby the door frame side unit right arm The lower arm portion 7630 is positioned at the lower portion in the door frame side unit right arm case portion 7610 due to its own weight. FIG. 312(B) shows a state (second state) in which the door-frame side unit right arm lower arm portion 7630 is positioned at the lower portion within the door-frame side unit right arm case portion 7610 . Note that, in the second state, the right upper arm portion 7620 of the door frame side unit, which has been invisible until then, becomes visible.

The door-frame side unit left arm portion 7650 has the same structure and function as the door-frame side unit right arm portion 7600 and is bilaterally symmetrical. Specifically, the door frame side unit left arm case portion 7660 has the same structure and function as the door frame side unit right arm case portion 7610, and the door frame side unit left arm upper arm portion 7670 has the door frame side unit right arm upper arm portion. The door frame side unit left lower arm portion 7680 has the same structure and function as the door frame side unit right lower arm portion 7630 . Therefore, detailed description of each member constituting the door frame side unit left arm portion 7650 is omitted.

As for the door frame side unit left arm portion 7650, similarly to the door frame side unit right arm portion 7600, the door frame side unit left arm lower arm portion 7680 is wound up by a reel-shaped drive mechanism (not shown) (first state). By rotating the reel-shaped drive mechanism in a direction opposite to the winding direction, it is possible to take a state (second state) positioned at the lower portion. For example, FIGS. 312(B) and 313(B) show a state (second state) in which the left lower arm portion 7680 of the door frame side unit is positioned at the bottom. Note that, in the second state, the left upper arm portion 7670 of the door frame side unit, which was invisible until then, becomes visible.

The whole or part of the outside (left side in front view) of the door frame side unit right arm case part 7610 and the whole or part of the outside (right side in front view) of the door frame side unit left arm case part 7660 are made of opaque synthetic resin. Alternatively, it may be constructed such that a colored and opaque seal or the like is attached after being formed from a colorless and transparent synthetic resin. The entire inside (right side in front view) of the door frame side unit right arm case portion 7610 and the entire inside (left side in front view) of the door frame side unit left arm case portion 7660 are preferably made of colorless and transparent synthetic resin.

With this configuration, the door frame side unit right upper arm portion 7620, the door frame side unit right lower arm portion 7630, the door frame side unit left upper arm portion 7670, and the door frame side unit left lower arm portion 7680 move. can be visually recognized by the left and right players, and only the players who are playing the pachinko machine 1 can enjoy the game without letting the other players know about the action. In addition, as will be described later, when these movable frame bodies are operated for the purpose of suggesting a predetermined degree of expectation, even if the special lottery results are lost after these movable frame bodies are operated, other It becomes difficult for other players to visually recognize the player, and it becomes difficult for other players to feel embarrassed.

The curtain plate member 50 has a curtain plate bottom unit right leg movable body 7700 on the left side in front view, and a curtain plate bottom unit left leg movable body 7750 on the right side in front view. The curtain plate bottom unit right leg movable body 7700 and the curtain plate bottom unit left leg movable body 7750 are in the standby position (first state) as shown in FIGS. They are located below the handle unit 300 respectively.

The curtain plate bottom unit right leg movable body 7700 is composed of a curtain plate bottom unit right leg shank portion 7710 and a curtain plate bottom unit right foot tip portion 7720 . The shape of the curtain plate bottom unit right leg shank portion 7710 is cylindrical. In addition, the right foot part 7720 of the curtain plate bottom unit has a cuboid shape that imitates the shape of the foot, and has two circular recesses in the part that corresponds to the sole of the foot. A curtain plate bottom unit right foot tip portion 7720 is attached to the front side surface of the curtain plate bottom unit right leg shin portion 7710 . Therefore, the curtain plate bottom unit right leg shank portion 7710 and the curtain plate bottom unit right foot tip portion 7720 operate integrally.

A drive mechanism (not shown) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 is provided in the lower portion of the outer frame 2, and the curtain plate bottom unit right leg shank portion 7710 can be moved in the front-rear direction. Further, the curtain plate bottom unit right leg shin portion 7710 can be rotated by a predetermined angle around the longitudinal direction of the curtain plate bottom unit right leg shin portion 7710 .

For example, the curtain plate bottom unit right leg shank portion 7710 is moved forward by a predetermined distance from the standby position (first state) shown in FIGS. It may be configured to operate in a stopped state (second state) by rotating it clockwise by 90 degrees. FIGS. 312(B) and 313(B) show the curtain plate bottom unit right leg shank portion 7710 in the stopped state (second state) in this way.

The curtain plate bottom unit left leg movable body 7750 has a bilaterally symmetrical structure and function equivalent to those of the curtain plate bottom unit right leg movable body 7700 . Specifically, the panel bottom unit left leg shin portion 7760 has the same structure and function as the panel bottom unit right leg shin portion 7710, and the panel bottom unit left leg tip portion 7770 has the panel bottom unit right leg. It has the same structure and function as tip 7720 . Therefore, a detailed description of each member constituting the curtain plate bottom unit left leg movable body 7750 will be omitted.

By providing the frame movable body under the game machine in this way, the movement of the frame movable body is not visually recognized by the player as in the conventional art, but is performed by a part of the player's body such as an arm. By the contact of the movable frame body, it is possible to provide the player with an unprecedented perceptual experience of recognizing that the movable frame body has moved.

With reference to FIGS. 312 and 313, an embodiment in which a plurality of frame movable bodies are provided in the pachinko machine 1 and they operate has been described. Specifically, the door frame top unit upper face movable body 7510, the right ear frame movable body 7100, the left ear frame movable body 7200, the door frame top unit face lower nose movable body 7522, and the door frame top unit face lower mouth movable body 7524. , door frame side unit right upper arm 7620, door frame side unit right lower arm 7630, door frame side unit left upper arm 7670, door frame side unit left lower arm 7680, curtain plate bottom unit right leg movable body 7700, curtain plate 312(A), 312(C), and 313(A) from the standby position (first state) shown in FIGS. ), and changes to the state (second state) at the movement position shown in FIGS. 312(D) and 313(B). Further, each frame movable body can take the first state and the second state by controlling a drive means (not shown) provided corresponding to each frame movable body by the peripheral control board 1510. .

Further, each frame movable body may be provided with a light emitting means controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 so that the normal light emitting state and the specific light emitting state described above can be established.

283(A) to 284(B), the production patterns shown in FIGS. 292(A) to 293(B), or the production patterns modified from these production patterns. It may be configured to be applied to a pattern to operate or emit light.

The right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are provided in the door frame top unit facial movable body 7510 . The right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear in the state (first state) housed in the door frame top unit face movable body 7510 after the door frame top unit face movable body 7510 is positioned upward in the second state. The movable frame body 7200 may be configured to protrude upward (second state). Further, such an operation may be applied to the time charts shown in FIGS. 298(A) to 299(B) and their modification examples. Specifically, in each time chart, first, the door frame top unit upper face movable body 7510 is changed from the first state to the second state, and the right ear frame movable body 7100, the left ear The movable frame body 7200 may be configured to change from the first state to the second state.

Alternatively, after the door frame top unit upper face movable body 7510 is in the second state located upward, the door frame top unit face lower nose movable body is stored in the door frame top unit lower face 7520 (first state). 7522 may be configured to protrude forward (second state). Further, such an operation may be applied to the time charts shown in FIGS. 298(A) to 299(B) and their modification examples. Specifically, in each time chart, first, the door frame top unit upper face movable body 7510 is changed from the first state to the second state, and the door frame top unit face lower nose movable body 7522 may be configured to transition from the first state to the second state.

In addition, after the door frame top unit face lower nose movable body 7522 is changed from the first state to the second state, the door frame top unit face lower mouth mouth movable body 7524 is configured to be changed from the first state to the second state. good too. Further, such an operation may be applied to the time charts shown in FIGS. 298(A) to 299(B) and their modification examples.

Alternatively, after the door frame top unit face lower mouth movable body 7524 is changed from the first state to the second state, the door frame top unit face lower nose movable body 7522 is changed from the first state to the second state. good too. Further, such an operation may be applied to the time charts shown in FIGS. 298(A) to 299(B) and their modification examples.

FIGS. 314(A) to 314(K) show modifications of the display mode of the simulated image of the movable frame applicable to the effect pattern described with reference to FIGS. 283(A) to 284(B). It is a thing. Note that FIG. 314(A) collectively expresses each effect pattern described with reference to FIGS. 283(A) to 284(B).

FIG. 314(B) is a time chart showing the operation patterns of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the display state of the simulated image of the movable frame body displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. be. In this effect pattern, the dynamic display of the frame movable body simulation image is started at timing t4, and the dynamic display of the frame movable body simulation image is completed at timing t6. After that, at timing t7, the upward movement of the movable frame body is started.

By constructing such an action/display pattern to be executable as an effect, the display of the simulated image of the movable frame becomes an advance notice of the action of the movable frame. In addition, the dynamic display of the movable frame body simulated image enables the player to recognize how the movable frame body operates. The motion of the movable body can be visually recognized from the start of the motion. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the movement of the frame movable body. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from inadvertently touching the movable frame body from injuring his or her fingers. In addition, it is possible to indicate that a player who has placed a light load or the like on the frame movable body should move them to another position. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the luggage falls and the player is injured, or the driving section for moving the frame movable body is subjected to a load.

FIG. 314(C) is a time chart showing the operation patterns of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the display state of the simulated image of the movable frame body displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. be. In this production pattern, the rising motion of the movable frame body is completed at timing t9, then the dynamic display of the movable frame body simulation image is started at timing t10, and the dynamic display of the movable frame body simulation image is started at timing t12. is completed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the movement of the frame movable body to the raised position (moving position). Therefore, if the player does not notice the movement of the frame movable body, such a player will suddenly be able to see the frame movable body that has completed the movement to the raised position. can be given to people. Further, since the simulated image of the movable frame is displayed after moving to the raised position, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the movable frame that has moved. Also, the player can know how the frame movable body moves.

FIG. 314(D) is a time chart showing the operation patterns of the movable right ear frame body 7100 and the movable left ear frame body 7200, and the display state of the simulated image of the movable frame body displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. be. In this production pattern, the dynamic display of the movable frame body simulated image is started at timing t6, the upward motion of the movable frame body is then started at timing t7, and the dynamic display of the movable frame body simulated image is started at timing t8. is completed, and the upward movement of the movable frame body is completed at timing t9.

By adopting such a configuration, the display of the simulated image of the movable frame serves as an advance notice of the movement of the movable frame. The player can be made to recognize how the frame movable body operates. The movement of the frame movable body can be visually recognized from the start of movement. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player misses the movement of the frame movable body. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a player carelessly touching the frame movable body injures his finger or the like.

FIG. 314(E) is a time chart showing the operation patterns of the movable right ear frame body 7100 and the movable left ear frame body 7200 and the display state of the simulated image of the movable frame body displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. be. In this production pattern, at timing t7, the moving frame movable body starts to move upward, then at timing t8 dynamic display of the movable frame simulated image starts, at timing t9 the moving frame moving body moves upward, and At timing t10, dynamic display of the simulated image of the movable frame is completed.

By adopting such a configuration, the player can be surprised when the movable frame body starts to move without realizing it. Also, the player can be notified that the frame movable body has started to move.

FIG. 314(F) is a time chart showing the operation patterns of the movable right ear frame body 7100 and the movable left ear frame body 7200, and the display state of the simulated image of the movable frame body displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. be. In this effect pattern, dynamic display of the frame movable body simulation image is performed from timing t3 to timing t7 (4 seconds). On the other hand, the upward movement of the frame movable body is performed from timing t7 to timing t9 (two seconds). The simulated image of the movable frame is dynamically displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 at half the speed of the actual movement of the movable frame.

With such a configuration, the player can recognize in detail how the frame movable body moves.

FIG. 314(G) is a time chart showing the operation patterns of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the display state of the simulated image of the movable frame body displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. be. In this effect pattern, dynamic display of the frame movable body simulation image is performed from timing t5 to timing t9 (4 seconds). On the other hand, the upward movement of the frame movable body is performed from timing t7 to timing t9 (two seconds). The simulated image of the movable frame is dynamically displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 at half the speed of the actual movement of the movable frame.

With such a configuration, the player can recognize in detail how the frame movable body moves.

FIG. 314(H) is a time chart showing the operation patterns of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the display state of the simulated image of the movable frame body displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. be. In this effect pattern, after the movable frame is raised from timing t7 to timing t9 (2 seconds), dynamic display of the simulated image of the movable frame is performed from timing t9 to timing t13 (4 seconds). will be The simulated image of the movable frame is dynamically displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 at half the speed of the actual movement of the movable frame.

With such a configuration, it is possible for the player to recognize in detail how the frame movable body has moved.

FIG. 314(I) is a time chart showing the operation patterns of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the display state of the simulated image of the movable frame body displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. be. In this effect pattern, after the dynamic display of the movable frame body simulation image is performed from timing t5 to timing t7 (2 seconds), the dynamic display of the movable frame body simulation image is performed again from timing t7 to timing t9. done. On the other hand, the upward movement of the frame movable body is performed from timing t7 to timing t9 (two seconds). The dynamic display of the movable frame body simulation image may be performed three times or more. For example, the dynamic display of the movable frame body simulation image may be performed from timing t3 to timing t5.

With such a configuration, it is possible for the player to recognize how the movable frame moves.

FIG. 314(J) is a time chart showing the operation patterns of the movable right ear frame body 7100 and the movable left ear frame body 7200 and the display state of the simulated image of the movable frame body displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. be. In this effect pattern, after the dynamic display of the movable frame body simulation image is performed from timing t7 to timing t9 (2 seconds), the dynamic display of the movable frame body simulation image is performed again from timing t9 to timing t11. done. On the other hand, the upward movement of the frame movable body is performed from timing t7 to timing t9 (two seconds). The dynamic display of the movable frame body simulation image may be performed three times or more. For example, the dynamic display of the movable frame body simulation image may be performed from timing t11 to timing t13.

With such a configuration, it is possible for the player to recognize how the movable frame body has moved.

FIG. 314(K) is a time chart showing the operation patterns of the movable right ear frame body 7100 and the movable left ear frame body 7200, and the display state of the simulated image of the movable frame body displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. be. In this effect pattern, a total of three times from timing t4 to timing t5, from timing t5 to timing t6, and from timing t6 to timing t7, which are timings before the frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state, are performed. At twice the speed of the frame movable body, the simulated image of the movable frame is changed from the display mode imitating the first state to the display mode imitating the second state. Such display may be performed twice in total from timing t5 to timing t6 and from timing t6 to timing t7, or may be performed only once from timing t6 to timing t7.

With such a configuration, it is possible for the player to recognize how the movable frame moves in a short period of time. In addition, since the simulated image of the movable frame is displayed quickly, the player's eyes become accustomed to the movement of the actual movable frame, allowing the player to fully enjoy the movement of the actual movable frame. becomes possible. Further, by performing the display a plurality of times, it is possible to make the player more aware of the action mode.

314(A) to 314(K) may be configured to be executed in response to a predetermined situation in the pachinko machine 1. FIG. In this case, the degree of expectation for the big win and the appearance frequency thereof may be different for each production pattern. For example, when a predetermined ready-to-win effect occurs, one of the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 314(A) to 314(K) is selected and executed. good. Also, the production pattern explained with reference to FIG. 314(A) has the highest appearance frequency, and the appearance frequency gradually decreases with the production patterns explained with reference to FIGS. 314(B) to 314(K). 314(A) has the lowest expectation for the big win, and the expectation for the big win gradually increases as the production pattern explained with reference to FIGS. The performance pattern to be executed may be selected based on the result of the jackpot lottery so that the . Further, each modified example described below may be similarly configured to be executed with a predetermined degree of expectation and appearance frequency.

By adopting such a configuration, when a performance pattern about the frame movable body different from the usual one appears, the degree of expectation of the player for the big win is not higher than that of the normal frame movable body performance pattern. It is possible to make it feel like.

It should be noted that some of the examples of effects shown in FIGS. 314(A) to 314(K) may be combined to be executed as effects. In this case, in the game board side effect display device 1600, it is preferable to combine so as not to display a plurality of simulated frame movable body images at the same time. For example, from timing t4 to timing t7, the production pattern shown in FIG. 314(K) is executed, and from timing t7 to timing t11, the production pattern shown in FIG. 314(J) is executed. It is possible to execute a production pattern that can play both.

FIGS. 315(A) to 315(E) show modifications of the light emission mode of the light emitting portion of the movable frame which can be applied to the production patterns described with reference to FIGS. 283(A) to 284(B). is shown. Note that FIG. 315(A) collectively expresses each effect pattern described with reference to FIGS. 283(A) to 284(B).

FIG. 315(B) shows an effect pattern in which the light-emitting portion of the movable frame is turned off at the timing (timing t7) when the movable frame starts to move from the standby position to the moving position. Also, in FIG. 315(C), the light-emitting section of the movable frame is turned off at the timing (timing t5) before the timing (timing t7) when the frame movable body starts to move from the standby position to the moving position. It shows the performance pattern.

In this way, before the movable frame body enters the second state, the light-emitting section of the movable frame body is turned off, and this state is maintained until the operation section is operated or until the effective period of operation ends. By being maintained, it becomes difficult for the player to notice that the frame movable body is moving from the standby position to the moving position. In such a situation, when the player operates the operation unit, the movable frame that has completed the movement to the movement position suddenly emits light from the extinguished state (special light emitting effect state or light emitting effect state). state), it is possible to give the player a big surprise.

FIG. 315(D) shows an effect pattern in which the light emission of the light emitting unit of the movable frame body is suppressed at timing t9 instead of being turned off. The state in which light emission is suppressed may be, for example, light emission with a longer blinking period or a smaller light amount than in the light emission effect state.

In this way, the same effect as in the case of turning off the light can be obtained by setting the state in which light emission is suppressed instead of turning off the light.

FIG. 315(E) shows an effect pattern in which the light-emitting portion of the movable frame body is put into a specific light-emission state instead of being turned off at timing t9. This effect pattern should be selected only when the result of the special lottery is a big hit. At timing t9 when the frame movable body enters the second state, an example of a production pattern in which the light-emitting section of the frame movable body is in the specific light emission production state has been shown. At timing t5, which is the timing before the body starts to move, the light-emitting section of the frame movable body may be brought into a specific light-emitting effect state.

By suddenly changing the state of the light-emitting part of the frame movable body to the specific light-emission presentation state instead of turning off the light, the player can have a great sense of anticipation for the big win.

FIGS. 316(A) to 316(E) show modified examples of the display mode of the simulated image of the movable frame applicable to the effect patterns described with reference to FIGS. 292(A) to 293(B). It is a thing. Note that FIG. 316(A) collectively expresses each effect pattern described with reference to FIGS. 292(A) to 293(B).

FIG. 316(B) is a time chart showing the operation patterns of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the display state of the simulated image of the movable frame body displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. be. In this effect pattern, the dynamic display of the movable frame body simulated image is started at timing t7, and thereafter, at timing t9, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 in the standby position (first state) are displayed. starts rotating and enters a rotating state (second state).

As described above, the image imitating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the image imitating the left ear frame movable body 7200 move at the same speed as the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 rotate. displayed. Therefore, between timing t7 and timing t9, the image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200 rotate twice. , the left ear frame movable body 7200 actually starts rotating. It should be noted that the timing for starting the display of the frame movable body simulation image may be earlier. For example, if the display of the simulated image of the movable frame is started at timing t5, an image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and an image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200 are displayed in four rotations. Later, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 actually start rotating.

In this way, by displaying the movable-frame-body simulated image before the movable-frame-body starts to operate, the display of the movable-frame-body simulated image serves as an advance notice that the movable-frame-body will operate. . In addition, the dynamic display of the simulated image of the movable frame allows the player to recognize how the movable frame operates. A player who sees such a simulated image of the movable frame can visually recognize the movement of the movable frame from the start of the movement. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player misses the movement of the frame movable body. In addition, by dynamically displaying simulated images of the movable frame before the movable frame starts to move, the player can certainly recognize how the movable frame moves. becomes. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from inadvertently touching the movable frame body from injuring his finger or the like. In addition, it is possible to indicate that a player who has placed a light load or the like on the frame movable body should move them to another position. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the luggage falls and the player is injured, or the driving section for moving the frame movable body is subjected to a load.

FIG. 316(C) is a time chart showing the operation patterns of the movable right ear frame body 7100 and the movable left ear frame body 7200 and the display state of the simulated image of the movable frame body displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. be. In this production pattern, at timing t9, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 in the standby position (first state) start rotating and enter the rotating state (second state). At t11, the dynamic display of the simulated image of the movable frame is started.

In this way, by displaying the movable frame simulated image after the movable frame starts to move, the player can notice that the movable frame has changed to the rotating state (second state). It becomes possible to make it difficult to break. Therefore, if the player does not notice the change in the state of the movable frame, the player suddenly sees the movable frame in a rotating state, which can bring a great surprise to the player. becomes.

FIG. 316(D) is a time chart showing the operation patterns of the movable right ear frame body 7100 and the movable left ear frame body 7200 and the display state of the simulated image of the movable frame body displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. be. In this effect pattern, the dynamic display of the frame movable body simulation image is started at timing t7. From timing t7 to timing t9, dynamic display of the simulated image of the movable frame is performed at high speed (two rotations per second). After that, at timing t9, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 in the standby position (first state) start rotating and enter the rotating state (second state).

In this manner, before the movable frame starts to operate, the simulated image of the movable frame is rotated and displayed at a faster speed (twice the speed) than the actual movable frame. changes to the rotating state (second state), it is possible to get used to the operation mode.

FIG. 316(E) is a time chart showing the operation patterns of the movable right ear frame body 7100 and the movable left ear frame body 7200, and the display state of the simulated image of the movable frame body displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. be. In this effect pattern, the dynamic display of the frame movable body simulation image is started at timing t5. From timing t5 to timing t9, dynamic display of the simulated image of the movable frame is performed at a low speed (half rotation per second). After that, at timing t9, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 in the standby position (first state) start rotating and enter the rotating state (second state).

In this manner, before the movable frame body starts to operate, the simulated image of the movable frame body is rotated and displayed at a slower speed (half the speed) than the actual movable frame body. It is possible for the player who feels that the motion mode is too fast when the body changes to the rotating state (second state) to know the motion mode of the frame movable body.

297 to 299, etc., and modifications thereof It may be configured to be executable as an effect pattern by appropriately applying it to the inner frame movable body in .

316(B) to 316(E) are described with reference to FIGS. 306 to 308, etc., and modifications of these embodiments. may be applied to either one of the inner frame movable body and the outer frame movable body, or may be applied to both in the same manner so as to be executable as a production pattern.

In the examples described above with reference to FIGS. 298 and 299, and FIGS. 307 and 308, respectively, after the first movable frame body is changed from the first state to the second state, that state is maintained for a certain period of time. It is configured to change the second frame movable body from the first state to the second state later. Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 298 and 299, it is configured to take a predetermined time even when changing the first movable frame body from the first state to the second state.

By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player overlooks the mode in which the movable frame body changes state.

283 and 284, 292 and 293, 298 and 299, and 307 and 308, the frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state. At the same timing as the timing, the simulated image of the movable frame body is dynamically displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 in the same manner as the changing manner of the actual movable frame body. C), FIGS. 314(E), 314(H), and 316(C), at the timing before starting the dynamic display of the frame movable body simulation image, the real frame The movable body may be configured to start an action to change from the first state to the second state or to change from the first state to the second state.

By adopting such a configuration, a player who sees the dynamic display of the simulated image of the movable frame can easily find the movable frame in motion without noticing that the real movable frame is in motion. It becomes possible to

In the examples described above with reference to FIGS. 292 and 293, FIGS. 298 and 299, and FIGS. 307 and 308, when the player operates the operation unit during the valid operation period, the result of the special lottery Depending on the condition, the state of the movable frame may change from the first state to the second state, or the second state may change to either the third state or the fourth state. .

With such a configuration, the player can determine the position of the operation unit and the position of the movable frame body whose state may change, and then operate the movable frame body while keeping his/her eyes aligned with the movable frame body. It is possible for the player to operate the operation part at a desired timing without looking at the part. As a result, it is possible to visually confirm whether or not the state of the movable frame body changes, and if so, to what state the state of the movable frame body changes.

In the examples described above with reference to FIGS. 292 and 293, FIGS. 298 and 299, and FIGS. However, in addition to the above example, a production pattern for displaying a special operation instruction image that can be displayed only when the result of the special lottery is a big win may be configured to be executable. For example, as the operation instruction image, the image of the movable frame may be displayed simultaneously with the image of the operation unit.

With such a configuration, when the player visually recognizes the special operation instruction image, the player can recognize that the result of the special lottery is a big win and that the movable frame body will always operate when the operation section is operated. As a result, it is possible to operate the operation section while keeping the line of sight on the frame movable body, and to fully enjoy the movement of the frame movable body.

In the examples described above with reference to FIGS. 283 and 284, FIGS. 292 and 293, FIGS. 298 and 299, and FIGS. A light-emitting part that can irradiate light is provided separately from the movable frame, and after the movable frame changes its state, it is turned off at the same timing as the operation effective period starts, and the operation to the operation part is performed. 315(D) and 315(E). , it is not always necessary to turn off the light, and it may be configured to be in a light emitting state distinguishable from the normal light emitting state. For example, only the outer frame movable body is turned off, the inner frame movable body is turned into a specific light emission state, or the right frame movable body is turned off and the left frame movable body is turned into a specific light emission state, so that a big hit It may be configured to notify the occurrence of Alternatively, all the frame movable bodies are turned off until the operation effective period occurs, and the inner frame movable body is put into a lighting effect state in response to the occurrence of the operation effective period to notify that the operation effective period has occurred, and then the operation unit. According to the operation to or the end of the operation valid period, the light emitting state of all the frame side movable bodies may be set to the light emitting state according to the result of the special lottery.

In this way, by changing the light emission state of the movable frame body to a different state according to the change in the state of the movable frame body, it becomes easier to perceive that the movable frame body has moved by the change in the light emission mode. In addition, if at least a part of the movable frame is illuminated, the player is less likely to be injured when the movable frame moves compared to when the movable frame is turned off. be

283 and 284, 292 and 293, 298 and 299, and 307 and 308, the timing at which the frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state 314 (B ), FIG. 314(D), FIG. 314(F), FIG. 314(G), FIG. 314(I), FIG. 314(K), FIG. 316(B), FIG. As described above with reference, at the timing prior to the timing at which the actual movable frame body starts to change from the first state to the second state or changes from the first state to the second state, , dynamic display of the simulated image of the movable frame may be started.

By adopting such a configuration, since the movable frame can be visually recognized in a state in which the motion of the movable frame is known in advance, every move of the movable frame can be overlooked. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of the situation. Such a configuration is particularly effective when the frame movable body moves intricately as in the time charts shown in FIGS. 298 and 299, or FIGS.

In the examples described above with reference to FIGS. 283 and 284, and FIGS. 298 and 299, respectively, the movable frame body changes from the first state to the second state in the same time (two seconds). The simulated image is configured to be dynamically displayed at the same speed as the changing mode of the actual movable frame body, but as described above with reference to FIG. The speed at which the display mode simulating the first state changes to the display mode simulating the second state may be faster than the speed at which the movable frame body changes from the first state to the second state.

In this way, the display mode in which the simulated image of the movable frame simulates the first state in a time (one second) shorter than the time (two seconds) required for the movable frame body to change from the first state to the second state. By setting the display mode to a state simulating the second state, the eyes get accustomed to the quick movement of the simulated image of the movable frame body, so that the real movable frame body changes from the first state to the second state. In some cases, it becomes possible to fully enjoy the movement.

In the examples described above with reference to FIGS. 292 and 293, and FIGS. 307 and 308, respectively, the frame movable body is configured to rotate once per second in the second state. As described above with reference, before the movable frame enters the second state, the movable frame simulated image may be dynamically displayed so as to rotate at a faster speed than the movable frame simulated image. For example, after the movable frame simulated image is displayed so as to rotate once or multiple times at a speed of one rotation in 0.5 seconds, the movable frame may be placed in the second state.

In this manner, dynamic display is performed in which the simulated image of the movable frame rotates once in a time (0.5 seconds) shorter than the time required for the movable frame to rotate once (1 second). By doing so, the eyes become accustomed to the quick movement of the simulated image of the movable frame, so that it is possible to fully enjoy the rotational movement of the real movable frame in the second state.

In the examples described above with reference to FIGS. 283 and 284, and FIGS. 298 and 299, respectively, the movable frame body changes from the first state to the second state in the same time (two seconds). The simulated image is configured to be dynamically displayed at the same speed as the changing mode of the actual frame movable body. As described above, the speed at which the movable frame simulated image changes from the display state simulating the first state to the display state simulating the second state is changed from the first state to the second state. It may be slower than the changing speed.

In this way, the movable frame simulated image is displayed in the first state in a longer time (4 seconds) than the time (2 seconds) required for the movable frame body to change from the first state to the second state. By configuring the display mode so as to change from the mode to the display mode of the state simulating the second state, even if the player feels that the movement of the movable frame is too fast for the player, the simulated image of the movable frame can be viewed. By being there, the player can recognize the action mode.

In the examples described above with reference to FIGS. 292 and 293, and FIGS. 307 and 308, respectively, the frame movable body is configured to rotate once per second in the second state. As described above with reference, before the movable frame body enters the second state, the movable frame simulated image may be dynamically displayed in a mode rotating at a slower speed than that. For example, after the movable frame simulated image is displayed so as to rotate once or multiple times at a speed of one rotation in 0.5 seconds, the movable frame may be set to the second state.
In this manner, dynamic display is performed in which the simulated image of the movable frame rotates once over a period of time (two seconds) longer than the time (one second) required for the movable frame to rotate once. As a result, even if the player feels that the actual rotating motion of the movable frame body in the second state is too fast, the player recognizes the mode of motion by looking at the simulated image of the movable frame body. becomes possible.

In the examples described above with reference to FIGS. 283 and 284, and FIGS. 298 and 299, respectively, the simulated image of the movable frame is displayed in the same manner as the actual state of the movable frame is changed from the first state to the second state. However, it is configured so that the display dynamically changing from the image showing the state simulating the first state to the image showing the state simulating the second state is performed only once. As described with reference to FIGS. 314(J) and 314(K), such display of the movable-frame-body simulated image may be performed multiple times.

In the examples described above with reference to FIGS. 292 and 293, and FIGS. 307 and 308, respectively, the movable frame body simulated image is displayed at the same timing as when the movable frame body changes from the first state to the second state. is started, and while the actual movable frame body continues in the second state (rotating state), the simulated image of the movable frame body is dynamically rotated and displayed in the same manner as the actual movable frame body changes. It is configured. Therefore, the simulated image of the movable frame body is repeatedly rotated and displayed in a loop.

In this way, the manner in which the state of the movable frame changes is dynamically displayed a plurality of times as a simulated image of the movable frame. To suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a player misses the change of a movable frame body from a first state to a second state by repeatedly and dynamically displaying simulated images of the movable frame body in a manner of periodically changing the frame movable body. becomes possible.

FIGS. 317(A) to 318(B) show modified examples of the production patterns described with reference to FIGS. 283(A) to 284(B). In this embodiment, at the start of the valid operation period (timing t9), the movable frame body starts to change from the standby position (first state) to the completed movement state (second state). the simulated image of the movable frame is not displayed; the precursor display is performed from timing t7 to timing t9 before the operation effective period occurs; This is different from the effect pattern described with reference to FIGS. 283(A) to 284(B) in that the post-operation display is performed when the effective period of operation ends without being performed (timing t18). Regarding points other than these (for example, the lighting effect state of the frame movable body, the stop timing of the decorative pattern, etc.), the effect mode is basically common, so the description of the part where the effect mode is common will be omitted. , the different parts mentioned above will be mainly described below.

FIG. 317(A) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a big hit and the player operates the operation unit during the period when the acceptance of operation for the operation unit is valid. there is FIG. 317(B) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a loss and the player operates the operation unit during the period when the acceptance of operations on the operation unit is valid. there is FIG. 318(A) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a big hit and the player does not operate the operation unit during the period when the operation acceptance for the operation unit is valid. ing. FIG. 318(B) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a loss and the player does not operate the operation unit during the period when operation reception for the operation unit is valid. ing.

In each effect pattern shown in FIGS. 317(A) to 318(B), the game board-side effect display device 1600 starts a precursor display, which is a display suggesting that an operation valid period will occur, from timing t7. . As the precursor display, the characters "Push?" At timing t9, the valid operation period starts, and an image of characters "Push!!" is displayed as an operation instruction display indicating that the operation unit is in the accepting state. The operation instruction display ends when an operation is performed on the operation unit (timing t14) or when the effective period of operation expires without being operated (timing t18). Display characters as images. The post-operation display continues for two seconds and then ends (timing t16 or timing t20).

On the other hand, at timing t9, the movable frame body is turned off and starts to move from the standby position (first state), and at timing t11, the movement is completed (second state). Become.

In this way, before or during the movement of the movable frame body, a display (an indication display or an operation instruction display) that distracts the player's attention from the movable frame body is provided, thereby allowing the player to read the operation section. When the operation is performed, the player's line of sight is guided to the movable frame by changing the state of the movable frame from the extinguished state to the specific luminous effect state or the normal luminous effect state. Since the player feels as if the frame movable body has changed from the first state to the second state without realizing it, it is possible to give the player a great surprise. Further, even if it takes a long time to change the state of the movable frame from the first state to the second state, the player can be assured that the movable frame will be in the second state by the precursor display or the operation instruction display. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a person feels irritated. In addition, since it is possible to move the frame movable body slowly, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of a situation in which a player carelessly touching the frame movable body is injured.

FIGS. 319(A) to 320(B) show modifications of the effect patterns described with reference to FIGS. 317(A) to 318(B). In this embodiment, the state in which the frame movable body is in the standby position (first state) is changed to the timing (t14) when the operation section is operated or the timing (timing t9) when the effective period of operation ends (timing t9). , the point where the movement is completed (the second state), and the movable frame body changes to the second state only when the result of the special lottery is a big win. This is different from the effect pattern described with reference to FIG. 318(B). Regarding points other than these (for example, the lighting effect state of the frame movable body, the stop timing of the decorative pattern, etc.), the effect mode is basically common, so the description of the part where the effect mode is common will be omitted. , the different parts mentioned above will be mainly described below.

FIG. 319(A) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a big hit and the player operates the operation unit during the period when the operation acceptance for the operation unit is valid. there is FIG. 319(B) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a loss and the player operates the operation unit during the period when the acceptance of operations on the operation unit is valid. there is FIG. 320(A) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a big win and the player does not operate the operating section during the period when the acceptance of operating the operating section is valid. ing. FIG. 320(B) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a loss and the player does not operate the operation unit during the period in which operation acceptance for the operation unit is valid. ing.

In the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 319A and 319B, an operation effective period occurs, and the player operates the operation unit while an operation instruction is being displayed (timing t14). , When the special lottery result is a big hit, the movable frame moves from the standby position (first state) to the completed movement (second state), and displays after the operation ( Timing t14 to timing t16), if the result of the special lottery is a loss, the state in which the frame movable body is in the standby position (first state) remains unchanged, and only the display after the operation is performed. there is

In the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 320(A) and 320(B), when the operation valid period ends (t18) and the special lottery result is a big hit, the frame movable body is in the standby position. While moving from (first state) to the state where movement is completed (second state), display after operation is performed (timing t18 to timing t20), and if the special lottery result is a loss, the movable frame body is in the standby position (first state), and only the post-operation display is performed.

In the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 319A and 320A, at timing t22, the state in which the frame movable body has been completely moved (second state) to the state in which it is in the standby position (first state). Movement is started, and movement to the standby position is completed at timing t24.

In this way, even after the player has operated the operation unit, by performing the post-operation display instead of the operation instruction display, the game can be played from the movable frame body that changes the state from the first state to the second state. It is possible to divert a person's consciousness. By terminating the post-operation display at the timing when the change to the second state of the frame movable body is completed, the player finally notices that the frame movable body is in the second state. It is possible to give surprises. In addition, even if it takes a long time to change the state of the movable frame from the first state to the second state, the player is irritated by the post-operation display that the movable frame is in the second state. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the user feels an emotion. In addition, since it is possible to move the frame movable body slowly, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of a situation in which a player carelessly touching the frame movable body is injured.

The timing of changing the frame movable body from the light-out state to the specific light emitting state is set to be the timing (timing t16) when the frame movable body completes the change from the first state to the second state. may By adopting such a configuration, it becomes more difficult for the player to notice changes in the state of the frame movable body.

FIGS. 321(A) to 322(B) show modified examples of the production patterns described with reference to FIGS. 298(A) to 299(B). In the present embodiment, the state in which the inner frame movable body is in the standby position (first state) is changed to the state in which movement is completed (second state) in accordance with the start of the operation valid period (timing t7). The starting point, the point at which the simulated image of the movable frame is not displayed, the point at which the precursor display is performed from timing t5 to timing t7 before the operation valid period occurs, the point at which the operation unit is operated (timing t11) or the operation 298(A) to 299(B) is different from the effect pattern described with reference to FIGS. Regarding points other than these (for example, the lighting effect state of the frame movable body, the stop timing of the decorative pattern, etc.), the effect mode is basically common, so the description of the part where the effect mode is common will be omitted. , the different parts mentioned above will be mainly described below.

FIG. 321(A) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a big hit and the player operates the operation unit during the period when the operation reception for the operation unit is valid. there is FIG. 321(B) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a loss and the player operates the operation unit during the period when the acceptance of operations on the operation unit is valid. there is FIG. 322(A) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a big win and the player does not operate the operating section during the period when the acceptance of operating the operating section is valid. ing. FIG. 322(B) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a loss and the player does not operate the operating section during the period when the acceptance of operating the operating section is valid. ing.

In each effect pattern shown in FIGS. 321(A) to 322(B), the game board-side effect display device 1600 starts a precursor display, which is a display suggesting that an operation valid period will occur, from timing t5. . As a precursor display, the text "Push?" At timing t7, the valid operation period starts, and an image of characters "PUSH!!" is displayed as an operation instruction display indicating that the operation unit is in the accepting state. The operation instruction display ends when an operation is performed on the operation unit (timing t11) or when the effective period of operation expires without being operated (timing t16). Display characters as images. The post-operation display continues for two seconds and then ends (timing t13 or timing t18).

On the other hand, at timing t7, the inner frame movable body is turned off and starts to move from the standby position (first state), and at timing t9, the movement is completed (second state). becomes.

In the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 321(A) and 321(B), an operation effective period occurs, and the player operates the operation unit while an operation instruction is being displayed (timing t11). If the special lottery result is a big hit, the outer frame movable body moves from the standby position (first state) to the completed state (second state), and displays after the operation. (Timing t11 to timing t13), when the special lottery result is a loss, the effect pattern in which only the display after the operation is performed without changing from the state (first state) where the outer frame movable body is in the standby position is displayed. It is

In the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 322(A) and 322(B), when the operation valid period ends (t16) and the special lottery result is a big hit, the outer frame movable body is at the standby position. While moving from the state (first state) to the state where the movement is completed (second state), a post-operation display is performed (timing t16 to timing t18), and if the special lottery result is a loss, the frame is movable. A production pattern is shown in which only the post-operation display is performed without changing from the state where the body is in the standby position (first state).

After that, in the production patterns shown in FIGS. 321(A) and 322(A), the outer frame movable body completes the change from the second state to the first state from timing t26 to timing t28. Further, in the production patterns shown in FIGS. 321(A) to 322(B), the inner frame movable body completes the change from the second state to the first state from timing t30 to timing t32, and a series of frame movable bodies operation ends.

In this way, before or during the movement of the inner frame movable body, a display (premonitory display or operation instruction display) that distracts the player from the frame movable body is performed, thereby increasing the player's awareness. The focus will be on the game board side effect display device 1600 . In addition, even during the movement of the outer frame movable body after the player has operated the operation section, the post-operation display is performed in place of the operation instruction display that has been performed up to that point, so that the player's awareness is improved. The player continues to be directed to the game board side effect display device 1600 . By adopting such a configuration, the player feels as if both the inner frame movable body and the outer frame movable body have changed from the first state to the second state without realizing it, which greatly surprises the player. be able to give. In addition, even if it takes time to change the state of the inner frame movable body or the outer frame movable body from the first state to the second state, the inner frame movable body can be moved by the precursor display, the operation instruction display, and the post-operation display. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player feels irritated by the fact that the body or the outer frame movable body is in the second state. In addition, since it is possible to move the frame movable body slowly, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of a situation in which a player carelessly touching the frame movable body is injured.

It should be noted that the timing of changing the frame movable body from the extinguished state to the specific light emitting state is performed at the timing (timing t13 or timing t18) when the outer frame movable body completes the change from the first state to the second state. It may be configured as By adopting such a configuration, it becomes more difficult for the player to notice changes in the state of the frame movable body.

FIGS. 323(A) to 324(B) show modifications of the production patterns described with reference to FIGS. 298(A) to 299(B). In this embodiment, when an operation is performed on the operation unit (timing t11) or when the effective period of operation ends (timing t16), the state where the inner frame movable body is at the standby position (first state) is changed. , start to change to the state (second state) where the movement is completed, and then the outer frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state, the point where the simulated image of the movable frame is not displayed, and the valid operation period is Precursor display is performed from timing t5 to timing t7 before occurrence, and post-operation display when an operation is performed on the operation unit (timing t11) or when the effective period of operation ends without being operated (timing t16). 298(A) to 299(B) is different from the production pattern described with reference to FIGS. Regarding points other than these (for example, the lighting effect state of the frame movable body, the stop timing of the decorative pattern, etc.), the effect mode is basically common, so the description of the part where the effect mode is common will be omitted. , the different parts mentioned above will be mainly described below.

FIG. 323(A) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a big hit and the player operates the operation unit during the period when the operation reception for the operation unit is valid. there is FIG. 323(B) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a loss and the player operates the operation unit during the period when the operation acceptance for the operation unit is valid. there is FIG. 324(A) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a big win and the player does not operate the operation unit during the period when the operation acceptance for the operation unit is valid. ing. FIG. 324(B) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a loss and the player does not operate the operation unit during the period when operation reception for the operation unit is valid. ing.

In each effect pattern shown in FIGS. 323(A) to 324(B), the game board-side effect display device 1600 starts a precursor display, which is a display suggesting that an operation valid period will occur, from timing t5. . As a precursor display, the text "Push?" At timing t7, the valid operation period starts, and an image of characters "PUSH!!" is displayed as an operation instruction display indicating that the operation unit is in the accepting state. The operation instruction display ends when an operation is performed on the operation unit (timing t11) or when the effective period of operation expires without being operated (timing t16). Display characters as images. The post-operation display continues for two seconds and then ends (timing t13 or timing t18).

In the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 323(A) and 323(B), an operation effective period occurs, and the player operates the operation unit while an operation instruction is being displayed (timing t11). , When the special lottery result is a big hit, the inner frame movable body changes from the state (first state) in the standby position to the state (second state) in which the movement is completed (timing t11 to timing t13). , the outer frame movable body changes from the state (first state) in the standby position to the state (second state) in which the movement is completed (timing t15 to timing t17), and when the special lottery result is a loss, An effect pattern is shown that does not change from the state (first state) in which the outer frame movable body is at the standby position.

In the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 324(A) and 324(B), when the operation valid period ends (t16) and the special lottery result is a big win, the inner frame movable body is at the standby position. After changing from the state (first state) to the state in which the movement is completed (second state) (timings t16 to t18), the movement is completed from the state (first state) in which the outer frame movable body is at the standby position. When the state (second state) changes (timing t20 to timing t22) and the result of the special lottery is a loss, there is an effect pattern that does not change from the state (first state) where the outer frame movable body is at the standby position. It is shown.

After that, in the production patterns shown in FIGS. 323(A) and 324(A), the outer frame movable body completes the change from the second state to the first state from timing t26 to timing t28. Also, in the production patterns shown in FIGS. 323(A) and 324(B), the inner frame movable body completes the change from the second state to the first state from timing t30 to timing t32, and a series of frame movable bodies operation ends.

In this way, when the player operates the operation section, the inner frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state, and then the outer frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state. By changing the state, the player slowly observes the manner in which the frame movable body changes the state, and from the player's point of view, the degree of excitement gradually increases over time.

321(A) to 322(B) and the effect patterns described with reference to FIGS. 323(A) to 324(B) are executed according to the game state. may be configured.

For example, in the case of a normal game state (such as during non-probability fluctuation, during non-time saving, during non-electric support, etc.) with a relatively long average variation time of decorative symbols, Figure 323 (A) ~ Figure 324 (B) It is preferable to execute the production pattern described with reference to . In this case, the player can thoroughly enjoy the movement of the frame movable body because the effect is performed in a state in which a big win is unlikely to occur.

On the other hand, it is a state that can occur after a big hit occurs once, and the average variation time of decorative symbols is relatively short compared to the normal game state. , during time saving, during electric power support, etc.), it is preferable to configure so as to execute the effect patterns described with reference to FIGS. In this case, the time from the operation of the operation part until the frame movable body enters the second state is short, and the transition to the jackpot game state can be performed at a good tempo.

In the normal game state, only the production patterns described with reference to FIGS. ) may be made executable.
323(A) to 324(B) rather than the production patterns described with reference to FIGS. 321(A) to 322(B). 321(A) to 322(B) rather than the production patterns described with reference to FIGS. 323(A) to 324(B). It may be configured to increase the ratio of execution of the effect patterns described with reference.

Also, the timing for executing the production patterns described with reference to FIGS. 323(A) to 324(B) is configured to be executed at an earlier stage than just before the stop display of the decorative symbols. good too. For example, before the decorative pattern forms the ready-to-reach state, the production pattern described with reference to FIGS. 323(A) to 324(B) is executed without stopping the decorative pattern, and When the frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state, the decorative pattern may form the ready-to-win state. By adopting such a structure, the players who have visually recognized the state in which the inner frame movable body and the outer frame movable body operate over time gradually develop an expectation that the result of the special lottery will be a big win. can be increased. In addition, it is desirable that the decorative pattern forms the reach state when the outer frame movable body is in the second state (for example, timing t24).

In addition, after executing the production pattern described with reference to FIG. 323(A) to FIG. 321(A) to 322(B) or 323(A) to 324(B) may be executed. good.

In this way, after executing the production patterns described with reference to FIGS. 321(A) to 322(B) or 323(A) to 324(B). 323(A) to 324(B) as an effect pattern for determining whether or not the ready-to-win state is formed, the frame movable body is displayed as a mere effect without accepting the player's operation to the operation unit. It may be configured to execute an effect pattern that operates. In this case, the operation invalid period continues as the reception state of the operation unit, and the precursor display, operation instruction display, and post-operation display are naturally not performed. By executing the performance pattern of such a modified mode, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player feels troublesome to operate the operating part in a state where the expectation of the big win is not so high.

In the production patterns described with reference to FIGS. 321(A) to 322(B), an example of displaying the characters "Push?" You may display so that it may move to a position. Also, it is preferable to move the movable frame body away from a certain position. For example, when the operation instruction display is performed in the central portion of the game board side effect display device 1600, as a precursor display, from the position directly above or diagonally above the game board side effect display device 1600 It is preferable that the characters "Push?" Further, as a post-operation display, the characters “!!” may move from the central portion of the game board side effect display device 1600 directly below or obliquely downward from the game board side effect display device 1600 . By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to further distract the player's attention from the upper movable frame body. As will be described later, when the frame movable body is provided below the game board side effect display device 1600, the precursor display and the post-operation display may be configured to move upward in the opposite manner.

In the production patterns described with reference to FIGS. 323(A) to 324(B), an example of displaying the characters "Push?" You may display so that it may move to a position. Also, it is preferable to move the movable frame body closer to a certain position. For example, when the operation instruction display is performed in the central portion of the game board-side effect display device 1600, the characters "PUSH?" It should be configured as follows. Further, as a post-operation display, the characters “!!” may move from the central portion of the game board side effect display device 1600 to the upper part of the game board side effect display device 1600 . With such a configuration, the player's line of sight can be guided to the frame movable body, and the player can fully view the entire series of changes of the frame movable body.

Further, as the operation instruction display, characters such as "!! PUSH!!" may be displayed as a special operation instruction display that occurs only when the special lottery result is a big win. As a post-operation display, instead of the character "!!", the operation instruction display "Push!!" or the special operation instruction display "!!Push!!" continues to be displayed as it is. may In addition, in response to the special operation instruction display "!!Push!!", the characters "!Push?!" !” may be displayed. In this way, the special characters displayed only when the result of the special lottery is a big hit are continuously displayed from before the effective period of operation until after the operation of the operation part, thereby giving the player a great sense of satisfaction. becomes possible.

FIGS. 325(A) to 325(D), FIGS. 326(A) to 326(C), and FIGS. 327(A) to 327(C) refer to FIGS. 283(A) to 284(B). 10 shows a modification of the effect pattern described above. In these modifications, only one of right ear frame movable body 7100 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as first frame movable body) and left ear frame movable body 7200 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as second frame movable body) the first frame movable body and the second frame movable body may be moved at different timings, and the first frame movable body is modeled after the first frame movable body. Although the simulated image of the movable frame is displayed, the simulated image of the movable frame simulating the second movable frame is basically not displayed for the second movable frame. is operated, and the timing at which the frame movable body operates is not limited to the timing just before the decorative pattern stops.

325(A) to 325(D), 326(A) to 326(C), and 327(A) to 327(C) are the effects performed during the variation of the decorative symbols. It is a pattern, and indicates a state in which a predetermined number of seconds have passed since the start of variation of the decorative design (for example, 10 seconds have passed since the start of variation of the decorative design at timing t0).

In the effect pattern shown in FIG. 325(A), the first frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state from timing t5 to timing t7, and maintains the second state for a predetermined time (8 seconds). After that (timing t7 to timing t15), the second state changes to the first state (timing t15 to timing t17). Further, the simulated image of the movable frame simulating the first movable frame changes from the first state to the second state in accordance with the movement of the first movable frame, and is continuously displayed in the second state for a predetermined time. and changes from the second state to the second state (timing t5 to timing t17). On the other hand, the second frame movable body maintains the first state without moving from the standby position. Also, the frame movable body simulated image simulating the second frame movable body is not displayed.

On the other hand, in the effect pattern shown in FIG. 325(B), the second frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state from timing t5 to timing t7, and after maintaining the second state for a predetermined time (timing t7 to timing t15), the state changes from the second state to the first state (timing t15 to timing t17). In addition, when the second frame movable body operates, the frame movable body simulated image simulating the second frame movable body is not displayed. On the other hand, the first frame movable body maintains the first state without moving from the standby position. Also, the frame movable body simulated image simulating the first frame movable body is not displayed.

Comparing the effect pattern shown in FIG. 325(A) with the effect pattern shown in FIG. 325(B), in the case of the effect pattern shown in FIG. Since the image is displayed, the player can easily notice that the first frame movable body has moved. On the other hand, in the case of the production pattern shown in FIG. 325(B), even when the second frame movable body is operated, the frame movable body simulated image simulating the second frame movable body is not displayed. , the player hardly notices that the second frame movable body has moved.

When the first frame movable body and the second frame movable body operate, the degree of expectation that the special lottery result corresponding to the changing decorative pattern will be a big hit is determined by the first frame movable body and the second frame movable body. It is preferable to configure such that the effect pattern is selected so as to be higher than when it is not performed. For example, the degree of expectation when the first frame movable body operates and the degree of expectation when the second frame movable body operates may each be 10%. With such a configuration, by displaying the simulated image of the movable frame simulating the first movable frame, the first movable frame is in a state where the eyes are directed toward the first movable frame. A player who notices this will have a sense of expectation for the big win.

On the other hand, in order to notice the movement of the second frame movable body, it is necessary to look away from the game board side effect display device 1600 on which decorative symbols are displayed and look at the second frame movable body. Therefore, if you frequently check whether the second frame movable body is operating or if you accidentally face the direction in which the second frame movable body is provided, the second frame movable body will not operate. You will notice that you are there. In this case, the player feels that he/she has learned by his or her own strength that the degree of expectation for the big win is high, and as part of the effect such that the simulated frame movable body imitating the first frame movable body is displayed, the first frame movable body simulation image is displayed. A greater sense of accomplishment will be felt compared to the case where the one-frame movable body is visually recognized, so to speak.

By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to further increase the player's interest in the frame movable body, and the player's interest, which was conventionally within a predetermined range centered on the game board 5, can be directed outward. It is possible to expand.

In the production patterns shown in FIGS. 325(A) and 325(B), an example is shown in which the degree of expectation when the first frame movable body and the second frame movable body operate is the same 10%, but FIG. ) may be set higher than the expectation level when the first frame movable body operates in the effect pattern shown in FIG. 325(A). . For example, the effect pattern may be selected so that the degree of expectation when the second frame movable body operates is 15% and the degree of expectation when the first frame movable body operates is 10%. With such a configuration, the player who notices that the second frame movable body is operating will feel a greater sense of accomplishment.

The production pattern shown in FIG. 325(C) is a production pattern obtained by modifying the production pattern shown in FIG. 325(B). In this production pattern, the time (timing t7 to timing t21) during which the second frame movable body is in the second state is 14 seconds, and in the production pattern shown in FIG. This is longer than the 8 seconds during which the state is maintained (timing t7 to timing t15). In this way, by making the time during which the second frame movable body is in the second state longer than the time during which the first frame movable body is in the second state, it is possible for the player to put the second frame movable body in the second state. Being in two states makes it easier to notice.

The expectation level of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 325(C) may be set higher than the expectation level of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 325(B). For example, the effect patterns may be selected so that the expectation level of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 325(B) is 15% and the expectation level of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 325(C) is 25%. . With such a configuration, the player will have a greater sense of anticipation as to how long the second state will be maintained from the moment the player notices that the second frame movable body is operating. The timing at which the player notices that the second frame movable body is in the second state is not constant, and there are cases where it is unknown when the second state has been reached, so the duration of the second state is As the game continues, the player will have a greater sense of expectation.

In the effect pattern shown in FIG. 325(B) and the effect pattern shown in FIG. 325(C), the longer the duration of the second frame movable body being in the second state, the greater the expectation that the special lottery result will be a big hit. Although the embodiment in which the is high is shown, it is also possible to provide three or more production patterns in which the duration of the second state is different. For example, an effect pattern that maintains the second state from timing t7 to time t27 may be made executable, and the degree of expectation for this effect pattern may be 30%.

In the production pattern shown in FIG. 325(B) and the production pattern shown in FIG. 325(C), the longer the duration of the second frame movable body in the second state, the higher the expectation that the special lottery result will be a big hit. However, the degree of expectation is suggested by the number of times the second frame movable body is in the second state, not by the duration that the second frame movable body is in the second state. good too. The production pattern shown in FIG. 325(D) shows an example thereof. The production pattern shown in FIG. 325(D) shows an example in which the second frame movable body moves from the first state to the second state twice. Alternatively, an effect pattern in which the third action is performed after the second action may be configured to be executable. Also at this time, it is preferable that the degree of expectation increases as the number of operations increases. For example, the expectation level is 15% when the second frame movable body operates only once, the expectation level is 25% when the second frame movable body operates twice, and the second frame movable body operates three times. It is preferable to configure so that the degree of expectation when operating is 35%. In this way, the higher the number of times the second frame movable body moves, the higher the degree of expectation. As to how many times the 2nd frame movable body will move, the 2nd frame movable body will be visually recognized with a great sense of anticipation.

The production pattern shown in FIG. 326(A) is a production pattern obtained by modifying the production pattern shown in FIG. 325(A). In this production pattern, the operation mode of the first frame movable body and the display mode of the frame movable body simulated image simulating the first frame movable body are the same as those of the production pattern shown in FIG. There is no difference in the mode of production). On the other hand, in the production pattern shown in FIG. 326(A), the second frame movable body starts to change from the first state to the second state at timing t21, is in the second state from timing t23 to timing t33, and is in the second state from timing t23 to timing t33. It differs from the effect pattern shown in FIG. 325(A) in that it returns to the first state at t35. Further, in the effect pattern shown in FIG. 326(A), when the second frame movable body is moved, the frame movable body simulated image simulating the second frame movable body is not displayed.

In a gaming machine capable of executing the production pattern shown in FIG. 325(A) and the production pattern shown in FIG. , the first frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state, and after returning to the first state, the second frame movable body changes to the first state at the timing when a predetermined time (4 seconds) elapses. 325(A) is selected), and when the second frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state (see FIG. 326(A) When the production pattern shown is selected).

With such a configuration, after the player's line of sight once turns to the first frame movable body during the operation of the first frame movable body, before the player's line of sight returns to the game board side effect display device 1600, the first frame movable body is moved. Since the second frame movable body may move, it is possible to make a player who has little game experience recognize that the second frame movable body may move.

The expectation level of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 326(A) may be set higher than the expectation level of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 325(A). For example, the production patterns may be selected so that the expectation level of the production pattern shown in FIG. 326(A) is 25% and the expectation level of the production pattern shown in FIG. 325(A) is 10%. . By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to make the player feel the expectation that the second frame movable body will move after the first frame movable body moves.

The production patterns shown in FIGS. 326(B) and 326(C) are production patterns obtained by modifying the production pattern shown in FIG. 325(A). This production pattern differs from the production pattern shown in FIG. 325(A) in that the motion of the first frame movable body and the display of the frame movable body simulated image simulating the first frame movable body are performed multiple times.

In the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 326(B) and 326(C), the first frame movable body starts changing from the first state to the second state at timing t2, and moves from timing t4 to timing t6. 2 state, returns to the first state at timing t8, then again starts to change from the first state to the second state at timing t11, enters the second state from timing t13 to timing t15, and returns to the second state at timing t17. It returns to state 1. In addition, a dynamic display of a frame movable body simulated image simulating the first frame movable body is performed in synchronization with the motion of the first frame movable body.

After that, in the effect pattern shown in FIG. 326(C), the second frame movable body starts to change from the first state to the second state at timing t21, and is in the second state from timing t23 to timing t33. At t35, it returns to the first state. On the other hand, in the effect pattern shown in FIG. 326(B), the motion of the second frame movable body is not performed.

In a gaming machine capable of executing the production pattern shown in FIG. 326(B) and the production pattern shown in FIG. , the first frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state, and then returns to the first state (timing t17). There are cases where the movable body changes from the first state to the second state and cases where the second frame movable body maintains the first state and does not change to the second state.

With such a configuration, after the player's line of sight continues to face the first frame movable body when the first frame movable body operates, before the player's line of sight returns to the game board side effect display device 1600 Since the second frame movable body may move, it is possible to make a player who has little game experience recognize that the second frame movable body may move.

The expectation level of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 326(C) may be set higher than the expectation level of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 326(B). For example, the production patterns may be selected such that the expectation level of the production pattern shown in FIG. 326(B) is 25% and the expectation level of the production pattern shown in FIG. 326(C) is 35%. . By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to make the player feel the expectation that the second frame movable body will move after the first frame movable body moves.

The production patterns shown in FIGS. 327(A) to 327(C) are production patterns obtained by modifying the production pattern shown in FIG. 325(A). This effect pattern is different from the effect pattern shown in FIG. 325(A) in that the second frame movable body may operate at a timing earlier than the motion of the first frame movable body.

In the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 327A to 327C, the timing at which the first frame movable body operates and the timing at which the frame movable body simulated image simulating the first frame movable body is displayed are the same. . Specifically, the first frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state from timing t21 to timing t23, and after maintaining the second state for a predetermined time (8 seconds) (timing t23 to timing t31 ), and changes from the second state to the first state (timing t31 to timing t33). Further, the simulated image of the movable frame simulating the first movable frame changes from the first state to the second state in accordance with the movement of the first movable frame, and is continuously displayed in the second state for a predetermined time. and changes from the second state to the first state (timing t21 to timing t33).

On the other hand, in each effect pattern shown in FIGS. 327(A) to 327(C), the operation mode of the second frame movable body is different as follows.

In the effect pattern shown in FIG. 327(A), the second frame movable body continues to be in the first state during the period from t0 to t39 and never enters the second state. In the production pattern shown in FIG. 327(B), the second frame movable body starts to change from the first state to the second state at timing t5, stays in the second state from timing t7 to timing t15, and is in the second state at timing t17. , the state returns to the first state. In the effect pattern shown in FIG. 327(C), the second frame movable body starts changing from the first state to the second state at timing t5, stays in the second state from timing t7 to timing t33, and reaches timing t35. , the state returns to the first state. It should be noted that the display of the frame movable body simulation image simulating the second frame movable body is not performed in any of the effect patterns.

The expectation level of the production pattern shown in FIG. 327(C) is made higher than the expectation level of the production pattern shown in FIG. 327(B), and the expectation level of the production pattern shown in FIG. ) may be set higher than the expected degree of the effect pattern shown in FIG. For example, the expectation level of the production pattern shown in FIG. 327(A) is 10%, the expectation level of the production pattern shown in FIG. 327(B) is 20%, and the expectation level of the production pattern shown in FIG. %.

Comparing the effect pattern shown in FIG. 327(A) with the effect pattern shown in FIG. 327(B), it can be seen that when the effect pattern shown in FIG. 327(B) is executed, the player may miss the movement of the second frame movable body. be. A player who can visually recognize the action of the second frame movable body can recognize that the degree of expectation is 20% due to the action of the first frame movable body after that. On the other hand, the player who did not notice the movement of the second frame movable body would be in a state of not knowing the exact degree of expectation even if the first frame movable body were to move.

Comparing the effect pattern shown in FIG. 327(A) with the effect pattern shown in FIG. 327(C), in the case of the effect pattern shown in FIG. The movable body remains in the movement position (second state). Therefore, when the player sees the frame movable body simulated image simulating the first frame movable body and notices that the first frame movable body is in the second state, the player checks the state of the second frame movable body. , when the second frame movable body is not operating at that time and is in the first state, it can be recognized that the degree of expectation is not so high. On the other hand, if the second frame movable body is operating at that time and is in the second state, it can be recognized that the degree of expectation is relatively high.

Comparing the effect pattern shown in FIG. 327(B) with the effect pattern shown in FIG. The player is interested in whether the first movable frame moves while the movable frame is in the second state. Then, when the first frame movable body operates and enters the second state, the player can recognize that the degree of expectation is high. On the other hand, if the second frame movable body enters the first state before the first frame movable body enters the first state, the player may recognize that the degree of expectation is relatively low. becomes.

In addition, in the effect pattern shown in FIG. 327(C), the second frame movable body is set to the first state after the first frame movable body is set to the first state. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to entertain the player for a long period of time in a desirable state for the player, who has a high degree of expectation.

The embodiments have been described with the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 shown in FIG. 282 as the first frame movable body and the second frame movable body, respectively. The frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 may be configured as the first frame movable body and the second frame movable body, respectively, so as to execute the effect pattern described above.

The embodiments have been described with the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 shown in FIG. 282 as the first frame movable body and the second frame movable body, respectively. Either one or both of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 is the first frame movable body, and either the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 or the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 is used as the first frame movable body. Alternatively, both of them may be used as the second frame movable body. A state in which one or both of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 are in the second state is defined as the second state of the first frame movable body, and the left ear inner frame movable body. A state in which either or both of 7400 and left ear outer frame movable body 7450 is in the second state may be configured to execute the above-described effect pattern as the second state of the second frame movable body. .

297, etc., in the embodiment shown in FIG. 306, etc., one of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 is changed from the first state to the second state to execute the above-described effect pattern. Then, the other of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 is changed from the first state to the second state, and the first frame movable body is changed from the first state to the second state. You may adopt it as an action to do. In addition, after the other of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 is changed from the second state to the first state, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 , from the second state to the first state may be adopted as the operation of changing the first frame movable body from the second state to the first state.

Similarly, when executing the effect pattern described above in the embodiments shown in FIG. 297 and the like and FIG. After changing to the second state, the other of left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and left ear outer frame movable body 7450 is changed from the first state to the second state. You may employ|adopt as operation|movement which makes two states. In addition, after the other of the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 is changed from the second state to the first state, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 , from the second state to the first state may be adopted as the operation of changing the second frame movable body from the second state to the first state.

In this way, state changes due to continuous motions of a plurality of frame movable bodies may be grouped together as a state change of one frame movable body.

The right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 are used as the first frame movable body to change the state, and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are used as the second frame movable body. Although an example of changing the state has been shown, only one of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 is configured to operate as the first frame movable body, and the other is not operated and is in a standby state. may be configured to remain as it is. Alternatively, only one of the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 is configured to operate as the second frame movable body, and the other is configured to remain in a standby state without being operated. may

For example, of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, only the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 is changed as the first frame movable body, and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 are changed. The outer ear frame movable body 7450 may be configured to change the state as the second frame movable body.

In this case, the areas of the first frame movable body and the second frame movable body differ when viewed from the front and when viewed from the side. Specifically, since the first frame movable body is composed of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the visible area is relatively small, and the second frame movable body consists of the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400. Since it is composed of the outer frame movable body 7450, the visible area is relatively large.

With such a configuration, when the state of the first frame movable body changes relatively small, a simulated frame movable body image corresponding to the state change of the first frame movable body is displayed when the state is changed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the change in the state of the first frame movable body. On the other hand, when the state of the second-frame movable body changes relatively large, the second-frame movable body does not change the state by not displaying the frame-movable-body simulated image corresponding to the second-frame movable body. It is possible to give the player a greater surprise when the player notices that the

The structure of the plurality of frame movable bodies described with reference to FIGS. 312 and 313 may be configured to execute the effect pattern described above.

For example, the curtain plate bottom unit right leg movable body 7700 may be the first frame movable body, and the curtain plate bottom unit left leg movable body 7750 may be the second frame movable body. Further, the state in which the curtain plate bottom unit right leg movable body 7700 and the curtain plate bottom unit left leg movable body 7750 are in the standby positions shown in FIGS. , 312(B), 312(D), and 313(B) may be set as the second state, and the above effect pattern may be executed.

Alternatively, the door frame side unit right upper arm portion 7620 and the door frame side unit right lower arm portion 7630 are the first frame movable body, and the door frame side unit left upper arm portion 7670 and the door frame side unit left lower arm portion 7680 are the second frame movable body. It may be a movable body. Furthermore, the door frame side unit right arm upper arm portion 7620, the door frame side unit right arm lower arm portion 7630, the door frame side unit left arm upper arm portion 7670, and the door frame side unit left arm lower arm portion 7680 are shown in FIGS. C), the state in the standby position shown in FIG. 313(A) is defined as the first state, and the state in the movement position shown in FIGS. 312(B), 312(D), and 313(B) is defined as the second state. , may be configured to execute the effect pattern described above.

For example, when the production pattern shown in FIG. Accompanied by the display of the frame movable body simulation image simulating the side unit right lower arm 7630, after changing from the state in the standby position (first state) to the state in the movement position (second state), and then to the standby position After changing to a certain state (first state), the door frame side unit left upper arm portion 7670 and the door frame side unit left lower arm portion 7680 are changed to the door frame side unit left upper arm portion 7670 and the door frame side unit left lower arm portion. 7680 without displaying the simulated image of the movable frame imitating the 7680, after changing from the state in the standby position (first state) to the state in the movement position (second state), the state in the standby position (first state) state).

Alternatively, either one or both of the curtain plate bottom unit right leg movable body 7700 and the curtain plate bottom unit left leg movable body 7750 are used as the first frame movable body, and the door frame top unit face-up movable body included in the door frame top unit face decoration part 7500 is movable. At least one of body 7510, right ear frame movable body 7100, left ear frame movable body 7200, door frame top unit face lower nose movable body 7522, door frame top unit face lower mouth movable body 7524 is used as the second frame movable body. may be Further, curtain plate bottom unit right leg movable body 7700, curtain plate bottom unit left leg movable body 7750, door frame top unit upper face movable body 7510, right ear frame movable body 7100, left ear frame movable body 7200, door frame top unit lower face The state in which the nose movable body 7522 and the door frame top unit face lower mouth movable body 7524 are in the standby positions shown in FIGS. B), FIG. 312(D), and FIG. 313(B) may be configured such that the above-described effect pattern is executed with the states of the movement positions shown in FIG. 312(D) and FIG.

For example, the curtain board bottom unit right leg movable body 7700 may be the first frame movable body, and the door frame top unit face movable body 7510 may be the second frame movable body, and the above-described effect pattern may be executed. In this case, the frame movable body simulated image is not displayed for the door frame top unit face movable body 7510 which is larger than the curtain board bottom unit right leg movable body 7700 . By adopting such a configuration, when the player notices that the door frame top unit face movable body 7510 (second frame movable body) is changing its state, the player is more surprised. can be given.

In addition to the door frame top unit face movable body 7510, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are also the second frame movable bodies, and the door frame top unit face movable body 7510 is stored below. After completing the upward movement from this position, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 complete the upward movement from the state in which they are housed in the door frame top unit face upward movable body 7510. This state may be the second state of the second frame movable body.

In this way, the first frame movable body and the second frame movable body are arranged at positions facing each other with the game area 5a and the game board side effect display device 1600 interposed therebetween. When the player is visually recognizing one of the frame movable bodies, the other frame movable body is less likely to be visually recognized by the player. In particular, when the effect pattern shown in FIG. 326(A) is executed, the player's attention is concentrated on the first frame movable body, and the second frame movable body, which is far from the viewing angle, is in the field of view. You will not be able to enter. Then, it is possible to give a big surprise that the second frame movable body has changed to an unexpected state to the player who notices the state after the movement of the second frame movable body.

Although the production pattern in which the simulated image of the movable frame simulating the second movable frame is not displayed when the second movable frame is operated, the movable frame simulating the second movable frame is shown for a short period of time. It may be configured to display a simulated image. In this case, the game board side effect display device 1600 displays a frame movable body simulated image simulating the second frame movable body for a short period of time (for example, 1 second) in the latter half of the predetermined period when the second frame movable body is in the second state. may be configured to be displayed in For example, from timing t30 to timing t31 in the effect pattern shown in FIG. 326(A), it is preferable to display a frame movable body simulated image simulating the second frame movable body.

By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player does not notice that the second frame movable body has moved.

Alternatively, a frame movable body simulation image simulating the second frame movable body may be displayed from timing t33 to timing t34 in the production pattern shown in FIG. 326(A).

With such a configuration, the player can see the state in which the second frame movable body is changing from the second state to the first state, and the player can see that the second frame movable body is in the first state. The user feels frustration that he or she could not enjoy the second state. As a result, in subsequent games, it is possible to heighten awareness of the possibility that the second frame movable body may be operating without realizing it.

283(A) to 284(B) have shown production patterns in which the movable frame moves. Due to the position of the movable frame body after the movement, the player may violently contact the movable frame body with his or her hand or head, which may injure the player or damage the movable frame body. On the other hand, in a game machine capable of moving the frame movable body, in addition to the movement of the frame movable body, various effects are performed on the game board 5 side, and the effect is performed in an excessive manner for the player. There is a risk of The embodiments described below are intended to solve such problems. 328 and 329, 330 and 331, 332 and 333, 334 and 335 correspond to FIGS. 283 and 284, 292 and 293, 298 and 299, and 307 and 308, respectively. 4 shows a modified example of the production pattern described with reference to each.

In each embodiment shown in FIGS. 328 and 329, FIGS. 330 and 331, FIGS. It is configured to be in a restrained state. The fluctuating effect sound is a sound that a predetermined music is reproduced in accordance with the fluctuation of the decoration pattern, and the player recognizes it as background music. For example, a piece of music consisting of a voice sung by a predetermined singer and performance sounds of a plurality of musical instruments is played for several minutes, during which the variation of decorative patterns seconds) is performed multiple times. By outputting such a fluctuating effect sound to the player, it is possible to improve the interest in the game. It should be noted that a plurality of such songs may be prepared in advance, and a configuration may be adopted in which playback of a different song is started at the timing when playback of a certain song is completed to the end. Alternatively, in accordance with the change of the game state, the music that has been reproduced so far may be faded out in the middle of reproduction, and another music different from the music that has been reproduced so far may be reproduced. In the present embodiment, by suppressing the volume of such fluctuating effect sound in accordance with the timing when the frame movable body operates, the state of excessive effect is suppressed.

Further, in this embodiment, a special sound is reproduced for a short period of time to remind the player that the movable frame body is moving or that the movable frame body has been moved. . As the special evocative sound, instead of emitting a sound that can be recognized as a series of songs that are played for a long time like the fluctuating effect sound, a sound effect (for example, a chime sound such as "ping-pong") is played in one second. Alternatively, it is preferable to reproduce a piece of music whose reproduction ends in a short period of time (for example, two seconds), or to reproduce a sound like a drum being continuously beaten (for example, a sound such as "thumping") for several seconds. Further, it is preferable that the sound constituting the special evocation sound does not include the instrumental sound used as part of the fluctuating effect sound. Also, the special wake-up sound is output at a predetermined volume without being affected by the output state of the fluctuating effect sound. For example, even in a normal state in which the volume of the fluctuating effect sound is not suppressed, and in a suppressed state in which the volume of the fluctuating effect sound is suppressed, the special awakening sound is output at a predetermined volume. Also, the volume of the special evocative sound should be higher than the volume of the fluctuating effect sound in the suppression state. It should be noted that, in the effect pattern described later, there is a case where the state in which the special evocation sound is output is maintained for about 10 seconds. In this case, it is preferable to repeat such sound effects or music whose reproduction ends in a short period of time so as to maintain the state in which the special evocative sound is output.

In this way, by suppressing the volume of the fluctuating effect sound and generating a special evocative sound in accordance with the operation of the frame movable body, it is possible to prevent the effect provided to the player from becoming excessive. Become. Furthermore, it is possible to prevent the player from being injured or the movable frame from being damaged due to the player coming into contact with the movable frame.

In the production pattern shown in FIGS. 328(A) to 329(B), at the timing (timing t7) when the frame movable body starts to move from the standby position (first state) to the movement position, the variable production It is configured to set the sound state to a suppressed state and to output a special evocative sound. Further, the output of the special evocation sound is configured to end at the timing (timing t14) when the operation unit is operated or at the timing (timing t18) when the effective period of operation ends. The suppression state of the fluctuating effect sound is also terminated at the timing (timing t14) when the operation unit is operated or at the timing (timing t18) when the valid operation period ends.

In the production patterns shown in FIGS. 330(A) to 331(B), the timing (timing t9 ), the state of the fluctuating effect sound is set to the suppressed state, and the state of outputting the special evocative sound is set. Further, the output of the special evocation sound is configured to end at the timing (timing t14) when the operation unit is operated or at the timing (timing t18) when the effective period of operation ends. The suppression state of the fluctuating effect sound is also terminated at the timing (timing t14) when the operation unit is operated or at the timing (timing t18) when the valid operation period ends.

Figure 332 (A) ~ Figure 333 (B) in the effect pattern shown, at the timing (timing t7) when the inner frame movable body starts to move from the standby position to the moving position (timing t7), the fluctuation The state of the effect sound is set to the suppression state, and the state is set to output the special evocative sound. Further, the output of the special evocation sound is configured to end at the timing (timing t14) when the operation unit is operated or at the timing (timing t18) when the effective period of operation ends. The suppression state of the fluctuating effect sound is also terminated at the timing (timing t14) when the operation unit is operated or at the timing (timing t18) when the valid operation period ends.

Figure 334 (A) ~ Figure 335 (B) in the effect pattern shown, the timing (timing At t5), the state of the fluctuating effect sound is set to the suppressed state, and the state of outputting the special evocative sound is set. Further, the output of the special evocation sound is configured to end at the timing (timing t14) when the operation unit is operated or at the timing (timing t18) when the effective period of operation ends. The suppression state of the fluctuating effect sound is also terminated at the timing (timing t14) when the operation unit is operated or at the timing (timing t18) when the valid operation period ends.

In this way, at the timing when the frame movable body starts to operate, the output state of the fluctuating effect sound is changed from the normal state to the suppressed state and the special evocative sound is changed from the non-output state to the output state, so that the effect state becomes excessive. It is possible to suppress

Also, as shown in FIGS. 332(A) to 333(B), when a plurality of movable frame bodies can move in order, the second moving frame movable body starts its operation. , the output state of the variable effect sound is changed from the suppressed state to the normal state, and the special evocative sound is changed from the output state to the non-output state. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to suppress excessive stopping of the fluctuating effect sound necessary for the effect.

The timing of returning the output state of the fluctuating effect sound from the suppression state to the normal state and the timing of not outputting the output state of the special evocative sound are when the player operates the operation unit or when the valid operation period ends. It is the timing of Since the predetermined time has passed since the movable frame moved, it is not meaningful to suppress the fluctuating effect sound. This is because the player notices that the movable body has moved.

On the other hand, the timing of returning the output state of the fluctuating effect sound from the suppression state to the normal state and the timing of changing the output state of the special evocative sound from the output state to the non-output state may be when the frame movable body returns to the first state. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being injured or the movable frame from being damaged due to the player coming into contact with the movable frame. In addition, in the case of an effect pattern in which the plurality of frame movable bodies return to the first state at different timings, the output state of the variable effect sound is suppressed at the timing when the frame movable body that is the latest to enter the first state returns to the first state. It is preferable that the state is returned to the normal state and the output state of the special alert sound is changed from the output state to the non-output state.

Alternatively, at the timing when the operating unit is operated or when the effective period of operation ends, the output state of the fluctuating effect sound is returned from the suppression state to the normal state, while the special evocation sound is changed from the output state to the non-output state. may be when the frame movable body returns to the first state. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being injured or the movable frame from being damaged due to the player coming into contact with the movable frame.

Alternatively, the output state of the special evocation sound is changed from the output state to the non-output state at the timing when the operation unit is operated or the operation effective period ends, and the timing for returning the output state of the fluctuating effect sound from the suppressed state to the normal state is set. It may be when the frame movable body returns to the first state. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being injured or the movable frame from being damaged due to the player coming into contact with the movable frame.

When there are a plurality of frame movable bodies and there are a plurality of timings at which the frame movable bodies start to operate, as in the effect patterns described with reference to FIGS. 332 and 333, FIGS. You may comprise so that a different special evocation sound may be output corresponding to each of the above.

In the effect patterns described with reference to FIGS. 332 and 333, the output state of the fluctuating effect sound is suppressed at the timing (timing t14) when the operating unit is operated or at the timing (timing t18) when the effective period of operation ends. An example is shown in which the state is changed to the normal state and the special alert sound is not output. It may be configured so that the sound output state may be continued.

For example, in the effect pattern shown in FIG. 332(A), until timing t15 when the outer frame movable body is moving to the movement position, or until timing t16 when the outer frame movable body completes movement to the movement position, or when the outer frame movable body The state of suppressing the fluctuating effect sound or the state of outputting the special evocative sound may be continued until timing t27 when the body is moving to the standby position or timing t28 when the outer frame movable body completes movement to the standby position. .

In addition, in the effect pattern shown in FIG. 333(A), until the timing t19 when the outer frame movable body is moving to the movement position, or until the timing t20 when the outer frame movable body completes the movement to the movement position, or when the outer frame movable body The state of suppressing the fluctuating effect sound or the state of outputting the special evocative sound may be continued until timing t27 when the body is moving to the standby position or timing t28 when the outer frame movable body completes movement to the standby position. .

On the other hand, in the production patterns shown in FIGS. 332(B) and 333(B), the production pattern is not transformed, and in the production pattern shown in FIG. 332(B), at timing t14, the production shown in FIG. In the pattern, at timing t18, the output state of the fluctuating effect sound is changed from the suppressed state to the normal state, and the special evocative sound is changed to the non-output state.

In this way, when the outer frame movable body operates (that is, when the special lottery result is a big hit), depending on the operation of the outer frame movable body, the suppression state of the fluctuating effect sound and the output state of the special evocative sound are controlled. By configuring so as to continue, the player may be injured or injured when the player touches the outer frame movable body that is in the state of moving to the moving position or in the state of moving to the moving position (second state). It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the outer frame movable body is damaged. In particular, the outer frame movable body starts moving at the timing when it is confirmed that the special lottery result is a big win, so the excitement felt by the player is very great. It is possible to make the player recognize that the outer frame movable body is operating without discouraging the player.

The timing of outputting the special wake-up sound may be limited. For example, the special evocation sound is output only during at least one of the period during which the frame movable body is changing from the first state to the second state and the period during which the second state is changing to the first state. may

For example, in the production patterns shown in FIGS. 328(A) to 329(B), during the period when the frame movable body is changing from the first state to the second state (period from timing t7 to timing t9), the frame movable body is changed from the second state to the first state (period from timing t22 to timing t24), the special evocation sound is output only during at least one period, and the special evocation sound is not output during the other periods. may be configured. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from coming into contact with the movable frame body.

Further, in the production patterns shown in FIGS. 332(A) and 333(B), the inner frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state (period from timing t7 to timing t9), the inner frame The special evocation sound is output only during at least one period of the period in which the movable body changes from the second state to the first state (period from timing t30 to timing t32), and the special evocation sound is not output during the other periods. It may be configured as Even with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from coming into contact with the movable frame body.

In the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 332(A) and 333(A), the period during which the outer frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state (timing t14 in the effect pattern shown in FIG. 332(A) period from timing t16, the period from timing t18 to timing t20 in the production pattern shown in FIG. It may be configured such that the special alert sound is output only during at least one period, and the special alert sound is not output during the other periods. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from coming into contact with the movable frame body.

In addition, the period during which the inner frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state (period from timing t7 to timing t9), the period during which the inner frame movable body changes from the second state to the first state (timing period from t30 to timing t32), the period during which the outer frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state (in the production pattern shown in FIG. 332(A), the period from timing t14 to timing t16; In the production pattern shown, the special evocation sound is generated only during at least one of the period from timing t18 to timing t20) and the period during which the outer frame movable body changes from the second state to the first state (from timing t26 to timing t28). It may be configured so as to output the special alert sound and not to output the special alert sound during other periods. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from coming into contact with the movable frame body.

In each of the production patterns described above, the state of the fluctuating production sound may be set to the suppressed state, and then the special evocative sound may be output with a slight delay. For example, it may be configured to output a special evocative sound two seconds after the fluctuating effect sound is suppressed. For example, in the production patterns shown in FIGS. 328(A) to 329(B), it is preferable to set the fluctuation production sound to a suppressed state at timing t7, and then output the special evocation sound at timing t9. With such a configuration, the player can clearly recognize that the fluctuating effect sound is suppressed and that the special evocation sound has a different property from the fluctuating effect sound.

Alternatively, in each effect pattern described above, the state of the fluctuating effect sound may be set to the suppressed state at a timing a predetermined time before the timing of outputting the special evocation sound. For example, two seconds before the timing of outputting the special awakening sound, the fluctuating effect sound may be suppressed. For example, in the production patterns shown in FIGS. 328(A) to 329(B), it is preferable that the variable production sound is suppressed at timing t5, and then the special evocation sound is output at timing t7. By adopting such a configuration, it becomes possible to clearly recognize that the variable effect sound has been suppressed and that the special evocation sound has a different property from the variable effect sound.

The timing for ending the output of the special awakening sound may be a predetermined timing. For example, it may be configured such that the special evocation sound is output only for the first two seconds after the movable frame body starts to move. For example, in the production patterns shown in FIGS. 328(A) to 329(B), at timing t7, the variable production sound is suppressed and the output of the special evocation sound is started, and at the timing t9, the output of the special evocation sound is started. It should be configured to terminate. It should be noted that the fluctuating effect sound may end at the timing (timing t14) when the operation unit is operated, or at the timing (timing t18) when the effective period of operation ends. With such a configuration, since the state in which the fluctuating effect sound is suppressed continues even after the timing when the output of the special evocation sound is finished, the player can easily recognize that the special evocation sound has been output.

It may be configured such that the fluctuation effect sound is suppressed and the special evocative sound is output before the start of the movement of the frame movable body. For example, at a timing two seconds before the frame movable body starts to move, it is preferable to suppress the fluctuating effect sound and output the special evocative sound. For example, in the production patterns shown in FIGS. 328(A) to 329(B), at timing t5, the fluctuating production sound is suppressed and the output of the special evocative sound is started, and at timing t7, the state of the frame movable body from the first state to the second state. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to recognize that the movable frame body is moving, and it is possible to prevent the player from being injured by coming into contact with the movable frame body.

The operation effective period may be generated in accordance with the timing when the frame movable body starts to operate and when the variable effect sound is set to the suppression state. For example, in the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 332(A) to 333(B), at timing t7, an operation valid period is generated, an operation instruction display is started, and the light emission effect state of the movable frame is turned off. It should be configured as follows. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to recognize that the movable frame body is moving, and it is possible to prevent the player from being injured by coming into contact with the movable frame body.

By slowly rotating the frame movable body in the embodiments shown in FIGS. 291, 294, 295, and 296, the time charts shown in FIGS. Alternatively, it may be operated like the frame movable body in the modified examples of the time charts shown in FIGS. 283(A) to 284(B). For example, the frame movable body in the embodiment shown in FIG. 291 may be rotated 90 degrees clockwise when viewed from the right over 2 seconds. When moving to the standby position, it is preferable to rotate the frame movable body 90 degrees counterclockwise as viewed from the right over 2 seconds.

298 and 299 or FIGS. may be operated like the inner frame movable body and the outer frame movable body in the modified example of the time chart shown in FIG. For example, the outer frame movable body in the embodiment shown in FIG. 306 may be rotated 90 degrees clockwise when viewed from the right over 2 seconds. Further, when the result of the special lottery is a big hit and the operation unit is operated or the operation valid period ends, the inner frame movable body may be rotated 90 degrees clockwise as viewed from the right over 2 seconds. . When moving to the standby position, the inner frame movable body is rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise as viewed from the right over 2 seconds, and then the outer frame movable body is rotated counterclockwise as viewed from the right over 2 seconds. Rotate it 90 degrees around.

282, 287, 288, 289, and 290, and FIGS. 297, 300, 301, 302 and 303, and 304 and 305. 297, 300, 301, 302 and 303, and 304 and 305 are in the second state, the frame is movable. Either one or both of the body, the inner frame movable body and the outer frame movable body may be configured to continue vertical movement of about 1 to 2 centimeters or rotational movement of about 5 degrees. With such a configuration, it becomes possible for the player to easily notice that the frame movable body, the inner frame movable body, and the outer frame movable body are operated to enter the second state.

In the embodiments described with reference to FIGS. 292 and 293 and FIGS. 307 and 308 respectively, the direction of rotation of the movable frame body is clockwise when viewed from the right side. For this reason, compared to the case where the rotating direction of the frame movable body is counterclockwise when viewed from the right side, when the player puts his or her hand or the like on the frame, the hand or the like is caught in the door frame top unit 570. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of the situation.

On the other hand, in the embodiments shown in FIGS. 292 and 293 and FIGS. 307 and 308, the rotating direction of the frame movable body may be configured to rotate counterclockwise when viewed from the right side. By adopting such a configuration, the rotating body can be visually recognized as if approaching the player, and the movable frame body can be visually recognized by the player in a powerful manner.

In the embodiments shown in FIGS. 292 and 293 and FIGS. 307 and 308, the frame movable body, the inner frame movable body, and the outer frame movable body are not rotated more than 360 degrees in the second state, but are rotated a predetermined number of times. A configuration may be adopted in which clockwise rotation when viewed from the right and counterclockwise rotation when viewed from the right are alternately repeated within the movement range. For example, as shown in FIGS. 291(B) and 291(E) or FIGS. The frame movable body, the inner frame movable body, and the outer frame movable body may be configured to repeat the turning motion within the range of 45 degrees to the front side and 45 degrees to the rear side. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player's hand or the like is caught in the door frame top unit 570 when the player puts the hand or the like on the frame.

In addition, in the inner frame movable body and the outer frame movable body shown in FIGS. 306(A) to 306(E), when the inner frame movable body rotates clockwise when viewed from the right, the outer When the frame movable body rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the right and the inner frame movable body rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the right, the outer frame movable body rotates clockwise when viewed from the right. It may be configured to rotate around. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player's hand or the like is caught in the door frame top unit 570 when the player puts the hand or the like on the frame.

In the embodiments described with reference to FIGS. 282 and 297, the movable frame has a light emitting unit, but the movable frame is illuminated at a predetermined location outside the movable frame (for example, inside the door frame top unit 570). It may be configured to have a light-emitting portion that illuminates the movable frame body. Alternatively, both of these may be provided, and the movable frame body may be illuminated by the light-emitting portion provided in the movable frame body and the light-emitting portion outside the movable frame body to create a predetermined rendering state.

On the other hand, in the embodiments described with reference to FIGS. 291(A) to 291(E) and FIGS. 7050 and the left light emitting portion 7052 in the door frame top unit are provided in the door frame top unit 570. By providing a light emitting part in each of the inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450, the right light emitting part 7050 in the door frame top unit, the door The frame movable body may be configured to emit light in the same manner as the left light emitting portion 7052 in the frame top unit. Alternatively, both of these may be provided, and the movable frame body may be illuminated by the light-emitting portion provided in the movable frame body and the light-emitting portion outside the movable frame body to create a predetermined rendering state.

With reference to FIGS. 282 to 335, examples have been shown in which the movable frame body changes from the first state to the second state, or changes from the second state to the third or fourth state. A player or an amusement store clerk pushes the movable frame body in the middle of changing to the second state or the movable frame body that has completed the change from the second state to the fourth state by hand. It may be configured so that it can be returned to the state (first state) located at the position. In this case, a drive mechanism (not shown) for driving the movable frame is provided with a sensor capable of detecting the position of the movable frame, so that when the movable frame is at the initial position at a timing when it should not be at the initial position, may be configured so that the frame movable body stays at the initial position by determining that an operation such as push-in has been performed by a player or an amusement store clerk and not operating the drive mechanism any more.

With such a configuration, the movable frame body can be returned to the initial position (first state) by the player or the store clerk at any timing. Further, even when a heavy article (such as a bag carried by the player) is placed on the movable frame, the driving mechanism for operating the movable frame is controlled so as not to operate the movable frame. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the load from being applied to the drive mechanism. In addition, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a player or a store clerk is injured.

282 to 335 show the basic structure of the movable frame body, modifications of the structure of the movable frame body, basic control modes of the movable frame body, and modifications of the control modes of the movable frame body. However, the predetermined embodiment or modification of the control mode of the movable frame may be applied to the predetermined embodiment or modification of the structure of the movable frame. Further, one or more other embodiments and modifications of the structure of the movable frame may be applied to the given embodiment and modifications of the structure of the movable frame. In addition, one or more other embodiments or modifications of the control mode of the movable frame may be applied to the predetermined embodiment or modification of the control mode of the frame movable body.

Embodiments may be obtained by applying each of the production examples in the embodiments and the technical matters in the production examples in combination. Moreover, it is good also as an embodiment combining and applying each technical matter in each role product structure.

(Second embodiment)
The second embodiment will be described below based on the embodiments shown in FIGS. 336-363.

[35. Fraudulent countermeasures against obstructive nails]
By the way, in a game machine, a plurality of obstacle nails are installed in the rolling area of the game ball. There was a fraudulent act that led a lot of game balls to an advantageous direction and fraudulently entered a winning slot.

For example, it is illegal to break into an amusement arcade after it is closed, open the door frame and bend the obstacle nail directly with a tool, etc., or, while the arcade is open, insert a piano wire or the like into the game area and bend the obstacle nail. A game ball has been illegally led to an advantageous direction by bending it, etc., and such illegality has brought great damage to the game parlor. The embodiments described below have been made in view of the above circumstances, and their object is to provide means for preventing fraudulent acts with respect to obstructive nails.

[35-1. game board]
FIG. 336 shows a front view of the game board 5' in the second embodiment, and FIG. 337 shows an exploded front perspective view of the game board 5'. As illustrated, the game board 5' in this embodiment is mainly composed of a front unit 2000, a game panel 1100, and a back unit 3000. FIG.

The back unit 3000 is composed of a movable effect unit 3600 that mainly performs movable effects using various movable members, and a game board side effect display device 1600 that is arranged behind it and displays game information, effect displays, etc. as images. It is The effects by the game board side effect display device 1600 and the movable effect unit 3600 are configured to be visible to the player through an opening formed in the center of the game panel 1100 .

As shown in the exploded front perspective view of the game board 5' shown in FIG. 337 and the exploded front perspective view of the game panel 1100 shown in FIG. , an outer rail 1001 and an inner rail 1002 are attached, and further, a plurality of obstacle nails 1200 and various prize winning devices (general prize winning port 2001, first starting port 2002) are provided, and an opening spreading in the center of the panel plate 1110 The front unit 2000 is fitted into the portion from the front and fixed to the panel plate 1110 from the front with screws (not shown).

[35-2. panel board]
The panel plate 1110 in this embodiment is formed of a colorless and transparent acrylic plate material with a thickness of about 10 mm. The panel plate 1110 may be made of, for example, a transparent synthetic resin plate such as polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, methacrylic resin, or the like.

In addition, a plurality of obstacle nails 1200 are planted on the panel plate 1110 in this embodiment, and the left side game area 5'a and the right side game area 5b of the panel plate 1110 correspond to the shooting direction of the game ball. configured on the front. That is, as shown in the exploded front perspective view of FIG. 338, a right game area 5b is formed as a rolling area for a game ball shot by a player to the right, and the right game area 5b is formed from the right side of the panel plate 1110 to the center. A panel projection 1117 projecting toward the opening is integrally formed with the panel plate 1110 . Obstacle nails 1201 to 1218 are planted on the front side of the panel projection 1117, as shown in the layout plan view of the obstacle nails in FIG.

[35-3. front unit]
As shown in the exploded front perspective view of the game panel 1100 in FIG. 338, the front unit 2000 in this embodiment is formed in a substantially annular shape from a colorless and transparent acrylic plate material with a thickness of about 2 mm, and is mainly composed of It is composed of a stage 2530, a warp exit 2522, a prize winning opening 2005, a channel device 2700, an area cover member 2600 to be described later, and the like.

Also, as shown in the enlarged front perspective view of the game panel 1100 in FIG. 339 and the exploded front perspective view of the area cover member 2600 in FIG. 340, the channel device 2700 includes a first channel forming member 2720a and a second channel and a forming member 2720b.

Above the first flow passage forming member 2720a and the second flow passage forming member 2720b, a first flow passage ball entrance 2710a and a second flow passage ball entrance 2710b are provided, respectively, for receiving a game ball shot by hitting to the right. Furthermore, the lower portion is provided with a first channel outlet 2730a and a second channel outlet 2730b. Therefore, the game ball fired by hitting to the right enters the first passage ball entrance 2710a or the second passage ball entrance 2710b, and is discharged from the first passage exit 2730a or the second passage exit 2730b. Then, the game ball is discharged to the right game area 5b formed on the panel plate 1110 described above.

[35-4. Right side play area]
In this embodiment, as described above, obstacle nails 1201 to 1218 are planted in the panel convex portion 1117 forming the right game area 5b. More specifically, FIG. Obstacle nails 1201 to 1218 are planted in an arrangement manner as shown in Fig. 2 to form flow paths for a plurality of game balls. That is, three obstruction nails 1201, 1202, and 1203 are planted at equal intervals above the panel convex portion 1117 in the horizontal direction, and twelve obstruction nails 1204 to 1215 are planted thereunder in two substantially vertical directions. of obstructing nails are planted in close proximity. Further below, three obstacle nails 1216 to 1218 are planted close to each other in a substantially oblique direction. In this embodiment, the obstructing nails are planted in the above-described arrangement, but the arrangement is not necessarily limited to such an arrangement, and the obstructing nails can be planted in any desired position. It is possible.

[35-5. Region covering member]
Furthermore, as shown in the enlarged front perspective view of the game panel 1100 in FIG. 339 and the exploded front perspective view of the area covering member 2600 in FIG. A region cover member 2600 is attached so as to cover the game region 5b from the front side.

The area covering member 2600 of this embodiment is formed of a colorless and transparent acrylic plate material having a thickness of about 2 mm and extending vertically as shown in the figure. According to such a configuration, it is possible to visually recognize the rolling state of the game ball on the back side through the area cover member 2600 while covering the channel device 2700 and the right game area 5b.

Note that the thickness of the region covering member 2600 is not necessarily limited to the thickness in this embodiment, and can be changed as appropriate. It is also possible to use a colorless and transparent synthetic resin plate such as polyarylate resin or methacrylic resin.

The area cover member 2600 has a substantially flat front surface and a rear surface, and a penetration portion 2610 including penetration portions 2611 to 2620 is formed as a plurality of openings penetrating in the front-rear direction at the lower portion of the front view. ing. These penetrating portions 2611 to 2620 are configured to function as accommodating portions capable of accommodating the nail heads of the obstacle nails 1201 to 1218 planted in the panel convex portion 1117 of the right game area 5b.

More specifically, as shown in the enlarged front perspective view of the game panel 1100 in FIG. 339 and the exploded rear perspective view of the area covering member 2600 in FIG. 2613 accommodate the nail heads of the obstructing nails 1201 to 1203, respectively, and the elongated hole-shaped penetrating portions 2614 to 2618 accommodate the adjacent obstructing nails 1204 to 1209 and 1212 to 1215. A penetrating portion 2619 which accommodates two nails each and has an elongated hole longer than the penetrating portions 2614 to 2618 is configured to accommodate the nail heads of the three obstructing nails 1216 to 1218 . A through portion 2620 having a notch is formed at the right end portion of the area covering member 2600 in front view, and the through portion 2620 has the nail heads of the two obstructing nails 1210 and 1211 adjacent to each other. configured to accommodate the part.

Also, as shown in the exploded rear perspective view of area covering member 2600 in FIG. By contacting the ball regulating protrusion 2640, the game ball rolling on the back side of the , it is possible to reduce the flowing speed of the game ball, prevent clogging, and regulate the rolling direction. .

Also, as shown in the exploded rear perspective view of the area covering member 2600 in FIG. In order to prevent this, the area cover member 2600 is fixed with a screw (not shown) on the back side. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 342, screws are attached to mounting bosses 2630, 2631, and 2633 from behind the game panel 1100 so that the area cover member 2600 cannot be easily removed from the back side of the game panel 1100. can be accessed, but the screws screwed into the mounting bosses 2632 are blocked by the panel plate 1110 and cannot be accessed. More specifically, the mounting bosses 2630 to 2633 are screwed to the front unit 2000 fixed to the front surface of the panel plate 1110. Therefore, when removing the area cover member 2600, the front unit 2000 itself is temporarily removed. It is constructed so that it must be removed from the panel plate 1110 . With such a configuration, for example, it becomes difficult for a malicious player or the like to remove the area cover member 2600, and it is possible to suppress an act of illegally bending an obstacle nail.

Additionally, as shown in the exploded front perspective view of area covering member 2600 in FIG. , each flow path is formed by attaching and covering the area cover member 2600 on the front side. That is, since the area covering member 2600 is an essential constituent member that constitutes a part of the flow path of the game ball, for example, a malicious player removes the area covering member 2600 and plant it in the right game area 5b. Even if the provided obstacle nails 1201 to 1218 are illegally bent and the game is played as it is, the game ball cannot move as expected in design when the area cover member 2600 is removed. It is configured to lead to damage of parts, etc., and make it difficult to play the game normally. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the act of removing the area covering member 2600 and illegally bending the obstructing nail.

Next, FIGS. 343(a) to 343(c) show sectional views of the implanted portion of the obstacle nail in the right game area 5b. Specifically, the illustration shows a manner in which the nail heads of the obstructing nails 1201 to 1209 and 1212 to 1218 implanted in the panel convex portion 1117 are accommodated in the penetration portion 2610 of the area covering member 2600, and this embodiment , the nail head of each obstructing nail is configured to be accommodated within the thickness of the area covering member 2600 .

In this embodiment, as described above, the thickness of the area covering member 2600 is set to 2 mm, and the dimension (h) from the front surface of the panel protrusion 1117 where each obstructing nail is implanted to the front surface of the area covering member 2600. is approximately 18 mm. Also, the distance (w) between the center of the nail head of each obstructing nail and the end of each penetrating portion 2610 of the area covering member 2600 is approximately 4 mm. Therefore, since the diameter of the nail head of the obstructing nail is about 4 mm, the gap between the peripheral end of the nail head and the open end of each through portion 2610 is about 2 mm.

To describe this embodiment more specifically, the cross-sectional view of FIG. 343(a) shows how the nail heads of the obstructing nails 1201-1203 are accommodated in the through-holes 2611-2613. In this case, the gap from the peripheral end of the nail head of each of the obstructing nails 1201 to 1203 to the open end of the penetrating portions 2611 to 2613 provided in the area covering member 2600 is approximately 2 mm as described above. The center of the nail head and the center of each penetrating portion are configured to match.

The sectional view of FIG. 343(b) shows how the nail heads of the obstacle nails 1204 to 1209 and 1212 to 1215 are accommodated in the penetrating portions 2614 to 2618. As shown in FIG. In this case, the gaps from the peripheral edge of the nail heads of the pair of adjacent obstructing nails 1204 to 1209 and 1212 to 1215 to the open ends of the penetrating portions 2611 to 2613 provided in the area covering member 2600 are the same as described above. It is approximately 2 mm.

The sectional view of FIG. 343(c) shows how the nail heads of the obstacle nails 1216 to 1218 are accommodated in the penetrating portion 2619. As shown in FIG. In this case, the clearance from the peripheral end of the nail head of each of the obstructing nails 1216 to 1218 to the open end of the penetrating portion 2619 provided in the area covering member 2600 is approximately 2 mm as described above.

As described above, since the gap between the outer peripheral edge of the nail head of the obstructing nail and the open end of the penetrating part 2610 constituting the receiving part is only about 2 mm, a tool for bending the obstructing nail is required. It becomes difficult to insert the obstructing nail, and even if the obstructing nail is improperly bent in some way, the peripheral edge of the nail head of the obstructing nail and the open end of the penetrating part 2610 interfere with each other. The degree of bending is limited to a very small amount, and as a result, it is possible to suppress the act of illegally bending the obstructing nail. Further, when the obstructing nail is illegally bent, the central position of the penetrating part 2610 and the central position of the nail head of the obstructing nail are eccentric, so that the eccentricity can be visually recognized from the front, thereby facilitating the illegal act. can be discovered.

[35-6. Other embodiments]
As described above, the present embodiment has been described based on the description of each drawing, but the present embodiment is not necessarily limited to the above-described embodiment, and the following modifications of the implementation configuration are possible.

For example, the relationship between the obstructing nail and the penetrating portion 2610 constituting the accommodating portion for the obstructing nail is as described above based on the embodiment shown in the cross-sectional view of FIG. The form is not limited, and the form of the inner peripheral surface of the penetrating portion 2610 can be variously changed as follows.

In the example of the penetrating portion 2610a shown in the cross-sectional views of FIGS. 356(a) to (c), two points on the inner peripheral surface of the penetrating portion 2610a, one on the front side of the area covering member 2600a and the other on the panel plate 1110 side, are: A convex portion with a small cross section is formed. According to such a configuration, when a tool or the like is forcibly inserted in order to illegally bend the obstacle nail 1220, traces such as chipping and denting are likely to remain on the convex portion, so that the illegal act can be easily discovered. It is possible to suppress the act of illegally bending the obstructing nail.

On the other hand, in the example of the penetrating portion 2610a shown in the cross-sectional views of FIGS. 357(a) to (g), a protruding portion facing the obstructing nail 1220 is formed in the central portion of the inner peripheral surface of the penetrating portion 2610a. there is According to such a configuration, when a tool or the like is forcibly inserted in order to illegally bend the obstructing nail 1220, traces such as chips and dents remain in the convex portion, so that the illegal act can be easily discovered. It is possible to suppress the act of illegally bending the obstacle nail. Moreover, compared with the embodiments shown in the cross-sectional views of FIGS. 356(a) to 356(c), it is possible to easily process and form the convex portions.

358(a) to (d) and the sectional views of FIGS. 359(a) to (d). A convex portion with a small cross section is formed on either the front side of or the panel plate 1110 side. According to such a configuration, when a tool or the like is forcibly inserted in order to illegally bend the obstructing nail 1220, traces such as chips and dents remain in the convex portion, so that the illegal act can be easily discovered. It is possible to suppress the act of illegally bending the obstacle nail.

360(a) to (e), the front side of the area covering member 2600a in the inner peripheral surface of the through portion 2610a is closed integrally with the area covering member 2600a, A receiving recess 2670 is formed to receive the nail head. According to such a configuration, since it is impossible to access the obstructing nail 1220 from the front side of the area covering member 2600a, it is possible to prevent the illegal bending of the obstructing nail 1220 in advance. Furthermore, when the blocking part is destroyed and a tool or the like is inserted, the trace remains, which makes it easier to detect fraudulent acts, and it is possible to suppress acts of illegally bending the obstructing nail. becomes.

In addition, in the examples shown in the cross-sectional views of FIGS. 361(a) to (c), a rib of about several millimeters may be provided at the opening end of the penetrating portion 2610a provided in the area covering member 2600a. With such a configuration, it becomes difficult for a tool for illegally bending an obstacle nail, a piano wire, or the like to access the nail head of the obstacle nail 1220 housed in the penetration portion 2610a, and the tool cannot be forcibly bent. When the nail is inserted, traces such as cracks and dents remain on the rib, so that the act of illegally bending the obstructing nail can be further suppressed. Furthermore, by providing the ribs, the strength of the through portion 2610a can be increased, and the rigidity of the area covering member 2600a itself can be increased.

In the present embodiment and the other examples described above, various modes of the penetrating portion constituting the accommodation portion for the obstructing nail were exemplified. Various forms can be adopted as long as they can accommodate all or part of the obstructing nail in a front view and function as an accommodating portion, including a penetrating portion having a similar shape.

In addition, a decorative seal with a decorative pattern may be attached to the front surface of the area covering member 2600. This not only improves the design of the area covering member 2600 itself, If a tool or the like is forcibly inserted into the gap between the end portion and the open end portion of the through portion 2610, traces such as scratches or peeling will remain on the decorative seal, making it easier to discover fraudulent acts. , it is possible to further suppress the act of illegally bending the obstacle nail. By attaching a decorative sticker with a through-hole corresponding to the through-hole 2610 to the surface of the area cover member 2600, the game area can be decorated at the rear side position of the obstacle nail. In contrast to the conventional technology in which only cell sheet decoration (cell decoration) is performed, a decorative sticker with a through hole attached to the area cover member 2600 can be used to create a game area close to the obstacle nail at the front position of the obstacle nail. decoration becomes possible. In addition, by adopting such a decorative seal attached to the area covering member 2600 together with the cell decoration, a three-dimensional decoration can be realized on both the rear side and the front side of the obstacle nail, and a game area that has never been seen before can be achieved. New decorations are possible. In this case, the area covering member 2600 is made of a transparent material, and the decorative sticker attached to the area covering member 2600 has a translucent part that allows the rear cell decoration area to be visually recognized. preferably. In the above embodiment, a sheet-shaped decorative seal was explained as an example, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to such a sticker. You may make it decorate directly by methods, such as processing.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the area cover member 2600 was formed as a single unit and attached to the front side of the front unit 2000, but it is not necessarily limited to this embodiment. It may be formed integrally with various prize winning devices, decoration members, and the like provided. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the trouble of attaching the area cover member 2600 in the manufacturing process of the gaming machine.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the area covering member 2600 is configured as a single member that covers the channel device 2700 and the right gaming area 5b, but is not necessarily limited to this embodiment. , the area cover member 2600 may be divided into a member covering the channel device 2700 and a member covering the right game area 5b, and may be configured to be attached to the front unit 2000 respectively.

In the above-described embodiment, the channel device 2700 and the right game area 5b are covered with the area cover member 2600. However, the invention is not limited to this embodiment. It is also possible to attach the region covering member 2600 to an arbitrary location.

For example, it is possible to attach the area covering member 2600a of the present invention to the game area shown in the front view of FIG. 353(a) in the manner shown in the front view of FIG. 353(b). More specifically, in the illustrated embodiment, the area covering member 2600a has a substantially rectangular penetrating portion 2651 for accommodating the nail head of the so-called jump nail 1231 and the nail head of the so-called dead nail 1230. a notch-shaped penetrating portion 2650 that accommodates the nail heads of the two left guide nails 1232; and a slot shape that accommodates the nail heads of four right guide nails 1233. are formed, and are screwed and fixed from the back side of the panel plate 1110 to four boss portions 2660 integrally formed with the region cover member 2600a. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress an act of illegally bending each obstacle nail that greatly affects the winning rate of the game ball to the first start hole 2002 . Furthermore, since the area cover member 2600a is fixed with screws from the rear side of the panel plate 1110, it is not possible to easily access the screws, and it is possible to prevent illegal bending of obstructing nails. ing. In this embodiment, the area cover member 2600a is provided so as to accommodate the obstructing nails planted around the first start opening 2002, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this, and other game areas may be provided. Also, an area covering member 2600a may be provided, and it is also possible to cover the entire game area with a single area covering member 2600a.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, as shown in the enlarged front perspective view of FIG. Although the cross section of the notch portion is configured to be closed, it is not limited to such an embodiment. , the notch portion of the through portion may be closed. In addition, the cutout portion in the through portion may be provided in any direction of the area covering member 2600. In this case, another component existing at a position facing the cutout portion may be provided in the cutout portion. should be configured to close

Also, FIG. 362 illustrates an installation mode of the area covering member 2600 in another embodiment. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 362(a), the obstructing nails 1212 and 1213 are accommodated in the penetrating portion 2617 serving as the accommodating portion for the obstructing nail, and the penetrating portion 2617 has a cutout portion. is provided.

In the embodiment illustrated in FIG. 362(a), all of the obstructing nails including the obstructing nails 1212 and 1213 are in their designed positions. By locating the nail head portion of the obstructing nail 1213 inside the line connecting the notched ends 2617a, it is possible to visually confirm that the obstructing nail 1213 is in the designed position.

On the other hand, in the embodiment illustrated in FIG. 362(b), the obstructing nail 1213 is improperly bent, and the nail head of the obstructing nail 1213 is aligned with the line connecting the two notched ends 2617a. It is configured so that it is possible to easily visually recognize that the obstructing nail is illegally bent by being visually recognized in the state of exceeding. FIG. 362(a) shows an example in which the obstacle nail 1213 is positioned inside the line connecting the two notched ends 2617a as designed. The region covering member 2600 is formed so as to be positioned on the line connecting the ends 2617a (so that the obstructing nail 1213 overlaps the line connecting the two notched ends 2617a in a front view) as designed. Even in this case, as shown in FIG. 362(b), if the line that connects the two notched ends 2617a is crossed, the fraud can be easily discovered.

[36. Measures for facilitating confirmation of nail position]
By the way, in a pachinko machine as a game machine, the ball output rate (the degree of prize winning) is greatly influenced by the adjustment of obstacle nails planted on the board surface of the game board. Depending on the ball output rate, the number of customers entering the hall changes greatly, which greatly affects the sales of the game hall. Therefore, it is necessary to check the state of the obstructing nails at the time of installation of the game machine and at appropriate and necessary timings after installation, and to adjust the obstructing nails as necessary. Conventionally, therefore, a nail sheet has been used to easily and accurately check the condition of a plurality of obstructing nails and adjust the nails.

The nail sheet is formed into a thin sheet by using a translucent or transparent plastic film or paper material. A pattern corresponding to each obstacle nail is printed on the surface of the nail sheet in the same manner as the gauge arrangement of the obstacle nail planted on the game board.

In order to check the consistency between the gauge arrangement of the obstructing nails actually planted in the game board and the designed gauge arrangement printed on the nail sheet, conventionally printed on the nail sheet together with the above gauge arrangement Various accessory devices and various prize winning devices are aligned with the top surface of the various accessory devices and various prize winning devices that are actually placed on the game board, and are superimposed on each other. I was checking the gauge array of.

However, in general, in addition to obstacle nails, various members such as multiple prize-winning devices, windmills, stages, decorative members, etc. also vary. Therefore, when the thin and freely deformable nail sheet is arranged on the game board, it is quite difficult even for a skilled person to arrange the nail sheet so as not to be twisted due to the irregularities on the back surface of the nail sheet. As a result, there has been a problem that it is impossible to accurately grasp the consistency between the gauge arrangement of the obstacle nails planted on the game board and the gauge arrangement printed on the nail sheet.

The embodiments described below have been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a game machine in which the positions of obstructing nails can be relatively easily confirmed.

[36-1. nail sheet]
FIG. 344 shows a front view of the nail sheet 5000 corresponding to the game panel 1100 in this embodiment. In the nail sheet 5000, the gauge arrangement of the obstacle nail printed body 5200 and the pattern of various arrangement members around the obstacle nail printed body 5200 are printed on an A4 size transparent film sheet 5100 in black.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 344, a first area printed on the nail sheet 5000 is used so that the gauge arrangement at a plurality of locations on the game panel 1100 can be confirmed using a limited range within the nail sheet 5000. A body 5110 and a second area printed body 5120 are printed, and the gauge arrays corresponding to the two obstruction nail implantation areas and the peripheral arrangement members are printed separately.

When using the nail sheet 5000 illustrated in FIG. 344 to check the gauge arrangement of the actually implanted obstructing nails, in this embodiment, as illustrated in FIG. The outer edge of the area cover member 2600 and the plurality of through parts 2610 printed on the surface are aligned accurately and superimposed on the game panel 1100, and the printed obstacle nail printed body 5200 and the obstacle nails planted on the back surface are provided. Check for any discrepancy between

[36-2. Area covering member]
As described above, the area covering member 2600 of this embodiment is shown in the enlarged front perspective view of the game panel 1100 in FIG. 339, the layout plan view of the obstructing nails in FIG. As shown, the nail heads of the obstructing nails 1201 to 1203 are accommodated in the circular through portions 2611 to 2613 of the area covering member 2600 when viewed from the front. , 1204 to 1209 and 1212 to 1215 , two of which are adjacent to each other. It is configured to accommodate ~1218 nail heads. A through portion 2620 having a partial notch is formed at the right end portion of the region covering member 2600 in front view, and the nail heads of the adjacent two obstacle nails 1210 and 1211 are formed in the through portion 2620. configured to accommodate the part.

342, mounting bosses 2630 to 2633 are integrally provided on the rear side of the area cover member 2600 so that the area cover member 2600 cannot be removed from the front of the game panel 1100. The member 2600 is screwed on the rear side. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 342, screws are attached to mounting bosses 2630, 2631, and 2633 from behind the game panel 1100 so that the area cover member 2600 cannot be easily removed from the back side of the game panel 1100. can be accessed, but the screws screwed into the mounting bosses 2632 are blocked by the panel plate 1110 and cannot be accessed. More specifically, the mounting bosses 2630 to 2633 are screwed to the front unit 2000 fixed to the front surface of the panel plate 1110. Therefore, when removing the area cover member 2600, the front unit 2000 itself is temporarily removed. It is constructed so that it must be removed from the panel plate 1110 .

Also, as shown in the exploded front perspective view of the area covering member 2600 in FIG. 340, the area covering member 2600 of the present embodiment covers the flow channel device 2700 and the right game area 5b in which a plurality of obstacle nails are implanted. In this way, it is provided on the game panel 1100 to form a wide and flat surface on the game panel 1100 . Due to such a characteristic configuration, when the very soft nail sheet 5000 is placed on the game panel 1100, it is superimposed on the above-mentioned flat surface, so that it affects various members and obstacle nails that protrude forward in different amounts. The nail sheet 5000 can be stably overlaid on the game panel 1100 without being damaged, even by a non-expert, and without twisting.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in the front view of FIG. 336, a large winning opening 2005 is arranged below the right game area 5b, and a large winning opening (not shown) is placed in front of the large winning opening 2005. A mouth cover member is provided. It should be noted that, like the area cover member 2600, the large winning opening cover member is formed to have flat surfaces on the front side and the rear side, and the area covering member 2600 is installed above the large winning opening cover member. and the front side are flush with each other. With such a configuration, the region covering member 2600 and the large winning opening covering member can form a wider flat surface on the game panel 1100 , and the nail sheet 5000 can be further laid on the game panel 1100 . It is possible to stably superimpose them.

Furthermore, the area covering member 2600 of this embodiment accommodates the nail heads of the obstructing nails as described above based on the enlarged front perspective view of FIG. 339 and the rear perspective view of the game panel 1100 of FIG. A plurality of penetrating portions 2610 having different shapes are formed, and when the nail sheets 5000 are superimposed, the shape of the penetrating portions printed on the nail sheet 5000 can be superimposed on the penetrating portions 2610 on the back surface to facilitate the positioning. In addition, it is possible to accurately position the nail sheet 5000 and quickly confirm the gauge arrangement of the obstructing nail while observing the eccentricity between the obstructing nail and the penetrating portion.

[36-3. Other embodiments]
As described above, the present embodiment has been described based on the description of each drawing, but the present embodiment is not necessarily limited to the above-described embodiment, and the following modifications of the implementation configuration are possible.

In the above-described embodiment, the region cover member 2600 is configured as a single member that covers the channel device 2700 and the right game region 5b, but is not necessarily limited to this embodiment. The member 2600 may be provided on the game panel 1100 separately into a member covering the channel device 2700 and a member covering the right game area 5b. That is, even if the area covering member 2600 having a flat surface on the front side is divided and mounted on the game panel 1100, one large flat surface can be formed. It is possible to stack on the front of the 2600.

Also, the area covering member 2600 may be integrally formed so as to cover a wider area of the game area, and such a configuration allows the nail sheet 5000 to be stably overlaid on the front surface of the area covering member 2600. is.

In addition, the region covering member 2600 in the above-described embodiment was constructed of a single member capable of covering the channel device 2700 and the right playing region 5b. Any range may be covered with a single area covering member or multiple area covering members, for example, as shown in the front view of FIG. One example is the provision of an area cover member 2600a for accommodating an obstructing nail. According to such a configuration, it is possible to easily and accurately superimpose the nail sheets 5000 at any place on the game panel 1100, and it is possible to quickly confirm the gauge arrangement of the obstacle nails. Become.

(Third embodiment)
The third embodiment will be described below based on the embodiments shown in FIGS. 336-363.

[37. Measures for visually confirming the state of obstructing nails]
By the way, a pachinko machine as a game machine is equipped with a plurality of obstacle nails. There was fraudulent activity. For the purpose of preventing such fraudulent acts, conventionally, a decorative cover is provided on the winning gate device so that the entrance obstruction nail planted directly above the winning gate device cannot be illegally bent. A concentric restricting portion is provided at a position corresponding to the obstructing nail for the introduction port. (For example, JP-A-2008-188259).

In general, the ball output rate (degree of winning) is greatly affected by the adjustment of the obstacle nails planted on the board surface of the game board. They have a great interest in the direction of inclination of the nail, and if the state of the obstructing nail is in a disadvantageous state for the game, they tend not to play the game with the game machine.

On the other hand, in the prior art as described above, for example, as shown in FIG. Since the relative positional relationship between the introduction port obstruction nail and the restricting portion forming the penetrating portion is grasped, the player can recognize that the entrance obstruction nail is inclined in a direction disadvantageous to the winning of the game ball. there was a risk of causing a decrease in interest if

The embodiments described below have been made in view of the above circumstances, and aim to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decline in interest.

[37-1. Area covering member]
In order to deal with the above problems, in this embodiment, as in the example shown in FIG. is the most important feature.

An area covering member 2600a in this embodiment illustrated in FIG. 346 has the same basic configuration as that of the second embodiment described above, and has an obstacle nail 1219 in the same manner as the area covering member 2600 of the second embodiment. , 1220 are housed in the through portion 2610a.

On the other hand, the area covering member 2600a in the present embodiment has an obstacle nail 1219 planted near the first start opening 2002 that greatly affects the winning degree of the game ball to the first start opening 2002 under the above-described problem. , 1220 are accommodated in the through portion 2610a.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 346(a), the area covering member 2600a is attached to the decorative member of the first starting port 2002, and the nail heads of the obstructing nails 1219 and 1220 are attached as shown in FIG. 346(a). It is accommodated in the through portion 2610a in the manner illustrated in b).

As a method for attaching the area cover member 2600a to the first starting port 2002, as shown in FIG. It is possible. Moreover, as shown in FIG. 346(d), it is also possible to integrally mold and attach the decoration member of the first starting port 2002. FIG.

As an example of this embodiment, FIG. 347 shows a plurality of embodiments in which the central position of the penetrating portion 2610a formed in the area covering member 2600a is shifted from the central position of the nail heads of the obstructing nails 1219 and 1220. ing.

That is, in order to solve the conventional problems described above, the center of the nail heads of the obstructing nails 1219 and 1220 are attached to the area covering member 2600a without bending or adjusting the actually planted obstructing nails 1219 and 1220. By forming (eccentrically) the penetrating portion 2610a with a position shifted from the position as the center position, is it an advantageous or disadvantageous state compared to the actual implanted state of the obstructing nail (curvature of the obstructing nail, etc.)? , which is visually recognized by the player.

For example, in the example shown in the front view of FIG. 347(a), by shifting the central position of the penetrating portion 2610a on the right side in the front view to the left of the central position of the nail head of the obstructing nail 1220, such a A player who sees such an eccentric mode is given the illusion that the obstacle nail 1220 on the right side is spread outward, and it is possible to induce a desire to play the game machine.

Further, in the example shown in the front view of FIG. 347(b), the central position of the through portion 2610a on the left side in the front view is shifted to the right from the central position of the nail head of the obstructing nail 1219. It is possible to make the player who sees the illusion that the obstacle nail 1219 on the left side is spread outward, and induce the desire to play the game machine.

Furthermore, in the example shown in the front view of FIG. 347(c), the central positions of the penetrating portions 2610a on both sides are shifted inward from the central positions of the nail heads of the obstructing nails 1219 and 1220, thereby It is possible to make the player who sees the illusion that the obstacle nails 1219 and 1220 on both sides are spread outward, and to induce the desire to play the game machine.

On the other hand, in the example shown in the front view of FIG. 347(d), the center position of the through portion 2610a on the right side in the front view is shifted to the right side of the center position of the nail head of the obstructing nail 1220, so that this It is possible to make the player who sees the illusion that the obstacle nail 1220 on the right side is bent inward. A player who visually recognizes such an aspect assumes that the ball passage between the obstacle nail 1219 and the obstacle nail 1220 is narrowed and that the game ball is in a disadvantageous situation when the game ball enters the first start hole 2002. Since the right obstruction nail 1220 is not bent inward, the game ball enters the first starting hole 2002 at the normal winning frequency. With such a configuration, it is possible to show an unexpected prize-winning mode to the player, and to increase interest in the game.

Further, in the example shown in the front view of FIG. 347(e), the central position of the through portion 2610a on the left side in the front view is shifted leftward from the central position of the nail head of the obstructing nail 1219, thereby It is possible to give the player who sees the illusion that the left obstacle nail 1219 is bent inward. A player who visually recognizes such an aspect assumes that the ball passage between the obstacle nail 1219 and the obstacle nail 1220 is narrowed and that the game ball is in a disadvantageous situation when the game ball enters the first start hole 2002. Since the left obstruction nail 1219 is not bent inward, the game ball enters the first start hole 2002 at the normal winning frequency. With such a configuration, it is possible to show an unexpected prize-winning mode to the player, and to increase interest in the game.

Furthermore, in the example shown in the front view of FIG. 347(f), the central positions of the penetrating portions 2610a on both sides are shifted outward from the central positions of the nail heads of the obstructing nails 1219 and 1220, thereby It is possible to give the player who sees the illusion that the obstacle nails 1219 and 1220 on both sides are bent inward. A player who visually recognizes such an aspect assumes that the ball passage between the obstacle nail 1219 and the obstacle nail 1220 is narrowed and that the game ball is in a disadvantageous situation when the game ball enters the first start hole 2002. Since the obstruction nails 1219 and 1220 on both sides are not bent inward, the game ball enters the first starting hole 2002 at the normal winning frequency. With such a configuration, it is possible to show an unexpected prize-winning mode to the player, and to increase interest in the game.

In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 347(a) to (f), area cover members 2600a having different formation positions of the penetrating portions 2610a are produced, and the first starting port 2002 is replaced as appropriate. It is very troublesome because it needs to be attached to the decorative part of the. Therefore, in the following, based on FIGS. 348(a) to 348(e), it is possible to reduce the trouble of manufacturing a plurality of area covering members 2600a and the trouble of storing and replacing the plurality of area covering members 2600a on the amusement arcade side. An embodiment will be described.

As shown in the front view of FIG. 348(a), in this embodiment, one region covering member 2600a is formed with four through portions 2610a, and two lower through portions 2610a are formed into two upper through portions. It is formed inside from 2610a. Then, when the illustrated Δ-shaped mark is attached to the decorative portion of the first starting port 2002 with the mark facing upward, as shown in the front view of FIG. The player can visually recognize the center position and the center positions of the nail heads of the obstructing nails 1219 and 1220 on both sides in the same state. Further, if the area cover member 2600a is rotated 180 degrees and the Δ-shaped mark is directed downward without exchanging the region cover member 2600a, the central positions of the through portions 2610a on both sides are aligned as shown in the front view of FIG. 348(c). The nail heads of the obstacle nails 1219 and 1220 on both sides can be arranged inside from the central positions of the nail heads, thereby giving the player the illusion that the obstacle nails 1219 and 1220 on both sides are spread outward. It is possible.

Also, as shown in FIG. 348(d), when the area covering member 2600a is rotated 90 degrees to the right and the triangle-shaped mark is placed facing right, the left obstacle nail 1219 is spread outward. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 348(e), if the region cover member 2600a is rotated 90 degrees to the left and the Δ-shaped mark is placed facing the left side, the right side It is possible to give the player the illusion that the obstacle nail 1220 is spread upward and slightly outward. With such a configuration, it is possible to variously change the viewing mode for the player with one area covering member 2600a without increasing the number of area covering members 2600a.

[37-3. Other embodiments]
As described above, the present embodiment has been described based on the description of each drawing, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to the above-described embodiment, and the following modifications of the implementation configuration are possible.

For example, as shown in FIG. 349(a), it is possible to form an egg-shaped through portion 2610a in the area covering member 2600a and attach it to the first starting port 2002, as shown in FIG. 349(b). By moving the area covering member 2600a downward from the installation mode to the installation mode shown in FIG. 349(c), the obstacle nails 1219 and 1220 on both sides are spread outwards for the player who is visually recognized from the front. It is possible to make an illusion like this. With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the motivation of the player to play the game machine.

The shape of the penetrating portion 2610a is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and the penetrating portion 2610a may be of various shapes as long as the player can visually recognize the relative positional relationship between the penetrating portion 2610a and the obstacle nail. can do. For example, as shown in FIG. 350(a), the shape of the through portion 2610a can be a substantially square shape with R portions arranged at the corners. It is also possible to have a square shape.

Furthermore, the penetrating portion 2610a of the present invention is not necessarily limited to a closed shape, and as shown in FIG. , 1220 of the nail heads. Further, as shown in FIG. 350(d), a notch-shaped penetrating portion may be formed in an oblique direction to accommodate the nail heads of the obstructing nails 1219 and 1220. FIG.

Further, from the viewpoint of making the state of the obstacle nail visible, the penetration part 2610a of the present invention may contain the nail heads of a plurality of obstacle nails. As shown in the figure, the shape of the through portion 2610a provided in the area covering member 2600a is an elongated hole, and the nail heads of a plurality of obstacle nails 1221, 1222 (or 1223, 1224) are accommodated in one through portion 2610a. It is also possible to configure Then, as shown in FIG. 351(b), by forming two long-hole-shaped through-holes 2610a at inner positions in the region cover member 2600a, the player visually recognized from the front can see the obstacle nails 1221 and 1222. , 1223, 1224 are spread outward. With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the motivation of the player to play the game machine.

In addition, in the above-described various embodiments, the area covering member is targeted for obstructive nails planted in the vicinity of the first starting port 2002, such as so-called dead nails that greatly affect the winning rate of the first starting port 2002. 2600a has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to the obstacle nail as described above. An area covering member 2600a may be provided to accommodate the obstruction nail within the penetration 2610a. That is, the player is made to visually recognize the relative positional relationship between the nail head of the obstructing nail and the penetrating portion 2610a provided in the region cover member 2600a, and the state of the obstructing nail is advantageous or disadvantageous for the game. If it is possible to recognize whether the player is in a good state or not, it is possible to increase the willingness to play the game machine.

For example, another embodiment illustrated in the front views of FIGS. 353 and 354 shows the installation of an area covering member 2600a for accommodating a plurality of obstructing nails planted around the first opening 2002. More specifically, in the illustrated embodiment, the region covering member 2600a has a substantially rectangular penetrating portion 2651 for accommodating the nail head of the so-called jump nail 1231 and the nail head of the so-called dead nail 1230. , a notch-shaped through-hole 2652 for accommodating the nail heads of the two left-side guide nails 1232, and a length for accommodating the nail-heads of the four right-side guide nails 1233. A hole-shaped through portion 2653 is formed, and is screwed from the rear side of the panel plate 1110 to four boss portions 2660 formed integrally with the area cover member 2600a.

A region cover member 2600a is provided in the manner shown in FIG. 353(b) with respect to the game region shown in FIG. 353(a). The area covering member 2600a provided in FIG. 353(b) is configured so that the player can visually recognize the jump nail 1231 and the life nail 1230 in a state that is neither advantageous nor disadvantageous. 2, the nail head of the jump nail 1231 is positioned at the center of the penetrating part 2651 and the nail head of the life nail 1230 is positioned below the penetrating part 2650 .

On the other hand, the area covering member 2600a shown in FIGS. 354(a) and 354(b) includes the area covering member 2600a shown in FIG. The formation correspondence of the through portion 2650 for accommodating the nail head of the life nail 1230 is different, and the area covering member 2600a shown in FIG. A longer penetrating portion 2650 for accommodating the nail head of the life nail 1230 is formed by shifting downward. With such a configuration, a player who visually recognizes the states of the jump nail 1231 and the life nail 1230 shown in FIG. It is possible to create an illusion that the player is in an advantageous state for winning a prize at the starting port 2002, and to increase the player's willingness to play.

Conversely, the area covering member 2600a shown in FIG. are formed in short. With such a configuration, a player who visually recognizes the states of the jump nail 1231 and the life nail 1230 shown in FIG. It is possible to create an illusion that the player is in a disadvantageous state for winning a prize at the starting port 2002, thereby increasing the player's interest in selecting a gaming machine to play. Moreover, even if it is visually recognized in a seemingly disadvantageous state, the actual state of the jump nail 1231 and the life nail 1230 is not in a state disadvantageous to winning, so the winning rate to the first start port 2002 is reduced. It's not going down. Therefore, a player who has played the game while visually confirming that the jump nail 1231 or the life nail 1230 is in a disadvantageous state will be surprised and exhilarated by the relatively good winning rate of the first start port 2002. can feel the feeling.

353 and 354. For example, as shown in the front view of FIG. The state of the nail head is determined by whether the nail head is located inside the line connecting the ends of the notched portions of the penetrating portion 2650 or outside beyond the line connecting the ends. It is also possible to configure so that the user can grasp it.

Also, the method of installing the area cover member 2600a to the game panel 1100 is not limited to the method of fixing to the decorative member of the first starting port 2002 described above. And as shown in the cross-sectional view of FIG. 351(d) or (e), it is possible to fix the area cover member 2600a to the panel plate 1110 from the front side with screws or the like. As a fixing method, mounting bosses may be integrally formed with the panel plate 1110 as shown in the cross-sectional view of FIG. A screw hole may be provided on the 1110 side, and at that time, as shown in the front view of FIG. preferably.

Furthermore, the manner in which the area cover member 2600a is attached to the panel plate 1110 is not limited to the embodiment described above. It is also possible to fix the area covering member 2600a by using the above structure. With such a configuration, since the area covering member 2600a cannot be easily removed from the front side of the game machine, the act of illegally bending the obstacle nail is prevented. can be prevented.

In the present embodiment and the other examples described above, various modes of the penetrating portion constituting the accommodation portion for the obstructing nail were exemplified. Various forms can be adopted as long as they can accommodate all or part of the obstructing nail in a front view and function as an accommodating portion, including a penetrating portion having a similar shape.

[38. Movable frame]
By the way, in the gaming machine described with reference to FIGS. By operating the movable decoration means provided on the frame constituting the outer shape of the game machine at a predetermined timing, it is possible to make the player feel interesting. However, some players find it troublesome to move their line of sight from the predetermined display means to the movable decoration means provided on the frame constituting the outer shape of the game machine, and do not move their line of sight to the movable decoration means that has been activated. In such cases, there is a risk that the player will not be able to fully enjoy the excitement of operating the movable decoration means.

Below, the movable decoration provided on the frame constituting the outer shape of the game machine, because the player feels troublesome to move the line of sight to the movable decoration means provided on the frame constituting the outer shape of the gaming machine. An embodiment of a game machine capable of making the player feel a sense of interest even when the line of sight does not move to the means will be described.

FIGS. 364 and 365 show an embodiment modified from the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 282. FIG. In the embodiment shown in FIGS. 364 and 365, the door frame top unit 570 includes, in addition to the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, a frame movable body shaped like a root vegetable. Root vegetable frame movable body 7800 that can move in any direction.

364(A), 364(B), 365(A), and 365(B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 364(C) is a plan view of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 364(D) and 364(E) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. FIG. 365(C) is a front view showing the internal structure of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800. FIG. 364(A), 364(C), and 364(D) show that the right ear frame movable body 7100, the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 are at the standby position in the door frame top unit 570. Shows the stowed state. FIG. 364(B) shows a state in which the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is housed in the standby position in the door frame top unit 570, and the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 have moved to the moving positions. there is FIG. 365(A) shows a state in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are housed in the standby position in the door frame top unit 570, and the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 has moved to the movement position. there is FIGS. 364(E) and 365(B) show a state where the right ear frame movable body 7100, the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 have moved to the movement positions.

As shown in FIG. 365(C), the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 has a root vegetable frame movable body first cover portion 7802 imitating root vegetable leaves on the right side in a front view. In addition, a root vegetable frame movable body second cover part 7804 imitating the root of a root vegetable is provided on the left side in a front view. Root vegetable frame movable body first cover portion 7802 and root vegetable frame movable body second cover portion 7804 are each made of white translucent synthetic resin, and root vegetable frame movable body light emitting portion 7810 is provided inside.

As shown in FIGS. 364(A), 364(B), etc., the lower end of the right connecting linear member 7820 is attached to a predetermined position on the left side of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 in front view. A lower end portion of a left connecting linear member 7830 is attached to a predetermined position on the right side of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 in front view. On the other hand, the upper end of the right coupling linear member 7820 is connected to the right up-and-down drive mechanism 7825 . In addition, the upper end of the left connecting linear member 7830 is connected to the left vertical motion drive mechanism 7835 . The right connecting linear member 7820 and the left connecting linear member 7830 are string-shaped and have a predetermined length.

The right connecting linear member 7820 and the left connecting linear member 7830 are specifically composed of a tubular cable, inside of which a signal from the peripheral control board 1510 is transmitted to the root vegetable frame movable body 7800. A signal line (not shown) and a feeder line (not shown) for supplying power to the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 are provided. The signal line and the feeder line may be configured to be provided inside either one of the right connecting wire member 7820 and the left connecting wire member 7830 . It should be noted that instead of transmitting a signal or supplying power to the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 by wire, a signal from the peripheral control board 1510 is transmitted to the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 wirelessly. A loop antenna or the like may be used to feed power to the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 from the side of the door frame 3 in a non-contact manner.

The right vertical motion drive mechanism 7825 and the left vertical motion drive mechanism 7835 each have a rotation mechanism (not shown). It is possible to wind up and down the right connecting linear member 7820 and the left connecting linear member 7830 configured by.

An opening (not shown) is provided on the lower surface of the door frame top unit 570, and by passing through the opening, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is moved downward from the state stored in the door frame top unit 570. It is possible to change the position to the front side of the game board side effect display device 1600, or to the state to be stored in the door frame top unit 570 from the state to be positioned in front of the game board side effect display device 1600. be. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 365(A), the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 can be moved so as to be positioned at the forward movement position of the game board side effect display device 1600 . Further, by rotating the rotation mechanism in the direction opposite to the predetermined direction, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 can be moved from the state in which it is positioned in front of the game board side effect display device 1600 shown in FIG. It can be moved to the standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570 shown in 364(A).

As shown in FIG. 365(C), the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 has a root vegetable frame movable body light emitting part 7810 inside. Specifically, the root vegetable frame movable body light-emitting part 7810 has a shape along the outer shape of the root vegetable frame movable body first cover part 7802 and the root vegetable frame movable body second cover part 7804 that constitute the front surface of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 . It consists of a white printed circuit board. As a specific configuration of the root vegetable frame movable body light emitting section 7810, for example, the configuration described above for the face substrate 6020 may be adopted. By driving and controlling a plurality of light sources (for example, full-color LEDs) mounted on the front side of the printed circuit board by the peripheral control board 1510, the first cover portion 7802 of the movable root vegetable frame and the second cover portion 7804 of the movable root vegetable frame are controlled. It is possible to have a luminescence decoration mode of a predetermined luminescence color.

As the light emitting mode of the root vegetable frame movable body light emitting part 7810, the same light emitting mode as the light emitting mode described above for the rear wall substrate 6352 may be adopted. For example, a plurality of light sources corresponding to the root vegetable frame movable body second cover portion 7804, which is a root-like portion of the root vegetable frame movable body light-emitting portion 7810, is caused to emit white light, and the root vegetable frame movable body second cover portion 7804, which is a portion like a leaf, emits white light. By causing a plurality of light sources corresponding to one cover portion 7802 to emit green light, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 can be made into a light-emitting decorative mode imitating a radish. On the other hand, a plurality of light sources corresponding to the root vegetable frame movable body second cover portion 7804, which is a portion simulating a root, emits red light, and a plurality of light sources corresponding to the root vegetable frame movable body first cover portion 7802, which is a portion simulating a leaf. By emitting green light from the light source of , it is possible to make the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 into a light-emitting decorative mode imitating a carrot.

282 to 287, 294 to 297, 300 to 306, and 309 to 309. 313, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 may be provided. Moreover, in such an embodiment, it may be configured so as to execute the effect mode shown below. In an embodiment in which the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 can be operated, one of these frame movable bodies The root vegetable frame movable body 7800 may be moved in response to the motion of at least one frame movable body (moving from the standby position to the moving position, changing from the stopped state to the rotating state, etc.).

366 and 367, an effect mode using the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 will be described below. 366(A) and 366(B) show the moving state of the first movable decoration means (the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200), and a simulated image imitating the first movable decoration means. It is the time chart which showed the display mode and the movement state of the 2nd movable decoration means (root vegetable frame movable body 7800). 367(A) to 367(C) are front views showing the state of the gaming machine at a predetermined timing of such an effect mode.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 366, t0, t1 to t34, t35, etc. are indicated according to the passage of time in order to explain the timing of the effects. The time between each timing is 1 second. These points are the same for the time charts shown in later-described drawings such as FIGS.

FIG. 366(A) shows an effect mode using the game machine described with reference to FIGS. 364 and 365. FIG. First, at a predetermined timing before timing t0, the game board side effect display device 1600 starts to change the decorative patterns, and at timing t7, the left and right decorative patterns temporarily stop at the same pattern, and only the central decorative pattern fluctuates. It becomes a reach state (for example, "4↓4").

At timing t7, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 start to move from the standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570 to the upward movement position due to drive control by the peripheral control board 1510. do. At the same time, at timing t7, the game board side effect display device 1600 starts displaying a simulated image simulating the door frame top unit 570, the right ear frame movable body 7100, and the left ear frame movable body 7200.

FIG. 367(A) shows a state in which the decorative pattern is in the reach state at timing t7, and a simulated image simulating the door frame top unit 570 has started to be displayed. The display of the simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the simulated image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200 starts immediately after this (0.1 second or the like).

From timing t7 to timing t9, drive control is performed to move the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 to the movement positions. At the same time, a simulated image simulating a mode in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 move to the movement positions is dynamically displayed.

At timing t9, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 complete movement to the movement positions. Simultaneously, a simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and a simulated image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200 are also displayed in a manner simulating the state in which the movement to the movement position is completed.

FIG. 367(B) shows a state in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 have completed their movement to the movement positions at timing t9. It shows a state in which a simulated image simulating a body 7200 is displayed in a manner simulating a state in which the movement to the movement position is completed.

Next, at timing t13, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 starts to move from the standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570 to the movement position moved downward from the door frame top unit 570. . At timing t14, the movement of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 to the movement position is completed. In this state, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 overlaps the display position of the simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the simulated image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200 in the game board side effect display device 1600 when viewed from the front. It will remain stationary in position. At the same time, at timing t14, the display of the simulated images simulating the door frame top unit 570, the right ear frame movable body 7100, and the left ear frame movable body 7200 that have been displayed until then is terminated.

In FIG. 367(C), at timing t14, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 displays a simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and a simulated left ear frame movable body 7200 in the game board side effect display device 1600. It shows a state in which it has moved to a position that overlaps the previous position in a front view.

Next, at timing t18, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 starts to change from the moving position moved downward from the door frame top unit 570 to the standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570. . At timing t19, the movement of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 to the standby position is completed.

Next, at timing t22, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 start moving from the upward movement position to the standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570. FIG. From timing t22 to timing t24, drive control is performed to move the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 to the standby position. At this time, a simulated image simulating a mode in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 move to the movement position is not displayed. At timing t24, the movement of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 to the standby position is completed.

At a predetermined timing after the timing t24, the variation of the decorative pattern in the center during variation is completed, and the result of the special lottery is a symbol (for example, "444") indicating that the result is a big hit, or the result of the special lottery. A symbol (for example, "454") indicating that the game is lost is stopped and displayed.

FIG. 366(B) shows a game having the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 described with reference to FIGS. It shows the production mode when applied to the machine.

First, at a predetermined timing before timing t0, the game board side effect display device 1600 starts to change the decorative patterns, and at timing t7, the left and right decorative patterns temporarily stop at the same pattern, and only the central decorative pattern fluctuates. Reach state. At timing t7, drive control by peripheral control board 1510 causes right ear frame movable body 7100 and left ear frame movable body 7200 to change from a state of being stopped in door frame top unit 570 to a state of being rotated. At the same time, at timing t7, the game board side effect display device 1600 starts displaying a simulated image simulating the door frame top unit 570, the right ear frame movable body 7100, and the left ear frame movable body 7200.

Next, at timing t13, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 starts to move from the standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570 to the movement position moved downward from the door frame top unit 570. . At timing t14, the movement of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 to the movement position is completed. In this state, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 overlaps the display position of the simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the simulated image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200 in the game board side effect display device 1600 when viewed from the front. It will remain stationary in position. At the same time, at timing t14, the display of the simulated images simulating the door frame top unit 570, the right ear frame movable body 7100, and the left ear frame movable body 7200 that have been displayed until then is terminated.

Next, at timing t18, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 starts to change from the moving position moved downward from the door frame top unit 570 to the standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570. . At timing t19, the movement of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 to the standby position is completed. At timing t<b>24 , the state of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 changes from the rotating state to the stopped state where they are housed in the door frame top unit 570 .

At a predetermined timing after the timing t24, the variation of the decorative pattern in the center during variation is completed, and the result of the special lottery is a symbol (for example, "444") indicating that the result is a big hit, or the result of the special lottery. A symbol (for example, "454") indicating that the game is lost is stopped and displayed.

During the game, the player keeps looking at the predetermined display means (the game board side effect display device 1600) in which the effect based on the lottery result of the lottery means is performed. A simulated image simulating the first movable decoration means is displayed on a predetermined display means in accordance with the drive control of the provided first movable decoration means (right ear frame movable body 7100 and left ear frame movable body 7200). As a result, the player is notified that the first movable decoration means is being driven and controlled, so that the player does not notice that the first movable decoration means is being driven and controlled. , the situation that the player cannot feel the excitement due to the driving control of the first movable decoration means, or the player carelessly touches the first movable decoration means and gets injured. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of such a situation.

On the other hand, a player who is reluctant to visually recognize the driving control of the first movable decoration means, such as feeling tired, directly recognizes that the first movable decoration means is being driven and controlled. It is possible to virtually experience the operation of the first movable decoration means by viewing a simulated image simulating the first movable decoration means displayed on the predetermined display means instead of viewing.

Furthermore, since the second movable decoration means (root vegetable frame movable body 7800) moves to a position overlapping the display position of the simulated image simulating the first movable decoration means in a front view, the first movable decoration means To impose a burden such as moving the line of sight on a reluctant player who does not move the line of sight with respect to the first movable decoration means although he/she is aware that the decoration means is driven and controlled. Instead, it is possible for the user to feel the interest caused by the movement of the second movable decoration means. In addition, it is possible to make such passive players regain their positive attitude towards games.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 366(A) and 366(B), the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is configured to move forward of the game board side effect display device 1600 at timing t13. , In addition to the effect mode in which the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 moves forward of the game board side effect display device 1600, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 does not move forward of the game board side effect display device 1600, and the door frame A presentation mode in which the player continues to be positioned at the standby position in the top unit 570 may be configured to be executable. With such a configuration, after the simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the simulated image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200 are displayed, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 moves the right ear frame movable body 7100. A rendering mode in which the simulated image and the simulated left ear frame movable body 7200 are superimposed in a front view with respect to the display position of the simulated simulated image, and a rendering mode in which the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 continues to be positioned at the standby position. and can be executed.

Further, when the performance mode in which the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is moved is executed, the expectation of the occurrence of the big hit state is higher than when the performance mode in which the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is not moved is executed. may be configured.

With such a configuration, after the simulated image imitating the first movable decoration means (right ear frame movable body 7100 and left ear frame movable body 7200) is displayed, the second movable decoration means (root vegetable frame movable body 7800) is driven and controlled to move to a position where the simulated image imitating the first movable decoration means is superimposed when viewed from the front, and the second movable decoration means stands by. Since the second effect mode of continuing to be positioned is executed, the player's interest is focused on whether or not the second movable decoration means moves.

Further, when the first effect mode is executed and when the second effect mode is executed, there is a state (jackpot state) in which the player is more advantageous when the first effect mode is executed. If the degree of expectation is increased, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the movement of the second movable decoration means.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 366(A) and 366(B), the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 moves in front of the game board side effect display device 1600 from timing t13 to timing t14. However, it may be configured to provide a plurality of operation modes when the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 moves forward of the game board side effect display device 1600 . For example, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is temporarily stopped at a position between the standby position and the moving position (between timing t13 and timing t14), and then returns to the standby position (timing t15). Alternatively, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 temporarily stops at a position intermediate between the standby position and the moving position (between timing t13 and timing t14), and then moves to the moving position (timing t15). can be configured to run In this case, it is preferable that the probability of occurrence of the big win state is higher when the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 moves to the moving position.

Alternatively, during the period (timing t14 to timing t18) after the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 completes movement to the game board side effect display device 1600 and starts to move into the door frame top unit 570, the root vegetable frame movable body In addition to the mode in which 7800 is stopped in front of the game board side effect display device 1600, it may be configured to move in a predetermined operation mode within the range in front of the game board side effect display device 1600.

In addition, a plurality of operation modes may be provided when the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 moves into the door frame top unit 570 and returns. For example, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 returns from the movement position to the standby position from timing t18 to timing t19, and in addition, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 temporarily stops at an intermediate position between the standby position and the movement position. (Between timing t18 and timing t19), after that, it returns to the waiting position (timing t20).

A mode in which the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 moves from the standby position to the moving position, a mode in which the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 moves to the moving position, and a mode in which the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 moves from the moving position to the standby position have been shown. A combination of the operation modes may be adopted as a plurality of operation modes for operating the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 . Further, the degree of expectation for the occurrence of a big hit state may differ depending on the plurality of operation modes.

With such a configuration, in addition to whether or not the second movable decoration means (root vegetable frame movable body 7800) moves, drive control is performed in one of a plurality of operation modes when it moves. Therefore, in addition to whether or not the second movable decoration means moves, the player's interest is focused on how the second movable decoration means moves.

Furthermore, when the degree of expectation for the occurrence of a state advantageous to the player (big win state) is configured to differ depending on the operation mode, the player will not be able to understand in what mode the second movable decoration means will move. It is possible to raise the expectation of

The root vegetable frame movable body 7800 may be configured to be in a light-off state until the forward movement of the game board side effect display device 1600 is completed, and to be in a light emitting decoration state after the movement to the movement position is completed. . Specifically, from timing t13 to timing t14, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is turned off, and at timing t14 when the movement of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 to the movement position is completed, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is turned into the light emitting decorative state. , the light emitting decoration state should be continued until timing t18 when the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 starts moving to the storage position. Alternatively, the luminous decoration state may be continued until timing t19 at which the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 completes movement to the storage position. As the luminous decorative state, it is preferable to select one of the above-described radish-like luminescence mode and carrot-like luminescence mode based on the result of a special lottery.

In this way, after moving the second movable decoration means (root vegetable frame movable body 7800) to the movement position in front of the predetermined display means (game board side effect display device 1600) in the off state, the luminous decoration is made at the movement position. By setting the state, it is possible to give the player a big surprise. In addition, by setting the luminous decoration state based on the result of the special lottery, the player can have a sense of expectation that the result of the special lottery will be advantageous to the player (big win). Further, when the second movable decoration means is accommodated in the standby position, by continuing the luminous decoration state, interest in the first movable decoration means located on the extension line of the movement direction of the second movable decoration means is increased. It becomes possible for the player to hold it.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 366 and 367, at the same time when the movement of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 starts, in the substantially central display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, , display of a simulated image imitating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and a simulated image imitating the left ear frame movable body 7200 are started. In addition, in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 366(A), at the same time as the movement of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 to the movement position is completed, the game board side effect display device 1600 is displayed. In the substantially central display area, a simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and a simulated image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200 are displayed to complete the movement to the movement position. Also, the right ear frame movable from the standby position to the moving position, such as timing t9 to timing t14 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 366(A) and timing t7 to timing t14 in the embodiment shown in FIG. In the same manner as the operation state of the body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the operation state of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 that have changed from the non-rotating state at the standby position to the rotating state, during these periods , a simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and a simulated image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200 may be displayed.

With such a configuration, the first movable decoration means changes from the first state (positioned at the standby position) to the second state (positioned at the moving position or rotating state). The state of (right ear frame movable body 7100 and left ear frame movable body 7200) can be accurately grasped by visual recognition of predetermined display means (game board side effect display device 1600).

On the other hand, a simulated image simulating the right ear-frame movable body 7100 and a simulated image simulating the left ear-frame movable body 7200 are displayed in a manner different from the operating states of the right ear-frame movable body 7100 and the left ear-frame movable body 7200 . may be configured to do so.

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 366A, a simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and a simulated image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200 move and appear from timing t7 to timing t9. However, this dynamic display may be performed again from timing t9 to timing t11, and further from timing t11 to timing t13.

In this way, the first movable decorative means (right ear frame movable body 7100 and left ear frame movable body 7200) provided on the frame shifts from the first state (standby state) to the second state (moving state). Even after the change, a simulated image simulating the operation mode of the first movable decoration means is dynamically displayed on a predetermined display means (game board side effect display device 1600), so that the player can see the first movable decoration means. It is possible to make the user interested in the operation of the decoration means. In the above example, such dynamic display is performed twice (period from timing t9 to timing t11 and period from timing t11 to timing t13), but dynamic display may be performed once. It is good also as 3 times or more.

Further, at timing t9 in the example shown in FIG. 366(A), the simulated image imitating the right ear frame movable body 7100 is separated from the simulated image imitating the door frame top unit 570, and the game board side effect display device is displayed. It may be configured such that it starts to move upward within the display area of 1600, then moves upward within the display area, and moves out of the display area at timing t11. Furthermore, from timing t11 to timing t13, a simulated image imitating the left ear frame movable body 7200 may be similarly dynamically displayed. FIG. 368(A) is a diagram showing the state at timing t10 in such an embodiment, in which the simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 is separated from the simulated image simulating the door frame top unit 570. It shows the state of moving upward.

In this example, the first movable decorative means (the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200) provided on the frame are changed from the first state (standby state) to the second state (moved position). position), a simulated image simulating the first movable decoration means (a simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear A simulated image imitating the frame movable body 7200) is configured to be moved in a predetermined direction suggesting the position where the first movable decoration means is provided. Further, the first movable decoration means is configured to be positioned on an extension line of the moving direction of the simulated image imitating the first movable decoration means when viewed from the front.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify that the first movable decoration means operates to change from the first state to the second state. In addition, it is possible to directly suggest the position where the first movable decoration means is provided, and to make the player interested in the operation of the first movable decoration means. In addition, an action that is impossible in the actual action of the first movable decoration means is performed with a simulated image imitating the first movable decoration means. It is possible to have it brought to

Alternatively, from timing t9 to timing t14 in the example shown in FIG. It may be configured to dynamically display so as to alternately appear and appear from simulated images. FIG. 368(B) shows a state in which the simulated image imitating the right ear frame movable body 7100 is half retracted with respect to the simulated image imitating the door frame top unit 570 .

In this example, the first movable decorative means (the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200) provided on the frame are changed from the first state (standby state) to the second state (moved position). position), a simulated image simulating the first movable decoration means (a simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear A simulated image simulating the frame movable body 7200) is displayed in a mode in which it reciprocates in a predetermined direction. Further, the first movable decoration means is configured to be positioned on an extension line of the reciprocating direction when viewed from the front.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify that the first movable decoration means operates to change from the first state to the second state. In addition, it is possible to suggest the position where the first movable decoration means is provided, and to make the player interested in the operation of the first movable decoration means. Also, the comical display of the simulated image simulating the first movable decoration means makes it possible for the player to take an interest in the operation of the first movable decoration means.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 368(A) and 368(B), the first movable decoration means provided on the frame (the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200) are After changing from the first state (standby state) to the second state (positioned at the movement position), the first movable decoration means moves to the first position in the predetermined display means (game board side effect display device 1600). A dynamic display of a simulated image imitating the first movable decorative means (ears popping upward, ears moving bouncing, etc.) is performed in a manner different from the manner in which the state changes from the state of (1) to the second state. Configure.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player interested in how the first movable decoration means actually operates.

On the other hand, from timing t9 to timing t14 in the presentation mode shown in FIG. 366(A), a simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and a simulated image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200 are dynamically displayed in a predetermined color. It may be configured to For example, in a simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100, after displaying an image in which the portion simulating the inner side of the ear is red and the portion simulating the outer side of the ear is white, the colors are exchanged and the ear is displayed. The display operation of displaying an image in which the part simulating the inside of the ear is white and the part simulating the outside of the ear is red may be repeated multiple times (for example, 5 times in total by changing the colors every second). . Further, such a display operation may be performed simultaneously on a simulated image simulating left ear frame movable body 7200 . FIG. 369(A) shows a simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and a simulated image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200. The portion simulating the inside of the ear is white, and the outside of the ear is white. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a state in which an image is displayed in which the simulated portion is red;

On the other hand, the simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the simulated image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200 may be configured to continue to be displayed in a predetermined color without changing the colors. FIG. 369(B) shows a simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100, in which both the inner ear portion and the outer ear portion simulating the ear are pink, and the left ear frame movable body 7200. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an effect mode in which, as a simulated image simulating the ear, an image in which both the portion simulating the inside of the ear and the portion simulating the outside of the ear are pink are continuously displayed.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player interested in how the first movable decoration means actually emits light.

The degree of expectation for the occurrence of the big hit state may be different depending on each performance mode described with reference to FIGS. 368 and 369. For example, the performance mode described with reference to FIG. 368(A) is configured to have a higher degree of expectation for the occurrence of a big hit state than the performance mode described with reference to FIG. 368(B). good too. In addition, the production mode described with reference to FIG. 369(A) is configured to have a higher degree of expectation for the occurrence of a big hit state than the production mode described with reference to FIG. 369(B). good too.

Furthermore, it may be configured to execute an effect mode in which the effect mode described with reference to FIG. 368 and the effect mode described with reference to FIG. 369 are combined. For example, the effect explained with reference to FIG. It may be configured such that the degree of expectation for the occurrence of the big win state is higher in the performance mode in which the mode and the performance mode described with reference to FIG. 369(B) are combined.

Further, it is preferable to configure such that the ratio of execution of the performance modes with a high degree of expectation for the occurrence of the big win state is low. For example, the performance mode is adjusted so that the ratio of the number of executions of the performance mode with the lower expectation for the occurrence of the big hit state to the number of times of the performance mode with the higher expectation for the occurrence of the big win state is 9:1. It is good to set the execution ratio.

With such a configuration, a simulated image simulating the first movable decorative means (a simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and a simulated image simulating the movable right ear frame 7100) displayed on the predetermined display means (game board side effect display device 1600) By providing a plurality of display modes of the simulated image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200, the monotony of the presentation is eliminated, and it becomes possible for the player to take an interest in the first movable decoration means. . In addition, the act of visually recognizing the action itself of the first movable decoration means directly, and the act of visually recognizing the simulated image simulating the first movable decoration means and knowing the degree of expectation for the occurrence of an advantageous state for the player. It is possible to provide the player with interest as to which action he enjoys.

In addition, since the degree of expectation that a state advantageous to the player (jackpot state) will occur is shown to the player by the display mode of the simulated image simulating the first movable decoration means, the first movable decoration means is visually recognized. In particular, it is possible to make a reluctant player recognize the presence of the first movable decoration means again.

In addition, the higher the degree of expectation for the occurrence of a state advantageous to the player (big hit state), the lower the proportion of execution of the performance mode. Although many modes are visually recognized, a performance mode with a high degree of expectation and a low execution rate is rarely seen (for example, once in 10 times), which gives the player a sense of surprise. In addition, the players who have visually recognized the latter presentation mode are excited by the fact that the degree of expectation is high, and they become more interested in the first movable decoration means.

The light emitting states of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are emitted so that they can be recognized in the same manner as the simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the simulated image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200. It may be configured to allow For example, in the state shown in FIG. 369(A), the outer sides of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are made to emit red light, and in the state shown in FIG. The entire movable frame body 7100 and the movable left ear frame body 7200 may be configured to emit pink light.

In this way, the light emission mode in the second state (positioned at the movement position) of the first movable decorative means (the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200) provided on the frame can be controlled in a predetermined manner. A simulated image simulating the first movable decoration means (a simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and a simulated image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200) displayed on the display means (game board side effect display device 1600) By making it the same as the image color of the image), when a player visually recognizing the predetermined display means tries to visually recognize the first movable decoration means, the player can quickly recognize the first movable decoration means. becomes possible.

In the substantially central display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is moved in a configuration in which the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed in a mode according to the result of the special lottery after starting the variation of the decorative patterns. It may be configured as

For example, when the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is to be operated, the variation of the decorative symbols is started at substantially the center of the game board side production display device 1600, and from the state in which the decorative symbols are being varied, the decorative symbols being varied are displayed. is moved to the upper right of the game board side effect display device 1600 and displayed in a reduced size, and a simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 is displayed in the substantially central display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. and the display of a simulated image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200 may be started.

After that, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is moved from the standby position to a position overlapping the substantially central display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, and further the root vegetable frame is moved from the position overlapping the substantially central display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. After the movable frame body 7800 is moved in the direction to be stored in the door frame top unit 570, the decorative pattern that has been displayed on the upper right until then is moved to substantially the center of the game board side effect display device 1600, and then the original size. It is preferable to configure such that the variable display is continued by expanding to 200 mm, and finally the stop display is performed in a manner suggesting the result of the lottery.

When such a decorative symbol variation mode is adopted, the decorative symbol variations are repeated approximately in the center of the game board side effect display device 1600 .

With this configuration, the player's line of sight stays at a predetermined position of the predetermined display means (approximately in the center of the game board side effect display device 1600), and the first movable decoration means (right ear frame movable Display of a simulated image simulating the first movable decoration means and display of the second movable decoration means are provided for a reluctant player who feels stressed by visually recognizing the drive control of the body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200). The movement of the decoration means (root vegetable frame movable body 7800) makes it possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player is forced to move the line of sight, and the player feels stress.

At approximately the center of the game board side effect display device 1600, the decorative pattern starts to change, and at the upper right of the game board side effect display device 1600, a smaller size than the decorative pattern displayed substantially at the center of the game board side effect display device 1600 is displayed. Along with starting the variation of the decorative symbols, from the state in which the respective decorative symbols are varied, in the state where the variable display of the decorative symbols during variation is continued on the upper right of the game board side effect display device 1600, the game board side. Display of the decorative pattern displayed in the approximate center of the production display device 1600 is temporarily terminated, and a simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body are displayed in the approximate center of the game board side production display device 1600. 7200 may be configured to start displaying a simulated image.

After that, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is moved from the standby position to a position overlapping the display area in the approximate center of the game board side effect display device 1600, and the root vegetable frame is moved from the position overlapping the approximate center of the game board side effect display device 1600. After moving the body 7800 in the direction in which it is housed in the door frame top unit 570, the variable display of the decorative pattern in the approximate center of the game board side effect display device 1600 is resumed, and finally, together with the decorative pattern displayed in the upper right. , may be stopped and displayed in a mode suggesting the result of the lottery.

When such a variation mode of decorative symbols is employed, the variation of decorative symbols is repeated approximately in the center and upper right of the game board side effect display device 1600 .

By adopting such a configuration, the line of sight of the player stays at a predetermined position of the predetermined display means (approximately in the center of the game board side effect display device 1600 where relatively large decorative patterns are displayed). , the first movable decoration means for a reluctant player who feels stressed by visually recognizing the drive control of the first movable decoration means (the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200). The display of a simulated image imitating the root vegetable frame and the movement of the second movable decoration means (the root vegetable frame movable body 7800) make the player feel as if he/she is forced to move his or her line of sight, thereby suppressing the occurrence of a situation in which the player feels stress. It becomes possible to

Although an example of displaying a small decorative pattern on the upper right of the game board side effect display device 1600 is shown, it is configured to be displayed on the lower right or lower left of the game board side effect display device 1600, and the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is configured to be displayed. During the period of moving from the standby position to the moving position (timing t13 to timing t14 in FIGS. 366(A) and 366(B)) and the period of being positioned at the moving position (timing t14 to timing t18), the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 moves. During the period of movement from the position to the standby position (timing t18 to timing t19 in FIGS. 366(A) and 366(B)), the small decorative pattern is not hidden by the root vegetable frame movable body 7800. may Specifically, during these periods, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 and the small-sized decorative pattern should not overlap when viewed from the front.

In this way, by the movement of the second movable decoration means (root vegetable frame movable body 7800), the predetermined position of the predetermined display means (the game board side effect display device 1600 in which relatively small decorative patterns are displayed) By configuring so that the decorative pattern displayed in the lower right or lower left) is not hidden, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a reluctant player feels that the performance is excessive.

372, 373, etc., these display methods may be employed when displaying a simulated image imitating a modeled body and decoration patterns on the game board side effect display device 1600. FIG.

In response to the display of the simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the simulated image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200, the game board side effect display device 1600 indicates when the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 will move. It may be configured to display the waiting time shown. A plurality of display modes will be described below with reference to FIGS. 370(A) and 370(B). FIG. 370(A) shows a modification of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 366(A). Also, FIG. 370(B) shows a modification of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 366(B).

As a display of the standby time, for example, in the display area between the simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the simulated image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200, "1" is displayed from timing t8 to timing t9. display a number, display the number "2" from timing t9 to timing t10, display the number "3" from timing t10 to timing t11, display the number "4" from timing t11 to timing t12, A character string “GO!!” (notation is abbreviated as “GO” in FIG. 370A) may be displayed from timing t12 to timing t13. In addition to the display of such numbers and characters, the character string "What if the root vegetables fall...?" It may be configured to be displayed in the display area between the simulated image imitating the movable body 7200 .

Alternatively, without displaying such numbers and characters, the character string "What if root vegetables fall...?" It may be configured to be displayed in the display area between the simulated image imitating the movable body 7200 .

Images (“1”, “2”, “3”, “4”, “GO!!”) suggesting the waiting time until the second movable decoration means (root vegetable frame movable body 7800) operates. is displayed on a predetermined display means (game board side effect display device 1600), the first movable decorative means (right ear frame movable body 7100 and left ear frame movable body 7200) can be visually recognized. The player can recognize the timing when the second movable decoration means operates, and by displaying a simulated image simulating the first movable decoration means, the player's line of sight is moved to the first movable decoration means. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a person overlooks the operation of the second movable decoration means. Further, for a passive player who does not move his/her line of sight toward the first movable decoration means, the operation timing of the second movable decoration means is suggested, so that the player can move his/her line of sight from the predetermined display means. It is possible to make the operation of the second movable decoration means wait without delay.

Also, at the same timing (timing t7) as the timing of displaying the simulated image simulating the first movable decoration means, an image suggesting that the second movable decoration means operates at a predetermined timing (“If the root vegetables fall, ?”), the player can simultaneously recognize that the first movable decoration means is operating and that the second movable decoration means is operating. A particularly active player moves his line of sight first to the first movable decoration means and does not notice that the display suggesting that the second movable decoration means is being operated is being performed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the operation of the second movable decoration means is overlooked.

In addition, by displaying an image suggesting a waiting time until the second movable decoration means operates near and adjacent to the simulated image simulating the first movable decoration means, the player can enjoy the second movable decoration means. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the user does not notice that the image suggesting the waiting time until the means operates is displayed.

An example of displaying an image suggesting a waiting time until the second movable decoration means operates in the display area between the simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the simulated image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200. However, the second movable decoration means operates so as to overlap one or both of the simulated image imitating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the simulated image imitating the left ear frame movable body 7200. It is also possible to display an image suggesting a waiting time until the movement or an image suggesting that the second movable decoration means will operate.

By adopting such a configuration, an image suggesting the wait time until the player operates the second movable decoration means and an image suggesting that the second movable decoration means will operate are displayed. It is possible to further suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the user does not notice that the user is there.

In response to the display of the simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the simulated image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200, the game board side effect display device 1600 indicates when the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 will move. Although an example of displaying the expected waiting time has been shown, instead of or in addition to such a display, a similar suggestion may be made by sound. For example, in the display area between the simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the simulated image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200, as shown in FIGS. The voice "ichi" is output from t8 to timing t9, the voice "ni" is output from timing t9 to timing t10, the voice "san" is output from timing t10 to timing t11, and the voice "san" is output from timing t11 to timing t12. It may be configured to output the voice "Yon" and output the voice "Goo" from timing t12 to timing t13. Alternatively, from timing t7 to timing t13, the line "Konsai gararakka ba" is output as voice, or some kind of melody (a melody of about 6 seconds whose output is completed at least at timing t13) is output. may be configured.

In this way, by adopting a configuration that outputs a sound suggesting a waiting time until the second movable decoration means (root vegetable frame movable body 7800) operates, the first movable decoration means (right ear frame movable body 7100) , left ear frame movable body 7200), even when the line of sight has moved to the first movable decoration means, the timing at which the second movable decoration means operates can be audibly recognized. Thus, it is possible to fully enjoy the operation of the first movable decoration means until just before the second movable decoration means operates.

Furthermore, in the case of a player who does not move his line of sight with respect to the first movable decoration means, he visually recognizes predetermined display means (game board side effect display device 1600) for performing effects based on the lottery result of the lottery means. As for the action itself, the player does not necessarily continue to visually recognize the predetermined display means by operating a mobile phone or smartphone, but the timing of the operation of the second movable decoration means is audibly indicated to the player by sound. Therefore, it is possible to restore the willingness to visually recognize the predetermined display means and the second movable decorative means.

366(A) and 366(B) show an embodiment in which the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 moves to a position overlapping the left and right ear frame movable body simulated images in a front view. After moving the frame movable body 7800 to the moving position, it may be configured to periodically move up and down at the moving position. For example, during the four seconds from timing t14 to timing t18, it may be configured to repeat such up-and-down movement four times in total by moving up once per second and then moving down. . During the movement at this time, at least part of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is moved to the area where the simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the simulated image simulating the left ear frame movable body 7200 were displayed in a front view. may be configured to move within a range overlapping with .

Thus, the position where the simulated image simulating the second movable decoration means (root vegetable frame movable body 7800) with the first movable decoration means (right ear frame movable body 7100 and left ear frame movable body 7200) was displayed. After moving to a moving position where the second movable decoration means overlaps with the second movable decoration means when viewed from the front, at least a part of the second movable decoration means moves so as to overlap the area where the simulated image simulating the first movable decoration means was displayed when viewed from the front. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a reluctant player feels stress due to the movement of the second movable decoration means after the movement to the movement position.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 364 and 365, since the player can directly touch the root vegetable frame movable body 7800, the player may be injured by the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 falling downward. Otherwise, there is a possibility that the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is pulled downward by the player and the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 and the like are destroyed. Therefore, an embodiment obtained by modifying the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 364 and 365 will be described below with reference to FIG. 371. FIG. In this embodiment, it is difficult for the player to touch the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 .

371(A) and 371(B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 371(C) is a plan view of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 371(D) and 371(E) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 371(A), 371(C), and 371(D) show that the right ear frame movable body 7100, the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 are at the standby position in the door frame top unit 570. Shows the stowed state. FIGS. 371(B) and 371(E) show a state where the right ear frame movable body 7100, the left ear frame movable body 7200 and the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 have moved to the movement position.

As shown in FIG. 371, in this embodiment, a root vegetable frame movable body cover unit 7850 is provided to cover the movement area of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 . The root vegetable frame movable body cover unit 7850 is provided in front of the door frame base unit 100 and below the door frame top unit 570, and includes a cover unit frame 7852 having a square shape in front view and a right triangle shape in side view, A cover unit front portion 7854 that covers the square portion formed on the front by the cover unit frame 7852, a cover unit right side portion 7856 that covers the right triangle portions formed on the left and right sides by the cover unit frame 7852, and a cover unit left side. and a surface portion 7858 .

The cover unit frame 7852 is made of colored (specifically, green) opaque synthetic resin. In addition, in order to increase the strength of the cover unit frame 7852, it may be made of metal. Also, the cover unit frame 7852 has a function of holding a cover unit front face portion 7854 , a cover unit right side face portion 7856 and a cover unit left side face portion 7858 .

The cover unit front surface portion 7854, the cover unit right side surface portion 7856, and the cover unit left side surface portion 7858 are each formed of a flat plate-like colorless and transparent synthetic resin. The cover unit front part 7854 is configured to be attached to the cover unit frame 7852 in a tilted state so that its upper part is located on the front side in a side view. A cover unit right side surface portion 7856 and a cover unit left side surface portion 7858 are provided so as to face each other at the left and right ends of the gaming machine.

A player can visually recognize the operating state of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 through the colorless and transparent cover unit front face portion 7854 . Also, a player who plays a game in an adjacent game machine can visually recognize the operation state of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 through the cover unit right side surface 7856 and the cover unit left side surface 7858 . It is possible.

A game machine employing such a configuration may be configured to execute the effect mode described with reference to FIG. 366 and the like.

In this way, the protective members (cover unit front surface 7854, cover unit right side surface 7856, cover unit left side surface 7858) are arranged so as to surround the movement area of the second movable decorative means (root vegetable frame movable body 7800), By adopting a configuration that makes it difficult for the player to touch the second movable decoration means and that the player can visually recognize the second movable decoration means through a transparent protective member, the second movable decoration means can be viewed. While maintaining the visibility of the movable decoration means and the impact given to the player when the second movable decoration means operates, the situation that the player is injured due to the movement of the second movable decoration means, It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player destroys the second movable decoration means.

282, an example in which the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 and the root vegetable frame movable body cover unit 7850 are provided by modifying the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 306 and 309 to 313, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 and the root vegetable frame movable body cover unit 7850 may be provided. Also, in such an embodiment, each effect mode described in this specification may be configured to be executed.

Although an example in which the cover unit frame 7852 holds the cover unit front face portion 7854, the cover unit right side face portion 7856, and the cover unit left side face portion 7858 is shown, any one or both of the cover unit right side face portion 7856 and the cover unit left side face portion 7858 may be held. It may be configured so as not to be provided. For example, the cover unit frame 7852 may have only the cover unit front portion 7854 , or the cover unit frame 7852 may have only the cover unit front portion 7854 and the cover unit left side portion 7858 .

In this way, the protective member (cover unit front portion 7854; or cover unit front portion 7854 and cover unit right side portion 7856; 7854 and the left side of the cover unit 7858) to contact the second movable decoration means from the sides (right and left, left only, or right only). In addition, by adopting a configuration in which the player can visually recognize the second movable decoration means through the protective member, the visibility of the second movable decoration means and when the second movable decoration means operates A situation in which the player is injured due to the movement of the second movable decoration means while maintaining the impact given to the player, or a situation in which the second movable decoration means is impulsively destroyed by the player. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of Furthermore, since it is possible to touch the second movable decoration means from the side surface where the protective member is not provided, even if some kind of abnormality occurs in the second movable decoration means, maintenance such as repairs can be carried out by the amusement store staff. etc. can be performed.

According to the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 364 to 371, etc., the player can be sufficiently impressed by operating the movable decoration means provided on the frame constituting the outer shape of the game machine. Even if it is not possible to do so, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the interest felt by the player is reduced.

[39. Movable frame]
By the way, in the gaming machine described with reference to FIGS. It is possible to excite the player by driving the modeled body provided on the frame constituting the outer shape of the game machine at a predetermined timing. However, there is room for improvement in the mode of presentation when a plurality of shaped bodies are provided in the frame.

An embodiment of a game machine capable of sufficiently stimulating the player's interest even if the frame has a plurality of drivable shaped bodies will be described below.

The game machine in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. and a right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and a left ear outer frame movable body 7450, which are frame movable bodies imitating the outside of the ear (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "ear outer frame movable body"). Each of these four frame movable bodies can independently assume a state of being positioned at the standby position and a state of being positioned at the moving position.

372, 373, 374, and 375, a first rendering mode using the outer ear frame movable body and a second rendering mode using the inner ear frame movable body will be described below. . FIGS. 372 and 373 are time charts for the first and second performance modes, and FIGS. 374 and 375 are front views showing the states of the gaming machine at predetermined timings of these performance modes. .

The first effect mode will be described below with reference to FIGS. 372(A) and 374. FIG. 372(A) and 372(B) have a movable inner ear frame movable body and an outer ear frame movable body like the gaming machine described with reference to FIG. It shows a presentation mode that can be applied to the gaming machine.

First, at a predetermined timing before timing t0, the game board side effect display device 1600 starts to change the decorative patterns, and at timing t4, the left and right decorative patterns temporarily stop at the same pattern, and only the central decorative pattern fluctuates. It becomes a reach state (for example, "4↓4").

At timing t8, the drive control by the peripheral control board 1510 causes the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 to move from the standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570 to the upper movement position. to start. At the same time, at timing t8, the game board side effect display device 1600 starts displaying a simulated image simulating the door frame top unit 570, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450.

FIG. 374(A) shows a state in which display of a simulated image simulating the door frame top unit 570 is started at timing t8. The display of the simulated image imitating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 is started immediately after this (after 0.1 seconds or the like).

From timing t8 to timing t10, drive control is performed to move the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 to the movement positions. Simultaneously, a simulated image simulating the manner in which the movable body 7350 of the right ear outer frame moves to the movement position and a simulated image simulating the manner in which the movable body 7450 of the left ear outer frame moves to the movement position are dynamically displayed. be done.

Next, at timing t10, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 complete movement to the movement positions. At the same time, a simulated image simulating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and a simulated image simulating the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are also displayed in a manner simulating a state in which movement to the movement position is completed.

FIG. 374(B) shows a state in which the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 have completed their movement to the movement positions at timing t10. It shows a state in which a simulated image simulating the outer ear frame movable body 7450 is displayed in a manner simulating a state in which movement to the movement position is completed.

From timing t10 to timing t16, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 continue to be positioned at the movement positions. At the same time, the display of the simulated image simulating the state in which the movable body 7350 of the right ear outer frame is located at the moving position and the simulated image simulating the state in which the movable body 7450 of the left ear outer frame is located at the moving position are also continued.

Next, at timing t16, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 start moving from the upward movement position to the standby position accommodated in the door frame top unit 570. FIG. At the same time, a simulated image imitating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and a simulated image imitating the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are dynamically displayed in such a manner that they start to move to the standby position.

From timing t16 to timing t18, drive control is performed to move the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 to the standby position. A simulated image simulating a mode in which the movable body 7350 of the right ear outer frame moves to the standby position and a simulated image simulating a mode in which the movable body 7450 of the left ear outer frame moves to the standby position are dynamically displayed. .

At timing t18, the movement of the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 to the standby position is completed, and they are housed in the door frame top unit 570. FIG. At the same time, the display mode of the simulated image simulating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the simulated image simulating the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 becomes the display mode in which the movement to the standby position is completed. Specifically, after a state in which only the simulated image simulating the door-frame top unit 570 is displayed for a moment, the display of the simulated image simulating the door-frame top unit 570 also ends.

At a predetermined timing after timing t18, the fluctuation of the central decorative pattern that has been fluctuating ends, and the result of the special lottery is a pattern (for example, "444") indicating a big win, or the result of the special lottery. A symbol (for example, "454") indicating that the game is lost is stopped and displayed.

The second effect mode will be described below with reference to FIGS. 372(B) and 375. FIG. First, at a predetermined timing before timing t0, the game board side effect display device 1600 starts to change the decorative patterns, and at timing t4, the left and right decorative patterns temporarily stop at the same pattern, and only the central decorative pattern fluctuates. It becomes a reach state (for example, "4↓4").

At timing t5, the game board side effect display device 1600 starts displaying a simulated image simulating the door frame top unit 570, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400.

FIG. 375(A) shows a state in which display of a simulated image simulating the door frame top unit 570 is started at timing t5. The display of the simulated image simulating the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 is started immediately after this (after 0.1 seconds or the like).

From timing t5 to timing t7, a simulated image simulating a mode in which the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 moves to the movement position and a simulated image simulating a mode in which the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 moves to the movement position. is displayed dynamically.

At timing t7, a simulated image simulating the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and a simulated image simulating the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 are displayed in a manner simulating a state in which movement to the movement position is completed.

FIG. 375(B) simulates the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 in a state where the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 are still housed in the door frame top unit 570 at timing t7. The simulated image and the simulated image simulating the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 are displayed in a manner simulating the state in which the movement to the movement position is completed.

Next, at timing t8, the drive control by the peripheral control board 1510 causes the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 to move upward from the standby position accommodated in the door frame top unit 570. start moving.

Next, at timing t10, the right inner ear frame movable body 7300 and the left inner ear frame movable body 7400 complete movement to the movement positions.

FIG. 375(C) shows a state in which the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 have completed their movement to the movement positions at timing t10. A simulated image simulating the inner ear frame movable body 7400 is displayed in a manner simulating a state in which the movement to the movement position is completed.

From timing t10 to timing t16, the right inner ear frame movable body 7300 and the left inner ear frame movable body 7400 continue to be positioned at the movement position. At the same time, a simulated image simulating a mode in which the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 is positioned at the movement position and a simulated image simulating a mode in which the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 is positioned at the movement position are displayed.

Next, at timing t16, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 start moving from the upward movement position to the standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570. FIG. At the same time, a simulated image simulating the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and a simulated image simulating the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 are dynamically displayed in such a manner that they start to move to the standby position.

From timing t16 to timing t18, drive control is performed to move the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 to the standby position. A simulated image simulating a mode in which the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 moves to the standby position and a simulated image simulating a mode in which the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 moves to the standby position are dynamically displayed. .

At timing t<b>18 , the movement of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 to the standby position is completed, and they are housed in the door frame top unit 570 . At the same time, the display mode of the simulated image simulating the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the simulated image simulating the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 becomes the display mode in which the movement to the standby position is completed. Specifically, after a state in which only the simulated image simulating the door-frame top unit 570 is displayed for a moment, the display of the simulated image simulating the door-frame top unit 570 also ends.

At a predetermined timing after timing t18, the fluctuation of the central decorative pattern that has been fluctuating ends, and the result of the special lottery is a pattern (for example, "444") indicating a big win, or the result of the special lottery. A symbol (for example, "454") indicating that the game is lost is stopped and displayed.

The right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 driven and controlled in the second rendering mode are the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7350 driven and controlled in the first rendering mode. Compared to the body 7450, the front view area in the state of moving to the movement position is smaller. Therefore, in the second presentation mode, after a predetermined time has passed after starting to display a simulated image simulating the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and a simulated image simulating the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, the right ear inner side By performing drive control of the frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, it is configured to compensate for the sense of volume as a performance.

372(A) and 372(B) can be replaced by a movable ear inner frame movable body like the gaming machine described with reference to FIG. Although an example of application to a gaming machine having the outer ear frame movable body has been shown, it may also be applied to the gaming machine described with reference to FIG. In this case, since the inner ear frame movable body moves from the upper waiting position to the lower moving position, the simulated image of the inner ear frame movable body is also displayed from above within the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. It becomes a display mode that moves downward. Also, it may be applied to the gaming machine described with reference to FIGS. In this case, since the inner ear frame movable body and the outer ear frame movable body move from the lower standby position to the upper moving position, the simulated images of the inner ear frame movable body and the outer ear frame movable body are also displayed in the game. In the display area of the board-side effect display device 1600, the display mode is such that it moves from the bottom to the top. Alternatively, the inner ear frame movable body and the outer ear frame movable body are respectively moved from the upper standby position to the lower moving position, and the simulated images of the inner ear frame movable body and the outer ear frame movable body are also displayed on the game board side. An effect mode may be adopted in which the display mode moves from top to bottom within the display area of the effect display device 1600 .

The first effect mode will be described below with reference to FIG. 373(A). 373(A) and 373(B) can be applied to a game machine having a rotatable inner ear frame movable body and an outer ear frame movable body as shown in FIGS. 306, 309, etc. It shows a directing mode.

First, at a predetermined timing before timing t0, the game board side effect display device 1600 starts to change the decorative patterns, and at timing t4, the left and right decorative patterns temporarily stop at the same pattern, and only the central decorative pattern fluctuates. It becomes a reach state (for example, "4↓4").

At timing t8, due to drive control by the peripheral control board 1510, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 change from the standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570 to the rotated state. . At the same time, at timing t8, the game board side effect display device 1600 starts displaying a simulated image simulating the door frame top unit 570, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450. The right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 in a dynamic mode imitating a rotated state.

From timing t8 to timing t18, the rotation states of the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450, the door frame top unit 570 in the game board side effect display device 1600, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left The display of the simulated image simulating the outer ear frame movable body 7450 is continued.

At timing t18, the state of the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 changes from the rotating state to the stopped state housed in the door frame top unit 570. FIG. At the same time, the display of the simulated images simulating the door frame top unit 570, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 ends.

At a predetermined timing after the timing t24, the variation of the decorative pattern in the center during variation is completed, and the result of the special lottery is a symbol (for example, "444") indicating that the result is a big hit, or the result of the special lottery. A symbol (for example, "454") indicating that the game is lost is stopped and displayed.

The second effect mode will be described below with reference to FIG. 373(B). First, at a predetermined timing before timing t0, the game board side effect display device 1600 starts to change the decorative patterns, and at timing t4, the left and right decorative patterns temporarily stop at the same pattern, and only the central decorative pattern fluctuates. It becomes a reach state (for example, "4↓4").

At timing t5, the game board side effect display device 1600 starts displaying a simulated image simulating the door frame top unit 570, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400. The right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 are displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 in a dynamic mode imitating a rotated state.

At timing t8, the drive control by the peripheral control board 1510 changes the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 from the standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570 to the rotated state. .

From timing t8 to timing t18, the rotation states of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, the door frame top unit 570 in the game board side effect display device 1600, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, and the left ear inner frame movable body 7300 are changed. The display of the simulated image simulating the ear inner frame movable body 7400 is continued.

At timing t<b>18 , the state of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 changes from the rotating state to the stopped state accommodated in the door frame top unit 570 . At the same time, the display of the simulated images simulating the door frame top unit 570, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 ends.

At a predetermined timing after the timing t24, the variation of the decorative pattern in the center during variation is completed, and the result of the special lottery is a symbol (for example, "444") indicating that the result is a big hit, or the result of the special lottery. A symbol (for example, "454") indicating that the game is lost is stopped and displayed.

The right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 driven and controlled in the second rendering mode are the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7350 driven and controlled in the first rendering mode. Compared to the body 7450, the maximum area visible in front view in the rotated state is smaller. Therefore, in the second presentation mode, after a predetermined time has passed after starting to display a simulated image simulating the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and a simulated image simulating the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, the right ear inner side By performing drive control of the frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body, it is configured to compensate for the sense of volume as an effect.

In this way, the first molded body provided on the frame (the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450) and the second molded body provided on the frame (the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and left ear inner frame movable body 7400). It is configured to start driving the second modeled body at the timing when time has passed. As a result, even when a plurality of shaped bodies are provided in the frame, it is possible to visually increase the sense of volume in the presentation using the second shaped body. In addition, by displaying a simulated image simulating the second modeled body in advance on the predetermined display means, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the drive control of the second modeled body. .

In addition, among the plurality of shaped bodies (first shaped body and second shaped body) provided in the game machine, the size of the shaped body itself and the amount of visual change when the shaped body is driven and controlled are relative. In order to control the drive of the second modeled body, which is relatively small and is not conspicuous to be driven and controlled, at the timing when a predetermined time has elapsed after the start of display of the simulated image simulating the second modeled body, the second It is configured to start driving the modeled body. As a result, it is possible to visually increase the sense of volume in the production using the second shaped body, which has a small visual change in size and is less noticeable when being driven and controlled. Become. In addition, by displaying a simulated image simulating the second modeled body in advance on the predetermined display means, it is possible to drive the second modeled body, which is relatively small in size and so on and which is likely to be overlooked for drive control. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player overlooks the control.

In addition, at the timing corresponding to the driving of the first modeled bodies (right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and left ear outer frame movable body 7450), a simulated image simulating the first shaped body is displayed on a predetermined display means (game board). By displaying on the side effect display device 1600), it is possible to show the player that the first molded body is being driven and controlled.

Modifications of the first rendering mode and the second rendering mode described with reference to FIG. 372 will be described below with reference to FIG.

FIG. 376(A) shows a modification of the display mode of the simulated image of the first molded object in the first rendering mode described with reference to FIG. 372(A). In Modified Example 1, the simulated image of the first modeled object is displayed from the first state to the second state from timing t7 to timing t9. Further, in Modified Example 2, the display of changing the simulated image of the first modeled object from the first state to the second state is performed from timing t9 to timing t11. Further, in Modified Example 3, after the display of changing the simulated image of the first modeled body from the first state to the second state is performed from timing t7 to timing t9, the display simulating the second state is performed. ends at timing t11, and from timing t11 to timing t13, the simulated image of the first modeled object is displayed to change from the first state to the second state.

In this manner, the timing at which the display of the simulated image simulating the first modeled object is started may be somewhat delayed with respect to the timing at which the drive control of the first modeled object is started. Alternatively, the timing for ending the display of the simulated image simulating the first modeled object may be the timing before the timing for the first modeled object to enter the first state. Similar effects can be obtained even when such a configuration is employed.

FIG. 376(B) shows a modification of the display mode of the simulated image of the second modeled object in the second rendering mode described with reference to FIG. 372(B). In Modification 1, the simulated image of the second modeled object in the second state is displayed from timing t5 to timing t8. Further, in Modification 2, the simulated image of the second modeled body in the second state is displayed from timing t5 to timing t9.

In this way, as the simulated image of the second modeled body, an image simulating the second state in which the second modeled body is drive-controlled is suddenly displayed, and the drive control of the second modeled body is performed. The display may be configured to continue until the start timing. Similar effects can be obtained even when such a configuration is adopted.

Modified examples of the first rendering mode and the second rendering mode described with reference to FIG. 373 will be described below with reference to FIG.

FIG. 377(A) shows a modification of the display mode of the simulated image of the first molded body in the first rendering mode described with reference to FIG. 373(A). In Modification 1, the simulated image of the first modeled object is displayed from timing t7 to timing t18. Further, in Modification 2, the simulated image of the first modeled object is displayed from timing t9 to timing t18. Further, in Modification 3, the simulated image of the first modeled object is displayed from timing t7 to timing t13.

In this manner, the timing at which the display of the simulated image simulating the first modeled object is started may be somewhat delayed with respect to the timing at which the drive control of the first modeled object is started. Alternatively, the timing for ending the display of the simulated image simulating the first modeled object may be the timing before the timing for the first modeled object to enter the first state. Similar effects can be obtained even when such a configuration is employed.

FIG. 377(B) shows a modification of the display mode of the simulated image of the second modeled object in the second rendering mode described with reference to FIG. 373(B). In Modification 1, the simulated image of the second modeled object in the second state is displayed from timing t5 to timing t8. Further, in Modification 2, the simulated image of the second modeled body in the second state is displayed from timing t5 to timing t9.

In this manner, an image simulating the second state in which the second modeled body is driven and controlled is displayed as the simulated image of the second modeled body, and the drive control of the second modeled body is started. It may be configured to continue to display until the timing to be displayed. Similar effects can be obtained even when such a configuration is adopted.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 372(A) and 373(A), a simulated image simulating the first shaped body is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 in the first effect mode. However, it may be configured so that the simulated image simulating the first modeled object is not displayed in the first presentation mode.

By adopting such a configuration, it becomes possible to secure a display area in the predetermined display means (game board side effect display device 1600). It is possible to keep displaying.

Alternatively, instead of displaying a simulated image simulating the first modeled object in the first rendering mode, a display may be provided to indicate that the first modeled object is being driven and controlled. For example, the game board-side effect display device 1600 may be configured to display a message "My ears may have popped out?!" or a message "Look up?!".

With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from noticing that the first modeled body is being driven and controlled.

Compared to the first modeled object and the second modeled object, the second modeled object has a smaller area in a front view in a drive-controlled state and is less conspicuous. Before the second modeled body is driven and controlled, a simulated image simulating the second modeled body is displayed. It may be configured so as to display a simulated image imitating the modeled body.

If the amount of movement of the second shaped body in the vertical direction or the horizontal direction when the drive is controlled is shorter than that of the first shaped body, the second shaped body is less noticeable. For example, in the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 374 and 375, the first modeled body (right ear outer frame movable body 7350, left ear outer frame movable body 7450) is driven and controlled to move upward from the standby position. 10 cm, when the second shaped body (right ear inner frame movable body 7300, left ear inner frame movable body 7400) is controlled to move upward by 5 cm from the standby position, the drive control of the second shaped body is It is less conspicuous than the first modeled body. In such a case, by displaying a simulated image of the second modeled object, it is possible to secure a sense of volume as a presentation.

In this way, when the moving distance of the second shaped body is smaller than the moving distance of the first shaped body when the drive is controlled, prior to the drive control of the second shaped body, the second shaped body is moved. By displaying the simulated image of , it is possible to secure a sense of volume as a production.

Alternatively, if the movement speed of the second modeled body is slower when the first modeled body and the second modeled body are driven and controlled, the first modeled body and the second modeled body that are rotatable are driven. In the case where the second modeled body has a slower angular velocity when rotated by control, or in the case where the time during which the first modeled body and the second modeled body are driven and controlled is shorter for the second modeled body, etc. , a simulated image of the second shaped body may be displayed prior to the drive control of the second shaped body. In this case as well, it is possible to secure a sense of volume as the effect in the effect using the second modeled body.

A simulated image simulating the second shaped body is dynamically displayed a plurality of times, and the number of times of the dynamic display is used to indicate to the player the degree of expectation that the special lottery result will be a big win. good too. For example, in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 372(B), in addition to the dynamic display performed from timing t5 to timing t7, it is possible to execute a presentation mode in which similar dynamic display is performed from timing t3 to timing t5. can be configured to Furthermore, from the timing t1 to the timing t3, a similar dynamic display may be performed. Further, in addition to the dynamic display performed from timing t5 to timing t7, it may be possible to execute a performance mode in which similar dynamic display is performed from timing t7 to timing t9. Further, from the timing t9 to the timing t11, a similar dynamic display effect mode may be configured to be executable.

In this way, the dynamic display of the simulated image simulating the second modeled body is repeatedly executed before or after the drive control of the second modeled body, and a state advantageous to the player occurs depending on the number of repetitions. By adopting a configuration that suggests the degree of expectation to be made, it is possible to further increase the sense of volume as a performance of the second modeled body, and in addition, the movement of the second modeled body provided in the frame. Either the act of directly viewing the object itself, or the act of viewing a simulated image simulating the second molded object displayed on a predetermined display means and knowing the degree of expectation that a state advantageous to the player will occur. It is possible to provide the player with the interest of enjoying the game.

In addition, a plurality of simulated images with different display modes are prepared in advance as simulated images simulating the second molded body, and the degree of expectation that the special lottery result will be a big win is given to the player according to the type of displayed simulated image. It may be configured as shown. For example, when a large simulated image simulating the second modeled object and a small simulated image simulating the second modeled object are prepared in advance, and a large simulated image simulating the second modeled object is displayed. It may be configured so that the degree of expectation that the special lottery result will be a big win is higher in the case of . Alternatively, a white simulated image imitating the second molded object and a red simulated image imitating the second molded object are prepared in advance, and the red simulated image imitating the second molded object is displayed. It may be configured so that the degree of expectation that the special lottery result will be a big win is higher in the case of winning.

In this way, it is possible to execute a plurality of different display modes as the dynamic display mode of the simulated image simulating the second modeled body, suggesting the degree of expectation that a state advantageous to the player will occur depending on the type of displayed simulated image. By adopting such a configuration, the variation of the display mode of the simulated image imitating the second modeled object increases, and in addition to being able to further increase the sense of volume as a production, the frame is provided with The action of directly viewing the movement of the second shaped body itself that is displayed, and the expectation that a situation that is advantageous to the player will occur by viewing the simulated image imitating the second shaped body displayed on the predetermined display means. It is possible to provide the player with the interest of which action of the action of knowing the degree to enjoy.

It should be noted that when suggesting the degree of expectation that a state advantageous to the player will occur by means of the display mode of the simulated image simulating the second modeled body, the second modeled body is driven and controlled. Although the motions of the two shaped bodies themselves are in the same motion mode, the motion mode of the second shaped body is made different, and the degree of expectation that a state advantageous to the player will occur depending on the motion mode of the second shaped body. It is good also as a structure which suggests.

In the second production mode, after displaying a simulated image simulating the second modeled object, the second modeled object is driven and controlled. good. For example, from timing t5 to timing t18 in the second rendering mode described with reference to FIGS. It should be configured as follows.

In this way, the third rendering mode without displaying the simulated image of the second molded body can be executed in addition to the first rendering mode and the second rendering mode. It is possible to provide the player with an unexpected and tense performance mode in which the second shaped body, which is relatively inconspicuous compared to the shaped body, is being driven without realizing it.

When driving the first molded body, an evocation sound indicating that the first molded body is driven may be output. For example, in the first rendering mode described with reference to FIGS. may be configured to output an evocative sound indicating that the modeled body is driven. Alternatively, the evocation sound indicating that the first shaped body is driven is output from timing t6 to timing t10 so that the evoked sound is output even after the driving of the first shaped body is controlled. Good to configure. Alternatively, an evocative sound indicating that the first modeled object is being driven is output from timing t8 to timing t12 so that the evocative sound is output after drive control of the first modeled object is started. It should be configured as follows.

By adopting such a configuration, by driving the first shaped body, which has a relatively large size and movement amount, among the plurality of shaped bodies (the first shaped body and the second shaped body), the player can move. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of such a situation as Note that when the second modeled body is driven, a simulated image simulating the second modeled body is displayed, so that such an evocative sound is not output.

372(A), FIG. 373(A), etc., an example of outputting an evocation sound during a predetermined period (timing t6 to timing t8 or timing t6 to timing t10) has been shown. 328, 329 and the like may be employed.

In order to drive the second modeled body, during either the display period of the simulated image simulating the second modeled body or the period during the drive control of the second modeled body, or both, during the change, as BGM It may be configured so as to suppress the volume of the output fluctuating effect sound. For example, in the second production mode described with reference to FIGS. 372(A) and 372(B), until timing t5, the fluctuating production sound is output in a normal mode, and a simulation simulating the second molded object is performed. In the period from timing t5 to timing t8, which is the period from when the image is displayed until the drive control of the second modeling object is started, the fluctuating effect sound is output in a mode that is more suppressed than in the normal mode. Good to configure. Alternatively, until timing t5, the fluctuating effect sound is output in a normal manner, and the simulated image simulating the second modeled object is displayed until the drive control of the second modeled object is terminated. In the period from timing t5 to timing t18, the fluctuating effect sound may be output in a more restrained manner than in a normal manner. In addition, in the suppression state, it is preferable to set the volume to half or less of that in the normal state.

By changing the output state of the fluctuating effect sound from the normal state to the suppressed state in accordance with the display of the simulated image simulating the second modeled object in this way, a plurality of modeled objects (the first modeled object and the second modeled object) are displayed. The player can concentrate on the fact that the second shaped body, which is relatively smaller in size, is driven or is being driven.

According to the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 372 to 375 and the like, by providing a plurality of shaped bodies in the frame, the size of each shaped body and the movable range when each shaped body is driven can be changed. Even in the case of restriction, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the interest felt by the player is reduced when each modeled body is driven alone.

[40. Movable frame]
By the way, in the game machine described with reference to FIGS. Thus, it is possible to make the player feel interesting. However, if the player does not notice the movement of the movable decoration means, the player may be injured by contacting the movable decoration means with his or her head or fingers. there were.

An embodiment of a gaming machine capable of suppressing the occurrence of a situation in which a player is injured by the movable decoration means will be described below.

A first effect mode and a second effect mode applicable to the gaming machine described with reference to FIG. 371 will be described below with reference to FIGS. 378(A) and 378(B). Note that the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 in this embodiment is provided inside the root vegetable frame movable body cover unit 7850 as described with reference to FIGS. is difficult to construct.

A first presentation mode using the right ear frame movable body 7100, the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 will be described below with reference to FIG. 378(A).

In the first effect mode, first, the game board side effect display device 1600 starts to change the decorative symbols at a predetermined timing before the timing t0. It becomes a ready-to-win state (for example, "4↓4") in which only the decorative pattern in the center changes.

Next, at timing t5, the output of an evocative sound for notifying that the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 will operate is started. Next, at timing t7, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are moved from the standby position accommodated in the door frame top unit 570 to the upward movement position by drive control by the peripheral control board 1510. to start.

From timing t7 to timing t9, drive control is performed to move the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 to the movement positions. At this time, the wake-up sound is also continuously output.

At timing t9, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 complete movement to the movement positions. At the same time, the output of the evocative sound that has been continuously output since timing t5 ends.

Next, at timing t21, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 starts to move from the standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570 to the movement position moved downward from the door frame top unit 570. . At timing t22, the movement of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 to the movement position is completed. From timing t22 to timing t25, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is positioned in a stationary state at a position overlapping substantially the center of the game board side effect display device 1600 in a front view.

Next, at timing t25, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 starts to change from the moving position moved downward from the door frame top unit 570 to the standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570. . At timing t26, the movement of root vegetable frame movable body 7800 to the standby position is completed.

Next, at timing t28, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 start moving from the upward movement position to the standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570. FIG.

From timing t28 to timing t30, drive control is performed to move the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 to the standby position. At timing t30, the movement of right ear frame movable body 7100 and left ear frame movable body 7200 to the standby position is completed.

At a predetermined timing after timing t30, the fluctuation of the central decorative pattern that has been fluctuating ends, and the result of the special lottery is either a pattern (for example, "444") indicating a big hit, or the result of the special lottery. A symbol (for example, "454") indicating that the game is lost is stopped and displayed.

A second presentation mode using the right ear frame movable body 7100, the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 will be described below with reference to FIG. 378(B). Note that, unlike the first effect mode, no evoking sound is output in the second effect mode. Also, the right ear frame movable body 7100, the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 are configured to start their operations at the same time.

In the second effect mode, first, at a predetermined timing before timing t0, the variation of decorative patterns is started in the game board side effect display device 1600, and at timing t4, the left and right decorative patterns are temporarily stopped at the same pattern, It becomes a ready-to-win state (for example, "4↓4") in which only the decorative pattern in the center changes.

Next, at timing t21, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 starts to move from the standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570 to the movement position moved downward from the door frame top unit 570. . At the same time, due to drive control by the peripheral control board 1510, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 start to move from the standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570 to the upper moving position.

At timing t22, the movement of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 to the movement position is completed. From timing t22 to timing t25, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is positioned in a stationary state at a position overlapping substantially the center of the game board side effect display device 1600 in a front view. On the other hand, at timing t23, the movement of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 to the movement positions is completed.

Next, at timing t25, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 starts to change from the moving position moved downward from the door frame top unit 570 to the standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570. . At timing t26, the movement of root vegetable frame movable body 7800 to the standby position is completed.

Next, at timing t28, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 start moving from the upward movement position to the standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570. FIG.

From timing t28 to timing t30, drive control is performed to move the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 to the standby position. At timing t30, the movement of right ear frame movable body 7100 and left ear frame movable body 7200 to the standby position is completed.

At a predetermined timing after timing t30, the fluctuation of the central decorative pattern that has been fluctuating ends, and the result of the special lottery is either a pattern (for example, "444") indicating a big hit, or the result of the special lottery. A symbol (for example, "454") indicating that the game is lost is stopped and displayed.

Root vegetable frame movable body 7800 and root vegetable frame movable body cover unit 7850 possessed by the game machine explained with reference to FIG. 379(A) and 379(B), a description will be given of a first effect mode and a second effect mode that can be executed in the game machine having the movable frame body 7200. do.

A first rendering mode using the right ear frame movable body 7100, the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 will be described below with reference to FIG. 379(A).

In the first effect mode, first, the game board side effect display device 1600 starts to change the decorative symbols at a predetermined timing before the timing t0. It becomes a ready-to-win state (for example, "4↓4") in which only the decorative pattern in the center changes.

Next, at timing t5, output of an evocative sound for notifying that the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 will move thereafter starts. Next, at timing t7, due to drive control by the peripheral control board 1510, the state of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 is changed from the standby state housed in the door frame top unit 570 to the rotating state. Let

At timing t9, the output of the evocative sound that has been continuously output since timing t5 ends.

Next, at timing t21, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 starts to move from the standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570 to the movement position moved downward from the door frame top unit 570. . At timing t22, the movement of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 to the movement position is completed. From timing t22 to timing t25, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is positioned in a stationary state at a position overlapping substantially the center of the game board side effect display device 1600 in a front view.

Next, at timing t25, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 starts to change from the moving position moved downward from the door frame top unit 570 to the standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570. . At timing t26, the movement of root vegetable frame movable body 7800 to the standby position is completed. Next, at timing t30, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 change from the rotating state to the state in which the rotation is stopped and stored in the standby position.

At a predetermined timing after timing t30, the fluctuation of the central decorative pattern that has been fluctuating ends, and the result of the special lottery is either a pattern (for example, "444") indicating a big hit, or the result of the special lottery. A symbol (for example, "454") indicating that the game is lost is stopped and displayed.

A second presentation mode using the right ear frame movable body 7100, the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 will be described below with reference to FIG. 379(B). Note that, unlike the first effect mode, no evoking sound is output in the second effect mode. Also, the right ear frame movable body 7100, the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 are configured to start their operations at the same time.

In the second effect mode, first, at a predetermined timing before timing t0, the variation of decorative patterns is started in the game board side effect display device 1600, and at timing t4, the left and right decorative patterns are temporarily stopped at the same pattern, It becomes a ready-to-win state (for example, "4↓4") in which only the decorative pattern in the center changes.

Next, at timing t21, due to drive control by the peripheral control board 1510, the state of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 is changed from the standby state housed in the door frame top unit 570 to the rotating state. Let

At the timing t21, at the same time, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 starts to move from the standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570 to the movement position moved downward from the door frame top unit 570. . At timing t22, the movement of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 to the movement position is completed. From timing t22 to timing t25, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is positioned in a stationary state at a position overlapping substantially the center of the game board side effect display device 1600 in a front view.

Next, at timing t25, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 starts to change from the moving position moved downward from the door frame top unit 570 to the standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570. . At timing t26, the movement of root vegetable frame movable body 7800 to the standby position is completed. Next, at timing t30, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 change from the rotating state to the state in which the rotation is stopped and stored in the standby position.

At a predetermined timing after timing t30, the fluctuation of the central decorative pattern that has been fluctuating ends, and the result of the special lottery is either a pattern (for example, "444") indicating a big hit, or the result of the special lottery. A symbol (for example, "454") indicating that the game is lost is stopped and displayed.

In the first production mode and the second production mode described with reference to FIGS. 378(A) and 378(B), or in the first presentation mode described with reference to FIGS. The operation mode of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is common in the presentation mode and the second presentation mode. On the other hand, in the first presentation mode, after the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 operate with the output of an evocative sound, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 operates after a predetermined period of time. On the other hand, in the second presentation mode, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 start operating at the same timing as the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 without outputting the evocative sound. It is configured.

Thus, when the first movable decorative means (the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200) provided on the frame operates independently, the evocative sound is output in advance, so that the game is played. Since the player pays attention to the first movable decoration means, the player's careless action (for example, standing up) can prevent the player from contacting the first movable decoration means and being injured. It is possible to suppress the occurrence.

On the other hand, when the second movable decoration means (root vegetable frame movable body 7800) is operated together with the first movable decoration means, it is configured not to output an evocative sound. This is because the second movable decoration means moves to a position overlapping predetermined display means (game board side effect display device 1600) in a front view, so that the player's consciousness is directed to the vicinity of the predetermined display means. This is because the player is less likely to make careless movements, and the player is less likely to be injured even if the first movable decoration means provided on the frame is in motion.

378(A), 379(A), etc., an example of outputting an evocation sound during a predetermined period (timing t5 to timing t9) has been shown. 329 or the like may be configured to employ the configuration relating to the special alert sound described above.

FIG. 380 shows a modification of the presentation mode described with reference to FIG. Also, FIG. 381 shows a modification of the presentation mode described with reference to FIG. In these modifications, in the second presentation mode, at timing t22 when the movement of the movable root frame frame body 7800 to the movement position is completed, the movable right ear frame body 7100 and the movable left ear frame body 7200 move to the movement position. It is configured to initiate a move operation.

In this way, at the timing when the second movable decoration means (root vegetable frame movable body 7800) starts to operate and moves to a position overlapping the predetermined display means (game board side effect display device 1600) in front view, the second 1 (the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200) starts to move, the player's consciousness is directed toward the vicinity of the predetermined display means, and the player is prevented from being careless. Movement becomes difficult, and even if the first movable decoration means provided on the frame moves, the player is less likely to get injured.

It may be configured such that the degree of expectation that the result of the special lottery will result in a big hit is higher in the second effect mode than in the first effect mode. Also, the frequency with which the first effect mode is executed may be higher than the frequency with which the second effect mode is executed. For example, out of 100 special lotteries, the first effect mode is performed about 5 times (performed with a probability of 5%), and the second effect mode is performed about once (performed with a probability of 1%). may be configured to be performed).

In this way, in the first production mode with a high execution frequency and a low expectation of a big hit, by outputting an evocative sound, the first movable decoration means (the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear The action of the frame movable body 7200) is called out to the player. In particular, since the player's level of expectation is low and the player's attention to the first movable decoration means is in a scattered state, such arousal is effective.

On the other hand, in the second performance mode in which the frequency of execution is low and the expectation of a big hit is high, no evocative sound is output, and the second movable decoration means (root vegetable frame movable body 7800) operates together with the first movable decoration means. I am letting In this case, since the expectation of a big hit is high, the player's line of sight is concentrated in the vicinity of the predetermined display means (game board side effect display device 1600) to which the second movable decoration means moves, and careless actions ( etc.), there is no need to output an evocative sound when operating the first movable decoration means.

On the other hand, since the clerk of the amusement arcade can visually recognize the operation of the first movable decoration means from a distance, there is a high possibility that a state advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot state) will occur. can be recognized, and it is possible to provide the player with a predetermined service (exchange of dollar boxes, processing of stopping in fixed-rate gaming machines, etc.).

In addition, if an evocative sound is output in a state of high expectation, it is conceivable that the player may become discouraged, but by not outputting the evocative sound, the occurrence of such a situation is suppressed. It becomes possible to

It is preferable to output an evocative sound at the beginning or middle of the variation of the decorative pattern, but not to output the evocative sound at the middle of the variation of the decorative pattern.

By adopting such a configuration, unnecessary sound is not output at the final stage of variation in which the variation result of the decorative pattern is displayed, and the player can concentrate on the state in which the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed on the predetermined display means. .

In the first effect mode, when outputting the evocative sound, the fluctuating effect sound may be suppressed. For example, in the period from timing t5 to timing t9 and the period from timing t4 to timing t10 in the first production mode shown in FIGS. should be

On the other hand, in the second presentation mode, the fluctuating presentation sound is suppressed until the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 moves downward, and the suppression of the fluctuating presentation sound is released at the same time when the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 moves downward. You may For example, in the period from timing t18 to timing t21 and the period from timing t18 to timing t26 in the second production mode shown in FIGS. should be

With this configuration, in the first effect mode, the evocative sound is output while the fluctuating effect sound is suppressed. will be effectively notified to

Further, in the second effect mode, the movement of the second movable decoration means is suppressed by suppressing the fluctuating effect sound for a predetermined period before the movement of the second movable decoration means is started. It becomes easier to convey to the player.

378, 379, etc., an example of suppressing the fluctuating effect sound in a predetermined period has been shown. It may be configured to employ a configuration relating to a variable effect sound or a special evocation sound.

In the first effect mode, the action of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 may be displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 . For example, as in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. The display of moving the simulated image upward may be displayed from timing t5 to timing t9 in the first effect mode described with reference to FIGS.

On the other hand, in the second effect mode, the game board side effect display device 1600 may not display such a display when the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are operated.

By performing such a display, it is possible to convey to the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the first movable decoration means will operate in the first presentation mode. On the other hand, in the second rendering mode, by not performing such a display when the first movable decoration means operates, excessive rendering around the predetermined display means is suppressed. can be done. In addition to the simulated image imitating the first movable decoration means, another image (for example, an image of an upward arrow) is displayed on the predetermined display means in a manner suggesting the position where the first movable decoration means is provided. may be configured to be displayed in

In the first production mode and the second production mode, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 that has moved to the movement position is moved to the standby position based on the player's operation of a predetermined operation unit (push button, lever, etc.). It may be configured to allow For example, in the first production mode and the second production mode, when the player operates the predetermined operation unit at timing t23, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is moved from the moving position from timing t23 to timing t24. It should be moved to the standby position.

In this way, it may be configured such that the time during which the second movable decoration means (root vegetable frame movable body 7800) is positioned at the movement position can be changed according to the operation by the player. As a result, it becomes difficult for other players to notice that the second movable decoration means is operating, and the degree of expectation from other players that a state advantageous to the player (big hit state) will occur is high. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a person is subjected to harassment or the like based on distortion.

In the modified examples of the first production mode and the second production mode in FIGS. 380 and 381, when there is an operation to the predetermined operation unit by the player, compared to the case where there is no operation to the predetermined operation unit The first movable decoration means may be configured to be driven early. 380 and 381, the second movable decoration means, which starts to operate before the first movable decoration means, is repeatedly viewed by the player who plays the game repeatedly. Therefore, the operation of the first movable decoration means becomes impatient. Therefore, the operation of the second movable decoration means is not always performed for a certain period of time before the first movable decoration means is operated, but the operation of the second movable decoration means is started by operating the button. By making it possible to drive the first movable decoration means at an appropriate timing after the display, the first movable decoration means can be quickly operated for the player who has watched the same performance many times. It is possible to give an opportunity to let the child play, and it is possible to suppress the decline in interest. It should be noted that the process of returning the second movable decoration means to the standby position may be started by such a predetermined operation, or even if the predetermined operation is performed, the second movable decoration means may be returned at a predetermined timing. It may be configured to start the process of returning the second movable decoration means to the standby position.

According to the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 378, 379, etc., an effect based on the lottery result can be performed without outputting an evocative sound when the first movable decoration means is operated. It is possible to direct the player's attention to the vicinity of the predetermined display means to be performed, and to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player is injured by the first movable decoration means.

In the above-described embodiment, by executing a predetermined effect mode out of a plurality of different effect modes, the left and right ear frame movable bodies indicate that there is a high degree of expectation that a big win, which is an advantageous state for the player, will occur. However, it is configured to notify the player of the degree of expectation for the occurrence of game content other than the degree of expectation for the occurrence of a big win. may

For example, it is possible to notify the content of the profit to be given to the player during the big win, even though the big win is confirmed. As for the content of profit, for example, the type of profit may be notified, or the amount of profit may be notified.

Alternatively, it may be configured to inform the content of the profit to be given to the player after the big hit. For example, it may be configured to notify the type of profit to be given to the player after the big win, or to notify the amount of profit to be given to the player after the big win. .

In this way, not only the degree of expectation for the occurrence of a state advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot state), but also the amount of profit given to the player in a state advantageous to the player (for example, Expectations regarding the number of balls to be played and the number of openings of the big winning mouth, etc., and new favorable conditions for the player that may occur after the end of the favorable conditions for the player (for example, variable conditions and electric chew support state), the type of benefit given to the player in the game that newly occurs after the end of the state advantageous to the player (for example, the variable state and the electric chew support state) As an example, even if it is configured to notify the number of fluctuations in which the probability variable state continues and the number of fluctuations in which the electric chew support continues), it is possible to achieve the same effects as the above-described embodiments.

The right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 show that the degree of expectation that a big hit, which is an advantageous state for the player, will occur is high by executing a predetermined performance mode out of a plurality of different performance modes. , the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, the left ear outer frame movable body 7450, etc. are operated to notify the player. , the degree of expectation for the occurrence of a big win may include the fact that the big win is determined (the occurrence of a 100% big win). For example, in each of the above-described embodiments, a 50% jackpot is generated when the first effect mode is executed, and a 100% jackpot is generated when the second effect mode is executed. may be configured to occur.

In the above-described embodiments, the right ear frame movable body 7100, the left ear frame movable body 7200, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body When a simulated image simulating the body 7450 or the like is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, a simulated image simulating the door frame top unit 570 is also displayed at the same time. A simulated image may be displayed in advance for about several seconds (for example, two seconds), and then the display of the simulated image simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100 to the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 may be started. . For example, in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 366(A), a simulated image simulating the door frame top unit 570 may be displayed from timing t5 to timing t7.

In addition, the simulated image imitating the door frame top unit 570 is fixedly displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 without moving, and the right ear frame is movable relative to the simulated image imitating the door frame top unit 570. A simulated image imitating a body 7100, a left ear frame movable body 7200, a right ear inner frame movable body 7300, a right ear outer frame movable body 7350, a left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and a left ear outer frame movable body 7450 moves upward. It should be configured to

In this way, operable movable decorative means and drivable modeling bodies (right ear frame movable body 7100, left ear frame movable body 7200, right ear inner frame movable body 7300, right ear outer frame movable body 7350, left ear inner frame A unit (door frame top unit 570) that displays a simulated image simulating the frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450) and stores and holds operable movable decorative means and drivable molded bodies. By displaying a simulated image simulating , the player can easily understand the operation mode and drive mode of the operable movable decoration means and the drivable modeled body.

In particular, a simulated image simulating a unit (door frame top unit 570) for housing and holding operable movable decorative means and drivable molded objects is displayed on a predetermined display means (game board side effect display device 1600). By fixedly displaying in a predetermined area, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand the operation mode and drive mode of the operable movable decorative means and the drivable modeled body.

Also, a unit that houses and holds operable movable decorative means and drivable shaped bodies at a timing prior to the timing of displaying a simulated image simulating the operable movable decorative means and drivable shaped bodies. By displaying a simulated image simulating (the door frame top unit 570), the player's sense of expectation for the operation of the movable decoration means and the driving of the modeled body increases. In addition, since the player can visually recognize the operation of the movable decoration means and the driving of the shaped body from the timing when the movement of the movable decoration means and the driving of the shaped body are started, the player can control the operation of the movable decoration means and the driving of the shaped body. can be enjoyed for a longer period of time.

In each of the embodiments described above, the simulated image simulating the door frame top unit 570 may be configured not to be displayed.

Note that instead of the operation of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800, the rabbit character 6000 described with reference to FIG. It may be configured to Also in this case, it is possible to obtain the same effects as those of the above-described effect modes.

A right ear frame movable body 7100, a left ear frame movable body 7200, a right ear inner frame movable body 7300, a right ear outer frame movable body 7350, a left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and a left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are door frame top units. An example of operation between the state of being housed in the door frame top unit 570 and the state of protruding upward from the door frame top unit 570 has been shown, but it is not limited to such a state change, and other state changes may also be possible. . For example, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 may move from a state in which half of them protrude from the door frame top unit 570 to a state in which they fully protrude from the door frame top unit 570 .

In this way, the first movable decorative means is moved from the first position (the state housed in the door frame top unit 570, the state half protruding from the door frame top unit 570) to the second position. Even if it is configured to operate between the positioned second state (the state where the door frame top unit 570 is completely protruded), the above-described effects can be obtained.

366, 378, etc., the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is accommodated in the door frame top unit 570, and a front view of substantially the center of the game board side effect display device 1600. Although an example has been shown in which the operation is performed between the states located at positions overlapping with , the change in the state is not limited to such a change, and other state changes may also be possible. For example, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 overlaps substantially the lower part of the game board side effect display device 1600 in a front view, and then overlaps substantially the center of the game board side effect display device 1600 in a front view. It may be configured to move to the state of being in position.

In this way, in the first state where the second movable decoration means is located at the first position (the state housed in the door frame top unit 570), it overlaps substantially the lower part of the game board side effect display device 1600 in a front view. position) to the second position (position overlapping substantially the center of the game board side effect display device 1600 in a front view). Even when it does, it becomes possible to have the effect mentioned above.

As an effect display performed in the display area of the effect display device, there is known a look-ahead effect display that is performed over a plurality of times of variable display of decorative symbols in response to the occurrence of a specific hold. The variable display of the decorative symbols corresponding to the specific holding causing the look-ahead performance display is stopped in a manner in which the decorative symbols indicate the occurrence of a big win, compared with the variable display of the decorative symbols in which the look-ahead performance display is not performed. The probability of being displayed is set high. Therefore, when the look-ahead effect display is executed, the player has an expectation that a big win will occur.

On the other hand, in the display area of the effect display device, the decorative symbols are variably displayed, and a plurality of effect displays corresponding to the decorative symbols that are being variably displayed (for example, the variable decorative symbols indicate a big hit) Effect display indicating the degree of expectation that is stopped and displayed in the form, etc.) is also performed. For this reason, the player can read the look-ahead effect display suggesting the result of the variable display of the decorative symbols several times ahead, and the variable display mode of the currently variable decorative symbols and the display contents of the effect display corresponding to the currently variable decorative symbols. At the same time, it is becoming a situation where it is necessary to visually recognize.

In such a situation, although the game can be made more interesting, there is a possibility that the player cannot fully grasp the contents indicated by these effect displays. In particular, since the player tends to pay attention to the variable display of decorative symbols that are currently changing and various effects displays corresponding to the variable display, the look-ahead effect display is relatively inconspicuous. There is a problem that the player may lose consciousness of the execution and the approaching start of variation of the decorative symbols corresponding to the look-ahead effect display.

Therefore, when executing the look-ahead effect display, the player can easily grasp that the look-ahead effect display is being executed and that the timing of starting the variable display of the decorative symbols corresponding to the look-ahead effect display is approaching. and embodiment.

Below, with reference to FIG. 382, first, various images displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 when executing the look-ahead effect display will be described.
Specifically, the game board side effect display device 1600 from the start of the fluctuation display of the decorative pattern to the stop of the fluctuation performed when the result of the special lottery performed corresponding to the winning to the first start port 2002 is lost. 382(A) to 382(F), an example of rendering in the display area will be described. In addition, FIG. 382 (A) to FIG. 382(D), FIG. 382(G), and FIG. 382(H).

FIG. 382(A) shows a state in which three decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. It also shows a state in which the pending image corresponding to the stopped decorative symbol is displayed. In addition, it shows a state in which there are three holds corresponding to the winning of the game ball to the first start port 2002. Specifically, a decorative pattern with the number "3" is placed as the left decorative pattern, and a decorative pattern with the number "5" is placed as the middle decorative pattern at equal intervals from the left in the approximate center of the display area in the vertical direction. , and decorative patterns with the number "2" as the right decorative patterns are stopped and displayed. The decorative pattern consists of a background area (white part in the figure) consisting of an image forming the outline of the decorative pattern in a vertically long rectangular shape, and a number area consisting of an image showing any number from "1" to "9" ( black part in the figure). As shown in the figure, the number area is centered in the background area.

It is preferable that an image having a color different from the color of the background area and the color of the number area constituting the decorative pattern is used. For example, it is preferable to set the color of the background area to white and the color of the number area to black. Note that the outline of the rectangular shape that forms the outline of the background area may be black.

At the bottom of the display area, from the left, the suspension display area, the first suspension display area, the second suspension display area, the third suspension display area, and the fourth suspension display area are set. A state is shown in which the reserved image is displayed in the display area, and the reserved images are displayed in the first to third reserved display areas. Although the fourth reserved display area is indicated by a dotted line in the drawing for explanation, the dotted line is not actually displayed in the display area as a display state, and the reserved image is displayed in the following drawings. In principle, such a dotted line indicating the intended position of the vehicle is not shown.

In FIG. 382(A), the pending image displayed in the pending display area is the pending image corresponding to the decorative symbols '3', '5', and '2' that are stopped and displayed. Further, the pending image displayed in the first pending display area is the pending image corresponding to the next variable display after the variable display corresponding to the pending image ends. Further, the pending image displayed in the second pending display area is the pending image corresponding to the next variable display after the variable display corresponding to the pending image displayed in the first pending display area is completed. be. Further, the pending image displayed in the third pending display area is a pending image corresponding to the next variable display after the variable display corresponding to the pending image displayed in the second pending display area is completed. be.

FIG. 382(B) shows a display state at the start of variation of decorative symbols corresponding to the reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area described with reference to FIG. 382(A).
Specifically, the upper edge of the decorative design that is one before in the display order is below the left decorative design to the right decorative design, and the top of the decorative design that is one after in the display order is above the left decorative design to the right decorative design. Bottom edge is displayed. Also, the display of the pending display ends.
The reserved image displayed in the reserved display area and the reserved images displayed in the first to fourth reserved display areas are always displayed on the front side of the decorative design. The reserved image and the reserved image are circular in shape and basically white in color. Also, the reserved image has a larger circle diameter than the reserved image.

FIG. 382(C) shows a state in which the left decorative design to the right decorative design are displayed in a variable manner. Each decorative pattern is displayed in a manner of scrolling downward in the display area.

Specifically, the lower side of a certain decorative pattern that is being displayed in a variable display is first displayed on the upper side of the display area, and then the decorative pattern moves downward to fill the display area. The entire decorative pattern is displayed, and after the lower end of the decorative pattern reaches the lower side of the display area, only a part of the upper side of the decorative pattern is displayed. The upper end of the decorative pattern reaches the lower side of the display area, and the decorative pattern is not displayed. In this way, each decorative pattern changes its display state in such a flow that it changes from a state not displayed in the display area to a state displayed in the display area and then to a state not displayed in the display area.

The display order is set for the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern. Specifically, following a decorative pattern with a certain number (eg, "1"), decorative patterns with the next number (eg, "2") appear in order from the upper side of the display area. will be displayed. The order of the numbers attached to the decorative patterns is the order of "1", "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", "8", and "9". . After the decorative pattern with the number "9", the decorative pattern with the number "1" is displayed in the display area. For example, in FIG. 382(C), the left decorative pattern with the number "1" attached to the lower side and the left decorative pattern with the number "2" attached to the upper side are displayed. , both left decorative patterns scroll downward, and the left decorative pattern with the number "2" is followed by the left decorative pattern with the number "3". , appear from the upper side of the display area.

With reference to FIG. 382(B), it has been explained that the display of the reserved image that has been displayed in the reserved display area until then ends at the same time as the decorative pattern starts to change, but the display of the reserved image ends At the same time, the pending image displayed in the first pending display area is displayed so as to move to the left while being enlarged, and displayed as the pending image in the pending display area. At the same time, the reserved image displayed in the second reserved display area is displayed so as to move to the left, and is displayed as a reserved image in the first reserved display area. At the same time, the reserved image displayed in the second reserved display area is displayed so as to move to the left, and is displayed as a reserved image in the first reserved display area. Enlargement of the reserved image and movement of the reserved image to the left are performed over a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.67 seconds). FIG. 382(C) shows the state after such a pending image is moved.

FIG. 382(D) shows a state in which the left decorative design is temporarily stopped and the middle decorative design and the right decorative design are being variably displayed. Specifically, the left decorative design with the number "2" is temporarily stopped and displayed. In addition, it shows a state in which a new pending image is displayed in the third pending display area in response to the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2002 .

Here, the temporary stop display will be described. A temporary stop display is a display mode of a decorative pattern in which a decorative pattern with a predetermined number is displayed as if it were stopped at a display position where the decorative pattern is finally displayed stopped or in the vicinity thereof. is. Specifically, for example, a decorative pattern with a predetermined number is gently moved up and down to the extent that the number attached to the decorative pattern is clearly visible, with reference to the display position where the decorative pattern is finally stopped and displayed. The temporary stop display of the decorative pattern is performed by displaying it so as to move or display it so as to sway. In this way, by performing the temporary stop display, the decorative symbols being changed are visually recognized as if they are stopped by the player, and the player can confirm the numbers attached to the decorative symbols. . It should be noted that when the decorative pattern is finally stopped and displayed, the decorative pattern is displayed in a completely stopped state without such vertical movement or swinging display.

When the temporarily stopped decorative pattern is changed to the finally stopped decorative pattern, or the temporarily stopped decorative pattern is scrolled and displayed again, There is a case where variable display is performed so that decorative symbols with other numbers are finally stopped and displayed, but the details will be described later.

In FIG. 382(D), arc-shaped lines are added to the upper left and lower right of the left decorative design with the number "2". This line indicates that the symbol is in a state of being temporarily stopped. Also, in other drawings, such arcuate lines may be attached to the decorative design, and in this case also, it indicates that the decorative design is in a state of being temporarily stopped and displayed.

FIG. 382(E) shows a state in which the right decorative design is temporarily stopped following the left decorative design, and the middle decorative design is being variably displayed. Specifically, a decorative pattern with the number "2" as the left decorative pattern and a decorative pattern with the number "4" as the right decorative pattern are temporarily stopped and displayed.

FIG. 382(F) shows a state in which left decorative symbols to right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. In accordance with the stop display of the middle decorative design, the left decorative design and the right decorative design, which have been temporarily stopped and displayed until then, are also stopped and displayed. In addition, in accordance with the stop display of the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern, in the figure, the decorative pattern with the number "2" attached to the left decorative pattern and the decoration with the number "7" attached to the middle decorative pattern As for the patterns, the decorative patterns in which the number "4" is added to the right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed, and the fact that the special lottery results are lost is indicated by the combination of the stopped and displayed decorative patterns. In the state where the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed, as shown in the figure, the decorative patterns displayed above and below each decorative pattern during fluctuation or temporary stop are no longer displayed. The stop display of the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern is continued for a predetermined time (for example, 1 second), after which the variable display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area is newly started. be. In addition, the display of the reserved image displayed in the reserved image ends at the same timing as the timing when the change of the new decorative pattern is started.

FIG. 382(G) shows a state in which the left decorative design is temporarily stopped, the right decorative design is temporarily stopped, and the middle decorative design is being variably displayed, from the display state shown with reference to FIG. 382(D). ing. Specifically, the left decorative pattern with the number "2" and the right decorative pattern with the number "2" are temporarily stopped, respectively, indicating that the ready-to-win state has occurred. state.

FIG. 382(H) shows a state in which left decorative symbols to right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. In addition, in accordance with the stop display of the middle decorative design, the left decorative design and the right decorative design, which have been temporarily stopped and displayed until then, are also stopped and displayed. In addition, in accordance with the stop display of the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern, the decorative pattern with the number "2" attached to the left decorative pattern and the decoration with the number "2" attached to the middle decorative pattern are shown in the figure. As for the patterns, the decorative patterns in which the number "2" is attached to the right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed, and the combination of the stopped and displayed decorative patterns indicates that the special lottery result is a big win. In the state where the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed, as shown in the figure, the decorative patterns displayed above and below each decorative pattern during fluctuation or temporary stop are no longer displayed. After the stop display of the left decorative design to the right decorative design continues for a predetermined time (for example, 1 second), the left decorative design to the right decorative design are no longer displayed. After that, the jackpot game state is started, and at the timing when the jackpot game state ends, the display of the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern is resumed, and after that, it corresponds to the reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area. The variable display of decorative patterns is newly started.

Thus, in the variable display example of the decorative symbols explained with reference to FIG. After the variable display is started from the state, after the variable display is performed for a predetermined time, the left decorative design and the right decorative design are temporarily stopped in this order, and then the middle decorative design is stopped. In addition, the left decorative design and the right decorative design are simultaneously displayed in a stopped state in accordance with the stop display of the middle decorative design. In addition, by stopping the decorative patterns with the same number as the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern, the player is shown that the special lottery result is a big win. In addition, the player is shown that the special lottery result is a loss by stopping at least one of the left to right decorative patterns to which a different number is attached as the decorative pattern.

An embodiment obtained by modifying the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 382 will be described below with reference to production examples shown in FIGS. FIG. 383 is a time chart in this example of effect, and FIG. 384 is a diagram showing a display state at a predetermined timing of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 in this example of effect. In FIG. 384, the variable display mode of the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern, the display mode of the reserved image in the reserved display area, and the display mode of the reserved image in the first to fourth reserved display areas are The display mode is the same as that described with reference to FIG. 382 unless otherwise noted. Note that these points also apply to other embodiments and production examples described later unless otherwise specified.

FIG. 383 is a time chart showing an example of effects in this embodiment. In the state immediately before the timing t0, the display state in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is a state in which the decorative symbols stop fluctuating. FIG. 384(A) is a diagram showing this state, and shows a state in which decorative patterns with numbers "6", "4", and "5" from the left are stopped and displayed. From this state, at timing t0, the variable display of the left decorative design to the right decorative design is newly started. FIG. 384(B) is a diagram showing a display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t1) after the start of the variable display, and shows a state in which variable display of left decorative symbols to right decorative symbols is being performed. there is

In the time chart shown in FIG. 383(A), t0, t1 to t34, t35, etc. are indicated according to the passage of time in order to explain the timing of the presentation. The time between each timing is 1 second. Note that these points also apply to other embodiments and production examples described later unless otherwise specified.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 383, at timing t2, a game ball enters the first starting hole 2002 and a new hold occurs. Further, with this starting winning as a trigger, the look-ahead effect display is started at timing t2. Also, in response to the look-ahead effect display, a specific pending image shaped like a pine branch with leaves is displayed instead of the normal pending image. The color of the specific reserved image is green. FIG. 384(C) shows a display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t3) after the look-ahead effect display is started at timing t2. Also, the third reserved display area shows a state in which a specific reserved image having a shape resembling a pine branch with leaves is displayed instead of an ordinary reserved image having a circular shape.

In the look-ahead effect display, a look-ahead effect image surrounding the display area in a frame shape is displayed in such a manner as to hide a part of the decorative symbols that are variably displayed so as to scroll downward. The look-ahead effect image is an image in which a plurality (specifically, six) of shapes resembling pine branches with leaves protrude toward the inside of a horizontally long rectangular frame. The color of the look-ahead effect image is slightly lighter green than the color of the specific pending image.

The display of the look-ahead effect image and the display of the specific pending image are performed based on the special lottery result obtained when the game ball wins the first start opening 2002, and only the normal pending image with a perfect circular shape and white color is displayed. The performance execution ratio is set so that the probability of winning a big hit is higher when the look-ahead effect image and the specific pending image are displayed than when they are displayed. For example, when a normal pending image is displayed, the probability of a big hit is 0.3%, and when a look-ahead effect image and a specific pending image are displayed, the probability of a big win is 10.0%. is configured to be

With such a configuration, the player can display the look-ahead effect image and the specific pending image, and when the decorative pattern corresponding to the specific pending image is changed, the normal pending image is displayed. Compared to the case where the variation of the decorative pattern corresponding to the reserved image is performed, there is an expectation that the decorative pattern will be stopped and displayed in a stop mode indicating that a big win will occur as a result of the variation of the decorative pattern. You will feel.

From timing t2 to timing t4, while the look-ahead effect image is displayed, the left decorative design to the right decorative design are variably displayed. A look-ahead effect image is displayed in front of the right decorative pattern. Therefore, the variable display of the left decorative design to the right decorative design is performed in a state that a part of the left decorative design to the right decorative design is hidden by the look-ahead effect image. In addition, the reserved image displayed in the reserved display area, the normal reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area, the normal reserved image displayed in the second reserved display area, and the third reserved display area The specific pending image is displayed on the front side of each decorative pattern and the look-ahead effect image.

At timing t4, all the left decorative symbols to the right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. FIG. 384(D) shows a display state in which all the left decorative symbols to the right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed at timing t4. At the timing when the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed, the front-to-back relationship between the pre-reading effect image and the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern is reversed, and the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are closer than the pre-reading effect image. displayed on the side. In addition, the reserved image displayed in the reserved display area, the normal reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area, the normal reserved image displayed in the second reserved display area, and the third reserved display area The specific pending image is displayed in front of the look-ahead effect image.

At the timing when the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, the decorative symbols positioned above and below each decorative symbol are no longer displayed. For example, in FIG. 384(D), as the left decorative pattern, only the decorative pattern with the number "1" is stopped and displayed. On the upper side of the decorative pattern is the lower part of the decorative pattern with the number "2", and on the lower side of the decorative pattern with the number "1" is the upper part of the decorative pattern with the number "9". is displayed. By adopting such a configuration, only the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed stand out and can be visually recognized by the player.

The stop display of the decorative pattern continues from timing t4 to timing t5. Also, during this period, the display mode in which the left decorative symbols to the right decorative symbols are displayed in front of the look-ahead effect image is continued.

At timing t5, a new variable display of decorative symbols is started. At the timing when the new variable display of the decorative pattern is started, the front-to-back effect image and the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are switched again, and the pre-reading effect image is displayed in front of the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern. display mode.

At the timing when the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, the decorative symbols positioned above and below each decorative symbol are no longer displayed. The display of the decorative patterns positioned above and below the pattern is also resumed. For example, in FIG. 384(D), only the decorative pattern with the number "1" is stopped and displayed as the left decorative pattern. , the lower part of the decorative pattern with the number "2" is displayed, and the lower part of the decorative pattern with the number "1" is displayed with the upper part of the decorative pattern with the number "9". The downward moving display of each decorative pattern is instantaneously started.

Thereafter, in accordance with the start and stop of the variable display of the decorative symbols, the front-rear effect image and the left to right decorative symbols are interchanged. For example, in the period from timing t4 to timing t5, the display mode in which the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are displayed in front of the look-ahead effect image is continued, but the period from timing t9 to timing t10 and timing t14 are continued. to timing t15, similarly, the display mode in which the left decorative symbols to the right decorative symbols are displayed in front of the look-ahead effect image is continued.

At the timing t15, the variable display of the decorative symbols corresponding to the start winning that triggered the display of the look-ahead effect image and the specific pending image is started. In FIG. 384(E), at a predetermined timing after timing t15 (for example, timing t16), the look-ahead effect image is displayed in front of the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern, and the specific reserved image is displayed in the reserved display area. Shows the displayed state.

At the timing t25, the left decorative design and the right decorative design are temporarily stopped and displayed with the numeral "2" attached thereto, and the ready-to-win state occurs. At this time, the middle decorative pattern is maintained in a variable display state in which it is scrolled downward and displayed. Also, at timing t25, the display of the prefetch effect image that has been displayed until then ends, and the prefetch effect image is not displayed. FIG. 384(F) shows the display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t26) after the ready-to-win state occurs and the display of the look-ahead effect image ends at timing t25.

At the timing t33, the medium decorative pattern that has been variably displayed in the display mode according to the special lottery result is in a variability stop state. Specifically, when the special lottery result is a loss, decorative designs with numbers other than "2" are stopped and displayed as medium decorative designs. Further, when the special lottery result is a big hit, a decorative pattern with a number "2" is stopped and displayed as a middle decorative pattern.

FIG. 384(G) shows a state in which, at timing t33, a decorative design with a numeral "3" attached as a middle decorative design is stopped and displayed. Thereafter, at timing t34, the display of the pending image displayed in the pending display area ends. On the other hand, the stop display state of the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern is continued until the game ball newly wins the first starting port 2002. - 特許庁

On the other hand, FIG. 384(H) shows a state in which, at timing t33, a decorative design with a numeral "2" attached as a middle decorative design is stopped and displayed. After that, at the timing t34, the display of the reserved image displayed in the reserved display area and the display of the left decorative symbols to the right decorative symbols are finished, and the game shifts to the jackpot game state.

In this embodiment, the look-ahead performance image is displayed closer to the viewer than the decorative symbols during the variable display of the decorative symbols, and the decorative symbols are displayed closer to the viewer than the look-ahead performance images while the decorative symbols are stopped. ing.

By adopting such a configuration, the player can visually clearly grasp the start and stop of each variable display, so that the decorative pattern corresponding to the specific reserved image can be displayed without confirming the movement of the specific reserved image. It becomes possible to recognize that one has approached the fluctuation display of .

In addition, the area occupied in the display area of the look-ahead effect image is larger than the area occupied in the display area of the specific reserved image, and the look-ahead effect image is closer to the stop position of the decorative pattern than the specific reserved image. Since it is displayed, even if the player concentrates on visually recognizing the variation mode of the decorative pattern, it becomes possible to recognize that the variable display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the specific reserved image is one step closer. .

Further, by displaying the decorative pattern and the read-ahead performance image at overlapping positions, the sizes of both the decorative pattern and the read-ahead performance image can be increased, and the utilization efficiency of the display area can be improved. Furthermore, the display can be optimized by configuring the image to be displayed on the front side to be switched between the decorative design and the pre-reading effect image according to the conditions.

Specifically, during the variation of the decorative symbols, the look-ahead effect image is displayed on the front side, so that the player is greatly affected by the approaching timing of performing the variation display corresponding to the look-ahead effect image. It can give you hope. On the other hand, while the variation of the decorative symbols is stopped, the stopping mode of the decorative symbols is not hindered by the look-ahead performance image, and the whole of the decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed can be clearly shown to the player. .

In the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 383 and 384, the size of the look-ahead effect image did not change even if the look-ahead effect image was displayed over a plurality of times of variable display of decorative symbols. 385, 387, and 388 below, when the look-ahead effect image is displayed over a plurality of times of variable display of decorative symbols, the size of the look-ahead effect image is changed. Shows an example of production.

In this effect example, a first prefetch effect image occupying the smallest area relative to the display area, a second prefetch effect image occupying a medium area relative to the display area, and a second prefetch effect image occupying a medium area relative to the display area. It is configured to switch between and display a large third look-ahead effect image at a predetermined timing. The first look-ahead effect image to the third look-ahead effect image are arranged in such a manner that a plurality of (specifically, six) shapes imitating pine branches with leaves protrude inside a horizontally long rectangular frame. In the case of the first look-ahead effect image, the size of the shape imitating a pine branch with leaves is the smallest. In the case of the third look-ahead effect image, the size of the shape imitating a pine branch with leaves is the largest. The colors of the first look-ahead effect image to the third look-ahead effect image are slightly lighter green than the color of the specific pending image. In the effect example described with reference to FIG. 384, the prefetch effect image displayed in the display area is the first prefetch effect image.

First, referring to FIGS. 385(A) and 387, there is shown an effect example in which the look-ahead effect image gradually increases over a plurality of variable display of decorative symbols. FIG. 385(A) is a time chart in this example of effect, and FIG. 387 is a diagram showing a display state at a predetermined timing of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 in this example of effect.

In this example of effect, the display of the first look-ahead effect image and the specific pending image is started in response to the winning of the game ball into the first starting hole 2002 at the timing t2. FIG. 387(A) shows the display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t3) after the display of the first look-ahead effect image and the specific pending image is started at timing t2.

At timing t4, all the left decorative symbols to the right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. FIG. 387(B) shows a display state in which all the left decorative symbols to the right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed at timing t4. At the timing when the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed, the front-to-back relationship between the pre-reading effect image and the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern is reversed, and the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are closer than the pre-reading effect image. displayed on the side.

Next, at timing t5, a new variable display of decorative symbols is started, and the look-ahead effect image is displayed closer to the viewer than the left to right decorative symbols. At timing t6, which is the timing after one second, instead of the first prefetch effect image, a second prefetch effect image larger than the first prefetch effect image is displayed. FIG. 387(C) shows the display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t7) after the display of the second look-ahead effect image is started at timing t6.

Next, at timing t9, the left decorative symbols to the right decorative symbols are all stopped and displayed. FIG. 387(D) shows a display state in which all the left decorative symbols to the right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed at timing t9. At the timing when the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed, the second look-ahead effect image and the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are displayed in reverse order, and the left decorative pattern to the right side of the second look-ahead effect image are reversed. Decorative patterns are displayed on the front side.

Next, at timing t10, a new variable display of decorative symbols is started. It is configured to display a third look-ahead effect image that is larger than the image. FIG. 387(E) shows the display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t12) after the display of the third look-ahead effect image is started at timing t11.

Next, at timing t14, all of the left decorative symbols to the right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. FIG. 387(F) shows a display state in which all the left decorative symbols to the right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed at timing t14. At the timing when the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed, the 3rd look-ahead effect image and the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are displayed in reverse order, and the left decorative pattern to the right side of the 3rd look-ahead effect image. Decorative patterns are displayed on the front side.

Next, at timing t15, a new variable display of decorative symbols is started. This variable display is a variable display corresponding to the start winning that triggered the start of the look-ahead effect display in this example of effect. At timing t15, the display front-to-back relation of the third look-ahead effect image and the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern is reversed, and the third look-ahead effect image is displayed in front of the left to right decorative patterns. FIG. 387(G) shows the display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t16) after the variable display of decorative symbols is started at timing t15.

As described above, in this embodiment, after the decorative symbols are displayed on the front side of the look-ahead effect image in accordance with the stop display of the decorative symbols, the look-ahead of the decorative symbols is performed in accordance with the start of the variable display of the decorative symbols. After the effect image is displayed on the front side, a prefetch effect image that occupies a larger area in the display area than the prefetch effect image that has been displayed so far is displayed instead of the prefetch effect image that has been displayed so far. It consists of

By adopting such a configuration, the player can visually clearly grasp the start and stop of each variable display, so that the decoration corresponding to the specific reserved image can be displayed without bothering to confirm the movement of the specific reserved image. It becomes possible to recognize that the pattern is approaching the variable display.

Further, the look-ahead effect image that was displayed behind the decorative pattern while the decorative pattern was stopped and partially hidden is displayed in a larger look-ahead effect immediately after the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern. Since it is displayed by switching to an image, it is possible for the player to visually recognize the look-ahead effect image as if it were enlarged twice.

Further, in the present embodiment, the size of the look-ahead effect image is configured to increase step by step. Specifically, by first displaying a small look-ahead effect image, it is possible to make the player recognize that the look-ahead effect has started, and at this stage, the visibility of the changing decorative pattern is greatly hindered. After that, the size of the look-ahead effect image gradually increases.

With such a configuration, it becomes possible for the player to recognize that the look-ahead performance has started, and after that, the size of the look-ahead performance image increases, making it difficult to see the changing decorative patterns. Even so, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player cannot understand the display content in the display area.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 385(B) and 388, there is shown an effect example in which the look-ahead effect image gradually becomes smaller over a plurality of times of variable display of decorative symbols. FIG. 385(B) is a time chart in this example of effect, and FIG. 388 is a diagram showing a display state at a predetermined timing of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 in this example of effect.

In this example of effect, the display of the third look-ahead effect image and the specific pending image is started in response to the winning of the game ball into the first start hole 2002 at timing t2. FIG. 388(A) shows a display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t3) after the display of the third look-ahead effect image and the specific pending image is started at timing t2.

At timing t4, all the left decorative symbols to the right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. FIG. 388(B) shows a display state in which all the left decorative symbols to the right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed at timing t4. At the timing when the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed, the front-to-back relationship between the pre-reading effect image and the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern is reversed, and the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are closer than the pre-reading effect image. displayed on the side.

Next, at timing t5, a new variable display of decorative symbols is started. It is configured to display a second look-ahead effect image that is smaller than the image. FIG. 388(C) shows the display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t7) after the display of the second look-ahead effect image is started at timing t6.

Next, at timing t9, the left decorative symbols to the right decorative symbols are all stopped and displayed. FIG. 388(D) shows a display state in which all of the left decorative symbols to the right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed at timing t9. At the timing when the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed, the second look-ahead effect image and the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are displayed in reverse order, and the left decorative pattern to the right side of the second look-ahead effect image are reversed. Decorative patterns are displayed on the front side.

Next, at timing t10, a new variable display of decorative symbols is started. It is configured to display a first look-ahead effect image that is smaller than the image. FIG. 388(E) shows the display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t12) after the display of the first look-ahead effect image is started at timing t11.

Next, at timing t14, all of the left decorative symbols to the right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. FIG. 388(F) shows a display state in which all the left decorative symbols to the right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed at timing t14. At the timing when the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed, the first look-ahead effect image and the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are displayed in reverse order, and the left decorative pattern to the right side of the first look-ahead effect image are reversed. Decorative patterns are displayed on the front side.

Next, at timing t15, a new variable display of decorative symbols is started. This variable display is a variable display corresponding to the start winning that triggered the start of the look-ahead effect display in this example of effect. At timing t15, the first look-ahead effect image and the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are reversed in display order, and the third look-ahead effect image is displayed closer to the viewer than the left to right decorative patterns. FIG. 388(G) shows the display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t16) after the variable display of decorative symbols is started at timing t15.

By adopting such a configuration, the same effects as those of the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 385(A) and 387 can be obtained. For example, since the player can visually clearly grasp the start and stop of each variable display, the player can approach the variable display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the specific reserved image without bothering to confirm the movement of the specific reserved image. can be recognized.

In addition, by displaying the largest prefetch effect image first as the prefetch effect image, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player cannot recognize that the prefetch effect has started. After that, by gradually decreasing the size of the look-ahead effect image, decorations that are variably displayed until the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the starting prize that triggered the display of the look-ahead effect image and the specific pending image are started. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player cannot understand the variation contents of the symbols.

Further, in the embodiments described with reference to FIGS. 385(A), 387, 385(B), and 388, in addition to the large opening provided in the central portion of the pre-reading effect image ( The second look-ahead effect image and the third look-ahead effect image) are configured to have a small opening through which an image displayed on the rear side can be visually recognized.

Specifically, in the case of the second look-ahead effect image, a total of 6 openings are provided around the second look-ahead effect image, and in the case of the third look-ahead effect image, a total of 8 openings are provided around the third look-ahead effect image. It is configured to be provided. In addition, openings are provided corresponding to the left to right decorative patterns so that the left to right decorative patterns are not difficult to see. For example, in the case of the second look-ahead effect image, two upper and lower openings correspond to the left decorative design, two upper and lower openings correspond to the middle decorative design, and two upper and lower openings correspond to the right decorative design. are provided.

In addition, in the case of the third look-ahead effect image, there are three openings vertically corresponding to the left decorative design, two vertically corresponding to the middle decorative design, and three vertically corresponding to the right decorative design. are provided. As described above, during the variation of the decorative design, the decorative design can be visually recognized through the opening at a predetermined timing, so that the visibility of the decorative design can be suppressed from being lowered.

By adopting such a configuration, even when the look-ahead effect image is displayed on the front side of the decorative pattern, and even during the variable display of the decorative pattern, the decorative pattern is displayed variably behind the look-ahead effect image. Since it is possible for the player to see through the opening, the player cannot understand the display contents in the display area while maintaining the impact given to the player by the display of the look-ahead effect image. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of the situation.

An embodiment in which the size of the look-ahead effect image does not change (Fig. 383), or an embodiment in which the size of the look-ahead effect image is increased (Fig. 385 (A)) after the decorative pattern starts to change, or an embodiment in which the size is reduced ( FIG. 385(B)) is shown, but the size of the look-ahead effect image to be displayed may be used to suggest the degree of expectation for a big hit.

For example, as the look-ahead effect image, a first look-ahead effect image occupying a small area of the display area, a second look-ahead effect image occupying a medium area of the display area, and a third look-ahead effect image occupying a large area of the display area The read-ahead effect display can be executed in three display modes of the read-ahead effect image, and the degree of expectation increases in the order of the first read-ahead effect image, the second look-ahead effect image, and the third look-ahead effect image, and finally. Depending on the type of the displayed look-ahead effect image, the variation result of the variable display corresponding to the start winning that triggered the start of the look-ahead effect display may be configured to suggest the degree of expectation that the big win will be indicated. . In this case, the player expects that a larger prefetch effect image will be displayed as the prefetch effect image.

Alternatively, the third prefetch effect image, the second prefetch effect image, and the first prefetch effect image are configured so that the degree of expectation increases in this order, and the prefetch effect display is performed according to the type of the prefetch effect image finally displayed. The variation result of the variation display corresponding to the starting prize that triggered the game may suggest the degree of expectation that the game will be a big hit. In this case, the player expects that a smaller prefetch effect image will be displayed as the prefetch effect image.

FIGS. 386(A) to 386(H) show modifications of the state of the look-ahead effect display in the time chart described with reference to FIG. 385(A).

FIG. 386(A) is a diagram for showing the changing state of decorative symbols, the number of pending symbols, and which of the symbols and the effect display should be preferentially displayed.

In FIG. 386(B), the first look-ahead effect image indicating low expectation is displayed at timing t2, the first look-ahead effect image indicating low expectation is displayed continuously at timing t5, and the first look-ahead effect image indicating medium expectation is displayed at timing t11. 2 is a time chart showing an effect example in which a look-ahead effect image is displayed.

In FIG. 386(C), the first look-ahead effect image indicating low expectation is displayed at timing t2, the first look-ahead effect image indicating low expectation is displayed continuously at timing t5, and the first look-ahead effect image indicating high expectation is displayed at timing t11. 3 is a time chart showing an effect example in which a look-ahead effect image is displayed.

In FIG. 386(D), the first look-ahead effect image indicating low expectation is displayed at timing t2, the second look-ahead effect image indicating medium expectation is displayed at timing t5, and the second look-ahead effect image indicating medium expectation is displayed at timing t11. 9 is a time chart showing an effect example in which a look-ahead effect image is continuously displayed;

In FIG. 386(E), the second look-ahead effect image indicating medium expectations is displayed at timing t2, the third look-ahead effect image indicating high expectations is displayed at timing t5, and the first look-ahead effect image indicating low expectations is displayed at timing t11. 9 is a time chart showing an effect example in which a look-ahead effect image is displayed;

In FIG. 386(F), the third look-ahead effect image indicating high expectation is displayed at timing t2, the third look-ahead effect image indicating high expectation is displayed continuously at timing t5, and the third look-ahead effect image indicating high expectation is displayed at timing t11. 3 is a time chart showing an effect example in which a look-ahead effect image is continuously displayed.

In this way, by constructing so that the degree of expectation increases according to the size of the prefetch effect image that is finally displayed, it is possible to further enhance interest when the prefetch effect image is displayed.

In the variable display corresponding to the start winning that triggered the start of the look-ahead effect display, the look-ahead effect image and the decoration pattern may be displayed so as not to overlap each other.

FIG. 386(G) is a time chart showing an effect example in which vertical bar-shaped images are displayed on the left and right sides of the display area as prefetch effect images instead of the third prefetch effect image indicating high expectations at timing t16. Also, FIG. 386(H) is a time chart showing an effect example in which vertical bar-shaped images are displayed on the left and right sides of the display area as the look-ahead effect image instead of the first look-ahead effect image indicating the low degree of expectation at timing t16. .

FIG. 388(H) shows the display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t17) after the display of the bar-shaped image is started at timing t16 in the time charts shown in FIGS. 386(G) and 386(H). ing. As shown in FIG. 388(H), the bar-shaped image is displayed at a position that does not overlap with any of the left decorative symbols to the right decorative symbols during variable display. In the drawing, the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are displayed in a variable manner. Also, the color of the bar-shaped image is light green, which is the same color as the first pre-reading effect image and the third pre-reading effect image that have been displayed so far.

As described above, in the present embodiment, instead of the look-ahead effect image that has been displayed over a plurality of variations of the decorative symbols, a bar-shaped image that does not overlap the decorative symbols that are changing is displayed as a look-ahead effect image with a different shape. It is configured to

By adopting such a configuration, the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern are made to be recognized by the player that the variable display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the starting prize that triggered the start of the look-ahead effect display is being performed. The appearance mode of the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the order of is clarified, and whether or not a ready-to-win state occurs, or which decorative symbols with numbers are temporarily stopped, The player's visibility is no longer obstructed.

In game shops, there are cases in which the game shop's unique services (such as unlimited services by lucky numbers) are provided to players by means of the numbers attached to the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed in the form of doubles indicating a big win. The player can confirm the numbers attached to the stopped decorative symbols from the time of temporary stop of the first temporarily stopped left decorative symbol that can determine whether or not such a service can be received.

It should be noted that the number attached to the decorative pattern may be configured to vary the degree of expectation for a big hit when a ready-to-win state occurs. For example, in the ready-to-win state by the decorative pattern with the number "4" and the ready-to-reach state by the decorative pattern with the number "7", the latter is configured so that the expectation of a big win is higher. do it. Alternatively, it may be configured such that the profit given to the player when the jackpot state occurs differs depending on the numbers attached to the decorative symbols. For example, when the decorative pattern with the number "4" stops on double rolls and hits a big hit, and when the decorative pattern with the number "7" stops on double rolls and hits a big hit. In the latter case, it is preferable that the large winning opening 2005 is opened more at the time of the big winning game, so that a large number of prize balls are provided to the player.

By adopting such a configuration, the player will be concerned about which number is attached to the left decorative symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed first. Displaying the image ensures the visibility of the decorative pattern.

In the example of effect described with reference to FIG. 388(H), the entire decorative pattern does not overlap the bar-shaped image, which is the look-ahead effect image. Of these, the background area may be allowed to overlap with the bar-shaped image, and the number area may be configured so as not to overlap with the bar-shaped image. In this case, the thickness of the bar-shaped image described with reference to FIG. 388(H) can be slightly increased in the horizontal direction (inward direction in the display area). Even with such a configuration, the numbers attached to the decorative patterns do not overlap with the look-ahead effect image, so the visibility of the decorative patterns is ensured.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 385 to 388, the size of the look-ahead effect image is used to indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the variable display will be a big hit. In place of or in addition to indicating the degree of expectation, an attribute other than the size of the look-ahead effect image may be modified to indicate the degree of expectation for a big hit.

For example, an image having the same shape as the first prefetch effect image shown in FIG. As effect images, a green prefetch effect image can be displayed as a second prefetch effect image, and a red prefetch effect image can be displayed as a third prefetch effect image in the time chart shown with reference to FIGS. 385 and 386. You may Also, at this time, the expectation level when the blue first look-ahead effect image is displayed is set to a low expectation level, the expectation level when the green second look-ahead effect image is displayed is set to a medium expectation level, and the expectation level when the green second look-ahead effect image is displayed is set to a medium expectation level. 3 It may be configured such that the degree of expectation when the look-ahead effect image is displayed is a high degree of expectation.

Also, an example of blue, green, and red images having the same shape as the first look-ahead effect image shown in FIG. are set to blue, green, and red, or images having the same shape as the third look-ahead effect image shown in FIG. It may be configured to

Alternatively, the degree of expectation may be indicated by a combination of the size and color of the look-ahead effect image. For example, the small-sized look-ahead effect image shown in FIG. A look-ahead effect image having the largest size shown in FIG. The expectation level when the second look-ahead effect image is displayed may be set to medium expectation level, and the expectation level when the third look-ahead effect image is displayed may be set to high expectation level.

By adopting such a configuration, the player can clearly grasp the start and stop of each variable display by the change in the color of the look-ahead effect image. It becomes possible to recognize that the decorative pattern corresponding to the image is approaching the variable display.

In the state where the look-ahead effect image is displayed, when the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed, the colors of the stopped and displayed decorative patterns may be set to the same color or a similar color. good. For example, the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern may all be blue.

Specifically, just before stopping the variable display, the background area and the number area of the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are set to blue, and the display is stopped in front of the look-ahead effect image in the blue state, and then the fluctuation starts. Sometimes, it is configured to be displayed behind the look-ahead effect image in a blue state, and during variation, it is preferably displayed in white or black, which is the original color. Alternatively, from the start of the display of the look-ahead effect image, the color of the background area and number area of the left decorative design to the right decorative design is set to blue, and the background area of the left decorative design to the right decorative design is displayed until the display of the look-ahead effect image ends. or the state in which the color of the number area is blue may be continued. The colors of the background area and number area of the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are not limited to blue, and may be green, red, gray, or the like. If the background area and the number area are to have the same color, it is preferable to provide a black outline portion for the numbers.

In addition, it is preferable that the color of the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern and the color of the look-ahead effect image are different colors. For example, when blue is adopted as the color of the left decorative design to the right decorative design, it is preferable to adopt a color other than blue (for example, red or green) as the color of the look-ahead effect image.

In this way, at least at the timing when each decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, each decorative pattern to be stopped is made the same color (for example, blue) or a similar color, so that the left decorative pattern to the right decoration that are stopped are displayed. In addition to the sense of unity of the patterns, the visual difference between the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern can be further enhanced with the look-ahead effect image displayed on the background side. It becomes more clearly recognized by the player.

Furthermore, by making the color of each decorative pattern and the color of the look-ahead effect image different colors, it is possible to further enhance the visual difference between the color of each decorative pattern and the look-ahead effect image, and the variable display of the decorative pattern ends. and start can be more clearly recognized by the player.

In this way, when the colors of the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are set to the same color, the color of each decorative pattern is changed to a different color while the look-ahead effect image is being displayed. may Such a change in the color of the decorative pattern is performed at the timing when each decorative pattern is being displayed in a variable manner and displayed on the front side of the look-ahead effect image, and each decorative pattern is displayed on the rear side of the look-ahead effect image. It is preferable to configure so that the color of the decorative pattern is not changed at the timing when it is set.

For example, during variation of each decorative pattern, the color of each decorative pattern may be changed from blue to green at the timing when each decorative pattern is displayed in front of the look-ahead performance image. It should be noted that depending on the color of the decorative pattern thus changed, some state in the gaming machine (for example, the degree of expectation that the variable display corresponding to the start winning that triggered the start of the look-ahead effect display will result in a variable result indicating a big win). It may be configured to suggest

With such a configuration, the player can more clearly recognize the end and start of the variable display of decorative symbols.

The look-ahead effect image may be provided with characters or symbols indicating the name of the effect. Further, when the decorative symbols are stopped, the characters or symbols indicating the name of the effect may be partially or wholly hidden by the stopped decorative symbols. For example, by adding a character string "pine mark growth time" to the pre-reading effect image, a part of the character string "pine mark growth time" is displayed by the decoration pattern displayed on the front side of the pre-reading effect image. Or configure everything to be hidden. Also, in the stick-shaped image shown in FIG. 388(H), a character string "pine tree mark growth time" may be attached as characters indicating the name of the effect.

With such a configuration, the entire name of the prefetch effect image can be visually recognized by the player when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started and the display priority of the prefetch effect image and the decorative pattern is switched. , it is possible to impress the player that the look-ahead effect image is being performed.

Also, it is preferable to change the name of the effect to be displayed in the bar-shaped image according to the size of the look-ahead effect image (that is, the degree of expectation for the big win) displayed until immediately before. For example, if the first look-ahead effect image is displayed, the character string "pine mark growth time (small)" is displayed, and if the second look-ahead effect image is displayed, the character string "pine mark growth time ( The character string "Middle)" may be configured to display the character string "Pine mark growth time (Large)" when the third look-ahead effect image is displayed.

By adopting such a configuration, it is possible for the player to confirm the degree of expectation for a big hit suggested by the look-ahead effect image while ensuring the visibility of the decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped and displayed.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 383 and the like, by displaying the specific pending image corresponding to the look-ahead effect image, when the variable display corresponding to the start winning that triggered the start of the look-ahead effect display However, instead of or in addition to the display of the specific suspension image, a normal suspension image with a perfect circular shape and white color is displayed, and at the same time as the display of the look-ahead effect image is started, a specific The effect sound may be configured to be output for a predetermined time (for example, one second from timing t2 to timing t3). Alternatively, it may be configured such that only the look-ahead effect image is displayed without outputting such a specific effect sound.

By adopting such a configuration, the player can visually clearly grasp the start and stop of each variable display, so that the player can start displaying the prefetch effect image without confirming the movement of the pending image. It is possible to recognize that one has approached the variable display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the hold that has become.

A performance mode is shown in which one of the look-ahead performance image and the decorative pattern is placed in front and the other is displayed in a superimposed manner. In these examples, in the portion where the image located in front and the image located in back are superimposed, the image located in back was configured to be invisible, but the image in front was half visible. It may be configured to be transparent so that the image located in the back can be seen through the image located in the front.

With such a configuration, the visibility of the look-ahead effect image and the decorative pattern can be ensured.

In the state where the variable display of the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed and the decorative pattern is displayed on the nearer side than the look-ahead effect image, there is an expectation regarding the variable display corresponding to the start winning that triggered the start of the display of the look-ahead effect image. It is preferable to configure so as not to perform the effect display indicating the degree of expectation other than the degree of expectation (the degree of expectation related to other pending images). For example, during execution of the look-ahead effect display, if a new hold occurs in response to the winning of the first start opening 2002, regardless of the result of the special lottery, a normal round white hold image is displayed. It should be configured to display

By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by information other than the variable display corresponding to the starting prize that triggered the start of the look-ahead effect display.

In FIGS. 387, 388, etc., an embodiment in which the read-ahead effect image is displayed in the periphery of the display area is shown, but the read-ahead effect image may be displayed near the center of the display area.

FIG. 389 shows a modification of the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 387 and 388. FIG. Fig. 389(A) shows the state in which the first look-ahead effect image is displayed at timing t2 of the time chart of Fig. 385(A), and Fig. 389(B) shows the state at timing t6 of the time chart of Fig. 385(A). FIG. 389(C) shows the state in which the second look-ahead effect image is displayed, and the state in which the third look-ahead effect image is displayed at timing t11 in the time chart of FIG. 385(A). Also, FIG. 389(D) shows a display state in which all of the left decorative symbols to the right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed at timing t14 in the time chart of FIG. 385(A).

In FIG. 389, the first prefetch effect image to the third prefetch effect image are images representing states in which one to three ingredients are stuck in the oden skewer. Specifically, the first look-ahead effect image is an image showing a skewer with triangular konjac stuck in it, and the second look-ahead effect image is a skewer with triangular konjac and square-shaped radish. The third read-ahead effect image is an image representing a state in which a triangular konjac, a square radish, and an elliptical paste are stuck in a skewer.

In this way, at the timing when one second has elapsed from the start of the variation of the decorative pattern, the first read-ahead performance image changes to the second read-ahead performance image, and the second look-ahead performance image changes to the third look-ahead performance image. Further, when the decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state, in any of the pre-reading effect images, the portion representing the ingredients (konjac, radish, paste) is hidden by displaying the decorative pattern on the front side, and only the portion representing the skewer is displayed. It is visible to the player without being hidden by the decoration pattern.

By adopting such a configuration, one look-ahead effect image can be visually recognized and a plurality of the look-ahead effect images can be visually recognized while the decorative pattern is changing and when the change is stopped. For this reason, the look of the look-ahead effect image is visually recognized by the player as if it has changed greatly, and the start and stop of each variable display can be visually recognized more clearly.

Also, only the portion hidden by the decorative pattern is a place that can change when a certain look-ahead effect image changes to another look-ahead effect image. Therefore, in the case where the type of the look-ahead effect image suggests the degree of expectation for a big win, the player can recognize the stop and start of variation of the decorative symbols if he or she watches only the point where the decorative symbols stop. , it is also possible to recognize the degree of expectation for a big win.

It should be noted that, during one variation of the decorative symbols, when performing a variation mode in which the left decorative symbols to the right decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed as if they were once stopped, and then the variable display is resumed, a look-ahead effect image is performed. without changing the priority of , the pre-reading effect image may be displayed on the front side of the decoration pattern continuously even during the temporary stop display. For example, in the time chart shown in FIG. 385(A), from timing t7 to timing t8 or from timing t17 to timing t18, left decorative symbols to right decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed, and then left decorative symbols to right decorative symbols are temporarily displayed. Even in the case of resuming the variable display of the symbols, it is preferable to continue to display the look-ahead effect image in front of the decorative symbols.

With such a configuration, a situation occurs in which the player misunderstands that the variable display is finished and a new variable display is started, and that the decorative pattern whose degree of expectation is suggested by the look-ahead effect image is approaching the variation. can be suppressed.

Although the example of displaying the look-ahead effect image around the display area has been shown, a plurality of look-ahead effect images may be displayed around the display area.

An embodiment obtained by modifying the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 383 and 384 will be described below with reference to production examples shown in FIGS. FIG. 390 is a time chart in this example of effect, and FIGS. 391 and 392 are diagrams showing the display state of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 at a predetermined timing in this example of effect.

The look-ahead effect in this embodiment includes a look-ahead effect frame image surrounding the outer periphery of the display area in a frame shape, and the first to sixth forewarning images provided in the display area in a display mode of two columns vertically and three columns horizontally. It is configured to be performed by a preview image.

Specifically, the first pine preview image is displayed in the upper left of the display area, the second pine preview image is displayed in the upper center of the display area, the third pine preview image is displayed in the upper right of the display area, and the third pine preview image is displayed in the lower left of the display area. The 4th pine preview image is displayed in the lower center of the display area, the 5th pine preview image is displayed in the lower right of the display area, and the 6th pine preview image is displayed in the lower right of the display area. The 1st to 6th pine preview images have different display start timings and display end timings, and the display starts and ends independently of each other.

Also, the first to sixth pine preview images are images suggesting that a predetermined effect will be performed.

Specifically, the first forewarning image is an image for notifying that the operation of the operation button 410 is enabled, and is attached with a character string "button ready".

In addition, the second pine preview image is an image for notifying that the ear frame movable body provided on the frame will change from the first state to the second state. attached.

Also, the third pine preview image is an image that foretells that the pending image will change to a pending image indicating that the degree of expectation is higher, and is attached with a character string such as "green pending!".

The fourth notice image is an image that displays a countdown indicating that some notice or suggestion regarding a game will be performed at a predetermined timing, and is added with a character string counted down according to the passage of time. For example, after a display such as "After 18 seconds?" is an image in which is displayed as a countdown.

The 5th pitch notice image is an image for notifying that a special ready-to-win with a higher expectation of a bigger hit than a normal ready-to-win state will occur as a ready-to-win state, and a character string "SP reach" is added.

The sixth notice image, like the fourth notice image, is an image that displays a countdown indicating that some kind of notice or suggestion regarding the game will be performed at a predetermined timing.

The color of the pre-reading effect frame image and the first to sixth pine preview images is green. The first to sixth pine preview images are bordered with a color other than green (for example, black). As a result, it is possible to make a visual difference from the pre-reading effect frame images displayed behind the first to sixth pine preview images. Also, the first to sixth notice images may continue to be displayed even after the corresponding notice or suggestion is executed, in which case they are displayed in gray instead of green. Also, the characters added to the first to sixth pine preview images are black.

FIG. 390 is a time chart showing an example of effects in this embodiment. In the state immediately before the timing t0, the display state in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is a state in which the decorative symbols stop fluctuating.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 390, at timing t2, a game ball enters the first starting hole 2002 and a new hold occurs. Also, with this starting winning as a trigger, at timing t2, display of a prefetch effect frame image, a third pine preview image, a fourth pine preview image, and a sixth pine preview image is started as the prefetch effect display.

FIG. 391(A) shows the display state immediately after the look-ahead effect display is started at timing t2. Specifically, on the front side of the changing decorative pattern, a read-ahead effect frame image that encloses the display area in a rectangular shape is displayed. It shows a state in which the preview image and the sixth preview image are displayed. Also, a state in which the pending image is displayed on the frontmost side is shown. Note that the pending image displayed in the third pending display area is a normal pending image in white.

The third pine notice image has the characters "green reserve!" It shows that it changes to a green hold indicating that the degree of expectation for a big hit is higher at a predetermined timing.

Further, the character string "18 seconds later?" is added to the fourth pine preview image, and the character string "23 seconds later?" is attached to the sixth pine preview image. This indicates that some notice or suggestion regarding the game will be made after 18 seconds (timing t20) and after 23 seconds (timing t25).

Next, at timing t4, the left decorative symbols to the right decorative symbols are all stopped and displayed. FIG. 391(B) shows a display state in which all the left decorative symbols to the right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed at timing t4. At the timing when the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed, the 3rd pine preview image, the 4th pine preview image, the 6th pine preview image and the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are displayed in reverse order, The left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are displayed in front of the third pine preview image, the fourth pine preview image, and the sixth pine preview image. The reserved image displayed in the reserved display area and the normal reserved images displayed in the first to third reserved display areas are displayed in front of the prefetch effect frame image.

Next, at timing t5, a new variable display of decorative symbols is started. At the timing when the new variable display of the decorative pattern is started, the 3rd pine preview image, the 4th pine preview image, the 6th pine preview image and the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are switched again, and the left decorative pattern to The display mode is such that the third pine notice image, the fourth pine notice image, and the sixth pine notice image are displayed in front of the right decorative pattern.

Next, at timing t7, the display of the fifth pine preview image is started. FIG. 391(C) shows the display state immediately after the display of the fifth pine preview image is started at timing t7. Specifically, it shows a state in which the fifth pine notice image with the characters "SP Reach!" is displayed on the front side of the changing decorative pattern. The 5th pine notice image has the character "SP reach!" This indicates that the change in is the special reach.

Next, at timing t9, the left decorative symbols to the right decorative symbols are all stopped and displayed. FIG. 391(D) shows a display state in which all the left decorative symbols to the right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed at timing t9. At the timing when the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed, the 3rd pine preview image, the 4th pine preview image to the 6th pine preview image, and the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are displayed in reverse order, The left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are displayed in front of the third pine preview image, the fourth pine preview image to the sixth pine preview image.

Next, at timing t10, a new variable display of decorative symbols is started. At the timing when the new variable display of the decoration pattern is started, the 3rd pine preview image, the 4th pine preview image, the 6th pine preview image, the left decoration pattern, the right decoration pattern, and the left decoration pattern are replaced again. The display mode is such that the third pine notice image, the fourth pine notice image to the sixth pine notice image are displayed in front of the right decorative pattern.

Next, at timing t11, the display of the second pine tree preview image is started. FIG. 391(E) shows the display state immediately after the display of the second pine preview image is started at timing t11. Specifically, it shows a state in which a second pine forewarning image with the words "Beware of the frame!" is displayed in front of the changing decorative pattern. The second notice image has a character string "Caution on the frame!" It shows that the ear frame movable body provided on the frame changes from the first state to the second state at a predetermined timing corresponding to the variation of the decorative pattern.

Next, at timing t13, the white pending image displayed in the first pending display area changes to a green pending image. At the same time, the display of the third forewarning image for notifying that the white pending image will change to the green pending image ends. FIG. 391(F) shows the state immediately after these displays are performed at timing t13.

Next, at timing t14, all of the left decorative symbols to the right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. FIG. 391(F) shows a display state in which all the left decorative symbols to the right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed at timing t14. At the timing when the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed, the 2nd pine preview image, the 4th pine preview image to the 6th pine preview image, and the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are displayed in reverse order, The left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are displayed in front of the second pine preview image, the fourth pine preview image to the sixth pine preview image.

Next, at timing t15, a new variable display of decorative symbols is started. At the timing when the new variable display of the decoration pattern starts, the 2nd pine preview image, the 4th pine preview image, the 6th pine preview image, the left decoration pattern, the right decoration pattern, and the left decoration pattern are replaced again. The display mode is such that the second pine notice image, the fourth pine notice image to the sixth pine notice image are displayed in front of the right decorative pattern. Further, the variation of this decorative pattern is a variation corresponding to the suspension caused by the winning of the game ball in the first start hole 2002 at the timing t2, and is a variation display targeted for the look-ahead effect display.

Next, at timing t17, the display of the first pine tree preview image is started. FIG. 391(G) shows the display state immediately after the display of the first pine preview image is started at timing t17. Specifically, it shows a state in which the first forewarning image with the words "button ready" is displayed in front of the changing decorative pattern. The character string "button ready" is attached to the first preview image, which indicates that the operation of the operation button 410 will be enabled at a predetermined timing.

Next, at timing t20, the characters added to the fourth pine preview image change from the characters "01 seconds later?" to the characters "Chance!". At the same time, the green pending image displayed in the pending display area changes to the red pending image. FIG. 392(A) shows the state immediately after these displays are performed at timing t20. The 4th pine preview image was green until then, but becomes gray due to the announcement corresponding to the 4th pine preview image (change to red reserved image).

Next, at timing t22, the display of the fourth pine preview image with the characters "Chance!" ends.

Next, at timing t25, the characters attached to the sixth pine preview image change from the characters "01 seconds later?" to the characters "Chance!". At the same time, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 starts falling to the front side of the display area. At the same time, the left decorative pattern with the number "2" and the right decorative pattern with the number "2" are temporarily stopped and displayed to generate a ready-to-win state. It should be noted that the middle decorative pattern continues to be displayed in a variable display state in which it is scrolled downward. FIG. 392B shows the state immediately after these displays are performed at timing t25. The preview image of the sixth pine tree has been green until then, but it becomes gray because the preview corresponding to the preview image of the sixth pine tree (movement of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800) has been performed.

Next, from timing t25 to timing t29, after the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 changes from the first state (standby state) to the second state (dropped state), the second state is maintained for a predetermined time, and then the second state ( dropped state) to the first state (standby state). Also, at timing t27, the display of the sixth pine preview image with the characters "Chance!" is terminated.

Next, at timing t30, the size of the decorative pattern changes and special reach occurs. Specifically, the left decorative pattern with the number “2”, which had been temporarily stopped and displayed approximately in the vertical center on the left side of the display area, is reduced to a square shape and temporarily displayed at the lower left of the display area. It will be in the stopped display state. Similarly, the right decorative pattern with the number "2", which had been temporarily stopped in the vertical center of the right side of the display area, was reduced to a square shape and temporarily stopped in the lower right of the display area. state. Further, the left decorative design and the right decorative design change from the state of being displayed behind the look-ahead performance frame image to the state of being displayed on the front side of the look-ahead performance frame image. At the same time, the size of the middle decorative pattern in the horizontal direction is approximately doubled, and a variable display is performed. At the same time, the display of the fifth pine preview image with the characters "SP reach!" is terminated. FIG. 392(C) shows the state immediately after these displays are performed at timing t30.

Next, at timing t35, the ear frame movable body changes from the first state (standby state) to the second state (moved to the movement position or rotated). Also, the characters attached to the second pine preview image change from the characters "Be careful on the frame!" to the characters "Moving on the frame!". FIG. 392(D) shows the state immediately after the characters attached to the second pine preview image change to the characters "moving on frame!" at timing t30. The second pine preview image has been green until then, but it turns gray because the previous notice (state change of the ear frame movable body) corresponding to the second pine preview image has been performed.

Next, at timing t41, the operation of the operation button 410 changes to a valid state. Also, the characters attached to the first preview image change from the characters "button preparation" to the characters "press OK!". Also, in the center of the lower portion of the display area in the left-right direction, an image imitating a button with the characters "PUSH" is displayed. FIG. 392(E) shows the state immediately after the characters attached to the first pine preview image change to the characters "Press OK!" at timing t30. The first pine notice image has been green until then, but it becomes gray because the notice corresponding to the first pine notice image (change to a state in which the operation of the operation button 410 is enabled) has been performed.

Although illustration is omitted, during a period from timing t41 to timing t43, when the player operates a button, some kind of display suggesting the degree of expectation for a big win is performed. For example, it may be configured such that a character string "May not hit..." or a character string "May hit..." is displayed for one second immediately after the button is operated in the display area according to the button operation. . In this case, if the character string "may not win..." is displayed, the expectation of a big hit is higher than when the character string "may not win..." is displayed. good.

Next, at timing t45, the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed in either a display mode indicating that the special lottery result is a loss or a display mode indicating that the special lottery result is a big hit. be done. FIG. 392(F) shows a display state in which the special lottery result is stop-displayed in a display mode indicating that the special lottery result is lost. Also, FIG. 392(G) shows a display state in which the special lottery result is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating that the special lottery result is a big win. At this time, the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern, which have been reduced and displayed at the corner of the display area, return to their original sizes and are stopped and displayed at substantially the center of the display area in the vertical direction. In addition, the horizontal width of the middle decorative pattern also returns to its original width, and is stopped and displayed at the substantially central position in the vertical direction of the display area.

As described above, in this embodiment, during the variation of the decorative patterns, the decorative patterns are displayed in front of the first to sixth pine preview images, and during the stop display of the decorative patterns, the first The pine notice image to the sixth pine notice image are configured to be displayed on the front side of the decorative pattern. By adopting such a configuration, the player can visually clearly grasp the start and stop of each variable display. It is possible to recognize that the decorative pattern corresponding to the reserved image is approaching the variable display without bothering to confirm the movement of the reserved image corresponding to the prize winning.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 390, an effect example is shown in which all of the first to sixth pine preview images are displayed. Based on this, only a part of the pine preview image may be displayed. In this case, it is preferable to display the pine forewarning image from a predetermined timing before the decorative pattern is stopped displayed to a predetermined timing after the start of the new variable display. For example, in the production example shown in FIG. 390, the pine forewarning image is displayed during the period from timing t3 to timing t6, the period from timing t8 to timing t11, and the period from timing t13 to timing t16. do it.

For example, in the case of displaying only the first forewarning image with the words "button ready!" good. Further, when displaying only the second pine forewarning image with the text "Caution on the frame!" Good to configure. The same is true for the third pine preview image to the sixth pine preview image.

By displaying a plurality of pine preview images, one of the pine preview images may be displayed during the period from timing t3 to timing t16. For example, in the effect example shown in FIG. 390, the third pine forewarning image with the characters "green pending!" is not displayed from timing t13 to timing t16. Also, the 5th pine preview image with the characters "SP reach!" is not displayed from timing t3 to timing t6. However, if both the third pine preview image and the sixth pine preview image are displayed, the pine preview image will be displayed during the period from timing t3 to timing t16. In this way, it is possible to display a plurality of pine forewarning images with different display start timings and display end timings.

The size of the look-ahead performance frame image is configured to display a look-ahead performance frame image larger than the performance examples shown in FIGS. You may do so. In this case, the width of the look-ahead rendering frame image, which is a shape surrounding the display area, is made thicker, and when the left to right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, the left and upper sides of the left decorative pattern and the upper side of the middle decorative pattern are displayed. , the upper side and the right side of the right decorative pattern may overlap the look-ahead effect frame image. Also, in this case, it is preferable that the number area of each of the statically displayed decorative symbols is configured so as not to overlap the look-ahead effect frame image. FIG. 393(A) is a display example of the pre-reading effect frame image having such a widened width immediately after timing t2, and FIG. This is an example.

By adopting such a configuration, even if there is a case where none of the pine forewarning images is displayed during the period from timing t3 to timing t16, the look-ahead effect frame image is behind the decorative pattern when the variation of the decorative pattern is stopped. , and the player can visually and clearly grasp the start and stop of each variable display.
Further, even when the decorative pattern corresponding to the suspension that triggered the display of the pine preview image is stopped and displayed, the decorative pattern will be displayed in front of the pre-reading effect frame image.

FIG. 394 is a modified embodiment of the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 394, the suspension display area, first to fourth suspension display areas are provided from the lower left position of the display area toward the upper right. FIG. 394(A) shows a display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t3) after the look-ahead effect display is started in FIG. Also, FIG. 394(B) shows a display state in which all the left decorative symbols to the right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed at timing t4 in FIG. In addition, FIG. 394 (A), FIG. 394 (B), the suspension display area, the first suspension display area, the second suspension display area is a normal suspension in a circular shape, the third suspension display area , a state in which a blue pending image indicating that the degree of expectation for a big hit is high is displayed. In addition, the number of suspensions is three, and the fourth suspension display area is indicated by a dotted line.

In this embodiment, during the variable display of the left to right decorative symbols, the reserved image is displayed closer to the viewer than the left to right decorative symbols. On the other hand, at the timing when the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed, the display order of the reserved image and the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern is reversed, and the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are closer than the reserved image. displayed on the side.

In this way, when the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed, part of the first to third reserved display regions and all of the fourth display region are temporarily hidden by the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern. state. In addition, as the third reserved display area, the second reserved display area, the first reserved display area, and the reserved display area are approached, the area where each display area is hidden by the decorative pattern decreases, and the left decorative pattern to the right decoration When the symbols are displayed in a stationary state, the visibility of each reserved image gradually increases, and the player's expectation for the big win increases at an accelerated pace.

With reference to FIGS. 395 and 396, depending on the points displayed corresponding to the predetermined performance display in the display area during the variable display of the decorative symbols, the variable display result of the decorative symbols becomes the variable display result indicating the big win. Shown is an example of an effect that indicates the degree of expectation.

Specifically, when the variable display of the decorative patterns is started, the temporary stop display of the decorative patterns is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 1 to 4 times) in accordance with the degree of expectation that the result of the variable display will be a big win. The degree of expectation for a big hit is suggested by these temporary stop display effects. 396(A) to 396(H), examples of effects will be described below.

FIGS. 396(A) to 396(H) are diagrams showing an example of the display mode from the start to the end of the "Oden x shopkeeper's time!" effect.

The "Oden x shopkeeper's time!" effect is one of the display effects performed based on the special lottery result obtained when the game ball wins the first starting hole 2002.例文帳に追加In this production example, after the Oden production image display production pattern, which will be described later, is executed four times, it is expected that the result of the variable display of the decorative symbols, which are being variably displayed, will be a big hit, due to the Oden image and the Oden points, which will be described later. degree is suggested.

FIG. 396(A) is a diagram showing a state immediately after the first oden effect image display effect pattern, which will be described later, starts with the start of the "Oden x shopkeeper's time!" effect. In addition, immediately after the display state of the presentation mode display area, the left oden presentation image display area to the right oden presentation image display area, and the accumulated oden point display area, which will be described later, the left decorative pattern to the right decoration are started. It shows the state where the variable display of the symbols has started.

In this state, a rectangular effect mode display area having long sides equal to the vertical length of the display area is provided at the right end of the display area. The presentation mode display area enters a state in which display is performed as the presentation of "Oden x Shopkeeper's time!" . In the effect mode display area, the name of the effect state being executed is given in vertical writing. In this production example, as shown in FIGS. 396(A) to 396(H), a character string "Oden x shopkeeper's time!" is attached.

The display area is provided with three oden effect image display areas: a left oden effect image display area, a middle oden effect image display area, and a right oden effect image display area. Each oden effect display area is a display area in which an oden effect image, which will be described later, is displayed.

The left oden effect image display area is the position where the left decorative pattern is displayed and temporarily stopped, the middle oden effect image display area is the position where the middle decorative pattern is stopped and temporarily stopped, and the right oden effect image display area. are provided at the positions where the right decorative pattern is stopped and temporarily stopped.

Further, each oden effect image display area is provided inside the peripheral portion of the decorative pattern displayed at the corresponding position.

It should be noted that the number area located in the center of the background area in each of the left decorative design to the right decorative design is a special effect including "Oden x Shopkeeper's time!" ) to FIG. 396(H), it is displayed in the lower left part of the background area in a size smaller than that during normal rendering. As a result, the visibility of the number area is ensured even when an oden effect image, which will be described later, is superimposed on the front side of the decorative symbols while the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed.

The oden effect image is an image displayed in the left oden effect image display area to the right oden effect image display area, and two types of the oden image and the angry face image are provided.

The oden performance image is displayed at a position overlapping with the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern, and is displayed in front of each decorative pattern during variable display that scrolls downward. On the other hand, with respect to each decorative pattern that is temporarily stopped, the oden effect image is displayed in front of each decorative pattern that is temporarily stopped, and the decorative pattern that is temporarily stopped is displayed in front of the oden effect image. In some cases, it may be displayed on the side.

The oden image is one of the images indicating the adjustment points of oden points, which are displayed in the left oden effect image display area to the right oden effect image display area, which will be described later. The oden image is an image of an isosceles triangle shape that imitates konjac, which is a type of oden.

The angry face image is one of the effect images indicating the adjustment points of the oden points described later, which are displayed in the left oden effect image display area to the right oden effect image display area. The angry face image is a circular image that imitates the angry face of the owner of a food stall that sells oden.

FIG. 395 shows 15 oden effect image display effect patterns that define combinations of oden effect images to be displayed in each image display area from the left oden effect image display area to the right oden effect image display area. Each oden effect image display effect pattern will be described below.

The oden effect image display effect pattern 01 is a effect pattern in which no oden effect image is displayed.

The oden effect image display effect pattern 02 and the oden effect image display effect pattern 03 are effect patterns in which one oden effect image is displayed. As shown in FIG. 395, when the oden effect image display effect pattern 02 is executed, an oden image is displayed in the left oden effect image display area. Further, when the oden effect image display effect pattern 03 is executed, an angry face image is displayed in the left oden effect image display area. Hereinafter, although description is omitted, in each effect pattern, whether or not an oden effect image is displayed in each of the left oden effect image display area, the middle oden effect image display area, and the right oden effect image display area is determined. If an effect image is to be displayed, it is defined which of the oden image and the angry face image is to be displayed.

Oden effect image display effect pattern 04 to oden effect image display effect pattern 07 are effect patterns in which two oden effect images are displayed.

Oden effect image display effect pattern 08 to oden effect image display effect pattern 15 are effect patterns in which three oden effect images are displayed.

In this production example, first, as shown in FIG. 396(A), when the production "Oden x shopkeeper's time!" Execution of pattern 04 is started.

FIGS. 396(A) and 396(B) show display states displayed when the oden effect image display effect pattern 04 is executed. FIG. 396(A) shows a state in which an oden image is displayed in the left oden effect image display area, an oden image is displayed in the middle oden effect image display area, and an oden effect image is displayed in the right oden effect image display area. It shows a state where there is no

At the lower left end of the display area, there is provided a rectangular total oden point display area having a long side approximately half the length of the display area in the vertical direction. In the accumulated oden point display area, as the production of "Oden x shopkeeper's time!" Along with this, the character string indicating the accumulated oden points is not displayed. The total oden points will be described later.

A character string such as "XX points!" is written vertically in the cumulative oden point display area. The "XX" portion of this character string displays the accumulated oden points. If the oden point is a negative value, it is displayed with a "-" sign added. A method for calculating the accumulated oden points will be described later. It should be noted that the cumulative oden point value is "0" when the "Oden x shopkeeper's time!" effect is started.

In FIG. 396(A), the initial value of the accumulated oden points is "0" points, and the character string "0 points!" The state attached to the total oden point display area is shown.

FIG. 396(B) shows the display state at the timing after a predetermined time (specifically, three seconds) has passed from the state shown in FIG. 396(A).

When a predetermined time (specifically, one second) elapses from the timing when the execution of the oden effect image display effect pattern 04 is started (the display state shown in FIG. 396(A)), the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are displayed. It changes from a display state in which the display moves downward and is variably displayed to a state in which the temporary stop display is performed. Specifically, the left decorative pattern is a decorative pattern with the number "5", the middle decorative pattern is a decorative pattern with the number "6", and the right decorative pattern is a decorative pattern with the number "6". The symbols change from a display state in which the symbols move downward and are variably displayed to a state in which they are temporarily stopped.

In addition, oden images are displayed in the left oden effect image display area and the middle oden effect image display area.

As a result, the oden image is displayed on the front side of the left decorative symbol that is temporarily stopped, and the oden image is displayed on the front side of the middle decorative symbol that is temporarily stopped. Become.

Also, when a predetermined time (specifically 1.5 seconds) has passed from the state shown in FIG. The oden image is displayed on the front side of the oden image.

Here, the obtained oden point display area will be described. The obtained oden point display areas are three oblong rectangular display areas provided in the upper part of the display area. The three acquired oden point display areas are arranged in the horizontal direction, and are provided in order from the left to the left acquired oden point display area, the middle acquired oden point display area, and the right acquired oden point display area. In addition, the three acquired oden point display areas correspond to the oden effect image display areas. Above the left oden effect image display area is the left acquired oden point display area, and above the middle oden effect image display area. A middle obtained oden point display area and a right obtained oden point display area are provided above the right oden effect image display area in correspondence with each other.

In addition, at the timing when a predetermined time (specifically, two seconds) has passed since the execution of an arbitrary oden effect image display effect pattern is started, an oden effect is displayed in front of each decorative pattern in the state of being temporarily stopped. When the image is displayed, an arbitrary oden point increase/decrease image is displayed in the obtained oden point display area corresponding to the oden effect image display area where the oden effect image is displayed.

Next, the oden point increase/decrease image will be described. The oden point increase/decrease image is a production image that indicates the addition or subtraction of oden points displayed in the left oden point display area to the right oden point display area, and there are two types of oden point increase images and oden point decrease images. ing.

For example, at the timing when a predetermined time (specifically, two seconds) has passed since the execution of the oden effect image display effect pattern 02 was started, the oden image is displayed on the front side of the left decorative symbol in the state of temporary stop display. When displayed, in the left acquired oden point display area corresponding to the oden effect image display area where the oden image is displayed, oden showing a symbol and a number such as "+1" indicating that the oden point has increased by 1 point A point increase image is displayed.

Further, for example, at the timing when a predetermined time (specifically, two seconds) has passed since the execution of the oden effect image display effect pattern 03 is started, an angry When the face image is displayed, a sign such as "-1" indicating that the oden point has decreased by 1 point is displayed in the left oden point display area corresponding to the oden effect image display area where the angry face image is displayed. and an oden point reduction image showing a number is displayed.

At the timing when a predetermined time (specifically, two seconds) has passed since the execution of the predetermined oden effect image display effect pattern is started, the oden effect When the image is not displayed, the oden point increase/decrease image is not displayed in the acquired oden point display area.

In this example of effect, a temporary stop display is performed at the timing when a predetermined time (specifically, two seconds) has passed since the execution of the oden effect image display effect pattern 04 shown in FIG. Since the oden image is displayed on the front side of the left decorative pattern of the state, in FIG. And the oden point increase image showing the number is displayed.

Here, a method for calculating the total oden points displayed in the total oden point display area will be described. At the timing when a predetermined time (specifically, two seconds) has passed since the execution of the predetermined oden effect image display effect pattern has started, the oden point increase/decrease image is displayed in the left acquired oden point display area to the right acquired oden point display area. When displayed, the oden points indicated by the oden point increase/decrease image are added to calculate the addition/subtraction acquired oden points. If the calculated added/subtracted acquired oden points are a value other than "0", for the accumulated oden points indicated by "XX" in the character string "XX points!" attached to the accumulated oden point display area, By adding the acquired oden points by addition and subtraction, the value obtained by the addition becomes a new accumulated oden point. The new accumulated oden points are "XX points" added to the accumulated oden point display area at the timing when a predetermined time (specifically, 3 seconds) has passed since the execution of the predetermined oden effect image display effect pattern was started. !” is displayed as a new accumulated oden point value indicated by “XX” in the character string.

At the timing when a predetermined time (specifically, 2 seconds) has passed since the execution of the predetermined oden effect image display effect pattern has started, the oden points are increased or decreased in the left acquired oden point display area to the right acquired oden point display area. When the image is not displayed, the total oden points displayed in the total oden point display area do not change.

In addition, at the timing when a predetermined time (specifically, two seconds) has passed since execution of a predetermined oden effect image display effect pattern has started, the oden points are increased or decreased in the left acquired oden point display area to the right acquired oden point display area. When the added/subtracted oden points calculated by adding the oden points indicated by the oden point increase/decrease image displayed in the image is "0" (for example, one oden point increase image and an oden point decrease image If one is displayed), the total oden points displayed in the total oden point display area do not change.

In this example of effect, the left oden effect image is displayed at the timing when a predetermined time (specifically, two seconds) has passed since the execution of the oden effect image display effect pattern 04 shown in FIG. When the oden point increase/decrease image is displayed in one of the display areas from the area to the right oden effect image display area, the oden points indicated by the oden point increase/decrease image are added. The displayed oden point increase/decrease image is only the oden point increase image showing a symbol and a number such as "+1" displayed in the left oden effect image display area.

Further, since the value of the accumulated oden points is "0", the character string attached to the accumulated oden point display area is "0 points!".

As a result, the addition/subtraction oden point value "+1" is added to the cumulative oden point value "0", resulting in a new cumulative oden point value of "+1".

As a result, in the display state shown in FIG. 396(B) after a predetermined time (specifically, three seconds) has elapsed since the oden effect image display effect pattern 04 shown in FIG. 396(A) was started. , the character string attached to the total oden point display area is "1 point!".

The display state at the timing after a predetermined time (specifically, 3 seconds) has passed since the execution of the predetermined oden effect image display effect pattern is started, and at the timing at which the predetermined time (specifically, 1 second) has continued, Execution of the predetermined oden effect image display effect pattern is terminated.

In this example of effect, the display state at the timing after a predetermined time (specifically, three seconds) has elapsed since execution of the oden effect image display effect pattern 04 shown in FIG. B), and after the display state shown in FIG. 396(B) continues for a predetermined time (specifically, one second), the oden effect image display effect pattern 04 is executed. ends.

After the execution of the predetermined oden effect image display effect pattern is completed, when the next predetermined oden effect image display effect pattern is executed, the oden image display effect interval is maintained for a predetermined time (specifically, one second). done.

Specifically, at the same time when the oden image display effect interval is started, the oden effect image in the oden effect image display area is displayed according to the predetermined oden effect image display effect pattern whose execution has ended. Then, the oden point increase/decrease image in the obtained oden point display area is not displayed.

In addition, at the same time when the oden image display effect interval is started, the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern which are temporarily stopped and displayed according to the predetermined oden effect image display effect pattern whose execution has ended are lowered again. It will be in a state of being variably displayed so as to scroll in the direction. In the variable display resumed in the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern, the decorative patterns are scrolled downward and displayed until the next predetermined oden effect image display effect pattern is executed and a temporary stop state is reached. The variable display state is maintained.

In this example of effect, when the execution of the oden effect image display effect pattern 04 is completed, the oden image display effect interval is started. Simultaneously with the start of the oden image display effect interval, the oden image in the left oden effect image display area and the oden point increase image in the left acquired oden point display area shown in FIG. 396(B) are displayed. It will be in the state of not

At the same time when the oden image display effect interval is started, according to the oden effect image display effect pattern 04 whose execution has ended, the left decorative pattern with the number "5" is replaced with the number "5" as the middle decorative pattern. The left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern, which were in the state where the decorative pattern with the number "6" as the right decorative pattern and the decorative pattern with the number "6" as the right decorative pattern, were temporarily stopped and displayed, are all variably displayed. state is resumed.

The variable display resumed in the left decorative design to the right decorative design is that each decorative design shown in FIG. Until the state is reached, the variable display state in which the decorative symbols are scrolled downward and displayed is maintained.

FIG. 396(C) shows the state immediately after the oden effect image display effect pattern 09, which is the second oden effect image display effect pattern in the "oden x shopkeeper's time!" effect, is started.

At this time, since the oden effect image display effect pattern is the oden effect image display effect pattern 09, the oden image is displayed in the left oden effect image display area, the angry face image is displayed in the middle oden effect image display area, and the right oden effect image is displayed. In the effect image display area, an angry face image is displayed in front of each decorative pattern being displayed in a variable manner.

Further, the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are maintained in a variable display state in which the decorative patterns are scrolled downward and displayed. In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 396(A), as the production of "Oden x shopkeeper's time!" is started, the character string "Oden x shopkeeper's time!" and the displayed state is maintained. In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 396(B), the character string "1 point!" attached to the total oden point display area is maintained to be continuously displayed. In addition, the oden point increase/decrease image is not displayed in the acquired oden point display area.

After a predetermined time (specifically, 1 second) has elapsed since the execution of the oden effect image display effect pattern 09 shown in FIG. It will be in the state of the temporary stop display from the state. Specifically, the left decorative pattern is a decorative pattern with the number "3", the middle decorative pattern is a decorative pattern with the number "4", and the right decorative pattern is a decorative pattern with the number "4". The symbols change from a state in which they are displayed in a variable state to a state in which they are displayed in a temporary stop state. At this time, in the state shown in FIG. 396(C), each oden effect image displayed in each oden effect image display area is displayed on the front side of each decorative symbol which is in a state of temporary stop display. condition continues.

Also, when a predetermined time (specifically 1.5 seconds) has passed from the state shown in FIG. A left decorative pattern with a number "3" is displayed in front of the oden image displayed in the left oden effect image display area. As a result, in the oden effect image display area, the oden image in the left oden effect image display area cannot be viewed, and the middle oden effect image display area displays an angry face image, and the right oden effect image display area displays an angry face image. It will be in a state where

Further, when a predetermined time (specifically, two seconds) elapses from the state shown in FIG. Corresponding to the fact that the angry face image is displayed in the image display area, in the acquired oden point display area, the medium acquired oden point display area has "-1" indicating that the oden point is reduced by 1 point. A state where an oden point reduction image showing a symbol and a number is displayed, and an oden point reduction image showing a symbol and a number such as "-1" indicating that the oden point is reduced by 1 point is displayed in the right acquired oden point display area. becomes.

At this time, the oden point increase/decrease images displayed in the acquired oden point display area are the oden point decrease image showing "-1" in the middle acquired oden point display area and the oden point decrease image showing "-1" in the right acquired oden point display area. , the value of the added/subtracted acquired oden points in the oden effect image display effect pattern 09 becomes "-2" which is the sum of "-1" and "-1".

In addition, since the calculated added/subtracted acquired oden point value is "-2" and is a value other than "0", addition is performed to the accumulated oden point value shown in the accumulated oden point display area. . In the state shown in FIG. 396(C), the character string attached to the cumulative oden point display area is "1 point!" On the other hand, by adding "-2" which is the value of the addition/subtraction acquired oden points in the oden effect image display effect pattern 09, the new accumulated oden point value becomes "-1".

As a result, in the state shown in FIG. 396(D), which is the timing when a predetermined time (specifically, 3 seconds) has passed from the state shown in FIG. The string will be "-1 point!".

FIG. 396(D) shows the display state at the timing after a predetermined time (specifically, 3 seconds) has passed since execution of the oden effect image display effect pattern 09 shown in FIG. 396(C) is started. there is

Specifically, in the left decorative design to the right decorative design, the decorative design with the number "3" as the left decorative design, the decorative design with the number "4" as the middle decorative design, and the right decorative design Decorative symbols with the number "4" are temporarily stopped and displayed.

In addition, in the oden effect image display area, an angry face image is displayed in the middle oden effect image display area, and an angry face image is displayed in the right oden effect image display area.

In addition, in the acquired oden point display area, in the middle acquired oden point display area, an oden point decrease image showing a symbol and a number such as "-1" indicating that the oden point is reduced by 1 point is displayed in the right acquired oden point display area. A symbol such as "-1" indicating that the oden point is reduced by one point and an oden point reduction image indicating a number are displayed.

Also, in the cumulative oden point display area, a character string such as "-1 point!" is attached.

After the display state shown in FIG. 396(D) continues for a predetermined time (specifically, one second), the second oden effect image display effect pattern in the effect "Oden x shopkeeper time!" The execution of the oden effect image display effect pattern 09 ends.

After the display state shown in FIG. 396(D) continues for a predetermined time (specifically, 1 second), the execution of the oden image display effect pattern 09 ends. be started.

At the same time when the oden image display effect interval is started, the angry face image in the middle oden effect image display area, the angry face image in the right oden effect image display area, and the middle acquisition shown in FIG. The oden point reduction image in the oden point display area and the oden point reduction image in the right obtained oden point display area are not displayed.

At the same time when the oden image display effect interval is started, according to the oden effect image display effect pattern 09 whose execution has ended, the left decorative pattern with the number "3" is replaced with the number "3" as the middle decorative pattern. The left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern, which were in the state where the decorative pattern with the number "4" as the right decorative pattern and the decorative pattern with the number "4" as the right decorative pattern, were temporarily stopped and displayed, are all variably displayed. state is resumed.

The variable display resumed in the left decorative design to the right decorative design is that each decorative design shown in FIG. Until the state is reached, the variable display state in which the decorative symbols are scrolled downward and displayed is maintained.

FIG. 396(E) shows the state immediately after the oden effect image display effect pattern 10, which is the third oden effect image display effect pattern in the "oden x shopkeeper's time!" effect, is started.

At this time, since the oden effect image display effect pattern is the oden effect image display effect pattern 10, the oden image is displayed in the left oden effect image display area, the angry face image is displayed in the middle oden effect image display area, and the right oden effect image is displayed. In the effect image display area, the oden image is displayed in front of each decorative pattern displayed in a variable display state.

Further, the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are maintained in a variable display state in which the decorative patterns are scrolled downward and displayed. In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 396(A), as the production of "Oden x shopkeeper's time!" is started, the character string "Oden x shopkeeper's time!" and the displayed state is maintained. In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 396(D), the character string "-1 point!" attached to the total oden point display area is maintained to be continuously displayed. In addition, the oden point increase/decrease image is not displayed in the acquired oden point display area.

After a predetermined time (specifically, 1 second) has elapsed since execution of the oden effect image display effect pattern 10 shown in FIG. It will be in the state of the temporary stop display from the state. Specifically, the left decorative pattern is a decorative pattern with the number "1", the middle decorative pattern is a decorative pattern with the number "2", and the right decorative pattern is a decorative pattern with the number "2". The symbols change from a state in which they are displayed in a variable state to a state in which they are displayed in a temporary stop state. At this time, in the state shown in FIG. 396(E), each oden effect image displayed in each oden effect image display area is displayed on the front side of each decorative symbol which is in the temporarily stopped state. condition continues.

Also, when a predetermined time (specifically 1.5 seconds) elapses from the state shown in FIG. A decorative pattern with a number "2" attached as a medium decorative pattern is displayed in front of the angry face image displayed in the medium effect image display area. As a result, in the oden effect image display area, the angry face image in the middle oden effect image display area cannot be visually recognized, and the oden image is displayed in the left oden effect image display area and the oden image is displayed in the right oden effect image display area. state.

Further, when a predetermined time (specifically, two seconds) elapses from the state shown in FIG. In the acquired oden point display area, the left acquired oden point display area has a symbol such as "+1" indicating that the oden point increases by 1 point, corresponding to the state where the oden images are displayed in the display area. An oden point increase image showing a number is displayed, and a sign such as "+1" indicating that the oden point is increased by one point and an oden point increase image showing a number are displayed in the right obtained oden point display area.

At this time, the oden point increase/decrease images displayed in the acquired oden point display area are the oden point increase image showing "+1" in the left acquired oden point display area and the oden point increase image showing "+1" in the right acquired oden point display area. Along with the oden point increasing image, the value of the addition/subtraction obtained oden points in the oden performance image display performance pattern 10 becomes "+2" which is the sum of "+1" and "+1".

Further, since the value of the calculated addition/subtraction obtained oden points is '+2' and is a value other than '0', addition is performed to the value of the accumulated oden points indicated in the accumulated oden point display area. In the state shown in FIG. 396(E), the character string added to the cumulative oden point display area is "-1 point!", so the cumulative oden point value is "-1". By adding "+2", which is the value of the addition/subtraction oden points in the oden effect image display effect pattern 10, to the value, the new accumulated oden point value becomes "1".

As a result, in the state shown in FIG. 396(D), which is the timing when a predetermined time (specifically, 3 seconds) has passed from the state shown in FIG. The character string to be displayed becomes "1 point!".

FIG. 396(F) shows the display state at the timing after a predetermined time (specifically, 3 seconds) has passed since execution of the oden effect image display effect pattern 10 shown in FIG. 396(E) is started. there is

Specifically, in the left decorative design to the right decorative design, the decorative design with the number "1" as the left decorative design, the decorative design with the number "2" as the middle decorative design, and the right decorative design Decorative symbols with the number "2" are temporarily stopped and displayed.

Further, in the oden effect image display area, the oden image is displayed in the left oden effect image display area, and the oden image is displayed in the right oden effect image display area.

In addition, in the obtained oden point display area, the left obtained oden point display area has an oden point increase image showing a symbol and a number such as "+1" indicating that the oden point increases by 1 point, and the right obtained oden point display area has oden points. A symbol such as "+1" indicating an increase of 1 point and an oden point increase image indicating a number are displayed.

In addition, in the accumulated oden point display area, a character string such as "1 point!" is attached.

After the display state shown in FIG. 396(F) continues for a predetermined time (specifically, one second), the third time of the oden effect image display effect pattern in the effect "Oden x Shopkeeper's time!" The execution of the oden effect image display effect pattern 10 ends.

After the display state shown in FIG. 396(F) continues for a predetermined time (specifically, 1 second), the execution of the oden image display effect pattern 10 ends. be started.

At the same time when the oden image display effect interval is started, the oden image in the left oden effect image display area, the oden image in the right oden effect image display area, and the left acquired oden points are shown in FIG. 396(F). The oden point increase image in the display area and the oden point increase image in the right acquired oden point display area are not displayed.

At the same time when the oden image display effect interval is started, according to the oden effect image display effect pattern 10 whose execution has ended, the left decorative pattern with the number "1" is replaced with the number "1" as the middle decorative pattern. The left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern, which were in the state where the decorative pattern with the number "2" as the right decorative pattern and the decorative pattern with the number "2" as the right decorative pattern, were temporarily stopped and displayed, are all variably displayed. state is resumed.

The variable display resumed in the left decorative design to the right decorative design is that each decorative design shown in FIG. Until the state is reached, the variable display state in which the decorative symbols are scrolled downward and displayed is maintained.

FIG. 396(G) shows the state immediately after the oden effect image display effect pattern 08, which is the fourth oden effect image display effect pattern in the "oden x shopkeeper's time!" effect, is started.

At this time, since the oden effect image display effect pattern is the oden effect image display effect pattern 08, the oden image is displayed in the left oden effect image display area, the oden image is displayed in the middle oden effect image display area, and the right oden effect is displayed. In the image display area, the oden image is displayed in front of each decorative pattern displayed in a variable display state.

Further, the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are maintained in a variable display state in which the decorative patterns are scrolled downward and displayed. In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 396(A), as the production of "Oden x shopkeeper's time!" is started, the character string "Oden x shopkeeper's time!" and the displayed state is maintained. In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 396(F), the character string "1 point!" attached to the total oden point display area is maintained to be continuously displayed. In addition, the oden point increase/decrease image is not displayed in the acquired oden point display area.

After a predetermined time (specifically, 1 second) has elapsed since execution of the oden effect image display effect pattern 08 shown in FIG. It will be in the state of the temporary stop display from the state. Specifically, the left decorative pattern is a decorative pattern with the number "6", the middle decorative pattern is a decorative pattern with the number "7", and the right decorative pattern is a decorative pattern with the number "7". The symbols change from a state in which they are displayed in a variable state to a state in which they are displayed in a temporary stop state. At this time, in the state shown in FIG. 396(G), each oden effect image displayed in each oden effect image display area is displayed on the front side of each decorative symbol which is in the temporarily stopped state. condition continues.

Also, when a predetermined time (specifically, 1.5 seconds) elapses from the state shown in FIG. Since the display state of each oden effect image display area is continued, the oden image is displayed in the left oden effect image display area, the oden image is displayed in the middle oden effect image display area, and the oden image is displayed in the right oden effect image display area. Each state is displayed.

Further, when a predetermined time (specifically, two seconds) has passed from the state shown in FIG. The oden image is displayed in the display area, and the oden image is displayed in the right oden effect image display area. An oden point increase image showing a symbol and a number such as "+1" indicating an increase, and an oden point increase image showing a symbol and a number such as "+1" indicating that the oden point is increased by 1 point in the medium acquired oden point display area However, in the right obtained oden point display area, a symbol such as "+1" indicating that the oden point is increased by one point and an oden point increase image indicating a number are displayed.

At this time, the oden point increase/decrease images displayed in the acquired oden point display area are the oden point increase image showing "+1" in the left acquired oden point display area and the oden point increase image showing "+1" in the middle acquired oden point display area. With the oden point increase image and the oden point increase image showing "+1" in the right acquired oden point display area, the values of addition and subtraction acquired oden points in the oden effect image display effect pattern 08 are "+1" and "+1". ” and “+1” become “+3”.

Further, since the value of the calculated addition/subtraction obtained oden points is '+3' and is a value other than '0', addition is performed to the value of the accumulated oden points indicated in the accumulated oden point display area. In the state shown in FIG. 396(G), the character string attached to the cumulative oden point display area is "1 point!" On the other hand, the addition of "+3", which is the value of the addition/subtraction oden points in the oden effect image display effect pattern 08, results in a new accumulated oden point value of "4".

As a result, in the state shown in FIG. 396(H), which is the timing when a predetermined time (specifically, 3 seconds) has elapsed from the state shown in FIG. The resulting string is "4 points!".

FIG. 396(H) shows the display state at the timing when a predetermined time (specifically, 3 seconds) has passed since execution of the oden effect image display effect pattern 08 shown in FIG. 396(G) is started. there is

Specifically, in the left decorative design to the right decorative design, the decorative design with the number "6" as the left decorative design, the decorative design with the number "7" as the middle decorative design, and the right decorative design Decorative symbols with the number "7" are temporarily stopped and displayed.

In addition, in the oden effect image display area, the oden image is displayed in the left oden effect image display area, the oden image is displayed in the middle oden effect image display area, and the oden image is displayed in the right oden effect image display area. there is

In addition, in the acquired oden point display area, the left acquired oden point display area has an oden point increase image showing a symbol and a number such as "+1" indicating that the oden point increases by 1 point, and the middle acquired oden point display area shows the oden point. The oden point increase image showing a symbol and number such as "+1" indicating that the oden is increased by 1 point, and the acquired oden point display area on the right shows a symbol and number such as "+1" that indicates that the oden point is increased by 1 point. Each point increase image is displayed.

In addition, in the cumulative oden point display area, a character string such as "4 points!" is attached.

After the display state shown in FIG. 396(H) continues for a predetermined time (specifically, one second), the fourth time of the oden effect image display effect pattern in the effect "Oden x Shopkeeper's time!" The execution of the oden effect image display effect pattern 08 ends.

After the execution of a predetermined oden effect image display effect pattern is completed, when the next predetermined oden effect image display effect pattern is not executed, the oden image display effect end interval is set to a predetermined time (specifically, 1 second). ).

Specifically, at the same time when the oden image display effect end interval is started, the oden effect image in the oden effect image display area is displayed according to the predetermined oden effect image display effect pattern whose execution has ended. Then, the oden point increase/decrease image in the obtained oden point display area is not displayed.

Further, with the start of the presentation of "Oden x shopkeeper's time!", the character string "Oden x shopkeeper's time!" attached in the presentation mode display area is maintained to be continuously displayed.

Further, when the execution of the predetermined oden effect image display effect pattern is completed and the next predetermined oden effect image display effect pattern is not executed, "XX points!" ” continues to be displayed.

In addition, at the same time when the oden image display effect end interval is started, the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern which are temporarily stopped and displayed according to the predetermined oden effect image display effect pattern whose execution has ended are decorated. The state in which the symbols are variably displayed is resumed. The variable display restarted in the left decorative design to the right decorative design is temporarily stopped when the left decorative design and the right decorative design are given the same arbitrary numbers as the reach state occurs. The variable display state in which the decorative symbols are scrolled downward and displayed is maintained until it becomes.

In this example of performance, when the execution of the oden performance image display performance pattern 08 is completed, the subsequent oden performance image display performance pattern is not executed, so that the oden image display performance end interval is started. Simultaneously with the start of the oden image display effect end interval, the oden image in the left oden effect image display area and the oden point increase image in the left acquired oden point display area shown in FIG. 396(H) are displayed. It will be in a state where it will not be

In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 396(A), as the production of "Oden x shopkeeper's time!" is started, the character string "Oden x shopkeeper's time!" and the displayed state is maintained.

In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 396(H), the character string "4 points!" attached to the total oden point display area is maintained to be continuously displayed.

At the same time when the oden image display effect end interval is started, according to the oden effect image display effect pattern 08 whose execution has ended, the left decorative pattern with the number "6" is changed to the middle decorative pattern with the number "6". The decorative pattern with the number "7" and the decorative pattern with the number "7" as the right decorative pattern are temporarily stopped and displayed, respectively. state is resumed.

The oden image display effect end interval continues for a predetermined time (specifically, one second). At the timing when a predetermined time (specifically, 1 second) has passed after the oden image display effect end interval ends, a decorative pattern with a predetermined number as the left decorative pattern is temporarily stopped from a state in which it is displayed in a variable manner. state. Next, when a predetermined time (specifically, 2 seconds) has elapsed after the oden image display effect end interval has ended, the same predetermined state as the right decorative pattern that is temporarily stopped and displayed on the left decorative pattern is displayed. The state in which the decorative symbols with the numbers of . Further, at the timing when the left decorative design and the right decorative design are temporarily stopped and displayed, the middle decorative design is maintained in a variable display state in which it is scrolled downward.

When a predetermined time (specifically, 5 seconds) elapses after the ready-to-win state occurs, the state in which the middle decorative pattern is variably displayed is changed to a state in which the variability is stopped.

Specifically, when the special lottery result that triggered the start of "Oden x shopkeeper time!" A decorative pattern attached with a number different from the decorative pattern attached with a predetermined number of the state is stopped and displayed.

On the other hand, when the special lottery result is a big hit, the decorations with the same numbers as the decorations with the predetermined numbers in the state of temporary stop display in the left decorations and the right decorations as middle decorations. The pattern is stopped and displayed.

With reference to FIGS. 396(A) to 396(H), an example of the effect in which the oden effect image display effect pattern is executed four times and "4" is finally displayed as the cumulative oden point value has been described. , the value of the cumulative oden points may be used to suggest the degree of expectation for a big hit by the player.

Specifically, based on the results of the special lottery, whether or not to execute the “Oden x Shopkeeper Time!” First, determine whether the value of Next, how many times the oden effect image display effect pattern is executed, in what order the oden effect image display effect pattern is executed, in each oden effect pattern, the oden effect image (oden image) when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped is displayed. , angry face image) to be displayed on the front side or the back side of the decorative pattern may be determined based on the final value of the accumulated oden points.

It is preferable to configure such that the higher the final value of the accumulated oden points, the higher the degree of expectation for a big hit. The final value of the accumulated oden points may be configured to take values from "-3" to "10", for example. In this case, when the cumulative oden point value is "-3" to "0", it is preferable that the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a failure without forming a ready-to-win state. In addition, when the value of the cumulative oden points is "1" to "10", the decorative pattern forms a ready-to-win state, and the formed ready-to-win state indicates the value obtained by multiplying the cumulative oden points by 10. The result may be configured to be the degree of expectation that is stopped and displayed. For example, if the final value of the cumulative oden points is "4", the degree of expectation for a big hit in the ready-to-win state that occurs thereafter may be set to 40%.

It should be noted that the number of times the oden effect image display effect pattern is executed may be determined with a predetermined number of times (for example, four times) as an upper limit. When the upper limit of the number of times the oden effect image display effect pattern is executed is set to 4, when the oden effect image display effect pattern is executed once, when the oden effect image display effect pattern is executed twice, the oden effect image display effect pattern is executed twice. One of the case where the effect image display effect pattern is executed three times and the case where the oden effect image display effect pattern is executed four times is selected based on the result of the special lottery.

At the start of the "Oden x shopkeeper's time!" effect (for example, the display state shown in FIG. 396(A)), the number of times the oden effect image display effect pattern is executed is displayed in the display area. It is preferable to configure so as to notify the In this case, the greater the number of times the oden effect image display effect pattern is executed, the higher the final value of the accumulated oden points. You will feel hopeful. It should be noted that the final value of accumulated oden points may be increased as the number of times the oden effect image display effect pattern is actually executed increases.

With such a configuration, it is possible to specifically know the degree of expectation for a big win by the number of points displayed. The number of points increases or decreases each time the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed, and the interest of the player in the temporarily stopped display of the decorative symbols can be enhanced.

395 and 396, the embodiment in which the oden image and the angry face image are displayed as the oden effect images has been shown, but only the oden image or only the angry face image is displayed as the oden effect image. Embodiments in which effects can be executed are described below with reference to FIGS. 397, 398, and 399.

395 and 396 are basically modified, the modified configurations will be particularly described, but the configurations that are not described will basically be illustrated in FIGS. Similar to the embodiment described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 397(A) is a diagram showing a table defining effect patterns capable of executing a "super oden time!" effect in which only an oden image is displayed as an oden effect image. Also, FIG. 398 is a diagram showing a display state in the display area when the "Super Oden Time!" effect is executed. Specifically, FIGS. 398(A) to 398(H) show, in chronological order, display examples when "Super Oden Time!" is executed as an effect corresponding to the suspension. 398(A), 398(B), 398(C), 398(D), 398(E), 398(F), 398(G), and 398(H) The performance proceeds in order.

As shown in FIG. 397(A), in the "super oden time!" effect, only the oden image is displayed as the oden effect image.

FIGS. 398(A) and 398(B) are examples of effects when the oden effect image display effect pattern 03 is selected in the "super oden time!" effect.

FIG. 398(C) and FIG. 398(D) are examples of effects when the oden effect image display effect pattern 03 is selected in the "super oden time!" effect.

FIG. 398(E) and FIG. 398(F) are examples of effects when the oden effect image display effect pattern 04 is selected in the "super oden time!" effect.

FIG. 398(G) and FIG. 398(H) are examples of effects when the oden effect image display effect pattern 04 is selected in the "super oden time!" effect.

In this way, it may be configured so that the accumulated oden points are not reduced. In this case, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the accumulated oden points are reduced and the player is disappointed.

FIG. 397(B) is a diagram showing a table defining a production pattern capable of executing a production in which only an angry face image is displayed as an Oden production image. FIG. 399 is a diagram showing the display state in the display area when the "shopkeeper's fury time!" presentation is executed. Specifically, FIGS. 399(A) to 399(H) show, in chronological order, display examples when "Shopkeeper's fury time!" is executed as an effect corresponding to the suspension. 399(A), 399(B), 399(C), 399(D), 399(E), 399(F), 399(G), and 399(H) The performance proceeds in order.

As shown in FIG. 397(B), in the "shopkeeper's fury time!" effect, only the angry face image is displayed as the oden effect image.
FIGS. 399(A) and 399(B) show an example of the effect when the oden effect image display effect pattern 03 is selected in the effect of "shopkeeper's fury time!".
FIG. 399(C) and FIG. 399(D) show an example of an effect when the oden effect image display effect pattern 04 is selected in the effect of "shopkeeper's fury time!".
FIG. 399(E) and FIG. 399(F) show an example of the effect when the oden effect image display effect pattern 02 is selected in the effect of "shopkeeper's fury time!".
FIG. 399(G) and FIG. 399(H) are examples of effects in the case where the oden effect image display effect pattern 04 is selected in the effect of "shopkeeper's fury time!".

In addition, in the "Shopkeeper's fury time!" production, the display in the accumulated oden point display area starts from "Remaining 10 points!" It is configured so that the accumulated oden points gradually decrease.

In this way, it may be configured so that the accumulated oden points do not increase. In this case, the player sees the effect of "Shopkeeper's fury time!" while hoping that the accumulated oden points will not decrease.

395 and 396, the embodiment in which the oden effect image is displayed a predetermined number of times while the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped has been described, but the effect is such that the oden effect image is displayed a predetermined number of times while the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. 400, 401 and 402 are described below.

In the present embodiment, as a look-ahead effect corresponding to the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2002, "Oden x Shopkeeper's Time!", "Super Oden Time!", and "Shopkeeper's Fury Time!" is doing.

Specifically, based on the special lottery result obtained when the game ball wins to the first start port 2002 and withheld, it may be configured to determine whether or not to carry out these look-ahead effects.

Figures 400(A) to 400(H) are tables when the effect "Oden x shopkeeper's time!" Examples are shown in chronological order. 400(A), 400(B), 400(C), 400(D), 400(E), 400(F), 400(G), and 400(H) The look-ahead performance progresses in order.

FIGS. 400(A) and 400(B) are examples of effects when the oden effect image display effect pattern 04 is selected in the effect of "Oden x shopkeeper's time!".

In addition, when executing the "Oden x shopkeeper's time!" A performance image is displayed on the front side or the rear side of the decorative pattern, an oden point increase/decrease image is displayed corresponding to the display mode of the oden performance image, and the accumulated oden points are updated corresponding to the displayed oden point increase/decrease image. It should be configured as follows. Figures 400(A), 400(C), 400(E), and 400(G) show the display state during the variation of the decorative pattern in Figures 400(B), 400(D), and 400 ( F) shows a display state in which the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. In FIG. 400(H), each decorative pattern is in a temporary stop state, and from this state, each decorative pattern fluctuates again to form a ready-to-win state, and then a display mode indicating a big win or a display mode indicating a loss. It will be in the state of being stopped by pressing .

FIG. 400(C) and FIG. 400(D) are examples of effects when the oden effect image display effect pattern 14 is selected in the effect of "Oden x shopkeeper's time!".

FIG. 400(E) and FIG. 400(F) are examples of effects when the oden effect image display effect pattern 10 is selected in the effect of "Oden x shopkeeper's time!".

FIG. 400(G) and FIG. 400(H) are examples of effects when the oden effect image display effect pattern 08 is selected in the effect "Oden x shopkeeper's time!".

It should be noted that the final value of the accumulated oden points may be configured to suggest the degree of expectation that the variation result of the decorative pattern corresponding to the starting prize that triggered the start of the look-ahead effect will be a display mode indicating a big win. .

In this way, by increasing or decreasing the accumulated oden points over a plurality of times of variable display, it is possible to arouse the player's interest in the manner in which the decorative symbols are stopped.

Figures 401(A) to 401(H) show display examples when "Super Oden Time!" They are shown in chronological order. 401(A), 401(B), 401(C), 401(D), 401(E), 401(F), and 401(G), the look-ahead effect progresses in this order. To go.

FIGS. 401(A) and 401(B) are examples of effects when the oden effect image display effect pattern 03 is selected in the "super oden time!" effect.

In addition, when executing the "Super Oden Time!" The image is displayed on the front side or the back side of the decorative pattern, the oden point increase/decrease image is displayed corresponding to the display mode of the oden effect image, and the accumulated oden points are updated according to the displayed oden point increase/decrease image. should be configured to Figures 401(A), 401(C), 401(E), and 401(G) show the display state during the variation of the decorative pattern in Figures 401(B), 401(D), and 401 ( F) shows a display state in which the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. In FIG. 401(H), each decorative design is in a temporary stop state, and from this state, each decorative design fluctuates again to form a ready-to-win state, and then a display mode indicating a big hit or a display mode indicating a loss. It will be in the state of being stopped by pressing .

FIG. 401(C) and FIG. 401(D) are examples of effects when the oden effect image display effect pattern 03 is selected in the "super oden time!" effect.

FIG. 401(E) and FIG. 401(F) are examples of effects when the oden effect image display effect pattern 04 is selected in the "super oden time!" effect.

FIG. 401(G) and FIG. 401(H) are examples of effects when the oden effect image display effect pattern 04 is selected in the "super oden time!" effect.

It should be noted that the final value of the accumulated oden points may be configured to suggest the degree of expectation that the variation result of the decorative pattern corresponding to the starting prize that triggered the start of the look-ahead effect will be a display mode indicating a big win. .

Figures 402(A) to 402(H) show display examples when "Shopkeeper's fury time!" They are shown in chronological order. 402(A), 402(B), 402(C), 402(D), 402(E), 402(F), and 402(G) progresses in order. To go.

FIGS. 402(A) and 402(B) show an example of the effect when the oden effect image display effect pattern 03 is selected in the effect of "shopkeeper's fury time!".

In addition, when executing the "shopkeeper's furious time!" The image is displayed on the front side or the back side of the decorative pattern, the oden point increase/decrease image is displayed corresponding to the display mode of the oden effect image, and the accumulated oden points are updated according to the displayed oden point increase/decrease image. should be configured to Figures 402(A), 402(C), 402(E), and 402(G) show the display state during the variation of the decorative pattern in Figures 402(B), 402(D), and 402 ( F) shows a display state in which the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. In FIG. 402(H), each decorative design is in a temporary stop state, and from this state, each decorative design fluctuates again to form a ready-to-win state, and then a display mode showing a big hit or a display mode showing a loss. It will be in the state of being stopped by pressing .

FIG. 402(C) and FIG. 402(D) are examples of effects in the case where the oden effect image display effect pattern 04 is selected in the effect of "shopkeeper's fury time!".

FIG. 402(E) and FIG. 402(F) are examples of effects in the case where the oden effect image display effect pattern 02 is selected in the effect of "shopkeeper's fury time!".

FIG. 402(G) and FIG. 402(H) are examples of effects in the case where the oden effect image display effect pattern 04 is selected in the effect of "shopkeeper's fury time!".

It should be noted that the final value of the accumulated oden points may be configured to suggest the degree of expectation that the variation result of the decorative pattern corresponding to the starting prize that triggered the start of the look-ahead effect will be a display mode indicating a big win. .

In the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 395 to 402, when the temporarily stopped or stopped decorative symbols are displayed in front of the oden effect image, the entire oden effect image is covered by the decorative symbols. Although it was configured to be hidden, when these embodiments are modified to display the temporarily stopped or stopped decorative pattern in front of the oden effect image, a part of the oden effect image may be configured to be visible.

FIGS. 403(A)-403(C) show an embodiment modified from the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 402. FIG. This embodiment shows the display state when the oden effect image display effect pattern 04 is executed in "shopkeeper's fury time!".

Fig. 403(A) shows the display state at the timing when execution of the oden effect image display effect pattern 04 is started, and Fig. 403(B) shows the display state after a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed from the display state of Fig. 403(A). At the timing when the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, all the angry face images are displayed in front of the decorative pattern in the left oden effect image display area to the right oden effect image display area. ing. In addition, FIG. 403(C) is timing when a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has passed from the display state of FIG. In the area, it shows a display state in which all the angry face images are displayed behind the decorative pattern.

As shown in the drawing, in this embodiment, even when the angry face image is hidden by the statically displayed decoration pattern, a part of the angry face image is visible to the player.

FIGS. 403(D)-403(F) show modified embodiments of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 401. FIG. This embodiment shows the display state when the oden effect image display effect pattern 04 is executed in "Super Oden Time!".

FIG. 403(D) shows the display state at the timing when execution of the oden effect image display effect pattern 04 is started, and FIG. At the timing when the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed, all the oden images are displayed in front of the decorative patterns in the left oden effect image display area to the right oden effect image display area. there is In addition, FIG. 403(F) is timing when a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has passed from the display state of FIG. In the area, it shows a display state in which all the oden face images are displayed behind the decorative patterns.

As shown in the drawing, in the present embodiment, even when the oden image is hidden by the decoration pattern that is stopped and displayed, a part of the oden image is visible to the player.

By adopting such a configuration, before temporary stop display or stop display of the decorative pattern, how many angry face images or oden images are displayed in the left oden effect image display area to the right oden effect image display area. It becomes possible for the player to confirm whether or not it was displayed.

In the above-described embodiment, when the oden image is displayed on the front side of the temporarily stopped or stopped decorative pattern, the oden point increase image is displayed, and the cumulative oden point value is increased by "1". or when an angry face image is displayed in front of the temporarily stopped or stopped decorative pattern, an oden point reduction image is displayed, and the value of the cumulative oden point is reduced by "1". Although the embodiment has been shown, the accumulated oden points may be changed when the oden image or the angry face image is displayed behind the temporarily stopped or stopped decorative pattern.

FIGS. 404(A)-404(F) show a modified embodiment of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 400. FIG. FIGS. 404(A) to 404(C) show the display state when the oden effect image display effect pattern 05 is executed in "Oden x shopkeeper's time!" in this embodiment. Also, FIGS. 404(D) to 404(F) show the display state when the oden effect image display effect pattern 10 is executed in "Oden x shopkeeper's time!" in this embodiment.

In this embodiment, when the oden image is displayed on the front side of the decoration pattern that is stopped and displayed, the oden point increase image with the character string "+3" is displayed in the obtained oden point display area. Further, when the oden point increase image with the character string "+3" is displayed, the accumulated oden points are increased by 3.

Further, when the oden image is displayed behind the statically displayed decorative pattern, an oden point decrease image with a character string of "-1" is displayed in the obtained oden point display area. Further, when the oden point decrease image with the character string "-1" is displayed, the total oden point is decreased by one.

Further, when an angry face image is displayed on the front side of the statically displayed decorative pattern, an oden point decrease image with a character string of "-3" is displayed in the obtained oden point display area. Further, when the oden point decrease image with the character string "-3" is displayed, the accumulated oden points are decreased by 3.

Further, when the oden image is displayed on the rear side of the statically displayed decorative pattern, an oden point increase image with a character string of "+1" is displayed in the acquired oden point display area. Further, when the oden point increasing image with the character string "+1" is displayed, the total oden point is increased by one.

FIG. 404(A) shows the display state at the timing when execution of the oden effect image display effect pattern 05 is started.

FIG. 404(B) shows an angry face image decorated in the left oden effect image display area at the timing when a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed from the display state of FIG. It shows a display state in which an oden point decrease image is displayed on the front side of the pattern and a character string "-3" is attached to the left oden point display area. Also, in the middle oden effect image display area, the oden image is displayed behind the decorative pattern, and the oden point reduction image with the character string "-1" is displayed in the middle acquired oden point display area. It shows a display state that has changed. It also shows a display state in which the display of "-4 points!" is displayed in the cumulative oden point display area.

FIG. 404(C) is timing when the decorative pattern is stopped after a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has passed from the display state of FIG. , and an oden point increase image with a character string of "+1" is displayed in the left oden point display area. Also, in the middle oden effect image display area, the oden image is displayed behind the decorative pattern, and the oden point reduction image with the character string "-1" is displayed in the middle acquired oden point display area. It shows a display state that has changed. It also shows a display state in which "0 points!" is displayed in the cumulative oden point display area.

FIG. 404(D) shows the display state at the timing when the oden effect image display effect pattern 10 is started.

Fig. 404(E) shows that the oden image is displayed as a decorative pattern in the left oden effect image display area at the timing when the decorative pattern is stopped after a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has passed from the display state of Fig. 404(D). , and an oden point decrease image with a character string of "-1" is displayed in the left oden point display area. In addition, in the middle oden effect image display area, an angry face image is displayed on the front side of the decoration pattern, and an oden point reduction image with a character string "-3" is displayed in the middle acquired oden point display area. It shows a display state that has become In addition, in the right oden effect image display area, the oden image is displayed on the front side of the decorative pattern, and the oden point increase image with the character string "+3" is displayed in the right acquired oden point display area. display status. It also shows a display state in which the display of "-1 point!" is displayed in the cumulative oden point display area.

In FIG. 404(F), the oden image is displayed as a decorative symbol in the left oden effect image display area at the timing when the decorative symbol is stopped after a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has passed from the display state of FIG. 404(D). , and an oden point decrease image with a character string of "-1" is displayed in the left oden point display area. In addition, in the middle oden effect image display area, the angry face image is displayed behind the decoration pattern, and the oden point reduction image with the character string "+1" is displayed in the middle acquired oden point display area. It shows a display state that has changed. Also, in the right oden effect image display area, the oden image is displayed behind the decorative pattern, and the oden point reduction image with the character string "-1" is displayed in the right acquired oden point display area. It shows a display state that has changed. It also shows a display state in which the display of "-1 point!" is displayed in the cumulative oden point display area.

In the present embodiment, even when the oden effect image is displayed behind the statically displayed decorative symbols, the accumulated oden points are increased or decreased. Therefore, the player pays attention to the display mode of all the displayed oden effect images, and it is possible to further improve the interest when the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed.

Further, in this embodiment, even when the oden image or the angry face image is hidden by the statically displayed decoration pattern, a part of the oden image or the angry face image can be visually recognized by the player. In addition, the player can determine whether the hidden oden effect image is the oden image or the angry face image, depending on the shape of the visible portion.

It should be noted that the oden image or the angry face image may be wholly hidden by the statically displayed decorative pattern.

FIGS. 405(A) to 405(F) show modified embodiments of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 401. FIG. FIGS. 405(A) to 405(C) show display states when the oden effect image display effect pattern 02 is executed in "Super Oden Time!" in this embodiment. Also, FIGS. 405(D) to 405(F) show the display state when the oden effect image display effect pattern 04 is executed in "super oden time!" in this embodiment.

In this embodiment, when the oden image is displayed on the front side of the decoration pattern that is stopped and displayed, the oden point increase image with the character string "+3" is displayed in the obtained oden point display area. Further, when the oden point increase image with the character string "+3" is displayed, the accumulated oden points are increased by 3.

Further, when the oden image is displayed behind the statically displayed decorative pattern, an oden point decrease image with a character string of "-1" is displayed in the obtained oden point display area. Further, when the oden point decrease image with the character string "-1" is displayed, the total oden point is decreased by one.

FIG. 405(A) shows the display state at the timing when execution of the oden effect image display effect pattern 02 is started.

Fig. 405(B) shows that the oden image is displayed as a decorative pattern in the left oden effect image display area at the timing when the decorative pattern is stopped after a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has passed from the display state of Fig. 405(A). It shows a display state in which an oden point increase image with a character string "+3" is displayed in the left oden point display area. It also shows a display state in which "3 points!" is displayed in the cumulative oden point display area.

Fig. 405(C) shows that the oden image is displayed in the left oden effect image display area after a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed from the display state of Fig. 405(A) and the decorative pattern is stopped. It shows a display state in which an oden point decrease image is displayed on the back side and with a character string of "-1" attached to the left oden point display area. It also shows a display state in which "-1 point!" is displayed in the cumulative oden point display area.

FIG. 405(D) shows the display state at the timing when the oden effect image display effect pattern 04 is started.

Fig. 405(E) shows that the oden image is displayed as a decorative pattern in the left oden effect image display area at the timing when the decorative pattern is stopped after a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed from the display state of Fig. 405(D). It shows a display state in which an oden point increase image with a character string "+3" is displayed in the left oden point display area. Also, in the middle oden effect image display area, the oden image is displayed behind the decorative pattern, and the oden point reduction image with the character string "-1" is displayed in the middle acquired oden point display area. It shows a display state that has changed. Also, in the right oden effect image display area, the oden image is displayed behind the decorative pattern, and the oden point reduction image with the character string "-1" is displayed in the right acquired oden point display area. It shows a display state that has changed. It also shows a display state in which the display of "1 point!" is displayed in the cumulative oden point display area.

Fig. 405(F) shows that the oden image is displayed as a decorative pattern in the left oden effect image display area at the timing when the decorative pattern is stopped after a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed from the display state of Fig. 405(D). , and an oden point decrease image with a character string of "-1" is displayed in the left oden point display area. Also, in the middle oden effect image display area, the oden image is displayed behind the decorative pattern, and the oden point reduction image with the character string "-1" is displayed in the middle acquired oden point display area. It shows a display state that has changed. Also, in the right oden effect image display area, the oden image is displayed behind the decorative pattern, and the oden point reduction image with the character string "-1" is displayed in the right acquired oden point display area. It shows a display state that has changed. It also shows a display state in which the display of "-3 points!" is displayed in the cumulative oden point display area.

In the present embodiment, when an oden image is displayed behind the stationary decorative pattern, the accumulated oden points are reduced. For this reason, the player will pay attention to the display mode of all the displayed oden images, and it is possible to improve the interest. In addition, it is possible to make the player interested in how many oden images are displayed and how many of the displayed oden images are displayed on the front side of the statically displayed decorative symbols. .

FIGS. 406(A)-406(F) show a modified embodiment of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 402. FIG. FIGS. 406(A) to 406(C) show the display state when the oden effect image display effect pattern 02 is executed in the "shopkeeper's fury time!" in this embodiment. Also, FIGS. 406(D) to 406(F) show the display state when the oden effect image display effect pattern 04 is executed in the "shopkeeper's fury time!" in this embodiment.

In this embodiment, when an angry face image is displayed on the front side of the statically displayed decorative pattern, an oden point reduction image with a character string of "-3" is displayed in the acquired oden point display area. . Further, when the oden point decrease image with the character string "-3" is displayed, the accumulated oden points are decreased by 3.

Also, when an angry face image is displayed on the rear side of the statically displayed decorative pattern, an oden point increase image with a character string of "+1" is displayed in the obtained oden point display area. Further, when the oden point decrease image with the character string "+1" is displayed, the total oden point is increased by one.

FIG. 406(A) shows the display state at the timing when execution of the oden effect image display effect pattern 02 is started.

Fig. 406(B) shows an angry face image decorated in the left oden effect image display area at the timing when the decorative pattern is stopped after a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has passed from the display state of Fig. 406(A). It shows a display state in which an oden point decrease image is displayed on the front side of the pattern and a character string "-3" is attached to the left oden point display area. In addition, it shows a display state in which the display of "remaining 7 points!" is displayed in the cumulative oden point display area.

Fig. 406(C) is timing when the decorative pattern is stopped after a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has passed from the display state of Fig. 406(A). , and an oden point increase image with a character string of "+1" is displayed in the left oden point display area. In addition, it shows a display state in which "11 remaining points!" is displayed in the cumulative oden point display area.

FIG. 406(D) shows the display state at the timing when the oden effect image display effect pattern 04 is started.

In FIG. 406(E), when a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed from the display state in FIG. It shows a display state in which an oden point decrease image is displayed on the front side of the pattern and a character string "-3" is attached to the left oden point display area. In addition, in the middle oden effect image display area, the angry face image is displayed behind the decoration pattern, and the oden point increase image with the character string "+1" is displayed in the middle acquired oden point display area. It shows a display state that has changed. In addition, in the right oden effect image display area, an angry face image is displayed behind the decoration pattern, and an oden point increase image with a character string "+1" is displayed in the right acquired oden point display area. It shows a display state that has changed. It also shows a display state in which the display of "9 points remaining!" is displayed in the cumulative oden point display area.

Fig. 406(F) is the timing when the decorative pattern is stopped after a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has passed from the display state of Fig. 406(D), and an angry face image is decorated in the left oden effect image display area. It shows a display state in which an oden point increase image is displayed behind the pattern and with a character string "+1" attached to the left acquired oden point display area. In addition, in the middle oden effect image display area, the angry face image is displayed behind the decoration pattern, and the oden point increase image with the character string "+1" is displayed in the middle acquired oden point display area. It shows a display state that has changed. In addition, in the right oden effect image display area, an angry face image is displayed behind the decoration pattern, and an oden point increase image with a character string "+1" is displayed in the right acquired oden point display area. It shows a display state that has changed. It also shows a display state in which the display of "13 remaining points!" is displayed in the cumulative oden point display area.

In this embodiment, when an angry face image is displayed behind the statically displayed decorative pattern, the accumulated oden points are increased. Therefore, the player will pay attention to the display mode of all the displayed angry face images, and it is possible to improve interest. Also, it is possible to make the player interested in how many angry face images are displayed and how many of the displayed angry face images are displayed behind the statically displayed decoration pattern. becomes.

FIG. 407 shows a modified embodiment of the embodiment described with reference to FIG.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 401, only the oden image imitating konjac is displayed as the oden effect image. It is configured to display an image of a mode in which different kinds of oden seeds are stuck. Incidentally, in this embodiment, the contents of the presentation other than the oden presentation image may be configured in the same manner as in the embodiment described with reference to FIG.

In this embodiment, when the execution of the oden effect image display effect pattern 02 is started, an oden image imitating konjac is displayed in the left oden effect image display area. In addition, a horizontally long skewer image that resembles a skewer is displayed behind the oden image that resembles konnyaku. FIG. 408(A) shows an oden effect image displayed when execution of the oden effect image display effect pattern 02 is started.

When the execution of the oden effect image display effect pattern 03 is started, an oden image imitating konnyaku is displayed in the left oden effect image display area, and a rectangular radish is displayed in the middle oden effect image display area. An oden image is displayed. Also, behind the oden image imitating konjac and the oden image imitating radish, a horizontally long skewer image imitating a skewer is displayed. FIG. 407(A) shows an oden effect image displayed when execution of the oden effect image display effect pattern 03 is started.

When the execution of the oden effect image display effect pattern 04 is started, an oden image imitating konnyaku is displayed in the left oden effect image display area, and a rectangular radish is displayed in the middle oden effect image display area. An oden image is displayed, and an oden image imitating an elliptical paste is displayed in the right oden effect image display area. Further, behind the oden image imitating konjac, the oden image imitating radish, and the oden image imitating paste, a horizontally long skewer image imitating a skewer is displayed. FIG. 407(E) shows an oden effect image displayed when execution of the oden effect image display effect pattern 03 is started.

Figures 407(A) to 407(H) show display examples when "Super Oden Time!" They are shown in chronological order. 407(A), 407(B), 407(C), 407(D), 407(E), 407(F), and 407(G), the look-ahead effect progresses in this order. To go.

407(A) and 407(B) are examples of effects when the oden effect image display effect pattern 03 is selected in the "super oden time!" effect.

FIGS. 407(A), 4075(C), 407(E), and 407(G) show the display state when the decorative pattern is changing. 407(F) shows a display state in which the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. In FIG. 407(H), each decorative design is in a temporary stop state, and from this state, each decorative design fluctuates again to form a ready-to-win state, and then a display mode showing a big hit or a display mode showing a loss. It will be in the state of being stopped by pressing .

FIG. 407(C) and FIG. 407(D) are examples of effects when the oden effect image display effect pattern 03 is selected in the "super oden time!" effect.

FIG. 407(E) and FIG. 407(F) are examples of effects when the oden effect image display effect pattern 04 is selected in the "super oden time!" effect.

FIG. 407(G) and FIG. 407(H) are examples of effects when the oden effect image display effect pattern 04 is selected in the "super oden time!" effect.

In this embodiment, it is possible for the player to visually recognize the image of the oden and the image of the skewer as one effect display. Further, even if the image of the oden is hidden by the decorative pattern, the image of the skewer has a length corresponding to the number of the oden. With such a configuration, it is possible to know how many kinds of oden were displayed before the decorative patterns were stopped and displayed even after the decorative patterns were stopped and displayed.

Figures 408(A) to 408(F) show an embodiment in which the embodiment described with reference to Figure 405 is applied to the embodiment described with reference to Figure 407.

FIGS. 408(A) to 408(C) show the display state when the oden effect image display effect pattern 02 is executed in "super oden time!" in this embodiment.

408(D) to 408(F) show the display state when the oden effect image display effect pattern 04 is executed in "Super Oden Time!" in this embodiment.

FIG. 408(A) shows the display state at the timing when execution of the oden effect image display effect pattern 02 is started.

Fig. 408(B) shows oden imitating konjac in the left oden effect image display area at the timing when the decorative pattern is stopped after a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed from the display state of Fig. 408(A). It shows a display state in which the image is displayed on the front side of the decorative pattern, and an oden point increase image with a character string of "+3" is displayed in the left acquired oden point display area. In addition, it shows a display state in which "3 points!" is displayed in the cumulative oden point display area.

Fig. 408(C) shows an oden image simulating konnyaku in the left oden effect image display area at the timing when the decorative pattern is stopped after a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed from the display state of Fig. 408(A). is displayed behind the decorative pattern, and an oden point reduction image with a character string of "-1" is displayed in the left acquired oden point display area. It also shows a display state in which "-1 point!" is displayed in the cumulative oden point display area.

FIG. 408(D) shows the display state at the timing when execution of the oden effect image display effect pattern 04 is started.

Fig. 408(E) shows oden imitating konjac in the left oden effect image display area at the timing when the decorative pattern is stopped after a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed from the display state of Fig. 408(D). It shows a display state in which the image is displayed on the front side of the decorative pattern, and an oden point increasing image with a character string "+3" is displayed in the left acquired oden point display area. In addition, in the middle oden effect image display area, an oden image imitating a radish is displayed behind the decorative pattern, and an oden point decrease image with a character string "-1" is displayed in the middle acquired oden point display area. It shows the display state that came to be displayed. In addition, in the right oden effect image display area, an oden image imitating paste is displayed behind the decorative pattern, and an oden point reduction image with a character string "-1" is displayed in the right oden point display area. It shows the display state that came to be displayed. It also shows a display state in which the display of "1 point!" is displayed in the cumulative oden point display area.

Fig. 408(F) shows oden imitating konnyaku in the left oden effect image display area at the timing when the decorative pattern is stopped after a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed from the display state of Fig. 408(D). It shows a display state in which the image is displayed behind the decorative pattern, and an oden point reduction image with a character string of "-1" is displayed in the left acquired oden point display area. In addition, in the middle oden effect image display area, an oden image imitating a radish is displayed behind the decorative pattern, and an oden point decrease image with a character string "-1" is displayed in the middle acquired oden point display area. It shows the display state that came to be displayed. In addition, in the right oden effect image display area, an oden image imitating paste is displayed behind the decorative pattern, and an oden point reduction image with a character string "-1" is displayed in the right oden point display area. It shows the display state that came to be displayed. It also shows a display state in which the display of "-3 points!" is displayed in the cumulative oden point display area.

In the present embodiment, when an oden image is displayed behind the stationary decorative pattern, the accumulated oden points are reduced. For this reason, the player will pay attention to the display mode of all the displayed oden images, and it is possible to improve the interest. In addition, it is possible to make the player interested in how many oden images are displayed and how many of the displayed oden images are displayed on the front side of the statically displayed decorative symbols. .

In the display area provided by the display means, the effect corresponding to the changing decorative pattern and the look-ahead effect may be performed at the same time. The player's attention is focused on the performance corresponding to the decorative pattern, the look-ahead performance is less conspicuous, and the impact of the look-ahead performance is reduced. In particular, when changing the mode of the look-ahead effect, there is a risk that the player may miss the changing mode. In this way, the look-ahead effect that suggests the degree of expectation by changing the display mode tends to lack impact, and there is a demand for increasing the impact of the look-ahead effect as a look-ahead effect.

In the embodiments described below, at least a portion of the predetermined effect image being displayed is once hidden by displaying another image in front, and then the entire predetermined effect image is displayed in front of the other image. is displayed, the display mode of the predetermined effect image is changed.

By adopting such a configuration, the predetermined effect image becomes smaller, then becomes larger, and is visually recognized by the player in the order of changing the display mode. As a thing, it is possible for the player to visually recognize it.

409 and 410, an example of rendering in this embodiment will be shown below. FIG. 409 is a time chart in this example of effect, and FIG. 410 is a diagram showing the display state of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 at a predetermined timing in this example of effect. In addition, the variable display mode of the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern, the display mode of the reserved image in the reserved display area, the display mode of the reserved image in the first reserved display area to the fourth reserved display area, etc. are not mentioned. As far as possible, it is the same as the display mode described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 409 is a time chart showing an example of effects in this embodiment. In the state immediately before the timing t0, the display state in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is a state in which the decorative symbols stop fluctuating. FIG. 410(A) is a diagram showing this state, and shows a state in which decorative patterns with numbers "3", "5", and "2" from the left are stopped and displayed.

In addition, the reserved display area has a white reserved image in a perfect circle shape, the first reserved display area has a blue reserved image in a perfect circular shape, and the second reserved display area has a white reserved image in a perfect circular shape. is displayed in the third reserved display area, and a white reserved image having a perfect circular shape is displayed in the third reserved display area. Note that the white pending image displayed in the pending display area is a pending image corresponding to the decorative symbols with the numbers '3', '5', and '2' that are stopped and displayed.

In the present embodiment, in addition to a white pending image as the pending image, a blue pending image as a pending image indicating that the special lottery result is expected to be a big hit is higher than the white pending image, It is possible to display a pending image colored green and a pending image colored red. In addition, the expectation level when the blue pending image is displayed is low expectation, the expectation level when the green pending image is displayed is medium expectation, and the expectation level when the red pending image is displayed is configured to have high expectations.

When the timing t0 comes from the state where the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 410(A), the variable display of the left decorative symbols to the right decorative symbols is newly started.

At timing t7, a plurality of images simulating pine branches with leaves are displayed in an overlapping manner at the bottom of the display area, in the center position in the horizontal direction. Specifically, an image imitating a pine branch with three leaves on the bottom, two on the middle, and one on the top is displayed. Hereinafter, the entire image will be referred to as a pine tree mark group image.

The pine tree mark group image is displayed at a position overlapping the middle decorative pattern, and is displayed on the nearer side than the middle decorative pattern during variable display or stationary display. Also, the pine tree mark group image has three transparent areas (openings) through which the image located on the rear side can be visually recognized. Also, the pine mark group image is displayed at a position overlapping the reserved display area and the first reserved display area. As will be described later, the pine mark group image, the reserved image, and the reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area are the case where the pine mark group image is displayed on the front side, and the reserved image and the first reserved display. The display mode may be a case where the pending image displayed in the area is displayed on the near side.

At timing t7, when the pine tree mark group image starts to be displayed, the pine tree mark group image is displayed on the front side of the reserved image and the reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area. FIG. 410B is a diagram showing a display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t8) after the display of the pine tree group image is started at timing t7, and the pine tree group image is the pending image. and the state displayed on the front side of the reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area.

In this state, the blue reserved image is hidden by the pine tree group image, and only part of the blue reserved image is visible. Specifically, in the three transparent regions of the pine tree mark group image, the blue reserved image located behind the pine tree mark group image is divided into three and visible.

Further, the reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area is hidden by the pine mark group image, and only a part of the reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area is visible. Specifically, the reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area is divided into two and can be visually recognized in one transparent area of the pine tree mark group image and the area outside the pine tree mark group image. .

At timing t9, the display priority of the pine mark group image and the reserved image and the reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area is switched, and the pine mark group image is displayed in the reserved image and the first reserved display area. The reserved image and the reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area are displayed in front of the pine mark group image.

FIG. 410(C) shows a predetermined timing (timing 10 is a diagram showing a display state at a predetermined timing between t9 and t10). FIG. In this state, the entire blue pending image is visible. In addition, the entire reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area can be visually recognized.

At timing t10, the green pending image is displayed instead of the blue pending image that has been displayed. FIG. 410D is a diagram showing a display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t11) after changing to a state in which the green pending image is displayed instead of the blue pending image at timing t10. is.

At timing t17, the display priority of the pine mark group image and the reserved image and the reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area are switched, and the reserved image and the reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area are switched to the pine tree mark group image. The state in which the pine mark group image is displayed in front of the mark group image is changed to the state in which the pine mark group image is displayed in front of the reserved image and the reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area.

FIG. 410(E) shows a predetermined timing (for example, , timing t18), and shows a state in which the pine mark group image is displayed in front of the reserved image and the reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area. In this state, in the three transparent areas of the pine tree group image, part of the green reserved image located behind is visible. Also, a part of the reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area is visible.

At timing t19, the display priority of the pine mark group image and the reserved image and the reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area is switched, and the pine mark group image is displayed in the reserved image and the first reserved display area. The reserved image and the reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area are displayed in front of the pine mark group image. FIG. 410(F) shows a predetermined timing (timing FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display state at a predetermined timing between t19 and t20). In this state, the entire green pending image is visible. In addition, the entire reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area can be visually recognized.

At timing t20, the red pending image is displayed instead of the green pending image that has been displayed. FIG. 410G is a diagram showing a display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t21) after changing to a state in which the red pending image is displayed instead of the green pending image at timing t20. is.

At the timing t25, the left decorative design and the right decorative design are temporarily stopped and displayed with the numeral "2" attached thereto, and the ready-to-win state occurs. At this time, the middle decorative pattern is maintained in a variable display state in which it is scrolled downward and displayed. Also, at timing t25, the display of the pine tree mark group image that has been displayed until then ends. FIG. 410(H) shows the display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t26) after the ready-to-reach state occurs and the display of the pine tree mark group image ends at timing t25.

At the timing t33, the medium decorative pattern that has been variably displayed in the display mode according to the special lottery result is in a variability stop state. Specifically, when the special lottery result is a loss, decorative designs with numbers other than "2" are stopped and displayed as medium decorative designs. Further, when the special lottery result is a big hit, a decorative pattern with a number "2" is stopped and displayed as a middle decorative pattern. When the special lottery result is a loss, a new variable display of the decorative pattern is started from timing t34, and when the special lottery result is a big hit, the decorative pattern is newly displayed after the big win game is over. change begins.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 409(B) to 409(E), other rendering examples of the display mode of the pending display will be shown.

In the effect example shown in FIG. 409B, at timing t10, the blue pending image that has been displayed does not change, and the blue pending image continues to be displayed. Also, at timing t20, the green pending image is displayed instead of the blue pending image that has been displayed.

In the effect example shown in FIG. 409(C), at timing t10, the green pending image is displayed instead of the blue pending image that has been displayed. Further, at timing t20, the green pending image continues to be displayed without changing the green pending image that has been displayed.

In the effect example shown in FIG. 409(D), at timing t10, instead of the white pending image that has been displayed until then, the green pending image is displayed. Also, at timing t20, the red pending image is displayed instead of the green pending image that has been displayed.

In the effect example shown in FIG. 409(E), at timing t10, the white pending image that has been displayed does not change, and the white pending image continues to be displayed. Further, at timing t20, the white pending image continues to be displayed without changing the white pending image that has been displayed until then.

409(A) to 409(E) may be configured to be executable based on the result of the special lottery.

Thus, based on the result of the special lottery, at predetermined timings (timing t10, timing t20), instead of the currently displayed pending image, the pending image that suggests a higher degree of expectation for a big win is displayed. Alternatively, at predetermined timings (timing t10, timing t20), the currently displayed pending image may continue to be displayed without being changed.

The change mode of the pending image described with reference to FIGS. 409(A) to 409(E) is merely an example. Specifically, at timing t10, the pending image in white, the pending image in blue, the pending image in green, and the pending image in red are displayed as they are, or are changed to the pending image with a higher degree of expectation. It is preferable to configure so as to change the display mode. Further, at timing t20, the pending image in white, the pending image in blue, the pending image in green, and the pending image in red are displayed as they are, or the display mode is changed to the pending image with a higher degree of expectation. It should be configured to change.

Thus, in the present embodiment, a portion of the reserved image (for example, the blue reserved image) suggesting a predetermined degree of expectation for a big hit is temporarily hidden by a predetermined image (pine mark group image) and visually recognized. After it becomes possible, the entire retained image becomes visible again, and the retained image that has become entirely visible is changed to a retained image that suggests a higher degree of expectation for a big hit (for example, the green retained image). It is configured to switch and display.
With such a configuration, it is possible for the player to visually recognize the change mode of the pending image as having a more impact.

Also, part of the reserved image (the relevant reserved image, the reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area) is hidden by the predetermined image (pine mark group image), and part of the reserved image is not hidden by the predetermined image. Thus, the player can visually recognize what kind of reserved image the hidden reserved image is (what color it is).

By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to know the degree of expectation for a big hit in a state in which the pending state is hidden.

The entire reserved image (at least one of the reserved image and the reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area) may be entirely hidden by a predetermined image (pine tree mark group image).

In the present embodiment, an example of effect is shown in which the opportunity for changing the display mode of the pending image occurs twice. Alternatively, it may be configured to occur multiple times (three times or more).

With such a configuration, as long as the predetermined image (the image of the group of pine trees) is displayed, the opportunity to change the display mode of the reserved image continues. It is possible to create a sense of anticipation that they will do so.

An example in which the display mode of the pending image can change at a predetermined timing (timing t10, timing t20) when a predetermined image (pine tree mark group image) is displayed has been shown, but the predetermined image is displayed. In this case, the currently displayed pending image (blue pending image) may always be changed to a pending image (green pending image, red pending image) with a higher expectation for a big hit.
With such a configuration, the display of the predetermined image makes it possible for the player to have great expectations for the change in the display mode of the pending image.

In addition, the length of the period (timing t7-timing t9, timing t17-timing t19) during which the pine mark group image is displayed in front of the reserved image and the reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area is After the reserved image and the reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area are displayed on the front side of the pine mark group image, the reserved image can be changed to the reserved image in another display mode. It is longer than the length of the period up to the relevant timing (timing t9-timing t10, timing t19-timing t20).

In addition, after the reserved image and the reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area are displayed on the front side of the pine mark group image, the reserved image changes to the reserved image in another display mode. The length of the period until the timing that may change is the period in which the reserved image and the reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area are displayed on the front side of the pine mark group image (timing t10-timing t17 , timing t19-timing t25).

Thus, the length of the period during which the pending image is displayed on the front side (eg, 6 seconds, 7 seconds) is the length of the period during which the pending image is displayed on the back side (eg, 2 seconds). is longer than By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to shorten the period during which a state in which it is difficult for the player to recognize the degree of expectation suggested by the pending image is maintained.
Also, from the length of the period during which the pending image is displayed on the back side (eg, 2 seconds), the length of the period from when the pending image is displayed on the front side to when the pending image changes (eg, , 1 second) is shorter. With such a configuration, it is possible for the player to recognize the change in the display mode of the pending image as a series of effects.

The second to fourth reserved display areas are configured so as not to be hidden by the pine mark group image.

By adopting such a configuration, whether or not the suspension is likely to be maximized (can be determined by visually checking the second suspension display area and the third suspension display area), whether the suspension is maximized (the 4 can be determined by visually recognizing the reserved display area), and when the player visually recognizes the second reserved display area and the fourth reserved display area, it becomes possible to confirm the reserved status well. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a stressful situation for the player, in which the starting prize is generated even though the number of reserved coins is the maximum (4). In addition, when it is confirmed that the number of reserved items is about to reach the maximum or that the number of reserved items has reached the maximum, the player operates the handle 302 to change the handle 302 to a state in which no game balls are shot. will be made.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 409(A) to 409(E) and FIG. 410, the change mode of the reserved image displayed in the reserved display area was described. In the pending image displayed in , the display mode may be similarly changed. Even with such a configuration, the same effect as in the case of changing the display mode of the pending image can be obtained.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 409(A), an embodiment in which the reserved display area and the first reserved display area may be hidden by the pine mark group image has been described with reference to FIG. In the time chart shown in 409(A), the reserved display area is not hidden by the pine mark group image, and the first to fourth reserved display areas are sometimes hidden by the pine mark group image. An embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

In the state immediately before the timing t0, the display state in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is a state in which the decorative symbols stop fluctuating. FIG. 411(A) is a diagram showing this state, and shows a state in which decorative patterns with numbers "3", "5", and "2" from the left are stopped and displayed.

In addition, the reserved display area has a white reserved image in a perfect circle shape, the first reserved display area has a blue reserved image in a perfect circular shape, and the second reserved display area has a white reserved image in a perfect circular shape. , and a blue reserved image having a perfect circular shape is displayed in the third reserved display area. Note that the white pending image displayed in the pending display area is a pending image corresponding to the decorative symbols with the numbers '3', '5', and '2' that are stopped and displayed.

At timing t7, the pine tree mark group image starts to be displayed in the lower right portion of the display area. When the display of the pine tree mark group image is started, the pine tree mark group image is positioned in front of the white reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area and the blue reserved image displayed in the second reserved display area. Is displayed.

FIG. 411B is a diagram showing a display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t8) after the display of the group of pine trees starts at timing t7. It shows a state in which the white reserved image displayed in the display area and the blue reserved image displayed in the second reserved display area are displayed on the front side. In this state, the white reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area and the blue reserved image displayed in the second reserved display area are hidden by the pine mark group image and displayed in the first reserved display area. Only part of the white reserved image displayed in the second reserved display area and part of the blue reserved image displayed in the second reserved display area are visible.

At timing t9, the display priority of the pine mark group image, the white reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area, and the blue reserved image displayed in the second reserved display area is switched, and the pine mark group image is switched. From the state displayed on the front side of the white pending image displayed in the first pending display area and the blue pending image displayed in the second pending display area, the white pending displayed in the first pending display area The image and the blue reserved image displayed in the second reserved display area change to a state in which they are displayed on the front side of the pine mark group image.

In FIG. 411(C), at timing t9, the white reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area and the blue reserved image displayed in the second reserved display area are displayed in front of the pine mark group image. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display state at a predetermined timing (predetermined timing between timing t9 and timing t10) after changing to a state. In this state, the entirety of the white reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area and the blue reserved image displayed in the second reserved display area is visible.

At timing t10, a green pending image is displayed instead of the blue pending image that has been displayed in the second pending display area. FIG. 411(D) shows a predetermined timing (for example, timing t11) after the change to a state in which a green pending image is displayed in place of the blue pending image displayed in the second pending display area at timing t10. ) is a diagram showing a display state.

At timing t17, the display priority of the pine mark group image, the white reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area, and the green reserved image displayed in the second reserved display area are switched, and the first reserved display area From the state in which the white reserved image displayed in the second reserved display area and the green reserved image displayed in the second reserved display area are displayed on the front side of the pine mark group image, the pine mark group image is displayed in the first reserved display area The state changes to a state in which the green pending image displayed in the white pending image and the green pending image displayed in the second pending display area are displayed on the front side.

In FIG. 411(E), at timing t17, the pine mark group image is displayed in front of the white reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area and the green reserved image displayed in the second reserved display area. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t18) after changing to a state, in which a white reserved image and a second reserved display in which the pine mark group image is displayed in the first reserved display area; It shows a state of being displayed on the front side of the green pending image displayed in the area.

At timing t19, the display priority of the pine mark group image, the white reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area, and the green reserved image displayed in the second reserved display area is switched, and the pine mark group image is switched. From the state displayed on the front side of the white pending image displayed in the first pending display area and the green pending image displayed in the second pending display area, the white pending displayed in the first pending display area The image and the green reserved image displayed in the second reserved display area change to a state in which they are displayed on the front side of the pine mark group image.

In FIG. 411(F), at timing t19, the white reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area and the green reserved image displayed in the second reserved display area are displayed in front of the pine mark group image. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display state at a predetermined timing (predetermined timing between timing t19 and timing t20) after changing to a state. In this state, the entire white reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area and the green reserved image displayed in the second reserved display area are visible.

At timing t20, a red pending image is displayed instead of the green pending image that has been displayed in the second pending display area. FIG. 411G is a diagram showing a display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t21) after changing to a state in which a red pending image is displayed instead of a green pending image at timing t20. .

At the timing t25, the left decorative design and the right decorative design are temporarily stopped and displayed with the numeral "2" attached thereto, and the ready-to-win state occurs. At this time, the middle decorative pattern is maintained in a variable display state in which it is scrolled downward and displayed. FIG. 411(H) shows the display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t26) after the reach state occurs at timing t25.

At the timing t33, the medium decorative pattern that has been variably displayed in the display mode according to the special lottery result is in a variability stop state. Specifically, when the special lottery result is a loss, decorative designs with numbers other than "2" are stopped and displayed as medium decorative designs. Further, when the special lottery result is a big hit, a decorative pattern with a number "2" is stopped and displayed as a middle decorative pattern. When the special lottery result is a loss, a new variable display of the decorative pattern is started from timing t34, and when the special lottery result is a big hit, the decorative pattern is newly displayed after the big win game is over. change begins.

Although an example of the effect of changing the display mode of the reserved image in the second reserved display area has been shown, the area in which the display mode of the reserved image is changed is not limited to the second reserved display area. In any one of the fourth reserved display areas, the display mode of the reserved image may be changed in the same manner as in the present example of effect.

In this embodiment, the first to fourth reserved display areas can be hidden by the pine mark group image. Further, the reserved display area is configured so as not to be hidden. In this way, by hiding a plurality of pending display areas with a predetermined image, it is possible to make the player feel interested in which pending image changes. In addition, by constructing the reserved display area so that it is not hidden by a predetermined image, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player cannot confirm the degree of expectation of the latest decorative pattern stop mode. becomes possible.

Note that the display mode of the pending image may be changed. At this time, the display of the pine tree mark group image is ended while the decoration pattern of the reserved image is changing, and the pine tree mark group image is not displayed, and is displayed in the first to fourth reserved display areas. In a state in which the displayed reserved image cannot be changed in display form, the display form of the reserved image may be changed to continue the variation of the decorative pattern corresponding to the reserved image.

With such a configuration, even when the pine tree group image is displayed, it is possible to change the display mode of the reserved image and make the player feel interesting. In addition, since the timing at which the reserved image displayed in the first to fourth reserved display areas can change the display mode and the timing at which the reserved image changes the display mode are different timings, the player can It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which confusion is caused with respect to the production.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 409(A), an embodiment in which the reserved display area and the first reserved display area may be hidden by the pine mark group image has been described with reference to FIG. An embodiment in which the time chart shown in 409(A) is modified so that the reserved display area to the fourth reserved display area may be hidden by the pine tree mark group image will be described with reference to FIG.

In the state immediately before the timing t0, the display state in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is a state in which the decorative symbols stop fluctuating. FIG. 412(A) is a diagram showing this state, and shows a state in which decorative patterns with numbers "3", "5", and "2" from the left are stopped and displayed.

Further, the reserved display area has a circular white reserved image, the first reserved display area has a circular blue reserved image, and the second reserved display area has a circular white reserved image. However, in the third reserved display area, a circular white reserved image is displayed. Note that the white pending image displayed in the pending display area is a pending image corresponding to the decorative symbols with the numbers '3', '5', and '2' that are stopped and displayed.

At timing t7, the pine tree mark group image starts to be displayed in the lower part of the display area. When the display of the pine tree mark group image is started, the pine tree mark group image includes the blue reserved image displayed in the reserved display area, the white reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area, and the second reserved display. It is displayed on the front side of the white reserved image displayed in the area.

FIG. 412B is a diagram showing a display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t8) after the display of the group of pine tree images is started at timing t7. It shows a state displayed on the front side of the blue reserved image displayed in the area, the white reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area, and the white reserved image displayed in the second reserved display area. ing. In this state, the blue reserved image displayed in the reserved display area, the white reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area, and the white reserved image displayed in the second reserved display area are the pine tree mark. Part of the blue reserved image hidden by the group image and displayed in the reserved display area, the white reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area, and the white reserved image displayed in the second reserved display area are visible respectively.

At timing t9, the pine mark group image, the blue reserved image displayed in the reserved display area, the white reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area, and the white reserved image displayed in the second reserved display area The display priority with the image is switched, and the pine mark group image is displayed in the reserved display area, the reserved image in blue, the reserved image in white in the first reserved display area, and the reserved image in the second reserved display area. From the state displayed on the front side of the white reserved image, the blue reserved image displayed in the reserved display area, the white reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area, and the second reserved display area The displayed white reserved image changes to a state in which it is displayed on the nearer side than the pine mark group image.

FIG. 412(C) shows the blue pending image displayed in the pending display area, the white pending image displayed in the first pending display area, and the white pending image displayed in the second pending display area at timing t9. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display state at a predetermined timing (a predetermined timing between timing t9 and timing t10) after the image changes to a state in which the image is displayed on the front side of the pine tree group image. In this state, the blue reserved image displayed in the reserved display area, the white reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area, and the white reserved image displayed in the second reserved display area are all visible. It is possible.

At timing t10, instead of the blue pending image that had been displayed in the pending display area until then, the green pending image is displayed. FIG. 412(D) shows a predetermined timing (for example, timing t11) is a diagram showing a display state.

At timing t17, the pine mark group image, the green reserved image displayed in the reserved display area, the white reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area, and the white reserved image displayed in the second reserved display area. The display priority with the image is switched, and the green pending image displayed in the pending display area, the white pending image displayed in the first pending display area, and the white pending image displayed in the second pending display area is displayed on the front side of the pine mark group image, the green reserved image in which the pine mark group image is displayed in the reserved display area, the white reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area, the second 2 changes to a state in which it is displayed on the front side of the white reserved image displayed in the reserved display area.

FIG. 412(E) shows, at timing t17, a green reserved image in which the pine mark group image is displayed in the reserved display area, a white reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area, and a white reserved image displayed in the second reserved display area. 18 is a diagram showing a display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t18) after changing to a state in which the white reserved image is displayed on the front side, and the pine mark group image is displayed in the reserved display area , the green pending image displayed in , the white pending image displayed in the first pending display area, and the white pending image displayed in the second pending display area. there is

At timing t19, the pine mark group image, the green reserved image displayed in the reserved display area, the white reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area, and the white reserved image displayed in the second reserved display area The display priority with the image is switched, and the green reserved image displayed in the reserved display area, the white reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area, and the pine mark group image displayed in the second reserved display area. From the state displayed on the front side of the white reserved image, the green reserved image displayed in the reserved display area, the white reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area, and the second reserved display area The displayed white reserved image changes to a state in which it is displayed on the nearer side than the pine mark group image.

FIG. 412F shows the green pending image displayed in the pending display area, the white pending image displayed in the first pending display area, and the white pending image displayed in the second pending display area at timing t19. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display state at a predetermined timing (predetermined timing between timing t19 and timing t20) after the image has changed to a state in which the image is displayed on the front side of the pine tree group image. In this state, the green reserved image displayed in the reserved display area, the white reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area, and the white reserved image displayed in the second reserved display area are all visible. It is possible.

At timing t20, instead of the green pending image that has been displayed in the pending display area until then, the red pending image is displayed. FIG. 412G is a diagram showing a display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t21) after changing to a state in which the red pending image is displayed instead of the green pending image at timing t20. is.

At the timing t25, the left decorative design and the right decorative design are temporarily stopped and displayed with the numeral "2" attached thereto, and the ready-to-win state occurs. At this time, the middle decorative pattern is maintained in a variable display state in which it is scrolled downward and displayed. Also, at timing t25, the display of the pine tree mark group image that has been displayed until then ends. FIG. 412(H) shows the display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t26) after the ready-to-reach state occurs and the display of the pine tree mark group image ends at timing t25.

At the timing t33, the medium decorative pattern that has been variably displayed in the display mode according to the special lottery result is in a variability stop state. Specifically, when the special lottery result is a loss, decorative designs with numbers other than "2" are stopped and displayed as medium decorative designs. Further, when the special lottery result is a big hit, a decorative pattern with a number "2" is stopped and displayed as a middle decorative pattern. When the special lottery result is a loss, a new variable display of the decorative pattern is started from timing t34, and when the special lottery result is a big hit, the decorative pattern is newly displayed after the big win game is over. change begins.

Although an example of the effect of changing the display mode of the reserved image in the reserved display area has been shown, the area in which the display mode of the reserved image is changed is not limited to the reserved display area, and the reserved display area to the fourth reserved In any one of the display areas, the display mode of the pending image may be changed in the same manner as in the present example of effect.

In this embodiment, the reserved display area to the fourth reserved display area can be hidden by the pine tree mark group image. In this way, by hiding a plurality of pending display areas with a predetermined image, it is possible to make the player feel interested in which pending image changes.

FIG. 413 shows an example of rendering in an embodiment obtained by modifying the embodiment described with reference to FIG.

In the present embodiment, two triangular strip images are displayed at the top and bottom of the display area, and the strip image displayed below the display area (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the “lower strip image”) is used to display the second image. The 1st reserved display area to the 4th reserved display area are hidden. In this embodiment, the reserved display area is provided in the lower left part of the display area, and in the area on the right side, from the left, the first reserved display area, the second reserved display area, the third reserved display area, the fourth reserved display area, and the fourth reserved display area. A reserved display area is provided for each.

The lower strip image does not overlap the reserved display area, but overlaps the first to fourth reserved display areas. In addition, the area overlapping with the lower band-shaped image increases as the first reserved display area, the second reserved display area, the third reserved display area, and the fourth reserved display area are reached. For example, about 1/4 of the lower side of the first reserved display area overlaps the lower strip image, but about 3/4 of the lower side of the fourth reserved display area overlaps the lower strip image. is configured to
FIGS. 413(A) to 413(D) show display examples in chronological order when an effect is executed for a predetermined hold (the third hold in the drawing of FIG. 413(A)). That is, the effects progress in the order of Figure 413(A), Figure 413(B), Figure 413(C) and Figure 413(D).

In FIG. 413(A), the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern are displayed in a variable manner, and a circular white reserved image is displayed in the reserved display area to the fourth reserved display area. is displayed. In the figure, the lower band-shaped image is located at a position overlapping the reserved images displayed in the first to fourth reserved display areas, and from the reserved images displayed in the first to fourth reserved display areas The display state displayed on the rear side is also shown.

FIG. 413B shows a display state in which the lower band-shaped image is displayed in front of the reserved images displayed in the first to fourth reserved display areas.

FIG. 413(C) shows a display state in which the reserved images displayed in the first to fourth reserved display areas are displayed in front of the lower strip image.

FIG. 413D shows a display state in which a blue pending image is displayed in place of the white pending image displayed in the third pending display area.

It may be configured to display band-shaped images as shown in FIGS. 413(A) to 413(D) instead of the pine tree mark group image in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 409. .

Although an example of the effect of changing the display mode of the reserved image in the third reserved display area has been shown, the area in which the display mode of the reserved image is changed is not limited to the second reserved display area. In any one of the fourth reserved display areas, the display mode of the reserved image may be changed in the same manner as in the present example of effect.

When the lower band-shaped image is displayed on the front side of the reserved image, the proportion of the area of the reserved image that is hidden by the lower band-shaped image is different according to the area where the reserved image is displayed. . Specifically, the reserved image is not hidden by the lower strip image in the first place, the first reserved image is hidden by about 20% of the lower area, and the second reserved image is hidden by about 40% of the lower side. The area is hidden, about 60% of the bottom area is hidden for the third reserved image, and about 80% of the bottom area is hidden for the fourth reserved image. In this manner, the closer to the fourth reserved display area, the higher the concealment ratio of the reserved image by the lower band-shaped image.

By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to increase the impact of the hold change in the hold for which the variable display is started later.

Although the lower band image has a triangular shape, the lower band image may be deformed into a stepped shape as shown in FIGS. 413(E) and 413(F). Specifically, it is preferable to provide a plurality of horizontal steps by combining lines perpendicular to the display area and lines horizontal to the display area so as to form a shape that slopes upward to the right as a whole.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 413(E) and 413(F), a plurality of reserved images can be hidden in one horizontal row. For example, about 30% of the area below the reserved image and the first reserved image is hidden by one horizontal step, and about 60% of the area below the second reserved image and the third reserved image is hidden by one horizontal step. Hidden by a horizontal step, and for the fourth reserved image, the entire image is hidden by one horizontal step.

Alternatively, the belt-shaped image formed stepwise in this way does not hide the reserved image with the lower belt-shaped image, hides about 20% of the lower area of the first reserved image, and hides the second reserved image. about 40% of the lower area is hidden, about 60% of the lower area of the third reserved image is hidden, and about 80% of the lower area of the fourth reserved image is hidden. may be configured.

Even with such a configuration, it is possible to increase the impact of the pending change in the pending where the variable display is started later.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 409(A), an embodiment in which the reserved display area and the first reserved display area may be hidden by the pine mark group image has been described with reference to FIG. A modified embodiment in which the reserved display area to the fourth reserved display area may be hidden by the pine tree mark group image will be described with reference to FIGS. 414 and 415. FIG. It should be noted that FIG. 414 is a time chart showing an example of effects in this embodiment. FIG. 415 is a diagram showing the display state in the display area.

In the state of timing t0, the display state in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is a state in which the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In addition, the reserved display area has a white reserved image in a perfect circle shape, the first reserved display area has a blue reserved image in a perfect circular shape, and the second reserved display area has a white reserved image in a perfect circular shape. , and a white pending image having a perfect circular shape is displayed in the third pending display area.

At timing t7, the display of the pine tree mark group image having a shape surrounding the display area is started. The pine tree mark group image in this embodiment is formed by combining 16 green images each having a shape resembling a pine branch with leaves. Any of the characters "N", "E", "X", and "T" is attached to the image imitating a pine branch with leaves. When the display of the pine tree mark group image is started, the pine tree mark group image is displayed in front of each of the reserved images displayed in the reserved display area to the third reserved display area.

FIG. 415A is a diagram showing a display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t8) after the display of the group of pine trees starts at timing t7. It shows a state of being displayed on the front side of each reserved image displayed in the area to the third reserved display area. In this state, each of the reserved images displayed in the reserved display area to the third reserved display area is hidden by the pine mark group image, and each reserved image displayed in the reserved display area to the third reserved display area is hidden. Only a portion of each is visible.

At timing t9, the display priority of the pine mark group image and each of the reserved images displayed in the reserved display area to the third reserved display area is switched, and the pine mark group image is displayed in the reserved display area to the third reserved display area. From the state in which each reserved image displayed in the display is displayed in front of each reserved image displayed in the reserved display area to the state in which each reserved image displayed in the reserved display area to the third reserved display area is displayed in front of the pine mark group image and change.

FIG. 415(B) shows a predetermined timing after changing to a state in which each of the reserved images displayed in the reserved display area to the third reserved display area is displayed on the front side of the pine mark group image at timing t9. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display state at (predetermined timing between timing t9 and timing t10). In this state, all of the reserved images displayed in the reserved display area to the third reserved display area can be visually recognized.

At timing t10, a green pending image is displayed in the first pending display area instead of the blue pending image that has been displayed in the first pending display area. Further, the left decorative symbols to the right decorative symbols scrolled downward are temporarily stopped and displayed. Specifically, the left decorative pattern to which the number "4" is attached, the middle decorative pattern to which the character string "continue" is attached, and the right decorative pattern to which the number "4" is attached are displayed. At approximately the center in the vertical direction of , the number "4" and the character string "Continue" are temporarily stopped and displayed in a visually recognizable manner.

FIG. 415(C) shows a predetermined timing (for example, timing t10 and timing t11) after a green pending image is displayed in the first pending display area instead of the blue pending image at timing t10. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display state at a predetermined timing between In this state, all of the reserved images displayed in the reserved display area to the third reserved display area can be visually recognized.

In this embodiment, the pine tree mark group image is temporarily not displayed during the period from timing t11 to timing t13. Also, during this period, the character string "x2" is displayed so as to overlap the upper right portion of the right decorative symbol that is temporarily stopped. FIG. 415D shows a display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t12) between timing t10 and timing t13. In this state, all of the reserved images displayed in the reserved display area to the third reserved display area can be visually recognized.

At timing t13, the display of the pine tree mark group image is started again. At this time, the pine mark group image is displayed in front of each of the reserved images displayed in the reserved display area to the third reserved display area. Further, at timing t13, the temporary stop display until then changes to a display state in which the left decorative symbols to the right decorative symbols are scrolled and moved downward. In FIG. 415(E), at timing t13, the pine mark group image has changed to a state where it is displayed in front of the reserved images displayed in the reserved display area to the third reserved display area. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display state at a later predetermined timing (for example, timing t14);

At timing t19, the display priority of the pine mark group image and each of the reserved images displayed in the reserved display area to the third reserved display area is switched, and the pine mark group image is displayed in the reserved display area to the third reserved display area. From the state in which each reserved image displayed in the display is displayed in front of each reserved image displayed in the reserved display area to the state in which each reserved image displayed in the reserved display area to the third reserved display area is displayed in front of the pine mark group image and change.

FIG. 415(F) is a predetermined timing after changing to a state where each of the reserved images displayed in the reserved display area to the third reserved display area is displayed on the front side of the pine mark group image at timing t19. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display state at (predetermined timing between timing t19 and timing t20). In this state, all of the reserved images displayed in the reserved display area to the third reserved display area can be visually recognized.

At timing t20, instead of the green pending image that had been displayed in the first pending display area until then, the red pending image is displayed in the first pending display area. Further, the left decorative symbols to the right decorative symbols scrolled downward are temporarily stopped and displayed. Specifically, the left decorative pattern to which the number "7" is attached, the middle decorative pattern to which the character string "continue" is attached, and the right decorative pattern to which the number "7" is attached are displayed. At approximately the center in the vertical direction, the number "7" and the character string "Continue" are temporarily stopped and displayed in a visually recognizable manner.

FIG. 415(G) shows a predetermined timing (for example, timing t20 and timing t21) after a red pending image is displayed in the first pending display area instead of the green pending image at timing t20. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display state at a predetermined timing between In this state, all of the reserved images displayed in the reserved display area to the third reserved display area can be visually recognized.

In this embodiment, the pine tree mark group image is not displayed at timing t21. Also, from timing t21 to timing t22, the character string "x3" is displayed so as to overlap the upper right portion of the right decorative symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed. FIG. 415(H) is a diagram showing a display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t22) between timing t21 and timing t23. In this state, all of the reserved images displayed in the reserved display area to the third reserved display area can be visually recognized.

At timing t23, the display state changes from the temporary stop display state to a display state in which the left decorative symbols to the right decorative symbols are scrolled downward.

At the timing t25, the left decorative design and the right decorative design are temporarily stopped and displayed with the numeral "7" attached thereto, and the ready-to-win state occurs. At this time, the middle decorative pattern is maintained in a variable display state in which it is scrolled downward and displayed. FIG. 415(H) shows the display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t26) after the reach state occurs at timing t25.

At the timing t33, the medium decorative pattern that has been variably displayed in the display mode according to the special lottery result is in a variability stop state. Specifically, when the special lottery result is a loss, a decorative design with a number other than "7" as the middle decorative design is stopped and displayed. In addition, when the special lottery result is a big hit, a decorative design with a number "7" is stopped and displayed as a medium decorative design. When the special lottery result is a loss, a new variable display of the decorative pattern is started from timing t34, and when the special lottery result is a big hit, the decorative pattern is newly displayed after the big win game is over. change begins.

Although an example of the effect of changing the display mode of the reserved image in the second reserved display area has been shown, the area in which the display mode of the reserved image is changed is not limited to the second reserved display area. In any one of the fourth reserved display areas, the display mode of the reserved image may be changed in the same manner as in the present example of effect.

In this embodiment, the reserved display area to the fourth reserved display area can be hidden by the pine tree mark group image. Further, the reserved display area is configured so as not to be hidden. In this manner, by hiding a plurality of reserved display areas with a predetermined image, it is possible to make the player feel interested in which reserved image changes. Further, it is configured such that the display mode of the reserved image can be changed at the timing when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed. Therefore, compared with the case where the decorative patterns are displayed so as to scroll and move, the player can be made to pay attention to the change of the reserved image, and the player can be distracted by the movement of the decorative patterns. , it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the state of change of the reserved image cannot be confirmed.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 409(A), an embodiment in which the reserved display area and the first reserved display area may be hidden by the pine mark group image has been described with reference to FIG. A modified embodiment in which the reserved display area may be hidden by the operation instruction image will be described with reference to FIGS. 416 and 417. FIG. It should be noted that FIG. 416 is a time chart showing an example of effects in this embodiment. FIG. 417 is a diagram showing the display state in the display area.

In the state of timing t0, the display state in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is a state in which the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. Further, the reserved display area has a circular blue reserved image, the first reserved display area has a circular white reserved image, and the second reserved display area has a circular white reserved image. However, a circular white pending image is displayed in each of the third pending display areas.

At timing t5, an operation instruction image indicating that the operation of the operation button 410 is valid starts frame-in from the lower center of the display area in the left-right direction toward the upper side. The operation instruction image has a horizontally long elliptical shape, and the character string "PUSH" is added to the image.

At timing t6, the frame-in of the operation instruction image to the display area is completed. The operation instruction image is displayed behind the reserved image. Further, the operation instruction image continues to move upward even after the frame-in is completed. FIG. 417(A) shows a state in which the operation instruction image has moved from bottom to top and has completely entered the display area.

At timing t7, the upward movement of the operation instruction image is completed. At the same time, the state in which the operation instruction image is displayed behind the reserved image is changed to the state in which the reserved image is displayed behind the operation instruction image. At the same time, the state in which the reception of operation on the operation button 410 is disabled is changed to the state in which it is enabled. The operation valid period for the operation button 410 continues for two seconds from timing t7 to timing t9. FIG. 417(B) shows, at timing t7, after the state in which the operation instruction image is displayed behind the pending image changes to the state in which the pending image is displayed behind the operation instruction image. is a diagram showing a display state at a predetermined timing (timing t8).

FIG. 417(C) shows a case where an operation is performed during the operation valid period (for example, the player operates the operation button 410 at timing t8 during the operation valid period), or a case where the operation valid period ends. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a display state displayed in (when the player does not operate the operation button 410 during the operation valid period). Specifically, the timing (for example, timing t8) at which the player operates the operation button 410 during the valid operation period, or the timing at which the valid operation period ends without the player performing an operation (timing t9). ), the state in which the blue reserved image is displayed behind the operation instruction image changes to a state in which the operation instruction image is displayed behind the blue reserved image.

At timing t10, a green pending image is displayed in the pending display area instead of the blue pending image that has been displayed in the pending display area. FIG. 417D shows a predetermined timing (for example, between timing t10 and timing t11) after a green pending image is displayed in the pending display area instead of the green pending image at timing t10. is a diagram showing a display state at a predetermined timing of .

At timing t11, the display of the operation instruction image displayed behind the pending image ends.

At timing t15, an operation instruction image indicating that the operation of the operation button 410 is valid starts frame-in from the lower center of the display area in the left-right direction toward the upper side. The operation instruction image has a horizontally long elliptical shape, and the character string "PUSH" is added to the image. Moreover, it is larger than the operation instruction image displayed from timing t5 to timing t11.

At timing t16, the frame-in of the operation instruction image to the display area is completed. The operation instruction image is displayed behind the reserved image. Further, the operation instruction image continues to move upward even after the frame-in is completed. FIG. 417(E) shows a state in which the operation instruction image has moved from bottom to top and has completely entered the display area.

At timing t17, the upward movement of the operation instruction image is completed. At the same time, the state in which the operation instruction image is displayed behind the reserved image is changed to the state in which the reserved image is displayed behind the operation instruction image. At the same time, the state in which the reception of operation on the operation button 410 is disabled is changed to the state in which it is enabled. The operation valid period for the operation button 410 continues for two seconds from timing t17 to timing t19. FIG. 417F shows, at timing t17, after the state in which the operation instruction image is displayed behind the pending image changes to the state in which the pending image is displayed behind the operation instruction image. is a diagram showing a display state at a predetermined timing (timing t18).

FIG. 417(G) shows a case where an operation is performed during the operation valid period (for example, the player operates the operation button 410 at timing t18 during the operation valid period), or a case where the operation valid period ends. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a display state displayed in (when the player does not operate the operation button 410 during the operation valid period). Specifically, the timing (for example, timing t18) at which the player operates the operation button 410 during the operation valid period, or the timing at which the operation valid period ends without the player performing an operation (timing t9 ), the state in which the green reserved image is displayed behind the operation instruction image changes to a state in which the operation instruction image is displayed behind the green reserved image.

At timing t10, instead of the green pending image that has been displayed in the pending display area until then, the red pending image that has been displayed in the pending display area is larger than the green pending (specifically, 2 times the diameter) the pending image will be displayed. FIG. 417(H) shows a predetermined timing (between timing t20 and timing t21) after a red pending image is displayed in the pending display area instead of the green pending image at timing t10. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display state at a predetermined timing.

At timing t21, the display of the operation instruction image displayed behind the pending image ends.

At timing t25, the left and right decorative symbols with the same number (for example, "2") are temporarily stopped and displayed to generate a ready-to-win state. At this time, the middle decorative pattern is maintained in a variable display state in which it is scrolled downward and displayed.

At the timing t33, the medium decorative pattern that has been variably displayed in the display mode according to the special lottery result is in a variability stop state. Specifically, when the special lottery result is a loss, decorative designs with numbers other than "2" are stopped and displayed as medium decorative designs. Further, when the special lottery result is a big hit, a decorative pattern with a number "2" is stopped and displayed as a middle decorative pattern. When the special lottery result is a loss, a new variable display of the decorative pattern is started from timing t34, and when the special lottery result is a big hit, the decorative pattern is newly displayed after the big win game is over. change begins.

In this way, by interchanging the anteroposterior relationship between the operation instruction image and the pending image, it is possible to provide an impactful effect for the change of the pending image. Further, since the characters attached to the operation instruction image are hidden by the reserved image, it is possible to give a great impact to the player.

In this embodiment, two types of operation instruction images having different sizes can be displayed. In addition, it may be configured such that the size of the reserved image may change. Further, the color of the pending image may not change, but the size of the pending image may change. For example, at timing t20, only the color of the green pending image is changed without changing the size of the green pending image to create a red pending image, or both the size and color of the green pending image are changed to create a large red pending image. Alternatively, a large green pending image may be obtained by changing only the size of the green pending image without changing the color of the green pending image. Also, when the size of the reserved image is increased, it is preferable to configure the system so that the expectation for the big win is higher than when the size of the reserved image is not increased.

With such a configuration, the enlarged pending image is visually recognized by the player so as to hide the operation instruction image, so that the effect of changing the pending image can be made more impactful.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 409(A), an embodiment in which the reserved display area and the first reserved display area may be hidden by the pine mark group image has been described with reference to FIG. An embodiment modified so that the reserved display area to the fourth reserved display area may be hidden by the decorative pattern being displayed in a variable manner will be described with reference to FIGS. 418 and 419. FIG. Note that FIG. 418 is a time chart showing an example of effects in this embodiment. FIG. 419 is a diagram showing the display state in the display area.

At timing t0, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the variable display of decorative symbols is started. FIG. 419(A) shows that at timing t0, after the variable display of the decorative symbols is started, at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t1), the winning of the game ball to the first start port 2002 occurs, and the number of reserved is the upper limit of four.

In this embodiment, the reserved images are not displayed horizontally in the lower part of the display area, but are displayed vertically in the left side of the display area. Specifically, a fourth reserved display area, a third reserved display area, a second reserved display area, a first reserved display area, and the reserved display area are provided on the left side of the display area from above.

In addition, instead of using a circular reserved image as the reserved image, an image in which ingredients of oden are stuck in a skewer (hereinafter sometimes referred to as an "oden reserved image") is used as the reserved image. there is The oden reserved image is composed of a part imitating a skewer and a part imitating ingredients. The number of ingredients is from 1 to 10, and as the number of ingredients increases, the length of the skewer becomes longer. In addition, the larger the number of ingredients in the image (the longer the length of the oden reservation when viewed in the entire oden reservation image, the longer the image), the variation result of the decoration pattern executed or executed corresponding to the reservation image is configured to increase the degree of expectation that it will indicate a big hit. Further, the oden reserved image in the present embodiment is basically displayed on the front side of the decorative pattern.

Below, corresponding to the number of ingredients that the oden reserved image has, an oden reserved image with one ingredient is an oden reserved image with one ingredient, and an oden reserved image with two ingredients is reserved with two ingredients. Image, oden reserved image with 3 ingredients, oden reserved image with 3 ingredients, oden reserved image with 4 ingredients, oden reserved image with 4 ingredients, oden reserved image with 5 ingredients 5 oden reserved image, 6 ingredients reserved oden image, 6 ingredients reserved oden image, 7 ingredients reserved oden image, 7 ingredients reserved image, 8 ingredients reserved oden image The image is called an oden reserved image with 8 ingredients, an oden reserved image with 9 ingredients is called an oden reserved image with 9 ingredients, and an oden reserved image with 10 ingredients is called an oden reserved image with 10 ingredients.

During the period from timing t0 when the decorative pattern starts to be displayed in a variable manner to timing t13, the oden reserved image is displayed in front of the decorative pattern. FIG. 419(A) shows an oden reserved image with four ingredients in the reserved display area, an oden reserved image with one ingredient in the first reserved display area, and an oden reserved image with two ingredients in the second reserved display area. , a state in which one ingredient oden reserved image is displayed in the third reserved display area and the fourth reserved display area.

At timing t13, the display priority of the oden reserved image and the decorative pattern is switched, and the state in which the oden reserved image is displayed in front of the decorative pattern is changed to the state in which the decorative pattern is displayed in front of the oden reserved image. and change. FIG. 419(B) shows a state in which the oden reserved image is displayed on the front side of the decorative pattern at timing t13, and a predetermined state after the decorative pattern is displayed on the front side of the oden reserved image. The display state at timing (for example, timing t14) is shown.

At timing t15, the display priority of the oden reserved image and the decorative pattern is switched, and the state in which the decorative pattern is displayed in front of the oden reserved image is changed to the state in which the oden reserved image is displayed in front of the decorative pattern. and change. In FIG. 419(C), the display priority of the oden reserved image and the decorative pattern is switched at timing t15, and the decorative pattern is displayed in front of the oden reserved image, and the oden reserved image is displayed in front of the decorative pattern. 2 shows the display state at a predetermined timing (predetermined timing between timing t15 and timing t16) after changing to the state displayed in .

At timing t16, in the reserved display area, the oden reserved image with 6 ingredients is displayed instead of the oden reserved image with 4 ingredients that has been displayed until then, and in the second reserved display area, Instead of the oden reserved image with 2 ingredients displayed until then, the state where the oden reserved image with 3 ingredients is displayed is changed. In FIG. 419(D), at timing t16, in the reserved display area, the oden reserved image with 6 ingredients is displayed instead of the oden reserved image with 4 ingredients that has been displayed until then. In the second reservation display area, at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t17) after changing to the state where the three ingredients oden reserved image is displayed instead of the two ingredients oden reserved image that was displayed until then It shows the display state.

At timing t19, the display priority of the oden reserved image and the decorative pattern is switched, and the state in which the oden reserved image is displayed in front of the decorative pattern is changed to the state in which the decorative pattern is displayed in front of the oden reserved image. and change.

FIG. 419(E) shows a state in which the oden reserved image is displayed in front of the decorative design at timing t19, and a predetermined state after the decorative design is displayed in front of the oden reserved image. The display state at timing (for example, timing t20) is shown.

At timing t21, the display priority of the oden reserved image and the decorative pattern is switched, and the state in which the decorative pattern is displayed in front of the oden reserved image is changed to the state in which the oden reserved image is displayed in front of the decorative pattern. and change.

In FIG. 419(F), the display priority of the oden reserved image and the decorative pattern is switched at timing t21, and the decorative pattern is displayed in front of the oden reserved image, and the oden reserved image is displayed in front of the decorative pattern. 2 shows the display state at a predetermined timing (predetermined timing between timing t21 and timing t22) after changing to the state displayed in .

At timing t22, in the reserved display area, the oden reserved image with 6 ingredients that had been displayed until then changes to a state in which an oden reserved image with 10 ingredients is displayed, and in the second reserved display area, Instead of the oden reserved image with 3 ingredients displayed until then, the state where the oden reserved image with 6 ingredients is displayed is changed.

In FIG. 419(G), at timing t22, in the reserved display area, the oden reserved image with 10 ingredients is displayed instead of the oden reserved image with 6 ingredients that had been displayed until then. In the second reservation display area, at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t23) after changing to the state where the 6 ingredients oden reserved image is displayed instead of the 3 ingredients oden reserved image that was displayed until then It shows the display state.

At timing t25, the left and right decorative symbols with the same number (for example, "2") are temporarily stopped and displayed to generate a ready-to-win state. At this time, the middle decorative pattern is maintained in a variable display state in which it is scrolled downward and displayed.

At the timing t33, the medium decorative pattern that has been variably displayed in the display mode according to the special lottery result is in a variability stop state. Specifically, when the special lottery result is a loss, decorative designs with numbers other than "2" are stopped and displayed as medium decorative designs. Further, when the special lottery result is a big hit, a decorative pattern with a number "2" is stopped and displayed as a middle decorative pattern. In addition, when the special lottery result is a loss, a new variable display of the decorative pattern is started from timing t34. On the other hand, when the special lottery result is a big hit, at timing t34, the display of the pending image in the relevant pending display area to the fourth pending display area is temporarily stopped, and after the big win game ends, the decoration pattern is renewed. The display of the pending image in the pending display region to the fourth pending display region is resumed at the same timing as the timing when the variable display is started.

In the present embodiment, for a normal oden reserved image (one ingredient oden reserved image) with a low expectation of a big hit, even if the decorative pattern is displayed on the front side of the oden reserved image, the decorative pattern are configured so that they do not overlap with each other.

Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the number of reservations cannot be confirmed when the player attempts to view the current number of reservations.

On the other hand, for the oden holding image (1 ingredient oden holding image to 10 ingredients oden holding image), which has a higher expectation for a big hit than the normal oden holding image (1 ingredient oden holding image), the decorative pattern is oden When it is displayed on the front side of the reserved image, it overlaps with the decorative pattern and is configured to be visually recognized by the player as if the oden reserved image is hidden by the decorative pattern. Therefore, when the oden reserved image is displayed on the front side of the decorative pattern and the display mode is changed to another oden reserved image, the oden reserved image is visually recognized by the player in a visual mode in which the oden reserved image is enlarged twice. , it is possible to give a great impact to the player.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 409(A), an embodiment in which the reserved display area and the first reserved display area may be hidden by the pine mark group image has been described with reference to FIG. An embodiment modified so that the reserved display area to the fourth reserved display area may be hidden by the decorative pattern being displayed in a variable manner will be described with reference to FIGS. 420 and 421. FIG. It should be noted that FIG. 420 is a time chart showing an example of effects in this embodiment. Also, FIG. 421 is a diagram showing a display state in the display area.

At timing t0, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the variable display of decorative symbols is started. During the period from timing t0 when the decorative pattern starts to be displayed in a variable manner to timing t7, the reserved images displayed in the reserved display area to the third reserved display area are displayed in front of the decorative pattern.

FIG. 421(A) shows the display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t1) after the variable display of decorative symbols is started at timing t0. In the figure, the reserved image is blue in the reserved display area, the reserved image is white in the first reserved display area, the reserved image is white in the second reserved display area, and the reserved image is white in the third reserved display area. A state in which an image is displayed is shown. Further, each of the reserved images displayed in the reserved display area to the third reserved display area is shown in a state of being displayed on the front side of the decorative pattern. In this embodiment, the reserved images displayed in the reserved display area to the fourth reserved display area are basically displayed on the front side of the decorative pattern.

At timing t7, the display priority of each reserved image displayed in the reserved display area to the third reserved display area and the decoration pattern is switched, and each reserved image displayed in the reserved display area to the third reserved display area is decorated. The state in which the decorative design is displayed in front of the pattern is changed to the state in which the decorative design is displayed in front of each reserved image displayed in the reserved display area to the third reserved display area.

FIG. 421(B) shows that at timing t7, each of the reserved images displayed in the reserved display area to the third reserved display area is displayed on the front side of the decorative design, and the decorative design is displayed in the reserved display area to the third reserved display area. 3 shows a display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t8) after changing to a state in which each reserved image displayed in the reserved display area 3 is displayed on the front side.

At timing t9, the display priority of each reserved image and decorative pattern displayed in the reserved display area to the third reserved display area is switched, and the decorative pattern is displayed in the reserved display area to the third reserved display area Each reservation The state of being displayed on the front side of the image is changed to the state of being displayed on the front side of the decoration pattern, with each reserved image displayed in the reserved display area to the third reserved display area.

421(C), the display priority of each reserved image and decorative pattern displayed in the reserved display area to the third reserved display area is switched at timing t9, and the decorative pattern is displayed in the reserved display area to the third reserved display area From the state displayed on the front side of each reserved image displayed in the state to the state in which each reserved image displayed in the reserved display area to the third reserved display area is displayed on the front side of the decorative pattern. The display state at a predetermined timing (predetermined timing between timing t9 and timing t10) after that is shown.

At timing t10, the pending display area changes to a state in which the green pending image is displayed in place of the blue pending image that has been displayed.

FIG. 421(D) shows, at timing t10, a predetermined timing ( For example, the display state at timing t11) is shown.

At timing t17, the display priority of each reserved image displayed in the reserved display area to the third reserved display area and the decoration pattern is switched, and each reserved image displayed in the reserved display area to the third reserved display area is decorated. The state in which the decorative design is displayed in front of the pattern is changed to the state in which the decorative design is displayed in front of each reserved image displayed in the reserved display area to the third reserved display area.

FIG. 421(E) shows that at timing t17, each of the reserved images displayed in the reserved display area to the third reserved display area is displayed on the front side of the decorative design, and the decorative design is displayed in the reserved display area to the third reserved display area. 3 shows a display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t18) after changing to a state in which each reserved image displayed in the reserved display area 3 is displayed on the front side.

At timing t19, the display priority of each reserved image and decorative pattern displayed in the reserved display area to the third reserved display area is switched, and the decorative pattern is displayed in the reserved display area to the third reserved display area Each reservation The state of being displayed on the front side of the image is changed to the state of being displayed on the front side of the decoration pattern, with each reserved image displayed in the reserved display area to the third reserved display area.

In FIG. 421(F), the display priority of each reserved image and decorative pattern displayed in the reserved display area to the third reserved display area is switched at timing t19, and the decorative pattern is displayed in the reserved display area to the third reserved display area. From the state displayed on the front side of each reserved image displayed in the state to the state in which each reserved image displayed in the reserved display area to the third reserved display area is displayed on the front side of the decorative pattern. The display state at a predetermined timing (predetermined timing between timing t19 and timing t20) after that is shown.

At timing t20, the state changes to a state in which the red pending image is displayed instead of the green pending image that has been displayed in the pending display area.

FIG. 421(G) shows, at timing t20, a predetermined timing ( For example, it shows the display state at timing t21).

At timing t25, the left and right decorative symbols with the same number (for example, "2") are temporarily stopped and displayed to generate a ready-to-win state. At this time, the middle decorative pattern is maintained in a variable display state in which it is scrolled downward and displayed.

At the timing t33, the medium decorative pattern that has been variably displayed in the display mode according to the special lottery result is in a variability stop state. Specifically, when the special lottery result is a loss, decorative designs with numbers other than "2" are stopped and displayed as medium decorative designs. Further, when the special lottery result is a big hit, a decorative pattern with a number "2" is stopped and displayed as a middle decorative pattern. In addition, when the special lottery result is a loss, a new variable display of the decorative pattern is started from timing t34. On the other hand, when the special lottery result is a big hit, at timing t34, the display of the pending image in the relevant pending display area to the third pending display area is temporarily stopped, and after the big win game ends, the decoration pattern is renewed. The display of the pending image in the pending display region to the fourth pending display region is resumed at the same timing as the timing when the variable display is started.

In the present embodiment, after the reserved image displayed in the reserved display area is hidden by the decorative pattern, the display mode of the reserved image is changed while the reserved image is displayed on the front side of the decorative pattern. there is With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the impact of the hold change.

During the period (timing t7 to timing t9, timing t17 to timing t19) in which the decorative pattern is displayed on the front side of the reserved image, there is a possibility that the reserved image will be difficult to see. Therefore, it is preferable to scroll the decorative symbols downward at a variable speed at which the reserved image can be visually recognized through the gap between the decorative symbols displayed on the upper side and the decorative symbols displayed on the lower side.

Specifically, at least once during the period in which the decorative pattern is displayed on the front side of the reserved image, from the gap between the decorative pattern displayed on the upper side and the decorative pattern displayed on the lower side, the reserved display area to the second 4, the reserved display area may be configured to be visible. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the number of reservations cannot be confirmed when the player tries to visually recognize the current number of reservations.

420(A) and 421(A) to 421(G), an example of changing the display mode of the pending image during the variable display in which the decorative symbols are scrolled downward has been shown. 420(B) and 421(H), an embodiment in which the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, and the display mode of the pending image is changed during the temporary stop display will be described. . Incidentally, FIG. 420(B) is a time chart showing an example of an effect regarding the variable state of decorative symbols in this embodiment. FIG. 421(H) is a diagram showing a display state in the display area.

In this embodiment, the left decorative symbols to the right decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the period from timing t7 to timing t11 and in the period from timing t17 to timing t21.

In the present embodiment, during the period from timing t7 to timing t9, and the period from timing t17 to timing t19, the decorative pattern is displayed in the reserved display area to the third reserved display area. It is in the state displayed in In this state, the upper half of each of the reserved images displayed in the reserved display area to the third reserved display area is hidden by the decoration pattern, and is visually recognized by the player.

Further, at timing t11 and timing t21, the display priority of each reserved image and decorative pattern displayed in the reserved display area to the third reserved display area is switched, and the decorative pattern is displayed in the reserved display area to the third reserved display area. From the state of being displayed on the front side of each reserved image to be displayed, each of the reserved images displayed in the reserved display area to the third reserved display area changes to the state of being displayed on the front side of the decorative pattern. . In this state, the entirety of each suspended image displayed in the suspended display area to the third suspended display area is visually recognized by the player.

FIG. 421(H) shows, at timing t10, a predetermined timing ( 10 shows a display state at a predetermined timing between timing t10 and timing t11.

In this way, even when the configuration is such that the whole of the reserved image becomes visible after part of the reserved image is hidden by the temporarily stopped decorative pattern while the decorative pattern is changing, It is possible to make an impact on the change mode.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 409(A), an embodiment has been described with reference to FIG. 410 in which the reserved display area and the first reserved display area are hidden by the pine mark group image. 422 and 423, an embodiment modified so that the display effect of counting down the time displayed during display may be hidden by the decorative pattern during variable display will be described. Note that FIG. 422 is a time chart showing an example of effects in this embodiment. Also, FIG. 423 is a diagram showing a display state in the display area.

At timing t0, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the variable display of decorative symbols is started. At the same time, a left countdown image is displayed behind the left decorative pattern. The color of the left countdown image is now green.

The countdown image is an image with a rhombic outer shape. A countdown image is an image indicating that a predetermined effect display is performed at a predetermined timing. Specifically, the number attached to the countdown image indicates the remaining time (remaining seconds) until the predetermined effect is executed. At the timing when the number attached to the countdown image becomes "00", a predetermined effect display is executed. Three countdown images, ie, a left countdown image, a middle countdown image, and a right countdown image are provided corresponding to the left decorative design, the middle decorative design, and the right decorative design. Each countdown image is displayed in front of or behind each decorative pattern in the upper part of the display area.

FIG. 423A shows the display state at timing t5. In the drawing, the left countdown image is displayed behind the left decorative pattern. The number "20" is attached to the left countdown image. The number attached to the left count image is decremented by one every time one second elapses from this state, and at timing t25, the number "00" is displayed, but the number "00" is displayed, a predetermined effect display (for example, one of a plurality of characters showing different degrees of expectation for big wins is displayed in the display area) is started. Note that these points are not limited to the left countdown image, and the same applies to the middle countdown image and the right countdown image, which will be described later.

At timing t8, the display priority of the countdown image and the decorative pattern is switched, and the state in which the decorative pattern is displayed in front of the countdown image changes to the state in which the countdown image is displayed in front of the decorative pattern. .

In FIG. 423(B), the display priority of the countdown image and the decorative pattern is switched at timing t8, and from the state in which the decorative pattern is displayed in front of the countdown image, the countdown image is displayed in front of the decorative pattern. It shows the display state immediately after changing to the normal state.

From timing t9 to timing t12, a middle countdown image appears from behind the left countdown image to the right. FIG. 423(C) shows the display state at timing t10 when the middle countdown image is appearing. In the figure, the middle countdown image is appearing from behind the left countdown image to the right. In addition, the countdown image that is moving to the right has a character string "?" instead of a number.

At timing t12, the movement of the middle countdown image to the right side is completed, and the middle countdown image and the middle decoration pattern are overlapped. The middle countdown image is displayed on the front side of the middle decorative pattern. At the same time, the number "30" is added instead of the character string "?" attached to the middle countdown image. Also in the middle countdown image, the assigned number is counted down and displayed according to the passage of time. Also, at timing t12, the left countdown image, which was green, changes to red.

FIG. 423(D) shows the state immediately after such a display mode change at timing t12.

At timing t13, the display priority of the countdown image and the decorative pattern is switched, and the state in which the countdown image is displayed in front of the decorative pattern is changed to the state in which the decorative pattern is displayed in front of the countdown image. .

In FIG. 423(E), the display priority of the countdown image and the decorative pattern is switched at timing t13, and from the state in which the countdown image is displayed in front of the decorative pattern, the decorative pattern is displayed in front of the countdown image. It shows the display state at timing t14, which is the timing after the state has changed to the state where the

At timing t15, the display priority of the countdown image and the decorative pattern is switched, and the state in which the decorative pattern is displayed in front of the countdown image changes to the state in which the countdown image is displayed in front of the decorative pattern. .

In FIG. 423(F), the display priority of the countdown image and the decorative pattern is switched at timing t15, and from the state in which the decorative pattern is displayed in front of the countdown image, the countdown image is displayed in front of the decorative pattern. It shows the display state immediately after changing to the normal state.

At timing t17, display of the right countdown image is started. The right countdown image does not slide like the middle countdown image and starts to be displayed, but is suddenly displayed at a position overlapping the right decorative pattern. The right countdown image is labeled with the number "60".

FIG. 423(G) shows the display state immediately after the display of the right countdown image is started.

At timing t18, the display priority of the countdown image and the decorative pattern is switched, and the state in which the countdown image is displayed in front of the decorative pattern is changed to the state in which the decorative pattern is displayed in front of the countdown image. .

In FIG. 423(H), the display priority of the countdown image and the decorative pattern is switched at timing t18, and from the state in which the countdown image is displayed in front of the decorative pattern, the decorative pattern is displayed in front of the countdown image. It shows the display state at timing t19, which is the timing after the state has changed to the state where the

At timing t23, the display priority of the countdown image and the decorative pattern is switched, and the state in which the decorative pattern is displayed in front of the countdown image changes to the state in which the countdown image is displayed in front of the decorative pattern. .

At timing t25, the number attached to the left countdown image becomes "00" and the display of the left countdown image ends at the same time. At the same time, a predetermined display effect is started in the display area.

At timing t26, the display priority of the countdown image and the decorative pattern is switched, and the state in which the countdown image is displayed in front of the decorative pattern is changed to the state in which the decorative pattern is displayed in front of the countdown image. .

For the middle countdown image and the right countdown image, the same display effect as that for the left countdown image is executed in the period before and after the timing when the attached number becomes "00".

After a predetermined display performance corresponding to the right countdown image is executed, the decorative patterns to which the same number (for example, ``2'') is attached as the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern are temporarily stopped and displayed to generate a ready-to-win state. At this time, the middle decorative pattern is maintained in a variable display state in which it is scrolled downward and displayed.

After the elapse of a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) from the occurrence of the ready-to-win state, the middle decorative pattern that has been variably displayed in a display mode according to the special lottery result comes to a variability stop state. Specifically, when the special lottery result is a loss, decorative designs with numbers other than "2" are stopped and displayed as medium decorative designs. Further, when the special lottery result is a big hit, a decorative pattern with a number "2" is stopped and displayed as a middle decorative pattern. In addition, when the special lottery result is a loss, a new variable display of the decorative pattern is started from timing t34. After the jackpot game ends, a new variable display of decorative symbols is started.

In this embodiment, the color of the countdown image (for example, green or red), the length of the countdown period (for example, 25 seconds, 30 seconds, or 60 seconds), the number of displayed countdown images (only the left countdown image , two of the left countdown image and the middle countdown image, or three of the left countdown image and the right countdown image) may suggest the degree of expectation for the big win. Alternatively, as the effect display displayed when the count reaches ``00'', a plurality of effect displays with different degrees of expectation for big hits are provided, and any of the effect displays is displayed corresponding to such a mode that the countdown image can take. It may be configured to suggest to the player whether it will be executed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when changing the display mode of the image to be displayed as a countdown, the countdown image is temporarily hidden by the decorative pattern, and after the whole is made visible again, the display mode of the countdown image is changed. It is configured to let By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to make an impact on the change mode of the countdown image.

Although the example of the effect in which the color of the countdown image changes from green to red has been shown, the color may not change in some cases.

It may be configured to change the reserved image over a plurality of times of variable display of the decorative pattern. Below, with reference to FIGS. 424(A) and 425, while switching the display priority between the hold image corresponding to the predetermined hold and the pine mark group image, the hold Fig. 3 shows an embodiment modified to change the image; FIG. 424(A) is a time chart showing an example of rendering in this embodiment. Also, FIG. 425 is a diagram showing a display state in the display area.

At timing t0, a new variable display of decorative symbols is started.

At timing t2, the display of the pine tree mark group image is started. The pine tree mark group image is displayed on the front side of the decorative pattern. Also, at this stage, the white reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area, the white reserved image displayed in the second reserved display area, and the blue reserved image displayed in the third reserved display area displayed behind. The pine tree mark group image displayed in the present embodiment is the same pine tree mark group image used in the embodiment described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 425A shows a display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t3) after the display of the pine tree group image is started at timing t2.

At timing t4, the decorative pattern changes from the variable display state to the stop display state in a display mode indicating that the special lottery result is lost. Specifically, a decorative pattern with the number “2” is attached as the left decorative pattern, a decorative pattern with the number “5” is attached as the middle decorative pattern, and a number “4” is attached as the right decorative pattern. The displayed decorative pattern is stopped. At the same time, the display priority of each reserved image displayed in the first to third reserved display areas and the pine mark group image is switched, and each reserved displayed in the first to third reserved display areas From the state where the image is displayed on the front side of the pine tree mark group image to the state where the pine tree mark group image is displayed on the front side of each of the reserved images displayed in the first to third reserved display areas. and change.

In FIG. 425(B), at timing t4, the decorative pattern is in a stopped display state, and the pine tree mark group image is displayed in front of the reserved images displayed in the first to third reserved display areas. 4 shows the display state at a predetermined timing (predetermined timing between timing t4 and timing t5) after changing to the displayed state.

At timing t5, the reserved image displayed in the reserved display area is no longer displayed, and the decorative pattern changes from the stationary display state to the variable display state, corresponding to the reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area until then. Variation display of decorative patterns is started. At the same time, the display priority of each reserved image and the pine mark group image displayed in the first to third reserved display areas is switched, and the pine mark group image is displayed in the first to third reserved display areas. From the state in which each reserved image is displayed in front of each displayed reserved image, to the state in which each reserved image displayed in the first to third reserved display areas is displayed in front of the pine mark group image. and change.

FIG. 425(C) shows that, at timing t5, the decoration pattern changes from the static display state to the variable display state, and each of the reserved images displayed in the first to third reserved display areas is different from the pine mark group image. also shows the display state immediately after changing to the state displayed on the near side.

At timing t5, the reserved images displayed in the respective reserved display areas simultaneously start moving toward the adjacent left reserved display area, and at timing t6, the respective reserved images start to move to the adjacent left reserved display areas. complete at the same time. Specifically, the reserved image that has been displayed in the first reserved display area until then moves to the left while being enlarged, so that the reserved image is displayed in the reserved display area. Further, the suspended image that has been displayed in the second suspended display area until then moves leftward and is displayed in the first suspended display area. Also, the blue reserved image that has been displayed in the third reserved display area until then moves leftward and is displayed in the second reserved display area. Furthermore, instead of the blue reserved image that has completed the movement to the second reserved display area, the green reserved image is displayed in the second reserved display area at timing t6.

FIG. 425(D) shows that the movement of each reserved image is completed at timing t6, and instead of the blue reserved image that has completed the movement to the second reserved display area, the green reserved image is displayed in the second reserved display area. It shows the display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t7) after it has been displayed.

At timing t9, the decorative pattern changes from the variable display state to the stop display state in a display mode indicating that the special lottery result is a loss. Specifically, a decorative pattern with the number “6” is attached as the left decorative pattern, a decorative pattern with the number “9” is attached as the middle decorative pattern, and a number “1” is attached as the right decorative pattern. The displayed decorative pattern is stopped. At the same time, the display priority of each reserved image and the pine mark group image displayed in the first reserved display area to the second reserved display area is switched, and each reserved displayed in the first reserved display area to the second reserved display area From the state where the image is displayed on the front side of the pine tree mark group image to the state where the pine tree mark group image is displayed on the front side of each of the reserved images displayed in the first to second reserved display areas. and change.

In FIG. 425(E), at timing t9, the decorative pattern is in a stopped display state, and the pine tree mark group image is displayed on the front side of each reserved image displayed in the first to second reserved display areas. The display state at a predetermined timing (predetermined timing between timing t9 and timing t10) after changing to the displayed state.

At timing t10, the reserved image displayed in the reserved display area is no longer displayed, and the decorative pattern changes from the stationary display state to the variable display state, corresponding to the reserved image that has been displayed in the first reserved display area until then. Variation display of decorative patterns is started. At the same time, the display priority of each reserved image and the pine mark group image displayed in the first to second reserved display areas is switched, and the pine mark group image is displayed in the first to second reserved display areas. From the state in which each reserved image is displayed in front of each displayed reserved image, to the state in which each reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area to the second reserved display area is displayed in front of the pine mark group image. and change.

In FIG. 425(F), at timing t10, the decorative pattern changes from the static display state to the variable display state, and each of the reserved images displayed in the first to second reserved display areas changes from the pine mark group image. also shows the display state immediately after changing to the state displayed on the near side.

At timing t10, the reserved images displayed in the respective reserved display areas simultaneously start moving toward the adjacent left reserved display area, and at timing t11, the respective reserved images start to move to the adjacent left reserved display areas. complete at the same time. Specifically, the reserved image that has been displayed in the first reserved display area until then moves to the left while being enlarged, so that the reserved image is displayed in the reserved display area. Also, the green reserved image that has been displayed in the second reserved display area until then moves leftward and is displayed in the first reserved display area. Furthermore, at timing t11, instead of the green pending image that has completed the movement to the first pending display area, the red pending image is displayed in the first pending display area.

In FIG. 425(G), the movement of each reserved image is completed at timing t6, and instead of the green reserved image that has completed the movement to the first reserved display area, the red reserved image is displayed in the first reserved display area. It shows the display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t12) after it has been displayed.

At timing t14, the decorative pattern changes from the variable display state to the stop display state in a display mode indicating that the special lottery result is a loss. Specifically, a decorative pattern with the number “4” is attached as the left decorative pattern, a decorative pattern with the number “1” is attached as the middle decorative pattern, and a number “2” is attached as the right decorative pattern. The displayed decorative pattern is stopped. At the same time, the display priority of the red reserved image and the pine tree mark group image displayed in the first reserved display area is switched, and the red reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area is on the front side of the pine tree mark group image. , to a state in which the pine tree mark group image is displayed in front of the red reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area.

At timing t15, the reserved image displayed in the reserved display area is no longer displayed, and the decorative pattern changes from the stationary display state to the variable display state, and the red reserved image that was displayed in the first reserved display area until then The variable display of the corresponding decorative pattern is started. At the same time, the display priority is switched between the red reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area and the pine tree mark group image, and the pine tree mark group image is closer to the front side than the red reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area. , to a state in which the red reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area is displayed on the front side of the pine mark group image.

At timing t15, the red reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area starts to move toward the reserved display area, and at timing t16, the movement of the red reserved image to the reserved display area is completed. Specifically, the red pending image, which has been displayed in the first pending display area until then, moves leftward while enlarging, so that it is displayed in the pending display area.

At the timing t25, the left decorative design and the right decorative design are temporarily stopped and displayed with the numeral "2" attached thereto, and the ready-to-win state occurs. At this time, the middle decorative pattern is maintained in a variable display state in which it is scrolled downward and displayed. The display of the pine mark group ends at the same time when the reach state occurs.

FIG. 425(H) shows the display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t26) after the reach state occurs at timing t25.

At the timing t33, the medium decorative pattern that has been variably displayed in the display mode according to the special lottery result is in a variability stop state. Specifically, when the special lottery result is a loss, decorative designs with numbers other than "2" are stopped and displayed as medium decorative designs. Further, when the special lottery result is a big hit, a decorative pattern with a number "2" is stopped and displayed as a middle decorative pattern. In addition, when the special lottery result is a loss, until the game ball enters the first start port 2002 and a new special lottery result is acquired, the decorative pattern continues to be displayed in a stopped display state, and the special lottery result is obtained. In the case of a big win, after the big win game ends, a new variation of the decorative pattern is started.

In this manner, the display mode of the pending image may be changed over a plurality of stop displays of the decorative symbols. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to make an impact on the change mode of the reserved image.

Below, with reference to FIGS. 424(B) and 426, the reserved image is displayed while switching the display priority between the reserved image corresponding to the predetermined reserved and the decorative design over a plurality of variable display of the decorative design. Fig. 3 shows a modified embodiment; FIG. 424(B) is a time chart showing an example of rendering in this embodiment. FIG. 426 is a diagram showing the display state in the display area.

At timing t0, a new variable display of decorative symbols is started. Further, at timing t0, the suspended images displayed in the first to fourth suspended display areas simultaneously start to move toward the adjacent suspended display area on the left side, and at timing t1, the first to fourth suspended display areas. At the same time, the movement of the reserved image displayed in the fourth reserved display area to the third reserved display area is completed.

FIG. 426A shows a display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t2) after the pending image has been moved at timing t1. In this state, a blue pending image is displayed in the third pending display area.

At timing t4, the decorative pattern changes from the variable display state to the stop display state in a display mode indicating that the special lottery result is lost. Specifically, a decorative pattern with the number “2” is attached as the left decorative pattern, a decorative pattern with the number “5” is attached as the middle decorative pattern, and a number “4” is attached as the right decorative pattern. The displayed decorative pattern is stopped. At the same time, the display priority of each reserved image and decorative pattern displayed in the first reserved display area to the third reserved display area is switched, and each reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area to the third reserved display area is A state in which the decorative pattern is displayed in front of the decorative pattern is changed to a state in which the decorative pattern is displayed in front of each reserved image displayed in the first to third reserved display areas.

In FIG. 426(B), at timing t4, the decorative pattern is in a stopped display state, and the decorative pattern is displayed in front of each reserved image displayed in the first to third reserved display areas. It shows the display state at a predetermined timing (predetermined timing between timing t4 and timing t5) after changing to the state.

At timing t5, the reserved image displayed in the reserved display area is no longer displayed, and the decorative pattern changes from the stationary display state to the variable display state, corresponding to the reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area until then. Variation display of decorative patterns is started. At the same time, the display priority of each of the reserved images and decorative patterns displayed in the first to third reserved display areas is switched, and the decorative patterns are displayed in the first to third reserved display areas. The state of being displayed on the front side of the reserved image is changed to the state of being displayed on the front side of the decorative pattern, each of the reserved images displayed in the first to third reserved display areas.

In FIG. 426(C), at timing t5, the decorative pattern changes from the stationary display state to the variable display state, and each of the reserved images displayed in the first to third reserved display areas is positioned in front of the decorative pattern. It shows the display state immediately after changing to the state displayed on the side.

At timing t5, the reserved images displayed in the respective reserved display areas simultaneously start moving toward the adjacent left reserved display area, and at timing t6, the respective reserved images start to move to the adjacent left reserved display areas. complete at the same time. Specifically, the reserved image that has been displayed in the first reserved display area until then moves to the left while being enlarged, so that the reserved image is displayed in the reserved display area. Further, the suspended image that has been displayed in the second suspended display area until then moves leftward and is displayed in the first suspended display area. Also, the blue reserved image that has been displayed in the third reserved display area until then moves leftward and is displayed in the second reserved display area. Furthermore, instead of the blue reserved image that has completed the movement to the second reserved display area, the green reserved image is displayed in the second reserved display area at timing t6.

FIG. 426(D) shows that the movement of each reserved image is completed at timing t6, and instead of the blue reserved image that has completed the movement to the second reserved display area, the green reserved image is displayed in the second reserved display area. It shows the display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t7) after it has been displayed.

At timing t9, the decorative pattern changes from the variable display state to the stop display state in a display mode indicating that the special lottery result is a loss. Specifically, a decorative pattern with the number “6” is attached as the left decorative pattern, a decorative pattern with the number “9” is attached as the middle decorative pattern, and a number “1” is attached as the right decorative pattern. The displayed decorative pattern is stopped. At the same time, the display priority of each reserved image and decorative pattern displayed in the first reserved display area to the second reserved display area is switched, and each reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area to the second reserved display area is A state in which the decorative pattern is displayed in front of the decorative pattern is changed to a state in which the decorative pattern is displayed in front of each reserved image displayed in the first to second reserved display areas.

In FIG. 426(E), at timing t9, the decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state, and the decorative pattern is displayed in front of each reserved image displayed in the first to second reserved display areas. It shows the display state at a predetermined timing (predetermined timing between timing t9 and timing t10) after changing to the state.

At timing t10, the reserved image displayed in the reserved display area is no longer displayed, and the decorative pattern changes from the stationary display state to the variable display state, corresponding to the reserved image that has been displayed in the first reserved display area until then. Variation display of decorative patterns is started. At the same time, the display priority of each reserved image and the decorative pattern displayed in the first reserved display area to the second reserved display area is switched, and the decorative pattern is displayed in the first reserved display area to the second reserved display area. The state of being displayed on the front side of the reserved image is changed to the state of being displayed on the front side of the decorative pattern with each of the reserved images displayed in the first to second reserved display areas.

In FIG. 425(F), at timing t10, the decorative pattern changes from the stationary display state to the variable display state, and the reserved images displayed in the first to second reserved display regions are displayed in front of the decorative pattern. It shows the display state immediately after changing to the state displayed on the side.

At timing t10, the reserved images displayed in the respective reserved display areas simultaneously start moving toward the adjacent left reserved display area, and at timing t11, the respective reserved images start to move to the adjacent left reserved display areas. complete at the same time. Specifically, the reserved image that has been displayed in the first reserved display area until then moves to the left while being enlarged, so that the reserved image is displayed in the reserved display area. Also, the green reserved image that has been displayed in the second reserved display area until then moves leftward and is displayed in the first reserved display area. Furthermore, at timing t11, instead of the green pending image that has completed the movement to the first pending display area, the red pending image is displayed in the first pending display area.

In FIG. 425(G), the movement of each reserved image is completed at timing t6, and instead of the green reserved image that has completed the movement to the first reserved display area, the red reserved image is displayed in the first reserved display area. It shows the display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t12) after it has been displayed.

At timing t14, the decorative pattern changes from the variable display state to the stop display state in a display mode indicating that the special lottery result is a loss. Specifically, a decorative pattern with the number “4” is attached as the left decorative pattern, a decorative pattern with the number “1” is attached as the middle decorative pattern, and a number “2” is attached as the right decorative pattern. The displayed decorative pattern is stopped. At the same time, the display priority of the red reserved image and the decorative pattern displayed in the first reserved display area is switched, and the red reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area is displayed in front of the decorative pattern. The state changes to a state in which the decorative pattern is displayed on the front side of the red reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area.

At timing t15, the reserved image displayed in the reserved display area is no longer displayed, and the decorative pattern changes from the stationary display state to the variable display state, and the red reserved image that was displayed in the first reserved display area until then The variable display of the corresponding decorative pattern is started. At the same time, the display priority of the red reserved image and the decorative design displayed in the first reserved display area is switched, and the decorative design is displayed in front of the red reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area. The state changes to a state in which the red reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area is displayed on the front side of the decorative pattern.

At timing t15, the red reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area starts to move toward the reserved display area, and at timing t16, the movement of the red reserved image to the reserved display area is completed. Specifically, the red pending image, which has been displayed in the first pending display area until then, moves leftward while enlarging, so that it is displayed in the pending display area.

At the timing t25, the left decorative design and the right decorative design are temporarily stopped and displayed with the numeral "2" attached thereto, and the ready-to-win state occurs. At this time, the middle decorative pattern is maintained in a variable display state in which it is scrolled downward and displayed. The display of the pine mark group ends at the same time when the reach state occurs.

FIG. 426(H) shows the display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t26) after the reach state occurs at timing t25.

At the timing t33, the medium decorative pattern that has been variably displayed in the display mode according to the special lottery result is in a variability stop state. Specifically, when the special lottery result is a loss, decorative designs with numbers other than "2" are stopped and displayed as medium decorative designs. Further, when the special lottery result is a big hit, a decorative pattern with a number "2" is stopped and displayed as a middle decorative pattern. In addition, when the special lottery result is a loss, until the game ball enters the first start port 2002 and a new special lottery result is acquired, the decorative pattern continues to be displayed in a stopped display state, and the special lottery result is obtained. In the case of a big win, after the big win game ends, a new variation of the decorative pattern is started.

In this manner, the display mode of the pending image may be changed over a plurality of stop displays of the decorative symbols. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to make an impact on the change mode of the reserved image.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 425 and 426, a new variable display of decorative symbols has started, and each pending image displayed in a pending display area has completed moving to an adjacent pending display area. Although the example of changing the display mode of the pending image to a different display mode at the timing (timing t6, timing t11) has been shown, the display mode of the pending image may be changed to a different display mode at other timings. good too.

For example, at the timing (timing t5, timing t10) when the new variable display of the decorative pattern is started, the display mode of the pending image is changed to a different display mode in the display state before the movement of the pending image is started. may be configured. Alternatively, a new variable display of the decorative pattern is started, and each reserved image displayed in the reserved display area is a period until the movement to the adjacent reserved display area is completed (timing t5 to timing t6, timing t10 to timing At t11), the display mode of the pending image may be gradually changed to a different display mode.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 409 to 423, the display mode of the pending image, oden pending image, countdown image, etc. is changed during one variation of the decorative pattern. As shown in the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 424 and 426, the holding image, the oden holding image, the countdown image, etc. in the embodiment are displayed behind the decorative design when the variable display of the decorative design is stopped. In addition, it is configured to be displayed on the front side of the decorative pattern in accordance with the start timing of the new variable display of the decorative pattern, and after a predetermined time has elapsed after displaying the decorative pattern on the front side (for example, 1 second later), it may be modified so as to change the display mode such as a pending image, an oden pending image, a countdown image, or the like.

Conventionally, when displaying a pending image, image data representing that there is a pending in the pending display area, image data representing that there is pending in the pending display area and the first pending display area, the pending display area and Image data indicating that there is a hold in the first holding display area to the second holding display area, image data showing that there is a holding in the holding display area and the first holding display area to the third holding display area, and the holding display A total of 5 image data representing that there is a hold in the area and the 1st hold display area to the 4th hold display area are stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b in advance, and the number of holds changes according to the progress of the game situation. , the drawing data of the image to be displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is generated based on any of the image data.

Specifically, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs to the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source screen data indicating that the number of pending items has increased by one at the timing when the start winning to the first start gate 2002 occurs, the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source is output. Based on the screen data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, instead of the image data indicating the number of reservations used to generate the drawing data, the image data with one more number of reservations is transferred to the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b. A display method was taken in which the data was read from and used to generate drawing data.

Similarly, when the variable display corresponding to the pending image ends and a new variable display starts, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs screen data indicating that the pending number has decreased by one to the VDP 1512a with built-in tone generator. Based on the screen data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the VDP 1512a with built-in tone generator displays the image data with the number of reservations less by one than the image data indicating the number of reservations used for generating the drawing data. and a display method of reading from the sound control ROM 1512b and using it to generate drawing data.

However, in recent years, an effect has been performed in which the display mode of the pending image is changed from the normal display mode to a different display mode. In this case, in addition to the five patterns described above, image data with different display modes of the pending image is prepared in advance in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b. As the variation of the display mode of the pending image increases, such as displaying a plurality of pending images in different display modes at the same time, the amount of image data prepared in advance increases geometrically, and the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b There was a problem that the data size of the image stored in was large.

In addition to changing the display mode of the reserved image, image data for starting the display of the reserved image, image data for moving the reserved image to an adjacent reserved display area, and an image for ending the display of the reserved image Data and the like, the more you try to increase the presentation mode for the pending image, the more you need to prepare the image data corresponding to those presentation modes in advance in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b. There is a problem that the size of the image data becomes large.

Therefore, in this embodiment, in the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source, layers are prepared individually for each of the reserved display area to the fourth reserved display area, and image data corresponding to one reserved display area is arranged in one layer, Each layer is composed to generate drawing data.

In the following, an embodiment will be described in which a plurality of layers with different display priorities are used, image data is arranged for each layer, and the arranged images are superimposed for display. .

Each layer has a predetermined number of vertical and horizontal pixels. This number of pixels is the same as the number of pixels of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 . For example, in a game machine equipped with a game board side effect display device 1600 having a display area of 1280 pixels wide and 800 pixels high, the number of pixels in each layer is 1280 pixels wide and 800 pixels high like this display area. . In the following description, the present embodiment is provided with a game board side effect display device 1600 having a display area of 1280 horizontal pixels and 800 vertical pixels. The number of pixels in the display area of the game board side effect display device is not limited to 1280 pixels horizontally and 800 pixels vertically. can be configured to

In the display area, the horizontal axis is the x-axis, the vertical axis is the y-axis, and the origin is set at the upper left. The coordinates of the origin are (0, 0), the coordinates of the lower left corner of the display area are (0, 799), the coordinates of the upper right corner of the display area are (1279, 0), and the coordinates of the lower right corner of the display area are (1279, 799). be. An image stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b can be placed on each layer by designating arbitrary coordinates in the layer. The image that can be placed on the layer has a rectangular shape, and the image is placed so that the upper left pixel of the image is positioned with respect to the specified coordinates. FIG. 430(A) is a diagram showing a state of a layer in which no image is arranged.

A display priority is set for each layer, and image data placed in a layer with a higher priority is composited so that it is displayed in front of image data placed in a layer with a lower priority. Rendering data is generated by

For example, if image data placed in a layer with a low priority and image data placed in a layer with a high priority overlap, the image data placed in a layer with a high priority overlaps the priority. Rendering data is generated in such a manner that the image data arranged in a layer with a low value is hidden.

In each layer, it is possible to place image data only on part of the layer, or to place image data on the entire layer. For example, when image data is placed only in part of a layer with a high priority, rendering data is generated in such a manner that an image placed in a layer with a low priority can be visually recognized from an area where no image data was placed. It will happen. On the other hand, when image data is placed on the entire layer with high priority, even if some image data is placed on a layer with low priority, the image placed on this layer with low priority is visible. Rendering data in a form that cannot be generated is generated.

It may be configured such that the transparency can be set for the image data arranged in the layer. In this case, it is preferable that the transparency can be set for each pixel of the image data arranged in the layer. In this embodiment, transparency can be set in the range of 0% to 100%. When the transparency is 0%, the pixel is opaque, when the transparency is 50%, the pixel is translucent, and when the transparency is 100%, the pixel is transparent. In this embodiment, if there is no particular mention of transparency, the transparency of the pixel or the image is 0%, ie opaque.

By making it possible to set the transparency of the pixels of the image data placed on the layer, even if the images placed on layers with different priorities overlap, both images can be visible. is. For example, if the transparency of all pixels of image data placed on a layer with high priority is set to 50% and the transparency of all pixels of image data placed on a layer of low priority is set to 0%, , the image placed on the high-priority layer becomes translucent, and the image placed on the low-priority layer is visible in a display mode that makes the image placed on the high-priority layer transparent. It is possible to generate drawing data that can be used.

An embodiment in which a plurality of such layers are set and a hold image corresponding to one hold is arranged in each of the layers will be described below with reference to FIGS. 427 and 428. FIG.

In the embodiment shown below, the upper limit of the number of pending for the first starting port 2002 is four. In addition, in the order of winning the first start port 2002, the suspension and the maximum of four suspensions (in the order in which the variation of the corresponding decorative pattern is started, the suspension, the first suspension, the second suspension, the third suspension, the third suspension) 4 pending) is displayed.

FIG. 427 is a diagram showing display priorities set for layers used for display processing and image data arranged in the layers in this embodiment. A part of the layers up to layer L99, which is the lowest degree layer, is shown in the figure. Of these layers, the layer L40, the layer L45, the layer L50, the layer L55, and the layer L60 are layers in which reserved images are arranged.

Note that the layer L00 is a layer in which an error notification image indicating that some kind of error has occurred in the gaming machine is arranged. In addition, the layer L35 is a layer in which the decorative symbols that are displayed still are arranged. In addition, the layer L65 is a layer in which decorative symbols being displayed in a variable manner are arranged. A layer L99 is a layer in which a background image is arranged.

In this embodiment, basically, the pending image corresponding to the pending is arranged on the layer L40. Also, a reserved image corresponding to the first reservation is arranged on the layer L45. Also, a pending image corresponding to the second pending is arranged on the layer L50. Also, a pending image corresponding to the third pending is arranged on the layer L55. Also, a reserved image corresponding to the fourth reservation is arranged on the layer L60.

FIG. 428 is a time chart showing an example of effects in this embodiment. FIG. 429 is a diagram showing how reserved images are arranged on layers in this embodiment.

The reserved image in this embodiment has a square shape of 320 pixels horizontally and 320 pixels vertically. The retained image consists of pixels forming a circular portion with a diameter of 320 pixels and pixels forming an outer portion of the circular shape with 100% transparency. The pixels forming the circular portion are composed of pixels with a black outline of the circle and white pixels inside the black outline. The contour portion has a width of about several pixels (for example, 3 pixels). By arranging such a pending image at predetermined coordinates on a predetermined layer, it is possible to generate drawing data in which the perfect circular pending image is visually recognized.

In this embodiment, FIG. 429A shows an example in which the pending image is arranged at coordinates (480, 440) of layer L40.

The reserved image in this embodiment has a square shape of 160 pixels wide by 160 pixels long. The reserved image consists of pixels forming a circular portion with a diameter of 160 pixels and pixels forming an outer portion of the circular shape with 100% transparency. The pixels forming the circular portion are composed of pixels with a black outline of the circle and white pixels inside the black outline. The contour portion has a width of about several pixels (for example, 3 pixels). By arranging such a reserved image at predetermined coordinates on a predetermined layer, it is possible to generate drawing data in which a circular reserved image is visually recognized.

FIG. 429(B) shows a state in which the square-shaped reserved image of 160 pixels wide by 160 pixels long is arranged as the first reserved image at the coordinates (760, 600) of the layer L45.

FIG. 429(C) shows a state in which the square-shaped reserved image of 160 pixels wide by 160 pixels long is arranged as the second reserved image at the coordinates (880, 600) of the layer L50.

FIG. 429(D) shows a state in which the square-shaped reserved image of 160 pixels wide by 160 pixels long is arranged as the third reserved image at the coordinates (1000, 600) of the layer L55.

FIG. 429(E) shows a state in which the square-shaped reserved image of 160 pixels wide by 160 pixels long is arranged as the fourth reserved image at the coordinates (1120, 600) of the layer L60.

Also, FIG. 429(F) shows each layer (for example, layer L40 to layer L60) described with reference to FIGS. shows an example of drawing data generated by synthesizing

In the present embodiment, in a layer structure capable of such display, it is possible to perform display processing for arranging each reserved image in a different layer as described below.

FIG. 428 is a time chart showing an example of effects in this embodiment. At timing t1, timing t2, timing t3, timing t8, and timing t10, a starting prize to the first start opening 2002 occurs, and the holding image corresponding to the holding and the first holding are displayed for the layers L40 to L60. to the reserved image corresponding to the fourth reservation are arranged.

FIG. 429F shows the display state at timing t11. In this state, the reserved image has the highest display priority, and the reserved image corresponding to the fourth reservation has the lowest display priority.

At timing t13, the pending image corresponding to the pending is placed on the layer L60, the pending image corresponding to the first pending is placed on the layer L55, the pending image corresponding to the second pending is placed on the layer L50, and the second pending image is placed on the layer L50. A reserved image corresponding to the 3rd reservation is arranged on the layer L45, and a reserved image corresponding to the 4th reservation is arranged on the layer L40. The coordinates arranged at this time are not changed.

FIG. 429(G) is a diagram showing a display state at timing t14. In this state, the display priority of the pending image is the lowest, and the display priority of the pending image corresponding to the fourth hold is the highest.

At timing t16, the reserved image corresponding to the relevant reservation, the reserved image corresponding to the first reservation to the reserved image corresponding to the fourth reservation are arranged on the layers L40 to L60, respectively, and the arrangement before timing t13 return to state.

At timing t19, the pending image corresponding to the pending that has been placed on the layer L40 is placed on the layer L50, and the pending image corresponding to the second pending that has been placed on the layer L50 is placed on the layer L40. The coordinates arranged at this time are not changed.

FIG. 429(H) is a diagram showing a display state at timing t20. In this state, the display priority of the pending image corresponding to the second pending is the highest. Further, the display priority of the hold image corresponding to the first hold is lower than the display priority of the hold image corresponding to the second hold, and the display priority of the hold image corresponding to the first hold is higher than the display priority of the hold image. The display priority of the pending image is the lowest.

At timing t22, the reserved image corresponding to the relevant reservation, the reserved image corresponding to the first reservation to the reserved image corresponding to the fourth reservation are arranged on the layers L40 to L60, respectively, and the arrangement before timing t19 return to state.

At timing t25, the pending image corresponding to the pending that was placed on the layer L40 again is placed on the layer L50, and the pending image corresponding to the second pending that was placed on the layer L50 is placed on the layer L40. .

At timing t28, the reserved image corresponding to the relevant reservation, the reserved image corresponding to the first reservation to the reserved image corresponding to the fourth reservation are arranged on the layers L40 to L60, respectively, and the arrangement before timing t25 return to state.

In this way, by switching the display priority of the reserved image while the decorative pattern is changing, it is possible to easily change the appearance of the entire reserved image. Also, it is possible to make a specific reserved image stand out more than other reserved images.

From timing t13 to timing t16, the display priority of the reserved image is the lowest, and the display priority of the reserved image corresponding to the fourth reservation is the highest. In addition, the configuration may be such that the same display is performed multiple times.

In addition, from timing t19 to timing t22, and from timing t25 to timing t28, the display priority of the pending image corresponding to the second pending is raised twice to make the pending image corresponding to the second pending conspicuous. , Such a display mode may be configured to be performed only once, or may be configured to be performed three or more times. Further, not only the hold image corresponding to the second hold, but also the hold image corresponding to the first hold, the hold image corresponding to the third hold, and the hold image corresponding to the fourth hold are configured to perform the same display. You may

It can also be said that the display mode shown in FIG. 429(G) makes the pending image corresponding to the fourth pending image more conspicuous than the other pending images. Note that such a display may be configured to be executed according to the prefetch result of each hold. For example, by increasing the display priority of a specific hold as in this example of effect, it may be configured to indicate that the degree of expectation for a big hit of the hold is high.

In addition, in the present embodiment and each embodiment described later, the reserved image corresponding to the variation of the decoration pattern currently being performed, the reserved image corresponding to the first reservation to the reserved image corresponding to the fourth reservation are specially displayed sometimes referred to as As the special display, a special display in which only the reserved image is displayed, a special display in which the reserved image and the reserved image corresponding to the first reservation are displayed, the reserved image and the reserved image corresponding to the first reservation, and the second A special display in which a hold image corresponding to the hold is displayed, a special display in which the hold image, the hold image corresponding to the first hold, the hold image corresponding to the second hold, and the hold image corresponding to the third hold are displayed, There is a special display in which the reserved image, the reserved image corresponding to the first reservation, the reserved image corresponding to the second reservation, the reserved image corresponding to the third reservation, and the reserved image corresponding to the fourth reservation are displayed. By means of the special display, it is possible to show to the player the number of variations of the decorative symbols from 1 to 5, including the number of variations of the currently varying decorative symbols.

Instead of the normal white pending image displayed as the pending image corresponding to the pending, the pending image corresponding to the first pending to the pending image corresponding to the fourth pending, blue indicating that the expectation of the big hit is higher , green, red, etc. may be arranged in layers.

In this production example, in a state where the display priority is not changed and a state where the display priority is changed, a reserved image in a specific color such as blue, green, or red is arranged in place of the white reserved image. It is preferable to configure the probabilities that .

For example, if the hold image corresponding to the second hold is placed in a layer L50 with a relatively low display priority (for example, timing t16 to timing t19), the layer L40 with a relatively high display priority In the case where it is placed (for example, timing t19 to timing t22), when it is placed in a layer with a higher display priority, a specific color such as blue, green, or red is used instead of the white pending image. may be configured to increase the probability that the reserved image of the

The timing of arranging the reserved image of the specific color is a predetermined timing between when the display priority is changed and when the display priority is changed again (for example, 2 seconds after the display priority is changed). should be For example, if the pending image corresponding to the second pending is placed in a layer L50 with a relatively low display priority (for example, timing t16 to timing t19), at timing t18, instead of the white pending image may be configured to arrange a reserved image of a specific color. In addition, when placed on the layer L40 with relatively high display priority (for example, timing t19 to timing t22), at timing t21, instead of the white pending image, a specific color pending image is placed. It may be configured as

Also, only when placed in a layer L40 with a relatively high display priority (for example, timing t19 to timing t22), instead of the white pending image, a red color that suggests that the expectation of a big hit is higher It may be configured so that a pending image can be placed.

In this way, as the layers in which one reserved image is arranged, there are a layer with a high display priority and a layer with a low display priority. It is configured so that the probabilities of arranging the images are different. By adopting such a configuration, when the display priority of the pending image changes, the player can feel the expectation that the pending image will change to a display mode that suggests a higher degree of expectation for a big win. It is possible to hold the

In the time chart, the hold image corresponding to the second hold was explained, but this is an example, and the hold image corresponding to the hold, the hold image corresponding to the first hold, and the hold image corresponding to the third hold The same display processing may be performed on both the reserved image and the reserved image corresponding to the fourth reservation.

Also, in the time chart, an example of the state of the state where the number of holds is 4 has been described, but the number of holds is not limited to 4. When there are 1 suspension and 2nd suspension, and when there are the suspension and the 1st suspension to the 3rd suspension, it may be configured to perform the same effect display. Note that when there is only the pending image, there is no need to switch layers, so the pending image may be changed to a pending image of a different color without switching layers. In addition, you may employ|adopt the same structure also in other embodiment.

Further, in another embodiment described later, at a predetermined timing (for example, 2 seconds later) after the layer in which the reserved image is arranged is changed, the reserved image in which the layer to be arranged is changed, as described above. The display mode of the pending image may be changed immediately.

At the timings of changing the layer on which the reserved image is arranged (for example, timing t13, timing t16, timing t19, timing t22, timing t25, and timing t28), an effect display indicating that the layer on which the reserved image is arranged has been changed. may be configured to be executed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 . For example, each displayed pending image may be configured to move vertically together. Alternatively, like the suspended image corresponding to the second suspended in the production example, only the suspended image with the highest priority may be configured to move in the vertical direction.

It should be noted that the timing of performing such effect display is a predetermined timing (for example, timing t12, timing t15, timing t18, timing t21, timing t24, timing t27) before the timing of changing the layer in which the pending image is arranged. or predetermined timings (for example, timing t14, timing t17, timing t20, timing t23, timing t26, timing t29) after changing the layer in which the reserved image is arranged.

With such a configuration, it is possible for the player to recognize that the layer in which the pending image is arranged has been changed. In addition, it is possible to make the player feel the expectation that the display mode of the predetermined pending image will change.

427 and 430, another embodiment in which a plurality of such layers are set and a hold image corresponding to one hold is arranged in each of the layers will be described below.

In the present embodiment, when the start winning to the first start port 2002 occurs first after the gaming machine is powered on, a pending image is arranged on the layer L40. Next, when the start winning to the first start opening 2002 occurs, a pending image is arranged on the layer L45. Next, when a start winning to the first start opening 2002 occurs, a pending image is arranged on the layer L50. Similarly, in accordance with the occurrence of the start winning to the first start opening 2002, the layer L55, the layer L60 and the layer in which the reserved image is arranged are switched. In addition, after the reserved image data is arranged on the layer L60, when the start winning to the first start opening 2002 occurs, the reserved image is arranged on the layer L40, and similarly, layer L45, layer L50 . Then, the layer in which the pending image data is arranged is cyclically changed when the start winning to the first start port 2002 occurs.

Next, referring to FIG. 430, a manner of arranging an image on a predetermined layer will be described with reference to reserved layers and reserved images. FIG. 430(A) is a diagram showing a state of a layer in which no image is arranged. As shown in the drawing, the number of pixels in the layer in this embodiment is 1280 pixels horizontally and 800 pixels vertically. Also, the origin (0, 0) is provided at the upper left of the layer as shown in the figure.

The reserved image in this embodiment has a square shape of 160 pixels horizontally and 160 pixels vertically. The retained image consists of pixels forming a circular portion with a diameter of 160 pixels and pixels forming an outer portion of the circular shape with 100% transparency. The pixels forming the circular portion are composed of pixels with a black outline of the circle and white pixels inside the black outline. The contour portion has a width of about several pixels (for example, 3 pixels). By arranging such a pending image at predetermined coordinates on a predetermined layer, it is possible to generate drawing data in which the perfect circular pending image is visually recognized.

In this embodiment, FIG. 430(B) shows an example in which the pending image is arranged at coordinates (560, 600) of a predetermined layer (eg, layer L40).

The reserved image in this embodiment has a square shape of 80 pixels horizontally and 80 pixels vertically. The retained image consists of pixels forming a circular portion with a diameter of 80 pixels and pixels forming an outer portion of the circular shape with 100% transparency. The pixels forming the circular portion are composed of pixels with a black outline of the circle and white pixels inside the black outline. The contour portion has a width of about several pixels (for example, 3 pixels). By arranging such a reserved image at predetermined coordinates on a predetermined layer, it is possible to generate drawing data in which a circular reserved image is visually recognized.

FIG. 430(C) shows an example in which a reserved image is arranged as the first reserved image at coordinates (760, 680) of a predetermined layer (eg, layer L45). FIG. 430(D) shows an example in which a pending image is arranged as a second pending image at coordinates (880, 680) of a predetermined layer (eg, layer L50). FIG. 430(E) shows an example in which a pending image is arranged as the third pending image at coordinates (1000, 680) of a predetermined layer (eg, layer L55). FIG. 430(F) shows an example in which a reserved image is arranged as the fourth reserved image at coordinates (1120, 680) of a predetermined layer (for example, layer L60).

FIG. 430(G) shows an example of drawing data generated by synthesizing each layer (for example, layer L40 to layer L60) described with reference to FIGS. 430(B) to 430(F). there is In FIG. 430(G), illustration of the background image and decorative pattern is omitted, but in reality all layers including these images are combined to generate drawing data.
Thus, in the present embodiment, the pending image corresponding to the pending, the respective pending images corresponding to the first to fourth pending are arranged at predetermined coordinates of different layers, and each layer is synthesized It is configured as follows.

431 and 432, an example of an effect for displaying the drawing data thus generated in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 will be described.

FIG. 431 is a time chart showing how reserved images are assigned to layers in this embodiment. Also, FIG. 432 shows a display example in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 . It should be noted that, in the following description, suspensions A to G are indicated according to the order of occurrence of suspensions. Such notation may also be used in other embodiments.

At the timing t1, a hold A is generated in response to the occurrence of the start winning to the first start opening 2002, and at the same time the hold image corresponding to the hold A is arranged at the coordinates (560, 600) of the layer L40. The reserved image has a square shape of 160 horizontal pixels and 160 vertical pixels, as described above, and is an image visually recognized as a white perfect circle.

Until the timing t1, the number of reserved symbols is 0 and the variable display of decorative symbols is not performed.

FIG. 432 shows a display state at a predetermined timing (predetermined timing between timing t1 and timing t2) after the start winning to the first start opening 2002 occurs at timing t1.

At the timing t2, a hold B is generated in response to the start winning to the first start opening 2002, and at the same time a hold image corresponding to the hold B is arranged at the coordinates (760, 680) of the layer L45. As described above, the reserved image has a square shape of 80 horizontal pixels and 80 vertical pixels, and is an image visually recognized as a white perfect circle.

At the timing t3, a hold C is generated in response to the occurrence of the start winning to the first start opening 2002, and at the same time a hold image corresponding to the hold C is arranged at the coordinates (880, 680) of the layer L50.

At timing t4, the variable display of the decorative symbols corresponding to the hold A is stopped.

At timing t5, the pending image corresponding to pending A, which has been placed on layer L40 until then, is not placed on layer L40.

Further, at timing t5, the variable display of the decorative symbols corresponding to the reservation B is started. At the same time, the pending image placed at coordinates (760, 680) of layer L45 is no longer placed, and instead, the pending image corresponding to pending B is placed at coordinates (560, 600) of layer L45.

Further, at timing t5, the pending image arranged at the coordinates (880, 680) of layer L50 corresponding to pending C is no longer placed, and instead, the pending image corresponding to pending C is placed on layer L50. It is located at coordinates (760,680).

Thus, in the present embodiment, five layers for holding display are prepared, and when holding occurs according to the occurrence of the start winning to the first start opening 2002, the layers are used in order It consists of

At timing t9, the pending image corresponding to pending E is placed on layer L60, and thereafter, at timing t11, the pending image corresponding to pending F is placed on layer L40 where the pending image corresponding to pending A was placed. be done. Similarly, at timing t17, the pending image corresponding to pending G is placed on the layer L45 where the pending image corresponding to pending B and the pending image was placed.

In this way, by placing only one reserved image in one layer, even if it is desired to change the display mode of the reserved image, the reserved image can be displayed without considering the display state in other layers. It is possible to change the display mode of .

An example of arranging a square image of 80 pixels wide by 80 pixels high as a reserved image and a square image of 160 pixels wide by 160 pixels high as the reserved image on a predetermined layer has been shown. It may be configured such that it is enlarged twice in both the vertical and horizontal directions and used as the reserved image. Alternatively, the reserved image may be reduced to 1/2 both in the vertical and horizontal directions and used as the reserved image.

With such a configuration, there is no need to create in advance the image data of at least one of the pending image and the relevant pending image, and it is possible to reduce the size of the image data stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b. Become.

The white portion of the reserved image may be configured to be a color other than white, such as blue, green, or red. In this case, the white reserved image consists of pixels forming the white part of a circular shape with a diameter of 160 pixels and pixels forming the outer part of the circular shape with 100% transparency. It is preferable to generate the suspension image in which the pixels forming the part are blue in advance and store it in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b. Similarly, the reserved image in which the pixels forming the white portion of the circular shape are green and the reserved image in which the pixels forming the white portion of the circular shape are red are generated in advance and stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b. Good to keep. Then, such a blue pending image, a green pending image, and a red pending image may be arranged at the coordinates (560, 600) instead of the white pending image.

It should be noted that the degree of expectation for a big hit may be indicated by the display mode of the pending image. In this case, as described above, it is preferable to configure the white, blue, green, and red colors so that the degree of expectation for the big win increases in this order.

As with the reserved image, the reserved image may also be configured such that the white portion of the reserved image is a color other than white, such as blue, green, or red. In this case, the white reserved image consisted of pixels forming the white portion of the circular shape with a diameter of 80 pixels and pixels forming the outer portion of the circular shape with 100% transparency. It is preferable to create in advance a reserved image in which the pixels forming the .DELTA. Similarly, a reserved image in which the pixels forming the white portion of the circular shape are green and a reserved image in which the pixels forming the white portion of the circular shape are red are created in advance and stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b. good. Then, replacing the blue pending image, the green pending image, and the red pending image with the white pending image, coordinates (760, 680), coordinates (880, 680), coordinates (1000, 680) ), and may be configured to be located at coordinates (1120, 680).

In addition, depending on the display mode of the pending image, it may be configured to indicate the degree of expectation for a big hit. In this case, as described above, it is preferable to configure the white, blue, green, and red colors so that the degree of expectation for the big win increases in this order.

In this way, a plurality of images with different display modes are created in advance as the reserved image or the reserved image, and one of the reserved images or the reserved image is arranged in a predetermined layer based on the special lottery result. may be configured. Note that the timing of arranging the reserved image or the reserved image with different display modes on the predetermined layer is the timing at which the reserved image or the reserved image corresponding to the predetermined reservation is first arranged on the predetermined layer (for example, FIG. 431 may be the timing t1) at which the hold A in the time chart shown in is placed on the layer L40.

Alternatively, it may be a timing after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after being placed on a predetermined layer (for example, timing t6, which is timing after timing t2 when hold B in the time chart shown in FIG. 431 is placed on layer L45, etc.).

Alternatively, the timing at which the variable display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the reserved image ends and the respective reserved images are rearranged in the adjacent left image arrangement position (for example, the layer corresponding to the reserved D in the time chart shown in FIG. 431 It may be the timing t10 at which the image placed at coordinates (880, 680) of L55 is placed at coordinates (760, 680) of layer L55.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to switch the reserved image or the reserved image to the reserved image or the reserved image having a different display mode at an arbitrary timing without greatly increasing the storage capacity of the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b. can be executed.

When a game ball wins the first start port 2002 and a new hold occurs, a new hold image is placed in a layer where nothing has been placed until then, but the hold as described above It may be configured such that the reserved image is first arranged at predetermined coordinates above the arrangement position of the image by a predetermined number of pixels, and the arrangement coordinates of the reserved image are dynamically changed so that the reserved image moves downward.

At the timing t1 when suspension A described with reference to FIG. 431 occurs, the suspension image is arranged at coordinates (560, 520), and is moved downward by 4 pixels every frame, and 20 frames (about 0.67 seconds) ) to move downward by 80 pixels to arrange the pending image corresponding to pending A at coordinates (560, 600). In this case, after the reserved image is displayed above the reserved image of a perfect circle by the radius, the player visually recognizes the display mode in which the reserved image moves downward by the radius over about 0.67 seconds. It will happen.

Also, at timing t2 at which suspension B described with reference to FIG. seconds) to move 40 pixels downward, and arrange the pending image corresponding to pending B at coordinates (760, 680). In this case, after the reserved image is displayed above the circular reserved image by the radius, the player can visually recognize the display mode in which the reserved image moves downward by the radius over about 0.67 seconds. Become.

In the above-described embodiment, the reserved image or the reserved image placed at the predetermined position of the layer was a single still image with no movement. The image to be viewed may be arranged at a predetermined position on the layer. For example, image data consisting of 30 still images is created in advance, and one of the 30 still images is arranged repeatedly in order at a predetermined position of the layer for each frame. You may By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to dynamically display the pending image with a period of 1 second.

In the above-described embodiment, at the start of a new variable display, the suspended image is suddenly placed 120 pixels to the left on the layer. In this case, the player may perceive the pending image as if it were suddenly displayed, and may not be able to understand the game situation.

Therefore, at the start of a new variable display, the coordinates for arranging the reserved image on a predetermined layer may be gradually changed so that the manner in which the reserved image moves in the horizontal direction can be visually recognized. For example, the y-coordinate is not changed in the coordinates where the pending image is placed, and the x-coordinate value is decreased by 6 every frame, and the x-coordinate value is decreased by 120 in 20 frames (about 0.67 seconds) (that is, 120 pixels in the left direction). With such a configuration, it is possible to dynamically move the pending image over 0.67 seconds.

In addition, in the display processing for moving the placement position of the pending image by 120 pixels over 20 frames, image data consisting of 20 still images is created in advance, and 20 still images are generated for each frame. may be arranged in order. With such a configuration, it is possible for the player to visually recognize the display mode of changing the display mode while the pending image moves.

It should be noted that while the decorative pattern is changing, up to four reserved images can be visibly displayed. 120 pixels). In this case, the process of dynamically moving the pending image using image data consisting of 20 still images is performed when moving the second pending leftward, when moving the third pending leftward, and when moving the third pending leftward. It may be configured to be used in each case of moving the 4-hold to the left. By setting the arrangement coordinates of the pending images at equal intervals in this way, it is possible to use the image data in common.

Regarding the coordinates for arranging the pending image, the y-coordinate is not changed, and only the x-coordinate is subtracted by a constant value for each frame. The diameter is twice (160 pixels) as compared with the diameter (80 pixels) of . A modified example of the embodiment in which a reserved image that has been placed as the first reserved image is arranged as the reserved image will be described below. Specifically, image data consisting of 20 still images is created in advance, and the coordinates (760, 680) of the reserved image arranged as the first reserved image are changed to the coordinates (560 , 600), the arrangement coordinates of each still image are determined so as to move linearly over 20 frames, and the still image is arranged for each frame. The 20 still images are configured such that the number of pixels in the vertical direction and the number of pixels in the horizontal direction also increase step by step.

An example has been shown in which image data consisting of 20 still images is created in advance and displayed sequentially. It may be constructed such that the image is enlarged to double the vertical and horizontal sizes at the 20th frame.

With such a configuration, there is no need to prepare image data consisting of 20 still images in advance, and the size of image data stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b can be reduced.

In this way, by arranging each on-hold image individually in a different layer, it is possible to increase the variation of the presentation mode of the on-hold image and reduce the size of the image data stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b. becomes.

Moreover, although a plurality of modified examples have been shown for the reserved image and the display mode of the reserved image, these modified examples may be applied to each embodiment described later. Moreover, even when it is applied to each embodiment described later, the effects as described above can be obtained.

433 and 434, an embodiment obtained by modifying the display method using layers described with reference to FIG. 427 and the like will be described. FIG. 433 is a diagram showing the display priority set for each layer in this embodiment. Also, FIG. 434 is a time chart of an example of rendering using the layer structure in this embodiment.

FIG. 433 is a diagram showing display priorities set for layers used for display processing and image data arranged in the layers in this embodiment. Similar to the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 427, in this embodiment also, layers L35, L40, L45, L50, L55, and L60 are layers in which reserved images are arranged. In this embodiment, the pending image displayed as the pending is arranged on the layer L40, the pending image indicating the first pending is arranged on the layer L45, and the second pending is shown on the layer L50. A reserved image is arranged, a reserved image indicating the third reservation is arranged on the layer L55, and a reserved image indicating the fourth reservation is arranged on the layer L60.

In the present embodiment, at timing t5 when the variable display of the decorative symbols ends, the arrangement of the pending image arranged on the layer L40 ends.

On the other hand, at timing t5, instead of the pending image arranged as the pending image indicating the first hold at the coordinates (760, 680) of the layer L45, the pending image is arranged at the coordinates (560, 600) of the layer L45. do. At this time, using the display method described above, the pending image arranged at the coordinates (760, 680) as the first pending image on the layer L45 is moved over 20 frames, and the pending image is moved to the coordinates It may be configured to be placed at (560, 600).

Further, at timing t5, the pending image arranged as the pending image indicating the second pending at the coordinates (880, 680) of the layer L50 is changed to the pending image showing the first pending at the coordinates (760, 680) of the layer L50. Place as At this time, using the above-described display method, the pending image arranged at the coordinates (880, 680) as the second pending image on the layer L50 is moved over 20 frames, and is displayed as the first pending image. It may be configured to be placed at coordinates (760, 600).

At timing t6, the pending image, which has been placed at the coordinates (560, 600) of the layer L45, is placed at the coordinates (560, 600) of the layer L40 as an image indicating the pending, and the pending image on the layer L45 Image placement ends. It should be noted that when the layer is switched without changing the arrangement coordinates in this way, there is no difference in how the player sees the suspension.

Further, at timing t6, as the image indicating the first suspension, the suspended image that has been placed at the coordinates (760, 680) of the layer L50 is placed at the coordinates (760, 680) of the layer L45, and is transferred to the layer L50. Placed state ends.

Thus, in the present embodiment, when a new hold occurs, a hold image corresponding to the newly occurring hold is placed in the layer with the highest display priority among the layers in which no hold image is arranged. placed. In addition, at the timing when the variable display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the predetermined suspension is finished and the variable display of the new decorative pattern is started, the coordinates of the suspended image arranged in each layer are changed in that layer. After that, it is arranged to be rearranged in a layer with a higher display priority.

Alternatively, the coordinates for arranging the reserved image may be configured to be gradually moved using a plurality of frames. In the present embodiment, at the timing one second after the timing when the variable display of the new decorative pattern is started, the layer in which each reserved image is arranged is changed to a layer with a high display priority without changing the coordinates to be arranged. It is configured to be rearranged. In this way, when the pending image is displayed so as to gradually move, it is preferable to complete the movement of the pending image before the pending image is placed on the layer with the higher display priority.

With reference to FIGS. 433 and 434, with regard to the pending image that was arranged at the prescribed coordinates in the prescribed layer at the start of the variation of the decorative symbols, the arrangement coordinates are changed in the layer and then the arrangement coordinates are maintained. shows an embodiment in which is arranged in a layer with a high display priority.

Next, referring to FIGS. 433 and 435, the suspended image that was placed at the predetermined coordinates of the predetermined layer at the start of the variation of the decorative pattern is first placed in a layer with a high display priority, and then placed in that layer. , an embodiment modified to change the placement coordinates is described. FIG. 433 is a diagram showing the layer structure in this embodiment. Also, FIG. 435 is a time chart of an example of rendering using the layer structure in this embodiment.

In the present embodiment, at timing t5 when the variable display of the decorative symbols ends, the arrangement of the pending image arranged on the layer L40 ends.

On the other hand, at timing t5, instead of the pending image arranged as the image showing the first hold at the coordinates (760, 680) of the layer L45, the image showing the hold at the coordinates (760, 680) of the layer L40 Place the reserved image once. After that (for example, after one frame), the retained image of 160 pixels by 160 pixels is arranged at the coordinates (560, 600) of the layer L40.

At this time, using the display method described above, the pending image arranged at the coordinates (760, 680) on the layer L40 is moved over 20 frames, and the pending image is moved to the coordinates (560, 600). may be configured to be placed in

Further, at timing t5, the pending image arranged as the pending image indicating the second pending at the coordinates (880, 680) of the layer L50 is replaced with the pending image showing the first pending at the coordinates (880, 680) of the layer L45. Place as After that (eg, one frame later), the retained image is placed at coordinates (760, 600) on layer L45.

At this time, using the display method described above, the suspended image arranged at the coordinates (880, 680) on the layer L45 is moved over 20 frames, and the suspended image indicating the first suspension is displayed at the coordinates ( 760, 600).

Thus, in the present embodiment, when a new hold occurs, a hold image corresponding to the newly occurring hold is placed in the layer with the highest display priority among the layers in which no hold image is arranged. placed. In addition, at the timing when the variable display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the predetermined pending is finished and the variable display of the new decorative pattern is started, the pending image arranged in each layer is arranged in the layer with the higher display priority. After redoing, the coordinates for arranging the reserved image are changed in each newly arranged layer.

Alternatively, the coordinates for arranging the reserved image may be configured to be gradually moved using a plurality of frames. In this embodiment, it is preferable that the movement of the reserved image is completed within one second from the timing when the variable display of the new decorative pattern is started.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 433 and 434 and the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. The reserved image indicating the third reservation, the reserved image indicating the third reservation, and the reserved image indicating the fourth reservation are arranged so that the display priority decreases in this order. A method of displaying a pending image using such set display priority will be described below.

FIG. 436 shows an effect example in which, in the display processing using layers described with reference to FIG. 433, when the reserved images overlap each other, the overlapping mode of the reserved images is automatically determined.

FIG. 436(A) shows a state in which the square-shaped reserved image of 160 horizontal pixels and 160 vertical pixels is arranged at the coordinates (560, 600) of the layer L40.

FIG. 436(B) shows a state in which a horizontally long rectangular pending image is arranged as the first pending image at the coordinates (680, 680) of the layer L45. Specifically, this retained image consists of pixels forming an elliptical white portion of 240 pixels wide by 80 pixels high inscribed in a rectangle of 240 pixels wide by 80 pixels high, and an elliptical white portion with 100% transparency. pixels forming the outer part. In addition, in this production example, the degree of expectation for a big hit is set to be higher for this retention visually recognized in an elliptical shape, compared to other retentions visually recognized in a perfect circular shape.

FIG. 436(C) shows a state in which the aforementioned reserved image of 80 horizontal pixels and 80 vertical pixels and having a square shape is arranged as a second reservation at the coordinates (880, 680) of the layer L50.

FIG. 436(D) shows a state in which the aforementioned reserved image of 80 horizontal pixels and 80 vertical pixels and having a square shape is arranged as the third reservation at the coordinates (1000, 680) of the layer L55.

FIG. 436(E) shows a state in which the square-shaped reserved image of 80 pixels wide by 80 pixels long is arranged as the fourth reserved image at the coordinates (1120, 680) of the layer L60.

FIG. 436(F) schematically shows the drawing data generated when each layer shown in FIGS. 436(A) to 436(E) and the layer L65 on which the changing decorative pattern is arranged are superimposed. It is shown Also, FIG. 436(G) shows a state in which one hold is digested from the state shown in FIG. ing. In addition, in the drawing, illustration of the 100% transparent portion outside the circular shape portion and the elliptical shape portion is omitted.

In this way, by arranging only one reserved image in one layer in the layers in which the display priority is set in a predetermined order, the display mode of the reserved image can be enlarged as shown in the figure. However, even if portions of the reserved images whose transparency is not 100% overlap each other, one of the reserved images is automatically displayed on the front side based on the set display priority. Become.

It should be noted that the horizontally long rectangular pending images shown in FIGS. 436(B) and 436(G) may be configured such that the horizontally long rectangular pending images are arranged in the layer from the time of the start winning. , At the time of starting winning, a square-shaped pending image is placed in a layer, and a square-shaped pending image at a predetermined timing (for example, when the first hold changes to the hold and the decorative pattern starts to change) Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which horizontally long rectangular retained images are arranged.

FIG. 437 shows an effect example in which, in the display processing using layers described with reference to FIG. 433, when the reserved images overlap each other, the overlapping mode of the reserved images is automatically determined.

FIG. 437A shows a state in which the square-shaped reserved image of 320 pixels wide by 320 pixels long is arranged at the coordinates (480, 440) of the layer L40. The retained image consists of pixels forming a circular portion with a diameter of 320 pixels and pixels forming an outer portion of the circular shape with 100% transparency. The pixels forming the circular portion are composed of pixels with a black outline of the circle and white pixels inside the black outline. The contour portion has a width of about several pixels (for example, 3 pixels).

FIG. 437(B) shows a state in which the square-shaped reserved image of 160 pixels wide by 160 pixels long is arranged as the first reserved image at the coordinates (760, 600) of the layer L45.

FIG. 437(C) shows a state in which the aforementioned reserved image of 160 horizontal pixels and 160 vertical pixels and having a square shape is arranged as the second reservation at the coordinates (880, 600) of the layer L50.

FIG. 437(D) shows a state in which the square-shaped reserved image of 160 pixels wide by 160 pixels long is arranged as the third reserved image at the coordinates (1000, 600) of the layer L55.

FIG. 437(E) shows a state in which the square-shaped reserved image of 160 pixels wide by 160 pixels long is arranged as the fourth reserved image at the coordinates (1120, 600) of the layer L60.

FIG. 437(F) schematically shows the drawing data generated when each layer shown in FIGS. 436(A) to 436(E) and the layer L65 on which the changing decorative pattern is arranged are superimposed. It is shown In addition, in the figure, illustration is omitted for a portion having a transparency of 100% outside the circular shape portion.

In this way, by arranging only one reserved image in one layer in the layers in which the display priority is set in a predetermined order, as shown in the figure, the transparency of the reserved image is 100%. Even if the non-% portions overlap each other, one of the pending images is automatically displayed on the front side based on the set display priority.

In this way, by arranging only one hold on one layer, it is possible to change the color of the hold image, increase the size of the hold image, move the hold image, and Even in the case of displaying pending images in which images may overlap each other, it is possible to generate drawing data related to the pending images without considering the display status of other pending images.

In the drawing data shown in FIGS. 436(F), 436(G), and 437(F), one reserved image may partially hide other reserved images, but the entire other reserved images is large enough to not be completely hidden. With such a configuration, the player can accurately recognize the number of reserved coins.

FIG. 438 shows the layer structure in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 433, modified so as to reverse the display priority order of the layers in which the reserved images to the reserved images showing the fourth reservation are arranged. It is a figure which shows. In the layer structure shown in FIG. 438, the layer L40 is arranged holding image indicating the fourth holding, the layer L45 is arranged holding image showing the third holding, the layer L50 is the second holding The pending image indicating the first pending is arranged on the layer L55, and the pending image displayed as the pending is arranged on the layer L60.

FIG. 439 is a time chart of an example of rendering using such a layer structure. The time chart shown in FIG. 439 is the same as the effect example described with reference to FIG. 434 except for the priority of layers such as the variation time of decorative symbols and the timing of start winning. In the example of effect shown in FIG. 439 as well, similarly to the example of effect described with reference to FIG. 434, the moving display of the pending image is performed during the period from when the variation of the decorative pattern is started until one second elapses. . On the other hand, at a timing (for example, timing t6 or timing t11) after one second has passed since the start of the variation of the decorative pattern, a display process of arranging the reserved image in a layer with a lower display priority by one is performed.

FIG. 440 is a time chart of an example of rendering using such a layer structure. The time chart shown in FIG. 440 is the same as the effect example described with reference to FIG. 435 except for the priority of layers such as the variation time of decorative symbols and the timing of start winning. In the production example shown in FIG. 440, at the start of the variation of the decorative pattern, the reserved image that has been placed at the predetermined coordinates of the predetermined layer is first placed in a layer with a low display priority, and then placed in that layer. A display process is performed to change the coordinates.

Various modifications of the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 433-435 may be applied to the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 438-440.

FIG. 441 shows an effect example in which, when the reserved images overlap each other in the display processing using layers described with reference to FIG. 438, the superposition mode of the reserved images is automatically determined.

FIG. 441(A) shows a state in which the square-shaped reserved image of 80 pixels wide by 80 pixels long is arranged as the fourth reserved image at the coordinates (1120, 680) of the layer L40.

FIG. 441(B) shows a state in which the square-shaped reserved image of 80 horizontal pixels and 80 vertical pixels is arranged as the third reservation at the coordinates (1000, 680) of the layer L45.

FIG. 441(C) shows a state in which the square-shaped reserved image of 80 horizontal pixels and 80 vertical pixels is arranged as a second reservation at the coordinates (880, 680) of the layer L50.

FIG. 441(D) shows a state in which a horizontally long rectangular reserved image is arranged as the first reserved image at the coordinates (680, 680) of the layer L55. Specifically, this retained image consists of pixels forming an elliptical white portion of 240 pixels wide by 80 pixels high inscribed in a rectangle of 240 pixels wide by 80 pixels high, and an elliptical white portion with 100% transparency. pixels forming the outer part. In addition, in this production example, the degree of expectation for a big hit is set to be higher for this retention visually recognized in an elliptical shape, compared to other retentions visually recognized in a perfect circular shape.

FIG. 441(E) shows a state in which the square-shaped reserved image of 160 horizontal pixels and 160 vertical pixels is arranged at the coordinates (560, 600) of the layer L60.

FIG. 441(F) schematically shows the drawing data generated when each layer shown in FIGS. 441(A) to 441(E) and the layer L65 on which the changing decorative pattern is arranged are superimposed. It is shown In addition, FIG. 441(G) shows a state in which one hold is digested from the state shown in FIG. ing. In addition, in the drawing, illustration of the 100% transparent portion outside the circular shape portion and the elliptical shape portion is omitted.

In this way, by arranging only one reserved image in one layer in the layers in which the display priority is set in a predetermined order, the display mode of the reserved image can be enlarged as shown in the figure. However, even if portions of the reserved images whose transparency is not 100% overlap each other, one of the reserved images is automatically displayed on the front side based on the set display priority. Become.

FIG. 442 shows an effect example in which, in the display processing using layers described with reference to FIG. 438, when the reserved images overlap each other, the superposition mode of the reserved images is automatically determined.

FIG. 442(A) shows a state in which the square-shaped reserved image of 160 pixels wide by 160 pixels long is arranged as the fourth reserved image at the coordinates (1120, 600) of the layer L40.

FIG. 442(B) shows a state in which the square-shaped reserved image of 160 pixels wide by 160 pixels long is arranged as the third reserved image at the coordinates (1000, 600) of the layer L45.

FIG. 442(C) shows a state in which the above-described square-shaped reserved image of 160 pixels wide by 160 pixels long is arranged as the second reserved image at the coordinates (880, 600) of the layer L50.

FIG. 442(D) shows a state in which the square-shaped reserved image of 160 pixels wide by 160 pixels long is arranged as the first reserved image at the coordinates (760, 600) of the layer L55.

FIG. 442(E) shows a state in which the square-shaped reserved image of 320 pixels wide by 320 pixels long is arranged at the coordinates (480, 440) of the layer L60. The retained image consists of pixels forming a circular portion with a diameter of 320 pixels and pixels forming an outer portion of the circular shape with 100% transparency. The pixels forming the circular portion are composed of pixels with a black outline of the circle and white pixels inside the black outline. The contour portion has a width of about several pixels (for example, 3 pixels).

FIG. 442(F) schematically shows the drawing data generated when each layer shown in FIGS. 442(A) to 442(E) and the layer L65 on which the changing decorative pattern is arranged are superimposed. It is shown It should be noted that in the drawing, the portion outside the circular shape portion where the transparency is 100% is omitted.

In this way, by arranging only one reserved image in one layer in the layers in which the display priority is set in a predetermined order, as shown in the figure, the transparency of the reserved image is 100%. Even if the non-% portions overlap each other, one of the pending images is automatically displayed on the front side based on the set display priority.

In this way, by arranging only one hold on one layer, it is possible to change the color of the hold image, increase the size of the hold image, move the hold image, and Even in the case of displaying pending images in which images may overlap each other, it is possible to generate drawing data related to the pending images without considering the display status of other pending images.

Instead of or in addition to changing the display mode of the reserved image, the reserved image is decorated by arranging a specific image corresponding to the reserved image in a layer with a higher display priority or a layer with a lower display priority than the reserved image. You may Further, by arranging such a specific image, it may be configured to indicate that the variation result of the decorative pattern related to the reserved image is highly expected to be a big hit.

An embodiment modified so that a specific image can be arranged on a predetermined layer in correspondence with a reserved image will be described below with reference to FIG. 443 .

FIG. 443 is a diagram showing display priorities set for layers used for display processing and image data arranged in the layers in this embodiment. A part of the layers up to layer L99, which is the lowest degree layer, is shown in the figure.

A layer L37 is a layer in which specific images corresponding to the reserved image, the reserved image corresponding to the first reservation to the reserved image corresponding to the fourth reservation are arranged.

A layer L39 is a layer on which a specific image corresponding to the reserved image is displayed. A layer L40 is a layer in which the reserved image is arranged. A layer L41 is a layer on which a specific image corresponding to the reserved image is displayed.

A layer L44 is a layer in which a specific image corresponding to the first suspension is displayed. A layer L45 is a layer in which a reserved image corresponding to the first reserved image is arranged. Layer L46 is a layer in which a specific image corresponding to the first suspension is displayed.

A layer L49 is a layer in which a specific image corresponding to the second hold is displayed. A layer L50 is a layer in which a reserved image corresponding to the second reserved image is arranged. A layer L51 is a layer in which a specific image corresponding to the second suspension is displayed.

A layer L54 is a layer in which a specific image corresponding to the third suspension is displayed. A layer L55 is a layer in which a pending image corresponding to the third pending is arranged. Layer L56 is a layer in which a specific image corresponding to the third suspension is displayed.

A layer L59 is a layer in which a specific image corresponding to the fourth hold is displayed. A layer L60 is a layer in which a reserved image corresponding to the fourth reserved image is arranged. A layer L61 is a layer in which a specific image corresponding to the fourth hold is displayed.

A layer L63 is a layer in which specific images corresponding to the reserved image, the reserved image corresponding to the first reservation to the reserved image corresponding to the fourth reservation are arranged.

Also, the layer L00 is a layer in which an error notification image indicating that some kind of error has occurred in the gaming machine is arranged. In addition, the layer L35 is a layer in which the decorative symbols that are displayed still are arranged. Also, the layer 65 is a layer in which the decorative symbols being displayed in a variable manner are arranged. A layer 99 is a layer in which a background image is arranged.

FIG. 444 is a diagram showing an example of an effect in a gaming machine employing the layer structure described with reference to FIG. 443. FIG. In the production examples shown in FIGS. 444(A) to 444(G), the holding image of the perfect circle corresponding to the holding is arranged on the layer L40, and the holding image of the perfect circle corresponding to the first holding is arranged on the layer L45. is arranged, a perfect circular pending image corresponding to the second pending is placed on the layer L50, a perfect circular pending image corresponding to the third pending is placed on the layer L55, and a perfect circular pending image corresponding to the fourth pending is placed on the layer L60 A held image is placed.

FIG. 444(A) is an example of rendering in which a specific image visually recognized as a horizontally oblong oval corresponding to the first hold is arranged on the layer L46. It should be noted that it is also possible to arrange specific images of oblong elliptical shapes in corresponding layers corresponding to the suspension, the second suspension to the fourth suspension.

FIG. 444(B) arranges a specific circular image corresponding to the reservation on the layer L41, arranges a specific circular image corresponding to the first reservation on the layer L46, and arranges the second reservation on the layer L51. This is an effect example in which a specific circular image corresponding to is arranged, and a specific circular specific image corresponding to the third reservation is arranged on the layer L56.

FIG. 444(C) is an example of rendering in which a horizontally long rectangular specific image is arranged on the layer L37 to hide the lower half of the reserved image positioned behind.

FIG. 444(D) is an example of rendering in which a horizontally long rectangular specific image with a transparency of 50% is arranged on the layer L37 so that the entire reserved image positioned behind is translucent.

FIG. 444(E) is an example of rendering in which a horizontally long rectangular specific image is arranged on the layer L65 so as to overlap the lower half of the reserved image positioned on the near side.

FIG. 444(F) arranges a vertically long oval specific image with a transparency of 50% on the layer L39 so that the pending image corresponding to the pending on the rear side can be visually recognized semitransparently, This is an effect example in which a specific image having a vertically long elliptical shape is arranged on the layer L49 with a transparency of 50% so that the pending image corresponding to the second pending located on the rear side can be visually recognized semitransparently.

FIG. 444(G) shows an effect in which the arrangement mode of each specific image described with reference to FIG. 444(B) and the arrangement mode of each specific image described with reference to FIG. 444(F) are executed simultaneously. For example.

In this way, by providing a layer in which a specific image can be arranged corresponding to each reserved image, various display modes can be executed for the reserved image while maintaining the visibility of each reserved image. .

Incidentally, as shown in FIGS. 444(A), 444(B), 444(F), and 444(G), by displaying a specific image corresponding to a predetermined hold, the corresponding specific image is It may be configured to indicate that the degree of expectation for a big hit is high compared to the reservation that is not displayed. Further, as shown in FIGS. 444(C) to 444(E), by displaying a specific image corresponding to the displayed suspension (the suspension to the fourth suspension in the figure), the specific image is displayed. It may be configured to indicate that any one of the displayed holds has a higher chance of winning a jackpot than a non-displayed hold. Also, such a form of presentation may be applied to the above-described embodiment. For example, when changing the pending image for the first pending, the display mode as shown in FIG. 444 may be executed.

FIG. 445 is an embodiment modified from the embodiment described with reference to FIG. In such a layered structure, the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 444 may be configured to be executable.

It is possible to realize diversification of effects not only by displaying decorative symbols and displaying reserved images, but also by arranging a plurality of characters in a plurality of layers with different display priorities. An embodiment modified so as to effectively utilize display processing by a plurality of layers to perform display effects will be described below.

FIG. 446(A) shows a first vehicle image, a second vehicle image, a first medal image, a second medal image, and a third medal image displayed in the display area in this embodiment. Also, FIG. 446(B) is a diagram schematically showing an arrangement mode of the medal image with respect to the vehicle image. FIG. 447 shows the layer structure in this embodiment and how images are arranged in layers in a plurality of effect patterns.

First, referring to FIG. 446(A), the car images (first car image, second car image) and medal images (first medal image, second medal image, third medal image) will be described.

The first vehicle image is a horizontally long rectangular image of 280 pixels wide by 200 pixels long. The first vehicle image is an image imitating a light van type cash transport vehicle. The first car image consists of an area composed of black pixels representing the body and tires of the vehicle, and other areas composed of pixels with 100% transparency (the upper left part of the image and the left and right parts of the tire part). It consists of

The second vehicle image is a horizontally long rectangular image of 280 pixels wide by 200 pixels long. The second vehicle image is an image imitating a truck with an open-type cargo bed. The second car image consists of an area composed of black pixels representing the body and tires of the car, and an area composed of pixels with 100% transparency (the upper left part of the image, the upper right part of the image, and the tire part). left and right parts).

The first medal image is a square image of 80 pixels wide by 80 pixels long. The first medal image is located inside the circular perfect circle, which is an area composed of black pixels representing a circular perfect circle with a width of several pixels (for example, 3 pixels) inscribed in a square of 80 pixels wide by 80 pixels high. It is composed of an area composed of black pixels representing the kanji character "gold" and an area composed of other pixels having 100% transparency.

The second medal image is a square-shaped image of 80 horizontal pixels and 80 vertical pixels. The second medal image is located inside the circular perfect circle, which is an area composed of black pixels representing a circular perfect circle with a width of several pixels (for example, 3 pixels) inscribed in a square of 80 pixels wide by 80 pixels high. It is composed of an area composed of black pixels representing the kanji character "silver" and an area composed of other pixels having 100% transparency.

The second medal image is a square-shaped image of 80 horizontal pixels and 80 vertical pixels. The third medal image is located inside the circular perfect circle, which is an area composed of black pixels representing a circular perfect circle with a width of several pixels (for example, 3 pixels) inscribed in a square of 80 pixels wide by 80 pixels high. It is composed of an area composed of black pixels representing the kanji character "copper" and an area composed of other pixels having 100% transparency.

The medal image and the car image are arranged in different layers. Description will be made below with reference to FIGS. 446B and 447. FIG. As shown in FIG. 447, car effect patterns 01 to 05 are provided as effect patterns in this embodiment. In each car effect pattern, display is executed in which the car image and the medal image move from the right end to the left end in the lower portion of the display area. Further, the car image and the reserved image, and the medal image and the reserved image may overlap each other, but the details will be described later.

In the car effect pattern 01, one of the medal images (the first medal image, the second medal image, and the third medal image) is placed on the layer L39, and the car images (the first and second car images) are placed on the layer L41. one is placed. Note that the layer L40 is a layer in which the pending image corresponding to the pending is arranged.

In the car effect pattern 02, one of the medal images (the first medal image, the second medal image, and the third medal image) is placed on the layer L44, and the car images (the first car image and the second car image) are placed on the layer L46. one is placed. Note that the layer L45 is a layer in which the reserved image corresponding to the first reservation is arranged.

In the car effect pattern 03, one of the medal images (the first medal image, the second medal image, and the third medal image) is placed on the layer L49, and the car images (the first and second car images) are placed on the layer L51. one is placed. Note that the layer L50 is a layer in which the pending image corresponding to the second pending is arranged.

In the car effect pattern 04, one of the medal images (the first medal image, the second medal image, and the third medal image) is placed on the layer L54, and the car images (the first and second car images) are placed on the layer L55. one is placed. Note that the layer L56 is a layer in which the pending image corresponding to the third pending is arranged.

In the car effect pattern 05, one of the medal images (the first medal image, the second medal image, and the third medal image) is placed on the layer L59, and the car images (the first and second car images) are placed on the layer L60. one is placed. Note that the layer L61 is a layer in which the reserved image corresponding to the fourth reservation is arranged.

The relative positional relationship between the car image placed on a predetermined layer and the medal image placed on the predetermined layer is the positional relationship in which the medal image is positioned behind the car image when the layers are superimposed. It has become. In addition, the positional relationship between the car image and the medal image does not change even when the car image is moved in the car effect patterns 01 to 05, and even if the car image moves, the relative positions of both images do not change. Relationships continue to be maintained.

FIG. 446B shows vehicle images (first and second vehicle images) arranged in predetermined layers and medal images (first and second medal images and third medal images) arranged in predetermined layers. medal image). In addition, in the drawing, only the outline portion is shown for the part imitating a car.

The combination of the car image and the medal image shown in FIG. 446(B) (six in total) can be applied to each of the car effect pattern 01 to the car effect pattern 05 shown in FIG. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute a total of 30 production patterns.

Referring to FIG. 448, an execution example of car presentation using car images and medal images is shown. In this production example, the decorative symbols are fluctuating, and the maximum number of reserved symbols is four. Further, in the lower portion of the display area, from left to right, the pending image corresponding to the pending, the pending image corresponding to the first pending to the fourth pending image corresponding to the fourth pending are arranged. The reserved image and each reserved image are square-shaped reserved images of 80 horizontal pixels and 80 vertical pixels as described above. As described above, when this image is placed on a predetermined layer, the image is displayed in a perfect circular shape with a black outline and a white inside of the outline.

FIG. 448 shows an example of an effect in the display area when the car effect pattern 03 is executed. In this production example, the first medal image is arranged on the layer L49, and the first car image is arranged on the layer L51. Further, on the layer L50, a pending image corresponding to the second pending is arranged.

FIG. 448(A) shows a state in which placement of the first medal image on the layer L49 and placement of the first car image on the layer L50 have started. A reserved image corresponding to the fourth reservation is placed on layer L60. Therefore, the first medal image arranged on the layer L49 and the first car image arranged on the layer L50 are positioned and visually recognized on the front side of the reserved image corresponding to the fourth reservation. It has a display mode.

In FIG. 448(B), the first medal image placed on layer L49 and the first car image placed on layer L51 move leftward from the state shown in FIG. 448(A) in the lower portion of the display area. It shows a state in which it has been moved by a predetermined number of pixels. In this state, the first vehicle image is located behind the reserved image corresponding to the second reserved image placed on the layer L50. Also, the first medal image is located on the front side of the reserved image corresponding to the second reserved, which is arranged on the layer L50.

The first medal image is composed of a perfectly circular contour portion made up of black pixels, a character portion made up of black pixels (in this case, the character “gold”), and other portions with 100% transparency. there is Therefore, when the first medal image is located on the front side of the reserved image, the outline of the black perfect circle and the black characters of the first medal image are on the front side of the white pixels of the reserved image. becomes visible. In FIG. 448(B), the left half of the character "Kin" overlaps the white portion of the reserved image, making it visible.

In FIG. 448(C), the first medal image placed on layer L49 and the first car image placed on layer L51 move leftward from the state shown in FIG. 448(B) in the lower portion of the display area. Further, it shows a state of moving by a predetermined number of pixels. Even in this state, the first medal image placed on the layer L49, the first car image placed on the layer L51, and the hold image corresponding to the second hold placed on the layer L50 overlap each other. There is, and the entirety of the characters "Kin" overlaps the white portion of the pending image corresponding to the second pending. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the character "KIN" as a whole.

In FIG. 448(D), the first medal image placed on layer L49 and the first car image placed on layer L51 move leftward from the state shown in FIG. 448(C) in the lower portion of the display area. Further, it shows a state of moving by a predetermined number of pixels. In this state, the first medal image placed on the layer L49, the first car image placed on the layer L51, and the hold image corresponding to the hold placed on the layer L40 overlap each other. However, since the hold image corresponding to the hold arranged on the layer L40 has a higher display priority, the first car image and the first medal image are higher than the hold image corresponding to the hold. displayed in the back.

As described above, in the present embodiment, by arranging predetermined images in layers before and after a layer in which a predetermined reserved image is arranged, it is possible to perform an effect corresponding to the reserved image.

In the above-described production example, the car production pattern 03 is executed to execute the production corresponding to the second hold. A similar effect mode can be realized for images. Similarly, by executing the car effect pattern 02, the car effect pattern 04 is applied to the reserved image corresponding to the first reserve by executing the car effect pattern 04 to the reserved image corresponding to the third reserve. By executing 05, a similar effect mode can be realized for the reserved image corresponding to the fourth reserved.

It may be configured to determine whether or not to execute the car effect pattern based on the result of the special lottery. Further, it is preferable to configure the system so that the degree of expectation that the result of the special lottery will be a big win is suggested by the type of the visually recognized medal. For example, the special lottery result is better when the second medal is displayed than when the third medal is displayed, and when the first medal is displayed than when the second medal is displayed. It is preferable to configure so that the degree of expectation that is a big hit is high. For example, in this production example, in the front side of the white part of the pending image displayed as the second pending, the letters "silver" and the letters "gold", the latter corresponds to the second pending It is preferable to configure so that the degree of expectation that the variation result of the decorative pattern will result in a big win is high.

An example of an effect is shown in which the medal image moves from the right end to the left end of the lower part of the display area along with the car image. can be configured to FIG. 448(E) shows a modified example in which the first medal image moving from the right is stopped at the center of the circular portion of the hold image corresponding to the second hold. In the figure, the first car image continues to move leftward independently of the first medal image, which is stopped and displayed, and is about to be out of the display area. It is

FIG. 449 shows an example of effect modified in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 448 so that the second vehicle image is moved instead of the first vehicle image.

In this way, when each car effect pattern is executed using the second car image, the player can visually recognize which medal image is arranged immediately after the car image appears at the left end of the lower part of the display area. becomes possible. Therefore, it is possible to arouse the player's interest in which hold the medal image that has become visible will stop.

In the embodiment shown below, an embodiment will be described in which a special lottery result is suggested according to the result of a display effect in which a plurality of characters run a foot race.

FIG. 450 is a diagram showing layers for arranging various images used in the ready-to-win foot race production in this embodiment and the display priority of these layers. Also, FIG. 451 shows an example of a performance in a foot race performance.

In the present embodiment, in the ready-to-win state, six male sextuplet characters and a tall male rival character who is the rival of the sextuplets run a foot race. , special lottery results are suggested.

Specifically, the six male characters who are the sextuplets are the first brother character of the eldest son, the second brother character of the second son, the third brother character of the third son, the fourth brother character of the fourth son, and the fifth brother character of the fifth son. It consists of a brother character and a sixth brother character of the sixth son.

Each character is a vertically long rectangular image consisting of opaque pixels of a predetermined color representing the character's head and character body, and 100% transparent pixels other than the character's head and character body. By arranging them in layers (layer L70, layer L72, layer L74, layer L76, layer L78, layer L80, layer L82), a display state in which they are visually recognized as a predetermined character is obtained.

As shown in FIG. 451(A), each character can be identified by adding a predetermined letter to the head of each character image. Specifically, the head of the first brother character is "1", the head of the second brother character is "2", the head of the third brother character is "3", and the head of the fourth brother character is "3". "4" is added to the head, "5" to the head of the fifth brother character, "6" to the head of the sixth brother character, and "ra" to the head of the rival character. ing.

As shown in FIG. 450, layer L82 is the first sibling character image showing the first sibling character, layer L80 is the second sibling character image showing the second sibling character, and layer L78 is the third sibling character image showing the third sibling character. Layer L74 is the fourth brother character image showing the fourth brother character, Layer L72 is the fifth brother character image showing the fifth brother character, Layer L70 is the sixth brother character showing the sixth brother character. The layer on which the image is placed. A layer L76 is a layer in which a rival character image representing a rival character is arranged. A layer L69, a layer L71, a layer L73, a layer L75, a layer L77, a layer L79, and a layer L81 are layers in which medal images are arranged.

FIG. 451(A) shows the display state immediately after the foot race ready-to-win effect is started. In this state, the first brother character image is on layer L82, the second brother character image is on layer L80, the third brother character image is on layer L78, the rival character image is on layer L76, and the fourth brother character is on layer L74. As for the images, the fifth brother character image is arranged on the layer L72, and the sixth brother character image is arranged on the layer L70. In addition, the reserved image, which is white and visually recognized as a perfect circle, is arranged on the layer L60. In addition, on the layer L65, decorative patterns with the number "2" attached to the upper left end and the upper right end are arranged in a state of being temporarily stopped, and the reach state is determined by the decorative patterns with the number "2" attached. formed.

In the display state shown in FIG. 451(A) immediately after the start of the foot race ready-to-win effect, the first brother character image is behind the second brother character image, and the second brother character image is behind the third brother character image. the third brother character image behind the rival character image, the rival character image behind the fourth brother character image, the fourth brother character image behind the fifth brother character image, and the fifth brother character image behind the fifth brother character image. The character image is positioned behind the sixth sibling character image. In this way, each image other than the sixth sibling character image is displayed in such a manner that a part of the image is hidden by the character image on the near side.

FIG. 451(B) shows the display state at the timing after a predetermined time has passed from the display state shown in FIG. 451(A). FIG. 451(C) shows the display state at the timing after a predetermined time has passed from the display state shown in FIG. 451(B). In the foot race ready-to-reach production, the coordinates in the y-axis direction are not changed for the first to sixth brother character images in each layer, and the values in the x-axis direction are changed to predetermined values. ∼ 6th brother characters are configured to be visually recognized as moving in the left and right direction. As for the rival character image, the arrangement coordinates in the layer L76 do not change during execution of the foot race ready-to-win effect, and the state of being displayed in the center of the display area is maintained.

In this way, by arranging a plurality of character images at overlapping positions and moving them only in one axial direction, it is possible to give a sense of depth to the appearance of the characters racing.

FIG. 451(D) shows the display state when a predetermined time has elapsed from the display state shown in FIG. 451(C). Specifically, it shows a state in which the goal line image placed on layer L84 is moving from the right side to the left side of the display area. In layer L84, the goal line image enters the frame from the right side of the display area, moves to the left side at a constant speed, and finally leaves the frame on the left side of the display area.

In the foot race reach production, there are cases where the rival character wins the foot race, and where one of the first to sixth brother characters wins the foot race. It is configured so that the expectation that the result of the special lottery will be a big hit is higher when the player wins the foot race. Whether or not the player wins the foot race is determined by whether or not the character image overlaps the goal line image first.

FIG. 451(E) shows a display example when the rival character first overlaps the goal line image. On the other hand, FIG. 451(G) shows a display example when the first brother character and the second brother character overlap the goal line image before the rival character.

After the display state shown in FIG. 451(E) or FIG. 451(G) is reached, the first medal images described with reference to FIG. A third medal image is displayed corresponding to the character images that have won first to third places. A medal image is not displayed correspondingly to the character images that have won the fourth place or later.

FIG. 451(F) shows the first to third medal images described with reference to FIG. 446(A) corresponding to the order of each character after the display state shown in FIG. 451(E) is reached. indicates a display state arranged corresponding to the character images that have won up to the third place.

Specifically, the first medal image is on layer L75, the rival character image is on layer L76, the second medal image is on layer L77, the third brother character image is on layer L78, and the third medal image is on layer L81. A first sibling character image is arranged on the layer L82. Thus, a display mode is shown in which the rival character wins the gold medal, the third brother character wins the silver medal, and the first brother character wins the bronze medal.

Similarly, in FIG. 451(H), after the display state shown in FIG. 3 shows a display state in which 3 medal images are arranged corresponding to the character images that have won up to 3rd place.

Specifically, the third medal image is on layer L75, the rival character image is on layer L76, the second medal image is on layer L77, the third sibling character image is on layer L78, and the first medal image is on layer L81. A first sibling character image is arranged on the layer L82. As a result, a display mode is shown in which the first brother character wins the gold medal, the third brother character wins the silver medal, and the rival character wins the bronze medal.

With such a configuration, as shown in FIGS. 451(F) and 451(H), it is possible to realize a display state in which medals are visually superimposed on the front side of each character. Further, by performing such a display performance, the degree of expectation of the decorative symbols in the ready-to-win state being stopped and displayed in a stop mode indicating that a big win will occur is shown to the player.

The display states shown in FIGS. 451(F) and 451(H) are for layer L69, layer L71, layer L73, layer L75, layer L77, layer L79, and layer L81, which are layers for arranging medal images. This is achieved by arranging medal images.

Specifically, the medal images corresponding to the first to third rankings are displayed in correspondence with the layers in which the character images that have won the first to third rankings are arranged.

A process of placing medal images on layer L69 corresponding to the character images placed on layer L70, a process of placing medal images on layer L71 corresponding to the character images placed on layer L72, and a process of placing medal images on layer L74. A process of placing a medal image on the layer L73 corresponding to the character image, a process of placing a medal image on the layer L75 corresponding to the character image placed on the layer L76, and a process of placing the medal image on the layer L78 corresponding to the character image placed on the layer L78. A process of placing a medal image on layer L77, a process of placing a medal image on layer L79 corresponding to the character image placed on layer L80, and a process of placing a medal image on layer L80 corresponding to the character image placed on layer L82. Arrangement processing is performed according to the result of the foot race.

Thus, in the foot race ready-to-win production, the result of the special lottery is indicated according to the character that reaches the finish line first. On the other hand, it may be configured to suggest the special lottery result in a different mode in the foot race ready-to-win production. 452 and 453, a modified example of the foot race ready-to-reach performance explained with reference to FIGS. 450 and 451 will be explained below.

FIG. 452 shows a first modification of the foot race ready-to-reach effect. In this production example, the fourth to sixth brother characters withdraw from the foot race in the middle of the foot race, and play tricks on the first to third brother characters and rival characters who are continuing the foot race. Such a display effect is executed.

FIG. 452(A) shows the state immediately after the start of the foot race. This display state is the same as the state shown in FIG.

FIG. 452(B) shows the display state at the timing after a predetermined time has passed from the display state shown in FIG. 452(A). FIG. 452B shows a state in which the fourth and sixth brother characters have moved to the left side of the display area, and the fifth brother character has moved to the right side of the display area.

FIG. 452(C) shows the display state at the timing after a predetermined time has passed from the display state shown in FIG. 452(B). FIG. 452(C) shows a display state in which the fourth brother character and the sixth brother character are framed out on the left side of the display area, and the fifth brother character is framed out on the right side of the display area. In the display area, the first to third brother characters and rival characters are in a foot race.

FIG. 452(D) shows the display state at the timing after a predetermined time has passed from the display state shown in FIG. 452(C). In the display state shown in FIG. 452(D), the fifth brother character holding a bronze medal (third medal image) frames in from the left side of the display area. The fifth brother character image is arranged on layer L72, and the third medal image is arranged on layer L71.

FIG. 452(E) shows the display state at the timing after a predetermined time has passed from the display state shown in FIG. 452(D). In the display state shown in FIG. 452(E), the fifth brother character holding the bronze medal (third medal image) moves to the center of the display area and overlaps the rival character and the third brother character on the front side. Become. In this state, a display effect is performed in which the fifth brother character hands over the bronze medal (third medal image) to the third brother character. For example, in the layer L71 where the third medal image is arranged, the arrangement position of the third medal image may be moved so as to oscillate vertically or horizontally.

FIG. 452(F) shows the display state at the timing after a predetermined time has passed from the display state shown in FIG. 452(E). In the display state shown in FIG. 452(F), the bronze medal (3rd medal image) that had been held by the 5th brother character was handed over to the 3rd brother character and overlapped on the front side of the 3rd brother character. state. The third brother character image is arranged on layer L78, and the third medal image is arranged on layer L77. Also, at the timing when the third medal image is laid out on the layer L77, the third medal image is not laid out on the layer L71. A goal line is displayed at the right end of the display area.

FIG. 452(G) shows the display state at the timing after a predetermined time has passed from the display state shown in FIG. 452(F). In the display state shown in FIG. 452(G), the third brother character reaches the goal line first while holding the bronze medal (third medal image).

FIG. 452(H) shows the display state at the timing after a predetermined time has passed from the display state shown in FIG. 452(G). In the display state shown in FIG. 452(H), the fourth brother character holds a gold medal (first medal image) and the sixth character holds a silver medal (second medal image) on the left side of the display area. It is In this presentation, the bronze medal won by the third brother character suggests the degree of expectation for the occurrence of a big hit. In addition, the degree of expectation for a big win is not suggested by the rival character and the first brother character who did not win medals despite placing in the top three.

FIG. 453 shows a second modification of the foot race ready-to-reach effect. In this production example, the fourth to sixth brother characters withdraw from the foot race in the middle of the foot race, and play tricks on the first to third brother characters and rival characters who are continuing the foot race. Such a display effect is executed.

FIG. 453(A) shows the state immediately after the start of the foot race. This display state is the same as the state shown in FIG.

FIG. 453(B) shows the display state at the timing after a predetermined time has passed from the display state shown in FIG. 453(A). FIG. 453B shows a state in which the fourth and sixth brother characters have moved to the left side of the display area, and the fifth brother character has moved to the right side of the display area.

FIG. 453(C) shows the display state at the timing after a predetermined time has passed from the display state shown in FIG. 453(B). FIG. 453(C) shows a display state in which the fourth brother character and the sixth brother character are framed out on the left side of the display area, and the fifth brother character is framed out on the right side of the display area. In the display area, the first to third brother characters and rival characters are in a foot race. Also, at this time, the layer on which the third brother character is placed is changed from the layer L78 on which it was placed until then to the layer L74. Also, the coordinates at which the third sibling character is arranged are changed from the right side of the rival character to the lower left.

FIG. 453(D) shows the display state at the timing after a predetermined time has passed from the display state shown in FIG. 453(C). In the display state shown in FIG. 453(D), the fourth sibling character holding a gold medal (first medal image) enters the frame from the left side of the display area. The fourth brother character image is arranged on layer L72, and the first medal image is arranged on layer L71.

FIG. 453(E) shows the display state at the timing after a predetermined time has passed from the display state shown in FIG. 453(D). In the display state shown in FIG. 453(E), the fourth brother character holding the gold medal (first medal image) moves to the center of the display area and overlaps the third brother character on the front side. In this state, a display effect is performed in which the fourth brother character hands over the gold medal (first medal image) to the third brother character.

FIG. 453(F) shows the display state at the timing after a predetermined time has passed from the display state shown in FIG. 453(E). In the display state shown in FIG. 453(F), the gold medal (first medal image) held by the fourth brother character is handed over to the third brother character and overlapped on the front side of the third brother character. state. The third brother character image is arranged on layer L74, and the first medal image is arranged on layer L73. A goal line is displayed at the right end of the display area.

FIG. 453(G) shows the display state at the timing after a predetermined time has passed from the display state shown in FIG. 453(F). In the display state shown in FIG. 453(G), the rival character is the first to reach the goal line. Also, a state is shown in which the third brother character reaches the goal line second while holding the gold medal (first medal image).

FIG. 453(H) shows the display state at the timing after a predetermined time has passed from the display state shown in FIG. 453(G). In the display state shown in FIG. 453(H), the fourth brother character holds a bronze medal (third medal image) and the sixth character holds a silver medal (second medal image) on the left side of the display area. It is In this presentation, the gold medal won by the third brother character suggests the degree of expectation for the occurrence of a big hit. In addition, the degree of expectation for a big win is not suggested by the rival character and the first brother character who did not win medals despite placing in the top three.

As in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 451, the degree of expectation for a big hit may be suggested by the order of reaching the goal line. In particular, the degree of expectation for a big win may be suggested by the order of sibling characters or the order of rival characters. In the present embodiment, a medal image is added to the character image as a display effect so that the ranking is easy to understand.

On the other hand, as described with reference to FIGS. 452 and 453, during the foot race production, some characters are caused to leave the screen, and the characters who have left the screen hand the medals to the characters during the foot race. , may be configured to perform an effect such that the order is forcibly determined. In this case, since the order of the characters can be predicted before the characters in the foot race reach the finish line, it is possible to enhance the interest compared to the production described with reference to FIG. 451 .

In FIG. 453, the layer on which the third brother character image is arranged is changed from layer L78 to layer L74 during the footrace ready-to-win effect. Such display control makes it possible to execute an effect display such that the third brother character image receives medals from another character on the nearer side than L76 where the rival character image is arranged.

As shown in FIG. 452(D), the third brother character image is arranged in a layer behind the rival character image. The mode of the medals given to the third brother character may be different depending on whether the medals are arranged on the layer closer to the player than the third brother character.

For example, when the third brother character is behind the rival character, the rival character interferes with the fourth brother character and the fifth brother character. It may be configured so that it may not be possible to pass.

On the other hand, when the third brother character is closer to the rival character than the rival character, the medals brought by the fourth brother character and the fifth brother character can almost certainly be handed over without being disturbed by the rival character. can be configured to Thus, when the third brother character is on the front side of the rival character, a predetermined medal (for example, a gold medal) is awarded to the third brother character compared to when the third brother character is on the back side of the rival character. It may be constructed so that the probability of being handed over to sibling characters is increased.

Also, the third brother character may be configured so that medals are handed over multiple times. In this case, a predetermined medal (for example, a gold medal) indicating that the third brother character is on the front side of the rival character indicates that the likelihood of a big hit is higher when the third brother character is on the front side of the rival character. ) so that the probability of possessing it at the goal is high.

In each of the embodiments described with reference to FIGS. 382 to 453, examples of moving the displayed image from the front side to the back side or from the back side to the front side were shown. 450, the display processing using the layer structure as described with reference to FIG. By moving to a layer, the displayed image may be moved from the front side to the back side or from the back side to the front side.

In this embodiment, a plurality of obstacle nails 1201 are planted from the front in the obstacle nail through-holes 1110a provided in the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. As shown in FIG. Specifically, the obstruction nail 1201 is held by the panel plate 1110 by engaging the obstruction nail helical portion 1201c provided at the tip portion of the obstruction nail 1201 so as to bite into the panel plate 1110 . Also, the panel plate 1110 is made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and through the panel plate 1110, it is possible to visually recognize the movable accessory and the light-emitting decorative portion arranged behind the panel plate 1110. However, by engaging the helical portion 1201c of the obstacle nail with the panel plate 1110, the panel plate 1110 is scratched or cracked, resulting in a cloudy portion (hereinafter collectively referred to as the whitened portion HKB). There is a problem that these parts become visible to the player, and the appearance deteriorates. This is a problem that cannot occur when obstacle nails are planted in a wooden game board as in the conventional art.

The applicant of the present application has studied in detail the cause and location of such whitening HKB. First, the manufacturing method and structure of the game panel 1100, which is the premise for generating the whitened portion HKB, will be described with reference to FIGS. 454 and 455. FIG.

FIG. 454(a) is a side view showing an obstacle nail 1201 planted in the panel plate 1110. FIG. FIG. 454(b) is a sectional view of the panel plate 1110 and the obstructing nail through-hole 1110a provided in the panel plate 1110 viewed from the right side. FIG. 454(c) is a cross-sectional view of the state in which the obstructing nail 1201 is implanted in the obstructing nail through-hole 1110a provided in the panel plate 1110, viewed from the right side. FIG. 454(d) is a cross-sectional view viewed from the right side of a portion A where the whitened portion HKB may occur around the obstructing nail 1201 implanted in the panel plate 1110. FIG. FIG. 454(e) is a cross-sectional view of an example of a state in which a whitened portion HKB is actually generated around the obstacle nail 1201 implanted in the panel plate 1110, viewed from the right. FIG. 455(a) shows the dimensions of each part constituting the obstruction nail 1201, and FIG. FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view showing the dimensions of each member shown. Note that some symbols are omitted in the drawing.

The structure and shape of the obstacle nail 1201 will be described with reference to FIG. 454(a). The obstacle nail 1201 is entirely made of brass and has a certain elasticity. In addition, in a white light irradiation environment, the whole is visually recognized as having a metallic luster tinged with yellow. The obstructing nail 1201 is composed of, from the left side, an obstructing nail head part 1201a, an obstructing nail first body part 1201b, an obstructing nail spiral part 1201c, an obstructing nail second body part 1201d, and an obstructing nail tip part 1201e from the left side. It's becoming The length L1 of the obstacle nail 1201 is 27 mm. The shape of the obstructing nail head 1201a is a dome-shaped round head, and is a perfect circle when viewed from the front. The obstacle nail head 1201a has a diameter L2 of 4 mm in front view and a thickness L3 of 1 mm in side view. The shape of the obstructing nail first body portion 1201b is cylindrical. The length L4 of the obstacle nail first body portion 1201b is 20 mm. The diameter L5 of the obstacle nail first body portion 1201b is 2 mm. The shape of the helical portion of the obstructing nail is substantially cylindrical. The length L7 of the obstacle nail spiral portion 1201c is 4 mm. The diameter of the obstacle nail helical portion 1201c is slightly larger than the diameter L5 of the obstacle nail first body portion 1201b. The shape of the obstructing nail second body portion 1201d is cylindrical. The length L8 of the obstructing nail second body portion 1201d is 1 mm. The diameter L6 of the second obstacle nail body portion 1201d is 2 mm, which is the same as the diameter L5 of the first obstacle nail body portion 1201b. The shape of the obstacle nail tip portion 1201e is conical. The length L9 of the obstructing nail tip portion 1201e is 1 mm.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 454(b) and 455(b), the structure of the panel plate 1110 before the obstruction nail 1201 is implanted will be described. The panel plate 1110 is made of a colorless and transparent acrylic plate material. The front and rear surfaces of the panel plate 1110 are formed to be smooth, and through the panel plate 1110 it is possible to clearly see the members located behind. The panel plate 1110 may be made of a plate material made of colorless and transparent synthetic resin such as polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, methacrylic resin, or the like. The thickness L10 of the panel plate 1110 is 10 mm. The panel plate 1110 is provided with an obstruction nail through-hole 1110a for implanting the obstruction nail 1201 therein. The obstacle nail through-hole 1110a has a columnar shape and a diameter L11 of 2 mm. The obstacle nail through-holes 1110 a are formed by cutting the panel plate 1110 . Therefore, the inner wall of the obstacle nail through-hole 1110a is slightly opaque and visually recognized by the player.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 454(c) and 455(b), a method of implanting the obstructing nail 1201 into the obstructing nail through-hole 1110a provided in the panel plate 1110 will be described. The obstructing nail tip portion 1201e of the obstructing nail 1201 is pushed into the obstructing nail through hole 1110a, and the obstructing nail helical portion 1201c, the obstructing nail second body portion 1201d, and the obstructing nail tip portion 1201e are entirely inside the obstructing nail through hole 1110a. , and a force is applied backward (to the right in the figure) until a part of the first body portion 1201b of the obstacle nail is positioned in the obstacle nail through-hole 1110a, thereby removing the obstacle against the panel plate 1110. Implantation of nail 1201 is completed. It should be noted that the impeding nail 1201 is implanted by a nailing machine. The length L4 of the obstacle nail first body portion 1201b is 20 mm. The length L13 of the portion located on the front side of the front surface is 17 mm. FIG. 454(c) shows a state in which the installation of the obstacle nail 1201 to the panel board 1110 is completed.

The distance L14 between the tip of the obstructing nail tip 1201e and the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 is 1 mm. With such a configuration, even if a game machine manufacturer or a store clerk carelessly touches the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 due to the obstruction nail tip portion 1201e, the obstruction nail 1201 may cause an injury. It is possible to prevent

The shape of the obstacle nail through-hole 1110a to penetrate the panel plate 1110 is that the inner wall of the obstacle nail through-hole 1110a was shaved when the obstacle nail 1201 was implanted into the panel plate 1110. This is to expel the acrylic resin powder from behind the panel plate 1110 to the outside.

As described above, the diameter L5 of the first obstacle nail body 1201b and the diameter L6 of the second obstacle nail body 1201d are 2 mm. Similarly, the diameter L11 of the obstacle nail through-hole 1110a is also 2 mm. On the other hand, the diameter of the obstructing nail spiral 1201c is slightly larger than 2 mm. Therefore, when the obstacle nail 1201 is pushed into the obstacle nail through-hole 1110a, the inner wall of the obstacle nail through-hole 1110a is slightly deformed by the obstacle nail helical portion 1201c. When the obstruction nail 1201 has been pushed in, the obstruction nail helical portion 1201c is engaged with the inner wall of the obstruction nail through-hole 1110a, and the obstruction nail 1201 is firmly held against the panel plate 1110. .

Incidentally, the diameter L11 of the obstacle nail through-hole 1110a is slightly larger than the diameter L5 of the first obstacle nail body 1201b and the diameter L6 of the second obstacle nail body 1201d, and is larger than the diameter of the obstacle nail helical portion 1201c. may also be configured to be slightly smaller. In this case, in a state where the obstacle nail spiral portion 1201c is engaged with the inner wall of the obstacle nail through-hole 1110a, the obstacle nail first body portion 1201b, the obstacle nail second body portion 1201d, and the inner wall of the obstacle nail through-hole 1110a There will be a small gap between the With such a configuration, when a game ball collides with the obstacle nail 1201 and the obstacle nail 1201 is elastically deformed, the elastic deformation of the obstacle nail 1201 is allowed by this gap. As a result, it is possible to prevent the obstacle nail 1201 from breaking when the game ball repeatedly collides with the obstacle nail 1201 .

By the way, in the step of implanting the obstacle nail 1201, the obstacle nail spiral portion 1201c moves backward in the obstacle nail through-hole 1110a, so that the inside of the obstacle nail through-hole 1110a provided in the panel plate 1110 is damaged. There is a problem that it is visually recognized as white.

The obstacle nail through hole 1110 a is formed by cutting the panel plate 1110 and has a shape that penetrates the panel plate 1110 . By being formed by cutting, the inner surface of the through-hole is rough and visually recognized as white. In particular, since the obstruction nail tip portion 1201e is implanted while remaining in the panel plate 1110, the hindmost portion of the obstruction nail through-hole 1110a itself can be seen in a whitened state.

In addition, when the obstacle nail 1201 is completely implanted, the obstacle nail through-hole 1110a is elastically deformed to maintain the engagement state with the obstacle nail helical portion 1201c, but when the elastic deformation limit is exceeded. , cracks may occur outward from the inner wall of the obstacle nail through-hole 1110a with which the obstacle nail helical portion 1201c engages.

Further, in a game on a gaming machine installed in a game parlor, the game ball collides with the obstacle nail 1201 many times, and the kinetic energy of the game ball is transferred to the obstacle nail through-hole 1110a of the obstacle nail first body portion 1201b. It may be transmitted to the inner wall of the obstructing nail through-hole 1110a via the portion located inside, and a crack may occur on the front side of the obstructing nail through-hole 1110a. Further, cracks may occur around the portion of the obstacle nail through-hole 1110a where the obstacle nail helical portion 1201c engages (inside the panel plate 1110).

In addition, in a game machine installed in a game arcade, an illegal act such as forcibly bending the obstacle nail 1201 is performed in order to make the winning rate of a predetermined winning hole advantageous to oneself. After cleaning the front surface of the panel plate 1110 with the door frame 3 in the open state, the store clerk moved the door frame 3 in the closing direction to close the door frame 3. 3 and the obstacle nail 1201 by mistake. Even in such a case, a large force is applied to the obstructing nail 1201, and the force passes through the obstructing nail through hole 1110a through the portion of the obstructing nail first body portion 1201b located within the obstructing nail through hole 1110a. It may be transmitted to the inner wall and crack may occur on the front side of the obstructing nail through-hole 1110a. Further, cracks may occur around the portion of the obstacle nail through-hole 1110a where the obstacle nail helical portion 1201c engages (inside the panel plate 1110).

In FIG. 454(d), A indicates a portion where the game ball YGK collides and thus a whitened portion HKB may occur. Also, FIGS. 454(e) and 455(b) show an example of a state in which the whitened portion HKB is actually generated. 454(e) and 455(b) show a state in which the force applied to the obstacle nail first body portion 1201b is transmitted to the inner wall of the obstacle nail through-hole 1110a, and a whitened portion HKB is generated on the front surface of the panel plate 1110. ing. It also shows a state in which a whitened portion HKB is generated inside the panel plate 1110 starting from a portion of the obstacle nail through-hole 1110a where the spiral-shaped portion 1201c of the obstacle nail engages. Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 455(b), the diameter L15 of the game ball YGK is 11 mm, the thickness L16 of the glass plate 192 is 3 mm, and the distance L17 between the glass plate 192 and the obstacle nail 1201 is 2 mm.

Furthermore, the longer the operating period at the amusement arcade, the higher the possibility that the panel board 1110 will have the whitened portion HKB. In addition, once the whitened portion HKB occurs, the structure of the synthetic resin around the whitened portion HKB is weakened, and the whitened portion HKB gradually expands starting from that site. A situation may also occur in which the whitened portion HKB extends outward from the center.

The shape of one whitened portion HKB generated in this manner is generally planar, and its area is approximately 1 to 2 mm square. may occur radially when viewed from the front. In addition, such a whitened portion HKB may occur in each of a plurality of obstructing nails 1201 .

Furthermore, the occurrence of such a whitened portion HKB may weaken the strength of engagement between the obstacle nail through-hole 1110a and the obstacle nail spiral portion 1201c. In this case, the repulsion mode when the game ball collides with the obstacle nail 1201 is weaker than what was assumed at the shipping stage of the pachinko machine 1 (even if the game ball hits the nail, it does not rebound much and absorbs momentum. ), and there is a possibility that the winning rate to the winning opening will change.

In addition, in a game on a game machine installed in a game shop, a situation may occur in which the obstacle nail 1201 is broken due to the operation in the game shop for a long period of time. will be replaced.

In this way, when the obstacle nail 1201 is planted in the panel plate 1110 made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, a predetermined movable accessory and a predetermined light-emitting decorative portion located behind the panel plate 1110 can be visually recognized. As a result, although the appearance is improved, the vicinity of the obstruction nail through-hole 1110a into which the obstruction nail 1201 is implanted appears white, thereby degrading the aesthetic appearance. Conventionally, there is known a game machine in which a pilot hole is provided in a transparent synthetic resin game board and a game nail is driven into the pilot hole (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-161638). However, it does not solve the problem that the engaging portion between the game nail and the game board and the pilot hole are visually turbid and the aesthetic appearance is deteriorated. On the other hand, the occurrence of the whitened portion HKB in the manufacturing stage of the pachinko machine 1 has been dealt with by methods such as mixing rubber into the material of the acrylic plate (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-104622), but the pachinko machine 1 Phenomenon such as whitening part HKB occurring when is installed in amusement arcades and being used for games for a long period of time, or whitening part HKB starting from the whitened part HKB that has occurred and gradually increasing in size. However, there was room for improvement in this regard, as it was not expected to occur. Means for solving these problems are shown below.

In the embodiment shown below, the panel plate 1110 explained with reference to FIG. is a modified embodiment. In addition, in this modified example, the region covering member 2600a is not provided.

FIG. 456 shows an embodiment in which the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 is provided with a panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b. FIG. 456(a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment. In the figure, illustration of the obstructing nail head portion 1201a is omitted. Therefore, the circles indicating the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 shown in the drawing are actually the obstacle nail 1201 constituting the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232. 1 indicates the thickness of the body portion 1201b. It can also be said that this indicates the thickness of the obstructing nail through-hole 1110a. Note that these points are the same for each drawing describing an embodiment obtained by modifying the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 456 .

FIG. 456(b) is a cross-sectional view along AA in FIG. 456(a). FIG. 456(b) schematically shows a cross section obtained by cutting the site where the life nail 1230 located on the left side in front view is implanted. This point is the same for each drawing describing an embodiment obtained by modifying the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 456 .

FIG. 456(c) is a cabinet diagram showing the structure in the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment, using an oblique projection method. The tilt angle in this cabinet view is 45 degrees. In the figure, illustration of the fine structure of the obstructing nail 1201 such as the obstructing nail head 1201a, the obstructing nail spiral shape part 1201c, the obstructing nail tip part 1201e, etc. is omitted, and the obstructing nail 1201 as a whole is shown as one cylinder. ing. In this cylinder, the solid line indicates the obstructing nail head portion 1201 a of the obstructing nail 1201 and the portion of the obstructing nail first body portion 1201 b located in front of the panel plate 1110 . In this cylinder, the portions indicated by dotted lines are the portion of the first obstacle nail body portion 1201b located inside the panel plate 1110, the obstacle nail spiral shape portion 1201c, the obstacle nail second body portion 1201d, and the obstacle nail. Tip 1201e indicates the rear end of obstructing nail through-hole 1110a. Note that these points are the same for each drawing explaining a modification obtained by changing the embodiment explained with reference to FIG. 456 .

Note that in FIG. 456(a), illustration of the whitened portion HKB is omitted. Also in FIG. 456(c), although the illustration of the whitened portion HKB is omitted, the whitened portion HKB occurs around the portion indicated by the dotted line of the obstacle nail 1201. FIG. Also, in FIGS. 456(a) to 456(c), illustration of the first starting port 2002 is omitted. Note that these points are the same for each drawing explaining a modification obtained by changing the embodiment explained with reference to FIG. 456 .

The panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b may be formed by cutting the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 to a thickness of about 1 mm. As the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b, a lens cut shape or a satin finish may be employed. The light emitted from the pachinko machine 1, the light from the lighting equipment installed in the game parlor, or the light installed in the amusement parlor from the front or rear of the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b thus formed. When the light from another gaming machine is incident, the light is irregularly reflected at the rough surface portion 1110b on the back of the panel board, and is visually recognized as whitish.

As shown in FIGS. 456(a) and 456(c), the portion of the panel plate 1110 where the obstruction nail through-hole 1110a is provided is viewed from the front or obliquely above the left with respect to the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b. In this case, it is visually recognized by the player in a state where it overlaps with the rough surface portion 1110b on the back of the panel plate.

In this way, behind the obstacle nail 1201 implanted as the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in the transparent plate portion (panel plate 1110), the bright color visible portion (panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b), it is possible to make the whitened portion HKB in the vicinity of the implantation site of the obstructing nail 1201 inconspicuous by the bright color visually recognized portion visually recognized in white.

In addition, white is visible when visible light of all wavelengths of natural light irradiated to a predetermined object is diffusely reflected almost uniformly (approximately 100 to 80%) regardless of the wavelength range of the predetermined object. It refers to the color that is supposed to be. In addition, light color means that light in a specific wavelength region of natural light irradiated to a predetermined object is partly absorbed by the predetermined object and light in the remaining wavelength region is roughly reflected diffusely. , creams, light grays, and bright yellows that are considered visible. On the other hand, black means that the surface of a given object uniformly absorbs most of the visible light of all wavelengths of the natural light irradiated to the given object, and part of the irradiated natural light (20 to several %) This refers to the color that becomes visible when diffusely reflected. In addition, dark color means that most of the wavelength range of natural light irradiated to a predetermined object is uniformly absorbed, and only a part of the irradiated light (about 20 to several percent) is diffusely reflected. However, in a specific wavelength region, it refers to a color close to black, for example, a color that can be visually recognized as a dark blue color due to the difference in light absorption. These definitions may be adopted as the definition of each color in this specification. In addition, in the embodiment described in the specification of the present application, the white portion may be light-colored, or the light-colored portion may be white. For example, instead of irradiating white light from a predetermined light emitting member, bright light may be emitted. Alternatively, the black portion may be darkened, or the dark portion may be blackened.

FIG. 456(d) is a diagram showing a modification of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 456(a). In the example shown in FIG. 456(d), a panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 is provided below the panel plate 1110, white light emitted from the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 is introduced into the panel plate 1110, and the panel The plate back rough surface portion 1110b is configured to diffusely reflect the introduced white light. In this case, the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b is in a state of being visually recognized by the player with white light. The panel board lower light emitting board 2400 may be configured to be controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 . In addition, instead of below the panel plate 1110, a light emitting part similar to the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 is provided on the side or above the panel plate 1110 instead of or in addition to the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400, The light-emitting portion provided in this way may be configured to emit light in the same manner as the panel plate lower light-emitting substrate 2400 .

With such a configuration, the amount of light emitted from the lighting equipment installed in the amusement arcade is weak, and the light from the gaming machines installed in the amusement arcade is weak (for example, when a game is played). Machines that are not turned on automatically go into power saving mode, reducing the amount of light emitted by the machine. Even in this case, the panel board back rough surface portion 1110b and the whitened portion HKB are visible together, and the whitened portion HKB in the vicinity of the implanted portion of the obstructing nail 1201 is visible. It is possible to make it inconspicuous. In this state, the whitened portion HKB itself also diffusely reflects the introduced white light and is visually recognized as white. Since a large amount of light is irregularly reflected behind the whitening portion HKB, it is possible to prevent the whitening portion HKB from being conspicuous.

Although a plurality of modified embodiments of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 456 will be described below, the technical contents shown in one embodiment may be applied to the technical contents shown in other embodiments.

Although an example in which white light is introduced from the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 toward the side of the panel plate 1110 is shown, yellow light may be introduced instead of the white light. . In this case, the panel board back rough surface portion 1110b is in a state of being visually recognized in yellow by the player due to the introduced light. In addition, the whitened portion HKB is also visible in yellow due to the introduced light. By the way, as described above, the obstructing nail 1201 is made of brass and has a yellowish metallic luster. Therefore, the color of the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b and the whitened portion HKB and the color of the obstructing nail 1201 are visually similar to each other, and the existence of the whitened portion HKB can be made inconspicuous. In the pachinko machine 1, since the obstruction nail 1201 has been used for several decades, the portion of the obstruction nail 1201 located in front of the front surface of the panel plate 1110 (the obstruction nail head 1201a and the obstruction nail No. 1201a). This is because the player rarely feels uncomfortable with the color and shape of the part of the body part 1201b that is not embedded in the panel plate 1110).

Although the obstruction nail 1201 is shown to be made of brass, other metal obstruction nails 1201 may be configured to be implanted in the panel plate 1110 . For example, a stainless steel obstacle nail 1201 with a grayish-white metallic luster or a pure copper obstacle nail 1201 with a reddish metallic luster may be planted in the panel plate 1110 .

When the stainless steel obstacle nail 1201 is adopted, the color of the light introduced from the panel board lower light emitting substrate 2400 should be white. In this case as well, the color of the whitened portion HKB and the rough surface portion 1110b on the back of the panel board and the color of the obstructing nail 1201 are visually similar to each other, so that the presence of the whitened portion HKB can be made inconspicuous. .

Similarly, when the pure copper obstacle nail 1201 is adopted, the color of the light introduced from the panel board lower light emitting substrate 2400 should be red or orange. In this case as well, the color of the whitened portion HKB and the rough surface portion 1110b on the back of the panel board and the color of the obstructing nail 1201 are visually similar to each other, so that the presence of the whitened portion HKB can be made inconspicuous. . In addition, in the obstruction nail 1201 made of pure copper, the color of the light introduced from the panel board lower light emitting substrate 2400 may be white.

In this way, the color of the metal that constitutes the obstacle nail 1201 and the color of the metal that constitutes the obstacle nail 1201 are obtained from the light emitting means (the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400) for the transparent plate portion (panel plate 1110). By introducing a similar color and irradiating the irregular reflection portion (panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b) and the whitening portion HKB located behind the obstacle nail 1201, the irregular reflection portion (panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b) and whitening Since the portion HKB and the obstructing nail 1201 are visually recognized in similar colors, the presence of the whitened portion HKB can be made inconspicuous.

456(a) to 456(d), the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 are all made of the same metal. In this embodiment, a metal having a metallic luster color is used, and the light emitted from the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 is configured so that the color changes from a predetermined one color at a predetermined timing.

Specifically, in FIGS. 456(b) and 456(c), a stainless steel obstacle nail 1201 is used as the left guide nail 1232, a pure copper obstacle nail 1201 is used as the jump nail 1231, and a brass nail is used as the life nail 1230. 1201 are adopted. In addition, the color of the light introduced from the panel board lower light emitting substrate 2400 to the panel board 1110 changes from the off state to white, green, red, and yellow in this order at a predetermined timing.

In this case, the light that is introduced from the panel board lower light-emitting substrate 2400 to the panel board 1110 and irradiated onto the obstacle nail 1201 by the irregular reflection of the panel board back rough surface portion 1110b causes the obstacle nail 1201 to be visually recognized under the ambient light in the amusement arcade. The amount of light is such that the change in the visually recognized hue of the obstructing nail 1201 becomes a slight difference compared to the color of the obstacle nail 1201 . For example, even if the light introduced from the panel board lower light-emitting substrate 2400 is red, the obstacle nail 1201 is yellow even if the obstacle nail 1201 is visually recognized as yellowish metallic luster under the ambient light in the amusement arcade. It is visually recognized as a tasteful metallic luster.

With such a configuration, the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 introduces white light to the side lower surface of the panel plate 1110 by turning on the white light from the unlit state to the light emitting state. In this case, the panel board back rough surface portion 1110b diffusely reflects the introduced light, so that it is visually recognized as white. In addition, the whitened portion HKB is also visually recognized as white by the introduced light. As described above, the left guiding nail 1232 employs the stainless steel obstructing nail 1201, so that the white light introduced from the panel board lower light emitting substrate 2400 to the panel board 1110 and the panel board back rough surface portion 1110b are separated. It reflects diffusely reflected white light and is visually recognized as grayish white metallic luster similar to the color of the panel plate 1110 and the whitened portion HKB. Therefore, the presence of the left guide nail 1232 and the whitened portion HKB can be made inconspicuous.

On the other hand, the jump nail 1231 is visible with a reddish metallic luster due to the use of the pure copper obstacle nail 1201 . Also, the life nail 1230 is visually recognized with a yellowish metallic luster because the brass obstacle nail 1201 is used. These jump nails 1231 and life nails 1230 are caused by the light introduced into the panel board 1110 from the panel board lower light-emitting substrate 2400 and the light diffusely reflected by the panel board back rough surface portion 1110b, respectively. Then, it becomes possible for the player to visually recognize the obstacle nail 1201 in a conspicuous state as an obstacle nail 1201 with a metallic luster tinged with yellow. Therefore, the presence of the whitened portion HKB can be made relatively inconspicuous.

After a predetermined time has passed, the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 changes its light emission state from white to green, thereby introducing green light to the side lower surface of the panel plate 1110 . In this case, the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b diffusely reflects the introduced light, so that it is visually recognized as green. Also, the whitened portion HKB is also visually recognized in green by the introduced light. As described above, the left guide nail 1232 employs the stainless steel obstruction nail 1201, so that the green light introduced from the panel board lower light emitting substrate 2400 to the panel board 1110 and the panel board back rough surface portion 1110b are separated. It reflects the diffusely reflected green light and is visually recognized as a greenish metallic luster similar to the color of the panel plate 1110 and the whitened portion HKB. Therefore, the presence of the left guide nail 1232 and the whitened portion HKB can be made inconspicuous.

On the other hand, the jump nail 1231 is visible with a reddish metallic luster due to the use of the pure copper obstacle nail 1201 . Also, the life nail 1230 is visually recognized with a yellowish metallic luster because the brass obstacle nail 1201 is used. These jump nails 1231 and life nails 1230 are caused by the light introduced into the panel board 1110 from the panel board lower light-emitting substrate 2400 and the light diffusely reflected by the panel board back rough surface portion 1110b, respectively. Then, it becomes possible for the player to visually recognize the obstacle nail 1201 in a conspicuous state as an obstacle nail 1201 with a metallic luster tinged with yellow. In particular, the jump nail 1231 is visually recognized with a reddish metallic luster, which is a complementary color to the rough surface portion 1110b on the back of the panel plate located on the periphery when viewed from the front, which is visually recognized in green. state. Therefore, the presence of the whitened portion HKB can be made relatively inconspicuous.

After a predetermined time has passed, the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 changes its light emission state from green to red, thereby introducing red light to the side lower surface of the panel plate 1110 . In this case, the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b diffusely reflects the introduced light, so that it is visually recognized as red. In addition, the whitened portion HKB is also visible in red due to the introduced light. As described above, the left guiding nail 1232 employs the stainless steel obstructing nail 1201, so that the red light introduced from the panel board lower light emitting substrate 2400 to the panel board 1110 and the panel board back rough surface portion 1110b are separated. It reflects diffusely reflected red light and is visually recognized with a reddish metallic luster. In addition, the jump nail 1231 adopts the obstacle nail 1201 made of pure copper, so that the light introduced from the panel board lower light emitting substrate 2400 to the panel board 1110 and the light irregularly reflected by the panel board back rough surface portion 1110b are separated. Reflected, it is visually recognized with a reddish metallic luster similar in color to the panel plate 1110 , the whitened portion HKB and the left guide nail 1232 . Therefore, the existence of the left guide nail 1232, the jump nail 1231, and the whitened portion HKB can be made inconspicuous.

On the other hand, the life nail 1230 is visible with a yellowish metallic luster due to the use of the brass obstacle nail 1201 . Light introduced to the panel plate 1110 from the panel plate lower light-emitting substrate 2400 and light diffusely reflected by the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b are visible to the player as an obstacle nail 1201 with yellowish metallic luster in a conspicuous state. It is possible to Therefore, the presence of the whitened portion HKB can be made relatively inconspicuous.

After a predetermined time has passed, the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 changes its light emission state from red to yellow, thereby introducing yellow light to the side lower surface of the panel plate 1110 . In this case, the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b diffusely reflects the introduced light, so that it is visually recognized as yellow. In addition, the whitened portion HKB is also visible in yellow due to the introduced light. As described above, the left guide nail 1232 employs the stainless steel obstruction nail 1201, so that the yellow light introduced from the panel board lower light emitting substrate 2400 to the panel board 1110 and the panel board back rough surface portion 1110b are separated. It reflects diffusely reflected yellow light and is visually recognized with a yellowish metallic luster. In addition, the life nail 1230 adopts the brass obstacle nail 1201, so that the light introduced into the panel board 1110 from the panel board lower light emitting substrate 2400 and the light irregularly reflected by the panel board back rough surface part 1110b are separated. It is reflected and visually recognized with a yellowish metallic luster similar in color to the panel plate 1110 , the whitened portion HKB and the left guide nail 1232 . Therefore, the presence of the left guide nail 1232, the life nail 1230, and the whitened portion HKB can be made inconspicuous.

On the other hand, the jump nail 1231 is visible with a reddish metallic luster due to the use of the pure copper obstacle nail 1201 . The light introduced into the panel plate 1110 from the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 and the light irregularly reflected by the panel plate back rough surface part 1110b are made visible by the player as an obstacle nail 1201 with a reddish metallic luster in a conspicuous state. becomes possible. Therefore, the presence of the whitened portion HKB can be made relatively inconspicuous.

In this way, a predetermined light that is switched to a different color at a predetermined timing is introduced from the light emitting means (panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400) to the transparent plate portion (panel plate 1110), and is emitted behind the obstructing nail 1201. By irradiating the diffused reflection portion (panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b) and the whitened portion HKB located there, the diffused reflection portion (panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b) and the whitened portion HKB can be visually recognized in a color similar to the color of the predetermined switched light. It will continue.

In addition, by configuring the plurality of obstacle nails 1201 with metals of a plurality of colors, light of a predetermined color is introduced into the transparent plate portion (panel plate 1110) at a predetermined timing. The obstacle nail 1201 of the first predetermined color is visually recognized by the player as a similar color to the predetermined color of light and is inconspicuous, and the obstacle nail 1201 of the second predetermined color is conspicuous as a different color to the predetermined color of light. The state is visually recognized by the player.

Further, the predetermined light introduced into the transparent plate portion (panel plate 1110) at a predetermined timing becomes different predetermined light, and the color of the light irradiated to the obstructing nail 1201 changes, thereby changing the color of the light to the first predetermined color. The second obstacle nail 1201 is conspicuous as a different color for different predetermined light colors, and the second predetermined color obstacle nail 1201 is inconspicuous as a similar color for different predetermined light colors. is visually recognized by the player.

In this way, by changing the color of the light irradiated to the irregular reflection portion (the rough surface portion 1110b on the back of the panel plate) located behind the obstacle nail 1201, the obstacle nail 1201 is switched between a conspicuous state and an inconspicuous state. Since the obstacle nail 1201 is visually recognized by the player, it is possible to change the visual recognition mode of the player with respect to the obstacle nail 1201 .

In this way, as the color of the predetermined light introduced to the transparent plate portion (panel plate 1110) changes, the light is visually recognized by the player in a conspicuous state due to the color different from the predetermined color. Since the obstacle nail 1201 to be displayed changes fluidly, the player can obtain a visual interest of following the obstacle nail 1201 that is made conspicuous with his/her eyes, and along with this, the player's attention is diverted. Thus, the presence of the whitened portion HKB can be made relatively inconspicuous.

An example has been shown in which the whitened portion HKB and the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b are visually recognized in a predetermined color by light of a predetermined color introduced from the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 to the panel plate 1110, but the panel plate It is preferable that the lower light emitting substrate 2400 is configured to emit light of a predetermined color so as to maintain the lighting state from when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on until the power is turned off.

By adopting such a configuration, the diffused reflection portion (panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b) and the whitened portion HKB, or the diffused reflection portion (panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b) and the whitened portion HKB, and the obstructing nail 1201 have the same color. , the presence of the whitened portion HKB can be made inconspicuous.

An example is shown in which the panel lower light emitting substrate 2400 is kept lit in a predetermined color while the pachinko machine 1 is powered on. It may be configured as For example, at a predetermined timing while the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the panel board lower light emitting substrate 2400 may be changed from lighting in a predetermined color to blinking in a predetermined color. Alternatively, the light intensity may be increased or decreased while the panel board lower light emitting substrate 2400 is lit in a predetermined color. With such a configuration, it is possible to use the light introduced from the panel board lower light-emitting substrate 2400 for decoration and indication of the game state. In addition, when the player starts the game and the main control board 1310 detects that the game ball has won the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, and the second starting opening 2004, the first starting opening 2002, the special lottery result drawn by winning the game ball in the second starting port 2004 is a big hit, and the time when the big winning game state in which the big winning port 2005 opens and closes a predetermined number of times is started may be the predetermined timing. . In addition, it is preferable to return to the original light emission state at the timing when the player ends the game or the timing when the jackpot game state ends. Alternatively, the special lottery result may be configured to indicate the degree of expectation for a big win by such a change in light emission mode.

In this way, by changing the light emitting mode of the light introduced from the light emitting means (panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400) to the transparent plate portion (panel plate 1110) to a different light emitting mode according to the game state, The light introduced into the transparent plate portion can be used as light for decorating the irregular reflection portion (rough surface portion 1110b on the back of the panel plate) and the whitening portion HKB, while making the presence of the whitening portion HKB inconspicuous. .

As the color of the light introduced into the panel plate 1110, light of a predetermined color other than white or a color similar in color tone to the obstructing nail 1201 may be employed. For example, any one of blue, green, and red light may be selectively introduced into the obstructing peg 1201 made of brass. Alternatively, any one of blue, green, and gold light may be selected and introduced into the obstacle nail 1201 made of pure copper. In these cases, although the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b and the whitened portion HKB are visually recognized by the color of the introduced light, the color of the light visually recognized in the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b and the whitened portion HKB and the color of the obstructing nail 1201 Since the colors are not the same, the effect of making the existence of the whitened portion HKB inconspicuous is limited. On the other hand, since it is possible to introduce a plurality of different colors to the panel plate 1110, it is possible to increase decorative diversity.

On the other hand, blue, green, red, and gold lights may be introduced into the obstacle nail 1201 made of stainless steel. In this case, the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b and the whitened portion HKB are visually recognized by the color of the introduced light. , the color of the light visually recognized in the whitened portion HKB and the color of the obstructing nail 1201 are visually recognized in the same color. can be introduced, it is possible to increase decorative diversity.

Light of one color among a plurality of colors of light is introduced to the panel plate 1110 from the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400, and a special lottery is drawn according to the color of the light introduced to the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b and the whitened portion HKB. It may also be configured to execute a lighting effect suggesting the degree of expectation that the result of the above will be a big win. It is preferable that this light emitting effect is started at a timing before the result of the special lottery is indicated to the player by stopping the variation of the decorative symbols.

For example, when the brass obstacle nail 1201 is adopted, as the light introduced from the panel board lower light emitting substrate 2400 to the panel board 1110, as the first expected color indicating that the expectation of a big hit is low (for example, 10%) Blue light is used as the second expected color with a medium expectation of a big hit (eg 30%), and green light is used as the third expected color indicating a high expectation of a big hit (eg 70%) Gold light is used. It may be configured to

In addition, when the pure copper obstacle nail 1201 is adopted, the light introduced from the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 from the panel plate 1110 is blue as the first expected color indicating that the probability of a big hit is low (for example, 10%). For the light, green light is used as the second expected color indicating a medium level of expectation for a big hit (for example, 30%), and red light is used as a third expected color for indicating a high degree of expectation for a big hit (for example, 70%). can be configured to

In addition, when the stainless steel obstacle nail 1201 is adopted, as the light introduced from the panel board lower light emitting substrate 2400 to the panel board 1110, the first expected color indicating that the expectation of a big hit is low (for example, 10%) Adopt blue light as the second expected color with medium expectation of big hit (eg 30%) and white light as the third expected color indicating high expectation of big hit (eg 70%). It may be configured to

In this way, when the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b and the whitened portion HKB are visually recognized in a predetermined color based on the result of the special lottery, the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 is displayed in a light emitting color with a relatively low probability of a big hit. When the panel lower light emitting substrate 2400 is caused to emit light in an emission color with a relatively high probability of winning a big hit, the color of the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b and the whitened portion HKB and the color of the obstacle nail 1201 are used. and are visually recognized in similar colors.

In this way, when the light emitting means (panel board lower light emitting board 2400) emits light in a color expected to be a big hit, the color of the obstacle nail 1201 and the irregular reflection part (the panel board back rough surface part 1110b) are used. ) and the color of the whitened portion HKB are visually recognized in a similar color, the whitened portion HKB can be made inconspicuous. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player notices it and puts a damper on the player's interest, which has been heightened by the high-expectation lighting performance.

In addition, the panel board lower light emitting substrate 2400 is normally turned off, and at the timing indicating the degree of expectation of a big hit (for example, the timing of occurrence of the ready-to-win state), any one of the first expected color to the third expected color is selected. light of any one of the first to third expected colors may be introduced to the panel plate 1110 by emitting light for a predetermined time (for example, two seconds).

The color of the light emitted by the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 may be changed from the first expected color to the second expected color at the timing before the special lottery result is suggested by the stoppage of the decorative pattern. . Alternatively, after changing from the first expected color to the second expected color, the color may be further changed to the third expected color. Alternatively, the first expected color may be changed to the third expected color, or the second expected color may be changed to the third expected color. Moreover, it is preferable that such a change in the expected color actually increases the degree of expectation that the special lottery result will be a big win.

It is preferable that the light emitting effects of the first expected color to the third expected color are executed until the variable display of the decorative pattern indicating the result of the special lottery is completed. Specifically, when the result of the special lottery is a loss, until the variable display of the decorative pattern indicating the result of the special lottery is stopped, or the variable display corresponding to the next special lottery result. Until is started, it may be configured to continue the light emission effect. On the other hand, when the result of the special lottery is a big win, the light-emitting performance is continued even at the timing when the variable display indicating that the result of the special lottery is a big win of the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, and the big win game state is established. It may be configured to continue the light emitting effect even after is started. In this case, the start of a predetermined round during the big win game state and the end of the big win game state may be set as the timing for ending the light emitting effect.

When the result of the special lottery is a big win, the fact that the result of the special lottery is a big win is indicated to the player (for example, a special character is displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, At a timing such as when a special sound effect is output, the light emission state of the first expected color or the second expected color may be changed to the light emission state of the third expected color. In this case, the start of a predetermined round during the big win game state and the end of the big win game state may be set as the timing for ending the light emitting effect.

In this way, at the timing when it is determined that the state is advantageous to the player (jackpot game state), the light emitting effect of the third expected color is executed, and even during the state that is advantageous to the player (jackpot game state). By executing the light emission performance with the third expected color, the whitening part HKB is made less conspicuous and the player hardly notices its existence, thereby generating a state advantageous to the player (big win game state). It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation that puts a damper on the player's heightened interest at the timing when the fact is confirmed or during the occurrence of a state advantageous to the player (jackpot game state).

The state of the panel board lower light emitting board 2400 can be changed from the light-emitting state to the light-emitting state or from the light-emitting state to the light-emitting state in response to the operation of the operation button 410 by the player or the game store clerk. You may Alternatively, the intensity of the light emitted from the panel lower light emitting substrate 2400 may be set in a plurality of levels, and the light emitted from the panel lower light emitting substrate 2400 may be adjusted according to the operation of the operation button 410 by the player or the store clerk. The strength may be configured to be changeable. Alternatively, a plurality of colors of light emitted from the panel lower light emitting substrate 2400 may be provided, and the color of the light emitted from the panel lower light emitting substrate 2400 may be changed according to the operation of the operation button 410 by the player or the store clerk. It may be configured to be changeable. Yellow, white, red, or the like may be adopted as the luminescent color that can be selected at this time. Moreover, you may combine these. With such a configuration, it is possible to irradiate the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b and the whitened portion HKB with an appropriate color and an appropriate amount of light that makes the whitened portion HKB inconspicuous.

This is because the amount of light from the lighting equipment installed inside the amusement parlor and the amount of light from other gaming machines installed inside the amusement parlor (especially the gaming machines installed back-to-back with respect to the pachinko machine 1). This is because the amount of light is not always sufficient to illuminate the rough surface portion 1110b on the back of the panel plate and the whitened portion HKB. For example, when the amount of light from lighting equipment or other game machines is sufficient, and the light from a plurality of light sources is mixed to illuminate the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b and the whitened portion HKB. If so, it is possible to make the whitened portion HKB inconspicuous even when the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 is in the off state. Also, it is possible to suppress the power consumption of the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加

On the other hand, the color of the light from the lighting equipment installed inside the amusement parlor, and the light from other gaming machines installed inside the amusement parlor (particularly, the gaming machines installed back-to-back with respect to the pachinko machine 1) is not necessarily a color close to white. For example, a phenomenon may occur in which the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b and the whitened portion HKB are illuminated by blue or green ambient light. In this case, by operating the operation button 410 so as to cause the panel board lower light emitting substrate 2400 to emit light in a color similar to the color of the metal that constitutes the obstacle nail 1201, the panel board back rough surface portion 1110b and the whitened portion are illuminated. It is possible to visually recognize the HKB and the obstructing nail 1201 in similar colors. For example, yellow light is emitted when brass obstacle nails 1201 are used, and red or orange light is emitted when pure copper obstacle nails 1201 are used. do it. By adjusting the amount of light emitted by the panel board lower light emitting substrate 2400 to such an extent that the color of the light from the lighting equipment and other game machines is not noticeable, the consumption of the pachinko machine 1 is reduced while making the whitened portion HKB inconspicuous. Electric power can be saved.

It should be noted that such changes in the light emitting state, light emitting color, and light intensity may be configured to be executable while the player is playing the game. For example, by operating the operation button 410, it is possible to change the lighting state, the lighting color, and the amount of light while the decorative symbols are changing or during the jackpot game state. Also, although the operation button 410 is an operation button for presentation, a dedicated button for changing the color or amount of light may be provided on the front surface of the plate unit 320 . Further, it is preferable to configure the button so that it can be operated without opening the door frame 3. - 特許庁

In this way, it is possible to adjust the color and amount of light emitted from the light emitting means (lower panel light emitting substrate 2400) by operating the operating means (operation button 410, etc.) that can be operated by the store clerk. Thus, the light emission state of the diffused reflection portion (the rough surface portion 1110b on the rear surface of the panel plate) can be made into a light emission state in which the whitened portion HKB is inconspicuous.

While the panel plate lower light emitting board 2400 emits light in a predetermined color during the variation of the decorative pattern, etc., the light emitting effect is performed as an example, but such light emitting effect can be executed during the jackpot game state. good too. For example, at a predetermined timing during the jackpot game, the light emission effect may be started, and at a predetermined timing during the jackpot game, the light emission effect may be terminated. In the light emitting effect, for example, it is preferable to suggest the degree of expectation regarding the game state that occurs after the end of the big win game state (for example, the degree of expectation that the probability change state will occur after the big win game state).

In this way, the light emitting means (panel By causing the lower light emitting substrate 2400) to emit light, it is possible to make the whitening portion HKB inconspicuous. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the heightened interest of the player due to the execution of the light emission performance with the degree of expectation is spoiled.

By providing the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b behind the obstacle nail 1201 or by introducing light of a predetermined color from the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 to the panel plate 1110, the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b can be visually recognized in a predetermined color. However, there is a problem that the front surface of the obstructing nail head 1201a (a portion forming a hemispherical spherical surface) is visually recognized as it is in the color of the metal that constitutes the obstructing nail head 1201a. In particular, when the amount of light from the lighting equipment installed in the arcade or from other game machines is weak, the back of the obstructing nail 1201 is visually recognized in a bright color, so that only the front of the obstructing nail head 1201a is visible. There is a risk that the player will feel a sense of incongruity because it will be visually recognized in a darker color than in a bright color and become conspicuous.

An embodiment in which the front surface of the obstructing nail head portion 1201a is made inconspicuous by irradiating the front surface of the obstructing nail head portion 1201a with light from the side, above, below, or in front will be described below.

The door-frame right-side unit 550 shown in FIG. 6 and the like may be placed in a light-emitting state so that the light emitted from the door-frame right-side unit 550 illuminates the front surface of the obstructing nail head 1201a. When the panel board lower light emitting board 2400 is in the off state, the panel board back rough surface portion 1110b is visible in a bright color. On the other hand, when the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 is in a light emitting state, the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b is visible in the color of the emitted light. should be the same color as the light emitted from the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b. When the panel board lower light emitting board 2400 is in the light emitting state, the door frame right side unit 550 is set in the light emitting state. should be In this way, by matching the emission color and timing of the emitted light between the panel lower light emitting substrate 2400 and the door frame right side unit 550, it is possible to make the front surface of the obstructing nail head 1201a inconspicuous. .

In this way, an irradiation means (door frame right side unit 550, etc.) capable of irradiating the obstacle nail 1201 with light from the front is provided, and white or bright light emitted from the light emitting means (panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400) is provided. In a state where the irregularly reflecting portion (rough surface portion 1110b on the rear surface of the panel board) reflects light irregularly, the irradiating means irradiates the obstructing nail 1201 with white or bright light from the front, thereby making the obstructing nail head 1201a conspicuous. can be made difficult.

By the way, when the door frame right side unit 550 is in a light-emitting state, only the right side of the front surface of the obstructing nail head 1201a is irradiated with light when viewed from the front, and the left side of the front surface of the obstructing nail head 1201a is: It is still visible in a dark color and stands out. Therefore, the door frame left side unit 530 of the door frame 3 may be configured to be symmetrical with the door frame right side unit 550 and controlled to be in the same light emitting state as the door frame right side unit 550 . With such a configuration, it is possible to irradiate the entire front surface of the obstructing nail head portion 1201a with light, thereby making the front surface of the obstructing nail head portion 1201a more inconspicuous. It is desirable that the door-frame left-side unit 530 and the door-frame right-side unit 550 have the same emission color and timing of emitted light.

In this way, a plurality of irradiating means (door frame right side unit 550, door frame left side unit 530, etc.) capable of irradiating light from the front onto the obstructing nail 1201 are provided, and light emitting means (panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400) are provided. In a state in which the irregularly reflecting portion (rough surface portion 1110b on the back of the panel plate) reflects light irregularly due to the light from the above, the plurality of irradiating means irradiate the obstacle nail 1201 with light from different angles in front of the obstacle nail 1201, thereby removing the obstacle nail head. The portion 1201a can be made inconspicuous.

Although an embodiment has been described in which the door frame right side unit 550 is in a light emitting state, the obstructing nail head 1201a can be illuminated by light from another member capable of emitting light instead of or in addition to the door frame right side unit 550. may be configured to irradiate the front surface of the . In these other members as well, it is preferable to match the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 with the emission color and emission timing of the emitted light.

Further, when light is emitted from the door frame right side unit 550 toward the front surface of the obstructing nail head 1201a, the panel board lower light emitting substrate 2400 may remain in the off state instead of the light emitting state. This is because when the obstructing nail head portion 1201a is irradiated with light from the front, the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b and the whitened portion HKB are also irradiated with the light at the same time. In this case, it is preferable to irradiate the obstructing nail head portion 1201a with white light from the front, or irradiate the obstructing nail head 1201a with light of the same color as the metal color of the obstructing nail 1201a. In addition, when the front surface of the obstructing nail head portion 1201a is irradiated with light not only from the door frame right side unit 550 but also from other members capable of emitting light, the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 can be used in the same manner. may remain in the off state instead of being in the light emitting state.

In this way, an irradiating means (door frame right side unit 550, etc.) capable of irradiating light from the front to the obstacle nail 1201 is provided, and when the light emitting means (panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400) is turned off, the irradiating means By irradiating the nail 1201 with white or bright light from the front, the white or bright light from the irradiating means is also radiated to the irregular reflection part (the panel board back rough surface part 1110b), and the irregular reflection part emits the light. Even in the case where the light is diffusely reflected, it is possible to make the obstructing nail head portion 1201a inconspicuous.

In addition, a light emitting part capable of emitting light downward is provided on the lower surface of the door frame top unit 570 described with reference to FIG. may By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to irradiate light above the front surface of the obstructing nail head portion 1201a, and it is possible to make the front surface of the obstructing nail head portion 1201a inconspicuous. In addition, the light emitted from the frame top lens decoration substrate 437 of the effect operation unit 400 described with reference to FIGS. It may be configured to irradiate light toward the obstructing nail head portion 1201 a through the frame top lens 418 . It should be noted that the frame top lens 418 is preferably made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to irradiate the lower front surface of the obstructing nail head portion 1201a with light, thereby making it possible to make the front surface of the obstructing nail head portion 1201a inconspicuous. It is desirable that the door frame top unit 570 and the frame top lens decoration substrate 437 of the production operation unit 400 match the emission color and emission timing of the emitted light.

In this way, an irradiation means (such as the door frame right side unit 550) capable of irradiating the obstructing nail 1201 with light from the front is provided above or below the obstructing nail 1201, so that the obstructing nail 1201 can be illuminated from the front. Even when configured to irradiate light, the obstructing nail head portion 1201a can be made inconspicuous.

24 and 37, the door frame top unit 570 and effect operation unit 400 described with reference to FIG. A similar configuration may be employed in a modified embodiment of the embodiment described with reference to illuminate the front surface of the obstructing nail head portion 1201a. In the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 282, the operation button 410 is made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and a light emitting means is provided in the operation button 410 so that the front surface of the obstructing nail head 1201a is illuminated. It may be configured to irradiate.

A configuration may be adopted in which light is emitted from the movable frame body provided in the door frame top unit 570 to the front surface of the obstructing nail head portion 1201a. For example, the rear surface of the printed circuit board that constitutes the right ear inner frame movable body light emitting portion 7330 of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 described with reference to FIGS. Light emitting diodes are mounted on the rear surface of the printed circuit board that constitutes the left ear inner frame movable body light emitting portion 7430 of the body 7400, and the rear surface of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body The rear surface of the body 7400 is made of a colorless transparent or milky white synthetic resin, and the light from the light emitting diode mounted on the printed circuit board constituting the right ear inner frame movable body light emitting part 7330 and the left ear inner frame movable body. The light from the light emitting diode mounted on the rear surface of the printed circuit board that constitutes the left ear inner frame movable body light emitting portion 7430 of the body 7400 may illuminate the front surface of the obstructing nail head 1201a. . In addition, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 described with reference to FIG. It can be made to emit light.

In this way, movable bodies (right ear outer frame movable body 7350, left ear outer frame movable body 7350, left ear outer frame movable body 7450, right ear inner frame movable body 7300, left ear inner frame movable body 7400, etc.) and operable operation means (operation button 410, etc.) are employed to irradiate obstacle nail 1201 with light from the front. Even when configured, the obstructing nail head portion 1201a can be made inconspicuous.

Also, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 described with reference to FIGS. The light from the right light emitting portion 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left light emitting portion 7052 in the door frame top unit provided in the door frame top unit 570 so as to irradiate the front surface of the obstructing nail head 1201a. It may be configured as

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 309(B) and 309(E), the right ear inner frame movable body first surface 7310, the right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360, and the left ear inner frame movable body first surface 7410, after the first surface 7460 of the left ear outer frame movable body is stopped facing the front (third state), the right light emitting portion 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left light emitting portion 7052 in the door frame top unit are turned on. It should be illuminated. Of the lights emitted from the right light emitting portion 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left light emitting portion 7052 in the door frame top unit, the first surface 7310 of the right ear inner frame movable body, the first surface 7360 of the right ear outer frame movable body, the left Part of the light that has not been irradiated to either the inner ear frame movable body first surface 7410 or the left ear outer frame movable body first surface 7460 is irradiated to the lower part of the game area 5a.

With such a configuration, the right ear inner frame movable body first surface 7310, the right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360, and the left ear inner frame in a state (third state) stopped facing the front. The movable body first surface 7410 and the left ear outer frame movable body first surface 7460 can be decorated by irradiating light, and the front surface of the obstructing nail head 1201a planted in the lower part of the game area 5a. It is possible to irradiate light upward from the left and right directions, and it is possible to make the front surface of the obstructing nail head 1201a inconspicuous without providing a new light source.

In addition, when the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 is turned off, the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b is visible in a bright color. The color of light emitted from the light emitting portion 7052 is preferably white. On the other hand, when the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 is in a light emitting state, the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b is visible in the color of the emitted light. The color of the light emitted from the left light emitting portion 7052 in the top unit may be the same color as the color of the light emitted from the rough surface portion 1110b on the rear surface of the panel plate.

In this way, by matching the emission color and emission timing of the emitted light in the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400, the right light emitting portion 7050 in the door frame top unit, and the left light emitting portion 7052 in the door frame top unit, the obstacle nail head can be detected. It is possible to make the front surface of the portion 1201a less conspicuous.

309(A), 309(C), and 309(D) from the standby position (first state) to the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, and the left ear The inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are rotated 10 degrees clockwise when viewed from the right side and stopped, and then the right light emitting part 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left light emitting part in the door frame top unit are turned. The portion 7052 may emit light. Most of the light emitted downward from the door frame top unit 570 of the light emitted from the right light emitting portion 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left light emitting portion 7052 in the door frame top unit is The entire play area 5a is irradiated without being blocked by the body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450.

By adopting such a configuration, it becomes possible to irradiate the upper front surface of the obstacle nail head 1201a planted in the entire game area 5a with light from the left and right directions, without providing a new light source. It is possible to make the front surface of the portion 1201a inconspicuous.

In addition, when the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 is turned off, the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b is visible in a bright color. The color of light emitted from the light emitting portion 7052 is preferably white. On the other hand, when the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 is in a light emitting state, the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b is visible in the color of the emitted light. The color of the light emitted from the left light emitting portion 7052 in the top unit may be the same color as the color of the light emitted from the rough surface portion 1110b on the rear surface of the panel plate.

In this way, by matching the emission color and emission timing of the emitted light in the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400, the right light emitting portion 7050 in the door frame top unit, and the left light emitting portion 7052 in the door frame top unit, the obstacle nail head can be detected. It is possible to make the front surface of the portion 1201a less conspicuous.

In addition, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 are set to the standby position (first state) shown in FIGS. After the ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are stopped facing the front shown in FIGS. The right light emitting portion 7050 and the left light emitting portion 7052 in the door frame top unit may be caused to emit light.

Of the light emitted from the right side light emitting portion 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left side light emitting portion 7052 in the door frame top unit, the first surface 7360 of the right ear outer frame movable body and the first surface 7460 of the left ear outer frame movable body A part of the light that has not been irradiated to either is irradiated to the upper part of the game area 5a and the lower part of the game area 5a.

With such a configuration, the right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360 and the left ear outer frame movable body first surface 7460 in a state (third state) stopped facing the front are irradiated with light for decoration. In addition, it is possible to irradiate light from the left and right to the upper front surface of the obstacle nail head 1201a planted in the upper part of the game area 5a and the lower part of the game area 5a, and a new light source is provided. It is possible to make the front surface of the obstructing nail head 1201a inconspicuous. In addition, in the central part in the vertical direction of the game area 5a, the light from the right side light emitting part 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left side light emitting part 7052 in the door frame top unit is emitted from the first surface 7360 of the right ear outer frame movable body, Since it is blocked by the first surface 7460 of the left ear outer frame movable body, it is hardly irradiated. As a result, the light is reflected on the surface of the front side and the back side of the glass unit 190 and the surface of the game board side effect display device 1600, and the amount of light that feels "dazzling" is incident on the eyeballs of the player. , it is possible to avoid a situation in which the player's visibility of the game board side effect display device 1600 is obstructed.

In addition, when the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 is turned off, the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b is visible in a bright color. The color of light emitted from the light emitting portion 7052 is preferably white. On the other hand, when the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 is in a light emitting state, the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b is visible in the color of the emitted light. The color of the light emitted from the left light emitting portion 7052 in the top unit may be the same color as the color of the light emitted from the rough surface portion 1110b on the rear surface of the panel plate.

In this way, by matching the emission color and emission timing of the emitted light in the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400, the right light emitting portion 7050 in the door frame top unit, and the left light emitting portion 7052 in the door frame top unit, the obstacle nail head can be detected. It is possible to make the front surface of the portion 1201a less conspicuous.

Further, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 described with reference to FIGS. 364, 365, 371, etc. may be configured to irradiate the front surface of the obstructing nail head portion 1201a with light. In this case, a light emitting diode is mounted on the rear surface of the root vegetable frame movable body light emitting portion 7810 made of a white printed circuit board, and is mounted on the rear surface of the root vegetable frame movable body light emitting portion 7810 with the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 positioned at the movement position. The front surface of the obstructing nail head 1201a may be illuminated with light from the light emitting diode. In this case, in order to protect the back surface of the root vegetable frame movable body light emitting part 7810, a cover member made of colorless transparent or milky white synthetic resin may be provided on the back surface of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800.

A light-emitting diode is not mounted on the rear surface of the root vegetable frame movable body light emitting portion 7810, and only a cover member made of colorless transparent or milky white synthetic resin is provided to protect the rear surface of the root vegetable frame movable body light emitting portion 7810. good too. In this case, the back of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 located at the movement position and the root vegetable frame movable body light emitting unit 7810 made of a white printed circuit board emit light forward from the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. The light diffusely reflected backward illuminates the front surface of the obstructing nail head 1201a. In this case, the display color used for the background image and the character image displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 may be white or a color similar to the color of the obstacle nail. Alternatively, as the background image or character image displayed in the display area of the game board-side effect display device 1600, an image that is painted so that the proportions of red, green, and blue are equally divided may be used. This is because these lights are irregularly reflected and mixed at the back surface of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 and the root vegetable frame movable body light-emitting part 7810 made of a white printed circuit board, so that the color of the light illuminating the obstructing nail 1201 becomes white. Because it becomes

In this way, irradiation means (such as the game board side effect display device 1600) capable of irradiating the obstacle nail 1201 with light from behind is provided behind the obstacle nail 1201, and light can be reflected to the obstacle nail 1201. Even when a reflecting means (root vegetable frame movable body light-emitting part 7810, etc.) is provided in front of the obstructing nail 1201 to irradiate the obstructing nail 1201 with light from the front, the obstructing nail head 1201a is made inconspicuous. be able to.

The shape of the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b represents a snowy mountain. In this way, by adopting a shape imitating the shape of an article or a geometric shape as the shape of the panel board back rough surface part 1110b, the panel board back rough surface part 1110b also functions as a part for decoration. It is possible to It should be noted that, in this specification, members and parts that have a similar shape and are white or diffusely reflect light represent snowy mountains. In addition, similar shaped members and portions with metallic luster represent glaciers. Other colors indicate plants growing in the mountains and rocks exposed as the surface of the mountains.

In this way, the obstacle nail head portion 1201a can be made inconspicuous by making the external shape of the irregular reflection portion (the rough surface portion 1110b on the back of the panel plate, etc.) into a decorative shape.

Although the method of implanting the obstruction nail 1201 into the obstruction nail through-hole 1110a provided in the panel plate 1110 has been shown, when a plurality of obstruction nails 1201 are implanted adjacently, there is a gap between the adjacent obstruction nails 1201. In the area of , both the effect of the elastic deformation of the panel plate 1110 caused by one of the implanted obstructing nails 1201 and the effect of the elastic deformation of the panel plate 1110 caused by the other implanted obstructing nail 1201 are will join. Therefore, the whitened portion HKB is likely to occur between the adjacent obstacle nails 1201 . In particular, like the left guide nail 1232, when the obstacle nails 1201 constituting the left guide nail 1232 are provided adjacently so that the game ball does not pass between them, such a whitened portion HKB is likely to occur. It should be noted that there is a high possibility that the whitened portion HKB will also occur in the right guide nail 1233 as well.

Therefore, in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 456, the entire left guide nail 1232 is configured to be located in one panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b when viewed from the front. By adopting such a configuration, even if the whitened portion HKB is generated in a portion where the whitened portion HKB is particularly likely to be generated, the generated whitened portion HKB can be made inconspicuous. Regarding the two obstacle nails 1201 planted as the life nails 1230 and the two obstacle nails 1201 planted as the jump nails 1231, the rough surface part 1110b on the back of the panel board is attached to each of the obstacle nails 1201. You may comprise so that each may be provided.

It should be noted that the panel board back rough surface portion 1110b and the game board side effect display device 1600 should preferably be configured so as not to overlap each other when viewed from the front. With such a configuration, the visibility of the game board side effect display device 1600 is not hindered. On the other hand, the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b and the game board side effect display device 1600 may overlap each other when viewed from the front. With such a configuration, at least a part of the periphery of the game board side effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized decoratively.

A configuration in which the technical matters in each embodiment described with reference to FIG. 456 are combined may be used. For example, the light emitting mode of the light emitting means in one embodiment may be adopted as the light emitting mode of the light emitting means in another embodiment. Also, the technical matters in each embodiment described with reference to FIG. 456 may be adopted in other embodiments described later. In addition, in the case of the embodiment having the panel board rear substrate 2420 instead of the panel board lower light emitting board 2400, the panel board rear board 2420 is replaced with the panel board lower light emitting board 2400. It is preferable to configure so as to emit light in the following manner.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 456, in the panel plate 1110, the boundary between the portion provided with the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b and the portion not provided with the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b consists of a combination of a plurality of straight lines. It is configured as follows. Specifically, a plurality of linear portions having a length approximately equal to the length of the obstructing nail 1201 is used to form a boundary between a portion provided with the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b and a portion not provided with the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b. It is

In this way, the boundary between the irregular reflection portion (the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b, etc.) and the rearward visible portion (the portion where the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b, etc. is not provided) where the rear can be easily visually recognized is formed by a plurality of straight lines. By constructing such that the bar-shaped obstacle nail 1201 and the boundary between the irregular reflection part and the rearward visible part are visually similar, the obstacle nail 1201 and the irregular reflection part are further integrated. It is possible to make the whitened portion HKB less conspicuous by making it visible to the player. It should be noted that at least some of the boundaries may be linear instead of all the boundaries being linear.

Also, the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b may be formed in a mesh shape. FIG. 457 shows an embodiment in which the shape of the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b described with reference to FIG. 456 is modified into a mesh shape. FIG. 457(a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment. FIG. 457(b) is a cabinet diagram showing the structure in the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment by the oblique projection method.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 457(a), among the obstacle nails 1201, the second from the right among the obstacle nails 1201 functioning as the jump nail 1231 provided on the left side and the left guide nail 1232 The obstacle nail 1201 is provided at a position that does not overlap with the rough surface portion 1110b on the back of the panel plate when viewed from the front. In addition, the two obstacle nails 1201 functioning as the life nails 1230 are provided at positions partially overlapping the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b in a front view. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 457(b), the portions of these obstructing nails 1201 implanted in the panel plate 1110 can be seen to overlap at least a part of the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b. In this way, it is possible for the player to visually recognize the obstacle nail 1201 and the rough surface portion 1110b on the back of the panel board while ensuring the visibility of the decorative member positioned behind.

Also, the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b may be formed from a plurality of decorative shapes. FIG. 458 shows an embodiment modified to form the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b described with reference to FIG. 456 from a plurality of decorative shapes. FIG. 458(a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment. FIG. 458(b) is a cabinet diagram showing the structure in the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment, using an oblique projection method.

In this embodiment, the panel board back rough surface portion 1110b has a decorative shape that imitates a shuriken. As shown in FIG. 458(a), among the obstructing nails 1201, the first obstructing nail 1201 from the right among the left guide nails 1232 and the two obstructing nails 1201 functioning as the life nail 1230 are attached to the back of the panel board. It is provided at a position that does not overlap with the rough surface portion 1110b when viewed from the front. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 458(b), the portions of these obstructing nails 1201 implanted in the panel plate 1110 can be visually recognized as overlapping at least a portion of the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b. In this way, it is possible for the player to visually recognize the obstacle nail 1201 and the rough surface portion 1110b on the back of the panel board while ensuring the visibility of the decorative member positioned behind.

Also, instead of the panel board back rough surface part 1110b, a panel board back first rough surface part 1110c and a panel board back second rough surface part 1110d having different roughnesses provided on the back surface of the panel board 1110 may be provided. FIG. 459 is modified so that a panel plate back first rough surface portion 1110c and a panel plate back second rough surface portion 1110d with different roughness are provided instead of the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b described with reference to FIG. Fig. 4 shows an embodiment; FIG. 459(a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment. FIG. 459(b) is a cabinet diagram showing the structure in the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment, using an oblique projection method.

In the present embodiment, the panel plate back first rough surface portion 1110c with relatively fine roughness is provided with second rough panel back surface portions 1110d with relatively coarse roughness above and below. The appearance of the panel board back first rough surface portion 1110c and the panel board back second rough surface portion 1110d are different. The boundary between the panel plate back first rough surface portion 1110c and the panel plate back second rough surface portion 1110d has a decorative shape that imitates a mountain range. As shown in FIG. 459(a), among the obstructing nails 1201, the first to third obstructing nails 1201 from the left among the left guide nails 1232 are positioned so as to overlap the panel plate back second rough surface portion 1110d in front view. is provided in In addition, the obstruction nail 1201 functioning as the left jump nail 1231 and the obstruction nail 1201 functioning as the left life nail 1230 are provided at positions overlapping the panel plate back first rough surface portion 1110c in a front view. .

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 459(b), the first to third hindrance nails 1201 from the left among the left guide nails 1232 are implanted in the panel board 1110 at the first rough surface portion on the back of the panel board. It can be visually recognized so that at least a part thereof overlaps with 1110c. In addition, the portion of the obstacle nail 1201 functioning as the left jumping nail 1231 and the obstacle nail 1201 functioning as the left life nail 1230 implanted in the panel plate 1110 is the panel plate back second rough surface portion 1110d. It can be visually recognized so that it overlaps with at least a part.

Instead of providing the panel board back first rough surface part 1110c and the panel board back second rough surface part 1110d according to the difference in roughness, the panel board back first rough surface part 1110c and the panel board are formed according to the difference in roughness. It may be configured to provide a plate back second rough surface portion 1110d. For example, the panel plate back first rough surface portion 1110c may be formed by satin finishing, and the panel plate back second rough surface portion 1110d may be formed by lens cutting. Even in this case, it is possible to make the panel plate back first rough surface portion 1110c and the panel plate back second rough surface portion 1110d look different.

In this way, a plurality of diffuse reflection portions (the panel plate back first rough surface portion 1110c and the panel plate back second rough surface portion 1110d) with different visual appearances are provided, and the decorative shape can be visually recognized at the boundary between the plurality of diffuse reflection portions. Even in such a case, the obstacle nail 1201 and the rough surface portion 1110b on the back of the panel board can be visually recognized by the player in an integrated manner, and the whitened portion HKB can be made inconspicuous.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 456(d), the embodiment in which the white light emitted from the panel board lower light emitting substrate 2400 is introduced into the panel board 1110 has been described. In the modified example described with reference, white light emitted from the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 may be introduced to the panel plate 1110 .

Referring to FIG. 456, an example in which panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b is provided on the back surface of panel plate 1110 is shown. A modified example in which a panel plate back metallic gloss portion 1110e is provided will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 460(a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment. FIG. 460(b) is a cross-sectional view along AA in FIG. 460(a). FIG. 460(c) is a cabinet diagram showing the structure in the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment, using an oblique projection method. 460(d) is a cross-sectional view showing a mode in which a panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 is provided below the panel plate 1110. FIG.

The panel board back metallic luster portion 1110e is preferably formed by plating the back surface of the panel board 1110 . As the panel plate back metallic luster portion 1110e, it is preferable to provide a plated layer that has a grayish white metallic luster and is visible in silver by plating processing using aluminum as a material. Alternatively, the panel plate back side metallic luster portion 1110e having a reddish metallic luster is provided by a plating process using pure copper as a material, or a yellowish metallic luster is provided by a plating process using brass as a material. , a panel plate back metallic gloss portion 1110e visually recognized in gold may be provided. As for the shape of the panel plate back metallic luster portion 1110e, it is preferable to adopt the same shape as the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b. The thickness of the plated thin film formed by the plating process is about 0.2 mm, which is exaggerated in the drawing. This point also applies to other embodiments and drawings showing other embodiments to be described later.

In this way, by providing a metallic luster portion (a metallic panel plate rear metallic luster portion 1110e also made of metal) behind the metallic obstacle nail 1201, the obstacle nail 1201 and the metallic lustrous portion are arranged to have a metallic luster. Therefore, the whitened portion HKB located between the obstacle nail 1201 and the metallic luster portion can be made inconspicuous in the front-rear relationship.

As shown in FIG. 460(d), the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 may be configured to introduce light into the panel plate 1110 and reflect the introduced light at the panel plate back metallic gloss portion 1110e. Moreover, the light emission mode and the like shown in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. With such a configuration, when the light emitted from the pachinko machine 1, the light from the lighting equipment installed in the game parlor, or the light from other game machines installed in the amusement parlor is weak. Even so, it is possible to visually recognize the panel plate back metallic gloss portion 1110e and the obstructing nail 1201 with metallic gloss, and as a result, it is possible to make the whitened portion HKB inconspicuous.

Further, the panel board back metallic glossy portion 1110e may be formed in a mesh shape. FIG. 461 shows an embodiment in which the shape of the panel plate back metallic luster portion 1110e described with reference to FIG. 460 is modified into a mesh shape. FIG. 461(a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment. FIG. 461(b) is a cabinet diagram showing the structure in the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment, using an oblique projection method.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 461(a), among the obstacle nails 1201, the second from the right among the obstacle nails 1201 functioning as the jump nail 1231 provided on the left side and the left guide nail 1232 The obstacle nail 1201 is provided at a position that does not overlap with the panel board back metallic luster portion 1110e when viewed from the front. Also, the two obstacle nails 1201 functioning as the life nails 1230 are provided at positions partially overlapping the panel plate back metallic luster portion 1110e in a front view. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 461(b), these obstacle nails 1201 can be visually recognized so that at least a part thereof overlaps with the panel board back metallic luster portion 1110e. In this way, it is possible for the player to visually recognize the obstacle nail 1201 and the panel plate back metallic luster portion 1110e in an integrated manner while ensuring the visibility of the decorative member positioned behind.

Further, the panel board back metallic luster portion 1110e may be formed from a plurality of decorative shapes. FIG. 462 shows an embodiment modified to form the panel plate back metallic gloss portion 1110e described with reference to FIG. 460 from a plurality of decorative shapes. FIG. 462(a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment. FIG. 462(b) is a cabinet diagram showing the structure in the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment, using an oblique projection method.

In this embodiment, the panel board back metallic luster portion 1110e has a decorative shape that imitates a shuriken. As shown in FIG. 462(a), among the obstructing nails 1201, the first obstructing nail 1201 from the right among the left guide nails 1232 and the two obstructing nails 1201 functioning as the life nail 1230 are attached to the back of the panel board. It is provided at a position that does not overlap with the rough surface portion 1110b when viewed from the front. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 462(b), these obstacle nails 1201 can be visually recognized so that at least a part thereof overlaps with the panel board back metallic gloss portion 1110e. In this way, it is possible for the player to visually recognize the obstructing nail 1201 and the rough surface portion 1110b on the back of the panel board while ensuring the visibility of the decorative member positioned behind, and as a result, whitening occurs. It is possible to make the portion HKB inconspicuous.

An example in which the panel plate back metallic luster portion 1110e is provided in a planar shape has been shown, but if the panel plate back metallic glossy portion 1110e mirror-reflects light, only the panel plate back metallic glossy portion 1110e stands out. , there is a possibility that the sense of unity between the panel board back metallic luster portion 1110e and the obstacle nail 1201 may be lost. This tendency becomes more conspicuous as the area of the panel plate back metallic glossy portion 1110e increases. Therefore, as in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 461, a mesh pattern may be formed in one panel plate back metallic luster portion 1110e. Alternatively, as in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 462, a plurality of panel plate back metallic luster portions 1110e may be provided to reduce the area of each panel plate back metallic luster portion 1110e. For example, an independent panel plate back metallic gloss portion 1110e may be provided for each obstacle nail 1201. FIG. Alternatively, the panel plate back metallic luster portion 1110e may be configured to diffusely reflect light more by removing a part of the panel plate back metallic lustrous portion 1110e generated by the plating process. With such a configuration, the visual sense of unity between the panel board back metallic luster portion 1110e and the obstacle nail 1201 can be improved.

Instead of the panel plate back metallic luster portion 1110e, a panel plate back first metallic glossy portion 1110f and a panel plate back second metallic glossy portion 1110g, which are visually recognized with mutually different metallic lusters, are provided on the back surface of the panel plate 1110. can be configured to FIG. 463 shows a panel board back first metallic luster part 1110f and a panel board back second metallic luster part 1110g which are visually recognized with mutually different metallic lusters instead of the panel board back metallic luster part 1110e described with reference to FIG. 10 shows an embodiment modified to provide FIG. 463(a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment. FIG. 463(b) is a cabinet diagram showing the structure in the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment, using an oblique projection method.

In this embodiment, the panel board back second metallic luster part 1110g is provided above and below the panel board back first metallic luster part 1110f. The boundary between the panel board back first metallic luster portion 1110f and the panel board back second metallic luster portion 1110g has a decorative shape resembling a mountain range.

For the first metallic luster part 1110f on the back of the panel board and the second metallic luster part 1110g on the back of the panel board, the plated part made of aluminum and visible in silver, the plated part made of pure copper and visible in reddish color, and brass It is possible to adopt an aspect in which the plated portion visually recognized in gold is appropriately combined with both the panel board back first metallic luster part 1110f and the panel board back second metallic luster part 1110g. Specifically, the first metallic luster portion 1110f on the back of the panel plate is formed of a plated portion visible in silver, and the second metallic luster portion 1110g on the back of the panel plate is a plated portion visible in reddish color or gold. It may be configured by a plated portion that Alternatively, the first metallic luster portion 1110f on the back of the panel plate is formed of a plated portion visible in gold, and the second metallic luster portion 1110g on the back of the panel plate is a plated portion visible in silver or a plated portion visible in a reddish color. It may be configured by Alternatively, the first metallic luster portion 1110f on the back of the panel plate is formed of a plated portion that is visible in a reddish color, and the second metallic luster portion 1110g on the back of the panel plate is a plated portion that is visible in silver or a plating portion that is visible in gold. It may be configured by

A combination may be employed in which the metallic luster of the back panel plate back metallic luster portion 1110e obtained by a predetermined plating process and the metallic luster of the obstacle nail 1201 have similar colors. For example, when a stainless-steel obstruction nail 1201 that is visible in silver is used as the obstruction nail 1201 , the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 may be plated to be visible in silver. Further, when a pure copper obstacle nail 1201 is employed as the obstacle nail 1201, the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 is preferably plated with a reddish metallic luster. In addition, when the obstruction nail 1201 made of brass is adopted as the obstruction nail 1201, the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 is preferably plated in gold so as to be visible. In this manner, the color of the obstacle nail 1201 and the color of the panel plate back metallic gloss portion 1110e are configured to match each other, so that the color of the obstacle nail 1201 and the panel plate back metallic gloss portion 1110e form an integral decorative portion. Since it is visually recognized by the player, the whitened portion HKB can be made less conspicuous.

Similarly, the metallic luster of one of the panel board back first metallic luster portion 1110f and the panel board back second metallic lustrous portion 1110g and the metallic luster of the obstructing nail 1201 have similar colors. A combination may be employed. For example, when a stainless steel obstacle nail that is visible in silver color is used as the obstacle nail 1201, the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 is plated so that the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 is visually visible in silver color. One of the portion 1110f and the second metallic luster portion 1110g on the back of the panel plate is formed so that it can be visually recognized with the same silvery metallic luster as the obstacle nail 1201, and the first metallic luster portion 1110f on the back of the panel and the panel. The other of the plate back second metallic luster portions 1110g may be plated so as to have a metallic luster other than silver (reddish metallic luster or gold).

In addition, when a brass obstacle nail 1201 is adopted as the obstacle nail 1201, the back surface of the panel plate 1110 is plated in gold so that the panel plate back first metallic luster portion 1110f and the panel One of the plate back second metallic luster portions 1110g is formed so as to be visually recognized with the same golden metallic luster as the obstacle nail 1201, and the panel plate back first metallic lustrous portion 1110f and the panel plate back second metallic luster are formed. It is preferable that the other of the metallic luster portions 1110g is plated so as to be visible with a metallic luster other than gold (reddish metallic luster or gold).

In this way, the metallic luster of the obstacle nail 1201, the first metallic luster portion (for example, the panel board back first metallic luster portion 1110f) and the second metallic luster portion (for example, the panel board back second metallic luster portion 1110g) ), the color of the obstacle nail 1201 and either one of the first metallic luster portion and the second metallic luster portion are integrated. The whitened portion HKB can be made less conspicuous by being visually recognized by the player as a decoration mode. In addition, since the metallic luster of the other of the first metallic lustrous portion and the second metallic lustrous portion is still visible, the other metallic lustrous portion is also the obstacle nail 1201 . The whitened portion HKB can be made more inconspicuous by visually recognizing it as a whole.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 460(d), the embodiment in which the light emitted from the panel board lower light emitting substrate 2400 is introduced into the panel board 1110 was shown, but with reference to FIGS. In the modified example described above, the light emitted from the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 may be introduced to the panel plate 1110 .

456 to 459 show an embodiment in which diffuse reflection portions (panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b, panel plate back first rough surface portion 1110c, panel plate back second rough surface portion 1110d) are provided on the rear surface of panel plate 1110. FIG. However, the diffused reflection portion in these embodiments is subjected to the plating processing described with reference to FIGS. A glossy portion 1110f and a panel board back second metallic glossy portion 1110g) may be provided. 458 and 459, in an embodiment having a plurality of diffused reflection portions, a metallic luster portion may be similarly provided for at least one diffused reflection portion. good. It should be noted that the other irregular reflection portion (rough surface portion 2410a of the panel plate rear decorative member) may also be plated in the same manner. Alternatively, another metallic luster portion may be formed by such a method to have an uneven shape.

In the case of such a configuration, the metallic glossy portion is not flat but has an uneven shape, so that ambient light and light from the light emitting means (panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400, etc.) are reflected in the metallic glossy portion. Since the obstacle nail 1201 and the metallic luster portion can be visually recognized more integrally, the whitened portion HKB can be made even less conspicuous. In addition, since both the irregular reflection portion and the metallic luster portion are provided, the irregular reflection portion and the whitened portion HKB are visually recognized as one, and the metallic luster portion and the metallic obstacle nail 1201 are visually integral. Therefore, the whitened portion HKB can be made less conspicuous.

By the way, a charged game ball may roll on the front surface of the panel plate 1110 . Such a phenomenon occurs when game balls are lifted and polished on a game machine island, which is composed of a plurality of pachinko machines, and other members (such as the polishing cloth used for polishing, the The game ball is charged with static electricity due to friction with the synthetic resin etc. constituting the flow path, and the game ball charged in this way is shot into the game area 5a. A discharge phenomenon may occur from a charged game ball toward the surroundings, but when a discharge phenomenon occurs, a high-frequency electromagnetic pulse is generated centering on the position where the discharge phenomenon occurred, and electrons located in the surroundings are generated. It may damage parts or cause electronic parts to malfunction.

In order to prevent such a problem from occurring, it is arranged behind the panel board back metallic glossy part 1110e, the panel board back first metallic glossy part 1110f, and the panel board back second metallic glossy part 1110g, and in a front view. Electronic parts and electronic elements may be arranged at overlapping positions, and these metallic luster portions may be used as shield members for protecting the electronic parts and electronic elements. For example, sensors such as the vibration detection sensor 2405, the first start sensor 4002, the second start sensor 4004, the count sensor 4005, the general winning sensor 4020, and the magnetic detection sensor 4024 are behind these metallic luster parts, and It is preferable to arrange them so that they overlap each other when viewed from the front.

In this way, an electronic component or an electronic component is provided at a position overlapping the metallic glossy portion (the panel plate back metallic glossy portion 1110e, the panel plate back first metallic glossy portion 1110f, and the panel plate back second metallic glossy portion 1110g) in a front view. By arranging at least one of the elements, it is possible to give the metallic luster portion used as decoration a function of protecting electronic parts and electronic elements.

In addition, the panel plate back metallic gloss portion 1110e, the panel plate back first metallic glossy portion 1110f, and the panel plate back second metallic glossy portion 1110g are connected to the ground of the electric circuit provided on the game board 5' by a predetermined metal cable (for example, , circuit ground of the peripheral control board 1510). When the panel plate back first metallic luster portion 1110f and the panel plate back second metallic luster portion 1110g are electrically connected, only one of them is connected to the electric circuit provided on the game board 5′. may be configured to be electrically connected to the ground of

In the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 456, the example of providing the panel board back rough surface portion 1110b by cutting the back surface of the panel board 1110 was shown. By printing a predetermined white or bright color pattern or pasting a sticker with a predetermined white or bright color pattern on it, the back of the panel plate can diffusely reflect light. It may be configured to provide a portion 1110h. As for the shape of such patterns and seals, it is preferable to employ the same shapes as the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b, the panel plate back first rough surface portion 1110c, and the panel plate back second rough surface portion 1110d.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 460, an example was shown in which the back surface of the panel plate 1110 is plated to provide the panel plate back metallic luster portion 1110e. A metallic luster portion 1110e on the rear surface of the panel plate is provided by printing a predetermined pattern that can be visually recognized with metallic luster or attaching a sticker with a predetermined pattern that can be visually recognized with metallic luster. It may be configured as

Referring to FIG. 456, an example in which panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b is provided on the back surface of panel plate 1110 is shown. A modified example in which a visual recognition portion 1110h and a panel plate rear metallic glossy portion 1110e capable of mirror-reflecting incident light are provided will be described with reference to FIG. It should be noted that the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 460 may be adopted for the panel plate back metallic luster portion 1110e.

FIG. 464(a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment. FIG. 464(b) is a cross-sectional view along AA in FIG. 464(a). FIG. 464(c) is a cabinet diagram showing the structure in the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment by the oblique projection method. FIG. 464(d) is a cross-sectional view showing a state in which a panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 is provided below the panel plate 1110. FIG.

According to such a configuration, the irregular reflection portion (panel plate back bright color visible portion 1110h) and the whitened portion HKB can be visually recognized as one, and the metallic gloss portion (panel plate back metallic gloss portion 1110e) and the metal The whitened portion HKB can be made less conspicuous because the whitened portion HKB can be visually recognized integrally with the obstacle nail 1201 made of the whitened portion.

It should be noted that the metal obstacle nail 1201 and the panel board back metallic luster portion 1110e may be configured to have similar metallic luster. For example, when a stainless steel obstacle nail 1201 is employed, it is preferable to employ a panel board back metallic luster portion 1110e that is visible in silver. Alternatively, when the obstruction nail 1201 made of brass is adopted, it is preferable to adopt the panel board back metallic gloss portion 1110e visually recognized in gold. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to visually recognize the panel board back metallic glossy portion 1110e and the metal obstructing nail 1201 more visually as one.

It should be noted that the metal obstacle nail 1201 and the panel board back metallic luster portion 1110e may be configured so as not to have similar metallic luster. For example, when the stainless steel obstacle nail 1201 is employed, the panel board back metallic luster portion 1110e that is visually recognized with a reddish metallic luster may be employed. Alternatively, when the brass obstruction nail 1201 is employed, the panel board back metallic luster portion 1110e that is visible in silver may be employed. Even in this case, since the obstacle nail 1201 and the panel board back metallic luster part 1110e match in terms of metallic luster, the obstacle nail 1201 and the panel board back metallic luster part 1110e can be visually recognized as one. can be done.

In addition, it may be configured such that the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 is caused to emit light in a predetermined color, and the light emitted from the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 is introduced from below the panel plate 1110 . FIG. 464(d) is a sectional view showing a state in which the panel board lower light emitting substrate 2400 is provided. For example, the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 may emit white or yellow light. Moreover, the light emission mode and the like shown in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. With such a configuration, when the light emitted from the pachinko machine 1, the light from the lighting equipment installed in the game parlor, or the light from other game machines installed in the amusement parlor is weak. Even so, it is possible to visually recognize the panel plate back metallic gloss portion 1110e and the obstructing nail 1201 with metallic gloss, and as a result, it is possible to make the whitened portion HKB inconspicuous.

An example in which the light emitted from the panel board lower light emitting substrate 2400 is introduced from below the panel board 1110 has been shown, but the light is directed forward behind the panel board back bright color visible portion 1110h and the panel board back metallic glossy portion 1110e. A predetermined light-emitting means may be arranged to illuminate the panel plate back bright color visible portion 1110h and the panel plate back metallic glossy portion 1110e from behind. The panel plate back bright color visible portion 1110h and the panel plate back metallic glossy portion 1110e are formed thin by thinning the thickness or by increasing the amount of light emitted forward from a predetermined light emitting means. Light emitted from the back of the panel plate back bright color visible portion 1110h and the panel plate back metallic luster portion 1110e is allowed to pass forward, so that the bright color of the panel plate back is visually recognized by the light emitted from the predetermined light emitting means. It is possible to bring the portion 1110h and the panel plate back metallic glossy portion 1110e into a decorative state.

The embodiments and technical matters related to the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b described with reference to FIGS. may be adopted. Similarly, the embodiments and technical matters relating to the panel board back metallic luster portion 1110e described with reference to FIGS. It may be employed in the gloss portion 2410b). Further, the embodiments and technical matters related to the panel board back bright color visible portion 1110h described with reference to FIG.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 460 and 464, a manufacturing method is adopted in which the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 is plated, printed, etc., and then the obstacle nail through-holes 1110a are provided in the panel plate 1110. good. This is because when the back surface of the panel plate 1110 is plated or printed after the obstacle nail through-holes 1110a are provided in the panel plate 1110, the inner walls of the obstacle nail through-holes 1110a are plated, This is because the appearance of the panel plate 1110 deteriorates due to the ink used for printing adhering to the inner wall of the obstacle nail through-hole 1110a. By the way, after the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 is subjected to plating processing, printing processing, etc., the panel plate 1110 is provided with an obstacle nail through-hole 1110a. light leaks forward from the gap between the rear end of the obstructing nail through-hole 1110a and the leading end portion 1201e of the obstructing nail. The leaked light may be viewed by the player in an annular shape, resulting in deterioration of the aesthetic appearance. Means for solving such problems are shown below.

465 shows a modification of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 464, in which a panel board rear board 2420 is installed behind the panel board 1110, and the panel board rear board 2420 is installed in front of the panel board rear board 2420. This embodiment employs a configuration in which the light emitting portion 2425 illuminates the panel plate back bright color visual recognition portion 1110h from behind.
FIG. 465(a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment. FIG. 465(b) is a cabinet diagram showing the structure of the panel board rear substrate 2420 by oblique projection. FIG. 465(c) is a cross-sectional view along AA in FIG. 465(a). FIG. 465(d) is a cabinet diagram showing the structure in the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment by the oblique projection method.

The panel board rear substrate 2420 is composed of a printed circuit board with white front and rear surfaces. A plurality of panel board rear board light-emitting portions 2425 are provided on the front surface of the panel board rear board 2420 . The panel board rear substrate light emitting portion 2425 is composed of a plurality of light emitting diodes surface-mounted as a light source on the front surface of the panel board rear substrate 2420 . The direction of the light emitted from the panel board rear substrate light-emitting portion 2425 is the normal direction of the panel board rear substrate 2420, and the light is emitted vertically toward the front.

As shown in FIG. 465, in this embodiment, a decoratively shaped panel board back bright color visible portion 1110h is provided on the rear surface of the panel board 1110, and behind the panel board back bright color visible portion 1110h, A panel plate rear substrate 2420 having the same outer shape as the panel plate back bright color visual recognition portion 1110h is provided. In addition, by causing the panel board rear board light emitting part 2425 to emit light, it is possible to decorate the panel board back bright color visual recognition part 1110h from the rear. The life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, the left guide nail 1232, and the panel board rear substrate light emitting portion 2425 are provided at positions that do not overlap when viewed from the front.

With such a configuration, the bright color visible portion (for example, the panel plate back bright color visible portion 1110h) is decorated with the light from the light source (for example, the panel plate rear substrate light emitting portion 2425) provided behind. can do. Furthermore, the amount of light leaking forward from the rear end portion of the obstacle nail through-hole 1110a can be reduced, and the rear end portion of the obstacle nail through-hole 1110a is visually recognized as an annular shape by the player. It becomes possible to suppress deterioration of aesthetic appearance.

A light-emitting diode that emits light toward the side of the mounting surface may be employed as the panel board rear substrate light-emitting portion 2425 . In this case, since the light emitted from the panel rear substrate light-emitting portion 2425 is emitted in a direction parallel to the panel rear substrate 2420, it is possible to irradiate the entire panel substrate 2420 with light. , the front surface of the panel board rear substrate 2420 can be prevented from being uneven in the irradiation amount of light.

The embodiment relating to the panel board rear substrate 2420 described with reference to FIG. 465 may be employed in the panel board rear substrate 2420 in other embodiments and the white board on which the light emitting diode is mounted.

Although an example of the bright color visible portion 1110h on the back of the panel plate has been shown, this configuration is not limited to decoration visible in a bright color, and such a configuration may be adopted for a decorative portion provided in the form of a thin film on the back surface of the panel plate. . In particular, in the case of a black or dark colored decorative part, the degree of conspicuousness when light leaks forward is more remarkable than that of a white or light colored decorative part. becomes possible. If a plurality of decorative portions are provided, and the decorative portions have a relatively bright decorative portion and a relatively dark decorative portion, the decorative portion having a brighter color is provided at a position overlapping the obstacle nail 1201 in a front view. Good. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to further suppress deterioration in appearance caused by the rear end portion of the obstacle nail through-hole 1110a being viewed by the player in an annular shape.

On the back surface of the panel plate 1110, a diffused reflection portion that diffusely reflects light (for example, the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b) is provided, or a metallic glossy portion that is visible with metallic luster (for example, the panel plate back metallic gloss portion 1110e) is provided. An example of making the whitened portion HKB around the obstacle nail 1201 less conspicuous by providing a bright color visible portion (for example, the panel plate back bright color visible portion 1110h) that is visually recognized in a bright color is shown below. By modifying the embodiment described with reference to 456, a panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is provided close to the back surface of the panel plate 1110 to diffusely reflect light, be visually recognized with metallic luster, or be visually recognized with a bright color. An embodiment in which a is provided will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 466(a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment. FIG. 466(b) is a cross-sectional view along AA in FIG. 466(a). FIG. 466(c) is a cabinet diagram showing the structure in the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment by the oblique projection method. 466(d) is a cross-sectional view showing a mode in which a panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 is provided below the panel plate 1110. FIG.

In this embodiment, behind the panel plate 1110, a panel plate rear decorative member 2410 made of colorless and transparent synthetic resin is arranged. The panel plate rear decorative member 2410 has a thickness of 2 mm, and has a panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a formed by subjecting the front side to lens cutting or satin finishing. The rough surface portion 2410a of the panel plate rear decorative member diffusely reflects ambient light, and is visually recognized in a whitish color. The rough surface portion 2410a of the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is provided on the front surface of the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 because the rough surface portion 2410a of the panel plate rear decorative member is arranged closer to the whitened portion HKB than when provided on the rear surface. This is because the whitening portion HKB can be viewed more integrally with the whitening portion HKB.

Behind the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the obstacle nail 1201 planted as the left guide nail 1232, the rough surface portion 2410a of the panel plate rear decorative member is positioned. there is

In this way, behind the obstacle nail 1201 implanted as the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in the transparent plate portion (panel plate 1110), the irregular reflection portion (panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a, etc.), the whitened portion HKB in the vicinity of the planting site of the obstructing nail 1201 can be made inconspicuous by the irregular reflection portion visually recognized in white. It becomes possible. Further, by providing the irregular reflection part on the front surface of the decorative member, the distance between the irregular reflection part and the whitening part HKB can be made closer, and the irregular reflection part and the whitening part HKB can be visually recognized more integrally. In this embodiment or other embodiments, the front surface of the diffused reflection portion (rough surface portion 2410a of the panel plate rear decorative member, etc.) included in the decorative member (panel plate rear decorative member 2410, etc.) is plated with metal to form unevenness. It may be configured to form a certain metallic luster.

As shown in FIG. 466(d), the panel board lower light-emitting substrate 2400 irradiates the panel board rear decorative member 2410 with light of a predetermined color (for example, white or yellow), and the light is irradiated on the panel board rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a. It may be configured to reflect light. Moreover, the light emission mode and the like shown in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. With such a configuration, when the light emitted from the pachinko machine 1, the light from the lighting equipment installed in the game parlor, or the light from other game machines installed in the amusement parlor is weak. Even so, the rough surface portion 2410a of the panel plate rear decorative member can be visually recognized whitish, and as a result, the whitened portion HKB can be made inconspicuous.

Referring to FIG. 466, an example is shown in which panel plate rear decorative member 2410 formed of colorless and transparent synthetic resin and having panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a on the front surface is provided behind panel plate 1110. An embodiment modified to have a panel plate rear decorative member metallic glossy portion 2410b instead of the plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 467(a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment. FIG. 467(b) is a cross-sectional view along AA in FIG. 467(a). FIG. 467(c) is a cabinet diagram showing the structure in the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment by the oblique projection method. FIG. 467(d) is a sectional view showing a mode in which a panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 is provided below the panel plate 1110. FIG.

In this embodiment, behind the panel plate 1110, a panel plate rear decorative member 2410 made of colorless and transparent synthetic resin is arranged. The panel plate rear decorative member 2410 has a thickness of 2 mm, and has a panel plate rear decorative member metallic gloss portion 2410b formed by plating on the front side. The metallic luster portion 2410b of the panel plate rear decorative member diffusely reflects the ambient light and is visually recognized with metallic luster. Even with such a configuration, the whitened portion HKB can be made inconspicuous.

As shown in FIG. 467(d), the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 irradiates the panel plate rear decorative member 2410, and the introduced light is reflected at the panel plate rear decorative member metallic luster portion 2410b. good too. Moreover, the light emission mode and the like shown in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. With such a configuration, when the light emitted from the pachinko machine 1, the light from the lighting equipment installed in the game parlor, or the light from other game machines installed in the amusement parlor is weak. Even so, the metallic luster portion 2410b of the panel plate rear decorative member and the obstructing nail 1201 can be visually recognized integrally with metallic luster, and as a result, the whitened portion HKB can be made inconspicuous.

Referring to FIG. 466, an example is shown in which panel plate rear decorative member 2410 formed of colorless and transparent synthetic resin and having panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a on the front surface is provided behind panel plate 1110. An embodiment in which the plate rear decorative member 2410 is modified to have a panel plate rear decorative member metallic glossy portion 2410b in addition to the panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 468(a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment. FIG. 468(b) is a cross-sectional view along AA in FIG. 468(a). FIG. 468(c) is a cabinet diagram showing the structure in the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment by the oblique projection method. 468(d) is a cross-sectional view showing a mode in which a panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 is provided below the panel plate 1110. FIG.

In this embodiment, behind the panel plate 1110, a panel plate rear decorative member 2410 made of colorless and transparent synthetic resin is arranged. The panel plate rear decorative member 2410 has a thickness of 2 mm, and includes a panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a formed by lens cutting and a panel plate formed by plating. It has a rear decorative member metallic gloss portion 2410b on the front side. The rough surface portion 2410a of the panel plate rear decorative member diffusely reflects ambient light, and is visually recognized in a whitish color. In addition, the metallic luster portion 2410b of the panel plate rear decorative member diffusely reflects the ambient light, so that the metallic luster is visually recognized.

In this way, behind the obstacle nail 1201, a decorative member (panel plate rear decorative member) provided with a diffused reflection portion (panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a, etc.) and a metallic luster portion (panel plate rear decorative member metallic luster portion 2410b). 2410, etc.) are positioned, the diffused reflection portion and the whitening portion HKB are visually recognized as one, and the metallic luster portion and the metal obstacle nail 1201 are visually recognized as one. The portion HKB can be made less conspicuous. In this embodiment or other embodiments, the decorative member (panel plate rear decorative member 2410, etc.) is subjected to lens cut processing, and a part thereof is subjected to plating processing so that the uneven metallic luster portion (panel It may be configured to form the plate rear decorative member metallic luster portion 2410b).

As shown in FIG. 468(d), the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 irradiates the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 with light, and the panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a and the panel plate rear decorative member metallic glossy portion 2410b are irradiated with light. It may be configured to reflect the reflected light. Moreover, the light emission mode and the like shown in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. With such a configuration, when the light emitted from the pachinko machine 1, the light from the lighting equipment installed in the game parlor, or the light from other game machines installed in the amusement parlor is weak. Even so, the metallic luster portion (for example, the panel plate rear decorative member metallic luster portion 2410b) and the obstacle nail 1201 can be visually recognized with metallic luster, and the irregular reflection portion (for example, the panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a ) can be visually recognized whitish, and as a result, the whitened portion HKB can be made inconspicuous.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 468, the panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a and the panel plate rear decorative member metallic luster portion 2410b were provided on the front surface of the panel plate rear decorative member 2410. A modified embodiment in which at least one of the rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a and the panel plate rear decorative member metallic luster portion 2410b is provided on the rear surface of the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 will be described with reference to FIG. .

FIGS. 469(a) to 469(c) are AA cross-sectional views showing modifications of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 468(b). FIG. 469(a) shows an embodiment in which the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is deformed to have the panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a on the rear side and the panel plate rear decorative member metallic glossy portion 2410b on the front side. ing. FIG. 469(b) shows an embodiment in which the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is deformed to have the panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a on the front side and the panel plate rear decorative member metallic glossy portion 2410b on the rear side. ing. FIG. 469(c) shows an embodiment in which the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is deformed so as to have both the panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a and the panel plate rear decorative member metallic luster portion 2410b on the rear surface side. . 469(a) to 469(c) show only cross-sectional views, but when viewed from the front, it has a decorative shape as shown in FIG. 468(a). . Moreover, this point also applies to other embodiments in which embodiments are shown with reference to cross-sectional views.

In this way, by providing the irregular reflection portion (for example, the panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a) and the metallic luster portion (for example, the panel plate rear decorative member metallic luster portion 2410b) at a distance in the front-rear direction, the decorative member ( For example, since the panel plate rear decorative member 2410) is visually recognized in a three-dimensional shape with a sense of depth, the whitened portion HKB can be made less conspicuous.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 468 and 469, the portion where the panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a is formed is the panel plate rear decorative member metallic glossy portion 2410b, and the panel plate rear decorative member metallic glossy portion 2410b. The portion where 2410b is formed may be configured to be the rough surface portion 2410a of the panel plate rear decorative member.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 469(a) and 469(b), the panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a and the panel plate rear decorative member metallic luster portion 2410b are each a panel plate rear decorative member. 2410, but a plurality of panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portions 2410a or a plurality of panel plate rear decorative member metallic glossy portions 2410b are provided, and the front side of the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 470, a modified embodiment that is provided on both the posterior side and the posterior side will be described with reference to FIG.

FIGS. 470(a) to 470(b) are cross-sectional views taken along line AA showing modifications of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 469(a). FIG. 470(a) shows an embodiment in which the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is modified so as to have the panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a on both the front side and the rear side. FIG. 470(b) shows an embodiment in which the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is deformed so as to have the panel plate rear decorative member metallic gloss portion 2410b on both the front side and the rear side.

In this way, by providing a plurality of diffused reflection portions (the rough surface portion 2410a of the panel plate rear decorative member) at a distance in the front-rear direction, the plurality of diffused reflection portions visually recognized in white are visually recognized three-dimensionally. A sense of visual unity between the irregular reflection portion and the whitening portion HKB can be enhanced, and the whitening portion HKB can be made less conspicuous. In addition, by providing a plurality of metallic luster portions (panel plate rear decorative member metallic luster portion 2410b) with a distance in the front-rear direction, the plurality of metallic luster portions can be visually recognized three-dimensionally. The visual sense of unity with the obstructing nail 1201 can be enhanced, and the whitened portion HKB can be made less conspicuous.

469 and 470, the panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a and the panel plate rear decorative member metallic glossy portion 2410b provided on the front surface of the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 and the panel The panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a and the panel plate rear decorative member metallic luster portion 2410b provided on the rear surface of the plate rear decorative member 2410 are provided so as not to overlap when viewed from the front. may be deformed so that they overlap when viewed from the front, and such a deformed embodiment will be shown below.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 466, the panel board rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a was provided on the front side of the panel board rear decorative member 2410. An embodiment modified to provide the plate rear decorative member metallic luster portion 2410b will be described with reference to FIGS. 471(a) to 471(e).

FIGS. 471(a) to 471(e) are AA sectional views showing modifications of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 466A(a). In FIG. 471(a), a panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a is provided on the front side of the panel plate rear decorative member 2410, and a panel plate rear decorative member metallic gloss portion 2410b is provided on the rear surface side of the panel plate rear decorative member 2410. 4 shows an embodiment modified to . In FIG. 471(b), a panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a is provided on the front side of the panel plate rear decorative member 2410, and only a part of the rear surface side of the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 has a metallic luster portion of the panel plate rear decorative member. 2410b shows a modified embodiment. In FIG. 471(c), the panel board rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a is provided only on a part of the front side of the panel board rear decorative member 2410, and the panel board rear decorative member metallic gloss portion is provided on the rear surface side of the panel board rear decorative member 2410. 2410b shows a modified embodiment. In FIG. 471(d), the panel board rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a is provided only on a part of the front side of the panel board rear decorative member 2410, and the panel board rear decorative member metallic gloss portion is provided on the rear surface side of the panel board rear decorative member 2410. 2410b shows a modified embodiment. FIG. 471(e) shows a panel board rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a provided on the front side of the panel board rear decorative member 2410, and only a part of the rear side of the panel board rear decorative member 2410 has a metallic luster portion of the panel board rear decorative member. 2410b shows a modified embodiment.

With such a configuration, a diffused reflection portion (for example, the panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a) or a metallic luster portion (for example, the panel plate rear decorative member metallic luster portion 2410b) is located behind the whitened portion HKB in a front view. is positioned, the whitened portion HKB can be made inconspicuous. In particular, as shown in FIGS. 471(a), 471(d), and 471(e), a metallic luster portion (for example, a panel plate rear decoration member) is behind a diffused reflection portion (for example, a panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a). When configured so that the member metallic luster portion 2410b) is positioned, the game board side effect display device 1600 or other luminous decoration is placed from behind the irregular reflection portion (for example, the panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a). Since there is no longer any light emitted from the member that performs the cleaning, it is possible to visually recognize the rough surface portion 2410a of the panel plate rear decorative member in a whiter color.

In the embodiments described with reference to FIGS. 469 to 471, only cross-sectional views are shown, but the panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a and the panel plate rear decorative member metallic luster portion 2410b in these embodiments are shown. As the shape in front view of , the shape in front view in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 468 may be adopted. In this case, the boundary between the rough surface portion 2410a of the panel plate rear decorative member and the metallic glossy portion 2410b of the panel plate rear decorative member is visually recognized as a decorative shape resembling a mountain range.

Referring to FIG. 466, an example is shown in which panel plate rear decorative member 2410 formed of colorless and transparent synthetic resin and having panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a on the front surface is provided behind panel plate 1110. An embodiment in which the plate rear decorative member 2410 itself is made of milky white resin will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 472(a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment. FIG. 472(b) is a cross-sectional view along AA in FIG. 472(a). FIG. 472(c) is a cabinet diagram showing the structure in the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment by the oblique projection method. 472(d) is a cross-sectional view showing a mode in which a panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 is provided below the panel plate 1110. FIG.

In this embodiment, behind the panel plate 1110, a panel plate rear decorative member 2410 made of a milky white synthetic resin is arranged. The panel plate rear decorative member 2410 has a thickness of 2 mm. The panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is visually recognized as milky white.

In this way, when the bright color visible part (for example, the panel plate rear decorative member 2410) is arranged behind the transparent plate part (panel plate 1110), the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 can be cut with a lens or the like. The whitened portion HKB can be made inconspicuous without performing processing such as plating.

It should be noted that the front surface of the panel board rear decorative member 2410 may be provided with the panel board rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a shown in the other embodiment. With such a configuration, the whitened portion HKB can be made less conspicuous.

Further, instead of arranging the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 made of milky white synthetic resin behind the obstructing nail 1201, a translucent or opaque panel plate made of light colored (white, yellow, skin color, etc.) synthetic resin can be used. The rear decorative member 2410 may be arranged behind the obstructing nail 1201 .

As shown in FIG. 472(d), the panel board lower light emitting substrate 2400 irradiates the panel board rear decorative member 2410 with light, and the panel board rear decorative member 2410 reflects the irradiated light forward. may Moreover, the light emission mode and the like shown in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. With such a configuration, when the light emitted from the pachinko machine 1, the light from the lighting equipment installed in the game parlor, or the light from other game machines installed in the amusement parlor is weak. Even so, the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 can be visually recognized whitish, and as a result, the whitened portion HKB can be made inconspicuous.

In addition, on the front surface of the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 made of a synthetic resin of a dark color (black, navy blue, etc.), which is translucent or opaque and visually recognized, a light-colored printed portion may be provided or a light-colored seal may be affixed. can be configured to Further, it is preferable to arrange such a bright-colored printed portion or a bright-colored sticker so as to be positioned behind the obstructing nail 1201 . Moreover, a predetermined decorative shape (for example, a plurality of columns of chevron-shaped decorative shapes as shown in FIG. 468) may be provided by such a bright-colored printed portion or sticker. Alternatively, a part of the predetermined decorative shape may be provided by a printed portion or sticker having metallic luster.

Referring to FIG. 466, an example is shown in which panel plate rear decorative member 2410 formed of colorless and transparent synthetic resin and having panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a on the front surface is provided behind panel plate 1110. An embodiment in which the plate rear decorative member 2410 is made of metal itself will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 473(a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment. FIG. 473(b) is a cross-sectional view along AA in FIG. 473(a). FIG. 473(c) is a cabinet diagram showing the structure in the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment, using an oblique projection method. FIG. 473(d) is a sectional view showing a mode in which a panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 is provided below the panel plate 1110. FIG.

In this embodiment, a panel plate rear decorative member 2410 formed of a metal plate material is arranged behind the panel plate 1110 . The panel plate rear decorative member 2410 has a thickness of 2 mm. The panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is visually recognized with metallic luster. Metal such as stainless steel, pure copper, and brass may be used as the metal forming the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 . As the metal forming the panel plate rear decorative member 2410, it is preferable to adopt a metal that is visually recognized in a color similar to that of the material of the obstructing nail 1201. FIG.

Also. The panel plate rear decorative member 2410 may be formed by bending a metal plate into a bellows shape or by deforming it into a predetermined decorative shape using a mold. At this time, it is preferable to process the metal plate so that the depth is increased in the front-rear direction. With such a configuration, the decorative member (for example, the panel plate rear decorative member 2410) that is visually recognized with metallic luster is visually recognized by the player with a feeling of unevenness, and the decorative member (for example, the panel plate rear decorative member 2410) ) and the obstacle nail 1201 are visually recognized more integrally. In addition, by providing a transparent top coat portion in a predetermined color (for example, red or yellow) on the front surface of the stainless flat plate, the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 can have a metallic luster (for example, copper) with a predetermined color. color, gold) may be configured to be visually recognized.

As shown in FIG. 473(d), the panel board lower light emitting substrate 2400 irradiates the panel board rear decorative member 2410 with light, and the front surface of the panel board rear decorative member 2410 reflects the irradiated light. may Moreover, the light emission mode and the like shown in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. With such a configuration, when the light emitted from the pachinko machine 1, the light from the lighting equipment installed in the game parlor, or the light from other game machines installed in the amusement parlor is weak. Even so, the decorative member (for example, the panel plate rear decorative member 2410) and the obstructing nail 1201 can be visually recognized with metallic luster, and as a result, the whitened portion HKB can be made inconspicuous.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 465, the panel board rear board light emitting section 2425 provided on the front surface of the panel board rear board 2420 illuminates the panel board rear bright color visual recognition section 1110h from behind. However, an embodiment modified so as not to have the panel plate back bright color visible portion 1110h will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 474(a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment. FIG. 474(b) is a cabinet diagram showing the structure of the panel board rear substrate 2420 by oblique projection. FIG. 474(c) is a cross-sectional view along AA in FIG. 474(a). FIG. 474(d) is a cabinet diagram showing the structure in the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment, using an oblique projection method.

In this embodiment, the panel plate rear substrate 2420 made of a white printed circuit board is configured to be directly visible through the panel plate 1110 . Even with such a configuration, the whitened portion HKB can be made less noticeable by the panel plate rear substrate 2420 which is visually recognized in white. It should be noted that the light-emitting diodes mounted on the front surface of the panel board rear substrate 2420 are preferably light-colored ones. In addition, a dark element (an IC for controlling a light-emitting diode, a driver for driving the light-emitting diode, etc.) is mounted on the rear surface of the panel board rear substrate 2420, or an obstacle nail 1201 on the front surface of the panel board rear substrate 2420 is mounted on the rear surface of the panel board rear substrate 2420. It is better to mount them in positions that do not overlap. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the whitened portion HKB is conspicuous due to the dark-colored element and the whitened portion HKB being viewed close to each other.

In this embodiment, a light-emitting diode that emits light to the side may be employed as the panel board rear substrate light-emitting portion 2425 . In this case, the entire front surface of the panel board rear board 2420 can be irradiated with light from the panel board rear board light emitting section 2425 .

An embodiment combining the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 466 and the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 474 will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 475(a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment. FIG. 475(b) is a cross-sectional view along AA in FIG. 475(a). FIG. 475(c) is a cabinet diagram showing the structure in the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment by the oblique projection method.

In this embodiment, behind the obstacle nail 1201, a panel plate rear decorative member 2410 formed of colorless and transparent synthetic resin and having a front surface subjected to lens cut processing is arranged. A white panel board rear substrate 2420 with 2425 is disposed. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to make the whitened portion HKB less conspicuous especially when the panel board rear substrate light emitting portion 2425 is turned off.

In the present embodiment, the panel board rear board 2420 consists of a panel board rear decorative member rough surface part 2410a capable of diffusely reflecting light emitted from the panel board rear board light emitting part 2425 and a white printed board. Since the light is reflected between and, the entire rough surface portion 2410a of the panel plate rear decorative member is uniformly irradiated with light, and the utilization efficiency of the light emitted from the panel plate rear substrate light emitting portion 2425 is improved. is also possible.

An embodiment combining the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 468 and the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 475 will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 476(a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment. FIG. 476(b) is a cross-sectional view along AA in FIG. 476(a). FIG. 476(c) is a cabinet diagram showing the structure in the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment, using an oblique projection method.

In this embodiment, a panel plate rear decorative member 2410 made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin is arranged behind the obstacle nail 1201, and a white panel plate having a panel plate rear substrate light-emitting portion 2425 further behind it. A rear substrate 2420 is provided. The front surface of the panel board rear decorative member 2410 is composed of a panel board rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a and a panel board rear decorative member metallic luster portion 2410b. The light emitted from the panel plate rear substrate light emitting portion 2425 is emitted forward through the panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a. On the other hand, when the panel board rear decorative member metallic luster portion 2410b is irradiated with the light emitted from the panel board rear substrate light emitting portion 2425, the light is emitted rearward on the rear surface of the panel board rear decorative member metallic luster portion 2410b. The light is reflected and returns to the white panel plate rear substrate 2420, and finally radiates forward through the panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a.

By adopting such a configuration, the panel plate rear decorative member metallic luster portion 2410b and the obstacle nail 1201 can be visually recognized integrally, and the panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a located behind the whitened portion HKB and the white colored portion can be seen. The panel plate rear substrate 2420 can make the whitened portion HKB inconspicuous.

As the panel board rear decorative member 2410 in the embodiment explained with reference to FIG. 476, the panel board rear decorative member 2410 in the embodiment explained with reference to FIGS. 468 to 471 may be adopted.

Further, as the light emission mode of the panel board rear substrate 2420 in the embodiment described with reference to FIGS.

Further, in the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 475 and 476, the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 and the panel plate rear substrate 2420 may be integrated as a decoration unit.

On the panel plate rear substrate 2420, an element for controlling or driving the panel plate rear substrate light emitting portion 2425 (an IC for controlling a light emitting diode, a light emitting diode) is placed at a position overlapping the panel plate rear decorative member metallic luster portion 2410b in a front view. (Driver, etc.) may be mounted. In this case, these elements are positioned behind the panel plate rear decorative member metallic luster portion 2410b. A dark-colored element may be employed as such an element.

By adopting such a configuration, even when statically charged game balls flow in on the board surface of the game board 5 and discharge occurs at a predetermined position to generate an electromagnetic pulse, the decorative member at the rear of the panel board is prevented. It is possible to reduce the influence of the electromagnetic pulse on these elements located behind the metallic luster portion 2410b. In addition, since it is no longer visible adjacent to the obstructing nail 1201, it is possible to make the whitened portion HKB inconspicuous. Instead of mounting these elements on the front surface of the panel board rear substrate 2420, these elements may be mounted on the rear surface of the panel board rear substrate 2420. FIG. Also in this case, the same effect can be obtained.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 474-476, a panel board rear board 2420 having a panel board rear board light emitting portion 2425 is positioned behind the obstruction nail 1201 . Therefore, it is possible to directly illuminate the periphery of the obstructing nail 1201 with a stronger amount of light than the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 described with reference to FIG. 456 and the like.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 474 to 476, when the panel board rear board light-emitting part 2425 emits a predetermined color (for example, white, red, and yellow) with a strong amount of light, the panel board rear board 2420 and the panel board rear decorative member 2410 can be made visible in a predetermined color, and the whitened portion HKB can also be made visible in a predetermined color. Also, for the obstacle nail 1201 having a metallic luster, the light from the panel board rear substrate 2420 located behind is mirror-reflected (especially at the obstacle nail first body portion 1201b), so that the original metal constituting the obstacle nail 1201 is removed. is visually recognized in a predetermined color instead of being visually recognized in a specific color. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the whitened portion HKB less conspicuous. When the panel board rear substrate light-emitting portion 2425 is caused to emit a strong amount of light as described above, each embodiment applied to the panel board lower light-emitting substrate 2400 is applied to the panel board rear substrate light-emitting portion 2425 to obtain a predetermined amount of light. may be caused to emit light with different emission colors or emission timings.

Note that light of a predetermined color from the panel board rear substrate 2420 does not reach the front surface of the obstructing nail head portion 1201a, which is a part of the obstructing nail 1201. In that case, the door frame right side unit 550, etc. It is preferable to irradiate the front surface of the obstructing nail head portion 1201a with the light of the same color as the predetermined color by means of a member located in front of the obstructing nail 1201a. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the front surface of the obstructing nail head portion 1201a is conspicuous.

The color of the panel plate rear decorative member metallic luster portion 2410b and the light emission color of the panel plate rear substrate light emission portion 2425 may be made to correspond to perform light emission effects, and the degree of expectation may be suggested by the light emission mode. At this time, in the case of an effect with a relatively high degree of expectation, it is preferable to configure the panel board rear substrate light emitting part 2425 to emit light in a color similar to the color of the panel board rear decorative member metallic luster part 2410b. Further, in the case of an effect with a relatively low degree of expectation, it is preferable to configure the panel board rear substrate light emitting part 2425 to emit light in a color different from the color of the panel board rear decorative member metallic luster part 2410b.

For example, when the panel plate rear decorative member metallic luster portion 2410b that is visually recognized in gold is provided, yellow light is emitted from the panel plate rear substrate light emitting portion 2425 as an effect with a relatively high degree of expectation. do it. Also, as an effect with a relatively low degree of expectation, it is preferable to irradiate blue light from the panel board rear substrate light emitting portion 2425 . By adopting such a configuration, in an effect with a relatively high degree of expectation, a predetermined color (panel plate rear decorative member metal The rough surface portion 2410a of the panel plate rear decorative member, which is decorated with light of the same color as the glossy portion 2410b, is integrally visible to the player, and the whitened portion HKB is also the metallic luster of the panel plate rear decorative member. Since they are decorated with the same color as the part 2410b, they are visible to the player as one. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the whitened portion HKB is visually recognized and the player's expectations for the big win, which are excited by the relatively high expectations, are diminished. Furthermore, since the rough surface portion 2410a of the panel plate rear decorative member and the metallic glossy portion 2410b of the panel plate rear decorative member are visually recognized as one with the same color, it is possible to give a visual impact to the player. . Specifically, areas that were perceived as separate areas are perceived as a single area, and the area is visually felt to be larger.

Note that when the panel plate rear decorative member metallic luster portion 2410b that is visually recognized with a silver metallic luster is provided, the emission color of the panel plate rear substrate light emitting portion 2425 in an effect with a relatively high degree of expectation is not yellow. It may be configured to adopt white. Similarly, when the panel plate rear decorative member metallic luster portion 2410b that is visually recognized with a reddish metallic luster is provided, yellow is the emission color of the panel plate rear substrate light emitting portion 2425 in a production with a relatively high degree of expectation. Alternatively, the red color may be adopted instead.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 474 and 475, the panel board rear board light-emitting portion 2425 provided on the panel board rear board 2420 is configured to be arranged around the obstacle nail 1201 when viewed from the front. good too. For example, two panel board rear board light emitting parts 2425 are arranged at positions facing each other across the obstacle nail 1201 (position of 180 degrees), or three panel board rear boards are arranged at angles of 120 degrees around the obstacle nail 1201 . It is preferable to configure so that the substrate light emitting portion 2425 is arranged. In FIGS. 474(a) and 475(a), three panel board rear substrate light-emitting portions 2425 are provided around the jump nail 1231 on the left side in a front view and the obstacle nail 1201 on the rightmost of the left guide nails 1232. provided so that it is illuminated evenly from the surroundings.

By adopting such a configuration, light of a predetermined color is emitted from the surroundings of the first obstacle nail body portion 1201b, the obstacle nail spiral shape portion 1201c, and the obstacle nail second body portion 1201d, which constitute the obstacle nail 1201. It is possible to irradiate without On the other hand, when only one panel board rear board light-emitting section 2425 is arranged around the obstacle nail 1201, the part where the light from the panel board rear board light-emitting section 2425 is difficult to reach is placed on both sides of the obstacle nail 1201. It occurs on the side opposite to the side where the panel board rear substrate light emitting portion 2425 is provided, and the appearance of the obstacle nail 1201 is spoiled. This tendency is particularly pronounced when the members (panel plate rear decorative member 2410, panel plate rear substrate 2420) positioned at the rear are visible in white as in the present embodiment. In addition, when irradiating the light from the plurality of panel board rear board light emitting parts 2425, it is preferable that the light emission mode of each panel board rear board light emitting part 2425 is the same. For example, the plurality of panel board rear substrate light emitting portions 2425 may all be configured to light up in the same predetermined color (white, red, yellow, etc.).

456 to 476, behind the panel plate 1110 are a panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b, a panel plate back metallic gloss portion 1110e, a panel plate rear decorative member 2410, a panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a, and a panel plate rear. An example of arranging the decorative member metallic luster portion 2410b, the panel plate rear substrate 2420, and the like has been shown. , the area covering member 2600a is provided with at least one of a diffuse reflection portion similar to the panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a, a bright color visible portion, and a metallic luster portion similar to the panel plate rear decorative member metallic luster portion 2410b. may be configured. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to make the whitened portion HKB less conspicuous. In addition, in order not to obstruct the rolling of the game ball, these rough surface parts and metallic luster parts are formed in a strip shape, and the width thereof is less than the diameter of the game ball. The game ball should be constructed so as not to be completely hidden by these rough surface portions and metallic luster portions.

It may be configured such that the irregular reflection portion and the metallic luster portion are provided on the rear surface of the glass plate 192 instead of the area covering member 2600a. Alternatively, in an embodiment having a plurality of glass plates 192 , the rough surface portion or metallic luster portion may be provided between the glass plates 192 .

By hiding the vicinity of the tip portion of the obstructing nail 1201 with these irregular reflection portions and metallic luster portions, the vicinity of the tip portion of the obstructing nail 1201 is difficult to be visually recognized when the vicinity of the tip portion of the obstructing nail 1201 is viewed from a predetermined angle. Or you may comprise so that it may become invisible.

By providing the irregular reflection portion, the bright color visible portion, and the metallic glossy portion in front of the whitened portion HKB in this way, the obstacle nail 1201 is sandwiched between the metallic glossy portion located in front and the metallic glossy portion located behind. It is possible to further enhance the sense of unity between the obstacle nail 1201 and the metallic luster portion. In addition, when the whitened portion HKB is viewed from a predetermined angle, the whitened portion HKB is hidden by the metallic luster portion and the irregular reflection portion. Furthermore, even if the whitening portion HKB is in a visible position, it will be sandwiched between the diffuse reflection portion and bright color visible portion located in the rear and the diffuse reflection portion and bright color visible portion located in front. HKB can be made less conspicuous.

465 to 476, one or both of the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 and the panel plate rear substrate 2420 are arranged behind the panel plate 1110 to make the whitened portion HKB inconspicuous. Although shown, as an effect, one or both of the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 and the panel plate rear substrate 2420 may be configured to be movable or pivotable. Further, it is preferable that this movement effect is executed under the control of the peripheral control board 1510 . In addition, it may be configured such that the degree of expectation for a big hit is suggested by this moving effect. A driving mechanism for moving and rotating the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear board 2420 may be driven and controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 .

By the way, when the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear board 2420 are configured to be movable in this way, the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear board light emitting section 2425 positioned at the standby position The whitened portion HKB, which has been inconspicuous until then, may become conspicuous when the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear substrate 2420 move to the moving positions. Therefore, in order to prevent the whitened portion HKB from becoming conspicuous, the following embodiments may be adopted.

FIG. 477 shows a modification of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 466 in which the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is vertically movable. FIG. 477(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 466(a), showing the panel board rear decorative member 2410 in the standby position. FIG. 477(b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 466(a), showing a state in which the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is at the moving position. When the panel board rear decorative member 2410 moves from the standby position to the first movement position, it moves upward in a plane parallel to the panel board 1110 by a predetermined distance (10 mm). It is located at a position overlapping with the panel board rear decorative member 2410 in a front view. FIG. 477(c) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 466(a), showing the panel board rear decorative member 2410 at the moving position. When the panel board rear decorative member 2410 moves from the standby position to the second movement position, it moves upward in a plane parallel to the panel board 1110 by a predetermined distance (20 mm). The panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is positioned so as not to overlap when viewed from the front.

In this way, when a decorative member having an irregularly reflecting portion (for example, the panel plate rear decorative member 2410) moves from the standby position to the first movement position in the movement effect, the obstructing nail 1201 is positioned behind the panel plate in a front view. By being positioned so as to overlap with the decorative member 2410, a state in which the whitened portion HKB is inconspicuous can be maintained.

In addition, when the panel board rear decorative member 2410 is moved to the first movement position, it is desirable that all the obstructing nails 1201 overlap the panel board rear decorative member 2410 in a front view. Even when only the nail 1201 is positioned so as to overlap the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 in a front view, the whitened portion HKB can be kept inconspicuous.

When the panel board rear decorative member 2410 moves to the second movement position, which is a position farther than the first movement position, the impact on the player increases due to the large amount of movement. The obstacle nail 1201 shown in 477(c) and the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 do not overlap when viewed from the front. Therefore, the execution frequency of moving the panel board rear decorative member 2410 from the standby position to the first movement position and then returning to the standby position without moving to the second movement position, and the panel board rear decoration member As for the execution frequency of the effect of moving the 2410 from the standby position to the second movement position and then returning to the standby position, it is preferable to increase the execution frequency of the former effect. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the occurrence frequency of situations in which the whitened portion HKB is conspicuous while realizing diversification of presentation modes in which the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is moved.

When moving the panel board rear decorative member 2410, it is preferable to move the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board lower light emitting substrate 2400 integrally. Alternatively, the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 and the panel plate rear substrate 2420 may be moved integrally. Then, in a state in which the panel board rear decorative member 2410 is in the first movement position or the second movement position, the panel board lower light emitting substrate 2400 or the panel board rear substrate 2420 may be brought into the light emitting state.

Further, when the panel board rear decorative member 2410 is at the first movement position and when it is at the second movement position, the panel board lower light emitting board 2400 or the panel board rear board 2420 is made to emit light in different states, thereby The decorative member 2410 may be configured to be in a light emitting state in which the decorative member 2410 is visually recognized in different light emitting states. Also, in the game board side effect display device 1600, a special effect image may be displayed simultaneously corresponding to this light emitting effect state. Also, different effect images may be displayed when the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is at the first movement position and when it is at the second movement position. A single character or an integrated effect can be achieved by the external shape of the panel board rear decorative member 2410 located at the first movement position or the second movement position and the special effect image displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. may be configured to represent For example, as a special effect image, it may be configured to display a raining state or a snowy state as a special effect image on the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 representing a mountain range. In addition, it may be configured such that a different degree of expectation for a big win is suggested by such a plurality of presentation modes.

With this configuration, the player's attention is focused on the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the game board side effect display device 1600 positioned in the direction in which the panel board rear decorative member 2410 moves. Even if the decoration member 2410 moves to the second movement position and the obstacle nail 1201 does not overlap the panel plate rear decoration member 2410 in a front view, the player's consciousness can be diverted from the whitened portion HKB. becomes.

Although an embodiment modified from the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 466 has been shown, the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 465 and 467 to 476 is not limited to the embodiment described with reference to FIG. may be similarly modified. Also, the embodiment may be applied between modifications of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 466 . Also, the modified example of the panel board rear decorative member 2410 may be applied to the panel board rear substrate 2420 as well. Also in these cases, the whitened portion HKB can be made inconspicuous.

FIG. 478 shows an embodiment in which the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 and the panel plate rear substrate 2420 are modified to be vertically movable in the embodiment described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 478(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 475(a), showing the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear substrate 2420 in the standby position.

FIG. 478(b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 475(a), showing a state in which the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is at the moving position. When the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 moves from the standby position to the moving position, it moves upward by a predetermined distance (20 mm) in a plane parallel to the panel plate 1110. Although the decorative member 2410 is positioned to overlap in front view, the obstructing nail 1201 and the panel board rear substrate 2420 are positioned to overlap in front view.

FIG. 478(c) is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 475(a), showing the panel plate rear substrate 2420 at the moving position. When the panel board rear board 2420 moves from the standby position to the moving position, it moves upward in a plane parallel to the panel board 1110 by a predetermined distance (20 mm). 2420 are positioned so as not to overlap when viewed from the front, but the obstructing nail 1201 and the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 are positioned to overlap when viewed from the front.

In this way, only one of the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear board 2420 is moved from the standby position to the moving position at a certain timing, and the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear board are moved. 2420 may not move to the moving position at the same time. For example, the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 and the panel plate rear substrate 2420 may be moved so as to appear and disappear alternately in the vertical direction.

By adopting such a configuration, even when the movement effect of moving the panel board rear decorative member 2410 or the panel board rear substrate 2420 to the movement position is executed, the obstacle nail 1201 and the panel board rear decorative member 2410 or the panel board rear are Since it is positioned so as to overlap with one of the substrates 2420 that has not moved in a front view, it is possible to maintain a state in which the whitened portion HKB is inconspicuous. An embodiment in which the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear substrate 2420 are respectively moved from the standby position to the moving position has been shown, but the panel board rear decorative member 2410 is provided instead of the panel board rear substrate 2420 and overlaps in the front-rear direction. The two panel board rear decorative members 2410 may be moved in the same manner. Alternatively, a panel plate rear substrate 2420 may be provided instead of the panel plate rear decorative member 2410, and the two panel plate rear substrates 2420 overlapping in the front-rear direction may be similarly moved. Also, the positions of the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear substrate 2420 may be reversed in the front-rear direction, and the panel board rear substrate 2420 may be arranged in the front and the panel board rear decorative member 2410 may be arranged in the rear, and they may be moved in the same manner. . Also, a plurality of decoration units each composed of the panel plate rear decoration member 2410 and the panel plate rear substrate 2420 may be stacked and arranged and moved in the same manner.

FIG. 478(d) is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 475(a), showing a state in which both the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear substrate 2420 are at the moving position. The panel plate rear decorative member 2410 and the panel plate rear substrate 2420 are moved upward in a plane parallel to the panel plate 1110 by a predetermined distance (20 mm) by moving from the standby position to the moving position. Both the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear substrate 2420 are positioned so as not to overlap with the nail 1201 when viewed from the front. In this case, the whitened portion HKB around the tip of the obstructing nail 1201 may become conspicuous.

Therefore, in a state in which both the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear substrate 2420 are in the moving position, the panel board rear decorative member 2410 is moved by causing the panel board rear substrate 2420 to emit light of a predetermined emission color. You may comprise so that it may be in a light emission production|presentation state. Also, in the game board side effect display device 1600, a special effect image may be displayed simultaneously corresponding to this light emitting effect state. A single character or the like may be represented by the external shape of the panel board rear decorative member 2410 located at the moving position and a special effect image displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 . Note that the same aspect as the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 477 may be adopted.

With such a configuration, the player's interest is focused on the side of the game board located in the direction in which the panel board rear decorative member 2410, the panel board rear board 2420, or the panel board rear board 2420 moves. Since the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear board 2420 are moved to the movement position to face the effect display device 1600, the obstacle nail 1201 does not overlap the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear board 2420 in a front view. Even in such a state, it is possible to make the whitened portion HKB inconspicuous.

Although an embodiment that is a modification of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 475 is shown, the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 476 is not limited to the embodiment described with reference to FIG. may Also, the embodiment may be applied between modifications of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 475 . In this case also, the whitened portion HKB can be made inconspicuous.

A predetermined pattern or the like is applied to the front surface of the movable panel plate rear decorative member 2410 and the movable panel plate rear base plate 2420 at a position overlapping the obstacle nail 1201 in a front view. A decorative member that is visually recognized in a bright color or metallic luster is provided, and the decorative member is visually recognized in a state in which both the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 and the panel plate rear substrate 2420 are moved from the standby position to the moving position. It may be configured to be possible. Even when only one of the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear substrate 2420 is provided, the same decorative means may be employed. With such a configuration, even when both the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear substrate 2420 are moved to the moving position, the whitened portion HKB can be kept inconspicuous.

Behind the panel board rear decorative member 2410 configured to be movable and the panel board rear board 2420 configured to be movable, the panel board rear decorative member 2410, not the decorative member, is placed at a position overlapping the obstacle nail 1201 in front view. or a drive mechanism (arm, pinion, rack, etc.) for driving the panel plate rear substrate 2420 may be provided. In this case, the drive mechanism is made of colorless transparent or white opaque synthetic resin, and when the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 and the panel plate rear substrate 2420 are moved to the moving position and stopped, the obstructing nail 1201 and the drive mechanism It is preferable to configure so that it overlaps with a portion of a predetermined shape (preferably a non-planar shape such as having unevenness) when viewed from the front. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to keep the whitened portion HKB inconspicuous. Incidentally, if the drive mechanism were formed of a black/dark synthetic resin, the whitened portion HKB would be very conspicuous. In this case, characters or patterns may be printed in white on the front surface of the drive mechanism so that these overlap the obstructing nail 1201 when viewed from the front. The flat cables and flexible boards that transmit control signals and power from the peripheral control board 1510 to the panel board rear board 2420 are made white, and the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear board 2420 are moved to the movement position. It may be configured such that the obstacle nail 1201 and the flat cable or the flexible substrate overlap each other when viewed from the front. A similar configuration may be employed when only one of the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear substrate 2420 is provided.

FIG. 479 shows a modification of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 466 in which the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is movable in the front-rear direction. FIG. 479(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 466(a), showing a state in which the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 and the panel plate rear base plate 2420 are at the front standby position. FIG. 479(b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 466(a), showing a state in which the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is in the rearward movement position. When the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 moves from the standby position to the moving position, it moves backward from the panel plate 1110 by a predetermined distance (5 mm). located in an overlapping position.

In this manner, the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 may be configured to be movable in the front-rear direction so that it can be separated from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 and moved closer thereto. When the panel plate 1110 and the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 or the panel plate rear substrate 2420 are approaching each other, the panel plate 1110 is separated from the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 or the panel plate rear substrate 2420. It is possible to make the whitened portion HKB less conspicuous than the state.

For example, as an effect indicating that the expectation of a big hit is high, the panel board rear decorative member 2410 may be moved to a rearward movement position so that the obstacle nail 1201 and the panel board rear decorative member 2410 are separated from each other. In a predetermined period during which the player is playing the game, the time during which the movement effect indicating that the degree of expectation for the big win is high (the time during which the player is at the movement position) indicates that the degree of expectation for the big win is high. It is preferable to configure the movement performance to be shorter than the time (not positioned at the movement position) during which the movement effect shown is not executed. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to make the whitened portion HKB inconspicuous during the time during which the performance indicating the high expectation of the big win is not executed, which occupies a large part of the game time.

On the other hand, the position of the panel board rear decorative member 2410 shown in FIG. 479(b) may be the standby position, and the position of the panel board rear decorative member 2410 shown in FIG. 479(a) may be the movement position. In a predetermined period during which the player is playing the game, the time during which the effect indicating the high expectation of the big win is being executed (the time the player is at the moving position) indicates the high expectation of the big win. Shorter than the time during which the performance is not executed (not positioned at the movement position). In this case, it is preferable to move the panel board rear decorative member 2410 to a forward movement position to change the state in which the obstacle nail 1201 and the panel board rear decorative member 2410 are closer to each other as an effect indicating that the expectation of a big hit is high. . By adopting such a structure, the whitened portion HKB can be made inconspicuous, and the player will notice the presence of the whitened portion HKB when a moving performance with a high expectation of a big win is being performed, and the expectation of a big win will not be noticed. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player's interest, which has been heightened due to the high degree of movement presentation, is spoiled.

480 shows that the front surface of the panel board rear decorative member 2410 is made deep in the front-rear direction in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 466, and the panel board rear decorative member 2410 is made vertically movable. Fig. 4 shows a modified embodiment;

FIG. 480(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 466(a), showing the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear substrate 2420 in the standby position. FIG. 480(b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 466(a), showing the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 at the moving position. When the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is moved from the standby position to the moving position, it moves upward by a predetermined distance (10 mm) in a plane parallel to the panel plate 1110. Even in this state, the obstructing nail 1201 and the panel plate rear decorative member are moved. 2410 is closer in the front-rear direction than when it is in the standby position, and overlaps in front view. It should be noted that the portion having a deep shape may be configured so as to be visually recognized as a decorative shape that imitates a mountain range when viewed from the front.

In this way, the front surface of the panel board rear decorative member 2410 is formed to have a recessed portion and a projecting portion in the front-rear direction, and when the panel board rear decorative member 2410 moves horizontally with respect to the panel board 1110, The obstacle nail 1201 and the protruding part are configured to move to a position where they overlap when viewed from the front, and the distance between the obstacle nail 1201 and the front surface of the panel board rear decorative member 2410 is reduced by the movement of the panel board rear decorative member 2410.例文帳に追加can be configured to The moving direction of the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is not limited to the vertical direction, and may be configured to move horizontally in the left-right direction or oblique direction when viewed from the front.

In addition, the time during which the effect indicating that the expectation of a big hit is high (the time when the player is at the moving position) is the time when the effect indicating the high expectation of the big hit is not being performed (the time when the player is at the moving position). not). In this case, it is preferable to move the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 to an upward movement position to change the state in which the obstacle nail 1201 and the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 are closer to each other as an effect indicating that the expectation of a big hit is high. . By adopting such a structure, the whitened part HKB can be made inconspicuous, and when a moving performance with a high expectation of a big win is performed, the player will notice the existence of the whitened part HKB, and the expectation of a big win will not be noticed. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player's interest, which has been heightened due to the performance of the high movement performance, is undermined.

On the other hand, the position of the panel board rear decorative member 2410 shown in FIG. 480(b) may be the standby position, and the position of the panel board rear decorative member 2410 shown in FIG. 480(a) may be the movement position. For example, as an effect indicating that the expectation of a big hit is high, the panel board rear decorative member 2410 may be moved to a downward movement position to change the state in which the obstacle nail 1201 and the panel board rear decorative member 2410 are separated. It should be noted that the time during which the movement effect indicating that the expectation of a big hit is high (time at the movement position) is the time when the movement effect indicating that the expectation of a big hit is high (at the movement position) is not executed. not located). By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to make the whitened portion HKB inconspicuous during the time during which the performance indicating the high expectation of the big win is not executed, which occupies a large part of the game time.

479 and 480, an embodiment in which the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is movable in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction has been described. It may be configured so as to execute a vibration effect of vibrating finely in the direction or in the front-rear direction. In addition, it is preferable to configure so as to indicate that the degree of expectation for a big hit is high by means of vibration presentation. In addition, when vibrating, the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 should be configured to vibrate within a range of about 3 mm to 5 mm. In addition, in the vibration range, it is preferable to configure so that the state of overlapping with the obstacle nail 1201 in a front view is maintained. With such a configuration, the state of reflection of light on the panel board rear decorative member 2410 continues to change, so that the whitened portion HKB can be made less conspicuous. It should be noted that not only the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 479 and 480 but also other embodiments may be configured to be able to execute the same vibration effect.

FIG. 481 shows an embodiment in which the panel board rear decorative member 2410 in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. FIG. 481(a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment. The panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is shown in the standby position. FIG. 481(b) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment. It shows a state where the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is rotated about 45 degrees clockwise from the standby position.

The panel plate rear decorative member 2410 can be rotated clockwise or counterclockwise around a panel plate rear decorative member rotating shaft 2410c provided in the front-rear direction. It should be noted that it is preferable to configure so as to suggest that the degree of expectation for a big win is high by the effect of rotating in this way. Also, it is possible to stop at a predetermined rotation angle, and the angle at which the game is stopped may be configured to indicate the degree of expectation for a big win. In this embodiment, even when the panel board rear decorative member 2410 is rotated, the obstruction nail 1201 functioning as the left jump nail 1231 and the obstruction nail 1201 functioning as the left life nail 1230 remain unchanged. The state of being always superimposed on the member 2410 in a front view is maintained.

With such a configuration, even when the panel board rear decorative member 2410 is configured to be rotatable, the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the obstructing nail 1201 continue to be in an overlapping positional relationship when viewed from the front. With respect to the obstacle nail 1201, it is possible to make the whitened portion HKB inconspicuous. As an effect, it is preferable to keep the panel board rear decorative member 2410 rotated, instead of turning the panel board rear decorative member 2410 from the standby position by a predetermined angle and stopping. In such a configuration, when viewed from the front, the state in which the panel board rear decorative member 2410 is located behind the obstructing nail 1201 and the state in which the panel board rear decorative member 2410 is not located behind the obstructing nail 1201 alternately. As a result, a state in which the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is not positioned behind the obstructing nail 1201 temporarily appears, but a state in which the whitened portion HKB is inconspicuous can be maintained. In this case, the rotation speed and the rotation direction of the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 may be used to indicate the degree of expectation for the big win.

FIG. 482 shows an embodiment in which the panel board rear decorative member 2410 in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. FIG. 482(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 466(a), showing the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear substrate 2420 in the standby position. FIG. 479(b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 466(a), showing a state in which the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is at the moving position. When the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 rotates from the standby position to the moving position, it rotates clockwise by about 30 degrees when viewed from the right side. They are located at overlapping positions when viewed from the front. FIG. 479(c) is a modification of the cross-sectional view shown in FIG. 479(b), showing a state where the game board side effect display device 1600 is positioned behind the panel plate rear decorative member 2410. FIG.

In this way, the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is configured to be rotatable about the panel plate rear decorative member rotating shaft 2410c, and can take a standby state parallel to the panel plate 1110 and a moving state not parallel to the panel plate 1110. may be configured to allow In addition, it is preferable that the action of moving to the moving state can be executed as an effect indicating that the degree of expectation for a big hit is high. Specifically, it is preferable to provide a plurality of rotation angles at the movement position of the panel board rear decorative member 2410 so that the degree of expectation of a big hit is suggested by the rotation angles. When the panel board rear decorative member 2410 is not parallel to the panel board 1110, the display of the game board side effect display device 1600 positioned behind the panel board rear decorative member 2410 is shown in FIG. 482(c). It is preferable that the light from the area is directly incident on the front surface of the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 . In this case, the light emitted from the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is irregularly reflected by the panel plate rear decorative member 2410, so that the presence of the whitened portion HKB can be made inconspicuous. In addition, when the display mode of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is to flash a predetermined image at a predetermined cycle, it is possible to further make the presence of the whitened portion HKB inconspicuous.

It should be noted that not only the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 but also other members capable of irradiating light irradiate the front surface of the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 rotated by a predetermined angle. It may be configured to

In this way, with respect to the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 which is originally provided at an angle or is in an inclined state, the game board side effect display device 1600 and other light-emitting decorative members have a high degree of expectation for a big hit. may be directly irradiated with white light that indicates In this case, since the panel board rear decorative member 2410 is illuminated in white, the whitened portion HKB is less conspicuous than when illuminated in other colors. In addition, when the obstruction nail 1201 made of brass is adopted, it may be illuminated in yellow instead of white.

FIG. 483(a) shows that a light guide plate 2460 is provided between the panel plate 1110, the panel plate rear decorative member 2410, and the game board side effect display device 1600 in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 482(c). It is a cross-sectional view for explaining an embodiment that is deformed into. Also, FIG. 483(b) is an embodiment modified from the embodiment shown in FIG. It is a cross-sectional view.

In this embodiment, the light guide plate 2460 is provided behind the panel plate 1110 . The light guide plate 2460 is a plate-like member made of colorless and transparent resin, and has a light guide plate uneven portion 2460a formed of fine unevenness on a part of either the front surface or the rear surface. The thickness of the light guide plate 2460 is 2 mm. In addition, the light guide plate concave-convex portion 2460a as a whole is visually recognized in a predetermined decorative shape such as a predetermined character, pattern, or pattern. Further, a predetermined light emitting portion is provided for introducing light from the side of the light guide plate 2460 . A peripheral control board 1510 controls the light emitting unit.

In a state in which light is not introduced from a predetermined light emitting portion to the light guide plate 2460, the light guide plate 2460 is visually recognized as colorless and transparent, and the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 positioned behind the light guide plate 2460 and the game board side effect display device 1600 are visible. can be visually recognized. In addition, since the light guide plate uneven portion 2460a is minute, the predetermined shape formed by the light guide plate uneven portion 2460a is invisible or difficult to be visually recognized by the player. On the other hand, when light is introduced from the side of the light guide plate 2460, the introduced light is diffusely reflected at the concave and convex portions. It becomes visible to the player in a mode of emitting light in color.

In this embodiment, the obstructing nail 1201 and the light guide plate uneven portion 2460a which is visually recognized in a predetermined shape when viewed from the front are provided so as to overlap each other when viewed from the front. When white light is introduced into the light guide plate 2460, the light guide plate 2460 and the whitened portion HKB can be viewed together, making the whitened portion HKB inconspicuous. Further, when yellow light is introduced into the light guide plate 2460, the light guide plate 2460 and the brass obstruction peg 1201 can be seen together, making the whitened portion HKB inconspicuous. As an effect suggesting that the degree of expectation for a big hit is high, an effect in which light is introduced into the light guide plate 2460 may be executed.

The panel plate rear decorative member 2410 may be arranged behind the light guide plate 2460 . In this case, even when light is not introduced into the light guide plate 2460, the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 positioned behind can make the whitened portion HKB inconspicuous. Furthermore, when light is introduced into the light guide plate 2460, a position closer to the obstructing nail 1201 can be made to emit white or yellow light, so that the whitened portion HKB can be made less conspicuous.

In addition, in a state where light is not introduced from a predetermined light emitting portion to the light guide plate 2460, the predetermined shape formed by the light guide plate uneven portion 2460a may be visually recognized by the player. In this case, the light guide plate uneven portion 2460a should be configured so that ambient light is diffusely reflected and visually recognized as white. With such a configuration, the light guide plate uneven portion 2460a provided in the light guide plate 2460 and visible in a predetermined shape can make the whitened portion HKB inconspicuous.

As shown in FIG. 483(b), the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 may be positioned behind the panel board 1110 at a position overlapping the obstacle nail 1201 in front view. A white image may be displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 at a position overlapping the site where the obstacle nail 1201 is planted in a front view. With the white image, the white image and the whitened portion HKB can be viewed together, and the whitened portion HKB can be made inconspicuous. Alternatively, it may be configured to display a yellow image. When configured so as to display a yellow image, the game board side effect display device 1600 and the brass obstacle nail 1201 can be viewed integrally, making the whitened portion HKB inconspicuous. As an effect suggesting that the degree of expectation for a big hit is high, it is preferable that an effect of displaying a white image or a yellow image is executed.

In this embodiment, the light guide plate 2460 is provided behind the panel plate 1110, and the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is positioned behind the light guide plate 2460. The light guide plate concave/convex portion 2460a, which is provided in the light plate 2460 and is visually recognized in a predetermined shape, and the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 may be arranged to overlap each other when viewed from the front.

When the light guide plate 2460 is in a non-luminous state, it is preferable to display a yellow or white image at a position overlapping the brass obstacle peg 1201 in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 when viewed from the front.

Alternatively, when the light guide plate 2460 is in a light emitting state, white is adopted as the color of the light introduced into the light guide plate 2460, and overlaps the brass obstacle peg 1201 in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 in a front view. A white image should be displayed at the position. Alternatively, when the light guide plate 2460 is in a light emitting state, yellow is adopted as the color of the light introduced into the light guide plate 2460, and overlaps with the brass obstacle nail 1201 in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 when viewed from the front. A yellow image should be displayed at the position.

Alternatively, when the light guide plate 2460 is in the light emitting state, yellow or white is adopted as the color of the light introduced into the light guide plate 2460, and the brass obstacle nail 1201 in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is viewed from the front. It is preferable to display a black image in the overlapping position with .

Even when these configurations are adopted, the light guide plate 2460, the game board side effect display device 1600, and the obstacle nail 1201 can be visually recognized integrally, and the whitened portion HKB can be made inconspicuous. In the embodiments described with reference to FIGS. 477 to 483, the panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a may be transformed into the panel plate rear decorative member metallic glossy portion 2410b. 477 to 483 are applied to the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 and the panel plate rear substrate 2420 in the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 466 to 474. may apply. In addition, various members capable of displaying, moving, and emitting light, such as the game board side effect display device 1600, the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400, the panel plate rear decorative member 2410, the panel plate rear substrate 2420, the light guide plate 2460, etc. Effects such as movement and light emission may be configured to be executed by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the result of the special lottery. Also, based on the result of the special lottery, the effect suggesting the degree of expectation for a big win executed by the peripheral control board 1510 should be configured to start at least before the stop of all decorative symbols. The effect suggesting the degree of expectation of a big hit may end at a timing before all the decorative patterns stop, or after a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) has passed after all the decorative patterns stop. It may be configured to

As described above, when the brass obstacle nail 1201 is implanted in the panel plate 1110, whitening HKB occurs around the obstacle nail 1201 and gradually An event that expands to A state in which the whitened portion HKB is generated deteriorates the aesthetic appearance, and hinders improvement of interest of the player.

On the other hand, there is a demand for knowing the long-term operation status of the pachinko machine 1 in advance in the game parlor. This is because when the pachinko machine 1 is operated in the game parlor for a long period of time, the possibility of failure or damage occurring in various parts constituting the pachinko machine 1 increases. A game machine may be equipped with dedicated hardware for measuring the operating time (for example, JP-A-2012-200434), but in this case, there is a problem that the price of the game machine becomes high. In addition, although it is possible to grasp the accumulated operating time by installing a hall computer that aggregates the operation status of the pachinko machine 1 in the amusement arcade, it is necessary to introduce an expensive hall computer and operate the hall computer. It was necessary to acquire the operation history of the game machine. In addition, when a game store purchases a second-hand game machine, it is difficult to know the cumulative operation time up to that point.

Therefore, in the embodiment shown below, it is made difficult for the player to notice the occurrence of the whitening portion HKB, and the clerk of the game parlor can easily grasp the operation status of the pachinko machine 1 by means of a low-cost configuration. The pachinko machine 1 capable of

FIG. 484 shows an embodiment modified from the embodiment described with reference to FIG. Specifically, a panel plate front decorative member 2450 is provided on the front surface of the panel plate 1110 .

FIG. 484(a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment. FIG. 484(b) is a cross-sectional view along AA in FIG. 484(a). FIG. 484(c) is a cabinet diagram showing the structure in the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment, using an oblique projection method. FIG. 484(d) is a sectional view showing a modification of the panel board front decorative member 2450. FIG.

In this embodiment, a panel board front decoration member 2450 made of colored (specifically, blue) opaque synthetic resin is provided in a shape surrounding the obstacle nail 1201 on the front surface of the panel board 1110 . Specifically, the panel plate front decorative member 2450 is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 , and then the obstacle nail 1201 is planted in the obstacle nail through-hole 1110 a provided in the panel plate 1110 . The obstacle nail 1201 may be made of stainless steel, pure copper, or brass. The panel front decorative member 2450 is provided in advance with a panel front decorative member through-hole 2450a through which the obstructing nail 1201 is passed. Also, the panel board front decorative member 2450 has a decorative outer shape.

As shown in FIG. 484(a), when viewed from the front, the parts located inside the panel plate 1110 of all the obstacle nails 1201 constituting the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 can be visually recognized. is impossible.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 484(c), when viewed from a predetermined angle (obliquely from the upper right in the drawing; the same applies to other embodiments), a specific obstacle nail 1201 (in this example, of the left guiding nails 1232, the first to third obstructing nails 1201 from the left can be visually recognized from the inside of the panel plate 1110. FIG. At this time, it is possible to visually confirm the occurrence of the whitened portion HKB in the portion of the specific obstructing nail 1201 located inside the panel plate 1110 .

By adopting such a configuration, the whitened portion HKB generated on the panel plate 1110 is hard to be visually recognized by the player, so that the whitened portion HKB is generated or the generated whitened portion HKB is enlarged. Even if it does, it is difficult for the player to notice that the whitened portion HKB has been generated, and it is possible to prevent it from hindering the improvement of interest.

On the other hand, through the panel plate 1110, the vicinity of the tip portion of the specific obstacle nail 1201 is configured to be visible from a predetermined direction. As a result, the amusement arcade can open the door frame 3 or remove the game board 5' from the predetermined angle with the game board 5' attached to the main body frame 4 and with the door frame 3 closed. It becomes possible to visually recognize the vicinity of the tip portion of a specific obstructing nail 1201 through the glass plate 192 from the front. Then, the state of occurrence of the whitened portion HKB around the tip portion of the specific obstructing nail 1201, specifically whether or not the whitened portion HKB has occurred, and if the whitened portion HKB has occurred, its size and the like are determined. It becomes possible to check the pachinko machine 1, and if the pachinko machine 1 fails or is damaged, it is possible to take measures such as performing maintenance actions for the pachinko machine 1, ordering replacement parts, and preparing a pachinko machine 1 to be installed instead. It is possible to do it in advance before doing it. Although it is possible to observe the specific obstacle nail 1201 while the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, it is preferable to observe the pachinko machine 1 while the power is off.

The value of the kinetic energy of the game ball shot from the ball launching device 680 gradually decreases while the game ball passes between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 and rises. , the value of potential energy gradually increases. When the game ball passes through the part provided with the backflow prevention member 1007 and reaches the upper part of the game area 5a, the value of the kinetic energy of the game ball is smaller than that at the time of launch, while the value of the game ball is increased. The value of the potential energy is larger than at the time of launch. From this state, the game ball falls through the area where the obstacle nail 1201 is planted in the game area 5a. Therefore, the value of the kinetic energy of the rolling game ball increases again while the value of the potential energy decreases toward the bottom of the board surface. Therefore, the whitened portion HKB is likely to occur particularly near the obstacle nail 1201 planted near the lower portion of the game area 5a.

On the other hand, as for the obstacle nail 1201, there is a possibility that an illegal adjustment is made to change the winning rate of game balls entering the winning opening. In this case, the obstacle nail 1201 planted in the vicinity of the winning opening is particularly likely to be subject to an illegal adjustment act. Therefore, the whitened portion HKB is likely to occur around the tip of the obstructing nail 1201 planted in the vicinity of the winning opening.

In this embodiment, when the vicinity of the tip portion of the obstruction nail 1201 constituting the left guide nail 1232 provided close to the first start opening 2002 located at the bottom of the board surface is viewed from a predetermined angle, the whitened portion HKB is observed. It is configured so that the occurrence status can be checked. The obstacle nail 1201 constituting the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the right guide nail 1233 is not limited to the left guide nail 1232. The same configuration is adopted so that when viewed from a predetermined angle, the whitened portion HKB is visible. It may be configured so that the occurrence status can be checked.

In addition, in the left side guide nail 1232, the game ball does not fall downward between the obstacle nails 1201 constituting the left side guide nail 1232, and the upper surface of the left side guide nail 1232 is directed to the lower right so that the game ball slides. rolling around. Then, the game ball rolled in this manner can collide with the jump nail 1231 provided on the left side in a state of increased momentum. For this reason, it is desirable that the jump nail 1231 provided on the left side in particular be configured so that the state of occurrence of the whitened portion HKB can be confirmed when viewed from a predetermined angle.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 353, a guide nail composed of a plurality of obstacle nails 1201 is provided on the upper left of the left guide nail 1232 in the same manner as the left guide nail 1232 . In this guide nail as well, the game ball slides on its upper surface and rolls toward the lower right (the game ball does not fall between the obstacle nails 1201 that constitute the guide nail. A game ball can fall between the nail and the left guide nail 1232). Therefore, among the obstructing nails 1201 forming the left guide nail 1232, the game ball in a state of increasing momentum can collide with the obstructing nail 1201 located on the left side. Among them, the obstacle nail 1201 provided on the leftmost side can be collided with by a game ball in a state of increased momentum. For this reason, in the present embodiment, the obstacle nail 1201 constituting the left guide nail 1232 is configured so that the state of occurrence of the whitened portion HKB can be confirmed when viewed from a predetermined angle. As described above, the site where the obstacle nail 1201 is planted close to the left guide nail 1232 is a site where the whitening portion HKB is likely to occur.

With reference to FIG. 484(c), an example of visually recognizing the specific obstructing nail 1201 from an oblique upper right direction is shown. and the shape of the panel board front decorative member 2450 . For example, the second obstructing nail 1201 from the right side among the obstructing nails 1201 forming the left guiding nail 1232 can be easily visually recognized around the tip of the obstructing nail 1201 when viewed obliquely from the upper left.

As for the angle at which the obstacle nail 1201 is visually recognized, the vicinity of the tip of the specific obstacle nail 1201 can be visually recognized from an angle of about 30 degrees to 60 degrees (incidence angle when the glass plate 192 is viewed from the front). It is desirable to provide a panel plate front decorative member 2450 . This is because, when an attempt is made to view the glass plate 192 from an angle close to the horizontal, ambient light is totally reflected and reflected on the glass plate 192, making it difficult to view the periphery of the tip of a specific obstacle nail 1201. This is because it may be difficult to Moreover, on the panel plate 1110, the specific obstacle nail 1201 to be observed is reflected in addition to the ambient light, and it may be difficult to visually recognize the tip portion of the specific obstacle nail 1201. FIG.

Although it is somewhat complicated, when the game board 5' attached to the main body frame 4 is visually recognized with the door frame 3 opened and the main body frame 4 closed, the door frame 3 is closed. Visibility is not hindered by the glass plate 192 at a position closer to the panel plate 1110 than in the above state, and the vicinity of the tip of the specific obstructing nail 1201 can be visually recognized.

When the door frame 3 is closed, the tip of the specific obstacle nail 1201 is invisible through the panel plate 1110, and when the door frame 3 is open, the tip of the specific obstacle nail 1201 is visible through the panel plate 1110. A panel plate front decorative member 2450 may be provided so that it can be visually recognized by the user. Alternatively, when the door frame 3 is closed, the tip of the specific obstacle nail 1201 is difficult to see through the panel plate 1110, and when the door frame 3 is open, the tip of the specific obstacle nail 1201 is not visible through the panel plate 1110. A panel board front decoration member 2450 may be provided so as to facilitate visual recognition through the panel.

With such a configuration, it is possible to make it more difficult for the player to notice that the whitened portion HKB has occurred. In addition, it is possible to check the state of occurrence of the whitened portion HKB simply by opening the door frame 3 .

In addition, as shown in FIG. 484(d), the end portion of the panel plate front decorative member 2450 may be chamfered so as to be oblique. By adopting such a configuration, the strength of the panel front decorative member 2450 can be increased, and the occurrence of a situation in which the panel front decorative member 2450 is damaged due to collision of game balls with the panel front decorative member 2450 is suppressed. becomes possible.

Referring to FIG. 484, an example in which panel front decorative member 2450 is provided on the front surface of panel plate 1110 is shown. An embodiment modified to configure is described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 485(a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment. FIG. 485(b) is a cross-sectional view along AA in FIG. 485(a). FIG. 485(c) is a cabinet diagram showing the structure in the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment, using an oblique projection method.

In this embodiment, the panel front decorative member 2450 is made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and a colorless and transparent panel front decorative member 2452 that allows the rear side to be visually recognized, and a colored (specifically, blue) opaque synthetic resin. is composed of an invisible panel plate front decorative member opaque portion 2454 . In addition, the upper end of the panel front decorative member colorless transparent portion 2452 and the boundary between the panel front decorative member colorless transparent portion 2452 and the panel front decorative member opaque portion 2454 have a decorative shape.

As shown in FIG. 485(a), when viewed from the front, the parts located inside the panel plate 1110 of all the obstacle nails 1201 constituting the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 can be visually recognized. is impossible.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 485(c), when viewed from a predetermined angle, the specific obstacle nail 1201 (in this example, the left guide nail 1232 Among them, for the first to third obstacle nails 1201) from the left, the portion positioned inside the panel plate 1110 can be visually recognized. At this time, it is possible to visually confirm the occurrence of the whitened portion HKB in the portion of the specific obstructing nail 1201 located inside the panel plate 1110 .

Referring to FIG. 484, an example is shown in which panel board front decorative member 2450 made of colored opaque synthetic resin is provided on the front surface of panel board 1110. Panel board front decorative member 2450 is made of colored (blue) transparent synthetic resin. An embodiment modified in this way will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 486(a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment. FIG. 486(b) is a cross-sectional view along AA in FIG. 486(a). FIG. 486(c) is a cabinet diagram showing the structure in the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment, using an oblique projection method.

In this embodiment, the panel plate front decorative member 2450 is made of colored transparent synthetic resin.

As shown in FIG. 486(a), when viewed from the front, the parts located inside the panel board 1110 of all the obstacle nails 1201 constituting the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 can be visually recognized. It is difficult.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 486(c), when viewed from a predetermined angle, a specific obstacle nail 1201 (in this example, among the left guide nails 1232, the first to third obstacles from the left) As for the nail 1201), it is possible to visually recognize the portion located inside the panel plate 1110. FIG. At this time, it is possible to visually confirm the occurrence of the whitened portion HKB in the portion of the specific obstructing nail 1201 located inside the panel plate 1110 .

Referring to FIG. 484, an example in which panel front decorative member 2450 is provided on the front surface of panel plate 1110 is shown. An embodiment modified to consist of is described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 487(a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment. FIG. 487(b) is a cross-sectional view along AA in FIG. 487(a). FIG. 487(c) is a cabinet diagram showing the structure in the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment, using an oblique projection method.

In this embodiment, the panel front decorative member 2450 is made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and a colorless and transparent panel front decorative member 2452 that allows the rear to be visually recognized, and a colored (blue) transparent synthetic resin that allows the rear to be visually recognized. It is composed of a panel plate front decorative member colored transparent portion 2456 which is difficult to remove. In addition, the upper end of the panel front decorative member colorless transparent portion 2452 and the boundary between the panel front decorative member colorless transparent portion 2452 and the panel front decorative member colored transparent portion 2456 have decorative shapes.

As shown in FIG. 487(a), when viewed from the front, the parts located inside the panel plate 1110 of all the obstacle nails 1201 constituting the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 can be visually recognized. is impossible.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 487(c), when viewed from a predetermined angle, the specific obstacle nail 1201 (in this example, the left guide nail 1232 Among them, for the first to third obstacle nails 1201) from the left, the portion positioned inside the panel plate 1110 can be visually recognized. At this time, it is possible to visually confirm the occurrence of the whitened portion HKB in the portion of the specific obstructing nail 1201 located inside the panel plate 1110 .

In the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 484, the shape of the panel board front decorative member 2450 may be a perfect circle, and the specific obstacle nail 1201 may be positioned at the center of the perfect circle.

FIG. 488(a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment. The panel plate 1110 in FIG. 488( a ) is provided with a circular panel plate front decorative member 2450 , and a life nail 1230 is positioned at the center of the panel plate front decorative member 2450 .

The shape of the panel board front decorative member 2450 may be a right-angled triangle or a star shape. The panel plate 1110 in FIG. 488( a ) is provided with a star-shaped panel front decorative member 2450 and a right-angled triangle-shaped panel front decorative member 2450 . Nail 1231 is located. In addition, the right jump nail 1231 is positioned at the center of the panel board front decorative member 2450 in the shape of a right triangle. In this manner, one panel board front decorative member 2450 may be provided corresponding to one obstructing nail 1201 .

In addition, the panel plate front decorative member 2450 may be provided for the plurality of obstructing nails 1201 . The left side guide nail 1232 shown in FIG.

Not limited to the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 484, the shape of the panel front decorative member opaque portion 2454 described with reference to FIG. 485, the shape of the panel front decorative member 2450 described with reference to FIG. These shapes may be employed for the shapes of the colored transparent portion 2456 of the panel front decorative member described with reference to , or modifications thereof.

By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to increase the angle at which the periphery of the tip portion of the specific obstructing nail 1201 can be visually recognized. It becomes possible to visually recognize even from various directions.

An example in which the panel front decorative member 2450 adopts a shape such as a perfect circle, a right triangle, a star shape, etc., and the specific obstacle nail 1201 is arranged at the center of them is shown. It may be configured to place a particular obstruction nail 1201 at an offset position.

FIG. 488(b) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment, showing a modification of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 488(a). It is a diagram.

In FIG. 488(b), the obstacle nail 1201 implanted as the life nail 1230 on the left side is located below the center of the circular panel board front decorative member 2450. In FIG. The obstacle nail 1201 implanted as the right life nail 1230 is located below the center of the circular panel front decorative member 2450 and protrudes downward from the end of the panel front decorative member 2450. is doing. Further, the obstacle nail 1201 planted as the jump nail 1231 on the left side is located below the center of the star-shaped panel front decorative member 2450 and protrudes downward from the end of the panel front decorative member 2450. is doing. The obstacle nail 1201 planted as the jump nail 1231 on the right side is located below the center of the right-angled triangular panel front decorative member 2450 and in contact with the end of the panel front decorative member 2450. there is Further, the obstacle nail 1201 implanted as the left guide nail 1232 is positioned so as to protrude obliquely to the lower left from the end of the panel board front decorative member 2450 .

As described above, the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 are located at the bottom of the board. Therefore, the player during the game visually recognizes these nails and the panel board front decoration member 2450 from obliquely above. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the panel board front decorative member 2450 is provided biased upward with respect to the specific obstructing nail 1201 . By adopting such a configuration, it becomes possible to dispose the panel front decorative member 2450 at a more free position while making the whitened portion HKB inconspicuous. Note that the player views the left guide nail 1232 obliquely from above and from the right side. Therefore, with respect to the left guide nail 1232, the panel board front decorative member 2450 is provided biased to the upper side and right side. By adopting such a configuration, it becomes possible to dispose the panel front decorative member 2450 at a more free position while making the whitened portion HKB inconspicuous.

A member visible in a color other than a bright color is placed behind the specific obstacle nail 1201, and when the vicinity of the tip of the specific obstacle nail 1201 is viewed from a predetermined angle, the tip of the specific obstacle nail 1201 and It may be configured so that the member visually recognized in a color other than the light color overlaps and is visually recognized. By adopting such a configuration, it becomes easier to understand the state of occurrence of the whitened portion HKB around the tip portion of the specific obstructing nail 1201 . It is desirable to use a dark color or black as a color other than white or bright color.

Although it has been shown that it is desirable to place a visible member in a color other than white or light behind a particular obstructing peg 1201, it is desirable that this member be flat without irregularities. At least, when the vicinity of the tip portion of the specific obstructing nail 1201 is viewed from a predetermined angle, it is preferable that a flat portion without unevenness is positioned behind the entire vicinity of the tip portion of the particular obstructing nail 1201 .

A display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 which is visually recognized in a dark color when the pachinko machine 1 is turned off may be positioned behind the specific obstacle nail 1201 . Then, when the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the vicinity of the tip portion of the specific obstacle nail 1201 are viewed from a predetermined angle, the tip portion of the specific obstacle nail 1201 and the display game board side effect display device 1600 are displayed. may be configured so that the display area of . By adopting such a configuration, it becomes easier to understand the state of occurrence of the whitened portion HKB around the tip portion of the specific obstructing nail 1201 .

Modifications have been shown in which light-colored or metallically lustrous members such as the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 and the panel plate rear substrate 2420 described with reference to FIGS. The embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 484 to 489 may be applied to the modified example. Specifically, behind the specific obstructing nail 1201, a bright-colored or metallically lustrous member such as the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 or the panel plate rear substrate 2420 described with reference to FIGS. It may be configured to be movably arranged.

In this case, during the game, members visible in bright color or metallic luster, such as the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 and the panel plate rear substrate 2420, are positioned behind the specific obstacle nail 1201 in a standby state, and a big hit is expected. At the time of effect suggesting the degree, it is preferable to configure so that members visible in bright color or metallic luster, such as the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 and the panel plate rear substrate 2420, move to the movement position. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the fact even if the whitened portion HKB occurs at the tip portion of the specific obstacle nail 1201 .

On the other hand, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off, members visible in bright colors or with metallic luster, such as the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 and the panel plate rear substrate 2420, are placed in the state in which the door frame 3 is open and the main body frame 4 is closed. In this state, the panel board 1110 may be configured so that a clerk of the amusement arcade can directly touch the panel board 1110 and move the panel board 1110 by inserting a hand into the opening provided in the center of the panel board 1110 . In addition, in a state in which members visible in a bright color or metallic luster, such as the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear substrate 2420 , are moved, the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear board 2410 and the panel board rear board 2410 are positioned behind the specific obstacle nail 1201 . It is preferable to configure so that members other than members that are visually recognized with a bright color or metallic luster, such as the substrate 2420, can be visually recognized. In this case, as the visually recognizable member, it is preferable to employ a brightly colored member that is not visually recognized or a member that is visually recognized with a color tone that does not have metallic luster. Specifically, it is preferable to employ a member that is visually recognized in a dark color.

By adopting such a configuration, when an amusement store clerk attempts to visually confirm the state of occurrence of the whitened portion HKB near the tip of a specific obstructing nail 1201, the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 or the panel plate By manually moving a bright-colored or metallically lustrous member such as the rear substrate 2420, the vicinity of the tip of the specific obstructing nail 1201 can be visually recognized well.

Depending on the amount of light emitted by the lighting equipment installed in the amusement arcade and the position of the lighting equipment, there is a possibility that the amount of light that reaches a specific obstacle nail 1201 may be insufficient. In particular, such a situation may occur when the panel board front decorative member 2450 is made of an opaque material. Therefore, according to the operation of the operation button 410 by the clerk of the amusement arcade, a specific obstacle nail 1201 may be illuminated from behind. As a light source for irradiating light, the panel plate rear substrate light emitting portion 2425 mounted on the panel plate rear substrate 2420, the game board side effect display device 1600, the above-described light guide plate 2460, etc., are used. These light sources can be changed from the off state to the on state according to the operation of , and these light sources can be changed from the on state to the off state according to the operation of the operation button 410. It should be configured as follows. Further, it may be configured such that the light amount of these light sources can be changed according to the operation of the operation button 410 . For example, the intensity of light emitted from these light sources may be set in a plurality of stages (for example, three stages) so that the intensity of light is sequentially switched according to the number of times the operation button 410 is operated by the store clerk. may be configured. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to obtain an appropriate amount of light around the tip portion of the specific obstructing nail 1201, and it is possible to confirm the occurrence state of the whitened portion HKB satisfactorily.

It should be noted that the light source that has been turned on or adjusted in this manner should preferably be configured to maintain the lighting state for a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 seconds) instead of blinking. Alternatively, it is preferable to configure so that the color of light (for example, white) emitted by the light source that is turned on or adjusted is not changed for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). Alternatively, these may be configured to be performed at the same time. Alternatively, the light may be turned off after the lighted state is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). In this way, by maintaining the lighting state for a predetermined period of time, or by maintaining the light emitting state in a predetermined color for a predetermined period of time, compared to the case where the light source is blinked or the light emission color is changed, the obstacle nail can be prevented. Visibility around the tip of 1201 can be improved.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 484, the panel front decorative member 2450 made of synthetic resin made it difficult for the player to visually recognize the tip of the obstructing nail 1201. Instead of the panel front decorative member 2450, 489, a modified embodiment in which a panel plate front decorative opaque thin layer portion 1110m is provided on the front surface of the panel plate 1110 will be described. Note that the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 484 to 488 may be applied to this embodiment.

FIG. 489(a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment. FIG. 489(b) is a cross-sectional view along AA in FIG. 489(a). FIG. 489(c) is a cabinet diagram showing the structure in the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in this embodiment, using an oblique projection method. FIG. 489(d) is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 489(a) in a modification of this embodiment.

In this embodiment, the panel plate 1110 has a panel plate front decorative opaque thin layer portion 1110m provided on the front surface thereof. The panel board front decorative opaque thin layer portion 1110m is blue and has a decorative shape that imitates a mountain range. After affixing an opaque sheet having a predetermined pattern and external shape to the panel plate 1110, the panel plate 1110 is cut together with this sheet to form an obstacle nail through-hole 1110a, and an obstacle nail 1201 is implanted in the obstacle nail through-hole 1110a. should be set.

Even in such a configuration, as in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 484, it is difficult for the player to notice that the whitened portion HKB has occurred, and the staff of the amusement arcade is not aware of the whitened portion HKB. It is possible to easily visually recognize the occurrence of

The embodiment of the panel front decoration member 2450 described with reference to FIGS. 484 to 487 may be applied to the panel front decoration opaque thin layer portion 1110m. For example, the panel front decoration opaque thin layer portion 1110m may have a decorative shape as in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 488, or the panel front decoration as in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. A part of the opaque thin layer portion 1110m may be made transparent, or the panel plate front decorative opaque thin layer portion 1110m may be made not opaque but colored (blue) translucent as in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. good.

When a game ball touches the edge of the decorative opaque thin layer portion 1110m in front of the panel many times, the thin opaque thin layer decorative opaque layer portion 1110m in front of the panel may be damaged from the end. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 489(d), it may be configured so that the game ball in contact with the obstacle nail 1201 and the panel plate 1110 does not contact the edge of the panel plate front decorative opaque thin layer portion 1110m. By configuring the end portion of the panel front decorative opaque thin layer portion 1110m in this manner, it is possible to prevent damage to the end portion of the panel front decorative opaque thin layer portion 1110m while hiding the whitened portion HKB.

By the way, there is a case where a predetermined decorative member is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. In this case, a predetermined decorative member is provided with a plurality of positioning bosses projecting rearward. Further, a predetermined decorative member is provided with a hole for inserting a screw for attaching the decorative member to the panel plate 1110 . On the other hand, the panel plate 1110 is provided with insertion holes for inserting bosses and attachment holes for attaching screws.

When attaching the decorative member, a positioning boss is inserted into the attachment hole provided in the panel plate 1110 . Next, the decorative member is fixed to the panel plate 1110 by passing the screws through the insertion holes for inserting the screws of the decorative member and the mounting holes provided in the panel plate 1110 and rotating the screws. Also, the decorative member can be removed by rotating the screw in the opposite direction.

By adopting such an attachment method, it is possible to shorten the time required for positioning the decorative member with respect to the panel plate 1110 and to attach the decorative member to the panel plate 1110 at an accurate position. Such a positioning method is described, for example, in the CD-ROM of Japanese Utility Model Application No. 05-059197 (Japanese Utility Model Application Laid-Open No. 07-022791).

By the way, when both the panel plate 1110 and the decorative member are made of transparent synthetic resin, the mounting hole provided in the panel plate and the boss provided in the decorative member are visible through the transparent decorative member. As a result, there is a problem that the appearance of the decorative member is spoiled. Specifically, the inner wall of the mounting hole provided in the panel plate 1110 and the boss located in the mounting hole are visible from the front of the decorative member as a cloudy columnar shape, which spoils the aesthetic appearance. there were.

Further, when a decorative member made of a transparent synthetic resin is attached to the wooden panel board 1110, the mounting hole provided in the wooden panel board is visually recognized as a black opening through the decorative member. There was a problem of putting it away. In particular, when the pattern of the cell plate provided on the front surface of the wooden panel plate is close to white, there is a problem that such black openings stand out.

Means for solving these problems will be described below with reference to FIG.

FIG. 490(a) is a front view of the decorative member 2470. FIG. FIG. 490(b) is a cross-sectional view along AA in FIG. 490(a). FIG. 490(c) is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. 490(a). FIG. 490(d) is a front view showing a state in which the decorative member 2470 is attached to the panel plate 1110. FIG. FIG. 490(e) is a sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. 490(d) when a colorless and transparent synthetic resin panel plate 1110 is employed. FIG. 490(f) is a CC sectional view in FIG. 490(d) when a wooden panel plate 1110 is used.

As shown in FIG. 490(a), the decorative member 2470 in this embodiment has a horizontally long rectangular shape. Also, the decorative member 2470 is made of colorless and transparent synthetic resin. The decorative member 2470 has a plate shape, and when the decorative member 2470 is attached to the panel plate 1110, it has a horizontally long rectangular decorative member front surface portion 2470a positioned in front and a horizontally long rectangular decorative member rear surface portion positioned in the rear. 2470b. The decorative member 2470 has a thickness of 4 mm, and through the decorative member 2470, it is possible to visually recognize the member located behind. The decorative member rear surface portion 2470b is provided with two cylindrical decorative member bosses 2470c vertically protruding rearward from the decorative member rear surface portion 2470b. The diameter of the decorative member boss 2470c is slightly less than 2 mm. Also, the length of the decorative member boss 2470c is 3 mm. The area of the decorative member rear surface portion 2470b is larger than the area of the decorative member front surface portion 2470a, and is formed obliquely as if chamfered from the end of the decorative member front surface portion 2470 toward the end of the decorative member rear surface portion 2470b. Four decorative member ramps 2470d are provided.

As shown in FIGS. 490(b) and 490(c), the angle formed between the decorative member front surface portion 2470a and the decorative member inclined portion 2470d is 135 degrees, and the angle formed between the decorative member rear surface portion 2470b and the decorative member inclined portion 2470d. is 45 degrees. A game ball rolling in the game area 5a comes into contact with the front surface of the decorative member 2470, but the rolling game ball collides with the decorative member 2470 because the decorative member inclined portion 2470d is chamfered. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of damage to the ends of the decorative member 2470 . The decorative member boss 2470c is provided at a position where the decorative member inclined portion 2470d and the decorative member inclined portion 2470d are visually recognized in a state where they partially overlap each other in a front view. The decorative member 2470 has two decorative member screw insertion holes 2470 e for inserting decorative member mounting screws 2471 for mounting the decorative member 2470 to the panel plate 1110 .

In this embodiment, the panel plate 1110 is made of colorless and transparent synthetic resin. The panel plate 1110 is provided with two panel plate boss insertion holes 1110p. The panel plate boss insertion hole 1110p has a diameter of 2 mm, which allows insertion and removal of the decorative member boss 2470c. In addition, the panel plate 1110 is provided with two panel plate screw insertion holes 1110q. The diameter of the panel plate screw insertion hole 1110q is 2 mm. The panel plate boss insertion hole 1110p and the panel plate screw insertion hole 1110q are each cylindrical and pass through the panel plate 1110. As shown in FIG.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 490(d) and 490(e), how to attach the decorative member 2470 to the panel plate 1110 will be described. The decorative member 2470 is brought close to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 from the front, the decorative member boss 2470c is inserted into the panel plate boss insertion hole 1110p provided in the panel plate 1110, and the front surface of the panel plate 1110 and the decorative member are inserted. By bringing the rear surface portion 2470b into contact with the decorative member 2470, the decorative member 2470 is positioned. Next, the decorative member mounting screw 2471 was inserted into the decorative member screw insertion hole 2470e and the panel plate screw insertion hole 1110q, and the decorative member mounting screw 2471 was rotated clockwise to attach the decorative member 2470 to the panel plate 1110. state. The decorative member mounting screw 2471 can be removed by rotating the decorative member mounting screw 2471 counterclockwise. Further, by removing the decorative member mounting screws 2471 in this way, the decorative member 2470 can be removed from the panel plate 1110 .

By adopting such a configuration, the boundary line between the decorative member front surface portion 2470a and the decorative member inclined portion 2470d is positioned with respect to the decorative member boss 2470c. Therefore, when viewed from the front, the decorative member boss 2470c is visually recognized as partially overlapping the decorative member inclined portion 2470d. Therefore, when the player visually recognizes the decorative member 2470, the decorative member boss 2470c and the panel plate boss insertion hole 1110p can be made inconspicuous. Moreover, with such a configuration, the damaged decorative member 2470 can be easily replaced with a new decorative member 2470 .

490(d) and 490(e), an embodiment in which the panel plate 1110 is made of colorless and transparent synthetic resin is shown. An embodiment modified so as to be composed of plywood will be described.

FIG. 490(f) is a CC sectional view of FIG. 490(d) when a wooden panel board 1110 is employed. In this embodiment, the panel plate boss insertion hole 1110p and the panel plate screw insertion hole 1110q of the panel plate 1110 are cylindrical, but do not penetrate the panel plate 1110. As shown in FIG. On the front surface of the panel plate 1110, a decorative opaque thin layer portion 1110m in front of the panel plate is provided so that the plywood constituting the panel plate 1110 is not visible. The method of attaching and detaching the decorative member 2470 to and from the panel plate 1110 configured in this manner is the same as in the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 490(d) and 490(e).

In this embodiment, a panel board boss insertion hole 1110p is provided in a manner penetrating through the panel board front decorative opaque thin layer portion 1110m. Therefore, when the colorless and transparent decoration member 2470 is attached to the panel plate 1110, the circular panel plate boss insertion hole 1110p provided to penetrate the panel plate front decorative opaque thin layer portion 1110m is A black circle with a diameter of 2 mm is visible from the front and spoils the aesthetic appearance. Therefore, in this embodiment, the panel plate boss insertion hole 1110p visually recognized as a black circle and the decorative member inclined portion 2470d are configured so as to be partially overlapped when viewed from the front. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the presence of the panel plate boss insertion hole 1110p inconspicuous.

As the panel board front decorative opaque thin layer portion 1110m provided on the front surface of the panel board 1110, a predetermined character or pattern may be provided by a method such as printing or pasting. In this case, the panel plate boss insertion hole 1110p may be provided in a dark or black portion of the panel plate front decorative opaque thin layer portion 1110m provided as a character or pattern. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the panel plate boss insertion hole 1110p inconspicuous.

In addition, when the panel front decoration opaque thin layer portion 1110m is provided on the front surface of the panel plate 1110 formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, the panel front decoration opaque thin layer portion 1110m provided as a character or pattern may be white or bright. It is preferable that the panel plate boss insertion hole 1110p is provided at the position of . This is because light from a predetermined light emitting means or the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 reaches the panel board boss insertion hole 1110p and the decorative member boss 2470c from behind the panel board 1110, thereby inserting the panel board boss. This is because the holes 1110p and the decorative member bosses 2470c are visible in a state of diffusely reflecting light. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the panel plate boss insertion hole 1110p inconspicuous. Although an example in which two decorative member bosses 2470c are provided has been shown, two or more decorative member bosses 2470c may be provided. In addition, although the embodiment in which the two decorative member bosses 2470c of the decorative member 2470 are positioned on the boundary line between the decorative member front surface portion 2470a and the decorative member inclined portion 2470d has been described, all of the decorative member bosses of the decorative member 2470 2470c need not be located at the boundary between the decorative member front portion 2470a and the decorative member sloped portion 2470d, and at least one decorative member boss 2470c is positioned at the boundary between the decorative member front portion 2470a and the decorative member sloped portion 2470d. All you have to do is

FIGS. 491(a) and 491(b) show examples of attaching the decorative member 2470 to the panel plate 1110, respectively. FIG. 491(a) shows an embodiment in which the decorative member 2470 is attached sideways. On the other hand, FIG. 491(b) shows an embodiment in which the decorative member 2470 is obliquely attached. In this embodiment, the inclination of the long side of the rectangular decorative member 2470 and the angle of the left guide nail 1232 are horizontal. In addition, since the decorative member inclined portion 2470d and the left guide nail 1232 are provided close to each other, the rolling game ball does not come into contact with the panel plate 1110 in the area sandwiched between the left guide nail 1232 and the decorative member 2470. is configured to

By adopting such a configuration, in the area above the left guide nail 1232 where the game ball may collide with force, the game ball that collides with the left guide nail 1232 and bounces directly collides with the panel plate 1110, It is possible to prevent the panel board 1110 from being damaged, and the panel board front decoration opaque thin layer portion 1110m provided in front of the panel board 1110 from being damaged. As for the decorative member 2470, the game ball that collides with the left guiding nail 1232 and bounces back may collide directly, and a partially clouded portion may occur. Better to replace. In this embodiment, the decorative member 2470 can be replaced with a new decorative member 2470 simply by removing the decorative member mounting screw 2471 while the door frame 3 is open.

With reference to FIGS. 492 and 493, an embodiment in which the position of the decorative member boss 2470c and the shape of the decorative member boss 2470c are modified will be described. 492(a), 492(b), 492(c), 493(a), 493(b) and 493(c) are front views of the decorative member 2470. FIG.

FIG. 492(a) shows an example in which a decorative member boss 2470c is provided at a position overlapping a decorative member front face portion 2470a and two adjacent decorative member inclined portions 2470d in a front view. With such a configuration, the boundary line between the decorative member front surface portion 2470a and one decorative member inclined portion 2470d, and the boundary line between the decorative member front surface portion 2470a and the other decorative member inclined portion 2470d with respect to the decorative member boss 2470c. There are three boundary lines, ie, a boundary line and a boundary line between one decorative member inclined portion 2470d and the other decorative member inclined portion 2470d. Therefore, since these three boundary lines overlap with the decorative member boss 2470c, the decorative member boss 2470c and the panel plate boss insertion hole 1110p can be made less conspicuous.

FIG. 492(b) shows an example in which a decorative member boss 2470c is provided at a position that does not overlap the decorative member front surface portion 2470a in front view, but overlaps two adjacent decorative member inclined portions 2470d in front view. Even with such a configuration, the decorative member boss 2470c and the panel plate boss insertion hole 1110p can be made inconspicuous.

FIG. 492(c) shows an example in which a decorative member boss 2470c is provided at a position that does not overlap the decorative member front surface portion 2470a in front view but overlaps the decorative member inclined portion 2470d in front view. Even with such a configuration, the decorative member boss 2470c and the panel plate boss insertion hole 1110p can be made inconspicuous.

492(b) and 492(c), when the position where the decorative member boss 2470c is provided is close to the end of the decorative member inclined portion 2470d, the panel plate When the decorative member 2470 is positioned with respect to 1110, the decorative member boss 2470c contacts another member provided on the panel plate 1110 and is formed thinner than the decorative member front surface portion 2470a. Unintentional force is applied to the end of the portion 2470d, and the decorative member inclined portion 2470d may be bent or cracked.

In this regard, in the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 490 and 492(a), the decorative member 2470 is properly positioned while partially recognizing the panel plate boss insertion hole 1110p and the decorative member boss 2470c in a front view. Since it is possible to position the decorative member 2470 at a certain position, it is possible to reduce the probability of the decorative member 2470 accidentally contacting another member. Furthermore, since the decorative member boss 2470 is provided at a position slightly away from the end of the decorative member inclined portion 2470d, even if the decorative member boss 2470c contacts another member, the entire decorative member inclined portion 2470d can Since the force is received, the decorative member inclined portion 2470d is less likely to bend, and as a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility of the decorative member inclined portion 2470d being bent or cracked.

493(a) to 493(c) show an embodiment in which the shape of the decorative member 2470 is changed from a horizontally long rectangular shape to a cross shape. FIG. 493(a) shows an example in which a decorative member boss 2470c is provided at a position overlapping a decorative member front face portion 2470a and two adjacent decorative member inclined portions 2470d in a front view. With such a configuration, the boundary line between the decorative member front surface portion 2470a and one decorative member inclined portion 2470d, and the boundary line between the decorative member front surface portion 2470a and the other decorative member inclined portion 2470d with respect to the decorative member boss 2470c. There are three boundary lines, ie, a boundary line and a boundary line between one decorative member inclined portion 2470d and the other decorative member inclined portion 2470d. Therefore, since these three boundary lines overlap with the decorative member boss 2470c, the decorative member boss 2470c and the panel plate boss insertion hole 1110p can be made less conspicuous.

FIG. 493(b) is an example in which a decorative member boss 2470c is provided at a position adjacent to the end of the decorative member front surface portion 2470a in front view and overlapping two adjacent decorative member inclined portions 2470d in front view. is. With such a configuration, the end of the decorative member front surface portion 2470a is adjacent to the decorative member boss 2470c, and one of the decorative member inclined portions is positioned so as to overlap the decorative member boss 2470c in front view. A boundary line between 2470d and the other decorative member inclined portion 2470d is positioned. Therefore, the decorative member boss 2470c and the panel board boss insertion hole 1110p can be made less conspicuous.

FIG. 493(c) shows an example in which a decorative member boss 2470c is provided at a position overlapping two adjacent decorative member inclined portions 2470d in a front view. With such a configuration, the boundary line between one decorative member inclined portion 2470d and the other decorative member inclined portion 2470d is positioned at a position overlapping the decorative member boss 2470c in a front view. Therefore, the decorative member boss 2470c and the panel board boss insertion hole 1110p can be made less conspicuous.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 490 and 492, the decorative member front portion 2470a is positioned between the decorative member bosses 2470c and 2470c. By providing the decorative member bosses 2470c and the decorative member bosses 2470c at separate positions in this way, it is possible to quickly position the decorative member bosses 2470c with respect to the panel plate 1110. FIG.

In this embodiment, the portion of the decorative member inclined portion 2470d that overlaps with the decorative member boss 2470c in front view has a linear shape, but other shapes than the linear shape may be adopted. For example, it may have an arc shape or a zigzag shape. If such a shape is adopted, the appearance of the front side of the decorative member boss 2470c becomes complicated, so the presence of the decorative member boss 2470c and the panel plate boss insertion hole 1110p can be made less conspicuous. Become. Further, the shape of the decorative member 2470 may be a perfect circle when viewed from the front, and the shape of the decorative member inclined portion 2470d may also be a shape of a perfect circle when viewed from the front. Further, in this case, the boundary between the decorative member front surface portion 2470a and the decorative member inclined portion 2470d is arc-shaped, and is similar in shape to the arc-shaped decorative member boss 2470c. The insertion hole 1110p can be made less conspicuous.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 490, the decorative member inclined portion 2470d was provided from the decorative member front surface portion 2470a toward the decorative member rear surface portion 2470b. An embodiment modified to provide a first inclined portion 2470f and a decorative member second inclined portion 2470g will be described with reference to FIG.

494(a) is a front view of the decorative member 2470. FIG. FIG. 494(b) is a sectional view along AA in FIG. 494(a). FIG. 494(c) is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA in an embodiment modified from the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 494(a).

As shown in FIGS. 494(a) and 494(b), the decorative member 2470 in this embodiment has a decorative member first inclined portion 2470f and a decorative member second inclined portion 2470g. The angle between the decorative member front surface portion 2470a and the decorative member first inclined portion 2470f is 155 degrees. The angle formed by the decorative member first inclined portion 2470f and the decorative member second inclined portion 2470g is 160 degrees. The angle formed by the decorative member second inclined portion 2470g and the decorative member rear surface portion 2470b is 45 degrees. The decorative member boss 2470c is provided at a position overlapping the decorative member first inclined portion 2470f in a front view.

In this embodiment, since the boundary between the decorative member first inclined portion 2470f and the decorative member second inclined portion 2470g is visually recognized by the player in a straight line, the decorative member It is possible to make the presence of the boss 2470c and the panel plate boss insertion hole 1110p less conspicuous.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 494(a) and 494(b), the decorative member first inclined portion 2470f is flat, but may be curved. FIG. 494(c) shows an embodiment in which the decorative member first inclined portion 2470f is configured to have a curved surface. In this embodiment, the decorative member boss 2470c is provided at a position overlapping the curved decorative member first inclined portion 2470f in a front view. With such a configuration, the decorative member boss 2470c and the panel plate boss insertion hole 1110p are bent and visible, so that the presence of the decorative member boss 2470c and the panel plate boss insertion hole 1110p becomes less noticeable. It becomes possible to

In the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 494(a), the decorative member boss 2470c is provided at a position overlapping the decorative member first inclined portion 2470f in a front view. An embodiment modified to provide is described with reference to FIG. 495(a).

495(a) is a front view of the decorative member 2470. FIG. FIG. 495(b) is a sectional view along AA in FIG. 495(a). FIG. 495(c) is a BB cross-sectional view of an embodiment modified from the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 495(a). FIG. 495(d) is a front view of the decorative member 2470 in an embodiment in which the position of the decorative member boss 2470c is modified.

As shown in FIG. 495(b), the decorative member boss 2470c provided on the lower left side of the decorative member 2470 is positioned with respect to the boundary formed by the decorative member first sloped portion 2470f and the decorative member second sloped portion 2470g when viewed from the front. It is provided in a position overlapping with. Also, as shown in FIG. 495(c), the decorative member boss 2470c provided on the upper right side of the decorative member 2470 is positioned with respect to the boundary formed by the decorative member front surface portion 2470a and the decorative member first inclined portion 2470f when viewed from the front. It is provided in a position overlapping with.

Also, as shown in FIG. 495(d), the decorative member boss 2470c provided on the lower left side of the decorative member 2470 is the boundary line between the decorative member first inclined portion 2470f and the decorative member first inclined portion 2470f. The boundary line between the first inclined portion 2470f and the decorative member second inclined portion 2470g and the boundary line between the decorative member second inclined portion 2470g and the decorative member second inclined portion 2470g overlap each other in a front view. is provided.

Also, as shown in FIG. 495(d), the decorative member boss 2470c provided on the upper right of the decorative member 2470 is located at the boundary between the decorative member first inclined portion 2470f and the decorative member first inclined portion 2470f. It is provided at a position where it overlaps with each of the boundary lines formed by the first inclined portion 2470f and the decorative member second inclined portion 2470g when viewed from the front.

In this way, a first plate portion (eg, panel plate 1110) having a positioning hole portion (eg, panel plate boss insertion hole 1110p) and a positioning protrusion (eg, decorative member boss 2470c) inserted into the positioning hole portion. and a chamfered portion (for example, a decorative member inclined portion 2470d) provided from the front to the rear, and a transparent second plate portion (for example, a decorative member 2470) having a positioning protrusion inserted into the positioning hole. In this state, at least a portion of the positioning protrusion overlaps the chamfered portion in a front view, so that the presence of the positioning protrusion and the positioning hole can be made less conspicuous.

An example in which the panel plate boss insertion hole 1110p and the panel plate screw insertion hole 1110q pass through the panel plate 1110 has been shown, but the panel plate boss insertion hole and the panel plate screw insertion hole do not pass through the panel plate 1110. Instead, it may be configured such that it is provided only halfway through the panel plate 1110 . For example, the length of the panel plate boss insertion hole 1110p may be set to the same length as the decorative member boss 2470c, and the length of the panel plate screw insertion hole 1110q may be set to the same length as the decorative member mounting screw 2471.

By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to shorten the length of the panel plate boss insertion hole 1110p and the panel plate screw insertion hole 1110q that are visible from the front through the transparent panel plate 1110, so that the panel plate boss can be inserted. It is possible to make the presence of the holes 1110p and the panel plate screw insertion holes 1110q less conspicuous.

A colored transparent synthetic resin may be employed as a material for forming the decorative member 2470 . In this case, the thickness of the portion provided with the decorative member boss 2470c is 7 mm to 8 mm, and the thickness of the portion not provided with the decorative member boss 2470c is 4 mm. Therefore, the portion provided with the decorative member boss 2470c appears darker than the portion not provided with the decorative member boss 2470c. For example, even if a blue colored synthetic resin is used as the decorative member 2470, the area where the decorative member boss 2470c is not provided is relatively light blue, and the area where the decorative member boss 2470c is provided is relatively dark blue. It will be visible in blue. Although the decorative member boss 2470c is visually conspicuous in this manner, the boundary line between the decorative member front surface portion 2470a and the decorative member inclined portion 2470d is positioned with respect to the decorative member boss 2470c. 2470c can be made inconspicuous.

The decoration member 2470 may be partially or wholly formed with a rough surface portion capable of diffusely reflecting light by satin finishing, texturing, or the like, and configured so that the rough surface portion and the decoration member boss 2470c overlap when viewed from the front. good. For example, at least one of the decorative member front surface portion 2470a, the decorative member rear surface portion 2470b, the decorative member inclined portion 2470d, the decorative member first inclined portion 2470f, and the decorative member second inclined portion 2470g may be provided with a rough surface portion. Good to configure. A plurality of decorative member inclined portions 2470d, decorative member first inclined portions 2470f, and decorative member second inclined portions 2470g are provided, and at least one of them may be configured to have a rough surface portion. It should be noted that the entire surface of each of the decorative member front surface portion 2470a, the decorative member rear surface portion 2470b, the decorative member inclined portion 2470d, the decorative member first inclined portion 2470f, and the decorative member second inclined portion 2470g may be roughened. Instead, only a part of the surface may be roughened.

By adopting such a configuration, the decorative member boss 2470c and the panel plate boss insertion hole 1110p can be secured while maintaining the transparency of the decorative light and the visibility of the panel plate front decorative opaque thin layer portion 1110m located behind the decorative member 2470. It can be made inconspicuous.

Although an example in which the decorative member 2470 is provided with the rough surface portion is shown, the decorative member 2470 may be provided with a metallic luster portion by plating or the like instead of the rough surface portion. In this case, the entire decorative member 2470, or at least one of the decorative member front surface portion 2470a and the decorative member rear surface portion 2470b, may be a metallic luster portion. Alternatively, the decorative member front surface portion 2470a and the decorative member rear surface portion 2470b may be configured so that only a portion of the surface thereof has a metallic luster instead of the entire surface thereof. Further, it is preferable that the metallic luster portion surrounds the periphery of the panel plate screw insertion hole 1110q. Also, the color of the decorative member mounting screw 2471 and the metallic luster portion should be similar in color. For example, if a decorative member mounting screw 2471 made of stainless steel and visually recognizable in silver is used, the color of the metallic luster portion should be silver. In addition, when the decorative member mounting screw 2471 made of brass and visually recognized with a yellowish metallic luster is adopted, the color of the metallic luster portion should be gold. The portion where the metallic luster portion is provided is limited to the periphery of the decorative member screw insertion hole 2470e, and the portion where the decorative member boss 2470c is provided is not provided with the metallic lustrous portion, but by adopting the above-described method. 2470c should be less conspicuous.

Such a configuration makes it possible to make the decorative member mounting screw 2471 inconspicuous when the decorative member 2470 is mounted on the panel plate 1110 by the decorative member mounting screw 2471 .

Although the embodiment in which the decorative member 2470 itself is provided with the rough surface portion and the metallic luster portion has been shown, the panel plate rear rough surface portion 1110b and the panel plate in the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. Back first rough surface portion 1110c, panel board back second rough surface portion 1110d, panel board back metallic glossy part 1110e, panel board back first metallic glossy part 1110f, panel board back second metallic glossy part 1110g, panel board back bright color visible Part 1110h, panel plate rear decorative member 2410, panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a, panel plate rear decorative member metallic luster portion 2410b, panel plate rear substrate 2420, etc. It may be configured such that a member visible in white or bright color or a member emitting light is positioned.

Specifically, the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b, the panel plate back first rough surface portion 1110c, the panel plate back second rough surface portion 1110d, and the panel Plate back metallic gloss portion 1110e, panel plate back first metallic gloss portion 1110f, panel plate back second metallic gloss portion 1110g, panel plate back bright color visible portion 1110h, panel plate rear decorative member 2410, panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a, panel plate rear decorative member metallic luster portion 2410b, panel plate rear substrate 2420, and other members that diffusely reflect light, members visible with metallic luster, members visible in white or bright colors, and members that emit light are positioned. It should be configured to

It should be noted that the obstacle nail 1201 and the decorative member boss 2470c may be provided at positions overlapping each other in a front view with respect to one panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b. Alternatively, each of the obstructing nail 1201 and the decorative member screw insertion hole 2470e may be provided at a position where it overlaps with one panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b when viewed from the front. Alternatively, the obstacle nail 1201, the decorative member boss 2470c, and the decorative member screw insertion hole 2470 may be provided at positions that overlap each of the rough surface portion 1110b on the rear surface of the panel plate when viewed from the front.

Not limited to the panel board back rough surface part 1110b, the panel board back first rough surface part 1110c, the panel board back second rough surface part 1110d, the panel board back metallic luster part 1110e, the panel board back first metallic luster part 1110f, the panel board back second 2 Metallic glossy portion 1110g, panel plate back bright color visible portion 1110h, panel plate rear decorative member 2410, panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a, panel plate rear decorative member metallic glossy portion 2410b, panel plate rear substrate 2420, etc. The same configuration may be adopted for members that diffusely reflect, members that are visible with metallic luster, members that are visible in white or bright colors, and members that can emit light.

With such a configuration, the panel board back rough surface portion 1110b, the panel board back first rough surface part 1110c, the panel board back second rough surface part 1110d, the panel board back metallic luster part 1110e, and the panel board back first metallic luster part 1110f, panel plate back second metallic gloss portion 1110g, panel plate back bright color visible portion 1110h, panel plate rear decorative member 2410, panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a, panel plate rear decorative member metallic glossy portion 2410b, panel plate rear A member that diffusely reflects light such as the substrate 2420, a member that is visually recognized with metallic luster, a member that is visually recognized in white or bright color, and a member that emits light is used not only for decoration, but also by the decorative member boss 2470c and the decorative member screw. It can also be used to make the insertion hole 2470e and the decorative member mounting screw 2471 inconspicuous. In this embodiment, it is not necessary to provide the decorative member boss 2470c at the boundary between the decorative member front surface portion 2470a and the decorative member inclined portion 2470d. 2470c may be provided.

Character role 9100, snowman role 9200, rabbit role 6000, stump role 6100, stump part 6200, stump box part 6300, grass role 6400, and mountain role 6500 described with reference to FIGS. , the first giant tree role 6600, the first cloud role 6700, and the back grass role 6800, which are members that diffusely reflect light, members that are visible with metallic luster, and are visible with white or bright colors. The panel board back rough surface portion 1110b, the panel board back first rough surface part 1110c, the panel board back second rough surface part 1110d, the panel board back metallic glossy part 1110e, and the panel board back first metal Glossy portion 1110f, panel plate back second metallic gloss portion 1110g, panel plate back bright color visible portion 1110h, panel plate rear decorative member 2410, panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a, panel plate rear decorative member metallic glossy portion 2410b, panel As with the board rear substrate 2420 and the like, it may be provided at a position overlapping the obstructing nail 1201, the decorative member boss 2470c, and the decorative member screw insertion hole 2470 in a front view.

A decorative member 2470 may be attached to the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 . In this case also, a similar mounting structure using the decorative member boss 2470c, the decorative member screw insertion hole 2470e, the decorative member mounting screw 2471, the panel plate boss insertion hole 1110p, and the panel plate screw insertion hole 1110q may be adopted. In this case, the head of the decorative member mounting screw 2471 is difficult to see from the front, and the helical portion of the body portion of the decorative member mounting screw 2471 and the panel plate screw insertion hole 1110q provided in the panel plate 1110 is engaged with is visible from the front as the whitened portion HKB. When the decorative member 2470 is attached to the panel plate 1110 by inserting the panel plate screw insertion hole 1110q from behind in this way, the portion where the decorative member mounting screw 2471 is inserted is visually recognized as the whitened portion HKB. Become. For the whitened portion HKB that is visually recognized in this way, a configuration that makes the whitened portion HKB inconspicuous as described above may be employed. For example, the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear substrate 2420 may be arranged behind the decorative member 2470 . Alternatively, the entire decorative member 2470 may be made of a transparent or translucent synthetic resin that is visible in bright color or white. Further, the surface of at least one of the decorative member front surface portion 2470a, the decorative member rear surface portion 2470b, the decorative member inclined portion 2470d, the decorative member first inclined portion 2470f, and the decorative member second inclined portion 2470g is subjected to satin finishing, texturing, or the like. A rough surface portion that can diffusely reflect light may be formed.

With such a configuration, even when the decorative member 2470 is attached to the rear surface of the panel plate 1110, the whitened portion HKB generated in the panel plate screw insertion hole 1110q and the panel plate boss insertion hole 1110p can be made inconspicuous. .

When the decorative member 2470 is attached to the rear surface of the panel plate 1110, the panel plate boss insertion hole 1110p and the panel plate screw insertion hole 1110q should be configured to a length that does not allow the panel plate 1110 to pass through.

By adopting such a configuration, the lengths of the panel plate boss insertion holes 1110p and the panel plate screw insertion holes 1110q can be shortened, and the whitening portion HKB generated in the panel plate screw insertion holes 1110q and the panel plate boss insertion can be reduced. The hole 1110p can be made inconspicuous. Furthermore, from the front surface of the game area 5a where the game ball rolls, cigarette ash and dust enter the panel board boss insertion hole 1110p and the panel board screw insertion hole 1110q, and the panel board boss insertion hole 1110p and the panel board screw insertion hole 1110q enter. It is possible to prevent the inner wall of the panel plate screw insertion hole 1110q from being soiled. Cigarette ash and dust mainly adhere to the game ball when the game ball is positioned in the upper tray 321, and move together with the game ball into the game area 5a.

Although the decorative member 2470 attached to the panel plate 1110 has been described as an example of the embodiment, it is not limited to the decorative member 2470, and other plate-like colorless transparent or colored transparent members attached to the panel plate 1110 can be used in the same way. configuration may be adopted. Further, the same configuration may be adopted when a plate-like colorless transparent or colored transparent decorative member is attached to a predetermined colorless transparent plate-like member, not limited to the panel plate 1110 . Moreover, when attaching a plate-shaped colorless and transparent member to a plate-shaped and colorless and transparent member, the same configuration may be employed.

Also, a similar configuration may be adopted as a structure for attaching a predetermined transparent member to a predetermined transparent member. For example, a similar configuration may be employed when attaching a specified portion of a first member made of a transparent material and a specified portion of a second member made of a transparent material. Specifically, it is preferable to provide a boss in one specific portion and an insertion hole into which the boss is inserted in the other specific portion.

2. Description of the Related Art A molding method using an ejector pin for separating a molded product from a mold is known when molding a member made of synthetic resin with a mold. However, there is a problem that the shape of the tip of the ejector pin is attached to the molded product at the place where the ejector pin is used. The shape of the tip of the ejector pin is generally circular. For this reason, the molded product has a circular recessed or protruded trace of, for example, a decorative member having a diameter of 3 mm and a thickness of 0.1 mm. When the decorative member 2470 of the present embodiment is formed using a metal mold using a colorless and transparent synthetic resin as a material, a trace of the ejector pin is left in a circular shape on the decorative member. is not aesthetically pleasing.

Therefore, it is preferable to configure the decorative member 2470 such that the circular mark formed by the ejector pin is positioned on the rear surface of the decorative member 2470 . Further, it is preferable that a part or all of the circular mark formed by the ejector pin overlaps the decorative member inclined portion 2470d when viewed from the front. Alternatively, the decorative member 2470 may be provided with a rough surface portion so that the rough surface portion and the circular mark overlap when viewed from the front.

In this way, by providing the traces produced by molding using a mold on the decorative member 2470 at a position that is difficult for the player to visually recognize, or by adopting a configuration that makes them difficult to visually recognize, the traces of the ejecting pins of the decorative member 2470 can be eliminated. can be made inconspicuous. The embodiment applied to the whitened portion HKB, the decorative member boss 2470c, the panel plate boss insertion hole 1110p, etc. may also be applied to the mark of the ejector pin that the decorative member 2470 has. In this case as well, the same effects as in the embodiment with respect to the whitened portion HKB and the decorative member boss 2470c are obtained.

By the way, among game machines, for example, a pachinko machine, generally, each player sits on a seat facing the front of the pachinko machine and plays a game. At this time, the position of the player's eyes and the distance in front of the game machine are close, and the player's eyes are positioned almost in front of the center position of the pachinko machine, although there are considerable differences in height due to age, gender, etc. Become. Then, depending on the movement of the game ball rolling in the game area about the center position of the pachinko machine, the decoration state such as the light emission and movement of the decorative member, or the game state, the line of sight is directed vertically, horizontally, or diagonally. It is shifted in a predetermined direction such as up. Therefore, when the central position of the game machine is the center, the member provided at the point where the player shifts the line of sight in this manner may be used as a member for hiding the whitened portion HKB.

For example, when the obstacle nail 1201 planted as the life nail 1230 or the jump nail 1231 is viewed obliquely from above by the player's line of sight, a member constituting the first starting port 2002 made of colorless and transparent synthetic resin; The whitened portion HKB caused by the implantation of the obstructing nail 1201 may overlap and be visually recognized. Similarly, when the obstruction nail 1201 planted as the left guide nail 1232 is viewed obliquely from above with the player's line of sight, the members constituting the general winning opening 2001 formed of colorless and transparent synthetic resin and the obstruction nail 1201 It may be configured so that the whitened portion HKB caused by implantation is superimposed and visually recognized. As described above, the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 are preferably provided at positions overlapping with the bright color visible portion, diffused reflection portion, and metallic luster portion when viewed from the front. In addition, in order to insert the members constituting the general winning opening 2001 and the members constituting the first starting opening 2002, and to pass the winning game ball from the front surface to the rear surface of the panel plate 1110, the panel plate 1110 is penetrated. The cut hole provided by the cutting hole is visually recognized with the inner wall whitened similarly to the obstacle nail through-hole 1110a. can be configured to

In this way, when viewed from a predetermined angle (for example, obliquely above) different from the front view, the winning opening member (for example, the member constituting the general winning opening 2001, the member constituting the first starting opening 2002) and the obstacle Even in a configuration where the implanted portion of the nail 1201 overlaps and is visually recognized, the whitened portion HKB can be made inconspicuous. It should be noted that, when viewed from a predetermined angle, it may be configured such that the bright color visual recognition portion, the irregular reflection portion, or the metallic luster portion and the implanted portion of the obstructing nail 1201 are visually recognized. In addition, the presence of the whitened portion HKB can be made inconspicuous in both cases of viewing from the front and from a predetermined angle different from the viewing from the front.

As shown in FIG. 491, the decorative member 2470 is provided above the obstacle nail 1201 that constitutes the left guide nail 1232 and the left jump nail 1231 . By adopting such a configuration, the whitened portion HKB and the decorative member generated by the planting of the obstacle nail 1201 constituting the left guide nail 1232 and the left jump nail 1231 are observed obliquely from above with the player's line of sight. 2470 are superimposed and visually recognized, the whitened portion HKB can be made inconspicuous. Specifically, the decorative member front surface portion 2470a, the decorative member rear surface portion 2470b, the decorative member boss 2470c, the decorative member inclined portion 2470d, the decorative member mounting screw 2471, etc. Since it is visually recognized on the front side, the whitened portion HKB can be made inconspicuous as a result. Moreover, the panel plate boss insertion hole 1110p and the panel plate screw insertion hole 1110q for attaching the decorative member 2470 to the panel plate 1110 are also visible overlapping the whitened portion HKB, so that the whitened portion HKB can be made inconspicuous. .

The decorative member 2470 may be provided below the obstacle nail 1201 that constitutes the left guide nail 1232 and the left jump nail 1231 . In this case, when viewed obliquely from above by the player's line of sight, the whitened portion HKB generated by the planting of the obstacle nail 1201 constituting the left guide nail 1232 and the left jump nail 1231 is located near the decorative member boss 2470c and the decorative member attachment. The decorative member 2470 may be provided at a position where it can be seen overlapping with the screw 2471, the panel plate boss insertion hole 1110p, and the panel plate screw insertion hole 1110q. With such a configuration, the whitened portion HKB can be made inconspicuous.

By the way, game machines may be installed in game shops for several years. On the other hand, the history of game boards formed by planting obstacle nails in transparent panel boards is shorter than the history of game boards formed by planting obstacle nails in wooden panel boards. It is only in the last 10 years or so that game machines installed on simple panel boards have been installed in amusement arcades in earnest. Furthermore, the playability of the game machine itself is constantly evolving. For this reason, the construction of the gauge formed by driving the obstacle nails and the device provided on the game board change each time, and the number of obstacle nails planted in the transparent panel plate and the number of obstacle nails implanted are changed accordingly. The position, spacing between obstructing nails, etc. also change. For this reason, it is necessary to verify whether the pattern of the gauge configuration that can be generated in various ways is likely to cause the whitening portion HKB or whether the whitening portion HKB is less likely to occur. It is in the current situation that it takes a month.

Until now, as obstacle nails that receive an impact due to collision from a game ball, especially immediately after launching, for example, a plurality of obstacle nails 1201 planted in the upper left of the game area 5a, and a plurality of obstacle nails 1201 planted in the right side of the game area 5a. There is a predetermined blocking nail 1201 of the plurality of blocking nails 1201 . Further, after that, as an obstacle nail 1201 on which game balls flowing down and rolling in the game area concentrate according to the game state, for example, a game ball rolling from the upper left of the game area 5a, which concentrates during a normal game, is predetermined. A plurality of obstacle nails 1201 planted on the left side of the game area 5a that collide with each other with probability, and an obstacle nail 1201 (jump nail) provided corresponding to the rolling path from the upper left of the game area 5a to the first start opening 2002 1231, a life nail 1230, a left guide nail 1232), and an obstruction nail 1201 provided near the big winning opening 2005, which is concentrated during a big win game, is presumed to deteriorate the whitened portion HKB.

In the embodiment described below, before a quality problem that may affect the progress of a game or the aesthetics perceived by a player occurs in the operation of a certain gaming machine in a gaming parlor, such a An embodiment is described that allows a store clerk to determine whether a quality problem is likely to occur.

In order to make the whitened part HKB inconspicuous, a bright color visible part, a diffused reflection part, and a metallic luster part are provided behind the planted part of the obstacle nail 1201 when viewed from the front. Although an example has been shown, in order to solve the above problem, a configuration may be employed in which the whitened portion HKB is intentionally implanted in a conspicuous position for a predetermined obstructing nail 1201 among the obstructing nails 1201 .

Specifically, among the obstructing nails 1201 constituting the left guiding nail 1232, the first obstructing nail 1201 and the second obstructing nail 1201 from the left are decorative members that are not bright in front view (preferably dark decorations). member).

By adopting such a configuration, the occurrence of the whitened portion HKB of some predetermined obstructive nails 1201 can be clearly visually recognized while making the whitened portion HKB inconspicuous for many of the obstructive nails 1201 . Therefore, it is possible to easily estimate the accumulated operating time of the game machine, and to use it as an index of whether or not the game machine is likely to have a quality problem.

As the dark-colored decorative member, it is desirable to employ a decorative member having a black-based decoration, for example, in order to make the whitened portion HKB more conspicuous. Alternatively, a liquid crystal display device or the like, which is often used as a performance display device, may be used as a basic device that constitutes a game machine. For example, the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 described with reference to FIGS. 250 to 253 is viewed as a black plane on the front surface when the pachinko machine 1 is powered off.

FIG. 496 shows an embodiment modified from the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 496 is a front view of the game board 5. FIG. In this embodiment, a game board side effect display device 1600 is provided behind a colorless and transparent panel plate 1110, and a life nail 1230, a jump nail 1231, a left guiding nail 1232, and other obstacles planted in the panel plate 1110 are displayed. A part of the nail 1201 is provided at a position overlapping the display area 1600a of the game board side effect display device 1600 in a front view. When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off, the front surface of the display area 1600a is visually recognized as a black plane.

In this way, the display area 1600a of the game board side effect display device 1600, which is visually recognized as a dark decorative member or a black surface, overlaps in a front view, or in a predetermined direction centered on the center position of the pachinko machine as described above. If a prescribed obstacle nail 1201 is planted in a position overlapping with a dark decorative member or a display area 1600a of the game board side effect display device 1600 when the line of sight is tilted at a prescribed angle, a whitened portion HKB in the prescribed obstacle nail 1201 is formed. It becomes easy to confirm the occurrence state of

By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to determine the occurrence of the whitened portion HKB for the predetermined obstacle nail 1201 planted at a position overlapping the dark colored decorative member or the display area 1600a of the game board side effect display device 1600 when viewed from the front. It becomes easy to confirm. It should be noted that, instead of viewing from the front, as described above, a dark-colored decorative member or a game board side is placed at a position overlapping the predetermined obstacle nail 1201 when the line of sight is tilted at a predetermined angle in a predetermined direction about the center position of the pachinko machine. It may be configured such that the display area 1600a of the effect display device 1600 is positioned. Also, this configuration may be adopted for the obstructing nail 1201 in another embodiment to improve the visibility of the whitened portion HKB.

The predetermined obstacle nail 1201 that allows the whitened portion HKB to be visually recognized may be planted in such a manner as to penetrate the panel front decoration member 2450 or the panel front decoration opaque thin layer portion 1110m. Alternatively, it may be planted in such a manner that neither the panel front decoration member 2450 nor the panel front decoration opaque thin layer portion 1110m penetrates.

FIG. 497 shows an embodiment modified from the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 497 is a front view of the game board 5. FIG. In this embodiment, the back surface of the panel plate 1110 is provided with a panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b. The life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the part of the left guide nail 1232 implanted in the panel plate 1110 are provided at positions overlapping the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b, which is visually recognized in bright color, when viewed from the front. On the other hand, some of the left guide nails 1232 (the upper left two obstacle nails 1201) and the other obstacle nails 1201 do not overlap the rough surface portion 1110b on the back of the panel plate when viewed from the front. It is provided so as to overlap with the display area 1600a.

With such a configuration, the whitened portion HKB of some of the obstacle nails 1201 can be made inconspicuous at all times, and the other obstacle nails 1201 can be prevented when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on. By displaying a bright color or yellow effect image in the display area 1600a in the manner described above according to the game state, the whitened portion HKB can be made inconspicuous, and the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off. , it is possible to make the whitened portion HKB conspicuous.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 497, by applying the above-described embodiment in place of the rough surface portion 1110b on the back of the panel plate, the whitened portion HKB of some of the obstructing nails 1201 is configured to be inconspicuous. You may For example, instead of or in addition to the panel board back rough surface part 1110b, a panel board back first rough surface part 1110c, a panel board back second rough surface part 1110d, a panel board back metallic luster part 1110e, and a panel board back first metallic luster part 1110f. , panel plate back second metallic luster portion 1110g, panel plate back bright color visible portion 1110h, panel plate front decoration opaque thin layer portion 1110m, panel plate rear decorative member 2410, and panel plate rear substrate 2420. can be configured to The shape of these members when viewed from the front is preferably the same as the shape of the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b when viewed from the front.

464 and 465, etc., the embodiment in which the panel plate back bright color visible portion 1110h is provided on the back side of the panel plate 1110 has been described. While adopting the same configuration, the dark color visible part on the back of the panel board with only the color being dark is viewed from the front with the predetermined obstacle nail 1201 as described above, or the line of sight is tilted at a predetermined angle in a predetermined direction centering on the center position of the pachinko machine. It may be configured so as to be provided at a position where it overlaps when it is closed. By adopting such a configuration, it becomes easy to confirm the occurrence state of the whitened portion HKB for the predetermined obstacle nail 1201 as described above.

An example of mounting a plurality of light emitting diodes as the panel board rear board light emitting part 2425 on the white panel board rear board 2420 has been shown, but a method such as printing on the panel board rear board 2420 adjacent to each light emitting diode can be used. The color of the character strings (for example, “LED01”, “LED02”, etc.) for confirming mounted components provided in 1 may be set to a light color (specifically, cream color or yellow). By adopting such a configuration, when adopting the obstacle nail 1201 made of brass, or when the panel plate rear decorative member metallic luster portion 2410b provided on the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is adopted, a gold metallic luster portion can be used as the metallic lustrous portion. When this is adopted, or when yellow is adopted as the emission color of the panel board rear substrate light emitting portion 2425, it is possible to make these character strings inconspicuous.

491 to 495, the decorative member 2470 has two decorative member bosses 2470c. As such, it is preferable to employ a decorative member inclined portion 2470d in which the surface forming the decorative member inclined portion 2470d faces obliquely upward.

By adopting such a configuration, stains such as cigarette ash, dust, dust, dirt on the player's hands and cigarette tar adhering to the game ball adhere to the decorative member inclined portion 2470d facing obliquely upward. In this case, it is possible to make the decorative member boss 2470c difficult to see due to these stains. Although dirt (particularly highly sticky stains such as cigarette tar and dirt from hands) adheres to the inclined portion 2470d of the decorative member facing diagonally downward, the decorative member facing diagonally upward relatively does not adhere to the inclined portion 2470d. Dirt adheres more easily to the inclined portion 2470d.

For example, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 491(b), of the two decorative member bosses 2470c, the upper left decorative member boss 2470c is more difficult to see due to dirt than the lower right decorative member boss 2470c. It is possible to create a desired state.

In addition, in the embodiment shown in FIGS. 493(a) to 493(c), dirt is likely to adhere to the portion where the valley-like boundary is formed by the two decorative member inclined portions 2470d. Therefore, it is possible to make the decorative member boss 2470c provided on the upper left shown in FIGS. In addition, in the amusement arcade, the game area 5a and the decoration member 2470 are periodically cleaned to remove adhering stains. However, when such cleaning is performed, there are cases in which dirt collects in the areas where boundaries such as valleys are formed in such embodiments. If such an event were to occur, not only the decorative member boss 2470c provided on the upper left but also the decorative member boss 2470c provided on the lower right would become difficult to see due to dirt. becomes possible.

When the decorative member 2470 is attached to the panel plate 1110, among the plurality of decorative member inclined portions 2470d of the decorative member 2470, at least the decorative member inclined portion 2470d facing diagonally upward rolls in the game area 5a. It is good to constitute so that the game ball which carries out can contact. With such a configuration, it is possible to efficiently stain the decorative member inclined portion 2470d by the rolling game ball. In addition, the game ball may contact all the decorative member inclined portions 2470 d of the decorative member 2470 . With such a configuration, the game ball comes into direct contact with the decorative member inclined portion 2470d, so that when the decorative member inclined portion 2470d is stained, the decorative member boss 2470c is difficult to see. It becomes possible to

Note that in these embodiments, not only one decorative member boss 2470c, but also a plurality (for example, two) or all of the decorative member bosses 2470c are placed at a position where they overlap the decorative member inclined portion 2470d that faces obliquely upward in a front view. may be configured to be placed in With such a configuration, it is possible to further increase the number of decorative member bosses 2470c that are difficult to visually recognize.

Conventionally, game machines provided with operating means have been studied. Hereinafter, a game machine which is provided with a plurality of operating means and effectively utilizes the plurality of operating means in production will be described. As shown in FIG. 498, the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment is provided with a mission button 3700, an attack button 3710, a left lever 3720, a right lever 3730, and a defense button 3740 that can be operated by the player under the door frame 3. .

The pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment is capable of performing an effect of displaying the own tank by image display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 during the variable display of decorative symbols. In this production, the self-tank moves along various paths, and during the movement to the destination, it goes through battles with enemy tanks, etc., and the result of the battle etc. is structured so that the result of the change in the decoration pattern is suggested. ing. Also, during the movement of the own tank or during the battle between the own tank and the enemy tank, the mission button 3700, the attack button 3710, the left lever 3720, the right lever 3730, the defense button 3740, etc. By receiving the player's operation on the operating means, it is possible to change the content of the performance such as the mode of suggesting the variation result of the decorative symbols.
In this specification, the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 may be simply referred to as the display area.

The mission button 3700 is a button that functions in various manners in the display of the own tank. The attack button 3710 is a button that can mainly attack the enemy unit in the display of the own tank. The defense button 3740 is a button that can mainly defend against attacks from enemy tanks in the display of the own tank. Each button can be pressed downward by a predetermined distance. The pachinko machine 1 can detect each button pressing operation by the player with a sensor (not shown), input the information to the peripheral control board 1510, and use it for production. When the button is not pressed by the player, it is moved upward by a return mechanism (not shown) using a spring or the like.

The left lever 3720 is a bar-shaped operating means that can be used for direction input. The base of the left lever 3720 is pivotally supported and can be tilted in any direction of 360 degrees. The maximum tiltable angle is 45 degrees. The left lever 3720 is structured to return to a vertical state (not tilted in any direction) by a return mechanism (not shown) using a spring or the like when the player releases the left lever 3720 . The pachinko machine 1 can detect the tilted direction and the tilted angle of the left lever 3720 with a sensor (not shown), input them to the peripheral control board 1510, and use them for performance. The player can perform an operation input by gripping the left lever 3720 and tilting it in a predetermined direction by a predetermined angle.

A left lever vibration source 3722 capable of generating vibration is incorporated below the left lever 3720 in the vertical direction. The left lever vibration source 3722 may be configured by a stepping motor having an eccentric weight attached to a rotating shaft or a reciprocating solenoid. The left lever vibration source 3722 can generate vibration by being driven and controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 . Vibration generated from the left lever vibration source 3722 is transmitted to the palm of the player holding the left lever 3720, so that the vibration can be used as an effect. For example, the left lever vibration source 3722 may be vibrated in a predetermined vibration mode in response to an operation performed in response to an operation instruction of the left lever 3720 . Also, the vibrating mode may be configured to indicate the degree of expectation for an event that is advantageous to the player, such as a big win.

A plurality of left lever vibration sources 3722 may be provided within the left lever 3720 . For example, left lever vibration sources 3722 may be provided in the upper half of left lever 3720 and the lower half of left lever 3720, respectively. Only one of them may be vibrated, or both vibration sources may be vibrated simultaneously.

A left lever light emitting source 3724 capable of emitting light in a predetermined color is built in above the left lever 3720 in the vertical direction. The left lever 3720 is made of a milky white synthetic resin, and the entire left lever 3720 can be decorated with light according to the color of the light emitted from the left lever light source 3724 . The left lever light emitting source 3724 is specifically composed of a plurality of full-color LEDs and a driving circuit, and can emit light in a predetermined color by driving and controlling the driving circuit by the peripheral control board 1510 . Mainly the upper half of the left lever 3720 can be decorated with light emission by the left lever light emission source 3724, and it is possible to use light emission modes such as light emission colors and flashing/lighting as effects. For example, light may be emitted in a predetermined light emission mode when an operation is performed in response to an operation instruction of the left lever 3720 . Further, it may be constructed such that the degree of expectation for an event that is advantageous to the player, such as a big win, is indicated by the light emission mode. It should be noted that the left lever 3720 may be formed using other material as long as it can transmit light, for example, it may be formed using a colorless and transparent synthetic resin with a lens cut.

Right lever 3730 has a structure and function similar to left lever 3720 . For example, the right lever 3730 can accept operational input. Further, similarly to the left lever 3720, a right lever vibration source 3732 and a right lever light emission source 3734 are provided in the right lever 3730, and can be used for effects similar to those of the left lever 3720.

The arrangement of each button is not limited to the embodiment described with reference to FIG. FIG. 499 shows an embodiment in which an attack button 3710 is placed on the upper end of left lever 3720 and a defense button 3740 is placed on the upper end of right lever 3730 . In this case, it is possible to press the attack button 3710 at the upper end of the left lever 3720 with the thumb while gripping the left lever 3720 and tilting the left lever 3720 . Similarly, while gripping the right lever 3730 and tilting the right lever 3730, it is possible to press the defense button 3740 at the upper end of the right lever 3730 with the thumb.

The attack button 3710 is made of a milky white or colorless transparent synthetic resin, and the left lever light source 3724 is set to a predetermined light emission mode according to the operation of the attack button 3710. good too. Similarly, the defense button 3740 is made of a milky-white or colorless transparent synthetic resin, and the right lever light source 3734 is set to a predetermined light emission mode according to the operation of the defense button 3740, thereby causing the defense button 3740 to emit light in a predetermined light mode. may be

Instead of installing the attack button 3710 on the upper end of the left lever 3720 and the defense button 3740 on the upper end of the right lever 3730, the mission button 3700 is installed on the upper end of the left lever 3720 instead of the attack button 3710. good too. Alternatively, the defense button 3740 may be replaced with the upper end of the right lever 3730 . Alternatively, two or three of these buttons may be arranged at the upper end of one lever.
With such a configuration, the tilting operation of the lever and the pressing operation of one or more buttons can be performed with one hand.

FIG. 500 shows an embodiment configured to execute an effect of displaying own tank as a ready-to-win effect while the decorative symbols are changing. FIG. 500(a) shows a state in which the decorative design is stopped and displayed. When the start winning to the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 occurs, the left, middle and right decorative patterns start to change.

FIG. 500(b) shows a state in which the left, middle, and right decorative patterns are variably displayed in such a manner that they appear from above the display area and disappear below. The decorative patterns are stopped and displayed with a pattern indicating a loss without forming a ready-to-win state, and when a ready-to-win state is formed and a pattern indicating losing is stopped and displayed, and a ready-to-win state is formed and a big win is achieved. There are cases where it is stopped and displayed with a symbol representing .

FIG. 500(c) shows a state in which the left and right "3" symbols are temporarily stopped and a ready-to-win state is formed. In this embodiment, as the ready-to-reach effect, it is possible to execute a tank ready-to-reach effect in which the own tank is displayed in the display area and moves forward.

FIG. 500(d) shows a state in which display of an effect of displaying own tank has started as a tank reach effect. Specifically, the own tank is moving forward on the road. The decorative pattern is displayed on the upper left of the display area.

FIG. 500(e) shows a state in which a self-tank and an enemy tank are fighting. Also, FIG. 500(f) shows a state in which the own tank has arrived at its destination. These function as effects that suggest the result of the special lottery. For example, as shown in FIG. 500(e), an effect display indicating whether or not the own tank can defeat the enemy tank or whether or not the own tank will be defeated by the enemy tank is executed, and depending on the result of the effect display, the result of the special lottery. is suggested. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 500(f), an effect display is executed to indicate whether or not the own tank can reach its destination without being beaten by the enemy tank, and the result of the effect display suggests the result of the special lottery. .

FIG. 500(g) shows a change display stop mode of decorative symbols when the result of the special lottery is a loss. Also, FIG. 500(h) shows a mode of stoppage of display of the decorative symbols when the result of the special lottery is a big hit. The display of the images of own tank, enemy tank, road, etc. ends just before the variation of the decorative pattern stops.

With reference to FIG. 500, an example of displaying the own tank is shown as the ready-to-win effect in the display area. can be configured to For example, by foreseeing the special lottery result related to the hold caused by the game ball winning the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, the execution of the effect of displaying the own tank is started, and multiple times It may be configured to run across symbol variations and suggest variation results of decorative symbols corresponding to prefetched reservations. Alternatively, an effect of displaying the own tank is executed from the start to the end of the big win, or an effect of displaying the tank is performed from the end of the big win until the decorative pattern is changed a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times). By executing it, it is suggested what kind of game state the game state changed at the end of the big win (for example, whether the probability of being judged as a big win in the special lottery is a high probability state or a low probability state). It may be configured to In this way, the target suggested by the effect of displaying one's own tank is not limited to the special lottery result (for example, the degree of expectation that a big win will occur). good.

FIG. 501 shows an effect situation in which the left hand is required to operate either the left lever 3720 or the right lever 3730 and the right hand is required to rotate the handle 302 . During the display of the own tank, the own tank basically advances forward automatically. At this time, by operating the left lever 3720 or the right lever 3730, it is possible to change the speed of the own tank or move it in the left and right direction. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 501, the speed of the own tank can be increased by tilting the left lever 3720 or the right lever 3730 forward as seen from the player. Also, by tilting the left lever 3720 or the right lever 3730 backward (toward the player) as seen from the player, it is possible to reduce the speed of the own tank. In addition, by tilting the left lever 3720 or the right lever 3730 to the right as seen from the player, it is possible to move the own tank to the right. Also, by tilting the left lever 3720 or the right lever 3730 to the left as seen from the player, it is possible to move the own tank to the left.

An embodiment in which one lever is operated with one hand (left hand) to move one's own tank has been shown, but it may be possible to perform an effect in which the left lever 3720 is operated with the left hand and the right lever 3730 is operated with the right hand. . In addition, since there is a ready-to-win effect, in which the degree of expectation of a big hit is higher than the variation of ordinary decorative patterns, the player does not necessarily need to operate the handle 302, and can use both hands to operate the left lever 3720 and the right lever 3720. Since various buttons such as the lever 3730 and the mission button 3700 can be operated, it is possible to enhance the entertainment even more as a production.

During the display of the own tank, the own tank basically advances forward automatically. At this time, by operating the left lever 3720 and the right lever 3730, it is possible to change the speed of the tank and move it in the left and right directions. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 502, the speed of the tank can be increased by tilting the left lever 3720 or the right lever 3730 forward from the player's point of view. Also, by tilting the left lever 3720 or the right lever 3730 backward (toward the player) as seen from the player, the speed of the tank can be reduced. Also, by tilting the left lever 3720 or the right lever 3730 to the right as seen from the player, it is possible to move the tank to the right. Also, by tilting the left lever 3720 or the right lever 3730 to the left as seen from the player, the tank can be moved to the left.

In addition, when the left lever 3720 and the right lever 3730 are tilted forward at the same time as seen from the player, the speed can be greatly increased as compared with the case where only one of the left lever 3720 and the right lever 3730 is operated. Similarly, when the left lever 3720 and the right lever 3730 are simultaneously tilted backward as viewed from the player, the speed can be greatly reduced compared to when only one of the left lever 3720 and the right lever 3730 is operated. . In addition, when the left lever 3720 and the right lever 3730 are simultaneously tilted to the right side as viewed from the player, the tank can be moved to the right side more greatly than when only one of the left lever 3720 and the right lever 3730 is operated. is. Similarly, when the left lever 3720 and the right lever 3730 are tilted to the left at the same time as seen from the player, the tank can be moved to the left by a large amount compared to the case where only one of the left lever 3720 and the right lever 3730 is operated. It is possible.

In this way, when the tank moves forward, the left lever 3720 and the right lever 3730 can be used to change the movement direction of the tank, thereby avoiding attacks from enemy units and setting up in the field. It is possible to execute effects such as avoiding obstacles such as mines and rocks and moving forward.

A basic mode of use of the mission button 3700, the attack button 3710, and the defense button 3740 in tank reach will be described. By operating the mission button 3700, it becomes possible to fire a bullet forward from the machine gun mounted on the own tank. Further, by operating the attack button 3710, it becomes possible to fire a cannonball forward from the battery mounted on the own tank. Also, by operating the defense button 3740, it is possible to provide a defense shield in front of the own tank to defend against attacks from enemy tanks. It should be noted that the function applied to each button may be different depending on the situation of production.

By the way, in this embodiment, a new condition is employed as the condition for changing the game state. New conditions for changing the game state will be described below with reference to FIGS. 503 and 504. FIG.

When the game ball enters the first starting port 2002, the special symbols are displayed in a variable manner on the first special symbol display device 1403, and the first special lottery result is displayed. Also, in the display area of the game board side effect display device, the variable display of the decorative symbols is performed in a mode corresponding to the result of the variable display of the special symbols.
Similarly, when the game ball enters the second starting port 2004, the second special symbol display device 1405 displays the special symbols in a variable manner, and displays the second special lottery result. Also, in the display area of the game board side effect display device, the variable display of the decorative symbols is performed in a mode corresponding to the result of the variable display of the special symbols.
In addition, when the normal lottery result drawn by passing the game ball through the gate part 2003 is "win", the second start port 2004 accepts the game ball from the state where it is impossible or difficult to accept the game ball. It is possible to change to a possible state.

In the present embodiment, regarding the lottery mode of the special symbols, there is a low probability (probability: 1/300) that the lottery result of the special symbols will be a ``big win'', and a lottery in which the lottery result of the special symbols is a ``big hit''. It is possible to have a state with a high probability of being the result (probability: 1/30).
In addition, regarding the lottery mode of the normal design, the fluctuation time of the normal design is long (30 seconds on average), and the probability that the normal lottery result will be a “hit” lottery result is low (probability: 1/100). It is possible to take a state in which the fluctuation time is short (average 2.0 seconds) and the probability that the normal symbol lottery result will be a "win" lottery result is high (probability: 1/1.2).
And it is possible to take the following four game states that combine these.
1: A normal state in which the special pattern lottery result has a low probability of becoming a "big hit" lottery result, the normal pattern variation time is long, and the normal lottery result has a low probability of becoming a "hit" lottery result.
2: A time-saving state in which the probability that the lottery result of the special pattern will be the lottery result of "big hit" is low, the fluctuation time of the normal pattern is short, and the probability that the lottery result of the normal lottery result will be the lottery result of "hit" is high.
3: A non-time-saving variable state in which the probability that the lottery result of the special pattern will be the lottery result of "big hit" is high, the fluctuation time of the normal pattern is long, and the probability that the lottery result of the normal lottery result will be the lottery result of "hit" is low. .
4: A variable state in which the special pattern lottery result has a high probability of becoming a "big hit" lottery result, the normal pattern fluctuation time is short, and the normal lottery result has a high probability of becoming a "hit" lottery result.
Also, apart from these game states, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "big hit", the following states are taken.
5: A big win state in which the big winning hole 2005 is opened and closed in a predetermined opening and closing pattern. It should be noted that the variable display of special symbols is not performed during the jackpot state.
FIG. 503 is a table showing these five game states.
Thus, in this embodiment, it is possible to take five game states. Then, when a predetermined condition is satisfied during the game, the game state changes from one game state to another game state. FIG. 504 is a diagram showing transition conditions for game states.

The time saving state shifts to the normal state on the condition that the number of occurrences of the special lottery result of losing after entering the time saving state reaches a predetermined number of times. For example, when the jackpot state ends, the state shifts to the time saving state, and in the time saving state, when the number of variations of the special symbols reaches 100 times, the game state shifts to the normal state.
The non-time-saving definite variable state and the definite variable state are continued until a big hit game state occurs.

In this embodiment, as the special lottery results, three lottery results of "losing", "losing with time saving", and "big win" are provided.

When the special lottery result is "losing", the special lottery result is displayed for a predetermined period of time, and then the large prize winning opening 2005 is not opened and closed in a predetermined opening/closing pattern, and the ordinary lottery result is "win". In addition to increasing the probability of becoming ", there is no occurrence of a "time saving state" in which the time until the ordinary lottery result is displayed is short.

When the special lottery result is "losing with time saving", the special lottery result is displayed for a predetermined time, and then the general lottery result is "hit" without opening and closing the large winning opening 2005 in a predetermined opening/closing pattern. The game state shifts to a "time saving state" in which the probability of becoming is increased and the time until the normal lottery result is displayed is short. Even if the special lottery result is "losing with time saving", if the game state is the time saving state, the non-time saving variable state, or the probability variable state, the shift to the time saving state is not performed. It should be noted that it is preferable to generate the "loss with time saving" with a predetermined probability. For example, among the special lottery results, the probability of occurrence of "big hit" may be 1/300, the probability of occurrence of "loss" may be 298/300, and the probability of occurrence of "loss with reduced time" may be 1/300.

When the special lottery result is a "big win", the special lottery result is displayed for a predetermined time, and the big winning opening 2005 is opened and closed in a predetermined opening/closing pattern. After the big win state is finished, the game state shifts to any one of the normal state, time-saving state, non-time-saving definite variable state, and definite variable state based on a predetermined big win breakdown. In addition, the ratio of shifting after the big win state may be appropriately set, and the number of game states to which the game state can shift after the big win may be set to less than four. For example, after the jackpot state, the ratio of shifting to the probability variable state may be 50%, the ratio of shifting to the time saving state may be 50%, and the ratio of going to the normal state and the non-time saving probability variable state may be 0%.

On the other hand, without adopting "time-saving loss", the number of times the special lottery results have been consecutively lost in the normal state is counted, and the number of times the special lottery results have been consecutively lost is specified in advance. (for example, 500 times), after the special lottery result is displayed for a predetermined time, the game state shifts from the normal state to the time-saving state without opening and closing the big winning port 2005.例文帳に追加
In addition, even if the number of times that the special lottery result has been lost during the time saving state, non-time saving variable state, and probability variable state reaches a predetermined specific number (for example, 500 times), the transition to the time saving state is performed. do not have.

Either one of the transition from the normal state to the time saving state based on the loss with time saving and the transition from the normal state to the time saving state based on the execution of a specific number of special lotteries may be adopted, or both may be adopted. good too.

By adopting "loss with reduced working hours" as a result of the special lottery, the game state can be shifted from the normal state to the reduced working hours state without any balls being output. In addition, it is possible to receive the special lottery results in a time-saving state in which the number of game balls is less likely to decrease than in a normal state.

In addition, when the special lottery is executed a certain number of times, the game state shifts from the normal state to the time-saving state, so if the normal state continues for a certain period of time, the time-saving state in which the game balls are less likely to decrease than in the normal state It is possible to receive a special lottery result at.

The details of the big win when the result of the first special lottery results in a big win and the details of the big win when the result of the second special lottery results in a big win may be the same.
Alternatively, the details of the big win when the result of the first special lottery results in a big win may be different from the details of the big win when the result of the second special lottery results in a big win. For example, the breakdown when the first special lottery result is a big hit is 50% for the normal state and 50% for the time-saving state, and the breakdown when the second special lottery result is a big hit. , The time-saving state jackpot may be 20%, and the probability variable state jackpot may be 80%.

Hereinafter, an embodiment of a ready-to-win effect executed using such an operation unit and conditions for changing the game state will be described together with display contents displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. FIG.

Conventionally, by displaying an image of a character or the like on the display means, an effect has been performed that suggests a variable display result of the decorative pattern (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-179063, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-022544). For example, by displaying an image of a predetermined character before the stop of the variation of the decorative symbols, the player is informed that the probability that the variable display result of the decorative symbols will result in a big hit is a predetermined probability (for example, 10%). The suggested rendition was being carried out.
However, some players do not necessarily like to see such suggestive effects. For example, if a certain suggestive effect is displayed multiple times, but the results of the most recent multiple variable displays in which the suggestive effect was displayed are all variable display results that indicate a loss, the suggestive effect Therefore, there are cases where the user feels distrust, such as "I may fail again...", or feels that the suggestive performance is bad, and does not want to see the suggestive performance. Such a tendency is conspicuous in a suggestive effect in which a player is requested to operate a predetermined operation unit, and a display indicating a predetermined degree of expectation is displayed based on the reception of the operation. In such a case, the player may lose interest in the game by being forced to visually recognize a suggestive effect that he or she does not want to see even though the player has purposely operated the operating means.

Also, there are players who prefer that the result of the variable display be clearly announced, rather than being suggested with half-hearted expectations. For such a player, there is a risk that showing a suggestive effect with a low expectation level (for example, 10%) may lead to a decrease in interest.

However, the presence of such a player has not been considered conventionally, and there is room for improvement in the mode of execution of the suggestive effect. In the following embodiments, taking into account the presence of such players, an embodiment configured to suppress a decline in interest will be described.

505, etc., in a battle scene between a self-tank and an enemy tank, a shield bullet is displayed by firing shield bullets from a newly developed self-tank capable of firing shield bullets. Explain reach.

FIG. 505 is a time chart showing the progress of "shield bullet reach" in this embodiment. In this time chart, when it is determined in the main control board 1310 to execute the effect pattern of executing the variable display of the special symbol over 34 seconds corresponding to one start winning, the game is played by the control by the peripheral control board 1510. In the display area of the board side effect display device 1600, the progress of the effect mode in which the variable display of decorative symbols is executed for 34 seconds is shown. In addition, after the end of the variable display of the special symbols and the decorative symbols, the stop display of the special symbols and the stop display of the decorative symbols are executed over one second. Also, in the display area, in addition to the variable display of decorative patterns, the image of the own tank, the image of the enemy tank, a simulated image simulating the attack button 3710, a simulated image simulating the defense button 3740, etc. are displayed. Details will be described later.
506 and 507 show the display mode of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 at a predetermined timing of the time chart explained with reference to FIG. 505. FIG.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 505, t0, t1 to t34, t35, etc. are indicated according to the passage of time in order to explain the timing of the effects. The time between each timing is 1 second. Note that these points also apply to other embodiments and production examples described later unless otherwise specified.

Further, each of the embodiments shown in FIGS. 510-557 is basically a modification of the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 505-509. Therefore, in the description of each embodiment shown in FIGS. The embodiments in the embodiments shown in are applicable.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 505, at timing t0, the variable display of decorative symbols is started. From the timing t0 to the timing t5, as shown in FIG. 500(b), left, middle, and right decorative patterns are variably displayed. At timing t5, as shown in FIG. 500(c), the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern are the same pattern (in this embodiment, the pattern consisting of the number "3") is temporarily stopped and displayed to generate a ready-to-win state. Then, the left, middle, and right decorative patterns are reduced and displayed on the upper left of the display area. At the same time, an image of the self-tank advancing on the road is displayed in the display area. Also, during the period from timing t5 to timing t27, acceptance of operation of defense button 3740 is enabled.

FIG. 506(a) shows a state in which an image of the own tank is displayed in the display area at timing t5. Reached decorative patterns (“3”, “↓”, “3”) are displayed in the upper left of the display area, the image of the tank is displayed in the lower center of the display area, and the tank moves in the center of the display area in the horizontal direction. The image of the road is displayed at the top of the display area, the image of the horizon and the sky is displayed at the bottom right of the display area, and the dialog image of the character "Colonel Dinah" and the window image surrounding the dialog image are displayed at the bottom left of the display area. It shows a state in which a dialogue image of "Sergeant Might", which is a character for presentation, and a window image surrounding the dialogue image are displayed. In addition, the player himself is set as a second lieutenant who controls his own tank, and moves on the battlefield with his own tank with "Colonel Dyna", which is higher than the second lieutenant, and "Sergeant Might", who is lower than the second lieutenant. A production that goes on is executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the sense of immersion in the virtual reality ready-to-win effect.

By pressing the defense button 3740 for a long time, as shown in the dialogue of "Colonel Dina" in FIG.

At timing t9, a white enemy tank image starts to be displayed in the upper right corner of the display area and moves leftward. FIG. 506(b) shows a state in which the image of the enemy tank is moving leftward toward the road at timing t10.

At timing t11, the image of the white enemy tank moving from right to left within the display area is positioned on the road. At this timing, the image of the enemy tank in white may be replaced with the image of the enemy tank in red. At the same time, the reception of the operation of the attack button 3710 is enabled, and a simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 is displayed to the right of the lines of "Sergeant Might". The operation effective period of attack button 3710 continues for three seconds from timing t11 to timing t14.
There are two types of enemy tank images displayed on the road: a white image and a red image. The display ratio of the enemy tank image is set so that when the image of the enemy tank in red is displayed, the special lottery result is more likely to be a big hit.
Two types of simulated images of the attack button 3710, a white simulated image and a red simulated image, are prepared, and the red simulated image is displayed more than the white simulated image. The display ratio of the enemy tank image is set so that the special lottery result is more likely to be a big hit when the player is selected.

A combination of the color of the image of the enemy tank and the color of the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 may suggest the degree of expectation for a big win.
For example, if both the image of the enemy tank and the simulated image of the attack button 3710 are white, the degree of expectation is 10%, and one of the image of the enemy tank and the simulated image of the attack button 3710 is white and the other is white. The appearance ratio may be set so that the expectation level is 20% when the color of is red, and the expectation level is 30% when both the image of the enemy tank and the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 are red.
Note that the color of only one of the image of the enemy tank and the simulated image of the attack button 3710 may be changed from white to red to indicate the degree of expectation. Also, depending on the combination of the color of the image of the enemy tank and the color of the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710, the expectation of the big win is 100%. You may prepare.

FIG. 506(c) shows a state in which a white simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 and a white image of an enemy tank are displayed on the road in the display area at timing t12.

On the other hand, FIG. 506(e) shows a state in which a red simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 and a red image of an enemy tank are displayed on the road in the display area from timing t11 to timing t12. .

When the attack button 3710 is operated during the effective period of operation of the attack button 3710 (timing t11 to timing t14), an image of a shell flying out from the battery of the own tank is displayed, and an image of the enemy tank is displayed. is transformed into a destroyed image. Also, an image of the shell exploding is displayed. Also, the display of the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 ends.

FIG. 505(b) is a time chart showing a display mode when the attack button 3710 is operated during the operation valid period of the attack button 3710. FIG. FIG. 505(c) is a time chart showing a display mode when the attack button 3710 is operated during the effective period of operation of the attack button 3710. FIG.

The display of the destruction image of the enemy tank and the display of the explosion image of the cannonball continue for three seconds from the timing when the attack button 3710 is pressed. For example, when the attack button 3710 is operated at timing t13, the display of the destroying image of the enemy tank and the display of the explosion image of the cannonball continue until timing t16.

There are two types of images of cannonball explosions: one with a moderate explosion and one with a large explosion. Display ratio is set. For example, when an image of a shell exploding to a moderate degree is displayed, the expectation level is +10 compared to the expectation level indicated by the image of the enemy tank and the image simulating the attack button 3710 that have been displayed up to that point. %, and the production rate may be set so that the expectation level increases by +20% when an image in which a cannonball explodes greatly is displayed.

FIG. 506(d) shows a state in which an image of a destroyed white enemy tank and an image of a moderately exploded cannonball are displayed on the road in the display area from timing t13 to timing t16. On the other hand, FIG. 506(f) shows a state in which an image of a destroyed white enemy tank and an image of a large explosion of a cannonball are displayed on the road in the display area from timing t13 to timing t16. It should be noted that even when a red enemy tank is displayed as in the embodiment shown in FIG. Either the image of the explosion or the image of a large explosion of the cannonball is displayed on the road. Thus, the color of the moving tank image and the color of the destroyed tank image are the same.

FIG. 505(c) is a time chart showing what is displayed in the display area when the attack button 3710 is not operated within the valid period of operation. If the attack button 3710 is not operated within the effective period of operation, at timing t14, which is the timing at which the effective period of operation ends, an image effect in which a shell is fired from the own tank is displayed, and an image of the enemy tank is displayed. transforms into a destroyed image. In addition, either an image in which the shell explodes moderately or an image in which the shell explodes greatly is displayed. Moreover, the display of the destruction image continues for three seconds from timing t14 to timing t17. These display modes are the same as when the attack button 3710 is operated.
Thus, the player sees the same display effect regardless of whether or not the attack button 3710 is operated, except for the display timing and the lateral position of the enemy tank. Then, the player recognizes the degree of expectation that the special lottery result will be a big win depending on the effect mode of the visually recognized display effect.

After this display effect is performed from timing t9 to timing t17 (when the attack button 3710 is not operated) at the longest, from timing t17 to timing t25 (when the attack button 3710 is not operated), The same performance is performed again. In addition, the degree of expectation that the special lottery result will be a big hit is similarly suggested in the effect performed again.

In addition, from timing t9 to timing t17 (when the attack button 3710 is not operated) at the longest, and from timing t17 to timing t25 (when the attack button 3710 is not operated) at the longest, the enemy tank moves and is destroyed. However, it is possible to execute a production pattern in which the enemy tank moves and is destroyed only at the former timing, or the enemy tank is moved and destroyed only at the latter timing. An effect pattern in which an effect is executed may be executed. Also, at two timings, an effect pattern in which the enemy tank is not displayed may be executed. In this case, the player does not operate the attack button 3710, and the “shield bullet reach” effect ends.

It is preferable to set the appearance ratio of the production pattern so that the expectation of a big hit is higher in the production pattern in which the enemy tank is displayed than in the production pattern in which the enemy tank is not displayed. Also, it is better to set the appearance rate of the production pattern so that the expectation of a big hit is higher in the production pattern in which the enemy tank moves twice and is destroyed than in the production pattern in which the enemy tank moves only once and is destroyed. . With such a configuration, when this suggestive effect is executed, the enemy tank can be moved and destroyed 0 to 2 times. The player's expectations for the destruction mode will increase. Note that an effect pattern in which the enemy tank is moved and destroyed three times or more may be configured to be executable.

FIG. 505(d) is a time chart showing what is displayed when the defense button 3740 is not operated. As shown in FIG. 505(d), when the defense button 3740 is not operated, the effect display based on the operation of the defense button 3740 is not performed. FIGS. 506(c) to 506(f) show the display mode in the display area when the effect display based on the operation of the defense button 3740 is not performed.

Next, the display mode in the display area when the defense button 3740 is operated will be described.

By pressing the defense button 3740 for a long time during the effective period of operation of the defense button 3740 (timing t5 to timing t27), the image of the own tank and the image of the enemy tank are set to prevent attacks from the enemy tank. Shield image is displayed. The condition for determining that the long press has started may be that the defense button 3740 is kept pressed for 0.5 seconds. Also, as long as the long press of the defense button 3740 continues, the display of the shield image continues.
Although the shape of the shield image is a horizontally long oval in the drawing, the shape of the shield image may be configured to change dynamically during display. Also, the shield image may be displayed intermittently. For example, when the defense button 3740 is kept pressed for a long time, the shield image gradually becomes smaller after the shield image starts to be displayed, and the shield bullets are automatically fired at the timing when the shield image is completely disappeared. A display effect may be repeatedly performed in which a shield bullet is fired at a target and explodes, and a new shield image is displayed. Continuing the display of the shield image includes such a display mode.

FIG. 505(e) is a time chart showing a display mode when the defense button 3740 is long-pressed during the effective period of operation of the defense button 3740. FIG. As shown in this time chart, the shield image is displayed from timing t7 when it is determined that the player has pressed the button for a long time to timing t24 when the player releases the defense button 3740 and the long pressing ends. is displayed. By displaying the shield image based on the player's operation of the defense button 3740 in this way, it is possible to hide the color of the image of the enemy tank, the color of the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710, and the mode of destruction of the enemy tank. is.

For example, FIG. 507(a) shows the timing after the display shown in FIG. It shows a display state displayed when the long press of the defense button 3740 by is operated. As shown in the drawing, a shield image is displayed based on detection of a long press of defense button 3740 . In addition, the dialogue image of "Colonel Dyna" also corresponds to the display of the shield image.

FIG. 507(b) shows a state in which a shield image is displayed at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t9 to timing t11) while an image of an enemy tank is displayed and the tank is moving toward the road. That is, when the shield image is displayed in the display state shown in FIG. 506(b), the display state shown in FIG. 507(b) is obtained.

FIGS. 507(c) and 507(e) show an image of an enemy tank displayed on the road and a simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 (for example, timing t11 to timing t14). The display mode in which the image is displayed is shown. That is, when the shield image is displayed in the display state shown with reference to FIG. 506(c), the display state shown in FIG. 507(c) is obtained. Similarly, when the shield image is displayed in the display state shown in FIG. 506(e), the display state shown in FIG. 507(e) is obtained.

At this time, although the color of the enemy tank image and the color of the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 suggest the degree of expectation that the special lottery result will be a big hit, these images are hidden by the shield image. , it is possible to make it difficult to recognize the degree of expectation for a big hit.

FIGS. 507(d) and 507(f) show a state in which an image of a destroyed enemy tank is displayed (for example, timing t12 to timing t15 when there is an operation, and timing t14 to timing t17 when no operation is performed), and the shield image is displayed. An example of the displayed state is shown. That is, when the shield image is displayed in the display state shown in FIG. 506(d), the display state shown in FIG. 507(d) is obtained. Similarly, when the shield image is displayed in the display state shown in FIG. 506(f), the display state shown in FIG. 507(f) is obtained.

At this time, the degree of expectation that the special lottery result will be a big hit is suggested by the explosion mode of the cannonball and the color of the destroyed image of the enemy tank. It is designed to be able to make the degree difficult to recognize.

In order to hide the image of the enemy tank, the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710, and the explosion mode of the shell with the shield image, the display priority of the shield image is changed to the image of the enemy tank, the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710, and the shell. should be higher than the display priority of the image. Also, it is preferable to set the display priority of the window displaying the lines of "Colonel Dinah" and "Sergeant Might" higher than the display priority of the shield image.

It should be noted that the operation acceptance period of the defense button 3740 is from timing t5 when the ready-to-win effect starts to timing t27 after the second destruction image of the enemy tank is displayed. Also, even if the defense button 3740 has been pressed for a long time, the display of the shield image ends at the same time as the operation effective period of the defense button 3740 expires.

According to such a configuration, the effect display suggesting the degree of expectation can be made difficult to see according to the player's preference, so that the player who does not want to know the degree of expectation does not feel stress. It is possible to provide a game environment.
For example, by operating the defense button 3740 at the timing when the image of the enemy tank is displayed on the right side of the display area as shown in FIG. It can be made difficult to visually recognize depending on the taste of the person or the mood of the day.

With reference to FIGS. 506(a) to 506(f) and FIGS. 507(a) to 507(f), an image of an enemy tank and a simulated image simulating an attack button 3710 are colored white or red. In addition to these, it is configured to execute a production pattern that displays an image of an enemy tank or a simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 in gold with an expectation level of 100%. good too. In particular, it is preferable that the image of the enemy tank and the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 are displayed first in a pattern in which they are displayed twice. In this case, the player cancels the long press of the defense button 3740 for the second display of the image of the enemy tank. You can enjoy the "Reach" performance.

It should be noted that the player may operate the defense button 3740 by mistake for the attack button 3710 . In this case, it is difficult to visually recognize simulated images imitating the attack button 3710, images of moving enemy tanks, images of destroyed enemy tanks, and images of exploding artillery shells. be. Therefore, in the present embodiment, as described above, the shield image is displayed not only when the defense button 3740 is simply pressed, but also when the defense button 3740 is long pressed. With such a configuration, even if the defense button 3740 is mistakenly operated, the shield image is not displayed immediately, so the player who wants to see the suggestive effect feels stressed. can prevent the occurrence of

Although the display of the shield image ends when the long press of the defense button 3740 ends, the display of the shield image may continue for a predetermined number of seconds (6 seconds) after the long press ends.

When the player presses and holds the defense button 3740 for a long time, the shield image concentrically increases step by step, and when the player releases the defense button 3740, the shield image concentrically decreases step by step. can be configured to For example, the shield image may concentrically increase in steps over 2 seconds, and the shield image may concentrically decrease in steps over 2 seconds. With such a configuration, even if the defense button 3740 is operated by mistake, by quickly releasing the defense button 3740, a simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 or an enemy tank image can be displayed. Since the visibility of is restored, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the player who wants to see the suggestive effect feels stressed. In addition, by changing the display mode of the shield image in this way, the image indicating the degree of expectation can be changed from one display mode of not hidden at all, partly hidden, or completely hidden by the shield image to another display mode. It may be configured so that the display mode can be changed.

Although an example in which the display mode of the shield image changes based on the player's operation has been shown, the display mode of the shield image being displayed can be changed independently of the player's operation. may be configured. For example, the size of the shield image can be automatically increased or decreased, the shape of the shield image can be changed periodically, or the transparency of the shield image can be changed. You may Moreover, you may combine these display modes. In addition, by changing the display mode of the shield image in this way, the image indicating the degree of expectation (simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 or the image of the enemy tank) is completely hidden or partially hidden by the shield image. The configuration may be such that the display mode can be changed from one of the display mode and the all-hidden mode to another display mode.

Instead of pressing the defense button 3740 for a long time, or in addition, when it is detected that the defense button 3740 has been repeatedly hit by the player, the shield image may be displayed for a predetermined number of seconds. FIG. 505(f) is a time chart showing such a transformed rendering mode. In this time chart, the shield image was displayed in the period from timing t10 to timing t16 and in the period from timing t18 to timing t24, based on the detection of the repeated hits of the defense button 3740 by the player. is shown. It should be noted that the condition for determining that the key has been hit four times or more in one second may be set as a condition for determining that the key has been repeatedly hit. Note that after the shield image is displayed, it is not necessary to continue hitting repeatedly, and the shield image is displayed for a predetermined number of seconds (6 seconds).
Instead of pressing the defense button 3740 for a long time or pressing repeatedly, when the defense button 3740 is pressed, a predetermined lottery may be held and the shield image may be displayed with a probability of 1/3.

Also, the shield image may be displayed when the mission button 3700 and the defense button 3740 are pressed at the same time. Alternatively, when the operation unit described with reference to FIG. 499 is employed, the shield image may be displayed when the defense button 3740 is pressed while the right lever 3730 is tilted forward.

In this way, by configuring the shield image to be displayed when a specific condition regarding the defense button 3740 is satisfied based on the operation of the defense button 3740, it is possible to prevent the player from accidentally operating the defense button 3740. Even if it does, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the shield image is immediately displayed, and the visibility of the suggestive effect is not hindered.

Operation of the defense button 3740 when the results of the variable display in which only the attack button 3710 is effective and the tank ready-to-reach effect is executed show a failure for a predetermined number of times (for example, 3 or 5 times) in succession. It may be configured so that reception is enabled and "shield bullet reach" in which a shield image is displayed can be executed. In addition, on the condition that the result of the variable display in which the "shield bullet reach" is executed indicates a big hit, the reception of operation for the defense button 3740 is disabled, and only the operation of the attack button 3710 is effective for the tank reach effect. until the result of the variable display performed by is consecutively showing a failure for a predetermined number of times (for example, 3 times or 5 times), the display of the shield image is not displayed even if the defense button 3740 is operated. good. With such a configuration, it is possible to invalidate the erroneous operation of the defense button 3740 and reduce the dissatisfaction felt by the player when the special lottery results of losing consecutively occur.

The display time of the shield image displayed by pressing the defense button 3740 should be set longer than the display time of the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 . For example, in the present embodiment, the movement time of the enemy tank before the operation valid period is 2 seconds, and the display time of the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 is 3 seconds. It is preferable to set the display time of the shield image to 6 seconds. With such a configuration, once the display of the shield image is started, the hidden state of the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 is maintained until the display of the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 ends. It is possible to reduce the operation burden on the player.

After the attack button 3710 is operated or when the effective period of the attack button 3710 expires, an image of the enemy tank being destroyed and an image of the shell exploding are displayed, but these images are also hidden by the shield image. A display time of the shield image may be determined. For example, in this embodiment, the display time of the image of the destroyed enemy tank and the image of the exploding cannonball is set to 3 seconds, but the display time of the shield image displayed by pressing the defense button 3740 is set to 6 seconds. do it. With such a configuration, the image of the enemy tank being destroyed and the image of the shell exploding can be hidden by the shield image.

In this embodiment, the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 is displayed for a maximum of 3 seconds, and the image of the destroyed enemy tank and the image of the exploding shell are displayed for 3 seconds. A time longer than the total time (for example, 10 seconds) may be used. With such a configuration, by displaying the shield image while the enemy tank is moving, both the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710, the image of the destroyed enemy tank, and the image of the exploding cannonball are shielded. Can be hidden by an image.

The display of the shield image that has been displayed for a predetermined time may be configured so that the player can stop the display. For example, by pressing the mission button 3700 or the defense button 3740 while the shield image is being displayed, the display of the shield image may be terminated. By adopting such a configuration, by visually recognizing a part of the effect suggesting the degree of expectation, the player who has noticed that the effect indicating the degree of expectation is actually being executed is notified of the effect. can quickly provide a visible situation. Alternatively, the display of the shield image may be automatically stopped when the suggestion effect indicating the degree of expectation higher than a predetermined level is started. For example, when an image of a golden enemy tank with an expectation level of 100% or a simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 is displayed, the display of the shield image may be automatically stopped.

On the other hand, if the display of the shield image is stopped by satisfying a simple condition such as pressing a button, the effect can be easily visually recognized by the player's erroneous operation of the button. state. Therefore, when a specific condition is satisfied based on the pressing of the mission button 3700 or the defense button 3740, it is preferable to stop the display of the shield image. Specifically, the same conditions as those for starting the display of the shield image as described above may be adopted as the conditions for stopping the display of the shield image.

An operation method for stopping the display of the shield image may be displayed while the shield image is being displayed. For example, in the dialog window of "Colonel Dina", the line "This weakling! Press the mission button to release the shield!" !” should be displayed. With such a configuration, even if the player displays the shield image by mistake, the display of the shield image can be quickly terminated.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 505(e), the shield image can be displayed multiple times by making it possible to accept multiple operations of the defense button 3740 during the effective period. . Also, as long as the defense button 3740 is kept pressed for a long time, the shield image is displayed for an extended period of time and is displayed continuously. As a result, the image of the enemy tank, the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710, the image of the destroyed enemy tank, and the image of the exploding cannonball can all be made invisible.

It may be configured to be able to execute a display effect in which the shield image cannot be displayed or the display of the shield image being displayed is terminated. For example, at the timing when an image suggesting high expectations (for example, a red or gold image) is displayed, the display of the shield image is terminated, and the image suggesting high expectations is displayed for a predetermined period, or It may be configured such that the shield image cannot be displayed by the player until the variable display of the decorative symbols suggesting the degree of expectation is completed. Alternatively, during the display of the shield image, a start winning prize to the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004 occurs, and the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball Depending on the result of prefetching. , At the timing when it is decided to perform a high-expectation production, the display of the shield image ends, and the “shield bullet reach” production continues until the variable display of the decorative pattern targeted for reading ends. In addition, the shield image may be configured so as not to be displayed by the player. Also, as a display effect in this case, an image of an enemy tank that is larger than the shield image may be displayed.
In this way, the teacher can be improved by making the shield image invisible to the player based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. Also, by displaying a predetermined image that is larger than the shield image, it is possible to increase the player's expectation that an advantageous state will occur.

In the present embodiment, the operation acceptance period of the defense button 3740 is started after the start of the variable display of the decorative symbols. You may start. In this case, at the timing t0, it is preferable to display the mode shown in FIG. 506(a).

In this embodiment, the period for accepting the operation of the defense button 3740 ends before the variable display of the decorative symbols stops. 3740 operation acceptance may be continued. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to make the stop mode of the decorative symbols indicating the special lottery result difficult to see by the shield image according to the intention of the player.

By combining these embodiments, the shield image may be displayed from the start of variation of the decorative pattern (timing t0) to the end of the variation display (timing t35).

An embodiment has been described in which the shield image is displayed for a predetermined period of time (such as 6 seconds) under conditions such as repeated hits of the defense button 3740 and a 1/3 lottery performed when the defense button 3740 is operated. It may be configured so that it can be set by the user. For example, during the demonstration period when the variable display of decorative symbols is not being performed and the jackpot game is not being played, by tilting the left lever 3720 or the right lever 3730, the display time of the shield image can be reduced, for example, from 5 seconds to 60 seconds. It may be configured so that it can be set between By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to display the shield image in a manner that suits the mood of the player.

The period during which the shield image can be displayed may be set by the player based on the number of variations of the decorative symbols. For example, when 20 times is set as the number of variations of the decorative pattern, the defense button 3740 is pressed in the tank ready-to-win effect that occurs during the period from when the player makes the setting until the number of times of variation of the decorative pattern reaches 20. By operating it, the shield image can be displayed. On the other hand, if the player does not make the setting, the shield image is not displayed even if the defense button 3740 is operated during the tank ready-to-win effect.

Even if the condition for displaying the shield image again is met during the display of the shield image, no new shield image is displayed. This makes it possible to prevent excessive performance from being executed. On the other hand, if the condition to display the shield image again is met while the shield image is being displayed, the display time of the shield image being displayed will be postponed starting from the timing when the condition to display the shield image is met. may be configured to be According to such a configuration, it is possible to continue to hide the suggestion effect with the shield image while suppressing excessive effect.

On the other hand, if the condition for displaying the shield image again is met during the display of the shield image, a new shield image may be displayed immediately. In this case, the display of the shield image being displayed may be interrupted and a new shield image may be displayed, or a new shield image may be displayed in addition to the shield image being displayed. With such a configuration, the time during which the shield image is not displayed can be shortened, and the time during which the shield image is displayed can be easily extended.

Further, it may be configured to output sound effects corresponding to the type of image of the enemy tank, the type of simulated image imitating the attack button 3710, and the type of the explosion image of the cannonball. In this case, the degree of expectation is indicated to the player by the output sound as well.
On the other hand, for a player who does not want to know the degree of expectation, output of such effect sound is not preferable. Therefore, when displaying the shield image, the output of the special sound may be started at the timing when the shield image is displayed. Then, the output of the special sound is preferably continued until the display of the shield image ends.
Also, when outputting the special sound, the volume of the effect sound may be suppressed. It is preferable to continue suppressing the sound volume of the effect sound until the display of the shield image ends. Also, the volume of the special sound may be higher than the volume of the effect sound. Alternatively, both of these may be adopted.
With such a configuration, the effect sound becomes difficult to hear due to the volume reduction, and the effect sound becomes difficult to hear due to the special sound. can be obfuscated.
It should be noted that, when an enemy tank appears, it may be configured to output a predetermined effect sound that does not indicate the degree of expectation. In this case, a player who does not want to know the degree of expectation can display a shield image and start outputting a special sound by operating the defense button 3740 promptly at the timing of hearing the predetermined effect sound. can.

Even in a game state advantageous to the player, such as a time-saving state in which the variation time of decorative symbols is short, or a probability variation state in which the probability of a special lottery result being a big win is high, the suggestive performance may be executed. In this case, the shield image may not be displayed even if the defense button 3740 is operated. By adopting such a configuration, in a game state in which a big win is more likely to occur than usual, if the defense button 3740 is mistakenly operated, an image of an enemy tank, a simulated image simulating the attack button 3710, or an enemy tank is displayed. It is possible to prevent the destroyed image from becoming difficult to see, and to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the player misses the highly anticipated presentation.

On the other hand, when the suggestive effect can be executed in a game state advantageous to the player, such as a time-saving state or a variable probability state, a shield image may be displayed in response to the operation of the defense button 3740. . By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to hide the suggestive effect even in a game state in which a big win is more likely to occur than usual.
Alternatively, in a game state that is advantageous to the player, the size of the shield image is reduced or the display time of the shield image is shortened compared to the normal state, so that the suggestive effect hidden by the shield image is displayed. You may make it improve visibility a little.

In addition, the suggestive effect may be made executable during the jackpot game state. In the suggestive effect in this case, the degree of expectation that the big win will occur again after the big win game state ends is reported by performing a pending look-ahead, or the time saving state and the probability change state that are more advantageous than the normal state after the big win end. It is preferable to notify the degree of expectation as to whether or not to shift to . For example, when the 10-round big win is being executed, such a suggestive effect may be performed from the 3rd round to the 5th round. With such a configuration, the defense button 3740 is erroneously operated at the timing when the game state that occurs after the big win can be known, and the image of the enemy tank, the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710, and the enemy tank are destroyed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the image that has been processed from becoming difficult to see.

On the other hand, when the suggestive effect can be executed during the big hit, the shield image may be displayed in response to the operation of the defense button 3740 . With such a configuration, it is possible to hide the suggestion effect even during the big win. To make it difficult for a player who does not want to know the game state after the big win to recognize the degree of expectation of the game state after the big win.

An effect similar to the "shield bullet reach" effect in which the own tank moves on the road may be executed over a plurality of times of variation of the decoration pattern as a prefetch effect based on the prefetch of the suspension in the normal state.
In this case, it is preferable to construct such that the display effect in which one's own tank moves on the road is continuously performed from the start of the fluctuation of the decorative pattern to the stop of the fluctuation a plurality of times. In addition, during the variation of the decorative pattern, the degree of expectation of the big hit for the prefetched hold is indicated by the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710, the image of the enemy tank, the image of the explosion of the cannonball, etc., as described above. Alternatively, a shield image may be displayed in response to the operation of the defense button 3740 to make it difficult to visually recognize these images. Then, it is preferable that the display of the shield image is displayed over a plurality of times of variable display of the decorative symbols.
It should be noted that the pending image that is the target of prefetching may be configured to be hidden by the shield image.
In this way, a sense of unity can be produced by performing a suggestive effect that the own tank moves on the road across the variations of a plurality of decorative patterns.

In the event that a big hit occurs due to the "Shield Bullet Reach" effect, in which the tank moves on the road, the display effect of the tank moving will continue during and after the big hit. may In addition, after the occurrence of the big win game state, the degree of expectation that the big win will occur again after the big win game state ends is reported by reading the hold, or the time saving state and the probability that the state is more advantageous than the normal state after the big win ends. It is preferable to notify the degree of expectation as to whether or not the vehicle will shift to the variable state by means of a suggestive effect that the own tank moves on the road. Furthermore, after the big hit, when the time saving state or the probability changing state is reached, the suggesting effect that the own tank moves on the road may be continued until the time saving state or the probability changing state ends. In this case as well, the shield image displayed in response to the operation of the defense button 3740 should be configured so that the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710, the image of the enemy tank, the image of the explosion of the cannonball, etc. are difficult to see. .
In addition, the display of the shield image may be configured to be displayed across the variable display state of the decorative patterns, the stop display state of the decorative patterns, the big win game state, and the variable state of the decorative patterns after the big win game state.
Even with such a configuration, it is possible to create a sense of unity in the performance.

Although the shield image renders part of the image of the enemy tank invisible in this example, the shield image may render the entire image of the enemy tank invisible.
FIG. 508(a) shows a modification of the effect example shown with reference to FIG. 507(e). In the rendering example shown in FIG. 508(a), all of the image of the enemy tank and part of the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 are hidden by the shield image.

Although a portion of the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 is rendered invisible by the shield image, the shield image may be configured so that the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 is entirely invisible. good too.
FIG. 508(b) shows a modification of the production shown with reference to FIG. 507(e). In the rendering example shown in FIG. 508(b), part of the image of the enemy tank and all of the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 are hidden by the shield image.

The shield image shows an example in which the image of the destroyed enemy tank and part of the explosion pattern of the shell are invisible, but the image of the destroyed enemy tank and the explosion pattern of the shell are all visible with the shield image. It may be configured to be disabled.
FIG. 508(c) shows a modification of the effect shown with reference to FIG. 507(d). In the rendering example shown in FIG. 508(c), the image of the destroyed enemy tank and the explosion mode of the cannonball are all hidden by the shield image.

An image of an enemy tank whose display priority is lower than that of the shield image because the shield image is opaque, a simulated image imitating the attack button 3710, an image of the destroyed enemy tank, and an explosion mode of the cannonball are rendered invisible by the shield image. However, the shield image may be translucent, and these images with low display priority may be visible through the shield image.

In this way, the simulated image simulating the first operation unit and the corresponding display corresponding to the operation of the operation unit are displayed in a manner hidden by the image displayed based on the operation of the second operation unit. These images can mask the degree of expectation implied by the
Further, part of the simulated image simulating the first operation unit and corresponding display corresponding to the operation of the operation unit can be displayed in a manner hidden by the image displayed based on the operation of the second operation unit. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize the degree of expectation indicated by the image while recognizing that the image indicating the degree of expectation is being displayed.
In addition, only a part of these images suggests the degree of expectation, and the part that suggests the degree of expectation can be partially or completely hidden by the shield image. good too.

Although the color of the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 is used to indicate the degree of expectation, the shape and size of the simulated image itself may be different instead of or in addition to the color of the simulated image. Then, the degree of expectation may be suggested by the shape of the simulated image itself or the size of the image. Here, it is preferable to configure such that the area protruding from the shield image is larger when the degree of expectation is high. A similar configuration may also be adopted for the image of the enemy tank, the image of the destroyed enemy tank, and the mode of explosion of the shell. With such a configuration, when the degree of expectation is high, it is possible to make it difficult for the image indicating the degree of expectation to be hidden by the shield image.

In the state where the shield image is displayed, a larger shield image is displayed by performing a more difficult operation (for example, pressing the defense button 3740 for a longer period of time or repeatedly hitting it). good too. In addition, the large shield image hides the simulated image of the attack button 3710, the image of the enemy tank, the image of the destroyed enemy tank, and the explosion of the cannonball more than the normal shield image. may
By adopting such a configuration, the player can be involved in the ratio of hiding the image suggesting the degree of expectation, so that the interest can be further improved.

FIGS. 509(a) to 509(d) show modifications of the effect shown with reference to FIG. 506(c). FIG. 509(a) shows an effect example in which a small-sized simulated image is displayed as a simulated image imitating the attack button 3710. FIG. FIG. 509(b) shows an effect example in which a small-sized simulated image and a shield image are displayed as simulated images imitating the attack button 3710 . FIG. 509(c) shows an effect example in which a large size simulated image is displayed as a simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 . FIG. 509(d) shows an effect example in which a large-sized simulated image and a shield image are displayed as simulated images imitating the attack button 3710 .
The degree of expectation for a big win is higher when a large-sized simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 is displayed than when a small-sized simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 is displayed. configured to be high.
With such a configuration, when a simulated image with a high degree of expectation is displayed, the area of the simulated image that is not hidden by the shield image is increased, so that the player is informed that the degree of expectation is high. can be recognized.
In addition to the simulated image, the image of the enemy tank and the image of the destroyed enemy tank may be configured to have different shapes and sizes to similarly indicate the degree of expectation.

Although the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710, the image of the enemy tank, the image of the destroyed enemy tank, and the image of the exploding artillery shell are used to suggest the degree of expectation, the embodiment applied to a certain image will be described in other examples. It may also be applied to embodiments in images. Alternatively, embodiments applied to one plurality of images may be applied to embodiments applied to other plurality of images.

A simulated image imitating the attack button 3710, an image of an enemy tank, an image of a destroyed enemy tank, and an image of an explosion of artillery shells have been shown to suggest the level of expectation. may be configured as suggested. In this case, it is preferable that at least this portion is hidden by the shield image. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to make the degree of expectation unrecognizable or difficult to recognize while making it possible to grasp the progress of the presentation.

As described above, according to the "shield bullet reach" in the present embodiment, the predetermined image indicating the degree of expectation related to the first operation unit is made difficult to be visually recognized by the image displayed by the operation of the second operation unit. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player who does not want to know the degree of expectation with the option of hiding the degree of expectation, thereby suppressing the decrease in interest in the game.

Conventionally, a game machine provided with a plurality of operation units has been known (for example, JP-A-2011-087638). In addition, the effective period during which the operation to the operation unit can be accepted is limited to a part of the period during which the decorative pattern changes. Therefore, even if the desire to operate the operation unit increases, some players feel frustrated that they cannot operate the operation unit. In addition, when an operation is performed during the effective period, a display effect corresponding to the operation is always performed, so the operation of the operation unit sometimes feels rutted. Therefore, in the embodiment shown below, considering that there are players who think like this, an operation means that can be operated for a long period of time while the decorative symbols are changing is provided, and the operation to the operation unit is supported. Therefore, a change in display is not necessarily given, but a special change in display is given on the condition that a specific condition is satisfied.

510 to 513, display examples shown in FIGS. 514 and 515, and the like. In the "special machine gun reach" production in this embodiment, the functions and displays related to the attack button 3710 are displayed in the same manner as in the embodiment described with reference to FIG.
On the other hand, in the “Special Machine Gun Reach” effect, a pattern is executed in which operation acceptance for the mission button 3700 instead of the defense button 3740 is effective. The decorative pattern of the mission button 3700 is in the ready-to-reach state, and operation reception becomes effective at the timing (timing t5) when the ready-to-reach effect in which the own tank moves is started. The acceptance of the operation ends at timing t27, which is the timing after the enemy tank is displayed twice.

The period during which operation acceptance for the mission button 3700 is valid (timing t5 to timing t27) is longer than the period during which operation reception for the attack button 3710 is valid (timing t11 to timing t14). includes a period during which operation reception for the attack button 3710 is valid. Also, as described above, the attack button 3710 is always given a display change in response to an operation accepted during the operation valid period. On the other hand, even if the mission button 3700 is operated, the display corresponding to the operation is not necessarily performed. is granted. For example, every time the mission button 3700 is operated, a lottery with a probability of 1/3 of winning is performed, and when a winning result is obtained, a bullet fired from a special machine gun appears in the display area as an enemy tank. An image of an explosion occurring upon hitting is displayed for a predetermined period of time.

In addition, a simulated image simulating the mission button 3700 is continuously displayed during the period (timing t5 to timing t27) during which the operation reception of the mission button 3700 is valid, indicating that the operation of the mission button 3700 is valid. be

The time chart in FIG. 510 shows an example of an effect when neither attack button 3710 nor mission button 3700 is operated.
In the time chart shown in FIG. 510, at timing t0, the variable display of decorative symbols is started. From the timing t0 to the timing t5, as shown in FIG. 500(b), left, middle, and right decorative patterns are variably displayed. At the timing t5, as shown in FIG. 500(c), the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern are the same pattern (in this embodiment, the pattern consisting of the number "3") is temporarily stopped and the ready-to-win state occurs. Then, the left, middle, and right decorative patterns are reduced and displayed on the upper left of the display area. At the same time, an image or the like of the self-tank advancing on the road is displayed in the display area. Also, during the period from timing t5 to timing t27, acceptance of operation of the mission button 3700 is enabled.

FIG. 514(a) shows a state in which an image of the own tank is displayed in the display area at timing t5. Reached decorative patterns (“3”, “↓”, “3”) are displayed in the upper left of the display area, the image of the tank is displayed in the lower center of the display area, and the tank moves in the center of the display area in the horizontal direction. The image of the road is displayed at the top of the display area, the image of the horizon and the sky is displayed at the bottom right of the display area, and the dialog image of the character "Colonel Dinah" and the window image surrounding the dialog image are displayed at the bottom left of the display area. A window image surrounding the speech image of "Sergeant Might", who is a character in the production, and a simulated image imitating the mission button 3700 is displayed on the upper left of the window image displaying the speech image of "Colonel Dinah". is shown.

By operating the mission button 3700, bullets are fired from the tank's special machine gun and displayed moving, as shown in the dialogue of "Colonel Dinah" in Fig. 514(a). do.

At timing t9, a white enemy tank image starts to be displayed in the upper right corner of the display area and moves leftward. FIG. 506(b) shows a state in which the image of the enemy tank is moving to the left toward the road at timing t10.

At timing t11, a white image of an enemy tank moving from right to left within the display area is positioned on the road. At the same time, the reception of the operation of the attack button 3710 is enabled, and a simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 is displayed to the right of the lines of "Sergeant Might". The operation effective period of attack button 3710 continues for three seconds from timing t11 to timing t14.

FIG. 514(b) shows a state in which a white simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 and a white image of an enemy tank are displayed on the road in the display area at timing t11. FIG. 514(c) shows a state in which a white simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 and a white image of an enemy tank are displayed on the road in the display area at timing t12.

At timing t14, the image of the enemy tank reaches the left edge of the road. Also, the valid period of operation for the attack button 3710 expires. FIG. 514(d) shows the display state at timing t14.

From timing t14 to timing t16, the image of the enemy tank continues to move to the left in the display area, and at timing t16, the image of the enemy tank moves off the screen and is not displayed.

The operation effective period of the mission button 3700 and the display of the simulated image simulating the mission button 3700 are continued until timing t27. At timing t27, the operation effective period of the mission button 3700 and the display of the simulated image simulating the mission button 3700 end.

Thereafter, from timing t32 to timing t34, the display mode is changed to that shown in FIG. 500(f), and at timing t34, the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed. If the special lottery result is a loss, the display state shown in FIG. 500(g) is displayed from timing t34 to timing t35, and if the special lottery result is a big hit, FIG. becomes the display state shown in .

With reference to the time chart of FIG. 510, an example of an effect when the player does not operate the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700 is shown.

Next, with reference to the time chart in FIG. 511, an example of an effect when the attack button 3710 is operated by the player will be described.

The time chart in FIG. 511 shows an example of an effect when the attack button 3710 is operated at timing t12. In this case, the movement of the cannonball is displayed from timing t12 to timing t13. FIG. 514(e) shows a display example when the cannonball is moving. Also, at timing t12 when attack button 3710 is operated, the effective period of operation of attack button 3710 ends.

At timing t13, the image of the enemy tank changes to the image of the destroyed enemy tank. Also, an image of the shell exploding is displayed. The image of the destroyed enemy tank and the image of the exploding cannonball are displayed for three seconds (three seconds from timing t13 to timing t16 in this production example). FIG. 514(f) is a display example showing a state in which an image of a destroyed enemy tank and an image of an exploding cannonball are displayed.

Next, with reference to the time chart of FIG. 512, an example of an effect when the player operates the mission button 3700 will be shown.

The time chart in FIG. 512 shows an example of an effect when the mission button 3700 is operated at timing t12. FIG. 512(a) is a time chart showing an example of an effect in which the mission button 3700 is operated, a bullet is fired from a special machine gun, and an image of the bullet exploding is displayed. Also, FIG. 512(b) is a time chart showing an example of an effect in which the mission button 3700 is operated and a bullet is fired from the special machine gun, but the image of the bullet exploding is not displayed.

In the case of the production example shown in FIG. 512(a), from timing t12 to timing t13, display is performed in which the bullet fired from the special machine gun moves. FIG. 515(a) shows a display example when the bullet is moving. At timing t14, the effective period of operation of attack button 3710 ends.

FIG. 512(a) shows an example effect in which a winning lottery (selected with a probability of 1/3) is performed based on the operation of the mission button 3700, and an image of a destroyed enemy tank is displayed. is. In this case, at timing t13, the image of the enemy tank changes to the image of the destroyed enemy tank. Also, an image of the bullet exploding is displayed. The image of the destroyed enemy tank and the image of the bullet exploding are displayed for three seconds (three seconds from timing t13 to timing t16 in this production example). FIG. 515(b) is a display example showing a state in which an image of a destroyed enemy tank and an image of an exploding bullet are displayed.

On the other hand, in the production example shown in FIG. 512(b), the lottery performed based on the operation of the mission button 3700 results in a loss (selected with a probability of 2/3), and the image of the destroyed enemy tank is not displayed. For example. In this case, at timing t13, the image of the enemy tank does not change to the image of the destroyed enemy tank, and the image of the enemy tank continues to move leftward. Also, the image of the bullet exploding is not displayed. FIG. 515(c) is a display example in which the image of the enemy tank continues to move to the left without changing to the image of the destroyed enemy tank (for example, timing t14).

Next, with reference to the time chart in FIG. 513, an example of an effect when the player operates both the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 will be shown.

The time chart in FIG. 513 shows an example of an effect when the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 are simultaneously operated at timing t12. FIG. 513(a) is a time chart showing an example of an effect in which the mission button 3700 is operated and an image of a bullet exploding is displayed. FIG. 513(b) is a time chart showing an effect example in which the mission button 3700 is operated, but the image of the bullet exploding is not displayed.

In the case of the production example shown in FIG. 513(a), from timing t12 to timing t13, a moving display of the bullet fired from the battery and a moving display of the bullet fired from the special machine gun are performed. FIG. 515(d) shows a display example in which the cannonball and the bullet are moving. At timing t12, the effective period of operation of attack button 3710 ends.

FIG. 513(a) shows an example effect in which a winning lottery (selected with a probability of 1/3) is performed based on the operation of the mission button 3700, and an image of a destroyed enemy tank is displayed. is. In this case, at timing t13, the image of the enemy tank changes to the image of the destroyed enemy tank. Also, an image of an exploded cannonball and an image of an exploded bullet are displayed. The image of the destroyed enemy tank, the image of the exploding cannonball, and the image of the exploding bullet are displayed for three seconds (three seconds from timing t13 to timing t16 in this production example). FIG. 515(e) is a display example showing a state in which an image of a destroyed enemy tank, an image of an exploding bullet, and an image of an exploding artillery shell are displayed.

On the other hand, in the production example shown in FIG. 513(b), the lottery performed based on the operation of the mission button 3700 results in a loss (selected with a probability of 2/3), and an image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed. This is a production example. In this case, at timing t13, the image of the enemy tank changes to the image of the destroyed enemy tank. Also, an image of the shell exploding is displayed. The image of the destroyed enemy tank and the image of the exploding cannonball are displayed for three seconds (three seconds from timing t13 to timing t16 in this production example). FIG. 515(f) is a display example showing a state in which an image of a destroyed enemy tank and an image of an exploding cannonball are displayed.

As shown in FIG. 515(e), the size of the exploded bullet image displayed based on the operation of the mission button 3700 is larger than the size of the exploded cannonball image displayed based on the operation of the attack button 3710. is also big. Also, the image of the exploded cannonball displayed based on the operation of the attack button 3710 has a higher display priority than the image of the destroyed enemy tank. Further, the image of the exploding bullet displayed based on the operation of the mission button 3700 has a higher display priority than the image of the exploding cannonball displayed based on the operation of the attack button 3710 .
By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to make a display change that is not necessarily given based on the operation of the mission button 3700 stand out. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the display change imparted in this manner.

When the operation of the attack button 3710 is accepted, an image of an enemy tank destroyed in response to the operation accepted by the player is displayed. Therefore, the player operates the attack button 3710 during the effect of moving the tank to display an explosion image, and after displaying the image of the enemy tank in a destroyed display mode, operates the mission button 3700. , a further explosion image can be applied to the image of the destroyed enemy tank. On the other hand, the player can operate only the mission button 3700 without operating the attack button 3710 to change the image of the enemy tank to the image of the destroyed enemy tank.

Image of destroyed enemy tank, simulated image of mission button 3700, simulated image of attack button 3710, image of exploding cannonball, image of exploding bullet (color, size, shape, etc.) At least one of them may be configured to suggest the degree of expectation of a big win. Specifically, the same method (color, size, shape, etc. of each image) as in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 505 may be adopted. It should be noted that these images do not have to suggest the degree of expectation of a big win.

According to such a configuration, when the mission button 3700 is operated and a specific condition (a 1/3 lottery is awarded) is satisfied, the image of the enemy tank is changed to the image of the destroyed enemy tank. can be changed. Also, an image of an exploded bullet can be added to the image of the destroyed enemy tank. By giving such a display change, the player feels that the operation of the mission button 3700 has been rewarded, and feels great pleasure in making the display change appear with great difficulty. Interest can be improved.

The explosion image displayed based on the operation of the mission button 3700 has a higher display priority than the explosion image displayed based on the operation of the attack button 3710 . With such a configuration, in addition to the operation of the mission button 3700, the visibility of the image that is displayed only when a specific condition (1/3 lottery wins) is achieved is ensured. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the visibility of the image displayed by the operation of 3700 is obstructed and the player feels dissatisfied.

A plurality of modes with different appearance rates may be displayed as modes of display changes performed in the display area in accordance with the operation of the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700 . For example, there are three destruction images of enemy tanks with different degrees of destruction. Destructive images to be displayed may be selected and displayed such that the probability of displaying a destructive image with a low degree of destruction is 30% and the probability of displaying a destructive image with a low degree of destruction is 60%. Also, a destruction image of an enemy tank with a very large degree of destruction, which is displayed at an extremely low probability (1%) only when the mission button 3700 is operated, may be provided. According to this, when the display change effect is made to appear with difficulty, the player is presented with a rarer display change effect. Instead of or in addition to the destruction image, a similar display may be performed in the explosion image.

If the player does not operate the attack button 3710, at the end of the effective period of operation of the attack button 3710 (timing t14), the cannonball is automatically fired, and even if the player does not operate it, the shell is automatically fired. It may be configured such that a destroyed image of an enemy tank is displayed. With such a configuration, the player can concentrate on operating the mission button 3700 .

In this embodiment, when the enemy tank is not displayed, the mission button 3700 is operated to fire a bullet from the special machine gun possessed by the own tank, and a display is made in which the fired bullet hits the road and explodes. It is possible. For example, at timing t5, by operating the mission button 3700, a display is performed in which the bullets fired from timing t5 to timing t6 move. Further, when the 1/3 lottery is won, an image display is performed for three seconds from timing t6 to timing t9, in which the shot bullet hits the ground and explodes.
The operation timing at which the moving enemy tank is destroyed by a bullet fired based on the operation of the mission button 3700 may be from timing t9 to timing t16, which is the movement period of the enemy tank. The operation effective period of the attack button 3710 may be from timing t11 to timing t14.

On the other hand, before the attack button 3710 is operated, the player operates the mission button 3700, wins the 1/3 lottery, and displays a mode in which the bullet fired from the special machine gun of the own tank hits the enemy tank and explodes. In this case, even if the attack button 3710 is operated during the effective period of operation of the attack button 3710, the display of the image of the cannonball moving or the image of the cannonball exploding corresponding to the operation of the attack button 3710 will not be displayed. It may be configured not to do so. With such a configuration, it is possible to create an effect in which the player feels as if he defeated the enemy tank with his own strength. can increase the satisfaction of In addition, since the image of the exploding shell is not displayed, it is possible to operate the mission button 3700 to ensure the visibility of the image of the exploding bullet, which is the effect that has been made to appear with great effort.
In addition, when the mission button 3700 is operated in a situation where the image of the exploded cannonball and the image of the destroyed enemy tank corresponding to the operation of the attack button 3710 are displayed, the operation of the mission button 3700 is performed. add an image of the bullet exploding. In this case, it is possible to give the player a sense of satisfaction as if the enemy tank had been destroyed.

Similar to the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 505 and the like, the color of the enemy tank and the mode of destruction of the enemy tank may be used to indicate the degree of expectation. In this case, it is preferable that at least a part of the color of the enemy tank and the mode of destruction of the enemy tank be visually recognized by the image of the bullet exploding displayed by operating the mission button 3700 . With such a configuration, it is possible to ensure the visibility of the indicated degree of expectation.
Further, in the case of a suggestive effect with a low degree of expectation, the bullet explodes by operating the mission button 3700 during a predetermined period after the suggestive effect ends (for example, the period from timing t16 to timing t27). Since the displayed image can be displayed once or a plurality of times, it is possible to recover the interest in the game that has decreased due to the performance with a low degree of expectation.

Although an embodiment in which the mission button 3700 is operated has been shown, in addition to the mission button 3700, a right lever 3730 and a left lever 3720 can be operated, and the direction of the special machine gun can be changed to the left and right by the right lever 3730 and the left lever 3720. may be made available. When the special machine gun is facing the enemy tank, the probability of winning the lottery when the mission button 3700 is operated is set to 1/2, which is easier than 1/3. If the player is not facing the enemy tank, the probability of winning the lottery when the mission button 3700 is operated may be set to 1/10, which is less than 1/3. Furthermore, if the operation modes of the right lever 3730 and the left lever 3720 are very appropriate, the probability of winning the lottery may be 100%. Conversely, if the operation mode of the right lever 3730 or the left lever 3720 is extremely inappropriate, the probability of winning the lottery may be set to 0%.
In this case, the player operates the mission button 3700 while operating the right lever 3730 and the left lever 3720, aiming to display the enemy tanks in a destroyed mode, thereby making the game more immersive. can be obtained. Also, when an image of destroying an enemy tank is displayed, a great sense of accomplishment is felt.

It should be noted that the amusement arcade may be configured so that when the mission button 3700 is operated, the probability of winning the lottery can be changed. Alternatively, the real-time clock function may be used so that the probability of winning the lottery when the mission button 3700 is operated changes every week. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to set the appearance ratio of the effects according to the tendency of the players who visit the store. For example, the probability of winning the lottery may be cyclically switched to 0%, 30%, 100%, 50%, 0%, and so on every day.

Mission button 3700 may be configured to have a situation in which operation instructions are displayed and a situation in which operation instructions are not displayed during a period in which operation reception is valid. For example, an effect pattern in which a simulated image simulating the mission button 3700 is displayed and an effect pattern in which a simulated image simulating the mission button 3700 is not displayed may be executable.

Such selection of effect patterns may be configured so that the store clerk can select which effect pattern is to be executed, or which effect pattern is to be executed using a real-time clock function. may be configured to change monthly. For example, for one month from the introduction of the pachinko machine 1, only a performance pattern in which the operation instruction display is not performed can be executed, and after one month from the introduction of the pachinko machine 1, a performance pattern in which the operation instruction display is not performed is allowed. It is preferable to configure so that both of the effect patterns for performing the operation instruction display can be executed. Alternatively, when executing "Special Machine Gun Reach", it is preferable to select one of an effect pattern in which the operation instruction display is not performed and an effect pattern in which the operation instruction display is performed with a predetermined probability (for example, a probability of 50/50).

By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to simplify the display contents in the display area in the case of the production pattern in which the operation instruction display is not performed. In addition, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a player unfamiliar with the game is confused by a plurality of operation instructions. On the other hand, a player accustomed to the game operates the mission button 3700 even in a situation where the operation instruction display is not displayed, fires a bullet from the special machine gun possessed by the own tank, and the fired bullet hits and explodes. It is possible to display the mode to be used.

An example has been shown in which a ⅓ lottery is performed in accordance with the operation of the mission button 3700, but in this case, the player who expects to receive a display change hits the mission button 3700 repeatedly. On the other hand, if the operation of the mission button 3700 is simply repeated hits, there is also a problem that the player gets bored. Therefore, another operation mode, for example, may be configured such that the ⅓ lottery is performed by long-pressing the mission button 3700 . In this case, for example, the lottery may be drawn once every time the mission button 3700 is kept pressed for one second.

Also, at the timing when the operation of the mission button 3700 can be accepted, it is preferable to instruct the player which operation pattern is required. For example, in the case of an effect pattern requiring continuous pressing of the mission button 3700, the line "Colonel Dyna" is displayed as "Hit the mission button 3700 repeatedly!" In such a case, it is preferable to display "Press and hold the mission button 3700!" as the lines of "Colonel Dyna".

By adopting such a configuration, the player does not carelessly operate the mission button 3700, but feels a sense of tension as to which performance pattern is executed and which operation instruction is presented. Also, since the number of times you can receive the lottery is smaller when you press and hold than when you press repeatedly (since you can generally press repeatedly several times per second), in the effect pattern that requires long press If the mode display in which the enemy tank explodes is realized, the player will have a greater sense of accomplishment. By providing a plurality of effect patterns with different degrees of image display difficulty in this way, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.
Note that the appearance ratio of the effect pattern requiring repeated hits and the effect pattern requiring long pressing may be configured to be selected by the store clerk, or may be set using the real-time clock function. may be configured.

Furthermore, when the player executes an operation mode different from the operation instruction mode for the mission button 3700, an effect pattern in which bullets are shot from a special machine gun may be executed.

For example, if the mission button 3700 is repeatedly hit according to the operation instruction in the effect pattern displayed as "Keep hitting the mission button 3700!" When a long press is performed, which is a different operation, a lottery is performed with a probability of 1/2 each time the mission button 3700 is pressed for one second. be configured to do so.

On the other hand, if the mission button 3700 is pressed and held according to the operation instruction in the effect pattern that displays "Press and hold the mission button 3700", the display for firing the special machine gun is not displayed, and the operation instruction and the operation instruction are not displayed. is a different operation, a lottery with a probability of 1/2 is performed each time the mission button 3700 is pressed, and if the lottery is won, a special machine gun is fired. should be configured so that

It may be configured to display an image of a bullet exploding in different manners (preferably with different colors or shapes) when the button is pressed for a long time and when the button is hit repeatedly.

Furthermore, as the line of "Colonel Dyna", a production pattern is executed that does not indicate the operation mode of the mission button 3700 that displays the line "I wonder what I should do with the mission button to shoot the special machine gun." may be configured as possible. Internally, as the effect pattern, either the effect pattern requiring a long press of the mission button 3700 or the effect pattern requiring repeated hitting of the mission button 3700 may be executed. Furthermore, if the operation mode by the player is different from the required operation mode, the line of "Colonel Dyna", "I remembered! To shoot the special machine gun, hit the mission button repeatedly!" or "I remembered! To shoot the special machine gun, press and hold the mission button!" In this way, when the operation performed by the player by estimating the operation mode is an appropriate operation mode, or when the operation performed by the player by estimating the operation mode is not appropriate, the appropriate operation mode is performed. When the player performs an appropriate operation mode after the instructions are displayed, an image is displayed in which the bullet explodes in a special mode different from when the instruction display of the operation mode has been performed in advance. may Also, different special sound effects may be output corresponding to the exploding images.

By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to satisfy the rebelliousness against the gaming machine in the player who feels as if he or she is constantly being commanded by the gaming machine. Alternatively, it is possible to give surprise and satisfaction to the player who accidentally or intentionally performed an operation different from the instruction. In addition, since the game is played while guessing the mode of operation for the operation unit, it is possible to increase the willingness to participate in the game. Furthermore, the second operation unit may be displayed in a manner in which the operation instructions are not necessarily clearly displayed.

An example has been shown in which a lottery is performed by long-pressing or repeatedly hitting the mission button 3700 to satisfy a specific condition, and a display to fire a special machine gun is performed, but the specific condition can be achieved by other methods. It may be configured as For example, in an effect pattern that requires a long press of the mission button 3700, if the mission button 3700 is held down for 10 seconds, a display of bullets being fired from a special machine gun may be displayed. Alternatively, in an effect pattern that requires repeated hitting of the mission button 3700, if the mission button 3700 can be repeatedly hit 16 times or more in 1 second, a display that bullets are fired from the special machine gun is displayed. good too.

The attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 have the same operation mode in terms of pressing. Therefore, instead of using the mission button 3700, the left lever 3720 or the right lever 3730 is rotated clockwise or counterclockwise by one rotation, whereby the lottery is performed and a bullet is fired from the special machine gun with a probability of 1/3. It may be configured so that the display to be performed is performed. Alternatively, the left lever 3720 or the right lever 3730 may be rotated clockwise or counterclockwise a plurality of times (for example, three rotations) to display a bullet being fired from the special machine gun. .

During the variation of the decorative pattern, it may be configured such that the operation to the mission button 3700 can always be accepted. By adopting such a configuration, the mission button 3700 can be operated by a player who feels unreasonable anger because the variable display result is a failure even though the variable display result is a highly expected reach. By doing so, such resentment can be alleviated. For example, it is possible to get rid of the frustration by attacking the decorative design while the decorative design that has been stopped due to failure is being displayed.
Further, it is preferable to configure so that the given display change is not terminated even if the variable display subsequent to the variable display that has failed is started. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling further dissatisfaction due to forced interruption of the display of the image of the exploding bullet displayed for relief. In this way, when it is determined that the display of the image of the exploding bullet crosses over the variation of the decorative pattern, the "special machine gun reach" is executed again at the timing t0 when the next decorative pattern starts to fluctuate. It may be configured as By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to prevent an unnatural state in terms of presentation.

It should be noted that whether or not a bullet is fired may also be determined by lottery by operating the mission button 3700 . For example, it may be configured such that the bullet is fired with a probability of 1/2 and the bullet is not fired with a probability of 1/2.

According to this embodiment, when the mission button 3700 is operated and a specific condition is satisfied, the display content of the display area is changed. A sense of satisfaction is felt that the display has been performed. In addition, even if the display result by operating the attack button 3710 is disappointing to the player and the player feels dissatisfied with the display result, the display is performed based on the operation of the mission button 3700. This alleviates the dissatisfaction felt by the player. In particular, since the mission button 3700 is allowed to be operated a plurality of times, display corresponding to the operation is eventually performed, which is effective in relieving the player's dissatisfaction.

Conventionally, a game machine provided with a plurality of operation units has been known (for example, JP-A-2011-087638). In addition, at the timing when the operation on the operation unit becomes valid, it outputs a sound effect indicating that the operation can be accepted or the operation can be accepted, and the operation is accepted at the timing when the operation is performed. There has been known a gaming machine that outputs a sound effect indicating However, there is still room for further improvement in production. Below, when operation reception for the operation unit is enabled, no sound effect is output even if an operation is performed on the operation unit, and furthermore, when a specific condition is met, an operation reception reception display is displayed. , shows an embodiment in which a special sound is output.

Hereinafter, an embodiment related to "silent machine gun reach", which is a modification of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 510 and the like, will be described with reference to FIG. 516 and the like. Except for the output of sound effects such as voice, substantially the same display as in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 510 and the like is performed in the display area. Various modifications of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 510 and the like can be applied to the present embodiment. The "silent machine gun" in this embodiment is an improvement of the "special machine gun" in the embodiment described with reference to FIG.

The time chart in FIG. 516 shows a situation in which neither attack button 3710 nor mission button 3700 is operated. As shown in FIG. 516, in this embodiment, it is possible to accept the operation of the attack button 3710 during a predetermined period (timing t9 to timing t11) immediately before the timing at which the operation reception of the attack button 3710 is validated. A sound effect "preparing to fire a cannon", which is an indication sound, is output. At the timing t11 when the acceptance of the operation of the attack button 3710 becomes valid, the output of the sound "OK", which is an effective sound indicating that the acceptance of the operation has become valid, starts. The voice "OK" is output from timing t11 to timing t12. The operation effective period of attack button 3710 ends at timing t14. At timing t14, when the period for accepting the operation of the attack button 3710 ends, the end sound indicating that the period for accepting the operation of the attack button 3710 has ended is output from timing t14 to timing t16. will be
On the other hand, regarding the mission button 3700, the valid operation period starts at timing t5 and ends at timing t27. Not done.

FIG. 520(a) shows a state in which the image of the own tank is displayed in the display area at timing t5.
By operating the mission button 3700, as shown in the dialogue of "Colonel Dinah" in FIG. will be described later.

FIGS. 520 and 521 show examples of display in the display area, and the type of sound output (or being output) in the display state is shown in the upper right portion of the figure. ing. For example, the character string "\OK/" is written in the upper right of the display example shown in FIG. This indicates that the voice is (or is being output) output.

At timing t9, a white image of an enemy tank is displayed in the upper right corner of the display area. Also, from timing t9 to timing t11, a voice saying "cannon firing preparation" is output. FIG. 520(b) shows a state in which a white image of an enemy tank is displayed at the upper right of the display area at timing t9.

At timing t11, the image of the enemy tank is displayed on the road. At the same time, the valid period for operating the attack button 3710 is started. In addition, a sound "OK" is output from timing t11 to timing t12. FIG. 520(c) shows a state in which an image of an enemy tank is displayed on the road at timing t11.

FIG. 520(c) shows the display state at timing t12.

At timing t14, the image of the enemy tank reaches the left edge of the road. Also, the effective period of operation of the attack button 3710 expires. Also, from timing t14 to timing t16, a voice saying "Stop preparing the cannon~" is output. FIG. 520(d) shows the display state at timing t14.

The time chart of FIG. 517 is a diagram showing an effect example in which the attack button 3710 is operated and the mission button 3700 is not operated during the operation valid period. As shown in FIG. 517, when the attack button 3710 is operated at a predetermined timing (timing t12 in this production example) during the operation effective period of the attack button 3710, the sound of firing a shell from the cannon A certain sound effect "boom" is output for a predetermined time (timing t12 to timing t13), and then a sound effect "boom", which is the sound of a shell hitting a tank and exploding, is output for a predetermined time (timing t12-timing t13). t13 to timing t15) is performed.

From timing t12 to timing t13, display of the movement of the cannonball is performed. FIG. 520(f) shows a display example when the cannonball is moving. At timing t12, the effective period of operation of attack button 3710 ends.

At timing t13, the image of the enemy tank changes to the image of the destroyed enemy tank. Also, an image of the shell exploding is displayed. The image of the destroyed enemy tank and the image of the exploding cannonball are displayed for three seconds (three seconds from timing t13 to timing t16 in this production example). In addition, from timing t13 to timing t15, a sound effect "Boom", which is the sound of an explosion of a cannonball, is output. FIG. 520(g) is a display example showing a state in which an image of a destroyed enemy tank and an image of an exploding cannonball are displayed.

The time chart in FIG. 518 shows an example of an effect when the attack button 3710 is not operated and the mission button 3700 is operated. When the mission button 3700 is operated, as described above, there are cases where the enemy tank can be destroyed and cases where the enemy tank cannot be destroyed. FIG. 518(a) shows an example of presentation when the enemy tank is destroyed, and FIG. 518(b) shows an example of presentation when the enemy tank cannot be destroyed. As described above, the probability of destroying the enemy tank is 1/3, and the probability of not destroying the enemy tank is 2/3. When the enemy tank is destroyed, the destroyed image of the enemy tank is displayed, and at the same time, a sound effect "Boom", which is the sound of the bullet hitting the enemy tank and the bullet exploding, is output. On the other hand, if the enemy tank cannot be destroyed, no sound effect is output.
In the production example shown in FIG. 518, since the attack button 3710 is not operated, the same effect sound as in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 516 is output.

In the case of the production example shown in FIG. 518(a), display is performed from timing t12 to timing t13 in which a bullet fired from a silent machine gun moves. FIG. 521(a) shows a display example when the bullet is moving. At timing t14, the effective period of operation of attack button 3710 ends.

FIG. 518(a) shows an example effect in which a winning lottery (selected with a probability of 1/3) is performed based on the operation of the mission button 3700, and an image of a destroyed enemy tank is displayed. is. In this case, at timing t13, the image of the enemy tank changes to the image of the destroyed enemy tank. Also, an image of the bullet exploding is displayed. The image of the destroyed enemy tank and the image of the bullet exploding are displayed for three seconds (three seconds from timing t13 to timing t16 in this production example). Also, from timing t13 to timing t15, a sound effect "Boom", which is the sound of the bullet hitting the enemy tank and exploding, is output. FIG. 521(b) is a display example showing a state (for example, timing t14) in which an image of a destroyed enemy tank and an image of an exploding bullet are displayed.

On the other hand, in the production example shown in FIG. 518(b), the lottery performed based on the operation of the mission button 3700 results in a loss (selected with a probability of 2/3), and the image of the destroyed enemy tank is not displayed. For example. In this case, at timing t13, the image of the enemy tank continues to move leftward without changing to the image of the destroyed enemy tank. Also, the image of the bullet exploding is not displayed. Also, sound output corresponding to bullet firing is not performed. FIG. 521(c) is a display example in which the image of the enemy tank continues to move to the left without changing to the image of the destroyed enemy tank (for example, timing t14).

The time chart in FIG. 519 shows a situation in which both the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 are operated. In this case, according to the operation of the attack button 3710, a sound effect similar to that of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 517 is output. Also, according to the operation of the mission button 3700, a sound effect similar to that of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 518 is output.

The time chart in FIG. 519 shows an example of an effect when the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 are simultaneously operated at timing t12. FIG. 519(a) is a time chart showing an effect example in which the mission button 3700 is operated and an image of an exploding bullet is displayed. FIG. 519(b) is a time chart showing an effect example in which the mission button 3700 is operated but the image of the bullet exploding is not displayed.

In the case of the production example shown in FIG. 519(a), from timing t12 to timing t13, a moving display of a bullet fired from a battery and a moving display of a bullet fired from a silent machine gun are performed. In addition, a sound effect "sound", which is the sound of firing a shell from a cannon, is output. FIG. 521(d) shows a display example in which the cannonball and the bullet are moving. At timing t12, the effective period of operation of attack button 3710 ends.

FIG. 519(a) shows an example effect in which a winning lottery (selected with a probability of 1/3) is performed based on the operation of the mission button 3700, and an image of a destroyed enemy tank is displayed. is. In this case, at timing t13, the image of the enemy tank changes to the image of the destroyed enemy tank. Also, an image of an exploded cannonball and an image of an exploded bullet are displayed. The image of the destroyed enemy tank, the image of the exploding cannonball, and the image of the exploding bullet are displayed for three seconds (three seconds from timing t13 to timing t16 in this production example). Also, from timing t13 to timing t15, a sound effect "Boom", which is the sound of the bullet hitting the enemy tank and exploding, is output. At the same time, a sound effect "Boom", which is the sound of the shell hitting the enemy tank and the shell exploding, is output. FIG. 521(e) is a display example showing a state (for example, timing t14) in which an image of a destroyed enemy tank, an image of an exploding bullet, and an image of an exploding cannonball are displayed.

On the other hand, in the production example shown in FIG. 519(b), the lottery performed based on the operation of the mission button 3700 results in a loss (selected with a probability of 2/3), and an image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed. This is a production example. In this case, at timing t13, the image of the enemy tank changes to the image of the destroyed enemy tank. Also, an image of the shell exploding is displayed. The image of the destroyed enemy tank and the image of the exploding cannonball are displayed for three seconds (three seconds from timing t13 to timing t16 in this production example). Also, from timing t13 to timing t15, a sound "boom", which is the sound of an enemy tank being hit by a cannonball and exploding, is output. FIG. 521(f) is a display example showing a state (for example, timing t14) in which an image of a destroyed enemy tank and an image of an exploding cannonball are displayed.

The volume of the sound effect "boom" output based on the operation of the mission button 3700 should be higher than the volume of the sound effect "boom" output based on the operation of the attack button 3710. Note that in FIGS. 521(b) and 521(e), the fact that the volume of the sound effect "Boom" is high is indicated by enlarging the font of the letters "\Boom/".
In addition, during the period (timing t13 to timing t15) in which the effect sound "boom" is output based on the operation of the mission button 3700, the volume of the fluctuating effect sound such as BGM may be suppressed. .
In addition, when the sound effect "boom" is output based on the operation of the mission button 3700, the sound effect "boom" that is originally output when the attack button 3710 is operated is not output. Alternatively, if the output is already in progress, the output may be interrupted and the output of the effect sound “boom” based on the operation of the mission button 3700 may be started.
Also, the period during which the sound effect "boom" output based on the operation of the mission button 3700 is output should be longer than the sound effect "boom" output based on the operation of the attack button 3710. For example, the period for outputting the sound effect "boom" based on the operation of the mission button 3700 is three times the period for outputting the sound effect "boom" based on the operation of the attack button 3710. It may be a certain 6 seconds. In addition, the sound effect output based on the operation of the mission button 3700 (sound effect "boom") may be output multiple times. For example, a sound effect "Boom" may be output three times in six seconds. Alternatively, the image of the bullet exploding may be displayed a plurality of times. For example, it may be configured to display an image of a bullet exploding three times in six seconds.
Also, the sound effect output based on the operation of the mission button 3700 and the sound effect output based on the operation of the attack button 3710 may be different. For example, based on the operation of the mission button 3700, a sound effect "bokhan" may be output.
In addition, the display displayed and the sound effect output based on the operation of the attack button 3710 can be seen or heard by the player once for each player operation that satisfies the conditions. However, the display displayed and the sound effect output based on the operation of the mission button 3700 are made so that the player can see and hear them two or more times for one player operation that satisfies the conditions. may

Thus, for the attack button 3710, a sound effect indicating that the operation can be accepted, a sound effect indicating that the operation can be accepted, and a sound effect indicating that the operation has been accepted are output. .
On the other hand, regarding the mission button 3700, no sound effect indicating that the operation can be accepted or the sound effect indicating that the operation can be accepted is output. Furthermore, even when an operation is performed, a sound effect is output with a predetermined probability (1/3) after a predetermined time (one second) after the operation is performed.
As described above, since the operation of the mission button 3700 does not always output a sound effect, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.
In addition, the sound effect output and the explosion image displayed based on the operation of the mission button 3700 can be output or displayed multiple times, thereby further enhancing interest.
Furthermore, the explosion image displayed based on operation of mission button 3700 is larger than the explosion image displayed based on operation of attack button 3710 . Further, it is desirable that the sound effect output based on the operation of the mission button 3700 is easier to hear than the sound effect output based on the operation of the attack button 3710, as described above.
By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize sound effects and special displays associated with the operation of the mission button 3700, which are relatively difficult to appear.

In this embodiment, the period for accepting operation of the mission button 3700 is started after the start of the variable display of the decorative symbols. You may start. In this case, at the timing t0, it is preferable to display the mode shown in FIG. 520(a).

In the present embodiment, the period for accepting the operation of the mission button 3700 ends before the variable display of the decorative symbols stops. 3700 operation acceptance may be continued.

By combining these embodiments, it is possible to continue acceptance of the operation of the mission button 3700 from the start of variation of the decorative pattern (timing t0) to the end of the variation display (timing t35). By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to increase opportunities for the player to make sound effects and special displays associated with the operation of the mission button 3700, which are relatively difficult to make appear, appear.

When the display of the image of the exploding bullet and the output of the sound effect of the exploding bullet, which is the sound of the exploding bullet, are performed once based on the operation of the mission button 3700, after these displays and the output of the sound are finished, It is preferable to configure so that images can be displayed and sound effects can be output.
For example, in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 518(a), at timing t15, the output of the sound effect "Boom" is terminated, and at timing t16, the display of the image of the bullet exploding is terminated. In this case, the period from timing t16 to timing t17 is a period in which the image of the exploding bullet is not displayed and the sound effect of the exploding bullet is not output, and these images are displayed after timing t17. and output of sound effects.
Moreover, even if the operation of the mission button 3700 satisfies the output condition of the sound effect "boom" and the display condition of the image of the exploding bullet between timings t15 and t16, these sounds and displays are executed. During the period, no sound is output or displayed, and if an operation that satisfies the conditions is performed after timing t16 when these sounds and displays end, output of sound effects and display of images are resumed. You may start.
With such a configuration, it becomes possible to clearly recognize the display of images and the output of sound effects each time. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of situations that cannot be recognized by

In the production example shown with reference to FIG. 516 and the like, the effective period during which the attack button 3710 can be operated occurs only once from timing t11 to timing t14, but it is configured to be able to occur multiple times. You may For example, the same display may be performed from timing t19 to timing t22. Also, the number of occurrences may be determined based on the result of the special lottery, and the degree of expectation may be suggested by the number of occurrences and the contents of each performance. In addition, it is preferable to generate the operation effective period of the attack button 3710 multiple times during the operation effective period of the mission button 3700 .
The number of times the attack button 3710 is operated during the effective period, that is, the number of times the image of the shell exploding is displayed based on the operation of the attack button 3710 can be determined based on the special lottery result. On the other hand, the display of the image of the exploding bullet and the output of the sound effect of the exploding bullet, which is the sound of the exploding bullet, based on the operation of the mission button 3700, are not based on the result of the special lottery, and can be performed multiple times during the operation valid period. can be run multiple times.
With such a configuration, it is possible to successfully display an image of an exploded bullet by operating the mission button 3700 a plurality of times, thereby enhancing the player's sense of accomplishment.

It should be noted that the own tank may be configured to be equipped with an additional machine gun. In this case, it is possible to employ an intermediate rendering mode between the bullets fired from the battery in this embodiment and the bullets fired from the silent machine gun. For example, a further machine gun basically takes the same operation reception mode and production mode as the silent machine gun in this embodiment, but when the operation is performed, it makes a reception sound indicating that the operation has been accepted (for example, a bullet flying) It may be configured to always output a sound). It should be noted that the defense button 3740 may be used as the operation unit in this case. Also, the size of the bullet explosion image should be set to an intermediate size between the cannonball explosion image and the silent machine gun explosion image.

As shown in FIG. 520(a), etc., the fact that the operation of the mission button 3700 is effective is indicated by a simulated image imitating the mission button 3700 and the lines of "Colonel Dyna", and the operation of the mission button 3700 is effective. It is good also as composition which does not report that it is.
For example, in the first half of the operation effective period of the mission button 3700, the operation instruction of the mission button 3700 is not performed, and in the latter half of the operation effective period of the mission button 3700, the operation instruction of the mission button 3700 may be performed. good. It should be noted that the operation of the attack button 3710 may be enabled when the enemy tank moves from the right side of the display area in the first half and the second half of the effective period of the operation of the mission button 3700 . In this case, when an enemy tank is displayed for the first time, the user can concentrate on operating the attack button 3710, and when an enemy tank is displayed for the second time, in addition to operating the attack button 3710, the mission button 3700 can be operated. It is possible to operate.
In this way, even when the display based on the acceptance of the operation of the mission button 3700 is valid, the configuration may be such that the operation instruction display of the mission button 3700 is performed and not performed.
Note that the special sound and display content based on the reception of the operation of the mission button 3700 may differ depending on whether the operation instruction display of the mission button 3700 is performed or not. For example, when the operation instruction display of the mission button 3700 is not performed, compared with the case where the operation instruction display of the mission button 3700 is performed, a louder special sound is output or a larger explosion image is displayed. may be performed. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to further enhance the amusement felt by the player.

It may be possible to switch between when the operation instruction display is performed and when it is not performed by the above-described real-time clock function or the operation by the player or the store clerk.

As described above, according to the "silent machine gun reach" according to the present embodiment, the special sound is output when the second operation unit is operated and a specific condition is satisfied. With such a configuration, even if the second operation unit is operated, the special sound may or may not be output, so the special sound can be output fortunately. The player will feel great pleasure.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a game machine in which operation instructions for an operation unit are displayed (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-046210). In such a game machine, the player simply follows the contents of the instruction, and there is room for improvement in terms of enhancing the entertainment. For example, when the operation instruction is not followed, the same display as when the operation instruction is followed after a predetermined time has passed, or when the operation instruction is not performed, no display is performed. It is general and the intention of the player who does not want to follow the operation instructions is not respected. Therefore, in the embodiment shown below, an embodiment will be described in which a special display is performed when an operation is performed on the operation unit in an operation mode contrary to the contents of the instruction.

Below, referring to FIG. 522 and the like, the “bomb character reach” in which the own tank and the bomb character fight while accelerating or decelerating the own tank will be described.

FIG. 522 is a table showing effect patterns to be selected in "bomb character reach". Also, FIGS. 523 to 525 are time charts showing examples of effects when one of the effect patterns is executed. 526 to 531 show display examples at predetermined timings in these time charts.

In the "bomb character reach", the decorative symbols are variably displayed for 34 seconds, and the decorative symbols are statically displayed for 1 second. During the variable display of the decorative symbols, the decorative symbols are in the reach state at timing t5. Further, a period from timing t6 to timing t15 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "first period"), a period from timing t16 to timing t25 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "second period"), during display In addition to the own tank, an effect is performed in which the bomb character A or the bomb character B is displayed.

In the "bomb character reach", a bomb character appears on the road on which the tank is traveling, and an effect is executed asking whether or not to operate the left lever 3720 so as to advance the tank toward the bomb character. .

As the bomb characters, a bomb character A, which is a bomb character wearing sunglasses, and a bomb character B, whose sunglasses are upside down and opposite to the bomb character A, are displayed. When the bomb character A is displayed, the own tank will be partially destroyed if the own tank rams into it, and when the bomb character B is displayed, the own tank will not be destroyed even if the own tank rams into it, and it will move forward. can proceed.

A bomb character is displayed in front of the own tank, and two characters ("Colonel Dyna" and "Sergeant Might") indicate whether or not the own tank should be rammed into the bomb character. For example, as the line of "Colonel Dinah", a line such as "Determinedly fake! Forward!" is displayed to instruct the player to push the left lever 3720 forward (on the game machine side, the same shall apply hereinafter). In addition, as the line of "Sergeant Might", a line such as "Enemy bomb found ahead! Please slow down!" is displayed, instructing the player to push the left lever 3720 backward (to the player's side, the same shall apply hereinafter). In addition, instead of indirect expressions such as "forward" and "backward", more direct expressions such as "Push the left lever forward" or "Push the left lever backward" may be adopted. .

In addition, on the left side of the window displaying the lines of "Colonel Dinah", there is a vertically long rectangular simulated image of the left lever 3720, and an image instructing the operation mode of the left lever 3720 ("tilt forward", " "rear tilt") is displayed. Similarly, on the right side of the window displaying the words “Sergeant Might”, a vertically long rectangular simulated image imitating the left lever 3720 and an image instructing how to operate the left lever 3720 are displayed.

In "Bomb Character Reach", if the line of "Colonel Dina" is to give an operation instruction, the instruction is basically a line that indicates an operation instruction that is 100% wrong. Further, the image for instructing the operation mode of left lever 3720 is also an image for instructing an incorrect operation mode. On the other hand, if the dialogue of "Sergeant Might" is to give an operation instruction, the probability that the dialogue that gives the wrong operation instruction will be displayed is 20%, and the probability that the dialogue that will give the correct operation instruction will be displayed is 80%. be. Also, as the image for instructing the operation mode of the left lever 3720, an image matching the contents of the instruction indicated by the dialogue is displayed.
For this reason, the player can operate the lever in the opposite direction to the command contents for the dialogue of "Colonel Dinah" and the instruction to operate the left lever 3720. You just have to be a little careful when operating the lever.
It should be noted that once the player gets used to it, it is possible to distinguish the type of the bomb character from the shape of the sunglasses. can be manipulated.

When the bomb character A is displayed, the self-tank will be partially destroyed when the self-tank collides with it. When the self-tank does not crash into the bomb character A, it is possible to prevent the self-tank from being destroyed by the explosion of only the bomb character A before the self-tank collides. When the bomb character A collides with the self-tank, the first collision results in a state in which the battery of the self-tank is destroyed (state of the self-tank shown in FIG. 527(c)). In addition, in the second collision, the tank's machine gun is also destroyed (the tank's state shown in FIG. 527(f)).
On the other hand, when the bomb character B is displayed, even if the bomb character B collides with the own tank, the own tank is not destroyed and the player can move forward. The bomb character B is actually a huge balloon disguised as a bomb, and even if the own tank crashes into it, the own tank will not be destroyed.
When the own tank advances, a giant bomb character appears and an effect using the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 can be executed, the details of which will be described later.

The effect pattern shown in the table of FIG. 522 is determined whether or not the bomb character is displayed at times t6 to t11 and at times t16 to t21 in the time charts shown in FIGS. , it indicates whether the displayed bomb character is the bomb character A or the bomb character B. Also, at timing t26, the state that the image of the own tank can take is shown.

Effect pattern 01, effect pattern 03, effect pattern 07, and effect pattern 09 are effect patterns in which bomb character A does not appear. Therefore, at timing t26, the own tank is in a state where it cannot be destroyed.
Effect pattern 02, effect pattern 04, effect pattern 06, and effect pattern 08 are effect patterns in which bomb character A appears once. Therefore, at the timing t26, the self-tank is either not destroyed or the battery of the self-tank is destroyed.
The production pattern 05 is a production pattern in which the bomb character A appears twice. Therefore, at timing t26, the tank is in one of the following states: the tank is not destroyed, the battery of the tank is destroyed, and the battery and machine gun of the tank are destroyed.

Peripheral control board 1510 determines which of the effect patterns 01 to 09 is to be executed. For example, it may be determined based on the results of a special lottery.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 523, 526, and 527, the mode of presentation using the explosion character A will be described.
FIG. 523(a) is a time chart showing the state of variable display of decorative symbols executed together with the effects shown in the time charts of FIGS. 523(b) and 523(c).
FIG. 523(b) is a time chart showing an execution mode of an effect pattern in which the bomb character A is displayed during the first period. The effect state when the effect pattern 04, which is the effect pattern for displaying the bomb character A, is executed during the first period (timing t6 to timing t15) will be described below.
At timing t5, "bomb character reach" is started. FIG. 526(a) shows a display example from timing t5 to timing t6.
At timing t6, the bomb character A is displayed in the upper center of the display area. At this time, one of the lines of "Colonel Dinah" is displayed as "I'm sure it's fake! Go forward!" On the other hand, as a line of "Sergeant Might", one of "Enemy bomb found ahead! Please slow down!", "That guy is fake. Forward!" be. In addition, when the dialogue indicates that the left lever 3720 is to be tilted forward, a simulated image of the lever with the words "tilt forward" is displayed together with the dialogue. In addition, when the dialogue indicates that the left lever 3720 is to be tilted backward, a simulated image of the left lever 3720 with the words "tilt backward" is displayed together with the dialogue. Further, when the dialogue does not indicate the operation mode of left lever 3720, the simulated image of left lever 3720 is not displayed.

FIGS. 526(b) to 526(g) show display examples displayed in the display area from timing t6 to timing t11. As described above, there are two types of lines for "Colonel Dina" and three types for "Sergeant Might", and a total of six combinations can be displayed by combining these lines. These six combinations are shown in FIGS. 526(b) to 526(g).

For example, FIG. 526(b) shows the display of the erroneous operation instruction “Colonel Dina” “Determinedly fake! This is a display example showing a state in which the line "Bomb found! Slow down!" is displayed.
In this case, the player can avoid a collision with the bomb character A by performing an operation (tilting the left lever 3720 backward) opposite to the operation mode instructed by the line "Colonel Dinah". In addition, by performing an operation (an operation of tilting the left lever 3720 backward) according to the operation mode instructed by the line "Sergeant Might", the collision with the bomb character A can be avoided. In addition, the player can avoid collision with the bomb character A by confirming that the displayed bomb character is the bomb character A and tilting the lever backward regardless of the instruction contents of the lines.

In addition, FIG. 526(e) shows the display of the line "Um, mumble" of "Colonel Dina" and the line of "Sergeant Might", which is the correct operation instruction, "He's a fake. Advance!" It is a display example showing a state in which is displayed.
In this case, the mode of operation is not indicated by the lines of "Colonel Dyna". In addition, by performing an operation (an operation of tilting the left lever 3720 forward) in accordance with the operation mode instructed by the line "Sergeant Might", the robot collides with the bomb character A. On the other hand, if the player confirms that the displayed bomb character is the bomb character A regardless of the instruction content of the lines and then tilts the left lever 3720 backward, the bomb character A is displayed. avoid collisions with

As for the operation period for tilting the left lever 3720 in a predetermined direction, it is determined that an operation input has been performed by tilting the left lever 3720 in a predetermined direction for a predetermined period of time within a period from timing t6 to timing t11. For example, it is determined that the operation has been performed when the left lever 3720 is tilted forward for two seconds from timing t7 to timing t9.

When the left lever 3720 is tilted forward when the bomb character A is displayed, an effect display in which the bomb character A collides with the own tank is displayed from timing t11 to timing t15.
Specifically, from timing t11 to timing t12, an image in which the own tank and the bomb character A collide is displayed. FIG. 527(a) is a display example from timing t11 to timing t12.
Next, from timing t12 to timing t15, an image is displayed in which the battery of the own tank is destroyed. FIG. 527(c) is a display example from timing t12 to timing t15.

On the other hand, if the left lever 3720 is tilted backward when the bomb character A is displayed, the bomb character A explodes in front of the own tank from timing t11 to timing t12. FIG. 527(b) is a display example from timing t11 to timing t12. From timing t12 to timing t15, display as shown in FIG. 526(a) may be performed.

FIG. 523(c) is a time chart showing an execution mode of an effect pattern in which the bomb character A is displayed during the second period. FIG. 523(c) shows an example of an effect when the effect pattern 02, which is an effect pattern in which the bomb character A is displayed during the second period, is executed.
In this example of effect, the same effect display as the example of effect shown with reference to FIG. 523(b) is performed from timing t16 to timing t25.

When either the bomb character A or the bomb character B is displayed in both the first period and the second period like the production pattern 05, the production pattern 06, the production pattern 08, and the production pattern 09, FIG. 523(c) with the effect mode related to timing t11 to timing t15 in the time chart shown in FIG. 524(b) or the effect mode related to timing t11 to timing t15 in the time chart shown in FIG. 524(c) or a combination of the presentation modes related to the timings t16 to t25 in the time chart shown in FIG. 524(c) is executed.

For example, when the production pattern 05 is selected, the production mode according to timing t11 to timing t15 in the time chart shown in FIG. An effect mode in which such effect modes are combined is executed.
In this case, there is a possibility that the own tank will crash into the bomb character A during both the first period and the second period.
For example, when the self-tank crashes into the bomb character A in the first period, the self-tank has its turret destroyed. By thrusting in, the self-tank will be in a state where the machine gun has been destroyed.
FIG. 527(d) shows a display example from timing t21 to timing t22 when the bomb character A is hit by the self-tank whose turret has been destroyed in the second period. Further, from the timing t22 to the timing t25, the display example shown in FIG. 527(f) is displayed.
On the other hand, in the second period, if the self-tank whose turret has been destroyed does not run into the bomb character A, the display example shown in FIG.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 524, 528, and 529, the mode of presentation using the explosion character B will be described.
FIG. 524(a) is a time chart showing the state of variable display of decorative symbols executed together with the effects shown in the time charts of FIGS. 524(b) and 524(c).
FIG. 524(b) is a time chart showing an execution mode of an effect pattern in which the bomb character B is displayed during the first period. The effect state when the effect pattern 07, which is the effect pattern for displaying the bomb character B, is executed during the first period (timing t6 to timing t11) will be described below.
At timing t5, "bomb character reach" is started. FIG. 528(a) shows a display example from timing t5 to timing t6.
At timing t6, the bomb character B is displayed in the upper center of the display area. At this time, either "Enemy bomb! Slow down!" On the other hand, as a line of "Sergeant Might", one of the following is displayed: "He's a fake. Move forward!", "Enemy bomb found ahead! Slow down!" be. Also, when each line indicates that the left lever 3720 is to be tilted forward, a simulated image of the left lever 3720 with the words "tilt forward" is displayed together with the line. In addition, when each line indicates that the left lever 3720 is to be tilted backward, a simulated image of the left lever 3720 with the words "back tilt" is displayed together with the line. Further, when the dialogue does not indicate the operation mode of left lever 3720, the simulated image of left lever 3720 is not displayed.

FIGS. 528(b) to 528(g) show display examples displayed in the display area from timing t6 to timing t11. As described above, there are two types of lines for "Colonel Dina" and three types for "Sergeant Might", and a total of six combinations can be displayed by combining these lines. These six combinations are shown in FIGS. 528(b) to 528(g).

For example, FIG. 528(b) shows the display of the erroneous operation instruction "Colonel Dyna" saying "Enemy bomb! Slow down!" and the correct operation instruction "Sgt. This is a display example showing a state in which the line "It's a fake. Forward!" is displayed.
In this case, the player can plunge into the bomb character B by performing an operation (tilting the left lever 3720 forward) opposite to the operation mode instructed by the line "Colonel Dinah". Also, by performing an operation (an operation of tilting the left lever 3720 forward) in accordance with the operation mode instructed by the line "Sergeant Might", the bomb character B can be thrust into. In addition, regardless of the instruction contents of the lines, it is possible to plunge into the bomb character B by confirming that the displayed bomb character is the bomb character B and tilting the left lever 3720 forward.

Also, Fig. 528(e) shows the display of "Colonel Dina"'s line "Um, mumbling." ] is a display example showing a state in which the words "" are displayed.
In this case, the mode of operation is not indicated by the lines of "Colonel Dyna". Further, by performing an operation (an operation of tilting the left lever 3720 forward) in accordance with the operation mode instructed by the line "Sergeant Might", the bomb character B cannot be thrust into. On the other hand, if the player confirms that the displayed bomb character is the bomb character B regardless of the instruction content of the lines, and then tilts the left lever 3720 forward, the bomb character B is displayed. can plunge into.

When the lever is tilted forward when the bomb character B is displayed, an effect display is performed in which the player's own tank crashes into the bomb character B from timing t11 to timing t15.
From timing t11 to timing t12, an image of the own tank crashing into the bomb character B is displayed. FIG. 529(a) is a display example from timing t11 to timing t12. From timing t12 to timing t15, it is preferable to display as shown in FIG. 526(a).

On the other hand, when the left lever 3720 is tilted backward when the bomb character B is displayed, the bomb character B positioned in front of the own tank is displayed as it is from timing t11 to timing t12. FIG. 529(b) is a display example from timing t11 to timing t12. From timing t12 to timing t15, display as shown in FIG. 526(a) may be performed.

FIG. 524(c) is a time chart showing an execution mode of an effect pattern in which the bomb character B is displayed during the second period. FIG. 524(c) shows an example of an effect when the effect pattern 03, which is an effect pattern in which the bomb character B is displayed during the second period, is executed.
In this example of effect, the same effect display as the example of effect shown with reference to FIG. 524(b) is performed from timing t16 to timing t25.

Next, with reference to the time chart of FIG. 525, description will be given of the effect modes at timings t26 to t35 when effect patterns 01 to 09 are executed.
As described above, based on the selected effect pattern and the operation mode of the left lever 3720 by the player, at timing t26, the own tank is in the intact state, the turret destroyed, and the turret and machine gun destroyed. It is displayed in one of two states.

As shown in FIG. 525(a), at timing t26, bomb character A or bomb character B starts to be displayed. Also, from timing t26 to timing t28, operation of either attack button 3710 or mission button 3700 is enabled.
The attack button 3710 is active when your own tank is intact. On the other hand, the mission button 3700 becomes effective when the battery of the own tank is destroyed. Note that neither the operation of the attack button 3710 nor the operation of the mission button 3700 is valid when the battery and the machine gun are destroyed. It should be noted that an effect mode when the operation of attack button 3710 or mission button 3700 is not valid will be described later.

At timing t26, the bomb character A is displayed in the center of the display area at the same time that the attack button 3710 is activated. Also, a simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 is displayed in the upper right of the window displaying the lines of "Sergeant Might".
530(a) is from timing t26 until attack button 3710 is operated (until t28 in FIG. 525(a)), or until the operation effective period of attack button 3710 expires (t29 in FIG. 525(a)). until) is a display example in the period.

If the special lottery result is a big hit, the bomb character A explodes three times from the timing when the attack button 3710 is operated during the effective period of operation of the attack button 3710 or the timing when the effective period of operation ends. seconds. FIG. 530(b) shows a display mode in which the bomb character A explodes after the attack button 3710 is operated or after the operation valid period ends when the special lottery result is a big win. After that, at timing t34, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a big hit.
On the other hand, if the result of the special lottery is a loss, the bomb character A becomes the own tank from the timing when the attack button 3710 is operated during the operation effective period of the attack button 3710 or the timing when the operation effective period ends. The display of moving toward you is displayed for 3 seconds. FIG. 530(c) shows a display mode in which the bomb character A moves toward the own tank after the operation of the attack button 3710 or after the expiration of the effective period of operation when the special lottery result is a loss. After that, at timing t34, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a failure.
Based on the operation of the attack button 3710 or the expiration of the operation effective period, a display effect is executed in which a shell is fired from the battery of the own tank, as in the example effect shown with reference to FIG. 514 .

At timing t26, the bomb character A is displayed in the center of the display area at the same time that the mission button 3700 is activated. Also, a simulated image imitating the mission button 3700 is displayed on the upper left of the window displaying the lines of "Colonel Dina".
530(d) is from timing t26 until mission button 3700 is operated (until t28 in FIG. 525(a)), or until the operation effective period of mission button 3700 expires (t29 in FIG. 525(a)). until) is a display example in the period.

If the special lottery result is a big hit, the bomb character A explodes 3 times from the timing when the mission button 3700 is operated during the operation effective period of the mission button 3700 or the timing when the operation effective period ends. seconds. FIG. 530(e) shows a display mode in which the bomb character A explodes after the operation or after the expiration of the effective period of the operation when the special lottery result is a big win. After that, at timing t34, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a big hit.
On the other hand, if the result of the special lottery is a loss, the bomb character A becomes the own tank from the timing when the mission button 3700 is operated during the operation effective period of the mission button 3700 or the timing when the operation effective period ends. The display of moving toward you is displayed for 3 seconds. FIG. 530(f) shows a display mode in which the bomb character A moves toward the own tank after the operation of the mission button 3700 or after the end of the effective period of operation when the special lottery result is a loss. After that, at timing t34, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a failure.
Based on the operation of the mission button 3700 or the end of the valid period of operation, a display effect is executed in which a bullet is fired from the machine gun of the own tank, as in the example effect shown with reference to FIG. 515 .

Effect pattern 05 is executed, and in both the first period and the second period, when own tank crashes into bomb character A, at timing t26, the own tank with its battery and machine gun destroyed is displayed. The Rukoto.
FIG. 525(b) is a time chart showing the effect state executed in this case.

In this case, if the special lottery result is a loss, the bomb character A starts to be displayed at timing t26 and is displayed at that position until timing t29. FIG. 531(a) shows a display example from timing t26 to timing t29.
From timing t29 to timing t32, a display of the bomb character A moving toward the own tank is displayed for 3 seconds. FIG. 531(b) shows a display mode in which the bomb character A is moving toward its own tank. After that, at timing t34, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a failure.
On the other hand, when the special lottery result is a big hit, the bomb character B starts to be displayed at timing t26 and is displayed at that position until timing t29. FIG. 531(a) shows a display example from timing t26 to timing t29.
From timing t29 to timing t32, a display of the bomb character B moving toward the own tank is displayed for 3 seconds. FIG. 531(b) shows a display mode in which the bomb character B is moving toward its own tank. After that, at timing t34, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a big hit.
In either case, neither the attack button 3710 nor the mission button 3700 are enabled to accept operations.

In this way, the player can perform the operations shown in FIGS. Special operation units (attack button 3710 and mission button 3700) can be operated, and special images (image of bomb character A exploding, image of tilting sunglasses worn by bomb character A, and “Dyna It is possible to see the lines of "Colonel" and "Sergeant Might"). On the other hand, when the player obediently follows the operation instruction, as shown in FIGS. I can't.
Also, as shown in FIGS. 530(a) and (d), or FIGS. 530(b) and (e), the player can visually recognize a special effect display according to the state of destruction of the own tank. .

It should be noted that if the player does not operate the left lever 3720, the operation instruction indicated by "Colonel Dyna" or "Sergeant Might" may be automatically executed. Also, at this time, the image displayed when the player issues the operation instruction may be automatically displayed. If "Colonel Dyna" or "Sergeant Might" does not issue an operation instruction and the player does not operate the left lever 3720, either the forward leaning operation or the backward leaning operation is automatically selected by lottery. may be displayed in For example, the forward tilting operation is selected with a probability of 1/2, and the backward tilting operation is selected with a probability of 1/2, and the display corresponding to the selected operation may be performed.

In the above-described embodiment, the player is required to perform an operation that does not follow the operation instruction during at least one of the first period and the second period. In addition, by performing an operation that does not follow the operation instruction, it is possible to generate an effect state in which an operation to a specific operation unit becomes effective immediately before the decorative symbols are stopped and a special image is displayed.
In this way, since the player is presented with an operation instruction in a mode different from or inconsistent with the operation instruction that should be performed, the player is asked what kind of operation is appropriate for the operation unit. The tilting operation of the left lever 3720 is performed by estimating whether it is. Then, when the player is able to perform an appropriate operation against the operation instruction, the player can operate a special operation section or view a special image or effect display. becomes possible.
In addition, a special image may be displayed only when a specific condition (for example, successful operations contrary to the operation instruction are performed multiple times) is satisfied in addition to performing an operation contrary to the operation instruction. . By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to make the special display visible only to the player who has properly performed the operation, rather than being accidentally displayed by appropriately operating the operation unit. .

The player may operate the left lever 3720 in the left-right direction so that the forward-moving self-tank avoids the minefield provided on the road.
For example, an image of a real minefield and an image of a fake minefield are displayed on the right or left side of the road, and the player operates the left lever 3720 in the horizontal direction to execute an effect of avoiding the minefield. do it. Then, if the own tank rushes into a real minefield, it is preferable to configure so that the battery and machine gun of the own tank are destroyed. In addition, the lines of "Colonel Dina" and "Sergeant Might" are also configured to give wrong operation instructions regarding the operation mode of the left lever 3720. FIG. It is preferable to configure such an effect to be executable in the first period and the second period.

In this way, even if the left lever 3720 is properly operated to move the own tank while avoiding the minefield to the left and right, and the operation contrary to the operation instruction is successfully performed, it will be explained with reference to FIGS. 522 to 531. As in the embodiment described above, it is possible to allow the player to operate a special operation unit, or to visually recognize a special image or effect display.

Although the effect table shown in FIG. 522 has the first period and the second period, it is configured to have only the first period, and the bomb character does not appear in the first period. It is also possible to adopt a table from which one of the production pattern, the production pattern in which the bomb character A appears, and the production pattern in which the bomb character B appears is selected.
In this case, if the self-tank crashes into the bomb character A, both the battery and the machine gun of the self-tank may be destroyed.

Although the effect table shown in FIG. 522 has the first period and the second period, the effect can be changed by using the effect table configured to provide three or more periods in which the bomb character can be displayed. may be executed.
In addition, a pending look-ahead is performed, and based on the look-ahead result, a plurality of periods in which the bomb character can be displayed are provided over a plurality of decorative pattern variations (a bomb character can be displayed in one decorative pattern variation). One period may be provided one by one, or a period may be provided in which any number of bomb characters can be displayed in one variation of the decorative pattern), Stopping the variable display corresponding to the prefetch target hold 525, 530, and 531 may be executed just before the game.

In addition, although three levels of display mode are provided for own tanks, two levels may be provided, or four or more levels may be provided. Also, as an example of changing the display mode, an example of the staged destruction of the own tank was shown, but the stage of destroying the own tank returns to the relatively undestroyed stage after repairing the own tank. may be configured to be executable.

An example has been shown in which the bomb character does not appear, the bomb character A appears, and the bomb character B appears in the first period or the second period. , either one of the bomb character A or the bomb character B may always be displayed. For example, the table shown in FIG. 522 may be modified to employ a table consisting of only production pattern 05, production pattern 06, production pattern 08, and production pattern 09. By adopting such a configuration, one of the bomb characters is displayed in each period of the production pattern, so that the feeling of tension in operating the left lever 3720 can be increased.

Note that in the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 526 to 531, the example of the display when the bomb character is displayed is mainly illustrated, but in the period when the bomb character is not displayed, the display shown in FIG. 526 ( As shown in a), it is preferable to display the own tank character moving forward.

A special image may be displayed only when a specific condition is met. For example, a special display may be performed only when an operation that does not follow an operation instruction is successfully performed multiple times. Also, even if the player performs an operation that does not follow the operation instruction, a predetermined lottery may be conducted and a special display may be performed with a predetermined probability (eg, 1/5). With such a configuration, the special image is not displayed by chance just by operating the operation unit, and the difficulty of displaying the special image can be increased. It is possible to increase the surprise and joy felt by the player when is displayed.

When a special image is displayed based on the operation of the left lever 3720, at least during the period during which the special image is displayed, the volume of the fluctuating effect sound may be lowered.
Also, when a special image is displayed based on the operation of the left lever 3720, a special sound (for example, a special explosion sound) is output at least during the period when the special image is displayed. may
Furthermore, the suppression of the fluctuating effect sound and the output of the special sound may be performed at the same time.
By suppressing the variable effect sound or outputting the special sound in response to the display of the special image in this manner, the display of the special image is prevented from being disturbed by the variable effect sound. Also, the display of the special image can be made more conspicuous by the output of the special sound.

It should be noted that the variable performance sound is a sound that is recognized as background music by the player, when a predetermined musical piece is reproduced in accordance with the variation of the decoration pattern. For example, a piece of music consisting of a voice sung by a predetermined singer and performance sounds of a plurality of musical instruments is played for several minutes, during which the variation of decorative patterns seconds) is performed multiple times. By outputting such a fluctuating effect sound to the player, it is possible to improve the interest in the game. It should be noted that a plurality of such songs may be prepared in advance, and a configuration may be adopted in which playback of a different song is started at the timing when playback of a certain song is completed to the end. Alternatively, in accordance with the change of the game state, the music that has been reproduced so far may be faded out in the middle of reproduction, and another music different from the music that has been reproduced so far may be reproduced.

A game state is generated in which a special image is displayed when the left lever 3720 is properly operated without being deceived by the operation instruction. The display period of the simulated image simulating the button 3710 is constructed so as to overlap, and the special image (such as an image of a bomb exploding) and the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 are displayed at the same time. Examples are shown below.

FIGS. 532(a) to 532(c) show other display examples that can be displayed at the timing when the diagram shown in FIG. 530(a) is displayed.
In each of FIGS. 532(a) to 532(c), the display priority of the obliquely tilted translucent sunglasses image is the window displaying the words of "Colonel Dina" and the words of "Colonel Dina". The display priority is higher than that of the image, the image of own tank, the image of bomb character A, and the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 . 532(a), two translucent sunglasses are displayed as shown in FIG. 532(b), and two images are shown in FIG. In some cases, three items are displayed as shown. Then, as shown in FIG. 530(a), when the semi-transparent sunglasses image is displayed, the expectation for the big win is higher when the semi-transparent sunglasses image is displayed than when the semi-transparent sunglasses image is not displayed. A decision is made whether to display the image. In addition, the display mode of the semi-transparent sunglasses image is determined so that the greater the number of semi-transparent sunglasses images, the higher the expectation of the big win.

For example, when the display state shown in FIG. 530(a) is reached, the expectation level is 10%, when the display state shown in FIG. 532(a) is reached, the expectation level is 30%, and the display shown in FIG. It is preferable to display a semi-transparent sunglasses image so that the degree of expectation in the state shown in FIG. 532(c) is 50% and the degree of expectation in the display state shown in FIG.

The display of the translucent sunglasses image starts at timing t26 and continues until the attack button 3710 is operated or until the operation effective period of the attack button 3710 ends. If the bomb character A can be exploded (that is, if the special lottery result is a big hit), the display of the translucent sunglasses image may be continued until the display of the explosion image ends.

With such a configuration, the same effects as those of the above-described embodiment can be obtained. In addition, since the translucent sunglasses image (special image) is displayed in front of the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710, the special image that can be visually recognized is the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710. can be prevented from being hidden by

FIG. 532(d) is a modification of the display example shown with reference to FIG. 532(c). As in this display example, a simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 may be configured to be displayed closer to the viewer than the translucent sunglasses image (special image).
Alternatively, the display mode shown in FIG. 532(c) and the display mode shown in FIG. 532(d) may be alternately displayed. For example, the display mode may be switched every 0.5 seconds from timing t26 to timing t29.
By adopting such a configuration, both the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 and the translucent sunglasses image can be highlighted.
Note that the bomb character A before or after the explosion may also be displayed in the same manner as the simulated image of the attack button 3710 .

It should be noted that the image of translucent sunglasses does not have to indicate the degree of expectation. In this case, a difference may be provided in the appearance rate of the displayed images.

In the production examples shown with reference to FIGS. 525 and 530, one operation of attack button 3710 or mission button 3700 can be accepted from timing t26 to timing t29. 533, an embodiment in which operations on the , mission button 3700 can be received multiple times will be described.

FIGS. 533(a) to 533(c) are display examples when the attack button 3710 is configured to be operable a plurality of times (for example, five times) from timing t26 to timing t29. In addition, a plurality of (for example, five) simulated images imitating the attack button 3710 are displayed according to the number of times the attack button 3710 can be operated. Moreover, each time the attack button 3710 is operated once, the display of the simulated image displayed on the front side among the simulated images simulating the attack button 3710 ends. When the attack button 3710 is operated, if the result of the special lottery is a big hit, an image of the bomb character A being hit by a cannonball and exploding is displayed with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/2). It is recommended that you do so. Further, when the result of the special lottery is a big win, if the fifth operation is performed, the image of the explosion may be displayed with a probability of 100%. If the result of the special lottery is a loss, the bomb character A is not hit by the cannonball and the image of the explosion is not displayed.
FIG. 533(a) shows a display example at timing t26.
FIG. 533(b) shows a state in which, when the attack button 3710 is operated for the third time, a lottery with a predetermined probability is won and an image of an explosion is displayed.
On the other hand, if the result of the special lottery is a loss, the display shown in FIG. state.
When the image of the explosion is displayed, if the number of times the attack button 3710 can be operated remains, the remaining number of operations are accepted, and the image of the explosion is displayed in response to this operation. The aspect may be configured to be displayed in an even more explosive aspect.
Since attack button 3710 is not necessarily required to be operated when an explosion image is displayed, the simulated image imitating attack button 3710 may be displayed with a lower display priority than the image of the explosion. FIG. 533(b) shows a display example in which the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 is displayed with a lower display priority than the exploded image.

FIGS. 533(d) to 533(f) are display examples when the mission button 3700 is configured to be operable a plurality of times (for example, five times) from timing t26 to timing t29. In addition, a plurality of (for example, five) simulated images imitating the mission button 3700 are displayed according to the number of times the mission button 3700 can be operated. Moreover, each time the mission button 3700 is operated once, the display of the simulated image displayed on the front side among the simulated images simulating the mission button 3700 ends. When the mission button 3700 is operated, if the result of the special lottery is a big win, an image of the bomb character A being hit by a cannonball and exploding is displayed with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/3). It is recommended that you do so. Note that if the result of the special lottery is a loss, the explosion image is not displayed.
FIG. 533(d) shows a display example at timing t26.
Also, FIG. 533(d) shows a state in which an explosion image is displayed when the mission button 3700 is operated for the third time, and a lottery with a predetermined probability is won.
On the other hand, if the result of the special lottery is a loss, the display shown in FIG. state.
When the explosion image is displayed, if the number of times the mission button 3700 can be operated remains, the remaining number of operations are accepted, and the explosion image is displayed in response to this operation. The aspect may be configured to be displayed in an even more explosive aspect.
Since it is not always necessary to operate the mission button 3700 when the explosion image is displayed, the simulated image imitating the mission button 3700 may be displayed with a lower display priority than the image of the explosion. FIG. 533(e) shows a display example in which the simulated image imitating the mission button 3700 is displayed with lower display priority than the image of the explosion.

It should be noted that, in the production examples shown with reference to FIGS. 533(d) to 533(f), the line of "Colonel Dinah" is "Shoot the special machine gun! Press the defense button!" It is instructed. For this reason, the player needs to carefully observe the presentation situation and operate the mission button 3700 . And when the mission button 3700 can be operated, a special image of a bomb exploding can be visually recognized.

533(a) to 533(c) and FIGS. 533(d) to 533(f). 534 for explanation. In the present embodiment, when timing t26 has come without destroying the battery of the own tank, acceptance of the operations of the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 are enabled at the same time. At this time, each of the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 can receive operations a predetermined number of times (for example, five times each). Also, a predetermined number of simulated images imitating the attack button 3710 and simulated images imitating the mission button 3700 are displayed.

FIG. 534(a) shows a display example in which five simulated images imitating the attack button 3710 and five simulated images imitating the mission button 3700 are displayed. It should be noted that, as described above, the operation valid period should start from timing t26.
In this state, when the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700 is operated, the special lottery result is determined as a jackpot as described above, and a lottery with a predetermined probability (1/2 for the attack button 3710, As for the mission button 3700, an image of an explosion is displayed depending on whether or not 1/3) has been hit.

FIG. 534(b) shows a state in which an explosion image is displayed in response to the third operation of the attack button 3710. FIG. Also, FIG. 534(d) shows a state in which an explosion image is displayed in response to the third operation of the mission button 3700. FIG. The display examples shown in FIGS. 534(b) and 534(d) can be displayed when the special lottery result is a big hit. When the image of the explosion is displayed, if the number of times the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700 can be operated remains, the remaining number of operations are accepted, and the image of the explosion corresponding to the operation is accepted. may be configured to be displayed in a more explosive manner.
For example, in the display state shown in FIG. 534(b), if a predetermined lottery (1/3) is won based on the operation of the mission button 3700, the explosion mode in the display state shown in FIG. You may change the display mode to Alternatively, in the display state shown in FIG. 534(d), if a predetermined lottery (1/2) is won based on the operation of the attack button 3710, the display mode will be the explosion mode shown in FIG. 534(b). may be changed.
In addition, when the result of the special lottery is a big hit, even if the mission button 3700 and the attack button 3710 are operated and the predetermined lottery continues to be lost, if the operation is performed a total of 10 times, 100% It is preferable to display an exploded image in a mode corresponding to the last operated button with a probability of .
When an explosion image is displayed, it is not always necessary to operate the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700. Therefore, the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 and the simulated image simulating the mission button 3700 are given priority over the image of the explosion. It should be displayed at a lower frequency. FIGS. 534(b) and 534(d) show display examples in which a simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 and a simulated image simulating the mission button 3700 are displayed with a lower display priority than the image of the explosion. ing.
If the special lottery result is a loss, the timing of operating the attack button 3710 five times and the mission button 3700 five times during the valid operation period, or for three seconds from the timing when the valid operation period ends. The display state shown in (c) is obtained.
It should be noted that, in the production example shown with reference to FIG. 534(a), the line of "Colonel Dyna" is an erroneous operation instruction such as "Shoot the special machine gun! Press the defense button!". For this reason, the player needs to carefully observe the presentation situation and operate the mission button 3700 .

In the production example explained with reference to FIG. 530(d), the line of "Colonel Dina" instructs the operation of the mission button 3700, but "Shoot the special machine gun! Press the mission button! instead of the line "Shoot the special machine gun! Press the defense button!" may be displayed.
530(a), the production example explained with reference to FIG. 532(a), the production example explained with reference to FIG. 533(a), and the production example explained with reference to FIG. In the production example described with reference, the line "Sergeant Might" instructs the operation of the attack button 3710. Instead, it may be configured to display an erroneous line saying "It's a large bomb~! Please attack with the defense button!".
By adopting such a configuration, the player needs to carefully observe the performance situation, so that it is possible to further improve the game interest. It should be noted that the player can recognize the operation unit to be operated by the simulated image simulating the mission button 3700 and the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 .

Also, the simulated images of the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 show the operation parts to be operated, but these also show the words of "Colonel Dina" and the words of "Sergeant Might". case), a simulated image may be displayed to indicate an operation unit different from the operation unit that should be operated. It should be noted that in this case, when an appropriate operation is performed, a display of firing a cannonball or a bullet may be displayed to suggest to the player that an appropriate display has been performed.

Although a display example of displaying simulated images of the left lever 3720, the attack button 3710, and the mission button 3700 has been shown, these displays do not have to be performed. In this case, the player is required to operate the operation unit in a manner contrary to the operation instruction or in a manner different from the operation instruction based on the type of bomb character, the state of destruction of the own tank, etc. Therefore, the player must perform an appropriate operation. Since the degree of difficulty of performing the operation increases, it is possible to improve the interest felt when an appropriate operation is performed.

533 and 534, even after timing t26, if the player performs an operation that does not follow the operation instruction, a special image (explosion image, tilted sunglasses image, etc.) is displayed. An example of a production that generates a production state that is set is shown. Such an embodiment also has the same effect as the embodiment described above with reference to FIGS. 522 to 532. FIG.

It should be noted that the time during which the special image is displayed should be longer than the time during which the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 is displayed. With such a configuration, the player can enjoy a special image.

The special image displayed when an operation contrary to the operation instruction or different from the operation instruction is performed should preferably be displayed as an image larger than the operation instruction. For example, in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 532, an image (large translucent sunglasses shown in FIG. image) can be displayed. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the player's interest in the display of a more special image.

In addition, although the operation instruction display such as "tilt forward" and "tilt backward" is performed as the operation instruction of the left lever 3720 in this embodiment, when the operation instruction is not performed (Fig. 526(g), Fig. 528(g) 2), the content of the operation can be estimated from the display mode of the displayed bomb character. A special image may be displayed only when the player can properly operate the left lever 3720 in such a more difficult operation situation. For example, in the display example shown in FIG. It is preferable to configure such that an image (special image) in which the sunglasses are tilted is displayed with a predetermined probability (1/10) when it is performed.

Note that when the left lever 3720 or the various buttons described above are operated, an operation acceptance sound that directly corresponds to the operation of the left lever 3720 or the various buttons described above is not output. It may be configured such that a special sound corresponding to the operation is output only when the special condition as described above is satisfied and a special image is displayed. With such a configuration, the player can feel that the special image is displayed in a special way. It should be noted that a similar configuration may be employed in the display of special images in the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 532-534.

As the operation contrary to the operation instruction, the example of the effect of tilting the left lever 3720 in a different direction and the example of the effect of operating a button different from the instructed button are given, but other modes are also possible. For example, when the player is instructed to press and hold the attack button 3710, repeatedly hitting the attack button 3710 may be adopted as an operation contrary to the operation instruction. Alternatively, operating the defense button 3740 when the operation of the attack button 3710 is instructed may be adopted as an operation contrary to the operation instruction.

It should be noted that, when an operation is performed that does not follow the operation instruction display, a special display change is given, but the degree of expectation for a big hit is indicated by the provision of such a special display change. It may be configured as Alternatively, it may be constructed so as not to indicate the degree of expectation of a big hit. Alternatively, among the special display changes described above, some display changes indicate the degree of expectation of a big win, and other display changes do not indicate the degree of expectation of a big win. good too.

In this embodiment, the operation reception period of the left lever 3720 is started after the start of the variable display of the decorative symbols. You may start. In this case, at timing t0, the mode shown in FIG. 526(b) may be displayed to start the "bomb character reach".

Also, based on the pending look-ahead, the effect similar to the “bomb character reach” shown with reference to FIGS. In this case, it is preferable to display the bomb character A and the bomb character B once in the variable display of the decorative symbols executed before the variable display of the decorative symbols to be read ahead. Over the entire period during which the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner, an effect for accepting the operation of the left lever 3720 corresponding to the displayed bomb character is performed. It is preferable to perform corresponding display effects. 523 and 524. For example, the example of the effect executed from the timing t6 to the timing t11 in FIGS. you should do it. Then, during the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbols to be read ahead to the end of the stop display, it is preferable to execute the effect performed from the timing t26 to the timing t35 in FIG.

It should be noted that the destroyed gun battery may be revived by the player performing an operation that does not follow the operation instruction display when the gun battery of the own tank has been destroyed.
Also, in a state in which the machine gun of the own tank is destroyed, the destroyed machine gun may be revived by the player performing an operation that does not follow the operation instruction display.
In addition, in a state in which the gun battery of the own tank is not destroyed, the player may perform an operation that does not follow the operation instruction display, so that the own tank is upgraded. For example, the number of turrets may increase one by one, the color of the turret may change, or the turret may change to an oversized turret.
In this case, as shown in FIG. 522, the timing at which the bomb character can appear is not limited to only two times, but is set to a greater number of times, such as five times, to further improve the interest of the presentation. can be done. In addition, the player can be made to visually recognize a special effect display such as the resurrection of the destroyed machine gun or the upgrade of the self-tank.

The degree of expectation for a big win may be indicated by giving a change in display, or the change in display may be given as a mere effect and not to show the degree of expectation.
For example, the degree of expectation may be indicated by the number of turrets, the color of the turrets, and the size of the turrets. Alternatively, the present game state or the game state to be generated may be suggested or notified according to the number of turrets, the color of the turrets, or the size of the turrets.

The bomb character A or the bomb character B may always be displayed in the first period, the second period, and the variable display in the look-ahead effect. By adopting such a configuration, the operation instructions are always shown to the player, and the player can be made to feel tense, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement.

Although an example in which a special display change is given by operating the left lever 3720 without following the instructed operation content has been shown, an operation contrary to the instructed operation content or an operation different from the instructed operation content has been shown. may be configured to give a special display change.

An example is shown in which both "Colonel Dyna" and "Sergeant Might" may give operation instructions, but in a series of "bomb character reach", only one character may give operation instructions. . In this case, for the other character, it is preferable to display a line such as "Hmm, mumble".

In this way, in "Bomb Chara Reach", a special display change is given when an operation that does not follow the operation instruction display is intentionally performed, and it is possible to give the player a special sense of satisfaction. Become.

Conventionally, in order to suggest the result of a special lottery, there have been cases where a predetermined image is displayed based on an operation by a player to suggest the result of the special lottery (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-046210). By the way, the number of times such operations are accepted and the number of times of display performed in response to the acceptance of operations are predetermined. Also, the period during which the player can operate is limited to a predetermined period, and the display mode cannot be freely changed by the player's free operation. In addition, the display time of the effect displayed in this way is constant, and there is room for improvement in this respect as well. In the embodiments described below, it is possible to accept operations multiple times during the operation valid period, and the display time of the image displayed based on the operation is set to be long or short, and depending on the length of time displayed, special An embodiment that makes it possible to suggest the result of the lottery will be described.

The “suddenly tank effect” that can be executed as a look-ahead effect pattern will be described below with reference to FIG. 535 and the like. It should be noted that whether or not to perform the “suddenly tank effect” is determined based on pre-reading of the pending contents in the peripheral control board 1510 .
Fig. 535 shows the types of production patterns that can be selected, the conditions for selecting the production patterns, the period during which the look-ahead production is executed (specifically, how many times the decorative symbols are displayed in variable display) in the "suddenly tank production". is executed).

The look-ahead performance pattern 01 is a performance pattern that can be selected when the number of pending is 1 to 4 when the previous variable display of decorative patterns is finished and the variable display of decorative patterns is newly started. The look-ahead effect pattern 01 is a effect pattern in which a “suddenly tank effect” is executed in the variable display related to the suspension at the start of the variable display. Since the look-ahead effect pattern 01 is executed only in one variable display period, it is not strictly a look-ahead effect, but is referred to as a look-ahead effect for the sake of convenience.

The look-ahead performance pattern 02 is a performance pattern that can be selected when the pending number is 1 to 3 when the previous variable display of decorative patterns is finished and the variable display of decorative patterns is newly started. The look-ahead effect pattern 02 is a effect pattern in which a "suddenly tank effect" is executed in the variable display related to the suspension at the start of the variable display and the variable display related to the first suspension.

The look-ahead performance pattern 03 is a performance pattern that can be selected when the pending number is 1 to 2 when the previous variable display of decorative patterns is finished and the variable display of decorative patterns is newly started. The look-ahead effect pattern 03 is a effect pattern in which a "suddenly tank effect" is executed in the variable display related to the suspension at the start of the variable display, the variable display related to the first suspension, and the variable display related to the second suspension.

The look-ahead performance pattern 04 is a performance pattern that can be selected when the number of reservations is 1 to 3 when the previous variable display of decorative patterns is finished and the variable display of decorative patterns is newly started. In the look-ahead effect pattern 04, a "suddenly tank effect" is executed in the variable display related to the suspension at the start of the variable display, the variable display related to the first suspension, the variable display related to the second suspension, and the variable display related to the third suspension. It is a production pattern that

In addition, in the performance patterns in which the variable display is performed multiple times, such as the look-ahead performance pattern 02 to the look-ahead performance pattern 04, the result of the special lottery is a big hit or a loss for the last variable display in which the "sudden tank performance" is executed. Any of them is fine, but if all the special lottery results of the intermediate variable displays other than the final variable display in which the ``suddenly tank performance'' is executed are lost, the prefetch performance is based on the prefetch performance pattern 02 to the prefetch performance pattern 04. should be executed.

FIG. 536 is a table showing three display effect patterns displayed in the "suddenly tank effect". Also, FIG. 537 is a time chart showing an effect mode when the look-ahead effect pattern 01 is selected.

As shown in FIG. 537(a), in the “suddenly tank effect”, the time during which the variable display of decorative symbols is performed is 14 seconds from timing t0 to timing t14. Moreover, the time during which the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed is one second. At timing t0, operation acceptance of attack button 3710 becomes valid, and operation acceptance of attack button 3710 becomes invalid at timing t14 when the variable display of the decorative pattern ends. A simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 is displayed in the display area during a period (timing t0 to timing t14) in which the acceptance of the operation of the attack button 3710 is valid. Below, with reference to FIG. 538, a description will be given of the effects displayed in the display area based on the player's operation of the attack button 3710. FIG.

FIG. 538 is a diagram showing a display mode in the display area at a predetermined timing in the time chart described with reference to FIG. 537. FIG.

FIG. 538(a) shows a state in which an image of the own tank is displayed in the display area at timing t0. Reached decorative patterns (“3”, “↓”, “3”) are displayed in the upper left corner of the display area, and an image of the tank facing forward is displayed in the lower center of the display area. The image of the enemy tank facing the direction, the image of the road along which the tank moves in the center of the display area in the horizontal direction, the image of the horizon and the sky in the upper part of the display area, and the character in the production in the lower right of the display area. A dialogue image of a certain "Colonel Dina" and a window image surrounding the dialogue image are displayed in the lower left of the display area. A simulated image representing an attack button 3710 is displayed to the right of the enclosing window image.
In this way, in the “suddenly tank effect”, at timing t0, the image of the own tank and the image of the enemy tank are suddenly displayed, and operation reception for the attack button 3710 is enabled.

As shown in FIG. 537(a), when the attack button 3710 is not operated during the valid operation period, the image of the enemy tank continues to be displayed until timing t14. Also, at timing t14, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed.

On the other hand, after the operation of the attack button 3710 by the player is detected, an effect display corresponding to the operation is immediately executed. FIG. 536 is a table showing production patterns executed based on the operation of attack button 3710. FIG.
Also, FIGS. 537(b) to 537(d) are time charts showing a state in which an effect pattern corresponding to the operation is executed based on the reception of the operation of attack button 3710 at timing t3.
Also, FIGS. 537(e) to 537(g) show a state in which an effect pattern corresponding to the operation is executed based on the reception of the operation of the attack button 3710 at timings t3 and t8. Chart.

FIG. 536 shows an effect pattern selected in response to the operation of the attack button 3710. FIG.
When the smoke display effect pattern 01 is selected, an image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed for one second. At the same time, a smoke image indicating that smoke is rising from the enemy tank is displayed on the upper right of the image of the destroyed enemy tank for one second. After that, an image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed for one second.
When the smoke display effect pattern 02 is selected, an image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed for 2 seconds. At the same time, a smoke image indicating that smoke is rising from the enemy tank is displayed for two seconds on the upper right of the image of the destroyed enemy tank. After that, an image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed for one second.
When the smoke display effect pattern 03 is selected, an image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed for 3 seconds. At the same time, a smoke image indicating that smoke is rising from the enemy tank is displayed for 3 seconds on the upper right of the image of the destroyed enemy tank. After that, an image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed for one second.

Appearance ratios are determined in advance by the smoke display effect pattern 01 to the smoke display effect pattern 03 so as to indicate the degree of expectation that the result of the variable display will be a big hit. The degree of expectation when the smoke display effect pattern 01 is executed is 30%, the degree of expectation when the smoke display effect pattern 02 is executed is 50%, and the degree of expectation when the smoke display effect pattern 03 is executed is 100%. is.

FIG. 537(b) is a time chart showing an effect example in which the smoke display effect pattern 01 is executed from timing t3 to timing t5 based on the operation of the attack button 3710. FIG.
FIG. 537(c) is a time chart showing an example effect in which the smoke display effect pattern 02 is executed from timing t3 to timing t6 based on the operation of the attack button 3710. FIG.
FIG. 537(d) is a time chart showing an example effect in which the smoke display effect pattern 03 is executed from timing t3 to timing t7 based on the operation of the attack button 3710. FIG.

FIG. 538(b) shows a display example in the display area when the attack button 3710 is operated at timing t3 in the production examples shown in FIGS. 537(b) to 537(d). FIG. 538(b) shows a state in which an image of a shell being fired at an enemy tank and the shell exploding and an image of a destroyed enemy tank are displayed in the display area.

The display shown in FIG. 538(b) ends in less than 1 second (for example, 0.1 second), and the display state shown in FIG. 538(c) is reached. In this display state, the battery of the enemy tank is destroyed, and a smoke image showing smoke rising from the enemy tank is displayed on the upper right of the image of the destroyed enemy tank.

In the case of the effect example shown in FIG. 537(b), the smoke display effect pattern 01 is selected, and the smoke image shown in FIG. 538(d) is displayed one second after the display state shown in FIG. 538(c). becomes a display state in which is not displayed. In addition, here, the lines of "Colonel Dina" are changed and displayed, indicating that the degree of expectation is low.

In the case of the effect example shown in FIG. 537(c), the smoke display effect pattern 02 is selected, so that the display state in which the smoke image is not displayed two seconds after the display state shown in FIG. 538(c) is entered. (illustration omitted). As the line of "Colonel Dyna" displayed two seconds later, a display of "Is the power of the new gun so good..." is displayed. Here, the line of "Colonel Dinah" indicates moderate expectations.

In the case of the effect example shown in FIG. 537(d), the smoke display effect pattern 03 is selected, so that the smoke image shown in FIG. 538(e) is displayed three seconds after the display state shown in FIG. becomes a display state in which is not displayed. Also, here, the lines of "Colonel Dinah" are changed and displayed, indicating that the degree of expectation is high.

Thus, it is suggested that the longer the smoke image is displayed (either 1 second, 2 seconds, or 3 seconds), the higher the expectation of a big win.
Therefore, the player views the display area expecting that the smoke image will be displayed for a long time.
In addition, the lines of "Colonel Dyna" that are displayed when the display of the smoke image ends are displayed corresponding to each smoke display effect pattern. Therefore, the line of "Colonel Dinah" also suggests the degree of expectation for a big hit. The lines of "Colonel Dyna" correspond to the display time of the smoke image. It is possible to make even a player who has a low degree of concentration on a game, who does not play the game, feel interest in the game.

One second after the smoke image is no longer displayed, a new enemy tank image is displayed. For example, in the case of the production example shown in FIG. 537(b), the image of the new enemy tank is displayed at timing t5. In the case of the production example shown in FIG. 537(c), the image of the new enemy tank is displayed at timing t6. In the case of the production example shown in FIG. 537(d), at timing t7, an image of a new enemy tank is displayed. FIG. 538(f) is a rendering example showing a state in which an image of a new enemy tank is displayed.

In the production examples shown in FIGS. 537(b) to 537(d), the attack button 3710 is not operated after that, and the variable display of decorative symbols ends at timing t14.

FIG. 539(a) shows a display example that is displayed for one second from timing t14 to timing t15 when the result of the special lottery is a jackpot in the production examples shown in FIGS. 537(b) to 537(d). there is In the drawing, a state is shown in which the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed at "333" indicating that the result of the special lottery is a big win. In addition, the dialogue images of "Colonel Dinah" and "Sergeant Might" are also displayed in a mode of notifying that the game is a big hit.
FIG. 539(b) shows a display example that is displayed for one second from timing t14 to timing t15 when the result of the special lottery is a loss in the production examples shown in FIGS. 537(b) to 537(d). there is In the drawing, a state is shown in which the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed at "343" indicating that the result of the special lottery is a loss. In addition, the dialogue images of "Colonel Dinah" and "Sergeant Might" are also displayed in a manner to notify that they are lost.

537(b) to 537(d) show examples of effects when the attack button 3710 is operated at timing t3. It is possible to receive an operation from and execute any smoke display effect pattern.

In this way, the smoke display effect pattern can be executed a plurality of times by accepting the operation from the player not only once but a plurality of times from the timing t0 to the timing t14.

FIGS. 537(e) to 537(g) show examples of effects when it is detected that the attack button 3710 has been operated at timings t3 and t8.
FIG. 537(e) shows an effect example in which smoke display effect pattern 01 is started at timing t3 and smoke display effect pattern 01 is started at time t8.
FIG. 537(f) shows an effect example in which smoke display effect pattern 01 is started at timing t3 and smoke display effect pattern 02 is started at time t8.
FIG. 537(g) shows an effect example in which smoke display effect pattern 01 is started at timing t3 and smoke display effect pattern 03 is started at time t8.
Even if the smoke display effect pattern is executed a plurality of times, the same display as the effect example described with reference to FIGS. done.

If it is detected that the attack button 3710 has been operated by the player during the execution of a certain smoke display effect pattern, after the smoke display effect pattern being executed ends, FIG. After the display state shown in FIG. 538(b) is continued for one second, one of the smoke display effect patterns is automatically executed, and the display state after FIG. 538(b) may be obtained. For example, when the player operates the attack button 3710 three times in a short period of time (for example, one second) while an image of an undestroyed enemy tank is displayed, the smoke display effect pattern is automatically executed three times. will be

An example of executing the "suddenly tank effect" in one time variable display when the prefetch effect pattern 01 is selected is shown below. A description will be given of the manner in which the "tank performance" is executed.
In addition, in the "suddenly tank effect", the effect is executed for up to four times of variable display, and the variable time required for each variable display is 14 seconds, and the variable stop time is 1 second.

Below, with reference to FIGS. 540 and 541, an effect example when the look-ahead effect pattern 02 is executed will be described. The look-ahead effect pattern 02 is a effect pattern in which a "suddenly tank effect" is executed over two variable displays.
In this case, the target whose degree of expectation is suggested by the look-ahead effect is the special lottery result corresponding to the second variable display. Also, the special lottery result corresponding to the variable display other than the second time is a loss. This point is the same for the look-ahead effect pattern 03 and the look-ahead effect pattern 04 as well.
Also in the look-ahead effect pattern 02 to the look-ahead effect pattern 04, when the display of the smoke image or the image of the destroyed enemy tank starts and ends during the variable display of the decoration pattern, refer to FIGS. 537 and 538. A display similar to the example of effect described above is performed.

The display mode of the smoke image and the image of the destroyed enemy tank while the decorative symbols are still displayed will be described below.
As shown in FIG. 540(a), when the attack button 3710 is not operated at all, the display state shown in FIG. 541(a) occurs from timing t14 to timing t15.
As shown in FIG. 540(b), when the smoke display effect pattern 01 is started at the timing t12 based on the operation of the attack button 3710, the effect of the smoke display effect pattern 01 ends at the time t14, and the effect by the smoke display effect pattern 01 ends at the time t14. From time t15 to timing t15, the display state shown in FIG.
As shown in FIG. 540(c), when the smoke display effect pattern 02 is started at timing t13 based on the operation of the attack button 3710, the smoke image and the destroyed enemy tank appear at timings t14 and t15. Since the image is displayed, the display state shown in FIG. 541(c) is obtained from timing t14 to timing t15.
As shown in FIG. 540(d), when the smoke display effect pattern 03 is started at timing t12 based on the operation of the attack button 3710, the smoke image and the destroyed enemy tank appear at timings t14 and t15. Since the image is displayed, the display state shown in FIG. 541(c) is obtained from timing t14 to timing t15.
As shown in FIG. 540(e), when the smoke display effect pattern 01 is started at timing t13 based on the operation of the attack button 3710, the image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed from timing t14 to timing t15. Therefore, the display state shown in FIG. 541(d) is obtained from timing t14 to timing t15.
As shown in FIG. 540(f), when the smoke display effect pattern 03 is started at timing t11 based on the operation of the attack button 3710, the image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed at timing t14 to timing t15. 541(e) from timing t14 to timing t15.

At timing t15, the variable display of a new decorative pattern is started. At this time, the display of the decorative pattern is also started in a display mode forming a ready-to-win state such as "3↓3".

With reference to FIG. 540, the display mode of the smoke image and the destruction image of the enemy tank when the decoration pattern corresponding to the hold that occurred before the hold that was the target of the look-ahead effect stops has been described. , and FIG. 542, the display mode of the smoke image and the destroyed image of the enemy tank when the decoration pattern corresponding to the suspension targeted for the look-ahead effect is stopped will be described.

FIGS. 542(b) to 542(f) show examples of effects in which the execution period of the selected smoke display effect pattern overlaps with the stop display period (timing t29 to timing t30) of the decorative symbols. In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 542(b) to 542(f), even during the execution period of the selected smoke display effect pattern, the smoke display effect pattern being executed is stopped at timing t29 and decorated. It shows an example of effect for performing stop display of symbols. From timing t29 to timing t30, the display state shown in FIG. 539(a) or FIG. 539(b) is displayed based on the result of the special lottery.

On the other hand, only when the result of the special lottery is a big hit, the smoke display effect pattern being executed may be executed for a predetermined execution period. In this case, although the big win game state is started from the timing t30, the opening state of the big win game is set from the timing t30 to the timing t35, and the opening and closing operation of the big winning opening 2005 is started from the timing t35. FIGS. 543(b) to 543(f) show examples of effects in which a smoke image or an image of a destroyed enemy tank is displayed while the variation of decorative symbols is stopped or during a jackpot game.

On the other hand, only when the result of the special lottery is a loss, the smoke display effect pattern being executed may be executed for a predetermined execution period. In this case, although the next variable display is started from timing t30, the tank effect is continued suddenly even in the next variable display, and the "suddenly tank effect" is ended in the middle of the variable display. good.
Figures 543(b) to 543(f) show an example of a presentation in which an image of smoke or an image of a destroyed enemy tank is displayed while the variation of the decoration pattern is stopped or when the next variation display is started. .

Thus, in the "suddenly tank effect" according to the present embodiment, it is possible to accept the operation of the attack button 3710 (operation unit) at the same time when the decorative pattern starts to change, and the display effect based on the operation of the operation unit can be performed. The number of times of execution is not predetermined, and the display effect can be executed any number of times based on the player's intention, so that the player is strongly interested in the operation of the operation unit. can be done. In addition to simply operating the operation part, pay attention to the display time of the smoke image (specific display) displayed in response to the operation (the longer the display time, the higher the expectation of the big win. Because it is necessary), it can be more interesting. Furthermore, since the variation time of the decorative pattern is set to be short, it is possible to create a sense of tension regarding the operation of the operation unit and the display time of the smoke image displayed in response to the operation. In addition, as a look-ahead effect, by configuring the display effect to be executable over variations of a plurality of decorative patterns, the degree of expectation indicated by the display time of the smoke image is the degree of expectation for the variation of any decorative pattern. It can increase the player's interest in whether there is.

Although three smoke display effect patterns are shown in FIG. 536, the "suddenly tank effect" may be executed using a table in which only the smoke display effect pattern 01 and the smoke display effect pattern 02 are executed. Alternatively, the "suddenly tank effect" is executed using a table in which only the smoke display effect pattern 01 and the smoke display effect pattern 03 are executed, or a table in which only the smoke display effect pattern 02 and the smoke display effect pattern 03 are executed. good too.

Furthermore, as the smoke display effect pattern 04, the destruction image and the smoke image are displayed for 4 seconds, and then only the destruction image is displayed for 1 second. Either one or both of the production patterns with 100% jackpot expectation may be employed in a production mode in which the destruction image and the smoke image are displayed for 5 seconds and then only the destruction image is displayed for 1 second. In this way, by adopting an effect pattern with a long effect execution period, the player can almost certainly notice that the degree of expectation is 100%, and the interest can be improved.

535 to 543, an embodiment in which the longer the smoke image (specific display) is displayed, the higher the expectation that the result of the special lottery will be a big hit has been described. An embodiment modified so that the shorter the display time of the destroyed enemy tank in the embodiment, the higher the expectation that the result of the special lottery will be a big win will be described with reference to FIGS. 544 to 551. . It should be noted that the description of the same processing, display, etc. as before deformation may be omitted.

FIG. 544 shows an effect pattern selected in response to the operation of the attack button 3710. FIG.
When the white flag display effect pattern 01 is selected, an image of a destroyed enemy tank is displayed for 3 seconds. After that, an image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed for one second. At the same time, a white flag image indicating that the enemy tank has surrendered is displayed on the image of the destroyed enemy tank for one second.
When the white flag display effect pattern 02 is selected, an image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed for 2 seconds. After that, an image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed for one second. At the same time, a white flag image indicating that the enemy tank has surrendered is displayed on the image of the destroyed enemy tank for one second.
When the white flag display effect pattern 03 is selected, an image of a destroyed enemy tank is displayed for one second. After that, an image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed for one second. At the same time, a white flag image indicating that the enemy tank has surrendered is displayed on the image of the destroyed enemy tank for one second.

The white flag display effect pattern 01 to white flag display effect pattern 03 determine the appearance rate in advance so as to indicate the degree of expectation that the variable display result will be a big hit. The expectation level is 30% when the white flag display effect pattern 01 is executed, the expectation level is 50% when the white flag display effect pattern 02 is executed, and the expectation level is 100% when the white flag display effect pattern 03 is executed. is.

FIG. 545(b) is a time chart showing an example effect in which the white flag display effect pattern 01 is executed from timing t3 to timing t7 based on the operation of the attack button 3710. FIG.
FIG. 545(c) is a time chart showing an example effect in which white flag display effect pattern 02 is executed from timing t3 to timing t6 based on the operation of attack button 3710. FIG.
FIG. 545(d) is a time chart showing an example effect in which white flag display effect pattern 03 is executed from timing t3 to timing t5 based on the operation of attack button 3710. FIG.

FIG. 546(b) shows a display example in the display area when the attack button 3710 is operated at timing t3 in the production examples shown in FIGS. 545(b) to 545(d). FIG. 546(b) shows a state in which an image of an enemy tank being fired and an image of the bomb exploding and an image of a destroyed enemy tank being displayed in the display area.

The display shown in FIG. 546(b) ends in less than 1 second (for example, 0.1 second), and becomes the display state shown in FIG. 546(c). In this display state, the battery of the enemy tank is destroyed and an image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed. Note that the white flag image is not yet displayed at this stage.

In the case of the effect example shown in FIG. 545(b), the white flag display effect pattern 01 is selected, so that the white flag image shown in FIG. 546(d) is displayed three seconds after the display state shown in FIG. is displayed. In addition, here, the lines of "Colonel Dina" are changed and displayed, indicating that the degree of expectation is low.

In the case of the effect example shown in FIG. 545(c), by selecting the white flag display effect pattern 02, the display state where the white flag image is displayed two seconds after the display state shown in FIG. 546(c) is displayed. (illustration omitted). As the line of "Colonel Dinah" displayed two seconds later, "Is the morale of the enemy army so good..." is displayed. Here, the line of "Colonel Dinah" indicates moderate expectations.

In the case of the effect example shown in FIG. 545(d), the white flag display effect pattern 03 is selected, and the white flag image shown in FIG. 546(e) is displayed one second after the display state shown in FIG. is displayed. Also, here, the lines of "Colonel Dinah" are changed and displayed, indicating that the degree of expectation is high.

In this way, the longer the image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed without the white flag image (either 1 second, 2 seconds, or 3 seconds), the higher the expectation of a big hit. be done.
Therefore, the player views the display area expecting that the white flag image will not be displayed and only the image of the destroyed enemy tank will be displayed for a long time.
In addition, the lines of "Colonel Dyna" that are displayed when the display of the white flag image is started are displayed corresponding to each white flag display effect pattern. Therefore, the line of "Colonel Dinah" also suggests the degree of expectation for a big hit. The line of "Colonel Dyna" corresponds to the time when the white flag image is not displayed and only the image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed, so the white flag image is not displayed and only the image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed. Even if you don't know exactly when will be displayed, you can still get an idea of your expectations, so you don't have to bother checking when the white flag image won't be displayed and only the destroyed enemy tank image will be displayed. It is possible to make even a player who has a low degree of concentration on a simple game feel the interest in the game.

One second after the white flag image is displayed, a new enemy tank image is displayed. For example, in the case of the production example shown in FIG. 545(b), at timing t7, an image of a new enemy tank is displayed. In the case of the production example shown in FIG. 545(c), at timing t6, an image of a new enemy tank is displayed. In the case of the production example shown in FIG. 545(d), at timing t5, an image of a new enemy tank is displayed. FIG. 546(f) is a rendering example showing a state in which an image of a new enemy tank is displayed.

In the production examples shown in FIGS. 545(b) to 545(d), the attack button 3710 is not operated after that, and the variable display of decorative symbols ends at timing t14.

FIG. 547(a) shows a display state that is displayed for one second from timing t14 to timing t15 when the result of the special lottery is a jackpot in the production examples shown in FIGS. 545(b) to 545(d). there is In the drawing, a state is shown in which the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed at "333" indicating that the result of the special lottery is a big win. In addition, the dialogue images of "Colonel Dinah" and "Sergeant Might" are also displayed in a mode of notifying that the game is a big hit.
FIG. 547(b) shows a display state that is displayed for one second from timing t14 to timing t15 when the result of the special lottery is a loss in the production examples shown in FIGS. 545(b) to 545(d). there is In the drawing, a state is shown in which the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed at "343" indicating that the result of the special lottery is a loss. In addition, the dialogue images of "Colonel Dinah" and "Sergeant Might" are also displayed in a manner to notify that they are lost.

545(b) to 545(d) show an example of the effect when the attack button 3710 is operated at timing t3. It is possible to receive an operation from and execute any white flag display effect pattern.

Further, by accepting the operation from the player not only once but a plurality of times from timing t0 to timing t14, it is possible to execute the white flag display effect pattern a plurality of times.

FIGS. 545(e) to 545(g) show examples of effects when it is detected that the attack button 3710 has been operated at two timings of timing t3 and timing t8.
FIG. 545(e) shows an effect example in which the white flag display effect pattern 01 is started at timing t3 and the white flag display effect pattern 01 is started at time t8.
FIG. 545(f) shows an effect example in which white flag display effect pattern 01 is started at timing t3 and white flag display effect pattern 02 is started at time t8.
FIG. 545(g) shows an effect example in which white flag display effect pattern 01 is started at timing t3, and white flag display effect pattern 03 is started at time t8.
Even if the white flag display effect pattern is executed a plurality of times, a display similar to the effect example described with reference to FIGS. done.

If it is detected that the attack button 3710 has been operated by the player during the execution of a certain white flag display effect pattern, after the white flag display effect pattern being executed ends, FIG. After the display state shown in FIG. 546(b) is continued for one second, one of the white flag display effect patterns is automatically executed, and the display state after FIG. 546(b) may be obtained. For example, when the player operates the attack button 3710 three times in a short period of time (for example, one second) while an image of an undestroyed enemy tank is displayed, the white flag display effect pattern is automatically executed three times. will be

An example of executing the "suddenly tank effect" in one time variable display when the prefetch effect pattern 01 is selected is shown below. A description will be given of the manner in which the "tank performance" is executed.
In addition, in the "suddenly tank effect", the effect is executed for up to four times of variable display, and the variable time required for one variable display is 14 seconds, and the variable stop time is 1 second.

Below, with reference to FIGS. 548 and 549, an effect example when the look-ahead effect pattern 02 is executed will be described. The look-ahead effect pattern 02 is a effect pattern in which a "suddenly tank effect" is executed over two variable displays.
In this case, the target whose degree of expectation is suggested by the look-ahead effect is the special lottery result corresponding to the second variable display. Also, the special lottery result corresponding to the variable display other than the second time is a loss. This point is the same for the look-ahead effect pattern 03 and the look-ahead effect pattern 04 as well.
Also in the look-ahead effect pattern 02 to the look-ahead effect pattern 04, when the display of the white flag image or the image of the destroyed enemy tank starts and ends during the variable display of the decoration pattern, refer to FIGS. 545 and 546. A display similar to the example of effect described above is performed.

The display mode of the white flag image and the image of the destroyed enemy tank while the decorative symbols are still displayed will be described below.
As shown in FIG. 548(a), when the attack button 3710 is not operated at all, the display state shown in FIG. 549(a) occurs from timing t14 to timing t15.
As shown in FIG. 548(b), when white flag display effect pattern 03 is started at timing t12 based on the operation of attack button 3710, the effect of white flag display effect pattern 03 ends at time t14, and timing t14. From time t15 to timing t15, the display state shown in FIG. 549(b) is reached.
As shown in FIG. 548(c), when the white flag display effect pattern 02 is started at timing t13 based on the operation of the attack button 3710, the image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed from timing t14 to timing t15. 549(c) from timing t14 to timing t15.
As shown in FIG. 548(d), when the white flag display effect pattern 01 is started at timing t12 based on the operation of the attack button 3710, the image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed from timing t14 to timing t15. 549(c) from timing t14 to timing t15.
As shown in FIG. 548(e), when the white flag display effect pattern 03 is started at timing t13 based on the operation of the attack button 3710, the white flag image and the destroyed enemy tank appear at timings t14 and t15. Since the image is displayed, the display state shown in FIG. 549(d) is obtained from timing t14 to timing t15.
As shown in FIG. 548(f), when the white flag display effect pattern 01 is started at timing t11 based on the operation of the attack button 3710, the white flag image and the destroyed enemy tank are displayed at timings t14 and t15. Since the image is displayed, the display state shown in FIG. 549(e) is obtained from timing t14 to timing t15.

At timing t15, the variable display of a new decorative pattern is started. At this time, the display of the decorative pattern is also started in a display mode forming a ready-to-win state such as "3↓3".

With reference to FIG. 548, the display mode of the white flag image and the destruction image of the enemy tank when the decoration pattern corresponding to the hold that occurred before the hold that was the object of the look-ahead effect stops has been described. 550, the display mode of the white flag image and the destruction image of the enemy tank when the decoration pattern corresponding to the suspension targeted for the look-ahead effect is stopped will be described.

FIGS. 550(b) to 550(f) show examples of effects in which the execution period of the selected white flag display effect pattern overlaps with the stop display period (timing t29 to timing t30) of the decorative symbols. In the production examples shown in FIGS. 550(b) to 550(f), even during the execution period of the selected white flag display production pattern, the white flag display production pattern being executed is stopped at timing t29, and decoration is performed. It shows an example of effect for performing stop display of symbols. From timing t29 to timing t30, the display state shown in FIG. 547(a) or FIG. 547(b) is displayed based on the result of the special lottery.

On the other hand, only when the result of the special lottery is a big hit, the white flag display effect pattern being executed may be executed for a predetermined execution period. In this case, although the big win game state is started from the timing t30, the opening state of the big win game is set from the timing t30 to the timing t35, and the opening and closing operation of the big winning opening 2005 is started from the timing t35. FIGS. 551(b) to 551(f) show examples of effects in which a white flag image or an image of a destroyed enemy tank is displayed while the variation of decorative symbols is stopped or during a jackpot game.

On the other hand, when the result of the special lottery is a loss, the white flag display performance pattern being executed is configured to be executed for a predetermined execution period, and when the result of the special lottery is a big hit, the white flag display during execution. The effect pattern may be configured to be interrupted without being executed for a predetermined execution period. This prevents the player from feeling dissatisfied that the result of the special lottery was a loss, even though the highly anticipated performance was executed if the display of the destroyed enemy tank image was interrupted. It is for
In addition, if the result of the special lottery is a loss and there are one or more pending, the next variable display will start at timing t30, but the "suddenly tank effect" will continue even in the next variable display, It is preferable to configure so that the "suddenly tank presentation" is ended in the middle of the variable display. With such a configuration, the "suddenly tank presentation" can be ended in a natural manner without making the player feel uncomfortable.
Figures 551(b) to 551(f) show an example of a presentation in which an image of smoke or an image of a destroyed enemy tank is displayed while the variation of the decoration pattern is stopped or when the next variation display is started. .

The embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 544-551 can also achieve the same effect as the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 536-543. In the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 544 to 551, the shorter the display time of the destroyed enemy tank, the higher the expectation of a big hit. Expecting that the display time of the tank will be short, you will have to watch the display effect.

535 to 551, an embodiment of "suddenly a tank effect" has been shown, but the embodiment may be modified as follows. An embodiment in which an image of a destroyed enemy tank and an image of smoke are displayed will be described as an example. good too.

As shown in FIGS. 536 and 544, the display time of the image of the destroyed enemy tank is either 2 seconds, 3 seconds, or 4 seconds. A predetermined sound effect may be output while the image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed. For example, sound effects of 2 seconds, 3 seconds, and 4 seconds are prepared in advance, and at the same time when the image of the destroyed enemy tank starts to be displayed, the output of the sound effect of the same seconds may be started. In this way, the display of the image of the destroyed enemy tank and the output of the sound effect may be started at the same timing and finished at the same timing.

On the other hand, it may be modified so that the display time of the image of the destroyed enemy tank and the output time of the sound effect are different. For example, only a sound effect with an output time of 4 seconds is prepared, and this sound effect is output regardless of whether the image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed for 2, 3, or 4 seconds. It should be configured as follows. By adopting such a configuration, it becomes impossible to know the degree of expectation unless the player is watching the display mode of the image of the destroyed enemy tank, and the game can be given a sense of tension. It is also possible to employ only sound effects with an output time of 3 seconds or only sound effects with an output time of 2 seconds.

A predetermined sound effect may be looped to output the sound. For example, a sound effect with a length of one second may be reproduced multiple times (2 times, 3 times, 4 times) in accordance with the display time of the image of the destroyed enemy tank. For example, a sound effect having a length of 1 second may be reproduced four times in succession to output the sound effect for 4 seconds. In this case, as above, the display time is different, but the sound effect is output a certain number of times (for a certain period of time), so that the expectation level cannot be understood unless the image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed carefully. , and the game can be made to have a sense of tension.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 536, the degree of expectation when the smoke display effect pattern 01 is executed is set to 30%, but it may be set to 0% instead of 30%. Similarly, in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 544, the degree of expectation when the white flag display effect pattern 01 is executed is set to 30%, but it may be set to 0% instead of 30%.

536 and 544, based on the player's operation, the effect pattern for displaying an image of an enemy tank being destroyed can be executed multiple times. However, a limit may be set on the number of executions of highly anticipated effect patterns. For example, the number of times the smoke display effect pattern 03 or the white flag display effect pattern 03, which has a 100% chance of winning a big hit, is executed during one "suddenly tank effect" may be limited to once. Also, the number of times the performance pattern with the expectation level of 0% as described above is executed may be similarly limited to one time. With such a configuration, the player carefully observes whether or not the high-expectation (or low-expectation) effect pattern is executed, so that the game can be made tense.

As shown in FIGS. 538 and 546, in this embodiment, decoration patterns (during variable display and during stop display), a simulated image simulating an attack button 3710, an image of an undestroyed enemy tank, a destroyed enemy The tank images are displayed relatively small in the display area, but at least one of them may be displayed larger. For example, the decorative pattern may be variably displayed in sizes shown in FIGS. 500(b) and 500(c). In this case, a display mode in which these images overlap may be adopted. In this case, the display priority is given to the image of the enemy tank that has not been destroyed and the image of the enemy tank that has been destroyed. ), should be in that order. In addition, it is preferable to lower the display priority of the image of the own tank, the serif image, and the background image such as the road.

With such a configuration, the decorative pattern (during variable display and during stop display), the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710, the image of the undestroyed enemy tank, or the image of the destroyed enemy tank are superimposed on each other. Even if displayed, the visibility of the image of the enemy tank that has not been destroyed or the enemy tank that has been destroyed is not hindered by the decorative pattern or the simulated image of the attack button 3710 . Therefore, the timing of starting and ending the display of the image of the destroyed enemy tank is clarified, preventing the player from misunderstanding the display time of the image of the destroyed enemy tank, that is, the degree of expectation. can.

An embodiment in which the image of the enemy tank is always destroyed and displayed by operating the attack button 3710 has been described, but the difficulty level is increased to display the image of the enemy tank in a destroyed state. may In this case, the display conditions for the operation of the operation unit in the above-described embodiment may be adopted. For example, when the attack button 3710 is operated, a lottery is held, and if the player wins with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/2), the image of the enemy tank is destroyed and displayed. good too. In this way, by configuring the image of the destroyed enemy tank to be displayed when a specific condition is met, the difficulty of displaying the image of the destroyed enemy tank can be increased. Even if the player is operating , the player can have a sense of tension that they do not know when the image of the destroyed tank will be displayed.

In the above-described embodiment, when the expectation of a big hit is 100%, that is, when the result of the special lottery is a big hit, the image of the tank being destroyed in the "suddenly tank effect" is displayed at a different time than usual (smoke An example of the effect when the display effect pattern 03 or the white flag display effect pattern 03 is selected has been shown, but it not only suggests that it is a big win, but also suggests other game values that are profitable for the player. may be performed. For example, as described above, by winning the symbol to which the time saving is given, or by executing a predetermined number of losing fluctuations from the time of turning on the power or from the previous hit, the time saving is given from the normal game state The “suddenly tank effect” may be executed in the loss variation that triggers the switch to the game state. In this case as well, since it is common that a time-saving game state is given instead of winning as an advantage advantageous to the player, the various effects described in the above-described embodiments can be produced in the same manner.

In the above-described embodiment, the degree of expectation for a big hit is indicated by the "suddenly tank effect", but the "suddenly tank effect" may be configured to indicate the type of profit given to the player. For example, as a benefit given to the player, after the variable decorative pattern becomes a big hit, which of the time-saving state or the variable probability state is given, or whether it is likely to be given (for example, the expectation that it will be a variable state percentage) may be indicated. Alternatively, in a gaming machine that can shift to the time saving state or the probability changing state after the variation of the decorative pattern without going through the jackpot state, which of the time saving state or the probability changing state is given after the variation of the decorative pattern, or is given. It may indicate whether it is easy (for example, what percentage is expected to be in a probability variable state).

Thus, according to the “suddenly tank effect”, it is possible to enhance the interest of the gaming machine.

Conventionally, there has been an effect in which a player is requested to operate an operation unit (for example, JP-A-2010-046210). In such an effect, the predetermined effect display is displayed regardless of whether the player operates the operation unit or not, so that the operation of the operation unit gives a sense of tension. It was blurry. In particular, even if a complicated operation mode is requested, it is only a pretense after all, and the predetermined effect is performed regardless of the operation mode performed by the player on the operation unit. However, by executing such an effect, there is a possibility that the player's interest in the effect display may be lowered. As described above, the conventional game machine has room for improvement in terms of effectively using the operation to the operation unit to improve the amusement of the game. Therefore, in the embodiment shown below, it is possible to make the player feel nervous about the operation mode of the operation unit by the player, thereby suppressing the decline in the interest in the game. will be explained.

In the embodiments described below, the operation of the left lever 3720 is requested to the player, and depending on whether the player can tilt the left lever 3720 in a predetermined direction and angle and maintain that state, Therefore, it is configured so that there are cases where viewing the special effect display is not hindered and when viewing is hindered (when it is impossible to see or when it is difficult to see). there is

552, display examples shown in FIGS. 553 and 554, etc., the player is required to operate the left lever 3720 within a predetermined range. ” will be described. Note that FIG. 553 shows a display example when an appropriate operation is performed as shown in FIG. 552(a). Also, FIG. 554 shows a display example when an appropriate operation is not performed as shown in FIG. 552(b).

At timing t5, a ready-to-win effect state occurs. In "Full Breakthrough Reach", a speed display window showing the speed of your own tank is displayed above the dialogue window of "Colonel Dyna". The display in the speed display window changes depending on how the player operates the left lever 3720 . Decorative patterns, roads, and self-tank images are displayed in the same manner as in other embodiments. FIGS. 553(a) and 554(a) show display examples at timing t5 when the ready-to-win effect state occurs.

At timing t5, an operation effective period of left lever 3720 occurs. As shown with reference to FIG. 501, by operating the left lever 3720, it is possible to change the lateral position and speed of the own tank. The operation effective period of the left lever 3720 continues until the timing t34, which is the variation stop timing of the decorative symbols.

At a timing t7, a state is created in which a cannonball is fired from behind the own tank. This effect state continues for four seconds until timing t11. Also during this period, a simulated image simulating the left lever 3720 is displayed to the left of the dialogue window of "Colonel Dinah". In addition, the simulated image is labeled with the character “tilted forward” indicating the operation mode of the left lever 3720 .
FIGS. 553(b) and 554(b) show display examples at timing t7.

An example of the effect when the left lever 3720 is appropriately operated will be described below with reference to the time chart shown in FIG. 552(a), the display example shown in FIG. 553, and the like. Further, an example of the effect when the left lever 3720 is not properly operated will be described below with reference to the time chart shown in FIG. 552(b), the display example shown in FIG. 554, and the like.

From timing t7 to timing t11, the player needs to tilt the left lever 3720 forward by a predetermined angle for a predetermined period. Specifically, the left lever 3720 should be maintained between 10 degrees and 45 degrees forward from the upright position of the left lever 3720 for 2 seconds. By performing such an operation, a display in which the self-tank is accelerating and moving is displayed in the display area. FIG. 553(c) shows a display example when the own tank is sufficiently accelerated at timing t9.

The time chart shown in FIG. 552(a) shows a state in which the player can tilt the left lever 3720 at an appropriate angle from timing t8 to timing t10. At timing t11, the operation instruction display for left lever 3720 ends. FIG. 553(d) shows a display example from timing t11 to timing t15 when the left lever 3720 is appropriately operated.

On the other hand, if the left lever 3720 is not properly operated, for example, if the time to operate the left lever 3720 is insufficient or the angle to operate it is insufficient, the shell fired from the enemy tank hits the own tank. , the display that the shell explodes is performed.

The time chart of FIG. 552(b) shows an effect example in which the left lever 3720 is operated only for one second from timing t8 to timing t9 during the operation effective period of the left lever 3720. FIG. In this case, your tank is not fast enough. Therefore, at timing t11, which is the end timing of the operation instruction display, the display of the smoke image generated by the explosion of the shell around the image of the own tank starts.

The display state shown in FIG. 554(c) shows a display example when the speed of the own tank is not sufficient at timing t9. Also, FIG. 554(d) shows a display example in which a smoke image is displayed from timing t11 to timing t15 because the vehicle's speed was not sufficient.

In addition, in FIGS. 553(c) and 553(d), a state is shown in which characters "30 km/h" are displayed as the speed of the own tank. In addition, FIGS. 554(c) and 554(d) show a state in which characters "20 km/h" are displayed as the speed of the own tank. In this manner, when an appropriate operation is performed on the left lever 3720 while the operation instruction is being displayed, the display in the speed display window is set to 30 km/h or more, and an appropriate operation is being performed while the operation instruction is being displayed. If not, or if an appropriate operation is not performed while the operation instruction is being displayed, the display in the speed display window is less than 30 km/h. Specifically, the time after the left lever 3720 reaches an appropriate angle is measured, and the speed display of the own tank is increased by 1 km/h every 0.1 seconds. According to such a configuration, by looking at the display of the speed display window, the player can check whether the operation mode of the left lever 3720 is properly performed and whether the operation of the left lever 3720 is properly performed. recognizable.

From timing t15 to timing t24, a display effect is performed in which the own tank advances forward. Even if the smoke image was displayed due to the explosion of the shell from the enemy unit, the display of the smoke image ends at timing t15. FIGS. 553(e) and 554(e) show display examples of the display effects in which the own tank advances from timing t15 to timing t24. Note that the speed in the speed display window that has been changed according to the operation of the left lever 3720 changes from the timing (timing t15) when the display of the smoke image ends to the timing (timing t15) when the operation instruction display for the left lever 3720 is performed again. The speed may be set to "10 km/h" at a predetermined timing up to timing t24).

In this embodiment, it is possible to change the speed of the own tank according to the operation of the left lever 3720 during the period from timing t5 to timing t34. Therefore, by operating the left lever 3720 during the period when the operation instruction display is not performed, it is possible to practice changing the speed of the own tank. In this case, it is preferable to display "10 km/h" in the speed display window at the timing when the speed indication display is started.

At timing t24, images of a plurality of enemy tanks are displayed in the upper part of the display area. Images of a plurality of enemy tanks are moved leftward in the upper part of the display area and displayed until timing t32. At the same time, a simulated image simulating the left lever 3720 is displayed, and an operation instruction display for the left lever 3720 is started. The operation instruction display for left lever 3720 is performed until timing t32.

From timing t24 to timing t32, the player needs to tilt the left lever 3720 forward by a predetermined angle for a predetermined period. Specifically, the left lever 3720 should be maintained between 30 degrees and 45 degrees forward from the upright position of the left lever 3720 for 4 seconds. By performing such an operation, a display in which the own tank is accelerated to a maximum speed of 50 km/h is displayed in the display area.

The time chart shown in FIG. 552(a) shows a state in which the player can tilt the left lever 3720 at an appropriate angle from timing t25 to timing t29. At timing t32, the operation instruction display for left lever 3720 ends. FIG. 553(g) shows a display example from timing t32 to timing t34 when the left lever 3720 is appropriately operated.

Next, from timing t34 to timing t35, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. FIG. 553(h) is a display example showing a display state in which decorative symbols are stopped.

On the other hand, if the left lever 3720 is not properly operated, for example, if the time to operate the left lever 3720 is insufficient, the tilting angle is insufficient, or the tilting direction is wrong, the own tank and the enemy tank are separated. A display that the self-tank exploded due to the collision is performed.

The time chart of FIG. 552(b) shows a state in which the left lever 3720 is properly tilted for only two seconds from timing t25 to timing t27 during the operation valid period of the left lever 3720. FIG. In this case, your tank is not fast enough. Therefore, from timing t32, which is the end timing of the operation instruction display, the display of the smoke image generated by the collision with the enemy tank around the image of the own tank starts.

FIG. 554(g) shows a display example from timing t32 to timing t34 when the own tank is not sufficiently accelerated. Also, FIG. 554(h) shows a display example in which a smoke image is displayed from timing t34 when the decorative symbols are displayed in a stopped state to timing t35.

Although the display examples shown in FIGS. 553 and 554 show the display examples when the special lottery result is a big hit, the same display is performed when the special lottery result is a loss. In this case, it is preferable to stop display the decorative pattern with the number "343" to indicate that the result of the special lottery is a loss.

As described above, according to the "full power breakthrough reach" in the present embodiment, when the player cannot operate the left lever 3720 in an appropriate operation mode, the visibility of the stopped display mode of the decorative symbols displayed in a large size is reduced. Obstructed by smoke images. Therefore, it becomes difficult for the player to confirm the stationary display mode of the decorative symbols displayed in a large size, and the player will be conscious of performing appropriate operations from the next time onwards. On the other hand, when the player operates the left lever 3720 in an appropriate operation mode, the player can visually recognize the stop display mode of the decorative symbols displayed in a large size without impeding visibility. You will feel a sense of satisfaction that you have completed the tense operation.

In the present embodiment, the operation instruction display for the left lever 3720 is performed twice during the period from timing t7 to timing t11 and the period from timing t24 to timing t32. done.
At this time, the operation mode of the left lever 3720 is such that the time required for the operation is longer and the operation angle is narrower at the later timing than at the first timing. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a more tense operation mode.

FIG. 552(c) is an embodiment modified from the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 552(a) and 552(b). In this embodiment, the display time of the smoke image is lengthened when the smoke image is displayed due to the shell of the enemy tank, and the smoke image is displayed until the timing when the enemy tank group is displayed. there is
Specifically, the smoke image is displayed until timing t27. In such a configuration, the display period of the smoke image (timing t11 to timing t27) and part of the display period (timing t24 to timing t31) during which the second operation instruction is displayed overlap. Become.
At this time, the simulated image imitating the left lever 3720 may be partially or entirely hidden by the smoke image. Similarly, a part or all of the speech of "Colonel Dyna" instructing the operation of the left lever 3720 and the speed display window may be hidden.
With such a configuration, if an appropriate operation is not performed during the display period (timing t7 to timing t11) in which the first operation instruction display is performed, the display period in which the second operation instruction display is performed. Since it becomes difficult to recognize the operation mode during (timing t24 to timing t31), the sense of tension in the operation of left lever 3720 can be increased.

Alternatively, the length of the smoke image to be displayed when the left lever 3720 is not properly operated may be determined by lottery. For example, the display time may be determined by lottery from a minimum of 4 seconds to a maximum of 24 seconds. In this case, the smoke image is displayed for 4 seconds from timing t11 to timing t15 at the shortest and for 24 seconds from timing t11 to timing t35 at the longest. Especially when the longest display period is selected, the decorative pattern stopped and displayed in the center of the display area becomes difficult or invisible due to the smoke image regardless of the operation mode of the left lever 3720 for the second time. .

Note that the technical idea related to the “suddenly tank effect” shown with reference to FIGS. 535 to 551 may be applied to the display mode of the smoke image in the “full breakthrough reach”. For example, it may be configured such that the display time of the smoke image in the "full power breakthrough reach" is different depending on whether or not the big hit state or the time saving state occurs.

Although an example of displaying a smoke image is shown when the player is unable to perform an appropriate operation while the operation instruction is being displayed, it is possible to perform an appropriate operation instead of always displaying these images. If not, these images may be displayed with a predetermined probability (for example, a probability of 1/2).
When the special lottery result is a loss, the smoke image is displayed with a predetermined probability (for example, a probability of 3/4), and when the special lottery result is a big hit, the smoke image is not displayed. It may be configured as
Further, a plurality of modes may be provided for the color and shape of the smoke image, and the degree of expectation for the special lottery result may be suggested by the display mode of the displayed smoke image.

Another embodiment modified from the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 552 etc. will be described with reference to FIGS. 555 and 556 . FIG. 555 is a time chart in this embodiment. Also, FIG. 556 shows a display example in this embodiment.

In this embodiment, instead of displaying a group of tanks, an effect is executed from timing t24 to timing t29 in which a minefield is displayed on the road on which one's own tank travels. FIG. 556(a) shows a display example at timing t29, which is the timing when the display of the minefield is started. From timing t24 to timing t29, a display is made in which the own tank approaches the minefield.

At timing t26, acceptance of the operation of the mission button 3700 becomes valid. The operation valid period of the mission button 3700 continues until the mission button 3700 is operated. If the mission button 3700 is not operated, the process continues until timing t29. In addition, during the operation valid period of the mission button 3700, a simulated image simulating the mission button 3700 is displayed on the upper left of the dialogue window of "Colonel Dina". FIG. 556(b) shows a display example at timing t26 when the operation effective period of the mission button 3700 occurs.

As shown in FIG. 555(c), when the mission button 3700 is operated during the valid period of operation (timing t28), the own tank jumps and jumps over the advancing minefield. is performed for 3 seconds. FIG. 556(c) shows a display example at the timing (for example, timing t31) when the player operates the mission button 3700 during the valid operation period and the effect of jumping the own tank ends. This display continues until timing t34.

Next, from timing t34 to timing t35, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. FIG. 556(d) is a display example showing a display state in which decorative symbols are stopped.

FIG. 555(d) shows an effect example when the mission button 3700 is not operated during the valid operation period. In this case, from timing t29, which is the timing at which the valid operation period ends, to timing t35, a smoke image with a higher display priority than the own tank is displayed, and the own tank enters the minefield and is enveloped in smoke. A performance display is performed. FIG. 556(e) shows a display example from timing t29 to timing t34.

Next, from timing t34 to timing t35, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. FIG. 556(f) is a display example showing a display state in which decorative symbols are stopped. At this time, the decorative pattern stopped and displayed in the center of the display area is hidden by the smoke image.

In this way, when the mission button 3700 is properly operated, the visibility of the stationary decorative pattern is not hindered. The visibility of the decorative pattern stopped and displayed by the image is obstructed. Therefore, the player will be more nervous about operating the mission button 3700 .

Note that the modification shown with reference to FIG. 552(c) may also be applied to the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. In this case, the simulated image of the mission button 3700, the lines of "Colonel Dyna" instructing the operation of the mission button 3700, and the display mode of the tank jumping are difficult to see due to the smoke generated by the shells of the enemy tank group. or become invisible. As a result, the feeling of tension with respect to the operation of left lever 3720 is increased.

Thus, according to the "full power breakthrough reach" in this embodiment, depending on whether the left lever 3720 can be operated within a predetermined operation range, the decorative pattern stop display mode (or The visibility of the simulated image imitating the mission button 3700, the operation instruction display of the mission button 3700, and the effect display corresponding to the operation of the mission button 3700) may or may not be hindered by the smoke image. The player will feel nervous about the operation of the left lever 3720, and will be motivated to operate the left lever 3720 positively, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

An example of displaying a smoke image with a predetermined probability (probability of 1/2) when the operation of the left lever 3720 is inappropriate has been described. , the probability of displaying a smoke image may be different. For example, when the tilting direction of the left lever 3720 is appropriate but the operation time is shorter than a predetermined time, the shorter the operation time, the more easily the smoke image is displayed. In addition, the smoke image may be displayed with a probability of 90% or 100% when no operation is performed or when an operation in the direction opposite to the direction indicated by the operation is performed.

It should be noted that the visibility mode of the operation instruction image, decorative pattern, and the like may be completely invisible by the smoke image, or may be partially invisible but partially visible. Alternatively, a semi-transparent image may be used as the smoke image so that the operation instruction image, the decorative pattern, and the like may be vaguely visible through the semi-transparent smoke image. By adopting such a configuration, the visibility of the operation instruction image and the decorative pattern is ensured to a certain extent.

A display effect (such as displaying a predetermined character image) with an expectation level of 100% and a very low appearance probability can be executed, and the timing at which this display effect is executed is set to the timing at which a smoke image can be displayed. good too. In addition, it may be configured such that part or all of this display effect is invisible or difficult to see due to the smoke image. In this case, this display effect may be hidden by the smoke image, which is a very unfortunate game situation for the player. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to keep the player more nervous when operating the operating means.

Although the visibility of the reach mode of the decorative pattern is hindered by the smoke image, the display time of the smoke image may be set so that the display of the smoke image ends before the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. good. For example, the display of the smoke image may end at timing t34, and the smoke image may not be displayed during the period from timing t34 to timing t35. By adopting such a configuration, the visibility of the statically displayed decorative pattern is not hindered by the smoke image, so that the result of the special lottery is a loss even though the statically displayed decorative pattern indicates a big win. Thus, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player misunderstands, or the player misunderstands that the decorative pattern that is stopped and displayed indicates a loss, but that it is a big hit.

Alternatively, even when the smoke image is displayed, it may be configured such that the visibility of the statically displayed decorative pattern may or may not be hindered. For example, a lottery with a probability of 1/2 may be executed so that the statically displayed decorative pattern may or may not be hidden by the smoke image. Alternatively, if the time the left lever 3720 was tilted was less than half of the required operating time, then the stationary decorative symbols remain hidden by the smoke image and the time the left lever 3720 was tilted. is more than half of the required operation time, the statically displayed decorative pattern may not be hidden by the smoke image (for example, the display of the smoke image ends at timing t34). With such a configuration, the player can operate the left lever 3720 with more tension.

The variable display of the decorative pattern may be made invisible or difficult to be visually recognized over a plurality of times of variable display by the smoke image.
For example, the display time of the smoke image may be set to 120 seconds instead of 4 seconds, and the smoke image may be displayed over the variable display of a plurality of decorative patterns. Alternatively, the display time of the smoke image may be modified from the lottery mode described above and the display time of the smoke image may be determined by lottery from a minimum of 4 seconds to a maximum of 120 seconds. is ignored twice (timing t7 to timing t11, timing t24 to timing t32) and the left lever 3720 is not tilted, such a smoke image is displayed with a high probability (probability of 99/100). It should be configured as follows.
In this case, during the period (timing t32-timing t34) in which the decorative pattern is variably displayed and the period (timing t34-timing t35) in which the decorative pattern is statically displayed, the decorative pattern is hidden by the smoke image to improve visibility. In addition, the variable display of the decorative symbols and the stationary display of the decorative symbols starting after the timing t35 are performed multiple times, respectively, and the visibility may be obstructed by the smoke image.
In this case, for the purpose of consistency as an effect, it is preferable to continue the "full-strength breakthrough reach" even after timing t35. In this case, the player is requested to operate the left lever 3720 again.
Further, when the display of the smoke image straddles the variable display of the decorative pattern in this way, the operation of the left lever 3720 is disabled even during the stoppage of the variable display of the decorative pattern or immediately after the start of the variable display (between the timing t0 and the timing t5). First, the effective operation period is set to 7, which continues over a plurality of variable displays, so that an effect display (such as a change in the speed display in the speed display window) based on the reception of the operation of the left lever 3720 can be performed at any time. may be configured.

In the drawing, the speed of the own tank is displayed in the display area, but the tilted direction or tilted angle of the left lever 3720 may be displayed. Alternatively, it may be configured to display the elapsed time after the left lever 3720 is tilted at the required angle under the condition that the operation instruction of the left lever 3720 is being performed. With such a configuration, the player can recognize whether the left lever 3720 is operated within an appropriate range and how many seconds the left lever 3720 is operated within an appropriate range.

A simulated image simulating the left lever 3720 is displayed, and an operation instruction is displayed by the words "Colonel Dyna". An effect pattern requiring tilting operation of the left lever 3720 may be executed without displaying a clear operation instruction display by image display. For example, the fact that an enemy tank is approaching from behind can be indicated by displaying a state in which a shell is fired from behind, and the player can voluntarily tilt the left lever 3720 without displaying an operation instruction. may be configured to allow By constructing the game so that a game situation with a higher degree of difficulty can occur in this way, it is possible to further heighten the sense of tension regarding the operation of the left lever 3720 .

The player may not be able to properly recognize whether the left lever 3720 is properly maintained within a predetermined operating range. Therefore, the operation mode of the left lever 3720 may be notified by the vibration mode of the left lever vibration source 3722 built in the left lever 3720 . For example, the vibration source may be vibrated for 0.5 seconds when the operation range of the left lever 3720 is moved within the appropriate operation range by the player's operation. Alternatively, left lever vibration source 3722 starts vibrating when the operation range of left lever 3720 moves into the appropriate operation range, and during the period in which the operation range of left lever 3720 is within the appropriate operation range, Vibration of the left lever vibration source 3722 may be continued, and vibration of the vibration source may be terminated when the operation range of the left lever 3720 is out of the appropriate range.

Also, the operation mode of the left lever 3720 (whether the operation is being performed appropriately) is indicated by the display contents in the speed display window. It may be configured so that there is For example, the smoke image may be configured to obscure the speed of the own tank within the speed display window. In this case, since the operation mode is not displayed, the player operates the left lever 3720 with more tension.

An example of tilting the left lever 3720 forward has been shown, but in order to make the operation more difficult, the range in which the lever should be operated is limited to around 30 degrees forward (for example, the range from 25 degrees to 35 degrees), If it is completely tilted forward 45 degrees, smoke will come out of the tank's engine with a predetermined probability (1/2 probability), and the smoke image shown in Fig. 554(d) or Fig. 554(g) will be displayed. It may be configured such that the image of the own tank and the operation instruction display are hidden by this smoke image. In this case, the player is required to perform operations with a higher degree of difficulty, making it possible to heighten the sense of tension. In addition, when such an embodiment is adopted, it is possible to practice tilting the left lever 3720 to an appropriate range at any time during the period in which the left lever 3720 can be operated.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 555 and 556, if the left lever 3720 cannot be properly operated, a smoke image is displayed to hinder the visibility of the operation instruction of the mission button 3700. It is configured as follows. Further, even if the mission button 3700 can be operated, the smoke image obstructs the visibility of the effect display corresponding to the operation of the mission button 3700 (the display mode in which the own tank jumps). With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the sense of tension with respect to the operation of left lever 3720 .

Further, the type of display mode of a simulated image simulating the mission button 3700, the display mode and type of the dialogue itself of “Colonel Dina” that instructs the operation mode of the mission button 3700, and the type of dialogue itself when the mission button 3700 is operated. Depending on the type of display mode in which the tank jumps, an operation corresponding image may be displayed that indicates the degree of expectation that the result of the special lottery will be a big win. According to such a configuration, depending on whether or not the left lever 3720 can be operated within an appropriate operating range, the visibility of the display indicating the degree of expectation may or may not be hindered by the smoke image. It will happen. Therefore, the player who wants to know the degree of expectation naturally operates the left lever 3720 with a sense of urgency, thereby realizing an improvement in interest.
It should be noted that the technical idea that suggests the degree of expectation in the "shield bullet reach" shown with reference to FIGS. It may be applied to a display mode of a simulated image, a simulated image imitating the mission button 3700, an image of an enemy tank group, an image of a minefield, and the like. For example, the degree of expectation for the occurrence of the big hit state or the time saving state may be indicated by the display mode of these images in the "full power breakthrough reach". Also, the technical idea related to the shield image in the "shield bullet reach" may be applied to the smoke image in the "full breakthrough reach".

Although the operation of the mission button 3700 is requested after the operation instruction of the left lever 3720 is completed, the operation of the mission button 3700 may be requested while the operation instruction of the left lever 3720 is being requested. With such a configuration, the operation difficulty of the left lever 3720 and the operation of the mission button 3700 is increased, and the tension of the player can be increased. It should be noted that when both operation instruction displays are performed at the same time, it is preferable to display the operation instruction displays in such a manner that they do not overlap each other. For example, the display form shown in FIG. 553(b) and the simulated image imitating the lever 3720 in the display form shown in FIG. When the area available for display in the display area is insufficient, either one of the simulated image imitating the lever 3720 and the simulated image imitating the mission button 3700 is placed on the front side and one of the simulated images is placed on the back side. It is preferable to display the simulated image so that part of the simulated image displayed behind is visible while the simulated image is displayed in an overlapping manner.

By the way, if the degree of difficulty is increased too much, there is a risk that players who are not good at complicated operations will shy away from playing the game. Therefore, even if there is no operation by the player, an auto reception mode is adopted in which the same effect display as when there is an appropriate operation by the player is performed, and the operation of the left lever 3720 and the operation of the mission button 3700 are not performed. Even in such a case, the same effect display as when the player performs an appropriate operation may be executed. In this case, the player only has to concentrate on operating the operation unit that has not been set to the automatic reception mode.
It should be noted that it is preferable to configure so that only the operation of the left lever 3720 can be set to the auto-acceptance mode, only the operation of the mission button 3700 can be set to the auto-acceptance mode, or both the operations of the left lever 3720 and the mission button 3700 can be set to the auto-acceptance mode.
In particular, when only the operation of the mission button 3700 is set to the auto-acceptance mode, the player only has to concentrate on operating the left lever 3720 well, which may confuse the player who is not accustomed to the "all-out reach". can prevent the occurrence of Also, when both the left lever 3720 and the mission button 3700 are set to the auto reception mode, the player can concentrate on visually recognizing the effect without operating the left lever 3720 or the mission button 3700. .

In addition to left lever 3720, right lever 3730 may be configured to be operable. For example, in the operation of the right lever 3730, it is preferable to make it a condition for executing the effect mode that the right lever 3730 is tilted within a predetermined tilting range for a predetermined period of time, similarly to the left lever 3720. For example, it is preferable to perform an effect display in which dust appears from caterpillars that represent the manner in which the own tank is accelerating. In this case, it is preferable that an image (simulated image or the like) for instructing the operation of right lever 3730 is not displayed.
In this manner, the right lever 3730 may be set to a presentation mode in which the presentation display based on the operation of the left lever 3720 looks gorgeous. Therefore, the operation instruction is not displayed, and the image displayed based on the operation of the right lever 3730 does not suggest the degree of expectation.
It is preferable that the operation effective period of the right lever 3730 is matched with the operation effective period of the left lever 3720 .
By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to maintain a higher sense of tension for the player who is tired of operating the left lever.

Furthermore, it is difficult to operate the left lever 3720, the right lever 3730, and the mission button 3700 with one hand at the same time. It should be installed in a position where it is not possible to That is, since one operation part is operated with one hand, the tension of the game can be enhanced.
Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, there are cases where the three operating sections, left lever 3720, right lever 3730, and mission button 3700, can be operated simultaneously. It can make you feel nervous.
In the operating section shown in FIG. 498, since the attack button 3710 is provided between the mission button 3700 and the left lever 3720 and the distance is large, it is extremely difficult to operate both operating sections with one hand. Impossible. On the other hand, left lever 3720 and right lever 3730 are close to each other. Therefore, the positions where the right lever 3730 and the defense button 3740 are provided may be exchanged. In this case, since the defense button 3740 is positioned between the left lever 3720 and the right lever 3730, it is extremely difficult or impossible to operate both operating sections with one hand.

Although an embodiment in which the left lever 3720 is used for a predetermined effect has been shown, a right lever 3730 may be used instead of the left lever 3720 . Both the left lever 3720 and the right lever 3730 may be configured to be capable of accepting operations, and the above-described display effects and the like may be executed when the operation of either lever satisfies the above-described conditions.

In this way, according to the "full power breakthrough reach" in the present embodiment, it is possible to increase the tension of operating the operation unit.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, an effect of pressing one operation unit in a game machine has been known. In this case, by providing a plurality of operation units and using the operation units for presentation, the game interest can be improved (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2011-087638). Furthermore, when the operation to a plurality of operation units is enabled at the same time, the amusement of the game can be further enhanced. On the other hand, a player who wants a simple game may feel troublesome or stressed by the requirement of such a complicated operation mode, and may rather lose interest in the game. A gaming machine that satisfies each of the players having different tastes in this way and prevents the interest from being lowered in any case will be described below.

In the "AI tank reach" of this embodiment, the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 may be enabled at the same time at a predetermined timing during the display effect. The player can set whether or not to display the simulated image and the simulated image of the mission button 3700 indicating the operation instruction of the mission button 3700 .
The player sets in advance a first setting (first effect situation) for displaying both a simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 and a simulated image simulating the mission button 3700, and displays only the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710. a second setting (second rendering situation) to display only a simulated image imitating the mission button 3700 (third rendering situation); a simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700; The player can select and set any one of the four settings (production situations) of the fourth setting (fourth production situation) in which both of the simulated images are not displayed. .
Selection by the player is configured to be performed using the left lever 3720, the attack button 3710, etc. during the demonstration during which the decorative symbols are not changing. Also, when the power is turned on when no selection is made by the player, the first setting is selected by default.

When the operation effective period of the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 occurs during the variable display of the decoration pattern, a simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 and a simulation simulating the mission button 3700 are displayed in a mode corresponding to the setting selected by the player. An image is displayed. For example, when the player selects the third setting, the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 is not displayed, and only the simulated image simulating the mission button 3700 is displayed.

557 to 562 for "AI Tank Reach", depending on whether or not the attack button 3710 or mission button 3700 is operated when the first to fourth settings are made, A display example will be described.

FIG. 557(a) is a time chart showing an embodiment in which a first setting (first rendering situation) is made and a simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 and a simulated image simulating the mission button 3700 are displayed.
FIG. 559 corresponds to the time chart shown in FIG. 557(a) and shows a display state in which the first setting is made and a simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 and a simulated image simulating the mission button 3700 are displayed. It is a diagram.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 557(a), "AI tank reach" occurs at timing t5. In "AI Tank Reach", a display effect is performed in which the own tank moves on a mountain road. FIG. 559(a) is a display example at timing t5.
At timing t8, an image of an enemy tank is displayed in the upper part of the display area. In addition, the lines of "Colonel Dina" and "Sergeant Might" that instruct the operation of the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 are displayed. Also, the effective period of operation of the attack button 3710 and the effective period of operation of the mission button 3700 are started. In addition, a simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 and a simulated image simulating the mission button 3700 are displayed during the operation valid period of the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 (timing t8 to timing t11). FIG. 559(b) shows a display example at timing t8.
The effective period of operation of the attack button 3710 and the effective period of operation of the mission button 3700 each continue for three seconds until timing t11. On the other hand, if the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700 is operated during the operation valid period, the operation valid period of the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 ends. At the timing when the operation effective period ends, the display of the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 and the simulated image simulating the mission button 3700 also ends.
When the attack button 3710 is operated during the valid period of operation, a shell is fired from the battery of the own tank, the fired shell moves toward the enemy tank, the shell hits the enemy tank, and the shell hits the enemy tank. A production display of exploding is performed. FIG. 559(c) shows a display example of a cannonball moving toward an enemy tank. Also, FIG. 559(d) shows an example of an effect in which an image of a shell hitting an enemy tank and the shell exploding is displayed. The display of the movement of the cannonball and the subsequent display of the image of the explosion of the cannonball are performed for three seconds after the attack button 3710 is operated.
When the mission button 3700 is operated during the valid period of operation, a bullet is fired from the machine gun of the own tank, the fired bullet moves toward the enemy tank, the bullet hits the enemy tank, and the bullet is fired. A production display of exploding is performed. FIG. 559(e) shows a display example of a bullet moving toward an enemy tank. Also, FIG. 559(f) shows an example of an effect in which an image of a bullet hitting an enemy tank and exploding is displayed. The movement display of the bullet and the subsequent display of the image of the bullet exploding are performed for three seconds after the mission button 3700 is operated.
Note that if the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700 is not operated during the valid operation period, the enemy tank will move backward without displaying that the shell or bullet moves or explodes. As a result, a display that is not displayed in the display area is performed.
Also after timing t23, the same display effect as the display effect executed after time t8 is performed.

FIG. 557(b) shows an embodiment in which the second setting (second rendering situation) is made and the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 is displayed, but the simulated image simulating the mission button 3700 is not displayed. Chart.
FIG. 560 corresponds to the time chart shown in FIG. 557(b), in which the second setting is made and the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 is displayed but the simulated image simulating the mission button 3700 is not displayed. It is a figure which shows a state.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 557(b), "AI tank reach" occurs at timing t5. In "AI Tank Reach", a display effect is performed in which the own tank moves on a mountain road. FIG. 560(a) is a display example at timing t5.
At timing t8, an image of an enemy tank is displayed in the upper part of the display area. In addition, the words "Sergeant Might" instructing the operation of the attack button 3710 are displayed. Also, the effective period of operation of the attack button 3710 and the effective period of operation of the mission button 3700 are started. In addition, during the operation effective period of the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 (timing t8 to timing t11), a simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 is displayed, and a simulated image simulating the mission button 3700 is not displayed. can't break FIG. 560(b) shows a display example at timing t8.
The effective period of operation of the attack button 3710 and the effective period of operation of the mission button 3700 each continue for three seconds until timing t11. On the other hand, if the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700 is operated during the operation valid period, the operation valid period of the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 ends. In addition, the display of the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 also ends at the timing when the operation effective period ends.
When the attack button 3710 is operated during the valid period of operation, a shell is fired from the battery of the own tank, the fired shell moves toward the enemy tank, the shell hits the enemy tank, and the shell hits the enemy tank. A production display of exploding is performed. FIG. 560(c) shows a display example of a cannonball moving toward an enemy tank. FIG. 560(d) shows an example of an effect in which an image is displayed in which a cannonball hits an enemy tank and explodes. The display of the movement of the cannonball and the subsequent display of the image of the explosion of the cannonball are performed for three seconds after the attack button 3710 is operated.
When the mission button 3700 is operated during the valid period of operation, a bullet is fired from the machine gun of the own tank, the fired bullet moves toward the enemy tank, the bullet hits the enemy tank, and the bullet is fired. A production display of exploding is performed. FIG. 560(e) shows a display example of a bullet moving toward an enemy tank. FIG. 560(f) shows an example of an effect in which an image of a bullet hitting an enemy tank and exploding is displayed. The movement display of the bullet and the subsequent display of the image of the bullet exploding are performed for three seconds after the mission button 3700 is operated.
Note that if the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700 is not operated during the valid operation period, the enemy tank will move backward without displaying that the shell or bullet moves or explodes. As a result, a display that is not displayed in the display area is performed.
Also after timing t23, the same display effect as the display effect executed after time t8 is performed.

FIG. 558(a) shows an embodiment in which a simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 is not displayed, but a simulated image simulating the mission button 3700 is displayed. Chart.
FIG. 561 corresponds to the time chart shown in FIG. 558(a), in which the third setting is made and the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 is not displayed, but the simulated image simulating the mission button 3700 is displayed. It is a figure which shows a state.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 558(a), "AI tank reach" occurs at timing t5. In "AI Tank Reach", a display effect is performed in which the own tank moves on a mountain road. FIG. 561(a) is a display example at timing t5.
At timing t8, an image of an enemy tank is displayed in the upper part of the display area. In addition, the line "Colonel Dina" instructing the operation of the mission button 3700 is displayed. Also, the effective period of operation of the attack button 3710 and the effective period of operation of the mission button 3700 are started. In addition, during the effective period of operation of the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 (timing t8 to timing t11), a simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 is not displayed, and a simulated image simulating the mission button 3700 is displayed. will be FIG. 561(b) shows a display example at timing t8.
The effective period of operation of the attack button 3710 and the effective period of operation of the mission button 3700 each continue for three seconds until timing t11. On the other hand, if the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700 is operated during the operation valid period, the operation valid period of the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 ends. In addition, the display of the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 also ends at the timing when the operation effective period ends.
When the attack button 3710 is operated during the valid period of operation, a shell is fired from the battery of the own tank, the fired shell moves toward the enemy tank, the shell hits the enemy tank, and the shell hits the enemy tank. A production display of exploding is performed. FIG. 561(c) shows a display example of a cannonball moving toward an enemy tank. Also, FIG. 561(d) shows an example of an effect in which an image of a shell hitting an enemy tank and the shell exploding is displayed. The display of the movement of the cannonball and the subsequent display of the image of the explosion of the cannonball are performed for three seconds after the attack button 3710 is operated.
When the mission button 3700 is operated during the valid period of operation, a bullet is fired from the machine gun of the own tank, the fired bullet moves toward the enemy tank, the bullet hits the enemy tank, and the bullet is fired. A production display of exploding is performed. FIG. 561(e) shows a display example of a bullet moving toward an enemy tank. Also, FIG. 561(f) shows an example of an effect in which an image of the bullet hitting the enemy tank and the bullet exploding is displayed. The movement display of the bullet and the subsequent display of the image of the bullet exploding are performed for three seconds after the mission button 3700 is operated.
Note that if the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700 is not operated during the valid operation period, the enemy tank will move backward without displaying that the shell or bullet moves or explodes. As a result, a display that is not displayed in the display area is performed.
Also after timing t23, the same display effect as the display effect executed after time t8 is performed.

FIG. 558(b) is a time chart showing an embodiment in which the fourth setting (fourth rendering situation) is made and neither the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 nor the simulated image simulating the mission button 3700 is displayed.
FIG. 562 corresponds to the time chart shown in FIG. 558(b) and shows a display state in which the fourth setting is made and neither the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 nor the simulated image simulating the mission button 3700 is displayed. is.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 558(b), "AI tank reach" occurs at timing t5. In "AI Tank Reach", a display effect is performed in which the own tank moves on a mountain road. FIG. 562(a) is a display example at timing t5.
At timing t8, an image of an enemy tank is displayed in the upper part of the display area. Also, the effective period of operation of the attack button 3710 and the effective period of operation of the mission button 3700 are started. Further, during the effective period of operation of the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 (timing t8 to timing t11), display of a simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 and display of a simulated image simulating the mission button 3700 are not performed. FIG. 562(b) shows a display example at timing t8.
The effective period of operation of the attack button 3710 and the effective period of operation of the mission button 3700 each continue for three seconds until timing t11. On the other hand, if the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700 is operated during the operation valid period, the operation valid period of the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 ends. In addition, the display of the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 also ends at the timing when the operation effective period ends.
When the attack button 3710 is operated during the valid period of operation, a shell is fired from the battery of the own tank, the fired shell moves toward the enemy tank, the shell hits the enemy tank, and the shell hits the enemy tank. A production display of exploding is performed. FIG. 562(c) shows a display example of a cannonball moving toward an enemy tank. Also, FIG. 562(d) shows an example of an effect in which an image of a shell hitting an enemy tank and exploding is displayed. The display of the movement of the cannonball and the subsequent display of the image of the explosion of the cannonball are performed for three seconds after the attack button 3710 is operated.
When the mission button 3700 is operated during the valid period of operation, a bullet is fired from the machine gun of the own tank, the fired bullet moves toward the enemy tank, the bullet hits the enemy tank, and the bullet is fired. A production display of exploding is performed. FIG. 562(e) shows a display example of a bullet moving toward an enemy tank. FIG. 562(f) shows an example of an effect in which an image of a bullet hitting an enemy tank and exploding is displayed. The movement display of the bullet and the subsequent display of the image of the bullet exploding are performed for three seconds after the mission button 3700 is operated.
Note that if the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700 is not operated during the valid operation period, the enemy tank will move backward without displaying that the shell or bullet moves or explodes. As a result, a display that is not displayed in the display area is performed.
Also after timing t23, the same display effect as the display effect executed after time t8 is performed.

The operation effective period of the attack button 3710 and the operation effective period of the mission button 3700 are the same. At this time, a simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 and a simulated image imitating the mission button 3700 are displayed according to the setting selected by the player. In addition, corresponding to the display of these simulated images, the lines of "Colonel Dinah" and "Sergeant Might" also change to indicate the manner of operation instructions. When the operation of either the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700 is accepted, the operation valid period ends. Therefore, when the operation of one of attack button 3710 and mission button 3700 is accepted, the effect display corresponding to the operation of the other operation unit is not performed.

An image of an enemy tank, a simulated image simulating the attack button 3710, an image of an exploding cannonball, or the like may be used to suggest the degree of expectation for a big win. In this case, it is preferable to apply various types of expectation level suggestive modes in the "shield bullet reach" shown with reference to FIGS.
It should be noted that the simulated image of the mission button 3700 and the image of the exploding bullet may be displayed in the same manner as the simulated image of the attack button 3710 and the image of the exploding shell.

As described above, according to the "AI tank reach" of the present embodiment, the effect situation in which a simulated image simulating the operating unit is displayed and the simulated image simulating the operating unit is displayed based on the intention of the player. Since an effect situation in which the game is not performed is realized, it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

An example in which the player can select the first to fourth settings has been shown. The setting may be changed while the door of the door frame 3 is open. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately change the settings according to the customer base of the amusement arcade, the location situation, the number of days that have passed since the introduction, and the like, thereby providing the player with the optimum gaming environment. It should be noted that the settings made by the game arcade may be effective only when power is turned on to the game machine, and the settings may be changed by the player thereafter.

A first setting in which display of a simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 or a simulated image simulating the mission button 3700 is not restricted by the operation of a predetermined operation unit (for example, the defense button 3740) operable by the player; Any one of the second to fourth settings, in which the display of the simulated image imitating the button 3710 and the simulated image imitating the mission button 3700 is restricted, is alternately switched. good too. For example, if the player has selected the second setting, by operating the defense button 3740 once, the setting is switched to the first setting, and the player can operate the defense button 3740 again. , may be configured to be the second setting again. Note that when the player has selected the first setting, even if the defense button 3740 is operated, the state in which the first setting is selected continues. For example, when the defense button 3740 is operated at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t14) during the variable display of the decorative symbols, the setting may be switched. On the other hand, it may be configured such that the setting cannot be switched during the operation valid period (the period during which the simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 or the simulated image simulating the mission button 3700 is displayed).
With such a configuration, it is possible to quickly switch to a setting in which both simulated images of the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 are displayed.

If the setting can be switched by the player with a simple operation, the player may be dissatisfied, for example, if the setting is switched just by pressing a button by mistake. Therefore, a configuration may be employed in which switching of settings is not easily executed. For example, it may be configured such that the setting is switched when a specific condition regarding operation such as holding down the defense button 3740 for 3 seconds is satisfied.

When the non-gaming state continues for a predetermined time (for example, 10 minutes), if the setting is the second setting to the fourth setting, the setting is automatically changed to the first setting, which is the default setting. You may make it By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a player who has started playing a game from feeling uncomfortable due to a change in settings.

An example has been shown in which both the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 can be operated at the same time, and when one of the buttons is operated, the operation valid period of the other button ends. may be configured so that the operation effective period of the other button is not terminated even when is operated. For example, if the attack button 3710 is operated and then the mission button 3700 is operated, after the effect display corresponding to the operation of the attack button 3710 (shooting, moving, and exploding shells) is started, , the effect display corresponding to the operation of the mission button 3700 (bullet shooting/movement/explosion display) may be started.

It may be configured such that only the operation of the attack button 3710 is valid and the case of only the operation of the mission button 3700 is valid. In this case, it is preferable to determine whether or not to display the simulated image of the button whose operation is valid based on the setting. Alternatively, without being limited to the setting, it may be configured to display a simulated image of the operation means whose operation is valid. If there is only one operating unit for which the operation is valid, it is assumed that the player will not find it difficult to operate the buttons, so it is useful to adopt such a method.

Instead of activating the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 at the same time, for example, in a situation where one operation unit is valid, the other operation unit may be valid. In this case as well, it is preferable to determine whether or not to display a simulated image simulating the operation unit based on the settings.

The attack button 3710 may be enabled after the mission button 3700 is enabled. Here, when the attack button 3710 is activated while the image corresponding to the operation of the mission button 3700 (the image in which the bullet is moving) is displayed, a simulated image simulating the attack button 3710 is displayed. It may be configured not to display. By adopting such a configuration, information can be prevented from being excessive, and the stress felt by the player can be reduced.

Before or at the same time as the valid operation period occurs, a sound effect indicating that the valid operation period has started or is in the valid operation period may be output. For example, a predetermined sound effect may be output at timings (from timing t7 to timing t8 and from timing t22 to timing t23) before the operation valid period starts. Alternatively, a predetermined sound effect may be output when the operation valid period occurs (timing t8 to timing t9, timing t23 to timing t24).
On the other hand, even if the effective period of operation occurs, if the simulated image of the operation part is set not to be displayed, it is preferable that the effect sound indicating that the effective period of operation has occurred is not output for the operation part. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling confused. On the other hand, when an operation is performed, it is preferable to configure so that a predetermined sound corresponding to the reception of the operation is output. In this case, it is possible to prevent the effect of the presentation from being lowered.

Depending on the selected settings, a rendering situation in which one simulated button-like image is displayed, and an rendered situation in which two button-like simulated images are displayed can occur. At this time, when only one simulated image is displayed, the size of the simulated image may be displayed larger than when two simulated images are displayed.
With such a configuration, the display area can be effectively used. In addition, a player who does not select to display a plurality of simulated images may not notice that the simulated images are displayed due to their age. It is possible to notice the fact that it has not happened, and it is possible to more preferably suppress the decrease in interest.

Furthermore, the third operation unit (defense button 3740) is used, and both the first operation unit (attack button 3710) and the second operation unit (mission button 3700) can accept operations, and the first operation unit can be simulated. In a first effect situation in which both an image (display related to operation of the first operation section) and a simulated image of the second operation section (display related to operation of the second operation section) are displayed, the player operates the third operation section. is operated, a special display may appear that makes it difficult to visually recognize both the displayed simulated image of the first operating section and the simulated image of the second operating section.
This special display notifies the player who operates the third operation part in a situation where the operation of the first operation part or the second operation part is actually performed that the operation is erroneous. It is possible to suggest In addition, it is considered that the player who operates the third operation part intentionally performs such an action in a situation where the simulated image of the first operation part and the simulated image of the second operation part are clearly displayed. Therefore, in order for a special display to be displayed to such an intentional player, the condition for the appearance of the display is not limited to the fact that the third operation section is simply operated. It is desirable that the above special display is performed when the third operation unit is operated and the operation time of the third operation unit satisfies a special condition of a predetermined number of seconds or longer.

As described above, according to the “AI tank reach” of the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by the effects related to the display mode of the simulated image.

With reference to FIGS. 498 to 562, an embodiment has been described in which the performance using the operation unit is further improved. Embodiments applicable to these embodiments are described below.

Although an example in which the operating portion is provided at the lower portion of the door frame has been shown, another operating portion may be adopted. For example, a non-contact infrared sensor is provided on the game board, and the glass plate is divided into a plurality of areas, for example, four areas, upper right, lower right, lower left, and upper left, in a cross shape. The operation acceptance may be performed when the is brought close to the . By adopting such a configuration, the player can move his or her hand upwards greatly, so that the player can feel more participating in the game. In this regard, a sensor is provided in the movable part of the movable body provided on the frame (a part imitating a rabbit's ear, a movable body imitating a root vegetable, etc.) so that the movement by the player can be detected, and the operation input by the player is made possible. You may give these movable parts the function to receive. In this case, the feeling of participating in the game is further enhanced.

In various operation instructions in each embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. A special display may be performed by operating a part, etc.). For example, each embodiment may be modified so that an image that is normally displayed when an operation is performed in accordance with an operation instruction is displayed when a predetermined operation is performed that does not follow an operation instruction. .

On the other hand, some players, such as players who are tired or aged, may show a tendency to dislike such operation inputs that require large physical movements. Therefore, one or more sensors are provided in a predetermined area in the game area, and the above-described various operation units are operated based on the detection by the sensor of a game ball shot into the game area by the player. It can be used as a substitute for In this case, the player can replace the operation of the operation part by operating the operation part only with the right hand. Input can be made. It should be noted that it is also possible to accept both an operation to the operation unit and an input from a sensor provided in a predetermined area, and to perform an effect display corresponding to the operation input at the time when an operation input is made to either one of them. good. Alternatively, it may be configured such that the player or the store clerk of the game parlor can select which of the operation input to the operation unit and the sensor provided in the predetermined area receives the operation input. Alternatively, it may be configured such that the operation input is performed only by the shot game ball. As the predetermined area, a dedicated performance sensor capable of detecting the passage or approach of a game ball may be provided on the board surface, or an existing winning opening (for example, general winning opening, first start opening, gate , a large winning opening, etc.), the operation input may be received based on the winning of the game ball (detection by a sensor). Note that the sensor function may be added to an existing predetermined member instead of the predetermined region. For example, when a backflow prevention member at the top of the rail or a sensor at the upper right corner of the game board is provided with a sensor to detect that a game ball has passed or collided based on the player's operation. It may be configured so that the operation input is accepted at the same time. In order to correspond to the directional input of the lever, two or more sensors provided at different positions may be used to simulate the directional input. Further, the operation time may be calculated in a pseudo manner according to the number of detections per unit time. In this way, the operation input may be accepted by the player adjusting the shooting intensity of the game ball so that a predetermined sensor or the like detects the game ball. As a result, it is possible to further diversify the effects by reducing the number of operation units and enabling execution of further effect display based on the reception of operations on the operation units.

505 to 509, an embodiment capable of displaying a predetermined image hidden by a shield image has been shown, but in the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. A configuration may be adopted in which simulated images simulating parts are displayed respectively and can be hidden by the shield image. Further, it may be configured such that operation instruction displays are displayed corresponding to a plurality of operation units and can be hidden by the shield image. In addition, it is also possible to display operation correspondence displays corresponding to operations on a plurality of operation units, and to hide them with shield images. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for a player who is less interested in operating the operation units to visually recognize the displays related to the plurality of operation units.
The embodiments shown with reference to FIGS. 510 to 562 may also be configured to be able to display a plurality of operation units and shield images.
It should be noted that the shield image may be displayed by operating a predetermined operation unit (defense button 3740, etc.).

498 to 562, "shield bullet reach", "special machine gun reach", "silent machine gun reach", "bomb character reach", "suddenly tank effect", "full power breakthrough reach", "AI tank reach" has been shown, it is possible to employ a predetermined technical concept in one production as a technical concept in another production. Also, it is possible to employ a plurality of technical ideas in a plurality of presentations as technical ideas in one presentation.

For example, the display of the shield image related to "shield bullet reach" is changed to "special machine gun reach", "silent machine gun reach", "bomb character reach", "suddenly tank effect", "full power breakthrough reach", and "AI tank reach". may be applied to each production of At this time, predetermined images (images of enemy tanks, images of bomb characters, simulated images imitating predetermined buttons, images of exploding cannonballs, images of exploding bullets, images of smoke, images of white flags, etc.) are displayed in each effect. Images used in each production) should suggest the degree of expectation in a way related to "shield bullet reach". Also, the degree of expectation shown in this way may be hidden by a shield image.
In addition, the look-ahead mode related to the "suddenly tank effect", the execution mode related to the look-ahead effect, and their technical ideas are described as "shield bullet reach", "special machine gun reach", "silent machine gun reach", "bomb character reach", "full power "Breakthrough Reach", "AI Tank Reach", "Shield Bullet Reach", "Special Machine Gun Reach", "Silent Machine Gun Reach", "Bomb Chara Reach", "Full Breakthrough" over multiple display changes Reach" and "AI Tank Reach" may be executed.
For example, in contrast to the production mode using the shield image related to "shield bullet reach" and the smoke image related to "full breakthrough reach", the production mode and technology using the image of the destroyed enemy tank of "suddenly tank effect" Ideas can be applied.
Also, the shield image and the smoke image may be configured to be displayed multiple times by the player, or the shield image and the smoke image may be displayed across the variable display. In this case, the image that suggests the degree of expectation (the image of the destroyed enemy tank in the "suddenly tank effect") corresponding to the variable display that is the target of prefetching is hidden by the shield image or the smoke image. It should be configured as follows.
In addition, for example, in "special machine gun reach" and "silent machine gun reach", images of shells fired from a battery, bullets fired from a machine gun, and images of shells and bullets exploding may be displayed across the variable display. .
In addition, for example, in the case of "bomb character reach", a collision scene between the bomb character and the self-tank can occur not only during the variation of the decorative symbols but also immediately before the stop of the variation of the decorative symbols. The self-tank may explode (part of the self-tank is destroyed) across the , and the self-tank may straddle the stop display of the decorative pattern without exploding. It should be noted that, just before the variable display to be read ahead stops changing, it is preferable to execute the effect of displaying a large bomb character shown in FIGS.
In addition, in the "full-strength breakthrough reach", it may be configured so that there are cases where the player is attacked by the shells of the enemy unit a plurality of times during the variable display of one decorative pattern. Also, the smoke image may be displayed across the variable display of the decorative pattern. In this way, after effecting display based on the look-ahead a plurality of times, it is preferable to display a group of enemy tanks appearing at the last timing of the variable display, which is the subject of the look-ahead.
Also, in the "AI tank reach", display over a plurality of variable displays may be performed based on the look-ahead. In this case, each variable display may be configured so that one or more encounters with enemy tanks occur. At least, immediately before the variable display of the decorative pattern is stopped, an encounter with an enemy tank may occur, and an image of destroying the cannonball or bullet may be displayed across the variable display of the decorative pattern. In addition, when the left lever 3720, which is normally not instructed to operate, is operated, as a production, the tank falls on the cliff on the left side of the road and a smoke image is displayed on the screen. good too. In this case, the display of the smoke image is preferably performed over a plurality of times of variable display of the decorative symbols until the variable display of the decorative symbols targeted for the look-ahead effect display is stopped.
In addition, in each production of "shield bullet reach", "special machine gun reach", "silent machine gun reach", "bomb character reach", "suddenly tank effect", "full power breakthrough reach", and "AI tank reach", the mission button 3700, attack button 3710, left lever 3720, defense button 3740, etc. are shown to be operable. Alternatively, when the look-ahead effect is performed, it may be configured to be executable over the variable display of a plurality of decorative symbols. Further, it is preferable that the effective number of operations can be executed a plurality of times during the variable display of one decorative pattern. Also, the display corresponding to the reception of the operation of the operation unit may be configured to be displayed a plurality of times. Further, it is preferable that the display corresponding to such operation acceptance is displayed across the variable display of the decorative symbols.
By adopting such a configuration, since some kind of display reaction occurs in response to the player's operation on the operation unit, it is possible to satisfy the player. Furthermore, the effect display based on the operation is executed across the variable display without being interrupted by the stop display of the variable display, thereby preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable with the executed effect.

Embodiments may be obtained by combining and applying each technical matter in the structure of the gaming machine in the embodiments. Further, the embodiments may be applied by combining each production example and each technical matter in each production example. Moreover, it is good also as an embodiment combining and applying each technical matter in each role product structure. Moreover, it is good also as an embodiment, combining and applying each of these technical matters.

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments. and design changes are possible.

That is, in the embodiment, the game machine is applied to the pachinko machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and can be applied to a pachislot machine or a game machine formed by combining a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine. Also in this case, the same effects can be obtained.

1 pachinko machine 2 outer frame 3 door frame 4 main body frame 5 game board 5' game board 5a game area 190 glass unit 530 door frame left side unit 550 door frame right side unit 570 door frame top unit 931 power board 1000 front constituent member 1001 Outer rail 1002 Inner rail 1100 Game panel 1100a Game panel opening 1110 Panel board 1110a Obstacle nail penetration hole 1110b Panel board back rough surface part 1110c Panel board back first rough surface part 1110d Panel board back second rough surface part 1110e Panel board back metallic glossy part 1110f Panel board back first metallic gloss part 1110g Panel board back second metallic gloss part 1110h Panel board back bright color visible part 1110i Panel board back first bright color visible part 1110j Panel board back second bright color visible part 1110m Panel board front decoration Opaque thin layer portion 1110p Panel plate boss insertion hole 1110q Panel plate screw insertion hole 1117 Panel convex portion 1200 Obstacle nail 1201 Obstacle nail 1201a Obstacle nail head 1201b Obstacle nail first body 1201c Obstacle nail helical part 1201d Obstacle nail second body Part 1202 Obstacle nail 1203 Obstacle nail 1204 Obstacle nail 1205 Obstacle nail 1206 Obstacle nail 1207 Obstacle nail 1208 Obstacle nail 1209 Obstacle nail 1210 Obstacle nail 1211 Obstacle nail 1212 Obstacle nail 1213 Obstacle nail 1214 Obstacle nail 1215 Obstacle nail 11216 Obstacle nail 1217 Obstacle nail Obstacle nail 1219 Obstacle nail 1220 Obstacle nail 1221 Obstacle nail 1222 Obstacle nail 1223 Obstacle nail 1224 Obstacle nail 1230 Life nail 1231 Jump nail 1232 Left guide nail 1233 Right guide nail 1402 Normal pattern display 1403 First special pattern display 1404 First special Reserved number indicator 1405 Second special symbol indicator 1406 Second special reserved number indicator 1407 Round indicator 1500 Peripheral control unit 1510 Peripheral control board 1600 Game board side effect display device 1600a Display area 2000 Table unit 2001 General winning opening 2002 First start opening 2003 Gate portion 2004 Second start opening 2005 Big winning opening 2400 Panel board lower light emitting substrate 2410 Panel board rear decorative member 2410a Panel board rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410b Pa Panel plate rear decorative member metallic gloss portion 2410c Panel plate rear decorative member rotating shaft 2420 Panel plate rear substrate 2425 Panel plate rear substrate light-emitting portion 2450 Panel plate front decorative member 2450a Panel plate front decorative member through hole 2452 Panel plate front decorative member colorless transparent portion 2454 Panel plate front decorative member opaque portion 2456 Panel plate front decorative member colored transparent portion 2460 Light guide plate 2460a Light guide plate uneven portion 2470 Decorative member 2470a Decorative member front portion 2470b Decorative member rear surface portion 2470c Decorative member boss 2470d Decorative member inclined portion 2470e Decorative member screw insertion hole 2470f Decorative member first inclined portion 2470g Decorative member second inclined portion 2471 Decorative member mounting screw 2522 Warp exit 2530 Stage 2600 Area covering member 2600a Area covering member 2610 Penetrating portion 2610a Penetrating portion 2611 Penetrating portion 2612 Penetrating portion 2613 Penetrating portion 2614 Penetrating portion 2615 Penetration portion 2616 Penetration portion 2617 Penetration portion 2617a Notched end portion 2618 Penetration portion 2619 Penetration portion 2620 Penetration portion 2630 Mounting boss 2631 Mounting boss 2632 Mounting boss 2633 Mounting boss 2640 Ball restricting projection 2650 Penetration portion 2651 Penetration portion 2655 Penetration portion 26653 Penetration portion 2619 Penetration portion 2620 Penetration portion Part 2660 Boss part 2670 Receiving recess 2700 Channel device 2710a First channel inlet 2710b Second channel inlet 2720a First channel forming member 2720b Second channel forming member 2730a First channel outlet 2730b Second channel outlet 3700 mission button 3710 attack button 3720 left lever 3722 left lever vibration source 3724 left lever light source 3730 right lever 3732 right lever vibration source 3734 right lever light source 3740 defense button 5000 nail sheet 5100 film sheet 5110 first area printed material 5120 second second Area printed material 5200 Obstacle nail printed material 5950 Rail member 6000 Rabbit part 6010 Face cover part 6011 Face cover part front part 6011a First face light scattering part 6011b Second face light scattering part 6012 Face cover upper surface part 6013 Right face cover part Face portion 6014 Lower surface portion of face cover portion 6015 Left surface portion of face cover portion 6016 First arm portion 6017 Second arm portion 6 020 face substrate 6021 first ear portion 6021a first ear decoration portion 6022 second ear portion 6022a second ear decoration portion 6023 face emission portion 6023a first face emission portion 6023b second face emission portion 6024 mouth decoration portion 6025 control element 6026 driver 6027 resistor 6027a first resistor 6027b second resistor 6027c third resistor 6027d fourth resistor 6027e fifth resistor 6027f sixth resistor 6028 capacitor 6028a first capacitor 6028b second capacitor 6029 connector 6030 trunk 6100 stump accessory 6200 stump 6210 Plate portion 6210a Stump opening 6300 Stump box portion 6310 Box upper wall portion 6320 Box right wall portion 6330 Box lower wall portion 6340 Box left wall portion 6350 Box rear wall portion 6352 Rear wall substrate 6352a First rear wall substrate 6352b Second rear wall Substrate 6354 Rear wall light emitting part 6354a First rear wall light emitting part 6354b Second rear wall light emitting part 6356 Rear wall cover 6358 Rear wall cover light scattering part 6358a First rear wall cover light scattering part 6358b Second rear wall cover light scattering part 6360 First grass movable portion 6360a First grass decoration portion 6370 Second grass movable portion 6370a Second grass decoration portion 6380 Rear wall plate portion 6381 Grass plate portion 6381a Grass plate colored transparent portion 6381b Grass plate colorless transparent portion 6382a Grass plate central decoration portion 6382b Grass board upper decoration part 6382c Grass board right decoration part 6382d Grass board lower decoration part 6382e Grass board left decoration part 6400 Grass accessory 6420 Grass board 6422 Grass board front light emitting part 6422a Grass board front first light emitting part 6422b Grass board front first light emitting part 2 light emitting parts 6422c grass substrate front surface third light emitting part 6424 grass substrate rear surface light emitting part 6424a grass substrate rear surface first light emitting part 6424b grass substrate rear surface second light emitting part 6426 grass substrate opening 6426a grass substrate first opening 6426b grass substrate second Opening 6440 Grass front cover 6442 Grass front cover transparent part 6442a Grass front cover colorless transparent part 6442b Grass front cover colored transparent part 6444 Grass front cover light scattering part 6444a Grass front cover colorless light scattering part 6444b Grass front cover colored light scattering part 6446 Grass front cover opaque portion 6448 Grass front cover opening 6448a Grass front cover first opening 6448b Grass front cover second Opening 6460 Back cover cover 6462 Back cover transparent part 6462a Back cover cover colorless transparent part 6462b Back cover cover colored transparent part 6464 Back cover cover light scattering part 6464a Back cover cover colorless light scattering part 6464b Back cover cover colored light scattering part 6466 Back grass cover opaque part 6470 1st grass role 6475 2nd grass role 6480 3rd grass role 6485 4th grass role 6500 Mountain role 6520 Mountain board 6522 Mountain board front light emitting part 6522a Mountain board front first light emitting part 6522b Mountain substrate front surface 2nd light emitting portion 6522c Mountain substrate front surface 3rd light emitting portion 6522d Mountain substrate front surface 4th light emitting portion 6522e Mountain substrate front surface 5th light emitting portion 6522f Mountain substrate front surface 6th light emitting portion 6522g Mountain substrate front surface 7th light emitting portion 6522h Mountain substrate Board front surface eighth light emitting portion 6522i Mountain substrate front surface ninth light emitting portion 6524 Mountain substrate opening 6540 First mountain front cover 6542 First mountain front cover colored transparent portion 6544 First mountain front cover colored light scattering portion 6548 First mountain front cover Opening 6560 Second mountain front cover 6562 Second mountain front cover colorless transparent portion 6564 Second mountain front cover colorless light scattering portion 6600 First giant tree accessory 6610 First giant tree trunk substrate 6630 First giant tree leaf substrate 6650 Second giant tree role Thing 6660 2nd huge tree trunk board 6680 2nd big tree leaf board 6700 1st cloud object 6750 2nd cloud object 6800 Back grass component 6820 Back grass board 6822 Back grass board front light emitting part 6824 Back grass board opening Part 6824a Back grass substrate first opening 6824b Back grass substrate second opening 6824c Back grass substrate third opening 6824d Back grass substrate fourth opening 6840 Back grass front cover 6842 Back grass front cover colored Transparent part 6844 Back grass front cover colored light scattering part 6848 Back grass front cover opening 6848a Back grass front cover first opening 6848b Back grass front cover second opening 6848c Back grass front cover third opening 6848d Back grass front cover fourth opening 7000 Door frame top unit top right ear opening 7002 Door frame top unit top right ear opening 7004 Door frame top unit second right ear opening 7010 Door frame top unit top Left ear opening 7012 Door frame top unit first left ear opening 7014 Door frame top unit second left ear opening 7020 Door frame top unit bottom right ear opening 7022 Door frame top unit bottom first right ear opening 7024 Door frame top unit bottom second right ear opening 7030 Door frame top unit bottom left ear opening 7032 Door frame top unit bottom first left ear opening 7034 Door frame top Lower second left ear opening 7040 Door frame top unit upper both ear openings 7050 Door frame top unit right light emitting part 7052 Door frame top unit left light emitting part 7100 Right ear frame movable body 7110 Right ear frame movable body 1st Surface 7112 Right ear frame movable body first surface inner decorative portion 7114 Right ear frame movable body first surface outer decorative portion 7116 Right ear frame movable body inner light emitting portion 7118 Right ear frame movable body outer light emitting portion 7120 Right ear frame movable body No. Surface 2 7140 Right ear frame movable body rotation shaft 7200 Left ear frame movable body 7210 Left ear frame movable body 1st surface 7212 Left ear frame movable body 1st surface inner decorative portion 7214 Left ear frame movable body 1st surface outer decorative portion 7216 Left ear frame movable body inner light emitting part 7218 Left ear frame movable body outer light emitting part 7220 Left ear frame movable body second surface 7240 Left ear frame movable body rotation shaft 7300 Right ear inner frame movable body 7310 Right ear inner frame movable body First surface 7320 Right ear inner frame movable body Second surface 7330 Right ear inner frame movable body Light-emitting part 7340 Right ear inner frame movable body rotation shaft 7350 Right ear outer frame movable body 7360 Right ear outer frame movable body First surface 7370 Right ear outer frame movable body second surface 7380 Right ear outer frame movable body Light-emitting part 7390 Right ear outer frame movable body rotation shaft 7400 Left ear inner frame movable body 7410 Left ear inner frame movable body First surface 7420 Left ear inner frame Movable body second surface 7430 Left ear inner frame movable body Light emitting part 7440 Left ear inner frame movable body rotation axis 7450 Left ear outer frame movable body 7460 Left ear outer frame movable body First surface 7470 Left ear outer frame movable body second Surface 7480 Left ear outer frame movable body light-emitting part 7490 Left ear outer frame movable body rotation axis 7500 Door frame top unit Face decoration part 7510 Door frame top unit Face top movable body 7512 Door frame top unit Right eye decoration part 7514 Door frame top unit Left eye decoration part 7520 Door frame top unit face lower part 7522 Door frame top unit face lower nose movable body 7524 Door frame top unit face lower mouth movable body 7600 Door frame side unit right arm part 7610 Door frame side unit right arm case part 7620 Door frame side unit Right arm upper arm part 7630 Door frame side unit right arm lower arm part 7650 Door frame side unit left Arm part 7660 Door frame side unit left arm case part 7670 Door frame side unit left arm upper arm part 7680 Door frame side unit left arm lower arm part 7700 Curtain board bottom unit right leg movable body 7710 Curtain board bottom unit right leg shin part 7720 Curtain board bottom unit right foot tip Part 7750 Curtain plate bottom unit left leg movable body 7760 Curtain plate bottom unit left leg shin part 7770 Curtain plate bottom unit left foot tip part 7800 Root vegetable frame movable body 7802 Root vegetable frame movable body first cover part 7804 Root vegetable frame movable body second cover part 7810 Root vegetable Frame movable body light-emitting part 7820 Right connecting linear member 7825 Right vertical movement driving mechanism 7830 Left connecting linear member 7835 Left vertical movement driving mechanism 7850 Root vegetable frame movable body cover unit 7852 Cover unit frame 7854 Cover unit front part 7856 Cover unit right side part 7858 Left side of cover unit 9100 Text accessory 9110 Cover member (cover body)
9111 transmission part (first region)
9112 non-transmissive portion (second region)
9120 character accessory substrate 9130 base member 9200 snowman accessory 9210 cover member 9210a front side cover member 9210b back side cover member 9220 snowman substrate 9301 light emitter (LED)
9302 Resistance HKB Whitening YGK Game ball

Claims (1)

A plate portion having a rolling area on which the game ball rolls is formed on the front side;
an obstacle nail planted in the plate;
an attachment member attached from the front to the front surface of the plate portion and having transparency,
The plate portion has a positioning hole,
The mounting member has a positioning projection inserted into the positioning hole, and an inclined portion provided as a surface inclined toward the front surface of the plate portion,
The positioning projection is inserted into the positioning hole and positioned on the front surface of the plate,
In a state in which the mounting member is attached to the front surface of the plate portion,
At least part of the positioning protrusion overlaps the inclined portion in a front view,
The plate portion is made of transparent resin, and the inclined portion is positioned below the center of the rolling area,
A guide nail array in which a plurality of the obstacle nails are arranged at intervals narrower than the diameter of the game ball is provided near the lower portion of the inclined portion,
The inclined portion is configured as a strip-shaped surface having a longer length in a direction orthogonal to the inclined direction than the length in the inclined direction,
at least part of the inclined portion is positioned along the direction in which the obstructing nails are arranged in the guide nail row;
The longitudinal dimension of the inclined portion along the direction in which the obstacle nails are arranged is longer than the length dimension of the guide nail rows.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images